Catálogo Master - Baixa Tensão - 2020 - en

Low Voltage Master Catalogue
Low Voltage
Master Catalogue
066
60
E
8
Modular DIN Rail Products
MCB
NB1-63 NB1-63H NB1-63DC NB7

In: 1~63A In: 1~63A In: 1~63A In: 63A
Icn=6000A 10000A Icu=6000A
Page P-001 Page P-007 Page P-011 Page P-014
NB1-63G NBH8
In: 1~63A In: 1~63A In: 1~40A
Icn=3000A, Icn=4500A,
4500A 6000A
Page P-016 Page P-019 Page P-024
MCCB RCCB
DZ158 NL1 NL210

In: 63A, 80A, Magnetic
100A, 125A type
Icu=6kA, 10kA
RCBO
NB1L NB3LE NB3LEG NB3LEU

Magnetic Electronic Electronic Electronic
type type type type
Page P-034 Page P-043

NBH8LE DZ158LE NB2LE NB310L

Electronic Electronic Electronic Magnetic
type type type type
NB4LE
Magnetic
type
Page P-055
Accessories for MCB, RCBO
XF9 XF9J S9 V9
Auxiliary Alarm auxiliary Shunt Under-voltage
contact contact release release

Modular DIN Rail Products
AX-1 AX-5 OUVR-1 OUVR-2
Auxiliary Auxiliary Self-recovery Self-recovery
contact contact Protector Protector
OUVT-1
Over/under
voltage release
Page P-075
Switch Disconnector Change-over Switch
NH2 NH4 NZK1 NZK2

In=32A, In=32A,
63A, 100A, 40A,63A,
125A 80A,100A,
125A;
Surge Arrester Pushbutton & Indicator
NU6-Ⅱ NU6-Ⅲ NP9 ND9

Pushbutton Indicator
light
Consumer Unit
NX8 NX2 NXW1
Wall Mounting Enclosure
NXW5
Page P-98
P-001 Modular DIN Rail Products MCB
NB1 Miniature Circuit Breaker
Color coded contact position indicator

1
provides visual indication of the device
status and insulation function
Magnetic trip elements provide
4
Type B, C and D trip characteristics
while bimetallic element protect
against slight overload
Line and load side terminals accept bus bar

5
connections for reduced costs and more
efficient installation of multiple devices
2 Trip-free mechanism, device operation 6 Heat dissipation gap provides better cooling
can not be defeated by holding the
operator in the ON position
3 Breaking capacity up to 6000A 7 Extendable DIN-rail holder for easy installation

MCB Modular DIN Rail Products P-002
NB1 -63
Miniature Circuit Breaker A
1. General
1.1 Function
protection of circuits against short-circuit currents,
protection of circuits against overload currents,
switch,isolation.
NB1 circuit-breakers are used in domestic installation,
as well as in commercial and industry electrical
distribution systems.
1.2 Selection
Technical data of the network at the point considered:
short-circuit current at the circuit-breaker installation point,
which must always be less than the breaking capacity of
this device,network normal voltage.
Tripping curves:
B curve (3-5In)
protection for people and big length cables in TN and IT
systems.
C curve (5-10In)
protection for resistive and inductive loads with low inrush
current.
D curve(10-14In)
protection for circuits which supply loads with high inrush
current at the circuit closing
(LV/LV transformers, breakdown lamps).
1.3 Approvals and certificates

Detailed information, please refer to Certificates Table
on the last page.
K
RTE
TE
IN
A A
DNV
014
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type B curve IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type C curve IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type D curve
t(s) t(s) t(s)
10000 10000 10000
5000 5000 5000
1h 1h 1h
2000 2000 2000
1000 1000 1000
500 500 500
200 200 200
100 100 100
50 50 50
20 20 20
10 10 10
5 5 5
2 2 2
1 1 1
0.5 0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05 0.05

0.02 0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 34 5 7 10 20 30 5070100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 14 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
t(s) IEC/EN 60947-2 AC type 8-12 In IEC/EN 60947-2 AC type 9.6-14.4In

10000 t(s)
10000
5000
1h 5000
2000 1h
2000
1000
1000
500
500
200
200
100
100
50
50
20
20
10
10
5
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.05
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.005
0.005
0.002
0.002
0.001
0.001
1.05 2 3 45 8 12 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In 0.5 1.05 1.3 2 3 4 5 7 9.6 14.4 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
Let-through I 2t/A 2S I2t

63A
10 5 50A
40A
32A
5 25A
20A
16A
10A
6A
10 4
4A
5 3A
2A
10 3
1A
10 2 5 10 3 5 10 4
Short-circuit current IP/A

2.2
Standard
Rated current In A
IEC/EN 60898-1
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13, 16,

IEC/EN 60947-2 UL1077
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13, 16, 20,

A
20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
Poles 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P 1P, 2P
Rated voltage Ue V 230/400~240/415 277/480 110/125
Insulation voltage Ui V 500
Rated frequency 50/60Hz DC
Rated breaking capacity A 6000 6000 5000 10000
Electrical Energy limiting class 3

features Rated impulse withstand voltage(1.2/50) Uimp V 4000
Dielectric test voltage at ind. Freq. for 1 min kV 2 1.890 2
Pollution degree 2
Rated current (A) Max power loss per pole (W)
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10 2
Power loss per pole
16, 20, 25, 32 3.5
40, 50, 63 5
Thermo-magnetic release characteristic B, C, D (8-12)In B, C, D
Electrical life 4, 000
Mechanical life 20, 000
Contact position indicator Yes
Protection degree IP20
Mechanical
features Reference temperature for setting
℃ 30
of thermal element
Ambient temperature (with

℃ -35-+70
daily average≤35℃)
Storage temperation ℃ -35-+70

Terminal connection type Cable/U-type busbar/Pin-type busbar
mm 2
25
Terminal size top/bottom for cable
AWG 18-4
mm2 10
Terminal size top/bottom for busbar
Installation AWG 18-8
N·m 2.0
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 22
Mounting On DIN rail EN 60715 (35mm) by means of fast clip device
Connection From top and bottom

Auxiliary contact Yes
Combination Shunt release Yes
with
accessories Under voltage release Yes
Alarm contant Yes
2.3 Selectivity
Power supply side: RT36-00 (fuse)

In
20 25 36 50 63 80 100 125 160
(A)
Is (kA)
≤2 1.2 4 ＞12 ＞12 ＞12 ＞12 ＞12 ＞12 ＞12
3 0.7 1.2 3.8 5.3 6 6 6 6 6
4 0.6 0.9 2.5 3.8 6 6 6 6 6
6 0.5 0.8 1.9 2.5 4.5 5 6 6 6
Load side: NB1-63,
NB1-63H 10 0.7 1.4 2.2 3.2 3.6 6 6 6
Curve B, C
16 1.2 1.8 2.6 3 5.6 6 6
20 1.5 2.2 2.5 4.6 6 6
25 1.3 2 2.2 4.1 5.5 6
32 1.7 1.9 3.8 4.5 6
40 1.7 3 4 5
50 1.5 2.6 3.5 4.5
63 2.4 3.3 4.5
Power supply side: NM8-100S/H/R

In
16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
(A)
Is (kA)
≤10 0.19 0.19 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8
16 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8
Load side: NB1-63,
NB1-63H 20 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8
Curve B, C
25 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8
32 0.5 0.63 0.8
40 0.63 0.8
50 0.8
63
2.4 Backup protection
Power supply side: RT16 series

In
40 50 63 80 100 125 160
(A)
Is (kA)
1~6 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
8~10 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
13 40 40 40 40 35 35 35
Load side: NB1-63,
NB1-63H 16 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
Curve B, C
20 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
25 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
32 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
40 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
50 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
63 20 20 20 20 15 15 15
Power supply side: NM8

In
NM8-125S NM8-125H NM8-125R NM8-250S NM8-250H NM8-250R
(A)
Is (kA)
Load side: NB1-63,
NB1-63H 1~6 15 18 18 15 15 15
Curve B, C
10~20 12 15 15 12 12 12
32~40 12 15 15 12 12 12
50~60 12 15 15 12 12 12
2.5 Temperature derating

The maximum permissible current in a circuit breaker depends on the ambient temperature where the circuit breaker is
placed. Ambient temperature is the temperature inside the enclosure or switchboard in which the circuit breakers are installed.
The reference temperature is 30℃
A
Ambient temperature
-35 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Rated current(A)
1 1.3 1.26 1.23 1.19 1.15 1.11 1.05 1 0.96 0.93 0.88 0.83
2 2.6 2.52 2.46 2.38 2.28 2.2 2.08 2 1.92 1.86 1.76 1.66
3 3.9 3.78 3.69 3.57 3.42 3.3 3.12 3 2.88 2.79 2.64 2.49
4 5.2 5.04 4.92 4.76 4.56 4.4 4.16 4 3.84 3.76 3.52 3.32
6 7.80 7.56 7.38 7.14 6.84 6.6 6.24 6 5.76 5.64 5.28 4.98
10 13.20 12.7 12.5 12 11.5 11.1 10.6 10 9.6 9.3 8.9 8.40
16 21.12 20.48 20 19.2 18.4 17.76 16.96 16 15.36 14.88 14.24 10.92
20 26.40 25.6 25 24 23 22.2 21.2 20 19.2 18.6 17.8 16.80
25 33 32 31.25 30 28.75 27.75 26.5 25 24 23.25 22.25 21
32 42.56 41.28 40 38.72 37.12 35.52 33.92 32 30.72 29.76 28.16 26.88
40 53.20 51.2 50 48 46.4 44.8 42.4 40 38.4 37.2 35.6 33.60
50 67 65.5 63 60.5 58 56 53 50 48 46.5 44 41.50
63 83.79 81.9 80.01 76.86 73.71 70.56 66.78 63 60.48 58.9 55.44 52.29
When several simultaneously operating circuit breakers are mounted side by side in a small enclosure,
the temperature rise inside the enclosure causes a reduction in current rating.
You must then assign the rating (already derated if necessary according to ambient temperatuer) a downrating factor of 0.8.
3. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)

45±0.31
34.5±0.5
86 -1.4
0
0 0 0 0
49.5±0.31 18 -0.43 36 -0.43 54 -1.2 72 -1.2
0
78 -1.2
1P 1P+N, 2P 3P 3P+N, 4P
NB1-63H
Miniature Circuit Breaker
1. General
1.1 Function
switch,isolation.
NB1-63H circuit-breakers are used in domestic installation,
1.2 Selection
Tripping curves:
B curve (3-5In)
systems.
C curve (5-10In)
current.
D curve(10-14In)
2. Technical data
2.1 curves
IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type B curve

t(s)
10000
5000
1h
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.005
0.002
0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
K
RTE
TE
IN
A A
IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type C curve IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type D curve Let-through I 2t/A 2S I2t
A
t(s) t(s)
10000 10000 63A
10 5
5000 5000 50A
1h 1h 32A 40A
2000 2000 25A
5 20A
1000 1000
500 500
16A
10A
200 200
100 100
6A
50 50 10 4
20 20 4A
10 10 3A
5
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5 2A
3
0.2 0.2 10
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05 1A
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001 10 2 5 10 3 5 10 4
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 14 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
2.2
Standard IEC/EN 60898-1

Rated current In A 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 16,20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
Poles 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P
Rated voltage Ue V 230/400~240/415
Rated frequency 50/60Hz
Rated breaking capacity A 10000
Electrical Energy limiting class 3

features Rated impulse withstand voltage(1.2/50) Uimp V 6000
Dielectric test voltage at ind. Freq. for 1 min kV 2
Pollution degree 2
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10 2
Power loss per pole
13, 16, 20, 25, 32 3.5
40, 50, 63 5
Thermo-magnetic release characteristic B, C, D
Mechanical
℃ 30
of thermal element

℃ -35～＋70
Storage temperation ℃ -35...+70

mm2 25
AWG 18-4
mm2 10
N·m 2.0
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 22

with
Alarm contant Yes
2.3 Selectivity

In
20 25 36 50 63 80 100 125 160
(A)
Is (kA)
≤2 1.2 4 ＞12 ＞12 ＞12 ＞12 ＞12 ＞12 ＞12
3 0.7 1.2 3.8 5.3 6 6 6 6 6
4 0.6 0.9 2.5 3.8 6 6 6 6 6
6 0.5 0.8 1.9 2.5 4.5 5 6 6 6
Load side: NB1-63,
NB1-63H 10 0.7 1.4 2.2 3.2 3.6 6 6 6
Curve B, C
16 1.2 1.8 2.6 3 5.6 6 6
20 1.5 2.2 2.5 4.6 6 6
25 1.3 2 2.2 4.1 5.5 6
32 1.7 1.9 3.8 4.5 6
40 1.7 3 4 5
50 1.5 2.6 3.5 4.5
63 2.4 3.3 4.5

In
16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
(A)
Is (kA)
≤10 0.19 0.19 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8
16 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8
Load side: NB1-63,
NB1-63H 20 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8
Curve B, C
25 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8
32 0.5 0.63 0.8
40 0.63 0.8
50 0.8
63

In
40 50 63 80 100 125 160
(A)
Is (kA)
1~6 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
8~10 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
13 40 40 40 40 35 35 35
Load side: NB1-63,
NB1-63H 16 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
Curve B, C
20 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
25 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
32 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
40 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
50 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
63 20 20 20 20 15 15 15

In
(A)
Is (kA)
Load side: NB1-63,
NB1-63H 1~6 15 18 18 15 15 15
Curve B, C
10~20 12 15 15 12 12 12
32~40 12 15 15 12 12 12
50~60 12 15 15 12 12 12

placed. Ambient temperature is the temperature inside the enclosure or switchboard in which the circuit breakers are installed. A
Ambient temperature
-35 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Rated current(A)
1 1.3 1.26 1.23 1.19 1.15 1.11 1.05 1 0.96 0.93 0.88 0.83
2 2.6 2.52 2.46 2.38 2.28 2.2 2.08 2 1.92 1.86 1.76 1.66
3 3.9 3.78 3.69 3.57 3.42 3.3 3.12 3 2.88 2.79 2.64 2.49
4 5.2 5.04 4.92 4.76 4.56 4.4 4.16 4 3.84 3.76 3.52 3.32
6 7.80 7.56 7.38 7.14 6.84 6.6 6.24 6 5.76 5.64 5.28 4.98
10 13.20 12.7 12.5 12 11.5 11.1 10.6 10 9.6 9.3 8.9 8.40
16 21.12 20.48 20 19.2 18.4 17.76 16.96 16 15.36 14.88 14.24 10.92
20 26.40 25.6 25 24 23 22.2 21.2 20 19.2 18.6 17.8 16.80
25 33 32 31.25 30 28.75 27.75 26.5 25 24 23.25 22.25 21
32 42.56 41.28 40 38.72 37.12 35.52 33.92 32 30.72 29.76 28.16 26.88
40 53.20 51.2 50 48 46.4 44.8 42.4 40 38.4 37.2 35.6 33.60
50 67 65.5 63 60.5 58 56 53 50 48 46.5 44 41.50
63 83.79 81.9 80.01 76.86 73.71 70.56 66.78 63 60.48 58.9 55.44 52.29

34.5±0.5
45±0.31
86 -1.4
0
0 0 0 0
49.5±0.31 18 -0.43 36 -0.43 54 -1.2 72 -1.2
0
78 -1.2 1P 1P+N, 2P 3P 3P+N, 4P
3. Type designation
N B 1 - 63 DC
Direct Current
Frame size rated current
Designed sequence number
MCB
Company code
4. Operating conditions
4.1 Ambient temperature:-35℃~+70℃(Refer to 5.3)
4.2 The atmosphere condition:≤95%
4.3 Pollution degree:Ⅱ
4.4 Altitude:≤2000m(if exceed 2000m,Refer to 5.4)
5. Technical data
NB1-63DC 5.1 Classification
DC Circuit Breaker 5.1.1 Rate Current In:

1A,2A,3A,4A,6A,10A,13A,16A,20A,25A,32A,40A,50A,63A
1. General 5.1.2 Number of poles: 1P,2P,4P
1.1 Certificates: CCC,CE,CB,TUV; 5.1.3 Tripping curves: C Type,(7~10)In
1.2 Standard: IEC/EN 60947-2 ,RoHS; 5.2 Parameters
1.3 Rated voltage up to 1000V, Rated current up to 63A; 5.2.1 Rated breaking capacity Icu
1.4 Protection of circuits against overload currents;
1.5 Protection of circuits against short-circuit currents;
1.6 NB1-63 DC circuit-breakers are used in

communication systems and PV DC systems.
2. Features
2.1 Excellent breaking capacity
2.2 Double connection function of lead wire and bus bar
2.3 Stored energy operation, fast closing, long service life
2.4 Convenient installation, disassembly
2.5 Contact on-off indication, higher security
2.6 Green environmental protection and energy saving

Rated current Number of Rated voltage Rated breaking

In (A) poles
1
Ue (V)
250
capacity Icu (A)
6000 A
1~63 2 500 6000
4 1000 6000
5.2.2 Electrical and mechancial life

a. Electrical life:＞ 1500
b. Mechancial life:＞20,000
5.2.3 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:4KV
5.2.4 (28-32)℃ ambient temperature over-current protection features.
Test Initial Time limit for tripping Expected

Test Remarks
current state or not tripping result
a 1.05In Cold state t≤1h Not tripping
b 1.30In Right after test number a t＜1h Tripping The current is rising within 5s
c 7In Cold state t≤0.2s Not tripping
d 10In Cold state t＜0.1s Tripping
Note: The terminology”Cold state”means that the test is performed at the base calibration temperature with no load prior to the test.
Temperature compensation coefficient under various operational temperature.

Rated current (A)
-35℃ -30℃ -20℃ -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃ 70℃
1 1.3 1.26 1.23 1.19 1.15 1.11 1.05 1 0.96 0.93 0.88 0.83
2 2.6 2.52 2.46 2.38 2.28 2.2 2.08 2 1.92 1.86 1.76 1.66
3 3.9 3.78 3.69 3.57 3.42 3.3 3.12 3 2.88 2.79 2.64 2.49
4 5.2 5.04 4.92 4.76 4.56 4.4 4.16 4 3.84 3.76 3.52 3.32
6 7.8 7.56 7.38 7.14 6.84 6.6 6.24 6 5.76 5.64 5.28 4.98
10 13.2 12.7 12.5 12 11.5 11.1 10.6 10 9.6 9.3 8.9 8.4
13 17.16 16.51 16.25 15.6 14.95 14.43 13.78 13 12.48 12.09 11.57 10.92
16 21.12 20.48 20 19.2 18.4 17.76 16.96 16 15.36 14.88 14.24 13.44
20 26.4 25.6 25 24 23 22.2 21.2 20 19.2 18.6 17.8 16.8
25 33 32 31.25 30 28.75 27.75 26.5 25 24 23.25 22.25 21
32 42.56 41.28 40 38.72 37.12 35.52 33.93 32 30.72 29.76 28.16 26.88
40 53.2 51.2 50 48 46.4 44.8 42.4 40 38.4 37.2 35.6 33.6
50 67 65.5 63 60.5 58 56 53 50 48 46.5 44 41.5
63 83.79 81.9 80.01 76.86 73.71 70.56 66.78 63 60.48 58.9 55.44 52.29
5.4 Altitude derating
Rated current Current correction factor

Tripping type For example
In (A) ≤2000 2000~3000m ≥3000m
1,2,3,4,6,10,
Rated current of 10A products rated
C 13,16,20,32, 1 0.9 0.8
current derating 2500m:0.9×10=9A
40,50,63
5.5 Curves shown in Figure 1 5.6 Wiring: Apply to 25 mm2 wire connection terminals
Tightening torque 2.5N·m
t(s)
10000 Copper wire nominal

Rated current In (A)
5000 cross sectional area(mm2)
1H
2000 1~6 1
1000
10 1.5
500
13,16,20 2.5
200
25 4
100
50 32 6
20 40,50 10
10
63 16
5
2
1 5.7 Each pole power consumption of the circuit breaker
0.5
0.2 Each pole maximum
0.1 power consumption(W)
0.05
1~10 2
0.02
0.01 13~32 3.5
0.005 40~63 5
0.002
0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
5.8 DC application wiring diagram shown in Figure 2
1P 2P Uplead connection Uplead connection Uplead connection

Downlead connection Uplead connection Downlead connection Uplead connection Downlead connection
L－ L＋ L－
L－ L＋
1 3
1
1 3 L＋ L＋ L－
1 3 L－
1 2 4 3 1 2 4 3
L＋
1 2 4 3
1 3
2 4
2
2 4 L＋
2 4
2 4 L－
L＋ L－ L＋ L－
4P
Uplead connection Downlead connection Uplead connection
M L－ L＋
L－ L＋
1 3 Wiring diagram description:
1 2 4 3
1.L+:Positive pole of power supply,L-:Negative pole of power supply;
1 3
2.+:Positive pole of circuit breaker,-:Negative pole of circuit breaker;

3. :Load;
2 4 4.The DC power supply is usually ‘L-’grounded.The neutral pole ‘M’
of the positive and negative power supply system is grounded.
2 4
L＋ L－ M

34.5±0.50
45±0.31
86 -1.4
0
35
0
1P 18-0.43
7.5
0
49.5±0.31 36-0.62
0
2P 27
78 -1.2 0
72 -1.2
4P
2. Type designation
NB7 A
Design number
Miniature circuit breaker
Company code
3. Technical data
3.1 Main specifications
3.1.1 Graded according to the rated current In: 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A,
6A, 10A, 16A, 20A, 25A, 32A, 40A, 50A, 63A;
3.1.2 Classified as follows according to the type of instantaneous

release: type B (3-5)In, type C (5-10)In, type D ((10-16)In;
3.1.3 Categorized as follows according to the number of poles:

a. Single pole
b. Two poles
c. Three poles
d. Four poles
NB7 3.2 Technical parameters
Miniature Circuit Breaker 3.2.1 For the rated short circuit breaking capacity, see Table 1
Table 1
1. General
Rated current Number of Rated voltage Rated short circuit
In (A) poles Ue (V) capacity Icn (A)
The NB7 series miniature circuit breaker is applicable to
the circuit with an alternating current of 50Hz/60Hz, rated 1 240/415
B, C type: 1~40 6000
voltage of 240/415V, and rated current up to 63A for 2, 3, 4 415
overload protection and short circuit protection, and also 1 240/415

B, C type: 50 63
for not-frequent operational transformation in the circuit 2, 3, 4 415
4500
under normal condition. 1 240/415
D type: 1~63
This product can be applied to various places such as 2, 3, 4 415
industrial, commercial, and tall buildings, and residential

houses. 3.2.2 Mechanical/electrical Life
The product meets the standards of IEC60898-1. a. Electrical life: not less than 4,000 times
b. Mechanical life: not less than 10,000 times
3.2.3 For the over current protection characteristics, see Table 2
Table 2
Test Initial Time limit for tripping Expected Test environment

Test Type Remarks
current state or not tripping result temperature
a B, C, D 1.13 In Cold state t≤1h Not tripping
b B, C, D 1.45 In Right after test number 1 t＜1h Tripping The current is

rising within 5s
1s＜t＜60s (In≤32A)
c B, C, D 2.55 In Cold state Tripping
1s＜t＜120s (In＞32A)
B 3In
The power supply is turned on
d C 5In Cold state t≤0.1s Not tripping 30℃~35℃
by closing the auxiliary switch
D 10In
B 5In
The power supply is turned on
e C 10In Cold state t＜0.1s Tripping
by closing the auxiliary switch
D 16In
Note: The terminology “Cold state” means that the test is performed at the base calibration temperature with no load prior to the test.
2
3.2.4 For the tripping performance diagram, see Fig 1 3.2.5 Wiring: good for connection of leads of less than 25mm
(see Table 3); wiring method: screw hold-down with a toque
B Type of 2N·m
t(s)
10000
5000
1h Nominal cross-sectional area
2000 of the copper conductor (mm2)
1000
500
1~6 1
200
100 10 1.5
50
16,20 2.5
20
10 25 4
5
32 6
2
1 40,50 10
0.5
0.2
63 16
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01 4. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)
0.005
0.002
0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 5070 100 200 I/In
0
72-1.2
4P 0 Multi poles 80-1.2
0
54-1.2
3P
0
C Type 36-0.62 0
Single pole 78-1.2
t(s) 2P
0
10000 18-0.43 67.3±0.37
1P
5000
1h
2000
1000
500
81.5±0.44
200
45±0.31
34.5±0.5
100
85.5 -1.4
0
50
.OFF .OFF .OFF .OFF
20
10
5
2
1
0.5
0.2
50.3±0.37
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.005
0.002
0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 5070 100 200 I/In
5. Ordering information
5.1 When ordering the goods, the user shall indicate the following
items:
D Type
t(s)
10000 5.1.1 Types and names of products, for example, NB7 miniature
5000
1h circuit breaker;
2000
1000 5.1.2 Instantaneous tripping type and rated current, for example,
500
200
C25;
100 5.1.3 Number of poles: for example, 2P;
50
20 5.1.4 Amount on order, for example, 50 units;
10
5
5.2 Example for ordering: 50 units of the NB7 series miniature
2
1 circuit breakers, 2P, C25.
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.005
0.002
0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 16 20 30 5070 100 200 I/In
BC B BG
Miniature Circuit Breaker A
1. General
1.1 Function
switch,isolation.
1.2 Selection
the earthing systems (TNS, TNC),
Tripping curves:
B curve (3-5In)
systems.
C curve (5-10In)
current.
D curve(10-20In)

on the last page.
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
BC B BG is of high current limiting performance to limit

the destruction energy due to short circuit to the greatest extent.
IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type B curve IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type C curve
t(s) t(s)
10000 10000
5000 5000
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20
20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In I/In
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200
IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type D curve IEC/EN 60947-2 AC type 8-12 In

t(s) t(s)
10000 10000
5000
5000
1h
2000 2000
1000 1000
500
500
200 200
100 100
50
50
20 20
10
10
5
5
2
2
1
1
0.05
0.05
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.01 0.005
0.005
0.002
0.002
0.001
0.001
1.05 2 3 45 8 12 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
2.2
Standard
Rated current In A
IEC/EN 60898-1
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 15, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 60, 63
IEC/EN 60947-2 A
Poles 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P
Rated frequency Hz 50/60
Electrical 3 (1~63A) eBC

features Rated breaking capacity kA 4.5 (1~63A) eB
6 (B,C 1~40A) eBG
Rated impulse withstand voltage(1.2/50) Uimp V 4000

Pollution degree 2
Thermo-magnetic release characteristic B, C, D 8-12In
Mechanical
℃ 30
of thermal element

℃ -5...+40

Terminal connection type Cable/Pin-type busbar
mm2 1~25
AWG 17~3
mm2 1~10
Installation AWG 17~7
N·m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 18

Temperature compensation coefficient under various operational temperature

Rated current
In (A) -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 55℃ 60℃
1~6 1.20 1.14 1.09 1.05 1.00 0.96 0.80 0.75 0.70
10~32 1.18 1.12 1.08 1.04 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.88 0.84
40~60 1.16 1.12 1.07 1.03 1.00 0.97 0.87 0.83 0.80

45±0.31
80 -1.20
34.5±0.5
0
44±0.31
0 0 0 0
18 -0.43 36 -0.62 54 -1.20 72 -1.20
0
74 -1.20 (single pole)
0
77.8 -1.20 (multi poles)
1P 2P 3P 4P
NB1-63G Miniature Circuit Breaker
Color coded contact position indicator

1
provides visual indication of the device
status and insulation function
Magnetic trip elements provide
4
Type B and C trip characteristics
while bimetallic element protect
against slight overload
Line and load side terminals accept bus bar

5 connections for reduced costs and more
efficient installation of multiple devices
2 Trip-free mechanism, device operation 6 Heat dissipation gap provides better cooling
can not be defeated by holding the
operator in the ON position
3 Breaking capacity up to 6000A 7 Extendable DIN-rail holder for easy installation

NB1-63G Miniature Circuit

Breaker A
1. General
1.1 Function
switch,isolation.
NB1-63G circuit-breakers are used in domestic installation,
1.2 Selection
Tripping curves:
B curve (3-5In)
systems.
C curve (5-10In)
current.
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type B curve IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type C curve Let-through I2t/A2S I2t
t(s) t(s)
10000 10000 63A
105
5000 5000 50A
1h 1h 32A 40A
2000 2000 25A
5 20A
1000 1000
500 500
16A
10A
200 200
100 100 6A
50 50 104
20 20 4A
10 10 3A
5
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5 2A
3
0.2 0.2 10
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05 1A
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 34 5 7 10 20 30 5070100 200 I/In 102 5 103 5 104
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
2.2
6, 10, 13, 16,

Rated current In A 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63
Rated voltage Ue V 230/400
Rated frequency 50/60Hz
Rated breaking capacity A 6000
Energy limiting class 3
Electrical
features Dielectric test voltage at ind. Freq. for 1 min kV 2
Pollution degree 2
6, 10 2.5
Power loss per pole
16, 20, 25, 32 5
40, 50, 63 10
Thermo-magnetic release characteristic B, C

Mechanical Protection degree IP20

features
Reference temperature for setting ℃ 30
of thermal element

℃ -35～＋70
Storage temperation ℃ -35～＋70

mm2 25
AWG 18-4
mm2 10
N·m 2.0
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 22

with
Alarm contant Yes
2.3 Selectivity
In
(A)
20 25 36 50 63 80 100 125 160

A
Is (kA)
6 0.5 0.8 1.9 2.5 4.5 5 6 6 6
10 0.7 1.4 2.2 3.2 3.6 6 6 6
16 1.2 1.8 2.6 3 5.6 6 6
20 1.5 2.2 2.5 4.6 6 6
Load side: NB1-63G
25 1.3 2 2.2 4.1 5.5 6
32 1.7 1.9 3.8 4.5 6
40 1.7 3 4 5
50 1.5 2.6 3.5 4.5
63 2.4 3.3 4.5

In
16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
(A)
Is (kA)
≤10 0.19 0.19 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8
16 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8
Load side: NB1-63G 20 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8

25 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8
32 0.5 0.63 0.8
40 0.63 0.8
50 0.8
63

In
40 50 63 80 100 125 160
(A)
Is (kA)
6 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
10 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
13 40 40 40 40 35 35 35
16 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
Load side: NB1-63G
20 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
25 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
32 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
40 40 40 40 40 30 30 30
50 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
63 20 20 20 20 15 15 15

In
(A)
Is (kA)
Load side: NB1-63G 6 15 18 18 15 15 15
10~20 12 15 15 12 12 12
32~40 12 15 15 12 12 12
50~60 12 15 15 12 12 12

Ambient temperature
-35 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Rated current(A)
6 7.80 7.56 7.38 7.14 6.84 6.6 6.24 6 5.76 5.64 5.28 4.98
10 13.20 12.7 12.5 12 11.5 11.1 10.6 10 9.6 9.3 8.9 8.40
16 21.12 20.48 20 19.2 18.4 17.76 16.96 16 15.36 14.88 14.24 10.92
20 26.40 25.6 25 24 23 22.2 21.2 20 19.2 18.6 17.8 16.80
25 33 32 31.25 30 28.75 27.75 26.5 25 24 23.25 22.25 21
32 42.56 41.28 40 38.72 37.12 35.52 33.92 32 30.72 29.76 28.16 26.88
40 53.20 51.2 50 48 46.4 44.8 42.4 40 38.4 37.2 35.6 33.60
50 67 65.5 63 60.5 58 56 53 50 48 46.5 44 41.50
63 83.79 81.9 80.01 76.86 73.71 70.56 66.78 63 60.48 58.9 55.44 52.29

34.5±0.5
45±0.31
-1.4
0
86
0 0 0 0
18 36 54 72
49.5±0.31 -0.43 -0.62 -1.2 -1.2
0
78
-1.2 1P 2P 3P 4P
NBH8 Miniature Circuit Breaker

1. General
A
1.1 Function
switch,isolation.
1.2 Selection
Tripping curves:
B curve (3-5In)
systems.
C curve (5-10In)
current.

on the last page.
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type B Curve IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type C Curve

t(s) t(s)
10000 10000
5000 5000
1h 1h
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
2.2

Rated current In A 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40
Poles 1P+N
Electrical Rated frequency Hz 50/60

features Rated breaking capacity A 4500/6000
Pollution degree 2
Energy limiting class 3
Mechanical
℃ 30
of thermal element

℃ -5...+40

mm2 16
AWG 18-5
mm2 10
N·m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 18

with
Alarm contant Yes

Temperature -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 55℃ 60℃

Temperature compensation coefficient 1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.875 0.85

34.5±0.5
45±0.31
-1.4
0
86
0
18 5.5 44±0.31
-0.43
60.7±0.37
0
76
-1.2
Note
A
P-027 Modular DIN Rail Products MCCB
DZ158 Moulded Case

Circuit Breaker
1. General
1.1 Function
switch, isolation.
1.2 Selection
this device, network normal voltage.

on the last page.
014
MCCB Modular DIN Rail Products P-028
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
A
t(s) IEC/EN 60947-2 AC type 8-12 In
10000
8000
1h (or 2h)
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
30
20
10
5
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.005
0.002
0.001
0.5 1 1.3 2 3 4 5 8 12 20 30 50 70 100 I/In
2.2

Rated current In A 63, 80, 100, 125
Electrical Rated frequency Hz 50/60

features Rated breaking capacity kA 6/10
Rated impulse withstand voltage(1.2/50) Uimp kV 4
Dielectric test voltage at ind. Freq. for 1 min kV 1.89
Pollution degree 3
Thermo-magnetic release characteristic 8-12In
1,500 (In=63A, 80A, 100A)

Electrical life
1,000 (In=125A)
8,500 (In=63A, 80A, 100A)

Mechanical life
7,000 (In=125A)

Mechanical
features
Reference temperature for setting
℃ 30
of thermal element

℃ -5...+40

Terminal connection type Cable
mm2 16~50
AWG 6-0
Installation 3.5
Tightening torque
31
Mounting N·m On DIN rail EN 60715 (35mm) by means of fast clip device
Connection In-Ibs. From top and bottom
Combination
with Auxiliary contact Yes
accessories
P-029 Modular DIN Rail Products MCCB

Rated current Temperature compensation coefficient under various operational temperature

In (A) -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃
63 1.275 1.215 1.15 1.075 1.00 0.915 0.825 0.735
80 1.27 1.205 1.135 1.07 1.00 0.925 0.845 0.755
100 1.275 1.21 1.135 1.075 1.00 0.925 0.845 0.755
125 1.25 1.19 1.125 1.08 1.00 0.93 0.86 0.78
0
108 -1.4
4P
0
81 -1.4 0
3P 78.5-1.2(2,3,4P)
0
54 -0.74 0 (1P)
73.5-1.2
2P
0
27-0.52
49.5±0.31
1P
80.5±0.26
45±0.31
34.5±0.5
84.5±0.7
65.5±0.37
RCCB Modular DIN Rail Products P-030
Tripping sensitivity
10mA - precision instrument leakage protection and bathroom
use.
30mA - additional protection against direct contact.
A
100mA - co-ordinated with the earth system according to
the formula IΔn ＜50/R, to provide protection against
indirect contacts;
300mA/500mA - protection against indirect contacts, as well
as fire hazard.
Tripping time
Instantaneous
It ensures instantaneous tripping (without time-delay).
Short time delay G/SI
It ensures any tripping at least 10ms.

Selective S
It ensures total discrimination with a nonselective RCD

placed downstream.

on the last page.
NL1 Residual Current Main distribution board Sub- distribution board
Operated Circuit Breaker RCCB
without over-current RCCB S

RCCB
protection (Magnetic)
RCCB G/SI
1. General
Selective S Instantaneous, short time delay G/SI
1.1 Function
Control electric circuits.
Protect people against indirect contacts and additional
protection against direct contacts.
Protect installations against fire hazard due to insulation
faults.
Residual current circuit breakers are used in housing, tertiary
sector and industry.
1.2 Selection
Detectable wave form
AC class
Tripping is ensured for slowly increasing sinusoidal AC
residual currents.
A class
Tripping is ensured for sinusoidal AC residual currents and
for pulsed DC residual currents, whether applied suddenly
or increasing slowly.
S, G/SI class
Tripping is ensured not only for sinusoidal AC residual currents
but also for pulsed DC residual currents whether applied
suddenly or increasing slowly. S, G/SI type with filters against
spurious tripping caused by harmonics and transient surges.
With the impact of 8/20us surge 3000A, this high immunity
RCCB will still be in stable status.
014
P-031 Modular DIN Rail Products RCCB
2. Technical data

Type (wave form of the earth leakage sensed) AC, A, AC-G, A-G, AC-S, A-S, A-SI
Rated current In A 25, 40, 63, 80, 100
Poles 1P+N, 3P+N
Rated sensitivity I△n A 0.01for1P+N 25A, 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 0.5
Rated residual making and 500 (In=25A/40A), 800(In=80A/100A)

Electrical A
breaking capacity I△m 630 (In=63A)
features
Short-circuit current Inc=I△c A 6000/10000
SCPD fuse A 10000
break time under I△n s ≤0.1(Normal type), 10ms~300ms(G type). 150ms~500ms(S type)
Pollution degree 2
Fault current indicator Yes
Mechanical
features
℃ -5...+40

mm2 25/35
AWG 18-3/18-2
mm2 10/16
Installation AWG 18-8/18-5
N·m 2.5
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 22
0
79
-1.2
5.5
34.5±0.5
45±0.31
-1.4
0
86
0
0 72
36 -1.2 49.5±0.31
-0.62
RCCB Modular DIN Rail Products P-032
NL210 Residual Current

Operated Circuit Breaker A
without over-current protection
1. General
1.1 Function
faults.
1.2 Selection
Type B
Tripping is ensured for sinusoidal AC residual currents pulsed
DC residual currents, alternating residual sinusoidal currents
up to 1000Hz, pulsating direct residual currents and for
smooth direct residual currents, whether applied suddenly or
increasing slowly.
100mA - co-ordinated with the earth system according to
the formula IΔn＜50/R, to provide protection against indirect
contacts;
300mA - protection against indirect contacts, as well as fire
hazard.
Tripping time
Instantaneous

CE, KEMA
1.4 Add-on devices

AX-5 auxiliary contacts
TC-1 terminal cover
P-033 Modular DIN Rail Products RCCB
2. Technical data
Standard IEC/EN 62423 & IEC/EN 61008-1

Type (wave form of the earth leakage sensed) B
Rated current In A 25, 40, 63
Poles 1P+N, 3P+N
Rated voltage Ue V 1P+N: 230/240 V~; 3P+N: 400/415 V~;
Rated sensitivity I△n A 0.03, 0.1, 0.3
Rated residual making and 500 (In=25A/40A)

Electrical A
features
Short-circuit current Inc=I△c A 10,000
SCPD fuse A 10000
break time under I△n s ≤0.1
Rated frequency Hz 50
Rated impulse withstand voltage(1.2/50) Uimp V 4,000
Pollution degree 2
Mechanical life 10,000
Mechanical
features
℃ -25...+40

mm2 25/35
AWG 18-3/18-2
mm2 10/16
Installation AWG 18-8/18-5
N·m 2.5
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 22
0
79
1P+N 3P+N -1.2
49.5±0.31
45±0.31
34.5±0.5
-1.4
0
91
5.5
0 0
54 72
-0.9 -1.2
RCBO Modular DIN Rail Products P-034
NB1L Residual Current

with over-current protection
(Magnetic)
1. General
1.1 Function
Personnel and fire protection: Cable and line protection
against
overload and short-circuits.
1.2 Selection
Rated residual operating current
I∆n ≤30 mA: additional protection in the case of direct
contact.
I∆n ≤300 mA: preventative fire protection in the case of
ground fault currents.
Tripping class
AC class
Tripping is ensured for sinusoidal,
alternating currents, whether they be quickly applied or
slowly increase.
A class
Tripping is ensured for sinusoidal, alternating
residual currents as well as for pulsed DC residual
currents, whether they be quickly applied or slowly
increase.
Tripping curve
B curve (3-5 In) protection and control of the circuits against
overloads and short-circuits; protection for
people and big length cables in TN and IT systems.
C curve (5-10 In) protection and control of the circuits
against overloads and short-circuits; protection for
resistive and inductive loads with low inrush current.

on the last page.
P-035 Modular DIN Rail Products RCBO
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
t(s) t(s)
B Curve 10000
C Curve
10000
5000 5000
1h 1h
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
2.2

Type (wave form of the earth leakage sensed) A AC, A A
Thermo-magnetic release characteristic B, C B, C B, C
Rated current In A 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25 2, 4, 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40
Poles 1P+N(N left) 1P+N( N right) 2P
Rated voltage Ue V 220/230/240~ 220/230/240~ 220/230/240~

Rated sensitivity I△n A 0.03 0.03, 0.1, 0.3 0.03
Electrical Rated residual making

A 500 3,000 500
features and breaking capacity I△m
Rated short-circuit capacity lcn A 6,000 6,000/10,000 10,000

Break time under I△n s ≤0.1
Rated impulse
V 6,000
withstand voltage (1.2/50)Uimp
Dielectric TEST voltage at ind. Freq. for 1min kV 2

Pollution degree 2
Electrical life 2,000
Mechanical
features
Ambient temperature
℃ -5...+40
(with daily average≤35℃)
Storage temperature ℃ -25...+70

mm2 25
AWG 18-3
mm2 10
AWG 18-8
Installation
N·m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 18


Temperature -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃
Temperature compensation
1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85
coefficient of rated current

Combined
49.5±0.31
49.5±0.31
45±0.31
45±0.31
34.5±0.5
34.5±0.5
86 -1.4
86 -1.4
0
0
0 0 0 0
36 -0.62 77 -1.2 54-1.2 78 -1.2
1P+N 2P
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
t(s) t(s)
B Curve 10000
C Curve
10000
5000 5000
1h 1h
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
2.2

Type (wave form of the earth leakage sensed) AC, A for NB1L-40 | AC for NB1L-63
NB1L-40 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40
Rated current In A
NB1L-63 50, 63
Poles NB1L-40/NB1L-63 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P

Rated sensitivity I△n A 0.03, 0.1, 0.3
Electrical Rated residual making 500 (In≤40A)

A
features and breaking capacity I△m 630 (In＞40A)
Rated short-circuit capacity lcn A 6,000/10,000
Break time under I△n S ≤0.1
Rated impulse
V 6,000

Insulation voltage Ui 500
Pollution degree 2
Mechanical
features
Ambient temperature
℃ -5...+40

mm2 25
AWG 18-3
mm2 10
AWG 18-8
Installation
N·m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 18
From top and bottom (for combined type)
Connection
From top (MCB+add-on RCCB block)

Temperature -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃
1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85
MCB+add-on RCCB block
0
78.5 -1.2
49.5±0.31
A 5.5
34.5±0.50
45±0.31
88 -1.4
0
Overall dimensions A (mm)

Number of poles
1~40A 50~63A
0 0
1P+N 45 -0.62 54 -0.74
0 0
2P 63 -0.74 72 -0.74
0 0
3P 108 -1.4 117 -1.4
0 0
3P+N 108 -1.4 117 -1.4
0 0
4P 126 -1.6 135-1.6
B(mm)
0 0
1P+N 27-0.52 36 -0.62
0 0
2P 27-0.52 36 -0.62
0 0
3P 54-1.20 63 -1.2
0 0
3P+N 54-1.20 63 -1.2
0 0
4P 54-1.20 63 -1.2
NB3LE Residual Current

Operated Circuit Breaker
with Over-current Protection
(Electronic)
1. General
1.1 Selection
I∆n = 30 mA: additional protection in the case of direct
contact.
Tripping class
AC class – Tripping is ensured for sinusoidal, alternating
currents, whether they be quickly applied or slowly increase.
Tripping curve
overloads and short-circuits; protection for people and big
length cables in TN and IT systems.
against
overloads and short-circuits; protection for resistive and
inductive loads with low inrush current.

on the last page.
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
B Curve C Curve
t(s) t(s)
10000 10000
5000 5000
1h 1h
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
2.2
Standard
Type (wave form of the earth leakage sensed)
IEC/EN 61009-1
AC,A
A
Rated current In A 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32
Poles 1P+N
Rated voltage Ue V 240
Rated sensitivity I△n A 0.03
Rated residual making

A 2000
and breaking capacity I△m
Electrical Rated short-circuit capacity lcn A 6,000
features
Rated impulse
V 4,000

Pollution degree 2
features
Ambient temperature
℃ -5...+40

mm2 16
AWG 18-5
mm2 10
N·m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 18
Connection From top

The reference temperature is 30℃ Ambient temperature: -5℃~+40℃.
Temperature -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃
1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85

0
76.5 -1.20 0
49.5 ± 0.31 18-0.18
18
O PEN
34.5±0.50
45 ± 0.31
7.5
111 ± 0.70
113.5-1.40
OFF 1
0
5.5
35
27
57±0.37
66.2±0.37
NB3LEG Residual Current

(Electronic)
1. General
1.1 Selection
I∆n ≤ 30 mA: additional protection in the case of direct
contact.
Tripping class
A class
Tripping is ensured for sinusoidal, alternating residual
currents as well as for pulsed DC residual currents, whether
they be quickly applied or slowly increase.
Tripping curve
against

on the last page.
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
B Curve C Curve
t(s) t(s)
10000 10000
5000 5000
1h 1h
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
2.2
Standard
BS EN61009-1
AC, A
A
Rated current In A 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50
Poles 1P+N
Rated voltage Ue V 240V AC

A 3000
features
Rated impulse
V 4,000

Pollution degree 2
features
Ambient temperature
℃ -5...+40

mm2 16
AWG 18-5
mm2 10
N·m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 18
Connection From top

The reference temperature is 30℃ Ambient temperature: -5℃~+40℃.
Temperature -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃
1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85
0
77 -1.2 0
98 ± 0.44
102 -1.4 0
34.5 ± 0.5 0
45 ± 0.31
49.5 ± 0.31
0
18 -0.43
NB3LEU
Residual Current
(Electronic)
1. General
1.1 Selection
I∆n = 30 mA:
additional protection in the case of direct contact.
Tripping class
Tripping curve
against

on the last page.
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
B Curve C Curve
t(s) t(s)
10000 10000
5000 5000
1h 1h
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
2.2
Standard
IEC/EN 61009-1
AC,A
A
Rated current In A 6，10，13，16，20，25，32，40，45，50
Poles 1P+N
Rated voltage Ue V 240

A 500
features
Rated impulse
V 4,000

Pollution degree 2
features
Ambient temperature
℃ -5...+40

mm2 16
AWG 18-5
mm2 10
N·m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 18
Connection From bottom

Temperature -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃
1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85
0
77-1.20 7.5
57±0.37 1
35
27
115±0.44
119-1.40
0
34.5±0.50
45±0.31
.
O OFF
49.5±0.31
66.2±0.37 0
18-0.43
NBH8LE
Residual Current
(Electronic)
1. General
1.1 Function
Personnel and fire protection
Cable and line protection against overload
and short-circuits.
1.2 Selection
I∆n = 10mA, 30mA: additional protection
in the case of direct contact.
AC class – Tripping is ensured for sinusoidal,
alternating currents, whether they be quickly applied
or slowly increase.

on the last page.
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
C Curve
t(s)
10000
5000
1h
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.005
0.002
0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
2.2
Standard
IEC/EN 61009-1
AC
A
Thermo-magnetic release characteristic C
Rated current In A 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40
Poles 1P+N
Rated sensitivity I△n A 0.01, 0.03

A 500
Electrical Rated short-circuit capacity lcn A 4500/6000
features
Rated impulse
V 4,000

Pollution degree 2
features
Ambient temperature
℃ -5...+40

mm2 16
AWG 18-5
mm2 10
N·m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 11
Connection From top

Temperature -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃
1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85
coefficient

45±0.31
34.5±0.5
-1.4
0
86
0
36 -0.43 44±0.31
60.7±0.37 5.5
0
76.5 -1.2
P-047 Modular DIN Rail Products CBR
DZ158LE
Circuit-Break Incorporating
Residual Current Protection
1. General
1.1 Function
Personnel and fire protection
Cable and line protection against overload and
short-circuits.
1.2 Selection
I∆n ≤ 30 mA: additional protection
in the case of direct contact.
I∆n ≤300 mA: preventative fire protection
in the case of ground fault currents.
AC class – Tripping is ensured for sinusoidal,
alternating currents, whether they be quickly applied
or slowly increase.

on the last page.
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
Curve
t(s)
10000
8000
1h(or 2h)
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.005
0.002
0.001
0.5 1 1.3 2 3 45 8 12 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
CBR Modular DIN Rail Products P-048
2.2
Standard
IEC/EN 60947-2
AC
A
Thermo-magnetic release characteristic 8-12In
Rated current In A 63, 80, 100
Poles 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P
Electrical Rated voltage Ue V 230/400

features Rated sensitivity I△n A 0.03, 0.1, 0.3

A 2,000
Rated short-circuit capacity lcn kA 6

Rated impulse
kV 4
Dielectric TEST voltage at ind. Freq. for 1min kV 1.89

Pollution degree 3
Mechanical
features
Ambient temperature
℃ -5...+40

Cable
Terminal connection type
16~35
N·m 3.5
Installation Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 31
On DIN rail EN 60715 (35mm) by means of fast clip device

Mounting Connection
From top
Rated current Temperature compensation coefficient under various operational temperature

In (A) -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃
63 1.275 1.215 1.15 1.075 1.00 0.915 0.825 0.735
80 1.27 1.205 1.135 1.27 1.00 0.925 0.845 0.755
100 1.275 1.21 1.135 1.075 1.00 0.925 0.845 0.755

P-049 Modular DIN Rail Products CBR
H
65.5±0.37
L
49.5±0.31
45±0.31
34.5±0.5
-1.40
108±0.70
0
Number 113
of poles 1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N 4P
0 0 0 0 0
L (mm) 54 -0.74 81 -0.87 108 -1.40 108 -1.40 135 -1.60
0 0 0 0 0
H (mm) 73.5 -1.2 78.5 -1.2 78.5 -1.2 78.5 -1.2 78.5 -1.2

1. General
The NB2LE residual current operated circuit breakers are suitable
for lines with AC 50/60Hz, rated voltage 240V, rated current up
to 40A and for purposes of residual current protection, overload
and short circuit protection. When any personal electric shock
occurs or the circuit leakage current exceeds the predetermined
value, the residual current operated circuit breaker can
automatically cut off the power supply in a very short period of
time, so that the safety of persons and electrical equipment can
be protected. The residual current operated circuit breaker can
be used for infrequent conversion of lines under normal
conditions, and applied under occasions such as industrial, and
commercial, high-rise buildings and residential houses.
2. Type designation
Instantaneous trip type and rated current (A)
Function Code (electronic residual current)
Design sequence No.
Miniature Circuit Breaker
Company Code
3. Technical data
3.1 The tripping characteristic curves are as shown in Fig. 1.
B Curve C Curve
t(s) t(s)
10000 10000
5000 5000
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 5070 100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 5070 100 200 I/In
3.2

Rated current In A 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40
Main Classified by Type of Instantaneous Tripping Type B: (3 ~ 5) ln,Type C: (5 ~ 10) ln

Specifications Poles 1P + N
Type(wave form of the earth leakage sensed) Type AC, Type A
Rated voltage Ue V AC230/240
Frame size rated current Inm A 40
Rated residual operating current I △ n A 0.03
Rated residual non-operating current I △ no A 0.015
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn A 6000
Technical
Rated residual making and
Parameters A 3000
breaking capacity I △ m

Rated impuse withstand voltage Uimp V 6,000
3.3 The residual current breaking times
Breaking time when the residual current assumes the following values (s)
In(A) I△n(A)
I△n 2 I△n 5 I△n 5A,10A,20A,50A,100A,200A,500Aa I△tb
6~40 0.03 0.1 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.04
a. For tests of 5A,10A,20A,50A,100A,200A and 500A, the current values beyond the lower limit of over-current instantaneous tripping are not tested.
b. Tests are done when I△t is equal to the lower limit current of over-current instantaneous tripping of type B and type C.
3.4 The over-current protection characteristics
No. Rated current In (A) Initial state Test current (A) Specified time (t) Expected result Remarks
a Cold state 1.13In t≥1h Non-tripping
Increase to the specified current

b Immediately after sequence a 1.45In t＜h Tripping
within 5s after test item a.
c Cold state 2.55In 1s＜t＜60s Tripping

6~40
3In t≥0.1s Non-tripping
Type B
5In t＜0.1s Tripping
d Cold state
5In t≥0.1s Non-tripping
Type C
10In t＜0.1s Tripping

The product shall be mounted using mounting rail of 35-7.5 section steel.
The overall and mounting dimensions are as shown in Fig. 2 and Fig. 3.
Fig. 2 Overall and installation dimensions Fig. 3 Mounting rail size
0
77 -1.20
0
18 -0.43 44±0.31
34.5±0.50
45±0.31
6000
35 L
-1.40
0
7.5
95
27
5.1 When ordering, the following information must be indicated:

a. Product type and description, such as: NB2LE residual current operated circuit breaker;
A
b. Rated current, such as: 25A;
c. Instantaneous tripping type, such as: Type C;
d. Rated residual operating current, such as: 0.03A
e. Operating conditions when containing DC component, such as: Type A;
f. Ordering quantity, such as: 90 units.
5.2 Ordering examples: NB2LE residual current operated circuit breaker C25, 0.03A, A type, 90 units.
NB310L Residual Current

(Magnetic)
1. General
1.1 Function
against overload and short-circuits.
1.2 Selection
I∆n ＝30mA,300mA: additional protection in the case of
direct contact.
Tripping class
A and AC class
A class tripping is ensured for sinusoidal, alternating residual
they be quickly or slowly increase.
AC class tripping is ensured for sinusoidal, alternating
residual currents, whether they be quickly or slowly increase.
Tripping curve
B curve (3 In-5 In) protection and control of the circuits
C curve (5 In-10 In) protection and control of the circuits

CE/CB/KEMA
1.4 Add-on devices

XF9 auxiliary contacts
S9 shunt release
V9 under voltage release
OVT-1 over voltage release
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
B Curve t(s) C Curve

t(s)
10000 10000
5000 5000
1h 1h
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
2.2
Standard
IEC/EN 61009-1
A A, AC
A
Rated current In A 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40
Poles 2P 3P+N
Rated voltage Ue V 230/240 230/400
Rated sensitivity I△n A 0.03 0.03,0.3

A 3,000
features
Rated impulse
V 4,000 4,000

Pollution degree 2
Mechanical life 20,000 10,000
features
Ambient temperature
℃ -25...+40

mm2 25
AWG 18-3
mm2 10
N·m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 18

Temperature -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃
1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85
49.5±0.31 49.5±0.31
45±0.31
34.5 ±0.5
45±0.31
34.5 ±0.5
86-1.4
0
86-1.4
0
0 0
0 0 72 -1.2 77.5 -1.2
36 -0.62 77.1 -1.2
2P 3P+N

(Electronic)
1. General
1.1 Function
against overload and short-circuits.
1.2 Selection
I∆n ＝30mA, additional protection in the case of direct
contact.
RCD Type
Type A
RCD Type A is ensured for sinusoidal, alternating residual
they be quickly or slowly increase.
Tripping curve
B curve (3 In-5 In) protection and control of the circuits
C curve (5 In-10 In) protection and control of the circuits

CE/CB
1.4 Add-on devices

XF9 auxiliary contacts
S9 shunt release
V9 under voltage release
OVT-1 over voltage release
2. Technical data
2.1 Curves
B Curve t(s) C Curve

t(s)
10000 10000
5000 5000
1h 1h
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100 100
50 50
20 20
10 10
5 5
2 2
1 1
0.5 0.5
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0.05 0.05
0.02 0.02
0.01 0.01
0.005 0.005
0.002 0.002
0.001 0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70100 200 I/In 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
RCBO Modular DIN Rail Products P- 056
2.2
Standard
IEC/EN 61009-1
A
A
Rated current In A 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32
Poles 2P

A 3,000
features
Rated impulse
kV 4

Pollution degree 2
features
Ambient temperature
℃ -25...+40

mm2 25
AWG 18-3
mm2 10
N·m 2
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 18
Connection Bottom electrical feeding

Temperature -10℃ 0℃ 10℃ 20℃ 30℃ 40℃ 50℃ 60℃
1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85
49.5±0.31
45±0.31
34.5 ±0.5
86-1.4
0
0 0
36 -0.62 77.1 -1.2
2P
P-057 Modular DIN Rail Products Accessories for MCB, RCBO
XF9 (Auxiliary Contact for

NB1, NBH8, NB1L, NBH8LE)
1. General
Indication of the position of the device's contacts.
To be mounted on the left side of the MCBs/RCBOs
thanks to the special pin.
2. Technical data
Standard IEC/EN 60947-5-1

UN (V) In (A)
AC415 50/60Hz 3
AC240 50/60Hz 6
Rated value
DC130 1
DC48 2
Electrical DC24 6
features Configurations 1N/O+1N/C
Rated impulse
V 4,000

Pollution degree 2

features Ambient temperature
℃ -5...+40

mm2 2.5
N·m 0.8
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 7
Accessories for MCB, RCBO Modular DIN Rail Products P-058
0
A
9 -0.36
82±0.19
36±0.5
45±0.31
49.5±0.31
0
77-1.2
XF9J (Alarm Auxiliary Contact for

NB1, NBH8, NB1L, NBH8LE)
1. General
1.1 Indication of the position of the device's contacts only
after the automatic release of the MCBs and RCBOs
due to an overload or a short-circuit.
1.2 To be mounted on the left side of the MCBs/RCBOs

2. Technical data

UN (V) In (A)
AC415 50/60Hz 3
AC240 50/60Hz 6
Rated value
DC130 1
DC48 2
Electrical DC24 6
features Configurations 1N/O+1N/C
Rated impulse
V 4,000

Pollution degree 2

℃ -5...+40

mm2 2.5
N·m 0.8
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 7
0
9 -0.36
A
45±0.31
82±0.19
36±0.5
49.5±0.31
0
77 -1.2
S9
(Shunt Release for NB1,
NBH8, NB1L, NBH8LE)
1. General
1.1 Remote opening of the device when a voltage is applied.

2. Technical data

AC230/400 50/60Hz
Rated voltage Us V AC/DC24
AC/DC48
Electrical Rated impulse

V 4,000
features withstand voltage (1.2/50)Uimp

Pollution degree 2

℃ -5...+40

mm2 2.5
N·m 0.8
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 7
0
18-0.18
A
45±0.31
36±0.5
82-1.4
0
49.5±0.31
0
77-1.2
V9
(Under Voltage Release
for NB1, NBH8, NB1L,NBH8LE)
1. General
1.1 Protection of the load in the event of a voltage drop
(between 70% and 35% of its rated value)
1.2 Positive safety (device's tripping when the voltage is

disconnected) emergency stop by means of a button.

2. Technical data

Rated voltage Us V AC230 50/60Hz
70-35%Ue, reliable operation
Optional voltage of release ＜35%Ue, prevent breaker from making
85~110%Ue, reliable operation
Electrical
features Rated impulse
V 4,000

Pollution degree 2

℃ -5...+40

mm2 2.5
N·m 0.8
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 7

0
18-0.43 A
45±0.31
36±0.5
82 -1.4
0
49.5±0.31
0
77-1.2
AX-1
(Auxiliary Contact
for DZ158, DZ158LE)
1. General
1.1 Indication of the position of the device's contacts.

2. Technical data

Un (V) In (A)
Rated voltage Us V AC415 50/60Hz 3
DC125 1
Configurations 1N/O+1N/C
Electrical
features Rated impulse
V 4,000

Pollution degree 2

℃ -5...+40

mm2 2.5
N·m 0.8
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 7
Model Order Code

AX-1 985483
0
9.3 -0.36
A
37.2±0.5
79±0.6
45±0.5
73.7±0.6
P-067 Modular DIN Rail Products Accessories for RCCB
AX-5
Auxiliary Contact
1. Scope of Application
AX-5 auxiliary contact is mainly used in the circuit of AC 50/60Hz,
rated heating current 6A, rated voltage AC 415V or DC 130V;
assembled with NL1, it is used for distant circuit breaker on/off
signal indication.
Conforming standard: GB/T 14048.5 , IEC 60947-5-1, accredited

through CE certification.
2. Model and Meanings
Design No
Auxiliary contact
3. Main Parameters and Technical Performance
3.1 Rated working current under different rated voltages
AC-12: AC415V/3A, AC240V/6A
DC-12: DC130V/1A, DC48V/2A, DC24V/6A
3.2 Life
The working life of auxiliary contact is not lower than 10,000 operations.
4. Main Parameters and Technical Performance
4.1Ambient temperature:-35 ºC ~+70 ºC Figure 1 wiring diagram
4.2 The atmosphere condition:≤95%
4.3 Pollution degree: II
4.4 Altitude: ≤2000m
5. Product assembly and installation

5.1 AX-5 auxiliary contact is a kind of accessories, and can only function after being assembled with the NL1. The assembly and disassembly
diagrams are shown below.
Figure 2
Plate
Accessories for RCCB Modular DIN Rail Products P-068
5.2 Remove left cover plate of circuit breaker
6. overall and mounting Dimensions (mm) A

Figure 3
7.2 Types and names of product, for example， AX-5 auxiliary contact.
7.2 Quantity on order，for example，50u nits.
7.3 Example for ordering: AX-5 auxiliary contact, 50units

OUVR-1 Self-recovery
Overvoltage and Undervoltage
Protector
1. Product Features
1.1 Preventing misoperation: Where sudden transient or
temporary overvoltage occurs in the line, the protector will
not generate misoperation; when the line suffers instable
voltage or sudden power recovery after sudden power
disruption due to loose contact or other fault, the protector
will not close the circuit;
1.2 Reliable operation: Protection is characterized by inverse time

lag operation with operating time≤1s;
1.3 Wide scope of voltage protection: 0~450V; in case of

maximum fault voltage upon line fault, the protector itself will
not be damaged;
1.4 Safer, impulse withstand voltage: 4kV (conforming to the

safety standard of category Ⅲ electrical apparatus);
1.5 Condition indication: The protector has the LED to indicate

the operating state, where green is normal voltage indication,
and red is overvoltage or undervoltage indication;
1.6 External modular design, guiderail DIN rail mounting.
OUVR-1self-recovery overvoltage and undervoltage protector is

a new type of intelligent protection apparatus. With the modular
standard design, in case of the overvoltage or undervoltage of
power supply line, the protector can quickly and safely break the
circuit under continuous high voltage surge, avoiding the
happening of an accident due to abnormal voltage entry into the
terminal apparatus; when voltage resumes normal value, the
protector will automatically close the circuit within the specified
time to ensure the terminal apparatus can operate normally in an
unattended way.
OUVR-1self-recovery overvoltage and undervoltage protector is

applied for the users or loads of AC 230/400V, 50Hz and rated
operating current 80A and below. It is mainly used in the
household distribution box or other distribution line requiring
protection.

bottom entry
OUVR- 1 80A 3P+N and upper exit
Mode of connection: upper

entry and lower bottom exit,
lower bottom entry and
upper exit
Number of poles: 1P+N, 3P+N
Rated current: 32A, 40A, 50A, 63A, 80A
Design No.
Self-recovery overvoltage and undervoltage protector
4. Normal Operating Conditions and Mounting Conditions

4.1 Ambient temperature: -20℃~+65℃
4.2 Altitude: ≤3000M

A
4.3 Atmospheric conditions: The atmospheric relative humidity is not more than 50% when the ambient air temperature is +40℃; high
relative humidity is permitted under low temperature. For example, it may be up to 90% at +20℃; special measures should be taken in
case of occasional condensation due to temperature variation;
4.4 Pollution degree: level 2;
4.5 Mounting category: category Ⅱ or Ⅲ.
4.6 Mounting form: It is installed using the TH35-7.5 section steel mounting rail. The inclination of installing surface and vertical plane
cannot exceed 5°.
5. Points for Attention

5.1 When the protector is energized for the first time, it needs a time delay of 30±10s before normal power supply of loads.
5.2 Protector conductor N is neutral line, L is live line; connection cannot be done in a wrong way;
5.3 Mode of connection is upper entry and bottom exit;
5.4 Before use, please tighten the clamping screws to prevent the damage of the product due to loose contact.
5.5 LED indication: green lamp normally on–normal
Red lamp normally on–overvoltage or undervolage
5.6 neutral line must be connected. When the neutral lineor any phase of live conductor is disconnected in the line, the protector will play
a role of protection.
5.7 After overvoltage or undervoltage of a 3P+N product, it can only resume normal operation when the voltage of three phases to
neutral line is within the range of recovery value.
6. Main Parameters and Technical Indices

6.1 Rated voltage: AC230V/400V, 50Hz
6.2 Rated operating current: 32A, 40A, 50A, 63A, 80A
6.3 Overvoltage operation cutoff value: 270V±5V
6.4 Overvoltage recovery value: 240~260V
6.5 Undervoltage operation cutoff value: 170±5V
6.6 Undervoltage recovery value: 185~195V
6.7 Time delay close time: 30±10s
6.8 Electric mechanical life: >50,000 operations
6.9 Power consumption: <2W
6.10 Connection capacity: <25mm2
6.11 Number of poles: 1P+N, 3P+N
6.12 Mode of connection: upper entry and lower bottom exit, lower bottom entry and upper exit
7. Installation and Connection

7.1 Before installation, it should first check whether the product mark conforms to the use conditions.
7.2 Connection should be done according to the product marked entry and exit (The load current cannot be higher than the product
rated current).
7.3 Pole N cannot be connected in a wrong way, and it must be reliably connected; otherwise, the protector cannot operate normally.
7.4 For the connecting conductor section area, refer to Table 1.
Table 1 Section Area and Rated Current of Connecting Conductor
Rated current A 32 40 50 63 80
Conductor section area mm2 6 10 10 16 25

8. Outline and Installing Dimensions
1P+N 3P+N
Neutral Live
line lin Neutral Live Live Live
line lin lin lin
AC220V
Input
77
83
35
45
83
35
45
Output
66 Load 66
36 Neutral Live Live Live

line lin lin lin
72
Upper Entry and Bottom Upper Entry and Bottom

Exit Connection Diagram Exit Connection Diagram
1P+N 3P+N
36
Live Live Live Neutral
lin lin lin line
Input
AC220V
Power
supply
77
83
35
45
83
35
45
protector
Power
Protection
66
66
Live Live Live Neutral
Neutral Live
lin lin lin line
line lin
72
Bottom Entry and Upper Bottom Entry and Upper

Exit Connection Diagram Exit Connection Diagram
When ordering the goods,the user must shall indicate the product name, type, number of poles, rated voltage, rated current and order
quantity:
Order example: To order OUVR-1 self-recovery overvoltage and undervoltage protector, 1P+N, upper entry and lower exit, rated voltage
230V, rated current 40A, quantity: 1000units:
Please indicate: OUVR-1 40A 1P+N upper entry and lower bottom exit 230V 1000units.
OUVR-2 Self-recovery
Overvoltage and Undervoltage A
Protector
1. Product Features
1.1 Preventing misoperation: Where sudden transient or
temporary overvoltage occurs in the line, the protector will
not generate misoperation; when the line suffers instable
voltage or sudden power recovery after sudden power
disruption due to loose contact or other fault, the protector
will not close the circuit;
1.2 Reliable operation: Protection is characterized by inverse time

lag operation with operating time≤1s;
1.3 Wide scope of voltage protection: 0~450V; in case of

maximum fault voltage, the protector itself will not be
damaged;
Safer, impulse withstand voltage: 4kV (conforming to the

safety standard of category Ⅲ electrical apparatus);
1.4 Condition indication: The protector has the LED to indicate

the operating state, where green is normal voltage indication,
and red is overvoltage or under voltage indication;
1.5 The product is easy for installation with cable from bottom
feed;
1.6 The product only has 27mm with small size;
1.7 External modular design, DIN rail mounting.
2.1 OUVR-2 self-recovery overvoltage and undervoltage

protector is a new type of intelligent protection apparatus.
With the modular standard design, in case of overvoltage or
undervoltage of power supply line, the protector can quickly
and safely break the circuit under continuous high voltage
surge, avoiding the happening of an accident due to
abnormal voltage entry into the terminal apparatus; when
voltage resumes normal value, the protector will
automatically close the circuit within the specified time to
ensure the terminal apparatus can operate normally in an
unattended way.
2.2 OUVR-2 self-recovery overvoltage and undervoltage

protector is applied for the users or loads of AC 230V, 50Hz
and rated operating current 80A and below. It is mainly used
in the household distribution box or other distribution line
requiring protection.

OUVR- 2 80A 1P+N
Number of poles: 1P+N, 3P+N
Rated current: 32A, 40A, 50A, 63A, 80A
Design No.
Self-recovery overvoltage and undervoltage protector
4. Normal Operating Conditions and Mounting Conditions
4.2 Altitude: ≤3000M
4.3 Atmospheric conditions: The atmospheric relative humidity is not more than 50% when the ambient air temperature is +40℃; high
relative humidity is permitted under low temperature. For example, it may be up to 90% at +20℃; special measures should be taken in
case of occasional condensation due to temperature variation;
4.4 Pollution degree: level 2;
4.5 Mounting category: category Ⅱ or Ⅲ.
4.6 Mounting form: It is installed using the TH35-7.5 section steel mounting rail. The inclination of installing surface and vertical plane
cannot exceed 5°.
5. Points for Attention

5.1 When the protector is energized for the first time, it needs a time delay of 30±10s before normal power supply of loads.
5.2 Protector conductor N is neutral line, L is live line; connection cannot be done in a wrong way;
5.3 Mode of connection is lower bottom entry and upper exit; bottom entry and l bottom exit; l bottom entry, upper/bottom exit;
5.4 Before use, please tighten the clamping screws to prevent the damage of the product due to loose contact.
5.5 LED indication: green lamp normally on–normal
Red lamp normally on–overvoltage or undervolage
5.6 Neutral line must be connected. When the Neutral line is disconnected, the protector will play a role of protection.
6. Main Parameters and Technical Indices
6.1 Rated voltage : 230V 50Hz
6.2 Rated operating current: 32A, 40A, 50A, 63A, 80A
6.3 Overvoltage operation cutoff value: 275V>>
6.4 Undervoltage operation cutoff value: 161V<<
6.5 Recovery value: 196V~253V
6.6 Time delay close time: 30s±10s
6.7 Electric mechanical life: >50,000 operations
6.8 Power consumption: <2W
6.9 Connection capacity: <25mm2

7. Installation and Connection

7.1 Before installation, it should first check whether the product mark conforms to the use conditions.
7.2 Connection should be done according to the product marked entry and exit (The load current cannot be higher than the product
A
rated current).
7.3 Pole N cannot be connected in a wrong way, and it must be reliably connected; otherwise, the protector cannot operate normally.
For the connecting conductor section area, refer to Table 1.
Table 1 Section Area and Rated Current of Connecting Conductor
Rated current A 32 40 50 63 80
Conductor section area mm2 6 10 10 16 25
8. Overall and mounting dimensions(mm)
Fig.1 Overall and mounting dimensions(mm)

42.5 27
34.5
81
45
65
72
65.5
9. Mode of connection
Fig.1 Mode of Connection
Entry Entry Exit Entry Exit

Neutral Live Neutral Live Live Neutral Neutral Live Live Neutral
line line line line line line line line line line
N AC230V L N AC230V L N L N AC230V L N L
Protection Protection Protection

Power Power Power
supply supply supply
N L N L
Neutral Live Neutral Live

line line line line
Exit Exit
Bottom Entry and Bottom Bottom Entry and Upper Bottom Entry/Upper and Bottom
Exit Connection Diagram Exit Connection Diagram Exit Connection Diagram
10.1 When ordering the goods,the user must shall indicate the product name, type, number of poles, rated voltage, rated current and
order quantity:
10.2Order example: To order OUVR-2 self-recovery overvoltage and undervoltage protector, 1P+N, rated voltage 230V, rated current 40A,
quantity: 1000units:
10.3Please indicate: OUVR-2 1P+N 230V 40A lower bottom entry and upper exit 1000units.
OUVT-1 Over/under voltage release

1. Major function
To be assembled with circuit breaker to achieve over/under voltage protection.
2. Parameters and performance

Rated operation voltage Ue: AC 240V, 50Hz;
Overvoltage operation setting value Uvo: 280V;
Rated insulation voltage Ui: 500V;
Tripping characteristics: the release is assembled with NXB-63 series circuit breaker. When
the applied voltage is reduced to 35%Ue or increased to 95% ~ 105% of the over-voltage
setting value, the release should drive the circuit breaker to act. When the applied
voltage is below 35%Ue or above 105% of the over-voltage setting value, the release
should be able to prevent the circuit breaker from closing. When the supply voltage is
above 85% Ue and below 95% of over-voltage setting value, the circuit breaker should be
able to close normally. The upper limit of the applied voltage should be less than 110%
over-voltage operation setting value.
Mechanical and electrical life: the mechanical and electrical life after the release is
assembled with the circuit breaker should be ≥ 4000 cycles, of which, 500 cycles for
over-voltage trip and under-voltage trip each, and 3000 cycles for the open/close of the
circuit breaker.
3. Assembly and installation of the product

OUVT-1 can be assembled with NB1-63 series circuit breaker, with the assembly
diagram shown below:
Figure 1
①Remove the left cover ②

of circuit breaker
After OUVT-1 is assembled with the circuit breaker, mount them on the TH3.5-7.5 steel
mounting rail.
4. Dimensions and installation sizes

Figure 2
L
0
18 -0.43
45±0.31
36±0.5
82±0.43
49.5±0.31
76-1.2
0
P-077 Modular DIN Rail Products Switch Disconnector
NH2 Switch Disconnector
1. General
1. 1 In the open position, It complies with the requirements of
the isolating function.
1.2 It is designed match DZ series MCBs/RCBOs.

on the last page.
014
2. Technical data

Rated current le A 32, 63, 100,125
Rated impulse
V 4,000
Electrical Rated short-time withstand current lcw 12le, 1s

features Rated making and breaking capacity 3le, 1.05Ue, cosΦ=0.65
Rated short circuit making capacity 20le, t=0.1s
Dielectric test voltage at ind. Freq. for 5s kV 1.89
Pollution degree 2
Uilization category AC-22A
Mechanical
features
Ambient temperature (with daily average≤35℃) ℃ -5...+40
mm2 50
AWG 18-2
mm2 25
Installation Terminal size top/bottom for busbar
AWG 18-3
N·m 2.5
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 22
Rated current Screw size Tightening torque Copper cross-sectional area

32A, 63A M5 2.0 N.m 32A: 6mm2; 63A: 16 mm2
100A, 125A M7 3.5N.m 100A: 35mm2; 125A: 50 mm2
Switch Disconnector Modular DIN Rail Products P-078
A
0
1P 18 -0.43
45±0.31
34.5±0.5
79 -1.2
0
0 65.5±0.37
36 -0.62
2P H Poles 1P 2P~4P
0
54 -1.2
3P H (mm) 74
0
77
0
-1.2 -1.2
0
72 -1.2
4P
P-079 Modular DIN Rail Products Switch Disconnector
1. General
1.1 In the open position, It complies with the
requirements of the isolating function.
1.2 It is designed match NB series MCBs/RCBOs.

on the last page.
2. Technical data

Rated current le A 32, 40, 63, 80, 100, 125
Rated impulse
V 4,000
Electrical Rated short-time withstand current lcw 12le, 1s

features Rated making and breaking capacity 3le, 1.05Ue, cosΦ=0.65
Rated short circuit making capacity 20le, t=0.1s
Dielectric test voltage at ind. Freq. for 5s kV 1.89
Pollution degree 2
Uilization category AC-22A
Mechanical
features
Ambient temperature (with daily average≤35℃) ℃ -5...+40
Terminal connection type Cable/Pin-type busbar/U-type busbar
mm2 50
AWG 18-1/0
mm2 35
Installation Terminal size top/bottom for busbar
AWG 18-2
N·m 2.5
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 22
Switch Disconnector Modular DIN Rail Products P-080
34.5±0.50
45±0.31
86-1.4
0
0
18-0.43 49.5±0.31
0
36 -0.62 H
0
54 -1.2
0
72 -1.2
Number
of poles 1P 2P~4P
0 0
H (mm) 74 -1.2 77 -1.2
P-081 Modular DIN Rail Products Change-over Switch
NZK1-32 Change-over Switch
1. General
1.1 Certificates: KEMA;
1.2 Electric ratings: AC 50/60Hz;

rated voltage up to 250V, rated current 32A;
1.3 Standard: IEC60669-1
2.1 Temperature:-5℃~+40℃;
the average value shall not exceed +35℃
2.2 Altitude: ≤2000m;
2.3 Air conditions: :

At mounting site, relative humidity not exceed 50%
at the max temperature of +40℃, higher relative
humidity is allowable under lower temperature.
For example, RH could be 90% at +20℃, special
measures should be taken to occurrence of dews.
2.4 Mounting conditions:

Inclination between the mounting plane and the
vertical plane should not exceed ±5°
2.5 Assemble with TH35-7.5 steel mounting rail
3. Type designation
NZK1-32
Rated current of frame size (A)
Design SN (1: Three-way switch)
Change-over Switch
Corporate Characteristic Code
4. Technicall data
4.1 Poles: 1P, 2P
4.2 Rated frequency: 50Hz/60Hz;
4.3 Rated operating current Ie: 32A;
4.4 Rated voltage Ue: 250V;
4.5 Rated making and breaking capacity:

1.1Ue; 1.25Ie; COSΦ=0.3±0.05; 200 times
4.6 Operational performance:

Ue0+5%; Ie; COSΦ=0.6±0.05; 10000 times
Change-over Switch Modular DIN Rail Products P-082
5. Circuit diagram
2 4
2 4 6 8
A
1
1 5
NZK1-32/1 NZK1-32/2
Mounting Rail Dimensions

45±0.31
85.3 -1.4
34.5±0.5
0
35 L
7.5
0 49.5±0.31
18-0.43
1P
65.5±0.37 27
0
36 -0.62
2P 0
78-1.2
7. Installation and usage
7.1 Prior to installation, check whether the switch symbol complies with the operating conditions.
7.2 As shown, snap into the mounting rail.

Contact 1-2 is closed when the handle is at position I, and contact 1-2, 1-4 are opened when the handle is at position "O", contact 1-4
is closed when the handle is at position Ⅱ.
7.3 Before turning the power ON,

operate the switch several times to ensure that it is flexible and reliable, without any delay.
7.4 The switch must be protected against rain during usage, storage and transportation, etc.
8.1 Indicate the following order information:

a) Product model and name, e.g. Change-over switch NZK1-32
b) Number of poles, e.g. 2P
c) Quantity of order, e.g. 100 units
8.2 Example:
e.g. Change-over switch NZK1-32/2 100 units
P-083 Modular DIN Rail Products Change-over Switch
NZK2-32 Change-over Switch
1. General
1.1 Certificates: KEMA;
1.2 Electric ratings: AC 50/60Hz;

rated voltage up to 250V, rated current 32A;
1.3 Standard: IEC60669-1
2.1 Temperature:-5℃~+40℃;
the average value shall not exceed +35℃
2.3 Air conditions: :

At mounting site, relative humidity not exceed 50%
at the max temperature of +40℃, higher relative
humidity is allowable under lower temperature.
For example, RH could be 90% at +20℃, special
measures should be taken to occurrence of dews.

Inclination between the mounting plane and the
vertical plane should not exceed ±5°
2.5 Assemble with TH35-7.5 steel mounting rail
3. Type designation
NZK2-32
Rated current of frame size (A)
Design SN (2: Two-way switch)
Change-over Switch
Corporate Characteristic Code
4. Technicall data
4.1 Poles: 1P, 2P
4.2 Rated frequency: 50Hz/60Hz;
4.3 Rated operating current Ie: 32A;
4.4 Rated voltage Ue: 250V;
4.5 Rated making and breaking capacity:

1.1Ue; 1.25Ie; COSΦ=0.3±0.05; 200 times
4.6 Operational performance:

Ue0+5%; Ie; COSΦ=0.6±0.05; 10000 times
Change-over Switch Modular DIN Rail Products P-084
5. Circuit diagram
A
2 4
2 4 6 8
1
1 5
NZK2-32/1 NZK2-32/2
Mounting Rail Dimensions

45±0.31
34.5±0.5
85.3-1.4
0
35 L
7.5
0 49.5±0.31
18-0.43
1P
65.5±0.37 27
0
36 -0.62
2P 78 -1.2
0
7. Installation and usage
7.1 Prior to installation, check whether the switch symbol complies with the operating conditions.
7.2 As shown, snap into the mounting rail.

Contact 1-2 is closed when the handle is at position I, and contact 1-4 is opened, contact 1-4 is closed when the handle is at position
Ⅱ, and contact 1-2 is opened.
7.3 Before turning the power ON, operate the switch several times to ensure that it is flexible and reliable, without any delay.
7.4 The switch must be protected against rain during usage, storage and transportation, etc.
8.1 Indicate the following order information:

a) Product model and name, e.g. Change-over switch NZK2-32
b) Number of poles, e.g. 2P
c) Quantity of order, e.g. 100 units
8.2 Example:
e.g. Change-over switch NZK2-32/2 100 units
P-085 Modular DIN Rail Products Surge Arrester
NU6-Ⅱ
Low-voltage Surge Arrester
1. General
1.1 Certificates: international certificates are under proceeding;
1.2 Number of poles: 1, 2,3, 4;
1.3 Electric ratings: 230/400V, AC50Hz;
1.4 Application: Protect electric system and on-loading electrical

apparatus from thunder and instantaneous over-voltage;
1.5 Standard: IEC 61643-1, EN 61643-11
2. Technical data
Max. continuous Level of Maximum discharge Nominal discharge Mounting category

Model operational protection current Imax current In of protected
voltage Uc (V~) Up (kV) (8/20μs) (kA) (8/20μs) (kA) apparatus
385 1.8 Ⅱ, Ⅲ
NU6-Ⅱ 40 15
460 2.0 Ⅱ, Ⅲ
385 1.8 Ⅱ, Ⅲ
NU6-Ⅱ 60 25
460 2.0 Ⅱ, Ⅲ
385 1.8 Ⅱ, Ⅲ
NU6-Ⅱ 100 40
460 2.0 Ⅲ
Auxiliary Configurations Rated voltage Un(V) Rated current In(A)

contact INO+INC AC125 3
3. How to select surge protectors
a. The voltage should be ≤Uc;

b. Up＜maximum impulse withstands;
c. Different protectors should be selected
according to various grounding system and protection mode.
Max. continuous Applicable

Protection Number of
Model operational grounding Circuits
mode poles
voltage Uc (V~) system
TN-S L-PE, N-PE 1 phase, 3 phase 5 wire 1,2,3,4

385 TN-C L-PE 1 phase, 3 phase 4 wire 1,2,3
TT L-PE, N-PE 1 phase, 3 phase 4 wire 1,2,3,4
NU6-Ⅱ TN-S L-PE, N-PE 1 phase, 3 phase 5 wire 1,2,3,4
TN-C L-PE 1 phase, 3 phase 4 wire 1,2,3
460
IT L-PE 1 phase, 3 phase 3 /4 wire 1,2,3,4
TT L-PE, N-PE 1 phase, 3 phase 4 wire 1,2,3,4
Surge Arrester Modular DIN Rail Products P-086
4. Functions 3
4.1 The product is composed of two independent components:

removable protective module 4 and base 2;
4
A
4.2 When the product is damaged, the part 3 will indicate;
t
Pull ou
Plug in
please replace the removable protective module 4 at
R
once and there is no need to cutoff the circuits;
4.3 The part 1 is for maximum continuous operational

voltage indication as well as avoiding replacement with
2
wrong module.

NU6-Ⅱ/F (40, 60kA) with remote signal output contact
Remote signal output contact

45±0.31
101.5-1.4
34.5±0.5
0
0
18-0.43
5.5±0.1 1P
0
36 -0.02
49.5±0.31 2P 0
65.5±0.37 54 -1.2
3P
0
72 -1.2
4P
NU6-Ⅱ (40, 60kA) without remote signal output contact

34.5±0.5
45±0.31
-1.4
0
93.5
0
18-0.43
1P
5.5±0.1 0
36 -0.02
49.5±0.31 2P 0
54 -1.2
65.5±0.37 3P
0
72 -1.2
4P
NU6-Ⅱ/F (100kA) with remote signal output contact

45±0.31
101.5-1.4
34.5±0.5
0
0
36-0.62
1P
5.5±0.1 0
72 -1.2
49.5±0.31 2P 0
108 -1.4
65.5±0.37 3P
0
144 -1.6
-
4P
NU6-Ⅱ (100kA) without remote signal output contact
45±0.31
-1.4
34.5±0.5
0
93.5
0
36-0.62
1P
0
5.5±0.1 72 -1.2
2P 0
49.5±0.31 108 -1.4
3P
65.5±0.37 0
144 -1.6
-
4P
NU6-ⅡG
1. General
1.2 Number of pole: 1, 2, 3, 4, 1P+N, 3P+N;
1.3 Electric ratings: 230/400V, AC50/60Hz;

apparatus from thunder and instantaneous over-voltage;
1.5 Standard: IEC/EN 61643-11
2. Technical data
Max. continuous operational Level of protection Maximum discharge curr ent Imax Nominal discharge curr ent In
Model
voltage Uc (V~) Up (kV) (8/20 μs) (kA) (8/20 μs) (kA)
275 1.5
320 1.6
40 20
385 1.8
440 2.0
NU6-Ⅱ G(/F) 255(NPE) 1.5
275 1.6
320 1.8 65 30
385 2.0
440 2.2
Auxiliar y Configurations Rated voltage Un(V) Rated current In(A)

contact 1NO+1NC AC250 0.5
3. How to select sur ge protect ors

a. The voltage should be ≤Uc;
b. Up＜maximum impulse withstands;
c. Different protectors should be selected
according to various grounding system and protection mode.
Max. continuous Applicable

Protection Number o f
Model operational grounding Circuits
mode poles
voltage Uc (V~) system
TN-S L-PE,L-N,N-PE 1 phase,3 phase 5 wire 1,2,4, 1P+N,3P+N

275 TN-C L-PEN 1 phase,3 phase 4 wire 1,3
TT L-N,N-PE 1 phase,3 phase 4 wire 1P+N,3P+N
TT L-N,N-PE 1 phase,3 phase 4 wire 1P+N,3P+N
NU6-Ⅱ G(/F) TN-S L-PE,L-N,N-PE 1 phase,3 phase 5 wire 1,2,4, 1P+N,3P+N
TT L-PE, L-N,N-PE 1 phase,3 phase 4 wire 1,2,4, 1P+N,3P+N
TN-C L-PEN 1 phase,3 phase 4 wire 1,3
440
TT L-PE,L-N,N-PE 1 phase,3 phase 4 wire 1,2,4, 1P+N,3P+N
IT L-PE 1 phase,3 phase 3wire 1,3
Surge Arr ester Modular DIN Rail Products P-088
4. Functions
3
4.1 The product is composed of two independent components:

removable protective module 4 and base 2;
4
A
please replace the removable protective module 4 at
once and there is no need to cutoff the circuits;
4.3 The part 1 is for maximum continuous operational

voltage indication as well as avoiding replacement with
2
wrong module.

NU6-ⅡG/F (40, 65kA) with remote control port
Auxiliary contact
99 -1.4
34.5±0.5
45±0.3
0
18 -0.6
5.5±0.1 1P
0
50±0.3 36 -1.2
1P+N,2P
0
67.7±0.3 54 -2.4
3P
0
72 -2.4
3P+N,4P
NU6-ⅡG (40, 65kA) without remote control port

34.5±0.5
45±0.3
89.5 -1.4
0
5.5±0.1 0
18 -0.6
50±0.31 1P
0
36 -1.2
67.7±0.3 1P+N,2P
0
54 -2.4
3P
0
72 -2.4
3P+N,4P
NU6-Ⅲ
1. General
1.2 Electric ratings: Single phase power distribution and control

system of AC50Hz, 230V;
1.3 Short circuit current: up to 5kA (8/20μs);

apparatus from lightening and instantaneous over-voltage;
1.5 Standard：IEC61643-1, EN61643-11
2. Technical data
Uoc (1.2/50μs) Short circuit current Max. continuous Level of

Model
(kV) Isc (8/20us)(KA) operational voltage Uc (V~) protection Up (kV)
275 1.5
NU6-Ⅲ 10 5 320 1.5
385 1.5
Auxiliary Configurations Rated voltage Un(V) Rated current In(A)

contact INO+INC AC125 3
3. Type and circuit diagram
Model Type Circuit diagram
L PE
L PE
NU6-Ⅲ
Compound Type U GDT
1P+N
N
N
NU6-Ⅲ
L N
L N
U U
2P NU6-Ⅲ Compound Type

GDT GDT
PE
PE
Surge Arrester Modular DIN Rail Products P-090
4. Design type and protective mode of different surge protectors
Model Uoc (1.2/50μs) (kV) Uc (V~) Corresponding design type and protection mode
Compound type (with gasdischarge tube + voltage

A
275
sensitive resistance) L-N/N-PE
NU6-Ⅲ 10
320 Compound type (with gas discharge tube + voltage
385 sensitive resistance) L-PE/N-PE
5. Functions
5.1 The product is composed of two independent components: 3

removable protective module 4 and base 2; 4

please replace the removable protective module 4 at once
Plug in
and there is no need to cutoff the circuits;
t
Pull ou
5.3 The part 1 is for maximum continuous operational voltage
indication as well as avoiding replacement with wrong
module. 2

NU6-Ⅲ/F with remote signal output contact

-1.4
0
34.5±0.5
45±0.31
101.5
5.5±0.1
49.5±0.31 0
18 -0.43
65.5±0.37
NU6-Ⅲ without remote signal output contact

34.5±0.5
45±0.31
93 -1.4
0
35
7.5
5.5±0.1
27
49.5±0.31 0
18 -0.43
65.5±0.37
NU6-Ⅱ series surge arrestor NU6-Ⅲ series surge arrestor
The boundary between lightning The boundary between lightning

protection areas of LPZ1 & LPZ2 protection areas of LPZ2 & LPZ3
Protection category: C Protection category: D

Over-voltage mounting category: Ⅱ Over-voltage mounting category: Ⅰ
Rated impulse withstand voltage: 2500V Rated impulse withstand voltage: 1500V
Parameters of discharge: Imax and In Parameters of discharge: Uoc and Isc
Applicable to branch power distribution

Applicable to terminal of power distribution
switchgear
*Note: Fuse/Circuit breaker are strongly recommended to be installed upstream the surge protector.
7. Recommended circuit breaker selection
Surge protector Maximum discharge current (kA) Fuse or circuit breaker (upstream)
40 gL/gG 125A
NU6-Ⅱ 60 gL/gG 160A
100 gL/gG 250A
NU6-Ⅲ ALL NB1 C10

Pushbutton & Indicator Modular DIN Rail Products P-092
2.1 Ambient temperature: -5℃~+40℃,

average temperature in 24 hours not exceed +35℃;
A
2.2 Altitude: ≤ 2000m;
2.3 Air conditions:

At mounting site, relative humidity
not exceed 50% at the max temperature of +40℃,
higher relative humidity is allowable under lower
temperature. For example, RH could be 90% at +20℃.
Special measures should be taken to occurrence of dews;
2.4 Mounting category: Ⅱ, Ⅲ;
2.5 Pollution grade: Ⅱ;
2.6 Mounting mode: TH35-7.5 standard rail,

inclination between mounting and vertical plane
not exceed 5°.
3. Technical data
3.1 Life (operations):
a. Electric life : 100,000
NP9 Pushbutton b. Mechanical life : 250,000
3.2 Assembly of contact:

1. General 1NO,2NO,3NO,4NO,1NO+1NC,1NO+2NC,2NO+1NC,2NO+2
1.1 Electric ratings: 230V, AC50/60Hz; NC,3NO+1NC, (Not available for illuminated type)
1.2 Utilization category: AC-14; 3.3 Technical data of signal lamp

a. Rated operational voltage: AC/DC6.3V, AC/DC12V,
1.3 Rated conventional heating current lth: 16A;
AC/DC24V, AC/DC110V, AC/DC230V
1.4 Rated operational current Ie: 6A; b. Rated operational current: ≤20mA
1.5 Rated insulation voltage Ui: 500V; 3.4 Life: LED≥30000h
1.6 Protection grade: IP20;
1.7 Standard: IEC/EN 60947-5-1;
0
71 -1.20
0 66.7±0.37
18 -0.43
49.5±0.31
34.5±0.50
45±0.31
86 -1.40
0
P-093 Modular DIN Rail Products Pushbutton & Indicator
ND9 Indicator Light
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: 230V, AC50/60Hz;
1.2 Rated insulation voltage Ui: 500V;
1.3 Protection grade: IP20
1.4 Rated operational current: ≤20mA
1.5 Life: LED≥30000h;
1.6 Standard: IEC/EN 60947-5-1
2. Operating Conditions

average temperature in 24 hours not exceed +35℃;
2.3 Air conditions:

At mounting site, relative humidity not exceed 50% at the
max temperature of +40℃, higher relative humidity is
allowable under lower temperature. For example,
RH could be 90% at +20℃. Special measures should be
taken to occurrence of dews;
2.4 Mounting category: Ⅱ, Ⅲ;
2.5 Pollution grade: Ⅱ;
2.6 Mounting mode: TH35-7.5 standard rail, inclination

between mounting and vertical plane not exceed 5°
3. Wirng
Cross section area of the conductor is 1.0mm2, and tightening
torque should be 0.8N•m
0
71 -1.20
0 66.2±0.37
18 -0.43
49.5±0.31
34.5±0.50
45±0.31
86 -1.40
0
Consumer Unit Modular DIN Rail Products P-094
NX8 Consumer Unit (Body)
1. General
A
1.1 Electric ratings: up to 100A, 230V, AC50/60Hz;
1.2 No. Of mounted units: 5, 6, 8, 12, 15, 20, 24;
1.3 On-load current (A): 100/1-phase;
1.4 Protection degree: IP30;
1.5 Standard: IEC61439-3(EN60670-24)
2. Features
2.1 The window of the consumer unit is designed with novel
appearance and convenient operation. Open and close
operation is flexible, and self-locking at the open status;
2.2 Inside the product, there is a neon indicator light to indicate

status of power supply; having a elegant appearance and
clear indication;
2.3 The interiorly mounted MCBs are all in compliance with

relative IEC standards, 9mm modularized electric
components are applicable, as well;
2.4 On request, various circuit combinations can be assembled;

and the mounting capacity of the product units can be taken
to 5~24 units;
2.5 Convenient and reliable operation, having exposed handle,

and all live parts to be mounted inside the wall box ;
2.6 The consumer unit is designed with internal terminal blocks

for connection of neutral line and protective grounding wire.
2.7 The enclosure of the unit is made of plastic material with

metal structure.
P-095 Modular DIN Rail Products Consumer Unit
A
E
4-φ5
H
B
24
Model A B C D E F H Remark
0
NX8-5 184±1.45 200±1.45 164±1.25 180±1.45 114±1.1 130±1.25 105 -2.2 Single-row
0
NX8-5J 184±1.45 200±1.45 164±1.25 180±1.45 114±1.1 130±1.25 105 -2.2 Single-row
0
NX8-6J 202±1.45 200±1.45 182±1.25 180±1.45 132±1.1 130±1.25 105 -2.2 Single-row
0
NX8-8 238±1.45 200±1.45 218±1.45 180±1.45 168±1.25 130±1.25 105 -2.2 Single-row
0
NX8-8J 238±1.45 200±1.45 218±1.45 180±1.45 168±1.25 130±1.25 105 -2.2 Single-row
0
NX8-12 310±1.6 200±1.45 290±1.6 180±1.45 240±1.45 130±1.25 105 -2.2 Single-row
0
NX8-12J 310±1.6 200±1.45 290±1.6 180±1.45 240±1.45 130±1.25 105 -2.2 Single-row
0
NX8-15 364±1.8 200±1.45 344±1.8 180±1.45 294±1.6 130±1.25 105 -2.2 Single-row
0
NX8-15J 364±1.8 200±1.45 344±1.8 180±1.45 294±1.6 130±1.25 105 -2.2 Single-row
0
NX8-20 274±1.6 350±1.8 254±1.6 330±1.8 204±1.45 280±1.6 105 -2.2 Double-rows
0
NX8-20J 274±1.6 350±1.8 254±1.6 330±1.8 204±1.45 280±1.6 105 -2.2 Double-rows
0
NX8-24 310±1.6 350±1.8 290±1.6 330±1.8 240±1.45 280±1.6 105 -2.2 Double-rows
0
NX8-24J 310±1.6 350±1.8 290±1.6 330±1.8 240±1.45 280±1.6 105 -2.2 Double-rows
Consumer Unit Modular DIN Rail Products P-096
NX2 Consumer Unit (Body)

1. General
A
1.2 No. Of mounted units: 8, 10, 14, 18, 28, 36;
1.3 On-load current (A): 100/1-phase;
1.4 Protection degree: IP30(after installation);
1.5 Standard: IEC61439-3(EN60670-24)
2. Features
2.1 The product has appearance patent.
In addition to the standard mounting rail, a front panel for
fixing is supplied.
The shape fixing bolts are easy for fastening and loosening.
2.2 The interiorly mounted MCBs are in compliance with relative

IEC standards, 9mm modularized electric components are
available, as well.
2.3 On request, various circuits combinations can be assembled;

and the mounting capacity of the product units can be taken
to 8~36 units.

and all live parts to be mounted inside the wall box.

2.6 The enclosure of the unit is made of plastic material.
C
C
520±3
188±2.5
250±2.5
188±2.5
A 137±2.5
41±1.5
A 137±2.5
41±1.5
Model A B C Remark
NX2-8 194±2.5 218±2.5 144±2.5
NX2-10 230±2.5 254±2.5 180±2.5
Single-row
NX2-14 302±2.5 326±2.5 252±2.5
NX2-18 374±2.5 398±2.5 324±2.5
NX2-28 302±2.5 326±2.5 252±2.5
Double-rows
NX2-36 374±2.5 398±2.5 324±2.5
P-097 Modular DIN Rail Products Consumer Unit
NXW1 Consumer Unit

(NXW1 Consumer Unit Body )
for Outdoor Application
1. General
1.2 No. of mounted units: 3, 5;
1.3 On-load current A: 63;
1.4 Protection degree: IP65;
1.5 Standard: IEC61439-3(EN60670-24)
2. Features
2.1 Special designed with excellent enclosure capability;
with high protection degree up to IP65, applicable for
outdoor mounting.
2.2 The interiorly mounted MCBs are all in compliance with

relative IEC standards, 9mm modularized electric
components are applicable, as well;
2.3 On request, various circuit combinations can be assembled;

and the mounting capacity of the product units can be
taken to 3~ 5units;

and all live parts to be mounted inside the wall box;

2.6 The enclosure of the unit is made of plastic material.
184±2.5
108±1.5
B
A
112.6±1.5
Model A B
NXW1-3 66.8±1.5 100±1.5
NXW1-5 102.8±1.5 136±2.5
Wall Mounting Enclosure Modular DIN Rail Products P-098
NXW5 Wall Mounting Enclosure

A
115°
⑧ ⑥
① ---- Door lock: The operated lock for preventing unwanted operation.
② ---- Panel: Zinc-plated steel panel
③ ---- Earthing studs: Earthing connection between body and door.
④ ---- Wall fixing brackets: For easy surface installation.
⑤ ---- Hinges: Hinged connection provide better operating.
⑥ ---- Flanged panel: With sealing gasket that increased cable entry capacity.
⑦ ---- Sealing rubber gasket: Make high protection degree.
⑧ ---- Studs: For additional panel.
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
MCCB
NM8, NM8S NM1

Moulded Case Moulded Case
Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
NM8N
Moulded Case
Circuit Breakers
Page P-093
P-001 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers NM8, NM8S NM8, NM8S Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-002 NM8, NM8S Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-003 NM8, NM8S Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-004
3. Type designation 4. Product overview

NM8 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
Application code
1 Body
Blank: for power distribution;
M: for motor protection

2 Thermo magnetic release
B
Number of poles: 1: 1-pole 2: 2-pole
3: 3-pole 4: 4-pole
3 Electronic release 14
With current release components,
N-pole makes and breaks with other
4 Plug-in base 15
three poles, N-pole first makes then
breaks, N-pole operating value is 1.0In
5 Rotary manual operating handle
of other three poles 10
Rated current : 6 Motor driven operating mechanism

125: 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125
9
250: 100, 125, 160,180, 200, 225, 250 4
7 Under-voltage release
400: 250, 315, 350, 400
630: 250, 315, 350, 400, 500, 630 (for
8
thermo-magnetic breaker, the rated operational 8 Shunt release
16
current be up to 500A)
7
800: 630, 700, 800 9 Alarm contact
NM8, NM8S 1250:630, 700, 800, 1000, 1250
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker 1600: 1000,1250,1600 (Only electronic products)

10 Auxiliary contact
18
Breaking capacity code:
1. General C: Economy type; (current limiting technology utilised) 11 Front connection plate 13
S: Standard type; (current limiting technology utilised)
1.1 Certificates: CE, DNV, KEMA, UKrSEPRO, EAC, RCC; H: Higher type; (current limiting technology utilised)
12 Rear connection plate
1.2 Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, AC220V~690V R: Current limiting type (current limiting technology 3
16A~1600A; utilised)
1.3 Standard: IEC/EN 60947-2. 13 Locking system(padlock)
Frame size rated current: 125, 250, 400,
12
630, 800, 1250, 1600
2. Operating conditions 14 Short terminal cover
Release type code:
2.1 Temperature: -5℃~+40℃; the average value within 24h shall 1
Blank: thermal-magnetic release; 15 Extended terminal cover
not exceed +35℃; for the circuit breaker with thermo- 2
S: Electronic release;
magnetic release, +40℃ is set to be the standard
temperature for ratings. Special utilization,please refer to Design sequence number 16 DIN rail adaptor 11
coefficients indicated on page 21 for temperature compensation
MCCB
correction; 17 Cage clamp terminal 5
Company code
18 Mechanical interlock 17
2.3 Pollution grade: Grade 3;
2.4 IP grade: IP40

17
2.5 Air conditions:
max temperature of +40℃, higher relative humidity is 17
allowable under lower temperature.
For example, RH could be 90% at +20℃, special measures 17
should be taken to occurrence of dews.
14
6
5 15
DNV
P-005 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers NM8, NM8S NM8, NM8S Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-006 NM8, NM8S Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-007 NM8, NM8S Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-008
5. Technical data
5. 1 Parameters
NM8 circuit breaker Thermal-magnetic type NM8-125 NM8-250 NM8-400 NM8-630 NM8-800 NM8-1250 NM8S circuit breaker Electronic type NM8S-125 NM8S-250 NM8S-400 NM8S-630① NM8S-800 NM8S-1250 NM8S-1600
4 Frames Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4 3 Frames Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3
Electric characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN60947-2 Electric characteristics as per IEC 60947-2 and EN60947-2
B
Rated current(A) In 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125 100, 125, 160, 180, 200, 225, 250 250, 315, 350, 400 250, 315, 350, 400, 500 630, 700, 800 630, 700, 800, 1000, 1250 Rated current(A) In 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125 100, 125, 160, 180, 200, 225, 250 250, 315, 350, 400 250, 315, 350, 400, 500, 630 630, 700, 800 630, 700, 800, 1000, 1250 1000, 1250, 1600
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui 800 800 800 800 800 800 Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui 800 800 800 800 800 800
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp 8 8 8 8 8 8 Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp 8 8 8 8 8 8
AC 50/60Hz 690 690 690 690 690 690 AC 50/60Hz 690 690 690 690 690 415
Rated operational voltage (V) Ue Rated operational voltage (V) Ue
DC - - - - - - DC - - - - - -
Number of poles ① Number of poles
1 2 3 4 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
H H
L L
W W
Breaking capacity code - H C S H R C S H H C S H R C S H C S H R C S H C S H R C S H S H R S H S H R S H Breaking capacity code S H S H S H R S H S H R S H S H R S H S H R S H S H R S H

_ _ _ _ _
Rated ultimate short-circuit AC 380V/400V/415V - 100 35 50 100 150 35 50 100 100 35 50 100 150 35 50 100 50 70 100 150 50 70 100 50 70 100 150 50 70 100 50 70 50 70 50 70 50 70 Rated ultimate short-circuit AC 380V/400V/415V 70 100 70 100 70 100 150 70 100 70 100 150 70 100 50 70 50 70 50 70 50 70 50 70 50 70
breaking capacity (kA RMS) Icu _ _ breaking capacity (kA RMS) Icu _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
AC 660V/690V - 8 6 8 8 8 6 8 8 10 6 10 10 10 6 10 10 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 AC 660V/690V 10 10 10 10 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
② ② ② ②
Rated service breaking capacity Ics= (%Icu) 100 100 100 100 50 50 Rated service breaking capacity Ics= (%Icu) 100 100 100 50 50 50
Suitability for isolation Suitability for isolation
Utilization category A A A A A A Utilization category A A A A A A
Safety of insulation Safety of insulation
Mechanical 20,000 20,000 15,000 15,000 10,000 10,000 Mechanical 20,000 15,000 15,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
Life(CO recycle) Life(CO recycle)
Electrical 10,000 10,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 6,000 Electrical 20,000 6,000 4,000 4,000 4,000 4,000
Protection Thermo-magnetic Thermo-magnetic Thermo-magnetic Thermo-magnetic Thermo-magnetic Thermo-magnetic Protection Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic Electronic
Release units Release units
Over-load protection Over-load protection
Short-circuit protection Short-circuit protection
Added on residual _ _ _ _ _ _ Added on residual _ _ _ _ _ _

Residual current protection Residual current protection
current protection module current protection module
Mounting and connection Mounting and connection
Front connection Front connection
Fixed Rear connection _ _ Fixed _ _ _
Rear connection
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
DIN rail Front connection DIN rail Front connection
_ _ _ _ _
Front connection Front connection
Plug-in _ _ Plug-in _ _ _
Rear connection Rear connection
_ _
Handle Handle
Manual Manual
Direct or extended rotary handle Direct or extended rotary handle
Motor-driven mechanism Motor-driven mechanism

Manual, remote operated automatic source changeover systems Manual, remote operated automatic source changeover systems
Shunt and under-voltage release Shunt and under-voltage release
Auxiliary and alarm contact Auxiliary and alarm contact
Pad locking system _ _ Pad locking system _ _ _
Mounting and connection accessories Mounting and connection accessories

Connection terminal Connection terminal
_ _ _
Front connection plate Front connection plate
_ _ _ _ _
Rear connection plate Rear connection plate
DIN rail adaptor _ _ _ _ DIN rail adaptor _ _ _ _ _
Plug-in type connection accessories _ _ Plug-in type connection accessories _ _ _
Terminal covers Terminal covers

Interphase barrier Interphase barrier
Dimension and weight Dimension and weight
Dimension(mm)W×H×L Fixed type-front connection 62×140×79 90×140×79 120×140×79 70×157×88 105×157×88 140×157×88 140×255×113 185×255×113 140×255×113 185×255×113 210×370×196 280×370×196 210×370×196 280×370×196 Dimension(mm)W×L×H Fixed type-front connection 105×157×88 140×157×88 140×255×113 185×255×113 140×255×113 185×255×113 210×370×196 280×370×196 210×370×196 280×370×196 210×370×201 280×370×201
Weight(kg) Fixed type-front connection 0.85 1.2 1.6 1.5 2.1 2.8 7.5 10 7.5 10 17.5 23 17.5 23 Weight(kg) Fixed type-front connection 2.1 2.8 8 11 8 11 17.5 23 17.5 23 23 30
Note: Note: ① The rated current of NM8S-630 plug-in type up to 570A.

① For 1 pole product, Ics=100%Icu=45kA @AC220V/ 240V
② When Ue is ≥660V, Ics=50% Icu.
P-009 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers NM8, NM8S
5.2 The following table shows which connection diagram to use according to the number of poles to be connected in series to obtain the
required breaking capacity, in relation to the type of distribution network:
protection Earth-insulated Network with one Network with a

Rated voltage V Isolation
function network polarity(1) earthed middle point earthed
≤250 ■ ■ A A A
■ - - - -
≤500 ■ ■ A B A
■ - - C -
Note:
a. The risk of double earth fault is nil, therefore the fault current only involves a part of the interruption poles.
b. For connection with four poles in series, circuit-breakers with neutral at 100% of the phase settings must be used.
6. Release
6.1 Thermo-magnetic release
6.1.1 Thermo-magnetic release of NM8-250, 400, 630, 800 and 1250 breakers can be set to meet protection requirements
t
a b
IR Ii 10 5 A 40℃
9 6
1.0 0.7 b
0.9 0.8 8 7
X A X A IR Ii
0 IR Ii 1
Adjustable setting of over-load protection a

Adjustable setting of short-circuit protection or fixed b
NM8, NM8S Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-010
Thermo-magnetic
NM8-125 NM8-250 NM8-400 NM8-630 NM8-800 NM8-1250
release
Rated value (A) 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 100, 125, 160, 180, 250,315, 250, 315, 350, 630, 700, 630, 700, 800,
In 40℃ 63, 80, 100, 125 200, 225, 250 350, 400 400, 500 800 1000, 1250
Over-load
protection
Thermo protection B
Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range
Tripping current IR (A)
(0.8~1)XIn (0.8~1)XIn 1) (0.8~1)XIn1) (0.8~1)XIn1) (0.8~1)XIn (0.8~1)XIn
N-pole protection (A)

Without protection Without protection Without protection Without protection Without protection Without protection
4A, 4B
1.0XIr 1.0XIr 1.0XIr 1.0XIr 1.0XIr 1.0XIr
4C, 4D
Short-circuit protection Magnetic protection
10In (for power Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range

distribution protection) (5~10) XIn (5~10) XIn (5~10) XIn Adjustable range Adjustable range
Tripping current li (A)
(8~12)In(for motor (8~12)In(for motor (8~12)In(for motor (5~10) XIn (5~10)XIn
12In (for motor protection)
protection) protection) protection)
1)
Note:
(0.7~1) Xln is optional, please note that ordering code is different with (0.8~1) Xln
NM8-250, (100~180)A: adjustable magnetic protection value=(6~10)In, (200~250)A: adjustable magnetic protection value=(5~10)In
6.1.2 Characteristic of thermo protection operation of thermo-magnetic release for power distribution
Serial No. Test current I/In Conventional time Initial status
＞1h (In≤63A)
1 Conventional non-tripping current 1.05 Cold status
＞2h (In＞63A)
≤1h (In≤63A)
2 Conventional tripping current 1.3 Right after test 1
≤2h (In＞63A)
6.1.3 Characteristic of thermo protection operation of thermo-magnetic release for motor protection
Serial No. Test current I/In Conventional time Initial status

1 Conventional non-tripping current 1.0 ＞2h Cold status
1.2 ≤2h
2 Conventional tripping current 1.5 ≤4min Right after test 1
7.2 4s≤T≤10s
6.2 Electronic Release
6.2.1 NM8S-125, 250 electronic release is an universal module.

It is of 11 current specifications: 40A, 50A, 63A, 80A, 100A,125A, 160A, 180A, 200A, 225A and 250A to adjust setting values and to
meet protection requirements.
.4 OFF 1.5
OFF
.5 1.5 2
0.9 I R .6 2 I sd I i .5 I nN
IR 3
.7 3 4 1
1.2 I R
.8 4 6
.9 5 8
XI n XI n XI n XI n
.95 6 10
Test/Com 1 8 12
The indicator light flashes, when single-phase operational current is ≤90% IR.
The indicator light is always lit, when single-phase operational current is ≥115% IR.
Electronic release NM8S-125 NM8S-250

Rated value In (A) 20~70℃ 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125 100, 125, 160, 180, 200, 225, 250
Over-load protection Thermal protection
Adjustable range 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, Adjustable range 0.4, 0.5, 0.6,
B
Tripping current IR
0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1XIn 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1XIn
1.05IR >2h non tripping ＞2h non tripping

1.3 IR ≤1h ≤1h
Tripping time
1.5 IR 96s 96s
6IR 6s 6s
N-line protection Adjustable rage Adjustable rage

tripping current InN OFF, 0.5, 1XIn OFF, 0.5, 1XIn
Adjustable range Adjustable range

Tripping current li
1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12XIn 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12XIn
Short time-delay short current Adjustable range Adjustable range

protection tripping current lsd OFF, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8XIn OFF, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8XIn
6.2.2 NM8S-400, 630 electronic release is an universal module.

It is of 6 current specifications: 250A, 315A, 350A, 400A, 500A, and 630A to adjust setting values and to meet protection
requirements.
IR .4 OFF 1.5
1.5 OFF
.5 2
.6 IR 2 I sd 3 Ii .5
Ig InN
.7 3 4 1
Isd
.8 4 6
Ii 0.9 I R
.9 5 8
1.2 I R .95 X In 6 X In 10 X In X In
1 8 12
3 T R .1 T sd .1 TnN
6 .2 .2
12 .3 .3
18 .4 .4
Test/Com @6I R s s s
6.2.3 NM8S-800, 1250, 1600electronic release is an universal module. It is of 6 current specifications: 630A, 700A, 800A, 1000A,
1250A and 1600A to adjust setting values and to meet protection requirements.
The release is of wide setting range and multi-functional modules can be selected.
IR .4 OFF 1.5
OFF
.5 1.5 2
.6 2 3 .5
Ig
.7 IR 3 I sd 4 Ii 1 InN
Isd
.8 4 6
Ii
.9 5 8
.95 6 10
X In 8 X In 12 X In X In
A/kA 1
1.2 I R
Reset 3 TR .1 T sd .1 TnN
S 6 .2 .2
LN L1 L2 L3
12 .3 .3
Query 18 .4 .4
Test/Com @6I R s s s
Tripping current IR, Isd, li should be set with three-digit switch or rotary knob as per current.
▪ IR, setting of over-load protection

IR could be adjusted as per customers' requirements,
and TR, tripping time at the status of 6IR can be set as per customers' requirements.
Model 1.05 IR 1.3 IR 1.5 IR (s) 2.0 IR (s) 6 IR (s)
48,96, 27, 54, 3, 6,

NM8S-400, 630 ＞2h non-tripping ＜1h tripping
192, 288 108, 162 12, 18
48, 96, 27, 54, 3, 6,

NM8S-800,1250,1600 ＞2h non-tripping ＜1h tripping
192, 288 108, 162 12, 18
▪ Ir, indicator light for over-load status indication

The indicator light flashes, when single-phase operational current is ＜90% IR
The indicator light is always lit, when single-phase operational current is ≥115% IR
▪ Isd, setting of short-circuit protection and tripping time

Setting value of current Isd could be adjusted as per customers' requirements and OFF stands for status without ST protection;
Tsd, the tripping time could be adjusted as per customers' requirements.
▪ Ii, setting of short-circuit protection

Value of setting current could be adjusted as per customers' requirements
B
▪ InN, setting of protection operations
As a 4P circuit breaker with N-line protection, setting value of current Ig could be adjusted as per customers' requirements and OFF
stands for status without protection of N-pole; TnN, the operating time of N-pole could be adjusted as per customers' requirements.
Electronic release NM8S-400 NM8S-630 NM8S-800 NM8S-1250 NM8S-1600

Rated value A In 20~70℃ 250, 315, 350, 400 250, 315, 350, 400, 500, 630 630, 700, 800 630, 700, 800, 1000, 1250 1000, 1250, 1600
long time-delay over-load

protection (thermal protection)
Adjustable range 0.4, 0.5, Adjustable range 0.4, 0.5, Adjustable range 0.4, 0.5, Adjustable range 0.4, 0.5, Adjustable range 0.4, 0.6,
Tripping current IR (A)
0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1XIn 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1XIn 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1XIn 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1XIn 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1*In
Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range
Tripping time 6IR (s)
3, 6, 12, 18 3, 6, 12, 18 3, 6, 12, 18 3, 6, 12, 18 3, 6, 12, 18
short time-delay
short-circuit protection
Tripping current Isd (A)
OFF, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8XIn OFF, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8XIn OFF, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8XIn OFF, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8XIn OFF, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8*In
Tripping time Tsd (s)
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
(Instantaneous) short-circuit protection
Tripping current li (A) 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12XIn 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12XIn 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12XIn 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12XIn 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12XIn
12In(for motor protection) 12In(for motor protection) 12In(for motor protection) 12In(for motor protection) 12In(for motor protection)
(N-line) protection
Tripping current lnN (A)
OFF, 0.5, 1XIn OFF, 0.5, 1XIn OFF, 0.5, 1XIn OFF, 0.5, 1XIn OFF, 0.5, 1XIn
Tripping time TnN (s)
0.1,0.2, 0.3, 0.4 0.1,0.2, 0.3, 0.4 0.1,0.2, 0.3, 0.4 0.1,0.2, 0.3, 0.4 0.1,0.2, 0.3, 0.4
7. Curves
7.1 Tripping curve (ambient temperature +40℃)
NM8-125(16A, 20A)
s 10000
7200
3600
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
Ii=10In
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 1000 1500 2000 I/IR
NM8-125(25A, 32A)
s 10000
7200
3600
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
Ii=10In
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 1000 1500 2000 I/IR
NM8-125(40A, 50A)
s 10000
7200
3600
2000
1000
500
B
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
Ii=10In
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 1000 1500 2000 I/IR
NM8-125(63A, 80A, 100A, 125A)
s 10000
7200
3600
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
Ii=10In
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 45 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 1000 1500 2000 I/IR
NM8-250(100A, 125A)
s 10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
Ii=5~10In
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 45 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 1000 I/IR
NM8-250(160A, 180A)
s 10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
2
Ii=5~10In
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 45 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 1000 I/IR
NM8-250(200A, 225A, 250A)
s 10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
B
20
10
2
Ii=5~10In
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 45 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 1000 I/IR
NM8-400, 630(250A~500A)
s 10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
2
Ii=5~10In
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 45 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 I/IR

NM8-800(630~800A)
NM8-1250(630A~1250A)
s 10000
5000
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
2
Ii=5~10In
1
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 45 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 I/IR
NM8S-125, 250(40A~250A)
s 10000
7200
3600
2000
IR=0.4~1In
1000
500
200
100
50
20
TR=6s
10
5
2
1
Isd=1.5~8In
.5 Tsd=0.2s
.2
.1 Ii=1.5~12In
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 45 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 I/IR

NM8S-400,630(250A~630A)
NM8S-800,1250(630A~1250A)
NM8S-1600(1000A~1600A)
s 10000
7200
3600
2000
B
IR=0.4~1In
1000
500
200
TR=3s,6s,12s,18s
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
Isd=1.5~8In
.5 Isd=0.1s,0.2s,0.3s,0.4s
.2
.1 Ii=1.5~12In
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 45 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 I/IR
Motor protection release

NM8-125(16A~125A)
s 10000
7200
3600
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
Ii=12In
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 45 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 I/IR

NM8-250(100A～250A)
s 10000
7200
3600
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1 Ii=8~12In
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 45 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 I/IR
NM8-400,630(250A~500A)
s 10000
7200
3600
2000
1000
500
200
100
50
20
10
5
2
1
Ii=8~12In
.5
.2
.1
.05
.02
.01
.005
.002
.001
.5 .7 1 2 3 45 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300 400 600 I/IR

7.2 Temperature compensation

When the ambient temperature slightly changes, tripping characteristics will change as well,
please refer to the table below for temperature compensation correction.
7.2.1 Temperature compensation coefficient of breaker with thermo-magnetic release as follows.
Ambient temperature 0℃ 5℃ 10℃ 15℃ 20℃ 25℃ 30℃ 35℃ 40℃ 45℃ 50℃ 55℃ 60℃ 65℃ 70℃
Temperature compensation coefficient 1.2 1.175 1.15 1.125 1.1 1.075 1.05 1.025 1.0 0.975 0.95 0.925 0.90 0.875 0.85
Note: For reference only
7.2.2 Temperature compensation coefficient of breaker with electronic release as follows

B
Frame Level rated current 0℃ 5℃ 10℃ 15℃ 20℃ 25℃ 30℃ 35℃ 40℃ 45℃ 50℃ 55℃ 60℃ 65℃ 70℃
NM8S-125S/H(40~125) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
NM8S-250S/H(125~160) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
NM8S-250S/H(200~250) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.95 0.95 0.90 0.90
NM8S-630S/H/R(250~400) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.98 0.95 0.93 0.90
NM8S-630S/H/R(500~630) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.98 0.95 0.93 0.90 0.88 0.85
NM8S-800S/H/R(630~800) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.975 0.975 0.95 0.95 0.925 0.925
NM8S-1250S/H/R(1000~1250) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.95 0.9 0.875 0.80 0.80 0.80
NM8S-1600S/H/R(1000~1600) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.95 0.9 0.875 0.80 0.80 0.80
8. Mounting of circuit breaker

8.1 Modes of down-lead .
Two modes of upper and lower down-lead are available;
adoption of different down-lead modes will not affect normal
operation of breaker, in addition, it is no need for derating.
8.2 Modes of mounting

Mounting modes following are available for fixed and plug-in type breakers.
A B C D E
8.3 Modes of fixing 8.3.2 Fixing mode following is available for NM8(S)-125, 250 for
8.3.1 Fixing modes following are available for fixed and plug-in fixed type breakers, which adopts DIN rail adaptor of front
type breakers. connection.
On bottom plate On hollow plate On Bus-bar
35
8.4 Secured distance 8.4.2 Min. distance between breaker and surface of switchgear
8.4.1 Min. Distance between breakers where the operation handle is exposed.
A B
T T
4 4
A=0 B=0
8.4.3 Min. distance between breaker and side of switchgear 8.4.4 Min. distance between top and bottom of breaker
D1
4
D2
White or colored metal plate

4
C Insulation plate or insulation
connection terminal
Insulation plate or insulation White or colored

NM8 Breaker Ue C connection terminal(mm) metal plate(mm)
D1 D2 D1 D2
Ue≤440V 10 30 30 35 35
NM8-125
Ue<600V 20 30 30 35 35
NM8S-125
Ue≥600V 30 30 30 35 35
B
Ue≤440V 10 30 30 35 35
NM8-250
Ue<600V 20 30 30 35 35
NM8S-250
Ue≥600V 30 30 30 35 35
Ue≤440V 10 30 30 60 60
NM8-400, 630,
Ue<600V 20 30 30 60 60
NM8S-400, 630
Ue≥600V 30 30 30 100 100
NM8-800, 1250,
Ue≤690V 50 130 100 70 70
NM8S-800, 1250, 1600
Note: when voltage is ≥500V, extended terminal cover should be mounted
8.5 Modes of connection
8.5.1 Cable connection plug and Copper busbar

a. Screw is used to connect with copper (aluminum) cable connection plug or copper busbar
Size of connection screw
NM8-125: M6
NM8S-125, NM8-250, NM8S-250: M8
NM8-400, 630, NM8S-400, 630: M10
NM8-800, 1250, NM8S-800, 1250: M10
D
φ φ
φ
D
D
24
L
L
L
L
Copper cable Aluminum cable

Copper busbar Copper busbar [NM8(S)-1250]
connection plug connection plug
NM8S-125
NM8-400, 630 NM8-800, 1250
Dimension NM8-125 NM8-250
NM8S-400, 630 NM8S-800, 1250, 1600
NM8S-250
Distance between different poles(mm) 30 35 45 70

L(mm) ≤15 ≤25 ≤32 ≤ 50
D(mm) ≤7 ≤10 ≤16 ≤ 16
Φ(mm) ＞6 ＞8 ＞10 ＞ 11
b. With front connection and use screw to connect

with copper (aluminum) cable connection plate or copper busbar
Size of connection screw
NM8-125: M6
NM8S-125, NM8-250, NM8S-250: M8
NM8-400, 630, NM8S-400, 630: M12
NM8-800, 1250, NM8S-800,1250,1600: M10
Front connection plate Front connection plate
D
φ φ
φ
D
D
24
L
L
L
L
Copper cable Aluminum cable Copper Copper busbar

connection plug connection plug busbar [NM8(S)-1250]
NM8S-125
NM8-400, 630 NM8-800, 1250
Dimension NM8-125 NM8-250
NM8S-400, 630 NM8S-800, 1250, 1600
NM8S-250
Distance between different poles(mm) 30 35 52.5 70 70

L(mm) ≤15 ≤25 ≤40 ≤60 ≤50
D(mm) ≤7 ≤10 ≤16 ≤16 ≤16
Φ(mm) ＞6 ＞8 ＞12 ＞12 ＞11
8.5.2 Connection of bare cable

L
Copper or aluminum cable

NM8S-125 NM8-400, 630

Dimension
Dimension NM8-125 NM8-250 NM8S-400, 630
NM8S-250
Number of cable 1 2 4
L(mm) 16 20 L(mm) 26 30, 60 30
CSA(mm2) 2.5~50 2.5~185 CSA(mm2) 35~370 35~185 35~125
B
8.5.3 Rear connection 8.5.4 Plug-in type connection
For rear connection, cable connection plug should be Two modes of front and rear connection are available;
used for connection with copper busbar. for rear connection, upper limit or lower limit connection
is used.
Rear connection Plug-in type
Front connection
Lower limit connection
for rear connection
Horizontal Vertical
8.5.5 Standard CSA of copper cable

or busbar used for connection
Rated current(A) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 350 400 500 630 700 800 1000 1250 1600
Cross section Copper cable 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 10 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 185 185 240 2×150 2×185 2×240 2×240 - - -
area (mm2) Copper busbar - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2×30×5 2×40×5 2×50×5 2×50×5 2×60×5 2×80×5 2×80×5
8.5.6 Usual cross sections for conductors according intensity
Copper conductors Copper bar

In(A)
Cross Section Area (mm2) Dimensions Area (mm2)
10 1.5 —
16 2.5 —
20 2.5 —
25 4 —
32 6 —
40 10 —
63 16 —
80 25 —
100 35 —
125 50 —
160 70 —
200 95 —
250 120 —
315 185 —
400 240 —
500 2×150 2×30×5

630 2×185 2×40×5
800 2×240 2×50×5
1000 — 2×60×5
1250 — 2×80×5
1600 — 2×80×5
8.6 Overall and Mounting Dimensions
8.6.1 Overall and mounting dimensions of fixed type for front connection
H2
H1
2P 3P 4P H0
1 3
G2
L3
L4
L1
L2
L1
L2
L2
L1
T T
2 4
4
W3 W0 W0 W0 W0 W0
W1 W2
Plate mount Bar mount DIN rail mount[NM8(S)-125,250]
3P 4P K2
K1 2×Φd K 3P 4P
K 4×Φd
K1 K2
K
K
35
G2
G2
G1
G1
2×Φd 4×Φd
(mm)
Model L1 L2 L3 L4 H0 H1 H2 K K1 K2 G1 G2 W0 W1 W2 W3 d
NM8-125 140 243 126 54 72 79 108 15 30 60 56 112 30 90 120 62 5.5
NM8S-125/NM8-250/NM8S-250 157 273 140 60 82 88 126 17.5 35 70 62.5 125 35 105 140 70 5.5
NM8-400, 630/NM8S-400, 630 255 482 227 114 109 113 168 22.5 45 90 100 201.5 45 140 185 - 5.5
NM8-800, 1250/NM8S-800, 1250 370 565 265 134.5 141 145 206 35 70 140 120 240 70 210 280 - 7
NM8S-1600 370 565 341.5 124 137 151 211 35 70 140 120 240 70 210 280 - 7
8.6.2 Overall and mounting dimensions of fixed type for rear connection
Plate mount
3P 4P 3P K1 4P K2
K K
Φd1 6×ΦD 8×ΦD
Φd1
2×Φd
H4
4×Φd
H4
G2
G4
H3
H3
G1
G3
W0 W0 W0 W0 W0
W0W0
W0W0W0
(mm)
Model H3 H4 W0 K K1 K2 G1 G2 G3 G4 d d1 D
NM8-125 47 87 30 15 30 60 56 112 63 126 5.5 6.5 15
NM8S-125/NM8-250/NM8S-250 47 87 35 17.5 35 70 62.5 125 70 140 5.5 8 20
NM8-400,630/NM8S-400,630 50 100 45 22.5 45 90 100 200 113.5 227 6 13 32
8.6.3 Overall and mounting dimension of plug-in type

Plate mount
B
3P 4P N M
W0 W0 W0
L6
L4
TT T
L5
L3
H5
W0 W0 W0 W0 W0 H6
W1 W2 H7
Plate mount M Bar mount
3P 4P K2
3P 4P
K1 2×Φd2 4×Φd2 K
K
K8
K7
K6
K6
U
G8
G6
G10
G5
G7
G9
K3 2×Φd2 4×Φd2
K3
K4 K5
Plate mount N front connection (standard configuration)

Insulation barrier must be mounted Plate mount N rear connection
between mounting plate and breaker base Mounting plate and breaker base must be used with insulation material
Lower limit
3P 4P 3P 4P
K1 2×Φd2 K2 2×Φd2
K1 K2
K 4×Φd2
4×Φd2 K K K
G12
G12
G14
G13
G11
G11
6×ΦD2
W0 W0 8×ΦD2 W0 W0 W0
Note: Plug-in type rear connection, use insulated mounting base plate
Upper limit
K2
3P K1 4P
4×Φd2 K
K 2×Φd2
G12
G16
G15
G11
W0 W0 W0
W0 W0 6×ΦD2
8×ΦD2
(mm)
Model W0 W1 W2 L4 L5 L6 H5 H6 H7 K K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7
NM8-125 30 90 120 170.5 90 180 24 40 67 15 30 60 47 94 124 30 60
NM8S-125/NM8-250/NM8S-250 35 105 140 190 102.5 205 27 45 75 17.5 35 70 54.5 109 144 35 70
NM8-400, 630/NM8S-400, 630 45 140 185 300 157.5 315 27 45 100 22.5 45 90 71.5 143 188 45 90
Model K8 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 d2 D2 U

NM8-125 90 77 154 85.2 170.4 32.5 65 68 136 54.5 109 70.5 141 6 20 ≤32
NM8S-125/NM8-250/NM8S-250 105 87 174 95 190 37.5 75 77.5 155 61 122 79 158 6 25 ≤32
NM8-400, 630/NM8S-400, 630 140 137 274 150 300 75 150 125 250 101 202 126 252 6 35 ≤32
8.6.4 Flush type (for fixed or plug-in type)
P2 Hole A Hole B Hole C

P1
C4
C4
C3
C3
C2
C1
R3
R4(3P)
R5(4P)
R6(3P)
R1
R2
B/C A
(mm)
Model P1 P2 R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 C1 C2 C3 C4
NM8-125 73 80 13 26 46.5 93 123 65 26 68 50.5 101
NM8S-125/NM8-250/NM8S-250 83 90 14.5 29 54 108 143 73 33 78 56.5 113
NM8-400, 630/NM8S-400, 630 109 114 26.5 53 71.5 143 188 - 41.5 116 108 205
NM8-1250/NM8S-1250 103 145 41 82 107 214 284 - 90 131 125 250
9. Accessories
9.1 Inner accessories
9.1.1 Shunt release Shunt release Wiring diagram Under-voltage release Wiring diagram
Us=70~110%Us, circuit breaker reliably operates

Long-time electrification is prohibited
B
Time of response: pulsive type≥20ms, ≤60ms <U
9.1.2 Under-voltage release

Us=35~70%Ue, circuit breaker reliably breaks
Us≥85%Ue, circuit breaker reliably closes
C1 C2 D1 D2
Us＜35%Ue, prevent circuit breaker from making
Note: With under-voltage release, Us≥85%Ue,
circuit breaker normally makes and breaks
9.1.3 Auxiliary contact

Function: Indication of contacting status
Wiring diagram
F11 QF Power
Circuit breaker is at F12
F11 supply
making status F14 F14
Circuit breaker is at F12 F12

F11
breaking status
F14
9.1.4 Alarm contact

Function: indication of reason for circuit breaker releasing;
* Over-load
* Short-circuit
* Grounding fault
* Operation of under-voltage releasing or free tripping
When circuit breaker normally makes and breaks,
alarm contact not operates.
After free tripping(or tripping due to failure),
alarm contact operates and after the circuit breaker again
normally operates, alarm contact recovers original status.
Wiring diagram
Circuit breaker is at B11 QF Power supply

B12
breaking or making status B12 B14
B14
Circuit breaker is at free B12

B11 B12
release (or alarming)status B14
Left ON
Right
Mounting and wiring mode
Handle OFF
Accessory Code
NM8-125, 250 NM8-400, 630 NM8-800, 1250
NM8S-125, 250 NM8S-400, 630 NM8S-800, 1250,1600
3P, 4P 3P, 4P 3P, 4P
No accessory
Alarm contact AL
SM: AC220V, SQ: AC380V

Shunt release
SB: DC24V
Auxiliary contact AX
UM: AC220V
Under-voltage release
UQ: AC380V
Shunt release SM: AC220V, SQ: AC380V,

Auxiliary contact SB: DC24V AX
Two groups of
auxiliary contact AX, AX
Under-voltage release UM: AC220V, UQ: AC380V

Alarm contact SB: DC24V AL
Alarm contact AL
AL
Alarm contact

Auxiliary contact, alarm SB: DC24V AX, AL 348
Two groups of AX, AX

auxiliary contact AL
Alarm contact Auxiliary

AX, AL
contact, alarm contact
(UM: AC220V, UQ: AC380V)
■-Shunt release ▲-Under-voltage release ○-Auxiliary contact ●-Alarm contact

Note: 1: For NM8-125, 250, 400, 630, NM8S-125, 250, 400, 630, under-voltage and shunt release couldn't be simultaneously
equipped on one breaker.
2: For NM8-800, 1250, NM8S-800, 1250, 1600, at most three auxiliary contacts could be equipped, under-voltage and shunt
release could be simultaneously equipped on one breaker, in addition, their positions could be exchanged.
9.2 External accessories

circuit breaker P7
9.2.1 Economic extended rotary handle Y
P6
Protection degree: IP30
Functions: Isolation function indication;
0(breaking), 1(making)and free tripping indication;
At "OFF" status, the breaker can be fitted with 1-3 X
padlocks with a diameter of 5-8mm(by customer),

This prevents the door of switchgear being opened
unwantedly. D
24 B
MIN=50mm
(mm)
NM8S-125, NM8-250, NM8-400, NM8-630,

Dimension NM8-125 NM8(S)-800 NM8(S)-1250,1600
NM8S-250 NM8S-400 NM8S-630
P6 18 18 18 18 18 18
P7 55 55 72 72 95.5 95.5
P8 65 65 126 126 170 170
Handle mounting (mm)

NM8(S)-125,250,400,630 NM8(S)-800,1250,1600
Φ66.5 150
112 4×Φ4.2
54
Φ36
45°
Chains
N
O
112
150
Chains
Φ36
F
OF
P8
2×Φ5.5 ≥ 200
≥200
P8
9.2.2 Direct rotary handle

Protection degree：IP40
Functions:
Reliable insulation;
Isolation function indication;
0(breaking), 1(making) and free tripping indication;
Realize free tripping of circuit breaker;
At "OFF" status, the breaker can be fitted with 1-3
padlocks with a diameter of
5~8mm (by customer).
Direct rotary handle
3P 4P
W4 93
L9
L8
L7
T T
4 4
W3 W3
H8
W1 W2
H9
Front boring(fixed or plgu-in circuit breaker)(mm)
R7
R6
C6
C5
P3
9.2.3 Extended rotary handle

Functions:
B
When the door is open, the release can be set
and the breaker will not make;
At "OFF" status, the breaker can be fitted with 1~3
padlocks with a diameter of 5~8mm (by customer).
Then door of the switchgear can be opened.
Front boring(fixed or plug-in circuit breaker)(mm)
45° Y
W4
Φ50
L9
X
G
P4
G
18
17 2×Φ4.2
(mm)
W1 W2 W3 W4 L7 L8 L9 H8 H9 P3 P4 R6 R7 C5 C6 G17 G18
≥175
NM8-125 90 120 76 15.25 37 70 13.3 115 163 80 38 76 38 70 37 74
≤600
NM8S-125
≥175
NM8-250 105 140 93.5 15.5 39 77.5 9 126 174 90 46.5 93 40.5 76.5 37 74
≤600
NM8S-250
NM8-400,630/ ≥175
140 185 122 18 69 121.5 24.5 152 200 115 61 122 70.5 121 37 74
NM8S-400,630 ≤600
9.2.4 Motor-driven mechanism

Functions:
Free releasing of circuit breaker;
Making and breaking the breaker manually or automatically
Manual operation
Turn "manual/auto" switch to "auto" position and then turn
the handle to make and break the breaker.
Automatic operation:
Turn "manual/auto" switch to "manual" position and then
push the button to make and break the breaker remotely.
The make/break operation is carried out via pulse or
self-retaining type signal control.
Operational range: 85%Un~110%Un.
NM8 circuit breaker Rated control voltage Electrical life Operational current Power consumption
AC/DC 110V
NM8-125 DC 220V 10,000 operations ≥0.5 A 200W
AC 380V 300W
NM8S-125 AC230/DC 220V

NM8-250 10,000 operations ≥0.5 A 200W
AC 380V
NM8S-250 300W
AC/DC 110V
NM8-400
AC/DC 110V
NM8S-400
AC230/DC 220V 5,000 operations ≥2 A 350W
NM8-630
AC 380V
NM8S-630
NM8-800
AC/DC 110V
NM8S-800
AC230/DC 220V 3,000 operations ≥7.5 A 400W
NM8-1250
AC 380V
NM8S-1250
3P 4P
H11
H10 W5
W5
L10
L11
Operating
handle
Front boring(fixed or plug-in circuit breaker) Wiring diagram
R9
P5
R8
P1 P2 S1 S2 S4
C8
Power
C7
supply
ON OFF
Uc
(mm)
Model W5 H10 H11 L10 L11 R8 R9 P5 C7 C8
NM8-125 90 77 164 117 17.3 46.5 93 144 17.3 120
NM8S-125, NM8-250, NM8S-250 90 77 175 117 14.5 46.5 93 155 14.5 120
NM8(S)-400, 630 130 115 250 175 19 65 130 225 19 180
NM8(S)-800, 1250 130 115 295 175 47.5 65 130 270 47.5 180
9.3 Locking system

Locking the breaker at status of making or breaking.
The system can be fitted with 1~3 padlocks with a diameter of 5~8mm (by customer).
9.4 Terminal cover
Protect from being contacted with main circuit.
Selection of terminal cover:
Fixed breaker (front connection): Long terminal cover; Fixed breaker (rear connection): Short terminal cover;
Plug-in breaker: short terminal cover; When voltage is ≥500V, terminal cover selected for definite connection mode B
Locking system Long terminal cover Short terminal cover
10. COMA-2 communication module 10.1 General

COMA-2 communication module is the interface module for our intelligent MCCB
and bus communication system, suitable for NM8S series of intelligent MCCB,
operating communication level conversion and relay control output.
Combined with the Modbus-RTU communication protocol, the communication
module can easily connect with Fieldbus master device to realize telemeter, and the
remote control function.
10.2 Technical parameter

Rated voltage: AC230V, AC400V or DC24V (range of error 15%)
Communication type: RS485 (Modbus protocol)
Contact capacity: AC250V /15A
Transmission medium: shielded twisted pair line
Transmission distance: 12km (using A level of shielded twisted pair line)
Working state instructions: LED instructions
Station number: 2 stations
10.3 Dimensions of product and installation
~230V~
~400V~
+ 24V-
51±0.37 5.5±0.12 83.5±0.5
[VOID IF SEAL IS BROKEN]
~ 230V ~ PE G B1 A1 B2 A2
INSPECTOR:
DATE:
77.5±0.24
COMA-2
36±0.16
Power
Input1
70 -0.34
86 -0.34
0
0
Txd1
Txd2
Input2
JD1 JD2
0
65 -0.3
10.4 Solutions for communication
Solution Function Product and accessories Remark
NM8S MCCB
Solution 1 Telemetering Read phase current
COMA-2
NM8S MCCB
COMA-2 Read phase current
Solution 2 Telemetering+Telesignalisation
Auxiliary contact Indicate the status of MCCB
NM8S MCCB
Read phase current
COMA-2
Solution 3 Telemetering+Telesignalisation+Telecommand Indicate the status of MCCB
Auxiliary contact
Remote control Mccb switch on and off
Motor-driven mechanism
11. Complementary technical information

11.1 Isolation function .
Isolation functions of all the circuit breakers as per
IEC60947/EN60947-2; Isolating position of contactors is at 0
(OFF) status. The operating handle will correctly indicate the
status of 0(OFF), only if the contactor breaks.
Padlocks could be mounted after the contacts breaks;
Operation of isolation functions will realize following points:
■ Contacts operation correctly indicates: .
operating reliability of interior mechanism;
■ No residual current; ;
■ Higher impulse withstands voltage for terminals .
a. Exceptional current-limiting capacity is able to greatly reduce
at the power supply side and on-load side.
power caused by fault current so as to enhance breaking
11.2 Current-limiting capacity of breaker to Ics=100%Icu; ;
b .The capacity has greatly released damages, which short-circuit
11.2.1 Current-limiting capacity .
current lay to apparatus; ;
The current-limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is its
c .The capacity has greatly lowered temperature-rise so as to
aptitude to limit short-circuits current. By occurring of
2
short-circuit, the breaker is able to limit I t in time so as lengthen service life of the cable; ;
to protect circuits and switchgear at downstream. d. The capacity has greatly reduced power so as to lessen
The exceptional limiting capacity of NM8 series is due to distortion of contacts and bus bar; ;
the rotating double-break technique, which is e. The capacity has greatly decreased interruptions to apparatus
characterized by very rapid natural repulsion of contacts nearby.
and the appearance of two arc voltages in series with a
I
very steep wave front.
Prospective
11.2.2 Current-limiting curves current peak
The current-limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is
expressed by two curves which are the prospective current
and the actual short-circuit current.
Thermal stress (A2S), i.e. the energy dissipated by the
Actual
short-circuit current in a conductor with a resistance of 1Ω. current peak
The table below indicates the maximum permissible

thermal stresses for cables depending on their insulation,
t
conductor (Cu or Al) and cross section area (CSA).
CSA values are given in mm2 and thermal stresses in A2S.
CSA(mm2) 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35

Cu K=115 2.97×104 8.26×104 2.12×105 4.76×105 1.32×106 3.40×106 8.26×106 1.62×107
PVC 4 4 5 5
Al K=76 1.30×10 3.61×10 9.26×10 2.08×10 5.78×106
1.48×10 6
3.16×10 6
7.08×107
4 5 4 4 4 4 4
Cu K=131 3.86×10 1.07×10 2.75×10 6.18×10 1.72×10 4.39×10 1.07×10 2.10×104
Butyl
Al K=87 1.70×104 4.73×104 1.21×104 2.72×104 7.57×104 1.94×104 4.73×104 9.27×104
Cu K=143 4.60×104 1.28×104 3.27×104 7.36×104 2.04×104 5.23×104 1.28×104 2.51×104
EPR 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Al K=94 1.99×10 5.52×10 1.41×10 3.18×10 8.84×10 2.26×10 5.52×10 1.08×104
CSA(mm2) 50 70 95 120 150 185 240

Cu K=115 3.31×104 6.48×104 1.19×105 1.90×105 2.98×106 4.53×106 7.62×106
PVC
Al K=76 1.44×104 2.83×104 5.21×105 8.32×105 1.30×106 1.98×106 3.33×106
4 5 4 4 4 4
Cu K=131 4.29×10 8.41×10 1.55×10 2.47×10 3.86×10 5.87×10 9.88×104
Butyl 4 4 4 4 4 4
Al K=87 1.89×10 3.71×10 6.83×10 1.09×10 1.70×10 2.59×10 4.36×104
Cu K=143 5.11×104 1.00×104 1.85×104 2.94×104 4.60×104 7.00×104 1.18×104
EPR
Al K=94 2.21×104 4.33×104 7.97×104 1.27×104 1.99×104 3.02×104 5.09×104
K is quoted from GB-50054 code for design of low voltage electrical installations.
Example:
a.What is the actual current when a prospective short-circuit current of 125kA rms (peak value=275kA)
comes through the current-limiting operation circuit breaker at upstream of NM8-125R
Answer: the peak value=23kA; (for details, refer to current-limiting curves)
b.Is a Cu/PVC cable with a CSA of 10mm2 adequately protected by a NM8-125S circuit breaker
Answer: the table above indicates that the permissible thermal stress is 1.32×106 A2S
at the point where a NM8-125S (Icu=50kA) is installed,
and the short-circuit current is limited within the range of 1.32×106 A2S, therefore the cable could be protected.
B
2 2
I t Curve A s curve
Ip [kA] I2 t [A2s] 380V~415V AC

380V~415V AC
109
200
5
NM8(S)-1250, 1600(630A~1600A)
3
2
100 NM8(S)-1250, 1600(630A~1600A)
8
80 10
NM8(S)-800(630A~800A)
70 5
60 3
2
50 NM8(S)-800(630A~800A)
NM8(S)-630(250A~630A) 107
40
NM8(S)-400(250A~400A) 5 NM8(S)-630(250A~630A)
3 NM8(S)-400(250A~400A)
30
NM8(S)-250(100A~250A) 2
NM8-125(40A~125A)
6
10
20 NM8(S)-250(100A~250A)
5
NM8-125(16A~32A) NM8-125(40A~125A)
3
2
NM8-125(16A~32A)
10
7 105
5
4
3 5
3
3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
2
3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
Irms [kA]
Irms [kA]
2 2
I t Curve A s curve
Ip [kA] 690V AC I2t 690V AC

50
108
40 3
NM8(S)-1250(630A~1250A) 2
NM8(S)-800(630A~800A) NM8(S)-1250(630A~1250A)
107
30 NM8(S)-800(630A~800A)
5
NM8(S)-630(250A~630A)
NM8(S)-400(250A~400A) 3 NM8(S)-630(250A~630A)
2
NM8(S)-400(250A~400A)
20
6
10
NM8(S)-250(100A~250A)
5
NM8(S)-250(100A~250A) NM8-125(40A~125A)
3
NM8-125(16A~32A)
NM8-125(40A~125A) 2
10 NM8-125(16A~32A)
105
7
5
4 5
3
3
2
3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 3 4 5 7 10 20 30 50 70 100 200 300
Irms [kA] Irms [kA]
11.3 Power loss per pole
Resistance/ power
NM8-125 NM8S-125 NM8-250 NM8S-250 NM8-400 NM8S-400
loss mΩ/W
16 7.1/1.8
20 6.2/2.5
25 4.8/3
32 3.7/3.8
40 2.6/4.2 0.85/1.4
50 2.7/6.8 0.7/1.8
63 1.7/6.7 0.7/2.8
80 1.3/8.3 0.7/4.5
100 0.85/8.5 0.5/5 1.0/10 0.5/5
125 0.71/11.1 0.5/7.8 1.0/15.6 0.5/7.8
160 0.55/14 0.36/9.2
180 0.55/17.8 0.36/11.7

200 0.55/22 0.36/14.4
225 0.55/27.8 0.28/14.2
250 0.55/34.4 0.28/17.5 0.3/18.8 0.15/9.4

315 0.28/27.8 0.15/14.9
350 0.28/34.3 0.15/18.4
400 0.24/38.4 0.15/24
500
630
700
800
1000
1250, 1600
11.4 Influences which altitude lay to tripping characteristics

To tripping characteristics of circuit breaker, it is no obvious influence, when the altitude does not exceed 2000m.
Once the altitude exceeds the level of 2000m, factors of dielectric stress lowering and cooled air should be
taken into consideration.
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000

Dielectric stress (V) 3000 2500 2100 1800
Max. operational voltage (V) 690 550 480 420
Ratings at 40℃ (A) 1In 0.96In 0.93In 0.9In
NM8-630 NM8S-630 NM8-800 NM8S-800 NM8-1250 NM8S-1250,1600
0.3/18.8 0.13/8.1
0.28/27.8 0.13/12.9
0.28/34.3 0.13/15.9
0.24/38.4 0.13/20.8
0.2/50 0.13/32.5
0.13/51.6 0.04/15.9 0.04/15.9 0.04/15.9 0.04/15.9
0.04/19.6 0.04/19.6 0.04/19.6 0.04/19.6
0.04/25.6 0.04/25.6 0.04/25.6 0.04/25.6
0.04/40 0.04/40
0.04/62.5 0.04/62.5
11.5 Cascading .
Definition of Cascading . Application of cascading .

Current-limiting technique has been adopted for cascading Through the application of cascading, connected apparatuses
to install downstream circuit breaker with lower breaking could be installed in different switchgears to realize normal
capacity (cheaper circuit breakers) at the given point of circuit, operation. Therefore, cascading, in common, refers to various
and upstream NM8(S) circuit breaker operates to limit short- combination of circuit breakers installed at the given point of
circuit current. Under the operation of cascading which the breaking capacity is lower than prospective short-
network, circuit breaker with lower breaking capacity circuit current. And breaking capacity of upstream circuit
compared with prospective short-circuit current at the given breakers should be equal to or higher than prospective short-
point could operate under normal short-circuit status. circuit current at the installed point to protect apparatus at
As the short-circuit current will be limited by upstream downstream. Cascading application is in conformity with
circuit breaker with current-limiting operation, cascading IEC60947-2 standards.
network is applicable to all the power distribution apparatus
protection at downstream. .
In addition, cascading operation is not restricted to operation
of two switches in serial, but is applicable in various electric
networks, as well.
Cascading (220/230/240V)
Upstream: NM8-125~1250
Downstream: DZ47, eB, UB, DZ158, DZ267, NB1, NBH8, NM8 (S)-125~1250
Upstream
Breaking capacity NM8-125S NM8-125H NM8-125R NM8-250S NM8-250H NM8-250R NM8-400S
(kA rms) 85 100 150 85 100 150 85
Downstream Breaking capacity (kA rms)
DZ267 30 80 80 30 40 40
DZ47, eB, UB 30 80 80 30 40 40
NBH8 30 80 80 30 40 40
NB1(Icn=6000A) 40 100 100 40 50 50
NB1-63(Icn=10000A) 50 100 100 50 65 65
DZ158-100 50 100 100 50 65 65 50
NM8-125S 100 150 100 150
NM8-125H 150 150
NM8-250S 100 150
NM8-250H 150
NM8-400S
NM8-400H
NM8-630S
NM8-630H
NM8-800S
NM8-800H
NM8-1250S
NM8-1250H
NM8S-125S 100 150 100 150
NM8S-125H 150 150
NM8S-250S 100 150
NM8S-250H 150
NM8S-400S
NM8S-400H
NM8S-630S
NM8S-630H
NM8S-800S
NM8S-800H
NM8S-1250S
NM8S-1250H
NM8-400H NM8-400R NM8-630S NM8-630H NM8-630R NM8-800S NM8-800H NM8-1250S NM8-1250H

100 150 85 100 150 65 100 65 100
65 65
100 150 100 150 100 100
150 150
100 150 100 150 100 100
150 150
100 150 100 150 100 100
150 150
100 150 100 100
150
100 100
100 100
100 150 100 150 100 100

150 150
100 150 100 150 100 100
150 150
100 150 100 150 100 100
150 150
100 150 100 100
150
100 100
100 100
Upstream: NM8S-125~1600
Downstream: DZ267, DZ47, eB, UB, NBH8, NB1, DZ158, NM8(S)-125~1600
Upstream
NM8S-125S NM8S-125H NM8S-250S NM8S-250H NM8S-400S NM8S-400H NM8S-400R
Breaking capacity
85 100 85 100 85 100 150
(kA rms)
DZ267 30 80 30 40
DZ47, eB, UB 30 80 30 40
NBH8 30 80 30 40
NB1(Icn=6000A) 40 100 40 50
NB1(Icn=10000A) 50 100 50 65
DZ158-100 50 100 50 65 50 65 65
NM8-125S 100 100 100 150
NM8-125H 150
NM8-250S 100 100 150
NM8-250H 150
NM8-400S 100 150
NM8-400H 150
NM8-630S
NM8-630H
NM8-800S
NM8-800H
NM8-1250S
NM8-1250H
NM8S-125S 100 100 100 150
NM8S-125H 150
NM8S-250S 100 100 150
NM8S-250H 150
NM8S-400S 100 150
NM8S-400H 150
NM8S-630S
NM8S-630H
NM8S-800S
NM8S-800H
NM8S-1250S
NM8S-1250H
NM8S-1600H
NM8S-630S NM8S-630H NM8S-630R NM8S-800S NM8S-800H NM8S-1250S NM8S-1250H NM8S-1600H

85 100 150 65 100 65 100 100
100 150 100 100 100

150
100 150 100 100 100
150
100 150 100 100 100
150
100 150 100 100 100
150
100 100 100
100 100 100
100 150 100 100 100

150
100 150 100 100 100
150
100 150 100 100 100
150
100 150 100 100 100
150
100 100 100
100 100 100

100 100
Cascading (380/400/415V)
Upstream: NM8-125~1250;
Downstream: DZ47,eB, UB, DZ158, DZ267, NB1, NBH8, NM8(S)-125~1250
Upstream
NM8-125S NM8-125H NM8-125R NM8-250S NM8-250H NM8-250R NM8-400S
Breaking capacity
50 100 150 50 100 150 70
(kA rms)
DZ47, eB, UB 15 20 20 15 20 20
NB1(Icn=6000A) 25 30 30 25 30 30
NB1-63(Icn=10000A) 25 40 40 25 40 40
DZ158-100 25 40 40 25 40 40 25
NM8-125S 100 150 100 150 70
NM8-125H 150 150
NM8-250S 100 150 70
NM8-250H 150
NM8-400S
NM8-400H
NM8-630S
NM8-630H
NM8-800S
NM8-800H
NM8-1250S
NM8-1250H
NM8S-125S 100 150 100 150 70
NM8S-125H 150 150
NM8S-250S 100 150 70
NM8S-250H 150
NM8S-400S
NM8S-400H
NM8S-630S
NM8S-630H
NM8S-800S
NM8S-800H
NM8S-1250S
NM8S-1250H
NM8-400H NM8-400R NM8-630S NM8-630H NM8-630R NM8-800S NM8-800H NM8-1250S NM8-1250H

100 150 70 100 150 50 70 50 70
B
40 40
100 150
150 70 100 150 70 70
100 150 150
150 70 100 150 70 70
100 150 150
150 100 150 70 70
150
100 150 70 70
150
70 70
70 70
100 150
150 70 100 150 70 70
100 150 150
150 70 100 150 70 70
100 150 150
150 100 150 70 70
150
100 150 70 70
150
70 70
70 70
Upstream：NM8S-125~1250
Downstream：DZ267, DZ47, eB, UB, NBH8, NB1, DZ158, NM8（S）-125~1250
Upstream
NM8S-125S NM8S-125H NM8S-250S NM8S-250H NM8S-400S NM8S-400H NM8S-400R
Breaking capacity
50 100 50 100 70 100 150
(kA rms)
DZ47, eB, UB 15 20 15 20
NB1(Icn=6000A) 25 30 25 30
NB1-63(Icn=10000A) 25 40 25 40
DZ158 25 40 25 40 25 40 40
NM8-125S 100 100 100 150
NM8-125H 100 100 150
NM8-250S 100 100 150
NM8-250H 100 150
NM8-400S 100 150
NM8-400H 150
NM8-630S
NM8-630H
NM8-800S
NM8-800H
NM8-1250S
NM8-1250H
NM8S-125S 100 100 100 150
NM8S-125H 100 100 150
NM8S-250S 100 100 150
NM8S-250H 100 150
NM8S-400S 100 150
NM8S-400H 150
NM8S-630S
NM8S-630H
NM8S-800S
NM8S-800H
NM8S-1250S
NM8S-1250H
NM8S-1600H
NM8S-630S NM8S-630H NM8S-630R NM8S-800S NM8S-800H NM8S-1250S NM8S-1250H NM8S-1600H

70 100 150 50 70 50 70 70
B
100 150 70 70 70
100 150 70 70 70
100 150 70 70 70
100 150 70 70 70
100 150 70 70 70
100 150 70 70 70
100 150 70 70 70
150 70 70 70
70 70 70
70 70 70
70 70 70
70 70 70
100 150 70 70 70
100 150 70 70 70
100 150 70 70 70
100 150 70 70 70
100 150 70 70 70
100 150 70 70 70
100 150 70 70 70
150 70 70 70
70 70 70
70 70 70
70 70 70
70 70 70
70 70 70
11.6 Protection discrimination(selectivity)

Protection discrimination is a must factor in low-voltage power distribution design so as to ensure reliability and continuity for users'
electricity utilization.
Whenever there is fault occurring in the electric network, the upstream breaker where the fault is occurring breaks.
Protection discrimination could be clarified into 3 kinds: Total protection discrimination, partial protection discrimination and no
protection discrimination(refer to fig aside):
Total protection discrimination: For all kinds of current where the faults occurred, including the overload current and nonresistance
current, breaker D2 breaks and breaker D1 keeps making status.
Partial protection discrimination: For a much lower current compared with where the fault occurred (the limit value of protection
discrimination), breaker D2 breaks and breaker D1 keeps making status (total protection discrimination).
When the fault current is lower than limit value of protection discrimination, the upstream and downstream breakers are applicable
to protection discrimination; when the fault current exceeds limit value of protection discrimination, the upstream and downstream
breakers are not applicable to protection discrimination (no protection discrimination). And both of the breakers of D1 and D2 break.
Downstream: DZ267, DZ47, eB, UB, NBH8, NB1, DZ158
Upstream NM8-125 S/H/R NM8-250 S/H/R

Downstream In (A)
Ii (kA) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 100 160 200 250
≤10 0.19 0.25 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
16 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
DZ267 20 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
C Curves
25 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
32 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
≤10 0.19 0.25 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
16 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
20 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
DZ47, eB, UB 25 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
C Curves 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
32
40 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
50 0.8 1.0 T T T T
60 1.0 T T T T
≤10 0.19 0.25 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
16 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
NBH8 20 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T

B C Curves 25 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
32 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
40 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
≤10 0.19 0.25 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
16 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
20 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
NB1 25 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T

B C D Curves 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
32
40 0.63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
50 0.8 1.0 T T T T
63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
63 0.8 1.0 T T T T
DZ158 80 1.0 T T T T
100 T T T
D1
D2
B
NM8-400 S/H/R NM8-630 S/H/R NM8-800 S/H NM8-1250 S/H
250 315 350 400 250 315 350 400 500 630 700 800 630 700 800 1000 1250
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
Downstream: DZ267, DZ47, eB, UB, NBH8, NB1, DZ158
Upstream NM8S-125 S/H NM8S-250 S/H NM8S-400 S/H/R

Downstream In (A)
Ii (kA) 40 100 125 100 160 200 250 250 315 350 400
≤10 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T

16 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
DZ267
20 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
C Curves
25 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
32 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
≤10 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
16 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
20 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
DZ47, eB, UB 25 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T

C Curves 32 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
40 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
50 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
60 1.0 T T T T T T T T
≤10 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
16 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
NBH8 20 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T

B C Curves 25 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
32 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
40 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
≤10 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
16 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
20 0.5 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
25 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
32 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
NB1 40 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T

B C D Curves 50 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
63 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
63 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
80 1.0 T T T T T T T T
100 T T T T T T T
63 0.8 1.0 T T T T T T T T
80 1.0 T T T T T T T T
DZ158 100 T T T T T T T
125 T T T T T T T
NM8S-630 S/H/R NM8S-800 S/H NM8S-1250 S/H NM8S-1600 S/H
250 315 350 400 500 630 630 700 800 630 700 800 1000 1250 1000 1250 1600
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
B
Downstream: NM8(S)-125~1250
NM8-125 S/H/R NM8-250 S/H/R

Upstream
Downstream In (A)
Ii (kA) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 100 160 200 250
16 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
20 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
25 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
32 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
NM8-125 S 40 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
50 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
63 1.0 2.0 T T T
80 1.25 T T
100 1.25 T T
125 T
16 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
20 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
25 0.5 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
32 0.5 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 T T T
40 0.63 0.8 1.0 2.0 3.6 3.6 3.6

NM8-125 H/R 3.6 3.6
50 0.8 1.0 2.0 3.6
63 1.0 2.0 3.6 3.6 3.6
80 3.6 3.6 3.6
100 3.6 3.6 3.6
125 3.6
40 0.63 0.8 1.0 1.25 T T T

NM8S-125 S/H 100 1.25 T T
125 2.5
100 3
NM8-250 S 160
200
250
100 3
NM8-250 H/R 160

200
250
100 1.6 2 2.5
160 2.5
NM8S-250 S/H
200
250
250
315
NM8-400 S/H/R
350
400
250
315
NM8S-400 S/H/R
350
400
250
315
NM8-630 S/H/R 350
400
500
250 315 350 400 250 315 350 400 500 630 700 800 630 700 800 1000 1250
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
B
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
5 T T T 3 T T T T T T T T T T T T
5 T T 5 T T T T T T T T T T T
5 T 5 T T T T T T T T T T
5 5 T T T T T T T T T
5 T T 3 T T T T 40 40 40 40 40 40 T T
T T 5 T T T 40 40 40 40 40 40 T T
5 T 5 T T 40 40 40 40 40 40 T T
5 5 T 40 40 40 40 40 40 T T
5 5 5 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
5 5 5 T T T T T T T T T T T T T
5 5 T T T T T T T T T T
5 T T T T T T T T T
8 8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
8 8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
30 30 30 30 30 30 T T
30 30 30 30 30 T T
Upstream NM8-125 S/H/R NM8-250 S/H/R

Downstream In (A)
Ii (kA) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 100 160 200 250
250
315
350
NM8S-630 S/H/R
400
500
630
630
NM8-800 S/H 700
800
630
NM8S-800 S/H 700
800
630
700
NM8-1250 S/H 800
1000
1250
630
700
NM8S-1250 S/H 800
1000
1250
1000
NM8S-1600 S/H 1250
1600
Downstream: NM8(S)-125~1250

Downstream In (A)
Ii (kA) 40 100 125 100 160 200 250 250 315 350 400
16 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T

20 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
25 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
32 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
40 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
NM8-125 S
50 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
63 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
80 T T T T T T T
100 T T T T T T
125 T T T T T
16 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
20 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
25 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
32 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
40 1.2 1.2 1.2 T T T T T T T
NM8-125 H/R
50 1.2 1.2 1.2 2 36 36 T T T T
63 1.2 1.2 2 36 36 T T T T
80 2 36 36 T T T T
100 36 T T T T
125 36 T T T T
40 1.2 1.2 2 2 T T T T T T
NM8S-125 S/H 100 2 T T T T T T

125 T T T T T
250 315 350 400 250 315 350 400 500 630 700 800 630 700 800 1000 1250
8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15
12 12
12
12 12 12
12
15
15
15
15
B
15 15
15 15
15 15
NM8S-630 S/H/R NM8S-800 S/H NM8S-1250,1600 S/H
250 315 350 400 500 630 630 700 800 630 700 800 1000 1250
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T
T T T T T T 50 50 50 50 50 50 T T

Downstream In (A)
Ii (kA) 40 100 125 100 160 200 250 250 315 350 400
40 1.2 1.2 2 2 T T T T T T
100 2 T T T T T T
125 T T T T T
100 3 5 5 5 5
160 5 5
NM8-250 S
200
250
100 3 5 5 5 5
160 5 5
NM8-250 H/R
200
250
100 5 5 5 5 5
160 5 5 5 5 5
NM8S-250 S/H
200 5 5
250 5
250
315
NM8-400 S/H/R 350
400
250
315
NM8S-400 S/H/R 350
400
250
315
NM8-630 S/H/R 350
400
500
250
315
350
NM8S-630 S/H/R
400
500
630
630
700
NM8-800 S/H
800
630
NM8S-800 S/H 700

800
630
700
NM8-1250 S/H 800
1000
1250
630
700
NM8S-1250 S/H 800
1000
1250
1000
NM8S-1600 S/H 1250
1600
Note:
a. The area with T indication clarifies total protection discrimination between upstream and downstream circuit breakers;
b. The area with numbers clarifies partial protection discrimination between upstream and downstream circuit breakers;
c. For partial protection discrimination, the Max. fault current values to ensure time discrimination performance are given in the
table; when fault current exceeds this value, upstream and downstream circuit breakers may operate at the same time.
NM8S-630 S/H/R NM8S-800 S/H NM8S-1250 S/H NM8S-1600 S/H
250 315 350 400 500 630 630 700 800 630 700 800 1000 1250 1000 1250 1600
T T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
B
T T T T T T T T T T T T
T T T T T T 40 40 40 40 40 40 T T T T T
T T T 40 40 40 40 40 40 T T T T T
T T 40 40 40 40 40 40 T T T T T
T 40 40 40 40 40 40 T T T T T
T T T T T T T T T T T T T
8 8 8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T T T T
8 8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T T T T
8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T T T T
8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T T T T
8 8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15 15 15 15
8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15 15 15 15
8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15 15 15 15
8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15 15 15 15
8 8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T T T T
8 8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T T T T
8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T T T T
8 30 30 30 30 30 30 T T T T T
30 30 30 30 T T T T T
8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15 15 15 15
8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15 15 15 15
8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15 15 15 15
8 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15 15 15 15
12 12 12 12 12 15 15 15 15 15
12 12 15 15 15 15 15
20 20 20 20 20
15 15 15 15 15
20 20 20 20 20
15 15 15 15 15
11.7 Selection table of components for motor control or protection

400V, 50kA, type2, MCCB normal load start-up
Circuit breaker Contactor Thermal relay

Motor parameters
parameters parameters parameters
Rated Rated Setting of

Rated heating Rated current
power current Model magnetic Model Model
current (A) (A)
(kW) (A) protection (A)
5.5 10.9 NM8-125S/16M 192 NC1-12 20 NR2-25 9~13

7.5 14.4 NM8-125S/20M 240 NC1-18 32 NR2-25 12~18
11 20.9 NM8-125S/25M 300 NC1-25 40 NR2-25 17~25
15 28 NM8-125S/32M 384 NC1-32 50 NR2-36 23~32
18.5 34.1 NM8-125S/40M 480 NC1-40 60 NR2-36 28~36
22 39.4 NM8-125S/50M 600 NC1-50 80 NR2-93 30~40
30 53.4 NM8-125S/63M 756 NC1-65 80 NR2-93 48~65
37 67.9 NM8-125S/80M 960 NC1-80 110 NR2-93 55~70
45 80.5 NM8-125S/100M 1200 NC1-95 110 NR2-93 80~93
55 98.5 NM8-125S/125M 1500 NC2-115 200 NR2-200 80~125
75 133 NM8-250S/160M 1920 NC2-150 200 NR2-200 100~160
90 158.7 NM8-250S/200M 2400 NC2-185 275 NR2-200 100~160
110 192 NM8-250S/250M 3000 NC2-225 275 NR2-200 125~200
132 229 NM8-400S/315M 3780 NC2-265 315 NR2-630 160~250
160 275 NM8-400S/350M 4200 NC2-330 380 NR2-630 200~315
200 343 NM8-400S/400M 4800 NC2-400 450 NR2-630 250~400
250 445 NM8-630S/500M 6000 NC2-500 630 NR2-630 315~500
290 520 NM8S-630S/630M 7560 NC2-630 800 NR2-630 400~630
315 560 NM8S-630S/630M 7560 NC2-630 800 NR2-630 400~630
Note:
1. NM8 and NM8S breakers can replace each other with the same capacity in the table above .
2. NRE8 electronic relays and NR2 thermal relays can replace each other with the same capacity in the table above.
400V, 50kA, type2, MCCB heavy-load start-up
Circuit breaker Contactor Thermal relay

Motor parameters
parameters parameters parameters
Rated Rated Setting of

Rated heating Rated current
power current Model magnetic Model Model
current (A) (A)
(kW) (A) protection (A)
5.5 10.9 NM8-125S/16M 192 NC1-18 32 NR2-25 9~13

7.5 14.4 NM8-125S/20M 240 NC1-25 40 NR2-25 12~18
11 20.9 NM8-125S/25M 300 NC1-32 50 NR2-25 17~25
15 28 NM8-125S/32M 384 NC1-40 60 NR2-36 23~32
18.5 34.1 NM8-125S/40M 480 NC1-50 80 NR2-36 28~36
22 39.4 NM8-125S/50M 600 NC1-65 80 NR2-93 30~40
30 53.4 NM8-125S/63M 756 NC1-80 110 NR2-93 48~65
37 67.9 NM8-125S/80M 960 NC1-95 110 NR2-93 55~70
45 80.5 NM8-125S/100M 1200 NC2-115 200 NR2-93 80~93
55 98.5 NM8-125S/125M 1500 NC2-150 200 NR2-200 80~125
75 133 NM8-250S/160M 1920 NC2-185 275 NR2-200 100~160
90 158.7 NM8-250S/200M 2400 NC2-225 275 NR2-200 100~160
110 192 NM8-250S/250M 3000 NC2-265 315 NR2-200 125~200
132 229 NM8-400S/315M 3780 NC2-330 380 NR2-630 160~250
160 275 NM8-400S/350M 4200 NC2-400 450 NR2-630 200~315
200 343 NM8-400S/400M 4800 NC2-500 630 NR2-630 250~400
250 445 NM8-630S/500M 6000 NC2-630 800 NR2-630 315~500
290 520 NM8S-630S/630M 7560 NC2-630 800 NR2-630 400~630
Note:
1. NM8 and NM8S breakers can replace each other with the same capacity in the table above .
400V, 50kA, type2, MCCB star-delta start-up
Motor Circuit breaker Contactor Thermal relay

parameters parameters parameters parameters
Rated Rated Setting of Rated

Feedback Delta Star
power current Model magnetic Model current
contactor contactor contactor
B
(kW) (A) protection (A) (A)
5.5 10.9 NM8-125S/16M 192 NC1-09 NC1-09 NC1-09 NR2-11.5 5.5~8

7.5 14.4 NM8-125S/20M 240 NC1-12 NC1-12 NC1-09 NR2-11.5 7~10
11 20.9 NM8-125S/25M 300 NC1-18 NC1-18 NC1-09 NR2-25 9~13
15 28 NM8-125S/32M 384 NC1-25 NC1-25 NC1-12 NR2-25 12~18
18.5 34.1 NM8-125S/40M 480 NC1-25 NC1-25 NC1-18 NR2-25 17~25
22 39.4 NM8-125S/50M 600 NC1-32 NC1-32 NC1-18 NR2-36 23~32
30 53.4 NM8-125S/63M 756 NC1-40 NC1-40 NC1-25 NR2-36 28~36
37 67.9 NM8-125S/80M 960 NC1-50 NC1-50 NC1-32 NR2-93 30~40
45 80.5 NM8-125S/100M 1200 NC1-65 NC1-65 NC1-32 NR2-93 37~50
55 98.5 NM8-125S/125M 1500 NC1-80 NC1-80 NC1-40 NR2-93 48~65
75 133 NM8-250S/160M 1920 NC1-95 NC1-95 NC1-50 NR2-93 63~80
90 158.7 NM8-250S/200M 2400 NC2-115 NC2-115 NC2-65 NR2-93 80~93
110 192 NM8-250S/250M 3000 NC2-150 NC2-150 NC2-80 NR2-200 80~125
132 229 NM8-400S/315M 3780 NC2-150 NC2-150 NC2-95 NR2-200 80~125
160 275 NM8-400S/350M 4200 NC2-185 NC2-185 NC2-115 NR2-200 100~160
200 343 NM8-400S/400M 4800 NC2-225 NC2-225 NC2-150 NR2-200 125~200
250 445 NM8-630S/500M 6000 NC2-330 NC2-330 NC2-185 NR2-630 200~315
290 520 NM8S-630S/630M 7560 NC2-400 NC2-400 NC2-185 NR2-630 200~315
315 560 NM8S-630S/630M 7560 NC2-400 NC2-400 NC2-225 NR2-630 250~400
Note:
1. NM8 and NM8S breakers can replace each other with the same capacity in the table above.
3. Breaker is at the power supply side
4. In the delta connection circuit of thermal relay, the setting value is 0.58Ie;
5. The max. start-up time is 20s;
6. When Star type connection is changed into delta connection, the following connection modes of motor are recommended: L1, U1 to V2; L2, V1 to W2; L3, W1 to U2 to
lower the impulse current;
7. The interval of star type connection changing into delta connection is 0.1s.
12. NM8 series accessories description form
Name of accessory Code Frame Pole Remark
Auxiliary AX-8/M8 NM8(S)-125,250,400,630

2P/3P/4P
contact NM8(S)-800,1250
Alarm AL-8/M8
NM8(S)-125,250,400,630 2P/3P/4P
contact
Alarm AL-8/M8-1250
NM8(S)-800,1250 3P/4P
contact
Shunt release SM6:AC220V

SQ6:AC380V
SH6:AC110V NM8-125 2P/3P/4P
SB1:DC24V
SB4:DC110V
SM5:AC220V
SQ5:AC380V
NM8S-125
SH5:AC110V 2P/3P/4P
NM8(S)-250,400,630
SB0:DC24V
SB5:DC110V
SM7:AC220V
SQ7:AC380V
SH7:AC110V
NM8(S)-800,1250 3P/4P
SB3:DC24V
SB7:DC110V
SB2:DC220V
UM6:AC220V
Under voltage release NM8-125 2P/3P/4P
UQ6:AC380V
UM5:AC220V
UQ5:AC380V NM8S-125
2P/3P/4P
UB0:DC24V NM8(S)-250,400,630
UB5:DC110V
UM7:AC220V
UQ7:AC380V NM8(S)-800,1250 3P/4P
UB3:DC24V
Motor driven operating mechanism MO10:AC/DC110V

MO12:AC230/DC220 NM8-125
MO13:AC380
MO22:AC230/DC220 NM8S-125
MO23:AC380 NM8(S)-250
MO30:AC/DC110V 3P/4P
MO32:AC230/DC220 NM8(S)-400,630
MO33:AC380
MO40:AC/DC110V
MO41:AC230/DC220 NM8(S)-800,1250
MO42:AC380
PL13 3P
Plug-in base NM8-125
PL14 4P
PL23 NM8S-125 3P
PL24 NM8(S)-250 4P
PL33 3P
NM8(S)-400,630
PL34 4P
Economical extended rotary RH11 3P

NM8-125
manual operating handle RH14 4P
RH21 NM8S-125 3P
RH24 NM8(S)-250 4P
RH31 NM8(S)-400,630 3P/4P
RH41 NM8(S)-800,1250 3P/4P
Normal direct RH12 NM8-125 3P/4P

rotary manual RH22 NM8-250 3P/4P
operating handle
RH25 NM8S-125/250 3P/4P
RH32 NM8-400,630 3P/4P
RH35 NM8S-400,630 3P/4P
Continued form 1
Normal extended rotary RH13 NM8-125 3P/4P
manual operating handle
RH23 NM8-250 3P/4P
RH26 NM8S-125/250 3P/4P
RH33 NM8-400,630 3P/4P
Locking system
RH36
PD1
PD2
NM8S-400,630
NM8-125
NM8S-125,NM8(S)-250
3P/4P
3P/4P
3P/4P
B
PD3 NM8(S)-400,630 3P/4P
PD4 NM8(S)-800,1250 3P/4P
COMA-2/AC230V NM8(S)-125
NM8(S)-250
COMA-2/AC400V
NM8(S)-400,630
COMA-2/DC24V NM8(S)-800,1250
Mechanical Interlock MI13 3P

NM8-125
MI14 4P
MI23 NM8S-125 3P
MI24 NM8(S)-250 4P
MI33 3P
NM8(S)-400,630
MI34 4P
DIN rail adaptor DIN13 3P

NM8-125
DIN14 4P
DIN23 NM8S-125 3P
DIN24 NM8(S)-250 4P
Rear connection plate BM12 2P

BM13 NM8-125 3P
BM14 4P
BM22 2P
NM8S-125
BM23 3P
NM8(S)-250
BM24 4P
BM33 3P
NM8(S)-400,630
BM34 4P
Short terminal cover ST13 3P

NM8-125
ST14 4P
ST23 NM8S-125 3P
ST24 NM8(S)-250 4P
ST33 3P
NM8(S)-400,630
ST34 4P
ST43 3P
NM8(S)-800,1250
ST44 4P
Extended terminal cover LT13 3P

NM8-125
LT14 4P
LT23 NM8S-125 3P
LT24 NM8(S)-250 4P
LT33 3P
NM8(S)-400,630
LT34 4P
LT43 3P
NM8(S)-800,1250
LT44 4P
Front connection plate FM12 2P

FM13 NM8-125 3P
FM14 4P
FM22 2P
NM8S-125
FM23 3P
NM8(S)-250
FM24 4P
FM33 3P
NM8(S)-400,630
FM34 4P
FM43 3P
NM8(S)-800,1250
FM44 4P
Continued form 1
Cage clamp terminal CT12 2P

CT13 NM8-125 3P
CT14 4P
CT22 2P
NM8S-125
CT23 3P
NM8(S)-250
CT24 4P
CT33 3P
NM8(S)-400,630
CT34 4P
Exterior clamp terminal ET12 C1 2P 1×95

ET13 C1 NM8-125 3P 1×95
ET14 C1 4P 1×95
ET22 C1 2P 1×240
ET23 C1 3P 1×240
ET24 C1 4P 1×240
ET22 C2 2P 2×120
ET23 C2 NM8S-125 3P 2×120
NM8(S)-250
ET24 C2 4P 2×120
ET22 C6 2P 6×35
ET23 C6 3P 6×35
ET24 C6 4P 6×35
ET33 C2 3P 2×240
ET34 C2 4P 2×240
ET33 C4 NM8(S)-400,630 3P 4×95
ET34 C4 4P 4×95
ET43 C3 3P 3×240
ET44 C3 4P 3×240
ET43 C4 NM8(S)-800,1250 3P 4×240
ET44 C4 4P 4×240
13. Model definition and description for NM8 series product
NM8S - 250 H / 160 / 4C / M
Product Frame Breaking

capacity code Rated current Poles Usage code
code current
NM8: Thermal 125 C 16, 20, 25, 32, 2:2 poles M: motor protection
magnetic MCCB 250 S 40, 50, 63, 80, 3:3 poles No code:
NM8S: 400 H 100, 125, 160, 4:4 poles distribution protection
Electronic MCCB 630 R 180, 200, 225, 4A: there is no over current release installed at pole N and
800 250, 315, 350, N pole will always connect, which will not operate with
1250 400, 500, 630, the other three poles.
1600 700, 800, 4B: there is no over current release installed at pole N and
1000, 1250 N pole will operate with the other three poles.
1600 4C: there is over current release installed at pole N and
N pole will operate with the other three poles.
4D: there is over current release installed at pole N and
N pole will always connect.
14. Model definition and description for NM8 accesorries
BM23 / RH12 / UM5 / AX-8/M8
Control mechanism
Connection Accessories Internal Accessories
Accessories
FM12,FM13,FM14: Front connection plate

(NM8-125)
FM22,FM23,FM24: Front connection plate
RH11,RH14: Economical extended
rotary manual operating handle
(NM8-125)
Shunt release
SM6:AC220V
SH6:AC110V
Under voltage release
UM6:AC220V
UQ6:AC380V
Auxiliary
contact
(NM8(S)-125,
B
(NM8S-125 NM8(S)-250) RH21,RH24: Economical extended SQ6:AC380V (NM8-100) NM8(S)-250,400,630,
FM33,FM34: Front connection plate rotary manual operating handle SB1:DC24V UM5:AC220V NM8(S)-800,1250)
(NM8(S)-400,630) (NM8S-125 NM8(S)-250) SB4:DC110V UQ5:AC380V
FM43,FM44: Front connection plate RH31: Economical extended rotary (NM8-125) UB0:DC24V Alarm contact
(NM8(S)-800,1250) manual operating handle UB5:DC110V AL-8/M8
BM12,BM13,BM14: Rear connection plate (NM8(S)-400,630) SM5:AC220V (NM8S-125, (NM8(S)-125,
(NM8-125) RH41: Economical extended rotary SH5:AC110V NM8(S)-250,400,630) NM8(S)-250,400,630)
BM22,BM23,BM24: Rear connection plate manual operating handle SQ5:AC380V UM7:AC220V AL-8/M8-1250
(NM8S-125 NM8(S)-250) (NM8(S)-800,1250) SB0:DC24V UQ7:AC380V (NM8(S)-800,1250)
BM33,BM34: Rear connection plate RH13: Normal extended rotary SB5:DC110V UB3:DC24V
(NM8(S)-400,630) manual operating handle(NM8-125) (NM8S-125, (NM8(S)-800,1250)
PL13,PL14: Plug-in base RH23, RH26: Normal extended rotary NM8(S)-250,
(NM8-125) manual operating handle 400,630)
PL23,PL24: Plug-in base (NM8-250,NM8S-125,250)
(NM8S-125 NM8(S)-250) RH33, RH36: Normal extended rotary SM7:AC220V
PL33,PL34: Plug-in base manual operating handle SH7:AC110V
(NM8(S)-400,630) (NM8-400,630,NM8S-400,630) SQ7:AC380V
DIN13,DIN14: DIN rail adaptor RH12: Normal direct rotary manual SB3:DC24V
(NM8-125) operating handle(NM8-125) SB7:DC110V
DIN23,DIN24: DIN rail adaptor RH22,RH25: Normal direct rotary SB2:DC220V
(NM8S-125 NM8(S)-250) manual operating handle (NM8(S)-800,
CT12, CT13, CT14: Cage clamp terminal (NM8-250,NM8S-125,250) 1250)
(NM8-125) RH32, RH35: Normal direct rotary
CT22, CT23, CT24: Cage clamp terminal manual operating handle
(NM8S-125 NM8(S)-250) (NM8-400,630,NM8S-400,630)
CT33, CT34: Cage clamp terminal MO10, MO12, MO13: Motor driven
(NM8(S)-400,630) operating mechanism(NM8-125)
LT13,LT14: Extended terminal cover MO20，MO22, MO23: Motor driven
(NM8-125) operating mechanism(NM8S-125
LT23,LT24: Extended terminal cover NM8(S)-250)
(NM8S-125 NM8(S)-250) MO30, MO32, MO33: Motor driven
LT33,LT34: Extended terminal cover operating
(NM8(S)-400,630) mechanism(NM8(S)-400,630)
LT43,LT44: Extended terminal cover MO40, MO41, MO42: Motor driven
(NM8(S)-800,1250) operating
ST13,ST14: Short terminal cover mechanism(NM8(S)-800,1250)
(NM8-125) PD1: Locking system(NM8-125)
ST23,ST24: Short terminal cover PD2: Locking system
(NM8S-125 NM8(S)-250) (NM8S-125 NM8(S)-250)
(NM8(S)-400,630) (NM8(S)-400,630)
(NM8(S)-800,1250) (NM8(S)-800,1250)
Communication model
(NM8S-125,250,400,630,800,1250)
P-065 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Note
Note
NM1 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-066
2. Type designation
N M 1－ □ □ □/□ □ □ □
Type of N-pole for 4-P breaker*
Application: Blank: for power
B
distribution;
2: for motor protection
Release type and accessory code

(please refer to table on page 94)
Number of poles
Operation mode: Blank: direct operation with

handle;
P: motor-driven operation;
Z: Operation with rotary handle
Code of Breaking capacity :

C-basic type;
S-standard type;
H-higher type;
R-current limiting type
Frame size rated current

NM1
Design sequence number
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
MCCB code
1. General Company code
Note *: There is types of N-pole for 4P breaker .

1.1 Certificates: KEMA, UKrSEPRO, EAC, RCC, EK;
B: Without current release components, N-Pole makes with the
1.2 Electric ratings: AC 690V,50/60HZ, 10~1250A; other three poles(N-pole first makes then breaks);
1.3 Mounting mode: Vertical and horizontal;

3. Classification
1.4 Standard: IEC/EN60947-2.
According to breaking capacity of breaker:
Standard type (C,S) Higher type (H)
S H
Current-limiting type (R)
R
P-067 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers NM1
According to wiring mode:
Front connection
According to operation mode:
Direct operation with handle Operation with rotary handle Motor-driven operation
According to number of poles:
2P 3P 4P
4.1 Temperature: -5℃~+40℃; the average value within 24h 4.3 Pollution grade: Grade 3
shall not exceed +35℃.(please refer to coefficients on P79
4.4 IP grade: IP30
for temperature compensation correction); for the circuit
breaker with thermo-magnetic release, +40℃ is set to be 4.5 Air conditions
the standard temperature for ratings. For temperature not At mounting site, relative humidity not exceed 50% at the
between -5℃~+40℃, please contact us for temperature max temperature of +40℃, higher relative humidity is
compensation correction. allowable under lower temperature. For example, RH could
be 90% at +20℃, special measures should be taken to
4.2 Altitude: not exceed 2000m (Please contact with us for occurrence of dews.
reduction coefficient if altitude at the mounted site beyond
2000m). .
P-068 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers NM1 NM1 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-069 NM1 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-070
5. Technical data
Frame size current 63 125 250 400 630 800 1250
Electric characteristics as per IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2

Rated current (A) In 40℃ 10, 16, 20, 25, 30, 32, 40, 50, 63 25, 30, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125 100, 125, 140, 150, 160, 175, 180, 200, 225, 250 250, 300, 315, 350, 400 400, 450, 500, 630 630, 700, 800 800, 1000, 1250
Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui
500 800 800 800 800 800 800
Rated impulse withstand voltage(kV) Uimp 6 8 8 8 8 8 8
Rated operational voltage (V)
Arcing distance (mm)
Breaking capacity code
Ue AC 50/60Hz 415
≤50
S H
690
≤50
C S H R
690
≤50
C S H R
690
≤100
S H R
690
≤100
S H R
690
≤100
S H R
690
≤100
H
B
Number of poles 3 3 4 3 3 2 3 4 3 2 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 3 4 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 3
Rated ultimate short-circuit AC 220/230/240V 20 42 42 25 42 65 65 65 85 25 25 25 20 42 42 65 65 65 85 50 50 85 100 50 50 85 100 65 65 85 85 100 85
breaking capacity
AC 380/400/415V 15 35 35 20 25 50 50 50 65 20 20 20 10 25 25 50 50 50 65 35 35 50 70 35 35 50 70 50 50 60 60 70 65
Icu (kA, rms)
Test sequence:O-t-CO AC 660/690V _ _ _ 3 3 _ 8 8 10 _ 5 5 _ 5 5 _ 8 8 10 10 10 12 15 12 12 15 15 12 12 20 20 20 20
Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics (%Icu)

50% 50% 50% 50% 50% 50%
Test sequence:O-t-CO-t-CO
Isolation function ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Utilization class A A A A A A A
Front connection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Rear connection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Plug in type ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Shunt release ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Under-voltage release ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Auxiliary contact ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Alarm contact ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Note:
The symbols O-t-Co, O-t-Co-t-Co are used for defining the sequence of operations.
O: breaking operation; t: the time interval between two successive short-circuit operations;
CO: a making operation followed, after the appropriate opening time, by a breaking operation.
P-071 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers NM1 NM1 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-072 NM1 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-073
6. Release 7. Product overview

Inverse time breaking action property of the over current NM1 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
releasing of the breaker ( for power distribution) at the status
that all poles are electrified simultaneously 1 MCCB (fixed type)
No. Test current I/In Conventional time Initial status

Conventional 2h(In＞63A),
1 1.05 Cold status
non-trip current Ih(In≤63A)
Conventional 2h(In＞63A), Right after

3 Shunt release
2 1.30
trip current Ih(In≤63A) test no. 1
4 Alarm contact
Inverse time-delay breaking operation property of the over
current tripping of the breaker(for motor protection) at the
5 Auxiliary contact
status that all poles are electrified simultaneously(conforms to
IEC60947-3)
6 Motor-driven operation mechanism
Serial Setting Conventional Start-up

Remark
No. current time status
7 Extended manual operation handle
1 1.0In ＞2h Cold status
2 1.2In ≤2h Right after test number 1 8 Mechanical interlock

10A≤In≤25A
≤2min Hot state
25A≤In≤63A 9 Cage clamp terminal
3 1.5In
≤4min Hot state 63A≤In≤125A
≤8min Hot state 125A≤In≤800A

10 Terminal cover
0.5s≤Tp≤5s Cold state 10A≤In≤25A
2s≤Tp≤10s Cold state 25A≤In≤63A

4 7.2In 11 Front connection plate

8. Curves (for power distribution, calibrated at 40℃)
8.1 The characteristic curve of anti-time limit and the correcting curve of temperature see fig.
Fig.1 NM1-63(10~32), NM1-125(25~32) Fig.2 NM1-63(10~32), NM1-125(25~32)

Characteristic Curve Adjustment curve of temperature
10000
7200 130
B
3600
1200
600 120
300
120
110
Rated current(%)
60
Tripping time(s)
30
20
10 100
5
2
1
0.5
90
0.2
0.1
0.05
80
0.02
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 20 -5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Rated current times Ambient temperature (℃)
Fig.3 NM1-63(40~63), NM1-125(40~125) Fig.4 NM1-63(40~63), NM1-125(40~125)

Characteristic Curve Adjustment curve of temperature
10000
7200
3600
1200 130
600
300
120 120
60
30
Rated current(%)
Tripping time(s)
20 110
10
5
2 100
1
0.5
0.2 90
0.1
0.05
80
0.02
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 20 -5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Fig.5 NM1-250 Characteristic Curve Fig.6 NM1-250 Adjustment curve of temperature
10000
7200 130
3600
1200
600 120
300
120
60 110
Rated current(%)
Tripping time(s)
30
20
10 100
5
2
1 90
0.5
0.2
0.1 80
0.05
0.02
-5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 20
Ambient temperature (℃)

Rated current times
10000
7200
3600 130
1200
600
300
120
120
Rated current(%)
60 110
Tripping time(s)
20
10
5 100
2
1
0.5 90
0.2
0.1
0.05 80
0.02
-5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Fig.9 NM1-630, NM1-800 Characteristic Curve Fig.10 NM1-630, NM1-800 Adjustment curve of temperature
130
120 B
110
Rated current(%)
Tripping time(s)
100
90
80
-5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
130
120
Rated current(%)
110
Tripping time(s)
100
90
80
-5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

8.2 Temperature compensation correction

NM1 series temperature compensation coefficient table (calibration at 40℃, for the calibration at other temperature standards
please contact with us)
Current Compensation coefficient

Type
range -5℃ 0℃ 5℃ 10℃ 15℃ 20℃ 25℃ 30℃ 35℃ 40℃ 45℃ 50℃ 55℃ 60℃
NM1-63S, H 10~32A 1.18 1.17 1.16 1.14 1.12 1.09 1.07 1.05 1.03 1 0.97 0.95 0.92 0.87
NM1-63S, H 40~63A 1.16 1.16 1.15 1.14 1.12 1.10 1.08 1.06 1.03 1 0.97 0.94 0.87 0.82
NM1-125C, S, H, R 25~32A 1.18 1.17 1.16 1.14 1.12 1.09 1.07 1.05 1.03 1 0.97 0.95 0.92 0.87
NM1-125C, S, H, R 40~125A 1.16 1.16 1.15 1.14 1.12 1.10 1.08 1.06 1.03 1 0.97 0.94 0.87 0.82
NM1-250 S, H, R 100~250A 1.14 1.13 1.13 1.12 1.10 1.08 1.07 1.05 1.03 1 0.97 0.93 0.86 0.76
NM1-400S, H, R 225~400A 1.13 1.12 1.12 1.11 1.10 1.08 1.06 1.05 1.03 1 0.97 0.93 0.85 0.75
NM1-630S, H, R 400~630A 1.13 1.12 1.12 1.11 1.10 1.08 1.07 1.05 1.03 1 0.97 0.93 0.85 0.75
NM1-800S,H, R 630~800A 1.13 1.12 1.12 1.11 1.10 1.08 1.07 1.05 1.03 1 0.97 0.93 0.85 0.75
NM1-1250H 700~1250A 1.14 1.13 1.12 1.11 1.10 1.09 1.07 1.05 1.03 1 0.97 0.92 0.85 0.76
9. Wiring
Front connection(Fixed connection)
Extended connection terminals (for products 10~1250A, extended terminals are available) Connection screws
C B A
Front connection screw Front connection screw

Breaking Breaking
Frame Current Frame Current
capacity Hexagonal Hexagonal Cross capacity Hexagonal Hexagonal Cross
level (A) level (A)
code head screw (A) socket screw (B) screw (C) code head screw (A) socket screw (B) screw (C)
S ■ C ■ ■
10
H ■ S ■ ■
80
S ■ H ■ ■
16
H ■ R ■ ■
20
S
H
■
■
125 100
C
S
■
■
■
■ B
S ■ H ■ ■
25
H ■ R ■ ■
S ■ C ■ ■
30
H ■ S ■ ■
63 125
S ■ H ■ ■
32
H ■ R ■ ■
S ■ S ■
40
H ■ 100 H ■
S ■ R ■
50
H ■ S ■
S ■ 125 H ■
60
H ■ R ■
S ■ S ■
63
H ■ 140 H ■
C ■ ■ R ■
S ■ ■ S ■
25
H ■ ■ 150 H ■
R ■ ■ R ■
C ■ ■ S ■
S ■ ■ 160 H ■
30
H ■ ■ R ■
250
R ■ ■ S ■
C ■ ■ 175 H ■
S ■ ■ R ■
32
H ■ ■ S ■
R ■ ■ 180 H ■
C ■ ■ R ■
S ■ ■ S ■
40
H ■ ■ 200 H ■
R ■ ■ R ■
125
C ■ ■ S ■
S ■ ■ 225 H ■
50
H ■ ■ R ■
R ■ ■ S ■
C ■ ■ 250 H ■
S ■ ■ R ■
60
H ■ ■ S ■ ■
R ■ ■ 225 H ■ ■
C ■ ■ R ■ ■
S ■ ■ S ■ ■
63
H ■ ■ 400 250 H ■ ■
R ■ ■ R ■ ■
C ■ ■ S ■ ■
S ■ ■ 300 H ■ ■
75
H ■ ■ R ■ ■
R ■ ■
Front connection screw Cage clamp terminals (for products 16~400A, cage clamp
Breaking
Frame Current
capacity Hexagonal Hexagonal Cross terminals are available)
level (A)
code head screw (A) socket screw (B) screw (C)
S ■ ■
315 H ■ ■
R ■ ■
S ■ ■
400 350 H ■ ■
R ■ ■
S ■ ■
400 H ■ ■
A type B type
R ■ ■
S ■
400 H ■
R ■
S ■ LINE LOAD LOAD
450 H ■
R ■ LINE
LOAD
LINE
LINE
LOAD
OFF
ON ON
■
LOAD
LINE
S
OFF
ON
630 500 H ■ OFF LINE
ON
OFF
LOAD LOAD
R ■ (2)
S ■
LOAD
630 H ■ LINE LINE
(1) (3) (4)
R ■
H ■
630
R ■ Modes of down-lead (1) and (2) illustrated in the figure are
H ■ available for your wiring operation. For its breaking capacity may
800 700
R ■
be affected, mode of down-lead (3) is not recommended, before
H ■
800 reception of any authorized announcement from the
R ■
manufacturer; the mode of down-lead (4) is prohibited for your
wiring.
10. Overall and mounting dimensions
Fig.15a NM1-63, 125, 250 fixed connection
Barrier for Barrier for

arcing isolation arcing isolation A A
A
2×Φd A 2×Φd
G
B
G G H2
G1
G1
G1
H4
F F
L1
L2
C
B
E
L
E
L2
B
C
E
L
22
22
H3
6×Φd
4×Φd H
H1(max)
W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 W1
W4 W3 W W2
2P 3P 4P
(mm)
NM1-125C NM1-125H NM1-250H

Dimension NM1-63S NM1-63H NM1-250S/1P NM1-250S
NM1-125S NM1-125R NM1-250R
C 85 85 85 85 102 102 102
E 48 48 51 51 51 51 51
F 23 23 23 23 22 23 23
G 14 14 17.5 17.5 23 23 23
G1 6.5 6.5 7.5 7.5 11.5 11.5 11.5
H 70 80 67 86 86 87 103.5
H1 91 100 86 104 109 110 127
H2 19 28 24 24 24 24 24
Overall H3 6 6 4 4 4.5 3.5 3.5

dimensions H4 5 5 7 7 6 5.5 5.5
L 135 135 155 155 165 165 165
L1 235 235 255 255 - 360 360
L2 117 117 136 136 144 144 144
W 76 76 90 90 105 105
W1 25 25 30 30 - - 35
W2 - 103 - 120 - - 140
W3 - - - 65 - - 75
W4 - - - - 35 - -
A 25 25 30 30 28 35 35
Mounting
B 117 117 130.5 130.5 109 126 126
dimensions Φd 4.5 4.5 4.5×6 4.5×6 3.5 5 5

Overall and mounting dimensions of NM1-400, 630, 800, 1250(Fixed type)
Barrier for Barrier for

A arcing isolation A A1 arcing isolation
G1
H5
H4
F F
H3
C1
L1
L2
E
E
C
B
L
22 22
4×Φd 6×Φd H2
H
W1 W1 W1 W1 W1 H1(max)
W W2
3P 4P
(mm)
NM1-400S NM1-630S
Dimension NM1-400H NM1-630H NM1-800H/R NM1-1250H
NM1-400R NM1-630R
C 128 136 136 265.5

C1 174 184.5 204 345.5
E 89 89 81 100
F 66 66 66 78
G 31 40.5 45 -
G1 12 15.5 12 -
H 107 112 116 141
H1 162 164.5 168 202
Overall H2 38 42 42 1250:56； 700A~1000A:54

dimensions H3 6 6.5 4.5 19
H4 5 3.5 5 2
H5 4.5 4.5 8 4.5
L 257 270.5 280 406*
L1 459 472 490 715
L2 224 234 243 -
W 150 182 210 210
W1 48 58 70 70
W2 198 240 280 -
A 44 58 70 70
Mounting A1 50 58 70 -
dimensions 200
B 194 243 375
Φd 7 7 7 10
*Note: Lengh of NM1-1250H with the connection board, is 545mm

11. Accessories
Inner accessories
Auxiliary contact Shunt release Alarm contact Under-voltage release

Left Right
Handle
B
Accessory code Mounting and wiring mode
NM1-63S,H
NM1-125C,S,H,R
Magnetic Compound NM1-125H,R NM1-250S,H
Accessory NM1-1250H
only release release NM1-250H,R NM1-400S,H,R
NM1-630S,H,R
NM1-800H, R
2P 3P 4P 3P
No accessory 200 300
Alarm contact 208 308
Shunt release 210 310
Auxiliary contact 220 320
Under-voltage release 230 330
Shunt release,
240 340
auxiliary contact
Shunt release,
250 350
under-voltage release
Two groups of
auxiliary contacts 260 360
Auxiliary contact,
270 370
under-voltage release
Shunt release,
218 318
alarm contact
Auxiliary
228 328
alarm contact
Under-voltage release,
238 338
auxiliary alarm contact
Shunt release, auxiliary

alarm contact 248 348
Two groups auxiliary contact

268 368
of auxiliary alarm contact
278 378
auxiliary alarm contact
Note：■Shunt release ▲Under-voltage release ○Auxiliary contact ●Alarm contact

11.1 Under-voltage release

a. Un=70~35% Us, reliable operation
b. Un=＜35% Us, prevent breaker from making
c. Un=＞85% Us, guarantee the breaker making
The rated voltage of the under-voltage release is 50Hz,
230V and 400V.
Code of under-voltage release
code A2 A4
voltage AC 230V AC 400V
rated frequency 50Hz 50Hz
11.2 Shunt release

The rated control voltage of shunt release is 50Hz,
230V and 400V.
Un=70%~110% Us, reliable operation
Code of shunt release
code A2 A4 D3
voltage AC 230V AC 400V DC 24V
rated 50Hz/ 50Hz/ -

frequency 60Hz 60Hz
Note: when voltage is DC 24V, rated current should be up to 5A±10%
Wiring diagram of shunt release
11.3 Auxiliary contact and alarm contact
Rated parameter of auxiliary contact
Frame size Conventional heating current Ith (A) Rated current Ie (A) at AC 400 V Rated current Ie (A) at DC 230 V
Inm≤250A 3 0.26 0.14
Inm≥400A 6 3 0.2
a. Auxiliary contact
F12
Circuit breaker is at “breaking” status F11
F14
F12
Circuit breaker is at “making” status F11
F14
B
b. Alarm contact
When circuit breaker normally makes and breaks, alarm contact
doesn't operate. After free release (or release due to failure)
alarm contact operate; and after the circuit breaker operates
again,alarm contact returns to the original status.
Circuit breaker is at "breaking" or B12

“making" status B11
B14
B12
Circuit breaker is at free release B11
(or alarming) status
B14
Wiring diagram of NM1 auxiliary contact
Power
Power
supply
supply
Making
circuit
Breaking
circuit
External accessories
11.4 Motor-driven operation mechanism
Model
NM1-63 NM1-125, NM1-250, NM1-400, NM1-630, NM1-800, NM1-1250
Items
Structure form Motor

Code of AC/DC voltage A1/D1, A2/D2, A4
Note: A1 AC 110V, A2 AC 230V, A4 AC 400V, D1 DC 110V, D2 DC 230V

Making and breaking diagram of

motor-driven operation mechanism(AC/DC)
K2
M
1
K1 Y
X M
K2 K2 M
S3 Y
K1 K1
Making S1 2 S3
X 1 2 3 4
S2 3
T S1 Making
Breaking
T S2 Breaking
U~
With self-locking relay Without self-locking relay
Specification AC 50Hz 230V or 400V Specification AC 50Hz 230V or 400V
Rotary manual operation mechanism
Making/breaking wiring diagram of manual operation mechanism
Circuit breaker H
Y 20
24
D
Min=150mm
Mounting dimensions of manual operation mechanism
Φ61
B
53
Φ36
45°
chain
2×Φ5.5
≥200
Boring diagram of
handle mounting
(mm)
NM1-800H NM1-1250S
Model NM1-63 NM1-125 NM1-250 NM1-400 NM1-630
NM1-800R NM1-1250H
Mounting
51 51 54 88 89 96 83
size H
Y value of the
handle related
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
to the center
of the breaker
Mounting and boring dimensions
A C A
B
F
8-φd
A breaker E B breaker
(mm)
Model A B C D E F L Φd
NM1-63 25 117 80 30 80 135 182 4.5
NM1-125 30 130.5 90 30 90 155 210 4.5×6*
NM1-250 35 126 100 30 100 165 240 5.5
NM1-400 44 194 136 30 40 257 330 7
NM1-630 58 200 172 48 62 270 412 7
NM1-800 70 243 167 28 40 280 448 7
Note:
1. * stands for length of boring.
2. Install the breaker on the frame first, then install the mechanical interlock on the breaker.
12. Complementary technical information

12.1 The customized products of NM1-250, of which the capacity can be enriched to 250A is available.
12.2 NM1-1250 products are equipped with connection plate when they are sold; if you need connection plate for products of other
model, the connection plate should be ordered separately.
12.3 Only H type breaker is applicable to manufacture NM1 series switch disconnector.
12.4 Terminal covers of the whole series NM1 products are available, and the protection degree can be up to IP40 after the breaker is
equipped with terminal cover.
.12.5 Safe distance between other electric apparatuses for mounting. B
For NM1-400~800
For NM1-63~250
(mm)
Type
NM1-63 NM1-125 NM1-250 NM1-400 NM1-630 NM1-800 NM1-1250
Distance(min)
Line side 50 50 50 100 100 100 100
Load side 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Right side 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
Left side 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
12.6 Tightening torque table
Wire size(copper) Rated current Tightening torque(N·m)

(A)
AWG/MCM mm2 Front connection plate Boxing terminal
16-6 1.5-16 10≤In≤63 5 3
4-3 25-50 63＜In≤125 10 8
1-250 50-120 100＜In≤250 12 10
250-500 120-240 250＜In≤400 22 16
300×2 150×2 400＜In≤500 28 18
350×2 185×2 500＜In≤630 28 20
500×2 240×2 630＜In≤800 30 -
350×4 185×4 800＜In≤1250 30 -
12.7 Technical Data of NM1 series
Frame Number Icu/Ics(kA)

Model Ui (V)
current (A) of poles 220V 230V 240V 380V 400V 415V 660V 690V
NM1-63S 3 500 20/10 15/7.5 -
63
NM1-63H 3/4 500 42/21 35/17.5 -
NM1-125C 3 800 25/12.5 20/10 3/1.5

NM1-125S 3 800 42/21 25/12.5 3/1.5
125 65/32.5 50/25 -
2 800
NM1-125H
3/4 800 65/32.5 50/25 8/4
NM1-125R 3 800 85/42.5 65/32.5 10/5
1 800 20/10 10/5 -
NM1-250S
3/4 800 42/21 25/12.5 5/2.5
250 2 800 65/32.5 50/25 -
NM1-250H
3/4 800 65/32.5 50/25 8/4
NM1-250R 3 800 85/42.5 65/32.5 10/5
NM1-400S 3/4 800 50/25 35/17.5 10/5
400 NM1-400H 3 800 85/42.5 50/25 12/6
NM1-400R 3 800 100/50 70/35 15/7.5
NM1-630S 3/4 800 50/25 35/17.5 12/6
630 NM1-630H 3 800 85/42.5 50/25 15/7.5
NM1-630R 3 800 100/50 70/35 20/10
NM1-800H 3/4 800 85/42.5 60/30 20/10
800
NM1-800R 3 800 100/50 70/35 20/10
1250 NM1-1250H 3 800 85/42.5 65/32.5 20/10

Frame Number Icu/Ics(kA)

Model Ui (V)
current (A) of poles 220V 230V 240V 380V 400V 415V 660V 690V
NM1-63S 3 500 20/40 15/30 -

63
NM1-63H 3/4 500 42/88.2 35/73.5 -
NM1-125C 3 800 25/52.5 20/40 -
NM1-125S 3 800 42/88.2 25/52.5 -

125
NM1-125H
2
3/4
800
800
65/43
65/43
50/105
50/105
-
-
B
NM1-125R 3 800 85/187 65/143
1 800 20/40 - -
NM1-250S
2/ 3/4 800 42/88.2 25/52.5 -
250
NM1-250H 2/ 3/4 800 65/136.5 50/105 -
NM1-250R 3 800 85/187 65/143 -
NM1-400S 3/4 800 50/105 35/73.5 -
400 NM1-400H 3 800 85/187 50/105 -
NM1-400R 3 800 100/220 70/154 -
NM1-630S 3/4 800 50/105 35/73.5 -
630 NM1-630H 3 800 85/187 50/105 -
NM1-630R 3 800 100/220 70/154 -
NM1-800H 3/4 800 85/187 60/132 -

800
NM1-800R 3 800 100/220 70/154 -
1250 NM1-1250H 3 800 85/187 65/143
Note: Parameters in black are only for your reference.

12.8 Cascading
12.8.1 Cascading (220/230/240V)
Downstream: DZ47, eB, UB, DZ158, DZ267, NB1, NBH8, NM1-63~1250
Upstream
NM1-63S NM1-63H NM1-125S NM1-125H NM1-125R NM1-250S NM1-250H
Breaking capacity
20 42 25 50 65 25 50
(kA RMS)
Downstream Breaking capacity (kA RMS)
DZ267 20 40 20 35 50 20 25
DZ47, eB, UB 20 40 20 35 50 20 25
NBH8 20 40 20 35 50 20 25
NB1(Icn=6000A) 20 42 25 35 50 25 35
NB1(Icn=10000A) 20 42 25 40 50 25 35
DZ158 25 40 50 25 40
NM1-63S 42 25 50 65 25 50
NM1-63H 65
NM1-125S 50 65 50
NM1-125H 65
NM1-250S 50
NM1-250H
NM1-400S
NM1-400H
NM1-630S
NM1-630H
NM1-800H
NM1-1250H
12.8.2 Cascading (380/400/415V)

Downstream: DZ47, eB, UB, DZ158, DZ267, NB1, NBH8, NM1-63~1250
Upstream
NM1-63S NM1-63H NM1-125S NM1-125H NM1-125R NM1-250S NM1-250H
Breaking capacity
15 35 25 50 65 25 50
(kA RMS)
Downstream Breaking capacity (kA RMS)
DZ47, eB, UB 10 15 10 15 15 10 15
NB1(Icn=6000A) 15 20 15 20 20 15 20
NB1(Icn=10000A) 15 20 20 25 25 20 25
DZ158 20 25 35 20 25
NM1-63S 35 25 50 65 25 50
NM1-63H 65
NM1-125S 50 65 50
NM1-125H 65
NM1-250S 50
NM1-250H
NM1-400S
NM1-400H
NM1-630S
NM1-630H
NM1-800H
NM1-1250H
NM1-250R NM1-400S NM1-400H NM1-400R NM1-630S NM1-630H NM1-630R NM1-800H NM1-800R NM1-1250H
65 35 50 70 35 50 70 60 70 65
B
30
30
30
35
40
50 30 40 50
65
65
65 50 70 50 70 60 70 65
65 70 70 70
65 50 70 50 70 60 70 65
65 70 70 70
50 70 50 70 60 70 65
70 70 70
50 70
70
70
NM1-250R NM1-400S NM1-400H NM1-400R NM1-630S NM1-630H NM1-630R NM1-800H NM1-800R NM1-1250H
65 35 50 70 35 50 70 60 70 65
15
20
25
35 20 25 35
65
65
65 50 70
65 70 50 70 60 70 65
65 50 70 70 70
65 70 50 70 60 70 65
50 70 70 70
70 50 70 60 70 65
70 70
50 70
70
70
NM8N Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
1 Body
2 Thermo magnetic release
3 Electronic release
4 Communication module
5 Cell box
6 Cable connector
7 Front connection plate
8 Rear connection plate
22
9 Cage clamp terminal
10 Residual current protection module

21
11 Long terminal cover

20
12 Short terminal cover
13 Direct rotary handle 19 18
17
14 Economic extended rotary handle
15 Extended rotary handle
16 Motor driven operating mechanism
17 Mechanical interlock
16
18 Locking system
19 Closing electromagnet
15
21 Shunt release
22 Alarm contact
23 Auxiliary contact
24 Interphase barrier
14
13
25 Plug-in base
26 Draw-out base
27 DIN rail adaptor
28 Plug and pull safety device

24
23
25 28
26
27
4
2
10
7
11
12
NM8N Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-093
1. General
NM8N series moulded case circuit breaker is suitable for the circuit of AC
50/60Hz, with rated voltage AC690V and below, DC system rated voltage
DC1000V and below, and rated current of 16A and 1600A. It can protect circuits
and electric equipment against overload, short circuit or undervoltage, and
can also provide protection of overload, short circuit and under voltage for
infrequent start of motor.
Products have functions of power distribution protection, motor protection,

residual current protection and isolation.
The circuit breaker can be installed vertically, installed horizontally and can also
enter the line from the bottom.
Standards compliant:
IEC 60947-1 general rules for low-voltage switchgear and control equipment;
IEC 60947-2 low-voltage switchgear and control equipment circuit breakers;
IEC 60947-3 low-voltage switchgear and control equipment switches,
disconnectors and fuse combination appliances;
IEC 60947-4-1 Electromechanical contactors and motor starters
(including motor protectors) for low voltage switchgear and control equipment
2.1 Temperature:
Operating and storage temperature is -40° C~+70° C; the average value
within 24 hours does not exceed +35° C; when the ambient temperature is
-40° C~+70° C, users need to consider derating or temperature compensation
whose details can be referred to in Page
2.3 Pollution grade: Grade 3;
2.4 IP grade: IP40
2.5 Air conditions:

At mounting site, relative humidity not exceed 50% at the max temperature
of +40 ℃ , higher relative humidity is allowable under lower temperature. For
example, RH could be 90% at +20 ℃ , special measures should be taken to
occurrence of dews.
P-094 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers NM8N
3. Type designation
3.1 NM8N Moulded Case Circuit Breaker and Switch Disconnector
NM8N □-□□□□□□
Special application
Poles:
1P: 1-pole
2P: 2-pole
3P: 3-pole
4B: 4-pole, there is no over-current protection at
pole N and N-pole operates with other three poles
4C: 4-pole, there is over-current protection at pole N
and N-pole operates with other three poles
Rated current
125 : 16-20-25-32-40-50-63-80-100-125
250 : 32-63-100-125-160-180-200-225-250
400 : 250-315-350-400
630 : 400-500-630
800 : 500-630-700-800
1600 : 800-1000-1250-1600
Release type code

TM: Thermal-magnetic type
EN: Basic electronic type for power distribution
EM: Standard electronic type for power distribution
M: Magnetic type for motor protection
ENM: Basic electronic type for motor protection
EMM: Standard electronic type for motor protection
Blank：Switch disconnector type
Breaking capacity code: B, C, S, Q, H, R

(Switch disconnector type has no code)
Frame size rated current:

125：125A；250：250A；400：400A
630：630A；800：800A；1600：1600A
DC: DC MCCB
Blank: AC MCCB
SD: Switch disconnector
Design code
MCCB
Company code
3.2 NM8NL Residual Current Circuit Breaker
NM8NL -□□□□□□□
Rated residual current code:
RCD1: 0.03-0.1-0.3-1A adjustable
(Applicable to the frame size of 125-250-400-630)
RCD2: 0.05-0.2-0.5-2A adjustable (Applicable to the
frame size of 125-250)
RCD3: 0.05-0.2-0.5-1A adjustable (Applicable to the
RCD4: 0.1-0.3-1-2A adjustable (Applicable to the
Rated residual current type:

Default: AC type, A: A type
Pole code:
3P: 3-pole
4B: 4-pole, there is no over-current protection at
pole N and N-pole operates with other three poles
4C: 4-pole, there is over-current protection at pole
N and N-pole operates with other three poles
Rated current :
125 : 16-20-25-32-40-50-63-80-100-125
250 : 32-63-100-125-160-180-200-225-250
400 : 250-315-350-400
630 : 400-500-630
Release type code:

TM: Thermal-magnetic type
EN: Basic electronic type for power distribution
EM: Standard electronic type for power distribution
M: Magnetic type for motor protection
ENM: Basic electronic type for motor protection
EMM: Standard electronic type for motor protection
Breaking capacity code：C/S/Q/H/R

125：125A；250：250A；400：400A；630：630A
Residual current code
Design code
MCCB
Company code
4. Technical data
NM8N Moulded Case Circuit Breaker 125 250

Magnetic type 16-20-25-32-40-50-63-80-100-125 125-160-180-200-225-250
Rated operating
Thermal-magnetic type 16-20-25-32-40-50-63-80-100-125 125-160-180-200-225-250
current In (A), 40 ℃
Electronic type — 32-63-100-160-250
Electric characteristics
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) 8 8
Rated operational voltage Ue(V),AC 50/60Hz 380/400/415,440,500,660/690 380/400/415,440,500,660/690
Breaking capacity code C S Q H R C S Q H R

1P ■ ■ — — — ■ ■ — — —
2P ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Number of poles
3P ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
4P ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
AC220/230/240V1) 36 50 — — — 36 50 — — —
Rated ultimate AC380/400/415V 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150
short-circuit
AC440V 36 50 70 100 100 36 50 70 100 100
breaking
capacityIcu(kA) AC500V 25 40 40 50 50 25 40 40 50 50
AC660/690V 6 8 8 10 10 6 8 8 10 10
AC220/230/240V1) 36 50 — — — 36 50 — — —
Rated service AC380/400/415V 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150
breaking AC440V 36 50 70 100 100 36 50 70 100 100
capacityIcs(kA) AC500V 25 40 40 50 50 25 40 40 50 50
AC660/690V 6 8 8 10 10 6 8 8 10 10
Rated short-time withstand current Icw (kA,1s) — 1(32A,63A);2(100A,160A);3(250A)
Utilization category A A
Ambient temperature -40℃ ~+70℃ 2)

Safety of insulation ■ ■
Arcing distance 0 0
Mechanical life
Maintenance free 15000 15000
(CO recycle)
Electrical life AC415V,In 8000 6000
(CO recycle) AC690V,In 2000 1500
Release units
TM ■ ■
Distribution
EN — ■
protection
EM — ■
M ■ ■
Motor
ENM — ■
protection
EMM — ■
Mounting and connection
Front connection ■ ■
Fixed
Rear connection ■ ■
3)
Plug-in
Front connection — —
Draw-out3)
Rear connection — —
DIN rail Front connection ■ ■
Dimension
Width（1P/2P/3P/4P） 35/62/90/120 40/70/105/140
Dimension (mm)
Height 140 157
W╳H╳D
Depth 78.5 88.7
Weight
1P 0.5 0.75
2P 0.83 1.3
Weight(kg)/Fixed
3P 1.19 1.85(TM/M)；2.0(EN/EM)
4P 1.55 2.5(TM/M)；2.65(EN/EM)
Note：1）For 1 pole product only；

2）
The operating temperature of basic (dial code) electronic type is -35° C~+70° C, and the operating temperature
of standard (liquid crystal) electronic type is -25° C~+70° C;
3）
For 3/4 pole product only；
4）
The data in "()" is for motor type.
400 630 800 1600

250-315-350-400 400-500 500-630-700-800 —
250-315-350-400 400-500 500-630-700-800 800-1000-1250-1600
250-400 400-630 630-800 800-1000-1250-1600
1000 1000 1000 1000

12 12 12 8
380/400/415,440,
380/400/415,440,500,660/690 380/400/415,440,500,660/690 380/400/415,440,500,660/690
500,660/690
C S Q H R C S Q H R C S Q H R S Q H
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 50 70 100
36 50 70 100 100 36 50 70 100 100 36 50 70 100 100 50 65 —
25 40 40 50 50 25 40 40 50 50 25 40 40 50 100 40 50 —
10 12 12 15 15 10 12 12 15 15 12 15 15 20 30 30 30 30
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 50 70 70
36 50 70 100 100 36 50 70 100 100 36 50 70 100 100 40 50 —
25 40 40 50 50 25 40 40 50 50 25 40 40 50 100 30 40 —
10 12 12 15 15 10 12 12 15 15 12 15 15 15 15 30 30 30
5 5(400A);8(630A) 10 20
IEC/EN 60947-2
A(Thermal-magnetic)/
A(Thermal-magnetic)/B(Electronic) A(Thermal-magnetic)/B(Electronic) A(Thermal-magnetic)/B(Electronic)
B(Electronic)
-40℃ ~+70℃ 2)
■ ■ ■ ■
0 0 0 0
15000 15000 10000 6000
4000 4000(400A)/3000(630A) 2000 1000

1500 1500 1000 1000
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ —
■ ■ ■ —
■ ■ — ■
■ ■ ■ —
■ ■ — —
■ ■ — —
■ ■ ■ —
■ ■ ■ —
— — — —
140/185 140/185 195/260 210/280

255 255 300 286
113 113 133 167（195）4)
— — — —
— — — —
5.2(TM/M)；5.8(EN/EM) 5.5(TM/M)；6.0(EN/EM) 10.5(TM/M)；10.5(EN/EM) 13.5(16)4)
6.7(TM/M)；7.8(EN/EM) 7.0(TM/M)；8.0(EN/EM) 13.5(TM/M)；13.5(EN/EM) 17.5(20)4)
NM8N DC Moulded Case Circuit Breaker 125 250
Rated operating current In (A), 40 ℃ 16-20-25-32-40-50-63-80-100-125 125-160-180-200-225-250
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 8
Rated operational voltageUe(V),DC 250， 500， 750， 1000 250， 500， 750， 1000
Breaking capacity code B C S Q H B C S Q H
1P ■ ■ ■ — — ■ ■ ■ — —
2P ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Number of poles
3P ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
4P ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
DC250V 1P 25 36 50 — — 25 36 50 — —
Rated ultimate
short-circuit DC500V 2P in series 25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100
breaking capacity DC750V 3P in series 25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100
Icu(kA)
DC1000V 4P in series 25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100
DC250V 1P 25 36 50 — — 25 36 50 — —
Rated service DC500V 2P in series 25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100
breaking capacity
Ics(kA) DC750V 3P in series 25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100
DC1000V 4P in series 25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100
Ambient temperature -40℃ ~+70℃
Safety of insulation ■ ■
Arcing distance 0 0
Mechanical life
Maintenance free 15000 15000
(CO recycle)
Electrical life
DC1000V,In 2000 1500
(CO recycle)
Release units
Distribution
TM ■ ■
protection
Fixed
Plug-in1)
Front connection — —
Draw-out1)
Rear connection — —
DIN rail Front connection ■ ■
Dimension
Width（1P/2P/3P/4P） 35/62/90/120 40/70/105/140

Dimension (mm)
Height 140 157
W╳H╳D
Depth 78.5 88.7
Weight
1P 0.5 0.75
2P 0.83 1.3
Weight(kg)/Fixed
3P 1.19 1.85
4P 1.55 2.5
Note: 1）For 3/4 pole product only.

400 630 800 1600

800-1000-
250-315-350-400 400-500 500-630-700-800
1250-1600
1000 1000 1250 1000
12 12 12 8
750， 1000 750， 1000 750， 1000 750， 1000
B C S Q H B C S Q H B C S Q H B C
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100 25 36
25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100 25 36
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100 25 36
25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100 25 36 50 70 100 25 36
IEC/EN 60947-2
A A A A
-40℃ ~+70℃
■ ■ ■ ■
0 0 0 0
15000 15000 10000 6000
1500 1500 1000 1000
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ — ■
■ ■ ■ —
■ ■ — —
■ ■ — —
■ ■ ■ —
■ ■ ■ —
— — — —
140/185 140/185 195/260 210/280
255 255 300 286
113 113 133 167
— — — —
— — — —
5.2 5.5 10.3 13.5
6.7 7 13.5 17.5

NM8NL Residual Current protection module 125 250 400 630
Rated operating current In (A), 40 ℃ 125 250 400 630
Number of poles 3P、4P 3P、4P 3P、4P 3P、4P
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 1000 1000 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 8 12 12
Rated operational voltageUe(V),AC 50/60Hz 380/400/415、440 380/400/415、440 380/400/415、440 380/400/415、440

16-20-25-32-40-50- 125-160-180-200-225-
TM 250-315-350-400A 400-500A
63-80-100-125 250
EN — 32-63-100-160-250 250-400 400-630
Rated current (A) EM — 32-63-100-160-250 250-400 400-630

of circuit breaker 16-20-25-32-40-50- 125-160-180-200-225-
M 250-315-350-400A 400-500A
63-80-100-125 250
ENM — 32-63-100-160-250 250-400 400-630
EMM — 32-63-100-160-250 250-400 400-630

RCD1（Four-step
0.03-0.1-0.3-1 0.03-0.1-0.3-1 0.03-0.1-0.3-1 0.03-0.1-0.3-1
adjusable）
RCD2（Four-step
Rated residual 0.05-0.2-0.5-2 0.05-0.2-0.5-2 — —
adjusable）
operating current
IΔn(A) RCD3（Four-step
— — 0.05-0.2-0.5-1 0.05-0.2-0.5-1
adjusable）
RCD4（Four-step
— — 0.1-0.3-1-2 0.1-0.3-1-2
adjusable）
Rated residual non-operating current
0.5IΔn 0.5IΔn 0.5IΔn 0.5IΔn
IΔno(A)
1)
Limit non-actuating time (ms) Δt : 0-60-200-500
Maximum breaking Total breaking time
100-300-500-1000 100-300-500-1000 100-300-500-1000 100-300-500-1000
time (ms) (adjustable)
Rated residual making and breaking capacity
0.25Icu 0.25Icu 0.25Icu 0.25Icu
IΔm(kA)
Leakage alarm non-tripping function □ □ □ □
Residual current type A/AC A/AC A/AC A/AC
Safety of insulation ■ ■ ■ ■
Arcing distance 0 0 0 0
Dimension
Width（3P/4P） 90/120 105/140 140/185 140/185

Dimension with circuit
breaker (mm) Height 205 232 355 355
W×H×D
Depth 78.5 88 113 113
Weight
Weight of residual 3P 0.43 0.84 1.98 1.98
current protection
module (kg) 4P 0.51 1.08 2.69 2.69
Note：1）When the residual operating current is set to 0.03A, the limit non-actuating time must be set to 0.
NM8NSD Switch Disconnector 125 250 400 800 1600

NM8NSD Switch Disconnector
125 250 400 800 1600
Ith(A),40℃
Number of poles 2P 3P 4P 2P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
Rated operational 800-1000-1250-
125 250 400 800
current Ie(A) 1600
Rated operational AC (50/60Hz) 690 690 690 690 415/690

voltage Ue(V) DC 500 750 1000 500 750 1000 750 1000 750 1000 750 1500
AC : 1000
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 1000 1000 1000 1250
DC : 1500
Rated impulse withstand
8 8 12 12 12
voltage Uimp (kV)
Rated short-circuit making capacity
3.2(AC)/2(DC) 5(AC)/3.2(DC) 8(AC)/5(DC) 14 40(AC)/19.2(DC)
Icm(kA)
Rated short-time 1s 2 3.2 5 8/10 20(AC)/19.2(DC)
withstand current
Icw(kA) 3s 2 3.2 5 8/10 20
Standard IEC/EN 60947-3，GB/T 14048.3

AC-22A/AC-23A AC-22A/AC-23A AC-22A/AC-23A AC-22A/AC-23A AC-22A/AC-23A
Utilization category
DC-22A/DC-23A DC-22A/DC-23A DC-22A/DC-23A DC-22A/DC-23A DC-22A/DC-22B
Safety of insulation ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Arcing distance 0 0 0 0 0
Mechanical life
Maintenance free 15000 15000 15000 10000 6000
(CO recycle)
AC415V,In 8000 6000 4000 2000 1000
Electrical life
AC690V,In 2000 1500 1500 1000 1000
(CO recycle)
DC1000V,In 2000 1500 1500 1000 1000
Front connection ■ ■ ■ — ■
Fixed
Rear connection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Front connection ■ ■ ■ — —
Plug-in1)
Rear connection ■ ■ ■ — —
Front connection — — ■ ■ —
Draw-out1)
Rear connection — — ■ ■ —
DIN rail Front connection ■ ■ — — —
Dimension
Width（2P/3P/4P） 62/90/120 70/105/140 140/185 195/260 210/280

Dimension(mm)
Height 140 157 255 300 286
W×H×D
Depth 78.5 88 113 133 167（195）2)
Weight
2P 0.81 1.1 — — —
Weight(kg)/Fixed 3P 1.05 1.75 5 9.5 13(15.5)2)
4P 1.5 2.4 5.5 12.5 17(19.5)2)
Note: 1）For 3/4 pole product only；

2）
The data in "()" is for motor type
5. Release
5.1 Protection for power distribution
5.1.1 Thermo-magnetic type release TM
Thermo-magnetic release of NM8N-125, 250, 400, 630, 800 and 1600 breakers can be set to meet
protection requirements
Thermo-magnetic
125 250 400 630 800 1600
release TM
2P/3P
Number of poles 1P 1P 2P/3P/4P 3P/4P 3P/4P 3P/4P 3P/4P
4P
16/20/25 125/160 160/180
250/315 500/630 800/1000
Rated curent 32/40/50 180/200 125 200/225 400/500
350/400 700/800 1250/1600
63/80/100/125 225/250 250
Over-load protection
1.0 0.7- 1.0
Setting current
Non- 0.8- Non- 0.7-0.8-0.9-1.0 0.8-0.9-1.0
（A）Ir=In х adjustable 0.9-1.0 adjustable
Short-circuit instantaneous protection
7-8-
Setting current
10 10 9-10- 5-6-7-8-9-10
（A）Ii=In х
11-12
Accuracy ±20%
N-pole protection
Setting current
/ 10 / The same with the other three-phase poles.
（A）IiN=In х
Accuracy ±20%
5.1.2 Basic electronic type release for power distribution EN

EN electronic trip unit has three-stage protection of overload, short circuit short time-delay and
short circuit instantaneous protection.
Electronic type EN 250 400 630 800 1600
Over-load Setting current Ir=In ╳ 0.4-0.5-0.6-0.7-0.8-0.9-0.95-1.0
long-time delay
protection 6Ir Tripping time Tr(s) 3-6-12-18, Accuracy ±10%
Short circuit Setting current Isd=Ir× 1.5-2-3-4-6-8-10, OFF, Accuracy ±15%

short-time delay 0.1-0.2-0.3-0.4，Accuracy ±20% or ±40ms(higher value will
protection Tripping time Tsd(s)
be selected)
Short circuit Setting current Ii=In× 2-3-4-6-8-10-12, OFF, Accuracy ±15%
instantaneous
protection Max. tripping time (ms) 60
IrN=(0.5,1)xIn, OFF; IsdN=(1.5-2-3-4-6-8-10)IrN
Neutral line Setting current
IiN=(2-3-4-6-8-10-12)IrN
protection
Tripping time (s) The same with the other three-phase poles.
● Overload protection and tripping time setting

—The current value Ir can be adjusted according to the user's needs. The tripping time Tr is at the
status of 6Ir.
● Short circuit short-time delay protection and trip time setting
—The current value Isd can be adjusted according to the user's needs. Tripping time Tsd is the short-
circuit short time-delay tripping time, which can be adjusted according to user needs.
● Short circuit instantaneous protection characteristics setting
—The current value Ii can be adjusted according to the user's needs.
● Neutral line protection feature setting
The four-pole circuit breaker N-pole protection current value can be adjusted according to user
needs. The N pole tripping time is the same with the other three-phase poles.
5.1.3 Standard electronic type release for power distribution EM

EM release has four-stage protection of overload, short circuit short-time delay, short circuit
instantaneous protection and earth fault, with real-time current display, protection parameter
information display, fault information display and parameter setting function
Run
Alarm
>0.9Ir
>1.05Ir
COM
EM
Electronic type EM 250 400 630 800 1600

Over-load Setting current Ir=In ╳ 0.4~1.0, Stepping1A
long-time delay
protection 6Ir Tripping time Tr(s) 3~18, 1s, Accuracy ±10%
Short circuit Setting current Isd=Ir× 1.5~10, Stepping1A, OFF, Accuracy ±15%
short-
time delay 0.1-0.2-0.3-0.4, Accuracy ±20% or ±40ms(higher value
Tripping time Tsd(s)
protection will be selected)
Short circuit Setting current Ii=In× 1.5~12, Stepping1A, OFF, Accuracy ±15%
instantaneous
Earth fault Setting current Ig=In ╳ 0.4-0.5-0.6-0.7-0.8-0.9-1.0, OFF, Accuracy ±15%

protection Tripping time (s) 0.1-0.2-0.3-0.4,Accuracy ±15%
Neutral line Setting current IrN=(0.5,1)xIn; IsdN=(1.5~10)IrN; IiN=(1.5~12)IrN; 可 OFF

protection Tripping time (s) The same with the other three-phase poles.
● Overload protection and tripping time setting

— Current setting value Ir , the user can adjust the range according to the ↑ and ↓ buttons on the
panel, the range is (0.4~1.0) In, and the tripping time Tr is at the status of 6Ir, which can be adjusted
according to user needs.
● Short circuit short-time delay protection and tripping time setting
—The current setting value Isd can be adjusted according to the user's needs, and the “OFF”
indicates function can be turned off. Tripping time Tsd is the short-circuit short-time delay tripping
time, which can be adjusted according to user needs.
● Short circuit instantaneous protection characteristics setting
—The current setting value Ii can be adjusted according to the user's needs, and the “OFF”
indicates function can be turned off.
● Neutral line protection feature setting
—Neutral line protection of the four-pole circuit breaker (current setting value InN ), the setting
range is 0.5In , 1I n or OFF, which can be adjusted according to the user's needs. The “OFF”
position indicates that the N pole has no protection function.
● Earth fault protection
Earth fault Ig can be adjusted according to user needs, where the “OFF” means the function can
be turned off.
t
5.2 Protection for motor

5.2.1 Motor starting characteristics
At present, most of the motors use three-phase asynchronous induction motors, and a large part
td of them use the direct start mode, namely, the electric energy does not take artificial restriction
measures, and directly feeds to start the motor, which is also called full-pressure start. When the
asynchronous motor is directly started, a high starting current of 4 to 7 times of the rated current
occurs. The reason why the asynchronous motor has a large starting current is that the motor
has certain inertia, and the rotor speed cannot be immediately changed to the rated speed after
starting. At this time, the relative rotational speed of the rotating magnetic field of the stator
In Id Id ’ I (synchronous speed of the motor, slightly higher than the rated speed) is large. The rotor winding
Motor starting Current curve cuts the stator magnetic field at a large speed to generate a large current; at the same time, the
magnetic field generated by the large current of the rotor in turn induces the stator winding, so
that the current also rapidly increases.
Startup parameter
Rated current (In ): current value of the motor under rated operation
Starting current (Id): The current when the motor starts, its magnitude varies with different
conditions, the average value is 7.2×In
Start peak current (Id ,): Transient current during the first two half-waves after the motor is powered
on, typically 14 × In
Start-up time (td): generally 0.5~20s, which refers to the time when the motor has starting current
Direct startup impact on the protection device
For circuit breakers with magnetic protection, if the conventional current of the magnetic trip unit
is set incorrectly, the circuit breaker will mistake the start current of the motor for short-circuit
current, causing the circuit breaker to malfunction. For the independent thermal relay, the heat
generated by the large starting current during the motor starting phase will also cause the relay
to trip. For the contactor, if the motor needs electric or regenerative braking, it needs to be able
to be broken during the motor starting phase. It generally needs to derate, in order to avoid the
malfunction of the protection device caused by the start current:
The inverse time characteristic curve of the independent thermal relay is required to be completely
above the starting current.
The short-circuit current trip setting of the circuit breaker with magnetic protection should be
greater than the peak starting current of the motor.
5.2.2 Protection solution

The NM8N Series offers start-up, control and protection solutions for two three-phase
asynchronous motors:
Three-component solution
Electromagnetic protection circuit breaker + contactor + thermal relay

Among them, the electromagnetic protection circuit breaker is used for short circuit protection, the
contactor is used for motor operation, and the thermal relay is used for overload, phase loss and
phase unbalance protection.
1）Magnetic release M
The electromagnetic protection circuit breaker has a current range of 125~800A, an adjustable
range of 9~14In and an accuracy of 20%. It is especially suitable for use in the classic three-
component protection solution.
Magnetic M 125 250 400 630 800

Pole 3P/4P 3P/4P 3P/4P 3P/4P 3P/4P
Short circuit instantaneous protection
Setting current（A）Ii=In х 12 9-10-11-12-13-14
Accuracy ±20%
N pole protection
Setting current（A）IiN=In х 12 The same with the other three-phase poles.Ii
Accuracy ±20%
Two-component solution
Integrated protection electronic circuit breaker + contactor
In the two-component solution, there is no need to use the thermal relay, and the integrated
protection electronic circuit breaker has the functions of overload, phase loss, phase unbalance
protection and short circuit protection. The integrated protection electronic circuit breaker not only
has high tripping precision, but also has reliable operation. The two-component solution consisting
of contactors and the installation time can be saved without being affected by the ambient
temperature.
2）Integrated protection: Basic electronic type release for motor protection ENM
The ENM electronic trip unit allows for tighter tolerance trip times, as detailed in the table below.
Electronic type ENM 250 400 630 800
Setting current Ir=In ╳ 0.4-0.5-0.6-0.7-0.8-0.9-1.0, OFF
Overload
4、8、16,
long-time delay 7.2Ir Tripping time Tr(s) 48、16、24, Accuracy ±10%
Accuracy ±10%
protection
Tripping level 5、10、20 5、10、20、30
Short circuit Setting current Isd=Ir× 5-6-8-9-10-11-12, OFF, Accuracy ±15%
short-time delay
protection Tripping time Tsd(ms) 100,Accuracy ±40
Short circuit Setting current Ii=In× 151）
instantaneous
Phase unbalance/Phase failure Iunbal 30%-40%-50%-60%-70%-80%-90% (Phase failure)-OFF
Max. trip time of phase imbalance (s) 4-6-8-10,Accuracy ±10%
Tripping time of phase failure (s) 0.25,Accuracy ±20%
IrN=(0.5,1)xIn;IsdN=(5-6-8-9-10-11-12)IrN
Neutral line Setting current
IiN=15IrN, OFF
protection
Tripping time The same with the other three-phase poles
Note: 1）Setting current Isd<Ii(within tolerance).
3）Integrated protection: Standard electronic type release for motor protection EMM
The EMM electronic release not only has the protection function of the ENM release, but also adds
ground fault protection and stall protection. Moreover, it can also display real-time current, display
protection parameter information, display fault information, and have parameter setting function.
Electronic type EMM 250 400 630 800
Protection current Ir=In ╳ 0.4~1.0，Stepping1A, OFF
Overload
4、8、16,
long-time delay 7.2Ir Tripping time Tr(s) 4、8、16、24, Accuracy ±10%
Accuracy±10%
protection
Tripping level 5、10、20 5、10、20、30
Short circuit Protection current Isd=Ir× 4~12, Stepping1A, OFF, Accuracy ±15%
short-time delay
protection Tripping time Tsd(ms) 100, Accuracy ±40
Short circuit Protection current Ii=In× 151）
instantaneous
protection Max. tripping time(ms) 60
Protection current Ig=In ╳ 0.4-0.5-0.6-0.7-0.8-0.9-1.0，OFF, Accuracy ±15%
Earth fault
protection 0.1-0.2-0.3-0.4, Accuracy ±20% or 40ms(higher
Tripping time (s)
value will be selected)
Phase unbalance/Phase failure Iunbal 30%-40%-50%-60%-70%-80%-90%(Phase failure)-OFF
Max. trip time of phase imbalance (s) 4-6-8-10, Accuracy ±10%
Tripping time of phase failure (s) 0.25, Accuracy ±20%
Locked-rotor current Ijam (3~10)Ir，Stepping1A, OFF(Defalut), Accuracy ±15%
Tripping timeTjam(s) 1~30, Step size1s, Defalut 5, Accuracy ±10%
Neutral line Setting current IrN=(0.5,1)xIn, OFF; IsdN=(4~12)IrN; IiN=15IrN, OFF
protection Tripping time The same with the other three-phase poles.
1）
Note: Setting current Isd<Ii(within tolerance).
6. Tripping curve
6.1 Thermal-magnetic type for power distribution
NM8N-125(16A,20A,25A,32A)
NM8N-125(40A,50A,63A)
NM8N-125(80A,100A,125A)
NM8N-250(125A)
NM8N-250(160A,180A)
NM8N-250(200A,225A,250A)
NM8N-400(250A~400A)
NM8N-630(400A~500A)
NM8N-800(500A~800A)
NM8N-1600(800A~1600A)
6.2 Magnetic type for motor protection
NM8N-125(16A~125A)
Maximum heat withstand capacity
NM8N-250(125A~250A)

NM8N-400(250A~400A)
NM8N-630(400A~500A)
NM8N-800(500A~800A)

6.3 Electronic type for power distribution
EN Basic electronic type
Long-time Ir= (0.4, 0.5, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 0.95, 1)In Instantaneous Ii= (OFF, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 ) In
delay Tr= (3, 6, 12, 18) s
Short-time Isd= (OFF, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 ) Ir

delay Tsd= (0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4) s
EM Standard electronic type
Long-time delay Ir= (0.4~1)In Tr= (3~18)s Instantaneous Ii= (1.5~12 ) In Earth fault Ig= (0.4~1 ) In Tg=(0.1~0.4)s
Short-time
Isd= (1.5~10)Ir Tsd=(0.1~0.4)s
delay
6.4 Electronic type for motor protection
ENM Basic electronic type
Long-time Ir=(OFF,0.4,0.5,0.7,0.8,0.9,1)In @7.2Ir Instantaneous Ii= 15 In

delay Class= (5, 10, 20, 30)
Short-time Isd= (OFF,5,6,8,9,10,11,12 )Ir

delay Tsd= 0.1s
EMM Standard electronic type
Long-time Ir=(0.4~1)In @7.2Ir Instantaneous Ii= 15 In Earth fault Ig= (0.4~1 ) In Tg=(0.1~0.4)s
delay Class= (5, 10, 20, 30)
Short-time
Isd= (4~10)Ir Tsd=0.1s
delay
7. Mounting of circuit breaker
7.1 Modes of down-lead
Incoming method
7.2 Modes of mounting
Modes of mounting
7.3 Safe distance
Zero arc
Zero arc Zero arc
Zero arc
8. Overall and Mounting Dimensions
8.1 NM8N-125
NM8N-125 Front connection (1P/2P)
Front connection
Phase barrier
Unit:(mm)
Front connection
Phase barrier
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-125 Rear connection (1P/2P)
Unit:(mm)
Rear connection
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-125 Plug-in front connection
Mounting plate
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-125 Plug-in rear connection
Vertical connection
Horizontal connection
Mounting plate
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-125 DIN-rail mounting
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-125 DIN-rail mounting (DIN-rail adapter is needed)
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-125 Mechanical interlock
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-125 Terminal cover
3P Long terminal cover 4P Long terminal cover
3P Short terminal cover 4P Short terminal cover
Unit:(mm)
8.2 NM8N-250
Front connection
Front connection
Phase barrier
Unit:(mm)
Front connection
Phase barrier
Unit:(mm)
Unit:(mm)
Rear connection
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-250 Plug-in front connection
Mounting plate
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-250 Plug-in rear connection
Mounting plate
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-250 DIN-rail mounting
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-250 DIN-rail mounting (DIN-rail adapter is needed)
Unit:(mm)
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-250 Terminal cover

Unit:(mm)
8.3 NM8N-400/630
NM8N-400/630 Front connection
Front connection Phase barrier
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-400/630 Rear connection
Rear connection
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-400/630 Plug-in front connection
Mounting plate
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-400/630 Plug-in rear connection
Vertical connection
Mounting plate
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-400/630 DIN-rail mounting
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-400/630 Mechanical interlock
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-400/630 Long terminal cover
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-400/630 Short terminal cover
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-400/630 Draw-out type
Front connection
Rear connection
Unit:(mm)
Dimension
Current Pole
DIN-rail mounting
Installation dimension
Pole
DIN-rail mounting
Rear connection
Installation floor
Front connection
Installation floor
Installation dimension of rear plate connection

Current
Pole
L7=90 when it is front connection, the rest of dimensions are the same with rear connection
8.4 NM8N-800
NM8N-800 Front connection (3P)
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-800 Front connection (4P)
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-800 Rear connection
N pole
Unit:(mm)
135.5
135.5
269
269
3P 4P
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-800 Short terminal cover
300.6
97.5
195 113
260
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-800 Long terminal cover
516.6
516.6
195
113
97.5
260 131.5
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-800 Draw-out type
Front connection
Rear connection
Unit:(mm)
Dimension
Pole
DIN-rail mounting
Pole
Rear connection
Installation floor
Front connection
Installation floor
Pole
L7=200 when it is front connection, the rest of dimensions

are the same with rear connection
8.5 NM8N-1600
NM8N-1600 Front connection (Manual type 3P)
Connection row
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-1600 Front connection (Manual type 4P)
Connection row
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-1600 Front connection (Motor type 3P)
Connection row
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-1600 Front connection (Motor type 4P)
Connection row
Unit:(mm)
8.6 NM8NL
NM8NL-125 Front connection
Connection row
Phase barrier
Unit:(mm)
NM8NL-125 Rear connection
Unit:(mm)
NM8NL-125 DIN-rail mounting
Unit:(mm)
NM8NL-250 Front connection
Unit:(mm)
NM8NL-250 Rear connection
Unit:(mm)
NM8NL-250 DIN-rail mounting
Unit:(mm)
NM8NL-400/630 Front connection
Unit:(mm)
NM8NL-400/630 Rear connection
Unit:(mm)
NM8NL-400/630 DIN-rail mounting
Unit:(mm)
8.7 NM8N Wiring diagram
NM8N-125 Cable connector
Unit:(mm)
Z
26
62.5
62.5
95
95
NM8N-125 Product center

NM8N-125 Product center
NM8NL-125 Product center NM8NL-125 Product center
MC21-M8 1hole CCT21-M8 1hole

Z
Z
40
70
70
107.5
107.5
Product center
NM8N-250产品中心 Product center
NM8N-250产品中心
Product center
NM8NL-250产品中心 Product center
NM8NL-250产品中心
CCT22-M8 1hole MC22-M8 1hole
Z
52
41
70
107.5
70
107.5
Product center
Product center
NM8NL-250产品中心 NM8NL-250产品中心
Product center
Unit:(mm)
MC22-M8 2 hole MC22-M8 6 hole
Unit:(mm)
Z Z
73
Z
56
113.5
113.5
113.5
163.5
163.5
163.5
Product center
NM8N-400/630产品中心 Product center
NM8N-400/630产品中心 NM8N-400/630产品中心
Product center
Product center
NM8NL-400/630产品中心 Product center
NM8NL-400/630产品中心 NM8NL-400/630产品中心
Product center
CCT23-M8 1hole MC23-M8 2 hole MC23-M8 4 hole

42
132.5
Product center
Unit:(mm)
MC24-M8 2 hole
Unit:(mm)
Z Z
85.5
85.5
129
129
Product center
MC25-M8 4 hole MC25-M8 3 hole

8.8 Wiring
NM8N-125 NM8N-250
≤4
≤6
≥7.5 Φ7 ≤4 ≥9.5
Φ7 Φ8.5 ≤6
≤7.5 Φ8.5
≤8.5
2
≤14. .2
≤14 ≤25 ≤25
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-400/630 NM8N-800
≤8 ≤10
≤8
Φ10.5
≥15 ≥20 ≤10
Φ10.5 Φ13 Φ13
≤12.5 ≤16
≤30
≤30 ≤50 ≤50
Unit:(mm)
NM8N-1600
≤20
≥14 Φ10.5
25
≤16
≤55
Unit:(mm)
9. Accessories characteristics and installation

NM8N moulded case circuit breaker has various accessory modules, which can be
found in P84 for more details
9.1 AX Auxiliary contact

9.1.1 Function
Remotely indicate the circuit breaker's making (on) or breaking / tripping (OFF) status,
connected to the auxiliary circuit of the circuit breaker.
9.1.2 Model description
AX 21-M8
Serial code: NM8N series
Frame size code: Auxiliary contacts are universal accessories

for each frame, with default as code 21
Auxiliary contact name code
9.1.3 Indication of circuit breaker status
Circuit breaker is at breaking status F12

F11
F14
F12 F11
Circuit breaker is at making status
F14
9.1.4 Electrical characteristics

Rated Rated current (A)
voltage (V) AC-15 DC-13
AC 110 5 —
AC 240 4 —
AC 415 2 —
DC 110 — 0.25
DC 220 — 0.25
9.1.5 Wiring diagram
Power supply
Making circuit
Breaking circuit
9.2 AL Alarm contact

9.2.1 Function
It is mainly used to provide a signal when the load of the circuit breaker is overloaded,
short-circuited or undervoltage, or tripped.
The reasons for the failure of the alarm signal are:
• Over-load or short-circuit
• Undervoltage trip
• Residual current action trip
• Manual free trip
AL 21-M8
Serial code: NM8N series
Frame size code: Alarm contacts are universal accessories

for each frame, with default as code 21
Alarm contact name code
9.2.3 Indication of circuit breaker status

Circuit breaker is at breaking
or making status
Circuit breaker is at free tripping
status
AC-15 DC-13
AC 110 5 —
AC 240 4 —
AC 415 2 —
DC 110 — 0.25
DC 220 — 0.25
B11 QF
电源 supply
Power
TRIP B14
报警指示
Alarm status
Normal status
B12
Breaking or making 正常指示
9.3 SHT Shunt release

9.3.1 Function
Shunt releases operate according to electrical signals, enabling remote control and
automatic control of circuit breakers. When the supply voltage When the voltage
is equal to any voltage between 70% and 110% of the rated control power supply
voltage, the shunt release should enable the circuit breaker to operate reliably.
SHT 21-M8 AC48V
Rated voltage：AC48V/110V/220-240V/380-415V;
DC24V/48V/110-120V/220V
Series code: NM8N series
Frame code: 21 for 125 frame; 22 for 250/400/630 frame; 24 for 800 frame;
25 for 1600 frame
Shunt release code
Power consumption (W)

Frame size AC220- AC380-
AC48V AC110V DC24V DC48V DC220V
240V 415V
125A 2.2 2.2 2 2.5 2.5 2.2 2
250/400/630A 2.3 2.5 2.2 2.5 2.2 2.5 2.5
800A 2.3 2.5 2.2 2.5 2.2 2.5 2.5
1600A 110 195 480 560 230 110 160
9.3.4 Action characteristics

Can be powered for a long time. Response time: pulse type ≥ 20ms, ≤ 60ms
Shunt release
C1 C2
SB
Note：When the rated control power supply voltage DC24V shunt release is used, the
maximum length of the copper wire (each of the two wires) must meet the following table:
Conductor cross-sectional area
Rated control 1.5mm2 2.5mm2

supply voltageUs(DC24V)
100%Us 150m 250m
85%Us 100m 160m
9.4 UVT Under-voltage release

9.4.1 Function
Realize the under-voltage protection function of the circuit breaker, open the
circuit breaker when the power supply voltage is too low, and protect the electrical
equipment.
• When the supply voltage drops (even slowly) to 70% to 35% of the rated control
supply voltage, the undervoltage trips The breaker should open the circuit breaker
reliably.
• When the supply voltage is equal to or greater than 85% of the rated control supply
voltage of the undervoltage release, the circuit breaker should be guaranteed to close.
• When the supply voltage is less than 35% of the rated control supply voltage of the
undervoltage release, the undervoltage release should prevent the circuit breaker.
UVT 21-M8 AC48V
Rated voltage: AC48V; AC110V;AC220-240V;AC380-415V;

DC24V;DC48V;DC110-120V;DC220V
Frame size code: 21 for 125 frame; 22 for 250/400/630 frame; 24 for 800 frame;
25 for 1600 frame
Under-voltage release code
Power consumption (W)

Frame size AC220- AC380- DC110-
AC48V AC110V DC24V DC48V DC220V
240V 415V 120V
125A 1.6 1.6 2 3 1.2 1.6 2 2.2
250/400/630A 1.5 1.5 2.2 3 0.8 1.5 2 2.5
800A 1.5 1.5 2.2 3 0.8 1.5 2 2.5
1600A 2.6 2.2 1.7 0.7 2.8 2.5 2.2 1.8
U<
9.5 MOD Motor-driven mechanism

9.5.1 Function
It is suitable for closing, opening and re-opening of circuit breakers at long distances,
as well as automation applications.
A: Protection level: IP40
• Reliable insulation;
• With isolation function indication;
• O (open), I (closed) and free trip 3 position indications;
• Free circuit breaker trip;
• Manually or automatically operated circuit breakers for closing and opening.
B: manual operation
Pull the "manual / auto" switch to the manual position and turn the operation handle
to switch on and off the circuit breaker.
C: automatic operation
Pull the "manual / auto" switch to the automatic position, and remotely press the
"close or open" button to switch on and off the circuit breaker.
D: Automatically switch on or off by pulse or self-holding signal control.
E: Only when the control voltage is ≥ 85% Un and ≤ 110% Un can the circuit breaker
be reliably switched on and off.

MOD 21-M8 AC110/DC110-120V
Rated voltage: AC110/DC110-120V;AC220-240V/DC220V;

AC380-415V;DC24V
Frame size code: 21 for 125 frame; 22 for 250 frame; 23 for 400/630
frame; 24 for 800 frame; 25 for 1600 frame
Motor-driven mechanism code
Note: The 1600 frame motor-driven mechanism is assembled in the factory and is
suitable for electronic circuit breakers and disconnectors according to the inside of the
circuit breaker.

Minimum
Frame Rated operational Life(CO Power Action Making Breaking duration of
size voltage recycle) consumption current duration duration ON (OFF)
signal pulse
125A 10000 150 VA ≥ 3A ≤ 500ms ≤ 500ms 300ms
250A 10000 150 VA ≥ 3A ≤ 500ms ≤ 500ms 300ms

AC110V/DC110-120V
AC220-240V/DC220V
400/630A AC380-415V 8000 300 VA ≥ 3A ≤ 1000ms ≤ 1000ms 300ms
DC24V
800A 4000 300 VA ≥ 3A ≤ 1000ms ≤ 1000ms 300ms
1600A 7000 75VA ≥ 3A ≤ 1000ms ≤ 1000ms 300ms
Power
supply
9.5.5 Installation dimension drawing
Overall and mounting dimension of MOD21-M8
Motor-driven
mechanism center
Product center
Overall dimension of MOD22-M8

Mounting dimension of MOD22-M8
Motor-driven
mechanism center
Product center
Motor-driven
mechanism center
Product center
Motor-driven
mechanism center
Product center
9.6 SRH Economic extended rotary handle

9.6.1 Function
The unique design and transmission structure are adopted to realize the closing,
opening and re-closing operation of the circuit breaker by rotating the handle.
• The circuit breaker can be locked in the OFF position with 1 ~ 3 padlocks with a
diameter of 5 ~ 8mm. At this time, it can prevent the circuit breaker from closing and
the switch cabinet from opening;
• When the switch is in the ON position, the cabinet door cannot be opened under the
action of the rotary handle (if the cabinet door is opened urgently, the cabinet door
can be opened by the emergency unlocking device on the handle).

SRH 21-M8 3P
Number of poles: 3P; 4P (only applicable to 125, 250 frames); 400A and above
frames have no code
Frame size code: 21 for 125 frame; 22 for 250 frame; 23 for 400/630 frame;
24 for 800 frame; 25 for 1600 frame
Economic extended rotary handle code
Overall and mounting dimension of SRH21-M8
Hinge
Hinge
Hinge
Product center
Handle center
Hinge
210 225
60
15
52
X Product center X
28.5
X1 Handle center X1
170
29
210(3P)
Min=50
280(4P) 150
Y1 Y
112
4Xø4.2
ø36
X1
150
112
X1
≥200
Y1 Y1
9.7 DRH Direct rotary handle

9.7.1 Function
• The circuit breaker can be locked in the OFF position through 1~3 padlocks with a
diameter of 5 ~ 8mm.
• (Padlock user prepared)
DRH 21-M8 T
Circuit breaker type: T: Thermal magnetic circuit breaker, M: Magnetic circuit

breaker, SD: Switch disconnector; E: Electronic circuit breaker
Direct rotary handle code
Overall dimension of DRH21-M8
Handle center
Product center
Handle center
Product center
Handle center
Product center
9.8 ERH Extended rotary handle

9.8.1 Function
• When the switch cabinet door is open, the setting value of the circuit breaker release
can be set;
• When the switch cabinet door is opened, it can prevent the circuit breaker from
closng;
• The circuit breaker can be locked in the OFF position through (1 ~ 3) padlocks with a
diameter of (5 ~ 8) mm;
• (Padlock user prepared) can prevent the switch cabinet door from opening at this
time;
• When the switch is in the ON position, the cabinet door cannot be opened under
the action of the rotary handle (if the cabinet door is opened urgently, the cabinet
door can be opened by the emergency unlocking device on the handle).

ERH 21-M8 T
Circuit breaker type: T: Thermal magnetic circuit breaker, M: Magnetic circuit

breaker, SD: Switch disconnector; E: Electronic circuit breaker
Extended rotary handle code

Overall and mounting dimension of ERH21-M8
Handle center
Product center
Hinge
Handle center
Product center
Hinge
Handle center
Product center
Hinge
9.9 LHD Extended handle

9.9.1 Function
With a unique design, the circuit breaker can be closed, opened and re-latched by
rotating the handle. It is only applicable to 1600A.
LHD 25-M8
Frame size code: 25 for 1600 frame
Extended handle code
9.9.3 Overall dimension
140 366max
60
o
30
210(3P)
280(4P)
9.10 KLK Locking system

9.10.1 Function
The locking system locks the open position of the circuit breaker.
• The locking system can be equipped with (1 ~ 3) padlocks with a diameter range (5
~ 8) mm.
• (Padlock user prepared)）
KLK 21-M8
Frame size code: 21 for 125 frame; 22 for 250 frame; 23 for 400/630 frame
Extended handle code
9.11 MIT Mechanical interlock

9.11.1 Function
When used together with two circuit breakers with the same housing, when one circuit
breaker is closed, the other circuit breaker cannot be closed and is in the open state.
MIT 21-M8 3P
Poles: 3P; 4P（It is only applicable to 25、250、400、630 壳架）;800 No code for

shell frame
24 for 800 frame
Mechanical interlock code
9.12 TCV Short terminal cover

9.12.1 Function
Prevents contact with the main circuit and can also be used to prevent short circuit
between phases.
For voltages ≥ 500V, terminal covers must be fitted

TCV 21-M8 3P
Poles: 3P; 4P
24 for 800 frame
Short terminal cover code

9.13 TCE Long terminal cover

9.13.1 Function
Prevents contact with the main circuit and can also be used to prevent short
circuit between phases. There are knock-out holes in front of the terminal cover to
accommodate various lug cables and front wiring.
For voltages ≥ 500V, terminal covers must be fitted

TCE 21-M8 3P
Number of poles: 3P; 4P
24 for 800 frame
Long terminal cover code
9.14 FCP Front connection plate

9.14.1 Function
Make the circuit breaker have a flexible wiring mode. By installing this accessory, the
pole spacing can be increased to increase the electrical gap between adjacent poles at
the inlet and outlet ends of the circuit breaker and enhance the safety between lines.
FCP 25-M8 3P(16001）)
Number of poles: 1P / 2P (only for 125A and 250 frames); 3P; 4P
25 for 1600 frame
Front connection plate code
1）
Note : Only applicable to 1600 frame, there are three specifications of 1000, 1250, 1600
9.15 RCP Rear connection plate

9.15.1 Function
Make the circuit breaker have flexible wiring mode, which can realize the wiring behind
the board

RCP 21-M8 2P
Number of poles: 1P / 2P (only for 125A and 250 frames); 3P; 4P
24 for 800 frame
Rear connection plate code

9.16 CCT Cage clamp terminal

9.16.1 Function
Make the circuit breaker have a flexible wiring mode, which can directly connect the
bare wires.
CCT21/22-M8 CCT 21-M8
Cage clamp terminal code
CCT23-M8 9.16.3 Wiring capacity

Serial No. Wiring capacity Torque
CCT21-M8 (2.5~75)mm2 8N.m
CCT22-M8 (10~120)mm2 10N.m
CCT23-M8 (120~240)mm2 35N.m
9.17 MC Cable connector

9.17.1 Function
Make the circuit breaker have a flexible wiring method, which can directly connect the
bare wires and realize the connection of multiple wires.
MC 25-M8(3)(12501）)
Current specifications
Number of external holes: (1) 1 hole; (2) 2 holes; (3) 3 holes; (4) 4 holes; (6) 6 holes
24 for 800 frame; 25 for 1600 frame;
Cable connector code
Note1）: Only applicable to 1600 housing, only 800-1250 specifications
9.17.3 Wiring capacity

Serial No. Wiring capacity Torque Note
MC21-M8 (1) (16~95)mm2 10N.m 1hole
MC22-M8 (1) (35~240)mm2 30N.m 1hole
MC22-M8 (2) 2x(35~120)mm2 30N.m 2holes
MC22-M8 (6) 6x(10~35)mm2 10N.m 6holes
MC23-M8 (2) 2x(120~240)mm2 35N.m 2holes
MC23-M8 (4) 4x95mm2 15N.m 4holes
MC24-M8 (2) 2x240mm2 35N.m 2holes
MC25-M8(800) (3) 3x(95~300)mm2 35N.m 3holes
MC25-M8(1000/1250) (4) 4x(95~240)mm2 35N.m 4holes
9.18 PIA Plug-in base

9.18.1 Function
• Quickly change the circuit breaker without changing the inlet and outlet wires and
installing the base;
• Plug-in base can be pre-installed, which is convenient for customers to add circuit
breakers in the future;
• When the circuit breaker is installed through the board or the base, the power circuit
can be isolated;
• With plug-in safety device function (optional), it can ensure that the circuit breaker
can trip automatically when it is pulled out when the circuit breaker is closed.
PIA 21F-M8 3P
Code of wiring method: F for front connection; B for rear connection
Plug-in base code

9.19 PISDPISD Plug-in safety device

9.19.1 Function
Used together with the plug-in base, it can ensure that the circuit breaker can
automatically trip when it is pulled out when the circuit breaker is closed.

PISD 21-M8 T
Circuit breaker type: T thermal magnetic circuit breaker; E electronic circuit breaker
Plug-in safety device code
9.20 DOB Draw-out base

9.20.1 Function
• Quickly change the circuit breaker without changing the inlet and outlet wires and
installing the base;
• Withdrawable base can be installed in advance to provide convenience for customers
to add circuit breakers later;
• With plug-in safety device function (optional), it can ensure that the circuit breaker can

DOB 23F-M8 3P(400A)1）
Code of wiring method: F for front connection; B for rear connection
Frame size code: 23 for 400/630 frame;24 for 800 frame
Draw-out base code

Note1）: DOB23 is suitable for 400/630 housings. There are two specifications of 400 and 630.
9.21 DOSD Draw-out safety device

9.21.1 Function
Used together with the plug-in base, it can ensure that the circuit breaker can

DOSD 23-M8 T
Circuit breaker type: T thermal magnetic circuit breaker; E electronic circuit breaker
Frame size code: 23 for 400/630 frame; 24 for 800 frame;
Plug-in safety device code

9.22 DRA DIN-rail adapter

9.22.1 Function
Adapt to the body and can be mounted on a 35mm standard DIN rail

DRA 21-M8 3P
Frame size code: 21 for 125 frame; 22 for 250 frame;
DIN-rail adapter code
9.23 COMA communication module

9.23.1 Function
The COMA communication module is an interface module for the communication
between the electronic plastic case circuit breaker and the bus system, and performs
communication and relay control output. Combined with the Modbus-RTU
communication protocol, this communication module can easily establish a connection
with a fieldbus master device to achieve three remote or four remote functions.
The technical parameters are as follows:
• Rated voltage: AC230V or DC24V (error range ± 15%)
• Communication type: RS485 (Modbus-RTU protocol)
• Contact capacity: AC250V / 3A; DC30V / 3A
• Transmission medium: shielded twisted pair
• Transmission distance: 1.2km (using category A shielded twisted pair)
• Working status indication: LED indication
• Number of stations: 1 station
COMA22-M8 DC24V
Rated voltage: AC230V, DC24V
Frame code: 22 is a universal accessory for electronic molded case circuit breakers
Communication module code
9.23.3 Communication solution

Achievable
Solutions Required products and accessories Note
function
NM8N basic or standard electronic molded case
Remote mea-
Solution 1 circuit breaker; 1.Read phase current
sure
COMA22-M8 communication module.
NM8N basic or standard electronic moulded case
circuit breaker; 1. Read phase current
Remote
COMA22-M8 communication module; 2. Indicate circuit breaker
Solution 2 measure
AX auxiliary contact (optional, indicating opening position information (open,
Remote signal
and closing status); closed, trip status)
AL alarm contact (optional, indicating trip status).
NM8N basic or standard electronic moulded case
1. Read phase current
Remote circuit breaker;
2. Indicate circuit breaker
measure COMA22-M8 communication module;
position information (open,
Solution 3 Remote signal AX auxiliary contact (optional, indicating opening
closed, trip status)
Remote and closing status);
3. Control circuit breaker
control AL alarm contact (optional, indicating trip status);
opening and closing
MOD electric operation mechanism.
1. Read phase current
2. Indicate circuit breaker
position information (open,
Remote mea- NM8N standard electronic molded case circuit
closed, trip status)
sure breaker;
3. Control circuit breaker
Remote signal COMA22-M8 communication module;
opening and closing
Solution 4 Remote con- AX auxiliary contact (optional, indicating opening
4. Adjust the internal parameter
trol and closing status);
settings of the controller
Remote ad- AL alarm contact (optional, indicating trip status);
(only for standard specifications.
justment MOD electric operation mechanism.
For details, please
refer to the communication
protocol).
9.24 PSU battery box

9.24.1 Function
Provide DC 9V power for the standard (liquid crystal) controller for users to view, set
and modify controller parameters. Ranch
Output voltage: DC 9V
Continuous power supply time: 7 hours

PSU22-M8
Frame code: 22 is a universal accessory for standard (liquid

crystal) electronic molded case circuit breakers
Battery box code
9.25 CEM Closing electromagnet

9.25.1 Function
The closing electromagnet is used to close the circuit breaker by remote control.
When the circuit breaker is in the open and energy storage state at the same time, the
breaker can be closed at any time. The closing electromagnet device has both AC and
DC control. When the power supply voltage is equal to any voltage value between 85%
and 110% of the rated control power voltage, closing electromagnet can reliably close
the circuit breaker. The working mode of the closed electromagnet is a short-time
work system. It cannot be allowed to be energized for a long time. The energization
time is between 0.2s and 2s, otherwise there is a danger of being burned.
CEM25-M8 AC48V
Rated voltage: AC48V/110V/220-240V/380-415V

DC24V/DC48V/110-120V/220V
Frame code: 25 represents 1600 frame
Closing electromagnet code

Note：Applicable to 1600 frame motor type.

AC48V/110V /220-260V/380-415V
Rated working voltageUe (V)
DC24V/48V/110-120V220V
Voltage range 85-110%
Pulse duration range (s) 0.2~2
AC 5VA
Power
consumption
DC 5W
Circuit breaker closing time (ms) <70
Breaker opening time (ms) 50±10
Rated insulation voltage (kV) 2
Peak current 6XIn
9.26 PHS Phase barrier

9.26.1 Function
Guarantees phase-to-phase insulation safety and prevents phase-to-phase short circuits
PHS 21-M8
Shell code: 21 for 125 frame; 22 for 250 frame; 23 for 400/630 frame;
24 for 800 frame; 25 for 1600 frame
Phase barrier code, standard accessory.

9.26 Installation diagram of internal accessories
Left ON Right
Mounting and wiring mode
Handle OFF
Accessory name
NM8N-125, 250 NM8N-400, 630
NM8N-800 NM8N-1600 NM8N-1600 MOD
NM8NL-125, 250 NM8NL-400, 630
3P, 4P 3P, 4P 3P, 4P 3P, 4P 3P, 4P
No accessory
Alarm contact
Auxiliary contact
Shunt release
Shunt release
Auxiliary contact
Auxiliary contact
Shunt release
Alarm contact
Auxiliary contact
Alarm contact
Alarm contact
Shunt release
Auxiliary contact, alarm
Auxiliary contact
alarm contact
■-Shunt release 　▲-Under-voltage release　 ○-Auxiliary contact 　●-Alarm contact
Note: a. NM8N-125, 250, 400, 630, 800 cannot be equipped with undervoltage release and shunt release at the same time;
　　　b. NM8N-125, 250 3P / 4P can be equipped with a maximum of 2 sets of auxiliary contacts; 1P has no internal accessories; 2P can be equipped with a
　　 maximum of one auxiliary / alarm contact at the same time;
　　 c. NM8N-400, 630 can install up to 3 sets of auxiliary contacts;
　　 d. NM8N-800 can be equipped with up to 4 auxiliary contacts;
　　 e. NM8N-1600 MOD can be equipped with a maximum of 3 sets of auxiliary contacts, and can simultaneously install undervoltage release and shunt release;
　　 f. NM8N series can only be equipped with one alarm contact.
10. Technical Supplement
10.1 DC application wiring method
Solutions Unipolar grounding system Ungrounded system
i i
a a
+ +
U R U R
- -
Circuit diagram B B
b b
C A C A
maximum short-circuit
Fault A current Isc Fault A has no effect
Impact of fault maximum short-circuit maximum short-circuit

Fault B Fault B
current Isc current Isc
Fault C has no effect Fault C has no effect
Load
Load
Note: 1. The upper and lower lines can be used, here the Note: 1. Both the upper and lower lines can be used, here the
注：1. 上、下进线皆可，此处以下进线为例；
following lines are taken as an example. following lines are taken as an example; 2. Make sure that the
installation2. 确保安装方式不会发生二次接地故障。
method does not cause a secondary ground fault.
Load
DC500~750V
Load
Note: 1. The upper and lower lines can be used, here the Note: 1. Both the upper and lower lines can be used, here the
following lines are taken as an example. following lines are taken as an example; 2. Make sure that the
installation method does not cause a secondary ground fault.
Load
DC750~1000V
Load
Load
Note: 1. The upper and lower lines can be used, here the
following lines are taken as an example.
10.2 NM8N power loss table
Fixed circuit breaker Power loss

Rated current
Release type Model resistance loss per pole per pole
(A)
mΩ (W)
16 8.8 2.3
20 8.8 3.5
25 5.2 3.3
32 4.5 4.6
40 2.6 4.2
NM8N-125
50 1.8 4.5
63 1.7 6.7
80 1.3 8.3
100 0.88 8.8
125 0.8 12.5
125 0.7 10.9
160 0.55 14.1
180 0.55 17.8
NM8N-250
200 0.55 22.0
Thermal 225 0.4 20.3
magnetic 250 0.4 25.0
250 0.35 21.9
315 0.25 24.8
NM8N-400
350 0.25 30.6
400 0.15 24.0
400 0.15 24.0
NM8N-630
500 0.12 30.0
500 0.08 20.0
630 0.08 31.8
NM8N-800
700 0.08 39.2
800 0.08 51.2
800 0.08 51.2
1000 0.08 80.0
NM8N-1600
1250 0.04 62.5
1600 0.04 102.4
32 0.8 0.8
63 0.4 1.6
NM8N-250 100 0.4 4.0
160 0.4 10.2
250 0.4 25.0
250 0.15 9.4
NM8N-400
400 0.15 24.0
Electronic
400 0.15 24.0
NM8N-630
630 0.12 47.6
NM8N-800 800 0.08 51.2
800 0.08 51.2
1000 0.08 80.0
NM8N-1600
1250 0.04 62.5
1600 0.04 102.4
63 0.8 3.2
NM8NSD-125 100 0.8 8.0
125 0.8 12.5
125 0.4 6.3
160 0.4 10.2
Switch NM8NSD-250
disconnector
200 0.4 16.0
250 0.4 25.0
250 0.15 9.4
NM8NSD-400
400 0.15 24.0
NM8NSD-630 630 0.12 47.6
NM8NSD-800 800 0.08 51.2
10.3 NM8N thermal magnetic circuit breaker rated operational current and temperature compensation coefficient table
Ambient
temperature -40℃ -35℃ -25℃ -15℃ -5℃ 0℃ +10℃ +20℃ +30℃ +40℃ +50℃ +60℃ +70℃
Rated current
16A 22.5 22 20.5 20 19.5 19 18.5 17.5 17 16 15 14.5 14
20A 28 27.5 26.5 25.5 24.5 24 23 22 21 20 19.5 18.5 18
25A 35 34 33 32 30.5 30 28 27 26 25 24 22.5 22
32A 45 44 42 41 39 38 37 35 33 32 30.5 29 28
NM8N- 40A 56 55 53 51 49 48 46 44 42 40 37 33.5 29

125 50A 70 68.5 66 64 61 60 57.5 55 52.5 50 47.5 45 40
63A 88 86.5 83 80 77 75 72 69 66 63 58.5 53 46
80A 112 110 106 102 98 96 92 88 84 80 74.5 67 56
100A 140 137 132 127 122 120 115 110 105 100 93 84 80
125A 175 172 165 159 153 150 144 137 131 125 116 105 91
125A 175 172 165 159 153 150 144 137 131 125 118 106 96
160A. 224 220 212 204 196 192 184 176 168 160 152 136 120
NM8N- 180A 252 247 238 229 220 216 207 198 189 180 171 157 144
250 200A 280 275 265 255 245 240 230 220 210 200 190 175 166
225A 315 309 300 288 276 270 259 247 236 225 213 196 180
250A 350 343 332 319 306 300 287 275 262 250 237 218 207
250A 350 343 332 319 306 300 287 275 262 250 237 225 212
NM8N- 315A 441 433 418 402 386 378 362 346 331 315 300 286 271
400 350A 490 481 465 447 429 420 402 385 367 350 332 295 276
400A 560 550 530 510 490 480 460 440 420 400 380 360 320
250A 350 343 332 319 306 300 287 275 262 250 237 225 212
315A 441 433 418 402 386 378 362 346 331 315 300 286 271
NM8N-
350A 490 481 465 447 429 420 402 385 367 350 332 295 276
630
400A 560 550 530 510 490 480 460 440 420 400 380 360 320
500A 700 687 662 637 612 600 575 550 525 500 450 406 360
500A 700 687 662 637 612 600 575 550 525 500 490 460 400
NM8N- 630A 882 866 836 804 772 756 724 693 661 630 580 530 490
800 700A 980 962 927 892 857 840 805 770 735 700 670 645 575
800A 1120 1100 1060 1020 980 960 920 880 840 800 735 670 625
800A 1120 1100 1060 1020 980 960 920 880 840 800 760 696 640
NM8N- 1000A 1400 1375 1325 1275 1225 1200 1150 1100 1050 1000 950 870 800
1600 1250A 1750 1718 1656 1594 1531 1500 1437 1375 1312 1250 1187 1088 1000
1600A 2240 2200 2120 2040 1960 1920 1840 1760 1680 1600 1520 1390 1280
Note1）：For a multi-pole DC circuit breaker, if a 2m long standard wire is used in series, the derating factor above applies.
2）
：When the copper short-circuit bar is connected in series, it needs to be further reduced based on the above table (except
NM8NDC-1600). The specific derating factor should be determined by users according to their different wiring methods. Derating
by a factor of 0.8).
10.4 NM8N electronic circuit breaker rated operational current and temperature compensation coefficient table
Ambient
temperature -25℃ -15℃ -5℃ 0℃ +10℃ +20℃ +30℃ +40℃ +50℃ +60℃ +70℃
Rated current
32A 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
63A 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63
NM8N-250 100A 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
160A 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160
250A 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 240 225 213
250A 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250
NM8N-400
400A 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 380 360 340
250A 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250
NM8N-630 400A 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 380 360 340
630A 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 600 570 540
630A 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630
NM8N-800
800A 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 760 720 680
800A 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800
1000A 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
NM8N-1600
1250A 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
1600A 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1520 1440 1360
Note：Individual specifications of products need to be derated at a temperature of 50 ° C and above (parameters refer to the table), and Ir needs to be adjusted to the
corresponding gear.
For example：NM8N-250 EN 250 3P products are used at 70 ° C. The product needs to be derated to 213A, and the Ir position is adjusted to 0.8In position. The
NM8N-250 EM 250 3P product is used at 70 ° C. The product should be derated to 213A, and the Ir position should be adjusted to 213A.
10.5 Derating factor table for circuit breaker with residual current protection module
Model Derating factor
16A~63A 1
NM8N-125+NM8NL-125 80A~100A 0.9
125A 0.8
125A~180A 1
NM8N-250+NM8NL-250
200A~250A 0.9
32A、63A、100A、160A 1
NM8N-250+NM8NL-250 electronic type
250A 0.95
250A 1
NM8N-400+NM8NL-400 315A、350 0.96
400A 0.93
250A 1
400A 0.95
400A 0.93
NM8N-630+NM8NL-630
500A 0.87
400A~500A 1
630A 0.90
10.6 Derating factor table for circuit breakers with plug-in or draw-out accessories
Derating factor
Model
+Plug-in type +Economic draw-out type
16A-100A 1 /
NM8N-125
125A 0.95 /
125A-180A 1 /
NM8N-250
200A-250A 0.95 /
NM8N-250 32A、63A、100A、160A 1 /
electronic type 250A 0.95 /
NM8N-400 250A-400A 1 1
NM8N-400
250A-400A 1 1
electronic type
400A 1 1
NM8N-630
500A 0.95 1
NM8N-630 400A-500A 1 1
electronic type 630A 0.9 0.9
500-700A / 0.95
NM8N-800
800A / 0.9
NM8N-800 630A / 1
electronic type 800A / 0.9
10.7 NM8N Derating factor table for circuit breakers altitude
Altitude (m) 2000m 3000m 4000m 5000m
Rated operational current In 1×In 0.96×In 0.93×In 0.9×In
AC 690 550 480 420

Rated operational voltage Ue （V）
DC（4pole string） 1000 900 850 800
Rated insulation voltage Ui （V） 1000 930 870 800
Uimp =8kV 2200 2050 1900 1770

AC
Uimp =12kV 2550 2370 2200 2050
Dielectric properties（V）
Uimp =8kV 3110 2892 2705 2488
DC
Uimp =12kV 3600 3350 3110 2985
NM8N-125
NM8N-250 8 8 8 8
Rated insulation impulse voltage NM8N-1600
Uimp （kV） NM8N-400
NM8N-630 12 10 8 8
NM8N-800
10.8 Cascading (AC220/230/240V)
Upstream NM8N-125 NM8N-250 NM8N-400 NM8N-630 NM8N-800

Breaking C S Q H R C S Q H R C S Q H R C S Q H R C S Q H R
capacity
（kA rms） 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150
Downstream Breaking capacity（kA rms）
NB1N 25 30 40 60 60 25 30 40 60 60 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
NB1H 30 40 50 65 65 30 40 50 65 65 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
NM8N-125C 50 60 80 100 50 60 80 100 50 60 80 100 50 60 80 100 50 60 80 100
NM8N-125S 70 90 120 70 90 120 70 90 120 70 90 120 70 90 120
NM8N-125Q 90 140 90 140 90 140 90 140 90 140
NM8N-125H 150 150 150 150 150
NM8N-250C 50 60 80 100 50 60 80 100 50 60 80 100 50 60 80 100
NM8N-250S 70 90 120 70 90 120 70 90 120 70 90 120
NM8N-250Q 90 140 90 140 90 140 90 140
NM8N-250H 150 150 150 150
NM8N-400C 50 60 80 100 50 60 80 100 50 60 80 100
NM8N-400S 70 90 120 70 90 120 70 90 120
NM8N-400Q 90 140 90 140 90 140
NM8N-400H 150 150 150
NM8N-630C 50 60 80 100 50 60 80 100
NM8N-630S 70 90 120 70 90 120
NM8N-630Q 90 140 90 140
NM8N-630H 150 150
NM8N-800C 50 60 80 100
NM8N-800S 70 90 120
NM8N-800Q 90 140
NM8N-800H 150
10.9 Cascading (AC380/400/415V)
Upstream NM8N-125 NM8N-250 NM8N-400 NM8N-630 NM8N-800

Breaking C S Q H R C S Q H R C S Q H R C S Q H R C S Q H R
capacity
（kA rms） 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150 36 50 70 100 150
Downstream Breaking capacity（kA rms）
NB1N 20 25 25 25 25 20 25 25 25 25 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
NB1H 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
NM8N-125C 50 50 80 100 50 50 80 100 50 50 80 100 50 50 80 100 50 50 80 100
NM8N-125S 70 90 120 70 90 120 70 90 120 70 90 120 70 90 120
NM8N-125Q 90 140 90 140 90 140 90 140 90 140
NM8N-125H 150 150 150 150 150
NM8N-250C 50 50 80 100 50 50 80 100 50 50 80 100 50 50 80 100
NM8N-250S 70 90 120 70 90 120 70 90 120 70 90 120
NM8N-250Q 90 140 90 140 90 140 90 140
NM8N-250H 150 150 150 150
NM8N-400C 50 50 80 100 50 50 80 100 50 50 80 100
NM8N-400S 70 90 120 70 90 120 70 90 120
NM8N-400Q 90 140 90 140 90 140
NM8N-400H 150 150 150
NM8N-630C 50 50 80 100 50 50 80 100
NM8N-630S 70 90 120 70 90 120
NM8N-630Q 90 140 90 140
NM8N-630H 150 150
NM8N-800C 50 50 80 100
NM8N-800S 70 90 120
NM8N-800Q 90 140
NM8N-800H 150
10.10 Selective protection
Upstream
NM8N-125 NM8N-250 NM8N-250 Electronic
Downstream In（A）16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 125 160 180 200 225 250 32 63 100 160 250
≤ 10 190 190 300 400 500 500 500 630 800 1000 T T T T T T 400 500 1000 T T
16 300 400 500 500 500 630 800 1000 T T T T T T 400 500 1000 T T
20 500 500 500 630 800 1000 T T T T T T 500 1000 T T
NB1 25 500 500 630 800 1000 T T T T T T 500 1000 T T

Tripping curve:B/C 32 500 630 800 1000 2000 5000 T T T T 500 1000 T T
40 630 800 1000 2000 5000 T T T T 1000 T T
50 800 1000 2000 5000 T T T T 1000 T T
63 1000 2000 5000 T T T T 1000 T T
16 400 500 500 630 800 1000 1000 2500 2500 2500 2500 2800 500 1000 2500 2800
20 500 500 630 800 1000 1000 2500 2500 2500 2500 2800 500 1000 2500 2800
25 500 630 800 1000 1000 2500 2500 2500 2500 2800 500 1000 2500 2800
32 630 800 1000 1000 2500 2500 2500 2500 2800 1000 2500 2800
40 800 1000 1000 2000 2000 2500 2500 2800 1000 2000 2800
NM8N-125
50 1000 1000 2000 2000 2500 2500 2800 1000 2000 2800
63 1000 2000 2000 2500 2500 2800 2000 2800
80 2000 2000 2500 2500 2800 2000 2800
100 2500 2500 2800 2800
125 2500 2800 2800
125
160
180
NM8N-250
200
225
250
32 1000 2000 2800
63 2000 2800
NM8N-250
100 2800
Electronic
160
250
250
315
NM8N-400
350
400
NM8N-400 250
Electronic 400
250
315
NM8N-630 350
400
500
250
NM8N-630
400
Electronic
630
Note：1） No content, meaning no selectivity.

2）
1000, which indicates local selectivity, and the number indicates the maximum fault current to achieve selectivity. For
example, selectivity below 1000A can be achieved here, and upper and lower circuit breakers above 1000A may
operate simultaneously.
3）
T, which means that full selectivity is satisfied within the breaking capacity of the lower circuit breaker.
NM8N- NM8N
NM8N-630
NM8N-400 400 NM8N-630 NM8N-800 -800 NM8N-1600 NM8N-1600 Electronic
Electronic
Electronic Electronic
250 315 350 400 250 400 250 315 350 400 500 250 400 630 500 630 700 800 800 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1600
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
2800 3500 4000 5000 2800 5000 2800 3500 4000 5000 T 2800 5000 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
3500 4000 5000 5000 3500 4000 5000 T 5000 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
4000 5000 5000 4000 5000 T 5000 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
5000 5000 5000 T 5000 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
4000 5000 5000 4000 5000 T 5000 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
5000 5000 6000 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 12000 15000 19000 9500 12000 15000 19000
6000 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 12000 15000 19000 9500 12000 15000 19000
9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 12000 15000 19000 9500 12000 15000 19000
9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 12000 15000 19000 9500 12000 15000 19000
5000 5000 6000 5000 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 12000 15000 19000 9500 12000 15000 19000
9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 12000 15000 19000 9500 12000 15000 19000
5000 5000 6000 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 12000 15000 19000 9500 12000 15000 19000
6000 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 12000 15000 19000 9500 12000 15000 19000
9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 12000 15000 19000 9500 12000 15000 19000
9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 12000 15000 19000 9500 12000 15000 19000
9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 1250 1600 9500 9500 1250 1600
5000 5000 6000 5000 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 12000 15000 19000 9500 12000 15000 19000
9500 9500 9500 9500 9500 12000 15000 19000 9500 12000 15000 19000
9500 1250 1600 9500 1250 1600
11 .Ordering notice
11.1 Quick selection of circuit breaker

11.1.1 Quick selection of power distribution and motor protection circuit breakers11)
NM8N - 250 S TM 125 4C OTHER
Frame Breaking Special

Circuit breaker Release type Rated current(A) Poles
current(A) code requirement
EN/EM/ENM/
M: Magnetic for TM/M
EMM
motor protection
TM : Thermal 125 : 16,20,25 1P : One pole
Magnetic for 32,40,50,63,80 — 2P : Two-pole
Distribution 100,125 3P : Three-pole
Protection 4B : Four-pole2)
EN: Electronic 4C : Four-pole2)
250 : 125,160,180 250 : 32,63,100
Basic for
200,225,250 160,250
125 C : 36kA Distribution
250 S : 50kA Protection
400 Q : 70kA EM: Electronic
630 H : 100kA Standard for 400 : 250,315
400 : 250,400
800 R : 150kA Distribution 350,400
Protection
ENM: Electronic 3P : Three-pole
Basic for Motor 630 : 400,500 630 : 400,630 4B : Four-pole2)
NM8N Protection 4C : Four-pole2)
moulded case EMM: Electronic
circuit breaker Standard
800 : 500,630
for Motor 800 : 630,800
700,800
Protection
TM: Thermal TM/EN/EM

Magnetic for
Distribution
Protection
EN: Electronic 3P : Three-pole MOD DC1103)
S : 50kA
Basic for 4B : Four-pole2) MOD DC2203)
1600 Q : 70kA
Distribution 4C :Four-pole2) MOD AC2303)
H : 100kA 1600 : 800,1000,1250,1600 MOD AC4003)
Protection
EM: Electronic
Standard for
Distribution
Protection
Note：1）For customer needs beyond the technical requirements of the sample, you can contact the company's sales department or technical department as a special
order processing; The body and accessories should be written separately when ordering. If the user requires the factory to assemble the body and accessories,
it must be specified when ordering, otherwise the factory will ship separately; Motor protection is only applicable to 3P / 4P;
2）
4B：Neutral poles without protection, can be operated with other three poles; 4C: Neutral poles with protection, can be operated with other three poles.
3）
Only NM8N-1600 has motor type
11.1.2 Quick selection of DC circuit breaker
NM8N DC - 250 S TM 125 2P OTHER
Rated Special
Current type Frame current(A) Breaking code Release type Poles
current(A) requirement
125 : 16,20,25
32,40,50,63,80
100,125
250 : 125,160
125 B : 25kA 180,200,225 1P : One pole1)
TM : Thermal
250 C : 36kA 250 2P : Two-pole1)
Magnetic
400 S : 50kA 3P : Three-pole
for Distribution
630 Q : 70kA 400 : 250,315 4P : Four-pole
Protection
800 H : 100kA 350,400
DC : Direct current
630 : 400,500
800 : 500,630
700,800
TM : Thermal
B : 25kA Magnetic 1600 : 800,100 3P : Three-pole
1600
C : 36kA for Distribution 1250,1600 4P : Four-pole
Protection
Note：1）1P / 2P is limited to 125 and 250 frame products.

11.1.3 Quick selection of Residual current circuit breaker/Residual current protection module1)
NM8N L - 250 S TM 125 4C A RCD1 ALT
Residual Residual Residual

current current Frame Breaking current Rated residual Special
Release type3) Poles
protection protection current(A) code3) type current code requirement
code code code
EN/EM/
TM/M ENM/
EMM
TM: Thermal 3P : Three poles
Magnetic 125 : 16,20 4B : Four poles2) RCD1: 0.03-0.1-0.3-
for Distribution 25,32,40,50 4C : Four poles2) 1A adjustable (for
—
Protection 63,80,100 125,250,400,630A)
EN: Electronic Basic 125 Residual current Default:
for Distribution protection RCD2: 0.05-0.2-0.5- No special
Protection module has no 2A adjustable requirements
125 C : 36kA
EM: Electronic 250 : 125 250 : neutral pole code (for 125,250A)
Residual 250 S : 50kA Default:
Standard 160,180 32,63,100 ALT: Leakage
current 400 Q : 70kA AC type
for Distribution 200,225,250 160,250 RCD3: 0.05-0.2- alarm with trip
protection 630 H : 100kA A: A type
Protection 0.5-2A adjustable
R : 150kA
M: Magnetic for (suitable for ALNT: Leakage
Motor Protection 3P : Three poles 400,630A) alarm without
ENM: Electronic Basic 400 : 250 400 : 4B : Four poles2) trip
for Motor Protection 315,350,400 250,400 4C : Four poles2) RCD4: 0.1-0.3-1-2A
EMM: Electronic adjustable (suitable
Standard for Motor Residual current for 400,630A)
Protection protection
630 : 630 : module has
400,500 400,630 noneutral
polecode
Note：1）For customer needs beyond the technical requirements of the sample, you can contact the company's sales department or technical
department as a special order processing; The body and accessories should be written separately when ordering. If the user requires
the factory to assemble the body and accessories, it must be specified when ordering, otherwise the factory will ship separately; Motor
protection is only applicable to 3P / 4P;
2）
4B：Neutral poles without protection, can be operated with the other three phases; 4C: Neutral poles with protection, can be operated
with the other three phases;
3）
Residual current protection module selection does not have this code, for example: NM8NL-250 4C A RCD1 ALT means 250A frame, 4
poles, A type residual current protection, residual operating current 0.03-0.1-0.3-1A, with Residual current protection module with
leakage alarm trip function.
11.1.4 Quick selection of switch disconnector

NM8N SD - 250 AC 125 2P OTHER
Switch Special
Frame current (A) Release type Frame current (A) Poles
disconnector requirement
125 : Default
250 : Default
125
2P : Two-pole1)
250 AC: Alternating
SD : Switch 400 : Default 3P : Three-pole
400 current
disconnector 4P : Four-pole
800 DC: Direct current
800 : Default
1600
1600 : 800,1000
1250,1600
Note：1）2P is only for 125 and 250 frame products.

11.2 NM8N accessory models selection table
Accessory type Code Specification NM8N-125 NM8N-250

Universal AX21-M8
Neutral AX21-M8 N
Universal AL21-M8
Alarm contact AL
Neutral AL21-M8 N
AC48V SHT21-M8 AC48V SHT22-M8 AC48V
AC110V SHT21-M8 AC110V SHT22-M8 AC110V
AC220-240V SHT21-M8 AC220-240V SHT22-M8 AC220-240V
Shunt release SHT AC380-415V SHT21-M8 AC380-415V SHT22-M8 AC380-415V
DC24V SHT21-M8 DC24V SHT22-M8 DC24V
AC48V UVT21-M8 AC48V UVT22-M8 AC48V
AC110V UVT21-M8 AC110V UVT22-M8 AC110V
AC220-240V UVT21-M8 AC220-240V UVT22-M8 AC220-240V
AC380-415V UVT21-M8 AC380-415V UVT22-M8 AC380-415V
Under-voltage release UVT
DC24V UVT21-M8 DC24V UVT22-M8 DC24V
DC110-120V UVT21-M8 DC110-120V UVT22-M8 DC110-120V
AC48V / /
AC110V / /
AC220-240V / /
AC380-415V / /
Closing electromagnet CEM
DC24V / /
DC48V / /
DC110-120V / /
DC220V / /
AC110/DC110-120V MOD21-M8 AC110/DC110-120V MOD22-M8 AC110/DC110-120V
AC220-240/DC220V MOD21-M8 AC220-240V/DC220V MOD22-M8 AC220-240V/DC220V
Motor-driven mechanism MOD
AC380-415V MOD21-M8 AC380-415V MOD22-M8 AC380-415V
DC24V MOD21-M8 DC24V MOD22-M8 DC24V
Economic extended 3P SRH21-M8 3P SRH22-M8 3P
SRH
rotary handle 4P SRH21-M8 4P SRH22-M8 4P
Thermal magnetic (T) DRH21-M8 T DRH22-M8 T
Magnetic（M） DRH21-M8 M DRH22-M8 M
Direct rotary handle DRH Electronic (E) / DRH22-M8 E
Switch
DRH21-M8 M DRH22-M8 SD
disconnector（SD）
Thermal magnetic (T) ERH21-M8 T ERH22-M8 T
Magnetic（M） ERH21-M8 M ERH22-M8 M
Extended rotary handle ERH Electronic (E) / ERH22-M8 E
Switch
ERH21-M8 M ERH22-M8 SD
disconnector（SD）
Extended rotary handle LHD 3P/4P / /
Locking system KLK KLK21-M8 KLK22-M8
3P MIT21-M8 3P MIT22-M8 3P
Mechanical interlock MIT
4P MIT21-M8 4P MIT22-M8 4P
3P TCV21-M8 3P TCV22-M8 3P
Short terminal cover TCV
4P TCV21-M8 4P TCV22-M8 4P
3P TCE21-M8 3P TCE22-M8 3P
Long terminal cover TCE
4P TCE21-M8 4P TCE22-M8 4P
1P FCP21-M8 1P FCP22-M8 1P
Front connection plate FCP
1P RCP21-M8 1P RCP22-M8 1P
Rear connection plate RCP
Cage clamp terminal CCT 1hole CCT21-M8 CCT22-M8
1hole MC21-M8(1) MC22-M8(1)
2hole / MC22-M8(2)
Cable connector MC 3hole / /
4hole / /
6hole / MC22-M8(6)
3P Front connection PIA21F-M8 3P PIA22F-M8 3P
4P Front connection PIA21F-M8 4P PIA22F-M8 4P
Plug-in base PIA
3P Rear connection PIA21B-M8 3P PIA22B-M8 3P
4P Rear connection PIA21B-M8 4P PIA22B-M8 4P
Thermal magnetic (T) PISD21-M8 T PISD22-M8 T
Plug-in safety device PISD
Electronic (E) / PISD22-M8 E
3P Front connection / /
4P Front connection / /
Draw-out base DOB
3P Rear connection / /
4P Rear connection / /
Thermal magnetic (T) / /
DIN-rail adapter DOSD
Electronic (E) / /
3P DRA21-M8 3P DRA22-M8 3P
DIN-rail adapter DRA
4P DRA21-M8 4P DRA22-M8 4P
/ COMA22-M8 DC24V 0.5m
DC24V / COMA22-M8 DC24V 1.5m
/ COMA22-M8 DC24V 3m
Communication module COMA
/ COMA22-M8 AC230V 0.5m
AC230V / COMA22-M8 AC230V 1.5m
/ COMA22-M8 AC230V 3m
Battery box PSU / PSU22-M8
Phase barrier PHS PHS21-M8 PHS22-M8
NM8N-400 NM8N-630 NM8N-800 NM8N-1600

AX21-M8
AX21-M8 N
AL21-M8
AL21-M8 N
SHT22-M8 AC48V SHT24-M8 AC48V SHT25-M8 AC48V
SHT22-M8 AC110V SHT24-M8 AC110V SHT25-M8 AC110V
SHT22-M8 AC220-240V SHT24-M8 AC220-240V SHT25-M8 AC220-240V
SHT22-M8 AC380-415V SHT24-M8 AC380-415V SHT25-M8 AC380-415V
SHT22-M8 DC24V SHT24-M8 DC24V SHT25-M8 DC24V
UVT22-M8 AC48V UVT24-M8 AC48V UVT25-M8 AC48V
UVT22-M8 AC110V UVT24-M8 AC110V UVT25-M8 AC110V
UVT22-M8 AC220-240V UVT24-M8 AC220-240V UVT25-M8 AC220-240V
UVT22-M8 AC380-415V UVT24-M8 AC380-415V UVT25-M8 AC380-415V
UVT22-M8 DC24V UVT24-M8 DC24V UVT25-M8 DC24V
UVT22-M8 DC110-120V UVT24-M8 DC110-120V UVT25-M8 DC110-120V
/ / CEM25-M8 AC48V
/ / CEM25-M8 AC110V
/ / CEM25-M8 AC220-240V
/ / CEM25-M8 AC380-415V
/ / CEM25-M8 DC24V
/ / CEM25-M8 DC48V
/ / CEM25-M8 DC110-120V
/ / CEM25-M8 DC220V
MOD23-M8 AC110/DC110-120V MOD24-M8 AC110/DC110-120V MOD25-M8 AC110/DC110-120V
MOD23-M8 AC220-240V/DC220V MOD24-M8 AC220-240V/DC220V MOD25-M8 AC220-240V/DC220V
MOD23-M8 AC380-415V MOD24-M8 AC380-415V MOD25-M8 AC380-415V
MOD23-M8 DC24V MOD24-M8 DC24V MOD25-M8 DC24V
SRH23-M8 SRH24-M8 SRH25-M8
DRH23-M8 T / /
DRH23-M8 M / /
DRH23-M8 E / /
DRH23-M8 SD / /
ERH23-M8 T / /
ERH23-M8 M / /
ERH23-M8 E / /
ERH23-M8 SD / /
/ / LHD25-M8
KLK23-M8 / /
MIT23-M8 3P /
MIT24-M8
MIT23-M8 4P /
TCV23-M8 3P TCV24-M8 3P /
TCV23-M8 4P TCV24-M8 4P /
TCE23-M8 3P TCE24-M8 3P /
TCE23-M8 4P TCE24-M8 4P /
/ / /
/ / /
FCP23-M8 3P / FCP25-M8 3P
FCP23-M8 4P / FCP25-M8 4P
/ / /
/ / /
RCP23-M8 3P RCP24-M8 3P /
RCP23-M8 4P RCP24-M8 4P /
CCT23-M8 / /
/ / /
MC23-M8(2) MC24-M8(2) /
/ / MC25-M8(3)(800)
MC23-M8(4) / MC25-M8(4)(1000/1250)
/ / /
PIA23F-M8 3P / /
PIA23F-M8 4P / /
PIA23B-M8 3P / /
PIA23B-M8 4P / /
PISD23-M8 T PISD24-M8 T /
PISD23-M8 E PISD24-M8 E /
DOB23F-M8 3P(400A) DOB23F-M8 3P(630A) DOB24F-M8 3P /
DOB23F-M8 4P(400A) DOB23F-M8 4P(630A) DOB24F-M8 4P /
DOB23B-M8 3P(400A) DOB23B-M8 3P(630A) DOB24B-M8 3P /
DOB23B-M8 4P(400A) DOB23B-M8 4P(630A) DOB24B-M8 4P /
DOSD23-M8 T DOSD24-M8 T /
DOSD23-M8 E DOSD24-M8 E /
/ / /
/ / /
COMA22-M8 DC24V 0.5m
COMA22-M8 DC24V 1.5m
COMA22-M8 DC24V 3m
COMA22-M8 AC230V 0.5m
COMA22-M8 AC230V 1.5m
COMA22-M8 AC230V 3m
PSU22-M8
PHS23-M8 PHS24-M8 PHS25-M8
NA1 Air Circuit Breaker
NA1
NA1
Page P-001
P-001 Air Circuit Breaker NA8G
1. User Purpose and Range of Application

The NA8G series air circuit breaker (“circuit breaker” in short), with rated current from 200A to 6300A and rated operating
voltage of 415V, 690V AC, is suitable for operation under 50Hz/60Hz AC and is mainly used in distribution network for power
distribution, and to protect power line and power equipment from various faults such as overload, short circuit, undervoltage and
single-phase ground. The circuit breaker is a combination of aesthetic appearance, high breaking capacity,zero flashover and multiple
intelligent protection features . It can provide selective protection with accurate operations, to avoid unnecessary black out and
guarantee reliable power supply.
The circuit breaker is widely applied in power plants, factories, mines and modern high rises, especially in power distribution
system of intelligent buildings. It is also widely used in green projects such as wind power generation or solar power generation.
2. Type Key and Definitions
NA8G 1600 1600 M / 3 MO D AC230V
Intelligent Pole Operation Installation

Product Frame size Control circuit
Rated current number method method
code current controller code voltage code
code code code
M: basic type 3: MO:

200 D: AC 230V
1600 (digital display) three motor
400 withdrawable
poles operation
630 H: communication
800 type (LCD display) 4: MN:
2500 four manual F: fixed AC 400V
1000
poles operation
1250
1600
3200 DC 110V
2000
2500
3200
4000 DC 220V
4000
5000
6300
6300
Notes: 1. Manual operation: not containing any motor operation mechanism, closing electromagnet and shunt release. Motor operation: including all standard
accessories for remote operation.
2. Code example: NA8G-1600-1600M/3 MO D AC230V: frame size 1600, rated current 1600A, M type intelligent controller, 3 poles, motor operation,
withdrawable type, control voltage AC230V.
3. Conditions for Normal Use, Installation, Transportation and Storage
3.1 Ambient air temperature from -5ºC~+40ºC, with average temperature within 24h not exceeding +35ºC.
Note: user shall consult with manufacturer for applications under temperature over +40ºC or below -5ºC.
3.2 The product shall not be installed at an altitude higher than 2000m.
3.3 Relative humidity shall not exceed 50% when ambient air temperature is at +40ºC; higher relative humidity is allowed under lower
temperature; if the average minimum relative humidity is 90% in wettest month, and the average minimum temperature in that month is
+25ºC, condensation due to temperature changes shall be taken into consideration.
3.4 The pollution grade is 3.
NA8G Air Circuit Breaker P-002
3.5 The installation category of the main circuit of the circuit breaker is IV. When the rated operating voltage of the main circuit is less
than or equal to AC400V, the auxiliary circuit installation category is the same as that of the circuit breaker except that the primary coil of
the power transformer of the undervoltage release and the intelligent controller are the same as the circuit breaker. III; when the rated
working voltage of the main circuit is greater than AC400V and less than or equal to AC690V, the control circuit and auxiliary circuit need
to be isolated from the main circuit by an isolation transformer with a capacity of ≥ 2kA, and the maximum working voltage of the control
circuit and auxiliary circuit is AC400V The installation categories of auxiliary circuits are all Ⅲ.
3.6 Circuit breaker should be installed in set or separately indoor according to this instruction, with vertical inclination not bigger than 5°.
3.7 Protection level: IP20 on the front and IP00 on the other.
4. Key Technical Parameters and Performance
Table 1 Key technical parameters
Frame size NA8G-1600 NA8G-2500 NA8G-3200 NA8G-4000 NA8G-6300
200,400,630,800, 630,800,1000,1250, 1600,2000,2500, 1600,2000,2500,

Rated current In (A) 4000,5000 6300
1000,1250,1600 1600,2000,2500 2900,3200 2900,3200,4000
Rated current of N-pole IN (A) 100%In 100%In 100%In 100%In 50%In /
Number of poles 3P,4P 3P,4P 3P,4P 3P,4P 3P,4P 3P
Utilization category B B B B B
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 690 1000 1000 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage

8 12 12 12 12
Uimp (kV)
Rated frequency (Hz) 50/60 50 50/60 50/60 50/60
Rated operational voltage Ue (V) 415 690 415 690 415 690 415 690 415
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking

50 25 80 50 100 65 100 65 120
capacity Icu（kA rms）VAC
Rated service short-circuit breaking

40 20 55 40 80 65 100 65 100
capacity Ics（kA rms）VAC
Rated short-time withstand current

40 20 55 40 80 65 85 65 100
Icw 1s（kA rms）VAC
Rated short-circuit making capacity

105 52.5 176 105 220 143 220 143 264
Icm（kA peak）VAC
Breaking time (ms) 20～30 20～30 20～35 20～35 20～35
Closing time (ms) 30～40 30～40 30～40 30～40 30～45
Frequency of operation (times/hour) 20 20 10 10 10
Mechanical life 15000 10000 10000 10000 5000
Life C /O cycle Electrical (AC400V) 5000 5000 4000 5000 1000
life (AC690V) 3000 3000 2000 3000 500
Flashover distance (mm) 0 0 0 0
For upper or For upper or For upper or For upper or For upper or
Wire incoming pattern
lower port lower port lower port lower port lower port
Fixed (kg) 22/26.5 46/55 52.5/66.5 52.5/66.5 -

Weight(3P/4P)
Withdrawerable(kg) 42.5/55 80/91.5 98/121 98/121 210/233
Dimension(3P/4P) Fixed 320×(254/324)×248 400×(370/465)×290 402×(430/545)×290 402×(430/545)×290 -

H×W×D
Withdrawerable 351×(282/352)×297 431×(375/470)×391 431×(435/550)×391 431×(435/550)×391 431×(813/930)×391
Notes: It is only withdrawerable type for NA8G-6300 and no fixed type； it is only 3P type for NA8G-6300(In=6300A) and no 4P type.
5. Structural Features
5.1 NA8G-1600 withdrawable circuit breaker structure
Secondary connecting part Shunt release
Closing electromagnet
Breaking button
Energy storage handle
OFF/ON indicator
Making button
Energy storage
& release indicator
Intlligent controller Operating mechanism
Figure 5.1-1 NA8G-1600 withdrawerable circuit breaker structure
Secondary connecting part
Slide panel
Safety separator
Guide rail
Baffle push rod
Extraction draw plate
Rocking handle
deposit hole
Locking device Rocking handle work hole

Position indicator
Figure 5.1-1 NA8G-1600 withdrawer structure

5.2 NA8G-3200 withdrawable circuit breaker structure
Secondary connecting part Zero arcover hood
Reset button Energy storage handle
Breaking button
Making button
OFF/ON indicator
Name plate
Intlligent controller
Energy storage
& release indicator
Figure 5.2-1 NA8G-3200 withdrawerable circuit breaker structure
Slide panel
Safety separator
Guide rail
Guide rail
Rocking handle work hole
Extraction draw
plate
Rocking handle
deposit hole
Position indicator Locking device
Figure 5.2-2 NA8G-3200 withdrawer structure

5.3 The states of air circuit breaker
PUSH OFF PUSH ON PUSH OFF PUSH ON
Energy Energy
store release
OFF and energy store OFF and energy release
PUSH OFF PUSH ON PUSH OFF PUSH ON
Energy Energy
store release
ON and energy store ON and energy release
Figure 5. 3-1 Four status of air circuit breaker
Connected Connected
Test Test
Disconnected Disconnected
“Connected” position main circuit and “Test” position, main circuit disconnected
secondary circuit are both connected and isolated with safety barrier, only secondary
circuit is connected
Connected
Test
Disconnected
“Disconnected” position, maincircuit and

secondary circuit are both disconnected
Firgue5.3-2 Position of withdrawerable circuitbreaker
6. Installation Requirements
6.1 Pre-installation check

6.1.1 Check with your order to see whether it is consistent with the parameters on the nameplate of the circuit breaker,
check for the following items:

a. Circuit breaker type, rated current, rated operating voltage;
b. Installation method, operating method;
c. Intelligent controller voltage, shunt release voltage, closing electromagnet voltage, energy storage motor voltage, undervoltage
release voltage and delay time;
d. Other special ordering requirements;
6.1.2 Check the packing contents according to the configuration described in this manual;
6.1.3 Before installing, operating, maintaining and repairing the product, read this manual carefully to avoid artificial damage to the circuit
breaker and cause unnecessary problems.
6.2 Preparation before installation
6.2.1 Unpack according to the order described on the bottom of the package, do not use brutal force;
6.2.2 Remove the circuit breaker from the base plate of the package. If the circuit breaker is of withdrawable type, you can find fixing bolts
inside the drawer seat, rotate the body out and clean up the drawer seat;
6.2.3 Use 500V megameter to test the insulation resistance of the circuit breaker. It shall not be lower than 20 megohm under ambient
temperature of 25℃±5℃ and relative humidity of 50-70%. Position for testing insulation resistance: between phases and between phase
and frame when the circuit breaker is closed; between inlet and outlet cable of each phase when the circuit breaker is open.
6.3 Recommended busbar, power consumption and derated application of circuit breaker
6.3.1 Recommendation busbar
Maximum allowable temperature of busbar: 100℃.Busbar is made of bare copper, with width and thickness in mm.
Table 2 Recommended busbar for circuit breaker
Frame Rated Ambient temperature (-5 ~40) ℃ Ambient temperature 50℃ Ambient temperature 60 ℃
size current Recommended busbar specifications Recommended busbar specifications Recommended busbar specifications
current (A) Specification Width Specification Width Specification
Width Thickness Pieces Thickness Pieces Thickness Pieces
200 30 5 1 30*5*1 30 5 1 30*5*1 40 5 1 40*5*1
400 30 5 2 30*5*2 30 5 2 30*5*2 30 10 1 30*10*1
630 40 5 2 40*5*2 40 5 2 40*5*2 50 5 2 50*5*2
1600A 800 50 5 2 50*5*2 50 5 2 50*5*2 50 6 2 50*6*2
1000 50 5 3 50*5*3 50 5 3 50*5*3 50 6 3 50*6*3
1250 60 8 2 60*8*2 60 8 2 60*8*2 60 10 2 60*10*2
1600 60 10 2 60*10*2 60 10 2 60*10*2 60 10 3 60*10*3
630 40 5 2 40*5*2 50 5 2 50*5*2 50 5 2 50*5*2
800 50 5 2 50*5*2 50 5 2 50*5*2 60 5 2 60*5*2
1000 50 5 3 50*5*3 50 5 3 50*5*3 60 5 3 60*5*3
2500A 1250 60 8 2 60*8*2 60 8 2 60*8*2 60 8 3 60*8*3
1600 60 10 2 60*10*2 60 10 2 60*10*2 60 10 3 60*10*3
2000 100 5 3 100*5*3 100 5 3 100*5*3 100 5 4 100*5*4
2500 100 10 2 100*10*2 100 10 2 100*10*2 80 10 3 80*10*3
1600 100 6 2 100*6*2 100 6 2 100*6*2 100 8 2 100*8*2
2000 100 6 3 100*6*3 100 6 3 100*6*3 100 10 2 100*10*2
3200A 2500 100 10 2 100*10*2 100 10 2 100*10*2 100 10 2 100*10*2
2900 100 10 3 100*10*3 100 10 3 100*10*3 100 10 4 100*10*4
3200 100 10 4 100*10*4 100 10 4 100*10*4 100 10 5 100*10*5
1600 80 8 2 80*8*2 80 8 2 80*8*2 80 10 3 80*10*3
2000 80 8 3 80*8*3 80 8 3 80*8*3 80 10 3 80*10*3
2500 80 6 4 80*6*4 80 6 4 80*6*4 80 8 4 80*8*4
4000A
2900 80 6 4 80*6*4 80 6 4 80*6*4 80 8 4 80*8*4
3200 100 10 4 100*10*4 100 10 4 100*10*4 100 10 4 100*10*4
4000 100 10 5 100*10*5 100 10 5 100*10*5 120 10 5 120*10*5
4000 100 10 5 100*10*5 100 10 5 100*10*5 100 10 6 100*10*5
6300A 5000 100 10 7 100*10*7 100 10 7 100*10*7 120 10 7 120*10*7
6300 120 10 7 120*10*7 120 10 7 120*10*7 120 10 8 120*10*8
Notes: a. If the busbar selected by user does not match with the terminals of circuit breaker, an extended busbar is needed for adaption. The extended busbar
should be provided by user itself, with cross section area not smaller than the requirement in the table above. The clearance of extended busbar should not
be smaller than that of circuit breaker terminals.
b. After installing the busbar according to the table above, make sure the electric clearance between each phase is not less than 18mm.
c. If silicon controlled electrical elements (such as high frequency induction heating furnace (medium frequency furnace for steelmaking), solid state high
frequency welder (such as submerged arc welder), vacuum heating melting equipment (such as single crystal silicon growth furnace)) are used for three-
phase rectification and high-frequency inversion in loading equipment, impact from ambient temperature and altitude as well as higher harmonic generated
by silicon controlled electrical elements should all be considered when selecting circuit breaker. In such cases, the circuit breaker must be derated, the
recommend derating factor is 0.5-0.8.
d. After the busbar is installed, the electrical clearance between the upper and lower fixing bolts of the busbar should not be smaller than 20mm.
e. After the circuit breaker is installed, the safety clearance between live parts of different electrical potentials and the safety clearance between live parts
and earth should not be smaller than 18mm.
6.3.2 Power consumption

Power consumption is measured under In, 50/60Hz for each pole.
Table 3 Power consumption of circuit breaker
Rated current (A) Power consumption of Power consumption of

Frame size
withdrawable type (W) fixed type (W)
200 115 45
400 140 80
630 161 100
1600 A 800 215 110
1000 230 120
1250 250 130
1600 460 220
630 58.6 26.4
800 73.7 36.6
1000 172 78
2 5 00 A 1250 268 122
1600 440 200
2000 530 262
2500 600 312
1600 390 170
2000 470 250
3200 A 2500 550 280
2900 550 280
3200 670 420
1600 470 250
2000 470 250
4000 A 2500 550 280

2900 550 280
3200 670 420
4000 1047 656
4000 550 -
6300A 5000 590 -
6300 950 -
6.3.3 Circuit breaker derating

a) Circuit breaker derating under different temperature
Table 4 Temperature derating table for NA8G-1600
Ambient temperature 200A 400A 630A 800A 1000A 1250A 1600A

Connection method Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
40° - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
45° - - - - - - - - - - - - 1550 -
50° - - - - - - - - - - - - 1500 1550
55° - - - - - - - - 950 950 1150 1200 1450 1500
60° - - - - 550 580 700 700 900 900 1050 1100 1350 1450

Connection method Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
40° - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
45° - - - - - - - - - - 1900 - 2400 2400
50° - - - - - - - - 1500 1550 1850 1900 2300 2300
55° - - - - - - - - 1400 1450 1800 1800 2200 2200
60° - - - - - - - - 1300 1350 1700 1700 2100 2100
Ambient temperature 1600 A 2000A 2500A 2900A 3200A

Connection method Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
40° - - - - - - - - - -
45° - - - - - - - - - -
50° - - - - - - - - 3100 -
55° - - - - 2450 - 2800 - 3000 3050
60° - - - - 2350 2400 2700 2800 2900 2900
Ambient temperature 1600A 2000A 2500A 2900A 3200 A 4000A

Connection method Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
40° - - - - - - - - - - - -
45° - - - - - - - - - - 3800 3850
50° - - - - - - - - 3100 - 3600 3650
55° - - - - 2450 - 2800 - 3000 3050 3400 3450
60° - - 1900 1950 2350 2400 2700 2800 2900 2950 3200 3250
Ambient temperature 4000A 5000A 6300A

Connection method Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
40° - / - / - /
45° - / - / 6100 /
4700
50° - / / 6000 /
55° 3900 / 4600 / 5500 /
60° 3800 / 4400 / 5200 /
Note: “-” means no derating; “/” means no vertical connection.
b) Circuit breaker derating under different altitudes

Table 9 Voltage correction table under different altitudes
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000

Rate impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp 12 10 8.5 7.5
Insulation class (V) Ui 1000 800 700 600
Power frequency withstand voltage (V) 2200 1955 1760 1600
Maximum operating voltage (V) Ue 690 580 500 400
Table 10 Current correction table under different altitudes
Altitude (m) Rated operating current (Ie)

2000 1.0Ie
2500 0.93Ie
3000 0.88Ie
3500 0.83Ie
4000 0.78Ie
4500 0.73Ie
5000 Must confirm with manufacturer
Note: If ambient temperature is lower than 40ºC, Ie=In; if ambient temperature is higher than 40ºC, Ie≠In, Ie and In should be referred to according to temperature
derating table.
6.4 Circuit breaker installation

a. Fixed type circuit breaker installation Place the circuit breaker in the cabinet, use 4 M6 (Inm=1600A) or M10 (Inm=2500A and above) bolts and
washers to fix the circuit breaker.
The circuit breaker should be secured properly, without additional mechanical force, to avoid damage of circuit breaker or poor contact of main
bus.
b. Withdrawable type circuit breaker installation
Draw the circuit breaker body out of the drawer seat, install the drawer seat in the cabinet, use 4 M6 (Inm=1600A) or M10 (Inm=2500A and above)
bolts and washers to fix the circuit breaker.
The circuit breaker should be secured properly, without additional mechanical force, to avoid damage of circuit breaker or poor contact of main bus
and secondary circuit. Then, install the body back into the drawer seat.
(1)Withdrawer socket placed horizontally (2)Pull out the guide rail
(3)Place the breaker body on the guide rail (4)Move the breaker body onto the guide rail with a snap
(5)Push the breaker body in, and turn it into the connected
position
Figure 6.4-1 Diagram of operation for the withdawerable circuit breaker
6.5 Interval
Leave sufficient space for ventilation in the cabinet, the spacer for upper and lower connectors of circuit breaker must be made of non-
magnetic material.
6.6 Busbar fixation
The busbar must be fixed with proper torque by using bolts and nuts, too big or too small torque is not allowed. Too big torque may
cause bolts to slip which makes it difficult to tighten the bolts; too small torque may cause misalignment of bolts and nuts which leads to
poor fastening and may cause excessive temperature rise. For circuit breaker connections, the data of torque tightening is applicable to
copper busbar and steel bolts and nuts, with grade≥8.8, it is also applicable aluminum busbar.
1. Circuit breaker terminal 1 2 3 4

2. Busbar
3. Bolt
4. Washer
5. Nut
6. Elastic washer
6 5
Figure 6.6-1 Diagram of busbar fixing
Recommended installation method
Figure 6.6-2 Recommended installation diagram of busbar
Table 11 Tightening torque for circuit breaker
Bolt type Application Preferred tightening torque

M3 Secure secondary connection cable （0.5~0.7）N·m
M8 (only with flat washer) Secure the product to cabinet (1600A frame size) （18~25）N·m
M10 (only with flat washer) Secure the product to cabinet (2500A frame size and above) （25~40）N·m
M10 Secure busbar （36~52）N·m
M12 Secure busbar （61~94）N·m
7. Outline and Installation Dimensions
Front view Side view
105 105
51
351
275
313
74
141(3P) 141
297
211(4P)
Baseline
Figure 7.1 Overall dimension of NA8G-1600 withdrawable type
Hole size of the base Hole size of the panel
258
N Pole
220
10×Φ5
118
6.5
320
120
10
95
2×Φ8.5
118
2
75
Circuit breaker installation plate

67(3P) 78 (63)
137(4 P) Baseline
Baseline
Figure 7.1-1 Perforating size of NAG8-1600 withdrawable type

Side view Busbar installation dimensions
51
D
150
78.5
Φ11 70 70 70
15
25 50
N Pole
In(A) D(mm)
51
200~800 10
1000~1600 16
Note: If the user wants to change the horizontal connection to the vertical Baseline
connection on site, just rotate the busbar 90 °.
Figure 7.1-2 Horizontal busbar connection of NA8G-1600 withdrawable type
Φ11 50
50
150
15
78.5
25
70 70 70
D
In(A) D(mm) N极
200~800 10
1000~1600 16
Baseline
Note: If the user wants to change the horizontal connection to the vertical
Figure 7.1-3 Vertical busbar connection of NA8G-1600 withdrawable type

D
B
90
A
101 101
Φ11
15
20 80 35
Unit:mm
35
In(A) A B C D
120
90
200~800 68.5 169 10 10
1000~1600 63 179 15 16
Note: The extended busbar is an optional accessory, which wil

be charged separately.
Baseline
Figure 7.1-4 Extended busbar horizontal connection of NA8G-1600-3P withdrawable type

C
D
B
90
A
Φ11 101 101 101

15
20 80 35
Unit:mm
In(A) A B C D N Pole
35
120
90
200~800 68.5 169 10 10

1000~1600 63 179 15 16
Note: The extended busbar is an optional accessory, which wil 15.5

Baseline
Figure 7.1-5 Extended busbar horizontal connection of NA8G-1600-4P withdrawable type

N Pole
Unit:mm
In(A) A B D
200~800 10 10 10
1000~1600 15 15.5 16

Baseline
Figure 7.1 -6 Extended busbar vertical connection of NA8G-1600 withdrawable type

105 105
320
275
118.5(3P) 118.5 100 64

6
188.5(4P)
250
127(3P) 127
1 9 7(4P)
Baseline
Figure 7.2 Overall dimension of NA8G-1600 fixed type
258
220
N Pole
8×Φ5
4×Φ8.5
100
322
285
64
Circuit breaker
installation plate
118.5(3P) 118.5
188.5(4P)
Baseline
Baseline
Figure 7.2-1 Perforating size of NAG8-1600 fixed type

( 37 )
D
149
48.5
Φ11 70 70 70
15
25 50
In(A) D(mm)
( 37 )
N Pole
200~800 10
1000~1600 16
Note: If the user wants to change the horizontal connection to the vertical Baseline
Figure 7.2-2 Horizontal busbar connection of NA8G-1600 fixed type
Φ11
（37）
50
149
15
25
48.5
70 70 70
D
N Pole
( 37 )
In(A) D(mm)
200~800 10
1000~1600 16
connection on site, just rotate the busbar 90 °. Baseline
Figure 7.2-3 Vertical busbar connection of NA8G-1600 fixed type

D
B
90
A
Φ11 101 101
15
20 80 35
35
Unit:mm
120
90
In(A) A B C D
200~800 38.5 169 10 10
1000~1600 33 179 15 16
be charged separately. Baseline
Figure 7.2-4 Extended busbar horizontal connection of NA8G-1600-3P fixed type

C
D
B
90
A
Φ11 101 101 101

15
20 80 35
N Pole
35
Unit:mm
90
120
In(A) A B C D
200~800 38.5 169 10 10
1000~1600 33 179 15 16 15.5
Figure 7.2-5 Extended busbar horizontal connection of NA8G-1600-4P fixed type

Φ11 15 35
35
90
150
80
48.5
70 70 70
N Pole
A
90
Unit:mm
B
In(A) A B D D
200~800 10 10 10
1000~1600 15 15 16
Baseline
Figure 7.2 -6 Extended busbar vertical connection of NA8G-1600 fixed type

167.5(3P) 167.5
262.5(4P)
146 146
431
258
70.5
42.5
37
187.5(3P) 187.5 97
282.5(4P) Baseline 175 107
391
N pole
48
345
302
11
Φ
17
156
11
270
175
391
379
17
147
Φ 14
48
107
Circuit breaker
installation plate
11×Φ4
20
132.5(3P) 132.5 Baseline

227.5(4P)
Baseline
Figure 7.3-1 Perforating size of NA8G-2500 withdrawable type

Busbar installation dimensions (factory default configuration)
95 95 95
11.5
24
Φ13 60 28
N pole
48
D
112
48
391
102.5
391
132.5(3P) 132.5
227.5(4P)
Baseline
In(A) D(mm)
630 10
800~1600 15
Note: If the user wants to change the horizontal connection to the vertical 2000~2500 20
Figure7.3-2 Horizontal busbar connection of NA8G-2500 withdrawable type
Busbar installation dimensions

95 95 95
D
N pole
48
(48)
24
11.5
28
112
391
Φ13
60
102.5
391
132.5(3P) 132.5
227.5(4P)
Baseline
In(A) D(mm)
Note: If the user wants to change the vertical connection to the
630 10
horizontal connection on site, just rotate the busbar 90 °. 800~1600 15
2000~2500 20
Figure7.3-3 Vertical busbar connection of NA8G-2500 withdrawable type


95 95 95
12.5
Φ11 L 30
N pole
30
80
D
112
391 80
102.5
391
132.5(3P)
227.5(4P)
132.5 Unit ： mm
Baseline In(A) D L
630~1600 15 60
Note: 1) The extended busbar is an optional accessory, which requires additional costs; 2000~2500 20 70
2) If the user wants to change the horizontal connection to the vertical connection on
site, just rotate the busbar 90 °.
Figure7.3-4 Horizontal extended busbar connection of NA8G-2500 withdrawable type

95 95 95
D
N pole
80
12.5 30
30
L
112
Φ11 80
391
102.5
391
132.5(3P)
227.5(4P)
132.5 Unit ： mm
Baseline In(A) D L
630~1600 15 60
Note: 1) The extended busbar is an optional accessory, which requires additional costs; 2000~2500 20 70
2) If the user wants to change the vertical connection to the horizontal connection on
site, just rotate the busbar 90 °.
Figure7.3-5 Vertical extended busbar connection of NA8G-2500 withdrawable type

159(3P) 159
254(4P)
146 146
400
258
42
21.5
34.5
170(3P) 170 150 70.5

265(4P)
290
185(3P) 185
280(4P)
Baseline
N pole
345
42
302
16
84
12
×Φ
270
311
290
150
70.5
56.5
20.5
Circuit breaker
28.5
installation plate
Baseline
170(3P) 170
265(4P)
Baseline
Figure 7.4-1 Perforating size of NA8G-2500 fixed type

95 95 95
17
Φ13 60 28
N pole
42
42
D
290
112
55
170(3P) 170 290
265(4P)
Baseline
Unit ： mm
In(A) D
630 10
800~1600 15
2000~2500 20
Figure7.4-2 Horizontal busbar connection of NA8G-2500 fixed type
95 95 95
14
Φ13 60 28
N pole
30
60
D
290
112
55
170(3P) 170 290

265(4P)
Baseline
Unit ： mm
In(A) D
630 10
Note: The extended busbar is an optional accessory,
800~1600 15
which requires additional costs.
2000~2500 20
Frgure7.4-3 Horizontal extended busbar connection of NA8G-2500 fixed type

Busbar installation dimensions (side view) Rear view
95 95 95
30
17
10 10
40
125
342
112
20
55
40
50
50
80 290 Φ14 40 Baseline N pole
17
80
Note: The vertical connection busbar is an optional accessory, which requires an additional
cost; the vertical connection requires an additional phase spacer.
Figure7.4-4 Horizontal busbar connection of NA8G-2500（In=2000A~2500A） fixed type
95 95 95
30
17
10 10
40
120
337
112
15
55
40
50
50

17
60
Note: The vertical connection busbar is an optional accessory, which requires an additional
cost.
Figure7.4-5 Vertical busbar connection of NA8G-2500（In=800A~1600A） fixed type

90 90 90
17
10
40
125
332
112
10
55
40
50
50
17
60
Note: The vertical connection busbar is an optional accessory, which requires an

additional cost.
Figure7.4-6 Vertical busbar connection of NA8G-2500（In=630A） fixed type


198.5(3P) 198.5
313.5(4P)
154 154
52
431
258
70.5
42.5
37
217.5(3P) 217.5 97
332.5(4P) 175 107

Baseline
391
N pole
52
361
318
Φ 11
17
155
11
270
391
175
378
147
16
Φ14
48
107
21.5
11×Φ4
Circuit breaker
installation plate
162.5(3P) 162.5 Baseline
277.5(4P)
Baseline


115 115 115
14
Φ11 78 50
N pole
29
52
52
25
391
112
93
162.5(3P) 162.5 391
277.5(4P)
Baseline
Figure 7.5-2 Horizontal busbar connection of NA8G-3200(In=1600A~2500A) withdrawable type

115 115 115
25
N pole
29
52
52
29
14
50
391
Φ11
112
78
66.5
162.5(3P) 162.5 391

277.5(4P)
Baseline
Note: If the user wants to change the vertical connection to the
horizontal connection on site, just rotate the busbar 90 °.
Figure 7.5-3 Vertical busbar connection of NA8G-3200(In=1600A~2500A) withdrawable type


127 127 127
75
100 25
14
N pole Φ11
29
52
52
25
391
112
93
162.5(3P) 162.5 391
277.5(4P)
Baseline
Note: If the user changes the horizontal to vertical connection on the scene, the upper and lower buses of
the N and B phases on both sides must be replaced with the same as the A and C buses of the middle.

115 115 115
25
N pole
29
52
52
29
Φ11 14
25
50
391
36
100
75
45.5
162.5(3P) 162.5 391

277.5(4P)
Baseline
Note: If the user changes the vertical to horizontal connection on the scene, the upper and lower buses of
the N and C phases on both sides must be replaced with the same as the A and B buses of the middle.


127 127 127
20
100 Φ13 50
N pole
40
109
109
D
112
391
107.5
391
162.5(3P) 162.5 In(A) D(mm)

277.5(4P) 1600~2500 20
Baseline
2900~3200 30
Note: The extended busbar is an optional accessory, which requires additional costs.
figure7.5 -6 Horizontal extened busbar connection of NA8G-3200 withdrawable type

115 115 115
N pole
109
109
20 40
Φ13
50
136
391
100
95.5
(45.5)
391
162.5(3P) 162.5 In(A) D(mm)

277.5(4P) 1600~2500 20
Baseline
2900~3200 30
Note: The extended busbar is an optional accessory, which requires additional costs.
figure7.5 -6 Vertical extened busbar connection of NA8G-3200 withdrawable type

189(3P) 189
( )
304 4P
154 154
32
402
129
21.5
44
200(3P)
34.5
200
150 73
315(4P)
215(3P) 215 290
330(4P)
Baseline
N pole
32
361
16
318
12
150
84
×Φ
270
311
73
20.5
200(3P) 200 Circuit breaker

28.5
installation plate
315(4P)
215(3P) 215 Baseline
330(4P) Baseline
Figure 7.6-1 Perforating size of NAG8-3200 fixed type

198.5(3P) 198.5
313.5(4P)
154 154
41.5
431
258
7
70.5
42.5
37
217.5(3P) 217.5 97
332.5(4P) 175 107

Baseline
398.5
N pole
41.5
361
318
Φ11
17
155
11
270
378
398.5
147
175
16
Φ14
48
21.5
107
11×Φ4
Circuit breaker
installation plate
Baseline
162.5(3P) 162.5
277.5(4P)
Baseline

115 115 115
78 50 Φ11
41.5
N pole
41.5
25
398.5
133
84
398.5
162.5(3P) 162.5
277.5(4P)
Baseline
Note: If the user wants to change the horizontal connection to the vertical connection on site, just rotate the bus bar 90 °.
115 115 115
25
N pole
41.5
41.5
29
14
50
398.5
(133)
55
Φ11
78
(96.5)
57.5
162.5(3P) 162.5 398.5

277.5(4P)
Baseline
Note: If the user wants to change the vertical connection to the horizontal connection on site, just rotate the bus bar 90 °.

126 126 126
29
14
100 25 Φ11 75
N pole
41.5
41.5
25
398.5
133
96.5
162.5(3P) 162.5 398.5

277.5(4P)
Baseline
Note: If the user changes the horizontal to vertical connection on the scene, the upper and lower buses of the N and B phases on both
sides need to be replaced with the same as the A and C buses of the middle.
115 115 115
25
N pole
41.5
41.5
29
14
75
25
398.5
(155)
Φ11
155
100
(85.5)
35.5
398.5
162.5(3P) 162.5
277.5(4P)
Baseline
Note: If the user changes the vertical to horizontal connection on the scene, the upper and lower buses of the N and C phases on both sides need to be
replaced with the horizontally connected bus specifications.


126 126 126
20
100 Φ13 50
N pole
40
98
98
D
133
398.5
96.5
398.5
162.5(3P) 162.5
In(A) D(mm)
277.5(4P)
Baseline 1600~2500 20
2900~4000 30
Note：1）The extended busbar is an optional accessory, which requires additional costs;
2） If the user changes the horizontal to vertical connection at the scene, the upper and lower buses of
the N and B phases on both sides need to be replaced with the same as the A and C buses of the
middle.
Figure7.7-6 Horizontal extened busbar connection of NA8G-4000 withdrawable type

115 115 115
D
N pole
98
98
20 40
Φ13
50
155
398.5
100
85.5
398.5
(35.5)
In(A) D(mm)
162.5(3P) 162.5
277.5(4P) 1600~2500 20
Baseline
2900~4000 30
Note：1）The extended busbar is an optional accessory, which requires additional costs;
2）If the user changes the vertical to horizontal connection at the scene, the upper and lower buses of the N and B phases on both sides need to be
replaced with the horizontally connected bus specifications.
Figure7.7-7 Vertical extened busbar connection of NA8G-4000 withdrawable type

189(3P) 189
304( 4P)
154 154
33
402
258
7
21.5
34.5
44
200(3P) 200 150 73
315(4P)
215(3P) 215 290
330(4P)
Baseline
Hole size of the base Hole size of the base

33
361
16 318
12
150
290
84
×Φ
270
311
73
20.5
Circuit breaker
28.5
200(3P) 200 installation plate

315(4P)
Baseline
215(3P) 215
330(4P)
Baseline
Figure 7.8-1 Perforating size of NA8G-4000 fixed type

115 115 115
14
29
Φ11 78 50
N pole
33
25
33
290
133
47.5
200(3P) 200 290
315(4P)
Baseline
Note: If the user wants to change the horizontal connection to the vertical connection on site, just rotate the busbar 90 °.
Figure7.8-2 Horizontal busbar connection of NA8G-4000(In=1600A-2500A) fixed type
115 115 115
25
N pole
33
33
29
14
50
290
(133)
55
Φ11
78
(60)
200(3P) 200 290

21
315(4P)
Baseline
Note: If the user wants to change the vertical connection to the horizontal connection on site, just rotate the busbar 90 °.
Figure7.8-3 Vertical busbar connection of NA8G-4000(In=1600A-2500A) fixed type

Busbar installation dimension (factory default configuration)
126 126 126
29
14
100 25 Φ11 75
N pole
33
25
33
290
133
47.5
200(3P) 200
315(4P)
290
Baseline
Note: If the user changes the horizontal to vertical connection on the scene, the upper and lower buses of the N and C phases on
both sides need to be replaced with the same as the A and B buses of the middle.
Figure7.8-4 Horizontal busbar connection of NA8G-4000(In=2900A-4000A) fixed type
Busbar installation dimension
115 115 115
25 铁质材料
N pole
33
33
29
14
75
25
290
(155)
55
Φ11
100
(49)
200(3P) 200
315(4P) 290
1
Baseline
Note: If the user changes the vertical to horizontal connection on the scene, the upper and lower buses of the N and B phases on
both sides need to be replaced with the horizontally connected bus specifications.
Figure7.8-5 Vertical busbar connection of NA8G-4000(In=2900A-4000A) fixed type


126 126 126
20
100 Φ13 50
N pole
40
89.5
89.5
D
290
133
60
200(3P) 200 290
315(4P)
Baseline
Note： 1） The extended busbar is an optional accessory, which requires additional costs; In(A) D(mm)
2） If the user changes the horizontal to vertical connection on the scene, the upper and lower buses 1600~2500 20
of the N and B phases on both sides need to be replaced with the same as the A and C buses of the
middle. 2900~4000 30
Figure7.8-6 Horizontal extended busbar connection of NA8G-4000 fixed type

115 115 115
N pole
89.5
89.5
20 40
Φ13
50
290
(155)
55
100
(49)
200(3P) 200 290

315(4P)
Baseline
In(A) D(mm)
Note： 1） The extended busbar is an optional accessory, which requires additional costs;
2）If the user changes the vertical to horizontal connection on the scene, the upper and lower buses of
1600~2500 20
the N and B phases on both sides need to be replaced with the horizontally connected bus 2900~4000 30
specifications.
Figure7.8-6 Vertical extended busbar connection of NA8G-4000 fixed type

576.5(3P) 198.5
691.5(4P) 154 154
103
431
258
70.5
42.5
37
596.5(3P) 218.5 97
711.5(4P)
175 107
Baseline
391
Figure 7.9 Overall dimension of NA8G-6300(In=4000A~5000A) withdrawable type
N pole 361
318
103
155
Φ11 17
270
11
378
147
391
175
16
Φ14
48
107
21.5
11×Φ4
540.5(3P) 162.5 Circuit breaker
installation plate
655.5(4P)
596.5(3P) 218.5 Baseline
711.5(4P) Baseline
Figure 7.9-1 Perforating size of NAG8-6300(In=4000A~5000A) withdrawable type

182.5 246.5 246.5

N pole
100
20
55 210 Φ15 50 55 50
40
103
58.5 (160) 103
30
391
112
92
391
540.5(3P) 162.5
655.5(4P)
Baseline

691.5 198.5
154 154
103
431
70.5 258
42.5
37
711.5 218.5 97
Baseline 175 107
391
Figure 7.10 Overall dimension of NA8G-4000(In=6300A) withdrawable type
Hole size of the panel

Hole size of the base
361
103
318
Φ11 17
155
11
270
391
175
378
147
Φ14
16
48
107
21.5
655.5 162.5
11×Φ4
Circuit breaker
711.5 218.5
installation plate
Baseline Baseline
Figure 7.10-1 Perforating size of NAG8-6300(In=6300A) withdrawable type

316.5 323.5
260 260
50 80 50
20
Φ15
40
80
103
77 (141.5)
103
30
391
112
92
391
655.5 162.5
Baseline
Figure 7.10-2 Horizontal busbar connection of NA8G-6300(In=6300A) withdrawable type

Note: Power module and RU-1 relay signal module are of same overall dimension, 35mm standard guide rail installation can
also be used for installation.
Figure 7.11 PSU-1 power module, RU-1 relay signal module
Secondary output terminal M3.5 screw

115
258
130
280
1 6 x M8
92
72
250
380
Note: Circuit breaker with leakage transformer must use vertical bus connection.
Figure 7.12 Overall dimensions of leakage protection transformer

Front view
144
Main circuit entry

21.5
6
39.5
12 8
Flexible connection coil
top entry main circuit entry bottom entry
Note: 1. Neutral transformer should be installed at the entry end main circuit entry direction main circuit entry direction
of circuit breaker, with its flexible cable side facing
towards the entry direction of main circuit.
2. When the rated current is 200A-630A,the transformer
needs to be wrapped around the busbar twice to be used
normally.
Figure 7.12 Overall dimensions of neutral pole current transformer

Reset
Direction A
Right side plate

of circuit breaker
Small installation plate
Direction A Installation plate
Buckle plate
Opening position
R60
This plate should be
designed by user Closing
position
Installation hole
117.6
Right installation plate

Installation of circuit breaker
hole 20.5
Installation surface
59
Figure 7.13 NA8G-1600 fixed type circuit breaker status door interlock installation dimensions
Reset
Direction A
Direction A Right side plate of circuit

breaker drawer seat
Buckle plate
Installation plate
R60
This plate should be
designed by user
Right installation plate

150
of circuit breaker
8.4
Installation hole
14
35
Figure 7.14 NA8G-1600 withdrawable type circuit breaker status door interlock installation dimensions
Installation plate
Small installation plate
Installation plate
Installation plate
Opening position
Buckle plate 23° 0 ′0″
R100
26°0 ′0″
Closing position
10
182
96.21
Right installation
plate of circuit breaker
Installation hole
Installation hole
13.5
45 30.7
Figure 7.15 NA8G-2500~4000 fixed type circuit breaker status door interlock installation dimensions
Right plate of circuit breaker drawer seat
Installation plate
Installation plate
Opening position
Buckle plate 23°0′0″
R100
26°0′0″
Closing position
14
10
15.5 18
26.21
185.8
218
96.21
Base plate of circuit
breaker drawer seat
Installation hole
80
Figure 7.16 NA8G-2500~6300 withdrawable type circuit breaker status door interlock installation dimensions
8. Control Circuit Electrical Wiring Diagram
N A B C SB1 SB2 SB3 HL2 HL4 HL5 HL6 HL7
2 3 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 59 60 62 64 65 XT
M FU
Processing
unit AX Control
SA
circuit
power
F DT Q
FU
1 4 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 61 63 XT
HL1 HL3
Shunt Closing Undervoltage Energy Energy 3 postion electrical signals

Main circuit Intelligent controller storage storage Auxiliary switch of drawer seat
release electromagnet release indicator motor
Figure 8.1 Control circuit wiring diagram of NA8G-1600 M controller
C04 4 group conversion contact (default) C06 6 group conversion contact (optional) N3 3NO, 3NC contact (optional)
38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 54 38 40 42 44 46 48
37 40 43 46 37 40 43 46 49 52 37 39 41 43 45 47
F—shunt release DT—closing electromagnet Q—undervoltage release M—motor operating 20#: empty
mechanism 21#~ 24#: empty
SA—position switch XT—terminal AX—auxiliary terminal SB1—Breaking button 24#, 25#: signal input contact for external N phase transformer, normally empty, used as signal
SB2—Making button SB3—emergency stop button HL1—fault indicator HL2—energy storage input contact for external transformer if specially ordered by user.
indicator 27#: protectively earthed, connected to exterior panel of circuit breaker.
HL3—Breaking indicator HL4—Making indicator HL5~7—position indicator 28#, 29#: shunt release; 30#, 31#: closing electromagnet; 32#, 33#: undervoltage release
FU—fuse (6A) 34#~36#: motor operating mechanism
1#, 2#: intelligent controller power: voltage AC220/380V, can be directly connected to 1#, 2#; 37#~ 56#: auxiliary contact. Normally 4 groups of changeover auxiliary contacts, 6 groups of
If voltage is DC220/110V, a 24V output from power module is required before being changeover auxiliary contacts or 3NO/3NC contacts are available if specially ordered by user.
connected to 1#, 2# 6-group conversion auxiliary contacts are only applicable to AC current.
3#~ 5#: trip alarm contact (3 is the common contact) 57#~65#: 3 position signal indicator for withdrawable circuit breaker, no connection for regular
delivery, only for withdrawable circuit breakers with the functions.
6#~ 9#: auxiliary contact (1 NO and 1 NC contact), optional
Note: Solid lines are factory connected, dotted lines need to be connected by user.
10#, 11#: empty
12#~ 19#: empty
Figure 8.1-1 AX auxiliary contact wiring diagram of NA8G-1600 M controller

To collector line AC 220V

PSU-1
profibus
24V
DC 24V
ST-DP NC + -
GND
D+ D-
+ - DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3

Dedicated shielded
twisted pair DC 24V
Modbus-RTU RU-1
SB1 SB2 SB3 HL3 HL6 HL7
N A B C UN U A UB UC D01 D 02 D03 HL5
+
Red
2 3 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 35 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 59 60 62 64 65 XT
FU
Processing SA
unit AX Control
circuit
power
F DT Q M
FU
1 4 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 34 36 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 61 63 XT
Green
HL4
HL1
Closing
Shunt electrom- Undervolta- Energy Energy 3 postion electrical signals
Main circuit Intelligent controller ge release
storage storage Auxiliary switch of drawer seat
release agnet indicator motor
Figure 8.2 Control circuit wiring diagram of NA8G-1600 H controller
C04 4 group conversion contact (default) C06 6 group conversion contact (optional) N3 3NO, 3NC contact (optional)
38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 54 38 40 42 44 46 48
37 40 43 46 37 40 43 46 49 52 37 39 41 43 45 47
F—shunt release DT—closing electromagnet Q—under voltage release M—motor operating 24#, 25#: signal input contact for external N phase transformer or external earth current
mechanism SA—position switch XT—terminal AX—auxiliary terminal SB1—Breaking button transformer, normally empty, used as signal input contact for external transformer if specially
SB2—Makeing button SB3—emergency stop button HL1—fault indicator HL2—energy ordered by user.
storage indicator HL3—Breaking indicator HL4—Makeing indicator HL5~7—position indicator 27#: protectively earthed, connected to exterior panel of circuit breaker.
FU—fuse (6A) 28#, 29#: shunt release; 30#, 31#: closing electromagnet; 32#, 33#: undervoltage release
1#, 2#: intelligent controller power: voltage AC220/380V, can be directly connected to 1#, 2#; 34#~36#: motor operating mechanism
If voltage is DC220/110V, a 24V output from power module is required before being 37#~ 56#: auxiliary contact. 6-group conversion auxiliary contacts are only applicable to AC
connected to 1#, 2# current.
3#~ 5#: trip alarm contact (3 is the common contact) Normally 4 groups of changeover auxiliary contacts, 6 groups of changeover auxiliary contacts
6#~ 9#: auxiliary contact (1 NO and 1 NC contact), optional or 3NO/3NC contacts are available if specially ordered by user.
10#, 11#: H type intelligent controller default communication output terminal 57#~65#: 3 position signal indicator for withdrawable circuit breaker, no connection for regular
12#~ 15#: 3 groups of programmable output signals, must be connected with external RU-1 delivery, only for withdrawable circuit breakers with the functions.
relay module. Default outputs of H type intelligent controller with programmable output ST-DP: DP protocol module, no need for ST-DP protocol module if upstream communication
signals: 12#, 13#: closing signal output, 12#, 14#: opening signal output, 12#, 15#: fault trip. protocol is Modbus-RTU; use ST-DP protocol module to transfer Modbus-RTU protocol into
No connection for normal product. Profibus-DP protocol if upstream communication protocol is Profibus-DP, which will be charged
19#: H intelligent controller communication shield grounding. separately.
20#~ 23#: voltage display input signal terminal, 20#: Phase N voltage signal, 21#: phase A RU-1: relay module. Upstream machine opens and closes circuit breaker through remote
voltage signal, 22#: phase B voltage signal, 23#: phase C voltage signal. No connection for control, used for opening and closing signal energy amplification, which will be charged
normal product. separately.
Figure 8.2-1 AX auxiliary contact wiring diagram of NA8G-1600 H controller

2 3 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 59 60 62 64 65 XT
M FU
Processing
unit AX Control
SA
circuit
power
F DT Q
FU
1 4 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 61 63 XT
HL3
HL1

Figure 8.3 Control circuit wiring diagram of NA8G-2500~6300 M controller
C04 4 group conversion N4 4NO, 4NC contact

contact (default) C06 6 group conversion contact (optional) (optional) N5 5NO, 5NC contact (optional)
38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 54 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
37 40 43 46 37 40 43 46 49 52 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55
F—shunt release DT—closing electromagnet Q—under voltage release M—motor operating 24#, 25#: signal input contact for external N phase transformer, normally empty, used as
mechanism signal input contact for external transformer if specially ordered by user.
SA—position switch XT—terminal AX—auxiliary terminal SB1—Breaking button 27#: protectively earthed, connected to exterior panel of circuit breaker.
SB2—Makeing button SB3—emergency stop button HL1—fault indicator HL2—energy 28#, 29#: shunt release; 30#, 31#: closing electromagnet; 32#, 33#: undervoltage release
storage indicator HL3—Breaking indicator HL4—Makeing indicator HL5~7—position indicator 34#~36#: motor operating mechanism
FU—fuse (6A) 37#~ 56#: auxiliary contact. 6-group conversion auxiliary contacts are only applicable to AC
1#, 2#: intelligent controller power: voltage AC220/380V, can be directly connected to 1#, 2#; current.
If voltage is DC220/110V, a 24V output from power module will be required before being Normally 4 groups of changeover auxiliary contacts, 6 groups of changeover auxiliary
connected to 1#, 2# contacts or 4NO/4NC contacts and 5NO/5NC contacts are available if specially ordered by
3#~ 5#: trip alarm contact (3 is common contact) user.
6#~ 9#: auxiliary contact (1 NO and 1 NC contact), optional 57#~65#: 3 position signal indicator for withdrawable circuit breaker, no connection for regular
10#, 11#: empty delivery, only for withdrawable circuit breakers with the functions.
12#~ 19#: empty Note: Solid lines are factory connected, dotted lines need to be connected by user.
20#: empty
21#~ 24#: empty
Figure 8.3-1 AX auxiliary contact wiring diagram of NA8G-2500~6300 M controller

To collector line AC 220V

PSU-1
profibus
24V
DC 24V
ST-DP NC + -
GND
D+D -
+ - DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3

Dedicated shielded
twisted pair DC 24V
Modbus-RTU RU-1
SB1 SB2 SB3 HL4 HL5 HL6 HL7
N A B C UN UA UB UC D01 02
D D03
+
Red
2 3 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 35 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 59 60 62 64 65 XT
FU
Processing SA
unit AX Control
circuit
power
F DT Q M
FU
1 4 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 34 36 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 61 63 XT
Green
- HL3

Figure 8.4 Control circuit wiring diagram of NA8G-2500~6300 H controller
C04 4 group conversion contact

C06 6 group conversion contact (optional) N4 4NO, 4NC contact (optional) N5 5NO, 5NC contact (optional)
(default)
38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 54 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
37 40 43 46 37 40 43 46 49 52 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55
F—shunt release DT—closing electromagnet Q—undervoltage release M—motor operating 24#, 25#: signal input contact for external N phase transformer or external earth current
mechanism SA—position switch XT—termial AX—auxiliary terminal SB1—Breaking button transformer, normally empty, used as signal input contact for external transformer if specially
SB2—Makeing button SB3—emergency stop button HL1—fault indicator HL2—energy ordered by user.
storage indicator HL3—Breaking indicator HL4—Makeing indicator HL5~7—position indicator 27#: protectively earthed, connected to exterior panel of circuit breaker.
FU—fuse (6A) 28#, 29#: shunt release; 30#, 31#: closing electromagnet; 32#, 33#: undervoltage release
1#, 2#: intelligent controller power: voltage AC220/380V, can be directly connected to 1#, 2#; 34#~36#: motor operating mechanism
If voltage is DC220/110V, a 24V output from power module is required before being 37#~ 56#: auxiliary contact. 6-group conversion auxiliary contacts are only applicable to AC
connected to 1#, 2# current.
3#~ 5#: trip alarm contact (3 is common contact) Normally 4 groups of changeover auxiliary contacts, 6 groups of changeover auxiliary
6#~ 9#: auxiliary contact (1 NO and 1 NC contact), optional contacts or 4NO/4NC contacts and 5NO/5NC contacts are available if specially ordered by
10#, 11#: H type intelligent controller default communication output terminal user.
12#~ 15#: 3 groups of programmable output signals, must be connected with external RU-1 57#~65#: 3 position signal indicator for withdrawable circuit breaker, no connection for regular
relay module. Default outputs of H type intelligent controller with programmable output delivery, only for withdrawable circuit breakers with the functions.
signals: 12#, 13#: closing signal output, 12#, 14#: opening signal output, 12#, 15#: fault trip. ST-DP: DP protocol module, no need for ST-DP protocol module if upstream communication
No connection for normal product. protocol is Modbus-RTU; use ST-DP protocol module to transfer Modbus-RTU protocol into
19#: H intelligent controller communication shield grounding. Profibus-DP protocol if upstream communication protocol is Profibus-DP, which will be
20#~ 23#: voltage display input signal terminal, 20#: N phase voltage signal, 21#: phase A charged separately.
voltage signal, 22#: phase B voltage signal, 23#: phase C voltage signal. No connection for RU-1: relay module. Upstream machine opens and closes circuit breaker through remote
normal product. control, used for opening and closing signal energy amplification, which will be charged
separately.
Figure 8.4-1 AX auxiliary contact wiring diagram of NA8G-2500~6300 H controller

9. Intelligent controller usage
9.1 Operation interface of M type (basic type) intelligent controller
2
9
3 10
4
11
6
12
13
8
14
1 Display window: shows current value, setting parameters, fault current, release time, etc.
2 Ir indicator: overload long-time-delay fault indication.
3 Ig indicator: earth, neutral fault indication.
4 “→” button: used to query the current value of each phase; after entering the submenu, select the contents in the submenus
of each level in a cycle.
5 Menu button: Press the menu button to enter the sub-menus of each level in turn.
6 Overload and long-time-delay protection settings: the left knob is for setting the multiple of the long delay protection
current; the right knob is for setting the delay time.
7 Short-circuit short-time-delay protection setting: The left-hand knob is for setting the multiple of the short-time-delay
protection current.
8 Earth fault protection setting: the left knob is for setting the earth fault protection current multiple; the right knob is for
setting the delay time.
9 Isd indicator: short-circuit short-time-delay fault indication.
10 Ii indicator: short-circuit instantaneous fault indication.
11 Reset button: return to the previous menu; the controller software is reset, the reset button must be pressed after the knob
setting switch is adjusted; control.There is a fault memory after the device trips, it must be cleare by pressing the reset key.
12 Cover lock hole.
13 Button for tripping test.
14 Short-circuit instantaneous current protection setting: Knob setting instantaneous protection multiple of current.
Figure 9.1 M-type (basic type) intelligent controller

9.2 Operation interface of H type (communication type) intelligent controller
6 11
7
8
12
9 13
10
1 Display window: shows current, set parameters, fault current, release time, etc.
2 Return key: exit current menu to previous one, or cancel current parameter setting value
3 Up key: move select box upwards under current menu, or used to input “+” setting value under parameter setting
4 Setup key: switch to default setup menu
5 Inquiry key: switch to default inquiry menu
6 Down key: move select box downwards under current menu, or used to input “-” setting value under parameter setting
7 Confirm key: enter the next menu of the selected box, or save current parameter setting
8 Ir indicator for overload long-time-delay tripping
9 Isd indicator for short circuit short-time-delay tripping
10 Ig indicator for earth fault tripping
11 Cover lock hole
12 Button for tripping test
13 Ii indicator for short-circuit instantaneous tripping
Figure 9.2 H type (communication type) intelligent controller

9.3 Intelligent controller feature introduction

9.3.1 Overcurrent protection curve
10000
5000
Ir=(0.4-1)In
1000
500
200
tr=(1~30)s
100
50
20
T(s) 10
2
I t ON
5
2 Isd=（1.5~10）Ir
Isd=（1.5~10）Ir
1
2
I t OFF
0.5
0.2
0.1
Ii=（2~15)In
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.2 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.8 1 2 3 4 5 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30
X Ir
Figure 9.3-1 Overcurrent protection curve
10000
5000
Ig=(0.2-1)In
1000 MAX 1200A
500 MIN 120A
200
100
50
20
T(s) 10
2
I t ON
5
1
0.5
0.2
0.1 2
I t OFF
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30
X In
Figure 9.3-2 Neutral line (earthing) fault protection curve

9.4 Intelligent controller protection features

a.Overload long time delay protection
The overload long delay protection function is generally used to protect the cable overload, and the protection
is based on the true RMS value of the current.
Table 17 Parameter setting and action characteristics of overload long delay
Setting parameters Setting range Current action error

Long-time-delay current setting value M type：（0.4～1.0）In ±15%
Ir H type：（0.4～1.0）In+OFF
Long-time-delay current setting step H type：1A（1600～2500 frame）；2A（3200～6300 frame）
Long-time-delay time setting value tr （1-2-4-8-12-16-20-24-30）s ±10%
6 ²
Inverse time characteristic t= ( )
N
×t r
Multiple of fault current Action time

I＜0.85Ir No action
I＞1.15Ir Action
1.5Ir 16 32 64 128 192 256 320 384 480
2.0Ir 9 18 36 72 108 144 180 216 270
6.0Ir 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 30
Note: For the inverse time characteristic cur ve, its code meaning is
N --- fault current divided by multiple of set current I / Ir
t --- Delay time for fault action
tr --- long delay time set value
Allowable error of operating time ± 15%
Conventional factor y setting: overload long delay current 1.0In;
Normal factor y setting: Action time 2s (under 6Ir)
Example: Known overload long delay current 1.0In, delay time 2s (under 6Ir), now line current I = 1.8In, the actual fault action delay time
can be calculated:
N = 1.8In / 1.0In = 1.8
t = (6 / 1.8) 2 × 2 = 22.2s
b. Short-circuit short-delay protection

The short-time delay protection is based on the current effective value (RMS) protection, which is divided into two sections: the anti-
time section and the definite-time section; it further strengthens the cooperation with the
lower-level protection devices.
Table 18 Short circuit short delay parameter settings and operating characteristics
Setting parameters Setting range Current action error

Short delay current M type： 1.5 10 In
±10%
setting value Isd H type：（1.5～10）In+OFF
Short delay current setting step H type：1A（1600～2500 frame）；2A（3200～6300 frame）
Short delay time setting M type--Definite-time limit 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 anti-time limit 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 ± 15% or inherent ± 40ms
value tsd H type--Definite-time limit：0.11、0.21、0.31、0.41；anti-time limit：0.1、0.2、0.3、0.4 (take the maximum value)
Current Action time

I＜0.9Isd No action
I＞1.15Isd Delay action
Operating characteristics I²t=（10Ir）²tsd
Isd<I≤10Ir Anti-time limit
Setting time (s): 0.1、0.2、0.3、0.4
Setting time (s): 0.11 0.21 0.31 0.41
I≥1.1Isd Definite-time limit Minimum (s): 0.06、0.16、0.255、0.34
Maximum(s): 0.14、0.24、 0.345、0.46
Reture time 0.05、0.14、0.25、0.33
Note: For the anti-time characteristic curve, its code meaning is

Isd --- short-time-delay current set value
I ----- fault current value
Ir ---- long-time-delay current set value
t ----- fault action delay time
tsd --- short-time delay to achieve the set value
Allowable error of action time ± 15%
Conventional factory setting: short delay current 8.0Ir;Conventional factory setting: short delay time limit 0.41s.
c. Short-circuit transient protection characteristics

The short-circuit instantaneous protection function prevents solid-state short-circuits in the power distribution
system. Such faults are generally phase-to-phase faults. The short-circuit current is large and needs to be quickly disconnected.
Instantaneous protection is based on the true RMS value of the current.
Table 18 Short-circuit transient protection characteristics
Setting parameters Setting range

Instantaneous current
（2～15）In+OFF
setting value Ii
Instantaneous current 1A（1600～2500 frame）
setting step 2A（3200～6300 frame）
I＜0.85Ii no action
Action characteristics I＞1.15Ii action
Action time ≤100ms
d. Single-phase ground protection

For single-phase metal grounding protection, there are two protection methods: vector sum (difference) type (T) and ground current
type (W). The vector sum type detects the zero-sequence current, that is, takes the vector sum of the four-phase (three-phase four-wire
system) or three-phase (three-phase three-wire system) current for protection. The ground current type uses a special external transformer
to directly detect the current on the ground cable. It can simultaneously protect the upper and lower ground faults of the circuit breaker. The
maximum distance between the transformer and the circuit breaker does not exceed 5 meters.
Table19 Earthing fault protection setting range
Product model Setting range Setting step Current error

1600 frame （0.2～1.0）In+OFF，Max 1200A 1A
2500 frame （0.2～1.0）In+OFF，Max 1200A 1A ±15%
3200~6300 frame 500A～1200A+OFF 2A
Table20 Definite-time earth fault protection features
fault current Delay action time（s）

Setting time 0.11 0.21 0.31 0.41
Minimum delay 0.06 0.16 0.255 0.34
＞Ig
Maximum delay 0.14 0.24 0.345 0.46
Returnable time 0.05 0.14 0.25 0.33
Table 21 Anti-time earth fault protection features
fault current Delay action time (s)

Setting time 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
＞Ig and（I≥0.8In
Minimum delay 0.06 0.16 0.255 0.34
or 1200A）
Maximum delay 0.14 0.24 0.345 0.46
(I g )²
＞Ig and（I＜0.8In Inverse time delay t= ×tg
I²
or 1200A）
Returnable time 0.05 0.14 0.25 0.33
Note: Ig-Set value for Earthing protection;

I-Fauit current value
T-Fauit operation delay time
tg-Set value for earthing inverse time lag
Allowable error of inverse time lag operation time ±15%
Normal factory setting:OFF
9.5 Auxiliary Function Description

9.5.1 Test function description
When the controller cooperates with the circuit breaker in the field debugging, periodic inspection or maintenance, it needs to use the
controller's test function to break several times to check the cooperation between the controller and the circuit breaker. After the circuit
breaker is closed, press the "test" button, and the intelligent controller will trip instantaneously to open the circuit breaker.
Notes: a.This function can only be used during on-site debugging or maintenance of the circuit breaker. Do not use it during normal operation.
b. Before closing the controller, the reset button above the controller panel must be pressed before the circuit breaker can be closed and put into
operation again.
9.5.2 Fault memory description

After the controller is reset or powered off, it still has fault memory function, which keeps the most recent historical
event for easy analysis after the event. Only when a new fault occurs again, the original information is cleared and the latest fault data is
saved. For the query method, refer to the description of the fault display above.
9.6 Display Function Description
When the rated current is 400A or more, the single-phase current is not less than 0.4In, and the controller works
normally when the three-phase is not less than 0.2In. When the rated current is less than 400A, the single-phase is
not less than 0.8In, and the three-phase is not less than 0.4In, the controller works normally.
Notes: When power is applied to the ST 220V AC power module, the controller will no longer display when the voltage drops to AC120V.
When power is applied to the ST 380V AC power module, the controller will no longer display when the voltage drops to AC200V.
a. Current display
Current display error range: ± 5%
b. Voltage display
Voltage display error range: ± 1.5%
10. Circuit Breaker Accessories
10.1 Closing electromagnet (CC)

After the operation mechanism finishes energy storage, CC is energized and
ready for remote closing.
Table 23 Operation feature of Closing electromagnet
1600 frame size CC

Feature CC
220/230/240
VAC 50/60HZ
Power Supply 380/400/415
VDC 220,110
Operation voltage 0.85-1.1Us
Frame size: power AC 400VA
consumption (VA or W) DC 1600：380W；2500~6300：130W
Circuit breaker response time 30ms-45ms
2500-6300 frame size CC
10.2 Shunt release (ST)
After being energized, ST will instantaneously disconnect the circuit breaker,
to realize remote opening.
Table 24 Operation feature of Shunt release
1600 frame size ST Feature ST

220/230/240
VAC 50/60HZ
VDC 220,110
Operation voltage 0.85-1.1Us
Frame size: power AC 400VA
consumption (VA or W) DC 1600：380W；2500~6300：130W
2500-6300 frame size ST
10.3 Undervoltage release (UVT)

If the supply voltage drops to any point between 35%-70% of rated voltage, the
release coil will disconnect the circuit breaker instantaneously. If the UVT release coil is not
energized, the circuit breaker cannot be closed manually (closing button) or electrically
(closing electromagnet). The circuit breaker can only be closed when the supply voltage of
UVT release coil reaches 85% of rated voltage.
Delayed undervoltage release (UVTD)
To prevent unintended release due to voltage drop in short time, we add an operation
1600 frame size UVT delay to UVT by adding a delay unit.
Table 25 Operation feature of undervoltage release

Feature
2500~6300 frame size UVT 220/230/240
VAC 50/60HZ
VDC _
Open 0.35-0.7Ue 0.35-0.7Ue

Operation threshold
Close 0.85Ue 0.85-1.1Ue
Frame size: power 1600 ： 220W/15W；
UVT
2 500 ~ 6300 ： 220W/13W
consumption
1600 ： 20VA
(VA or W) UVTD
2 500 ~ 6300 ： 48VA
Adjustable time 1s-5s, delay time adjustable
Notes: a.closing/maintain.
b.only NA8G-1600 uses external undervoltage delay module, delay unit is integrated into the
undervoltage delay release for 2500-7500 products.
10.4 Motor operation mechanism (MO)

Storage energy by motor and automatically after circuit breaker closing, to ensure
the circuit breaker can close immediately after opening. Energy storage handle used as
standby measure if there is no auxiliary power supply.
Table 26 Feature of motor operation mechanism
Feature
VAC 50/60HZ 220/230/240，380/400/415
Power Supply
1600 frame size MO VDC 110，220
Operation threshold 0.85-1.1Us
Frame size: power 1600:75W；2500:85W；3200:110W；
consumption (VA or W) 4000:150W；6300:150W
Motor overcurrent time ≤1min
Energy storage time ≤7s
Operation frequency ≤2times/min
After the motor operation mechanism (MO) finishes energy storing, the internal
indication contact will switch to output, user may connect the energy storage indicator, see
the table below for feature of indication contact.
2500-7500 frame size MO
Table 27 Indication contact technical parameters

Spring energy storage indication contact
Standard supply 1NO
Breaking capacity Current (A)/Voltage (V)
VAC（AC-15） 1.3/240，0.75/415
Application type
VDC（DC-13） 0.55/220，0.27/110
10.5 Auxiliary contacts (OF)

1600 frame size OF Standard configuration: 4 groups of changeover contacts (4CO) Optional
configuration:
6 groups of changeover contacts (6CO) Optional for NA8 full series
3NO, 3NC (N3) Optional for NA8-1600
4NO, 4NC (N4) Optional for NA8-2500-7500
5NO, 5NC (N5) Optional for NA8-2500-7500
Table 29 Auxiliary contact technical parameters (1)

2500-6300 frame size OF
Features
Auxiliary model 4CO/N4/N5 6CO(1600)
Breaking capacity Current (A) Current (A)
230/240VAC(AC-15) 1.3 1.3
Application 400/415VAC(AC-15) 0.75 0.75
type 110VDC(DC-13) 0.55 -
220VDC(DC-13) 0.27 -
Table 30 Auxiliary contact technical parameters (2)
Features
Auxiliary model 6CO (2500 and above)
Breaking capacity Current (A)
230/240VAC(AC-15) 1.3
Application 400/415VAC(AC-15) 0.75
type 110VDC(DC-13) 0.55
220VDC(DC-13) 0.27
Note: 6groupsofchangeovercontactsofNA8G-1600isnotapplicabletoDCoperationvoltage.
10.6 Key lock (KL)

Key lock is used to lockout the opening button of circuit breaker. After pulling out the
key, you will not be able to close the circuit breaker manually or electrically, and the circuit
breaker will maintain opening status; user may choose this option, and we will provide lock
and key; there are 3 types of key locks:
1 lock and 1 key (1S1S): 1 circuit breaker with an independent lock and a key
2 locks and 1 key (2S1S): 2 circuit breakers with two identical locks and a key
3 locks and 2 keys (3S2S): 3 circuit breaker with 3 identical locks and 2 keys
Notes: 1. Before you pull out the key, you must press the opening button first, then rotate the key
counterclockwise;
2.Ifuserpurchasekeylockseparately,thenyoumustuseholeopenertoopenaholeonthepanel
before installation, there are two diameters available: Φ21mm (NA8-1600)and φ 24mm (NA8G-
2500~6300),holeopenershouldbeprovidedbyuseritself.
10.7 Button lock (PL)

A padlock is used to lock the mechanical breaking and closing buttons on the panel.
After lockout, user will not be able to open or close the circuit breaker manually (padlock
should be provided by user itself).
10.8 Padlock for drawer seat disconnect position

Use the padlock to lock the drawer seat and body at disconnect position, at this position,
user cannot insert the drawer seat rotation handle into the hole to rotate and change the
position of withdrawable circuit breaker body.
Padlock should be provided by user itself.
10.9 Padlock for drawer seat baffle

If a padlock is used, user ensure the body contact will not be connected with external
live circuit when the circuit breaker body is at disconnect or test position.
Padlock should be provided by user itself.
10.10 Circuit breaker status door interlock

This interlock can prevent the cabinet from being opened when the circuit breaker is
under closing status; the cabinet can only be opened when the circuit breaker is under
opening status.
10.11 Circuit breaker position door interlock

This interlock can prevent the cabinet from being opened when the circuit breaker is at
connect or test position; the cabinet can only be opened when the circuit breaker is at
disconnect position. This device is only applicable to withdrawable products.
10.12 Three-position electrical signal device CE-CT-CD

Use the rotary handle to shake the circuit breaker body to any position of
separation, test, and connection. The device will output a group of normally closed
signals for users to detect position signals. The internal indicator contact
characteristics are shown in the table below.
Table 29 Indicating contact technical parameters

Spring energy storage indicator contact
Provided as standard 1NO
Break-off Current（A）/Voltage（V）
VAC（AC-15） 1.3/240，0.75/415
Use category
VDC（DC-13） 0.55/220，0.27/110
10.13 Barrier
Installed between the phases of connector bar, to enhance the phase to phase
insulation of circuit breaker.
10.14 Door frame and gasket

Installed on the cabinet door for sealing, with protection class of IP40.
10.15 Mechanical interlock ILK2 (steel cable double interlock)

For interlock of two horizontally or vertically installed 3 pole or 4 pole circuit breakers.
Circuit diagram Possible operation method
1QF 2QF
0 0
1QF 2QF 0 1
1 0
Notes: a. Ifuserneedstobendthesteelcable,thetransitionarcatthebendmustbelargerthanR120mm,

toensuretheflexiblemovementofthecable.
b.Checkthecableandmakesurethereissufficientlubricanttoguaranteetheflexiblemovementof
thecable.
10.16 Mechanical interlock ILK3/4

For interlock of three horizontally or vertically installed 3 pole or 4 pole circuit
breakers.
ILK-3 triple interlock circuit diagram

1QF 2QF 3QF
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
ILK-3 triple interlock diagram
1 1 0
ILK-4 triple interlock circuit diagram

1QF 2QF 3QF
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
ILK-4 interlock diagram
Notes: a. If user needs to bend the steel cable, the transition arc at the bend must be larger than
R120mm,toensuretheflexiblemovementofthecable.
b. Check the cable and make sure there is sufficient lubricant to guarantee the flexible
movementofthecable.
11. Ordering Information
11.1 Circuit breaker configuration
Table 34 Circuit breaker standard configuration
NA8G-1600 NA8G-2500 NA8G-3200 NA8G-4000 NA8G-6300

Standard accessories
Fixed Withdrawable Fixed Withdrawable Fixed Withdrawable Fixed Withdrawable Withdrawable
Circuit breaker body ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Withdrawer seat ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Intelligent controller ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Horizontal connection ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Auxiliary contacts 4CO ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Fault release indication
contact ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Motor operation
mechanism ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Closing electromagnet ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Shunt release ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Door frame ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Notes:Thestandardconfigurationaboveisformotortypeproducts,incomparisonwithwhichthestandardconfiguration of manual type does not include
motor operation mechanism, closing electromagnet and shunt release.
Table 35 Circuit breaker optional accessories
Standard NA8G-1600 NA8G-2500 NA8G-3200 NA8G-4000 NA8G-6300

accessories Fixed Withdrawable Fixed Withdrawable Fixed Withdrawable Fixed Withdrawable Withdrawable
Undervoltage instantaneous
release ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Relayed undervoltage
release ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Opening and closing button ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Drawer position padlock ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Drawer safety baffle
padlock ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Body key lock ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Position door interlock ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Status door interlock ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Auxiliary contacts 6CO ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Auxiliary contacts N3 ▪ ▪
Auxiliary contacts N4 ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Auxiliary contacts N5 ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Drawer position indication
contact
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
External neutral line
transformer ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Earth current transformer
and accessories ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Interphase barrier ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Mechanical interlock (2 sets) ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Mechanical interlock (3 sets) ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
11.2 Circuit breaker selection table
Table 36 Circuit breaker selection table
Frame size current NA8G-1600 NA8G-2500 NA8G-3200 NA8G-4000 NA8G-6300

200A □ 630A □ 1600A □ 1600A □ 4000A □
400A □ 800A □ 2000A □ 2000A □ 5000A □
Rate current 630A □ 1000A □ 2500A □ 2500A □ 6300A □
800A □ 1250A □ 2900A □ 2900A □
1000A □ 1600A □ 3200A □ 3200A □
1250A □ 2000A □ 4000A □
1600A □ 2500A □
Number of poles 3P □ 4P □
Installation method Withdrawable □ Fixed □(not available for NA8G-6300)
Bus connection Horizontal □ Vertical □ Mixed □ (specify)
Intelligent controller M type □ (basic) H type □ (communication)
Closing electromagnet □ Shunt release □ Energy storage motor □

Shunt, close, motor
AC220/230V □ AC380/400 V □ DC220V □ DC110V □
UVT □ UVTD □
Undervoltage release AC220/230V □
AC380/400V □
NA8G-1600 C04 (standard) C 06 □ (only for AC) N3 □ (only for AC)
Auxiliary contact
NA8G-2500~6300 C04 (standard) C 06 □ N4 □ N5 □
Auxiliary contact
3 position signal device for drawer seat □
indicator(optional)
Connection accessories
Interphase barrier □
(optional)
External transformer: N phase external transformer □ External LEC leakage transformer □ Earth current protection transformer
□
Controller function: 3P+N protection □ Leakage protection □ Earth current protection □
Controller functions Voltage measurement and protection □ Energy measurement and protection □ Signal contact output □
and accessories ZSI zone selective interlock protection □ Load monitoring □
Notes: 1) 3P+N protection requires N phase external transformer;
(optional)
2)LeakageprotectionrequiresexternalLECleakagetransformer;
3)Earthcurrentprotectionrequiresearthcurrentprotectiontransformer.
Locking mechanism (Optional) Breaking and making button lock □ 1 lock 1 key □ 2 locks 1 key □ 3 locks 2 keys □
Mechanical interlock (Optional) Steel cable interlock (dual interlock) □ Steel cable interlock (MIT-3) □ Steel cable interlock (MIT-4) □
Module (Optional) PSU-1 □ RU-1 □ ST-DP protocol conversion module □
Notes:1)specifyframesizecurrent,ratedcurrentandauxiliarycontrolvoltagewhenordering.
2)Pleasemark“□”or“√”inthe“-”toselecttheoptionyouneed;ifnotmarked,wewilldeliverywithfactorysettings.
3)Extrachargesarerequiredforadditionalfunctionsandspecialrequirements.Telephone:
Fax:0577-62877777-706288
Configuration
1. NA8G-1600-6300 regular configuration
Shunt release, closing electromagnet, 4 groups of auxiliary changeover contacts, motor, M type intelligent controller, main circuit
horizontal connection, door frame, main circuit installation bolts, circuit breaker manual, package box, drawer seat (withdrawable circuit
breaker).
2. Optional configuration (extra charges)
NA8G-1600 optional configuration: undervoltage instantaneous release, undervoltage delayed release, steel cable interlock, keylock,
external transformer ground protection, 6 groups of auxiliary changeover contacts, 3 NO 3 NC contacts, H type intelligent controller, optional
H type functions, interphase barrier, position signal.
NA8G-2500-6300 optional configuration: undervoltage delayed release (1s-5s adjustable), steel cable interlock, button lock, keylock,
door interlock, external transformer ground protection, vertical connection, 6 groups of auxiliary changeover contacts, 4 NO 4 NC contacts, 5
NO 5 NC contacts, H type intelligent controller, optional H type functions, position signal.
Air Circuit Breaker
ACB
NA8
Page P-001
P-001 Air Circuit Breaker NA8

Structural Features of Circuit Breaker
Drawer seat
Arcing chamber
Shunt release
Rotar y handle Auxiliar y contact

Closing electromagnet
Intelligent controller
Operating mechanism
Energy storage handle
Breaking button
Making button
Front cover
NA8 Air Circuit Breaker P-002
Identification of Circuit Breaker Panel
3
16
4
5
15
6
10
14 11
13 12
1 Trademark 9 Draw-out plate
2 Secondar y wiring terminal 10 Three-position locking device
3 Breaking button 11 Drawer padlock
4 Energy- storage handle 12 Racking- handle entr y
5 Making button 13 Position indicator
6 Name plate 14 Rotar y handle storage hole
7 Energy-storage/release indicator 15 Intelligent controller
8 Breaking/Making indicator 16 Fault-breaking indicator reset button
: “Connected” position, “Test”position,

: main
: “Disconnected” : Button does not pop up,
main circuit and circuit disconnected
position, main circuit and handle is free to rotate;
secondar y circuit are and isolated with
and secondar y circuit Button pops up, and handle
both connected safety barrier, only
are both disconnected
: can not be rotated until
secondar y circuit is
button is reset manually.
connected
Circuit Breaker
● Frame size (A): 1600（In preparation...）, 2500, 4000, 7500
● Two kinds of breaking capacity: N, H (for 7500)
● Rated voltage Ue (VAC): 380/400/415, 690,
● Number of poles: 3 or 4 poles
● Mounting mode: draw-out type or fixed type
● Mode of connection: horizontal connection, vertical
connection, mixed connection
Operating Conditions and Environmental

Suitability
● NA8 products can operate normally at the following

temperature.
Electric and mechanical characteristic applicable for ambient
temperature -5℃~+40℃ (certified), and also peripheral
ambient temperature -45℃~+70℃ (M type ), -20℃~+70℃
(H type ).
● For specific derating factor, see P23.
Storage conditions: Applicable for -45℃~+70℃.
● NA8 may resist against the following electromagnetic

interference:
EMI-generated overvoltage;
Overvoltage caused by environmental disturbance or

distribution system;
Radio wave (radio, interphone, radar, etc.)
Static discharge of terminal users
● NA8 circuit breakers have successfully accredited through the

EMC test specified in the following standards:
IEC/ EN 60947-2
The above tests may ensure:
no false tripping fault, tripping time not interrupted.
● Protection grade
Front IP20 , other sides IP00

Intelligent Controller
● M type (basic type)
Basic functions: current measurement and display,

protection function (L, S, I&G)
● H type (communication type)
Including all protection functions of M Type
LCD display
Communication function
● H type +optional functions
Including all protection and measurement functions of

H type
(optional) voltage, power and other measurement

functions
(optional) advanced protection function
(optional) harmonic measurement and analysis
(optional) multiple auxiliar y functions
Connection
● Rear connection
Horizontal connection, vertical connection, mixed connection

are optional, and horizontal connection is of standard
configuration
● Optional accessories
Interphase insulating barrier, NA8-1600 expansion busbar
Lock
● Key lock
● Drawer position padlock (to lock the circuit breaker at the
disconnected position)
● Drawer shutters padlock
● Breaking/Making button padlock
● Door interlock
Indication Contacts
● Standard contacts
Breaking/Making indication contact
Fault tripping indication contact
● Options
Drawer seat position indication contact
The ready to close contact may be added
(There is no such function for 1600A frame).

Remote Operation
● Standard accessories
Motor-driven mechanism: MO
Closing electromagnet: CC
Shunt release: ST
● Options
Undervoltage time delay release: UVTD
Undervoltage instantaneous release: UVT

Rated
Product model Breaking current 200 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 6300 7500
capacity
NA8-1600
（In preparation...）
N ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
NA8-2500 H ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
NA8-4000 H
NA8-7500
N ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
H ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
NA8 Product Model Definition and Explanations
NA8 1600 N 1600 M / 3 MO D 230VAC OTHER
Breaking Number of Operation Mounting Special

Product Frame Rated Intelligent controller Control circuit
capacity poles code mode mode requirement
code current current code voltage code
code code code code
N: MO: D:
M: basic type 3: 230VAC: None:
standard 200 motor-driven draw-out
1600 (digital display type) three poles AC 230 V no special
type 400 operation type
requirement
H: 630
H: communication MN: F:
higher 800 4: 400VAC:
2500 type manual
four poles fixed type AC 400 V
type 1000 operation
(LCD display type) special
1250 requirement,
1600 110VDC: like:
4000 DC 110 V
2000 KL :
2500 key lock
7500 3200 220VDC:

4000 DC 220 V
5000
6300
7500
Notes: 1) "N "needs not be indicated for type N breaking capacity of NA8-7500, and may be omitted; if type H breaking capacity is selected,“H”needs to be indicated.”
2) Manual operation: excluding motor-driven mechanism and closing electromagnet, shunt release. motor-drivenoperation: including all remote operation standard accessories.
3) Code instance: NA8-2500H-2000M/3MO-D AC230V: 2500A frame H type breaking capacity, rated current 2000A ,M type ntelligent controller, 3poles,motor-driven operation, draw-out type, control voltage AC230V.
NA8 Accessor y Model Definition and Explanations (1)
NA8 1600 CC 230VAC
Product Accessory code

Frame current Rated voltage code
code
1600 CC: closing electromagnet 230VAC：AC230V
2500 ST: shunt release 400VAC：AC400V
2500～7500 UVT: undervoltage instantaneous release 110VDC：DC110V
4000～7500 MO: motor-driven mechanism 220VDC：DC220V
UVTD: undervoltage time delay release

NA8 Accessor y Model Definition and Explanations (2)
NA8 － 1600 － OF － C04
Product
Frame current Accessor y code Accessor y specification
code
1600 C04: four groups of contacts
2500 C06: six groups of contacts
4000 N3: 3 NO 3 NC
7500 OF: auxiliar y contact N4: 4 NO 4 NC
2500～7500 N5: 5 NO 5 NC
4000～7500
1S1S: one lock one key
KL: key lock 2S1S: two locks one key
3S2S: three locks two keys
FCDP: fixed door frame
DCDP: draw-out type door frame
FD3: fixed three-pole interphase insulating barrier
FD4: fixed four-pole interphase insulating barrier
DD3: draw-out type three-pole interphase insulating barrier
DD4 : draw-out type four-pole interphase insulating barrier
CE-CD-CT: drawer seat three-position signal
ILK2: draw-out type two wire rope mechanical interlock
ILK2F: fixed two wire rope mechanical interlock
ILK3: mechanical interlock (3 in 2)
ILK4 :mechanical interlock (3 in 1)

Note
Main Technical Parameters of Circuit Breaker
Characteristics
Number of poles 3/4

Rated operational voltage Ue (V) 380/400/415、690
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 12

Rated frequency (Hz) 50/60
Flashover distance (mm) 0
Suitability for isolation IEC/EN 60947-2 Applicable
Pollution grade IEC 60664-1 N:3
Frame size
Rated current (A)

Rated current of the N pole (A)
Type of the circuit breaker
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (kA rms) VAC 50/60Hz Icu 380/400/415V、690V
Rated ser vice short-circuit breaking capacity (kA rms) VAC 50/60H z Ics 380/400/415V、690V
Utilization categor y
Rated short- time withstand current (kA rms) VAC 50/60Hz Icw 1s 380/400/415V、690V
Icw 3s 380/400/415V、690V
Rated short-circuit making capacity (kA peak) VAC 50/60Hz Icm 380/400/415V、690V
Making current tripping protection function (MCR kA rms)
Breaking time (ms)
Closing time (ms)
Mounting, connection and ser vice life
Ser vice life C/O cycle Mechanical No maintenance

Electrical No maintenance
Connection Horizontal、Vertical、Mixed
3P
Fixed type
Size (H×W×D) 4P
3P
Draw-out type
4P
NA8-1600 （In preparation...） NA8-2500

200 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500
200 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500
N(400V) N(690V) H（415V） H（690V）
55 36 85 65
50 36 85 65
B B
50 85 65
30 30 50 50
121 76 187 143
10 16
20～30 20～30
30～40 30～40
20000 20000
8000 3000 8000 4000
▪ ▪
320×254×250 396×370×367
320×324×250 396×465×367
351×282×350 431.5×375×476
351×352×350 431.5×470×476
NA8-4000 NA8-7500
1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300 7500
1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300 3750

H(415V) H(690V) N(440V) N(690V) H(440V) H(690V) N(440V) N(690V) H(440V) H(690V)
100 85 135 100 150 100 135 100 150 100
100 85 135 100 135 100 135 100 150 100
B B
100 85 135 100 135 100 135 100 135 100
75 75 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
220 187 297 220 330 220 297 220 330 220
26 26
20～30 20～30
30～40 30～45
10000 1000
6000 3000 500 1500(440v) 1000(690v)
▪ ▪
396×422×341
396×547×341
431×435×449 472×786×464
431×550×449 472×1016×464
Function Over view of Intelligent Controller

M Type intelligent controller (basic type)
Protection
All protective threshold values and time delays are set using
buttons.
1
● Overload protection
2
True RMS long time delay protection.
3
Thermal memory: heat accumulation before and after tripping.
4
● Short circuit protection
5
Short time delay (RMS) and instantaneous protection
11
6
4 definite time-delay options in terms of time delay
7
8 12 ● Earth fault protection
9 4 definite time-delay options in terms of time delay

13
10 ● Test function
Simulate 6IR test current for tripping test.
● Tripping recording function
Tripping reason display function

1 Display window: display the current value, setting parameter,
● Ammeter
fault current, tripping time, etc.
M Type intelligent controller measures the current true
2 Return button: exit from current menu and enter the upper-
effective value (RMS) from 40% to 150% with an accuracy of
level menu, or cancel current setting parameter value.
2%.
3 Up button: move up the check box submenu at the current
menu, or realize“+” parameter setting in parameter setting.
4 Set button: switch to the default setting menu.
5 Check button: switch to the default query menu.
6 Down button: move down the check box submenu at the

current menu, or realize “-” parameter setting in parameter
setting.
7 Enter button: enter the next-level menu of current selected

box, or save current parameter setting.
8 Ir indicator for overload long-time-delay tripping.
9 Isd indicator for short circuit short-time-delay tripping.
10 Ig indicator for earth fault tripping.
11 Cover lock hole
12 Button for tripping test
13 Ii indicator for short-circuit instantaneous tripping.

H Type Intelligent Controller (communication type)

Protection
All protective threshold values and time delays are set using buttons.
● Contain all protection functions of M type control unit.
● Communication function
1 Modbus - RTU communication protocol

2 ● Leakage protection function (optional)
3 Special external transformer is equipped.
4 ● Advanced protection function (optional)
5 Voltage unbalance protection
11 Overvoltage and undervoltage protection

6
7 Overfrequency and under-frequency protection
8 12 Phase sequence protection
9 Reverse power protection function

13 Demand value protection function
10
● Expanded functions
Intelligent controller self-diagnostics
Operation times/fault tripping/alarm/ deflection recording
function: providing the record of the latest 10times.
1 Display window: display the current value, setting parameter, Main contact abrasion display function: evaluate the contact
fault current, tripping time, etc.
abrasion degree according to the mechanical life, electric life and
2 Return button: exit from current menu and enter the breaking capacity of different frames.
upper3.8-level menu, or cancel current setting parameter
Internal clock function.
value.
Button Trip-test function.
3 Up button: move up the check box submenu at the current
● Electric energy meter (optional)
menu, or realize “+” parameter setting in parameter setting.
Voltage measurement
4 Set button: switch to the default setting menu.
Frequency measurement
5 Check button: switch to the default query menu
Demand value measurement
6 Down button: move down the check box submenu at the Power (active power, reactive power, apparent power) measurement
current menu, or realize “-” parameter setting in parameter
Electric energy (active power, reactive power, apparent power)
setting.
measurement
7 Enter button: enter the next-level menu of current selected
Power factor measurement
box, or save current parameter setting.
● Load monitoring function (optional)
8 Ir indicator for overload long-time-delay tripping.
● Zone selectivity interlock (optional)
9 Isd indicator for short circuit short-time-delay tripping .
● Input/output function (optional)
10 Ig indicator for earth fault tripping. 3DO, 4DO or 2DI, 2DO
11 Cover lock hole DI signal: AC230 V (standard, other optional); DC110V;
12 Test button for tripping test DO requires the power module (24VDC output) and relay module.
● Harmonic analysis function (optional)

13 Ii indicator for overload long-time-delay tripping.
Measuring the fundamental wave current, fundamental wave line
voltage, fundamental wave phase voltage, fundamental wave power
and each 3-31 odd harmonic current ratio (HRIh), harmonic voltage
ratio(HRUh), total harmonic current distortion [THDi , thdi], total
harmonic voltage distortion [THDu, thdu].
Harmonic wave ratio (HR):
the ratio of the RMS value of the hth of harmonic component
contained in the cyclic AC quantity to the RMS value of fundamental
wave component (in percentage).

Protective Characteristics of Intelligent Controller

Protective characteristics of intelligent controller consist of inverse time-delay and definite time-delay.
When the fault current exceeds the inverse time-delay
setting, the controller provides time delay protection according to the definite time-delay.
The inverse time-delay current conforms to the characteristic cur ve I²t.
Overload long-time-delay protection characteristics
Overload long-time-delay protection acting by threshold value.
Setting parameter Setting range Error

Long time-delay setting current Ir ( 0.4-1 .0) In+OFF ±15%
Long time-delay setting step size 1A (1600-2500 Frame size）； 2A(4000-7500 Frame size）
Long time-delay setting time tr (1-2- 4-8 -12-16-20 -24 -30)s ±10%
Anti-time-limit characteristic curve 6

t=( ) 2×tr
N
Fault current Action time
I< 0.85Ii No action
I> 1.l5Ii Action

1.5lr 16 32 64 128 192 256 320 384 480
2.0lr 9 18 36 72 108 144 180 216 270
6.0lr 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24 30
Notes:N --- the multiple of fault current divided by set current I/Ir
t --- fault operating delay time
tR --- long time delay set value
Operating time permissible error±15%
Conventional factory setting: overload long time delay current 1.0In;
Conventional factory setting: overload 6Ir; operating time 2s
Example: Given that overload long time delay current 1.0In, delay time 2s ( at 6Ir), now line current I=1.8In, actual fault operating delay time t may be calculated:
N =1.8In/1.0In=1.8
t= (6/1.8)2 × 2 =22.2s
Short circuit short-time-delay protection characteristics

Short circuit short time delay protection acting by threshold value.
Setting parameter Setting range Error
Short time-delay setting current Isd ( 1.5-10) In+OFF ± 10%
Short time-delay setting step size 1A (1600-2500 Frame size）； 2A(4000-7500 Frame size）
Definite-time-limit: 0.11、0.21、0.31、0.41;
Short time-delay setting time tsd ± 15% or inherent 40ms (take the maximum)
Anti-time-limit:0.1、0.2、0.3、0.4
Fault current Action time
I< 0.9Isd No action
I> 1.l5Isd Time-delay action

Isd＜I≤10I Action characteristicsI 2 t=(10I r ) 2 tsd
Anti-time-limit
Setting times0.1、0.2、0.3、0.4
Setting times0.11、0.21、0.31、0.41
1≥1.1Isd Definite-time-limit Min.s 0.06、0.16、0.255、0.34
Max.s 0.14、0.24、0.345、0.46
Return time 0.05、0.14、0.25、0.33
Notes: Isd --- short time delay current set value

I --- fault current
Ir --- long time delay set value
t --- fault operating delay time
tsd --- short time delay inverse time-delay set value
Operating time permissible error±15%
Conventional factory setting: short time delay current 8Ir
Conventional factory setting: short time delay operating time 0.4s
Short circuit instantaneous protection characteristic

Short circuit instantaneous protection acting by threshold value.
Setting parameter Setting range

Instantaneous setting current Ii ( 2~1 5) In+OFF
Short time-delay setting step size 1A (1600-2500 Frame size）； 2A(4000-7500 Frame size）
Operating characteristics I＜0.85Ii No action
I＞1.15Ii Action
≤100ms Action time
Earth Fault Protection Characteristic
Earth fault protection operating threshold
<0.9Ig: no action;
>1.1Ig: action;
NA8 -1600\2500: 0.2In~1.0In + OFF (MAX:1200A)
NA8-4000\7500: 500 A~1200 A + OFF
Setting time (s) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4

Min (s) 0.06 0.16 0.255 0.34
Definite time-delay
Max (s) 0.14 0.24 0.345 0.46
Return time 0.05 0.14 0.25 0.33
(I g)²
Inverse time-delay t= ×tg
I²
Notes: Ig — earth protection setting, NA8-1600\2500 default factory setting Ig =0.5In , 4000\7500 default factory setting Ig =800A
I --- fault current
T --- fault operating delay time
tg --- earth inverse time-delay set value
Inverse time-delay operating time permissible error±15%
Conventional factory setting: OFF
Controller Minimum Factor y Display Current
Frame Rated current Minimum display value
1600 400~1600 80
2500 630～2500 80
≥4000 ≥1600 160
Measuring Accuracy of Intelligent Controller
Current measurement
Measuring range Ia, Ib, Ic and I N not more than 15In (circuit breaker rated current)
Below 0.1In, measurement is inaccurate.

0.1In~0.4In, the accuracy will linearly change from 5% to 2%.
Measuring accuracy 0.4In~1.5In, the accuracy is 2%.
> 1.5In, the accuracy will linearly change from 2% to 15%.
Measuring accuracy of earth current is 10%.
Voltage measurement
Line voltage: 0~600 V

Measuring range
Phase voltage: 0~300 V
Measuring accuracy Error : ±1%
Frequency
Measuring range 40Hz~70Hz
Error Error : ±0.1H z
Power
Measurement mode Effective value

3P: total active power, total reactive power, total apparent power
Measuring content 4P: split phase active power, split phase reactive power, split phase apparent power, total active power, total
reactive power, total apparent power
Active power : -32768kW~+32767kW

Reactive power : -32768Kvar~+32767Kvar
Measuring range
Apparent power : 0KVA~65535kVA
Error : ±2.5%
Power factor
3P: total power factor

Measuring content
4P: split phase power factor
Measuring range -1.00~+1.00
Electric energy
Input reactive electric energy (EQin), output reactive electric energy (EQout)
Measuring content Input active electric energy (EPin), output active electric energy (EPout)
Total active electric energy (EPtotal), total reactive electric energy (EQtotal), total apparent electric energy (EStotal)
Active electric energy: -32768kWh~+32767kWh
Measuring range Reactive electric energy: -32768Kvarh~+32767Kvarh

Apparent electric energy: 0~65535kVAh
Measuring accuracy ±2.5%
Harmonic measurement
Current: Ia, Ib, Ic

Fundamental wave measurement
Voltage: Uab, Ubc, Uca
Total harmonic distortion THD: total distortion ratio of harmonic wave in relative to fundamental wave
THD and Thd Thd: total distortion ratio of harmonic wave in relative to effective value
Harmonic amplitude spectrum The controller may display FFT amplitude of 3~31 odd harmonic in percentage “%”.
Control unit measuring accuracy ±2%
Tripping Characteristic Cur ve of Intelligent Controller
10000
5000
Ir=(0.4-1)In
1000
500
200
tr=(1~30)s
100
50
20
T(s) 10
2
I t ON
5
2 Isd=（1.5~10）Ir
Isd=（1.5~10）Ir
1
2
I t OFF
0.5
0.2
0.1
Ii=（2~15)In
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.2 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.8 1 2 3 4 5 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30
X Ir
Fig.1 Overcurrent protection cur ves
10000
5000
Ig=(0.2-1)In
1000 MAX 1200A
500 MIN 120A
200
100
50
20
T(s) 10
2
I t ON
5
1
0.5
0.2
0.1
I2t OFF
0.05
0.02
0.01
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.8 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30
X In
Fig.2 Asymmetrical earth fault protection cur ves
Explanations on Earth Fault Protection

Single Phase Earth Fault Protection
● The three-pole circuit breaker realizes earth protection through testing whether the three-phase current vector sum is zero or
not via internal three current transformers.
L1
N A8
Internal current sensor
L2
L3
PEN
● The four-pole circuit breaker realizes earth protection through testing whether the three-phase current and N phase
current vector sum is zero or not via internal four current transformers.
L1
N A8
L2
L3
N
PE
● The 3P+N system realizes earth protection through the vector sum calculation via the three-pole circuit breaker and external
N-pole transformer.
L1
N A8
L2
L3
External N-pole transformer
Notes: ① The external N-phase current transformer is special transformer configured by the company, and the default lead wire is 2m long.
② At 3PT, the earth protection can be only used for balanced load; for unbalanced load, this function should be closed or the set value is set above the permissible
unbalanced current; otherwise, it might cause the operation of intelligent controller.
③ At (3P+N) T, maximum distance between transformer and circuit breaker cannot exceed 5m; when the transformer lead wire exceeds 2m long, it should be
particularly indicated upon placing an order.
As show below, a load side fault of NA8 circuit breaker: The fault current only flows through one phase. If the three-phase current vector
sum detected by 4 current sensors is higher than the set threshold, the intelligent control unit will activate the differential earth protection
function. Such earth protection realizes the load side earth fault protection.
Transformer secondary side

L1
N A8
L2
L3
PE
Earth transformer
Earth Current Type Earth Protection

The earth transformer is used at the transformer star center to fulfill earth protection.
On condition of the circuit breaker protection of medium voltage/low voltage transformer, an earth transformer can be equipped at the
transformer star connection center (the circuit breaker should be equipped with the H type controller, and the earth current protection
transformer should be selected), and this earth transformer may measure the earth fault current at the power supply side and
load side of NA8 circuit breaker, as shown below.
Intelligent
controller
PE
or
PEN
As shown below, through installing the external earth transformer, the earth fault at the power supply side of circuit breaker
can be checked, and the earth fault at the load side of NA8 circuit breaker can also be detected.
Transformer secondary side

L1
N A8
L2
L3
PE
Earth transformer
Residual Leakage Protection
It is especially suitable for places having high-sensitivity requirement for the residual current protection to prevent man-made indirect
contact. For NA8 circuit breaker, the H type controller should be selected, and the leakage protection function and leakage transformer
(LEC) accessory should be added so as to realize leakage protection.
Leakage current I△n [A]0.5-1-2-3-5-7-10-20-30

Tripping time △ t [s]0.06-0.17-0.25-0.33-0.42-0.58-0.75-0.83
LEC LEC
N
PE
Intelligent Intelligent
controller controller
The NA8 circuit breaker realizes the residual current protection function and needs to meet the following requirements:
1. Select the H-type controller;
2. Adding the leakage protection function of the controller;
3. Adding leakage current transformer (LEC) accessories;
4. The outgoing terminal of the circuit breaker is connected vertically;
5. It is available when the rated current of the circuit breaker is ≤3200A,

Accessor y: Lock
Key Lock KL
There are 3 kinds of key lock (The later two kinds are used in the distribution
system of two incoming cabinets and one connection cabinet):
one lock one key (1S1S)
two locks one key (2S1S)
three locks two keys (3S2S)
Drawer shutters Padlock
The padlock should be self prepared by the user.
If the padlock is selected, when the circuit breaker body is at the
disconnected or test position, it should ensure the body terminal is
not connected with external live circuit.
Drawer Position Padlock
The padlock should be self prepared by the user.
After the drawer seat and body are locked at the disconnected using the
padlock, the drawer seat rocker couldn’t be inserted into the drawer seat
rocking-handle hole, so the draw-out type circuit breaker body position
cannot be changed.
Door Interlock
Circuit breaker condition door interlock
When the circuit breaker is closed, it is forbidden to open the switchgear

door; when the circuit breaker is opened, it is allowed to open the switchgear
door.
Circuit breaker position door interlock
When the circuit breaker is at the connection and test position, it is

forbidden to open the switchgear door; when the circuit breaker is at the
detachment position, it is allowed to open the switchgear door.
Pushbutton Lock PL
Pushbutton lock: used to lock up the mechanical button opening and closing
the circuit breaker, and the padlock is used. After locking, manual opening
and closing operation couldn't be done. (the padlock should be self-
prepared by the user).
Mechanical Interlock IKL-2 (Wire rope two interlock):
It may realize the interlocking of two horizontal or vertically installed three- or four-
pole circuit breakers.
Possible mode of
Circuit diagram operation
1QF 2QF
0 0
1QF 2QF 0 1
1 0
Notes: a. When it needs to bend the wire rope, the transition arc at the
bend should be higher than R120mm to ensure it can move flexibly.
b. Check the wire rope and ensure enough lubricating oil in it to ensure
its flexible movement.
Mechanical Interlock ILK-3/4 (wire rope three interlock)

ILK -3 three interlock diagram
It may realize the interlocking of three flat or vertically installed three- or
four-pole circuit breakers
ILK-3 three interlock Possible mode ILK- 4 three interlock Possible mode
Circuit diagram of operation Circuit diagram of operation
1QF 2QF 3QF 1QF 2QF 3QF

0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 1
0 1 0 0 1 0
1 0 0 1 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
ILK -4 three interlock diagram
Notes: a. When it needs to bend the wire rope, the transition arc at the bend should be higher than
R120mm to ensure it can move flexibly.
b . Check the wire rope and ensure enough lubricating oil in it to ensure its flexible movement.
Accessor y: Indication Contact

Auxiliar y contact OF
Standard configuration 4CO 6CO（NA8-1600）
Breaking capacity current (A)/voltage (V) current (A)/voltage (V)

VAC（AC-15） 1.3/240，0.75/415 1.3/240，0.75/415
VDC（DC-13） 0.55/110，0.27/220 - -
Drawer seat three-position indication contact CD - CE - CT

Standard configuration 1CO/3
Breaking capacity current (A)/voltage (V)
VAC（AC-15） 1.3/240，0.75/415
VDC（DC-13） 0.55/110，0.27/220
Tripping alarm contact

Standard configuration 1CO
VAC（AC-15） 1.3/240，0.75/415
VDC（DC-13） 0.55/110，0.27/220

Standard configuration 1NO

VAC（AC-15） 1.3/240，0.75/415
VDC（DC-13） 0.55/110，0.27/220
Notes: 1) CO is the changeover contact, 1NO 1NC is matched with a common terminal.
2) NO is normally open contact, NC is normally closed contact.

Motor-driven mechanism (MO)
It has the function of motor energy storage and automatic re-energy storage after
closing of circuit breaker to ensure the circuit breaker can be closed immediately after
opening. Where there is no auxiliary power supply, the energy storage handle is used
as standby.
Characteristic
VAC 50/60Hz 220/230/240，380/400/415
Power supply
VDC 110，220
Operating threshold 0.85-1.1Us
Frame: power consumption (VA or W) 1600:75W；2500:85W；4000～7500: 150W

1600 frame MO 2500~7500 frame MO
Motor over-current time ≤1min
Energy storage time ≤7s
Operating frequency ≤2times/min
Electric remote operation coil (CC and ST)

Closing electromagnet (CC)
If energy storage of the mechanism is done, CC may fulfill remote closing after being
energized.
Characteristic CC
220/230/240
1600 frame CC&ST VAC 50/60Hz
Power supply 380/400/415
VDC 220,110
Operating voltage 0.85-1.1Us
AC 400VA
Frame: power consumption (VA or W)
DC 1600：380W；2500~7500：130W
Shunt release (ST)
After being energized, ST will open the circuit breaker instantaneously.
Characteristic ST
2500、4000~7500 frame CC&ST
220/230/240
VAC 50/60Hz
Power supply 380/400/415
VDC 220,110
Operating voltage 0.85-1.1Us
AC 400VA
Frame: power consumption (VA or W)
DC 1600：380W；2500~7500：130W
Undervoltage release (UVT)
If the supply voltage reduced to a value between 35% and 70% of rated voltage, this
tripping coil leads to the instantaneous opening of circuit breaker. If the UVT tripping
coil is not energized, the circuit breaker cannot be closed, manually (closing button) or
electrically (closed electromagnet). Only when the supply voltage of UVT tripping coil
reaches 85% of rated voltage, the circuit breaker can be closed.
Characteristic
VAC 50/60Hz 220/230/240，380/400/415
Power supply _
VDC
Opening 0.35-0.7Ue 0.35-0.7Ue
1600 frame UVT 2500、4000~7500 frame UVT Operating threshold
Closing 0.85Ue 0.85-1.1Ue
Frame: power consumption (W) 1600：220W/15W；

2500、4000~7500：220W/13W
Note: attracting/holding.
Undervoltage time delay release (UVTD)
To prevent the false tripping circuit breaker resulting from short time voltage drop, it
requires UVT operating time delay. A time delay unit is added besides UVT to realize
this function.
Characteristic
Power supply VAC 50/60Hz
Opening 0.35-0.7Ue
Operating threshold
Closing 0.85Ue
Frame: power consumption (VA) 1600：20VA；2500~7500：48VA
Adjustable time 1s~5s, the time delay can be selected and adjustable.
Note: Only NA8 - 1600 uses the external undervoltage time delay module, and 2500、4000~7500 product
undervoltage time delay release has built-in undervoltage time delay unit.
Capacticy Derating and Power Loss

NA8-1600 （In preparation...）
Connection mode Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
40° - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
45° - - - - - - - - - - - - 1550 -
50° - - - - - - - - - - - - 1500 1550
55° - - - - - - - - 950 950 1150 1200 1450 1500
60° - - - - 550 580 700 700 900 900 1050 1100 1350 1450
NA8-2500
Connection mode Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
40° - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
45° - - - - - - - - - - 1900 - 2400 2400
50° - - - - - - - - 1500 1550 1850 1900 2300 2300
55° - - - - - - - - 1400 1450 1800 1800 2200 2200
60° - - - - - - - - 1300 1350 1700 1700 2100 2100
NA8-4000
Ambient temperature 1600A 2000A 2500A 3200A 4000A
Connection mode Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
40° - - - - - - - - - -
45° - - - - - - - - 3800 3850
50° - - - - - - 3100 - 3600 3650
55° - - - - 2450 - 3000 3050 3400 3450
60° - - 1900 1950 2350 2400 2900 2950 3200 3250
NA8-7500
Ambient temperature 4000A 5000A 6300A 7500A
Connection mode Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
40° - - - - / - / -
45° - - - - / 6100 / 7000
50° - - 4700 4800 / 6000 / 6550
55° 3900 3900 4600 4650 / 5500 / 6050
60° 3800 3800 4400 4500 / 5200 / 5650
Note: “-” represents no derating; “/” means no horizontal connection.

Altitude Capacity Derating Factor
Voltage performance corrections under different altitudes
Altitude (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000

Rated impusle withstand voltage (kV) Uimp 12 10 8.5 7.5
Average insulation grade (V) Ui 1000 800 700 600
Maximum operational voltage (V ) Ue 690 580 500 400
Current performance corrections under different altitudes
Altitude (m) Rated operating current (Ie)

2000 1.0Ie
2500 0.93Ie
3000 0.88Ie
3500 0.83Ie
4000 0.78Ie
4500 0.73Ie
5000 The factor y must be contacted for confirmation
Note: If the ambient temperature is lower than 40 ℃, Ie = In ; if the ambient temperature is higher than 40 ℃, derating use must be done in strict accordance with the
requirement of operation manual; in such case, Ie ≠ In , Ie and In can be looked up according to the temperature derating table.
Power loss
Power loss is the power consumption per pole measured at In, 50/60 Hz.
Frame Rated current (A) Power loss of draw-out type (W) Power loss of fixed type (W)
200 115 45
400 140 80
630 161 100
800 215 110
1600A（In preparation...）
1000 230 120
1250 250 130
1600 460 220
630 58.6 26.4
800 73.7 36.6
1000 172 78
2500A
1250 268 122
1600 440 200
2000 530 262
2500 600 312
2000 470 250

2500 550 280
4000A
3200 670 420
4000 1047 656
4000 550 -
7500A 5000 590 -
6300 950 -
7500 1500 -
Dimension Of Busbar
Bolt Configuration and Mounting Torque
Bolt type Application Preferred tightening torque

M3 Fasten the secondar y connecting conductor （0.5~0.7）N · m
M8 (with flat washer only) Fasten the product on the switchgear (1600A frame) （18~25）N·m
M10 (with flat washer only) Fasten the product on the switchgear ( 2500A and above frame) （25~40）N·m
M10 Fasten the busbar （36~52）N·m
Connection Busbar Specification Reference under Different Temperatures

Permissible maximum busbar temperature: 100℃
The busbar material is bare copper, and the unit of width and thickness is both mm.
Ambient temperature (-5~40) ℃ Ambient temperature 50℃ Ambient temperature 60℃
Frame Rated Recommended busbar specification Recommended busbar specification Recommended busbar specification
current current (A) Number of Number of Number of

Width Thickness Specification Width Thickness Specification Width Thickness Specification
panels panels panels
200 30 5 1 30*5*1 30 5 1 30*5*1 40 5 1 40*5*1
400 30 5 2 30*5*2 30 5 2 30*5*2 30 10 1 30*10*1
630 40 5 2 40*5*2 40 5 2 40*5*2 50 5 2 50*5*2

800 50 5 2 50*5*2 50 5 2 50*5*2 50 6 2 50*6*2
1600A
1000 50 5 3 50*5*3 50 5 3 50*5*3 50 6 3 50*6*3
（In preparation...）
1250 60 8 2 60*8*2 60 8 2 60*8*2 60 10 2 60*10*2

1600 60 10 2 60*10*2 60 10 2 60*10*2 60 10 3 60*10*3
630 40 5 2 40*5*2 50 5 2 50*5*2 50 5 2 50*5*2
800 50 5 2 50*5*2 50 5 2 50*5*2 60 5 2 60*5*2

1000 50 5 3 50*5*3 50 5 3 50*5*3 60 5 3 60*5*3
2500A 1250 60 8 2 60*8*2 60 8 2 60*8*2 60 8 3 60*8*3
1600 60 10 2 60*10*2 60 10 2 60*10*2 60 10 3 60*10*3
2000 100 5 3 100*5*3 100 5 3 100*5*3 100 5 4 100*5*4
2500 100 10 2 100*10*2 100 10 2 100*10*2 80 10 3 80*10*3
2000 80 8 3 80*8*3 80 8 3 80*8*3 80 10 3 80*10*3

2500 80 6 4 80*6*4 80 6 4 80*6*4 80 8 4 80*8*4
4000A
3200 100 10 4 100*10*4 100 10 4 100*10*4 100 10 4 100*10*4
4000 100 10 5 100*10*5 100 10 5 100*10*5 120 10 5 120*10*5
4000 100 10 5 100*10*5 100 10 5 100*10*5 100 10 6 100*10*5
5000 100 10 7 100*10*7 100 10 7 100*10*7 120 10 7 120*10*7

7500A
6300 120 10 7 120*10*7 120 10 7 120*10*7 120 10 8 120*10*8
7500 120 10 9 120*10*9 120 10 9 120*10*9 120 10 10 120*10*10
Notes: a. When the copper busbar selected by the user is not matched with the circuit breaker connection terminal, it needs to design and process the extension busbar for
connection. The extension busbar will be designed by the user; its section area cannot be less than the above requirement, and the clearance between extension
busbars cannot be less than that between the circuit breaker connection terminals.
b. After installing the above recommended busbar, it shall ensure the electric clearance between adjacent phases of the circuit breakers is not less than 18mm.
c. For electric components using thyristor for three-phase rectification and high-frequency inversion in the load devices, like high-frequency induction heating electric
furnace (intermediate frequency furnace steel facility), solid state high frequency welder (such as submerged arc welder), vacuum heating melting facility (like single
crystal growing furnace) , upon selecting the circuit breaker, it should take into account not only the impact of ambient temperature and altitude, but also the impact
of higher harmonic generated by thyristor on the circuit breaker; in such case, it must be used by derating, and the recommended derating factor is (0.5~0.8).
d. After the user installs the busbar, the electric clearance between upper and lower busbar fastening bolts should not be less than 20 mm.
e. After the circuit breaker is installed, the safe spacing between different potential electrified bodies and between the electrified body and ground should be not less
than 18mm.
Dimension And Installation

NA8-1600 draw-out type （In preparation...）
210 36
310
275
351
95 75
141( 3P ) 141 300 (connected position)

211( 4P ) 344 (disconnected position)
Datum line
Hole size
Pole N 258
220
10×Φ5
118
6.5
10
320
120
95
2×Φ8.5
118
2
75
Circuit breaker
mounting plate
67（3P） 78
Datum line
137（4P）
Datum line
Side view Busbar mounting dimensions
50
D
150
78.5
Φ11
Pole N
16
Datum line
Vertical connection
Busbar mounting dimensions
Φ11 50
50
150
15
78.5
25
70 70 70
D
Pole N
16
Datum line
Three-pole product horizontal extension busbar (optional)
D
B
90
A
101 101
Φ11
15
20 80 35
Unit: mm
35
120
90
63 16
Datum line
Note: The extension busbar is of optional accessor y,
requiring additional expense.
Four-pole product horizontal extension busbar (optional)

C
D
B
90
A
101 101 101

Φ11
15
20 80 35
Pole N
35
Unit: mm
120
90
63 16
15.5
Datum line

Vertical extension busbar (optional)
Φ11 15 35
35
90
149
80
78.5
70 70 70
90
B
Unit: mm
Pole N
D
15.5 16
Datum line
Note: The extension busbar is of optional accessor y, requiring

additional expense.
NA8-1600 fixed type（In preparation...）
210
320
275
118.5（3P） 118.5 100 64

6
188.5（4P）
250
127（3P） 127
197（4P） Datum line
Hole size
258
220
8×Φ5
4×Φ8.5
100
322
285
Circuit breaker
64
mounting plate
118.5（3P） 118.5
188.5（4P）
Datum line Datum line

（37）
D
149
48.5
Φ11 70 70 70
15
25 50
（37）
Pole N
16
Note: If the user intends to change horizontal connection into vertical Datum line
connection at site, it only needs to rotate the busbar by 90°.
Vertical connection
Φ11
（37）
50
149
15
48.5
25
70 70 70
D
Pole N
16
Note: If the user intends to change vertical connection into horizontal

connection at site, it only needs to rotate the busbar by 90°. Datum line
Three-pole product horizontal extension busbar connection (optional)
D
B
90
A
101 101
Φ11
15
20 80 35
35
120
90
Unit: mm
33 16
Datum line
Note: The extension busbar is of optional accessor y, requiring additional expense.
Four-pole product horizontal extension busbar connection (optional)

C
D
B
90
A
Φ11 101 101 101

15
20 80 35
Pole N
35
90
120
Unit: mm
15.5
33 16
Datum line
Note: The extension busbar is of optional accessor y, requiring additional expense.

Vertical connection of extension busbar (optional)
Φ11 15 35
35
90
150
80
48.5
70 70 70
Unit: mm
A
90
B
Pole N D
16
Datum line
NA8-2500 Draw-out type
284 406
231.5
195.5
129
129
150
200
187.5（3P） 187.5 98
282.5（4P）
Datum line 108
Hole size
Pole N
344
155
2×Φ11
268
378
147
20
175
11×17
Circuit breaker
mounting plate
21.5
47
11×Φ5
98
108
Datum line
132( 3P ) 132
227.5( 4P ) Datum line
69.5
D
133
96.5
95 95 95
Φ11
12.5
L 30
Pole N
30
Unit: mm
In（A） D L
630～1600 15 60
2000～2500 20 70
Note: If the user intends to change horizontal connection into vertical

Vertical connection
Φ11 69.5
L
133
12.5 30
30
96.5
95 95 95
Pole N
D
Unit: mm
In（A） D L
630～1600 15 60
2000～2500 20 70

NA8-2500 fixed type
284 307
232.5
195.5
129
129
163.5
150
26.5
185( 3P ) 185
280( 4P )
Datum line 85
Hole size
Pole N
342
300
8×Φ5
269
311
150
16
12
Circuit breaker
21.5
87
26.5
mounting plate
29.5
Datum line
170( 3P ) 170
265( 4P )
Datum line
60
D
133
60
307
Φ11
12.5
95 95 95
L 30
Pole N
30
Unit: mm
In（A） D L
630～1600 15 60
2000～2500 20 70

Datum line
Vertical connection
Φ11 60
L
12.5
133
30
30
60
307
95 95 95
D
Pole N
Unit: mm
In（A） D L
630～1600 15 60
2000～2500 20 70

NA8-4000 draw-out type
308
42
232
431
258
199
217.5（3P） 217.5 98
332.5（4P） Datum line 108
407（connected position）
454（disconnected position）
Hole size
361
Pole N
318
17
155
Φ14
11
270
378
175
16
145
108
Circuit breaker
mounting plate
48
21.5
162.5（3P） 162.5 11×Φ5

277.5（4P）
Datum line
Datum line
Horizontal connection (In=1600A~2500A)
42
25
133
84
Pole N
Note: If the user intends to change horizontal connection into vertical Datum line
Vertical connection (In=1600A~2500A)
42
29
14
55
78
50
57.5
Pole N

42
25
133
84
Pole N

connection at site, it needs to change the upper and lower busbars of Datum line
phases N and B into the same busbars of phases A and C.
Vertical connection (In=3200A~ 4000A)
42
29
14
Φ11
75
25
57
100
35.5
25
Pole N
Note: If the user intends to change vertical connection into horizontal 115 115 115
connection at site, it needs to change the upper and lower busbars of
phases N and B into the same busbars of phases A and C. Datum line
NA8-4000 fixed type
308 308
232.5
129
129
163.5
150
58.5
216（3P） 216
331（4P） 85
Datum line
Hole size
Pole N
361
102.5
318
16
12
8×Φ5
150
270
311
58.5
85
Circuit breaker
20.5
201（3P） 201 mounting plate

28.5
316（4P）
Datum line
Datum line
33
25
133
47.5
Pole N
Datum line
Vertical connection (In=1600A~2500A)
33
29
14
18×Φ11(3P)
24×Φ11(4P)
50
55
78
21
Pole N

Datum line
Horizontal connection (In=3200A~ 4000A)
33
25
133
47.5

connection at site, it needs to change the upper and lower
Datum line
busbars of phases N and B into the same busbars of phases A and C.
Vertical connection (In=3200A~ 4000A)
33
29
14
Φ11
100
155
55
25
75
49
Pole N

connection at site, it needs to change the upper and lower Datum line
busbars of phases N and B into the same busbars of phases A and C.
NA8-7500 (In=4000A~ 6300A) three-pole draw-out type
335.5 450.5
56.5 384.5
231
258
200.5
40
207 92
Datum line
308 464(connected position)
510(disconnected position)
Hole size
Datum line
361
318
155
15
155
11
270
378
145
207
11×Φ5
16
48
21.5
92
Circuit breaker
42
156 240
mounting plate
197
Datum line
677
Horizontal connection (In=4000A~ 5000A/ three poles)
56.5 384.5
Datum line
115 115 115 115 115
14
25
Φ11
25
29
133
50
37
78
125
Phase A phaseB phaseC

Vertical connection (In=4000A~ 5000A/ three poles)
56.5 384.5
29
14 Datum line
Φ11
50
133
39

7898.5

Vertical connection (In=6300A/ three poles)
56.5 384.5
29
14
Φ11
25×3=75
Datum line
25
47.5
68
47.5

135
35
Note: In=6300A only has vertical connection and has no horizontal connection.
NA8-7500 draw-out type (In=4000A~ 6300A) four poles/ (In=7500A) three & four poles
565.5 450.5 56.5 384.5

231
258
200.5
40
207 92
Datum line
464(connected position)
308
510(disconnected position)
Hole size
Datum line
361
318
155
15
155
11
270
207
378
145
16
11×Φ5
48
21.5
92
141.5
398 240
42
878 Datum line Circuit breaker

mounting plate
Horizontal connection (In=4000A ~ 5000A/ four poles)
56.5 384.5
Datum line
25
115 115 115 115 115 115 115
14
Φ11 25
29
133
50
37
78
125
Phase N Phase A Phase B Phase C

Vertical connection (In=4000A~ 5000A/ four poles)
56.5 384.5
Datum line
29
14 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
Φ11 25
50
133

39
78
98.5

Vertical connection (In=6300A/ four poles)
56.5 384.5
29
14
Φ11
Datum line
25×3=75
25
115 115 115 115 115 115 115

25
47.5
68
47.5

135
35
Vertical connection (In=7500A/ three poles)
56.5 384.5
29
14
Φ11
25×3=75
25
115 149 162 149 115
81
47.5
25
68
47.5
Datum line
135
Phase A Phase B Phase C

35
Vertical connection (In=7500A/ four poles)
56.5 384.5
29
14
Φ11
115 115 149 162 149 115
25×3=75
25
81
25
47.5
68
Datum line
47.5

135
35
Dimensions of under voltage time delay control module,

power module, RU-1 relay signal module
72 39 8
24.5
1.5
35.5
45
90
82
2.5
Φ4.5 E
53
60.5
Note: Under voltage time delay control module, power module, RU-1 relay signal module have consistent overall dimensions,
and can be installed using the 35mm standard DIN rail mounting.
Dimensions of ground current transformer
00
Φ1
190
93
3
4×M6
90
70
7
9
100
185
Dimensions of leakage protection transformer
Secondary output terminal screw

M3.5
115
258
130
280
1 6 x M8
92
72
250
380
Note: The circuit breaker selected with the leakage transformer should
use the vertical busbar connection mode.
Dimensions of neutral pole current transformer
144
Front view
21.5
6
21.5
39.5
8
12 Main circuit
entr y
Flexible connection
coil
Main circuit
Upper entr y Bottom entr y
entr y
Main circuit entr y Main circuit entr y

direction direction
Note: 1. Upon fixing the neutral transformer, it needs to install it at the entr y end of circuit breaker, and one side of its flexible cable should
face the entr y direction of main circuit.
2.When the rated current is 200A-630A, the transformer needs to be wrapped around the busbar twice to be used normally.
E
Secondar y Circuit Wiring

NA8-1600 （In preparation...） M Type controller
2 3 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 59 60 62 64 65 XT
M FU
Processing
unit
AX Control circuit
SA
power supply
F DT Q
FU
1 4 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 61 63 XT
HL4
Intelligent controller Drawer seat three-position

Main circuit Sh un t
re le as e
Cl os in g Un de r vo lt ag e
el ec tr om ag ne t re le as e
En er gy
st or ag e
in di ca ti on
En er gy
st or ag e
mo to r
Auxiliary switch
electric signal
Type of AX auxiliary contact Used by the user
C 04 four groups of changeover C 06 six groups of changeover N 3 3 NO 3 NC

contacts (default) contacts (optional) contacts (optional)
38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 54 38 40 42 44 46 48
37 40 43 46 37 40 43 46 49 52 37 39 41 43 45 47
F—Shunt release DT—Closing electromagnet 24#, 25#: The contacts for external phase N transformer input
signal; for conventional product, they are empty, and
Q—Undervoltage release
should be ordered by the user specifically. Where
M—Motor-driven mechanism external transformer is required, they are the external
SA—Travel switch XT—Connection terminal transformer signal input contacts.
AX—Auxiliary contact SB1—Breaking button 27#：Protective grounding, is connected to the outer board
of the circuit breaker;
SB2—Making button SB3—Emergency stop button
28#, 29#: Shunt release;
HL1—Fault indicator light HL2—Energy storage indicator light
30#, 31#: Closing electromagnet;
HL3—Breaking indicator light
32#, 33#: Undervoltage release.
HL4—Making indicator light
34#~36#: Motor-driven mechanism.
HL5 ~7 —Position indicator light
37#~56#: Auxiliary contact.The conventional product has 4
FU—Fuse (6A) groups of changeover auxiliary contacts; in case of
1#, 2#: Intelligent controller power supply: voltage AC220/380V special order from the user, 6 groups of changeover
can be directly connected to 1#, 2#; If voltage is contacts can be provided, 3 NO 3C contacts. 6 groups
DC220/110V, it needs to through the power module,and of changeover contacts are used for AC only.
the power module outputs 24V which can be connected 57#~65#: Draw-out type circuit breaker three-position signal
to 1#, 2#. indication; the conventional supply has not wire
3#~5#: Tripping alarm contact (3 is the common point.) connection, is only for the draw-out type circuit
breaker with the secondary functions selected.
6#~ 9#: Auxiliary contact (1 NO and 1 NC ), optional.
Note: The part in solid line has been connected by the factor y,
10#, 11#: Empty and the part in dashed line shall be connected by the customer.
12#~ 19#: Empty
20#: Empty
21#~24#: Empty
NA8-1600 （In preparation...） H Type controller
To profibus AC 220V
PSU-1
profibus
24V
DC 24V
ST-DP NC + -
GND
D+D -
Sspecial shield + - DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3

twisted pair DC 24V
Modbus-RTU RU-1
N A B C UN UA UB UC D01 D02 D03
+
Red
2 3 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 35 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 59 60 62 64 65 XT
FU
Processing SA
unit
AX Control circuit
power supply
F DT Q M
FU
1 4 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 34 36 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 61 63 XT
Green
- HL3
Drawer seat three-position

Main circuit Intelligent controller Auxiliary switch
En er gy En er gy
Sh un t Cl os in g Un de r vo lt ag e
st or ag e st or ag e
re le as e el ec tr om ag ne t re le as e
in di ca ti on mo to r
electric signal
C04 four groups of changeover C06 six groups of changeover N3 3 NO 3 NC

38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 54 38 40 42 44 46 48
37 40 43 46 37 40 43 46 49 52 37 39 41 43 45 47
F —Shunt release DT —Closing electromagnet 24#, 25#: External Phase N transformer or external earth current
transformer input signal contact; for conventional
Q —Undervoltage release
product, they are empty, and should be ordered by
M —Motor-driven mechanism the user specifically. Where external transformer is
SA —Travel switch XT —Connection terminal required, they are the external transformer signal
input contacts.
AX —Auxiliary contact SB1 —Breaking button
27#： Protective grounding, is connected to the outer board
SB2 —Making button SB3 —Emergency stop button of the circuit breake;
HL1 —Fault indicator light 28#, 29#: Shunt release;
HL2 —Energy storage indicator light 30#, 31#: Closing electromagnet;
HL3 —Breaking indicator light 32#, 33#: Undervoltage release.
HL4 —Making indicator light 34 #~ 36 #: Motor-driven mechanism.
HL5 ~ 7 —Position indicator light 37 #~ 56 #: Auxiliary contact. 6 groups of changeover contacts
FU —Fuse (6A) are used for AC only.The conventional product has 4
groups of changeover auxiliary contacts; in case of
1#, 2#: Intelligent controller power supply: voltage AC220/380V
special order from the user, 6 groups of changeover
can be directly connected to 1#, 2#; If voltage is
contacts, 3 NO 3C contacts can be provided.
DC220/110V, it needs to through the power module,and
the power module outputs 24V which can be connected 57#~ 65#: Draw-out type circuit breaker three-position signal
to 1#, 2#. indication; the conventional supply has not wire
connection, is only for the draw-out type circuit
3#~5#: Tripping alarm contact (3 is the common point)
6#~9#: Auxiliary contact (1 NO and 1 NC ), optional.
ST-DP: DP protocol module; when the upper computer
10#, 11#: Type H intelligent controller default communication communication protocol is Modbus-RTU, ST-DP
output contact. protocol module is not required; when the upper
computer communication protocol is Profibus-DP,
12#~15#: 3 groups of programmable output signal, which must
ST-DP protocol module is required to change the
be connected with external RU-1 relay module. When
Modbus-RTU protocol into Profibus-DP protocol with
type H intelligent controller has programmable output
the cost separately charged.
signal, default output: 12 #, 13#: Closing signal output,
12#,14 #: Opening signal output,12 #, 15 #: Fault RU-1:Relay module.The upper computer remotely controls
tripping. The conventional product has no such it to open or close the circuit breaker, and it is used
connection. for amplifying the opening and closing signal energy
with the cost separately charged.
19#：H type intelligent controller communication
shielding ground wire Note: The part in solid line has been connected by the factor y, and the part
20#~23#: Voltage display input signal contact,20#: Phase N in dashed line shall be connected by the customer.
voltage signal,21#: Phase A voltage signal,

22#: Phase B voltage signal,23# : Phase C voltage
signal. The conventional product has no such
connection.
Secondar y Circuit Wiring

NA8-2500/4000/7500 M Type controller
2 3 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 59 60 62 64 65 XT
M FU
Processing
unit Control circuit
SA AX
power supply
F DT Q
FU
1 4 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 61 63 XT
HL4
Auxiliary switch Drawer seat three-position

En er gy En er gy
Main circuit Sh un t Cl os in g Un de r vo lt ag e
st or ag e st or ag e
re le as e el ec tr om ag ne t re le as e
in di ca ti on mo to r
electric signal
C 04 four groups of changeover C 06 six groups of changeover N 4 4NO&4NC

N 5 5NO&5NC contacts (optional)
38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 54 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
37 40 43 46 37 40 43 46 49 52 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55
24#, 25#: The contacts for external Phase N transformer input

F—Shunt release DT —Closing electromagnet
signal; for conventional product, they are empty, and
Q —Undervoltage release should be ordered by the user specifically. Where
M—Motor-driven mechanism external transformer is required, they are the external
transformer signal input contacts.
SA—Travel switch XT—Connection terminal
27#: Protective grounding, is connected to the outer
AX—Auxiliary contact SB1—Breaking button board of the circuit breaker；
SB2—Making button SB3—Emergency stop button
28 #, 29 #: Shunt release;
HL1—Fault indicator light HL2—Energy storage indicator light
30#, 31#: closing electromagnet;
HL3—Breaking indicator light HL4—Making indicator light
32 #, 33 #: Undervoltage release.
HL5 ~ 7—Position indicator light
34 #~36 #: Motor-driven mechanism.
FU—Fuse (6A)
37#~56#: Auxiliary contact. 6 groups of changeover contacts are
1#, 2#: Intelligent controller power supply: voltage AC220/380V used for AC only.The conventional product has 4
can be directly connected to 1#, 2#; If voltage is groups of changeover auxiliary contacts; in case of
DC220/110V, it needs to through the power module,and special order from the user, 6 groups of changeover
the power module outputs 24V which can be connected contacts, 4 NO 4 NC contacts and 5 NO 5 NC contacts
to 1#, 2#. can be provided.
3#~ 5#: Tripping alarm contact (3 is the common point) 57#~ 65#: Draw-out type circuit breaker three-position signal
indication, the conventional supply has not wire
6#~ 9#: Auxiliary contact (1 NO and 1 NC),optional
10#, 11#: Empty breaker with the secondary functions selected.
Note: The part in solid line has been connected by the factory, and the part in
12#~ 19#: Empty
dashed line shall be connected by the customer.
20#: Empty
21#~ 24#: Empty

NA8-2500/4000/7500 H Type controller
To profibus AC 220V
PSU-1
profibus
24V
DC 24V
ST-DP NC + -
GND
D+D -
Special shield + - DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3

twisted pair DC 24V
Modbus-RTU RU-1
N A B C UN UA UB UC D01 D02 D03
+
Red
2 3 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 35 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 59 60 62 64 65 XT
FU
Processing SA
unit
AX Control circuit
power supply
F DT Q M
FU
1 4 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 34 36 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 61 63 XT
Green
- HL3
Drawer seat three-position

Main circuit Intelligent controller Shunt
re lease
Closing
electro magnet
Under voltage
re lease
Energ y
sto rage
Energ y
sto rage
Auxiliary switch
indication moto r
electric signal
C04 four groups of changeover C06 six groups of changeover N4 4NO&4NC

N5 5NO&5NC contacts (optional)
38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 38 39 41 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 54 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56
37 40 43 46 37 40 43 46 49 52 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55
F —Shunt release DT —Closing electromagnet 24#, 25#: External Phase N transformer or external earth current
Q —Undervoltage release transformer input signal contact; for conventional

product, they are empty, and should be ordered by the
M —Motor-driven mechanism user specifically., where external transformer is
SA —Travel switch XT —Connection terminal required, they are the external transformer signal input
contacts.
AX —Auxiliary contact SB1 —Breaking button
27#:Protective grounding, is connected to the outer board
SB2 —Making button SB3 —Emergency stop button
of the circuit breake;
HL1 —Fault indicator light HL2 —Energy storage indicator light
28 #, 29 #: Shunt release;
HL3 —Breaking indicator light HL4 —Making indicator light
30#, 31#: Closing electromagnet;
HL5~7 —Position indicator light
32#, 33#: Undervoltage release.
FU —Fuse (6A)
34 #~ 36 #: Motor-driven mechanism.
1#, 2#:Intelligent controller power supply: voltage AC220/380V
37 #~56 #: Auxiliary contact. 6 groups of changeover contacts
can be directly connected to 1#, 2#;If voltage is
are used for AC only. The conventional product has 4
DC220/110V, it needs to through the power module,and
groups of changeover auxiliary contacts; in case of
the power module outputs 24V which can be connected
special order from the user, 6 groups of changeover
to 1#, 2#.
contacts, 4 NO 4 NC contacts or 5 NO 5 NC can be
3#~5#: Tripping alarm contact (3 is the common point) provided.
6#~9#: Auxiliary contact (NO contact), optional. 57#~ 65#: Draw-out type circuit breaker three-position signal
indication, the conventional supply has not wire
10# , 11#: Type H intelligent controller default communication
output contact.
12#~15#: 3 groups of programmable output signal, which must
ST-DP: DP protocol module, when the upper computer
be connected with external RU-1 relay module.When
communication protocol is Modbus-RTU, ST-DP protocol
type H intelligent controller has programmable output
module is not required; when the upper computer
signal, default output: 12#, 13#: Closing signal output,
communication protocol is Profibus-DP, ST-DP protocol
12#, 14#: Opening signal output, 12#, 15 #: Fault
module is required to change the Modbus-RTU protocol
tripping. The conventional product has no such
into Profibus-DP protocol with the cost separately
connection.
charged.
19#: H type intelligent controller communication shielding
RU-1: Relay module. The upper computer remotely controls it to
ground wire
open or close the circuit breaker, and it is used for
20#~23#:Voltage display I nput signal contact, 20#: Phase N amplifying the opening and closing signal energy with the
voltage signal, 21#: Phase A voltage signal, cost separately charged.
22#: Phase B voltage signal, 23#: Phase C voltage
signal. The conventional product has nsuch Note: The part in solid line has been connected by the factory,
connection. and the part in dashed line shall be connected by the
customer.
Circuit Breaker Configuration

NA8-1600（In preparation...） NA8-2500 NA8-4000 NA8-7500
Standard component Draw-out Draw-out Draw-out Draw-out

Fixed type Fixed type Fixed type
type type type type
Circuit breaker body ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Drawer seat ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Intelligent controller ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Upper and lower horizontal connection ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Auxiliar y contact 4CO ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Fault tripping indication contact ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Motor-driven operating mechanism ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Closed electromagnet ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Shunt release ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Door frame ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Note: The table above is the standard configuration of motor-driven type
NA8-1600（In preparation...） NA8-2500 NA8-4000 NA8-7500

Optional accessor y Draw-out Draw-out Draw-out Draw-out
Fixed type Fixed type Fixed type
type type type type
Under voltage time delay release ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Under voltage instantaneous release
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Opening/closing button lock
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Drawer position padlock
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Drawer safety barrier padlock
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Body key lock
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Position door interlock
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Condition door interlock
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Auxiliar y contact 6CO
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Auxiliar y contact 3NO + 3NC
▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Drawer position indication contact
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Mechanical interlock (two)
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
External neutral line transformer
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Ground current transformer and accessories
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Interphase insulating barrier ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Mechanical interlock (three) ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Circuit Breaker Type Selection Table

Frame current NA8-1600（In preparation...） NA8-2500 NA8-4000 NA8-7500
Circuit breaker N □ H □ H □ N □ H □
200A □ 630A □ 20 00A □ 4000 A □ 4000 A □
400A □ 800A □ 25 00A □ 5000 A □ 5000 A □
630A □ 1000A □ 32 00 A □ 6300A □ 6300A □
Rated current 800A □ 1250A □ 4000 A □ 7500A □ 7500A □
1000A □ 1600A □ 1600A □
1250A □ 2000A □
1600A □ 2500A □
Number of poles 3 poles □ 4 poles □

Mounting mode Draw-out type □ Fixed type □ ( NA8-7500 has no fixed type )
Busbar connection
mode
Horizontal connection □ Vertical connection □ Mixed connection □ ( indicating the connection mode )
M type □ H type □
（basic type ）（communication type ）
Closing electromagnet □ Shunt release □ Energy storage motor □

Shunt, closing, motor
AC220/230V □ AC380/400 V □ DC22 0V □ AC/DC11 0V □ DC24 V □
UVT □ UVTD □
Undervoltage release
AC220/230 V □ AC380/400 V □ DC22 0V □ AC/DC110V □ DC24 V □
NA8-1600 C04（standard ） C 06 □（only for AC ） N3 □（only for AC）

Auxiliary contact
N A8-2500、NA8-4000~7500 C04（standard ） C 06 □ N4 □ N5 □
Auxiliar y contact
indication (optional)
Drawer seat three-position signal device □
Connecting
accessor y (optional)
Interphase insulating barrier □ NA8-1600 extension busbar □
External transformer ： Phase N external transformer □ External LEC leakage transformer □ Ground current protection transformer □
Controller functions ： 3P + N protection function □ Leakage protection function □ Ground current protection function □
Voltage measurement and protection function □ Electric energy measurement and protection function □
Controller function
and accessories
Signal contact output function □
(optional) ZSI zone interlock protection function □ Load monitoring function □
Notes: 1) For 3P + N protection function, the phase N external transformer must be selected at the same time;
2) For the leakage protection function, the external LEC leakage transformer must be selected at the same time;
3) For the ground current protection function, the ground current protection transformer must be selected at the same time.
Lock mechanism
(optional)
Breaking/Making button lock □ One lock one key □ Two locks one key □ Three locks two keys □
Mechanical interlock Wire rope interlock (two interlock) □ Wire rope interlock (MIT-3) □ Wire rope interlock (MIT- 4) □
(optional)
Module (optional) PSU-1 □ RU-1 □ ST-DP protocol conversion module □

Remark : Upon placing an order, the frame current, rated current and auxiliar y control voltage must be indicated!
Notes: 1) Please check the □ corresponding to required option with “√” or “-”, and fill the figure; if there is no marking, we will provide the goods
according to the conventional factory setting.
2) If the additional functions and special requirement are selected, additional expense will incur separately. TEL: 0577-62877777 – 706213.
FAX: 0577 - 62877777–706288.
Configuration explanations
I. NA8-1600~2500、NA8-4000 ~7500 conventional configuration explanationsShunt release, closing electromagnet, 4 groups changeover
contacts, motor, M type intelligent controller, main circuit horizontal connection, door frame,main circuit mounting bolts, circuit breaker
operation manual, packing case, drawer seat (draw-out type circuit breaker)
II. Optional configuration (with additional expense)
NA8-1600 optional configuration explanations: undervoltage instantaneous release, undervoltage time delay release, wire rope interlock,
key lock, external transformer earth protection function, 6 groups of changeover contacts, 3NO 3NC contacts, H type intelligent controller,
optional type H function, interphase insulating barrier, position signal.
NA8-2500、NA8-4000~7500 optional configuration explanations: undervoltage time delay release (1s~5s adjustable), wire rope interlock,
button lock, key lock, door interlock,external transformer ground protection function, vertical connection, 6 groups of changeover
contacts, 4NO 4NC contacts, 5NO5NCcontacts, type H intelligent controller, optional H type function, position signal.
Note
NA1
NA1
Page P-001
NA1-1000X
200A to 1000A
NA1-2000X,NA1-2000XN，NA1-2000XH
630A to 2000A
Summary
5 basic frame sizes
For your various requirements, the Air Circuit Breaker NA1
includes 5 basic frame sizes as followed.
NA1-3200X,NA1-3200XN,NA1-4000X
2000A to 4000A
NA1-6300X,NA1-6300XN
4000A to 6300A
1. General 2.6 Type designation

NA1 - □□-□□ / □-□-□-□-□
1.1 Application scope
NA1 series air circuit breaker is suitable for the circuit of AC Voltage of secondary circuit
50Hz/60Hz with rated service voltage 400V, 690V and rated AC220V, AC380V,
service current up to 6300A. It is mainly used to distribute AC230V, AC400V
electric energy and protect circuits and electric equipment DC220V, DC110V
against over-load, under-voltage, short-circuit and single-
Wiring of main circuit:
phase earthing fault.
H:Horizontal wiring of main circuit
With intelligentized and selective protection functions, the V:Vertical wiring of main circuit
breaker can improve the reliability of power supply, and avoid
Mode of installation:
unnecessary power failure. The breaker is applicable for
F:Fixed type
power stations, factories, mines (for 690V) and modern high-
D:Draweout type
buildings, especially for the distribution system of
intelligentized building.
Mode of operation:
1.2 Standard: IEC/EN 60947-2. M:Manual
P: Power-driven
2. Operating conditions No. of poles:
2.1 Temperature condition: 3:3-pole
-5℃~40℃; the average value within 24h shall not exceed 4:4-pole
+35℃ (special situation excluded); Intelligent controller:
2.2 Altitude:≤2000m; M: Standard type

3M: Multifunctional type
2.3 Pollution grade: Grade 3; 3H: Communication type
2.4 Air conditions: Rated current:

max temperature of +40℃, higher relative humidity is
Frame size
allowable under lower temperature, RH could be 90% at Rated current
rated current
+20℃, special measures should be taken to occurrence of
200A
dews;
400A
2.5 Note: Without the intelligent controller, the breaker 1000A 630A
functions as a switch-disconnector. 800A
1000A
630A
800A
1000A
2000A
1250A
1600A
2000A
2000A
3200A 2500A
3200A
4000A 4000A
4000A
6300A 5000A
6300A
Breaking capacity:
X
XN
XH
1000,2000,3200,4000,6300
ACB
Company code
11
7
12 8
13
14
15
3
5
1 Drawout type
2 Fixed type
3 Intelligent controller
4 Operating mechanism
5 Auxiliary contact
9
6 Locking-device
10 7 Arcing chamber
8 Secondary wiring terminal
9 Wire-cable mechanical interlock
10 Connecting-rod type mechanical interlock
11 Shunt release
12 Closing electromagnet
14 Motor-driven energy-storage mechanism
15 Rotary handle
16 Mounting plate
2
16
6
3. Structure
+ =
Drawer seat Body

Drawout type breaker/switch-disconnector
Mounting plate Mounting plate for the Mounting plate

fixed type breaker/switch-disconnector
Secondary wiring terminal

Fault-breaking indicator
reset button Making button Under-voltage release
Energy storage &

Breaking button release indicator Shunt release
Breaking/making Closing electromagnet

indicator Name plate
Auxiliary contact
Motor-driven energy
Structure for in storage mechanism
and out Locking device
Rotary handle
Rotate out
Rotate in Intelligent controller
4. Main technical parameter
Type NA1-1000X
AC400V 42
Rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu)
AC690V 25
AC400V 30
Rated service short circuit breaking capacity (Ics)
AC690V 20
AC400V 30
Rated short-time withstand current (Icw.1s)
AC690V 20
Rated current In (A) 200 400 630 800 1000

Number of poles 3, 4
Rated voltage Ue (V) AC 400, AC 690
Rated current of N-pole In (A) 100%In
Intelligent Standard type (M)

controller Communication type (H)
Electric life AC 400V:6500, AC 690V:3000

Operation
Non-maintenance 15,000
performance Mechanical life
Maintenance 30,000
Connection pattern Horizontal, Vertical
Total breaking time (no additional delay time) (ms) ≤28

Closing time(ms) ≤50
Arcing distance(mm) 0
Type NA1-2000X NA1-2000XN NA1-2000XH
AC400V 80 50 65
Rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) AC415V 50 40 50
AC690V 50 40 50
AC400V 65 50 65
Rated service short circuit breaking capacity (Ics) AC415V 40 40 40
AC690V 40 40 40
AC400V 50 50 50
Rated short-time withstand (Icw.1s) AC415V 40 40 40
AC690V 40 40 40
AC400V 42 42 42
Rated short-time withstand (Icw.3s)
AC415V 42 42 42
Rated current In (A) 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000
Number of poles 3, 4
Rated voltage Ue (V) AC400, AC415, AC690

Electric life AC400:6500 AC690V:3000

Operation
performance Non-maintenance 15,000
Mechanical life
Maintenance 30,000
Type NA1-3200X NA1-3200XN NA1-4000X
AC400V 80 65 80
Rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) AC415V 65 50 —
AC690V 65 50 65
AC400V 65 65 65
Rated service short circuit breaking capacity (Ics) AC415V 65 50 —
AC690V 65 50 65
AC400V 65 65 65
Rated short-time withstand (Icw.1s) AC415V 50 50 —
AC690V 50 50 50
AC400V 45 45 —
AC415V 45 45 —
Rated current In (A) 2000 2500 3200 4000

Number of poles 3, 4 3
Rated voltage Ue (V) AC400, AC415, AC690

Electric life AC400V:3000 AC690V:2000 AC400V:1500 AC690V:1000

Operation
performance Non-maintenance 10,000
Mechanical life
Maintenance 20,000

Type NA1-6300X NA1-6300XN
AC400V 120 100

Rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) AC415V 85 75
AC690V 85 75
AC400V 100 100
Rated service short circuit breaking capacity (Ics) AC415V 75 75
AC690V 75 75
AC400V 100 100
Rated short-time withstand (Icw.1s) AC415V 75 75
AC690V 75 75
AC400V 50 50
AC415V 50 50
rated current In (A) 4000 5000 6300
Number of poles 3, 4 3
Rated voltage Ue (V) AC400, AC415,AC690
Rated current of N-pole In (A) 50%In —

Electric life AC400V:1500 AC690V:1000

Operation
performance Non-maintenance 5000
Mechanical life
Maintenance 10,000

Weight of single product (net weight)

Weight（kg） Model Spec. NA1-2000X(3/4) NA1-3200X(3/4) NA1-6300X(3/4)
NA1-1000X(3P/4P) NA1-4000X/3
Installation method 630 800~1600 2000 2000~2500 3200 4000~5000 6300
Fixed type 21/25 44/53 45/54 46/55 57/69 59/72 91 -/- -/-
Drawer type 38/45 67/82 73/85 75/90 96/118 106/130 135 201/233 235/-
5. Dimensions and connection NA1-1000X Fixed-type
Inner side of cabinet door Perforating dimension of doorframe
H
268
N 226
a
H
315
156
259
A 8×Φ4
101.5
D
Installation plate for
312
270
fixed-type circuitbreaker
46.5
3
216 15 228 9
3
Right-side installation
hole for fixed-type
N D
70 70 70 D
In（A）=630、800、1000 In（A）=200、400
12
16×Φ10.5 35 35 35
n×Φ13 8×Φ13 70 70 70
200,400A 35
15 35 53
n×Φ10.5
12
18
630,800,
N
1000A
12
18
15
10 N
35
12
15 10
35
144
4-9×13
L type vertical connection
L1
NA1-1000 L1 L In(A) A(mm) n(3P/4P) H(mm) a(mm)
3P 246 274 200、400 32 3/4 6 40

L
4P 316 344 630 50 6/8 8 55
800、1000 50 6/8 10 55
NA1-1000X Drawout-type
216 46 Inner side of cabinet door Perforating dimension of doorframe
H
268
N 226
a
179
362
8×Φ4 Installation plate for

101.5
316
304
D
358
drawer type circuit breaker

3
91.5
16
Right-side installation hole for
L1 57 Disconnect position drawer type circuit breaker
158 59
L
A 310 65
Connect position
27
N D D
70 70 70
12
In（A）=630、800、1000 In（A）=200、400
200,400A n×Φ13 16×Φ10.5 35 35 35 8×Φ13 70 70 70

35
15
12
35
18
n×Φ10.5
N
630,800,
18
1000A
63
15
10
35 N
12
15 10
35
2×Φ9
158

2-11.5×9
NA1-1000 L1 L In(A) A(mm) n(3P/4P) H(mm) a(mm)

L1（3P）
3P 194 308 200、400 33 3/4 6 40
4P 264 378 630 51 6/8 8 55

L1(4P)
800、1000 51 6/8 10 55
NA1-2000X/NA1-2000XN/NA1-2000XH Drawout-type
Inner side of cabinetdoor

C Farthest to the right of
45(Disconnect position) 448(4P)
C 8×Φ13 insulation base plate
28 60
a N
353(3P)
30
14
a
Farthest to the right
of circuit breaker
112
D 95 95 95 92.5 15
258
439
Horizontal connection(default)
42.5
C 16×Φ13
37
92
N 30 60 Farthest to the right of
14
70
insulation base plate
23
10 97 175
60
202.5
30
391
292
465
405(3P)
95 95 95 92.5
500(4P) Horizontal extended busbar
D
146.5
Φ11
294
267
302
360(4P)
370
265(3P)
N
48 16
2×11×17 115
40
Φ14
17
172.5 Installation plate 28
32×Φ13
70
20
11×Φ4 of circuit breaker 60

175 345 Farthest to the right
33 95 95 95
Farthest to the right 202.5 of circuit breaker
of circuit breaker
Panel hole L type vertical connection
NA1-2000X/NA1-2000XN/NA1-2000XH Drawout-type,vertical,rear connection,rotation busbar

353(3P)
C
4×Φ13
28
60
258
439
112
42.5
103.5
70
37
10 97 175 10
202.5
11.5
292
48 405(3P)
391
500(4P)
146.5
Φ11
294
267
302
360(4P)
370
265(3P)
48 16
2×11×17 Farthest to the right of

Φ14 insulation base plate
172.5 Installation plate

70
20
11×Φ4 of circuit breaker

175 345
33 Farthest to the right Farthest to the right
202.5 of circuit breaker of circuit breaker
Farthest to the right of circuit breaker
Panel hole
User only needs to rotate the busbar for 90°to change from vertical connection to horizontal connection onsite.
NA1-2000X/NA1-2000XN/NA1-2000XH Drawout-type, horizontal, rear connection,rotation busbar
Inner side of cabinetdoor 448( 4P )

45(Disconnect position) 353( 3P )
C
258
439
42.5
112
70
103.5
37
202.5
10 97 175 292
405( 3P )
391 500( 4P )
146.5
294
267
Φ11
302
370
360(4P)
265(3P)
C
48 16
Farthest to the right of

2×11×17 insulation base plate
N 60
11.5
Φ14
10
Installation plate 28 8×Φ13
172.5
20
48
70
345 Farthest to the right Farthest to the right

175
33 202.5 of circuit breaker of circuit breaker
Farthest to the right 95 95 95 92.5 15
of circuit breaker Panel hole
User only needs to rotate the busbar for 90°to change from horizontal connection to vertical connection onsite.
NA1-2000X/NA1-2000XN/NA1-2000XH Fixed-type
C
Inner side of cabinetdoor 18min 413(4P) 8×Φ13
28 60
Iron material 318(3P) N
292
42
17
a
C
115
D
95 95 95 86
402
a
112
258
C 16×Φ13 C
30 8×Φ13
55
60
14
N N 28 60
21
60
60
14 150 69.5
32
11 11
b
30
291 181
13
359 340(3P)
95 95 95 86 95 95 95 86
435(4P)
Horizontal extended connection Horizontal short busbar
D
4×Φ12
150
155.5
269
311
N
115
340(3P) 300
40
435(4P)
17
28.5
Right-side installation Installation plate

8×Φ4 2 of circuit breaker 32×Φ13 28
hole for circuit breaker
172.5 60
345 Right-side installation
hole for circuit breaker 95 95 95
Panel hole
NA1-3200x/NA1-3200xN Drawout-type
Inner side of cabinetdoor N C

528(4P) 16×Φ13 Farthest to the right of
45(Disconnect position) 90 100
25
50
413(3P)
100
a
C Farthest to the right
50
of circuit breaker
a 120 125 125 92.5 15
258
439
D Horizontal connection(default)
112
42.5
100
37
N C Farthest to the right of
16×Φ13
92
70
75 25
14
232.5
23
10 97 175
30
352
391
465(3P)
536 Farthest to the right
580(4P) of circuit breaker
115 125 125 92.5 15
Horizontal short busbar

D
155.5
303
273
362
379
Φ11
48 16
N
440(4P)
325(3P)
115
40
2×11×17
17
Φ14 Installation plate

202.5
20
11×Φ4 of circuit breaker 40

405 32×Φ13
70
Farthest to the right 100

175 232.5 of circuit breaker
33 125 125 125
of circuit breaker Panel hole
NA1-3200X/NA1-3200XN Drawout-type,vertical,rear connection,rotation busbar

45(Disconnect position)
528( 4P )
413( 3P )
C
8× Φ13
50
258
439
132
42.5
100
97.5
70
37
10 97 175 20 232.5
40 352
465( 3P )
94
391 580( 4P )
155.5
303
273
Φ11
362
379
440(4P)
N C
325(3P)
48 16
2×11×17 a
Φ14
104

70
20

175
33 405
Farthest to the right Farthest to the right
Farthest to the right of circuit breaker 232.5 of circuit breaker of circuit breaker
115 115 115 102.5 15
Panel hole
Note: In order to change vertical connection to horizontal connection onsite, user needs to change the upper and lower busbars of phase B
so they are different from those of phase A and phase C.

NA1-3200x/NA1-3200xN Drawout-type, horizontal, rear connection,rotation busbar

528( 4P )
413( 3P )
C
258
439
107.5 112
42.5
70
37
10 97 175
232.5
352
391 465( 3P )
580( 4P )
155.5
303
273
Φ11
440(4P)
362
379
325(3P)
48 16
2×11×17 C
Φ14 Farthest to the right of
20
100 insulation base plate
40
N 50
70
94
20
104
175 11×Φ4 of circuit breaker
33
405
Farthest to the right of circuit breaker 16×Φ13 Farthest to the right
232.5
of circuit breaker 115 125 125 92.5 15
Panel hole
Note: In order to change horizontal connection to vertical connection onsite, user needs to change the upper and lower busbars of phase B
so they are different from those of phase A and phase C.
NA1-3200x/NA1-3200xN Fixed-type
C
Inner side of cabinetdoor 16×Φ13
493(4P) 40 86
15
N
18min
Iron material 378(3P)
72
352
40
a 96
C 115 115 115
115
402
a
D
112
258
C
12×Φ13
50 86
18.5
N
55
32
21
60
14 150 69.5
11 11
291 211 115 115 115 96
13
389 400(3P) Horizontal short busbar

515(4P)
D
4×Φ12
155.5
150
N
115
269
311
40
362
15
400(3P)
28.5
515(4P) 32×Φ13 40
Right-side installation Installation plate 86
8×Φ4 2
hole for circuit breaker of circuit breaker
202.5 115 115 115
405 Right-side installation
hole for circuit breaker
Panel hole L type vertical connection
NA1-4000X Fixed-type (3P)
493
Inner side of cabinet door
C C
120 12×Φ13
134
15
30
40
134
402
40
258
112
189.5 189.5 79
21
Basic Point 4×Φ12
55
11 11
14 150 69.5 211
13
291
515
155.5
4×Φ12
269
311
362
150
28.5
8×Φ4 202.5 2 Installation plate of circuit breaker

515
405
Right-side installation hole for circuit breaker Right-side installation hole for circuit breaker
Panel hole
NA1-4000X Drawout-type (3P)

528
30
C
258
439
112
42.5
92
70
37
10 97 175
232.5
391 352
580
C
20
155.5
Φ11
303
103
273
40
362 Farthest to the right of

379
440

48 16
12×Φ13
2×11×17
Φ14 50
202.5 140 Farthest to the right

20
11×Φ4 Installation plate of circuit breaker

70
of circuit breaker
175 405 197.5 197.5 77.5 15
33 Farthest to the right
232.5 of circuit breaker
NA1-6300X/NA1-6300XN (In=4000A,5000A) Drawout-type

798(3P)
30
258
439
42.5
112
37
70
92
232.5
10 97 175 352
843(3P)
391
958(4P)
N C
155.5
100 155 210 28×Φ15
20
303
273
55
362 insulation base plate
379
Φ11
40
103
818(4P)
48 16
703(3P)
2×11×17 Farthest to the right

Φ14 of circuit breaker
202.5 Installation plate of circuit breaker 182.5 246.5 246.5 160 15
20
11×Φ4
405
70

175 232.5 of circuit breaker
33
Panel hole
NA1-6300X/NA1-6300XN (In=6300A) Drawout-type (3P)

45(Disconnected position)
903
30
258
439
112
42.5
37
70
92
232.5
10 97 175
352
391 958
C
155.5
80 180 260 Right & outer side of
20
Φ11
insulation panel
303
273
40
103
362
379
818
48 16
Right & outer

24 Φ15 side of breaker
2×11×17
Φ14 316.5 323.5 140 15
202.5
20
11×Φ4 Installation panel

70
405
175 Right & outer
33 232.5 side of breaker
Right & outer side of breaker
Opening hole on panel
6. Secondary circuit wiring
6.1 NA1-1000X
Standard type, type (M/3M)
Emergency Motor-driven Motor-driven Motor-driven

Main circuit Intelligent controller Auxiliary contact Auxiliary contact
break break make energy-storage
SB1 SB2 SB3

HL1 HL2 HL3
3 5 7 9 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 XT
FU
Intelligent Q F X M
controller
Power of
DF1 DF2 DF3 control circuit
DF4
SA
TA
FU
1 2 4 6 8 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 XT
HL1: Failure indicator 8#,9#: Making indicator (capacity AC400V,1A)

HL2: Close indicator 27#,28#: Under-voltage release(Connected to the main circuit)
HL3: Energy storage indicator 29#,30#: Shunt release
SB1: Under-voltage button 31#,32#: Closing electromagnet
SB2: Shunt button 33#,34#,35#: Energy storage motor
SB3: Close button 18#~26#, 38#~40#: Auxiliary contact
Q: Under-voltage release (auxiliary contact capacity: AC230V,5A)
F: Shunt release
X: Close electromagnet
M: Energy storage motor
DF1-DF4: Auxiliary switch
1#, 2#: Auxiliary power input
3#,4#,5#: Fault trip contact output(4# common terminal,
contact capacity AC230V,5A
6#,7#: To be connected with current transformer(selective)
Note:
Dashed is to be connected by users.
Communication type, type (H/3H)
Emergenay Motor-driven Motor-driven

Main circuit Intelligent controller break break make Auxiliary switch
L1
FU
N
PE
Profibus-DP ~ ~
AC 220V PSU-1
HL3
ST-DP DC 24V
Device + -
Fault indicator + - DI0 DI1DI2DI3 DI4

DC24V
Green SB1 SB2 SB3
RU-1
D01 D02 D03 D04
HL1 HL2
▲
Red
3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 XT
Intelligent Q F X M
controller
DF1 DF2 DF3

SA
TA
1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 XT
HL1: Failure indicator

8#,9#: Making indicator(capacity AC400V,1A)
HL2: Close indicator
10#, 11#: communication output
HL3: Energy storage indicator
12#, 13#: Signal alarm of load 1 output
SB1: Under-voltage button
14#, 15#: Signal alarm of load 2 output
SB2: Shunt button
16#, 17#: Making signal output
SB3: Close button
18#, 19#: Closing signal output
Q: Under-voltage release
20#: Communication shield ground line
F: Shunt release
21#~24#: Voltage signal input of phase N,A,B,C
X: Close electromagnet
(With voltage measurement);
21#~23# is a set of auxiliary switches
# #
(Without voltage measurement)
1 , 2 : Auxiliary power input(DC24)
# # # #
22# common terminal,contact capacity AC230V,5A
3 ,4 ,5 : Fault trip contact output(4 common terminal,
25#, 26#: Auxiliary contact (capacity:AC230V,5A)
contact capacity AC230V,5A
27#,28#: Under-voltage release(Connected to the main circuit)
6#, 7#: To be connected with current transformer(N/O auxiliary
29#,30#: Shunt release
contact, capacity AC400V, 1A,when no current transformer)
31#,32#: Closing electromagnet
33#,34#,35#: Energy storage motor
Note:
36#~40#: Auxiliary contact (capacity:AC230V,5A)
Six pairs change-over contacts standard type (M/3M)
Main Auxiliary Emergency Motor-driven Motor-driven Motor-driven

Intelligent controller Auxiliary contact
circuit contact break break make energy-storage
SB1 SB2 SB3

HL1 HL2 HL3
3 5 7 9 14 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 XT
FU
Q F X M
Intelligent Power of
controller control circuit
DF5 DF6 DF1 DF2 DF3
DF4
SA
TA
FU
1 2 4 6 8 10 11 12 13 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 XT
HL1: Failure indicator 8#,9#: Making indicator (capacity AC400V,1A)

HL2: Close indicator 12#~26#: Auxiliary contact(auxiliary
HL3: Energy storage indicator contact capacity: AC230V,1A)
SB1: Under-voltage button 27#,28#: Under-voltage release(Connected to the main circuit)
SB2: Shunt button 29#,30#: Shunt release
SB3: Close button 31#,32#: Closing release
Q: Under-voltage release 33#,34#:Energy storage indicator
F: Shunt release 34#,35#: Energy storage motor
X: Close release 38#~40#: Auxiliary contact(auxiliary
M: Energy storage motor contact capacity: AC230V,1A)
1#, 2#: Auxiliary power input
3#,4#,5#: Fault trip contact output(4# common
terminal,contact capacity AC230V,5A
6#, 7#: to be connected with current
transformer(selective)
Note:
Six pairs change-over contacts , without any additional function.
6.2 NA1-2000X~6300X
The secondary circuit wiring for NA1-2000X~6300X with standard type (M) intelligent controller and instantaneous under-voltage release
Emergency
Main circuit Over-current release Motor-driven Motor-driven Auxiliary contact
break break make
SB2
Failure Energy storage

SB1 SB3
3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
FU
Q F X M
AX
Power
SA
Processing
unit
FU
1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51
Open Close
_ 110V
~
_ 220V
~ Intelligent release power ("1" connect positive pole, and "2" connect negative pole for direct current)
~380V
SB1: Shunt button

SB3: Making button
Q: Under-voltage release
F: Shunt release
The auxiliary contact modes for customer use
X: Closing electromagnet
Ⅰ Four pairs change-over contacts Ⅱ Five pairs change-over contacts
XT: Connection terminal
36 38 40 42 44 46 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
SA: Position switch
Note: If control voltage of Q, F, X is different from each other,
they can be connected to different power.
# #
1 ,2 : Auxiliary power input
3#,4#,5#: Fault trip contact output(4# common terminal)
6#,7#,8#,9#: Auxiliary contact, normal open,
37 39 41 43 45 47 37 39 41 43 45 47 49
10#~24#: empty
# #
25 ,26 : to be connected with current transformer(selective)
27 ,28 : Under-voltage release(Connected to the main circuit)
# #
# #
29 ,30 : Shunt release
31#,32#: Closing release
33#,34#: Energy storage indicator
34#,35#: Energy storage motor
36#,51#: Auxiliary contact
Circuit explanation for signal output:

a. Broken-line parts shall be provided by customers.
b. Terminals 6#,7# can output NC (normal close) contact if that is required by users.
c. Terminal 35# can be directly connected to power (automatic pre-storing energy),
alternatively connect power after connecting NO button (manual-controlled
pre-storing energy).
d. Terminals 21#~24# is only for wiring with function meter display.
(excluding the special wiring)
The secondary circuit wiring for NA1-2000X~6300X with type (3M) intelligent controller and instantaneous under-voltage release
L1 1 2
N
PE
Highest-voltage of AC400V
to the incoming-line side
PE Un U1 U2 U3 SB2 SB1 SB3
Transformer
connected
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
Q F X SA
AX
M
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51
Energy-
Fault OpenClose
storage
Main Shunt Closing Energy- Energy-

circuit
Intelligent controller Undervoltage storage storage Auxiliary switch
release electromagnet indication motor
release
The auxiliary contact modes for customer use SB1: Shunt button
ⅠFour pairs change-over contacts Ⅱ Five pairs change-over contacts
SB3: Making button
36 38 40 42 44 46 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 Q: Under-voltage release
F: Shunt release
X: Closing release
XT: connection terminal
SA: Position switch
1#, 2#: Intelligent controller power input
37 39 41 43 45 47 37 39 41 43 45 47 49
Note: When the power supply of the intelligent controller
is AC power, the 1#~2# connects to the AC power directly.
When the power supply is DC power, forbid connecting the
1#~2# to the DC power directly. Add a DC power supply
module, then the DC power connect to the input terminal
of the DC power supply module, and the 1#~2# connect to
3#,4#,5#: Fault trip contact output(4#common terminal) the output terminal of the DC power supply module,
6#,7#,8#,9#: Auxiliary contact(normal open) or else the intelligent controller will be damaged.
10#~11#: empty
12#~19#: The programmable output terminal. The normal products without these terminals,
but if the customer special ordered, the cost extra added.
3M type acquiescence output:

12#,13#: Signal alarm of load 1 output; 14 ,15 : Signal alarm of load2 output
# #
16#,17#: Self-diagnose alarm; 18#,19#: Fault trip; 20#: PE line; 21#~24#: Display the voltage of the signal input.
The normal products without these terminals,
if the customer special ordered the function meter, the cost extra added.
#
21 : N phase input terminal
# # #
22 ,23 ,24 : A, B, C three phase power input terminal (note the sequence)(highest-voltage of AC 400V)
# #
25 ,26 : Connect to the N phase current transformer or the input terminal of the current leakage transformer.
The normal products without these terminals, if the customer special ordered, the cost extra added.
27 ,28 : Under-voltage release(Connected to the main circuit); 29 ,30 : Shunt release; 31 ,32 : Closing release;
# # # # # #
# # # # # #
33 ,34 : Energy storage indicator; 34 ,35 : Energy storage motor; 36 ~51 : Auxiliary contact
Note:
a. Red colored part is to be connected by users
b. When the power system is three phase three wire, directly connect the Un to U2.
( If the voltage exceeds 400V, special explanation when ordered)
The secondary circuit wiring for NA1-2000X~6300X with type (3H) intelligent controller and instantaneous under-voltage release
1 2
L1
N
PE
To TO3 busbar
~ ~
AC 220V PSU-1
Profibus
24V
ST-DP NC DC 24V
GND + -
D+ D-
+ - DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4

Special connecting wire
Highest-voltage of AC400V DC24V
Modbus-RTU SB2 SB1 SB3 RU-1

D01 D02 D03 D04
Transformer
connected
D+ D-
Red Green
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
Q F X SA
AX
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51
Fault Energy
storage Open Close
Main Closing Energy-

circuit Intelligent controller Undervoltage
Shunt
release electromagnet
Energy-
storage storage
Auxiliary switch
release indication
motor
The auxiliary contact modes for customer use SB1: Shunt button; SB2: Under-voltage button
SB3: Making button; Q: Under-voltage release
Ⅰ Four pairs change-over contacts Ⅱ Five pairs change-over contacts
F: Shunt release; X: Closing release
36 38 40 42 44 46 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 M: Energy storage motor; XT: connection terminal
SA: Position switch
37 39 41 43 45 47 37 39 41 43 45 47 49
# # # #
3 ,4 ,5 : Fault trip contact output(4 common terminal) the output terminal of the DC power supply module,
# # # #
6 ,7 ,8 ,9 : Auxiliary contact（normal open） or else the intelligent controller will be damaged.
# #
10 ~11 : communication output
# # # #
12 ,13 : Signal alarm of load 1 output; 14 ,15 : Signal alarm of load2 output
# # # #
16 ,17 :Breaking signal output; 18 ,19 :Making signal output
# #
20 : PE line; 21 : N phase input terminal
# # #
22 ,23 ,24 : A, B, C three phase power input terminal (note the sequence)(highest-voltage of AC 400V)
# #
25 26 : Connect to the N phase current transformer or the input terminal of the current leakage transformer.
ST~DP: DP protocol module. There is no need for the ST-DP protocol module,
if the communication protocol is Modbus-RTV. But when the communication protocol is Profibus-DP,
the ST-DP protocol module is necessary, but the cost extra added.
ST power module IV: power converter (optional components)
ST201: Magnify the signal capacity of the controller. ( optional components) If the customer special ordered,
the cost extra added.
27 ,28 : Under-voltage release(Connected to the main circuit); 29 ,30 : Shunt release
# # # #
# # # #
31 ,32 : Closing release; 33 ,34 : Energy storage indicator
# # # #
34 ,35 : Energy storage motor; 36 ~51 : Auxiliary contact
Note:
(If the voltage exceeds 400V, special explanation when ordered)
The secondary circuit wiring for NA1-2000X~6300X with standard type (M) intelligent controller and time-delay under-voltage release
Motor Motor
Main Emergency Motor driven Under-voltage
circuit Over-current release disconnection driven driven energy time-delay Auxiliary switch
break close storage release
Energy
SB2 SB1 SB3 storage
Failure Under-voltage
time-delay controller
3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
FU
AX
Power
Processing
unit
FU
1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51
Open Close
~_ 110V
Intelligent release power("1” connect positive pole, and “2” connect negative pole for direct current)
~_ 220V
~380V

Ⅰ Four pairs change-over contacts SB1: Shunt button SB2: Under-voltage button SB3: Making button
Q: Under-voltage time-delay release F: Shunt release
38 40 42 44 46 48 50
X: Closing electromagnet M: Energy storage motor
XT: Connection terminal SA: Position switch
Note: If control voltage of Q, F, X is different from each other,
they can be connected to different power.
39 41 43 45 47 49
1#,2#: Auxiliary power input

# # #
3 ,4 ,5 : Fault trip contact output(4# common terminal)
# # # #
6 ,7 ,8 ,9 : Auxiliary contact（normal open）
# #
10 ~24 : empty
25#,26#: to be connected with current transformer(selective)
27#,28#: Under-voltage release(Connected to the main circuit)
# #
29 ,30 : Shunt release
# #
31 ,32 : Closing release
# #
33 ,34 : Energy storage indicator
# #
34 ,35 : Energy storage motor
# #
36 ,37 : Under-voltage time delay release
# #
38 ~51 : Auxiliary contact
Circuit explanation for signal output:

a. Broken-line parts shall be provided by customers.
b. Terminals 6#,7# can output NC (normal close) contact if that is required by users.
c. Terminal 35# can be directly connected to power (automatic pre-storing energy),
alternatively connect power after connecting NO button (manual-controlled pre-storing energy).
d. The 21#~24# is only for wiring with function meter display. (Excluding the special wiring)
The secondary circuit wiring for NA1-2000X~6300X with type (3M) intelligent controller and time-delay under-voltage release
L1 1 2
N
PE
SB2 SB1 SB3

Highest-voltage of AC 400V
To the incoming-line side
PE Un U1 U2 U3
Transformer
Under-voltage
connected time-delay controller
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
F X SA Q
AX
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51
Energy
Fault
storage Open Close
Main Energy- Energy-

Shunt Closing
circuit
Intelligent controller Emergency
release electromagnet
storage
indication
storage
Under-voltage
time-delay
release
Auxiliary switch
break motor
SB1: Shunt button; SB2: Under-voltage button

Ⅰ Four pairs change-over contacts
38 40 42 44 46 48 50
M: Energy storage motor; XT: Connection terminal
SA: Position switch
39 41 43 45 47 49
the output terminal of the DC power supply module,
or else the intelligent controller will be damaged.
# # # # # # # #
3 ,4 ,5 : Fault trip contact output(4 common terminal); 6 ,7 ,8 ,9 : Auxiliary contact（normal open）
# # # #
10 ~11 : empty; 12 ~19 are the programmable output terminal. The normal products without these terminals,
but if the customer special ordered, the cost extra added.
3M type acquiescence output:

12#,13#: Signal alarm of load 1 output; 14#,15#: Signal alarm of load2 output
16#,17#: Self-diagnose alarm; 18#,19#: Fault trip
20#: PE line; 21#~24#: Display the voltage of the signal input. The normal products without these terminals,
if the customer special ordered the function meter, the cost extra added.
21#: N phase input terminal; 22#,23#,24#: A, B, C three phase power input terminal (note the sequence)(Highest-voltage of AC400V)
25#,26# Connect to the N phase current transformer or the input terminal of the current leakage transformer.
27#,28#: Under-voltage release(Connected to the main circuit); 29#,30#: Shunt release
31#,32#: Closing release; 33#,34#: Energy storage indicator
34#,35#: Energy storage motor; 36#,37#: Under-voltage time delay release
38#~51#: Auxiliary contact
Note:
b. When the power system is three phase three wire, directly connect the Un to U2. (If the voltage exceeds 400V,
special explanation when ordered)
The secondary circuit wiring for NA1-2000X~6300X with type (3H) intelligent controller and time-delay under-voltage release
1 2
L1
N
PE
To TO3 busbar
~ ~
AC 220V PSU-1
Profibus
24V DC 24V
+ -
ST-DP NC
GND
D+ D-
+ - DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4
SB2 SB1 SB3 DC24V

Special connecting wire RU-1
Highest-voltage of AC400V
D01 D02 D03 D04
To the inconnecting-line side
Modbus-RTV PE Un U1 U2 U3
Transformer
D+ D- Under-voltage
connected
Red Green time-delay controller
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
F X SA Q
AX
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51
Fault Energy
storage Open Close
Main Energy Energy

Shunt Closing Under-voltage
Intelligent controller Emergency release electromagnet
storage storage time-delay Auxiliary switch
circuit indication motor release
break
The auxiliary contact modes for customer use SB1: Shunt button; SB2: Under-voltage button
Ⅰ Four pairs change-over contacts
38 40 42 44 46 48 50 M: Energy storage motor; XT: Connection terminal
SA: Position switch
39 41 43 45 47 49 module, then the DC power connect to the input terminal
the output terminal of the DC power supply module,
3#,4#,5#: Fault trip contact output(4# common terminal) or else the intelligent controller will be damaged.
6#,7#,8#,9#: Auxiliary contact（normal open）
10#~11#: Communication output; 12#,13#: Signal alarm of load 1 output
14#,15# : Signal alarm of load 2 output; 16#,17#: Breaking signal output; 18#,19#: Closing signal output
20#: PE line; 21#: N phase input terminal
22#,23#,24#: A, B, C three phase power input terminal (note the sequence)(highest-voltage of AC400V)
25#,26# Connect to the N phase current transformer or the input terminal of the current leakage transformer.
ST~DP: DP protocol module. There is no need for the ST-DP protocol module,
if the communication protocol is Modbus-RTV. But when the communication protocol is Profibus-DP,
the ST-DP protocol module is necessary, but the cost extra added.
ST power module IV: power converter (optional components)
ST201: Magnify the signal capacity of the controller. ( optional components)
If the customer special ordered, the cost extra added.
27#,28#: Under-voltage release(Connected to the main circuit); 29#,30#: Shunt release
31#,32#: Closing release; 33#,34#: Energy storage indicator
34#,35#: Energy storage motor; 36#,37#: Under-voltage time delay release
38#~51#: Auxiliary contact
Note:
(If the voltage exceeds 400V, special explanation when ordered)
7. Installation
7.1 Installation
7.1.1 Unload the breaker from the soleplate of package. When the guide rod points to separated position and handle
If it is drawout type, firstly pull out the handle under can't be rotated any longer, pull out the handle and firmly
the drawer-base of breaker, and plug it into the hole grasp the aluminum handle on drawer-base, pull out the
on central part of plastic cover under the drawer-base breaker body and remove it form the base, then move the
crossbeam, anticlockwise turns the handle, the body base from the sole plate and clean up the dirty things inside
will slowly slide along the outside of drawer-base. the drawer-base.
Possible positions
7.1.2 Check the insulation resistance with a 500V megger, 7.1.3 Power supply
resistance should not be less than 20MΩ when NA1 devices can be supplied either from the top or
ambient temperature is 20℃±5℃ and relative from the bottom without reduction in performance,
humidity is 50%~70%. Otherwise dry it. in order to facilitate connection when installed in a
switchboard.
7.1.4 Put the breaker (fixed-type) or drawer-base (drawout-type) Mounting the circuit-breaker
into the installation-bracket, and make it fixed, directly It is important to distribute the weight of the device
connect the cable wire of main circuit to the bus wire of uniformly over a rigid mounting surface such as rails
fixed-type circuit breaker. Alternatively put breaker body or a base plate.
onto the slideway of drawer-base. Plug the handle into This mounting plane should be perfectly flat (tolerance
installation hole, clockwise turns it until the under-part of on support flatness: 2 mm).This eliminates any risk of
drawer-base points at the connection position and ”click” deformation which could interfere with correct
sound is heard. It indicates that breaker body has been operation of the circuit breaker.
connected to its place, then connect the cable of main NA1 devices can also be mounted on a vertical plane
circuit to drawer-base. using the special brackets.
Mounting with vertical brackets Mounting on rails
7.1.5 Partitions
A:non magnetic material
Sufficient openings must be provided in partitions to ensure
good air circulation around the circuit breaker;
Any partition between upstream and downstream connections
of the device must be made of nonmagnetic material.
For high-currents, of 2500 A and upwards, the metal supports
or barriers in the immediate vicinity of a conductor ;Metal
barriers through which a conductor passes must not form
a magnetic loop.
Busbars
The mechanical connection must be exclude the possibility
non magnetic material
of formation of a magnetic loop around a conductor.
7.1.6 Busbar connections

The busbars should be suitably adjusted to ensure the
connection points are positioned on the terminals before
the bolts B are inserted. The connections are held by the
supporter which is fixed to the framework of the
switchboard, in this way the circuit breaker terminals
do not have to support its weight C.
(This support should be placed close to the terminals).
B C
B
A
A
A
7.1.7 Main circuit adopts cable connection

Users should not apply too strong mechanical strength on
the terminals of Air Circuit Breaker. Extend the bus-bar of
circuit breaker with connecting bus-bar, position the wiring
piece of cable before inserting bolts; the cable should be
fixed on the frame of distributing cabinet firmly.
min18 min18
7.1.8 Clamping
1 2 3 4
Correct clamping of busbars depends on the tightening
torques used for the nuts and bolts,etc. Over-tightening
may have the same consequences as under-tightening.
For connecting busbars to the circuit breaker, the tightening 1 breaker terminal
torques to be used are shown in the table below. These 2 busbar
3 bolt
values are for use with copper busbars and steel nuts and
4 washer
bolts, class ≥8.8. 5 nut
6 spring washer
6 5
Examples
Preferred tightening torque for NA1's tightening components
Type of screw Application Preferred tightening torque

M3 Screws for secondary terminals 0.4~0.5 N·m
M10 Installing bolts of Air Circuit Breaker 38~55 N·m
M12 Connection terminals 61~94 N·m
Connected position Test position Disconnected position Drawout position
1.Both main circuit and control 1.The main circuit is disconnected,

circuit are connected. and the control circuit is connected. Neither the main circuit Main body is out
2.Normal application conditions 2.Test application conditions. nor the control circuit is connected. of the drawer seat.
7.2 Wiring the secondary circuit according to electric principle

diagram.
Note: Bolts, nuts, gaskets shouldn't be left inside the drawer
seat to avoid being blocked.
7.3 Operation Arcing chamber
Check the rated voltage of the following components
whether conforms to the power voltage . Such as under
Main body
voltage release, shunt release, closing electromagnet,
motor-driven mechanism and intelligent controller.
7.4 Maintenance Drawer seat
Check the technical parameters in time or add some

lubricating oil, etc.
This breaker structure is arranged vertically and modularized
composition with each functioncell separated, which make
the maintenance easy.
It has compact structure, reliable operation and strong free
maintenance capability. Please check the technical parameters
Handle Slideway
on the nameplate in accordance with the requirements of
order before installation.
Making the secondary circuit power, the motor-driven

Manual energy-storage
mechanism can store energy automatically until hearing the click
and energy stored indicating on the panel.
Otherwise press the storage handle for 6 times until hearing

the click and the indicator display energy stored
And the closing operation can be realized either by closing

electromagnet or manual button.
Shake with the manual energy-storage handle

up and down about six times to "click".
8. Recommendation for user's connecting bus-bar
Inm(A) NA1-1000X NA1-2000X/NA1-2000XN/NA1-2000XH NA1-3200X/NA1-3200XN NA1-4000X NA1-6300X/NA1-6300XN
In(A) 200 400 630 800 1000 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000/3P 4000/4P 4000 5000 6300
Thickness(mm) 5 5 5 6 8 5 6 8 10 12 10 8 10 10 10 - 10 10 10
Busbar Width(mm) 30 30 40 50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60 100 100 100 120 - 100 100 100
Number 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 4 4 - 5 7 8
Note: the specifications in the table is obtained as the ambient temperature of air circuit breaker is 40℃, with open installation; this is in
compliance with the specification of copper busbars adopted under the heating conditions regulated in IEC/EN60947-2.
9. Power loss
Inm(A) NA1-1000X NA1-2000X/NA1-2000XN/NA1-2000XH NA1-3200X/NA1-3200XN NA1-4000X NA1-6300X/NA1-6300XN
In(A) 200 400 630 800 1000 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000/3P 4000/4P 4000 5000 6300
Power Drawer type 40 101 123 110 171 70 110 172 268 440 530 384 600 737 921 - 575 898 1426
loss (W) Fixed type 33 85 107 94 146 34.4 50 78 122 200 262 200 312 307 450 - - - -
10. A2S curve
I2t（A2s×106）
460
320
200
190
180
170
160
150
140
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
20 40 60 80 100 120 Is（kA）
Is: prospective symmetrical current(of an a.c. circuit)
11. Temperature compensation correction
Ambient NA1-3200X/NA1-3200XN NA1-6300X/

Standard NA1-1000X NA1-2000X/NA1-2000XN/NA1-2000XH
temperature NA1-4000X NA1-6300XN
40℃ 200 400 630 800 1000 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300
45℃ 200 395 623 800 985 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 3800 4000 5000 6000
50℃ 200 384 605 800 960 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 3600 4000 5000 5600
IEC/EN60947-2 55℃ 200 328 584 800 924 630 800 1000 1250 1500 1900 2000 2300 3000 3400 4000 4800 5400
60℃ 200 248 548 800 870 610 800 1000 1250 1300 1800 2000 2200 2800 3200 4000 4800 5200
65℃ 192 192 500 800 810 610 800 1000 1250 1300 1650 2000 2200 2600 3000 4000 4600 5100
70℃ 170 170 473 750 750 473 800 1000 1200 1200 1400 2000 2000 2200 2520 4000 4000 4200
Note: The ACB is to calibrated at 40℃, special application please refer to the table above and the curve below.
1100 4200
1000 4000
900 3800
800 3600
Rated current （A）

In=200A 3400
700
3200 In=2000A
600 In=400A
3000 In=2500A
500 In=630A
2800 In=3200A
400 In=800A
2600 In=4000A
300 In=1000A
2400
200 2200
100 2000
0 1800
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Ambient temperature（℃） Ambient temperature（℃）
NA1-1000X NA1-3200X/NA1-3200XN/NA1-4000X
2000 6400
1900 6200
1800
6000
1700
1600 5800
1500 In=630A 5600

1400 In=800A 5400
1300 5200 In=4000A
1200 In=1000A
5000 In=5000A
1100 In=1250A
1000 4800 In=6300A
900 In=1600A 4600
800 In=2000A 4400
700 4200
600
4000
500
400 3800
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Ambient temperature（℃） Ambient temperature（℃）

NA1-2000X/NA1-2000XN/NA1-2000XH NA1-6300X/NA1-6300XN
12. Coordination recommendations
Capacity of transformer Breaking capacity of

Rated current Short circuit current
(kVA) & parallelly air circuit breaker for
of transformer In(A) of main circuit (kA)
connected number main circuit (kA)
1×250 360 9 9
2×250 360 9 9
3×250 360 9 18.5
1×315 455 11.4 11.4
2×315 455 11.4 11.4
3×315 455 11.4 22.7
1×400 578 14.4 14.4
2×400 578 14.4 14.4
3×400 578 14.4 28.8
1×500 722 18 18
2×500 722 18 18
3×500 722 18 36.1
1×630 910 22.7 22.7
2×630 910 22.7 22.7
3×630 910 22.7 44.5
1×800 1154 19.3 19.3
2×800 1154 19.3 19.3
3×800 1154 19.3 38.5
1×1000 1444 24 24
2×1000 1444 24 24
3×1000 1444 24 48.1
1×1250 1805 30 30
2×1250 1805 30 30
3×1250 1805 30 60.1
1×1600 2310 36.5 36.5
2×1600 2310 36.5 36.5
3×1600 2310 36.5 73
1×2000 2887 48.2 48.2
2×2000 2887 48.2 48.2
3×2000 2887 48.2 96.3
1×2500 3608 60 60
2×2500 3608 60 60
1×3150 4550 75.8 75.8
2×3150 4550 75.8 75.8

Type of air circuit Number and area of the Breaking capacity of

Air circuit breaker
breaker for busbar for main circuit air circuit breaker
for branch circuit
main circuit (n×W×T) for branch circuit (kA)
NA1-1000X-400 9
NA1-1000X-400 2×(5×30) 18.5 NA1, NM8
NA1-1000X-400 27.5
NA1-1000X-630 11.4
NA1-1000X-630 2×(5×40) 22.7 NA1, NM8
NA1-1000X-630 34.1
NA1-1000X-630 14.4
NA1-1000X-630 2×(5×40) 28.8 NA1, NM8
NA1-1000X-630 43.2
NA1-1000X-800 18
NA1-1000X-800 2×(6×50) 36.1 NA1, NM8
NA1-1000X-800 54.1
NA1-1000X-1000 22.7
NA1-1000X-1000 2×(8×50) 44.5 NA1, NM8
NA1-2000X-1000 67.2
NA1-2000X-1250 19.3
NA1-2000X-1250 2×(10×60) 38.5 NA1, NM8
NA1-2000X-1250 57.8
NA1-2000X-1600 24
NA1-2000X-1600 2×(12×60) 48.1 NA1, NM8
NA1-2000X-1600 72.1
NA1-2000X-2000 30
NA1-2000X-2000 3×(10×60) 60.1 NA1, NM8
NA1-2000X-2000 90.1
NA1-3200X-2500 36.5
NA1-3200X-2500 2×(10×100) 73 NA1, NM8
NA1-3200X-2500 109.5
NA1-3200X-3200 48.2
NA1-3200X-3200 4×(10×100) 96.3 NA1, NM8

NA1-3200X-3200 144.5
NA1-6300X-4000 60
4×(10×120) NA1, NM8
NA1-6300X-4000 120
NA1-6300X-5000 75.8
7×(10×100) NA1, NM8
NA1-6300X-5000 151.6
13. Selectivity protection
13.1 Selective protection between NM8 and NA1
Circuit breaker NA1-2000X/NA1-2000XN/NA1-2000XH
Rated
630 800 1000 1250
current (A)
Default setting ratings

5.04 6.4 8 10
of short time-delay 8In (kA)
Downstream Upstream Setting

0.63～9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
range (kA)
Delayed tripping
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
time (s)
Returnable time 0.06, 0.14, 0.23, 0.35
Frame size Rated Instantaneous

rated current current (A) setting ratings (kA)
0.16 0.63~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75

16
0.19(motor) 0.63~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
0.2 0.63~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75

20
0.24(motor) 0.63~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
0.25 0.63~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75

25
0.30(motor) 0.63~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
0.32 0.63~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75

32
0.38(motor) 0.63~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
0.40 0.63~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75

40
0.48(motor) 0.6624~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
NM8-125
NM8S-125
0.50 0.69~9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
50
0.60(motor) 0.828~9.45 0.828~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
0.63 0.8694~9.45 0.8694~12 1~15 1.25~18.75

63
0.75(motor) 1.035~9.45 1.035~12 1.035~15 1.25~18.75
0.80 1.104~9.45 1.104~12 1.104~15 1.25~18.75

80
0.96(motor) 1.325~9.45 1.325~12 1.325~15 1.325~18.75
1.0 1.38~9.45 1.38~12 1.38~15 1.38~18.75

100 1.20(motor) 1.656~9.45 1.656~12 1.656~15 1.656~18.75
1.25 1.725~9.45 1.725~12 1.725~15 1.725~18.75

125
1.5(motor) 2.07~9.45 2.07~12 2.07~15 2.07~18.75
1.0 1.38~9.45 1.38~12 1.38~15 1.38~18.75

100
1.2(motor) 1.656~9.45 1.656~12 1.656~15 1.656~18.75
1.6 2.208~9.45 2.208~12 2.208~15 2.208~18.75

160
1.92(motor) 2.65~9.45 2.65~12 2.65~15 2.65~18.75
NM8-250
NM8S-250
2.0 2.76~9.45 2.76~12 2.76~15 2.76~18.75
200
2.4(motor) 3.312~9.45 3.312~12 3.312~15 3.312~18.75
2.5 3.45~9.45 3.45~12 3.45~15 3.45~18.75

250
3.0(motor) 4.14~9.45 4.14~12 4.14~15 4.14~18.75
NA1-3200X/NA1-3200XN NA1-4000X NA1-6300X/NA1-6300XN
1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300
12.8 16 16 20 25.6 32 32 40 50.4
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
0.06, 0.14, 0.23, 0.35
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5

1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5

1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5

1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5

1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5

1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5

1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4～60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4～60 5~75 6.3~94.5

1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4～60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4～60 5~75 6.3~94.5

1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4～60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4～60 5~75 6.3~94.5

1.656~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4～60 5~75 6.3~94.5
1.725~24 1.725~30 1.725~30 1.725~37.7 1.725~48 1.725~60 1.725~60 1.725~75 1.725~94.5

2.07~24 2.07~30 2.07~30 2.07~37.7 2.07~48 2.07~60 2.07~60 2.07~75 2.07~94.5
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4～60 5~75 6.3~94.5

1.656~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4～60 5~75 6.3~94.5
2.208~24 2.208~30 2.208~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5

2.65~24 2.65~30 2.65~30 2.65~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
2.76~24 2.76~30 2.76~30 2.76~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5

3.312~24 3.312~30 3.312~30 3.312~37.7 3.312~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
3.45~24 3.45~30 3.45~30 3.45~37.7 3.45~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5

4.14~24 4.14~30 4.14~30 4.14~37.7 4.14~48 4.14~60 4.14~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
Rated
630 800 1000 1250
current (A)

5.04 6.4 8 10
Downstream Upstream
Setting
0.63～9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
range (kA)
Delayed tripping
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
time (s)
Returnable time 0.06, 0.14, 0.23, 0.35

rated current current (A) setting ratings (kA)
2.5 3.45~9.45 3.45~12 3.45~15 3.45~18.75

250 3.0(motor) 4.14~9.45 4.14~12 4.14~15 4.14~18.75
3.15 4.347~9.45 4.347~12 4.347~15 4.347~18.75

315 3.78(motor) 5.216~9.45 5.216~12 5.216~15 5.216~18.75
3.5 4.83~9.45 4.83~12 4.83~15 4.83~18.75

350 4.2(motor) 5.796~9.45 5.796~12 5.796~15 5.796~18.75
NM8-630
4.0 5.52~9.45 5.52~12 5.52~15 5.52~18.75
NM8S-630 400 4.8(motor) 6.624~9.45 6.624~12 6.624~15 6.624~18.75
5.0 6.9~9.45 6.9~12 6.9~15 6.9~18.75

500 6.0(motor) 8.28~9.45 8.28~12 8.28~15 8.28~18.75
6.3 8.694~9.45 8.694~12 8.694~15 8.694~18.75

630 7.56(motor) 10.44~12 10.44~15 10.44~18.75
6.3 8.694~9.45 8.694~12 8.694~15 8.694~18.75

NM8S-630 630 7.56(motor) 10.44~12 10.44~15 10.44~18.75
7.0 9.66~12 9.66~15 9.66~18.75

700 8.4(motor) 11.59~12 11.59~15 11.59~18.75
8.0 11.04~12 11.04~15 11.04~18.75

800 9.6(motor) 13.25~15 13.25~18.75
10 13.8~15 13.8~18.75
1000 12(motor)
NM8-1250 16.56~18.75
NM8S-1250 17.25~18.75
12.5
1250 15.0(motor)
1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300
12.8 16 16 20 25.6 32 32 40 50.4
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
0.06, 0.14, 0.23, 0.35
3.45~24 3.45~30 3.45~30 3.45~37.7 3.45~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5

4.14~24 4.14~30 4.14~30 4.14~37.7 4.14~48 4.14~60 4.14~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
4.347~24 4.347~30 4.347~30 4.347~37.7 4.347~48 4.347~60 4.347~60 5~75 6.3~94.5

5.216~24 5.216~30 5.216~30 5.216~37.7 5.216~48 5.216~60 5.216~60 5.216~75 6.3~94.5
4.83~24 4.83~30 4.83~30 4.83~37.7 4.83~48 4.83~60 4.83~60 5~75 6.3~94.5

5.796~24 5.796~30 5.796~30 5.796~37.7 5.796~48 5.796~60 5.796~60 5.796~75 6.3~94.5
5.52~24 5.52~30 5.52~30 5.52~37.7 5.52~48 5.52~60 5.52~60 5.52~75 6.3~94.5

6.624~24 6.624~30 6.624~30 6.624~37.7 6.624~48 6.624~60 6.624~60 6.624~75 6.624~94.5
6.9~24 6.9~30 6.9~30 6.9~37.7 6.9~48 6.9~60 6.9~60 6.9~75 6.9~94.5

8.28~24 8.28~30 8.28~30 8.28~37.7 8.28~48 8.28~60 8.28~60 8.28~75 8.28~94.5
8.694~24 8.694~30 8.694~30 8.694~37.7 8.694~48 8.694~60 8.694~60 8.694~75 8.694~94.5

10.44~24 10.44~30 10.44~30 10.44~37.7 10.44~48 10.44~60 10.44~60 10.44~75 10.44~94.5
8.694~24 8.694~30 8.694~30 8.694~37.7 8.694~48 8.694~60 8.694~60 8.694~75 8.694~94.5

10.44~24 10.44~30 10.44~30 10.44~37.7 10.44~48 10.44~60 10.44~60 10.44~75 10.44~94.5
9.66~24 9.66~30 9.66~30 9.66~37.7 9.66~48 9.66~60 9.66~60 9.66~75 9.66~94.5

11.59~24 11.59~30 11.59~30 11.59~37.7 11.59~48 11.59~60 11.59~60 11.59~75 11.59~94.5
11.04~24 11.04~30 11.04~30 11.04~37.7 11.04~48 11.04~60 11.04~60 11.04~75 11.04~94.5

13.25~24 13.25~30 13.25~30 13.25~37.7 13.25~48 13.25~60 13.25~60 13.25~75 13.25~94.5
13.8~24 13.8~30 13.8~30 13.8~37.7 13.8~48 13.8~60 13.8~60 13.8~75 13.8~94.5

16.56~24 16.56~30 16.56~30 16.56~37.7 16.56~48 16.56~60 16.56~60 16.56~75 16.56~94.5
17.25~24 17.25~30 17.25~30 17.25~37.7 17.25~48 17.25~60 17.25~60 17.25~75 17.25~94.5

20.7~24 20.7~30 20.7~30 20.7~37.7 20.7~48 20.7~60 20.7~60 20.7~75 20.7~94.5
13.2 Selective protection in NA1
Rated
630 800 1000 1250
current (A)

5.04 6.4 8 10
Downstream Upstream Setting

0.63～9.45 0.8~12 1~15 1.25~18.75
range (kA)
Delayed tripping
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
time (s)
Returnable time 0.06, 0.14, 0.23, 0.35
Frame size Rated Default instantaneous

rated current current (A) setting ratings 12In (kA)
400 4.8 6.348~9.45 6.348~12 6.348~15 6.348~18.75

630 7.56 9.998~12 9.998~15 9.998~18.75
800 9.6 12.696~15 12.696~18.75
NA1-2000X
1000 12 15.87~18.75
1250 15
1600 19.2
2000 24
2000 24
NA1-3200X 2500 30
3200 38.4
3200 38.4
NA1-4000X 4000 48
4000 48
5000 60
NA1-6300X
6300 75
Note: It can satisfy the selective protection if only the short time-delay setting value of the superior breaker 1.32 times more than the
subordinate breaker, when the instantaneous setting value is adjustive.
1600 2000 2000 2500 3200 4000 4000 5000 6300
12.8 16 16 20 25.6 32 32 40 50.4
1.6~24 2~30 2~30 2.5~37.7 3.2~48 4~60 4~60 5~75 6.3~94.5
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
0.06, 0.14, 0.23, 0.35
6.348~24 6.348~30 6.348~30 6.348~37.7 6.348~48 6.348~60 6.348~60 6.348~75 6.348~94.5

9.998~24 9.998~30 9.998~30 9.998~37.7 9.998~48 9.998~60 9.998~60 9.998~75 9.998~94.5
12.696~24 12.696~30 12.696~30 12.696~37.7 12.696~48 12.696~60 12.696~60 12.696~75 12.696~94.5
15.87~24 15.87~30 15.87~30 15.87~37.7 15.87~48 15.87~60 15.87~60 15.87~75 15.87~94.5
19.837~24 19.837~30 19.837~30 19.837~37.7 19.837~48 19.837~60 19.837~60 19.837~75 19.837~94.5
25.392~30 25.392~30 25.392~37.7 25.392~48 25.392~60 25.392~60 25.392~75 25.392~94.5
31.74~37.7 31.74~48 31.74~60 31.74~60 31.74~75 31.74~94.5
31.74~37.7 31.74~48 31.74~60 31.74~60 31.74~75 31.74~94.5
39.675~48 39.675~60 39.675~60 39.675~75 39.675~94.5
50.784~60 50.784~60 50.784~75 50.784~94.5
50.784~60 50.784~60 50.784~75 50.784~94.5
63.48~75 63.48~94.5
63.48~75 63.48~94.5
79.35~94.5
Intelligent Controller of NA1 series
14 Protection Features of intelligent controller

14.1 M/H and 3M/3H intelligent controller UI
M/H control 3M/3H control
Display window “Check”

Display current value, setting value, tripping time and Switch to query menu
so on “Ir” light
“Set” Overload long delay fault indication
Switch to setting menu “Isd” light
“Up” Short-circuit Short delay indication
Change the marquee or the selected parameter “Test”
“Return” Trip test button
Escape from this grade and return to upper menu or “Ii” light
cancel the current selected parameter Short-circuit instantaneous fault indication
“Enter” “Ig” light
Enter into the next menu directed by the current item, Asymmetric earthing or neutral line fault indication
or select current parameter and store modifications Alarm light
“Down” Communication light
Change the marquee or the selected parameter Run light
Note: Method of 3M/3H controller application please refer to 3M/3H controller instruction.
14.2 3M/3H controller default interface and menu structure 3M/3H controller default interface
3M/3H controller has four subjects menus and a default

interface:
The subjects menus are composed of 4 parts: measurement
menu, parameter set menu, protection parameter set menu,
history and maintenance menu.
14.3 Explanation of M/H controller symbols

14.3.1 Explanation of symbols for reference
No. symbol explanation

1 Ir= tr= Long delay current setting, long delay time setting
2 Isd= tsd= Short delay current setting, short delay time setting
3 Ig= tg= Earthing current setting, earthing time setting
4 Ii= Instantaneous current setting
5 N= Neutral line protection parameter setting
6 TM Trip simulated by software
7 TRIP Tripped
8 RUN Run normally
9 SET Normally on: in settable state; Flickering: modifiable parameter
10 LIN Storing state
11 P┠ 0 Protection setting interface
12 ГES Trip simulated by software setting interface
13 RLR Alarm setting or query interface
14 SYS System setting interface (current calibration , frequency setting …)
15 DBS Communication setting interface of H-type controller
16 DOS DO setting interface (H type with DO function )
17 FRU Fault record query interface
18 COU Operation times and life query interface
19 HDГ Thermal capacity query interface
20 DOC DO state query interface
21 H Thermal capacity data
22 F-- Fault record number
23 R-- Alarm record number
24 Lg L1 L2 L3 LN Earthing ,A,B,C,N phase
The corresponding LED lamp will flash to indicate the fault type after tripping.
25
The LED lamps are always on when the system is normal.
14.3.2 Operation and display instruction
There are four states, default state, setting state, query state and tripping state.
① Default state: default state is also called measuring state. All fault indicating lamps are off and maximum phase current is displayed.
In this state, if “▲” or “▼” button is pressed, L1,L2,L3(LN),Lg current can be displayed in turn.
Example is shown below:
L1 phase current display interface

②Setting state: press “Set” button in default interface to enter into setting interface. Current protection parameters, overload pre-alarm
value, earthing alarm threshold value and delay time can be queried or changed in setting state. Tripping can be simulated by software. In
this state, “▲” or “▼” button can be pressed to add or subtract value when “SET” indicating lamp is flickering. Don’t forget to
press “Enter” button to save data after setting.
Example 1 of changing long delay time is shown below:
3 times
Example 2 of short delay tripping simulated by software is shown below:
long
press
Example3 of setting earthing alarm threshold current is shown below:
Long press
③Query state: press “Check” button in default interface to enter into query interface. Last 8 fault records, last 8 alarm records, breaker
operation times, life record and thermal capacity can be queried in query state.
Example4 of querying second fault record is shown below:
Example5 of querying first alarm record is shown below:
Example6 of querying breaker operation times and life record is shown below:
Example7 of querying thermal capacity after tripping is shown below:
④Tripping state: “Reset” button should be press to return default interface after tripping at fault.
TRIP
L1
RUN
Press “Test” button to simulate Instantaneous trip
TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP
KA s A s
L2 L2
RUN RUN RUN RUN
Instantaneous trip state Earthing trip state

14.3.3 Controller functions list
M type H type
1 over-current protection (overload, short delay, instantaneous, earthing); 1 over-current protection (overload, short delay, instantaneous, earthing);
vector sum grounding mode. vector sum grounding mode.
2 Neutral line protection 2 Neutral line protection
3 Current measurement 3 Current measurement
4 two test functions: 4 two test functions:
(1)Instantaneous trip test simulated by mechanical button (1)Instantaneous trip test simulated by mechanical button
(2)Other trip tests simulated by software (2)Other trip tests simulated by software
5 Ten fault records 5 Ten fault records
6 Ten alarm records 6 Ten alarm records
7 MCR protection 7 MCR protection
8 operation times records 8 operation times records
9 thermal capacity 9 thermal capacity
10 overload pre-alarm 10 overload pre-alarm
11 communication function: MODBUS protocol
12 four DO function (optional)
3M type 3H type
1 all functions of M-type controller are included 1 all functions of 3M-type controller are included
2 HMI:128*64 LCD 2 voltage measurement and protection
3 frequency measurement and protection
4 power measurement and protection
5 electric energy, power-factor, harmonic measurement
6 communication function: MODBUS protocol
7 DI/DO function
14.4 specifications of characteristics

14.4.1 Over-current protection characteristic curve
Over-current protection characteristic curve
Ir=(0.4~1)In
1000 tr=(15~480)s
100
10
T(s)
Isd=(1.5~15)Ir(max40/50kA)
I2t ON
1 2
I t OFF
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1 0.1
Ii=(1.5~20)In
(max65/75kA)
0.01
0.5 5 3 30
I(xIr) I(xIn)
14.4.2 Overload long time-delay protection

Operating characteristics
Current Ratings Time

tolerance Current Action time(s)
Range(Ir) tolerance
≤1.05Ir >2h Non-trip

＞1.3Ir <1h trip
(0.4~1)In+ OFF ±10%
1.5Ir(setting time) 15 30 60 120 240 480 ±10%
2.0Ir 8.4 16.9 33.7 67.5 135 270 ±10%
Phase N Overload and

100% or 50%(Applicable to 3P+N or 4P)
Over-Current Characteristic
14.3 Short-circuit short-delay protection

2 2
Short-circuit short delay protection has two protection modes. One is inverse time and definite time protection. I Tsd= (8Ir) tsd works
when current is low. In this formula, I is actual current, Tsd is actual trip time, tsd is set trip delay time. When I is over inverse time set
value but below 8Ir, controller will operate according to over-current protection characteristic curve. When I is over both of inverse
time set value and 8Ir, controller will operate according to definite time protection. The other is definite time protection and set time is
0.11s, 0.21s, 0.31s, and 0.41s. When I is over Isd but below Ii, controller will operate according to definite time protection.

Range(Isd) tolerance
≤0.9Isd In the 2tsd Non-trip

＞1.1Isd In the 2tsd Delayed-trip
(1.5~15)Ir+ OFF ±10%
tsd 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 ±15%
Returnable time 0.06 0.14 0.25 0.33 ±15%
Note: a. When the intelligent controller is FrameⅡ (Inm=3200A、4000A), Isd shouldn’t be more than 40KA.
b. When the intelligent controller is FrameⅢ (Inm=6300), Isd shouldn’t be more than 50KA.
c. When tsd is 0.1s or 0.2s, time permissible error is ±0.040s.
14.4.4 Short-circuit instantaneous protection

Tripping time for instantanous protection (including the inherent breaking time of circuit breaker) should be
less than 50ms (effective value protection) or 30ms (peak value protection).
Current Ratings
tolerance Current Time tolerance
Range(Ii)
≤0.85Ii In the 0.2s Non-trip

(1.5~20)In+ OFF ±15%
＞1.15Ii In the 0.2s trip
Note: a. When the intelligent controller is FrameⅠ (Inm=2000A), Ii shouldn’t be more than 50KA.
b. When the intelligent controller is FrameⅡ (Inm=3200A、4000A), Ii shouldn’t be more than 65KA.
c. When the intelligent controller is FrameⅢ (Inm=6300), Ii shouldn’t be more than 75KA.
14.4.5 Earthing protection

Earthing protection has definite time characteristic. Fault delay time is shown below.
Earthing protection characteristic curve
Ig=(0.2~0.8)In，
min100A，max1200A
1000 或500A~1200A
100
10
T(s)
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1 0.1
0.01
0.1 1 10
I(xIn)
Operating characteristics of single-phase earthing protection

Range(Ig) tolerance
≤0.9Ig In the 2tg Non-tripping

Inm=1000/2000，
(0.2~0.8)In+ OFF ＞1.1Ig In the tg±0.032s or tg(1±25%) Tripping
±10%
Inm=3200/4000/6300, tg 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 ±15%
(500~1200)A+ OFF
Returnable time 0.06 0.14 0.25 0.33 ±15%
Note: a. When tg is 0.1s or 0.2s, time permissible error is ±0.040s;

b. When Inm is 1000A, Ig should be more than 100A. When Inm is 2000A, Ig shouldn' t be more than 1200A.
c. When Inm is 3200A, 4000A or 6300A, Ig should be between 500A and 1200A.
Single-phase protection is usually used in neutral-point solid ground system. Controller has two different protection modes, being
vector sum mode and external transformer mode.
In three-phase three-wire system using 3-pole breaker without external transformer, earthing fault signal comes from three- phase current
vector sum. Operating characteristic is definite time protection.
3PT mode
Contr
-oller
In three-phase four-wire system using 4-pole breaker without external transformer , earthing fault signal comes from three- phase current
and N-Pole current vector sum. Operating characteristic is definite time protection.
4PT mode
Contr
-oller
C
In three-phase four-wire system using 3-pole breaker with external N-pole transformer, earthing fault signal comes from three- phase and
N-Pole current vector sum. Operating characteristic is definite time protection.
(3P+N)T mode
Contr
-oller
Note:
① External N-pole transformer (connected to 6#, 7# terminal for NA1-1000, connected to 25#, 26# terminal for NA1-2000-6300) is a special product. Default lead wire is
2 meters long.
② Earthing protection in 3PT mode can only be used in balance load. It should be turned off or set value above allowable unbalance current when the load is unbalance or
the controller may operate.
③ The distance between external transformer and breaker should be less than 5m in (3P+N)T mode. When lead wire of external transformer needs to be longer than 2 meters,
special requirement should be noted when ordering.
15. Accessories
15.1 Shunt release
The power-on time cannot be greater than 2 seconds / time, and the power-on frequency cannot be greater than 5 times / minute.
a.The shunt release should be used except for special products where the circuit breaker must be directly disconnected manually;
b.The shunt release could operated within 10 meters to break the circuit breaker.
Characteristics of shunt release
Rated control power supply voltage Us(V) AC220/230 AC380/400 DC220 pulse AC110 ( not available
for NA1-1000X )
Operating voltage (V) (0.7-1.1)Us
Break time (ms) ≤28
Inm=1000A pulse 56 56 250 250 -
Power
consumption Intermittent(default) 300 300 132 70 300
Inm=2000A~6300A
(VA/W) 880 880 850 850
Pulse(option) 1800
Notes:
1.It must select pulse type in the automatic control system.
2. power-on time of the intermittent type cannot be greater than 2 s,
pulse frequency of the pulse type cannot be more than 5 times/min, or the components are easily burnt;
3. If the circuit breaker is not break by a single power-on of 15 s, must disconnect the power on the shunt release immediately.
15.2 Closed Electromagnet

After the energy storage of the motor is completed, the closed electromagnet can be operated and controlled within a
range of 10 meters to instantaneously release the energy storage spring force of the operating mechanism to
close the circuit breaker.
Characteristics of closed electromagnet

Rated control power supply voltage Us(V) AC110 ( not available
AC220/230 AC380/400 DC220 DC110 for NA1-1000X )
Operating voltage (V) (0.85-1.1)Us
Close time (ms) ≤50
Inm=1000A pulse 56 56 250 250 -
Power
consumption Intermittent(default) 300 300 132 70 300
Inm=2000A~6300A
(VA/W) 880 880
Pulse(option) 1800 850 850
Notes:
1.It must select pulse type in the automatic control system.
2. ppower-on time of the intermittent type cannot be greater than 2 s, pulse frequency of the pulse type cannot be more than
5 times/min, or the components are easily burnt;
3. Ensure that the product is in the energy storage state so that the closed electromagnet may be energized;
4.If the product is not closed after a single power-on for 15s, must disconnect the power on the closed electromagnet immediately.
15.3 Undervoltage release (UVT) (The power must be turned on before the circuit breaker is closed)
15.3.1 The undervoltage release has instantaneous operation and delayed operation:
Operation types of each frame under voltage release

Self-priming Helped priming
Undervoltage instantaneous release Inm=1000A, 6300A Inm=2000A, 3200A, 4000A/3

Undervoltage delay release Inm=1000A, 6300A Inm=2000A, 3200A, 4000A/3
Notes:
1.Inm=1000A undervoltage delay does not require an external delay controller. The power-off operation is an instantaneous operation. There is no zero
voltage delay function;
2.Inm=6300A undervoltage delay does not require an external undervoltage delay controller. There is a delay function for low voltage and power off;
3.Inm=2000A~4000A/3 undervoltage delay requires an external delay controller. There is a delay operation when the power is off.
There is a zero voltage delay function.
Delay time of under voltage release

Delay time (optional) Accuracy
Inm=1000A 1 s, 3 s, 5 s, 7 s (not adjustable) ±15%
Inm=2000A~4000A/3 1 s, 3 s, 5 s (non-adjustable) 0~1s
Inm=6300A 0.3 s~7.5 s (adjustable) ±15%
The undervoltage will not operate when the voltage returns to 85% Ue and higher,, within 1/2 delay time.
Note:
A self-priming undervoltage delay release may be provided for special orders of NA1-2000X~6300X. There is no external undervoltage delay controller,
and the delay time is 0.3s~7.5s, selectable and adjustable with an accuracy of ±15%.
15.3.2 When the undervoltage release is not powered, the circuit breaker cannot be closed either electrically or manually:
Characteristics of under voltage release
Rated control power supply voltage Ue(V) AC110, AC220/230, AC380/400

Operating voltage (V) (0.35~0.7)Ue
Reliable closing voltage (V) (0.85~1.1)Ue
Reliable not-closing voltage (V) ≤0.35Ue
Power consumption (Inm=1000A/Inm=2000A~6300A) 20VA/48VA (W)
15.4 The electric energy storage mechanism (the power-on time cannot be greater than 5 seconds / time, and the power-on frequency
cannot be greater than 3 times/min) has an automatic re-energy storage function to facilitate dual power switching.
Characteristics of electric energy storage mechanism
Rated control power supply voltage Us(V) AC380, AC220 DC220, DC110
Operating voltage (V) (0.85-1.1)Us (0.85-1.1)Us
Power consumption (Inm=1000A) 90W 90W
Power consumption (Inm=3200A, 4000A/3) 110W 110W
Energy storage time ≤5s ≤5s
Notes:
1.It is forbidden to turn on the power for 7 seconds to avoid damage.
15.5 Auxiliary contact NO

Standard type: Provides users with 4 sets of conversion contacts (default configuration).
Special type: 6 sets of Inm=1000A conversion contacts (for AC only);
Characteristic
Type NA1-1000X NA1-2000X/NA1-2000XN/NA1-2000XH/NA1-3200X/NA1-3200XN/NA1-4000X/NA1-6300X/NA1-6300XN
Rated voltage (V) AC230 AC400 DC220 AC230 AC400 DC220

conventional free-air thermal current Ith (A) 10 6 0.5 6 6 6
Rated control capacity 300VA 100VA 60W 300VA 300VA 60W
NA1-1000X NA1-2000X/NA1-2000XN/NA1-2000XH/NA1-3200X/NA1-3200XN/NA1-4000X/NA1-6300X/NA1-6300XN
Category Voltage Current Category Voltage Current
AC230V 1.3A AC230V 1.3A

AC-15 AC-15
AC400V 0.25A AC400V 0.75A
DC110V 0.55A DC110V 0.55A
DC-13 DC-13
DC220V 0.27A DC220V 0.27A
15.6 Doorcase 15.7 Phases barrier (Optional)

Installed on the door of the distribution cubicle, for sealing Installed between the busbars to increase the creepage
the distribution cubicle and making the protection class to distance.
IP40( fixed type and drawout type).
15.8 Transparent shield (NA1-2000) (Optional)

Installed on the doorcase of the cubicle's small door,
make the protection class to IP54. It is suitable for the
fixed, drawout type circuit breaker and the load switch.
15.9 Off position locking mechanism

When the circuit breaker is disconnected, padlock can be used to lock it after pulling out the lock lever, then the circuit breaker
can't be “Test” or “connected” position.( Padlock is prepared by users)
15.10 Key lock
Lock the circuit breaker on the OFF position, then the circuit breaker can't be closed.
Locks and keys will be provided by us.
Separate lock and key is matched with one set of the circuit breaker.
Three same locks and two same keys are matched with three circuit breaker.
Note: Before pulling out the key, the break pushbutton should be pressed first, rotate the key anticlockwise, then pull it out.
★ NA1Install the locking system

1. Components of the locking system:
+ +
lock washer key
2. Installation sequence:
1. Boring here, and 2. Put the washer into 3. Install the 4. Push the red button “ON”, and take
polish the hole the hole lock here the key out, then install the cover.
make it smooth
15.11 Cable mechanical interlock

It can realize the interlock of two horizontal or vertical-installed, three poles or four poles ,
drawout type or fixed type circuit breaker.
a. If need bend the cable, make sure the radian is more than 120°.
b. Check and make sure enough lubricating oil of the cable.
c. The maximum distance between two interlock circuit breakers is 1.5m.
1.5m(max)
Circuit diagram Available running manner
1QF 2QF
0 0
1QF 2QF
0 1
1 0
Notes: a. when the steel cable needs to be bent, enough transition arc should be reserved to guarantee flexible movement of steel cable;
b. check the steel cable and make sure there is enough lubricant in the steel cable to guarantee flexible movement of steel cable.
15.12 Connecting-rod type mechanical interlock

For two vertically mounted three-pole or four-pole circuit breakers, the interlock can be realized where
one makes and the other breaks.
Manner 1: three power supplies are provided

for one circuit breaker only
1QF 2QF
50
0 0
52 60 1QF 2QF
175 0 1
40
190
1 0
0.9m(max)
50
52 60
175
40
190
16. Maintenance and Overhaul of Circuit Breaker
Safety Precautions
The following operations must be executed in turn before conducting the maintenance or overhaul of circuit breakers:
a. Circuit breaker opening operation to ensure the circuit breaker is in an opening state;
b. Disconnecting the upper-level knife switch (if any) to ensure the main circuit and secondary circuit are uncharged;
c. Circuit breaker discharging, opening operation to ensure the circuit breaker is in a discharging and opening state;
d. The components which the personnel might contact must be uncharged. Keep Safe
Maintenance and overhaul cycle
Condition Environment Maintenance cycle Overhaul cycle Remarks
The air should be always kept Every six months Once per year Confirming to IEC60947-2
clean and dry. There is no corrosive gas. (every six months for more Requirement for general
The temperature is in between -5℃~+40℃ than 3 years of mounting environmental conditions.
General environment The humidity should conform to Specification period)
1.3 Operating Conditions c Requirement for
extreme atmosphere conditions.
Low temperature -5℃~-40℃ or high Every three months Every six months
temperature 40℃～65℃ or humidity≥90% (every three months for
Severe environment more than 3 years of
mounting period)
Places with more dust and corrosive gases Every month Every three months
16.1 Maintenance of circuit breaker

16.1.1 Foreign objects (such as tools, wire leads or fragments, metal
objects) in the switchgear should be regularly cleared.
16.1.2 The dust on the circuit breaker must be regularly cleared to
maintain its good insulation.
16.1.3 The spring washers of the main circuit connecting bolts，
the earthing bolts must be checked for whether they are
flattened and theconnection is firm.
16.1.4 Whether the opening or closing indication is correct and

reliable.
Opening charging Closing charging
OFF ON OFF ON
ON
OFF Charged
Charged
Opening discharging Closing discharging
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF ON
Discharged Discharged
16.2 Overhaul of circuit breaker

16.2.1 Connecting and mounting inspection
It is proposed to refer to the following requirement for the torsional forces of main circuit and secondary circuit.
Fastener specification Torque requirement N·m

M3 0.4~0.5
M4 1.2~1.7
M8 16~26
M10 36~52
M12 61~94
16.2.2 Insulating property test

The phase-phase and phase-earth insulation resistance, requirement≥20MΩ.
The insulation resistance test must be first done after overhaul and long-time（≥7days）of deenergization and before energization
again.
16.2.3 Operating characteristic inspection
All accessories shall be connected with corresponding rated voltage according to the face shield nameplate requirement, and the
following operations should be done:
Electric charging, closing and opening operation, 5times in cycle
Manual charging, closing and opening operation, 5times in cycle
The circuit breaker charging, opening and closing should be normal.
Note: The main circuit must be uncharged. If there is an under-voltage release, the rated voltage must be first connected.
Note: The picture takes NA1-2000X as an example

16.2.4 Inspection of circuit breaker components

16.2.4.1 Face shield dismantling
· Remove four bolts of circuit breaker fixed panel and take off the face shield.
Note: The picture takes NA1-2000X as an example.
16.2.4.2 Operating mechanism inspection

The mechanism components should be free of fracture and damage, and the fasteners are fastened.
Clear the dust and evenly apply oil onto the rotating components.
· Evenly apply 7012 low-temperature lubricating grease or lubricate same using

the similar solid grease onto the mechanism rotating positions.
Note: The picture takes NA1-2000X as an example.
16.2.4.3 Intelligent controller (taking NA1-2000 type M type controller as an example)

Parameter setting should conform to the site use requirement.
· 1. Press the “Set” button to enter the parameter setting interface “Pro”.
· 2. Press the “Enter” button to enter the protective parameter setting and
query interface.
· 3. Press the “▲” or “▼” button to in turn select the display of protective
parameter setting details.
· 4. Press the “Reset” button to return to the upper-level menu or exit from
the interface.
Simulated test tripping function

· Press the “Test” button to simulate the tripping test.
· Press the orange “Reset” button on the face shield to return to normal state.
16.2.4.4 Drawer set inspection (conduct the test after removing the body, taking NA1-2000X as an example)
There are no foreign objects inside.
· Observe whether there are foreign objects inside the draw-out socket, like
screws, wire leads, scrap iron; please clear same if any.
The flash barrier opening or closing is normal, and the spacing contact has no deformation or oxidization.
· Rotate to the · Rotate NA1-2000X~6300X to

“Disconnected” position, the Connected position.
and the flash barrier is · Press down NA1-1000X
shown as the left figure. separator and open the
connecting rod. The flash
barrier is shown as the left
figure. Observe whether each
phase bridge contacts are
deformed, misplaced or
oxidized. If any, replace same.
“Disconnected” “Connected”
Rotate the friction positions and apply oil evenly.
· Evenly apply 7012 low-temperature

lubricating grease or similar solid
grease onto the positions indicated
in the left figure.
16.2.4.5 Arcing Chamber (taking NA1-2000X~6300X as an example)

Each arc and arcing chambers are not broken. If any, please promptly replace same and clear inside dust, corrosion layer and arc
discharge point. In case of serious corrosion or rust, please promptly conduct replacement.
Note: Inspection must be done after short-circuit current breaking.
· Remove the fixing bolts · Take out the arc chamber. · Check chamber conditions.
16.2.4.6 Required main contact (taking NA1-2000X~6300X as an example) over-travel≥2mm.
· Conduct manual closing operation, and observe the main contact over-travel.
Note: Please replace the contact if it reaches the position shown.
Clear dust, corrosion layer and particle burnt objects.
· Close the product and main contact is at the shown position. Observe any dust,
particle burnt objects and oxidized corrosion layer of dynamic and static
contacts. If any, please promptly clear same.
Note: Inspection must be done after short-circuit current breaking.
16.2.4.7 Secondary circuit inspection

No shell damage.
Inspect the contact between the draw-out body secondary
circuitand drawer set secondary circuit using the multimeter.
At the “Test” or “Connection” position, the contacts are
in good contact , and the connecting screws are fastened ,
and the conductor insulation has no damage.
16.3 Replacement of undervoltage release, shunt release and

closed electromagnet accessories.The following operations
must be executed before replacing the accessories.
Cut off all power supplies and ensure the main circuit and
secondary circuit power supplies are uncharged. The
circuit breakers are in the discharging opening state.
16.3.1 Replacement of fixed accessories
Remove the panel fixing bolts and dismantle the panel.
Untie the tape and remove the connecting conductor.
Remove the fixed accessory mounting screws.
Dismantle the accessories and replace same.
Note: The shunt release should be first dismantled before replacing the NA1-2000
undervoltage release.
16.3.2 Replacement of draw-out accessories

Rotate the body to the detachment position and remove the
body.
Remove the panel fixing bolts and dismantle the panel.
Untie the tape and remove the connecting conductor.
Remove the fixed accessory mounting screws.
Dismantle the accessories and replace same.
Note: The shunt release should be first dismantled before replacing the NA1-2000
undervoltage release.
17. Common Failure Causes and Solutions

17.1 Troubleshooting logic
Begin
Circuit breaker Circuit breaker

opening failure closing failure
Manual opening Shunt release UVT opening Drawer set is The controller
Energy-storage
opening failure failure rotated in position is reset or not
failure or not or not
Inspect the Inspect the Inspect the Inspect the The drawer set is The controller reset
mechanism shnnt release UVT moto rotated in position button is reset
Maintain the UVT

attracting and mannal
opening operation
Inspect items:
1、The connection line is normnal or nor. Inspect the

The shunt
interlocking Opening or not
2、The connection voltage conforms to the release is charged
or not
device
requirement or not.
3、The components are damaged or not. Inspect the Inspect the UVT
Inspect the
shunt release and closed
please replace the damaged components mechanism
commection electromagnet
17.2 Faulty tripping analysis (taking NA1-2000X M as an example)

Failure cause identification
The failures are identified through the intelligent controller
indication..
· Presss the “Reset” button till · Press the “Check” button to

it returns to the default display enter the query menu interface;
interface. Press the “Enter” button to
enter the failure query menu
interface; press the “▼” and
select the failure record frequency
to be viewed, and press the
“Enter” button again to query
the failure details.
· Presss the “Reset” button to

exit from or return to the
upper-level menu.
Note: The electrical closing operation is forbidden before troubleshooting.

18. Regular malfunction and solutions
Fault description Reasons analysis Maintenance method
1. Check the breaking current value and operation time of intelligent release.
Over load tripping 2. Analyze the load and electric network, exclude the overload if it happens.
(Ir indicator flashing) 3. Match the actual operating current with long time-delay current setting value.
4. Press the reset button to reclose the breaker
1. Check the breaking current value and operation time of intelligent release.
2. Exclude the short circuit fault if it happens
Short circuit tripping
3. Check the setting value of intelligent release
(“Isd”or“Ii”indicator flashing)
4. Check the normal state of breaker
Tripping of 5. Press the reset button to reclose the breaker
circuit breaker
1. Check the breaking current value and acting time of intelligent release.
Earthing fault tripping 2. Exclude the earthing fault if that happens.
(IG indicator flashing) 3. Match the fault current setting value with the actual protection.
4. Press the reset button to reclose the breaker.
Under-voltage release fault: 1.Check the power is on or not

1. Rated working voltage is 2.Check the power voltage of under-voltage release, it shouldn't be less
less than 70%Ue than 85%Ue.
2. Fault of control unit 3.Replace the control unit of under-voltage release
Mechanical interlock acting Check the working state of two circuit breakers fixed with mechanical interlock
Intelligent release don't reset

Press the reset button to reclose the breaker
(panel is raised)
The breaker
Secondary circuit of drawerout- Make the breaker to "making" position
can't be
type breaker isn't connected ("click" sound will be heard)
closed
Check the secondary circuit:

Breaker hasn't stored energy 1. Power voltage of motor shouldn't less than 85%Ue.
2. Check the storage mechanism, replace it if necessary.
Mechanical interlock acting Check the working state of two circuit breakers
leads to locking of breaker fixed with mechanical interlock
The breaker Closing electromagnet:
can't be 1.Rated control voltage is 1. Power voltage of closing electromagnet
closed less than 85%Us; shouldn't less than 85%Us.
2.Closing electromagnet 2. Replace the electromagnet.
is damaged
Tripping immediately: 1. Check the breaking current value and operation time of intelligent release;
Tripping after
1. Short circuit current is closed 2. Exclude the short circuit fault if it happens;
closing the
2.Delay tripping because of 3. Exclude overload fault
circuit breaker
transient current is high 4. Check the normal state of breaker
(Fault indicator
when closing; 5. Modify the current setting value of intelligent release
flashing)
3. Overload current is closed 6. Press the reset button to reclose the breaker
The breaker can't be opened manually

1. There is fault with mechanical 1. Check the mechanism, if there is fault happened.
operating mechanism
Circuit breaker The breaker can't be opened by

can't be opened motor remotely
1. Check the mechanism, if there is fault happened.
1. There is fault with mechanical
2. Check the Power voltage of shunt release is less
operating mechanism
than 70%Us or not
2. Power voltage of shunt
3. Replace shunt release
release is less than 70%Us;
3. Shunt release is damaged
Fault description Reasons analysis Maintenance method

Manual storage can't be realized Mechanical fault with the energy-storage device
Circuit breaker Motor storage can't be realized

can't store energy 1. Power voltage of motor 1. Power voltage of motor energy-stored device shouldn't less
energy-stored device is less than 85%Us; than 85%Us
2. There is mechanical fault 2. Mechanical fault with the energy-storage device
with energy-storage device
Handle of drawerout- 1. There is padlock at the "opening" position

1. Take away the padlock
type circuit breaker 2. Slideway or breaker body
2. Pull the slideway or breaker body into its position
can't be drawn in or out isn't pulled into its position
Drawerout-type
1. Handle isn't pulled out
breaker can't be drawn 1. Pull out the handle
2. Breaker is not totally at the
out at the "opening" 2. Keep the circuit breaker totally at “opening” position
“opening" position
position
1. Something drop into the drawer base,

Drawerout-type breaker and lock the mechanism or mechanism
1. Check and clean the drawer base, or contact with manufacturer
can't reach the fault happens.
2. Match the body with relevant drawer base
"making" position 2. Breaker body not match with the frame
-size rated current of drawer base
1. Release isn't connected 1. Check the power is connected or not

with power 2. Cut off the power, then connect again. Otherwise contact
No display on
2. There is fault with release with manufacturer
intelligent release
panel
Check the electromagnet power voltage shouldn't be less
Rated control voltage is less than 85%Us;
than 85%Us.
Fault indicator still

Fault happened with Cut off the power, then connect again. Otherwise contact
flashing after pressing
intelligent release with manufacturer
the Reset button
NA1-1000X~6300X Ordering specification

Customer: Tel: Date:
Quantity:
Model □NA1-1000X □NA1-2000X □NA1-2000XN □NA1-2000XH □NA1-3200X □NA1-3200XN NA1-4000X □NA1-6300X □NA1-6300XN
□200 □400 □630 □630 □800 □1000 □2000 □2500 □4000 □5000
Rated current In (A) □4000
□800 □1000 □1250 □1600 □2000 □3200 □6300(no four poles)
Installation mode □ Drawout type □Fixed type (Note: no fixed type when In> 4000A)
Number of poles □ Three poles □Four poles
Protection function Auxiliary functions Optional function
□ M type 1. □ Ir overload long delay, Isd short-circuit short delay inverse

time + definite time, Ii transient short-circuit, Ig single-phase
Standard
grounding 4-section protection 1. Ammeter
(Default 2. □ Ir overload long delay, Isd definite time short-circuit short function
configuration) delay,Ii transient short-circuit, Ig single-phase grounding 4-section 2. Self-diagnostic
protection function
3. Tuning function
1. □ Ir overload long delay, Isd short-circuit short delay inverse 4. Test function □ Voltage display
time + definite time, Ii transient short-circuit, Ig single-phase 5 Display function
□ 3M type □ Frequency display
grounding 4-section protection
Multifunctional □ Power Factor show
2. □ Ir overload long delay, Isd definite time short-circuit short
(Optional delay,Ii transient short-circuit, Ig single-phase grounding 4-section □ Active power display
configuration) protection □ Load monitoring
function
1. □ Ir overload long delay Isd short-circuit short delay inverse time Note: For the specific
+definite time Ii transient short-circuit, Ig single-phase grounding optional function, refer

□ 3H-type 4-section protection
to List of controller
Communication 2. □ Ir overload long delay, Isd definite time short-circuit short delay,
Ii transient short-circuit, Ig single-phase grounding 4-section protection functions in the sample
type 3. □ with PROFIBUS-DP communication protocol (The cost of optional
(Optional □ with MODBUS communication protocol functions will be
configuration) calculated additionally).
Ir long delay current setting range: (0.4 to 1) In ! Conventional factory tuning: overload long delay 1.0In
Overload 1.5Ir action time setting range: 15,30,60 ...... 480s ! Conventional factory tuning: overload 1.5Ir; action 15s
Notes: ! Conventional factory setting: short delay current 8Ir ;

Protection Isd short delay current setting range: (1.5 to 15) Ir;
! Conventional factory tuning: Short delay action time 0.4s
function short delay action time (0.1 ~ 0.4) s
[Note: 3M, 3H for (1.5 to 15) Ir]
Settable
range and Ii instantaneous current setting range: 1.5In ~ 50kA/65kA/75kA
conventional
! Conventional factory tuning: 12In [Note: 3M, 3H for （1.5In~50kA/65kA/75kA）
factory tuning
Ig earthing protection current setting range: (0.2 to 0.8) In; the earthing protection time setting range: (0.1to0.4)s
! Conventional factory setting: 0.5 In; OFF
Controller power □AC380V,□AC400V,□AC220V,□AC230V,□AC127V,□DC220V,□DC110V (Optional)
□AC110V,□AC220/230V,□AC380/400V,□Order_____V ,□Non-undervoltage
□ Helped＆instantaneous □ Helped＆delay__s (Inm≥2000A, 1 s, 3 s, 5 s, non-adjustable);
Electrical accessories
Under voltage
release □ self-priming＆instantaneous □ self-priming＆delay __s (Inm≥2000A, 0.3 s~7.5 s,adjustable);
Note: Inm=1000A no Helped priming type, delay time 1 s, 3 s, 5 s, 7 s,non-adjustable. (No AC110V
Shunt release □ intermittent (only for Inm≥2000A and default) □AC110V,□AC220/230V,□AC380/400V,□DC110V,□DC220V for NA1-1000X)
Closing electromagnet □ pulse (must select in automatic control system) □AC110V,□AC220/230V,□AC380/400V,□DC110V,□DC220V

Electric motor □AC110V,□AC220/230V,□AC380/400V,□DC110V,□DC220V
Interlock device Mechanical linkage: □ Link interlock □ Cable interlock

(Optional)
(surcharge) Door interlock: □ Switch body position door interlock(drawer-type) □ Switch on/off state door interlock
Button lock: □Panel products on/off button lock
Key lock: □1 lock 1 key □2 locks 1 key □3 locks 1 key □ 3 locks 2 keys □5 locks 3 keys □Special custom__lock__ key
Special requirements
Accessories External transformer: □External N phase transformer [(3P+N)T type

(surcharge) (Optional)
□External leakage zero sequence current transformer (E mode) □External ground current transformer (W)
Module: □ PSU-1 Power module □RU-1 relay module □ST-DP protocol converting module
□Position signaling devices (□Connected □Test □Unconnected) □Mechanical counting device
□Horizontal connection (default) □Vertical connection (with L vertical bus-bar)

The main circuit
connection □Rotation busbar horizontal connection (Drawer In ≤ 3200)
(Optional)
□Rotation busbar vertical connection (drawer-type In ≤ 3200)
Note: The casing current, rated current and auxiliary control voltage must be specified when ordering!
Note: 1) Please mark “√” or fill figure in the relative ”□” if no mark, we will provide according to conventional.
Note: 2) The operational fuction of the intellgent controller and special requirements require additional costs.
Tel.:0577-62877777-6213 Fax :0577-62877777-6288
NA1-6300X NA1-4000X NA1-3200X NA1-2000X NA1-1000X

Configuration instructions
1. NA1-2000X~6300X fundamental configurations 2. NA1-1000X fundamental configurations

a. Motor-driven: a. Motor-driven:
Under-voltage instantaneous release; Under-voltage instantaneous release;
Shunt release; Shunt release;
Closing electromagnet; Closing electromagnet;
4 suits of transform contact; Motor driven operating mechanism;
Motor driven operating mechanism; 4 normal open and 4 normal close auxiliary
M-type Intelligent Controller; contacts;
Horizontal wiring of main circuit; M-type Intelligent Controller;
Doorcase; Closing and breaking push button lock;
Element of main circuit; Horizontal wiring of main circuit;
Operating instructions of M-type Intelligent Controller Doorcase;
Operating instructions of Air Circuit Breaker; Element of main circuit;
Packing box; Operating instructions of Air Circuit Breaker;
Drawer seat (Drawout type) Packing box;
Drawer seat(Drawout type)
b. Manual: b. Manual:
Under-voltage instantaneous release; Under-voltage instantaneous release;
4 suits of transform contact; 4 normal open and 4 normal close auxiliary
M-type Intelligent Controller; contacts;
Horizontal wiring of main circuit; M-type Intelligent Controller;
Doorcase; Horizontal wiring of main circuit;
Element of main circuit; Closing and breaking push button lock;
Operating instructions of M-type Intelligent Doorcase;
Controller Element of main circuit;
Operating instructions of Air Circuit Breaker; Operating instructions of Air Circuit Breaker;
Packing box; Packing box;
Drawer seat(Drawout type) Drawer seat(Drawout type)
4. NA1-1000X operational configuration (additional

3. NA1-2000X~6300X operational configuration
costs)
(additional costs)
Under voltage delayed release; wire-cable
Nonadjustable under voltage delayed release (1s, 3s, 5s);
mechanical interlock;
Connecting-rod type mechanical interlock (for drawout
key lock; External current transformer earthing
type);
protection;
Wire-cable mechanical interlock; Button lock; Key lock;
Vertical busbar; 6 groups changeover contacts;
Door interlock'Locking device;
H type intelligent controller; Phases barrier, position
External current transformer earthing protection;
signal
Vertical busbar;
Rotating busbar (IN≤3200);
3NO (normal open) and 3NC (normal close) contacts;
4NO and 4NC contacts; 5 groups changeover contacts;
3 groups changeover contacts; H type intelligent
controller;
Position signal; Counter; Protecting cover (NA1-2000);
Double power controller.
Contactors, Relays, Starters
Contactors
NC8 NC7 NC6 NC1

AC Contactor AC Contactor AC Contactor AC Contactor
06-500A 09-620A 06~09A 09~95A
NC1-2504Z(N) DP NC2 NCK3 NCK5

NC1-4004Z(N) DP AC Contactor Definite Purpose Definite Purpose
Contactor 115~800A Contactor Contactor
20~90A 20~40A
NC11 NCH8 NCH8-M

CJX1/K
Vacuum
AC Contactor Modular AC Modular contactor
Contractor
Contactor with Manual
20-63A operation
CJ19
for Power Factor
Correction
Page P-111
Relays
NR8 NRE8 NR2

Thermal Electronic Thermal
Overload Relay Overload Relay Overload Relay
Starters
NS2 CC Conversion NQ2 NQ3

Manual Motor Direct On-line DOL
Connectors
Starter Starter Electromagnetic
Starter
NKB1
Control & Protective
Switching Device
Page P-154
P-001 Contactors,Relays,Starters Contactors
NC8 Series
Current range: 6~500A
(6A, 9A, 12A, 18A, 25A, 32A, 38A, 40A, 50A, 65A, 80A, 100A,115A,150A,170A, 205A, 265A, 300A, 400A, 500A)
Poles: 3P, 4P
3-pole contactor
Frame size (A) 6, 9, 12 9, 12, 18 25, 32, 38 40, 50, 65

Mini type Normal type
Power (kW,400V) 2.2, 4, 5.5 4, 5.5, 7.5 11, 15, 18.5 18.5, 22, 30
4-pole contactor
Contactors Contactors,Relays,Starters P-002
80, 100 115,150,170 205, 265, 300 400, 500
37, 45 55, 75, 90 110, 132, 160 200, 250

10
11
5
1
12
6
NC8 and Accessories
1 Contactor
2 Mechanical interlock block
3 Contactor
4 Side mount aux
5 Side mount aux
6 Thermal overload relay
7 Front mount aux
8 Front mount aux

D
9 Pneumatic timers
10 Surge arrester block
4 11 Bus bar
12 Bus bar
3
8
3. Type designation
3-pole contactor
NC8 - 06 M 01 /Z /N
Combination
/ N: Reversing
None: Without additional device
Coil type
/ Z: DC operation coil
None: AC operation coil
/W:Wide voltage range operation coil
(only for 115~170A)
Auxiliary contact
Mini type (6A~12A): 01: 1NC; 10: 1NO
Normal type (9A~38A): None: 1NO+1NC; 22: 2NO+2NC
Normal type (40A~100A): None: 1NO+1NC;
Normal type (115A~500A): None: None
Contactor type
M: Mini type (6A~12A)
None: Normal type(9A~500A)
NC8 Series AC Contactor Nominal rating
06~500A 06: 6A; 09: 9A; ... 500: 500A
NC8 series AC contactor

1. General
NC8 series AC contactor is applied to circuits with AC
current frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz, rated operational
voltage up to 690 V and rated operational current up
to 500 A. It is used for remote making & breaking circuits, 4-pole contactors
and can also be used with proper thermal overload relay
together as an electromagnetic starter to protect circuits NC8 - 06 M /4 /Z /N
from overload.
Combination
Standard: IEC/EN 60947-4-1.
/ N: Reversing
None: Without additional device
2. Operating conditions Coil type

/ Z: DC operation coil
2.1 Certificates: CE, KEMA, UL; None: AC operation coil
2.2 Electric ratings: AC 50/60Hz, up to 690V, up to 500A; Number of main contact

2.3 Application: remotely makes and breaks circuit; Mini type (6A~12A)
/ 4: 4NO; / 22: 2NO+2NC
protect circuit from overload assembling
Normal type (9A~38A)
with proper thermal relay; / 4: 4NO; /22: 2NO+2NC
Normal type (40A~100A)
2.4 Utilization category: AC-1, AC-3, AC-4;
/4: 4NO
2.5 Mounting conditions: inclination between
Contactor type
mounting plane and vertical plane not M: Mini type (6A~12A)
None: Normal type(9A~100A)
exceed ±5°
Nominal rating
2.6 NC8-06（M）~65：IP20
06: 6A; 09: 9A; ... 100: 100A
NC8-80~170：IP10
NC8 series AC contactor
NC8-205~500：IP00(IP20 front face with shrouds SHD)
Accessories
F4 - 20 F5 - T 0
Contacts
Time-delay range
20: 2NO
0: 0.1s~3s
11: 1NO+1NC
02: 2NC 2: 0.1s~30s
40: 4NO 4: 10s~180s
31: 3NO+1NC
22: 2NO+2NC Time-delay type
13: 1NO+3NC T: Making time-delay
04: 4NC D: Breaking time-delay
Auxiliary contact Auxiliary contact
F8 - 20 NCF8 - 11 (for NC8 - 09~100),expect（40～100、DC）

D
Contacts
20: 2NO
11:1NO+1NC
02: 2NC
40: 4NO
31: 3NO+1NC
22: 2NO+2NC
13: 1NO+3NC Contacts
04: 4NC 11: 1NO+1NC
Auxiliary contact Side auxiliary contact
NCF1 - 11C / B SR8 - A / RV 48

Voltage protection scope
48: 24V~48V AC/DC
250: 110V~250V AC/DC (for RV type)
127V~250V AC (for RC type)
None: Normal type : for 115A~170A 440: 380V~440V AC
/B: for 205A~500A
Type of element
Contacts RV: Varistor
11: 1NO+1NC
RC: Resistance + Capacitance
Side auxiliary contact
Matching contactor
A: for mini type
B: for normal 9A～38A
C: for normal 40A～100A，expect DC
NCL8 - A Surge Arrester
A: for NC8-0 9～38

B: for NCB- 40～100，expect DC
C: for NC8-205～500
Mechanical interlocking
Quick selection table
Frame size 9A 12A 18A 25A 32A 38A
3-pole contactors
Auxiliary 1NO+1NC NC8-09 NC8-12 NC8-18 NC8-25 NC8-32 NC8-38

contacts 2NO+2NC NC8-0922 NC8-1222 NC8-1822 NC8-2522 NC8-3222 NC8-3822
Ratings/IEC/EN 60947-4-1 kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A
AC-1 25 25 32 40 55 55
220V/230V/240V 2.2 9 3 12 4 18 5.5 25 7.5 32 9 38
380V/400V 4 9 5.5 12 7.5 18 11 25 15 32 18.5 38

AC-3
415V 4 9 5.5 12 9 18 11 25 15 32 18.5 38
660V/690V 5.5 6.7 7.5 9 9 10.6 15 17.3 18.5 21.9 18.5 21.9
Ratings/UL508 hp A hp A hp A hp A hp A hp A
Continuous current (FLA) 25 25 32 40 50 50
110V/120V 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 2

Single
phase
230V/240V 1 2 3 3 5 5
200V/208V 3 3 5 7.5 10 10
230V/240V 3 3 5 7.5 10 10
Three
phases
460V/480V 5 7.5 10 15 20 20
575V/600V 7.5 10 15 20 25 25
Frame size 40A 50A 65A 80A 100A 115A 150A 170A
3-pole contactors
Auxiliary
1NO+1NC NC8-40 NC8-50 NC8-65 NC8-80 NC8-100 NC8-115 NC8-150 NC8-170
contacts
Ratings/IEC/EN 60947-4-1 kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A
AC-1
220V/230V/240V 11
60
40 15
80
50 18.5
80
65 22
125
80 25
125
100 37
200
115 45
200
150 55
275
170
D
380V/400V 18.5 40 22 50 30 65 37 80 45 100 55 115 75 150 90 170
AC-3
415V 22 40 25 50 37 65 45 80 45 100 59 115 80 150 100 170
660V/690V 30 34 33 39 37 42 45 49 45 49 80 86 100 107 110 118
Ratings/UL508 hp A hp A hp A hp A hp A hp A hp A hp A
Continuous current (FLA) 60 80 80 125 125 200 200 275
110V/120V 3 5 5 7.5 10 10 15 15
Single
phase
230V/240V 5 7.5 10 20 20 25 30 30
200V/208V 10 15 20 30 30 40 50 60
230V/240V 10 15 20 30 30 40 60 60
Three
phases
460V/480V 30 40 50 60 60 100 125 150
575V/600V 30 40 50 60 60 100 125 150

Frame size 205A 265A 300A 400A 500A
3-pole contactors
Auxiliary
2NO+2NC NC8-205 NC8-265 NC8-300 NC8-400 NC8-500
contacts
Ratings/IEC/EN 60947-4-4 kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A
AC-1 300 330 380 450 630
220V/230V/240V 63 205 75 265 90 300 132 400 160 500
380V/400V 110 205 132 265 160 300 200 400 250 500
AC-3
415V 110 205 140 265 160 300 220 400 280 500
660V/690V 132 137 160 185 200 235 300 303 355 354
Ratings/UL508 hp A hp A hp A hp A hp A
Continuous current (FLA) 300 330 380 450 630
110V/120V 15 20 25 30 40
Single
phase
230V/240V 30 40 50 60 75
200V/208V 60 75 100 125 150
230V/240V 75 100 125 150 200

Three
phases
460V/480V 150 200 250 300 400
575V/600V 200 250 300 400 500

4-pole Contactors
Auxiliary 4NO NC8-09/4 NC8-12/4 NC8-18/4 NC8-25/4 NC8-32/4 NC8-38/4

contacts 2NO+2NC NC8-09/22 NC8-12/22 NC8-18/22 NC8-25/22 NC8-32/22 NC8-38/22
AC-1 25 25 32 40 55 55
220V/230V/240V
380V/400V
2.2
4
9
9
3
5.5
12
12
4
7.5
18
18
5.5
11
25
25
7.5
15
32
32
9
18.5
38
38
D
AC-3
415V 4 9 5.5 12 9 18 11 25 15 32 18.5 38
660V/690V 5.5 6.7 7.5 9 9 10.6 15 17.3 18.5 21.9 18.5 21.9
Continuous current (FLA) 25 25 32 40 50 50
110V/120V 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 2

Single
phase
230V/240V 1 2 3 3 5 5
200V/208V 3 3 5 7.5 10 10
230V/240V 3 3 5 7.5 10 10
Three
phases
460V/480V 5 7.5 10 15 20 20
575V/600V 7.5 10 15 20 25 25
4-pole contactors
Auxiliary
4NO NC8-40/4 NC8-50/4 NC8-65/4 NC8-80/4 NC8-100/4
contacts
Ratings/IEC/EN 60947-4-1 kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A
AC-1 60 80 80 125 125
220V/230V/240V 11 40 15 50 18.5 65 22 80 25 100
380V/400V 18.5 40 22 50 30 65 37 80 45 100

AC-3
415V 22 40 25 50 37 65 45 80 45 100
660V/690V 30 34 33 39 37 42 45 49 45 49
Ratings/UL508 hp A hp A hp A hp A hp A
Continuous current (FLA) 60 80 80 125 125
110V/120V 3 5 5 7.5 10
Single
phase
230V/240V 5 7.5 10 20 20
200V/208V 10 15 20 30 30
230V/240V 10 15 20 30 30
Three
phases
460V/480V 30 40 50 60 60
575V/600V 30 40 50 60 60
Contactors
3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole
4NO F4-40
3NO+1NC F4-31
F4
4-pole Front mount 2NO+2NC F4-22
1NO+3NC F4-13
Contacts aux
4NC F4-04
2NO F4-20
F4
1NO+1NC
2NC
F4-11
F4-02 D
2-pole Front mount
Auxiliary contact block 0.1~3 F5-T0

Making time-delay
range (s) 0.1~30 F5-T2
10~180 F5-T4
0.1~3 F5-D0
F5 Breaking time-delay
0.1~30 F5-D2
1N/O+1N/C range (s)
Pneumatic timer 10~180 F5-D4
Contacts aux 1NO+1NC NCF8-11
NCF8
2-pole Side mount
48 24V~48V AC/DC
Voltage
110V~250V AC/DC (for RV type)
protection 250
Surge arrester 127V~250V AC (for RC type)
scope
SR8-B/RC250
440 380V~440V AC
Surge arrester
NR8-38
Rated current (A)
0.10-0.14 0.9-1.25 7.5-10

0.14-0.2 1.1-1.6 9-13
0.18-0.25 1.4-2 12-16
Overload relays 0.22-0.32 1.8-2.5 14-20
0.28-0.4 2.2-3.2 18-24
NR8-38 0.35-0.5 2.8-4 23-32
Bimetallic style 0.45-0.63 3.5-5 30-38
Overload relay 0.55-0.8 4.5-6.3
0.7-1 5.5-8
Contactors
3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole
4NO F4-40
3NO+1NC F4-31
F4
1NO+3NC F4-13
Contacts aux
4NC F4-04
2NO F4-20
1NO+1NC F4-11
2NC F4-02
F4
2-pole Front mount
Auxiliary contact block

0.1~3 F5-T0
Making time-delay
range (s) 0.1~30 F5-T2
10~180 F5-T4
0.1~3 F5-D0
0.1~30 F5-D2
1N/O+1N/C range (s)
Contacts aux 1NO+1NC NCF8-11
NCF8
2-pole Side mount
48 24V~48V AC/DC
Voltage
110V~250V AC/DC (for RV type)
protection 250
Surge arrester 127V~250V AC (for RC type)
scope
SR8-C/RC440
440 380V~440V AC
Surge arrester
Contactors
3-pole 3-pole 3-pole
4NO F4-40
3NO+1NC F4-31
F4
1NO+3NC F4-13
Contacts aux
4NC F4-04
2NO F4-20
F4
1NO+1NC
2NC
F4-11
F4-02 D
2-pole Front mount
0.1~3 F5-T0
Making time-delay
Auxiliary contact block range (s) 0.1~30 F5-T2
10~180 F5-T4
0.1~3 F5-D0
0.1~30 F5-D2
1N/O+1N/C range (s)
1NO+1NC NCF1-11C 1NO+1NC NCF1-11C/B
NCF1 NCF1
2-pole Side 2-pole Side
mount mount
Surge arrester /
Contactors
3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole 3-pole
NR2-93 NR2-200
Rated current (A) Rated current (A)
23～32 100～160
30～40 125～200
37～50
48～65
55～70
63～80
80～93
NR2-93 NRE8-100
Bimetallic style
Overload relays
Overload relay
Rated current (A)
65
100
NRE8-100
Electronic style
Overload relay
Contactors
3-pole 3-pole
NR2-630
Rated current (A)
Overload relays 160~250

200~315
250~400
315~500
NR2-630 400~630
Bimetallic style
Overload relay
AC coil DC coil
Contactors
Auxiliary 1NO NC8-06M10 NC8-09M10 NC8-12M10 NC8-06M10/Z NC8-09M10/Z NC8-12M10/Z

3-pole
contacts 1NC NC8-06M01 NC8-09M01 NC8-12M01 NC8-06M01/Z NC8-09M01/Z NC8-12M01/Z
Main 4NO NC8-06M/4 NC8-09M/4 NC8-12M/4 NC8-06M/4/Z NC8-09M/4/Z NC8-12M/4/Z

4-pole
contacts 2NO+2NC NC8-06M/22 NC8-09M/22 NC8-12M/22 NC8-06M/22/Z NC8-09M/22/Z NC8-12M/22/Z
D
AC-1 20 20 20 20 20 20
220V/230V/240V 1.5 6 2.2 9 3 12 1.5 6 2.2 9 3 12
380V/400V 2.2 6 4 9 5.5 12 2.2 6 4 9 5.5 12

AC-3
415V 2.2 6 4 9 5.5 12 2.2 6 4 9 5.5 12
660V/690V 3 3.8 4 4.9 4 4.9 3 3.8 4 4.9 4 4.9
Continuous current 20 20 20 20 20 20
Single 110V/120V 0.3 0.5 0.75 0.3 0.5 0.75

phase
230V/240V 0.75 1.5 2 0.75 1.5 2
200V/208V 1.5 3 3 1.5 3 3
230V/240V 1.5 3 3 1.5 3 3
Three
phases 460V/480V 3 5 7.5 3 5 7.5
575V/600V 3 5 10 3 5 10
Contactors AC coil DC coil
4NO F8-40
3NO+1NC F8-31
2NO+2NC F8-22
Auxiliary 1NO+3NC F8-13
contacts
contact
number 4NC F8-04
block
F8 2NO F8-20
Front mount 1NO+1NC F8-11
2NC F8-02
48 24V~48V AC/DC
Voltage
Surge arrester protection 250 110V~250V AC/DC
scope
SR8-A 440 380V~440V AC

Surge arrester
NR8-11.5
Rated current (A)
0.1~0.16 1.6~2.5
Overload relays 0.16~0.25 2.5~4
0.25~0.4 4~6
0.4~0.63 5.5~8
NR8-11.5 0.63~1 7~10
Bimetallic style 1~1.6 9~13
Overload relay
4. Technical data
4.1 Working environment and technical index
Overvoltage category Ⅲ
Pollution degree 3
Certificate CE, UL, KEMA
Protection degree IP20(NC8-06M~65) IP10(NC8-80~170) IP00(NC8-205~500)
-5℃~+40℃, the average temperature during 24 hours should not exceed +35℃.
Ambient air being working
More information refer to table 1
temperature
transportation or storage -25℃~+55℃, or up to +70℃ for a short time (in 24 hours)
Altitude(m) no exceeding 2000m, more information refer to table 2
At mounting side, relative humidity no exceeding 50%,

Atmosphere conditions at the max temperature of +40℃. Higher relative humidity is allowable under lower temperature.
For example, RH could be +20℃, special measure should be taken to occurrence of dews.
Installation conditions the inclination between installation plane and vertical plane is within ±5°
Impact and shake the product should be used in the places where there are no obvious impact and shake
environment temperature(℃) 40 50 60 70
Table 1
D
correction coefficient 1 0.875 0.75 0.625
Table 2
Altitude(m) 2000 3000 4000
Rated impulse withstand voltage

1 0.88 0.78
Correction coefficient
Rated operational current

1 0.92 0.9
Correction coefficient
4.2 Main circuit parameter and technic capability
Mini type Normal type

Rated conventional heating current(A) 20 20 20 25 25 32
Rated insulation voltage(V) 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage(kV) 6
Rated making capability making current: 10×Ie(AC-3) or 12×Ie(AC-4)
Rated breaking capability making-breaking current: 8×Ie(AC-3) or 10×Ie(AC-4)
Short-time withstand current(A) 10s 48 72 96 72 96 144
AC-3
220V/230V/240V 6 9 12 9 12 18
AC-4
AC-3 12
380V/400V 6 9 9 12 18
Rated AC-4 9
operational 12
AC-3
current (A) 415V 6 9 9 12 18
AC-4 9
AC-3 3.8 4.9 4.9 6.7 9 10.6
660V/690V
AC-4 3.8 4.9 4.9 6.7 9 10.6
220V/230V/240V 1.5 2.2 3 2.2 3 4
AC-3(kW) 380V/400V 2.2 4 5.5 4 5.5 7.5

415V 2.2 4 5.5 4 5.5 9
Rated 660V/690V 3 4 4 5.5 7.5 9

control 110V/120V 0.3 0.5 0.75 0.5 0.75 1
power 1PH(HP)
230V/240V 0.75 1.5 2 1 2 3
200V/208V 1.5 3 3 3 3 5
230V/240V 1.5 3 3 3 3 5
3PH(HP)
460V/480V 3 5 7.5 5 7.5 10
575V/600V 3 5 10 7.5 10 15
AC-3 1,200 operations/h

Operating frequency(415V)
AC-4 300 operations/h
AC-3 1,200,000 Operations
Electrical life(415V)
AC-4 to see Electrical life curves, page 32
Mechanical life 8,000,000 Operations

Configuration of main contacts 3-pole:3NO; 4-pole:4NO or 2NO+2NC
Matched fuse type RT16-20 RT16-20 RT16-20 RT16-20 RT16-25 RT16-32
Modle NR8-11.5 NR8-38
Matched thermal 0.1~0.16 0.63~1 2.5~4 9~13 0.10-0.14 0.28-0.4 0.7-1 1.8-2.5 4.5-6.3 12-16 30-38
over-load relay current 0.16~0.25 1~1.6 4~6 0.14-0.2 0.35-0.5 0.9-1.25 2.2-3.2 5.5-8 14-20
range 0.25~0.4 1.6~2.5 5.5~8 0.18-0.25 0.45-0.63 1.1-1.6 2.8-4 7.5-10 18-24
0.4~0.63 7~10 0.22-0.32 0.55-0.8 1.4-2 3.5-5 9-13 23-32
D-19 >> Empower the World

25A 32A 38A 40A 50A 65A 80A 100A 115A 150A 170A
Normal type
40 55 55 60 80 80 125 125 200 200 275
690
6 8
making current:10×Ie(AC-3) or 12×Ie(AC-4)
making-breaking current:8×Ie(AC-3) or 10×Ie(AC-4)
200 256 304 320 400 520 640 800 920 1200 1360
25 32 38 40 50 65 80 100 115 150 170
38 170
25 32 40 50 65 80 100 115 150
32 150
38 170
25 32 40 50 65 80 100 115 150
32 150
17.3 21.9 21.9 34 39 42 49 49 118
86 107
14 17.3 17.3 34 39 42 49 49 107
5.5 7.5 9 11 15 18.5 22 25 37 45 55

11 15 18.5 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
11
15
1.5
15
18.5
2
18.5
18.5
2
22
30
3
25
33
5
37
37
5
45
45
7.5
45
45
10
59
80
10
80
100
15
100
110
15
D
3 5 5 5 7.5 10 20 20 25 30 30
7.5 10 10 10 15 20 30 30 40 50 60
7.5 10 10 10 15 20 30 30 40 60 60
15 20 20 30 40 50 60 60 100 125 150
20 25 25 30 40 50 60 60 100 125 150
1,200 operations/h
300 operations/h 120 operations/h
1,200,000 Operations 800,000 Operations 600,000 Operations
to see Electrical life curves, page 32

10,000,000 Operations 6,000,000 Operations
3-pole: 3NO; 4-pole: 4NO 3-pole: 3NO
RT16-50 RT16-63 RT16-63 RT16-63 RT16-80 RT16-80 RT16-100 RT16-125 NT2-224 NT2-224 NT3-315
NR8-38 NR2-93 NR8-100 NRE8-100 NR2-200 NR8-200
0.10-0.14 0.45-0.63 1.8-2.5 7.5-10 30-38
0.14-0.2 0.55-0.8 2.2-3.2 9-13
0.18-0.25 0.7-1 2.8-4 12-16 23~32
0.22-0.32 0.9-1.25 3.5-5 14-20 30~40 55~70
0.28-0.4 1.1-1.6 4.5-6.3 18-24 37~50 63~80 30-65 100~160 80~160
0.35-0.5 1.4-2 5.5-8 23-32 48~65 80~100 50-100 125~200 100~200
Empower the World >> D-20

205A 265A 300A 400A 500A

Frame size
Normal type
Rated conventional heating current(A) 300 330 380 450 630
Rated impulse withstand voltage(kV) 8
Rated making capability making current: 10×Ie(AC-3) or 12×Ie(AC-4)
Rated breaking capability making-breaking current: 8×Ie(AC-3) or 10×Ie(AC-4)
Short-time withstand current(A) 10s 1640 2120 2400 3200 4000
AC-3 205 265 300 400 500
220V/230V/240V
AC-4 205 265 300 400 500
Rated AC-3 205 265 300 400 500

380V/400V
operational AC-4 205 265 300 400 500
current (A)
AC-3 205 265 300 400 500
415V
AC-4 205 265 300 400 500
AC-3 137 185 235 303 354
660V/690V
AC-4 137 185 235 303 354
220V/230V/240V 63 75 90 132 160

380V/400V 110 132 160 200 250
AC-3(kW)
415V 110 140 160 220 280
660V/690V 132 160 200 300 355
Rated 110V/120V 15 20 25 30 40
control 1PH(HP)
power 230V/240V 30 40 50 60 75
200V/208V 60 75 100 125 150
230V/240V 75 100 125 150 200
3PH(HP)
460V/480V 150 200 250 300 400
575V/600V 200 250 300 400 500
AC-3 600 operations/h 300 operations/h

Operating frequency(415V) AC-4 30 operations/h
AC-3 1,000,000 Operations 800,000 Operations
Electrical life(415V)
AC-4 to see Electrical life curves, page 32
Mechanical life 6,000,000 Operations
Configuration of main contacts 3-pole:3NO
Matched fuse type RT16(36)-315 RT16(36)-400 RT16(36)-425 RT16(36)-500 RT16(36)-800
Modle NR2-630
160~250
Matched thermal
current 200~315
over-load relay
range 250~400
315~500
400~630
4.3 The connection capability of main control circuit
Connection frame size 6A 9A 12A 9A 12A 18A 25A 32A 38A 40A 50A 65A 80A 100A
circuit Mini type Normal type
single
flexible cable 1~2.5 1~4 1.5~6 2.5~10 10~25 16~50
cable
(with cold
-press
cable duad
terminal) 1~1.5 1~2.5 1~4 2.5~6 4~16 10~35
conne cable
-ction
Main (mm2) single
1~2.5 1~4 1.5~4 2.5~10 - -
circuit cable
stiff
connection
cable
duad - -
1~2.5 1~4 1.5~4 2.5~10
cable
screw size M3 M3.5 M4 M8
(N.m) 0.8 1.2 2 6

tightening torque
(lb.in.) 7 7 10 45
single
flexible cable 1~2.5 1~4
cable
D
(with cold
-press duad
cable terminal) 1~1.5 1~2.5
conne cable
-ction
Control (mm2) single
1~2.5 1~4
circuit cable
stiff
connection
cable duad
1~2.5 1~4
cable
screw size M3 M3.5
(N.m) 0.8 1.2

tightening torque
(lb.in.) 7 7
Connection 115A 150A 170A 205A 265A 300A 400A 500A

frame size
circuit Normal type
single
flexible cable 10~95
cable
(with cold -
cable -press
duad -
conne terminal) 10~50
cable
-ction
(mm2) single
Main 10~95 50~240
circuit cable
stiff
connection cable
duad
10~50 50~240
cable
screw size M10 M10
(N.m) 10 14
tightening torque
(lb.in.) 124
single
flexible cable 1~4
(with cold cable
-press
duad
cable terminal) 1~2.5
conne cable
-ction
single
Control (mm2) 1~4
cable
circuit stiff
connection cable duad
1~4
cable
screw size M3.5
(N.m) 1.2
tightening torque
(lb.in.) 7
4.4 The characteristic of AC control circuit
Connection 6A 9A 12A 9A 12A 18A 25A 32A 38A 40A 50A 65A 80A 100A
Frame size
circuit Mini type Normal type
50Hz
AC 50Hz/60Hz 24, 36, 48, 110, 127, 220, 230, 240, 380, 400, 415
Coil voltage(V)
60Hz
DC 24, 48, 110, 125, 220, 250

attraction(hot) (85%~110%)Us; +40℃
Acting range
release(cold) AC: (20%~75%)Us, DC: (10%~75%)Us; -5℃
Pick-up VA 40 70 210 250

50Hz Hold VA 7 9.5 15 25 30
(3P)
Thermal loss(W) 1~4 2~4 4~7 5~8
Coil
Pick-up VA 40 85 90 260 270
power 50Hz/60Hz
(50Hz) (3P） Hold VA 7 9.5 16 28 30
50Hz/60Hz Pick-up VA 40 100 100 280 280
(4P)
Hold VA 7 15 17 30 36.6
Heat wastage(W) AC 1~4 2~4 4~7 5~8
Main contact close 10~18 12~25 15~25 15~30

action time(ms) disconnection 4~16 5~20 6~15 8~17
Connection 115A 150A 170A 205A 265A 300A 400A 500A

Frame size
circuit Normal type Normal type
AC AC/DC
AC/DC
Coil voltage(V) 110~127, 220~240, 380~415
DC 110~127, 220~240, 380~415
/W: 100~250
Coil 50Hz/60Hz Pick-up VA 700 600 800
power (3P0）
Hold VA 5 11 12
(50Hz)
AC 7~12
Heat wastage(W) 2~4 5~10
DC 6~11
Main contact close 15~30 30~95 45~100

action time(ms) disconnection 40~50 40~80 60~100
4.5 Main technical data of accessories
matched contactor model of accessories F4-20 F4-11 F4-02 F4-40 F4-31 F4-22 F4-13 F4-04
F4,
front N/O 2 1 0 4 3 2 1 0
mount NC8-09~500 contacts
N/C 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4
F8, matched contactor model of accessories F8-20 F8-11 F8-02 F8-40 F8-31 F8-22 F8-13 F8-04
front
N/O 2 1 0 4 3 2 1 0
mount NC8-06M~12M contacts
N/C 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4
matched contactor model of accessories NCF8-11
NCF8,
side N/O 1
mount NC8-09~100 contacts
N/C 1
matched contactor model of accessories NCF1-11C or NCF1-11C/B
NCF1,
side N/O 1
NC8-115~500 contacts
mount N/C 1
matched contactor model of accessories F5-T0 F5-T2 F5-T4 F5-D0 F5-D2 F5-D4
F5, N/O 1 1 1 1 1 1
Pneumatic contacts
NC8-09~500 N/C 1 1 1 1 1 1
timer
time-delay range(s) 0.1~3 0.1~30 10~180 0.1~3 0.1~30 10~180
D
NC8-06M~12M SR8-A
SR8,
surge NC8-09~38 SR8-B
arrester
NC8-40~100 SR8-C
Rated operational voltage(V) up to 690
Rated conventional current(A) 10
Rated making capability making current 10×Ie(AC-15) or 1×Ie(DC-13)
Short-circuit protection gG fuse: 10A
AC-15 360VA
Control capacity
AC-13 69W
Certificate CE, UL, KEMA
single
1~4
flexible cable (without cable
cold-press terminal)
duad
1~4
cable
Cable single
1~4
connection flexible cable (with cable
(mm2) cold-press terminal)
duad
1~2.5
cable
single
1~4
cable
inflexible cable
duad
1~4
cable
screw size M3.5

(N.m) 1.2
tightening torque
(lb.in.) 7
Note: The requirement to the environment of accesseries is same with that of the contactors'.
You can order the product that you need or recognize your existing product
according to the above-mentioned number and the letter of alphabet code.
5. Derived products
5.1 3-pole Reversing contactor
Aux. contacts
Frame size
1NO+1NC 2NO+2NC
D=87 H=92
9A NC8-09/N NC8-0922/N
12A NC8-12/N NC8-1222/N
W=100 18A NC8-18/N NC8-1822/N
Aux. contacts
Frame size
1NO+1NC 2NO+2NC
D=106 H=102
25A NC8-25/N NC8-25922/N
32A NC8-32/N NC8-3222/N
W=100 38A NC8-38/N NC8-3822/N
Aux. contacts
Frame size
1NO+1NC
D=139 H=157.5
40A NC8-40/N
50A NC8-50/N
W=187.6 65A NC8-65/N
Aux. contacts
Frame size
1NO+1NC
D=152 H=165
80A NC8-80/N
100A NC8-100/N
W=217.6
Aux. contacts
Frame size
2NO+2NC
D=156 H=155
115A NC8-115/N
150A NC8-150/N
W=255 170A NC8-170/N
Aux. contacts
Frame size
4NO+4NC
D=220 H=215
205A NC8-205/N
265A NC8-265/N
W=400 300A NC8-300/N
Aux. contacts
Frame size
4NO+4NC
D=238 H=220
400A NC8-400/N
500A NC8-500/N
W=480
5.2 4-pole Reversing contactor
Aux. contacts
Frame size
4NO
D=82 H=92 9A NC8-09/4/N
12A NC8-12/4/N
18A NC8-18/4/N
W=100
Aux. contacts
Frame size
4NO
25A NC8-25/4/N
D
D=90 H=102
32A NC8-32/4/N
38A NC8-38/4/N
W=122
Aux. contacts
Frame size
4NO
40A NC8-40/4/N
D=139 H=157.5 50A NC8-50/4/N
65A NC8-65/4/N
W=187.6
Aux. contacts
Frame size
4NO
D=152 H=165 80A NC8-80/4/N
100A NC8-100/4/N
W=217.6
5.3 Mini type Reversing contactors/AC coil
3-pole
Aux. contacts
D=58 H=64 Frame size
1NO 1NC
6A NC8-06M10/N NC8-06M01/N
W=91 9A NC8-09M10/N NC8-09M01/N
12A NC8-12M10/N NC8-12M01/N
4-pole
Main contacts
Frame size
4NO
D=58 H=64 6A NC8-06M/4/N
9A NC8-09M/4/N
12A NC8-12M/4/N
W=91
5.4 Mini type Reversing contactors/DC coil
3-pole
Aux. contacts
Frame size
1NO 1NC
D=70 H=64
6A NC8-06M10/Z/N NC8-06M01/Z/N
9A NC8-09M10/Z/N NC8-09M01/Z/N
W=91 12A NC8-12M10/Z/N NC8-12M01/Z/N
4-pole
Main contacts
Frame size
4NO
D=70 H=64 6A NC8-06M/4/Z/N
9A NC8-09M/4/Z/N
12A NC8-12M/4/Z/N
W=91
5.5 Magnetic starter
Mini type frame size from 6A to 12A
Normal type frame size from 40A to 170A D
5.6 Star-delta starter

Model Amax Bmax Cmax Dmax a b Φ

NC8-06M~12M 45 59 58 94 35±0.28 50±0.32 4.2
NC8-06M/4~12M/4 45 59 58 94 35±0.28 50±0.32 4.2
NC8-06M/Z~12M/Z 45 59 70 106 35±0.28 50±0.32 4.2
NC8-06M/4/Z~12M/4/Z 45 59 70 106 35±0.28 50±0.32 4.2
NC8-06M~12M
NC8-06M/4~12M/4
D(F8) a
C Φ
b
B
NC8-06M/Z~12M/Z
NC8-06M/4/Z~12M/4/Z
A
Model Amax Bmax Cmax Dmax Emax a b Φ

NC8-09~18 45 87 87 120 142 35±0.28 55~63 4.4
NC8-09/Z~18/Z 45 87 123 156 178 35±0.28 55~63 4.4
NC8-25~38 45 97 106 139 160 35±0.28 60~70 4.4
NC8-25/Z~38/Z 45 97 141 174 195 35±0.28 60~70 4.4
D(F4)/E(F5)
NC8-09~18 C a
B
b
Φ
A
NC8-25~38
NC8-09/4~18/4 45 87 82 115 136 35±0.28 55~63 4.4
NC8-09/4/Z~18/4/Z 45 87 118 151 172 35±0.28 55~63 4.4
NC8-25/4~38/4 57 97 90 122.5 144 35±0.28 60~70 4.4
NC8-25/4/Z~38/4/Z 57 97 125 158 180 35±0.28 60~70 4.4
D(F4)/E(F5)
C a
NC8-09/4~18/4
B
b
Φ
A
NC8-25/4~38/4

NC8-40~65 77 122.5 118 150 172 64±0.37 100~110 6.0
NC8-40/Z~65/Z 77 142 179 212 233 40 105 6.5
NC8-80~100 87 130 127 159 180 74±0.37 105~116 5.5
NC8-80/Z~100/Z 87 147 184 217 238 40 105 6.5
D(F4)/E(F5)
C a
Φ
NC8-40~65
b
B
A
NC8-115~170 120 156 155 190.5 210.5 96~110 130±0.8 7.0
NC8-80~100 Φ
D
Bmax
b
Cmax a
Dmax(F4)/Emax(F5) Amax
NC8-115~170
NC8-205~300 150 235 207 239 260 120 180 9.0

NC8-400~500 165 248 225 258 280 130 180 9.0
Fmax(F5) Dmax(NCF1X2)
Emax(F4) Amax
Cmax a
Bmax
b
NC8-205~500
NC8-40/4~65/4 84 122.5 118 150 172 71±0.37 100~110.5 6.0

NC8-40/4/Z~65/4/Z 84 142 179 212 233 40 105 6.5
NC8-80/4~100/4 99 130 127 158 180 86±0.5 105~118.5 5.5
NC8-80/4/Z~100/4/Z 99 147 184 217 238 40 105 6.5
NC8-40/4~65/4
D(F4)/E(F5) a
C Φ
B
NC8-80/4~100/4
A
7. Excursus
7.1 Electric life Curves
Electric life curves (AC-3 Ue=400V)
NC8-32, 38
NC8-06M
NC8-09M
NC8-12M
NC8-100
NC8-150
NC8-115
NC8-170
NC8-205
NC8-265
NC8-300
NC8-400
NC8-500
NC8-50
NC8-09
NC8-12
NC8-18
NC8-25
NC8-65
NC8-80
NC8-40
Electric life
X106
10
8
1.5
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 910 12 18 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 115150 170 205 265 300 400 500
0.75
110
132
160
18.5
200
250
1.5
2.2
5.5
7.5
45
22
30
37
55
90
75
11
15
4
400V
Rated current Ie(A)
Rated outputs of three-phase motors (50Hz AC-3)

Electric life curves (AC-2, AC-4 Ue=400V)
NC8-32, 38
NC8-06M
NC8-09M
NC8-12M
NC8-100
NC8-115
NC8-150
NC8-170
NC8-205
NC8-265
NC8-300
NC8-400
NC8-500
Electric life
NC8-50
NC8-18
NC8-25
NC8-65
NC8-80
NC8-12
NC8-09
NC8-40
X106
1.0
0.5
D
0.2
0.1
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.01
0 5 10 20 36 54 72 108 150 192 240 300 390 480 600 680 900 1020 1230 1590 1800 2400 3000
Breaking current Ic(A)
Example:
Request to control the start of three-phase motors
main technical parameter of three-phase motors: P=11kW, Ue=380V, Ie=22.6A
usage category: AC-3, The electric life span of request: 1,000,000 operations
the contactor should be NC8-25 according to the curves above
7.2 The application in illumination circuit
Model of contactor 06M, 09M, 12M 09, 12 18 25 32, 38 40 50, 65 80, 100
lamp technical data

(220V/240V) maximum permissible number of lamps per phase
W A μF
Incandescent lamp
60 0.27 - 35 59 77 92 129 163 207 296

75 0.34 - 28 47 61 73 103 129 164 235
100 0.45 - 21 35 46 55 77 97 124 177
150 0.68 - 14 23 30 36 51 64 82 117
200 0.91 - 10 17 23 27 38 48 62 88
300 1.40 - 6 11 15 18 25 31 40 57
500 2.30 - 4 7 8 11 15 19 24 34
750 3.40 - 2 4 6 7 10 13 16 23
1000 4.60 - 2 3 4 5 7 9 12 17
Single fluorescent lamp ( with starter, without compensation)
20 0.39 - 24 41 53 66 89 112 143 205
40 0.45 - 21 35 46 57 77 97 124 177
65 0.70 - 12 22 30 37 50 62 80 114
80 0.80 - 12 20 26 32 43 55 70 100
110 1.15 - 8 12 15 20 26 35 46 66
Single fluorescent lamp ( with starter, with parallel compensation)
20 0.18 5 83 94 105 155 215 233 335 530
40 0.26 5 58 65 75 107 150 160 230 365
65 0.42 7 35 40 45 66 92 100 142 225
80 0.52 7 28 32 36 53 74 80 115 180
100 0.60 16 23 26 29 43 59 64 92 145
110 0.70 18 21 24 27 40 55 59 85 135
Fluorescent lamps in dual mounting (with starter, without compensation)
2×20 -2×0.22 - 21 36 46 58 78 100 126 180
2×40 -2×0.41 - 11 18 24 30 42 52 68 96
2×65 -2×0.67 - 7 10 14 18 26 32 40 58
2×80 -2×0.82 - 5 8 12 14 20 26 34 48
2×110 -2×1.10 - 4 6 8 10 14 18 24 36
...... to be continued
lamp technical data

W A μF
Fluorescent lamps in dual mounting (with starter, with compensation in series)
2×20 2×0.13 - 36 60 80 100 134 168 214 306
2×40 2×0.24 - 20 32 42 54 72 90 116 166
2×65 2×0.39 - 12 20 26 32 44 56 70 102
2×80 2×0.48 - 10 16 20 26 36 44 58 82
2×110 2×0.65 - 7 12 16 20 26 32 42 60
Single fluorescent lamp (without starter, without compensation)
20 0.43 - 22 37 48 60 97 102 130 186
40 0.55 - 17 29 38 47 63 80 101 145
65 0.80 - 12 20 26 32 43 55 70 100
80 0.95 - 10 16 22 27 36 46 58 84
110 0.40 - 6 11 15 18 25 31 40 57
Single fluorescent lamp (with starter, with parallel compensation)
20
40
0.19
0.29
5
5
50
33
84
55
110
72
136
89
184
101
231
151
294
193
421
275
D
65 0.46 7 20 34 45 56 76 95 121 173
80 0.57 7 16 28 36 45 61 77 98 140
110 0.79 16 - 20 26 32 44 55 70 101
Fluorescent lamps (without starter, without compensation)
2×20 2×0.25 - 19 32 42 52 70 88 112 160
2×40 2×0.47 - 10 16 22 26 36 46 158 84
2×65 2×0.76 - 6 10 12 16 22 28 36 52
2×80 2×0.93 - 5 8 10 12 18 22 30 42
2×110 2×1.30 - 3 6 8 10 12 16 20 30
Fluorescent lamps in dual mounting (without starter, with compensation in series)
2×20 2×0.15 - 34 56 74 92 124 156 200 234
2×40 2×0.26 - 18 30 40 50 66 84 106 152
2×65 2×0.43 - 11 18 24 30 40 50 64 92
2×80 2×0.53 - 9 14 18 24 32 40 32 74
2×110 2×0.72 - 6 10 14 18 24 30 38 54
Low press sodium vapour lamps (with parallel compensation)
35 0.3 17 - 40 50 63 86 110 140 200
55 0.4 17 - 30 37 47 65 82 105 150
90 0.6 25 - - 25 31 43 55 70 100
135 0.9 36 - - - 21 28 36 46 66
150 1.0 36 - - - 19 26 33 42 60
180 1.2 36 - - - 15 21 27 35 50
200 1.3 36 - - - 14 20 25 32 46
lamp technical data
W A μF
High press sodium vapour lamps (without compensation)
150 1.9 - 4 6 7 10 13 17 22 31
250 3.2 - 2 3 4 5 8 10 13 18
400 5.0 - 1 2 3 3 5 6 8 12
700 8.8 - - - 2 2 2 3 4 6
1000 12.4 - - - 1 1 2 2 3 4
High press sodium vapour lamps (with parallel compensation)
150 0.84 20 - - 17 22 30 39 50 71
250 1.4 32 - - - 13 18 23 30 42
400 2.2 48 - - - 8 11 15 19 27
700 3.6 96 - - - - 6 8 10 15
1000 5.5 120 - - - - - 6 7 10
High press hydrargyrum lamps (without compensation)
50 0.54 - 14 22 27 35 48 64 77 111
80 0.81 - 9 14 18 23 32 40 51 74
125 1.20 - 6 9 12 15 21 27 34 49
250 2.30 - 3 5 6 8 11 14 17 26
400 4.10 - 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 14
700 6.80 - - 1 2 2 3 4 6 8
1000 9.90 - - 1 1 1 2 3 4 6
High press hydrargyrum lamps (with parallel compensation)
50 0.30 10 - 40 50 63 86 110 140 120

80 0.45 10 - 26 33 42 57 73 93 133
125 0.67 10 - 17 22 28 38 49 62 89
250 1.3 18 - 9 11 14 20 25 32 46
400 2.3 25 - - 6 8 11 14 18 26
700 3.8 40 - - - 5 6 8 11 15
1000 5.5 60 - - - 3 4 8 7 10
8.1 The following items should be illustrated when ordering:
8.1.1 The full name and model of contactor;
8.1.2 Rated operational voltage and frequency of coil;
8.1.3 Ordering total pcs;
8.2 Ordering example:NC8-1822 AC contactor,coil voltage 220V,50Hz 10 pcs;
2.1 Ambient air temperature:-5℃~+40℃,

its mean value not greater than +35℃
within 24 hours.
Ambient temperature
2.2 Atmospheric conditions:

When the maximum temperature is +40℃,
the relative humidity of the air shall not be
higher than 50%; a higher relative humidity
2000m
is allowed at a lower temperature, e.g.,
up to 90% at 20℃. Special measures shall Altitude
be taken for the condensation occasionally

produced due to temperature change.
2.3 Altitude: not higher than 2000m.
2.4 Pollution grade: 3
D
No Pollution
2.5 Installation classification: Ⅲ
2.6 Installation condition:

NC7 Series AC Contactor the installing surface shall be inclined
at not greater than ±5°to the vertical.
09~620A
2.7 Impact vibration:
1. General The product shall be installed in the place
free of remarkable shake, impact and vibration.
The NC7 series AC contactor (hereinafter referred to as
“contactor”) is mainly used in the circuit with an alternating 2.8 NC7-09~170：IP10
current of 50Hz (or 60Hz), rated operational voltage up to
NC7-205~620：IP00(IP20 front face with shrouds SHD)
690V, and rated operational current up to 620A under the
usage category of AC-3/400V; this contactor is mainly used for
remotely closing and breaking circuits, and can be combined
with an appropriate thermal overload relay to form a
electromagnetic starter so as to protect the circuits likely
to be overloaded in operation; the contactor is well suited for
frequently starting and controlling AC motors.
Standard: IEC60947-4-1
3. Type and meaning

3.1 Product type and meaning
NC7 - 09 01 /N
Main circuit current Number of auxiliary contacts An interlock product
09 9A 9A~95A 11 1NO+1NC /N Reversible product

AC Contactor 9A~95A
12 12A 115A~170A ... ... omitted Single unit of the product
... ... 205A~620A omitted 4NO+4NC /N Reversible product
115A~170A
475 475A omitted Single unit of the product
620 620A Reversible product

/Nc
vertical installation
205A~620A
Reversible product
/Ns
horizontal installation
omitted Single unit of the product
3.2 Accessory type and meaning
AX-3 / 20 F5 - T 0
Number of auxiliary contacts Time-delay type Time-delay range

Top Air
suspension 20 2NO T Making time-delay 0 0.1s~3s
time-delay
auxiliary 11 1NO+1NC head 2 0.1s~30s
D Breaking time-delay
contactor 4 10s~180s
02 2NC
block
40 4NO
31 3NO+1NC
22 2NO+2NC
13 1NO+3NC
04 4NC
NCF1 - 11C NJL S-GG
Number of auxiliary contacts Installation mode Size code

Side Mechanical
suspension GG NC7-205 Combination of two units
interlock
auxiliary 11C 1NO+1NC module HH NC7-250~300 Combination of two arbitrary units
contactor Horizontal
s KK NC7-410~475 Combination of two arbitrary units
block installation
LL NC7-620 Combination of two units
GG NC7-205 Combination of two units
GH NC7-205 and NC7-250~300
GK NC7-205 and NC7-410~475
GL NC7-205 and NC7-620
Note: For the NC7 product, the 9A-95A mechanical interlock HH NC7-250~300 Combination of two arbitrary units
Vertical
module can be directly purchased with an indication. c HK NC7-250~300 and NC7-410~475
installation
HL NC7-250~300 and NC7-620
KK NC7-410~475 Combination of two arbitrary units
KL NC7-410~475 and NC7-620
LL NC7-620 Combination of two units
4. Quick selection table
Specified current 9A 12A 18A 22A 25A 32A 38A
Number of
the auxiliary 1 NO+1NC
NC7-0911 NC7-1211 NC7-1811 NC7-2211 NC7-2511 NC7-3211 NC7-3811
contacts provided auxiliary contact
with the body itself
IEC/EN 60974-4-1 kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A
D
Appointed free air heat
20 20 32 32 40 50 50
generation current (A)
380V/400V(AC-3) 4 9 5.5 12 7.5 18 11 22 11 25 15 32 18.5 38

Rated
operational 380V/400V(AC-4) 1.5 3.5 2.2 5 3 7.7 3 7.7 4 8.5 5.5 12 5.5 12
current 660V/690V(AC-3) 5.5 6.6 7.5 8.9 10 12 11 14 15 18 18.5 22 18.5 22
and power
660V/690V(AC-4) 1.1 1.5 1.5 2 3.7 3.8 3.7 3.8 4 4.4 5.5 7.5 5.5 7.5
Accessories which can be further attached
Side suspension Top suspension

auxiliary contact Air delay head Mechanical interlock module
auxiliary contact
Surge suppressor Thermal overload relay Electronic overload relay

Specified current 40A 50A 65A 80A 95A
Number of
the auxiliary 1NO+1NC
NC7-4011 NC7-5011 NC7-6511 NC7-8011 NC7-9511
contacts provided auxiliary contact
IEC/EN 60974-4-1 kW A kW A kW A kW A kW A
Appointed free air heat generation current (A) 60 80 80 110 110
380V/400V(AC-3) 18.5 40 22 50 30 65 37 80 45 95
Rated
operational 380V/400V(AC-4) 7.5 18.5 11 24 15 28 18.5 37 22 44
current 660V/690V(AC-3) 30 34 37 39 37 42 45 49 45 49
and power
660V/690V(AC-4) 7.5 9 11 12 11 14 15 17.3 18.5 21.3
Side suspension Top suspension

auxiliary contact
Surge suppressor Thermal overload relay Electronic overload relay

Specified current 115A 150A 170A
Number of
the auxiliary
NC7-115 NC7-150 NC7-170
contacts provided
IEC/EN 60974-4-1 kW A kW A kW A

380V/400V(AC-3) 55
200
115 75
200
150 90
275
170
D
Rated
operational 380V/400V(AC-4) 55 115 75 150 90 150
current 660V/690V(AC-3) 80 86 100 107 110 118
and power
660V/690V(AC-4) 80 86 100 107 110 107
Top suspension Side suspension

auxiliary contact Air delay head
auxiliary contact
Thermal overload relay Electronic overload relay Mechanical interlock module

mount two
without auxiliary
AX-3/22
contacts, can mount NC7-205 NC7-250 NC7-300
two Top suspension 4NO+4NC
auxiliary contacts
Other mode Note Note Note

275 315 380
380V/400V(AC-3) 110 205 132 250 160 300

Rated
current
660V/690V(AC-3) 129 137 160 170 220 235
and power
660V/690V(AC-4) 129 137 160 170 220 235
Top suspension
Thermal overload relay Electronic overload relay

mount two
without auxiliary AX-3/22
contacts, can mount NC7-410 NC7-475 NC7-620
two Top suspension 4NO+4NC
auxiliary contacts
Other mode Note Note Note

380V/400V(AC-3) 200
450
410 265
630
475 335
800
620
D
Rated
current
660V/690V(AC-3) 280 303 335 353 450 462
and power
660V/690V(AC-4) 280 303 335 353 450 462
Top suspension
Thermal overload relay Electronic overload relay

Modularized accessories which can be installed additionally
4NO AX-3/40
3NO+1NC AX-3/31
2NO+2NC AX-3/22
1NO+3NC AX-3/13
Number of Able to be used for
auxiliary contacts the whole series products
4NC AX-3/04
AX-3
Auxiliary contact 2NO AX-3/20
1NO+1NC AX-3/11
2NC AX-3/02
0.1~3 F5-T0
On-delay time (s) 0.1~30 F5-T2
10~180 F5-T4
Able to be used for
the whole series products
0.1~3 F5-D0
F5
1N/O+1N/C
Air delay head Off-delay time (s) F5-D2
0.1~30
10~180 F5-D4
Able to be used for

Number of
1NO+1NC NCF1-11C the products of
auxiliary contacts
170A or lower
NCF1-11C
Secondary side suspension
auxiliary contact
AC 24V~48V SR2-A 24V~48V
Able to be used for

AC 100V~250V SR2-A 100V~250V the products of
9A~38A or lower
SR2-A
Surge suppressor AC 380V~440V SR2-A 380V~440V
Suppression
voltage range
AC/DC 24V~48V SR2-C 24V~48V
Able to be used for

AC/DC 100V~250V SR2-C 100V~250V the products of
40A~95A or lower
SR2-C
Surge suppressor AC/DC 380V~440V SR2-C 380V~440V
NR2-25 9A~32A
NR2-36 32A, 38A
NR2-93 40A~95A
NR2-150 115A~150A
NR2 NR2-200 115A~170A

Thermal overload relay
NR2-630 205A~620A
NRE8-25 9A~32A
NRE8-40 40A
NRE8-100
NRE8-200
40A~95A
115A~170A
D
NRE8
Electronic overload relay
NRE8-630 205A~620A
9A~95A Purchase individually Purchase it individually,

and install it by yourself
How to purchase
Reversible product without
40A~95A the products of
connecting wire
205A or higher Directly purchase the reversible products
Reversible product with (specified current for two contactors
9A~38A to be the same)
NC7-09~95 connecting wire
Mechanical interlock
module 115A~170A Purchase individually
NJLs-GG NC7-205 Combination of two units
Horizontal NJLs-HH NC7-250~300 Combination of two arbitrary units

installation NJLs-KK NC7-410~475 Combination of two arbitrary units
NJLs-LL NC7-620 Combination of two units
NJLc-GG NC7-205 Combination of two units
NC7-115~170 NJLc-GH NC7-205 and NC7-250~300

Over 205A product
Mechanical interlock mechanical interlocking NJLc-GK NC7-205 and NC7-410~475
mechanism code NJLc-GL NC7-205 and NC7-620
Vertical NJLc-HH NC7-250~300 Combination of two units

installation NJLc-HK NC7-250~300 and NC7-410~475
NJLc-HL NC7-250~300 and NC7-620
NJLc-KK NC7-410~475 Combination of two units
NC7-205~620 NJLc-KL NC7-410~475 and NC7-620
NJLc-LL NC7-620 Combination of two units
5. Main parameters and technical performance

5.1 Main parameters and technical performance criteria for the NC7 product
Type NC7-09 NC7-12 NC7-18 NC7-22 NC7-25 NC7-32 NC7-38 NC7-40 NC7-50 NC7-65 NC7-80 NC7-95
AC-3 9 12 18 22 25 32 38 40 50 65 80 95
Rated 380V/400V
AC-4 3.5 5 7.7 7.7 8.5 12 12 18.5 24 28 37 44
operational
current (A) AC-3 6.6 8.9 12 14 18 22 22 34 39 42 49 49
660V/690V
AC-4 1.5 2 3.8 3.8 4.4 7.5 7.5 9 12 14 17.3 21.3
Appointed free air heat generation current (A) 20 20 32 32 40 50 50 60 80 80 110 110
Rated insulation voltage (V) 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8
Rated making capacity Making current: 10xIe(AC-3) or 12xIe(AC-4)
Rated breaking capacity Making/breaking current: 8xIe(AC-3) or 10xIe(AC-4)
Short time withstand current (10s) 72 96 144 176 200 256 304 320 400 520 640 760
Controllable three-phase 380V/400V 4 5.5 7.5 11 11 15 18.5 18.5 22 30 37 45

squirrel-cage motor power(AC-3)kW
660V/690V 5.5 7.5 10 11 15 18.5 18.5 30 37 37 45 45
Intermittent-periodic-duty 380V/400V 1.5 2.2 3 3 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22

motor power(AC-4)kW 600V/690V 1.1 1.5 3.7 3.7 4 5.5 5.5 7.5 11 11 15 18.5
AC-3 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
Frequency of Electrical life
operation AC-4 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 120 120
(times/h)
Mechanical life 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600 3600
Electrical life AC-3 100 100 100 100 100 80 80 80 60 60 60 60
(ten thousand times)
AC-4 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 15 15 15 10 10
Mechanical life(ten thousand times) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 800 800 800 800 800 600 600
Type of the fuse adapted RT16-20 RT16-20 RT16-32 RT16-32 RT16-40 RT16-50 RT16-50 RT16-63 RT16-80 RT16-80 RT16-100 RT16-125
Piece (of string, etc) 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Cold-pressed Non-prefabricated-tip cord 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/2.5 1.5/4 1.5/4 1.5/4 1.5/4 1.5/4 1.5/4 2.5/6 2.5/6 2.5/6 2.5/6 6/25 4/10 6/25 4/10 6/25 4/10 10/35 6/16 10/35 6/16
terminal Cord with the prefabricated tip mm2 1/4 1/2.5 1/4 1/2.5 1.5/6 1.5/4 1.5/6 1.5/4 1.5/10 1.5/6 2.5/10 2.5/6 2.5/10 2.5/6 6/25 4/10 6/25 4/10 6/25 4/10 10/35 6/16 10/35 6/16
Non-prefabricated-tip hard wire
1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1.5/6 1.5/6 1.5/6 1.5/6 1.5/6 1.5/6 2.5/10 2.5/10 2.5/10 2.5/10 6/25 4/10 6/25 4/10 6/25 4/10 10/35 6/16 10/35 6/16
Connection terminal screw size and M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M4 M4 M4 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10
tightening torque (N·m) 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 1.2 1.2 1.2 4 4 4 6 6
Attracting(VA) 70 70 70 70 110 110 110 200 200 200 200 200

AC coil
power 50Hz Holding(VA) 9 9 9.5 9.5 14 19 19 57 57 57 57 57
Power(W) 1.8~2.7 1.8~2.7 3~4 3~4 3~4 3~4 3~4 6~10 6~10 6~10 6~10 6~10
Action (actuating)range Pull-in voltage: 85%Us~110%Us; Release voltage: 20%Us~75%Us
Basic parameters of the auxiliary contact AC-15：0.95A 380V/400V DC-13：0.15A 220V/250V Ith：10A
5.2 Rated control source voltage Us and code for the NC7 ac contactor of 170A or lower
Coil voltage Us(V) 24 36 42 48 110 127 220 230 240 380 400 415 440 480 500 600 660
50Hz B5 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 M5 P5 U5 Q5 V5 N5 R5 T5 S5 X5 Y5
60Hz B6 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 M6 P6 U6 Q6 V6 N6 R6 T6 S6 X6 Y6
50/60Hz B7 C7 D7 E7 F7 G7 M7 P7 U7 Q7 V7 N7 R7 T7 S7 X7 Y7
Type NC7-115 NC7-150 NC7-170 NC7-205 NC7-250 NC7-300 NC7-410 NC7-475 NC7-620
AC-3 115 150 170 205 250 300 410 475 620
Rated 380V/400V
AC-4 115 150 150 205 250 300 410 475 620
operational
current (A) AC-3 86 107 118 137 170 235 303 353 462
660V/690V
AC-4 86 107 107 137 170 235 303 353 462
Appointed free air heat generation current (A) 200 200 275 275 315 380 450 630 800
Rated insulation voltage (V) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
Rated making capacity Making current: 10xIe(AC-3) or 12xIe(AC-4)
Rated breaking capacity Making/breaking current: 8xIe(AC-3) or 10xIe(AC-4)
Short time withstand current (10s) 920 1200 1360 1640 2000 2400 3280 3800 4960
Controllable three-phase 380V/400V 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 265 335

squirrel-cage motor power(AC-3)kW 660V/690V 80 100 110 129 160 220 280 335 450
Intermittent-periodic-duty 380V/400V 55 75 90 110 132 160 200 265 335

motor power(AC-4)kW 600V/690V 80 100 110 129 160 220 280 335 450
Frequency of
operation
(times/h)
Electrical life
AC-3
AC-4
1200
120
1200
120
600
120
600
60
600
60
600
60
600
60
600
60
600
60
D
Mechanical life 1200 1200 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
Electrical life AC-3 80 80 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

(ten thousand times) AC-4 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 0.6 0.6
Mechanical life(ten thousand times) 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
Type of the fuse adapted NT3-225 NT3-225 NT3-315 RT16-3 RT16-3 RT16-3 RT16-3 RT16-4 RT16-4
115 150 170
Attracting(VA) 660 660 660
AC coil Holding(VA)
power 50Hz 91.2 91.2 91.2
Power(W)
10-15 10-15 10-15
Action (actuating)range Pull-in voltage: 85%Us~110%Us; Release voltage: 20%Us~75%Us; NC7-250~620 Release voltage: 10%Us~75%Us
Basic parameters of the auxiliary contact AC-15: 0.95A 380V/400V DC-13: 0.15A 220/250V Ith: 10A
Type NC7-115 NC7-150 NC7-170 NC7-205 NC7-250 NC7-300 NC7-410 NC7-475 NC7-620
Piece (of string, etc) 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 (2) 2 2
Cable (mm2) 10~50 10~50 10~50 95~150 120~185 185~240 240 (150) 150~185 185~240
Copper (mm) - - - - - - 30X5 40X5 50X5
Bolt M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M10 M12
Tightening torque(N·m) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 14
5.3 Rated control source voltage Us and code for the NC7 ac contactor (205A - 620A) product coil
Coil code Control voltage (V) Power VA

110 127 220 380 Schematic drawing
Contactor type Start Hold
NC7-205 FG110 FG127 FG220 FG380 966 66

NC7-250 FI110 FI127 FI220 FI380 1500 18
NC7-300 FI110 FI127 FI220 FI380 1500 18

NC7-410 FJ110 FJ127 FJ220 FJ380 1500 20
NC7-475 FK110 FK127 FK220 FK380 1500 25
NC7-620 FL110 FL127 FL220 FL380 1700 30
Note: Products of NC7-250 or higher are duplex winding ones.

6. Derivative products
Derivative products Contactor Auxiliary module Schematic drawing
Reversing contactor
Mechanical interlocking mechanism
Timing-delay contactor
Air delay head
Star-delta
starter
Air delay head
Magnetic starter
Thermal relay

NC7 09~38
A
D(Ax-3)/E(F5)
C
b
a
D
NC7 40~95
D(AX-3)/E(F5)
C A
Φ
B
a
NC7 115~170
D(AX-3)/E(F5)
C A
Φ
b
a
NC7 205~300
Φ
11.5
B
b
a
C
A
NC7 410~475
Φ
13.5
B
a
C A
NC7 620
15.5
B
b
a
C
A
D
mm
Type Amax Bmax Cmax Dmax Emax a b Φ
NC7-0911~1211 45 75 88 124.5 144.5 34/35 50/60/61.8 4.5
NC7-1811~2211 45 75 91 127.5 147.5 34/35 50/60/61.8 4.5
NC7-2511 56 88 100 135.5 155.5 40 50/60/75 4.5
NC7-3211~3811 56 88 105 140.5 160.5 40 50/60/75 4.5
NC7-40~65 77 129 119 157.5 177.5 40.5 107 6.5
NC7-80~95 87 129 127 165.5 185.5 40.5 107 6.5
NC7-115~170 122 157 158 192.5 212.5 96~110 130 7
NC7-205 171 197 186 80 110~120 6.5
NC7-250 202 203 215 96 110~120 6.5
NC7-300 213 206 220 96 110~120 6.5
NC7-410 213 206 220 80 170~180 8.5
NC7-475 233 238 233 80 170~180 8.5
NC7-620 309 304 256 180 180~190 10.5

The following to be indicated when ordering:
8.1 Full name and type of the contactor
8.2 Rated control source voltage and frequency or size code of the coil
8.3 If you need to order the AX-3 auxiliary contactor block, F5 air delay head or standard rail track for the product, you should further
give a clear indication; For products of 205A or higher, the auxiliary contactor blocks will not be attached for lack of indication such as
the number of those blocks and how they are combined.
8.4 When the NC7 115A-170A products leave the factory, the body is not provided with the dust cap. It is hoped users will further
give a clear indication when they need it.
8.5 Amount on order
8.6 The 38A-or-lower derivative N conventional products triple poles are provided in the mode of reversible wiring, so you
must give clear indication for your special wiring mode.
8.7 The 205A-or-higher derivative NS conventional products triple poles are provided in the mode of reversible wiring, so you must
give clear indication for your special wiring mode.
8.8 Order Sample:

10 units of NC7-0911 ac contacts, coil voltage 220V/50Hz, with 5 pieces of AX-3/22
10 units of NC7-300 ac contacts, coil voltage 220V/50Hz, with 10 pieces of AX-3/22 further attached
Mechanical interlocking mechanism to be order Writing format for ordering
NC7-205 combined with NC7-620

NJLc-GL 30 sets
Aertical installation, Mechanical interlocking mechanism, 30 sets
Two NC7-250 combination in a mode of

NJLc-HH 30 sets
Horizontal installation, Mechanical interlocking mechanism, 30 sets
2. Type designation
N C6-□ □ □ □ □
Blank: Screw-clamp connection

K: With solder “pins”
for direct connection
to printed circuit boards.
Number of contacts
10: 3N/O main contacts,
1N/O auxiliary contact
01: 3N/O main contacts.
1N/C auxiliary contact
04: 4N/O main contacts
08: 2N/O+2N/C main contacts
Rated operational current (AC-3, 380V) D

Design sequence No.
Contactor
NC6 AC Contactor, 6~9A
Company code
1. General
1.1 Certificates: CE, VDE, UKrSEPRO, EAC, UL;
1.2 Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, up to 690V, up to 9A;
1.3 Application: remotely makes and breaks circuit,

protect circuit from overload assembling .
with proper thermal relay;
1.4 Utilization category: AC-1, AC-3, AC-4; .
1.5 Ambient temperature: -5℃~+40℃; .
1.6 Altitude: ≤2000m; .
1.7 Mounting category: Ⅲ
.1.8 Mounting conditions: .

inclination between mounting plane .
and vertical plane not exceed ±30°
1.10 IP00 .
014
3. Technical data
3.1 Contactor
★ 3P contactor AC coil operation
Items Model NC6-06 NC6-06-K NC6-09 NC6-09-K
Rated cinventional
AC-1 20 20
heating current (A)
Rated operational 380/400V 6 9

AC-3/AC-4
current (A) 660/690V 3.8 5
220/230V 1.5 2.2
kW
(AC-3) 380/400V 2.2 4
660/690V 3 4
Power of motor
240V 2 2
hp 400V 3 3
600V 3 3
AC-3 1,200 1,200
Operating cycles Electrical
(operations/h) AC-4 300 300
Mechanical 3,600 3,600
3
AC-3 1,200 1,200
Electrical life (×10 operations)
AC-4 25 25
Mechanical life (×106 operations) 10 10
Matching fuse model RT16-16 RT16-20
★ 4P contactor AC operation
Items Model NC6-06 NC6-09
AC-1 20 20
Rated operational 380/400V 6 9
current (A) AC-3/AC-4
660/690V 3.8 5
220V/230V/240V 1.5 2.2
kW 380/400V 2.2 4
(AC-3) 660/690V 3 4
Power of motor
240V - 2
hp 400V - 3
600V - 3
AC-3 1,200 1,200
Operating cycles Electrical
AC-4 300 300
(operations/h)
Mechanical 3,600 3,600
AC-3 1,200 1,200

Electrical life (×103 operations)
AC-4 25 25
Mechanical life (×106 operations) 10 10
Matching fuse model RT16-16 RT16-20
3.2 AC coil specifications
Items Model NC6-06 NC6-09

Rated control voltage (V AC) 24, 36, 48, 110, 127, 220, 230, 380, 400
In-rush 30 30
Coil power (VA)
Sealed 4.5 4.5
4. Terminal connection
Model Number of piece Conductor (mm2) Screw size Tightening torque (N·m)
NC6-06 1 2.5 M3 0.5
NC6-09 1 2.5 M3 0.5
5. Accessories
5.1 Auxiliary contact
Auxiliary contact
Model
Model of assembled contact Conventional heating current (A) Control capacity
AC-15: 380/400V/0.95A
NCF6-20; NCF6-02
NC6-06 10
NCF6-11; NCF6-40
NCF6-31; NCF6-22 DC-13: 220/250V/0.15A
NCF6-13; NCF6-04
NCF6-20; NCF6-02
NCF6-11; NCF6-40
AC-15: 380/400V/0.95A
D
NCF6-31; NCF6-22
NCF6-13; NCF6-04
NC6-09 10
DC-13: 220/250V/0.15A
5.2 Assembly with thermal over-load relay
Assembled thermal over-load relay

Model of
Recommended fuse type
contactor Model Rated current (A)
aM gG
0.1~0.16 0.25 2
0.16~0.25 0.5 2
0.25~0.4 1 2
0.4~0.63 1 2
0.63~1 2 4
1~1.6 2 4
1.25~2 4 6
1.6~2.5 4 6
2.5~4 6 10
4~6 8 16
5.5~8 12 20
NC6-09 NR2-11.5 7~10 12 20
9~13 16 25
46max 2-Φ4.2
R 35±0.4 auxiliary contact 7.2
50±0.47
59max
35
33
5
4.2 36 58max
2. Type designation
N C 1-□ □ □ □ -□
Z: DC coil
N:Reversing/change-over
type contactor (There is no such type as
NC1-**Z (DC coil) and
NC1-**08 (2N/O+2N/C) ).
Number of contacts
10: 3 N/O main contacts+1 N/O auxiliary
contact (9A,12A,18A,25A,32A)
01: 3 N/O main contacts+1 N/C auxiliary
contact (9A,12A,18A,25A,32A)
11: 3 N/O main contacts+1 N/O
and 1N/C auxiliary contact
(40A,50A,65A,80A,95A)
04: 4 N/O main contacts
(9A,12A,25A,40A,50A,65A,80A,95A)
08: 2 N/O and 2N/C main contacts
(9A,12A,25A,40A,50A,65A,80A,95A)
Nc1 AC Contactor, 09~95A Basic specification, expressed

with the rated operational current
400(380)V, AC-3
1. General
Design sequence No.
1.1 Certificates: CE, KEMA, VDE, EK, EAC, RCC, UL;
Contactor
1.2 Electric ratings: AC50Hz (or 60Hz), 690V, up to 95A;
Company code
1.3 Application: remote making & breaking circuits;
protect circuit from over-load when assembling
with thermal over-load relay;
Frequent start-up and control of AC contactor;
1.4 Utilization category: AC-3, AC-4;
1.6 Ambient temperature: -5℃~+40℃;
1.7 Mounting category: Ⅲ

inclination between the mounting plane
and the vertical plane should not exceed ±5°
2.0 IP10
R
3. Curves
Electric life curves (AC-3)
NC1-09
NC1-12
NC1-50
NC1-18
NC1-32
NC1-65
NC1-25
NC1-80
NC1-95
NC1-40
Electric life
×106
10
8
6
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 16 1820 25 32 40 50 65 80 95 100 200 Breaking current (A)
18.5
30
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5
5.5
7.5
2.2
11
22
10
15
3
220V~240V KW
18.5
0.75
1.1
1.5
2.2
5.5
7.5
11
15
22
30
37
45
55
3
380V~415V
Rated outputs of three-phase motors (50Hz AC-3)
Electric life curves (AC-4)

NC1-09
NC1-12
NC1-25
NC1-40
NC1-18
NC1-32
NC1-65
NC1-50
NC1-95
NC1-80
Electric life
×106
1
0.8
0.4
0.2
0.15
0.1
0.06
0.04
0.02
0.01
5 10 20 30 40 60 80 100 150 200 300 400 500 600 Breaking current (A)
Example:
Request to control the start of three-phase motors
main technical parameter of three-phase motors: P=5.5kW, Ue=400V(380V), Ie=11A, Ic6×Ie=66A
The electric life span of request: 2,00,000 operations
the contactor should be NC1-32 according to the curves above
4. Technical data
4.1 AC coil contactor
★ AC coil operation
Items Model NC1-09 NC1-12 NC1-18 NC1-25

Frame Frame 1 (3P, 4P) Frame 2 (3P) Frame 3 (3P, 4P)
Rated conventional heating current (A) AC-1 25 25 32 45

AC-3 9 12 18 25
400(380)V
Rated operational AC-4 3.5 5 7.7 8.5
current (A) AC-3 6.6 8.9 12 18
690(660)V
AC-4 1.5 2 3.8 4.4
Rated insulation voltage (V AC) 690 690 690 690
230(220)V AC 2.2 3 4 5.5
kW 400(380)V AC 4 5.5 7.5 11
690(660)V AC 5.5 7.5 10 15

Power of controlled
3-phase 200V AC 3 5 7.5 7.5
cage motor (AC-3)
240V AC 3 5 7.5 10
hp
460V AC 5 7.5 10 15
600V AC 5 7.5 10 15
AC-3 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200

Operating frequency Electrical
(operations/h) AC-4 300 300 300 300
Mechanical 3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600
Electrical life AC-3 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000

(×103 operations) AC-4 200 200 200 200
Mechanical life (×106 operations) 10 10 10 10
Matched fuse type RT16-20 RT16-20 RT16-32 RT16-40
★ AC coil operation, reversing type
Items Model NC1-09N NC1-12N NC1-18N NC1-25N

380/400V 3.5 5 7.7 8.5
Ie(A)
660/690V 1.5 2 3.8 4.4
AC-4
380/400V 1.5 2.2 3 4
Pe(kW)
660/690V 1.1 1.5 3.7 4
200V 3 5 7.5 7.5
Power of controlled 240V 3 5 7.5 10
3-phase hp
cage motor (AC-3) 460V 5 7.5 10 15
600V 5 7.5 10 15
★ AC coil operation, change-over type
Items Model NC1-09N NC1-12N NC1-25N

Frame Frame 1 (4P) Frame 2 (4P) Frame 3 (4P)
Rated conventional heating current (A) AC-1 25 25 45
380/400V 3.5 5 8.5
Ie(A)
660/690V 1.5 2 4.4
AC-4
380/400V 1.5 2.2 4
Pe(kW)
660/690V 1.1 1.5 4
200V 3 5 7.5
Power of controlled 240V 3 5 10
3-phase hp
cage motor (AC-3) 460V 5 7.5 15
600V 5 7.5 15
NC1-32 NC1-40 NC1-50 NC1-65 NC1-80 NC1-95

Frame 4 (3P) Frame 5 (3P, 4P) Frame 6 (3P, 4P)
50 60 80 80 110(Can be customized for 125) 110(Can be customized for 125)
32 40 50 65 80 95
12 18.5 24 28 37 44
21 34 39 42 49 49
7.5
690
7.5
9
690
11
12
690
15
14
690
18.5
17.3
690
21.3
690
25
D
22
15 18.5 22 30 37 45
18.5 30 37 37 45 45
10 15 15 20 25 30
15 20 20 25 30 30
20 25 30 40 40 50
20 25 30 40 40 50
600 600 600 600 600 600

300 300 300 300 300 300
3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600
800 800 600 600 600 600
200 150 150 150 100 100
8 8 8 8 6 6
RT16-50 RT16-63 RT16-80 RT16-80 RT16-100 RT16-125
NC1-32N NC1-40N NC1-50N NC1-65N NC1-80N NC1-95N

12 18.5 24 28 37 44
7.5 9 12 14 17.3 21.3
5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
5.5 7.5 11 11 15 18.5
10 15 15 20 25 30
15 20 20 25 30 30
20 25 30 40 40 50
20 25 30 40 40 50
NC1-40N NC1-50N NC1-65N NC1-80N NC1-95N

Frame 4 (4P) Frame 5 (4P) Frame 6 (4P)
60 80 80 110(Can be customized for 125) 110(Can be customized for 125)
18.5 24 28 37 44
9 12 14 17.3 21.3
7.5 11 15 18.5 22
7.5 11 11 15 18.5
15 15 20 25 30
20 20 25 30 30
25 30 40 40 50
25 30 40 40 50
4.2 DC coil contactor
★ DC coil operation(24V,110V,220V)
Items Model NC1-09Z NC1-12Z NC1-18Z NC1-25Z


AC-3 9 12 18 25
400(380)V
Rated operational AC-4 3.5 5 7.7 8.5
current (A) AC-3 6.6 8.9 12 18
690(660)V
AC-4 1.5 2 3.8 4.4
Conventional heating current (A) 25 25 32 45
Rated insulation voltage (V AC) 690 690 690 690
230(220)V AC 2.2 3 4 5.5
Power of controlled
3-phase kW 400(380)V AC 4 5.5 7.5 11
cage motor (AC-3)
690(660)V AC 5.5 7.5 10 15
AC-3 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200
Operating frequency Electrical
AC-4 300 300 300 300
(operations/h)
Mechanical 3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600
AC-3 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000
Electrical life
(×103 operations) AC-4 200 200 200 200
Mechanical life (×106 operations) 10 10 10 10
Matched fuse type RT16-20 RT16-20 RT16-32 RT16-40
NC1-32Z NC1-40Z NC1-50Z NC1-65Z NC1-80Z NC1-95Z

32
12
40
18.5
50
24
65
28
80
37
95
44
D
21 34 39 42 49 49
7.5 9 12 14 17.3 21.3
690 690 690 690 690 690

7.5 11 15 18.5 22 25
15 18.5 22 30 37 45
18.5 30 37 37 45 45
600 600 600 600 600 600
300 300 300 300 300 300
3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600 3,600
800 800 600 600 600 600
200 150 150 150 100 100
8 8 8 8 6 6
RT16-50 RT16-63 RT16-80 RT16-80 RT16-100 RT16-125
5. Accessories
5.1 Accessories
Items Model NC1-09 NC1-12 NC1-18 NC1-25

In-rush (VA) 70 70 70 110
Coil
Sealed (VA) 9 9 9.5 14
power
Power (W) 1.8~2.7 1.8~2.7 3~4 3~4
AC coil Operation Operation voltage (85%~110%) Us
range Drop-out voltage (20%~75%) Us
Coil voltage(50Hz,60Hz,
24,36,48,110,127,220,230,240,380,415,440,480,500,600,660
50/60Hz)(V)
Coil power(W) 9 9 11 11
DC coil Operation Pick-up voltage (85%~110%) Us

Coil voltage (V) 24,36,48,110,220
F4 - □ □
Number of N/C auxiliary contact
F4 auxiliary contact
Number of N/O auxiliary contact
Auxiliary contact assembly
F5 - □ □
0: time-delay range, 0.1s~3s
4: time-delay range, 10s~180s
T: making time-delay; D: breaking time-delay

Time-delay module
NC F1- 1 1 C
Lateral side
1 N/C contact
1 N/O contact
NCF1-11C lateral side auxiliary contact
Design sequence No.
Contactor
Company code
NC1-32 NC1-40 NC1-50 NC1-65 NC1-80 NC1-95

110 300 300 300 300 300
14 57 57 57 57 57
3~4 6~10 6~10 6~10 6~10 6~10
(85%~110%) Us
(20%~75%) Us
24,36,48,110,127,220,230,240,380,415,440,480,500,600
11 20 20 20 20 20
(85%~110%) Us
(10%~75%) Us
Configuration of contacts
Picture Model
Number of N/O contact Number of N/C contact
F4-20 2 0
F4-11
F4-02
1
0
1
2
D
F4-40 4 0
F4-31 3 1
F4-22 2 2
F4-13 1 3
F4-04 0 4
Picture Model Time-delay range Number of time-delay contacts
F5-T0 0.1s~3s N/O+N/C
F5-T2 0.1s~30s N/O+N/C
F5-T4 10s~180s N/O+N/C
F5-D0 0.1s~3s N/O+N/C
F5-D2 0.1s~30s N/O+N/C
F5-D4 10s~180s N/O+N/C
NCF1-11C
1 1
NC1-40Z-95Z (DC coil) cannot be
installed with such accessor y
AC 24V~48V SR2-A 24V~48V
Able to be used for

AC 100V~250V SR2-A 100V~250V the products of
9A~38A or lower
SR2-A
AC 380V~440V SR2-A 380V~440V
Surge suppressor
Suppression
voltage range
AC 24V~48V SR2-C 24V~48V
Able to be used for

AC 100V~250V SR2-C 100V~250V the products of
40A~95A or lower
SR2-C AC 380V~440V SR2-C 380V~440V

Surge suppressor
5.2 Derived products when the contactor is assembled with following accessory module
Derived products Contactor Accessorial modular Picture
Time-delay contactor
Time-delay block
Reversing contactor
Magnetic starter
Thermal relay
AC contactor for
capacitor switching
Current-limiting
contact assembly
Star-delta starter
Auxiliary
Time-delay block contact assembly
Note: NC1-09Z-95Z cannot form the reversing contactor.

5.3 Assembly with thermal over-load relay
Assembled thermal over-load relay

Model of
contactor Model Rated current (A)
aM gG
0.1~0.16 0.25 2
0.16~0.25 0.5 2
0.25~0.4 1 2
0.4~0.63 1 2
0.63~1 2 4
NC1-09 1~1.6 2 4
NC1-12
1.25~2 4 6
NC1-18
NC1-25 1.6~2.5 4 6
NC1-32
2.5~4 6 10
4~6 8 16
5.5~8 12 20
NR2-25
7~10 12 20
9~13 16 25
12~18 20 35
17~25 25 50
D
23~32 40 63
NC1-32
28~36 40 80
NR2-36
23~32 40 63
30~40 40 100
NC1-40 37~50 63 100

NC1-50
48~65 63 100
NC1-65
NC1-80 55~70 80 125
NC1-95
63~80 80 125
NR2-93 80~93 100 160

5.4 Assembly with electronic overload relay
Rated Range of setting Recommended

Model of
Model Assembled thermal Over-load relay
contactor Fuse type
current (A) current (A)
1.2 0.6~1.2 RT36-4 (NT00-4)

2.4 1.2~2.4 RT36-6 (NT00-6)
NC1-09
4 2~4 RT36-10 (NT00-10)
8 4~8 RT36-16 (NT00-16)
10 5~10 RT36-20 (NT00-20)
NC1-12
12 7~12 RT36-25 (NT00-25)
NC1-18 20 10~20 RT36-40 (NT00-40)
NC1-25 NRE8-25 25 20~25 RT36-50 (NT00-50)
NC1-32 32 22~32 RT36-80 (NT00-80)
4 2~4 RT36-10 (NT00-10)
8 4~8 RT36-16 (NT00-16)
NC1-40 10 5~10 RT36-20 (NT00-20)
20 10~20 RT36-40 (NT00-40)
NRE8-40 40 20~40 RT36-80 (NT00-80)
NC1-40
NC1-50 65 30~65 RT36-160 (NT00-160)
NC1-65
NC1-80
100 50~100 RT36-200 (NT1-200)
NC1-95 NRE8-100
6. Technical information
6.1 Terminal connection
Cabling cross section(Cu)
Flexible cable Flexible cable Screw Tightening

Model Number with cold-pressed without cold- Inflexible torque (N·m)
size
of piece socket (mm2) pressed socket (mm2) cable (mm2)
1 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 M3.5 0.8

NC1-09
2 1/2.5 1/2.5 1/4 M3.5 0.8
1 1/2.5 1/4 1/4 M3.5 0.8
NC1-12
2 1/2.5 / 1/4 M3.5 0.8
1 1.5/4 1.5/6 1.5/6 M3.5 0.8
NC1-18
2 1.5/4 1.5/4 1.5/6 M3.5 0.8
1 1.5/4 1.5/10 1.5/6 M4 1.2
NC1-25
2 1.5/4 1.5/6 1.5/6 M4 1.2
1 2.5/6 2.5/10 2.5/10 M4 1.2
NC1-32
2 2.5/6 2.5/6 2.5/10 M4 1.2
1 6/25 6/25 6/25 M8 6
NC1-40
2 4/10 4/10 4/10 M8 6
1 6/25 6/25 6/25 M8 6
NC1-50
2 4/10 4/10 4/10 M8 6
1 6/25 6/25 6/25 M8 6
NC1-65
2 4/10 4/10 4/10 M8 6
1 10/35 10/35 10/35 M10 6 10
NC1-80
2 6/16 6/16 6/16 M10 6 10
1 10/35(50) 10/35(50) 10/35(50) M10 6 10
NC1-95
2 6/16 6/16 6/16 M10 6 10

NC1-09~32
A D(F4)/E(F5)
Φ
B
a
NC1-40~95
D(F4)/E(F5)
Φ
D
b
B
a L
C
A
NC1-09Z~32Z
A
D(F4)/E(F5)
S
C
P P Φ
b
a L
NC1-40Z~95Z
P P Φ
D(F4)/E(F5)
C
b
a
L
A
Model A max B max C max D max E max a b Φ L P S

NC1-09(Z)~12(Z) 47 76 82(116) 120.5(154.5) 140.5(174.5) 34/35 50/60 4.5 60(95) 10.5 8.6
NC1-18(Z) 47 76 87(122) 125.5(160.5) 145.5(180.5) 34/35 50/60 4.5 61(96) 11.3 10.4
NC1-25(Z) 57 86 95(131) 133.5(169.5) 153.5(189.5) 40 48 4.5 70(107) 13.2 11.7
NC1-32(Z) 57 86 100(138) 138.5(176.5) 158.5(196.5) 40 48 4.5 71.6(120) 14.5 13
NC1-4011(Z)~6511(Z) 77 129 116(173) 154.5(211.5) 174.5(231.5) 40 105 6.5 78(135) 20 8.6
NC1-4004~6504 84 129 116 154.5 174.5 40 105 6.5 78(135) 20 8.6
NC1-4008~6508 84 129 127 154.5 174.5 40 105 6.5 78 20 8.6
NC1-8011(Z)~9511(Z) 87 129 127(188) 165.5(226.5) 185.5(246.5) 40 105 6.5 83(140) 23.5 12
NC1-8004~9504 96 129 122 160.5 180.5 40 105 6.5 83 23.5 12
NC1-8008~9508 96 129 135 160.5 180.5 40 105 6.5 83 23.5 12
NC1-09~32N
50/60
a
g
b C
NC1-40~95N
h
Φ D(F4)/E(F5)
B
40 g 40
C
b
Contactor model a b c g h Φ
NC1-09N~12N 86 109 82 95 -- 4.5
NC1-18N 86 109 87 95 -- 4.5
NC1-25N 93 131 95 111 -- 4.5
NC1-32N 93 131 100 111 -- 4.5
NC1-40N~65N(3P) 129 165 116 50 90 6.5
NC1-80N~95N(3P) 129 187 127 57 96 6.5
NC1-40N~65N(4P) 129 180 116 50 90 6.5
NC1-80N~95N(4P) 129 205 127 57 96 6.5
Note:
1. L: in main circuit, the distance between terminals and plate;
2. P: in main circuit, the distance between two phases;
3. S: in main circuit, the width of contacting plate.
2. Type designation
N C 1-□ □ 04 Z(N) DP
Customised
Reversing AC / DC contactor
DC coil
4 N/O main contacts
Basic specification, expressed

with the rated operational current
(380V, AC-3)
Design Sequence No.
Contactor
Company Code
D
NC1-2504Z(N) DP 3.1 Ambient temperature: -5℃~+40℃,

average does not over +35℃
NC1-4004Z(N) DP 3.2 Altitude: bellow to 2000m
Contactor 3.3 Humidity: +40℃ max, relative humidity is no more than 50%,
lower temperature allows a higher relative humidity.
1. General 3.4 Pollution degree: 3
NC1-2504Z DP, NC1-4004Z DP AC contactor (hereinafter 3.5 Installation category: Ⅲ

called contactor) is developed from NC1-2504, NC1-4004 3.6 Installation conditions: the mounting surface and the vertical
ac contactor model, is mainly used for DC 48V, rated gradient of not more than ± 5°. Product should be installed
operation voltage up to 690V, rated current 25A and 40A and used for no apparent shake, shock and vibration
circuit for remote making and breaking circuits. And apply
3.7 IP10
to match with thermal overload relays electromagnetic
starter; can meet reversible function matching with same
model of NC1-2504, NC1-4004 AC contactor.
Standard: IEC60947-4-1
4. Technical data
Model NC1-2504Z DP NC1-4004Z DP

AC-3 25 40
380V~400V
AC-4 8.5 18.5
Rated current (A)
AC-3 18 34
660V~690V
AC-4 4.4 9
Rated conventional current (Ith)(A) 40 60
M Rated insulation voltage (V) 690V
220V/230V 5.5 11
Power of controlled
3-phase cage motor 380V/400V 11 18.5
(AC-3)kw
660V/690V 15 30
Electrical life (AC-4) 300
Operation frequency
Mechanical life 1800
Electrical life (AC-4)X10 4 400V (without derating) 1.5
Mechanical life X10 4 50
Coil voltage DC 48V DC48V
Matched fuse model RT16-40 RT16-63
pc 1 2 1 2
Non-prefabricated cord ends '1.5/4 1.5/4 6/25 4/10
2
Cold end mm
Prefabricated cord ends 1.5/10 1.5/6 6/25 4/10
Non-prefabricated hard-wine ends 1.5/6 1.5/6 6/25 4/10
Termial screw size M4 M4 M4 M8 M8 M8
Tighting torque (N.M) 1.2 1.2 1.2 4 4 4
Pick-up voltage:DC 40V-60V Pick-up voltage:DC 40V-60V
Operation range
Drop-out voltage:DC 4.8V-16V Drop-out voltage:DC 4.8V-16V
NC1-2504ZN DP NC1-4004ZN DP
25 40
8.5 18.5
18 34
4.4 9
40 60
5.5 11
11 18.5
15 30
20
DC48V/ AC220V DC48V/ AC220V
RT16-40 RT16-63
1 2 1 2
1.5/4
1.5/10
1.5/4
1.5/6
6/25
6/25
4/10
4/10
D
1.5/6 1.5/6 6/25 4/10
M4 M4 M4 M8 M8 M8
1.2 1.2 1.2 4 4 4
Pick-up voltage:DC40V-60V/AC 85%Us-110%Us Pick-up voltage:DC40V-60V/AC 85%Us-110%Us
Drop-out voltage:DC 4.8V-16V/AC 20%Us-75%Us Drop-out voltage:DC 4.8V-16V/AC 20%Us-75%Us

NC1-2504Z DP
93
68
4.5
50/60
M4 40X48
40X 50/60
83
40
NC1-2504ZN DP
4.5 93
140
50/60
M4 40X48 M4 40X48
40X 50/60 40X 50/60
83
32
112
NC1-4004Z DP
6.5 114
95
105
128
40
NC1-4004ZN DP
96
191 114
6.5
128
40 56 40
136
6.1 Completed name and model of contactor;

6.2 Rated operation voltage and frequency for AC coil;
6.3 Purchase quantity;
6.4 Mark clearly for ordering F4 contacts or din-rail extra.
2. Type designation
N C 2- □□□ □ / □
Number of poles: 4P; Blank:3P
Derivation code:
N: Reversing/chang-over type contactor
(Ns: horizontal mounting;
Nc: vertical mounting)
Z: DC control
Rated operational current (A), AC-3 380/400V
Design sequence No.
Contactor
Company code
3. Technical data
D
3.1 Clearance between active and static contacts
NC2 AC Contactor, 115~800A Models Distance between contacts
NC2-115N/150N ≥5mm
1. General NC2-185N/225N ≥5mm
NC2-265N/330N ≥6mm
1.1 Certificates: NC2-115~800 NC2-400N/500N ≥6.5mm
CE, VDE, UKrSEPRO, EAC, RCC, UL; NC2-630N ≥7mm

NC2-800N ≥7mm
1.2 Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, up to 690V, up to 800A;
1.3 Application: remote making & breaking circuits; 3.2 Mechanical life
a. NJLC-FF and NJLS-FF: 3×106 operations
protect circuit from overload when assembling
b. Other model: 2×106 operations
with thermal over-load relay;
(a) 3×106 NJLc-FF, NJLs-FF
1.4 Ambient temperature: -5℃~+40℃;
NJLs-FF, NJLs-GG, NJLs-HH, NJLs-KK, NJLs-LL,
1.5 Altitude: ≤2000m; NJLc-FF, NJLc-FG, NJLc-FH, NJLc-FK, NJLc-FL,
(b) 2×106
NJLc-GG, NJLc-GH, NJLc-GK, NJLc-GL, NJLc-HH,
1.6 Mounting category: Ⅲ NJLc-HK, NJLc-HL, NJLc-KK, NJLc-KL, NJLc-LL
1.7 Mounting conditions:inclination between the mounting plane

and the vertical plane not exceed±5° 3.3 Terminal connection
1.8 Standard: IEC/EN 60947-4-1 The connection capability

Tightening
Screw
1.9 IP00(IP20 front face with shrouds SHD) Model Cu busbar torque
Number Cable Cross size
Cross section (N·m)
of piece section (mm2)
(mm2)
NC2-115 1 70~95 - M6 3
NC2-150 1 70~95 - M8 6
NC2-185 1 95~150 - M8 6
NC2-225 1 95~150 - M10 10
NC2-265 1 120~185 - M10 10
NC2-330 1 185~240 - M10 10
NC2-400 1(2) 240(150) 30×5 M10 10
NC2-500 2 150~185 40×5 M10 10
NC2-630 2 185~240 50×5 M12 14
NC2-800 2 185~240 50×5 M12 14
014
4. Technical data
★ 3P contactors AC coil operation
Model NC2-115(Z) NC2-150(Z) NC2-185(Z) NC2-225(Z)

Frame Frame 1 Frame 2
Rated Conventional heating current (A) AC-1 200 200 275 275
AC-3 380/400V AC 115 150 185 225
Rated operational
current (A)
AC-4 660/690V AC 86 108 118 137
380/400V AC 55 75 90 110
kW
660/690V AC 80 100 110 129
Power of controlled 240V AC 40 50 60 75
3-phase cage motor
415V AC 60 75 100 125
(AC-3) hp
480V AC 75 100 100 125
600V AC 75 100 100 125
Operating cycles
1,200 1,200 600 600
(operations /h) AC-3
Electrical life
1.2 1.2 1 1
(×106 operations) AC-3
Mechanical life
10 10 6 6
(×106 operations)
Matched fuse Model RT36-1 RT36-1 RT36-2 RT36-2

type Rated current A 250 250 315 315
★ 4P contactors AC coil operation
Model NC2-115/4 NC2-150/4 NC2-185/4 NC2-225/4

Frame Frame 1 Frame 2
Conventional heating current (A) AC-1 200 200 275 275
Rated operational AC-3 380/400V AC 115 150 185 225

current (A) AC-4 660/690V AC 86 108 118 137
380/400V AC 55 75 90 110
kW
660/690V AC 80 100 110 129
Power of controlled 240V AC 40 50 60 75
3-phase cage motor
415V AC 60 75 100 125
(AC-3)
hp
480V AC 75 100 100 125
600V AC 75 100 100 125
Operating cycles
1,200 1,200 600 600
(operations /h) AC-3
Electrical life
1.2 1.2 1 1
(×106 operations) AC-3
Mechanical life
10 10 6 6
(×106 operations)
Matched fuse Model RT36-1 RT36-1 RT36-2 RT36-2

type Rated current (A) 250 250 315 315
NC2-265(Z) NC2-330(Z) NC2-400(Z) NC2-500 NC2-630 NC2-800

Frame 3 Frame 4 Frame 5 Frame 6 Frame 7
315 380 450 630 800 800
265 330 400 500 630 AC-3 AC-4

800 630
170 235 303 353 462 486 462
132 160 200 250 335 450
160 220 280 335 450 475
100 125 150 200 250 350
150 150 200 250 350 600
150 200 250 350 400 600
150 200 300 350 500 650
600 600 600 600 600 600
0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.6
6 6 6 6 6 3
D
RT36-3 RT36-3 RT36-3 RT36-4 RT36-4 RT36-4
355 500 630 800 1000 1000
NC2-265/4 NC2-330/4 NC2-400/4 NC2-630/4

Frame 3 Frame 4 Frame 5 Frame 6
315 380 450 800
265 330 400 630
170 235 303 462
132 160 200 335
160 220 280 450
100 125 150 250
150 150 200 350
150 200 250 400
150 200 300 500
600 600 600 600
0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
6 6 6 6
RT36-3 RT36-3 RT16-3 RT36-4

355 500 630 1000
5. Accessories
Items Model NC2-115(Z) NC2-150(Z) NC2-185(Z) NC2-225(Z)

In-rush (VA) 1500 1800
AC:
Coil Sealed (VA) 20 20
power In-rush (W) 1500 1800
DC:
Sealed (W) 20 20
AC coil
Operation voltage (85%~110%) Us
Operation
range Drop-out voltage Common products; 20%~75%; electricity-saving products: 10%~75%Us
Coil code 3P FF XXX (DC) FG XXX (DC)

(XXX=coil voltage) 4P FF XXX FG XXX
AC: 110-127, 220-240, 380-415

Coil voltage
DC: 48, 110, 220
F5 - □ □
F4 - □ □ 0: time-delay range, 0.1s~3s
Number of N/C auxiliary contacts
4: time-delay range, 10s~180s
F5 auxiliary contact Number of N/O auxiliary contacts T: making time-delay;
D: breaking time-delay
Time-delay module
NC2-265(Z) NC2-330(Z) NC2-400(Z) NC2-500 NC2-630 NC2-800

1,500 1,500 1,500 1,500 1,700 1,700
10 10 20 25 25 34.2
1500 1500 1700
8 8 10
(85%~110%) Us
Common products; 20%~75%; electricity-saving products: 10%~75%Us
FH XXX (DC) FI XXX (DC) FJ XXX (DC) FK XXX FL XXX FM XXX
FH XXX FI XXX FJ XXX - FL XXX/4 -
AC: 110,127,220,230,380,400 AC/DC: 110-127，220-240，

DC: 110,220(NC2-265Z/330Z/400Z) 380-415
Configuration of contacts
Picture Model
Number of NO contact Number of NC contact
F4-20 2 0
F4-11 1 1
D
F4-02 0 2
F4-40 4 0
F4-31 3 1
F4-22 2 2
F4-13 1 3
F4-04 0 4
Picture Model Time-delay range Configuration of time-delay contacts
F5-T0 0.1s~3s N/O+N/C
F5-T2 0.1s~30s N/O+N/C
F5-T4 10s~180s N/O+N/C
F5-D0 0.1s~3s N/O+N/C
F5-D2 0.1s~30s N/O+N/C
F5-D4 10s~180s N/O+N/C
Model of
Applicable assembly with contactors
mechanical interlock
NJLs-FF NC2-115+NC2-115; NC2-150+NC2-150; NC2-115+NC2-150
NJLs-GG NC2-185+NC2-185; NC2-225+NC2-225; NC2-185+NC2-225
NJLs-HH (Horizontal) NC2-265+NC2-265; NC2-330+NC2-330; NC2-265+NC2-330
NJLs-KK NC2-400+NC2-400; NC2-500+NC2-500; NC2-400+NC2-500
NJLs-LL NC2-630+NC2-630; NC2-800+NC2-800
NJLc-FF NC2-115+NC2-115; NC2-150+NC2-150; NC2-115+NC2-150
NJLc-FG NC2-115+NC2-185; NC2-150+NC2-185; NC2-115+NC2-225; NC2-150+NC2-225
NJLc-FH NC2-115+NC2-265; NC2-115+NC2-330; NC2-150+NC2-265; NC2-150+NC2-330
NJLc-FK NC2-115+NC2-400; NC2-115+NC2-500; NC2-150+NC2-400; NC2-150+NC2-500
NJLc-FL NC2-115+NC2-800; NC2-115+NC2-630; NC2-150+NC2-630; NC2-150+NC2-800
NJLc-GG NC2-185+NC2-185; NC2-225+NC2-225; NC2-185+NC2-225
NJLc-GH NC2-185+NC2-265; NC2-185+NC2-330; NC2-225+NC2-265; NC2-225+NC2-330
NJLc-GK (Vertical) NC2-185+NC2-400; NC2-225+NC2-500; NC2-225+NC2-400; NC2-225+NC2-500
NJLc-GL NC2-185+NC2-800; NC2-185+NC2-630; NC2-225+NC2-630; NC2-225+NC2-800
NJLc-HH NC2-265+NC2-265; NC2-330+NC2-330; NC2-265+NC2-330
NJLc-HK NC2-265+NC2-400; NC2-330+NC2-400; NC2-265+NC2-500; NC2-330+NC2-500
NJLc-HL NC2-265+NC2-265; NC2-265+NC2-630; NC2-330+NC2-630; NC2-330+NC2-800
NJLc-KK NC2-400+NC2-400; NC2-500+NC2-500; NC2-400+NC2-500; NC2-400+NC2-800
NJLc-KL NC2-400+NC2-630; NC2-500+NC2-630; NC2-500+NC2-800
NJLc-LL NC2-630+NC2-630; NC2-630+NC2-800
NJLc-MM NC2-800+NC2-800
6. Structure features
6.1 The contactor is composed of arc-extinguishing system, contact system, base frame and magnetic system (including iron core, coil)
The contact system of the contactor is of direct action type and double-breaking points allocation.
The lower base-frame of the contactor is made of shaped aluminum alloy and the coil is of plastic enclosed structure.
The coil is assembled with the amarture to be an integrated one. They can be directly taken out from or inserted into the contactor.
It is convenient for user's service and maintenance.
Scheme of NC2-115~265 structure
3 2
1
4
1: arc-extinguishing system 2: contact system 3: base frame 4: magnetic system
NC2 series contactor is of short arcing distance. For example,

the arcing distance of NC2-115~330 contactor is only 10mm (200~500V), which is about one sixth that of the previous contactor
of the same capacity. It is an excellent complementary element used for an electric control device and it occupies smaller space
in a complete set of equipment. The mechanical interlock can be added to the contactor in both horizontal direction
and vertical direction. Three sets of contactor can be interlocked in the vertical direction.
6.2 Refer to fig below for connection mode of connection plate, 6.3 For reversing type contactors assembled with
the interlocked contactors could be mounted horizontally NC2-115~225 and NC2-265~630,
or vertically. For vertical mounting, contactors with lower which will be mounted vertically, a padding plate
current mounted at the upper position. should be added at the bottom of NC2-115~225.
Connection of connection plate Rereising contactor mounted vertically
L1(A)L2(B)L3(C)
40
1 3 5
1 3 5
A1 A1
KM1 KM2
A2 2 4 6 2 4 6 A2
U V W
H
3P pad
1N 1L2 2L1 2L3
1L3 1L1 2L2 2N
H+40
1 3 5 7
A1 8 6 4 2 A1
KM1 KM2
A2 2 4 6 8 A2
7 5 3 1
L1 L2 L3 N
4P
NC2-115~330 NC2-400~500 NC2-630~800
S S S Φ
Φ Φ
P P P P P P
Amax Amax f Amax f
f
X1
X1
Bmax
Bmax
Bmax
M
H
M
H
H
L L X1
X1
Cmax Cmax Cmax
8.5 10.5
D
13.5
11.5
15.5
6.5
Ha
Ha
Ha
Ga
Ga R
Ga
Model A B C P S Φ f M H L X1 200~500V X1 660~1000V Ga Ha
3P 168 163 172 37 20 M6 131 147 124 107 10 15 80 110~120

NC2-115
4P 204 163 172 37 20 131 147 124 107
M6
3P 168 171 172 40 20 M8 131 150 124 107 10 15 80 110~120
NC2-150
4P 204 171 172 40 20 M8 131 150 124 107
3P 171 175 183 40 20 M8 131 154 127 113.5 10 15 80 110~120
NC2-185
4P 211 175 183 40 20 M8 131 154 127 113.5
3P 171 198 183 48 25 M10 131 172 127 113.5 10 15 80 110~120
NC2-225
4P 211 198 183 48 25 M10 131 172 127 113.5
3P 202 204 215 48 25 M10 147 178 147 141 10 15 96 110~120
NC2-265
4P 247 204 215 48 25 M10 147 178 147 141
3P 215 208 220 48 25 M10 147 181 158 145 10 15 96 110~120
NC2-330
4P 261 208 220 48 25 M10 147 181 158 145
3P 215 208 220 48 25 M10 147 181 158 145 15 20 80 170~180
NC2-400
4P 261 208 220 48 25 M10 147 181 158 145
NC2-500 3P 235 238 233 55 30 M10 150 208 172 146 15 20 80 170~180
3P 312 305 40 M12 181 264 202 155 20 30 180 180~190

NC2-630
4P 389 305 256 80 40 M12 181 264 202 155 240
NC2-800 3P 312 305 256 80 40 M12 181 264 202 155 20 30 180 180~190
Note: a. f is the min distance needed to mount and dismount the coil.
b. X1: arcing distance is identified by operating voltage and breaking capacity.
NC2-115Ns~630Ns (Horizontal mounting)
φ φ
b max
d
J
a max c
mm
Modle pole A max b max c d J
NC2-115Ns
3
4
350
425
163
208
330
370
71
108
D
3 350 171 330 71
NC2-150Ns
4 425 211 370 111
3 350 174 330 78
NC2-185Ns
4 430 223 370 118
110~120
3 350 197 330 78
NC2-225Ns
4 430 243 370 118
3 450 203 428 109
NC2-265Ns
4 546 249 485 157
3 450 206 428 124
NC2-330Ns
4 546 251 485 172
3 485 206 460 157
NC2-400Ns
4 595 251 485 170~180 157
NC2-500Ns 3 485 238 460 156
3 650 304 625 139
NC2-630Ns
4 810 364 785 180~190 139
NC2-800Ns 3 650 304 625 139
NC2-115Nc~630Nc (Vertical mounting)

H
H
H1
H1
9
12.5
a. NC2-115Nc~225Nc b. NC2-265Nc~800Nc
H H1
Model
Min Max Min Max
NC2-115Nc、NC2-150Nc 200 310 80 190
NC2-185Nc、NC2-225Nc 220 310 100 190
NC2-265Nc 250 380 130 260
NC2-330Nc 260 380 60 200
NC2-400Nc 280 380 100 200
NC2-500Nc 300 380 120 200
NC2-630Nc 380 380 200 200
NC2-800Nc 380 380 200 200
8. Assembly with overload relay
8.1 Assembly with thermal overload relay
Assembled thermal ocerload relay

Model of
contactor Recommended fuse type
Model Rated current (A)
aM gG
80~125 125 200
NC2-115
NC2-150 100~160 160 250
NC2-185
NC2-225
125~200 200 315
NR2-200
160~250 250 400
NC2-185
NC2-225 200~315 315 500
NC2-265
NC2-330
NC2-400 250~400 400 630
NC2-500
NC2-630~800
315~500 500 800
NR2-630
400~630 630 800
NCK3
Definite Purpose Contactor,
20~90A
1. General
1.1 Certificates: UL，CE、CSA
1.2 Application: HVACR;
1.3 Utilization category: AC-1, AC-8a;
1.4 Rated insulation voltage: 630V;
1.5 Standard: UL/CSA 60947-4-1 IEC/EN 60947-4-1
1.6 Normal operating conditions:
Ambient air temperature: -5℃~+40℃
Pollution degree: 2.
Altitude: ≤2000m
D
Mounting angle: The inclination between the mounting
surface and vertical plane cannot exceed ±5°.
1.7 IP00
2. Type designation
N C K 3 - □ /□ □ □
Number of N/C auxiliary contacts
Number of N/O auxiliary contacts
Number of main contacts, blank: 3P
Full Load Amps (AC-8a)
Design sequence No.
For HVACR application
Contactor
Company code
3. Technical data
3.1 Contactor
★ NCK3, 1P+shunt
NCK3-20/1-40/1
Model FLA LRA
RES Voltage Single-phase horsepower
240/277V 480V 600V 240/277V 480V 600V
120 1
NCK3-20/1 25 25 25 35 150 125 100
240 2
120 1
NCK3-25/1 25 25 25 35 150 125 100
240 2
120 1
NCK3-30/1 32 32 32 40 200 150 120
240 2
120 1
NCK3-32/1 32 32 32 40 200 150 120
240 2
120 2
NCK3-40/1 40 40 40 50 240 200 160
240 3
★ NCK3, 1pole+1NC auxiliary contact
NCK3-20/101-40/101
Model FLA LRA
240/277V 480V 600V 240/277V 480V 600V
120 1
NCK3-20/101 25 25 25 35 150 125 100
240 2
120 1
NCK3-25/101 25 25 25 35 150 125 100
240 2
120 1
NCK3-30/101 32 32 32 40 200 150 120
240 2
120 1
NCK3-32/101 32 32 32 40 200 150 120
240 2
120 2
NCK3-40/101 40 40 40 50 240 200 160
240 3
3.2 Contactor
★ NCK3, 2Pole
NCK3-20/2-40/2
Model FLA LRA
240/277V 480V 600V 240/277V 480V 600V
120 2
NCK3-20/2 25 25 25 35 150 125 100
240 3
120 2
NCK3-25/2 25 25 25 35 150 125 100
240 3
120 2
NCK3-30/2 32 32 32 40 200 150 120
240 3
120 2
NCK3-32/2 32 32 32 40 200 150 120
240 3
120 2
NCK3-40/2 40 40 40 50 240 200 160
240 3
★ NCK3, 3Pole
NCK3-20-40
Model FLA LRA Single-phase Three-phase
RES Voltage
240/277V 480V 600V 240/277V 480V 600V horsepower horsepower
120 2 /
240/277 5 10
NCK3-20 25 25 25 35 150 125 100
480 / 15
600 / 20
120 2 /
240/277 5 10
NCK3-25 25 25 25 35 150 125 100
480 / 15
600 / 20
120 2 /
240/277 5 10
NCK3-30 32 32 32 40 200 150 120
480 / 15
600 / 20
120 2 /
240/277 5 10
NCK3-32 32 32 32 40 200 150 120
480
600
/
/
15
20
D
120 3 /
240/277 7.5 10
NCK3-40 40 40 40 50 240 200 160
480 / 20
600 / 25
NCK3-50-60
RES Voltage
240/277V 480V 600V 240/277V 480V 600V horsepower HP horsepower HP
110/120 3 /
200/208 7.5 15
NCK3-50 50 50 50 65 300 250 200 240/277 10 15
480 / 25
600 / 25
110/120 5 /
200/208 7.5 25
NCK3-60 60 60 60 75 360 300 240 240/277 10 25
480 / 30
600 / 30
NCK3-75-90
RES Voltage
240/277V 480V 600V 240/277V 480V 600V horsepower HP horsepower HP
110/120 5 /
200/208 10 20
NCK3-75 75 75 75 90 450 375 300 240/277 15 25
480 / 50
600 / 50
110/120 7.5 /
200/208 15 25
NCK3-90 90 90 90 120 540 450 360 240/277 20 (88A FLA) 30
480 / 60
600 / 60 (62A FLA)
3.3 Coil specifications
★ 1Pole+shunt, 1Pole+1 NC, auxiliary contact, 2Pole
Model NCK3-25(20) NCK3-30(32) NCK3-40
Power In-rush (VA) 55 55 55

consumption Sealed (VA) 13 13 13
Operation Operation voltage (85%~110%) Us

Power supply voltage Us AC50/60Hz, 24V, 110V,120V, 220V,240V
★ 3Pole
Model NCK3-20~40 NCK3-50~60 NCK3-75~90
Power In-rush (VA) 51 83 165

Operation Operation voltage (85%~110%) Us

Power supply voltage Us AC50/60Hz, 24V, 110V,120V, 220V,240V
3.4 Specifications of auxiliar y contact
★ 1Pole+1 NC auxiliar y contact
Capacity of auxiliary contact

Ith (A) Ui (V)
AC (VA) DC (W)
10 600 300 30
★ 3Poe，lateral auxiliar y contact（NCF8-11 1NC+1NO）
Utilization Rated insulation Resistive amps Rated operational Rated operational Control
category voltage (V) (A) voltage (V) current (A) capacity
AC-15 660V 10 380/400 0.95 360VA

DC-13 660V 10 220/230 0.15 33W
4. Terminal connection
Cabling(mm2) (Cu) Tightening torque (N·m)
Model Rigid wire Flexible Main

with single core Coil
stranded wire circuit
torque(N.m) torque(N.m)
NCK3-20 2.5~6 2.5~4 - - M8 M5 2.3
NCK3-25 2.5~6 2.5~4 - - M8 M5 2.3
NCK3-32 4~10 2.5~6 - - M8 M5 2.3
NCK3-40 4~10 2.5~6 - - M8 M5 2.3
NCK3-50 6~16 4~10 M3.5 0.8 M10 - 4.5
NCK3-60 6~16 4~10 M3.5 0.8 M10 - 4.5
NCK3-75 16~35 10~25 M4 1.2 M12 - 5.6
NCK3-90 25~35 16~25 M4 1.2 M12 - 5.6


NCK3-20/1~40/1
4-φ5.4
41.3±0.2
22±0.14
92max
5.2
41.3±0.2
45±0.2
67max
55max
D
NCK3-20/10~40/10
C
Φ5.4
R
41.3±0.2
22±0.14
C
92max
5.4
41.3±0.2
67max
45±0.2
55max
NCK3-20~40
67.5max
57±0.2
5
5.
37.5±0.2
5.5
82.5±0.25
79.2±0.25
95.2max
5.5
5.5
12.6
73max
37.5±0.2
51.7±0.2
NCK3-50~60
67.5max
57±0.2
37.5±0.2
5
5.
5.5
5.5
82.5±0.25
79.2±0.25
115max
5.5
5.5
79max
37.5±0.2
51.7±0.2
NCK3-75~90
74±0.18
64±0.18
5
117±0.18
136max
+0,14
Φ10 0
+0,14
Φ5 0
120max
92max
2.Description of product model
Main load terminal

Denoted by L and S,
L indicates the box lug,
S indicates the screw
Denoted by letter T, T indicates two

quick- plug terminals and F indicates
four quick-plug terminals, omitted
when the single housing has only one
terminal (e.g. 3P, 4P).
1N represents 1 pole ,2N represents 2 poles,

3 represents 3 poles,4 represents 4 poles,
Rated current (AC-8a)
Design serial number

For HVACR application
AC-specific
D
AC contactor
NCK5 Definite Purpose Enterprise feature code
Contactor 20～40A 3. Product features
3.1 The coil is closed.

1. Overview
3.2 The range of coil voltage is complete, including 24V-480V. A
1.1 Product certification: UL, CSA CE
wide range covering 208V-240V is available for user
1.2 Application: HVACR selection.
1.3 Usage category: AC-1, AC-8a 3.3 3 Poles、4 poles: The coil connection can be up or down, with
1.4 Rated insulation voltage Ui: 630V 2 quick-plug connections, 1 quick-plug +
1.5 Applicable standard: UL/CSA 60947-4-1 IEC/EN 20947-4-1 screwed connection for user selection.
1.6 Normal operating conditions: 3.4 3 Poles、4 pole: The main circuit has diverse wiring modes:
Ambient air temperature: -5℃~+40℃ combined screw, box lug and two quick-plug
Pollution degree: 2.
combinations.
Altitude: ≤2000m
3.5 1 pole、2 pole：The main circuit has diverse wiring modes
Mounting angle: The inclination between the mounting
combined screw，box lug and two quick-plug or
surface and vertical plane cannot exceed ±5°.
four quick-plug combination.
1.7 IP00
4. Technical Parameters
4.1.1 Technical parameters of single two-pole main circuit
Definite purpose Rating HP ratings（single phase）
Model FLA LRA

RES 120V 240V
240/277V 480V 600V 240/277V 480V 600V
1 2
NCK5-20/1N-25/1N
25 25 25 35 150 125 100
NCK5-20/2N-25/2N
2 3
1 2
NCK5-30/1N-32/1N
32 32 32 40 200 150 120
NCK5-30/2N-32/2N
2 3
NCK5-40/1N 3
40 40 40 50 240 200 160 2
NCK5-40/2N
4.1.2 Technical parameters of 3 poles、4 poles main circuit
Definite purpose rating (Three phase) HP ratings
Model FLA LRA

RES Voltage Single phase Three phase
240/277V 480V 600V 240/277V 480V 600V
120 2 /
NCK5-20/3 240/277 5 10
25 25 25 35 150 125 100
NCK5-20/4 480 / 15
600 / 20
120 2 /
240/277 5 10
NCK5-25/3 25 25 25 35 150 125 100
NCK5-25/4 480 / 15
600 / 20
120 2 /
240/277 5 10
NCK5-30/3 32 32 32 40 200 150 120
NCK5-30/4 480 / 15
600 / 20
120 2 /
240/277 5 10
NCK5-32/3 32 32 32 40 200 150 120
480 / 15
NCK5-32/4
600 / 20
120 3 /
240/277 7.5 10
NCK5-40/3 40 40 40 50 240 200 160
480 / 20
NCK5-40/4
600 / 25
4.2 Technical Parameters of Coil
NCK5-20/3～40/3
NCK5-20/1N～40/1N NCK5-20/2N～40/2N
Type NCK5-20/4～40/4
Coil power IN-rush(VA) 45 55 62

Operating Pull-in voltage (85%~110%)Us

range Release voltage (20~65%）Us
Coil voltage (1 poles、2 poles： AC 50 or 60Hz；3 poles、4 poles： AC50 / 60Hz) 24V, 36V, 48V, 110V, 120V, 220V, 208~240V, 277V, 440V, 480V
4.3 Technical Parameters of 3 poles and 4poles Auxiliary Module (Side-mounted)
1NC+1NO auxiliary module (NCF8-11)
Usage Rated insulation Agreed free air heating Rated operating

Rated operating current Control capacity
category voltage (V) current (A) voltage (V)
AC-15 690 10 380/400 0.95 360VA

DC-13 690 10 220/230 0.15 33W
D
Contactors,Relays,Starters Contactors
Contactors Contactors,Relays,Starters
NC11 AC Contactor
1. Scope of application
NC11 contactor is mainly used in an electric meter box to
control the power supply system of the electric meter: Under
normal conditions, the main contacts of the contactor are
closed. Only if the consumers fail to pay the electric fee, the
power supply company can send a signal to the contactor to
apply power to the coil of the contactor, thereby cutting off
the power supply. Besides, it can also be used in the power
distribution cabinet in refrigerated warehouses and laundries.
NC11 contactor can be used in AC 50Hz or 60Hz circuit up to
400V/65A under AC-3 category for remote open and close.
Applicable standards: IEC 60947-4-1. EN 947-4-1.
2. Model and meanings
N C 11- /
Number of normally closed main contact
Number of normally open main contact
Basic specification code, expressed by 400V,

AC-3 rated operational current
AC contactor
Company code
3.1 Ambient air temperature: -5°C~+ 55°C; the mean value does
not exceed +35°C within 24 hours.
3.2 Altitude: not exceed 2000m.
3.3 Atmospheric conditions: The relative humidity shall not exceed

50% when the maximum temperature is +40°C; the relative
humidity can be higher when the temperature is lower; for
example, at +20°C, the relative humidity can be 90%. Special
measures shall be taken if there is condensation caused
accidently owing to temperature changes.
3.4 Pollution degree: 3.
3.5 Installation category: category Ⅲ.
3.6 Shock and vibration: the product shall be installed and used
in the place without serious shaking, shock, and vibration.
3.7 Protection class: IP10


Relevant technical parameters of the contactor are shown in table 1:
Table 1
Product model and specification
Technical parameters
NC11-65/04
Rated insulation voltage Ui 690V
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 8kV
Number of poles 4P
Storage -50℃~+80℃
Surrounding ambient temperature Operation -5℃~+55℃
Permissible -25℃~+55℃
Maximum sea level elevation 2000m
Installation way A ±5° angle with the normal erection plan is permissible
Rated operational current 65A
AC-3，θ≤55℃
(Ue≤440V) 80A
AC-1，θ≤55℃
Rated operational voltage 400V
Conventional free air thermal current Ith,0≤55 80A
Controllable three phase squirrel-cage motor 18.5
230V
Motor power kW 30
400V
Mechanical endurance (10k times) 100
Electrical endurance (AC-3) (10k times) 60
Pull-in voltage in thermal state (+55°C) (85%~110%)Us
Release voltage in cold state (-25°C) (75%~20%)Us
1 piece; min/max mm2 6/25

Flexible wire without terminal
2 pieces; min/max mm2 4/10
Connecting wire Flexible wire with terminal
2 pieces; min/max mm2 4/10
Hard wire without terminal
2 piece s; min/max mm2 4/10
Tightening torque 4 N.m.
Model of the fuse used RT16-80
Installation category Category Ⅲ
Protection grade IP10
Class of pollution Class 3
The body part has no auxiliary contact,

Auxiliary contact
but a NCF1-11C can be hung to each side respectively.
Work system applicable to the contactor 8-hour, no-break, intermittent periodic duty
Rated operational voltage of the coil 220V/230V. 380V/400V
5. Overall arrangement and key technologies
Contactors of this series are bridge type, double breaking points, directly operated AC contactor. The main contact is quadrupole normally
closed; it is reaction force is from the bridge shaped contact.
6. Overall and installation dimension

Figure 1 overall dimension and installation dimension of nc11-65/04
Bmax
b1
3×φ1
Amax
F Cmax
Table 1 mm
D
Basic specification Amax Bmax Cmax a b1 B2 Φ1 Φ2 F
+0.58
65 77 129 105 40±0.50 105±0.7 — 6.5 — 12
0
7. Ordering instructions
When an order is placed, please point out:

7.1 Complete name and model of the contactor;
7.2 Rated operational voltage and frequency or specification code of coil;
7.3 Amount on order.
Example of order: NC11-65/04AC contactor; coil voltage 220V 50Hz 10 sets.
NCH8 Modular AC Contactor

20~63A
1. General
1.1 Electric ratings: up to 20A, 25A, 40A, 63A, 230V, 400V

AC50/60Hz;
1.2 Utilization category: AC-1, AC-7a, AC-7b, AC-3;
1.3 Standard: IEC/EN 61095, IEC 60947-4-1
2. Model and meanings
N C H 8- /
Number of normally closed main contact

Number of normally open main contact
A rated operational current
Household
AC contactor
Company code
3. Features
3.1 Compact design and modularization design;
3.2 Insulation material with excellent performances has been

adopted to enhance the operation security to a great extent;
3.3 Elegant appearance. A mounting instruction diagram is

appended for convenient operation;
3.4 No noise during operation.
3.5 IP20
4. Technical data
4.1 Ratings
Utilization Conventional Controlled

Model Ui (V) Ue (V~) Ie (A)
category heating current (A) power (kW)
AC-1/AC-7a
AC-3/AC-7b
AC-1/AC-7a
AC-3/AC-7b
AC-1/AC-7a
AC-3/AC-7b
AC-1/AC-7a
AC-3/AC-7b
AC-1/AC-7a
AC-3/AC-7b
D
AC-1/AC-7a
AC-3/AC-7b
AC-1/AC-7a
AC-3/AC-7b
AC-1/AC-7a
AC-3/AC-7b
4.2 Action (operation) conditions:

When the ambient air temperature is - 5 ℃ ~ + 40 ℃, the rated control power supply voltage us is applied to the contactor suction coil,
so that when it is heated to a stable state, the contactor can be reliably closed under any voltage within the range of (85% ~ 110%) us.
The release voltage is neither higher than 75% us nor less than 20% us.
4.2.1 Agreed operational performance
Utilization Making conditions Breaking conditions Electrification Interval Operating

category I/Ie U/Ue COSΦ Ic/Ie Ur/Ue COSΦ time (s) time (s) frequency
AC-1 1.0 1.05 0.8 1.0 1.05 0.8 0.05 10 6000

AC-7a 1.0 1.05 0.8 1.0 1.05 0.8 0.05 10 30000
AC-3/AC-7b 6.0 1.0 0.45 1.0 0.17 0.45 0.05 10 30000
4.2.2Making and breaking capacity
Utilization Making and breaking conditions Electrification Interval Operating

category Ic/Ie Ur/Ue COSΦ time (s) time (s) frequency
AC-1/AC-7a 1.0 1.05 0.8 0.05 10 50

AC-3/AC-7b 8 1.05 0.45 0.05 10 50
4.3 Conventional heating current under different ambient temperature
Rated current 40℃ 50℃ 60℃ 70℃

Ie=20A 20A 18A 16A 14A
Ie=25A 25A 22A 18A 16A
Ie=40A 40A 38A 36A 32A
Ie=63A 63A 57A 50A 46A
4.4 Number of appended lamps with voltage up to 230V
Tungsten filament and halogen 230V

Unit power
60W 100W 200W 300W 500W 1000W
20A 20 12 6 4 2 1
25A 36 20 11 7 4 2
40A 85 50 25 17 10 5
63A 115 70 35 23 14 7
L2
L
H
H1
D
L1
D
Model L L1 L2 H H1
2P 4P
NCH8-20~25 18 36 85 35.5 45 65.5 50
NCH8-40~36 36 54 85 35.5 45 65.5 50
Model Number of contact Coil voltage
NCH8-20 2NO
NCH8-20 1NO+1NC
NCH8-20 2NC
NCH8-20 1NO
NCH8-20 1NC
NCH8-20 4NO
NCH8-20 2NO+2NC
NCH8-20 3NO+1NC
NCH8-25 2NO
NCH8-25 1NO+1NC
NCH8-25 2NC
NCH8-25 1NO
NCH8-25 1NC
NCH8-25 4NO
24V,220/230V,240V 50/60Hz
NCH8-25 2NO+2NC
NCH8-25 3NO+1NC
NCH8-40 4NO
NCH8-40 3NO+1NC
NCH8-40 2NO+2NC
NCH8-40 2NO
NCH8-40 1NO+1NC
NCH8-40 2NC
NCH8-63 4NO
NCH8-63 3NO+1NC
NCH8-63 2NO+2NC
NCH8-63 2NO
NCH8-63 1NO+1NC
NCH8-63 2NC
2. Type Specification and Definitions

N CH 8 - □ M/□ □ □
frequency：50/60Hz
Rated control power voltage Us (V)：

AC24V AC110V AC220-240V
Number main contact:

11: 1NO+1NC 02: 2NC 20: 2NO
40: 4NO 22: 2NO+2NC 04: 4NC
31: 3NO+1NC
Modular contactor with Manual operation
Rated operating current (A):

16/20/25/32/40/63
Modular contactor with Manual operation
Enterprise characteristics code
AX -11 / □
NCH8-□ M
Auxiliar y contact
Modular contactor with
Manual operation Auxiliar y contact group: 11: 1NO+1NC 20: 2NO
Note: Auxiliar y contacts are optional accessories
(not standard accessories).
1. The purpose of use
1.1 NCH8-□M series Manual Modular AC contactor (here inafter
referred as contactor) is mainly used in power systems with
3. Regular Operating Conditions
AC 50Hz/60Hz, rated operating voltage up to 400V and 3.1 Ambient temperature：-25℃~+70℃
rated operating current up to 63A. It is used as remote or
3.2 Humidity：Relative humidity＜50% at +40℃; up to 90% at
manual switch for circuit control under AC-7b and AC-7a
(non-inductive load or low-inductive load/resistance furnace, +20℃
domestic appliance and low-inductive load of similar 3.3 Altitude：＜2000m
applications) application category. The contactor shall not
3.4 Pollution class：Class 2
be used for breaking short-circuit current, therefore it
should be used with a proper short-circuit protection device. 3.5 Installation category：Class Ⅱ
1.2 Standard: IEC/EN 61095、IEC/EN60947-4-1 3.6 Protection class：IP20
3.7 Installation conditions：Vertical installation; the inclination of

the installation surface to any direction should not exceed 5°;
TH35-7.5 steel mounting rails should be used for installation.
3.8 Operation conditions：Pickup voltage： (85%~110%) Us;

release voltage：(20%~75%) Us
4. Main Technical Parameters

Table 1 Main Technical Parameters
Model 16A 20A 25A 32A 40A 63A
AC-7a 16 20 25 32 40 63
AC-7b 6 7 9 12 18 25
Conventional thermal current Ith (A) 25 25 25 63 63 63
Rated operating Rated Ue (V) 250V (2P), 400V(4P)
2P 1NO1NC, 2NO, 2NC

Number of main contacts
4P 2NO 2NC, 3NO 1NC, 4NO, 4NC
250V 3.5 4.5 5.5 8 9 14
AC-7a 400V 6 7.5 9.5 12 15 24

Control power (kW)
AC-7b 250V 1.4 1.6 2 3 4 5.5
400V 2.2 2.5 3.2 4.5 6 8

Electrical life (times） 8×104
Mechanical life (times) 100×104
Rated control power voltage Us (V) AC24V, AC110V, AC220-240V

Intermittent 30 times/h load factor 40%
Rated duty system
Eight hours Basic duty system
Hard wire 1.5~2.5 2×1.5

Control circuit
Flexible wire 1.5~2.5 2×2.5
Wiring (mm2)
Hard wire 1.5~6 6~25
Power circuit
Flexible wire 1.5~4 6~16
Control circuit 0.8
Torque (N.m)
Power circuit 0.8 3.5
5. Structure and Operation Principles
When the handle is moved to the "O" position, the control power on/off, contactor does not act; when the handle is in the "auto"
position, the contactor switch on/off is control by control power on/off, just like the normal contactor; when the handle is moved to the "I"
position, the contactor switch on immediately, and the handle automatically returns to the "auto" position after the control power from off
to on; when the handle is in the "I" position, use a screwdriver to push out the white pin key at "P" position, the contactor is switch on and
not acted by the control power on/off.
Figure 1 Manual Operation Diagram

Operation
Position: O Position: auto Position: I Position: I + P
A1
A2
A1 1
A2 2
Automatic return to
“auto” position
6. Outline and Installation Dimensions

Unit: mm
Figure2 NCH8-16M, NCH8-20M, NCH8-25M
73.5
68
49.5
18 36 5.5 23.5
35.5
45
81.5
4.2
Figure 3 NCH8-32M, NCH8-40M, NCH8-63M

73.5
68
49.5
36 54
5.5 23.5
85.5
45
35.5
4.6
Figure 4 AX-11
66
49.2
9 5.5 23.5
81
45
Figure 5 Installation
18 9
Spacer
Note: When the ambient temperature is higher than 60℃，the spacer must be assembled on both sides to facilitate heat dissipation.
During product selection, the user shall specify the following contents, if necessary, application conditions or requirements shall be
further specified:
Product name & type
Rated operating current
Number of poles of main contact
Rated control power voltage & frequency

CJX1-K series AC vacuum contactors
1 Gerernal
CJX1-K series AC vacuum contactors (hereinafter referred to as contactors) are mainly suitable to
be used in the circuit with AC 50Hz~60Hz, rated working voltage up to 1000V, and rated working
current up to 820A, for remote connection and disconnection of circuits. The contactors can be
used in combination with appropriate thermal overload relay or electronic protector and other
protective devices to form a vacuum electromagnetic starter, especially suitable for forming an
explosion-proof vacuum electromagnetic starter. The contactors are widely applied in mines,
smelting, petroleum extraction, storage, chemical industry, military industry, textile, construction
and other flammable, explosive or harsh environment.
Compliance standards: IEC 60947-4-1。
2 Type designation
CJX 1- □/ □□ K
Vacuum
Quantity of normally closed auxiliary contacts
Quantity of normally open auxiliary contacts
Basic specification code (Used in AC-3 class, expressed

by rated working current at 380V)
Design serial No.
AC contactor
AX2-1 1 □
"A" hangs on the left inner side, "B" hangs on the right
inner side, "C" hangs on the left outer side, and "D" hangs
on the right outer side
Quantity of normally closed auxiliary contacts
Quantity of normally open auxiliary contacts
Auxiliary contact group
3 Normal working conditions and installation conditions

3.1 Ambient temperature: -25°C~+60°C, with average value not exceeding +35°C within 24 hours.
3.2 Atmospheric conditions: When the highest temperature is +60°C, the relative humidity of the air
does not exceed 50%, and the higher humidity is allowed at lower temperatures. Special measures
should be taken in case of occasional condensation due to variations in temperature.
3.3 Pollution degree: 3.
3.4 Installation category: III.
3.5 Installation conditions: Vertical installation, the inclination of installation surface plane
is not greater than ±5°.
3.6 Impact vibration: The product should be installed and used in a place free of significant
shaking, impact and vibration.
5° 5°
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
90° 90°
CJX1-300/22K
GB/T 14048.4
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3

4 Product advantages
Wide applicable power supply
AC and DC coils are interchangeable.

For AC, 50Hz~60Hz are interchangeable.
Energy- saving
The electromagnetic system adopts dual-coil energy-saving technology,

which saves energy by about 85% compared with traditional contactors.
No electromagnetic noise
The conversion module of the electromagnetic system has the function
of surge suppression, but also converts AC power to DC power in
operation, thereby avoiding noise caused by electromagnetic oscillation.
Safety and environmental protection
Vacuum arc extinguishing technology is used, no arc spraying.
Easy maintenance
CJX1-225~500/22K coil block adopts the drawer-type structure, which can be

directly drawn out for replacement.
5 Main parameters and technical performance

Rated insulation voltage (Ui):1000V
Contactor type CJX1-225/22K CJX1-265/22K CJX1-300/22K
Appearance
Conventional free air thermal current Ith (A) 330 330 330
400V/380V
AC-3 Rated working current Ie (A) 690V/660V 225 265 300
1000V
400V/380V
110 132 160
AC-3使用类别下
The maximum power (kW)
of controllable three-phase 690V/660V 200 250 250
可控制三相鼠笼式电动机
squirrel -cage motor under
的最大功率（kW）
AC-3 class 1000V 315 355 400
AC-4 Rated operational current Ie (A) 400V/380V 110 132 160
The maximum power (kW) of

controllable three-phase
400V/380V 110 132 160
squirrel cage motor under
AC-4 class
Operating frequency 1200 1200 1200

Mechanical life (times/h)
Number of times×10 4
700 700 700
Operating frequency
600 600 600
AC-3 electrical life (times/h)
Number of times×10 4
200 200 200
Start 95 95 95
Coil power (VA)
Operation 7.4 7.4 7.4
Basic parameters of auxiliary contact AC-15：380V 0.95A，DC-13： 220V 0.15A，Ui:660V，Ith:10A
Quantity of auxiliary contact 2 NO and 2 NC
AC 50~60Hz
Coil voltage 110V、220V、380V
DC
Product net weight (kg) 7.369 7.369 7.369
CJX1-400/22K CJX1-500/22K CJX1-630/22K CJX1-820/22K
610 610 700 910
400 500 630 820
200 250 330 450
400 500 500 800
560 710 600 800
200 250 355 400
200 250 355 400
1200 1200 1200 1200
700 700 500 500
600 600 120 120
150 150 120 120
115 115 180 180
6.6 6.6 25 25
AC-15：380V 0.95A，DC-13： 220V 0.15A，Ui:660V，Ith:10A
2 NO and 2 NC 4 NO and 4 NC
110V、220V、380V
10.618 10.618 19.800 19.800

6 Overall and installation dimensions

Figure1 CJX1-225/22K、CJX1-265/22K、CJX1-300/22K
151max
+0.58
120±0.6 Φ9 0 211max
M10
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
215max
180±0.8
CJX1-300/22K AC-3
AC vacuum contactor 380/400 660/690 1000
GB/T 14048.4 160 250 400
IEC 60947-4-1 300 300 300
Ui=1000V Ith=330A Zhejiang Chint Electrics Co., Ltd.
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
48 48 137
Figure2 CJX1-400/22K、CJX1-500/22K
168max
+0.58 228max
130±0.64 Φ9 0
M10
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

218max
180±0.8
CJX1-500/22K AC-3
AC vacuum contactor 380/400 660/690 1000
GB/T 14048.4 250 500 710
IEC 60947-4-1 500 500 500
Ui=1000V Ith=610A Zhejiang Chint Electrics Co., Ltd.
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
150
48 48
Figure3 CJX1-630/44K、CJX1-820/44K
235max
70±0.6 Φ9+0.58
0
240max
M12
150±0.8
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
φ12 +0.66
0
A1
A2
300max
241±0.7
211±0.8
CJX1-630/44K
AC vacuum contactor
AC-3
GB/T 14048.4
IEC 60947-4-1 200 330 500
Ui=1000V Ith=700A 630 630 630
Zhejiang Chint Electrics Co., Ltd.
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
70 70 100
7 Type selection and ordering data
Control voltage Recommended matching bimetallic overload relay

Product type AC 50～ Order code
60Hz/DC Adjusting scope of
Product type
（V） setting current (A)
NR2-200
110 275702
125-200A
CJX1-225/22K
220 275703 NR2-630
160-250A
380 275704
NR2-630
110 275705 160-250A
CJX1-265/22K
220 275706 NR2-630
200-315A
380 275707
NR2-200
NR2-630
110 275708
200-315A
CJX1-300/22K
220 275709
NR2-630
250-400A
380 275710
NR2-630
110 275711
250-400A
CJX1-400/22K
220 275712 NR2-630
315-500A
380 275713
NR2-630
110 275714
315-500A
CJX1-500/22K
220 275715 NR2-630
400-630A
380 275716
110 275696
NR2-630 NR2-630
CJX1-630/44K 400-630A
220 275697
380 275698
110 275699
NR2-630
CJX1-820/44K 400-630A
220 275700
380 275701
Ordering instruction: When ordering contactor, the complete product type, name, voltage and quantity of coil must be indicated.
Recommended matching electronic overload relay Recommended matching SCPD

Rated Conductor Tightening
current (A) section (mm2) torque (N.M)
Adjusting scope of
Product type Product type
setting current (A)
NR8-200
100-200A
NR8-200
125-250A
NR8-200
125-250A
400A 185
NR8-630
200-400A
NRE8-200 RT36-2
NR8-630
200-400A
NR8-630
200-400A
NR8-630
200-400A
NR8-630
315-630A
630A 2X185 14
NR8-630
315-630A
NR8-630 RT36-3
315-630A
NRE8-630 NR8-630
315-630A 2X240 14
1000A
NR8-630
315-630A
2X (60X 5)
RT36-4 14
copper busbar
Order example: 10 sets of CJX1-225/22K AC vacuum contactor coil voltage 220V 50Hz
2. Type designation
C J 19 □ □
Number of auxiliary contacts

20: 2N/O, 11: 1N/O+1N/C
02: 2N/C (CJ19-25~43)
21: 2N/O+1N/C, 12: 1N/O+2N/C (CJ19-63~95)
10: 1N/O, 01: 1N/C (CJ19-115~170)
Basic model code
Design sequence No.
Contactor
the average during 24 hours should not exceed +35℃;
3.2 Altitude:≤ 2000m;
3.3 Atmosphere conditions: At mounting site,

CJ19 Contactor relative humidity not exceed 50% at the max temperature
of +40℃, higher relative humidity is allowable
for Capacitor Switching under lower temperature. For example,
RH could be 90% at +20℃,
special measures should be taken to occurrence of dews;
1. General
3.4 Pollution degree: 3
1.1 Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, up to 690V;
3.5 Installation category: Ⅲ
3.6 Installation conditions :
the inclination between installation plane
and vertical plane is within ±5 °
3.7 Impact and shake: the products should locate

in the places where there are no obvious impact and shake.
3.8 Protection class: IP10
4. Technical data
Item CJ19-25 CJ19-32 CJ19-43 CJ19-63 CJ19-95 CJ19-115 CJ19-150 CJ19-170
220/230V 6.7 10 15 20 35 40 46 52
Controllable capacitor
380/400V 12.5 20 25 33.3 50 60 80 90
Capacity
660/690V 18 26 36 48 92 100 120 130
Rated Isolation
Voltage Ui V 690
Rated Operational
220/230V, 380/400V,660/690V
Voltage Ue V
Conventional thermal current Ith A 25 32 43 63 95 200 200 275

Rated Operational current Ie A (380V) 17 23 29 43 72.2 87 115 130
Restrained surge capacity 20 Ie
AC-15: Ie:0.95A Ue:380/400V

Capacity of Auxiliar y contact DC-13: Ie:0.15A Ue:220/250V
Conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
Operating Frequency cycles/h 120

Electrical durability 10 4 10 2
Mechanical durability 10 4 100 300

CJ19-25~ 43
B
C
F
A
D
+0.3
4.5 0
CJ19-63~95
B
C
6.5
105±0.7
129max
40±0.5
CJ19-115~170
192max
110±0.6
96±0.5
1L1 3L2 5L3

155max
200max
130±0.8
R
CHNT
2T1 4T2 6T3

Φ7
120max
Model Amax Bmax Cmax Dmax E F Note

CJ19-25 80 47 124 76 34/35 50/60
Not only fixed by screws but also could
CJ19-32 90 58 132 86 40 48
be fixed with 35mm din rail
CJ19-43 90 58 136 86 40 48
CJ19-63 132 79 150 - - - Not only fixed by screws but also could
CJ19-95 135 87 158 - - - be fixed with 35mm and 75mm din rail
CJ19-115 200 120 192 155

Not only fixed by screws but also could
CJ19-150 200 120 192 155
be fixed with two 35mm din rail
CJ19-170 200 120 192 155
6. Wiring and installation

6.1 The connection terminals are protected through insulation cover, which is reliable and secure for installation and operation;
6.2 For CJ19-25~43, screws are available for installation, as well as the DIN rail;
for CJ19-63~95, 35mm or 75mm standard rail are available for installation.
for CJ19-115~170, screws are available for installation, as well as two 35mm DIN rail.
NR8 Thermal Overload Relay

1. General
Nr8 series thermal overload relay (hereinafter referred
to as thermal relay) is used to provide overload and phase
failure protection for AC motors with a frequency of AC
50Hz/60Hz, a voltage of up to 690V and a current of
0.1A~38A that operate continuously or intermittently.
The thermal relay also has temperature compensation,

operation indication, automatic and manual reset and
stop functions and stable and reliable performances.
Standard: IEC 60947-4-1.
Plug-in mounting is used between the thernal relay

and the contactor.
2.1 Altitude: not higher than 2000m.
D
2.2 When the ambient tempeature is -5℃~+40℃, the mean
value is no greater than +35℃ within 24 hours.
2.3 Atmospheric conditions: When the ambient air temperature

is +40℃, the relative humidity of the air shall not be higher
than 50%; a higher relative humidity is allowed at a lower
temperature; for example, for the wettest month, the lowest
temperature averaged shall not be higher than +25℃, the
maximum relative humidity averaged shall be 90%, and special
measures shall be taken for the condensation occasionally
produced due to temperature change.
2.4 Class of pollution: 3.
2.5 The inclination between the mounting plane and the vertical
plane shall not exceed 5°.
2.6 In non-explosive media that do not contain a sufficient

amount of gas or conductive dust to cause metal corrosion or
insulation failure.
2.7 In places with rain and snow protection equipment and not
full of vapor.
2.8 In places where there is no significant shake, impact or vibration.

3. Technical data
Item NR8-11.5 NR8-38

Current class 13 38
Nominal insulation voltage V 690 690
Phase failure protection Have Have
Manual and automatic reset Have Have
Temperature compensation Have Have
Tripping indication Have Have
Test button Have Have
Stop button Have Have
Mounting type Plug-in type Plug-in type
Auxiliary contact 1NO+1NC
1NO+1NC
AC-15 230V rated current A /
2.61
AC-15 380V/400V rated current A 1.5
1.5
DC-13 220V rated current A 0.2
0.2
1~10
Single-core or stranded conductor 1~2.5
Main circuit M4
Conductor Terminal screw M4
cross-sectional 0.5~2.5
area mm2 Single-core or stranded conductor 0.5~2.5
Auxiliary circuit M3.5
Terminal screw M3.5
4. Others
4.1 Structural features

4.1.1 Three-phase bimetal type, tripping class 10A.
4.1.2 Phase failure protection.
4.1.3 Setting curent continuously adjustable device.
4.1.4 Temperature compensation.
4.1.5 Operation indication.
4.1.6 Testing mechanism.
4.1.7 Stop button.
4.1.8 Manual and automatic reset button.
4.1.9 One N.O. contact and one N.C. contact, electrically separable.
4.1.10 Mounting type: plug-in mounting with the contactor.
4.2 Protection characteristics
Item No. Setting current multiple Operation time Test conditions

1 1.05 No operation within 2h
Cold state start
Overload 2 1.2 Operation within 2h Hot state start (after No.1)
protection 3 1.5 Operation with 2min Start when thermal equilibrium is reached
after applying a 1 times setting current
4 7.2 2s<Tp≤10s
Any two phases The other phase
5 No operation within 2h Cold state start
Phase failure 1.0 0.9
protection
6 1.15 0 Operation within 2h Hot state start (after No.5)
4.3 Type selection and ordering data (see the table)
Specification of matching fuse(RT 36 is

recommended) A Model of matching
Product appearance Rated current A
contactor
gG
0.1~0.16 2
0.16~0.25 2
0.25~0.4 2
0.4~0.63 2
0.63~1 4
1~1.6 4
1.6~2.5 6
2.5~4 10
4~6 16
5.5~8 20 NC8-06M NC8-06M/Z

NC8-09M NC8-09M/Z
7~10 20 NC8-12M NC8-12M/Z
NR8-11.5
9~13 25
0.10-0.14
0.14-0.2
2
2
D
0.18-0.25 2
0.22-0.32 2
0.28-0.4 2
0.35-0.5 2
0.45-0.63 2
0.55-0.8 4
0.7-1 4
0.9-1.25 4
1.1-1.6 4
1.4-2 6
1.8-2.5 6
NR8-38 NC8-09 NC8-12
2.2-3.2 10
NC8-18 NC8-25
2.8-4 10 NC8-32 NC8-38
3.5-5 16
4.5-6.3 16
5.5-8 20
7.5-10 20
9-13 25
12-16 35
14-20 50
18-24 50
23-32 63
30-38 80
P-113 Contactors,Relays,Starters Relays
4.4 Tripping characteristics
Time Class 10A
2
h
1
40
20
min
10
2
1
40
20
10
S
4
1
2 2
3
1
0.8
0.8 1 2 4 6 10 17 20
Setting current multiple ×(Ir)
One Balanced operation, 3-phase, cold state start.

Two Balanced operation, 2-phase, cold state start.
Three Balanced operation, 3-phase, cold state start.

NR8-11.5
NR8-11.5
RESET TEST/STOP 38
34 36
32
30
57±0.5
45±0.2 65 max
NR8-38
73max
45±0.18 68.5mxa
Relays Contactors,Relays,Starters P-114
4.3 Type selection and ordering data (see the table)
Specification of matching fuse(RT 36 is

recommended) A Model of matching
Product appearance Rated current A
contactor
gG
0.1~0.16 2
0.16~0.25 2
0.25~0.4 2
0.4~0.63 2
0.63~1 4
1~1.6 4
1.6~2.5 6
2.5~4 10
4~6 16
5.5~8 20 NC8-06M NC8-06M/Z

NC8-09M NC8-09M/Z
7~10 20 NC8-12M NC8-12M/Z
NR8-11.5
9~13 25
0.10-0.14
0.14-0.2
2
2
D
0.18-0.25 2
0.22-0.32 2
0.28-0.4 2
0.35-0.5 2
0.45-0.63 2
0.55-0.8 4
0.7-1 4
0.9-1.25 4
1.1-1.6 4
1.4-2 6
1.8-2.5 6
NR8-38 NC8-09 NC8-12
2.2-3.2 10
NC8-18 NC8-25
2.8-4 10 NC8-32 NC8-38
3.5-5 16
4.5-6.3 16
5.5-8 20
7.5-10 20
9-13 25
12-16 35
14-20 50
18-24 50
23-32 63
30-38 80
4.4 Tripping characteristics
Time Class 10A
2
h
1
40
20
min
10
2
1
40
20
10
S
4
1
2 2
3
1
0.8
0.8 1 2 4 6 10 17 20
Setting current multiple ×(Ir)
One Balanced operation, 3-phase, cold state start.

Two Balanced operation, 2-phase, cold state start.
Three Balanced operation, 3-phase, cold state start.

NR8-11.5
NR8-11.5
RESET TEST/STOP 38
34 36
32
30
57±0.5
45±0.2 65 max
NR8-38
73max
45±0.18 68.5mxa
2. Type designation
N Re 8 - □ / □
Mounting version
(F: independent; blank: combined)
Rated current class
Design sequence No.
Electronic overload relay
Company code
3. Features
3.1 Three-phase electronic type, tripping class10A;

D
3.2 Energy saving up to 80%
compared with bimetallic type;
NRE8 Electronic Overload Relay
3.3 Phase-failure protection;
1. General 3.4 Current setting continuously adjustable;
1.1 Certificates: CE, UKrSEPRO, UL; 3.5 Two indicator lights available for indicating normal,
overload time-delay, phase-failure and
1.2 Electrical ratings: AC50/60Hz, 690V;
phase-failure time-delay status respectively;
1.3 Standards: IEC/EN 60947-4-1, UL508
3.6 Manual test mechanism;
3.7 Manual reset button;
3.8 A pair of N/C and N/O contacts;
3.9 Two mounting versions:

independent or combined with a contactor.
4. Technical data
4.1 Main Circuit: Rated insulation;
Voltage: AC 690V;
Rated frequency: 50/60Hz;
4.2 Auxiliary Circuit: Rated insulation;

Voltage: AC 400V;
Rated frequency: 50/60Hz;
See table below for other ratings.
Utilization category AC-15 DC-13

Rated operational voltage Ue (V) 230 400 220
Rated operational current Ie (A) 2.5 1.5 0.2
Conventional heating current (A) 5
014
4.3 Wiring. Connection of main circuit is PVC insulation copper conductor or cable. See table below for details:
Current range (A) Cross section area (mm2) Length (m) Number of piece
I 8 1.0 1 1
8 I 12 1.5 1 1
12 I 20 2.5 1 1
20 I 25 4.0 1 1
25 I 32 6.0 1 1
32 I 50 10 1 1
50 I 65 16 1 1
65 I 85 25 1 1
85 I 115 35 1 1
115 I 150 50 2 1
150 I 175 75 2 1
175 I 225 95 2 1
225 I 250 120 2 1
250 I 275 150 2 1
275 I 350 185 2 1
350 I 400 240 2 1
400 I 500 150 2 2
500 I 630 185 2 2
4.4 Protection Characteristics

4.4.1 Operation characteristic under three-phase balanced-load status as per the table below.
Test Ambient
Series No. I/In Operating time
condition temperature ( )
1 1.05 2h non-tripping Cold status

2 1.20 ＜2h tripping Starts from hot status,
(20 5)
3 1.50 2 min right after item no.1
4 7.20 2s Tp 10s Cold status
Under three-phase operation, if relay current reaches and maintains 1.05 times of the current setting, the green lamp flashes and red lamp
does not light up, which indicates that the relay is not at over-load time-delay status, which equals to non-operation in 2 hours in serial
No. 1 of the table above. A current tolerance for serial No.1 is -3%, and a current tolerance for No.2 is +3% .
Cold status implies the status of the power re-energized of main circuit of relay 5 seconds after its power off.
4.4.2 Operation characteristic under phase-failure status as per the table below.
I/In
Series No. Operating time Tp Test condition Ambient temperature
Any two phases The third phase
Starts from
1 1.0 0.9 2h non-tripping
cold status
(20 5)
Starts from hot
2 1.15 0 2h tripping status, right after
item No.1
Under phase failure operation, if one phase has the current = 0, the other two phases have the current ≥1.15 times of the
current setting, then, the red lamp flashes, and green lamp lights up, which indicates that
the relay is at time-delay release status.
As to this table, the permissible error of the No.1 circuit is -3%, No.2 circuit +3%
4.5 Tripping Curve
Tripping class 10A
t(s)
1000
800
600
400
200
100
80
60
40
1
20
2
10
8
6
D
2
1
1 2 4 6 8 10 I/Ie
1: Cold status 2: Hot status
5.1 For Combined Mounting

NRE8-25
26.3/27.6 81.5max
61.5
20
CHINT
NRE8-25
22 23
77.4max
21
24 Titp
20 25 Test Reset
95 NC 96 97 NO 98
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
46max
NRE8-25/F
45max
91max
35.5
1 L1 3 L2
CHINT
83
35
NRE8-25
22 23
66
21 Trip
24
20 25 Test Reset
NC NO
95 96 97 98
4 T2 6 T3
NRE8-40
93max
17 17 70
20
CHINT
NRE8-40
85max
22 23
21
24 Titp
20 25 Test Reset
95 NC 96 97 NO 98
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
55max
NRE8-40/F
55max 104max
45
1 L1 3 L2
CHINT
94max
NRE8-40
77
35
32
28
24 36 Trip
20 40 Test RESET
95 NC 96 97 NO 98
T1 4 T2 6 T3
NRE8-100
101max
20/23.5 20/23.5
74.6
CHINT
22.8/27.1
NRE8-100
70
80
60 Trip
90
50 100 Test RESET
95 NC 96 97 NO 98
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
NRE8-100/F
72max
118max
615
1/L1 3/L2
123.5
35.5
105
NRE8-100
70 80
60 Test
90
50 100 Stop RESET
95 NC 96 97 NO 98
T1 4 T2 6 T3
6. Applications
K K
K
96 95
L1 L2 L3
Manual reset 97
98
Test 95
96
Stop
T1 T2 T3
Overload relay
M3~
7. Accessories
7.1 Mounting base
Mounting base Description Application D

NRE8-25 Incorporates with NRE8-25 to form
mounting bracket an independently mounted product
Mounting base Description Application
NRE8-40 Incorporates with NRE8-40 to form

PIA-7 Incorporates with NRE8-100 to form

Note: NRE8-100 without mounting bracket
7.2 Assembly with contactors
Thermal Rated Current Model of Model of

overload current setting recommended recommended
Relay (A) range (A) contactor fuse
1.2 0.6~1.2 RT36-4 (NT00-4)
2.4 1.2~2.4 RT36-6 (NT00-6)
4 2~4 RT36-10 (NT00-10)
8 4~8 NC1-09~18 RT36-16 (NT00-16)

NC1-25~32
10 5~10 RT36-20 (NT00-20)
NC7-09~18
12 7~12 NC7-25~38 RT36-25 (NT00-25)
NRE8-25
20 10~20 RT36-40 (NT00-40)
25 20~25 RT36-50 (NT00-50)
32 22~32 RT36-80 (NT00-80)
4 2~4 RT36-10 (NT00-10)
8 4~8 RT36-16 (NT00-16)

NC1-40~65
10 5~10 RT36-20 (NT00-20)
NC7-40~65
20 10~20 RT36-40 (NT00-40)
NRE8-40 40 20~40 RT36-80 (NT00-80)
NC1-40~65,NC7-40~65
65 30~65 RT36-160 (NT00-160)
NC8-40~65
NC1-80~95,NC7-80~95
100 50~100 RT36-200 (NT1-200)
NC8-80~100
NRE8-100
NR2 Thermal Overload Relay

1. General
1.1 Certificates: CE, KEMA, UkrSEPRO, EAC, RCC, UL;
1.2 Electric ratings: AC 50/60Hz, 690V, 0.1A~630A;
1.3 Tripping class: 10A;
1.4 Mounting version:

a. Plug-in: Available for NR2-11.5, 25, 36, 93, 150;
b. Independent: Available for NR2-200, 630;
2. Type designation
N R 2 -□
D
Current class
Design sequence No.
Thermal overload relay
Company code
3. Features
3.1 3-phase bimetal
3.2 Continuously readjustable current settings
3.3 Temperature compensation
3.4 Tripping indicator
3.5 Test button
3.6 Stop button
3.7 Manual and automatic reset button
3.8 Electrically separated 1N/O plus 1N/C contact
014
4. Technical data
4.1 Protection properties
Item Series No. I/In Operating time Tp Test condition
1 1.05 >2 h Start from cold status
Start from heat status,

2 1.2 ≤2 h right after item No.1
Overload
protection Start from heat status,
3 1.5 ≤2 min right after item No.1
4 7.2 2s<Tp≤10s Start from cold status
Any two Another

phases phase
Phase 5 >2 h Start from cold status
failure 1.0 0.9
protection
Start from heat status,
6 1.15 0 ≤2 h right after item No.5
Curves
120
100
80
60
40
20
min
10
8
6
4
cold status
1
40
three phase
20
three phase two phase
10
8 two phase
s
6
4
2
heat status
0.8
0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10
Multiple of rectified current

4.2 Main Technical Parameters
Model NR2-11.5
Picture
Current class(A) 13
Phase failure protection function Yes
Automatic & manual reset Yes
Temperature compensation Yes
Tripping indicator Yes
Test & stop pushbutton Yes
Mounting Plug-in Yes

mode Independent Yes
Auxiliary
contacts
No. of contacts
Rated current (A) (AC-15 220V)
Rated current (A) (AC-15 380V)
1N/O+1N/C
2.73
1.58
D
Rated current (A) (DC-13 220V) 0.2
Current setting range
Rated operational current(A) 0.1~0.16 0.16~0.25 0.25~0.40 0.40~0.63 0.63~1 1~1.6 1.25~2
Matched aM(A) 0.25 0.5 1 1 2 2 4

fuse gG(A) 2 2 2 2 4 4 6
Model NR2-93
Picture
Current class(A) 93
Phase failure protection function Yes
Automatic & manual reset Yes
Temperature compensation Yes
Tripping indicator Yes
Test & stop pushbutton Yes
Mounting Plug-in Yes

mode Independent Yes
Configuration of contacts 1N/O+1N/C
Auxiliary Rated current (A) (AC-15 220V) 2.73

contacts Rated current (A) (AC-15 380V) 1.58
Rated current (A) (DC-13 220V) 0.2
Current setting range
Rated operational current(A) 23~32 30~40 37~50 48~65 55~70 63~80 80~93
Matched aM(A) 40 40 63 63 80 80 100

fuse gG(A) 63 100 100 100 125 125 160
NR2-25 NR2-36
25 36
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Yes Yes
1N/O+1N/C 1N/O+1N/C
2.73 2.73
1.58 1.58
0.2 0.2
Current setting range Current setting range
1.6~2.5 2.5~4 4~6 5.5~8 7~10 9~13 12~18 17~25 23~32 28~36
4 6 8 12 12 16 20 25 40 40
6 10 16 20 20 25 35 50 63 80
NR2-150 NR2-200 NR2-630
150 200 630

Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Yes No No
No Yes Yes
1N/O+1N/C 1N/O+1N/C 1N/O+1N/C
2.73 2.73 2.73
1.58 1.58 1.58
0.2 0.2 0.2
Current setting range Current setting range Current setting range
80~104 95~120 110~150 80~125 100~160 125~200 160~250 200~315 250~400 315~500 400~630
125 125 160 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630
200 224 250 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 800
NR2-93
21 21 117max
R
NR2-93
83max
STOP RESET
A
H
TEST
55
NO NC
98 97 96 95
2 T1 4 T2 6 T3
72max
NR2-93 with MB-4
72max
R2.25
4
126max
D
105±0.5
NR2-93
35
4
128max
61.5±0.35
NR2-150 (matched with NC2)
102max
40 40
37 37
141max
R
NR2-25
STOP RESET
TEST
117max
70max
98max 120max
36±0.5 36±0.5
135max
70Max
NR2-200
181
40±0.16 20
81
M8
1 L1 3 L2 5
109±0.35
160
A
40 40 8
126 56
NR2-630
25/30* 50 215
12
M10
1 L1 3 L2 5
130±0.35
180/194*
A
H
48/55* 48/55*
171 44/45*
115
Note: Dimension with “*” for the product over 400A.
6. Wiring
Items NR2-11.5 NR2-25 NR2-36 NR2-93 NR2-150 NR2-200 NR2-630
Single core or
Main 1~4 1~4 4~10 4~35 25~95 25~95 70~2×240
stranded wire
circuit
Cross section Wiring screw M3.5 M4 M4 M10 M6/M8 M8 M10
area of
conductor mm2 Single core or
Auxiliary 1~2.5 1~2.5 1~2.5 1~2.5 1~2.5 1~2.5 1~2.5
stranded wire
circuit
Wiring screw M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5
7. Accessories
No. Description Application
Incorporate with NR2-11.5

1 MB-1 relay to form an independently
mounted product
Incorporate with NR2-25

mounted product

mounted product
4 MB-4
relay to form an independently
mounted product
D
8. Assembly with contactor

Model of Rated (RT16 is recommended) Model of
overload relay current (A) contactor
aM gG
0.1~0.16 0.25 2
0.16~0.25 0.5 2
0.25~0.4 1 2
0.4~0.63 1 2
0.63~1 2 4
1~1.6 2 4
1.25~2 4 6 NC6-09
1.6~2.5 4 6
2.5~4 6 10
4~6 8 16
NR2-11.5
5.5~8 12 20
7~10 12 20
9~13 16 25
0.1~0.16 0.25 2
0.16~0.25 0.5 2
0.25~0.4 1 2
0.4~0.63 1 2
0.63~1 2 4
1~1.6 2 4
NC1-09
1.25~2 4 6 NC1-12
NC1-18
1.6~2.5 4 6 NC1-25
NC1-32
2.5~4 6 10 NC7-09~18
NC7-25~32
4~6 8 16
NR2-25
5.5~8 12 20
7~10 12 20
9~13 16 25
12~18 20 35
17~25 25 50

Model of Rated (RT16 is recommended) Model of
overload relay current (A) contactor
aM gG
23~32 40 63
NC1-32
NC7-32~38
28~36 40 80
NR2-36
23~32 40 63
30~40 40 100
NC1-40
37~50 63 100 NC1-50
NC1-65
48~65 63 100 NC1-80
NC1-95
55~70 80 125 NC7-40~65
NC7-80~95
63~80 80 125
NR2-93
80~93 100 160
80~104 125 200
NC2-115
95~120 125 224
NC2-150
110~150 160 250

80~104 125 200
NC7-115
95~120 125 224 NC7-150
NC7-170
110~150 160 250

80~125 125 200

NC2-115
NC2-150
NC2-185
100~160 160 250
NC2-225
NC7-115~170
NC7-205
125~200 200 315
NR2-200
160~250 250 400
NC2-185
200~315 315 500 NC2-225
NC2-265
NC2-330
NC2-400
250~400 400 630 NC2-500
NC2-630
NC7-205~300
315~500 500 800 NC7-410~475
NC7-620
NR2-630 400~630 630 800

NS2 Manual Motor Starter

1. General
1.1 Certificates: SEMKO, CE, UkrSEPRO, EAC, RCC, UL;
1.2 Electric ratings: AC690V, 25A, 32A, 80A;
1.3 Standard: IEC/EN 60947-2, IEC60947-4-1
2. Type designation
NS2-25、NS2-32
NS2-□ □/ □
Rated current of release
Code of structural modification
Frame size rated current (A) D

Design sequence No.
AC motor starter
Company code
NS2-25X、NS2-32X 3. Operating conditions
3.1 Temperature: -5℃～+40℃,

average temperature in 24 hours not exceed +35℃
3.2 Altitude: not exceed 2000m
3.3 Air conditions:

max temperature of +40℃, higher relative humidity
is allowable under lower temperature,
for example, RH could be 90% at +20℃
3.4 Pollution grade: Grade Ⅲ
3.5 Trip class:

10A(NS2-25, NS2-25X, NS2-32, NS2-32X,NS2-32H)
10 (NS2-80, NS2-80B)
NS2-32H
3.6 Rated operational system:
Continuous operational system

The inclination between the mounting plane
and the vertical plane shall not exceed 5°
The product shall be installed and operated at a place
without obvious shake, impact and vibration.
NS2-80
014
P-131 Contactors,Relays,Starters Starters
4. Technical data
4.1 Protection properties
Over-load Protection Properties
Multiple of Expected Ambient

Series No. setting current Initial status Time temperature
results
1 1.05 Cold status t≥2h Non-tripping +20℃±2℃
Heat status
2 1.20 t＜2h Tripping +20℃±2℃
(right after test.1)
Heat status Tripping 10A t＜2min

3 1.50 Tripping +20℃±2℃
(right after test.1) class 10 t＜4min
Tripping 10A 2s＜t≤10s

4 7.20 Cold status Tripping +20℃±2℃
class 10 4s＜t≤10s
Phase failure protection properties
Multiple of setting current Expected Ambient

Series No. Initial status Time temperature
Any 2 phases The other phase results
1 1.0 0.9 Cold status t≥2h Non-tripping +20℃±2℃
Heat status
2 1.15 0 t＜2h Tripping +20℃±2℃
Temperature compensation properties
Multiple of Expected Ambient

Series No. setting current Initial status Time temperature
results
1 1.0 Cold status t≥2h Non-tripping +40℃±2℃
Heat status
2 1.2 t＜2h Tripping +40℃±2℃
Heat status
3 1.5 (through 1.0 times rated current ,after thermal t＜2min Tripping +40℃±2℃
equilibrium is reached)
4 1.05 Cold status t≥2h Non-tripping -5℃±2℃
5 1.3 Heat status

t＜2h Tripping -5℃±2℃
Heat status
6 1.5
(through 1.0 times rated current ,after thermal t＜4min Tripping -5℃±2℃
equilibrium is reached)
Starters Contactors,Relays,Starters P-132
4.2 Technical parameters
Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking Icu，

Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics
Rated current Setting current Arcing
Type of release regulation range 400/415V 690V distance
In(A) (A) Icu Ics Icu Ics (mm)
NS2-25(X) 0.16 0.1～0.16 100 100 100 100 40
NS2-25(X) 0.25 0.16～0.25 100 100 100 100 40
NS2-25(X) 0.4 0.25～0.4 100 100 100 100 40
NS2-25(X) 0.63 0.4～0.63 100 100 100 100 40
NS2-25(X) 1 0.63～1 100 100 100 100 40
NS2-25(X) 1.6 1～1.6 100 100 100 100 40
NS2-25(X) 2.5 1.6～2.5 100 100 3 2.25 40
NS2-25(X) 4 2.5～4 100 100 3 2.25 40
NS2-25(X) 6.3 4～6.3 100 100 3 2.25 40
NS2-25(X) 10 6～10 100 100 3 2.25 40
NS2-25(X) 14 9～14 15 7.5 3 2.25 40
NS2-25(X) 18 13～18 15 7.5 3 2.25 40
NS2-25(X) 23 17～23 15 6 3 2.25 40
NS2-25(X)
NS2-32(X)
25
32
20～25
24～32
15
10
6
5
3
3
2.25
2.25
40
40
D
NS2-32H 0.16 0.1～0.16 100 100 100 100 40
NS2-32H 0.25 0.16～0.25 100 100 100 100 40
NS2-32H 0.4 0.25～0.4 100 100 100 100 40
NS2-32H 0.63 0.4～0.63 100 100 100 100 40
NS2-32H 1 0.63～1 100 100 100 100 40
NS2-32H 1.6 1～1.6 100 100 100 100 40
NS2-32H 2.5 1.6～2.5 100 100 4 4 40
NS2-32H 4 2.5～4 100 100 4 4 40
NS2-32H 6.3 4～6.3 100 100 4 4 40
NS2-32H 10 6～10 100 100 4 4 40
NS2-32H 14 9～14 50 25 4 4 40
NS2-32H 18 13～18 50 25 4 4 40
NS2-32H 23 17～23 50 25 4 4 40
NS2-32H 25 20～25 50 25 4 4 40
NS2-32H 32 24～32 50 25 4 4 40
NS2-80 25 20~25 50 17.5 4 2 50
NS2-80 32 23~32 50 17.5 4 2 50
NS2-80 40 30~40 50 17.5 4 2 50
NS2-80 50 37~50 50 17.5 4 2 50
NS2-80 65 48~65 50 17.5 4 2 50
NS2-80 80 63~80 50 17.5 4 2 50
4.2.1 Rated power of three phase motor controlled by starter
Rated current Setting current Standard rated power of three phase motor (kW)
Type of release regulation range AC-3，50Hz/60Hz
In(A) (A) 230/240V 400V 415V 440V 500V 690V
NS2-25(X)、NS2-32H 0.16 0.1-0.16 - - - - - -
NS2-25(X)、NS2-32H 0.25 0.16-0.25 - - - - - -
NS2-25(X)、NS2-32H 0.4 0.25-0.4 - - - - - -
NS2-25(X)、NS2-32H 0.63 0.4-0.63 - - - - - 0.37
NS2-25(X)、NS2-32H 1 0.63-1 - - - 0.37 0.37 0.55
NS2-25(X)、NS2-32H 1.6 1-1.6 - 0.37 - 0.55 0.75 1.1
NS2-25(X)、NS2-32H 2.5 1.6-2.5 0.37 0.75 0.75 1.1 1.1 1.5
NS2-25(X)、NS2-32H 4 2.5-4 0.75 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.2 3
NS2-25(X)、NS2-32H 6.3 4-6.3 1.1 2.2 2.2 3 3.7 4
NS2-25(X)、NS2-32H 10 6-10 2.2 4 4 4 5.5 7.5
NS2-25(X)、NS2-32H 14 9-14 3 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 9
NS2-25(X)、NS2-32H 18 13-18 4 7.5 9 9 9 11
NS2-25(X)、NS2-32H 23 17-23 5.5 11 11 11 11 15

NS2-25(X)、NS2-32H 25 20-25 5.5 11 11 11 15 18.5
NS2-32(X)、NS2-32H 32 24-32 7.5 15 15 15 18.5 25
4.3 Setting value of instantaneous electromagnetic tripping current of starter
Regulating range of setting current Current setting value of instantaneous

Type Rated current of release In(A) of thermal element(A) electromagnetic release Ir(A)
0.16 0.1-0.16 1.5
0.25 0.16-0.25 2.4
0.4 0.25-0.4 5
0.63 0.4-0.63 8
1 0.63-1 13
1.6 1-1.6 22.5
2.5 1.6-2.5 33.5
NS2-25(X)
4 2.5-4 51
NS2-32H 6.3 4-6.3 78
10 6-10 138
14 9-14 170
18 13-18 223
23 17-23 327
25 20-25 327
NS2-32(X)、NS2-32H 32 24-32 416
25 20-25 350
32 23-32 448
40 30-40 560
NS2-80
50 37-50 700
65 48-65 910
80 63-80 1120
4.3.1 Action characteristics of instantaneous electromagnetic trip of starter
Test current Initial state Set time Expected results Ambient air temperature
0.8Ir Cold state t≥0.2s No trip +20℃±5℃
1.2Ir Cold state t＜0.2s Trip +20℃±5℃
4.4 Selection of backup fuse

When the expected short-circuit current of the installation site is greater than the rated limit short-circuit breaking capacity of
the starter, the type and melt current specification of the backup short-circuit protection fuse shall be provided. For example, gG
type fuse can be selected.
Current rating of fuse-link of back-up fuse,which Icc > Icu

Rated current Setting current
Type of release regulation range 230/240V 400/415V 440V 500V 690V
In(A) (A) aM A gL/gG A aM A gL/gG A aM A gL/gG A aM A gL/gG A aM A gL/gG A
NS2-25(X) 0.16 0.1-0.16 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
NS2-25(X) 0.25 0.16-0.25 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
NS2-25(X) 0.4 0.25-0.4 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
NS2-25(X) 0.63 0.4-0.63 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
NS2-25(X) 1 0.63-1 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
NS2-25(X) 1.6 1-1.6 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
NS2-25(X) 2.5 1.6-2.5 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ 16 20
★ ★
NS2-25(X) 4 2.5-4 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ 25 32
★
NS2-25(X) 6.3 4-6.3 ★ ★ ★ 50 63 50 63 32 40
★
NS2-25(X) 10 6-10 ★ ★ ★ 50 63 50 63 32 40
★
NS2-25(X) 14 9-14 ★ 63 80 50 63 50 63 40 50
NS2-25(X) 18 13-18 ★ ★ 63 80 50 63 50 63 40 50
NS2-25(X) 23 17-23 80 100 80 100 63 80 50 63 40 50
NS2-25(X) 25 20-25 80 100 80 100 63 80 50 63 40 50
NS2-32(X) 32 24-32 80 100 80 100 63 80 50 63 40 50
NS2-32H 0.16 0.1-0.16 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
NS2-32H 0.25 0.16-0.25 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
NS2-32H 0.4 0.25-0.4 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
NS2-32H 0.63 0.4-0.63 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
NS2-32H 1 0.63-1 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
NS2-32H 1.6 1-1.6 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
NS2-32H 2.5 1.6-2.5 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ 20 25
NS2-32H 4 2.5-4 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ 25 32
NS2-32H 6.3 4-6.3 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ 40 50
NS2-32H 10 6-10 ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ 50 63 40 50
NS2-32H 14 9-14 ★ ★ ★ ★ 50 63 50 63 50 63
NS2-32H 18 13-18 ★ ★ 100 125 63 80 50 63 50 63
NS2-32H 23 17-23 ★ ★ 100 125 80 100 50 63 50 63
NS2-32H 25 20-25 ★ ★ 100 125 80 100 50 63 50 63
NS2-32H 32 24-32 ★ ★ 100 125 80 100 50 63 50 63
NS2-80 25 20-25 - - 250 315 - - - - 160 200
NS2-80 32 23-32 - - 250 315 - - - - 160 200
NS2-80 40 30-40 - - 250 315 - - - - 160 200
NS2-80 50 37-50 - - 315 400 - - - - 200 250
NS2-80 65 48-65 - - 315 400 - - - - 200 250
- - 315 - - - - 200 250
NS2-80 80 63-80 400
5. Other
5.1 Starters accessories
5.1.1 Type, model and specifications of accessories (see Table 10).
Description of Accessories Model

Accessories Specifications
accessories NS2-25, NS2-32 applies NS2-25X, NS2-32X applies NS2-32H applies NS2-80 applies
NS2-UV110 NS2-UV110 NS2-UV110 NS2-UV110 110~115V, 50Hz；127V,60Hz
Undervoltage release NS2-UV220 NS2-UV220 NS2-UV220 NS2-UV220 220~240V, 50Hz
NS2-UV380 NS2-UV380 NS2-UV380 NS2-UV380 380~400V, 50Hz；440V,60Hz
NS2-SH110 NS2-SH110 NS2-SH110 NS2-SH110 110~115V, 50Hz；127V,60Hz
Shunt release NS2-SH220 NS2-SH220 NS2-SH220 NS2-SH220 220~240V, 50Hz
NS2-SH380 NS2-SH380 NS2-SH380 NS2-SH380 380~400V, 50Hz；440V,60Hz
Instantaneous auxiliary NS2-AE20 NS2-AE20 NS2-AE20 NS2-AE20 2NO
contact (front hanging) NS2-AE11
NS2-AE11 NS2-AE11 NS2-AE11 1NO+1NC
Instantaneous auxiliary NS2-AU20 NS2-AU20 NS2-AU20 NS2-AU20(NS2-80) 2NO
contact (side hanging) NS2-AU11(NS2-80) 1NO+1NC
NS2-AU11 NS2-AU11 NS2-AU11
NS2-FA0110 NS2-FA0110 NS2-FA0110 - 1NC+1NO
Fault signal contact and
D
NS2-FA0101 NS2-FA0101 NS2-FA0101 - 1NC+1NC
instantaneous auxiliary
contact NS2-FA1010 NS2-FA1010 NS2-FA1010 - 1NO+1NO
NS2-FA1001 NS2-FA1001 NS2-FA1001 - 1NO+1NC
Waterproof mounting box NS2-MC WPB-1 - - -
Mounting box with -

NS2-MC01 - - -
emergency stop button
5.1.2 Undervoltage trip device NS2-UV
NS2-UV110, UV220, UV380'S, performance:

a. Rated insulation voltage Ui (V): 690.
b. Operating characteristics: When the voltage drops to
70% and 35% of the rated voltage range, undervoltage
trip device shall act;
Undervoltage trip device in the power supply voltage is
less than 35% of the rated voltage of the trip device, the
undervoltage trip device should be able to prevent the
starter from closing;
NS2-SH
when the power supply voltage is equal to or greater
than 85% of the rated voltage of the trip device, the
undervoltage trip device should guarantee closure of the
starter.
5.1.3 The characteristics of the shunt trip

NS2-SH110, SH220, SH380:
a. Rated insulation voltage Ui (V): 690.
b. Operating characteristics: the operating voltage range of
the shunt trip device is rated working voltage of 70% ~
110%. NS2-AE
5.1.4 Characteristics of the instantaneous auxiliary contact NS2-

Ae20, AE11 (front hanging)
a. rated insulation voltage Ui (V): 250;
b. agreed thermal current Ith (A): 2.5;
c. type , rated voltage and rated operating current (see
Table 11) of instantaneous auxiliary contacts.
Table 11

Rated operating voltage Ue (V) 24 48 110/127 230/240 24 48 60
Rated operating current Ie (A) 2 1.25 1 0.5 1 0.3 0.15
Normal operating power P (W) 48 60 127 120 24 15 9
NS2-AU
5.1.5 Instantaneous auxiliary contact NS2-AU20, AU11
performance (side hanging):
b. agreed thermal current Ith (A): 6;
c. type, rated voltage and rated operating current of the
instantaneous auxiliary contacts(see Table 12).

Rated operating voltage Ue (V) 48 110/127 230/240 380/415 440 500 690 24 48 60 110 220
Rated operating current Ie (A) 6 4.5 3.3 2.2 1.5 1 0.6 6 5 3 1.3 0.5
Normal operating power P (W) 300 500 720 850 650 500 400 140 240 180 140 120
NS2-FA
5.1.6 Characteristics of the fault signal contact and
instantaneous auxiliary contact NS2-FA:
Fault signal contact and instantaneous auxiliary contact
NS2-FA, consist of the fault signal contact and
instantaneous auxiliary contact. They have different use
types and characteristics.
D
b. agreed thermal currents of instantaneous auxiliary
contacts: 6, agreed thermal current of
fault signal contacts lth (A): 2.5;
c. the use type, rated voltage and rated work current (see
Table 12) of the instantaneous auxiliary contact same as
the NS2-AU instantaneous auxiliary contact; the use
type, rated voltage and rated operating current (see
Table 13) of the fault signal contacts.

Rated operating voltage Ue (V) 24 48 110/127 230/240 24 48 60
Rated operating current Ie (A) 1.5 1 0.5 0.3 1 0.3 0.15
Normal operating power P (W) 36 48 72 72 24 15 9
Operating performance (time) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
5.1.7 Non-normal making and breaking capacity (see Table 14) of fault signal contact and instantaneous auxiliary contact.
Connection Disconnection On-off operation cycles and operating frequency

Use type CosΦ CosΦ Operating Operating cycles Energize
I/Ie U/Ue or T0.95 I/Ie U/Ue or T0.95 cycles per minutes Time
AC-14 6 1.1 0.7 6 1.1 0.7 10 2 0.05

AC-15 10 1.1 0.3 10 1.1 0.3 10 2 0.05
DC-13 1.1 1.1 6Pe 1.1 1.1 6Pe 10 2 0.05
Note: Pe≥50W, T0.95 upper limit≈6Pe≤300ms.
5.1.8 Mounting box （NS2-MC、NS2-MC01）
5.1.8 Mounting box
NS2-MC Waterproof installation box IP55
NS2-MC01 Installation box IP55

with emergency stop button
WPB-1 Waterproof installation box IP55

6. Overall and mounting dimension (mm)

NS2-25, NS2-32 NS2-25X, NS2-32X, NS2-32H
NS2-AU20, AU11 NS2-AU20, AU11

NS2-AU20, AU11 NS2-FA NS2-SH, UV NS2-AU20, AU11 NS2-FA NS2-SH, UV
NS2-AE20, AE11 NS2-AE20, AE11
9.5
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
11
11
9.5
25
23
|
NS2-25X
ON
20
20-25A
0OFF
9.3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3

18
9.3 9.3 9.3 18
81.1 81.1
NS2-80 NS2-25, NS2-32
NS2-AE20,AE11
NS2-AU20,AU11 (NS2-80) NS2-SH,UV
11
46.5±0.32
35.5±0.28
91.3±0.7
45±0.32
18 8±0.24
44.5±0.8
9.3 16.3±0.29 44.2±0.8
9.3
100.2 14.8±0.55 66±0.95
NS2-25X, NS2-32X NS2-32H

40
40
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
25
6.3
23 NS2-25X 6
46.5±0.32
35.5±0.28
|
45±0.32
91.3±0.7
ON
35.5±0.28
91.3±0.7
89±0.7
5
45±0.32
20
4
20-25A
0OFF
Test
8±0.24
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
30.8±0.3 44.2±0.8
44.5±0.8 44.5±0.8 85.9±0.9
80.5±0.9
40
99.1±0.9
40
94.9±0.9
NS2-80B NS2-80
120.9±0.8
21±0.5
63.6±0.8 107.3±0.8
112.5±0.57
35.7±0.28
110±0.8
35.7±0.3
118.4±0.8
14.8±0.35
5±0.12 63.5±0.37
72.5±0.43
78±0.43
NS2-MC
D
5.4
6.3
147.6
130
130mm
(5.4)
89.3
92.2
93.8
NS2-MC01
5.4
φ6 . 3
147.6
130
(5.4)
92.2 89.3
152.3
WPB-1
2x6.3 +0.2
-0 5.4±0.09
I ON
147.6±0.51
130±0.46
OFF
92.2±0.46 107.7±0.5
123±0.5
3. Type designation
CC - □ （NS2）
Suitable for NS2 starter
Design sequence No.
Company code
4.Operating Conditions
4.1 Ambient air temperature: -5℃~+40℃，daily average not
more than +35℃.
4.2 Altitude: Not exceed 2000m. If it exceeds 2000m, the product
should be used with reduced capacity. It is proposed that the
altitude increased by each 1000m, the capacity should be
reduced by 10%.
CC Conversion Connectors
4.3 Humidity: When the ambient air temperature is +40℃,
1. General the air relative humidity doesn’t exceed 50%; at a lower
temperature, the humidity could be higher. When the average

CC conversion connectors are used to connect AC contactor and
minimum temperature is +25℃,the average maximum
starter to be a composite apparatus, for the circuits with AC
relativehumidity is 90%, considering the product surface
current frequency 50HZ and rated operating voltage up to 690V.
condensation resulting from the temperature variation.
CC-2 (NS2) conversion connector is used for NC8-38 AC
4.4 Pollution grade: 3.
contactor and NS2-32H starter, and CC-3 (NS2) conversion
4.5 Installation category: Ⅲ.
connector is used for NC8-65 AC contactor and NS2-80 starter.
4.6 The external magnetic field of mounting place should not
After connecting the AC contactor and starter as a composite
exceed 5 times earth magnetism at any direction; it should
apparatus, CC connectors are applicable for various power
have no explosive or corrosive gas; no rain or snow attack;
distribution systems or motor protection and control systems.
and should be dry and ventilated.
Conformed standards: IEC60947-1 Low-voltage Switchgear
and Controlgear - Part 1: General rules.
2. Product Features
CC connectors combine AC contactor and starter as a composite
apparatus, can reduce the wiring and improve the system
operation reliability.
CC connectors are composed of shell, main circuit connection

and auxiliary circuit connection , can connect the circuits well.
The connector leads the coil terminals of AC contactor to the
above of the product, and reliable cable trough is designed to
facilitate the customers’wiring.

5. Main Technical Parameters

Table 1 Main Circuit Parameters
Model CC -2 (NS 2) CC -3( NS 2)
Rated operating voltage Ue ( V ) 690 690
Rated insulation voltage Ui ( V ) 690 and below 690 and below
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp ( kV ) 6 6
Rated operating current Ie max (A) 32 65
Number of poles 3P 3P
6. Installation
Fig.1 Outline and Installing Dimensions of CC-2(NS2)
59.7±0.7
82±0.8
D
CC-2
44.5±0.7
Fig.2 Outline and Installing Dimensions of CC-3(NS2)

100.4±0.9
65±0.7
CC-3
64±0.7
Fig.3 Outline and Installing Dimensions of CC-2(NS2) after assembly with the starter and contactor
99.1±1
85.9±1
NS2-32H
35.7±0.3
199±1.5
79.5±0.9
NC8-38
35.5±0.3
44.8±0.7
105.3±1
Fig.4 Outline and Installing Dimensions of CC-3(NS2) after assembly with the starter and contactor
76±0.9
63.6±0.9 120.9±1 41.8±0.5

107.3±1 φ4.5
35.5±0.3
250.3±2
262.3±2
107.1±1
35.5±0.3
φ6
φ6
6
64±0.9
NQ2 DOL Electromagnetic Starter
1. General
1.1 NQ2 series electromagnetic starter
( "starter" for short hereinafter) applies mainly to
circuit with AC current of 50Hz (or 60Hz),
rated operational voltage of 660V
and rated controlled power up to 33kW
(current up to 68A)
for using to control the direct start
and halt of the electromotor to protect the motor
from overload and phase failure.
1.2 The starter conforms to standards IEC/EN60947-4-1
2. Type designation
N Q 2
Rated control power code (AC-3, 380V): 1~4 D

Structure code:
Blank: non- reversing type without pushbutton
P: with pushbutton
N: reversing type
NB: reversing type without thermal relay
Frame level power code
Design sequence No.
Starter
Company code
3. Technical data
3.1 NQ2-15, 33
Rated power (AC-3)

Conventional Rated Model of Model of Range of
Model heating operational (kW) matched matched setting
current Ith (A) current Ie (A) contactor relay current (A)
660V 380V 220V
0.1~0.16
0.16~0.25
0.25~0.4
0.4~0.63
0.63~1
1~1.6
NQ2-15/1 13 12 7.5 5.5 3 NC1-1210 NR2-25 1.25~2
1.6~2.5
2.5~4
4~6
5.5~8
7~10
9~13
NQ2-15/2 18 18 10 7.5 4 NC1-1810 12~18
NQ2-15/3 25 25 15 11 5.5 NC1-2510 17~25
23~32
NQ2-15/4 36 32 18.5 15 7.5 NC1-3210 NR2-36
28~36
23~32
30~40
NQ2-33/1 52 52 33 25 15 NC1-6511
37~50
48~65
NR2-93
55~70
NQ2-33/2 68 68 37 33 25 NC1-9511 63~80
80~93
3.2 NQ2-15P, 33P
Rated power (AC-3)

Conventional Rated Model of Model of Model of Range of
Model heating operational (kW) matched matched matched setting
current Ith (A) current Ie (A) contactor relay pushbutton current (A)
660V 380V 220V
0.1~0.16
0.16~0.25
0.25~0.4
0.4~0.63
Start: 0.63~1
NQ2-15P/1 13 12 7.5 5.5 3 NC1-1210 NR2-25
NP2-EA31 1~1.6
1.25~2
1.6~2.5
Stop:
2.5~4
NP2-EA42
4~6
5.5~8
7~10
9~13
NQ2-15P/2 18 18 10 7.5 4 NC1-1810 12~18
NQ2-15P/3 25 25 15 11 5.5 NC1-2510 17~25
23~32
NQ2-15P/4 36 32 18.5 15 7.5 NC1-3210 NR2-36
28~36
23~32
NQ2-33P/1 52 52 33 25 15 NC1-6511 30~40
37~50
NR2-93
48~65
55~70
NQ2-33P/2 68 68 37 33 25 NC1-9511 63~80
80~93
3.3 NQ2-15 N
Rated power (AC-3)

Conventional Rated Model of Model of Range of
Model heating operational (kW) matched matched setting
current Ith (A) current Ie (A) contactor relay current (A)
660V 380V 220V
0.1~0.16
0.16~0.25
0.25~0.4
0.4~0.63
0.63~1
1~1.6
NQ2-15N/1 13 12 7.5 5.5 3 NC1-1210 NR2-25 1.25~2
1.6~2.5
2.5~4
4~6
5.5~8
NQ2-15N/2 18 18 10 7.5 4 NC1-1810

7~10
9~13
12~18
D
NQ2-15N/3 25 25 15 11 5.5 NC1-2510 17~25
23~32
NQ2-15N/4 36 32 18.5 15 7.5 NC1-3210 NR2-36
28~36
3.4 NQ2-15NB
Rated power (AC-3)

Conventional Rated Model of
Model heating operational (kW) matched
current Ith (A) current Ie (A) contactor
660V 380V 220V
NQ2-15NB/1 13 12 7.5 5.5 3 NC1-1201N
NQ2-15NB/2 18 18 10 7.5 4 NC1-1801N
NQ2-15NB/3 25 25 15 11 5.5 NC1-2501N
NQ2-15NB/4 36 32 18.5 15 7.5 NC1-3201N
Altitude: not exceeding 2000m; Temperature of ambient air: -5℃~+40℃

Rated control supply voltage (AC 50Hz): 24V, 36V, 48V, 110V, 127V, 220V, 380V, 415V
Mechanical life: 1,000,000 circles; Electric life: 500,000 circles; IP40

NQ2-15
207
150
3×Φ6
127 60
116
NQ2-15P
207
150
3×Φ6
60
138
116
NQ2-15N
207
150
3×Φ6
127 130
176
NQ2-15NB
207
150
3×Φ6
130
127
176
NQ2-33
296max
205
162max 105 4×Φ6.2

167max
NQ2-33P
296max
205
172max 105 4×Φ6.2
167max
5. Wiring Diagram
D
L1 L3 L5 L1 L3 L5
FU1 FU1
connect to other supply
1 3 5 1 3 5
FR
KM FR KM
2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1
FR KM FR KM
KM KM
2 4 6 A2 A2
2 4 6
U V W U V W
M M
Control supply voltage is as the same as Control supply voltage is not as the same as
the main circuit voltage (three-phrase) the main circuit voltage (three-phrase)
L N L N
FU1 FU1
Connect to other supply
1 3 5 1 3 5
FR FR
KM KM
2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1
FR FR
KM KM KM KM
2 4 6 A2 A2
2 4 6
U1 U2 U1 U2
M M
the main circuit voltage (single-phrase) the main circuit voltage (single-phrase)
NQ3 Series
DOL Electromagnetic Starter
1. General
1.1 NQ3 series electromagnetic starter
( "starter" for short hereinafter) applies mainly to
circuit with AC current of 50Hz (or 60Hz),
rated operational voltage of 660V
and rated controlled power up to 11kW
(current up to 22A)
for using to control the direct start
and halt of the electromotor to protect the motor
from overload and phase failure.
1.2 The starter conforms to standards IEC/EN60947-4-1
2. Type designation
NQ3- □ P
Code of structure characteristic:

P means with buttons
Code of power grade of the bracket
Design code name
Electromagnetic starter
Characteristic code of the enterprise
3. Technical data
Altitude: not exceeding 2000m;

Temperature of ambient air: -5℃~+40℃
Rated control supply voltage (AC 50Hz):
24V, 36V, 48V, 110V, 127V, 220V, 380V, 415V
Mechanical life: 1,000,000 circles;
Electric life: 500,000 circles;
IP55
Table 1 Basic Model and main technical parameter of the starter
Maximum rated Power (kW)

Model of Range of
Rated working
Model AC-3 equipped TOR matched setting current
current (A)
AC contactor A
660V 380V 220V
0.1~0.16
0.16~0.25
0.25~0.4
0.4~0.63
0.63~1
1~1.6
NQ3-5.5P 12 7.5 5.5 3 NC1-1810 NR2-25 1.25~2
1.6~2.5
2.5~4
4~6
5.5~8
7~10
9~13
NQ3-11P 22 15 11 5.5 NC1-3210

12~18
17~25 D
4. Overall and mounting dimension (mm)
NQ3-5.5P
START
166max
130
STOP
125max 60
3×Φ6
96max
NQ3-11P
196max
150
130max 60
116max 3×Φ6
5. Wiring Diagram
L1 L3 L5 L1 L3 L5
FU1 FU1
connect to other supply
1 3 5 1 3 5
FR
KM FR KM
2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1
FR KM FR KM
KM KM
2 4 6 A2 A2
2 4 6
U V W U V W
M M
the main circuit voltage (three-phrase) the main circuit voltage (three-phrase)
L N L N
FU1 FU1
Connect to other supply
1 3 5 1 3 5
FR FR
KM KM
2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 A1 1 3 5 A1
FR FR
KM KM KM KM
2 4 6 A2 A2
2 4 6
U1 U2 U1 U2
M M
the main circuit voltage (single-phrase) the main circuit voltage (single-phrase)
6. Picture
NQ3-5.5P
NQ3-11P D
2. Features
NKB1 series CPS adopts the integrated modular structure,
integrating the main functions of circuit breaker, contactor,
over load relay, starter, disconnector, and so on.
With small volume and high reliability, it consists of the

advantages of high short current breaking capacity and short
flashover distance. It can provide inverse time delay protection,
short circuit short time delay protection, instantaneous short
circuit protection, and fast short circuit protection. Once function
selected according to requirements, it can provide protection
for various motor starting, control circuits and distribution
circuits with accurate and reliable performance.
NKB1 series product consists of enclosure, electromagnetic

transmission mechanism, operation mechanism, main circuit
contacts sets, intelligent trip unit and auxiliary contacts, and can
control the making and breaking of the circuit locally or remotely.
The CPS has a variety of circuit protection functions: start delay,

phase failure, three phases unbalance, under current, over
voltage, under voltage, etc.
NKB1
Control & Protective The CPS has different types for choice: basic type,
fire-fighting type, leakage type, communication type. The whole
Switching Device series products have isolation function.
1. General The CPS has the one key recovery function and self-setting
function, to meet the different needs of the users.
NKB1 series control & protective switching device (CPS)
is mainly applied to circuit with AC current frequency of
The CPS has two control modes: remote automatic control &
50 Hz or 60Hz, rated operational voltage up to 690V and
local manual control. It has panel indication & electromechanical
rated operational current from 1A to 125A used for it is
signal alarm function.
making, carrying and breaking currents under normal
conditions, including specified overload conditions and
for making, carrying for a specified time and breaking
currents under specified abnormal conditions such as 3. Operating conditions
those of short-circuits.
Ambient temperature: -5℃~+40℃, average day temperature
value ≤ +35℃. It can operate reliably at -25℃~+70℃ for a
NBK1 series CPS is applied to power distribution and
short period.
motor protection & control of various occasions or
Altitude: ≤2000m,derating by 10% every 1000m when
systems, e.g. infrastructure, buildings, communications,
higher than 2000m.
etc.
Humidity: When ambient air temperature is + 40℃,
the relative humidity ≤ 50%；Higher relative humidity is
allowed at lower temperatures.
The average maximum relative humidity of the month is 90%
Standard: IEC60947-6-2 Multiple function equipment- when the minimum monthly average temperature is + 25 ℃,
Control and protective switching devices (or equipment) and the condensation occurring on the surface of the product
(CPS). due to temperature variation is taken into account.
Symbol: Pollution degree: 3
Installation category: Ⅲ
Installation site requirement: The external magnetic field of the
installation site shall not exceed 5 times of the geomagnetism in
any direction. No explosive gas, no corrosive gas; no rain or
snow invasion; dry and ventilated.
4. Type & designation

N KB 1 - / /
Additional function code:

Basic type: blank
Fire-fighting type: F
Leakage type: L
Communication type: T
Isolation type: G
Control supply voltage code: M-230V, Q-400V
Auxiliary contacts set code: 06-3NO 2NC+1 fault release+1 fault alarm
Rated operational current Ie(A): 1、3、6、12、16、25、32、45、63、80、100、125
Load type code: M-motor protection, L- distribution protection
Breaking capacity code: C-15kA, Y-35kA
Frame size (A): 45, 125
Serial number
D
Control & Protective Switching Device (CPS)
Enterprise code
5. Technical parameter
Table 1 Main circuit technical parameter
Type NKB1-45 NKB1-125

Rated operational voltage Ue(V) 400,690/50Hz
Rated insulation voltage Ui(V) 690 800
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp(kV) 4 6
Conventional free air thermal current Ith(A) 16 45 80 125
Rated operational current Ie(A) 1 3 6 12 16 25 32 45 63 80 100 125
Utilization categories AC-43,AC-44
Number of poles 3P
Table 2 Setting current of the controller
Rated operational Controller rated Overload setting Controllable motor

Frame size current range Ir1 (A) power Pe (kW) (400V)
current Ie (A) current Iet (A)
1 1 0.4~1 0.12~0.3
3 3 1.2~3 0.37~1.2
6 6 2.4~6 1.0~2.7
12 12 4.8~12 2.2~5.5
45
16 16 6.4~16 3.0~7.5
25 25 10~25 5.0~12
32 32 12.8~32 6.5~15
45 45 18~45 9.0~22
63 63 25~63 12~30
80 80 32~80 15~37
125
100 100 40~100 22~45
125 125 50~125 27~55
Table 3 Operating conditions for controlling electromagnet
Rated control supply voltage Conventional operation Operation voltage range

M : AC230V CPS reliable close (85%~110%)Us
Q : AC400V CPS open or trip (20%~75%)Us
Table 4 Electrical life
Type NKB1-45 NKB1-125
4
AC-43 120 100
Electrical life (10 )
AC-44 3 2
Mechanical life (104) 1000 500
Duties: Intermittent duty 300 Loading factor 40% 120 Loading factor 25%
t（s）
10000
Inverse time-delay protection
1000
100
10
Short time short delay protection
1
Instantaneous short circuit protection
0.1
Electromagnetic fast short circuit protection
0.01
0.001
1.0Ir 3Ir 6Ir 12Ir 16Ie 20Ie ×I
Figure 1 NKB1 time-current characteristics
6. Controller technical parameter
Fault status output

Function Parameter setting Delay setting Factory defaults Setting parameters
Basic type Fire-fighting type
Overload protection (0.4～1)Ie Protection curve F1 (0.4～1)Ie Delay tripping Delay alarm
Short circuit short time

delay protection
(3～12)Ir+OFF 0. 1～ 0. 4s 8Ir/0.2s (3～12)Ir+OFF Delay tripping Delay alarm
(6～16)Ie
Instantaneous short Instantaneous
<50ms 14Ie (8～16)Ie Tripping + alarm
circuit protection tripping
Phase unbalance（phase (20%～80%)+OFF Delay alarm

(20%～80%)+OFF 1～ 40s 30%/10s Delay tripping
failure, phase lose）protection (tripping)
OFF (0～0.8)Ir+OFF Delay alarm

Under-current protection (0～0.8)Ir+OFF 1～ 60s Delay tripping
(tripping)
Under-voltage Us230V (154V～198V)+OFF 1～ 30s 176V/10s (154V～198V)+OFF Delay Delay alarm

protection Us400V (266V～342V)+OFF 304V/10s (266V～342V)+OFF tripping (tripping)
1～ 30s
Over-voltage Us230V (230V～286V)+OFF 264V/10s (230V～286V)+OFF Delay
1～ 30s Delay alarm
protection Us400V (400V～494V)+OFF 456V/10s (400V～494V)+OFF tripping
1～ 30s
During the start delay, shield
certain protection function,
Start delay protection (0～99s)+OFF 0～99s 3s (0～99s)+OFF
e.g. instantaneous short
circuit tripping.
Delay Delay alarm

Locked rotor protection (5～9)Ir+OFF 0～50s OFF Hidden menu tripping (tripping)
Residual current protection (30～500mA)+OFF 0.1～1s 100mA (30～500mA)+OFF Tripping Alarm
Notes:Communication and leakage protection are optional function; communication type product adopts RS485 , RJ45 interface,
Modbus protocol.
Overload protection setting cur ve （1.5Ir1 operation times）:F0（overload protection close），F1(51), F2(98），F3(144) , F4(200)
The power signal of under/over voltage protection of the controller is taken from the control terminal Us(A1--A2).
6.1 Controller menu

Controller menu grading: open setup menu, hide setup menu, calibration menu;
Open the setup menu: the user can set functional parameters as required;
One key recover y operation: perform a one key recover y operation when parameter setting problem occurs,
and the controller will restore the factor y settings (factor y defaults);
Self-setting operation: when the load operation is stable, perform this self-setting operation, the controller
will set the setting current according to the circuit parameters automatically.
6.2 Controller display

When NKB1 is connected to the working power supply, the LED displays the voltage value, and this can be used as a
voltmeter, with the last three figures display the voltage value;
NBK1 can be used as an ammeter at runtime, and circularly displays three phase alternating current running condition;
Troubleshooting: no-load runs NKB1, and press “data” key to view the last fault type.
7. Operating instruction (handle)
Connect AUTO: (automatic control position) the CPS controls the connection of the
AUTO electromagnet coil, and realizes remote automatic control by making & breaking the
TRIP
control power supply.
OFF
Trip: when there's fault tripping, the mechanism of the switch trips, the main contacts
open, and the electromagnet coil circuit is disconnected.
RESET
OFF: manual operation, the electromagnet coil circuit is disconnected, the main contacts of
the switch remains in the open position.
RESET: turn the operation knob, to reset and switch on the tripped switch mechanism.
Isolation status: When the switch is in the OFF position, pull out the isolation strip
and lock it, the switch will be on the disconnected isolation status, and the handle is
not operational.
Notes: The isolation type CPS has isolation handle and isolation strip.
8. Installation
NKB1 Installation dimensions
30°
90° 90° 90°
90.5 13
145max 64 13 185max 30
19
78
36.5
213.5
245
174.5
202
4-φ4.2
4-φ5.4
NKB1-45 Control & protective switching device NKB1-125 Control & protective switching device
9. Basic electric control chart

9.1 Manual panel + local control
Local Auxi-
Fault
Seco- power manual liary
Power signal
ndary supply control signal
supply
power prote-
signal
supply ction Self
Start Stop Run Stop Stop Alarm
-lock
NKB1 Auxiliar y contacts instruction (06 auxiliar y)
NO NC NC NO NC a b
L2 FA 13 23 31 41 41 95 201
SS
Auxiliaries
SF 14 32 44 42 202
24 98
A1 14 13 23 31 95 201 AC-15 Ie:5A Ue:400V AC-15 Ie:3A Ue:230V

Notes: auxiliar y a(95/98): fault tripping signal port;
NKB1 Auxiliar y b (201/202): fire-fighting type fault talarmng signal port.
A2 24 32 98 202
N
PGW PGG PGR PGB PGY
9.2 Manual panel + local control+ remote control
Auxiliary Fault External

Seco- Power Signal
Local & signal signal signal
Power
ndary supply remote
supply
power prote- manual
signal Power
supply ction control Self-
Run Stop Stop Alarm Stop Run
lock supply
41 L1 L2 L3 N
L2 FA
NKB1
SS1
SS2 42 44
1 3 5
SF2 SF1 To the control panel
A1 14 13 23 31 95 201
NKB1
NKB1
I ＞ I ＞＞
24 32 98 202
A2
N 2 4 6
PGW PGG PGR PGB PGY PE
V W
U
M
～
Notes: This diagram is applicable to all kinds of motor when single equipment is in normal operation and adopts simultaneous local and remote control.
10. Attention
10.1 Before installing the CPS, make sure that the operation knob can work normally and is on the OFF position; “AUTO”
indicates the connection status of the main circuit,; “ TRIP” indicates the free tripping position that caused by circuit
fault, and the circuit fault must be removed by the responsible person before one operates the switch; “OFF” indicates
the main circuit open position; the free tripped switch can only be reset and switched on by turning the operation knob
to “RESET”.
10.2 Before installing the switch, make sure that the power supply of the coil and auxiliaries comply with the product
instruction as well as with the actual control circuit.
10.3 Energizing (85％～110％) Us to the coil, the electromagnet closes reliably when the knob is on “AUTO” position,
and the electromagnet releases reliably when the knob is on “OFF” position. The current setting has been set up
before leaving the factor y, and users can adjust it according to actual needs.
10.4 NKB1 can continue to run after breaking short circuit current, but it need checking and confirmation of its operation
status before continue operation.
10.5 In high power motor controlling application (above 11kW), when choosing the starting mode, the user shall take
starting torque, current multiple, voltage drop, circuit capacity into consideration. According to general requirements,
to start normally with proper load and satisfy the reliable operation of NKB1 electromagnet, the voltage reduction limit
shall not exceed 80% of the rated value, and the starting current multiple shall not exceed(4～5) times.
10.6 The exposed part of the external connecting wire of the incoming and outgoing terminal of the switch shall be wrapped
with insulator.
10.7 In the process of transportation and storage, the products shall be protected from rain and snow. The storage
environment shall meet the following conditions: daily average temperature shall be +25℃, relative humidity shall be
less than 90%, the environment temperature shall be no higher than +40℃ and no less than -5℃.

During product selection, the user shall specify the following contents, if necessar y, application conditions or requirements
shall be further specified:
Product name & type;
Rated current of the switch, intelligent controller type & rated current;
Control power supply voltage of the electromagnet coil;
Additional functions required.
10. Attention
10.1 Before installing the CPS, make sure that the operation knob can work normally and is on the OFF position; “AUTO”
indicates the connection status of the main circuit,; “ TRIP” indicates the free tripping position that caused by circuit
fault, and the circuit fault must be removed by the responsible person before one operates the switch; “OFF” indicates
the main circuit open position; the free tripped switch can only be reset and switched on by turning the operation knob
to “RESET”.
10.2 Before installing the switch, make sure that the power supply of the coil and auxiliaries comply with the product
instruction as well as with the actual control circuit.
10.3 Energizing (85％～110％) Us to the coil, the electromagnet closes reliably when the knob is on “AUTO” position,
and the electromagnet releases reliably when the knob is on “OFF” position. The current setting has been set up
before leaving the factor y, and users can adjust it according to actual needs.
10.4 NKB1 can continue to run after breaking short circuit current, but it need checking and confirmation of its operation
status before continue operation.
10.5 In high power motor controlling application (above 11kW), when choosing the starting mode, the user shall take
starting torque, current multiple, voltage drop, circuit capacity into consideration. According to general requirements,
to start normally with proper load and satisfy the reliable operation of NKB1 electromagnet, the voltage reduction limit
shall not exceed 80% of the rated value, and the starting current multiple shall not exceed(4～5) times.
10.6 The exposed part of the external connecting wire of the incoming and outgoing terminal of the switch shall be wrapped
with insulator.
10.7 In the process of transportation and storage, the products shall be protected from rain and snow. The storage
environment shall meet the following conditions: daily average temperature shall be +25℃, relative humidity shall be
less than 90%, the environment temperature shall be no higher than +40℃ and no less than -5℃.

During product selection, the user shall specify the following contents, if necessar y, application conditions or requirements
shall be further specified:
Product name & type;
Rated current of the switch, intelligent controller type & rated current;
Control power supply voltage of the electromagnet coil;
Additional functions required.
Pushbuttons & Indicator Lights & Buzzers
Pushbuttons
NP8 NP2 NP6 NP3
NPH1
Page P-042
Indicator Lights / Buzzers
ND16
Page P-045
Drill Plan Picture Index Certificates IP Product Model
C US
IP40 NP2 Series
Φ22.3mm
NP8 Series
IP65
NPH1 Pushbutton Box
Φ16mm IP40 NP6 Series
C US
IP40
ND16 Series
C R US LISTED IP65
Φ22.3mm
IP20 ND16 Buzzer
NP3 Series
IP65 Pendant Station
2 positions 2 positions
Selector Maintained Momentary Key-operated Maintained Maintained Momentary

Switches selector
Switches
Key Free
3 positions 3 positions
Maintained Momentary Maintained Maintained Momentary

P-001 Pushbuttons & Indicator Lights & buzzers Pushbuttons
Colors 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
White Black Green Red Yellow Blue Orange
E-003 E-004 E-005 E-007
E-006 E-008 E-009 E-010 E-011
E-008 E-003 E-004 E-009

Pushbuttons Pushbuttons & Indicator Lights & buzzers P-002
3. Technical data
3.1 Refer to table below for rated values
related to utilization category.
Rated operational voltage, V 415 240 120

AC-15
Rated operational current, A 1.9 3 6
Rated operational voltage, V 250 125 -
DC-13
Rated operational current, A 0.27 0.55 -
3.2 Refer to table 3

for basic parameters of illuminated pushbutton.
Basic parameters LED lamp

Rated operational current ≤20mA
Rated operational voltage AC/DC 6V, 12V, 24V, 36V, AC110V~230V
3.3 Durability
Mechanical life:
Flush, mushroom-headed and illuminated version:
3×106 operation circles.
Rotary, double-headed, self-locking and keyed version:
Electric life:
NP8 22mm Pushbutton Flush, mushroom-headed and illuminated version:
Compound Models AC 1×106 / DC 2.5×105 operation circles.

Rotary, double-headed, self-locking and key type button:
5
E
1. General
3.4 Short-circuit protective device: NT00-16 16A
Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, AC415V/DC250V;
Degree of protection: IP65 4. Features
Standard: IEC/EN60947-5-1
4.1 Operating mechanism features
2. Operating conditions bright colors and streamline surface.
4.2 Modular design.

2.1 Ambient temperature is -5℃~+40℃, the average
Operating system, adapter, contact system
temperature during 24 hours couldn't exceed +35℃.
and illuminating system can be freely combined
2.2 Altitude: ≤2000m. to realize different functions.
2.3 Atmosphere condition: Relative humidity of the atmosphere 4.3 Convenient for mounting
couldn't exceed 50% when the highest temperature is and dismounting thanks to snap-on structure.
+40℃; much higher relative humidity is allowable under
4.4 Automatic locking function of the central adaptor
the condition of lower temperature, for example,
makes it convenient and reliable
when the temperature reaches +20℃, the relatice humidity
for mounting and connection.
is up to 90%. As for dews,
which contingently appear due to change of temperature, 4.5 The terminal screw is available
special steeps should be taken. with anti-loosing mechanism to protect it
against loosening from the body during transportation.
4.6 LED lamp with high brightness and long service life
2.5 Installation category: Ⅱ
ensures reliable indication.
2.6 Tightening torque is 0.8~1.2N·m for the cable terminals.
Cross section of the cable connection is 0.5~2.5mm2,
and 8mm conductor length is needed.
5. NP8 pushbutton
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton-(Non illuminated)
NP8-□□ NP8-□□
Model Color Model Color
BN/ □□ BN/ □□
NP8-10BN/1 1 — NP8-30BN/1 3 —
NP8-10BN/2 1 — NP8-30BN/2 3 —
NP8-10BN/3 1 — NP8-30BN/3 3 —
NP8-10BN/4 1 — NP8-30BN/4 3 —
NP8-10BN/5 1 — NP8-30BN/5 3 —
NP8-10BN/6 1 — NP8-30BN/6 3 —
NP8-01BN/1 — 1 NP8-03BN/1 — 3
NP8-01BN/2 — 1 NP8-03BN/2 — 3
NP8-01BN/3 — 1 NP8-03BN/3 — 3
NP8-01BN/4 — 1 NP8-03BN/4 — 3
NP8-01BN/5 — 1 NP8-03BN/5 — 3
NP8-01BN/6 — 1 NP8-03BN/6 — 3
NP8-20BN/1 2 — NP8-12BN/1 1 2
NP8-20BN/2 2 — NP8-12BN/2 1 2
NP8-20BN/3 2 — NP8-12BN/3 1 2
NP8-20BN/4 2 — NP8-12BN/4 1 2
NP8-20BN/5 2 — NP8-12BN/5 1 2
NP8-20BN/6 2 — NP8-12BN/6 1 2
NP8-02BN/1 — 2 NP8-21BN/1 2 1
NP8-02BN/2 — 2 NP8-21BN/2 2 1
NP8-02BN/3 — 2 NP8-21BN/3 2 1
NP8-02BN/4 — 2 NP8-21BN/4 2 1
NP8-02BN/5 — 2 NP8-21BN/5 2 1
NP8-02BN/6 — 2 NP8-21BN/6 2 1
NP8-11BN/1 1 1
NP8-11BN/2 1 1 Dimension (mm)
NP8-11BN/3 1 1
NP8-11BN/4 1 1 13
NP8-11BN/5 1 1
NP8-11BN/6 1 1
31max
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton-illuminated

AC/DC6V, 12V, 24V, 36V, AC110V~230V
61max 46max
Model Color
NP8-10BND/1 1 —
— Model Color
NP8-10BND/3 1
NP8-10BND/4 1 — NP8-20BND/1 2 —
NP8-10BND/5 1 — NP8-20BND/3 2 —
NP8-10BND/6 1 — NP8-20BND/4 2 —
NP8-01BND/1 — 1 NP8-20BND/5 2 —
NP8-01BND/3 — 1 NP8-20BND/6 2 —
NP8-01BND/4 — 1 NP8-02BND/1 — 2
NP8-01BND/5 — 1 NP8-02BND/3 — 2
NP8-01BND/6 — 1 NP8-02BND/4 — 2
NP8-02BND/5 — 2
Dimension (mm) NP8-02BND/6 — 2

NP8-11BND/1 1 1
13 NP8-11BND/3 1 1
NP8-11BND/4 1 1
NP8-11BND/5 1 1
31max
NP8-11BND/6 1 1
46max
61max
★ Momentary Projecting Pushbutton-(Non illuminated)
NP8-10GN/1 1 — NP8-30GN/1 3 —
NP8-10GN/2 1 — NP8-30GN/2 3 —
NP8-10GN/3 1 — NP8-30GN/3 3 —
NP8-10GN/4 1 — NP8-30GN/4 3 —
NP8-10GN/5 1 — NP8-30GN/5 3 —
NP8-10GN/6 1 — NP8-30GN/6 3 —
NP8-01GN/1 — 1 NP8-03GN/1 — 3
NP8-01GN/2 — 1 NP8-03GN/2 — 3
NP8-01GN/3 — 1 NP8-03GN/3 — 3
NP8-01GN/4 — 1 NP8-30GN/4 3 —
NP8-01GN/5 — 1 NP8-30GN/5 3 —
NP8-01GN/6 — 1 NP8-30GN/6 3 —
NP8-20GN/1 2 — NP8-03GN/1 — 3
NP8-20GN/2 2 — NP8-03GN/2 — 3
NP8-20GN/3 2 — NP8-03GN/3 — 3
NP8-20GN/4 2 — NP8-03GN/4 — 3
NP8-20GN/5 2 — NP8-03GN/5 — 3
NP8-20GN/6 2 — NP8-03GN/6 — 3
NP8-02GN/1 — 2 NP8-12GN/1 1 2
NP8-02GN/2 — 2 NP8-12GN/2 1 2
E
NP8-02GN/3 — 2 NP8-12GN/3 1 2
NP8-02GN/4 — 2 NP8-12GN/4 1 2
NP8-02GN/5 — 2 NP8-12GN/5 1 2
NP8-02GN/6 — 2 NP8-12GN/6 1 2
NP8-11GN/1 1 1 NP8-21GN/1 2 1
NP8-11GN/2 1 1 NP8-21GN/2 2 1
NP8-11GN/3 1 1 NP8-21GN/3 2 1
NP8-11GN/4 1 1 NP8-21GN/4 2 1
NP8-11GN/5 1 1 NP8-21GN/5 2 1
NP8-11GN/6 1 1 NP8-21GN/6 2 1
★ Momentary Projecting Pushbutton-illuminated Dimension (mm)

AC/DC6V, 12V, 24V, 36V, AC110V~230V
20
Model Color
31max
NP8-10GND/1 1 —
NP8-10GND/3 1 —
NP8-10GND/4 1 —
NP8-10GND/5 1 — 46max
69max
NP8-10GND/6 1 —
NP8-01GND/1 — 1
NP8-01GND/3 — 1
Model Color
NP8-01GND/4 — 1
NP8-01GND/5 — 1 NP8-20GND/1 2 —
NP8-01GND/6 — 1 NP8-20GND/3 2 —
NP8-20GND/4 2 —
Dimension (mm) NP8-20GND/5 2 —
NP8-20GND/6 2 —
20 NP8-02GND/1 — 2
NP8-02GND/3 — 2
NP8-02GND/4 — 2
31max
NP8-02GND/5 — 2
NP8-02GND/6 — 2
NP8-11GND/1 1 1
46max
69max NP8-11GND/3 1 1
NP8-11GND/4 1 1
NP8-11GND/5 1 1
NP8-11GND/6 1 1
★ Φ40 Momentary Mushroom Pushbutton-(Non illuminated)

Model Color
NP8-03M/14 — 3
Model Color
NP8-03M/15 — 3
NP8-10M/11 1 — —
NP8-03M/16 3
NP8-10M/12 1 —
NP8-12M/11 1 2
NP8-10M/13 1 —
NP8-12M/12 1 2
NP8-10M/14 1 —
NP8-12M/13 1 2
NP8-10M/15 1 —
NP8-12M/14 1 2
NP8-10M/16 1 —
NP8-12M/15 1 2
NP8-01M/11 — 1 NP8-12M/16 1 2
NP8-01M/12 — 1 NP8-21M/11 2 1
NP8-01M/13 — 1 NP8-21M/12 2 1
NP8-01M/14 — 1 NP8-21M/13 2 1
NP8-01M/15 — 1 NP8-21M/14 2 1
NP8-01M/16 — 1 NP8-21M/15 2 1
NP8-20M/11 2 —
NP8-21M/16 2 1
NP8-20M/12 2 —
NP8-20M/13 2 —
★ Φ60 Momentary Mushroom Pushbutton-(Non illuminated)
NP8-20M/14 2 —
NP8-20M/15 2 —
NP8-20M/16 2 — Model Color
NP8-02M/11 — 2
NP8-10M/21 1 —
NP8-02M/12 — 2
NP8-10M/22 1 —
NP8-02M/13 — 2
NP8-10M/23 1 —
NP8-02M/14 — 2
NP8-10M/24 1 —
NP8-02M/15 — 2
NP8-10M/25 1 —
NP8-02M/16 — 2
NP8-10M/26 1 —
NP8-11M/11 1 1 —
NP8-01M/21 1
NP8-11M/12 1 1 —
NP8-01M/22 1
NP8-11M/13 1 1 —
NP8-01M/23 1
NP8-11M/14 1 1 —
NP8-01M/24 1
NP8-11M/15 1 1 —
NP8-01M/25 1
NP8-11M/16 1 1 —
NP8-01M/26 1
NP8-30M/11 3 —
NP8-20M/21 2 —
NP8-30M/12 3 —
NP8-20M/22 2 —
NP8-30M/13 3 —
NP8-20M/23 2 —
NP8-30M/14 3 —
NP8-20M/24 2 —
NP8-30M/15 3 —
NP8-20M/25 2 —
NP8-30M/16 3 —
NP8-20M/26 2 —
NP8-03M/11 — 3
NP8-02M/21 — 2
NP8-03M/12 — 3
NP8-02M/22 — 2
NP8-03M/13 — 3
★ Φ40 Momentary Mushroom Pushbutton-illuminated

Model Color
AC/DC6V, 12V, 24V, 36V, AC110V~230V
NP8-02M/23 — 2
NP8-02M/24 — 2 Model Color
NP8-02M/25 — 2
NP8-10MD/11 1 —
NP8-02M/26 — 2
NP8-10MD/13 1 —
NP8-11M/21 1 1
NP8-10MD/14 1 —
NP8-11M/22 1 1
NP8-10MD/15 1 —
NP8-11M/23 1 1
NP8-10MD/16 1 —
NP8-11M/24 1 1
NP8-01MD/11 — 1
NP8-11M/25 1 1
NP8-01MD/13 — 1
NP8-11M/26 1 1
NP8-01MD/14 — 1
NP8-30M/21 3 —
NP8-01MD/15 — 1
NP8-30M/22 3 —
NP8-01MD/16 — 1
NP8-30M/23 3 —
NP8-20MD/11 2 —
NP8-30M/24 3 —
NP8-20MD/13 2 —
NP8-30M/25 3 —
NP8-20MD/14 2 —
NP8-30M/26 3 —
NP8-20MD/15 2 —
NP8-03M/21 — 3
NP8-20MD/16 2 —
NP8-03M/22 — 3
NP8-02MD/11 — 2
NP8-03M/23 — 3
NP8-02MD/13 — 2
NP8-03M/24 — 3
NP8-02MD/14 — 2
NP8-03M/25 — 3
NP8-02MD/15 — 2
NP8-03M/26 — 3
E
NP8-02MD/16 — 2
NP8-12M/21 1 2
NP8-11MD/11 1 1
NP8-12M/22 1 2
NP8-11MD/13 1 1
NP8-12M/23 1 2
NP8-11MD/14 1 1
NP8-12M/24 1 2
NP8-11MD/15 1 1
NP8-12M/25 1 2
NP8-11MD/16 1 1
NP8-12M/26 1 2
NP8-21M/21 2 1
NP8-21M/22 2 1 ★ Φ60 Momentary Mushroom Pushbutton-illuminated
NP8-21M/23 2 1 AC/DC6V, 12V, 24V, 36V, AC110V~230V
NP8-21M/24 2 1
NP8-21M/25 2 1
Model Color
NP8-21M/26 2 1
NP8-10MD/21 1 —
Dimension (mm) NP8-10MD/23 1 —
NP8-10MD/24 1 —
NP8-10MD/25 1 —
NP8-□□M/□
41(61)max
NP8-10MD/26 1 —
28 NP8-01MD/21 — 1
NP8-01MD/23 — 1
NP8-01MD/24 — 1
NP8-01MD/25 — 1
31max
NP8-01MD/26 — 1
75max
46max
NP8-□□
★ Φ40 Mushroom Latching Pushbutton.turn to release
Model Color
MD/ □□ (Non-illuminated)
NP8-20MD/21 2 —
NP8-20MD/23 2 — NP8-□□
Model Color
ZS/ □□
NP8-20MD/24 2 —
NP8-20MD/25 2 —
NP8-10ZS/14 1 —
NP8-20MD/26 2 —
NP8-02MD/21 — 2
NP8-02MD/23 — 2
NP8-01ZS/14 — 1
NP8-02MD/24 — 2
NP8-02MD/25 — 2
NP8-02MD/26 — 2
NP8-11MD/21 1 1 NP8-□□
Model Color
NP8-11MD/23 ZS/ □□
1 1
NP8-11MD/24 1 1
NP8-11MD/25 1 1 NP8-20ZS/14 2 —
NP8-11MD/26 1 1
NP8-02ZS/14 — 2
Dimension (mm)
NP8-□□MD/□
NP8-11ZS/14 1 1
41(61)max
28

(Non-illuminated)
31max
NP8-□□
Model Color
75max ZS/ □□
46max
NP8-10ZS/24 1 —
NP8-01ZS/24 — 1
NP8-20ZS/24 2 —
NP8-□□
★ Φ30 Mrushoom Latching Pushbutton.turn to release
Model Color
ZS/ □□ (Non-illuminated)
NP8-02ZS/24 — 2 NP8-□□
Model Color
ZS/ □□
NP8-20ZS/34 2 —
NP8-11ZS/24 1 1
NP8-02ZS/34 — 2
(Non-illuminated)
NP8-□□ NP8-11ZS/34 1 1
Model Color
ZS/ □□
NP8-10ZS/34 1 — Dimension (mm)
NP8-□□ZS/□
NP8-01ZS/34 — 1 35
Φ61(Φ41,Φ31)max
83max E
★ Double-headed flush momentory button (Non-illuminated)
NP8- □□ S Lamp-Voltage Model Color
NP8-20S + 2 —
Non-illuminated NP8-02S + — 2
NP8-11S + 1 1
★ Double-headed flush momentory button (Illuminated)
NP8- □□ SD Lamp-Voltage Model Color
NP8-20SD + 2 —
LED: AC/DC 6V,

12V, 24V, 36V; NP8-02SD + — 2
AC 110V ～230V
NP8-11SD + 1 1
Dimension (mm)
NP8-□□S/□ NP8-□□SD/□
31max
31max
61max 56max 61max 56max

★ Light Dimension (mm)
Lamp-Voltage Model Color

15 NP8-D/□
NP8-D/1
NP8-D/3
LED: AC/AD 6V,
31max
12V, 24V, 36V; NP8-D/4
AC110V～230V
NP8-D/5
NP8-D/6
62max 46max
★ Selector Switches (2 positions)-(Non-illuminated)
Selector
Metal Color
Switches NP8- □□ Selector
Metal Color
X/22 □ Switches
NP8-10X/211 1 —
NP8-20X/221 2 —
NP8-10X/212 1 —
NP8-20X/222 2 —
NP8-10X/213 1 —
NP8-20X/223 2 —
NP8-10X/214 1 —
NP8-20X/224 2 —
NP8-10X/215 1 —
NP8-20X/225 2 —
NP8-10X/216 1 —
NP8-20X/226 2 —
NP8-01X/211 — 1
NP8-02X/221 — 2
NP8-01X/212 — 1
NP8-02X/222 — 2
NP8-01X/213 — 1
NP8-02X/223 — 2
NP8-01X/214 — 1
NP8-02X/224 — 2
NP8-01X/215 — 1
NP8-02X/225 — 2
NP8-01X/216 — 1
NP8-02X/226 — 2
Selector
Metal Color NP8-11X/221 1 1
Switches
— NP8-11X/222 1 1
NP8-10X/221 1
— NP8-11X/223 1 1
NP8-10X/222 1
— NP8-11X/224 1 1
NP8-10X/223 1
— NP8-11X/225 1 1
NP8-10X/224 1
— NP8-11X/226 1 1
NP8-10X/225 1
NP8-10X/226 1 —
NP8-01X/221 — 1 ★ Selector Switches (3 positions)-(Non-illuminated)

NP8-01X/222 — 1
NP8-01X/223 — 1 NP8- □□ Selector
Metal Color
X/ □ Switches
NP8-01X/224 — 1
— NP8-20X/311 2 —
NP8-01X/225 1
— NP8-20X/312 2 —
NP8-01X/226 1
NP8-20X/313 2 —
NP8- □□ Selector
Metal Color NP8-20X/314 —
X/ □ Switches 2
— NP8-20X/315 2 —
NP8-20X/211 2
— NP8-20X/316 2 —
NP8-20X/212 2
— NP8-02X/311 — 2
NP8-20X/213 2
— NP8-02X/312 — 2
NP8-20X/214 2
— NP8-02X/313 — 2
NP8-20X/215 2
— NP8-02X/314 — 2
NP8-20X/216 2
— NP8-02X/315 — 2
NP8-02X/211 2
— NP8-02X/316 — 2
NP8-02X/212 2
NP8-02X/213 — 2 NP8-11X/311 1 1
NP8-02X/214 — 2 NP8-11X/312 1 1
NP8-02X/215 — 2 NP8-11X/313 1 1
NP8-02X/216 — 2 NP8-11X/314 1 1
NP8-11X/211 1 1 NP8-11X/315 1 1
NP8-11X/212 1 1 NP8-11X/316 1 1
NP8-11X/213 1 1
NP8-11X/214 1 1
NP8-11X/215 1 1
NP8-11X/216 1 1
NP8- □□ Selector ★ Selector Switches (2 positions) -(Illuminated)

Metal Color
X/33 □ Switches AC/DC6V, 12V, 24V, 36V, AC110V~230V
NP8-20X/331 2 —
NP8-20X/332 2 — NP8- □□ Selector

Metal Color
XD/ □ Switches
NP8-20X/333 2 —
— NP8-10XD/211 1 —
NP8-20X/334 2
— NP8-10XD/213 1 —
NP8-20X/335 2
— NP8-10XD/214 1 —
NP8-20X/336 2
— NP8-10XD/215 1 —
NP8-02X/331 2
— NP8-10XD/216 1 —
NP8-02X/332 2
— NP8-01XD/211 — 1
NP8-02X/333 2
— NP8-01XD/213 — 1
NP8-02X/334 2
— NP8-01XD/214 — 1
NP8-02X/335 2
— NP8-01XD/215 — 1
NP8-02X/336 2
NP8-01XD/216 — 1
NP8-11X/331 1 1
NP8-11X/332 1 1 NP8- □□ Selector
Metal Color
XD/22□ Switches
NP8-11X/333 1 1
NP8-10XD/221 1 —
NP8-11X/334 1 1
NP8-10XD/223 1 —
NP8-11X/335 1 1
NP8-10XD/224 1 —
NP8-11X/336 1 1
NP8-10XD/225 1 —
Metal Color NP8-10XD/226 1 —
X/37 □ Switches
— NP8-01XD/221 — 1
NP8-20X/371 2
— NP8-01XD/223 — 1
NP8-20X/372 2
NP8-01XD/224 — 1
E
NP8-20X/373 2 —
— NP8-01XD/225 — 1
NP8-20X/374 2
— NP8-01XD/226 — 1
NP8-20X/375 2
Metal Color
XD/ □ Switches
NP8-02X/371 — 2
— NP8-20XD/211 2 —
NP8-02X/372 2
— NP8-20XD/213 2 —
NP8-02X/373 2
— NP8-20XD/214 2 —
NP8-02X/374 2
— NP8-20XD/215 2 —
NP8-02X/375 2
— NP8-20XD/216 2 —
NP8-02X/376 2
NP8-02XD/211 — 2
NP8-11X/371 1 1
NP8-02XD/213 — 2
NP8-11X/372 1 1
NP8-02XD/214 — 2
NP8-11X/373 1 1
NP8-02XD/215 — 2
NP8-11X/374 1 1
NP8-02XD/216 — 2
NP8-11X/375 1 1
NP8-11X/376 NP8-11XD/211 1 1
1 1
NP8-11XD/213 1 1
Metal Color NP8-11XD/214 1 1
X/38 □ Switches
NP8-20X/381 — NP8-11XD/215 1 1
2
NP8-20X/382 — NP8-11XD/216 1 1
2
Metal Color
XD/22□ Switches
NP8-20X/384 2 —
— NP8-20XD/221 2 —
NP8-20X/385 2
— NP8-20XD/223 2 —
NP8-20X/386 2
— NP8-20XD/224 2 —
NP8-02X/381 2
— NP8-20XD/225 2 —
NP8-02X/382 2
— NP8-20XD/226 2 —
NP8-02X/383 2
— NP8-02XD/221 — 2
NP8-02X/384 2
— NP8-02XD/223 — 2
NP8-02X/385 2
— NP8-02XD/224 — 2
NP8-02X/386 2
NP8-02XD/225 — 2
NP8-11X/381 1 1
NP8-02XD/226 — 2
NP8-11X/382 1 1
NP8-11X/383 NP8-11XD/221 1 1
1 1
NP8-11X/384 NP8-11XD/223 1 1
1 1
NP8-11X/385 NP8-11XD/224 1 1
1 1
NP8-11X/386 NP8-11XD/225 1 1
1 1
NP8-11XD/226 1 1
★ Key Switches (2 positions)-(Non-illuminated)

Metal Color
NP8-□□ Key XD/33□ Switches
Metal
Y/□ Switches —
NP8-20XD/331 2
NP8-20XD/333 2 —
NP8-10Y/21 1 — NP8-20XD/334 2 —
NP8-20XD/335 2 —
NP8-20XD/336 2 —
NP8-01Y/21 — 1 —
NP8-02XD/331 2
NP8-02XD/333 — 2
NP8-□□ Key NP8-02XD/334 — 2
Metal
Y/22 Switches —
NP8-02XD/335 2
NP8-02XD/336 — 2
NP8-10Y/22 1 — NP8-11XD/331 1 1
NP8-11XD/333 1 1
NP8-11XD/334 1 1
NP8-01Y/22 — 1 NP8-11XD/335 1 1
NP8-11XD/336 1 1
NP8-□□ Key NP8- □□ Selector
Metal Metal Color
Y/□ Switches XD/37□ Switches
NP8-20XD/371 2 —
NP8-20Y/21 2 —
NP8-20XD/373 2 —
NP8-20XD/374 2 —
NP8-02Y/21 — 2
NP8-20XD/375 2 —
NP8-20XD/376 2 —
NP8-11Y/21 1 1
NP8-02XD/371 — 2
NP8-□□ Key NP8-02XD/373 — 2
Metal
Y/22 Switches —
NP8-02XD/374 2
NP8-02XD/375 — 2
NP8-20Y/22 2 — NP8-02XD/376 — 2
NP8-11XD/371 1 1
NP8-11XD/373 1 1
NP8-02Y/22 — 2 NP8-11XD/374 1 1
NP8-11XD/375 1 1
NP8-11XD/376 1 1
NP8-11Y/22 1 1
Metal Color
XD/38□ Switches
NP8-20XD/381 2 —
★ Selector Switches (3 positions) -(Illuminated) NP8-20XD/383 2 —
AC/DC6V, 12V, 24V, 36V, AC110V~230V NP8-20XD/384 2 —
NP8-20XD/385 2 —
NP8- □□ Selector NP8-20XD/386 2 —
Metal Color
XD/ □ Switches NP8-02XD/381 — 2
NP8-20XD/311 2 — NP8-02XD/383 — 2
NP8-20XD/313 2 — NP8-02XD/384 — 2
NP8-20XD/314 2 — NP8-02XD/385 — 2
NP8-20XD/315 2 — NP8-02XD/386 — 2
NP8-20XD/316 2 — NP8-11XD/381 1 1
NP8-02XD/311 — 2 NP8-11XD/383 1 1
NP8-02XD/313 — 2 NP8-11XD/384 1 1
NP8-02XD/314 — 2 NP8-11XD/385 1 1
NP8-02XD/315 — 2 NP8-11XD/386 1 1
NP8-02XD/316 — 2
NP8-11XD/311 1 1 Dimension (mm)
NP8-11XD/313 1 1
NP8-11XD/314 1 1 NP8-□□XD/□
30
NP8-11XD/315 1 1
NP8-11XD/316 1 1
31max
46max
78max
★ Key Switches (3 positions)-(Non-illuminated) NP8-Contact NO

NP8-Contact NC
NP8-□□ Key
Metal
Y/□ Switches
32
10
NP8-20Y/31 2 —
NP8-02Y/31 — 2
34.2
NP8-11Y/31 1 1
NP8-LED units
NP8-□□ Key
Metal
Y/33 Switches
34
NP8-20Y/33 2 —
10
NP8-02Y/33 — 2
NP8-11Y/33 1 1 34.2
NP8-□□ Key
Metal
Y/37 Switches NP8-English Warning Labelφ60
NP8-20Y/37 2 — E RG E N
M C
Y
NP8-02Y/37 — 2
NP8-□□
NP8-11Y/37
Metal
Key
1 1
STOP
E
Y/38 Switches
NP8-20Y/38 2 — NP8-Warning Labelφ60
NP8-02Y/38 — 2
NP8-11Y/38 1 1
Dimension (mm)
43 NP8-□□Y/□
NP2,NP8,ND16 Installation tool
17
31max
φ33
140
86max 46max
Dimension (mm) NP8 Basement
46
NP8-□□X/□
31
11
31max
78max 46max
★ Metal-headed
Flush Ф40mm Ф60mm Ф40mm Turn to release Selector Selector

NP2-BA □□ mushroom mushroom mushroom NP2-BS □□ NP2-BD □□ NP2-BJ □□
NP2-BC □□ NP2-BR □□ push-pull
NP2-BT□□
E-016 E-018 E-018 E-018 E-018 E-020 E-020
Key switch Double-headed Illuminated Illuminated double- Indicator light

NP2-BG □□ NP2-BL8 □□□ NP2-BW3 □□□ headed NP2-BV □□
NP2-BW8 □□□
E-020 E-018 E-017 E-019 E-019
★ Plastic-headed
Flushbutton Ф40mm Ф60mm Turn to release Selector Selector

NP2-EA □□ mushroom mushroom NP2-ES □□ NP2-ED □□ NP2-EJ □□
NP2-EC □□ NP2-ER □□
E-021 E-022 E-022 E-024 E-025 E-025
Key switch Double-headed Illuminated Indicator light Economic indicator

NP2-EG □□ NP2-EL8 □□□ double-headed NP2-EV □□ light
NP2-EW8 □□□ NP2-EV16 □
E-026 E-023 E-023 E-024 E-025
Seperated modulars Head

★ Head-metal
Flush Illuminated Selector switch Key switch

NP2-BA □ NP2-BW3 □ NP2-BD □ NP2-BG □
E-027 E-027 E-028 E-028

Double-headed NP2-BL842 Illuminated double- Indicator light

button headed button NP2-BV/□
NP2-BL832 NP2-BW84
E-027 E-027 E-027 E-027
★ Head-plastic
Flush button Selector switch Illuminated Indicator light

NP2-EA □ NP2-ED □ button NP2-EV/□
NP2-EW3□
E-027 E-028 E-027 E-027
E
Double- Double- Illuminated Key switch
headed button headed button double-headed button NP2-EG □
NP2-EL832 NP2-EL842 NP2-EW84
E-027 E-027 E-027 E-028
Adaptor
Metal Plastic Base
NP2-BZ009 NP2-EZ009 NP2-EW6 NP2-EV6
E-028 E-028 E-029 E-029
Accessories
Bulbs Warning Label Water-proof enclosure
BA9s Ф60 Ф90 For NP2-BP For NP2-BA For NP2-BL832 For NP2-BL842
E-029 E-029 E-029 E-029 E-029 E-029 E-029

3. Technical data
3.1 Rated insulation voltage Ui : 415V
3.2 Conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
Rated operational Rated operational current Ie (A)

voltage Ue (V) AC-15 DC-13
415 1.9 -
240 3 0.27
125 - 0.55
3.3 Durability
Electric life: Flush-headed and mushroom-headed type: AC
5×105 operation circles, DC 2×105 operation circles; other
type: 1×105 operation circles; Mechanical life: flush-headed
and mushroom-headed type:
1 million operation circles, button with light:
3×105 operation circles;
other type: 1×105 operation circles.
4. Data of lamps of illuminated button

NP2 Series
Direct type
Basic parameters
1. General LED lamp
Rated operational current Ie Ie≤20mA
Rated operational voltage (V) AC/DC 6, 12, 24, 48, 110, 230
Degree of protection: IP40
Power supply rated
Standard: IEC/EN60947-5-1 operational current Ie
Ie≤20mA
2. Operating conditions Rated operational voltage (V) AC/DC 230, 380
2.1 Ambient temperature is -5℃~+40℃,the average 5. Features

5.1 No-dismounting of the button from the front side thanks to
2.2 Altitude: ≤2000m.
anti-moving operating part of metal type button;
2.3 Atmosphere condition: Relative humidity of the atmosphere
5.2 Reliable contacting could be ensured because of dual
couldn't exceed 50% when the highest temperature is +40℃;
functions of circuit switching and self-cleaning for all
much higher relative humidity is allowable under the
contacting points;
condition of lower temperature, for example, when the
temperature reaches +20℃, the relative humidity is up to 5.3 NC and NO contacting assemblies are independent to each
90%. As for dews, which contingently appear due to change other, and could be freely combined for convenient
of temperature,special steps should be taken. replacement;
2.4 Pollution degree: 3 5.4 Concealed connection terminals make the operation safe and
reliable. Elegant appearance due to adoption of Aluminum
2.5 Overvoltage category: Ⅱ
and Zinc alloy in metal type button operating parts and
2.6 Tightening torque is 0.8~1.2N·m for the cable terminals. bases.
Cross section of the cable connection is 0.5~2.5mm2, and
8mm conductor length is needed. 6. NP2 Series
NP2-BA □□ Model Color

NP2-BA11 1 —
NP2-BA21 1 —
NP2-BA31 1 —
NP2-BA41 1 —
NP2-BA51 1 —
NP2-BA61 1 —
NP2-BA12 — 1
NP2-BA22 — 1
NP2-BA32 — 1
NP2-BA42 — 1
014
NP2-BA52 — 1
NP2-BA62 — 1
Dimensions (mm)
NP2-BA □□ Model Color
NP2-BA13 2 —
13
NP2-BA □□
NP2-BA23 2 —
NP2-BA33 2 —
NP2-BA43 2 —
40
NP2-BA53 2 —
NP2-BA63 2 —
30 NP2-BA14 — 2
55
NP2-BA24 — 2
NP2-BA34 — 2
NP2-BA □□□□ Model Color NP2-BA44 — 2
NP2-BA3311 1 — NP2-BA54 — 2
NP2-BA2365 1 1 NP2-BA64 — 2
NP2-BA4322 — 1 NP2-BA15 1 1
NP2-BA2351 1 — NP2-BA25 1 1
NP2-BA1345 1 1 NP2-BA35 1 1
NP2-BA45 1 1
NP2-BL □□ Model Color NP2-BA55 1 1
NP2-BL42 — 1 NP2-BA65 1 1
NP2-BL31 1 —
NP2-BL55 1 1
NP2-BA □□□□
NP2-BL65 1 1
NP2-BL15 1 1
—
E
NP2-BL21 1
40
NP2-BW1 □□□ Model Color Note 11.5
56 30
NP2-BW1161 6V LED 1 —
NP2-BW1361 6V LED 1 —
NP2-BW1462 6V LED — 1 Direct NP2-BL □□

NP2-BW1561 6V LED 1 — 6V~230V
NP2-BW1661 6V LED 1 —
40
NP2-BW4 □□□ Model Color Note
18.5
NP2-BW4161 6V LED 1 — 30
83
NP2-BW4361 6V LED 1 —
Direct
NP2-BW4462 6V LED — 1
6V~230V
NP2-BW4561 6V LED 1 — NP2-BW1 □□□
NP2-BW4661 6V LED 1 —
40
NP2-BK1 □□65 Model Color Note

NP2-BK12365 6V LED 1 1
18.5
80 30
NP2-BK12465 6V LED 1 1
NP2-BK12565 6V LED 1 1 Two-position
locked
NP2-BK13365 6V LED 1 1
NP2-BK13465 6V LED 1 1 NP2-BW4 □□□
NP2-BK13565 6V LED 1 1
41
40
24
87 30
NP2-BK1 □□ 65
40
26
90 30
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton (Illuminated)
NP2-BW □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color

NP2-BW3161 LED 1 —
NP2-BW3361 LED 1 —
NP2-BW3461 LED 1 —
NP2-BW3561 LED 1 —
LED : AC /DC 6V, 12V,
NP2-BW3661 LED 1 —
24V, 36V, 48V,
110V, 230V NP2-BW3162 LED — 1
NP2-BW3362 LED — 1
NP2-BW3462 LED — 1
NP2-BW3562 LED — 1
NP2-BW3662 LED — 1
NP2-BW3163 LED 2 —
NP2-BW3363 LED 2 —
NP2-BW3463 LED 2 —
NP2-BW3563 LED 2 —
LED : AC /DC 6V, 12V, NP2-BW3663 LED 2 —
24V, 36V, 48V,
NP2-BW3164 LED — 2
110V, 230V
NP2-BW3364 LED — 2
NP2-BW3464 LED — 2
NP2-BW3564 LED — 2
NP2-BW3664 LED — 2
NP2-BW3165 LED 1 1
LED : AC/DC 6V, 12V, NP2-BW3365 LED 1 1

24V, 36V, 48V, NP2-BW3465 LED 1 1
110V, 230V
NP2-BW3565 LED 1 1
NP2-BW3665 LED 1 1
Dimensions (mm) ★ φ60 Momentary Mushroom (non-illuminated)
NP2-BR □□ Model Color

NP2-BW 3 □ 6 □
NP2-BR11 1 —
19
NP2-BR21 1 —
NP2-BR31 1 —
NP2-BR41 1 —
40
NP2-BR51 1 —
NP2-BR61 1 —
NP2-BR12 — 1
NP2-BR22 — 1
30 NP2-BR32 — 1
80 —
NP2-BR42 1
NP2-BR52 — 1
NP2-BR62 — 1
★ φ40 Momentary Mushroom (non-illuminated)
NP2-BC □□ Model Color

NP2-BC11 1 —
NP2-BC21 1 —
NP2-BC31 1 —
NP2-BC41 1 —
NP2-BC51 1 —
NP2-BC61 1 —
NP2-BC12 — 1
NP2-BC22 — 1
NP2-BC32 — 1
NP2-BC42 — 1
NP2-BC52 — 1
NP2-BC62 — 1
★ Φ40 Mushroom push-pull(non-illuminated) NP2-BC □□ Model Color

NP2-BC13 2 —
NP2-BT □□ Model Color NP2-BC23 2 —
NP2-BC33 2 —
NP2-BC43 2 —
NP2-BT42 — 1 NP2-BC53 2 —
NP2-BC63 2 —
NP2-BC14 — 2
NP2-BC24 — 2
Dimensions (mm) —
NP2-BC34 2
NP2-BC44 — 2
NP2-BC □□ NP2-BC54 — 2
NP2-BR □□ NP2-BC64 — 2
33 NP2-BT □□
NP2-BC15 1 1
NP2-BC25 1 1
φ 40/ φ 60
NP2-BC35 1 1
40
NP2-BC45 1 1
NP2-BC55 1 1
NP2-BC65 1 1
77
NP2-BR □□ Model Color

NP2-BR13 2 —
★ Double-headed flush momentory button (Non-illuminated) NP2-BR23 2 —
NP2-BR33 2 —
NP2-BL8 □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color
NP2-BR43
NP2-BR53
2
2
—
—
E
NP2-BR63 2 —
-------- NP2-BL8325 + 1 1
NP2-BR14 — 2
NP2-BR24 — 2
NP2-BR34 — 2
NP2-BR44 — 2
NP2-BR54 — 2
-------- NP2-BL8425 + 1 1 —
NP2-BR64 2
NP2-BR15 1 1
NP2-BR25 1 1
NP2-BR35 1 1
NP2-BR45 1 1
NP2-BR55 1 1
NP2-BR65 1 1
Dimensions (mm)
NP2-BL8325
12
42
55 30
★ Double-headed flush momentory button (Illuminated) Dimensions (mm)
NP2-BW8 □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color

15 NP2-BW8 □ 6 □
LED : AC/DC 6V,

12V, 24V, 36V, 48V, NP2-BW8465 + 1 1
110V, 230V
55
★ Mushroom button latching, turn to release(Non-illuminated)
30
79
Mushroom
NP2-BS □□ Model Color
-Diameter
NP2-BS441 1 —
φ30
NP2-BS442 — 1
Dimensions (mm)
NP2-BS541 1 —
φ40
NP2-BS542 — 1 NP2-BS □□□
NP2-BS641 1 —
φ60 33
NP2-BS642 — 1
NP2-BS443 2 —
φ30 NP2-BS444 — 2
φ30/ φ40/ φ60
NP2-BS445 1 1
40
NP2-BS543 2 —
φ40 NP2-BS544 — 2
NP2-BS545 1 1
NP2-BS643 2 —
77
φ60 NP2-BS644 — 2
NP2-BS645 1 1
★ Indicator Dimensions (mm)
NP2-BV □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color

NP2-BV61 14
NP2-BV 6 □
NP2-BV63
LED: AC 6V,
12V, 24V, 36V, NP2-BV64
40
48V, 110V, 230V NP2-BV65

NP2-BV66
56 30
★ Selector Switches (2 positions)-(Non-illuminated) ★ Selector Switches (3 positions)-(Non-illuminated)
NP2-BD Selector NP2-BD Selector

Metal Metal
(J, G) □□ Switches (J, G) □□ Switches
NP2-BD21 1 — NP2-BD33 2 —
NP2-BD22 — 1 NP2-BD34 — 2
NP2-BD23 2 — NP2-BD35 1 1
NP2-BD24 — 2 NP2-BD73 2 —
NP2-BD25 1 1 NP2-BD74 — 2
NP2-BD41 1 — NP2-BD75 1 1
NP2-BD42 — 1 NP2-BD53 2 —
NP2-BD43 2 — NP2-BD54 — 2
NP2-BD44 — 2 NP2-BD55 1 1
NP2-BD45 1 1 NP2-BD83 2 —
NP2-BJ21 1 — NP2-BD84 — 2
NP2-BJ22 — 1 NP2-BD85 1 1
NP2-BJ23 2 — NP2-BJ33 2 —
NP2-BJ24 — 2 NP2-BJ34 — 2
NP2-BJ25 1 1 NP2-BJ35 1 1
NP2-BJ41 1 — NP2-BJ73 2 —
NP2-BJ42 — 1 NP2-BJ74 — 2
NP2-BJ43 2 — NP2-BJ75 1 1
NP2-BJ44 — 2 NP2-BJ53 2 —
NP2-BJ45 1 1 NP2-BJ54 — 2
NP2-BG21
NP2-BG22
NP2-BG23
1
—
2
—
1
—
NP2-BJ55
NP2-BJ83
NP2-BJ84
1
2
—
1
—
2
E
NP2-BG24 — 2 NP2-BJ85 1 1
NP2-BG25 1 1 NP2-BG33 2 —
NP2-BG21B 1 — NP2-BG34 — 2
NP2-BG22B — 1 NP2-BG35 1 1
NP2-BG23B 2 — NP2-BG73 2 —
NP2-BG24B — 2 NP2-BG74 — 2
NP2-BG25B 1 1 NP2-BG75 1 1
NP2-BG41 1 — NP2-BG53 2 —
NP2-BG42 — 1 NP2-BG54 — 2
NP2-BG43 2 — NP2-BG55 1 1
NP2-BG44 — 2 NP2-BG83 2 —
NP2-BG45 1 1 NP2-BG84 — 2
NP2-BG85 1 1
NP2-BG33D 2 —
NP2-BG34D — 2
NP2-BG35D 1 1
Dimensions (mm)
42
27
27 19
40
40
40
70
30 63
30
70 30
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton (Non-illuminated) NP2-EA □□ Model Color

NP2-EA13 2 —
NP2-EA □□ Model Color NP2-EA23 2 —
NP2-EA11 1 — —
NP2-EA33 2
NP2-EA21 1 — —
NP2-EA43 2
NP2-EA31 1 — —
NP2-EA53 2
NP2-EA41 1 — —
NP2-EA63 2
NP2-EA51 1 — —
NP2-EA14 2
NP2-EA61 1 — —
NP2-EA24 2
NP2-EA12 — 1 —
NP2-EA34 2
NP2-EA22 — 1 —
NP2-EA44 2
NP2-EA32 — 1 —
NP2-EA54 2
NP2-EA42 — 1 —
NP2-EA64 2
NP2-EA52 — 1 NP2-EA15 1 1
NP2-EA62 — 1 NP2-EA25 1 1
NP2-EA35 1 1
Dimensions (mm) NP2-EA45 1 1

NP2-EA55 1 1
NP2-EA □□ NP2-EA65 1 1
12
Dimensions (mm)
42
NP2-EW 3 □ 6 □
19
55
30
42
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton (Illuminated)
30
NP2-EW3 □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color
80
NP2-EW3161 1 —
NP2-EW3361 1 —
NP2-EW3461 1 —
NP2-EW3561 1 —
NP2-EW3661 1 —
NP2-EW3162 — 1
LED: AC/DC 6V, NP2-EW3363 — 2
12V, 24V, 36V,
NP2-EW6464 — 2
48V, 110V, 230V
NP2-EW3562 — 1
NP2-EW3662 — 1
NP2-EW3165 1 1
NP2-EW3365 1 1
NP2-EW3465 1 1
NP2-EW3565 1 1
NP2-EW3665 1 1
★ Φ40 Momentary Mushroom button -(Non-illuminated) ★ Φ60 Momentary Mushroom button -(Non-illuminated)
NP2-EC □□ Model Color NP2-ER □□ Model Color
NP2-EC11 1 — NP2-ER11 1 —
NP2-EC21 1 — NP2-ER21 1 —
NP2-EC31 1 — NP2-ER31 1 —
NP2-EC41 1 — NP2-ER41 1 —
NP2-EC51 1 — NP2-ER51 1 —
NP2-EC61 1 — NP2-ER61 1 —
NP2-EC12 — 1 NP2-ER12 — 1
NP2-EC22 — 1 NP2-ER22 — 1
NP2-EC32 — 1 NP2-ER32 — 1
NP2-EC42 — 1 NP2-ER42 — 1
NP2-EC52 — 1 NP2-ER52 — 1
NP2-EC62 — 1 NP2-ER62 — 1
NP2-EC13 2 — NP2-ER13 2 —
NP2-EC23 2 — NP2-ER23 2 —
NP2-EC33 2 — NP2-ER33 2 —
NP2-EC43 2 — NP2-ER43 2 —
NP2-EC53 2 — NP2-ER53 2 —
NP2-EC63 2 — NP2-ER63 2 —
NP2-EC14 — 2 NP2-ER14 — 2
NP2-EC24 — 2 NP2-ER24 — 2
NP2-EC34 — 2 NP2-ER34 — 2
NP2-EC44
NP2-EC54
—
—
—
2
2
NP2-ER44
NP2-ER54
NP2-ER64
—
—
—
2
2
2
E
NP2-EC64 2
NP2-EC15 1 1 NP2-ER15 1 1
NP2-EC25 1 1 NP2-ER25 1 1
NP2-EC35 1 1 NP2-ER35 1 1
NP2-EC45 1 1 NP2-ER45 1 1
NP2-EC55 1 1 NP2-ER55 1 1
NP2-EC65 1 1 NP2-ER65 1 1
Dimensions (mm)
33
φ 40/ φ 60
42
77
★ Double-headed flush momentory button -(Non-illuminated)
NP2-EL8 □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color
-------- NP2-EL8325 + 1 1
-------- NP2-EL8425 + 1 1
Dimensions (mm)
NP2-EL8325
12
42
55 30
★ Double-headed flush momentory button (Illuminated)
NP2-EW8 □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color
LED: AC/DC 6V, 12V,

24V, 36V, 48V, NP2-EW8465 + 1 1
110V, 230V
Dimensions (mm)
15
55
78 30
★ Mushroom button latching, turn to release (Non-illuminated)
NP2-ES □□ Mushroom-Diameter Model Color

NP2-ES441 1 —
φ30
NP2-ES442 — 1
NP2-ES541 1 —
φ40 —
NP2-ES542 1
NP2-ES641 1 —
φ60
NP2-ES642 — 1
NP2-ES443 2 —
φ30 NP2-ES444 — 2
NP2-ES445 1 1
NP2-ES543 2 —
φ40 NP2-ES544 — 2
NP2-ES545 1 1
NP2-ES643 2 —
φ60 NP2-ES644 — 2
NP2-ES645 1 1
Dimensions (mm)
NP2-ES □□□
33
E
φ30/ φ40/ φ60
42
77
★ Indicator Dimensions (mm)
NP2-EV □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color NP2-EV 6 □

NP2-EV61 17
NP2-EV63
LED: AC/DC 6V,
12V, 24V, 36V, NP2-EV64
42
48V, 110V, 230V NP2-EV65

NP2-EV66
56 30
★ Indicator (compact) Dimensions (mm)
NP2-EV16 □□ Lamp-Voltage Model Color

14
NP2-EV161
LED: AC 6V, NP2-EV163
12V, 24V, 36V,
NP2-EV164
48V, 110V, 230V
NP2-EV165
NP2-EV166
54
★ Selector Switches (2 positions)-(Non-illuminated)
NP2-ED Selector
Model
(J、G) □□ Switches
NP2-ED21 1 — ★ Selector Switches (3 positions)-(Non-illuminated)

NP2-ED22 — 1
NP2-ED23 2 — Selector
Model
Switches
NP2-ED24 — 2
NP2-ED33 2 —
NP2-ED25 1 1
— NP2-ED34 — 2
NP2-ED41 1
NP2-ED42 — 1 NP2-ED35 1 1
— NP2-ED73 2 —
NP2-ED43 2
— NP2-ED74 — 2
NP2-ED44 2
NP2-ED45 1 1 NP2-ED75 1 1
— NP2-ED53 2 —
NP2-EJ21 1
— NP2-ED54 — 2
NP2-EJ22 1
NP2-EJ23 2 — NP2-ED55 1 1
— NP2-ED83 2 —
NP2-EJ24 2
NP2-ED84 — 2
NP2-EJ25 1 1
NP2-EJ41 1 — NP2-ED85 1 1
— NP2-EJ33 2 —
NP2-EJ42 1
— NP2-EJ34 — 2
NP2-EJ43 2
NP2-EJ44 — 2 NP2-EJ35 1 1
NP2-EJ73 2 —
NP2-EJ45 1 1
NP2-EJ74 — 2
NP2-EJ75 1 1
NP2-EJ53 2 —
NP2-EJ54 — 2
NP2-EJ55 1 1
NP2-EJ83 2 —
NP2-EJ84 — 2
NP2-EJ85 1 1
Dimensions (mm)
NP2-ED □□
27
42
70
30
★ Selector Switches (2 positions)-(Non-illuminated) ★ Selector Switches (3 positions)-(Non-illuminated)
Selector Selector
Model Model
Switches Switches
NP2-EG21 1 — NP2-EG33 2 —
NP2-EG22 — 1 NP2-EG34 — 2
NP2-EG23 2 — NP2-EG35 1 1
NP2-EG24 — 2 NP2-EG73 2 —
NP2-EG25 1 1 NP2-EG74 — 2
NP2-EG41 1 — NP2-EG75 1 1
NP2-EG42 — 1 NP2-EG53 2 —
NP2-EG43 2 — NP2-EG54 — 2
NP2-EG44 — 2 NP2-EG55 1 1
NP2-EG45 1 1 NP2-EG83 2 —
NP2-EG21B 1 — NP2-EG84 — 2
NP2-EG22B — 1 NP2-EG85 1 1
NP2-EG23B 2 — NP2-EG33D 2 —
NP2-EG24B — 2 NP2-EG34D — 2
NP2-EG25B 1 1 NP2-EG35D 1 1
Dimensions (mm)
NP2-EJ □□
E
27
42
30
70
42 NP2-EG □□
19
42
63
30
Head ★ Emergency stop button
★ Flush Momentary button-(Non-illuminated) NP2-BS□4 Metal Specifications
NP2-BS44 4： Turn restoration Φ30

NP2-BA □ Metal Specifications
NP2-BA1
NP2-BA2
NP2-BA3
NP2-BA4
NP2-BA5
NP2-BA6
NP2-EA □ Plastic Specifications
NP2-EA1
NP2-BA□□□ Metal Specifications NP2-EA2
NP2-BA331 NP2-EA3
NP2-BA236 NP2-EA4
NP2-BA432 NP2-EA5
NP2-BA235 NP2-EA6
NP2-BA134
NP2-BA637
NP2-EW3 □ Plastic Specifications
NP2-EW31
★ Flush Momentary button-(Illuminated) NP2-EW33
NP2-EW34
NP2-BW3 □ Metal Specifications
NP2-EW35
NP2-BW31
NP2-EW36
NP2-BW33
NP2-BW34
NP2-EL □□□ Plastic Specifications
NP2-BW35
NP2-BW36
NP2-EL832 Flush button
★ Double head button-(Non-illuminated)
NP2-BL □□□ Metal Specifications Flush button +

NP2-EL842 projecting button
NP2-BL832 Flush button
NP2-EW □□ Specifications
Plastic
Flush button +
NP2-BL842 projecting button Flush button +
NP2-EW84 projecting button
★ Double head button-(Illuminated)

NP2-EV/ □ Plastic Specifications
NP2-BW □□ Metal Specifications NP2-EV/1
NP2-EV/3
Flush button + NP2-EV/4
NP2-BW84
projecting button NP2-EV/5
NP2-EV/6
★ Indicator light NP2-ES□4 Plastic Specifications
3：Status indication
NP2-ES34
NP2-BV/ □ Metal Specifications turn restoration Φ40
NP2-BV/1 NP2-ES44 4： Turn restoration Φ30
NP2-BV/5
NP2-BV/6
★ Head of Selector Switch-(Non-illuminated) NP2-ED/ □ Plastic Specifications
NP2-BD/ □ Metal Specifications

NP2-ED2
NP2-BD2
NP2-ED3
NP2-BD3
NP2-ED4
NP2-BD4
NP2-ED5
NP2-BD5
NP2-EG7
NP2-BG7
NP2-EG8
NP2-BG8
NP2-EG □ Plastic Specifications
★ Head of Key Switch-(Non-illuminated)

NP2-EG2
E
NP2-BG □ Metal Specifications
NP2-BG2 NP2-EG2B
NP2-BG2B NP2-EG3
NP2-BG3 NP2-EG3D
NP2-BG3D NP2-EG4
NP2-BG4 NP2-EG5
NP2-BG5 NP2-EG7
NP2-BG7 NP2-EG8
NP2-BG8 NP2-EZ009 Plastic Specifications
NP2-EZ009 For NP2-E □□

★ Adapter
NP2-BZ009 Metal Specifications
NP2-BZ009
★ Waring label NP2-BZ Plastic Specifications
NP2-BY Plastic Specifications

NP2-BZ31 30mm(H)X45mm(L)
NP2-BY9101 Φ60 (blank)

NP2-BY9330 Φ60 (printed)
★ Head-enclosure of Push-button- (Water proof)
NP2-BY8101 Φ90 (blank) Specifications

NP2-BY8330 Φ90 (printed)
For NP2-BP
★ Contact block
NP2-BE □□□ Metal Specifications

For NP2-BA(EA)
NP2-BE101 NO Contact
Specifications
NP2-BE102 NC Contact
For NP2-BL(EL)832
NP2-BE103 2NO Contact
NP2-BE104 2NC Contact

For NP2-BL(EL)842
NP2-BE105 1NO+1NC Contact
★ Base for Illuminated (without lamp) BA9s Specifications

AC/DC 48V
NP2-EW □/EV □ Metal Specifications
AC/DC 48V
AC/DC 48V
NP2-EW6/EV6 Direct type
AC/DC 48V
AC/DC 48V
AC/DC 110V
★ Lamp (LED) AC/DC 110V
AC/DC 110V
BA9s Specifications
AC/DC 110V
AC/DC 6V AC/DC 110V
AC/DC 6V AC/DC 220V
AC/DC 6V AC/DC 220V
AC/DC 6V AC/DC 220V
AC/DC 6V AC/DC 220V
AC/DC 12V AC/DC 220V
AC/DC 12V
AC/DC 12V
AC/DC 12V
AC/DC 12V
AC/DC 24V
AC/DC 24V
AC/DC 24V
AC/DC 24V
AC/DC 24V
AC/DC 36V
AC/DC 36V
AC/DC 36V
AC/DC 36V
AC/DC 36V
★ Enclosure
Type code of button with box Meaning of the type code

PIC ( construction code) Configure Sign Color of the cover
B101H29 Gree flush button, 1NO Scutcheon sign: START French grey
B102 Gree flush button, 1NO Push button sign: Ⅰ French grey
B103 Gree flush button, 1NO Push button sign: START French grey
B111H29 Red flush button, 1NC Scutcheon sign: STOP French grey
B112 Red flush button, 1NC Push button sign: O French grey
B114 Red flush button, 1NC Push button sign: STOP French grey
RedΦ40 mushroom button

B174H29 Scutcheon sign: STOP French grey
self-locking, knob reset 1NC
J174 H29
Scutcheon sign: STOP Yellow
E
J174 Yellow
Two positons locking

B132H29 Scutcheon sign:STOP START French grey
knob,1NO
Two positons locking

B142H29 Scutcheon sign:STOP START French grey
key button,1NO
Green flush button 1NO

B211H29 Scutcheon sign:STOP,START French grey
Red flush button 1NC

B213 Push button sign: ⅠO French grey
Green flush button 1NO Push button sign:

B215 French grey
Red flush button 1NC START,STOP
White flush button 1NO

B222 Push button sign: ↑↓ French grey
Black fulsh button 1NO

B223 Push button sign: → ← French grey
Black fulsh button 1NO
Type code of button with box Meaning of the type code

PIC (construction code) Configure Sign Color of the cover

Scutcheon sign: FORWARD
B311H29 Red flush button 1NC French grey
STOP, REVERSE

Scutcheon sign: UP, STOP
DOWN

Scutcheon sign: OPEN, STOP
CLOSE
Push button sign:

Ⅰ
B339 Red flush button 1NC French grey
O
Black flush button 1NO
Ⅱ
Push button sign:

↑
O
↓
Push button sign:

→
O
←
Red pilot lamp, 220V LED

lamp, direct type Scutcheon sign: START,
B361H29 French grey
Green flush button 1NO STOP

Push button sign:
lamp, direct type
B363 Ⅰ French grey
O

lamp, direct type Push button sign: START,
B366 French grey
Green flush button 1NO STOP
Empty boxes, of which there

B01,B02,B03 is one hole, two holes and three French grey
holes.
Enclosure: normally opened cotact, normally closed contact



temperature reaches +20℃, the relative humidity is up to
90%. As for dews, which contingently appear due to change
of temperature, special steps should be taken.
3. Technical data
Rated insulated voltage Ui: 250V

Conventional heating current Ith: 3A
NP6 Series Rated operational voltage Ue (V) 24

-
110 220
AC-15 0.7 0.5
Rated operational current Ie (A)
E
DC-13 0.7 - 0.1
1. General

Degree of protection: IP40
Flush , Flush, Illuminated flush, Illuminated flush, Mushroom-headed,

latching momentary latching momentary momentary
NP6-□□ BS / □□ NP6-□□ B / □□ NP6-□□ DS / □□ NP6-□□ D / □□ NP6-□□ J / □
E-033~E-034 E-033 E-034~E-035 E-034~E-035 E-035
Mushroom-headed,
latching Key switch Selector switch Indicator light
NP6-□□ ZS / □ NP6-□□ Y / □□ NP6-□□ X / □□ NP6-XD / □□
E-036 E-036 E-035 E-036

4. Data of lamps of illuminated button
Rated operational voltage (V) 6 12 24

Rated operational current (mA) ≤20 ≤20 ≤20
Color
Life (h) ≥30000
4.1 Contact
Contact resistance: ≤50mΩ
4.2 Durability
Electric life (operation circles) Instantaneous button: AC: 500×103 ,DC: 250×103 Selector switch: 100×103
Mechanical life (operation circles) Instantaneous button: 1×106 Selector switch: 100×103
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton-(Non illuminated)
NP6-□□ NP6-□□
B/ □ J B/ □ Y
NP6-11B/1J 1 NP6-11B/1Y 1
NP6-11B/2J 1 NP6-11B/2Y 1
NP6-11B/3J 1 NP6-11B/3Y 1
NP6-11B/4J 1 NP6-11B/4Y 1
NP6-11B/5J 1 NP6-11B/5Y 1
NP6-11B/6J 1 NP6-11B/6Y 1
NP6-11B/7J 1 NP6-11B/7Y 1
NP6-22B/1J 2 NP6-22B/1Y 2
NP6-22B/2J 2 NP6-22B/2Y 2
NP6-22B/3J 2 NP6-22B/3Y 2
NP6-22B/4J 2 NP6-22B/4Y 2
NP6-22B/5J 2 NP6-22B/5Y 2
NP6-22B/6J 2 NP6-22B/6Y 2
NP6-22B/7J 2 NP6-22B/7Y 2
NP6-□□ ★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton-(Non illuminated)(Latching)

Model Color
B/ □ F
NP6-11B/1F 1
Model Color
NP6-11B/2F 1
NP6-11B/3F 1 NP6-11BS/1J 1
NP6-11B/4F 1 NP6-11BS/2J 1
NP6-11B/5F 1 NP6-11BS/3J 1
NP6-11B/6F 1 NP6-11BS/4J 1
NP6-11B/7F 1 NP6-11BS/5J 1
NP6-22B/1F 2 NP6-11BS/6J 1
NP6-22B/2F 2 NP6-11BS/7J 1
NP6-22B/3F 2 NP6-22BS/1J 2
NP6-22B/4F 2 NP6-22BS/2J 2
NP6-22B/5F 2 NP6-22BS/3J 2
NP6-22B/6F 2 NP6-22BS/4J 2
NP6-22B/7F 2 NP6-22BS/5J 2
NP6-22BS/6J 2
NP6-22BS/7J 2
NP6-□□ NP6-□□
BS/ □ F BS/ □ Y
NP6-11BS/1F 1 NP6-11BS/1Y 1
NP6-11BS/2F 1 NP6-11BS/2Y 1
NP6-11BS/3F 1 NP6-11BS/3Y 1
NP6-11BS/4F 1 NP6-11BS/4Y 1
NP6-11BS/5F 1 NP6-11BS/5Y 1
NP6-11BS/6F 1 NP6-11BS/6Y 1
NP6-11BS/7F 1 NP6-11BS/7Y 1
NP6-22BS/1F 2 NP6-22BS/1Y 2
NP6-22BS/2F 2 NP6-22BS/2Y 2
NP6-22BS/3F 2 NP6-22BS/3Y 2
NP6-22BS/4F 2 NP6-22BS/4Y 2
NP6-22BS/5F 2 NP6-22BS/5Y 2
NP6-22BS/6F 2 NP6-22BS/6Y 2
NP6-22BS/7F 2 NP6-22BS/7Y 2
Dimensions (mm)
9 9 22 8 φ18
22 8 18 9 22 8 18
0.6 1 0.6 1 5.7 0.6 1
E
GB14048.5-93 Ue:220V
GB14048.5-93 Ue:220V
NP6-11DS 按钮
NP6-11DS 按钮
GB14048.5-93 Ue:220V
NP6-11DS 按钮
24
18
Ie:0.5A
Ie:0.5A
Ie:0.5A
★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton-(Illuminated) (AC 6V,12V,24V) ★ Momentary Flush Pushbutton-(Illuminated)

(AC 6V,12V,24V , Latching)
NP6-11D/1J 1 NP6-11DS/1J 1
NP6-11D/3J 1 NP6-11DS/3J 1
NP6-11D/4J 1 NP6-11DS/4J 1
NP6-11D/5J 1 NP6-11DS/5J 1
NP6-11D/6J 1 NP6-11DS/6J 1
NP6-11D/7J 1 NP6-11DS/7J 1
NP6-22D/1J 2 NP6-22DS/1J 2
NP6-22D/3J 2 NP6-22DS/3J 2
NP6-22D/4J 2 NP6-22DS/4J 2
NP6-22D/5J 2 NP6-22DS/5J 2
NP6-22D/6J 2 NP6-22DS/6J 2
Rectangle 5PINS Rectangle 5PINS
NP6-22D/7J 2 NP6-22DS/7J 2
NP6-11D/1F 1 NP6-11DS/1F 1
NP6-11D/3F 1 NP6-11DS/3F 1
NP6-11D/4F 1 NP6-11DS/4F 1
NP6-11D/5F 1 NP6-11DS/5F 1
NP6-11D/6F 1 NP6-11DS/6F 1
NP6-11D/7F 1 NP6-11DS/7F 1
NP6-22D/1F 2 NP6-22DS/1F 2
NP6-22D/3F 2 NP6-22DS/3F 2
NP6-22D/4F 2 NP6-22DS/4F 2
NP6-22D/5F 2 NP6-22DS/5F 2
NP6-22D/6F 2 NP6-22DS/6F 2
NP6-22D/7F 2 NP6-22DS/7F 2
Model Color
Model Color
NP6-11D/1Y 1 NP6-11DS/1F 1
NP6-11D/3Y 1 NP6-11DS/3F 1
NP6-11D/4Y 1 NP6-11DS/4F 1
NP6-11D/5Y 1 NP6-11DS/5F 1
NP6-11D/6Y 1 NP6-11DS/6F 1
NP6-11D/7Y 1 NP6-11DS/7F 1
NP6-22D/1Y 2 NP6-22DS/1F 2
NP6-22D/3Y 2 NP6-22DS/3F 2
NP6-22D/4Y 2 NP6-22DS/4F 2
NP6-22D/5Y 2 NP6-22DS/5F 2
Round 5PINS NP6-22D/6Y 2 Round 5PINS NP6-22DS/6F 2
NP6-22D/7Y 2 NP6-22DS/7F 2
Dimensions (mm)
9 9 22 8 φ18
22 8 18 9 22 8 18
0.6 1 0.6 1 5.7 0.6 1
GB14048.5-93 Ue:220V
GB14048.5-93 Ue:220V
NP6-11DS 按钮
NP6-11DS 按钮
GB14048.5-93 Ue:220V
NP6-11DS 按钮
24
18
Ie:0.5A
Ie:0.5A
Ie:0.5A
★ Mushroom Pushbutton(Non illuminated) ★ Selector Switches (Non illuminated)
Selector
Model Color Model
Switches
NP6-11J/3 1
NP6-11X/2Y 1
NP6-11J/4 1
NP6-11J/5 1
NP6-22X/2Y 2
NP6-22J/3 2
NP6-22J/4 2
NP6-22X/3Y 2
NP6-22J/5 2
★ Mushroom Pushbutton-(Non illuminated)-(Latching) Dimensions (mm)
NP6-□□ ZS/4 Model Color
Ue:220V Ie:0.5A
NP6-11ZS/4 1
φ18
NP6 -11X 按钮
GB14048.5-93
φ18
NP6-22ZS/4 2 9 0.6 1
15.5 22 8
★ Indicator
★ Key Switches(Non illuminated)

NP6-XD/ □□ Model Color Voltage
NP6-XD/1J
Selector
NP6-XD/3J Model
Switches
NP6-XD/4J DC 6V,
NP6-XD/5J DC 12V, NP6-11Y/2Y 1
DC 24V
NP6-XD/6J
NP6-XD/7J NP6-22Y/2Y 2
NP6-XD/1F
NP6-XD/3F NP6-22Y/3Y 2
NP6-XD/4F
NP6-XD/5F
DC 6V,
DC 12V,
Dimensions (mm)
NP6-XD/6F
E
DC 24V
NP6-XD/7F
NP6-XD/1Y NP6-□□Y/□Y
NP6-XD/3Y
DC 6V,
NP6-XD/4Y
DC 12V,
NP6-XD/5Y DC 24V
Ue:220V Ie:0.5A
φ18
NP6 -11Y 按钮
NP6-XD/6Y
GB14048.5-93
NP6-XD/7Y
φ18
9 0.6 1
★ Key Switches(Non illuminated)
26 22 8
Selector
Model
Switches
NP6-11Y/2F 1 ★ Key Switches(Non illuminated)
NP6-22Y/2F 2 Selector
Model Switches
NP6-22Y/3F 2
NP6-11Y/2J 1
NP6-22Y/2J 2
Dimensions (mm)
NP6-22Y/3J 2
Ue:220V Ie:0.5A
NP6 -11Y 按钮
Dimensions (mm)
24
GB14048.5-93
NP6-□□Y/□J
9 0.6 1 18
26 22 8
Ue:220V Ie:0.5A
NP6 -11Y 按钮
24
GB14048.5-93
9 0.6 1
18
26 22 8
2.1 Ambient temperature is -5℃~+40℃, the average temperature

during 24 hours couldn't exceed +35℃.

temperature reaches +20℃, the relatice humidity is up to
3. Feature
With good capability of dust-proof and rain-proof application;

ensures reliable operation of circuit and equipments.
4. Technical data
NP3 Series
4.1 Rated insulation voltage Ui : 380V
1. General 4.2 Conventional thermal current Ith: 10A
Electric ratings: AC50/60Hz, AC380V/DC220V
Degree of protection: IP65 Rated operational voltage Ue (V) 380 220 110
andard: IEC/EN60947-5-1 Rated operational AC-15 2.5 4.5 -
current le (A) DC-13 - 0.3 0.6
4.3 Durability
Electric life: instantaneous: AC 5×105 operation circles,
DC 2×105 operation circles;
other type: 1×105 operation circles;
Mechanical life: instantaneous:
1×106 operation circles,
Illuminated button: 3×105 operation circles;
other type: 1×105 operation circles;
4.4 Contact
Contact resistance≤50mΩ (initial value)
NP3-□A NP3-□B NP3-□K

NP3
with power on & off with power on & off with starting and
(mechanical interlock) (electrical interlock) emergency stop button
E-038 E-038 E-041 E-041

5. NP3 series indicator

★ Momentary Flush button
NP3 □ Model Function
NP3-1 UP/DOWN
NP3-2 UP/DOWN, LEFT/RIGHT
NP3-3 UP/DOWN, LEFT/RIGHT, FRONT/BACT
NP3-4 UP/DOWN, LEFT/RIGHT, FRONT/BACT,Anti-clockwise/Clockwisw
UP/DOWN, LEFT/RIGHT, FRONT/BACT, Anti-clockwise/Clockwisw, FAST/SLOW

E
NP3-5
★ Momentary Flush button With Power Switching

("start" button Maintained)
Model Function
NP3-1A ON/OFF, UP/DOWN
NP3-2A ON/OFF, UP/DOWN, LEFT/RIGHT
NP3-3A ON/OFF, UP/DOWN, LEFT/RIGHT, FRONT/BACK
NP3-4A UP/DOWN, LEFT/RIGHT, FRONT/BACT,Anti-clockwise/Clockwisw

8-10
8-10 8-10
8-10
11-14
11-14
11-14 11-14 15-17
15-17
15-17 18-20
15-17
18-20
P-039
18-20
18-20
250
Dimension (mm)
310
Up
140
ON
Down
OFF
200
Up
ON
Up
Down 70 50
430
OFF Down
430
Left
Up
70 50
Right
NP3-1
320
Down
320
Front
8-10
Left
11-14
Back
15-17
Right
Anti- 18-20
clockwise
Front
Clockwise
Back
70 50
310
70 50
Up
Pushbuttons & Indicator Lights & buzzers
NP3-3A
NP3-1A
NP3-4
Down
200
Left
Right
8-10
8-10 8-10
11-14
11-14 11-14
70 50
15-17
15-17
15-17
18-20
18-20
18-20
NP3-2
Pushbuttons
8-10
11-14
15-17
18-20
Up
ON
ON
370
Down
OFF
OFF
Left
490
Up Up
260
490
Right
Down Down
Front
Up
380
370
Left Left
380
Back
Down
Right Right
Anti-
clockwise
Left
260
Front
Clockwise
70 50
Right
Back Fast
Anti- Front
Slow
clockwise
Back
Clockwise
70 50
70 50 70 50
NP3-4A
NP3-3
NP3-2A
NP3-5
8-10 8-10
8-10 8-10
11-14 11-14
11-14 11-14
15-17 15-17
15-17 15-17
18-20 18-20 18-20

18-20
310
ON ON
ON ON
370
OFF OFF
200
OFF OFF
430
Up Up
Up
490
Up
260
Down Down
Down
320
Down
Left
380
Left Left 70 50
Right
Right Right
Front
Front
Back 70 50
Back
Anti-
clockwise
Clockwise
70 50
70 50
NP3-3B
NP3-2B
NP3-1B
NP3-4B
Pushbuttons Pushbuttons & Indicator Lights & buzzers
P-040
E
NP3 □ B Model Function
NP3-1B START, STOP , UP/DOWN
NP3-2B START, STOP , UP/DOWN, LEFT/RIGHT
NP3-3B START, STOP , UP/DOWN, LEFT/RIGHT, FRONT/BACK
NP3-4B START, STOP , UP/DOWN, LEFT/RIGHT, FRONT/BAC, Anti-Clockwise

("start" button Maintained)
NP3 □ K Model Function
NP3-1K START, UP/DOWN
NP3-2K START, UP/DOWN, LEFT/RIGHT
NP3-3K START, UP/DOWN, LEFT/RIGHT, FRONT/BACK
NP3-4K START, UP/DOWN, LEFT/RIGHT, FRONT/BAC, Anti-Clockwise
★The electrical appliance diagrams of NP3
NP3-□B NP3-□K
NP3-□ NP3-□ A
STOP
UP ON
START START
DOWN OFF
LEFT UP
UP UP
RIGHT DOWN
DOWN DOWN
FRONT LEFT LEFT LEFT
BACK RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT
Anti-clockwise FRONT FRONT FRONT
Clockwise BACK BACK BACK
FAST Anti-clockwise Anti-clockwise

SLOW Clockwise
Clockwise Clockwise

couldn't exceed 50% when the highest temperature is
+40℃; much higher relative humidity is allowable under the
temperature reaches +20℃, the relative humidity is up to
2.5 Installation category: Ⅱ
2.6 Tightening torque is 0.8~1.2N·m for the cable terminals.

Cross section of the cable connection is 0.5~2.5mm2, and
8mm conductor length is needed.
3. Technical data
3.1 Conventional heating current Ith: 10A
3.2 Refer to table below, for ratings under different utilization

categories.
Rated operational voltage, V 415 240 120

AC-15
NPH1 Pushbutton Box Rated operational current, V
Rated operational voltage, V
1.9 3 6
-
250 125
DC-13
1. General
Life
Rated operational current, V 0.27 0.55 -
E
Degree of protection: IP65 Electric life: Flush-headed and mushroom-headed type:
Standard: IEC/EN60947-5-1 AC 5×105 operations, DC2.5×105 operations;
other type: 1×105 operations;
2. Operating conditions Mechanical life: flush-headed and mushroom-headed type:
1 million operations,
2.1 Ambient temperature is -5℃~+40℃, the average button with light: 3×106 operations;
temperature during 24 hours couldn't exceed +35℃. other type: 1×105 operations
Rated operational voltage Rated operational current

AC/DC 6V, 12V, 24V, 36V ≤20mA
AC 110V~230V ≤20mA
Dimension (mm)
4. NPH1 Enclosure
Enclosure with one hole
Enclosure with one hole 75max
Specifications
Model Protection degree
Color
75max
NPH1-10J IP65
61max
57
NPH1-10 IP65
Enclosure with three hole
Enclosure with two hole Specifications

Color
Specifications
Color IP65
NPH1-30J
IP65
NPH1-20J IP65
IP65
Dimension (mm) Enclosure with three hole
Enclosure with two hole
75max
100
75max
68
61max 139max 57
61max 107max
57
Dimension (mm)
Box with one hole (with flush button) NPH1-1001~1004
Specifications
Model Color
75max
NPH1-1001 1 —
NPH1-1002 1 —
71max 75max
NPH1-1003 — 1
Dimension (mm)
NPH1-1004 — 1
NPH1-1005~1006
Box with one hole (with mushroom-headed button)
75max
Specifications
Model
Color
NPH1-1005 φ40 1 —
86max 75max
NPH1-1006 φ40 — 1
Dimension (mm)
NPH1-1007~1008
Box with one hole (with selector switch)
Specifications
Model Type of positions Color
75max
NPH1-1007 1 —
88max
75max
NPH1-1008 2 —
Dimension (mm)
Box with one hole (with mushroom-headed button,self-locking) NPH1-1009~1010
Specifications
Model Color
75max
NPH1-1009 φ40 — 1
94max
75max
NPH1-1010 φ60 — 1
Box with one hole (with key switch) Dimension (mm)
Specifications NPH1-1011
Model Type of positions
75max
NPH1-1011 — 1
75max
74max
Box with two holes (with flush button) Dimension (mm)
Specifications NPH1-2001~2004
Model Color 71max
1 —
NPH1-2001
— 1
107max
1 — Ⅰ
NPH1-2002
— 1
1 —
↓
NPH1-2003
— 1
↓
—
↓
1
NPH1-2004 75max
— 1 ↓
Box with three holes (with flush button)
E
Specifications
Model
Specifications Color
Model Color 1
1 NPH1-3005 1NC
NPH1-3001 — 1 Indicator
AC/DC 24V
1 — light
1 — Ⅰ 1 Ⅰ
NPH1-3002 — 1 NPH1-3006 1
—
=
1 Indicator
AC/DC 24V
— light
1
↓
— 1
NPH1-3003
1 —
↓
—
↓ NPH1-3005~3006
1
NPH1-3004 — 1
1 — ↓
Dimension (mm)
139max
NPH1-3001~3004
71max
73max
75max
139max
75max
P-045 Pushbuttons & Indicator Lights & buzzers Indicator Lights
2.3 Atmosphere condition:

Relative humidity of the atmosphere couldn't exceed 50%
when the highest temperature is +40℃; much higher relative
humidity is allowable under the condition of lower
temperature, for example, when the temperature reaches
+20℃, the relative humidity is up to 90%. As for dews, which
contingently appear due to change of temperature, special
steps should be taken.
2.5 Overvoltage category: Ⅲ
2.6 Tightening torque is 0.8~1.2N·m for the cable terminals, and

1.5~1.8N·m for the fixing nut. Cross section of the cable
connection is 0.5~2.5mm2, and 8mm conductor length is
eeded.
ND16 Indicator Light

1. General
Degree of protection: IP65,IP40,IP20(Buzzer);
ND16-22F, ND16-22FS
ND16-22A ND16-22AS ND16-22B ND16-22BS ND16-22C ND16-22CS ND16-22D ND16-22DS ND16-22BK
ND16-22L,ND16-22LC
E-046 E-046 E-047 E-047 E-047~E-048 E-047~E-048 E-048 E-048 E-050 E-049
3. Technical data
Basic parameters
Rated operational voltage Ue (V) Rated operational

Service life (h) Brightness (cd/m2) Basic color
AC AC/DC current (mA)
400 6
230 12
110 24
- 36 ≥40
Ie≤20 ≥30000
- 48 ≥20(BUZZER)
- 110
- 230
- 400
Note: For AC power supply, the limit voltage range is 0.85Ue~1.1Ue between terminals;C:IP65; K2:anti-interference
Indicator Lights Pushbuttons & Indicator Lights & buzzers P-046
4. ND16 series indicator
★ Flat Platform-Lampshape (Resistance type) ★ Flat Platform-Lampshape (Resistance type)
ND16-22A/2 Lamp-Voltage Model Color ND16-22AS/2 Lamp-Voltage Model Color
(W) (W)
LED
AC/DC 6V, (G) (G)
LED
AC/DC 12V,
AC/DC 6V,
AC/DC 24V, (R) AC/DC 12V,
(R)
ND16-22A/2
AC/DC 36V, ND16-22AS/2
ND16-22A/2K2 AC/DC 24V,
AC/DC 48V,
(Y) AC/DC 36V, (Y)
AC/DC 110V,
AC/DC 48V,
AC/DC 230V,
AC/DC 400V (B) (B)
(O) (O)
★ Flat Platform-Lampshape (Capacitor type) ★ Flat Platform-Lampshape (Capacitor type)
ND16-22A/4 Lamp-Voltage Model Color ND16-22AS/4 Lamp-Voltage Model Color
(W) (W)
(G) (G)
LED LED
AC 110V, (R) AC 110V, (R)
E
ND16-22A/4 ND16-22AS/4
AC 230V, AC 230V,
ND16-22A/4K2 AC 400V
AC 400V
(Y) (Y)
(B) (B)
(O) (O)
Dimensions (mm) Dimensions (mm)
ND16-22A/□ ND16-22AS/□
φ 31 φ 31
14
14
64
52
★ Flat Round Platform-Lampshape (Resistance type) ★ Compacted Flat Round Platform-Lampshape (Resistance type)
ND16-22B/2 Lamp-Voltage Model Color ND16-22BS/2 Lamp-Voltage Model Color
(W) (W)
LED
AC/DC 6V, (G) (G)
LED
AC/DC12V,
AC/DC 6V,
AC/DC24V, ND16-22B/2 (R) AC/DC12V, ND16-22BS/2 (R)
AC/DC36V, ND16-22B/2K2
AC/DC 24V, ND16-22BS/2C
AC/DC48V, ND16-22B/2C
(Y) AC/DC36V, (Y)
AC/DC110V,
AC/DC48V
AC/DC230V,
AC/DC400V (B) (B)
(O) (O)
★ Flat Round Platform-Lampshape (Capacitance type) ★ Compacted Flat Round Platform-Lampshape (Capacitance type)
ND16-22B/4 Lamp-Voltage Model Color ND16-22BS/4 Lamp-Voltage Model Color
(W) (W)
(G) (G)
LED ND16-22B/4 LED
AC 110V, (R) AC 110V, ND16-22BS/4
(R)
ND16-22B/4K2
AC 230V, AC 230V, ND16-22BS/4C
ND16-22B/4C
AC 400V (Y) AC 400V (Y)
(B) (B)
(O) (O)
ND16-22B/□ ND16-22BS/□
Ф31 Ф31
14.5
14.5
64
52
★ Arc Surface ripple-Lampshape (Resistance type) ★ Compacted Arc Surface ripple-Lampshape (Resistance type)
ND16-22C/2 Lamp-Voltage Model Color ND16-22CS/2 Lamp-Voltage Model Color
(W) (W)
LED
AC/DC 6V, (G) (G)
LED
AC/DC12V,
AC/DC 6V,
AC/DC24V, (R) (R)
ND16-22C/2 AC/DC12V,
AC/DC36V, ND16-22CS/2
ND16-22C/2K2 AC/DC24V,
AC/DC48V,
AC/DC110V, (Y) AC/DC36V, (Y)
AC/DC48V,
AC/DC230V,
AC/DC400V (B) (B)
(O) (O)
Indicator Lights Pushbuttons & Indicator Lights & buzzers P-048
★ Arc Surface ripple-Lampshape (Capacitance type) ★ Compacted Arc Surface ripple-Lampshape (Capacitance type)
ND16-22C/4 Lamp-Voltage Model Color ND16-22CS/4 Lamp-Voltage Model Color
(W) (W)
(G) (G)
LED LED
AC 110V, ND16-22C/4
(R) AC 110V,
(R)
ND16-22CS/4
AC230V, ND16-22C/4K2 AC230V,
AC 400V (Y) AC 400V (Y)
(B) (B)
(O) (O)
ND16-22C/□ ND16-22CS/□
Ф31 Ф31
13
13
62
50
E
★ Arc Surface Round-Lampshape (Resistance type) ★ Compacted Arc Surface Round-Lampshape (Resistance type)
ND16-22D/2 Lamp-Voltage Model Color ND16-22DS/2 Lamp-Voltage Model Color
(W) (W)
LED:
AC/DC 6V, (G) (G)
LED:
AC/DC12V,
AC/DC 6V,
AC/DC24V, ND16-22D/2 (R) AC/DC12V, ND16-22DS/2 (R)
AC/DC36V, ND16-22D/2K2
ND16-22D/2C AC/DC24V, ND16-22DS/2C
AC/DC48V,
(Y) AC/DC36V, (Y)
AC/DC110V,
AC/DC48V
AC/DC230V,
AC/DC400V (B) (B)
(O) (O)
★ Arc Surface Round-Lampshape (Capacitance type) ★ Compacted Arc Surface Round-Lampshape (Capacitance type)
ND16-22D/4 Lamp-Voltage Model Color ND16-22DS/4 Lamp-Voltage Model Color
(W) (W)
(G) (G)
LED
LED AC 110V,
ND16-22D/4 (R) ND16-22DS/4 (R)
AC 110V, AC 230V, ND16-22DS/4C
ND16-22D/4K2
AC230V, AC 400V
ND16-22D/4C
AC 400V (Y) (Y)
(B) (B)
(O) (O)
Ф31.5 Ф31.5
15.5
15
64
52
★ Fast connection type (Resistance type) ★ Fast connection type (Capacitance type)
ND16-22BK/2 Lamp-Voltage Model Color ND16-22BK/4 Lamp-Voltage Model Color
(W) (W)
LED:
AC/DC 6V, (G) (G)
AC/DC12V,
LED:
AC/DC24V, (R) (R)
AC 110V,
AC/DC36V, ND16-22BK/2 ND16-22BK/4
AC 230V,
AC/DC48V,
AC/DC110V, (Y) AC 400V, (Y)
AC/DC230V,
AC/DC400V (B) (B)
(O) (O)
Dimensions (mm)
Ф31max ND16-22BK/□
14.5
64
Buzzers Pushbuttons & Indicator Lights & buzzers P-050
★ Interrupted type ★ Interrupted & flush type
ND16 Buzzer Model Color Voltage ND16 Buzzer Model Color Voltage
AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V

AC/DC 36V AC/DC 36V
ND16-22F AC/DC 48V ND16-22FS AC/DC 48V
AC/DC 110V, AC/DC 110V,
AC230V, AC230V,
AC400V AC400V
★ Continuous type ★ Continuous & lit type
ND16 Buzzer Model Color Voltage ND16 Buzzer Model Color Voltage
AC/DC 24V AC/DC 24V

AC/DC 36V AC/DC 36V
ND16-22L AC/DC 48V ND16-22LC AC/DC 48V
AC/DC 110V, AC/DC 110V,
AC230V, AC230V,
AC400V AC400V
Dimension (mm)
Ф31
ND16-22F
ND16-22FS
E
ND16-22L
ND16-22LC
16
55
Inverter & Soft-Starter
Inverter
NVF2G NVF3M NVF3

Inverter Inverter Inverter
Soft-Starter
NJR2-D NJR2-T NJR2-ZX
Soft-Starter Soft-Starter On-line Soft-Starter

P-001 Inverter & Soft-Starter Inverter
NVF2G Inverter
1. General
NVF2G-series inverters are high-efficiency open-loop vector
inverter researched and developed independently by our
company. It has the features of high starting torque (0.5 Hz, 1.5
times of rated torque), strong overload capacity, flexible and
convenient operation and forward PID and reverses PID, etc.This
series of inverter can be divided into mini type, general type
(heavy load) and fan and water pump type (light load), with the
functions of strong load adaptability, stable and reliable
operation and automatic energy-saving operation, etc. This
product can be widely applied to electric drive field and
automation control field, such as , water supply, municipal
administration, food, cement, chemical industry, dyeing, plastic
machinery.
Applicable equipment of the product
Draught Pump Air Conveyor Food Packaging

fan conditioning belt machinery machinery
2. Product features
PLC
RS-485 Modbus
Inverter Inverter & Soft-Starter P-002
2.1 Excellent motor drive and control performance

▪ High starting torque: 0.5 Hz, 150% of rated motor torque;
▪ Superior energy-saving effect: the motor load more lighter more efficiency; Improve the operation efficiency of the motor through
energy-saving control; the motor still operates under high-efficiency status regardless of the changes of load;
▪ Accurate auto tuning function: it can accurately conduct overall and static auto tuning of motor parameters with
convenient debugging and simple operation, which can improve the control accuracy and response speed;
▪ Speed tracking: during the restarting after recovery from the momentary power interruption, it can judge the rotate direction and
speed of motor and continue to operate smoothly;
▪ External DC electric reactor (over 110 kW) can effectively restrain higher harmonic.
▪ The exclusive dead time compensation technology can increase the output torque;
▪ Wide carrier frequency: (1-15) kHz, can effectively reduce the operation noise of motor;
▪ Ultra-strong overload capacity -- Maintain 1 min under 150% of rated current; in heavy load, it is uneasy frequently to trip overload
protection and ensures the continuous and stable operation of the equipment;
▪ Real-time load monitoring -- Real-time monitoring of bus bar voltage and motor current to ensure stable start and stop and quick
tracking.
2.2 High reliability design

▪ Design of the scope of universal input voltage: The fluctuation range of input voltage can reach up to ±15%;
▪ The function of input filtration can reduce harmonic interference effectively;
▪ The function of automatic voltage regulation (AVR) and automatic current limiting can make the system more stable;
▪ Perfect protection function and fault diagnosis system provide safe and reliable guarantee for the equipment.
2.3 Various application functions

▪ It adopts RS-485 communication interface and standard MODBUS communication protocol and can take networked automation
control with external PLC equipment.
▪ It has wobble frequency, which is available for textile industry;
▪ The efficiently energy saving can be achieved by the built-in intelligent PID control and dormancy function;
▪ Simple PLC control: The inverter can operate in variable speed according to certain rule through simple PLC function; It not only can
define one circular multistage frequency into the function code, but also can define the operation time, direction and number of
cycles of the multistage frequency into the function code;
F
▪ Modular design: The NVF2G series inverter integrates the modular design that easy to be assembled and disassembled with the
dismountable air heater and operation keyboard, which is easy for maintenance and usage;
▪ Design of common DC bus bar: Many inverters can be connected in parallel through common DC bus bar to share the feedback
energy of braking, avoid overvoltage, stabilize the DC bus bar voltage of single inverter and make the equipment operate
continuously and stably.
2.4 Ultra-strong environmental suitability:

▪ The inverter should be used at an ambient temperature of -10℃ to +40℃ and derated by 1% per 1℃ when over 40℃;
▪ The input range of wide voltage is the 15% fluctuation range of 380V, which is available for various civil and industrial power grid;
▪ Circuit board is processed with conformal coating to make it available for various complicated working conditions.
3. Various software functions
Speed tracking operation Frequency skip control
Start with the speed of motor under coast stop Skipping the special frequency to prevent the vibration of
The motor under coast stop can be introduced to the set frequency mechanical system
automatically without the speed detector. In order to prevent the vibration of mechanical system, it can automatically
keep away from the resonance point when operating under the constant
speed.
DC braking when starting Multistage speed operation
Make the motor under coast stop stopping and The program can be operated according to the set multistage
restarting again speed
Under coast stop, the motor will be automatically stopped by DC It can operate according to the frequency of internal storage based on
braking and re-started immediately when the rotate direction of the the signal combination. Multistage speed control can be achieved through
motor is uncertain. PLC, limit switch, etc.
Automatic voltage regulation (AVR) Energy-saving operation
Ensure the stable output voltage during the operation of Automatic operation with peak efficiency
inverter Detect the load current and provide the motor with the peak efficiency
During the voltage fluctuation of the power grid, the output voltage voltage according to the load and rotate speed to achieve the most
of invert will not change with it. efficient energy saving operation.
Automatic current limiting Failure record
Automatically limit the output current to prevent frequent Storage the fault information automatically
overcurrent When there is fault alarm, it will automatically record the current and
When the load fluctuation exceeds the current limit level, it will make voltage and fault type to provide reference for determining the fault
automatic regulation to maintain the current within the allowed range. cause.
Torque limit Sleep Mode of water pump
It will protect the machinery to ensure the reliable operation To reduce the mechanical wear
of machinery and equipment When the water consumption at night is less and the output frequency
It is helpful to protect the machinery by controlling the torque generated of inverter is lower than the dormancy frequency, the inverter will enter
by the motor within the set value. into dormancy status.
Frequency detection PID control
It is used to detect the frequency and is available for interlock Automatic process control
of brake It will conduct PID calculation in the inverter and take the calculation
When the output frequency is higher than the set value, it will output result as the frequency instruction to quantitatively control the pressure,
signal and is available for the interlock control of equipment. flow and air volume, etc.
Wobble frequency control Restraint of over voltage
It is operated by swinging up and down by taking the set Prevent fault and tripping due to overvoltage
frequency as the center It is valid to punch and other operations that regenerated repeatedly
Wobble frequency is available for textile, chemical fiber and other due to the crank motion; According to the regeneration status, it will
industries and occasions needing traversing and winding function. increase or decrease the operation frequency to restrain the overvoltage.
Fault restoration Automatic torque boost
To improve the reliability of continuous operation To increase the low-frequency output torque under V/F control
Even if the inverter is detected for fault, it will reset automatically after mode
auto-diagnosis to restart the operation without stopping the motor. It is used for setting the manual/automatic torque boost setting under
The number of automatic reset is 3. V/F control mode to effectively increase the low-frequency torque of
inverter.
4. Main parameters and technical features

4.1 NVF2G Inverter specifications
4.1.1 General type (T), fan and water pump type (P)
Power Voltage Catalog Number Power Capacity(kVA) Rated Input Current(A) Rated Output Current(A) Maximum Applicable Motor(kW) Braking Unit
NVF2G-0.4/T(P)S2 3.0 2.6 2.4 0.4

NVF2G-0.75/T(P)S2 4.2 4.8 4.5 0.75
NVF2G-1.5/T(P)S2 7.6 7.5 7 1.5
NVF2G-2.2/T(P)S2 7.6 10.7 10 2.2
Integrated inside
NVF2G-3.7/T(P)S2 13 17.2 16 3.7
Standard
NVF2G-5.5/T(P)S2 18 21.5 20 5.5
NVF2G-7.5/T(P)S2 29 32 30 7.5
NVF2G-11/T(P)S2 34 45 42 11
3-Phase 220V NVF2G-15/T(P)S2 46 59 55 15
NVF2G-18.5/T(P)S2 57 80 75 18.5
NVF2G-22/T(P)S2 69 86 80 22
Integrated inside
NVF2G-30/T(P)S2 85 118 110 30
By choosen
NVF2G-37/T(P)S2 114 140 130 37
NVF2G-45/T(P)S2 133 172 160 45
NVF2G-55/T(P)S2 160 215 200 55
NVF2G-75/T(P)S2 236 290 270 75 Integrated
F
NVF2G-90/T(P)S2 267 344 320 90 Outside
NVF2G-110/T(P)S2 267 408 380 110 By choosen
NVF2G-1.5/T(P)S4 3 3.9 3.7 1.5
NVF2G-2.2/T(P)S4 4.2 5.8 5 2.2

NVF2G-3.7/T(P)S4 7.6 10.5 9 3.7
NVF2G-5.5/PS4 9.9 14.6 11 5.5
NVF2G-5.5/TS4 9.9 14.6 13 5.5

Integrated inside
NVF2G-7.5/T(P)S4 13 17 17 7.5
Standard
NVF2G-11/PS4 18 26 22 11
NVF2G-11/TS4 18 26 25 11
NVF2G-15/T(P)S4 25 32 32 15
NVF2G-18.5/T(P)S4 29 38.5 37 18.5

NVF2G-22/T(P)S4 34 46.5 45 22
NVF2G-30/T(P)S4 46 62 60 30
NVF2G-37/T(P)S4 57 76 75 37
NVF2G-45/T(P)S4 69 92 90 45
3-Phase 380V 85 113 110 55
NVF2G-55/T(P)S4
NVF2G-75/PS4 114 157 140 75

NVF2G-75/TS4 114 157 150 75 Integrated inside
NVF2G-110/T(P)S4 160 214 210 110

NVF2G-132/T(P)S4 195 256 253 132
NVF2G-160/T(P)S4 236 307 300 160

NVF2G-185/T(P)S4 267 345 340 185
NVF2G-200/T(P)S4 289 385 380 200
NVF2G-220/T(P)S4 305 430 420 220
Integrated
NVF2G-245/T(P)S4 350 468 470 245
Outside
420 590 600 315
NVF2G-315/T(P)S4
NVF2G-355/T(P)S4 420 665 640 355
NVF2G-400/T(P)S4 460 785 690 400

4.2 Standard technical features
Input voltage range: 220V/380V(±15%)

Input frequency range: (47-63)Hz
Main
Power Output voltage range: 0- rated input voltage
Output frequency range: General type: (0-400)Hz; Fan and water pump type: (0-120)Hz
Programmable digital input: 6

Programmable analog input: AI1: (0-10)V ; AI2: (0-10)V or (0/4-20)mA; AI1 + AI2
Inputs and
Open collector output: 1
Outputs”
Relay output: Mini type: 2
Analogue output: 2, (0-10)V or (0/4-20)mA
Torque boost: Automatic torque boost; Manual torque boost of 0.1% - 30.0%
Dynamic braking: Built-in or external brake unit, external connection with brake resistance
DC braking: Start and stop are selectable separately; motion frequency (0-10)Hz, brake current (0-150)% , actuation time
(0.0-50.0)s
Jog control: Jog frequencyrange: (0-400)Hz, time for jog acceleration and deceleration (0.1-3600.0)s
Multistage speed operation: Multistage speed operation can be achieved through the built-in simple PLC or controlling
Operation multi-function terminal.
functions and
features Automatic voltage regulation (AVR): When the network voltage changes, it can keep the output voltage stable automatically
Automatic current limit: To automatically limit the current during the operation to prevent fault and tripping due to frequent
overcurrent
Built-in PID controller : It can constitute a closed-loop control system conveniently

Self-defined JOG function key: The JOG key can be set as jog operation or switch from for ward and reverse operation
Protection functions: It can provide over 20 kinds of fault protection functions: overcurrent, over voltage, under voltage
overheating, default phase, overload, PID disconnection and other protection functions,
Control mode: Non-PG vector control, V/F control,

Overload capacity: Mini type and general type: 150% rated current for 1min; Fan and pump type: 120% rated current for 1 min
Technical Starting torque: Non-PG vector control: 0.5 Hz /150% (Rated torque)
features Speed regulation ratio: Non-PG vector control: 1: 100; V/F control: 1:50
Speed control precision: (non-PG vector control): ±0.5% maximum speed
Carrier frequency (1-15) kHz
Temperature: The inverter should be used at an ambient temperature of-10℃ to+40℃ and derated by 1% per 1℃ when it is higher than
40℃
Humidity: Relative air humidity of the operation environment ≤ 90%, without moisture condensation
Operation Altitude: The inverter can achieve the rated power when installed below the altitude of 1000m. It should be derated by 10%
environment per 1000m when over 1000m.
Shock and vibration: The inverter should not be dropped to the ground or subjected to sudden shock . It should not be
installed in places where vibration may occur.
Electromagnetic radiation: The inverter should not be installed adjacent to electromagnetic radiation protection
Air pollution: The inverter should not be installed in places with air pollution, such as dust or corrosive gas atmosphere

Structure Brake units Standard braking unit for model under 22 kw; standard braking unit for model equal to or above 22 kW
Cooling mode: High-speed DC fan is used for the cooling of the whole NVF2G series inverter
5. Wiring diagram
5.1 Standard wiring diagram
5.1.1 Standard wiring diagram of general type and fan and water pump type
DC electric External brake

reactor resistor
Circuit
Contactor
breaker
+1 +2 B
B
-
R
R U U
Power S
S V V
input M
T
T W
W
Motor grounded
Inverter ground Main circuit terminals
connection
Control circuit terminals

Multi-function input 1 Multi-function analog
X1 AO1
Multi-function input 2 output
X2 (0 ~ 10) V or (0/4 ~ 20) mA
Multi-function input 3 X3
Multi-function input 4 X4 Multi-function analog
AO2
Multi-function input 5 output
X5
GND (0 ~ 10) V or (0/4 ~ 20) mA
Multi-function input 6
GND
X6
COM
COM
R1B
Output 1 of multifunctional relay
R1A Contact output
AC 250V, up to 3A
+10V R1C DC 30V, up to 1A
Resistance regulator
used for frequency
AI1
setting (0-10)V R2B
F
Output 2 of multifunctional relay
GND R2A Contact output
AC 250V, up to 3A
R2C DC 30V, up to 1A
Analog Input AI2
(0 ~ 10) V or
(0/4 ~ 20) mA
Y1
Open-loop collector output

RS485 communication 485+
(DC 24V)
Modbus communications COM
protocol 485-
COM
J601 J602 J603 J604
485+ 485- X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 Y1 COM R2A R2B R2C
+10V A12 A11 GND AO1 AO2 GND COM +24V R1A R1B R1C
Arrangement of the corresponding control terminal

J601 position (AI1 interface):Connect Terminal 1 with Terminal 2:0V-10V analog voltage input of AI1;
Connect Terminal 2 with Terminal 3: input of the potentiometer on panel
J602 position (AI2 interface):Connect Terminal 1 with Terminal 2:0V-10V analog voltage input;
Connect Terminal 2 with Terminal 3: 0/4 mA-20 mA analog current input
J603 position (AO1 interface): Connect Terminal 1 with Terminal 2:0V-10V analog voltage output;
Connect Terminal 2 with Terminal 3: 0/4 mA-20 mA analog current output
J604 position (AO2 interface): Connect Terminal 1 with Terminal 2:0V-10V analog voltage output;
Connect Terminal 2 with Terminal 3: 0/4 mA-20 mA analog current output
Corresponding models: NVF2G-1.5/PS4~400/TS4
5.2 Terminal annotation

5.2.1 Terminal annotation of main circuit
Terminal Symbol Terminal name and description
R,S,T Input terminal of AC power supply, used for connecting with 3-phase 380V/220V power-frequency power supply
⊕1, Θ Input terminal of DC power supply, used for connecting with external brake unit
⊕1,B Connect with braking resistor terminal
⊕1,⊕2 DC reactor connector
U,V,W AC output terminal, used for connecting with the motor
Grounding terminal, used for the grounding of inverter
5.2.2 Description of the control circuit terminal
Terminal Symbol Terminal name Description
R1A,R1B,R1C RA and RB are N/O contract group; RB and RC are N/C contract group
Relay output
R2A,R2B,R2C The functional parameters are set through F6.01 and F6.02
Functional parameters are set through F6.00,

Y1,COM Open collector output
the factor y default value is signal output under for ward status
485+,485- Serial communication terminal Power Terminal serially communicated with the external part
supply used for frequency setting Potentiometer of 4.7kΩ-10kΩ connected with AI1,AI2 and GND
10V
It is used to connect with potentiometer or 0V-10V signal to be taken as

AI1,GND Input terminal of analog signal
the frequency setting, set or feedback of PID
It inputs signals of 0V-10V and 0/4mA- 20mA

AI2,GND Input terminal of analog signal
to be taken as the frequency setting, set or feedback of PID
AO1 and AO2 connecting with the analog signal meter of DC 0V-10V or
AO1,AO2 Output terminal of analog signal 0/4mA-20mA can be used for indicating the operation frequency,
output current, output voltage, etc.
X1 Multi-function input terminal The default set is for ward operation
X2 Multi-function input terminal The default set is reverse operation
X3 Multi-function input terminal The default set is for ward jog
X4 Multi-function input terminal The default set is reverse jog
X5 Multi-function input terminal The default set is fault resetting
X6 Multi-function input terminal The default set is external fault input
Common point for

COM multi-functional input terminals Fit the use of X1-X6
24V,COM 24V output of auxiliary power supply 24V output of DC power (≤50mA)
6. Mounting dimensions (mm)
6.1 Product appearance diagram
Dimension of the hole on NVF2G display box
73.5(W1) 25
63
15.6
RUN/PRGF/R LOC/REMFAULT Hz A V
111.5
93
JOG - +
SHIFT
< <
PRG SET
RUN STOP
Dimension of Panel
NVF2G-1.5/TS4~11/PS4 & NVF2G-0.4/T(P)S2~5.5/T(P)S2
H1
H
D1
W D W1
NVF2G-11/TS4~45/PS4 & NVF2G-7.5/T(P)S2~18.5/T(P)S2
4×d
W D W1
H
H1
D1
F
NVF2G-45/TS4~75/PS4 & NVF2G-15/T(P)S2~30/T(P)S2
4×d
W D W1
H
H1
D1
NVF2G-75/TS4~400/TS4 & NVF2G-37/T(P)S2~110/T(P)S2
W D W1 W1 6×d
H1
H
D1
6.2 Product mounting dimensions
Product Mounting Weight

W H D W1 H1
specifications holed (kg)
NVF2G-1.5/PS4
NVF2G-1.5/TS4(2.2/PS4)
NVF2G-2.2/TS4(3.7/PS4) 118 187 173 107 175 Φ5 2.4
NVF2G-3.7/TS4(5.5/PS4)
NVF2G-5.5/TS4(7.5/PS4)
155 247 189 140 232 Φ6 3.6
NVF2G-7.5/TS4(11/PS4)
NVF2G-11/TS4(15/PS4)
191 378 183 90 362 Φ9 10.5
NVF2G-15/TS4(18.5/PS4)
NVF2G-18.5/TS4(22/PS4)
215 426 213 120 407 Φ9 15
300 527 230 166.6 506 Φ10 26.5
352 603 257 240 577 Φ10 34.2
406 631 272 126 600 Φ10 58
NVF2G-90/TS4(110/PS4)
NVF2G-110/TS4(132/PS4)
470 807 352 150 769 Φ12 108
NVF2G-132/TS4(160/PS4)
NVF2G-160/TS4(185/PS4)
NVF2G-185/TS4(200/PS4) 540 892 390 180 848 Φ12 121
NVF2G-200/TS4(220/PS4)
NVF2G-220/TS4(245/PS4)
NVF2G-245/TS4(280/PS4) 710 1020 386 250 978 Φ13 171.5
NVF2G-280/TS4(315/PS4)
NVF2G-315/TS4(355/PS4)
NVF2G-355/TS4(400/PS4) 734 1200 426 250 1152 Φ16.5 280
NVF2G-400/TS4
NVF2G-0.4/T(P)S2
NVF2G-0.75/T(P)S2
118 187 173 107 175 Φ5 2.4
NVF2G-1.5/T(P)S2
NVF2G-2.2/T(P)S2
NVF2G-3.7/T(P)S2 155 247 189 140 232 Φ6 3.6
NVF2G-5.5/T(P)S2 191 378 183 90 362 Φ9 10.5

NVF2G-7.5/T(P)S2
215 426 213 120 407 Φ9 15
NVF2G-11/T(P)S2
NVF2G-15/T(P)S2
300 527 230 166.6 506 Φ10 26.5
NVF2G-18.5/T(P)S2
NVF2G-22/T(P)S2
352 603 257 240 577 Φ10 34.2
NVF2G-30/T(P)S2
NVF2G-37/T(P)S2
406 631 272 126 600 Φ10 58
NVF2G-45/T(P)S2
NVF2G-55/T(P)S2 470 807 352 150 769 Φ12 108
NVF2G-75/T(P)S2
540 892 390 180 848 Φ12 121
NVF2G-90/T(P)S2
7. Optional accessories of peripheral equipment
Name of accessories Functions of accessories
It will protect the power system when short circuit occurred.

Circuit breaker It must be connected between the AC reactors of the AC main circuit power supply,
or be connected at the front of the inverter if there is no electric reactor.
To increase the power factor of input power,

AC input reactor
reduce the higher harmonic and restrain the surge on the power supply of inverter.
1. To improve or restrain the aberration rate of the voltage of power grid and current waveform due to
DC reactor the pulse current generated at the charging and discharging of filter capacitor ;
2. To reduce the amount of harmonic and increase the power supply quality of the power grid.
1. It can effectively restrain the noise-grade vibration of motor ;

AC output reactor 2. It can effectively restrain the differential mode noise within 100KHz at the output side of the inverter ;
3. It can effectively absorb surge voltage.
1. It can control the pumping voltage of bus bar and has certain protective function to the inverter ;
Brake units 2. When frequent braking is needed, it can increase the braking capacity of inverter.
It can consume the mechanical energy generated during braking as the thermal energy through
Braking resistor
brake resistor to reduce the deceleration time of drive system of the inverter.
When the operation panel of inverter is needed to be installed on the door sheet of control cabinet
Keyboard support plate
or needed remote control of operation cabinet, it shall be installed through keyboard support plate.
Display extension cable It is used as extension cable when using remote monitoring or pulling out the operation panel.
Selection table of accessories
Selection of braking accessories AC input electric reactor AC output electric reactor DC electric reactor
Inverter Configuration Braking resistance
Configuration
Configuration
conditions of Rated Rated Rated
Inductance Inductance Inductance
the braking Resistance Power current current Configuration current
(mH) (mH) (mH)
NVF2G-□/□□□ unit (10% value (Ω) (W) (A) (A) (A)
braking ratio)
1.5/PS4,1.5/TS4 400 260 3.7 2.239 3 2.1 — —

2.2/PS4,2.2/TS4 250 260 5.5 2.18 6.3 1.5 Do not need — —
Selectable external configuration
Selectable external configuration

Standard to purchase
3.7/PS4,3.7/TS4 150 390 9 1.85 11 1.1 — —
internal DC electric
5.5/PS4,5.5/TS4 braking 100 520 13 1.56 16 0.8 reactor — —
7.5/PS4,7.5/TS4 unit (including 75 780 18 1 18 0.65 — —
22/PS4 model)
11/PS4,11/TS4 50 1040 24 0.52 28 0.33 — —
15/PS4,15/TS4 40 1560 34 0.397 35 0.25 — —
18.5/PS4,18.5/TS4 32 4800 38 0.352 40 0.2 — —
22/PS4,22/TS4 27.2 4800 50 0.26 50 0.18 70 0.9
30/PS4,30/TS4 Selectable 20 6000 60 0.24 63 0.09 Selectable 80 0.86
37/PS4,37/TS4 internal 16 7000 75 0.235 80 0.08 external 100 0.7
braking configuration
45/PS4,45/TS4 13.6 9600 91 0.17 100 0.06 120 0.58
unit(including (including
55/PS4,55/TS4 110/PS4 10 12000 112 0.16 125 0.04 110/PS4 146 0.47
75/PS4,75/TS4 model) model)
6.8 12000 150 0.12 160 0.035 160 0.36
90/PS4,90/TS4 6.8 12000 200 0.0705 200 0.023 180 0.33
110/PS4,110/TS4 6 20000 224 0.0692 224 0.016 250 0.24
132/PS4,132/TS4 6 25000 280 0.0503 280 0.016 Standard 280 0.24
external
160/PS4,160/TS4 Selectable
Selectable 2.5 50000 315 0.0447 315 0.013 configuration 340 0.16
external
external
185/PS4,185/TS4 400 0.0352 400 0.011 460 0.09
braking
braking
200/PS4,200/TS4 400 0.0352 400 0.011 Standard 460 0.09
unit（including
unit（including
external
220/PS4,220/TS4 315/PS4model）
315/PS4 model） 450 0.0313 560 0.009 500 0.82
configuration
245/PS4,245/TS4 560 0.0251 600 0.008 （including 600 0.072
315/PS4
280/PS4,280/TS4 560 0.0251 600 0.008 model） 600 0.072
315/PS4,315/TS4 Selectable
660 0.042 660 0.011 Standard 1000 0.050
configuration
355/PS4,355/TS4 of external 660 0.042 660 0.011 internal 1000 0.050
braking
400/PS4,400/TS4 unit 800 0.035 800 0.009 configuratino 1000 0.050
F
Corresponding
physical diagram
of each accessor y
Display Support plate

Physical diagram of the panel
extension
of display extension
cable
cable and support
plate of the panel
Remarks: When the panel of inverter needs to be pulled out for control, it shall be noted specially when ordering
and the length of the display extension cable shall be indicated.
8.1 Type designation
NVF2G-□/□ □ □
Input voltage class: 2: 220V series; 4: 380V series
Input voltage: D: single-phase; S: three-phase
Type: T: General type; P: Fan and water pump type
Adaptive motor power (kW)
Improved type
Design sequence No.
Inverter
Company code
When ordering, you shall select the needed model and specification according to the illustration of model and implication:
For example:
3-phase 380V general type: NVF2G-45/TS4
3-phase 380V fan and water pump type: NVF2G-55/PS4
8.2 Selection guidance

8.2.1 In order to ensure the reliable operation of inverter, the power of inverter must be equal or greater than the power of
motor.
8.2.2 General-type inverter is mainly used for load excluding fan and water pump, such as: rolling mill, mixer, ball
grinder, centrifugal machine and other heavy-load machine.
8.2.3 Fan and water pump type of inverter is mainly used for fan, water pump and other light-load machine.
9. Customized VFC control cabinet

A variety of VFC control cabinets can be specially ordered according to the production process requirements.
2. Type designation
N VF 3 M - □/ T □□
Input voltage class:

2:220V series;
4:380V series
D: Single phase input
S: Three-phase input
General type
Motor adaption power
Mini type
Design SN
Inverter
Enterprise characteristic code
3.1 Temperature
Operating ambient temperature ranges from -10℃ to 40℃.
When the temperature is higher than 40℃, the inverter will
NVF3M be used through derating at 1% of the rated power for

every increase of 1℃
Series Inverter
3.2 Humidity
1. General 5%～95%RH, without condensed water.
NVF3M Series Mini inverter is a kind of high-performance 3.3 Altitude

vector control inverter, which is independently developed by
F
Inverter which is installed below the altitude of 1000 meters
our company. It adopts advanced control strategy to achieve can output the rated power. When the altitude exceeds 1000
a high-precision magnetic flux vector torque control, and it meters, the inverter needs to be used through derating and
is characterized by high control precision, wide speed range, is used through derating at 10% of the rated power for every
large starting torque, high reliability, strong overload capacity increase of 1000 meters.
and flexible and convenient operation. Rich and practical
speed control, torque control, process close loop control, 3.4 Shock and vibration
simple PLC, swing frequency control, multi-section speed Do not allow the inverter to fall to the ground or suffer from
control and other functions can meet the needs of a variety sudden shock. Do not install the inverter in places where
of complex high precision drive. there may be often vibration.
NVF3M Series Mini inverter is divided into single-phase and 3.5 Electromagnetic radiation
three-phase general inverters, which has strong load Install the inverter in places far away from the source
adaptability, stable and reliable operation, automatic energy- of electromagnetic radiation.
saving operation and other functions. It can be widely applied in
3.6 Water and moisture protection
medical care, food, water treatment, papermaking, textile,
Do not install the inverter in places where there may be
machine tool, conveyor belt, carpentry, traffic and
water spray or dew.
transportation, communication, machinery and equipment and
other electric drive and automation control fields.
3.7 Air pollution
Do not install the inverter in an air polluted place, such as
Products are designed and tested in accordance with the
dust, corrosive gas and other environment etc.
international standard; user environment test is strictly
simulated. 3.8 Storage environment
Do not install the inverter in environment with direct
Accordant standards: GB/T 12668.2-2002, IEC 61800-2. sunlight, oil, steam and vibration.
1000m
Altitude Ambient temperature Well Ventilated

4. Technical data
4.1 Inverter specifications
Power Voltage Catalog Number Power Capacity(kVA) Rated Output Current(A) Maximum Applicable Motor(kW) Braking Unit
NVF3M-0.4/TD2 1.0 2.5 0.4

Single phase 220V NVF3M-0.75/TD2 1.5 4.0 0.75
NVF3M-1.5/TD2 3.0 7.5 1.5
NVF3M-0.4/TS2 1.0 2.5 0.4
Integrated inside
Three phase 220V NVF3M-0.75/TS2 1.5 4.0 0.75
Standard
NVF3M-1.5/TS2 3.0 7.5 1.5
NVF3M-0.4/TS4 1.0 1.2 0.4
Three phase
NVF3M-0.75/TS4 1.5 2.5 0.75
380V-440V NVF3M-1.5/TS4 3.0 3.7 1.5
4.2. Standard technical features
Input voltage range: 220/380(±15%)
Input and output Input frequency range:(47~63)Hz

characteristics Output voltage range:0 ~ Input voltage
Output frequency range:(0 ~ 300)Hz
Programmable digital input: 5 input (including 1 high-speed pulse input)
Programmable analog input: AI1:(0 ~ 10)V or (0/4 ~ 20)mA ; AI2:(0 ~ 10)V or (0/4 ~ 20)mA ;
Peripheral
interface High speed pulse output: 1
Relay output: 1
Analog output: 1 , optional (0 ~ 10)V or (0/4 ~ 20)mA
Torque boost: Automatic torque boost; manual torque boost 0.1%~30.0%

Dynamic braking: Built-in brake unit, external braking resistor
DC braking: optional start and stop; operating frequency: (0~60)Hz; brake current: (0~100)% rated current; action time (0.0~30.0)s
Jog control: Jog frequency range:(0 ~ 50.0)Hz; jog acceleration and deceleration time (0.1 ~ 6000.0)s
Operation
Multi-speed operation: To achieve multi-speed operation through installing the simple PLC internally or controlling
function
the m u l t i-function terminal control
features
Automatic voltage regulation (AVR): Can automatically keep the output voltage constant when the grid voltage changes
Automatic current limiting: Automatically limit the current during operation to prevent frequent over-current fault tripping
Built-in PID controller : Can easily constitute a close-loop control system
Protection function: Provide as many as 20 kinds of fault protection functions: overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage,
overheating, open phase, overload, PID disconnection and other protection functions.
Control mode: Without PG vector control, V/F control

Overload capacity: 150% of rated current 60s
Technical Starting torque: Without PG vector control, 0.5Hz/150 %( rated torque)

features Speed ratio: 1:100(without PG control); 1:50 (V/F control)
Speed control precision:±0.5% of maximum speed
Carrier frequency:(0.5 ~ 15)kHz
Protection grade: IP20
Structure Brake unit: Three-phase general inverter comes standard with the built-in brake unit, and the single phase general inverter is
equipped with the optional brake unit.
Cooling mode: Cooling by high-speed DC fans

5. Wiring diagram
Brake resistor
+ B
QF
U
R(L)
V
S(N)30 M
W
T
Main circuit
Inverter grounding
Control
circuit terminal
X1
3-Phase 220V V I
X2 Analog output
1 2 3 AO
X3 V:(0-10)V
Multifunction
J3/AO GND
programmable I:{0(4)-20}mA
input terminal X4
HDI (High-speed pulse input)
COM
RC Relay output
Analog input
RA 250VAC/3A
power supply
Analog input
V:(0-10)V
+10V
AI1
V
1 2
I
3
RB 28VDC/1A
F
I:{0(4)-20}mA J1/AI1
AI2 V I
1 2 3 +24V
Analog input COM
GND J2/AI2
HDO
Open collector output
485+
RS485 communication COM (High-speed pulse output)
485-
RA RB HDI X1 X2 X3 X4 AI1 AI2

Correspond to control terminals arrangement
RC HDO +24V COM 485+ 485- GND +10V AO
J1 J2 J3 jumper selection:
J1 and J2 positions (AI1 and AI2 analog input interfaces):
When 1 is connected to 2: 0V～10V analog voltage input; when 2 is connected to 3, 0/4mA～20mA analog current input
J3 position(AO analog output interface):
When 1 is connected to 2: 0V～10V analog voltage output; when 2 is connected to 3, 0/4mA～20mA analog current output
5.2 Notes to main circuit terminal
Terminal mark Terminal name and description
R, S, T AC power input terminal, connecting the three-phase fundamental frequency power supply (200V～240V)/(380V～460V)
L, N AC power input terminal, connecting the single-phase fundamental frequency power supply (200V～240V)
+ ,B Connecting the brake resistor terminal

U, V, W AC output terminal, connecting the motor
Ground terminal, for inverter grounding
5.3. Control circuit terminal description
Terminal
Category Name Terminal function description Specifications
screen
Power +10V +10V Power supply Provide +10V reference power supply externally Maximum allowable output current 5mA
supply +10V Power ground Analog signal and＋10V power supply reference ground
GND Internal isolation of GND and COM
Accepting analog voltage or current single end input; Input voltage range: -10V~10V
AI1 Analog input AI1 voltage / current input are selected by the control board (input impedance: 45ｋΩ);
jumper J1 (reference ground: GND) resolution: 1/4000
Analog
input Input current range: 0mA~20 mA;
Accepting analog voltage or current single end input;
AI2 Analog input AI2 voltage / current input are selected by the control board resolution: 1/2000
jumper J2 (reference ground: GND) ( jumper is needed)
Providing analog voltage / current output; the output

Analog voltage and current are selected by the control board
A0 Analog output 1 Output voltage range:(0～10)V
output jumper J3; see Function code F6.11 description for the
Current output range:(0/4～20)mA
factory default output voltage (reference ground: GND)
458+ Positive terminal of 485 differential signal Standard RS485 communication interface
Commu- RS485 communication
nication interface
485- Negative terminal of 485 differential signal Please use the twisted pair or shielded wire
X1 Multi-functioninputterminal1
Programmable is defined as a multi-function switch Photoelectric coupling isolation input
Multi - X2 Multi-functioninputterminal2 impedance: R＝3.3ｋΩ;
input terminal; introduction to functions of F5.00~
function X3 Multi-functioninputterminal3 X1～X4 maximum input frequency:
F5.04 andF5.07 input terminals in switch input terminals
input 200Hz;X7 maximum input frequency:
X4 Multi-functioninputterminal4 (group F5)
terminal 100kHzInput voltage range:20～30V
Multi-function or pulse
HDI
input terminal HDI
Multi - Programmable is defined as a multi-function pulse signal

function Open collector pulse output terminal; introduction to functions of F6.00 and Output frequency range: Determined
HDO
output output terminal F6.02 output terminals in switch input terminals (group F6) by F6.18, maximum 100kHz
terminal (Public terminal: COM)
+24V +24V Power supply Maximum output current: 200mA

Power Providing ＋24V power supply externally to use with X1-X4,
supply HDI, HDO and other terminals
COM +24VPublic power end Internal isolation of COM and GND
RA RA-RB: Normally closed, RB-RC: Normally

open Contact capacity: NO/NC:5A/3A
Relay Programmable is defined as a multi-function relay output
250V～ See F6 for Methods of use.
output RB Relay output terminal; introduction to functions of F6.03 output terminal
Overvoltage level of the input voltage
terminal 1 in switch output terminals (group F6)
of the relay output terminal is overvoltage
RC level Ⅱ.

Outside drawing for panel
25
73.5 63
15.6
RUN/PRGF/R LOC/REM FAULT Hz A V

111.5
93
PRG - + SET
< <
MF SHIFT
RUN STOP
Dimension of Panel hole Dimension of Panel

NVF3M-0.4/TD2~1.5/TD2, 0.4/TS2～1.5/TS2, 0.4/TS4～1.5/TS4
MF SHIFT
H1
PRG SET
H
RUN STOP
W1 D1
W
D
Installation size Weight

Model
W H D W1 H1 D1 d kg
NVF3M-0.4/TD2
NVF3M-0.75/TD2
NVF3M-1.5/TD2
NVF3M-0.4/TS2
85 154 123 76 143 61 5 0.9
NVF3M-0.75/TS2
NVF3M-1.5/TS2
NVF3M-0.4/TS4
F
NVF3M-0.75/TS4
NVF3M-1.5/TS4
7.1 Select the model and specifications desired in accordance with the description of model and meaning when ordering:
For example:
Single phase 200V series: NVF3M-0.75/TD2
Three-phase200V series:NVF3M-0.75/TS2
Three-phase 380V series:NVF3M-0.75/TS4
7.2. Selection guide

7.2.1 To ensure the reliable operation of inverter, its power must be equal to or greater than the motor power.
7.2.2 General inverter is suitable for fan, water pump, rolling mill, mixer, ball mill, centrifuge and other loads.
8. Peripheral equipment options
Brake attachment options AC input reactor AC output reactor

Inverter
Configuration of Brake resistance Config- Rated Inductance Config- Rated Inductance
brake unit (10%
NVF3M-□/□□□ uration current(A) (mH) uration current (A) (mH)
of the braking ratio) Resistance (Ω) Power (W)
0.4/TD2 220 80 2.4 4.6 2.4 4.5
0.75/TD2 220 80 4.5 2.4 4.5 2.3
External selection
Brake unit
External selection
1.5/TD2 100 260 7 1.6 7 1.5

built-in
0.4/TS2 selection 220 80 2.4 4.6 2.4 4.5
0.75/TS2 220 80 4.5 2.4 4.5 2.3
1.5/TS2 100 260 7 1.6 7 1.5
0.4/TS4 Brake unit 750 80 2.5 2.83 3 2.1
0.75/TS4 built-in 750 80 3.7 2.239 3 2.1
selection
1.5/TS4 400 260 3.7 2.239 6.3 1.5
Display
Display extension
extension panel pallet
cable and display
cable
box pallet picture
Note: if it is necessary to pull the inverter panel for control, it shall be specially noted when ordering and length of the display extension line indicated.
NVF3 Series Inverter

1. Overview Typical applications
As a high-performance open-loop vector controlled inverter

developed by our company independently, NVF3 series
inverter achieves the high-precision flux vector torque
control by using the advanced control algorithm and is Packing
Fan Pump Air-conditioning Conveyer belt Food machinery
machinery
characterized by high control accuracy, wide speed range,
large starting torque, high reliability, strong overload
capacity and flexible operation. The rich and practical speed 2. Product Characteristics
control, torque control, process closed-loop control, simple
2.1 Model and meanings
PLC, wobble frequency control and multi-speed control can
meet a variety of complex high-precision transmission needs. N VF 3 - □/ □□□
NVF3 series inverter have two types that are the typical
type (heavy load) and fan-pump type (light load), with the
functions of strong load adaptability, reliable operation and Input voltage level:
automatic energy saving operation. It can be widely used in 2: 220V series; 4: 380V series
electrical transmission and automation control areas, Input voltage: D: single phase;
including , machine tool, textiles, energy, mining, chemical, S: three-phase
injection molding, foods, cement, water supply, municipal
Type: T: typical type; P: fan-pump type
services.
The product is designed and tested in accordance with Matched motor power (kW)
international standards and strictly simulates users’
Design.number
application environment for tests.
The product conforms to standards GB/T 12668.2-2002 and Inverter
IEC 61800-2.
Enterprise code
PLC
RS-485 Modbus
2.2 Excellent motor drive and control performance 2.4 Flexible application functions
▪ Accurate motor auto-tuning function: accurate auto-tuning of ▪ Function modular design: the function modular design is inte-
comprehensive and static motor parameters, easy debugging, grated into NVF3 series inverter which makes the operation
simple operation, and can improve the control accuracy and and debugging more convenient;
response speed; ▪ The built-in torque control function is suitable for wire drawing
▪ Good energy-saving effect: The lighter the motor load is, the machine and other special equipment and can achieve constant
F
lower the efficiency is. Energy-saving control will improve the tension control;
operating efficiency of motor, so that the motor is always ▪ The built-in intelligent PID control and sleep functions realize
high-efficiency energy saving and unattended automatic control;
running in the most efficient state no matter how the load
▪ Simple PLC control can realize the variable speed operation of
changes;
the inverter in accordance with a certain law, which can not only
▪ Unique dead zone compensation technology can improve the
define a circular multi-frequency in the function code, but also
output torque;
define the operation time, direction and number of cycles of
▪ High starting torque, 0.5Hz 150% rated torque (without PG co-
multi-frequency in the function code;
ntrol); 0.5Hz 180% rated torque (with PG control);
▪ The built-in RS485 communication interface and built-in
▪ Strong overload capacity: lasting for 60s at the rated current of
Modbus-RTU and Modbus-ASCII protocols in line with
150% and infrequent overload protection in case of heavy load international standards can easily structure the system network,
or load mutation, which ensure the continuous and stable ope- perfectly realizing the barrier-free communication with the
ration of the equipment; industrial machine;
▪ Wide carrier frequency design: (0.5 ~ 15) kHz, which can effect- ▪ Common DC busbar design: Multiple inverters can be parallelly
ively reduce the running noise of motor; connected by the common DC busbar, which can share the
▪ External standard DC reactor (above 110kW) can effectively in- braking feedback energy, avoid over-voltage and stabilize the
hibit the high harmonics and improve the power factor; DC busbar voltage of a single inverter to ensure the continuous
▪ Real-time monitoring: real-time monitoring of DC busbar volt- and stable operation of the equipment;
age, motor current and running status to timely know the run- ▪ With wobble control function, and suitable for textile and other
ning status of the system. industries.
2.3 Highly reliable design 2.5 Strong environmental adaptability
▪ Wide input voltage range: input voltage fluctuation up to ±15%; ▪ The environmental adaptability is strong when the
▪ The low in ductance design enables the system to be more stable temperature
and reliable; of the operating environment is at -10 ℃ ~ +40 ℃.When the
▪ The high-power two-stage DC-DC drive design makes the oper- temperature is over 40 ℃, use in accordance with 1% decrease
ation safer and more reliable; per increase of 1 ℃;
▪ The input filter design effectively provides lightning protection ▪ The wide input voltage range with the fluctuation range of
and reduces harmonic interference; 380V ± 15% can adapt to different civil and industrial power
▪ The automatic voltage stabilization and automatic current limiting grids;
functions make the operation more stable; ▪ Circuit boards use the conformal coating process, which can
▪ The perfect protection function and fault diagnosis system pro- adapt to a variety of complex conditions.
vide guarantee for the equipment.
3. Flexible software features
Stop and restart the free running motor

Speed Start with the speed of motor under coast stop. The motor under coast stop
DC braking
When the motor turns at irregular directions during the free running, the tracking can be introduced to the set frequency automatically without the speed
when starting
motor is immediately started automatically after being stopped by DC operation detector.
braking.
Ensure the stability of output voltage during the Skip the specific frequency to prevent the vibration
Automatic
voltage operation of inverter Frequency of the mechanical system
hopping
regulation Run and automatically avoid the resonance point during the operation at
When the grid voltage fluctuates, the output voltage of the inverter does control
(AVR) the constant speed in order to prevent the vibration of the mechanical
not change with the fluctuation of the grid voltage.
system.
Run the program at the set speeds

Automatic When the load fluctuation exceeds the level of current limiting, it will be
Multi-speed
current automatically adjusted to always keep the current within the allowable According to the signal combination, run at the internally stored frequency.
operation
limiting range. The multi-speed control can also be achieved through PLC and limit
switches
Protect the machinery and ensure the reliable Automatically operate at the maximum efficiency
operation of machinery and equipment Energy saving
Torque limit According to the load and rotational speed, detect the load current and
operation
The torque generated by the motor can be controlled within the set value, always provide voltage with the maximum efficiency for the motor to
which helps to protect the machinery. achieve the most efficient energy-saving operation.
Detect the frequency for the interlocking of brakes Automatically store the fault information
Frequency Fault
When the output frequency exceeds the set value, output the signal to recording When a fault alarm occurs, the current, voltage and fault type will be
detection
control the interlocking of external equipment. automatically recorded to provide a reference for the judgement of
fault causes.
Wobble up and down centering on the set frequency Reduce mechanical wears
Wobble
Pump sleep
frequency When the water consumption at night is very small and the output frequency
The wobble frequency function applies to the textile and chemical fiber control
control of the inverter is lower than the sleep frequency, the inverter will be on the
industries and occasions needing traversing and winding.
sleep state.
Improve the reliability of continuous operation Automatically control the process

Fault reset PID control Conduct PID operation inside the inverter, and use the operation result as
Even if a fault is detected in the inverter, it will automatically reset after
self-diagnosis and will restart operation without stopping the motor. the frequency command for the quantitative control of pressure, flow rate
The times of automatic reset are 3 times. and air volume.
Define the basic logical sequence of the equipment to

Prevent overvoltage and fault trip
achieve the automatic control Overvoltage
Simple PLC It is effective to the operation of punch having the regeneration state due
The operating mode, operating frequency, running direction and suppression
to the crank movement. Increase or decrease the operation frequency
acceleration and deceleration times of the built-in PLC can be set in according to the regeneration state to suppress the overvoltage.
segmentation separately
Achieve the load sharing Increase the low frequency output torque in V/F
Automatic
Droop control mode
torque
control The droop control is also known as the load distribution. This function can
increase The manual / automatic torque increase in V/F mode can effectively increase
achieve the load sharing when multiple motors drag the same load.
the low frequency torque of the inverter.
Meet the requirements for different pressure settings

Achieve the highly precise speed control Multi-stage at different time buckets
High-speed
closed-loop
pulse input Realize the external of the equipment controlling the operating frequency The multi-stage closed-loop setting control can meet the requirements for
control
through the high-speed pulse signal or as the occasion at the PID feedback different pressures at different time buckets in occasions such as water
channel. supply and gas supply so as to reduce waste and achieve energy efficiency.
Real-time monitoring of parameters of the inverter to Fully realize the independent adjustment of the output
achieve the multi-machine linkage Complete voltage and output frequency
High-speed V/F
pulse output Realize the set frequency, operating frequency, output current, output separation Realize the complete separation of V and F, that is, users can set the voltage
voltage, motor speed and other physical output, and can also be applied to and frequency giving channels separately to combine into a real-time V/F
the linkage of multiple inverters. curve for torque motor control.

4.1 Specifications parameters
Catalog Rated Output Maximum Applicable

Power Voltage Number Catalog Number Power Capacity(kVA) Rated Input Current(A) Current(A) Motor(kW) Braking Unit
NVF3-1.5/TS4 NVF3-1.5/PS4 3 3.9 3.8 1.5

NVF3-2.2/TS4 NVF3-2.2/PS4 3 5.8 5.1 2.2
NVF3-3.7/TS4 NVF3-3.7/PS4 5.9 10.5 9 3.7 Standard bulit-in
NVF3-5.5/TS4 NVF3-5.5/PS4 8.6 14.6 13 5.5 accessories
NVF3-7.5/TS4 NVF3-7.5/PS4 11 17 15 7.5 (including NVF3-22
NVF3-11/TS4 NVF3-11/PS4 17 26 25 11 /PS4 models)
NVF3-15/TS4 NVF3-15/PS4 21 32 30 15
NVF3-18.5/TS4 NVF3-18.5/PS4 24 38.5 37 18.5
NVF3-22/TS4 NVF3-22/PS4 30 46.5 45 22
NVF3-30/TS4 NVF3-30/PS4 40 62 60 30
Optional bulit-in
NVF3-37/TS4 NVF3-37/PS4 50 76 75 37
accessories
NVF3-45/TS4 NVF3-45/PS4 60 92 91 45
(including NVF3-110
NVF3-55/TS4 NVF3-55/PS4 72 113 112 55
/PS4 models)
NVF3-75/TS4 NVF3-75/PS4 100 157 150 75
NVF3-90/TS4 NVF3-90/PS4 116 180 176 90
3-Phase 380V
NVF3-110/TS4 NVF3-110/PS4 138 214 210 110
NVF3-132/TS4 NVF3-132/PS4 138 214 210 110
NVF3-160/TS4 NVF3-160/PS4 167 256 253 132
NVF3-185/TS4 NVF3-185/PS4 200 307 304 160
NVF3-200/TS4 NVF3-200/PS4 220 345 340 185

NVF3-220/TS4 NVF3-220/PS4 250 385 377 200 Optional external
accessories
NVF3-250/TS4 NVF3-250/PS4 265 430 426 220
NVF3-280/TS4 NVF3-280/PS4 280 468 465 250
NVF3-315/TS4 NVF3-315/PS4 355 525 520 280
NVF3-355/TS4 NVF3-355/PS4 388 590 585 315
NVF3-315/TS4
NVF3-400/TS4
NVF3-315/PS4
NVF3-400/PS4
500
565
665
785
650
725
355
400 F
4.2 Standard technical parameters
Input voltage range: 380V ( ± 15%)

Input and Input frequency range: (47 ~ 63) Hz
output
character Output voltage range: 0 ~ rated input voltage
Output frequency range: typical type: (0 ~ 300) Hz; fan-pump type: (0 ~ 120) Hz
Programmable digital input: 7 channels (including 1 channel high-speed pulse input)

Programmable analog input: AI1: (0 ~ 10) V or (0/4 ~ 20) mA input; AI2: (0 ~ 10) V or (0/4 ~ 20) mA input; AI3: (-10 ~ +10) V input; AI1 + Ai2
Peripheral
Open collector output: 2 channel outputs (including 1 channel high-speed pulse output)
interface
Relay output: 2 channel output;
Analog output: 2 channel outputs, optional (0 ~ 10) V or (0/4 ~ 20) mA
Torque boost: automatic torque boost; manual torque increase by 0.1% ~ 30.0%
Energy consumption braking: built-in or external braking unit, with external braking resistor
DC braking: optional DC braking at start and stopping, operating frequency (0 ~ 60) Hz, braking current (0 ~ 100) % rated current, operating time (0.0 ~ 30.0) s
Jog control: jog frequency range: (0 ~ 50) Hz, jog acceleration and deceleration time (0.1 ~ 6000.0) s
Operating Multi-speed operation: realizing the multi-speed operation through building in the simple PLC or controlling the multi-function terminal
function Automatic voltage regulation (AVR): automatically maintaining the constant output voltage when the grid voltage changes
character
Automatic current limiting: automatically limiting the current during operation to prevent frequent over-current and fault trip
Built-in PID controller: easily constitute the closed-loop control system
Custom MF function key: MF key can be set as jog operation, free stop and fast stop
Protection function: providing more than 20 kinds of fault protection functions, such as over-current, overvoltage, undervoltage, overheating, phase
failure, overload and PID disconnection protections
Control mode: without PG vector control, with PG vector control, without PG V/F control, with
Overload capacity: typical type: 1min at 150% of rated current; fan-pump type: 1min at 120% of rated current
Starting torque: without PG vector control: 0.5Hz/150% (rated torque)
Technical
characters Speed regulation ratio: without PG vector control: 1: 100
Speed control accuracy: (without PG vector control): ± 0.2% maximum speed
Switching frequency: (0.5 ~ 15) kHz
Protection class: IP20

Structure Braking unit: the braking unit is the standard configuration to models below 22kW and is optional to models above 22kW.
Cooling method: the full series of NVF3 inverter use the high-speed DC fan for cooling.
5. Basic operation wiring diagram

DC Reacto Braking resistor
QF KM
Three-phase R
+ 1 + 2 B - U
input power supply
380V50/60Hz S V M
T W
Inverter Main circuit terminals
E E
grounding
Control circuit terminals

R1C Programmable relay
output contact output
R1A AC250Vbelow3A
+24V
DC30Vbelow1A
R1B
PLC
R2C Programmable relay output2

output contact output
R2A
AC250Vbelow3A
R2B DC30Vbelow1A
COM Y
Output 1
CME
CME
HDO Programmable
X1 Output 2
NVF3 open collector
X2 COM output
(High speed
X3 output)
X4
V 1
Programmable AO1
X5
multi-function 2 Output1
input terminal GND Analogoutput
X6
I 3
HDI V:(0-10)V
J3/AO1
AO2
COM V 1 Output2 I:{0(4)-20}mA
2 GND
Analog input power supply
+10V V I I 3
1 2 3 J4/AO2
Analog input V:(0-10)V
AI1
I:{0(4)-20}mA AI2 J1/AI1

1 2 3
Analog input common port J5 PG card interface
GND J2/AI2
Analog input bipolar

AI3+
speed reference
AI3-
Multi-function
J6
RS485 expansion interface
485+
communication
485-
Standard wiring diagram for NVF3-1.5/TS4 ~ 315/PS4 models

J1, J2, J3 and J4 jumper selection:
J1, J2 positions (AI1, AI2 analog input interface):
When connect 1 to 2: 0V ~ 10V analog voltage input; When connect 2 to 3: 0/4mA ~ 20mA analog current input
J3, J4 positions (AO1, AO2 analog output interface):
When connect 1 to 2: 0V ~ 10V analog voltage output; When connect 2 to 3: 0/4mA ~ 20mA analog current output
5.2 Notes of main circuit terminals
Terminal mark Terminal name and description

R、S、T AC power input terminal, connecting power frequency three-phase power supply 380V
+1 、- DC power input terminal, connecting the external braking unit
+1 、+2 DC busbar positive pole, connecting DC reactor
+ 、B Connecting the braking resistor terminal
U、V、W、+2 、B AC output terminal, connecting the motor

Ground terminal, for inverter grounding
5.3 Descriptions of control circuit terminals
Terminal
Type screen Name Description of terminal function Specifications
printing
Power +10V +10V power supply External + 10V reference power supply Maximum allowable output current: 5mA
supply GND +10V GND Reference grounds of analog signals and + 10V power supply Internal isolation from COM and CME
Receive the analog voltage or current single-ended input,

Input voltage range: -10V ~ 10V (input
AI1 Analog single-ended input Ai1 with voltage / current input being selected by jumper J1 /
impedance: 45kΩ), resolution: 1/4000
Ai1 of the control panel (reference ground: GND)
Receive the analog voltage or current single-ended input, with Input current range: 0mA ~ 20 mA,
AI2 Analog single-ended input Ai2 voltage / current input being selected by jumper J2 / AI2 of the resolution: 1/2000 ( jumper required)
control panel (reference ground: GND)
Analog
input
Analog voltage differential input
AI3+ AI3+or analog voltage single When receiving the analog voltage differential input, AI3+ is the
-ended input non-inverting input terminal and AI3- is the inverting input
Input voltage range: -10V ~ 10V (input
terminal; when receiving the analog voltage single-ended input,
impedance: 15kΩ), resolution: 1/4000
Analog voltage differential input AI3+ is the signal input terminal and AI3- should be connected
AI3- AI3-or analog voltage single to GND (reference ground: GND).
-ended input
Provide analog voltage / current output with the output voltage

/ current being selected by jumper AO1 of the control panel: Voltage output range: (0 ~10) V Current
A01 Analog output 1 see function code F6.11 Description for the factory default output range: (0/4 ~20) mA
F
Analog output voltage (reference: GND)
output
Provide analog voltage / current output with the output voltage
/ current being selected by jumper AO2 of the control panel: Voltage output range: (0 ~10) V Current
A02 Analog output 2
see function code F6.12 Description for the factory default output range: (0/4 ~20) mA
output voltage (reference: GND)
Communi 458+ Positive terminal of 485 differential signal Standard RS485 communication interface
RS485 communication interface
cation 485- Negative terminal of 485 differential signal Please use twisted pair or shielded wire
X1 Multi-function input terminal 1

Multi- X3 Multi-function input terminal 3 Optocoupler isolation, input impedance:

function Be programmable as the multi-function binary input terminals, R= 3.3kΩ, X1 ~ X6
input the description of functions of F5.01 ~ F5.07 input terminals in Maximum input frequency: 200Hz, HDI
X5 Multi-function input terminal 5 binary input terminals (F5 group) maximum input frequency: 100kHz
terminal
X6 Multi-function input terminal 6 Input voltage range: (20 ~ 24) V
Multi-function or pulse input

HDI
terminal HDI
Be programmable as the multi-function binary output terminals, Optocoupler isolation output: maximum
Bidirectional open collector output
Y the description of functions of F6.01 output terminal in binary operational voltage: 30V Maximum
Multi- terminal 1
input terminals (F6 group) (common port: CME) output current: 50mA
function
output
Be programmable as the multi-function binary output terminals,
terminal Open collector pulse output Output frequency range: determined by
HDO the description of functions of F6.02 output terminal in binary
terminal F6.18, 100kHz maximum
input terminals (F6 group) (common port: CME)
Power +24V power supply External +24 V power supply Maximum output current: 100mA
+24V
supply
Multi-function input common Common port of multi-function input terminal (short Common port of X1 ~ X6 and HDI, internal
PLC
port circuit with 24V) isolation of PLC and 24V
24V power supply common A total of 1 common terminal, used together with
COM
port other terminals Internal isolation of COM, CME and GND
Internal short circuit of CME and COM
Y output common port Common port of multi-function output terminal
CME
Y1 (short circuit with COM)
R1A RA-RB: NC, RB-RC: NO

Relay
Be programmable as the multi-function relay output terminals, Contact capacity: NO/NC: 5A/3A 250V See
output
R1B Relay output the description of functions of output terminal in binary the usage method in F6 instructions. The
terminal
output terminals (F6 group) overvoltage level of the input voltage of the
1 R1C relay output terminal is class Ⅱ.
R2A R2A and R2B are a normally open

Relay contact group. R2B and R2C are a
Be programmable as the multi-function relay output terminals, normally closed group. The functions
output
R2B Relay output2 the description of functions of output terminal in binary are set by parameters set F6. The
terminal
output terminals (F6 group) over voltage level of the input voltage of
2
R2C the relay output terminal is classⅡ.
6. Overall and mounting dimension

Outline Drawing of Display Panel
25
73.5 63
15.6
RUN/PRGF/R LOC/REM FAULT Hz A V

111.5
93
PRG - + SET
MF SHIFT
< <
RUN STOP
Dimension of Panel hole Dimension of Panel
NVF3-1.5/TS4~11/PS4 Outline Drawings
H1
H
4×d D1
W
W1
D
NVF3-11/TS4~NVF3-75/PS4 Outline Drawings
4×d
W D W1
H
H1
D1
W D W1 W1 6×d
H1
H
D1
w
D W1 W1 6×d
H1
H
Mounting Dimension(mm)
Model
W H D W1 H1 mounting hoeld Weight(kg)
NVF3-1.5/PS4
NVF3-1.5/TS4
NVF3-2.2/PS4
NVF3-2.2/TS4 118 187 173 107 175 Ф5 2.4
NVF3-3.7/PS4
NVF3-3.7/TS4
NVF3-5.5/PS4
NVF3-5.5/TS4
NVF3-7.5/PS4
155 247 189 140 232 Ф6 3.6
NVF3-7.5/TS4
NVF3-11/PS4
NVF3-11/TS4
NVF3-15/PS4
NVF3-15/TS4
NVF3-18.5/PS4
191 378 183 90 362 Ф9 10.5 F
NVF3-18.5/TS4
NVF3-22/PS4 215 426 213 120 407 Ф10.5 15
NVF3-22/TS4
NVF3-30/PS4
NVF3-30/TS4
NVF3-37/PS4
259 433 240 140 408 Ф10.5 26
NVF3-37/TS4
NVF3-45/PS4
NVF3-45/TS4
NVF3-55/PS4
352 603 257 240 577 Ф10 34
NVF3-55/TS4
NVF3-75/PS4
NVF3-75/TS4
NVF3-90/PS4
406 631 272 126 600 Ф10 58
NVF3-90/TS4
NVF3-110/PS4
NVF3-110/TS4
NVF3-132/PS4
470 807 352 150 769 Ф12 108
NVF3-132/TS4
NVF3-160/PS4
NVF3-160/TS4
NVF3-185/PS4
NVF3-185/TS4
540 892 390 180 848 Ф12 121
NVF3-200/PS4
NVF3-200/TS4
NVF3-220/PS4
NVF3-220/TS4
NVF3-245/PS4
NVF3-245/TS4
710 1020 386 250 978 Ф13 171
NVF3-280/PS4
NVF3-280/TS4
NVF3-315/PS4
NVF3-315/TS4
NVF3-355/PS4
NVF3-355/TS4 734 1200 426 250 1152 Ф16.5 280
NVF3-400/PS4
NVF3-400/TS4
7. Optional peripheral devices
Optional device name Roles of optional device
Circuit breaker Protect the power supply system when a short circuit occurs. Be sure to connect it between the AC main circuit
for wiring power supply and AC reactor. If there is no reactor, connect it to the front of the inverter.
AC input reactor Improve the input power factors, reduce the higher harmonics, and suppress surges on the power supply of inverter.
1.Improve or suppress the distortion rate of grid voltage and current waveform caused by the charging and discharging
DC reactor pulse currents of the filter capacitor;
2.Reduce the total harmonic distortion and improve the quality of grid power supply.
1. Effectively inhibit the noise level vibration of motor;

AC output reactor 2. Effectively suppress the differential mode noise within 100 KHz on the inverter output side;
3. Effectively absorb the surge voltage.
1. Control the pumping-up of busbar voltage, and have a certain protection to inverter;
Braking unit
2. Improve the braking capacity of inverter in the need of frequent braking.
Consume the mechanical energy in the motor braking process in the form of thermal energy through the braking
Braking resistor
resistor, which can shorten the deceleration time of the inverter drive system.
The keyboard pallet is needed when the inverter operation panel needs to be installed on the door of control cabinet,
Keyboard pallet
or when the remote cabinet control is required.
Display extension cable It is used as an extension cable when using remote monitoring or pulling out the operation panel.
Accessory Selection Table
Selection of braking accessories AC input reactor AC output reactor DC reactor

Inverter
Braking resistor Induct Induct Induct
Braking unit Config Rated Config Rated Config Rated
ance ance ance
NVF3-□/□□□
configuration Resistance Power uration current uration current uration current
(10% braking rate) (Ω) (W)) (A) (mH) (A) (mH) (A) (mH)
1.5/PS4、1.5/TS4 400 260 3.7 2.239 3 2.1 — —

2.2/PS4、2.2/TS4 250 260 5.5 2.18 6.3 1.5 — —
Standard built-in
3.7/PS4、3.7/TS4 150 390 9 1.85 11 1.1 — —
accessories of
5.5/PS4、5.5/TS4 the braking 100 520 13 1.56 16 0.8 No need to — —
unit (including select DC
7.5/PS4、7.5/TS4 75 780 18 1 18 0.65 reactor — —
22/PS4 models)
11/PS4、11/TS4 50 1040 24 0.52 28 0.33 — —
15/PS4、15/TS4 40 1560 34 0.397 35 0.25 — —
18.5/PS4、18.5/TS4 32 4800 38 0.352 40 0.2 — —
Optional external accessorie
Optional external accessorie
22/PS4、22/TS4 27.2 4800 50 0.26 50 0.18 70 0.9

30/PS4、30/TS4 20 6000 60 0.24 63 0.09 Optional 80 0.86
Optional built-in
37/PS4、37/TS4 16 7000 75 0.235 80 0.08 external 100 0.7
accessories of
accessories
45/PS4、45/TS4 the braking 13.6 9600 91 0.17 100 0.06 120 0.58
(including
unit (including
55/PS4、55/TS4 10 12000 112 0.16 125 0.04 110/PS4 146 0.47
110/PS4 models)
models)
75/PS4、75/TS4 6.8 12000 150 0.12 160 0.035 160 0.36
90/PS4、90/TS4 6.8 12000 200 0.0705 200 0.023 180 0.33
110/PS4、110/TS4 6 20000 224 0.0692 224 0.016 250 0.24
132/PS4、132/TS4 6 25000 280 0.0503 280 0.016 280 0.24
160/PS4、160/TS4 2.5 50000 315 0.0447 315 0.013 340 0.16
185/PS4、185/TS4 Optional external 400 0.0352 400 0.011 Standard 460 0.09
200/PS4、200/TS4 accessories of 400 0.0352 400 0.011 external 460 0.09
the braking unit accessories
220/PS4、220/TS4 450 0.0313 560 0.009 500 0.82
250/PS4、250/TS4 560 0.0251 600 0.008 600 0.072
280/PS4、280/TS4 560 0.0251 600 0.008 600 0.072
315/PS4 640 0.0224 690 0.006 700 0.068
Display Display
Picture of display extension panel
extension cable and cable pallet
display panel pallet
Note: If the inverter panel needs to be pulled out for operation, it should be specified when ordering and indicate the length of the
display extension line.
Please select the required model and specifications according to the instructions of the model and meaning:
For example: Three-phase 380V typical type: NVF3-75/TS4
Three-phase 380V fan-pump type: NVF3-75/PS4
8.1 Model selection guide
8.1.1 In order to ensure the reliable operation of inverter, the power of inverter must be greater than or equal to the power of
motor.
8.1.2 The typical type inverter is mainly used for loads other than fan and pump, such as crane, rolling mill, mixer, ball mill,
centrifuge and other heavy loads.
8.1.3 The fan-pump type inverter is mainly used for light loads such as fan and pump. If the load running current is greater than
0.9 times the rated current, it is recommended to select the fan-pump type inverter with a larger gear or the typical type
inverter with the same power.
9. Custom frequency conversion control cabinet

Various frequency conversion control cabinets can be customized according to requirements of the production process.
F
P-027 Inverter & Soft-Starter Soft-Starter
2. Type designation
N J R 2-□ T
Indicate soft starter control unit,

three-phase 220V rating
Control motor power (kW)
Design sequence No.
Soft-starter
AC motors
Company code
3. Technical data
3.1 Power supply voltage: Three-phase AC220V (± 15%)
50Hz/60Hz (± 2%)
3.2 Starting current: 0.5 to 5 times the starting current limit

NJR2-T
3.3 Ramp-down time: 0s ~ 60s
Soft-Starter
3.4 Base value voltage for soft starting: 30%Ue ~ 70% Ue
1. General 3.5 Kickstart Time: 0.1s
NJR2-T series soft-starter is suitable for three-phase 220V 3.6 Environment requirements
voltage level soft starter, and is cored on advanced dual-
Where the altitude is over 1000m, the capacity utilization
CPU control technology. It controls SCR module, realizes
should be reduced, current reduced by 0.5% for each
soft starting & stopping of three-phase AC induction
additional 100m to 1000m;
motor (squirrel cage type), and has wide range
Ambient temperature of -10℃~40℃(current is reduced
of protection functions e.g. overload, input phase failure,
by 3% for each 1℃ above 40℃);
output phase failure, load short-circuit, starting limiting
Relative humidity less than 95%
overtime, over-voltage, and under-voltage.
Indoor environments featuring non-condensing, free of
flammable and explosive gas, free of conductive dust,
The products form into complete set mainly with control
well-ventilated.
cabinet; and are mainly used supporting the bypass AC
contactor with corresponding specifications. The product
specifications cover 7.5KW ~160KW squirrel cage type
three-phase AC induction motor; and widely used in
electrical drive equipment in the fields of metallurgy, fire
mining, water supply, municipal administration, food,
cement and petrochemical. It is an ideal updated product
of traditional star - delta starter, and self-coupling voltage
starting.
Standard: GB 14048.6 IEC 60947-4-2.

Soft-Starter Inverter & Soft-Starter P-028
4. Wiring diagram
KM1
W1
T
QF W
CT
V1
Three-phase S M
220V AC V
CT
Power U1
R
U
CT
RUN RUN NJR2-T

Fault relay output
STOP K3
X1 spare
X2 spare
Custom relay output
Quick stop K2
X3 KM1
COM
24V power supply 24V K1 Control Power

Bypass Relay
A1 spare Output
mA AO A
Analog current output
RS485 communication terminals
0~20mA GND B
F
External terminal wiring instructions
B RS485 communication terminals When RS485 communication is required,

A RS485 communication terminals please contact the manufacturer.
GND Analog ground As the reference ground for A0 output

AO (0 ~ 20) mA current output GND as reference ground
A1 Spare terminals
Reference ground of COM,

24V +24 V output
maximum output of 100mA
COM Common terminal Reference ground of +24 V

Connecting with COM when factor y default，once disconnect，
X3 quick stop terminal
output will be stopped with an “open circuit” fault
X2 Spare terminals
X1 Spare terminals
STOP Stopping terminal Can realize “two wire”and “three wire”control with COM
RUN Running terminal Can realize “two wire”and “three wire”control with COM
Fault relay output, normally open When there is a fault, the relay picks up
K3
Contact capacity (5A/250VAC) (0.2s pick-up time during power-up instant).
Programmable relay outputs, normally open The relay function can be defined programmatically,
K2 Contact capacity (5A/250VAC) when effective, the relay picks up.
Bypass relay output, normally open;

K1 Control bypass contactor.
Contact capacity (5A/250VAC)
5. Features
5.1 Perfect Human Design:
5.1 1 The wide-body large LCD, the Chinese and English display, parameter setting, and equipment operation and control
are made easier and simpler ;
5.1 2 Advanced diverse soft starting mode can adapt to various types of starting demands of load devices;
Voltage starting mode
Step voltage + current limiting starting mode

Step voltage + voltage starting mode
Current ramp starting mode
Double-loop starting mode
5.1.3 Enable online display of the current operating voltage and current signals, and have fault name and memor y function
to facilitate commissioning and maintenance of equipment;
5.1.4 Full aluminum radiator patented design, better cooling effect, and natural ventilation, saving installation space;
5.1.5 Unique soft start master-slave linkage function, conducive to the production process control of equipment;
5.1.6 RS485 communication function, easy to control and automation networking engineered (to be customized).
5.2 Reliable Quality Assurance
5.2.1 Intelligent dual-CPU optimized design, so that the system operation is more stable and reliable;
5.2.2 SMT chip production process, reducing the failure rate of the circuit board;
5.2.3 Excellent Electromagnetic Compatibility;
5.2.4 High temperature aging test and load test of the machine ensure high reliability of manufactured products.
5.3 Perfect and Reliable Protection
5.3.1 Soft starter under-voltage, over voltage protection;
5.3.2 Soft starter overheating, starting timeout protection;
5.3.3 Starting over-current, operating overload, load short circuit protection;
5.3.4 Input phase failure, output phase failure, and phase imbalance protection.
① ②
Patented
all-aluminum
Removable
design
Keyboard
5.4 Removable keyboard,easy to operate outside remote 5.5 all-aluminum design patent (75kW and below) gives
operation control.(see ①) better heat dissipation, natural air cooling, and saves
space (see ②)
③ ④
RS485
communication Data display
function and memor y
5.6 RS485 communication function (requiring extended 5.7 Display of operating voltage and current; fault
RS485 communication module), facilitating networked description code display and memor y function (see ④)
control and automation engineered; providing three
relay outputs: operation, ramp-top and failure for
external linkage control. (See ③)
5.8 Unique master-slave linkage soft starting function,
beneficial to production process control.

Display box
72
118.2
115
18
69
NJR2-7.5T~22T
145
R3.5 190
128
Rated Power of
R Weight
Model Current controlled
(kg)
(A) motor(kW)
NJR2-7.5T 30 7.5
READY RUN ERROR
NJR2-11T 44 11
250
268
ENTER RUN
确定运行
SET
设定
STOP
停止
NJR2-15T 60 15 5
F
NJR2-18.5T 74 18.5
NJR2-22T 88 22
U V W
NJR2-30T~37T
200
R3.5 183 215
Rated Power of
Weight
(kg)
READY RUN ERROR
(A) motor(kW)
270
310
ENTER RUN
确定运行
NJR2-30T 120 30
8
SET STOP
设定停止
NJR2-37T 148 37
K1 K2 K3
U V W
NJR2-45T~90T
253
220 241
Φ9
Rated Power of
Weight
R
(kg)
(A) motor(kW)
READY RUN ERROR
NJR2-45T 180 45
529
426
ENTER RUN
确定运行
SET STOP
NJR2-55T 220 55
设定停止
20
NJR2-75T 300 75
NJR2-90T 360 90
K1K2K3
NJR2-110T~160T
293
240 253
Φ9
R Rated Power of
Weight
(kg)
(A) motor(kW)
READY RUN ERROR
564
NJR2-110T 440 110

464
ENTER RUN
确定运行
SET STOP
设定停止
NJR2-132T 528 132 25

NJR2-160T 640 160
K1K2K3
7.1 Please select the required model and specification according to the instructions on model and meaning when ordering.
Example: The controlled motor power of 45kW is installed and used with soft starting cabinet or matching distribution
cabinet.
Ordering model: NJR2-45T
7.2 When motor with more than 4 poles is used with soft starter, recommend to select one size larger.
Example: the controlled motor power 55kW is installed and used with soft starting cabinet or matching distribution cabinet.
Ordering model: NJR2-110T
7.3 When bipolar motor is used with soft starter, as the starting current is large, please set the parameters correct as per the
instruction manual before use.
2. Type designation
N J R 2-□ □
D: control unit

Design sequence No.
Soft-starter
AC motors
Company code
3. Technical data
3.1 Mains voltage: Three-phase AC 380V (± 15%)
3.2 Mains frequency:50Hz/60Hz(± 2%))
3.3 Applicable motor: three phase squirrel cage induction

NJR2-D motor
Soft-Starter 3.4 Pollution degree: 3
3.5 Protection class:IP20

1. General
3.6 Rated insulation voltage:660V
NJR2-D series soft-starter is cored on advanced dual-CPU
control technology. It controls SCR module, 3.7 Rated impulse withstand voltage:2kV
realizes soft starting & stopping of three-phase
AC induction motor, and has wide range of protection
3.8 Cooling: Natural cooling F
functions e.g. overload, input phase failure, output 3.9 Starting frequency: Recommended no more than 10 times
phase failure, load short-circuit, starting limiting per hour, the heavier the load, the less the starting frequency;
overtime,over-voltage, and under-voltage.
3.10 Shock resistance: shock less than 0.5g;
NJR2-D series soft-starter requires external bypass 3.11 Environmental conditions: When the altitude is more
contactorwith voltage range of 380V, power than 1000m, used at reduced capacity, current is reduced
specifications for 7.5KW to 500KW; has characteristics by 0.5% for each additional 100m above 1000m;
of good load adaptability,stable and reliable operation,
3.12 When ambient temperature is between (-10 ~ 40) ℃,
and widely used in electrical drive equipment in the
current is reduced by 2% for each 1℃ more than 40 ℃;
fields of metallurgy, petroleum,fire, mining, water supply,
municipal, food, cement and petrochemical. It is an ideal 3.13 Relative humidity less than 95% (20 ~ 65) ℃;
updated product of traditionalstar - delta starter, and 3.14 No condensation, no flammable gas, no conductive
self-coupling voltage starting. dust, well ventilated.
Standard: GB 14048.6 IEC 60947-4-2. 3.15 Soft starting time

Soft stopping time
Starting delay
Starting interval delay
Programmable Output Delay
3.16 Startup mode: six kinds

Shutdown mode: two kinds
3.17 Initial voltage for soft starting

Soft-starting current limiting scope
Soft stopping current limiting scope
4. Wiring diagram
KM1
W1
T
W
QF
CT
V1
Three-phase M
S
380V AC
Power
V
CT
U1
R
CT
Run RUN
Fault relay output
NJR2-D K3
Stop STOP
X1 spare
X2 spare Custom relay output

K2
Quick stop X3
KM1
COM
24V power supply 24V K1 Bypass Relay Control Power

Output
A1 spare
Analog current output mA AO A

RS485 communication terminals
0~20mA
GND B


A1 Spare terminals

24V +24 V output

X3 Quick stop terminal
X2 Spare terminals
X1 Spare terminals
STOP Stopping terminal Can realize “two wire”and “three wire”control with COM
RUN Running terminal Can realize “two wire”and “three wire”control with COM
K3
Contact capacity (5A/250VAC) (0.2s pick-up time during power-up instant).
K2
Contact capacity (5A/250VAC) when effective, the relay picks up.

5. Features
5.1 Perfect Human Design:

5.1.1 The wide-body large LCD, the Chinese and English display, parameter setting, and equipment operation and control are
made easier and simpler;
5.1.2 Advanced diverse soft starting mode can adapt to various types of starting demands of load devices;
Voltage starting mode
Current-limiting starting mode
Step voltage + current limiting starting mode
Step voltage + voltage starting mode
Current ramp starting mode
Double-loop starting mode
5.1.3 Enable online display of the current operating voltage and current signals, and have fault name and memory function to
facilitate commissioning and maintenance of equipment;
5.1.4 full aluminum radiator patented design, better cooling effect, and natural ventilation, saving installation space;
5.1.5 Unique soft start master-slave linkage function, conducive to the production process control of equipment;
5.1.6 RS485 communication function, easy to control and automation networking engineered (to be customized).
5.2 Reliable Quality Assurance
5.2.1 Intelligent dual-CPU optimized design, so that the system operation is more stable and reliable;
5.2.2 SMT chip production process, reducing the failure rate of the circuit board;
5.2.3 Excellent Electromagnetic Compatibility;
5.2.4 High temperature aging test and load test of the machine ensure high reliability of manufactured products.
5.3 Perfect and Reliable Protection
5.3.1 Soft starter under-voltage, overvoltage protection;
5.3.2 Soft starter overheating, starting timeout protection;
5.3.3 Starting over-current, operating overload, load short circuit protection;
5.3.4 Input phase failure, output phase failure, and phase imbalance protection.
① ②
Removable
Patented
all-aluminum
F
Keyboard design
5.4 Removable keyboard,easy to operate outside remote 5.5 all-aluminum design patent (75kW and below) gives
operation control.(see ①) better heat dissipation, natural air cooling, and saves
space (see ②)
③ ④
RS485
Data display
communication
and memor y
function
5.6 RS485 communication function (requiring extended 5.7 Display of operating voltage and current; fault
RS485 communication module), facilitating networked description code display and memory function (see ④)
control and automation engineered; providing three 5.8 Unique master-slave linkage soft starting function,
relay outputs: operation, ramp-top and failure for beneficial to production process control.
external linkage control. (See ③)

Display box
72
118.2
115
18
69
NJR2-7.5D~45D
145
R3.5 190
128 Rated Power of
Weight
(kg)
(A) motor(kW)
R
NJR2-7.5D 15 7.5
NJR2-11D 22 11
READY RUN ERROR NJR2-15D 29 15
268
250
NJR2-18.5D 36 18.5
ENTER RUN
确定运行
SET STOP 5
设定停止
NJR2-22D 42 22
NJR2-30D 57 30
NJR2-37D 70 37
NJR2-45D 84 45
NJR2-55D~75D
200
R3.5 183 215
R
Rated Power of
Weight
(kg)
(A) motor(kW)
READY RUN ERROR
NJR2-55D 103 55
270
310
ENTER RUN
确定运行
8
SET
设定
STOP
停止 NJR2-75D 140 75
K1K2K3
U V W
NJR2-90D~185D
253
220 241
Φ9
Rated Power of
Weight
(kg)
R
(A) motor(kW)
NJR2-90D 167 90
READY RUN ERROR
NJR2-110D 207 110
529
426
ENTER RUN
确定运行
NJR2-132D 248 132

SET STOP
设定停止
20
NJR2-150D 280 150
NJR2-160D 300 160
K1K2K3
NJR2-185D 349 185
NJR2-220D~315D
293
240 253
Φ9
Rated Power of
Weight
R
(kg)
(A) motor(kW)
READY RUN ERROR
NJR2-220D 404 220

564
464
ENTER RUN
确定运行
NJR2-250D 459 250

SET STOP
设定停止
25
NJR2-280D 514 280
NJR2-315D 579 315
K1K2K3
F
NJR2-355D~500D
293
240 253
Φ9
Rated Power of
Weight
R
(kg)
(A) motor(kW)
READY RUN ERROR
NJR2-355D 634 355

564
464
ENTER RUN
确定运行
NJR2-400D 720 400

SET STOP
设定停止
52.5
NJR2-450D 810 450
NJR2-500D 900 500
K1K2K3
cabinet.
Ordering model: NJR2-45D (to be connected with the bypass contactor with corresponding specifications)
Example: the controlled motor power 75kW is installed and used with soft starting cabinet or matching distribution
cabinet.Ordering model: NJR2-90D (to be connected with the bypass contactor with corresponding specifications)
7.4 For heavy load application, recommend the use of soft starter one grade larger.
2. Type designation
N J R 2-□ ZX
On-line
Design sequence No.
Soft-starter
AC motors
Company code
3. Technical data
3.1 Power supply voltage: Three-phase AC380V (± 15%)
50Hz/60Hz (± 2%)
3.2 Starting current: 0.5 to 5 times the starting current limit
NJR2-ZX 3.3 Ramp-down time: 0s ~ 60s
On-line Soft-Starter 3.4 Base value voltage for soft starting: 30%Ue ~ 70% Ue
3.5 Kickstart Time: 0.1s

1. General
3.6 Environment requirements
NJR2-ZX Series on-line soft-starter is cored on advanced dual- Where the altitude is over 1000m, the capacity utilization
CPU control technology. It controls SCR module, realizes soft should be reduced, current reduced by 0.5% for each
starting & stopping of three-phase AC induction motor (squirrel additional 100m to 1000m;
cage type), and has wide range of protection functions e.g. Ambient temperature of -10℃~40℃ (current is reduced
overload, input phase failure, output phase failure, load short- by 3% for each 1℃ above 40℃);
circuit, starting limiting overtime, over-voltage, and under- Relative humidity less than 95%
voltage. Indoor environments featuring non-condensing, free of
After starting motor, the product does not require bypass flammable and explosive gas, free of conductive dust,
contactor, with power specifications covering 7.5KW ~75KW; well-ventilated.
widely used in electrical drive equipment in the fields of
metallurgy, fire, mining, water supply, municipal administration,
food,cement and petrochemical.
It is an ideal updated product of traditional
star - delta starter, and self-coupling voltage starting.
Standard: GB 14048.6,IEC 60947-4-2.
4. Wiring diagram
W
QF
CT
Three-phase
S
380V AC M
Power
V
CT
R
U
CT
RUN RUN
Fault relay output
NJR2-ZX K3
Stop STOP
X1 spare
X2 spare Custom relay output

K2
Quick stop X3
COM
24V power supply 24V K1 Full voltage relay out

A1 spare
mA AO A
Analog current output RS485 communication terminals
0~20mA GND B
F


A1 Spare terminals

24V +24 V output

X3 Quick stop terminal
X2 Spare terminals
X1 Spare terminals
STOP Stopping terminal Can realize "two wire"and "three wire"control with COM
RUN Running terminal Can realize "two wire"and "three wire"control with COM
K3 Contact capacity (5A/250VAC) (0.2s pick-up time during power-up instant).
K2 Contact capacity (5A/250VAC) when effective, the relay picks up.

5. Features
5.1 Long-time online operation without requiring bypass contactor, saving installation space.
5.2 Intelligent Digital Dual SCM optimized control
5.3 Diversified advanced soft starting
5.3.1 voltage starting mode
5.3.2 Current limiting starting mode
5.3.3 Kick voltage + current limiting start mode
5.3.4 Kick voltage + voltage starting mode
5.3.5 Current ramp starting mode
5.3.6 Dual closed-loop starting mode
5.4 Built-in overload, input phase failure, output phase failure, load short-circuit, start current limiting timeout, over-voltage,
under-voltage overheating and other protection functions.
① ②
Removable
Patented
all-aluminum
F
Keyboard design
5.5 Wide-body large LCD displays are in both Chinese English, the operation is more humane and the operation and parameter
settings are more simple and man-machine dialogue is achieved (see ① ②)
③ ④
RS485
Data display
communication
and memor y
function
5.6 Display of operating voltage and current; fault code display and memor y function (see ③ )
5.7 RS485 communication function (requiring extended RS485 communication module), facilitating networking control and
automation engineered; providing three relay outputs: operating, ramp-top and failure for external linkage control.
(see ④)
5.8 Unique master-slave linkage soft starting function, facilitating production process control of equipment.

Display box
72
118.2
115
18
69
NJR2-7.5ZX~37ZX
145
228max
123
Rated Power of
Weight
(kg)
NJR2-37ZX R
(A) motor(kW)
SOFTSTARTER
NJR2-7.5ZX 15 7.5
NJR2-11ZX 22 11
350max
NJR2-7.5ZX
软起动器
NJR2-15ZX 29 15
额定功率： 7.5kW
258
频率：50Hz/60Hz
额定电流(Ie)： 15 A
额定电压(Ue):AC 380V
极数： 3P
使用类别： AC-53a
防护等级： IP20
NJR2-18.5ZX 36 18.5 7
符合标准:：GB 14048.6
出厂编号：
NJR2-22ZX 42 22
NJR2-30ZX 57 30
NJR2-37ZX 70 37
NJR2-45ZX~75ZX
202
275max
172
R Rated Power of
Weight
(kg)
(A) motor(kW)
448max
NJR2-45ZX 84 45
NJR2-75ZX
软起动器
278
额定功率： 75kW
频率：50Hz/60Hz
F
极数： 3P
使用类别： AC-53a
NJR2-55ZX 103 55 11
防护等级： IP20
符合标准:GB14048.6
出厂编号：
NJR2-75ZX 140 75
cabinet.
Ordering model: NJR2-45ZX
Example: the controlled motor power 55kW is installed and used with soft starting cabinet or matching distribution cabinet.
Ordering model: NJR2-75ZX
7.4 For heavy load application, recommend the use of soft starter one grade larger.
Relay
Protection Relay
NJB1-YW NJB1-X Relay NJB1-X1 Relay NJB1-S

Floatless Relay (Three-Phase (Three Phase Time Delay
Unbalance, Phase Sequence, Relay
Sequence, Phase Phase Failure
FailureProtection)
Protection)
NJBK10 NJBK7 NJBK6 NJBK1

Motor Protection Motor Protection Motor Protection Series Motor
Relay Relay Relay Protector
NJBK2 NJBK5 NJBK5-5 JD-5A

Motor Motor Controller Motor Controller Integrated
Protection Motor Protector
Relay
JD-5E JD-5 JD-8 NJYB3

Integrated Integrated Integrated Motor Relay
Motor Protector Motor Protector Protector
NJYB1 XJ3
Phase-Failure and Phase-Failure and
Phase-Sequence Phase-Sequence
Protection Relay Protective Relay
Control Relay
NJS1-H NJS1-M NJS1 NJS5

Time Delay Relay Time Delay Relay Time Delay Relay Time Delay Relay
NJS5-M2 NJS3 NTE8 JSS48A

Time Relay Time Relay Time Delay Relay Time Delay Relay

LV Capacitor
Self-heating Shunt Capacitor
BZMJ BKMJ NWC1 NWC5
NWC6
Page P-017
Intelligent Reactive Power Compensation Controller
JKF8 NWK1-GR

Low Voltage VT & AVR & CT & PT
Control Transformers
NDK JBK5 SG CKSG

Control Transformer Control Transformer Three-phase Series Low-voltage
Air-immersed Series-connected
Transformer Reactor
Automatic AC Voltage Regulators
TND6 TM
TND1/TNS1 TND3
Automatic AC Ultra-low Voltage
Automatic AC Automatic AC
Voltage Regulator Automatic AC
Voltage Regulator Voltage Regulator
Voltage Regulator
TNDZ(DBW) DBW-JW
TNSZ(SBW) SBW-JW
Pillar Type AC Industrial-grade
Automatic Contactless Intelligent
Regulator with Voltage Stabilizer
Compensated
Current Transformers
BH-0.66Ⅲ RCT
BH-0.66Ⅰ SDH-0.66Ⅱ
Current Transformers Current Transformers
MES
Page P-045
Uninterruptible Power Supply
GP-UPS
PC-UPS HP-UPS
Series Online
Series Backup Series Online
Uninterruptible
Uninterruptible Uninterruptible
Power Supply
Power Supply Power Supply

P-001 Relay Protection Relay
3. Technical data
Type NJB1-YW
Operating mode Continuous operating
Contact number 1 Switching

Contact capacity Ue/Ie:AC-15 220V/0.75A,380V/0.47A;Ith:3A
AC 50Hz/60Hz 36V, 110V, 220V, 380V,

Operating voltage
(other voltage may be custom made)
Voltage between electrodes DC12V

Power consumption Max value about 3VA
Operation resistance 5kΩ~100kΩ(adjustable)
Resetting resistance 250kΩmax
Response time 0.1s~10s(adjustable)
Cable length Max length 100m
Green LED: power supply indication;

Indication mode
red LED:relay operation indication
Ambient temperature -5℃~+40℃

Installation mode Equipment or Track Type
4. Operating time-sequence diagram and wiring diagram

NJB1-YW operation time-sequence diagram
NJB1-YW Floatless Relay PWR
E2-E3
E1-E2
1. General
NJB1-YW Floatless Relay is applicable for water level automatic 0N
RY: SW1
control in industrial facilities & equipments, civil water tower,
high cistern, underground conservation pool, etc. 0FF
The control of automaitic water supply or drainage may be

NJB1-YW wiring diagram
achieved by a simgle operation of the function switch without
modifying the user's connectiong conditons.
A1
This product is not applicable for water level control of ~ A2
flammable and explosive liquid, such as oil, chemical liquid, etc. E3
E2
E1
2. Type designation 14 11
E1 12
E2
E3
Rated voltage of control power supply
Function code: floatless relay
Design sequence No. 5. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)

Relay
22.5±0.22
Enterprise featured code
102max
114max
Protection Relay Relay P-002
3. Technical data
Type NJB1-X
Three-phase, three-line mode: 380, 400, 415, 480VAC

Operating voltage
Three-phase, four-line mode: 220, 230, 240, 277VAC
Three-phase
Unbalance rate: 2%~22%
unbalance Operation
Unbalance
(0.1~30)s adjustable
Operation time
Contact number 1 Switching

Contact capacity Ue/Ie:AC-15 240V/0.75A,415V/0.47A;Ith:3A
Power supply: green LED, delay output:

Indication mode
yellow LED, alarm indication: red LED

Installation mode Equipment type or track type

NJB1-X
22.5max
NJB1-X Relay (Three-Phase
102max
Unbalance, Phase Sequence,
Phase Failure Protection)
1. General
NJB1-X relay (hereinafter called relay) are applied in 114max
AC380V~480V control circuits at a frequency of 50Hz as

protection elements of phase sequence, phase failuire and
phase unbalance,making or breaking circuits.The relay
with the true effective value of three phase AC voltatage
5. Wiring diagram
provides more reliable operating protection. The products
meet the requirements of standard IEC 60947-5-1.
N L1 L2 L3
NJB1-X
G
2. Type designation
power supply
shares with
N JB 1 - □/□ the rated input
voltage
Input
L1
Rated control supply voltage N
L2
Function code: X: Unbalance, L3

14 11
Phase Sequence, Phase Fall Protection. Output
12
Design S. N.
Relay
Load
3.1 Rated operational voltage: 200V AC~500V AC
3.2 Operation time: phase sequence, phase failure ≤ 0.1s
3.3 Contact capacity:

Ue/Ie: AC-15 220V/0.75A, 380V/0.47A;
Ith: 3A
3.4 Mounting type: Device type, DIN rail type
3.5 Power consumption: ≤3VA
3.6 Note: In normal operation, the NO contact of the relay is

closed, the operation indicator is on.
4. Wiring diagram
Powersupply
L1 L2 L3 shareswith
theratedinput
voltage
Input
L1
NJB1-X1 Relay (Three Phase L2

L3
Sequence, Phase Failure Output

14 11
Protection) Load
12
1. General
NJB1-X1 relay (phase sequence, phase failure protection) is 5. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)
used as an phase sequence and phase failure protection device
in control circuits with an AC voltage of 200V~500V and a
frequency of 50Hz to make and break the circuit. It cannot
monitor the phase failure of motor load.
2. Type designation
114max
L1 L 2 L3
N JB 1 - X1 电源
102±0.50
动作
Function code:
NJB1-X1
X1: phase sequence, phase failure relay
102max
Design sequence No. 15 18 16
22.5±0.22
Relay
Company code
NJB1-S Time Delay Relay
1. General
NJB1-S series time relay is suitable for being as the time
control and indicator elements in the control circuit with
the AC frequency of 50Hz/60Hz, rated control supply voltage
to 380V and DC control supply voltage to 24V, to connect or
break off the circuit at a predetermined time.
NJBI-S time-delay relay is used in controlling circuit as time
delay element to make or break circuit according to preset time.
2. Type designation
N JB 1 - □/□
Rated supply voltage
Feature code: S: Time-delay relay
Design sequence No.
Relay
Company code
3. Technical data
Type NJB1-S
Delayed ON operation/Interval
Operation mode
Delay/Cycle Delay
Contact number Delay 1 Group conversion

Contact capacity Ue/Ie:AC-15 220V/0.75A,380V/0.47A,Ith:3A
AC220V AC380V 50Hz/60Hz DC24V

Operating voltage
G
(other size may be custom made)
Electrical Endurance 1×105

Mechanical Endurance 1×106
Delay precision 5%
Installation mode Din rail mounting
Code name: 2,5,10,20,50,100,120 (time unit: s/min/h, optional)

Range: 0.2~2,0.5~5,1~10,2~20,5~50,10~100,12~120
Delay range
Note: delay range and time unit may be
selected through selection switch
4. Wiring diagram
NJB1-S wiring diagram
(+)
(~) A1 18 16
(-)
A2 15
(~)

NJB1-S NJB1-S
22.5max
102max
35
7.5
L
27
114max Use TH35-7.5 steel mounting rail for Installation
6. Timing-sequence diagram
Mode 1: Delayed ON operation Mode 3: Symmetrical recycling OFF cycle first
Source Source
T T
Output T T
Output T T T
Mode 2: Interval operation Mode 4: Symmetrical recycling ON cycle first
Source Source
T T T T T
Output Output T T T T
2. Type designation
Rated control supply voltage
Rated current specifications: 10:1A～10A,

50:5A～50A, 200:20A～200A
Design sequence No.
Motor protection relay
Company code
3.1 Altitude: not exceed 2000m;
3.2 the surrounding air temperature of -5°C～+40°C, and

the average value within 24h does not exceed +35 °C;
3.3 atmospheric conditions: the highest temperature of

+40 ° C, relative air humidity not exceeding 50%, lower
temperatures can be allowed to have a higher
relative humidity, for example, air humidity up to 90% at +20°
NJBK10 C, and special measures should be taken against the
condensation occasionally due to temperature changes;
Motor Protection Relay
3.4 Pollution level: 3;
1. General 3.5 Mounting surface and the vertical gradient of not more than
±5 °;
NJBK10 series motor protection relay (hereinafter referred
to as the protector) suitable for AC 50Hz, rated insulation 3.6 In medium without danger of explosion and medium
voltage up to 690V and under, rated working current 1A- gas not enough to corrode metal or destroy insulation and
200A long-term or intermittent AC motor work overload, where much conductive dust exist;
open-phase, three-phase imbalance protection. Product
3.7 Places with anti-rain and snow equipment and not full
meets IEC60947-4-1 standard requirements
of water vapor;
3.8 in the absence of significant shake, shock and vibration;
3.9 Installation Category: Ⅱ;

G
3.10 Electromagnetic Environment: A;
3.11 Casing protection grade: IP20.

4. Technical data
4.1 Main circuit: Rated insulation voltage is AC690V Rated frequency is 50Hz, rated operating current is 1A～200A.
Table 1
Model Rated current specification Rated current range A Suitable for motor power kW
NIBK10-10 10 1A～10A 0.5kW～kW
NJBK10-50 50 5A～50A 2.5kW～25kW
NJBK10-200 200 20A～200A 10kW～100kW
4.2 Auxiliary circuit: Rated insulation voltage AC380V Rated frequency 50Hz, auxiliary contacts parameters
Table 2
Utility Category Rated current range A
Rated operating voltage (V) 240 380
Rated operating current (A) 1.5 0.95
Conventional thermal current (A) 5
5. Structural characteristics
5.1 Double-row LED display, the upper row of LED displays running current, bottom row of LED displays set current, the
indicator lights indicate the operating status and fault status;
5.2 Features overload given time protection (on/off), inverse time overload protection, open-phase, three-phase current
unbalance protection function;
5.3 Built-in 4 overload curves are available to meet different occasions;
5.4 Panel with start and stop buttons, terminal block can be external connected with start and stop buttons with simplified
wiring;
5.5 Auto-start function can open the auto-start function and set the start-up delay. In case of power resumption or reset
after power failure, the protector start automatically as per the set auto start delay, free of any human intervention;
5.6 Fault memory and its indications: In case of motor failure, the indicator displays the fault type, while the bottom row LED
flashes and displays the fault code;
5.7 Mouning mode: screw mounting.
6. Protection characteristics
6.1 Inverse time operation characteristic
When the current value exceeds the 1.1 times the set current value, the protector will start the inverse overload protection
function. The protector shall simulate the calculation of the motor heat accumulation and movement time according to the
overload current multiples. When the heat accumulation reaches a certain value, the protector acts to cut off the AC
contactor, so as to protect the motor.
The relationship between the overload current and the time are shown in Table 3, Figure 1.
Table 3 inverse time operation characteristic table
Overload multiple
Action 1.05 1.2 1.5 2 5 6 7.2 Remark

Overload
time (s)
curve
Kr=1 No action 63 40 22 3.6 2.5 1.8 Meet the 5 level

Kr=2 No action 125 80 45 7.2 5 3.5 Meet the 10 level
Kr=3 No action 250 160 90 14 10 6.9 Meet the 10 level
Kr=4 No action 500 320 180 29 20 14 Meet the 20 level
Kr=5 No action 750 480 270 43 30 21 Meet the 30 level
6.2 phase failure and unbalanced action time is 3s, with a relative deviation of ± 10%, The unbalance rate can be set, unbalance ratio is
calculated as follows:
M3 ax I i - I avg
Unbalanced ratio= i=1 x 100%
I avg
Where:
Ii - Each phase current RMS
Iavg - Average value of three-phase current
Figure 1 time - current characteristic curve
100min
50min
20min
10min
5min
2min
1min
50s
20s Kr=5
10s Kr=4
5s Kr=3
Kr=2
2s
1s
1 2 5 8
×Iset
Time - current characteristic curve
6.3 definite time operation characteristic

When definite time function is open, set the overload ratio and trip time of definite time, if the running current ≥ set
overload current × ratio and exceeds the setting definite time, the protector shall act, as shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2 Definite time characteristic diagram G

l t2≥T,trip
t1＜T,no trip
lds
lset
t2
t1
Note: Iset expresses the set current

Ids = Iset × definite time ratio T expresses the definite time
7. Wiring diagram
7.1 Control power voltage AC220V wiring diagram in Figure 3 Control power voltage AC380V wiring diagram in Figure 4.
Figure 3 control supply voltage AC220V wiring diagram
L3 L2 L1 N
FU1
Stop Start
QS
W1 V1 U1
KM
FU1
W2 V2 U2 A1 A2 96 95 98 +12V
KM
W3 V3 U3
QF1 NJBK10 motor protection relay
QF1 AC220V
W4 V4 U4
M
3~
Figure 4 Control supply voltage AC380V wiring diagram
L3 L2 L1
FU1
Stop Start
QS
FU1
W1 V1 U1
KM
FU2
W2 V2 U2 A1 A2 96 95 98 +12V
KM
W3 V3 U3
QF1 NJBK10 motor protection relay
QF1 AC380V
W4 V4 U4
M
3~

Figure 5 Outside shape and dimensions
133max
65max
25 Running NJBK10
current
motor protection relay
Set
Start Stop
current
Reset Set up
Running Set Break Overload Unbalanced
35
phase
142.5±0.29
156max
9.1 Description and model specifications of the protector, the control supply voltage (AC220V, AC380V) selected according to the
requirements for use.
Setting current range (1A～10A, 5A～50A, 20A～200A);
9.2 Ordering Quantity.
G
2. Type designation
Rated control supply voltage (AC220V,

AC230V, AC240V, AC380V, AC400V, AC415V)
Rated current: 5,10,40,100,400,800
None: communication interface is not available

T: RS485 interface
None: 4mA～20mA analog transformation is not

available
M: 4mA～20mA analog transmission
Specification code
Design sequence No.
Company code
NJBK7 Motor Protection Relay 3.1 Altitude: Not more than 2000m.
3.2 Ambient air condition: -5℃～+40℃, and the average value in

1. General
24 hours shall not exceed +35℃.
NJBK7-800 series motor protection relay (hereinafter referred
3.3 When the maximum temperature is +40℃, the relative
to as "Protector") is applicable for overload protection,locked
humidity of air shall not exceed 50% and higher relative
rotor protection,phase failure protection, three-phase imbalance
humidity is allowable at lower temperature comparatively
protection,undercurrent protection,grounding protection , PTC
(e.g the air humidity may reach 90% when the temperature
temperature protection and communication failure protection
is +20℃). Special measures shall be taken to deal with
for AC electromotors of a frequency of 50Hz with a rated
occasianal condensation caused by variation in temperature.
insulation voltage of up to 690V and a rated operating current
of 1A～800A during long-term and intermittent work operation, 3.4 Pollution class: 3.
This protector is provided with RS485 interface and 4mA～20mA
3.5 The slope degree between installing and verical plane shall not
current loop transmitter interface for network communication
exceed ±5°.
and performs remote monitor control on the motor and fault
query through upper computer. This protector is usually used 3.6 Explosion hazard-free media, in which there are no gasses
together with AC contactor. that are capable of corroding metals and damage the
This product conforms to IEC60947-4-1. insulation and not conducting dust.
3.7 Areas with rain-and-snow-proof equipment and without

water vapor.
3.8 Areas without noticeable shaking, impact and vibration.
3.9 Installation class: Ⅲ.
3.10 Enclosure protection class:IP20.
4. Technical data
4.1 Main circuit: Rated insulatin voltage AC690V and rated frequency is 50Hz, rated impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50μs、4kV，rated
current 1A～800A.
Model rated current (A) current setting range (A) Appropriate motor power (kW) conditional short-circuit current（kA）
5 1～5 0.5～2.5 10
10 2～10 1～5 30
40 8～40 4～20
100 20～100 10～50
400 80～400 40～200
800 200～800 100～400
4.2 Auxiliary circuit: Rated insulation voltage is AC480V,and the rated frequency is 50Hz,rated impulse withstand voltage 1.2/50μs、2.5kV.
Application class AC-15

Rated operating voltage Ue (V) 240 480
Rated operating current Ie (A) 1.5 0.75
Rated thermal current Ith (A) 5
Rated conditional short-circuit current（kA) 1
4.3 Structural features

4.3.1 Set the parameters by button with current、trip level、locked rotor 、start delay ,etc.
4.3.2 Show the information by LED display with current、setting parameters、malfunction ,etc.
4.3.3 Show the current status（running、malfunction、stop、set）by LED display.
4.3.4 Start、stop、star delta can be controlled by one key.
4.3.5 Overload protection,locked rotor protection,phase failure protection, three-phase imbalance protection,undercurrent protection,
grounding protection , PTC temperature protection and communication failure protection are available.
4.3.6 The host adopted panel installation while the transformer is rail installation or by screw.
4.3.7 The terminals are pluggable that is easy for connecting.
4.3.8 Abundant current specification，suit for motors with different power.
4.3.9 4mA～20mA current loop transmitter interface.
4.3.10 Modbus communication function，monitor and control in long distance.
4.3.11 Power consumption: ≤3VA.
5. Protection charactersitics
5.1 Operating characteristics of overload protection
Overload multiple
1.05 1.2 1.5 2 5 6 7.2 Note
Overload Operation
cur ve time (s)
Kr=1 No action 63 40 22 3.6 2.5 1.8 In conformity with Class 5
Kr=2 No action 125 80 45 7.2 5 3.5 In conformity with Class 10A
Kr=3 No action 250 160 90 14 10 6.9 In conformity with Class 10
Kr=4 No action 500 320 180 29 20 14 In conformity with Class 20
Kr=5 No action 750 480 270 43 30 21 In conformity with Class 30
5.2 Rotor locking operation characteristic

If the maximum current ≥ setting current value × set multiplying
Tripping characteristic curve
G
factor for rotor locking, the protector will operate, and the
actuation time will be the set actuation time for rotor locking. 100min
5.3 Phase failure operation characteristic
50min
If the current value of any phase of the three phases is 25%
lower than the current that is setting,the protector will operate 20min
with the actuation time ≤3s.

10min
5.4 Current imbalance operation characteristic
5min
If the three-phase current value of main loop conforms to
following formula, the protector will operate, with the actuation
2min
time≤3s.
1min
M3ax I i - Iavg 50s
i=1
×100% ≥ Set current unbalancerate
I avg Kr=5
20s
Hereinto: Ii- Effective value per phase current 10s Kr=4

Iavg- Mean value of the three phases of currents
5s Kr=3
5.5 Undercurrent protection characteristic
Kr=2
If the minimum current ≤ setting current value × set multiplying 2s
Kr=1
factor for undercurrent, the protector will operate, and the
1s
actuation time will be the set actuation time for undercurrent. 1 2 5 8
5.6 Ground protection operation characteristic ×Iset
The protector performs ground fault protection through the

external zero-sequence transducer. When the zero-sequence
current is in range of (0.9～1.1)set current , the protector will
operate, with the actuation time ≤1s.
2. Type designation
Setting current code
Frame size
Design sequence No.
Company code
3.1 Altitude: should not exceed 2000m;
3.2 Ambient tempeature: -5℃~+40℃, and the average

temperature in 24h should not exceed +35℃；
3.3 Atmospheric conditions: The relative air humidity should not

NJBK6 exceed 50% at the maximum temperature of +40℃. The
relative humidity may be higher at lower temperatures, for
Motor Protection Relay example, the air humidity can be up to 90% at +20℃.
Special measures should be taken if condensation occurs on
1. General the product occasionally due to temperature variation;
NJBK6 series motor protection relay is used to provide 3.4 Pollution degree: 3;
overload, phase failure, three-phase current unbalance and 3.5 The inclination between the mounting plane and the vertical
locked rotor protection for AC motors with a frequency of plane should not exceed ±5°;
AC 50Hz, a rated insulation voltage of below 690V and a
rated operational current of 1A~36A that operate 3.6 In non-explosive media that do not contain a sufficient
continuously or intermittently. amount of gas or conductive dust to cause metal corrosion or
Standards: IEC 60947-4-1 insulation failure;
3.7 In places with rain and snow protection equipment and not
full of vapor;
3.8 In places where there is no significant shake, impact or

vibration;
4. Technical data 3.9 Mounting category: Ⅲ
4.1 Main data and technical characteristics
No. Setting current range Model of matching contactor Matching motor power
1A~3A CJX2-25/NC1-25 0.5kW~1.5kW
3A~9A CJX2-25/NC1-25 1.5kW~4.5kW
8A~24A CJX2-25/NC1-25 4kW~12kW
12A~36A CJX2-32/NC1-32 6kW~18kW
4.2 Technical data of main circuit 4.4 Technical data of auxiliary circuit
Rated operational current: 1A~36A, Control supply voltage: AC 220×(1±10%)V,
rated insulation voltage: 690V, rated frequency: 50Hz; AC 380×(1±10%)V; Rated frequency: 50Hz;
4.3 Technical data of control circuit 4.5 Operating characteristics
Number of contacts: 1 group of change-over contacts; 4.5.1 The operating characteristics of overload protection
Contact capacity: Ue/Ie: AC-15 380V/0.95A, 240V/1.5A; are given in Table 2
Ith: 5A; Rated frequency: 50Hz;
Setting current
No. Action time Starting conditions Starting conditions
multiple
1 1.05 No action within 2h Cold state +20℃

2 1.2 Action within 2h Hot Start +20℃
3 1.5 Action within 2min Hot Start +20℃
4 7.2 2s<Tp≤10s Cold state +20℃
4.5.2 Operating characteristic of phase failure protection

The protector will actuate within 3s if any of the three phases of main circuit currents is open and its relative deviation is ±20%.
4.5.3 Operating characteristic of unbalance protection of three phases of currents
The protector will actuate within 3s if the three phases of main circuit currents meet following two formulas at the same time and its
relative deviation is ±20%.
M3ax I i - Iavg
i=1 ×100%＞30%
I avg
Hereinto:
Ii- Effective value per phase current
Iavg- Mean value of the three phases of currents
4.5.4 Operating characteristic of latching protection
The latching current of the protector is set as 6Ie. When the main circuit current is larger than the latching current, the protector will
delay the actuation, and its actuation time is 3s and its relative deviation is ±20%.
4.6 Reset characteristics
After the operation of the protector, if the control supply voltage is normal, the protector can be reset manually; if the control supply
voltage is off, the protector resets immediately.
5. Connection diagram
The connection diagrams in case the control supply voltage is AC220V and AC380V are shown in Figure 1 and Figure 2.
L3 L2 L1 N L3 L2 L1 N
Figure 1 Figure 2
FU1 FU1
QS QS
W1 V1 U1 W1 V1 U1
KM KM
FU2 FU2
95 A1 95 A1
W2 V2 U2 W2 V2 U2
KM QF1 KM QF1
W3 V3 U3 STP ST W3 V3 U3 STP ST
96 A2 96 A2
QF1 QF1
W4 V4 U4 KM W4 V4 U4 KM
M M
3~ 3~
6. Installation and commissioning 7.2 Structural features

6.1 Before installation, read the operating instructions carefully. 7.2.1 Has phase failure, overload, three-phase current unbalance
Then, connect the wires in accordance with the connection and locked rotor protection functions.
diagram. 7.2.2 Has two indicators indicating running and fault states.
6.1.1 Terminals A1 and A2 are the control power supply input
terminals of the protector; 95 and 96 are the output control
terminals (N/C), 95 and 98 are N/O contacts.
7.2.3 Has a setting curent quantified continuously adjustable
device.
7.2.4 The main circuit uses plug-in connection for use in
G
6.1.2 Plug the protector into the outlet terminal of the contactor combination with the specified model of contactor.
and connect the control circuit in accordance with Figure 2 and
Figure 3.
6.2 Adjustment of setting current value 8. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)
Adjust the setting value of the protector using the setting
knob with indicating arrow and the setting current value on the 54.5max 82max
label plate according to the rated current marked
on the motor nameplate and the load conditions of the motor.
Adjust the setting current value of the protector to the scale
R 24
equal to the rated current value marked on the motor 18 30

88max
/
T R
12 36
nameplate. FAULT
NJBK6-36
RUN A
6.3 Commissioning: After checking the connection and setting,

switch on the power supply and operate the start button. The
motor should run normally and the (green) running
indicator on the protector panel should light up. If the red
indicator flashes, finely adjust the setting value until the red
indicator stops flashing.
9. Environmental conditions for the storage of the
7. Structure and principle protector
7.1 Operating principle: The protector detects the current of the 9.1 Temperature: -25℃~+40℃
main circuit of the motor by means of the current transformer 9.2 Relative humidity (at 25℃): should not exceed 85%
and judge if overload or phase failure has occurred 9.3 Protect from rain and snow
in the motor. In case of overload, it simulates the heat 9.4 The guaranteed storage period of the product is 18 months.
accumulation state of the motor by means of the singlechip and, Products exceeding the storage period must be reinspected
when the heat accumulation reaches the set limit, before being put into use.
disconnects the N/C contact of the built-in electromagnetic relay.
3.1 Altitude: No more than 2000m.
3.2 Ambient air temperature is -5℃~+40℃,and the average

value within 24h shall not exceed+35℃.
3.3 Atmospheric conditions: When the maximum temperature

is + 40 ℃,the air relative humidity shall not exceed 50%,
and a higher relative humidity is allowable at lower
temperatures, for example: at +20℃,the air humidity can
reach 90%, and special measures shall be taken to
condensation occasionally produced due to temperature
changes.
3.4 Class of pollution: 3.

3.5 Inclination between the mounting surface and
vertical plane shall not exceed±5°.
3.6 In places without explosion hazard media and no

enough gases to corrode the metal and damage the
insulation in the media and more conducting dust.
3.7 In places equipped with rain and snow prevention

equipment and without steam.
3.8 In places without significant shake, shock and vibration.

NJBK1 Series Motor Protector 3.9 Installation categor y: Ⅲ.
1. General 3.10 Electromagnetic environment: Environment B.
NJBK1 series motor protector (hereinafter referred to as 3.11 Shell protection grade: IP20.
protector) is applicable to the overload, open-phase, 3.12 Rated duty: Uninterrupted duty or eight-hour day
three-phase current imbalance and other protection working system.
for the AC motors in long-term or intermittent operations
with AC frequency at 50Hz, rated insulation voltage at
690V or below and rated operating current at 1A-400A.
2. Type designation

(AC220V, AC380V)
Setting current code(5: 1A~5A,

10:2A~10A,30:6A~30A, 8 0 : 1 6 A~ 8 0 A ,
200:40A~200A, 4 0 0 : 8 0 A~ 4 0 0 A)
Frame size: 80,400
Motor protector
Enterprise characteristic code

4. Technical data
4.1 Main circuit: Rated insulation voltage: AC690V; rated frequency: 50Hz.
Model Rated current: A Setting current range: A Suitable motor power : kW

NJBK1-80/5 5 1-5 0.5～2.5
NJBK1-80/10 10 2-10 1～5
NJBK1-80/30 30 6-30 3～15
NJBK1-80/80 80 16-80 8～40
NJBK1-400/200 200 40-200 20～100
NJBK1-400/400 400 80-400 40～200
4.2 Auxiliary circuit: Rated insulation voltage: AC380V; rated frequency: 50Hz; use category, rated working voltage, rated operating
current and conventional thermal current.
Use categor y AC-15

Conventional thermal current(A) 5
5. Structure characteristic
5.1 Structure characteristic
5. 1.1Knob sets current value and trip grade.
5.2 LED displays the current value, setting state, fault code and other information about the maximum phase.
5.3 With overload inverse time-lag protection, open-phase protection, three-phase current unbalance protection and other
functions.
5.4 5 optional built-in overload cur ves,meet the use at different occasions.
5.5 Test / Reset: Operating status, press "Test / Reset" button for a short time to conduct simulated action test, and press it for
a long time to enter setup mode; press this button to reset under fault conditions.
5.6 Pluggable terminal blocks, facilitate user connection.
5.7 Integrated design, simple structure, two installation methods of guide rail installation and screw mounting.
5.8 Fault memor y and its instruction. In case of motor failure, LED flashes alternately and displays the fault code and maximum
phase current value.
G
6. Protective characteristics
6.1 Overload operating characteristics
Overload multiple
Action 1.05 1.2 1.5 2 5 6 7.2 Remark

Overload
time (s)
curve
Kr=1 No action 63 40 22 3.6 2.5 1.8 Conform to Class 5

Kr=2 No action 125 80 45 7.2 5 3.5 Conform to Class 10A
Kr=3 No action 250 160 90 14 10 6.9 Conform to Class 10
Kr=4 No action 500 320 180 29 20 14 Conform to Class 20
Kr=5 No action 750 480 270 43 30 21 Conform to Class 30
6.2 Open-phase protection action characteristic

When any one phase current of the three-phase current of the main circuit is 0, the protector acts for 3s, with a relative
error of±20%.
6.3 Action characteristics of three-phase current unbalance protection
When three-phase current of the main circuit complies with the formula below, the protector acts for 3s, with a relative
deviation of±20%.
3
Max|Ii-I avg|
i=1
×100%＞30%
Iavg
Where:
Ii: Current effective value per phase
Iavg: Average value of three-phase current effective value
6.4 Tripping characteristic 8. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)

Time - current characteristic curve
100min
50min
20min
10min
5min
2min
1min
101max
50s
2 / T 1 4 / T 2 6 / T 3
20s Kr=5
10s
Kr=4 3×Φ16
5s
Kr=3
Kr=2 125max
2s
Kr=1
1s
1 2 5 8
×Iset
10 3
73max
10A 20 2 4
5 30
1 5
脱扣等级电流(A)
过载脱扣等级设定
断相电流设定
长按3s
不平衡 A相电流测试
设置——运行
7. Wiring diagram
测试 B相电流复位
C相电流
NJBK1电动机保护器
Control power supply voltage AC220V wiring diagram

113±0.29
L3 L2 L1 N
FU1
QS
W1 V1 U1
KM
FU1
W2 V2 U2 A1 A2 98 95 08 07
KM
W3 V3 U3
QF1 NJBK1 serises motor protector
QF1 AC220V
121max
W4 V4 U4 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
M
34max
3~
24max
155max
Control power supply voltage AC380V wiring diagram
L3 L2 L1
FU1
QS
72.5max
10
120/30
10A 20 80/15 160/45
FU1 5 30 40/0 200/60
W1 V1 U1 过载脱扣等级设定
脱扣等级电流(A)/起动延时(s)
断相电流设定
长按3s
不平衡起动延时设定设置 —— 运行测试
测试 A相电流复位
KM
B相电流
C相电流
NJBK1电动机保护器
FU2
W2 V2 U2 A1 A2 98 95 08 07 142.5±0.35
KM
W3 V3 U3
QF1 NJBK1 serises motor protector
QF1 AC380V
W4 V4 U4
9.1 Name and type specification of protector
M
3~ Select the control power supply voltage (AC220V,
AC380V) according to the operating requirements
Setting current range (1A~5A, 2A~10A, 6A~30A,
16A~80A,40A~200A,80A~400A).
9.2 Order quantity
3.1 Altitude ≤2000m.
3.2 Ambient air temperature -5℃ ~ +40℃, with daily average
≤+35℃.
3.3 Atmospheric condition: when the highest temperature is
+40℃, relative humidity of air shall be no more than 50%,
higher relative humidity shall be allowable at lower
temperature.
The max monthly average relative humidity of the most
humid month shall be not more than 90% and the lowest
monthly average temperature of the same month should be
no more than +25 ℃, condensed dew on surface of the
product due to the change of the temperature should be
taken into account.
3.4 Pollution Level: Level 3.
3.5 Installation Category: Ⅲ.
3.6 Inclination between installation plane and vertical plane shall
≤±5°.
3.7 At places without prominence rock, impact and vibration.
3.8 At places without explosive risk, without gases that may be
corrosive to metal or gases that may cause damage to the
insulation, and with little conducting dust
NJBK2 Motor 3.9 At places where rain & snow proof facilities are equipped
with and not being full of steam.
Protection Relay
4. Technical data
1. General
4.1 Main circuit: rated insulation voltage AC690V, rated frequency
NJBK2 series motor protection relay (hereinafter referred to
50Hz.
protector as simply) is applicable for overload, locked-rotor,
phase-failure, three phase current unbalance, earthing and Rated Setting current Suitable motor
Type
PTC temperature protection of AC motor @ A.C.50Hz, less current (A) range (A) power (kW)
than 690V rated insulation voltage and 1A ~ 800A rated NJBK2-200/10 10 2~10 1~5
operating current for its continuous working or NJBK2-200/50 50 10~50 5~25
discontinuous working. NJBK2-200/200 200 40~200 20~100
This product meets the requirements of IEC 60947- 4-1. NJBK2-400/400
NJBK2-800/800
400
800
160~400
320~800
80~200
160~400
G
2. Type designation
4.2 Auxiliary circuit: rated insulation voltage AC380V, rated
frequency 50Hz, Utility classes, rated operating voltage,
rated operating current and conventional heating current.
Supply voltage
Utility classes AC-15
Specification of rated current Rated operating voltage (V) 240 380
Rated current of the casing
Conventional heating current (A) 5
Design sequence No.

5. Design features
Company code
5.1 Equipped with functions of overload, locked-rotor, phase-
failure, three-phase unbalance, earthing and PTC
temperature protection etc.
5.2 Six indicators indicate status of power supply, operation,
phase-failure (three phase unbalance), overload, earthing
and temperature, respectively. Equipped with function of
fault memory.
5.3 Four kinds of trip class.
5.4 Digital dial-up settings with high precision.
5.5 Three kinds of reset modes: manual reset, remote manual
reset and automatic reset.
5.6 Installation mode: installation in parts and integral installation. Transformer Installation: bolts installation and Track installation. Relay
Installation: Rapid Track installation through meter.
5.7 Equipped with function of six times of current to test [Test by 6 times of the current].
6. Protection characteristics
6.1 Operation characteristics under three-phase balanced-load status
Times of Ambient
S.N. Trip class Operation time Test condition
setting current temperature℃
10A
10
1 1.05 <2h non-tripping Start from cold status
20
30
10A
10
2 1.2 <2h tripping Start right after Item No.1 20±2
20
30
10A <2min
10 <4min
3 1.5 Start right after Item No.1
20 <8min
30 <12min
10A 2s<tp≤10s
10 4s<tp≤10s
4 7.2 Start from cold status
20 6s<tp≤20s
30 9s<tp≤30s
6.2 Operation characteristic under phase-failure status
Times of setting current Ambient

S.N. Operation time Test condition
Any two phases The third phase temperature℃
1 1.0 0.9 <2h non-tripping

2 0.3~1.0 <Imax×40% ≤5s Start from cold status 20±2
3 0.3~1.0 0 ≤5s
6.3 Tripping feature 6.4 Performance feature of earthing protection
NJBK2 current-time characteristic curve Serial number Zero sequence current (A) Operation time (s)
1 0.5 ≤1
2 1 ≤1
120min
100min
6.5 Protection feature of pre-buried PTC thermistor in motor:
50min
PTC thermistor protection is carried out by detecting
resistance value of thermistor output from PTC detector pre-
20min
buried in stator winding or bearing of motor and taking it as
10min protection condition to judge whether motor is overheating,
when PTC reaching reacting resistance value, reacting
5min
delay<1s.
2min PTC protection
1min
50s
Ω Tripping delay PTC tripping

20s Tripping reset
30
10s 20 3000
10 1650
5s
1600
10A
2s
1s
1 2 5 8
t
×Ｉe PTC temperature alarm Alarm clearance
6.6 Reset feature:Manual reset, automatic reset and remote 9. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)
manual reset are available for option Resetting time varies
9.1 Overall and Amounting dimensions of NJBK2-200 transformer
according to different trip class, among the range of 4min to
12min. 112.5max
7. Wiring diagram
7.1 Wiring diagram for control power supply @ AC220V voltage
68max
61.5max
6/T3 4/T2 2/T1
Wiring diagram for control power supply @ AC220V voltage
L1
L2
L3
N 66.4±0.32
S1
2×Φ5.5
S2
KM KM
Reset
A1 A2 95 96 97 98 Y1 Y2
KM
NJBK2-X
71.4±0.23
C1
86.5max
A
C2 B
C
COM COM
COM
C
C
CT B B
A
A
T1 T2
2×R2.75
M
97±0.26
3~
Top view
7.2 Wiring diagram for control power supply @ AC380V voltage 9.2 Overall and mounting dimensions of NJBK2-200 macropore
Wiring diagram for control power supply @ AC380V voltage transformer
L1
L2
L3
N
S1
92max
S2
83max
KM KM Reset
36
KM A1 A2 95 96 97 98 Y1 Y2
C1
C2
COM
CT
COM
C
B
A
C
B
A
T1 T2
147max
118
86
G
M
3~
70max
60
8. Accessory instruction
S.N. Designation Quantity Remarks
It is suggested to be used
1 NJBK2-200 conductive bar 3 when main circuit current is
within the range of 80A-200A.
2 NJBK2 wire holder 2 Instrument installation

3 NJBK2 clamp 1 Instrument installation
9.3 Overall and Amounting dimensions of NJBK2-400 transformer 9.6 Overall and mounting dimensions of relay of protector
65max
30
104max
30
A1 A2 95 96 97 98 Y1 Y2
NJBK2-200
88±0.26
95max
35±0.19
128
193max Power supplyOperation Phase failureOverloadEarthingTemperature
+10
+20
+H
+D
+G
+A
+C
+B
+E
+F
+5
+J
+I
11.5 RESET TEST
6.5 CURRENTSETTING TRIP
T1 T2 C1 C2 COM C B A
60 ± 0.3
81max
71max
64±0.3 9.7 Overall and mounting dimensions of relay of protector

Top view
79± 0.5
9.4 Overall and mounting dimensions of NJBK2-800 transformer
65± 0.5
40
121max
40
164
247max
11.5 6.5
10.1 Designation and specification of protector, select control
current and voltage (AC220V, AC380V), setting current range
101max
(2A~10A, 10A~50A, 40A~200A, 160A~400A, 320A~800A),

80± 0.3
accessories (NJBK2-200 conductive bar, NJBK2 wire holder,

NJBK2 clamp) according to operating requirements.
82± 0.3 10.2 Order Quantity.
Top view
9.5 Overall and mounting dimensions of module sample

32max
35.5
95max
26max
Top view
2. Type designation
Function code
Blank: with liquid level relay
D: without liquid level relay
10: frame size code
Design sequence No.
Motor controller
Company code
3.1 Altitude: the altitude of the mounting location should not
exceed 2000m;
3.2 Ambient temperature: -5℃~+40℃, and the average

temperature in 24h should not exceed +35℃;
NJBK5 Motor Controller
3.3 Atmospheric conditions: The relative air humidity at the
mounting location should not exceed 50% at the maximum
1. General
temperature of +40℃. The relative humidity may be higher at
NJBK5 series motor controller (hereinafter referred to as lower temperatures. Special measures should be taken if
controller) is mainly used in circuits with a frequency of AC condensation occurs on the product occasionally due to
50Hz (or 60Hz), a rated operational voltage of up to 380V temperature variation;
and a rated control power of up to 11kW (current up to
3.4 Pollution degree: 3;
22A) to control the direct start and stop of water pumps or
motors, provide motors with overload and phase failure 3.5 Mounting category: Ⅲ;
protection, and realize automatic liquid level control for 3.6 In places where there is no significant vibration or impluse
civil water towers and reservoirs.
This product is not applicable to the liquid level control of 3.7 In non-explosive media that do not contain a sufficient
low-conductivity liquids, such as oil, purified water,
inflammable and explosive chemical liquids and high-
amount of gas or dust to cause metal corrosion or insulation
failure; G
density sewage. 3.8 In places where rain and snow protection is provided;
Standards: IEC 60947-4-1.
3.9 The inclination from the vertical plane should not exceed 5°.
4 Technical data
Max. rated power (kW)

Conventional Model of Model of Setting Number of
Type heating AC-3 matching matching current turns of
current (A) AC contactor motor protector range (A) protector (turn)
380V 220V
NJBK5-10 0.72A~2.4A
2.4 1.1 0.55 NXC-06/CJX2-1210 JD-8/0.5A~5A 0.72~2.4 5
NJBK5-10D 0.72A~2.4A
NJBK5-10 3.5A~11A
12 5.5 3 NXC-12/CJX2-1210 JD-8/2A~20A 3.5~11 1
NJBK5-10D 3.5A~11A
NJBK5-10 10A~16A
NJBK5-10D 10A~16A 16 7.5 4 NXC-16/CJX2-1810 JD-8/2A~20A 10~16 1
NJBK5-10 20A~25A
NJBK5-10D 20A~25A 25 11 5.5 NXC-25/CJX2-2510 JD-8/20A~80A 20~25 1
4.2 Rated control supply voltage Us: AC220V, AC380V.
4.3 Degree of protection of enclosure: IP55.
4.4 Protection characteristics of the controller

4.4.1 Phase failure protection characteristics of the controller: In case of failure of any phase of the three-phase main circuit passing through
the center hole of the motor comprehensive protector in the controller, the motor comprehensive protector operates for a period of
≤5s.
4.4.2 Overload protection characteristics of the controller under balanced three-phase load.
Setting current
No. Operation time Starting conditions
multiple
1 1.05 No action within 2h Cold state start

2 1.2 Action within 2h Start after No.1
3 1.5 Tripping class 30 ≤12min Start after applying a 1.0 times setting current for 2h
4 7.2 Tripping class 30 9s<Tp≤30s Cold state start
4.5 Down-lead distance of liquid level control electrode: 200m max.

4.6 Mounting type: installation type.
5. Features
The controller consists of a NXC or CJX2 series AC contactor, a JD-8 series motor comprehensive protector and an NJB1-YW1 liquid level
relay in a protective enclosure and is divided into two types, with liquid level relay and without liquid level relay. Products with liquid level
relay are used to control the start and stop and automatic pumping and drainage of water pumps and provide overload and phase failure
protection. Products without liquid level relay are used to control the start and stop of motors and provide overload and phase failure
protection.
Setting of the motor comprehensive protector in the controller is required before it is connected and put into use.
6. Wiring diagram
a. Connection diagram of NJBK5-10 in case both the control b. Connection diagram of NJBK5-10 in case the main circuit
circuit voltage and the main circuit voltage are AC380V voltage is AC380V and the control circuit voltage is AC220V
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 N
FU FU
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 A1 A1 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 A1 A1

STP NJB1-YW1 STP NJB1-YW1
KM NJB1-YW1 KM NJB1-YW1
KM KM
E1 E2 E3 E1 E2 E3
A2 A2 A2 A2
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
High 96 High
96
Medium Medium
JD-8 JD-8
95 Pool Low 95 Pool Low
11 14NO 11 14NO
JD-8 JD-8
NJB1-YW1 NJB1-YW1
ST ST
14 13NO KM 14 13NO KM
U V W U V W
M M
3～ 3～
a.Connection diagram of NJBK5-10D in case both the control b.Connection diagram of NJBK5-10D in case the main circuit
circuit voltage and the main circuit voltage are AC380V voltage is AC380V and the control circuit voltage is AC220V
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 N
FU FU
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 A1 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 A1

STP STP
KM KM KM KM
A2 A2
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
96 96
JD-8 14NO JD-8 14NO
JD-8 JD-8
95 ST 95 ST
13NO KM 13NO KM
U V W U V W
M M
3 ～ 3～
2×Φ6
START
PUMP
NJBK5-10
FULL MOTOR CONTROLLER R
NJBK5-10
162±0.5
198max
STOP Standard IEC60947-4-1

Rated operating current Ie
0.72A-2.4A
3.5A-11A
ZHEJIANGCHINTELECTRICSCO.,LTD.
10A-16A
20A-25A
Rated Control Supply Voltage Us
OVERLOAD 50HzAC220V
50HzAC380V
△
ZHEJIANG CHINTELECTRICSCO.,LTD.
!
Motor controller used for thefirst time,
motor intefrated protector should be setted!
Status Indication
red on-overload
green off-
phase failure
A B C
60.7±0.1
118max
127max G
2. Type designation
5: frame size code
Design sequence No.
Motor controller
Company code
3.1 Altitude: the altitude of the mounting location should not

exceed 2000m;
3.2 Ambient tempeature: -5℃~+40℃, and the average

temperature in 24h should not exceed +35℃;
3.3 Atmospheric conditions: The relative air humidity at the

NJBK5-5 Motor Controller mounting location should not exceed 50% at the maximum
temperature of +40℃. The relative humidity may be higher
at lower temperatures. Special measures should be taken if
1. General condensation occurs on the product occasionally due to
NJBK5-5 motor controller (hereinafter referred to as temperature variation。
controller) is mainly used in circuits with a frequency of AC 3.4 Pollution degree: 3;
50Hz/60Hz, a rated operational voltage of up to 220V and
a rated control power of up to 2.2kW (current up to 20A) 3.5 Mounting category: Ⅱ;
to control the direct start and stop of single-phase water 3.6 In places where there is no significant vibration or impact;
pumps, provide overload and underload protection (pump
3.7 In non-explosive media that do not contain a sufficient
runaway protection), and realize automatic liquid level
amount of gas or dust to cause metal corrosion or insulation
control for civil water towers and reservoirs.
failure;
This product is not applicable to the liquid level control
of oil, purified water, inflammable and explosive chemical 3.8 In places where rain and snow protection is provided;
liquids, corrosive liquids and high-density sewage.
3.9 The inclination from the vertical plane should not exceed 5°.
4. Technical data
Conventional Rate power

Setting current Rated operational Utilization
Model Type heating
range (A) voltage (V) categor y
current (A) kW HP
2A~10A 2~10 0.25~1.1 1/3~1.5

NJBK5-5 20 ΑC220 AC-1
4A~20A 4~20 0.55~2.2 3/4~3
4.2 Rated control supply voltage Us: AC220V.
4.3 Rated control supply voltage fluctuation range: (85%~110%)Us.
4.4 Degree of protection of enclosure: IP20.
4.5 Operating characteristics
4.5.1 When overload protection is active, the red “Fault” indicator of the controller lights up permanently, and overload protection
operates according to tripping class 10, see Table 2.
Table 2 Operating characteristics of overload protection
Setting current
No. Trip time Starting conditions
multiple
1 1.05 No trip within 2h Cold state start

2 1.2 Trip within 2h Start after No.1
3 1.5 ≤4min Start after applying a 1.0 times setting current for 2h
4 7.2 4s<Tp≤10s Cold state start
4.5.2 Operating characteristics of underload protection (pump runaway protection): When the actual operational current of the pump
motor is less than 20%~100% of the rated current of the motor, the red “Fault” indicator of the controller flashes and, after a delay
of 60s±10s, the controller stops operation.
4.5.3 Protection return characteristics: After the operation of the overload or underload protection (pump runaway protection) of the
controller, the controller restarts automatically after a delay of 30min±3min.
4.5.4 Reset characteristics: power-off reset, the reset time ≤ 1min.
4.6 Down-lead distance of liquid level control electrode: 500m max.
4.7 Requirements for the liquid under control: general domestic water or high-conductivity sewage.
4.8 Mounting type: installation type. G

5. Structure and principle
The controller consists of four parts, enclosure, base, sealing ring and main control panel. The enclosure has a “Force Start” button,
which is used to start the pump motor forcibly to fill the pool when the highest water level has not been reached and becomes invalid
when the highest water level has been reached. It also has a “Power” switch, which is used to switch on or off the power supply of the
controller (position “I” is on, and position “0” is off).
There are three liquid level detection electrode wires in the controller, E1, E2 and E3, which should be connected and installed in
high, medium and low positions in the pool under control by the user. When the water level in the pool is lower than position E3, the
controller starts the pump motor to pump water and the yellow “Water Level” indicator on the controller panel flashes, until the water
level in the pool reaches position E1. At this time, the yellow “Water Level” indicator on the controller panel lights up permanently and
the pump stops pumping.
6. Installation and commissioning
6.1 Before installation, read the operating instructions carefully. Then, connect the wires in accordance with the connection diagram.
During connection, the live wire and neutral wire of the controller power supply should be distinguished from each other, the three
liquid level detection electrodes in the controller, E1, E2 and E3, should be installed in high, medium and low positions in the pool
under control by the user, the terminals should be highly conductive.
6.2 Before the controller is put into use, overload setting must be carried out. Otherwise, overload protection will be inactive. Overload
setting is accomplished by simply setting the current value on the overload dial of the controller to the rated current of the motor. The
underload setting value can generally be 50% of the rated current. The user may also carry out underload setting after detecting the
no-load current of the motor and calculating the percentage to the rated current.
6.3 After checking the connection and carrying out overload and underload setting, press the power switch on the controller panel to
switch on the power supply and carry out relevant overload and underload tests. The controller may be used only if it operates
normally. If a fault occurs, check the connection or the overload and underload setting.
7. Wiring diagram 8. Overall and mounting dimentions (mm)
Figure 1 Connection diagram
4×Φ6
N L
Power Liquid level
supply Motor
Neutral Live electrode
wire wire
NJBK5-5
L N N L E3 E2 E1 NJBK5-5 MOTOR CONTROLLER
FORCED START
111±0.29
146max
Standard IEC60947-4-1
Rated operating current Ie
2A～10A
4A～20A
Rated Power Pe
QF 0.25kW～1.1kW
0.55kW～2.2kW
Rated Control Supply Voltage Us
High 50HzAC220V
POWER
Pool Medium Motor controller used for thefirst time,

over load should be setting
Low Status Indication
PowerWater level
Failure
M
～
61±0.2
84max 96max
Figure 2 Schematic diagram of setting knob
6 60
4 8 40 80
2 10 20 100
Overload setting (A) Underload setting (%)
3.2 Ambient temperature Range:-5℃~ +40℃, with daily

average≤+35℃.

+40℃, relative humidity of air shall be no more than 50%,
temperature, for instance air humidity may reach 90% at
+20℃. As for dews, which contigently appear due to change
of temperature, special steps should be taken
3.5 Inclination between installation plane and vertical plane

shall≤±5°.
3.6 At places without explosive risk, without gases that may be

corrosive to metal or gases that may cause damage to the
insulation, and with little conducting dust.
3.7 At places where rain & snow proof facilities are equipped
3.8 At places without prominence rock, impact and vibration.

JD-5A Integrated
3.9 Installation Category: Ⅲ.
Motor Protector
1. General
JD-5A Integrated Motor Protector (hereinafter referred to
as protector) is applicable for overload, phase-failure and
three-phase current unbalance protection of AC motor @
A.C.50Hz, less than AC690V rated insulation voltage and
1A~400A rated operating
current for its continuous working or discontinuous working.
G
Protector and AC contactor are generally used
cooperatively.
This product meets the requirements of IEC 60947-4-1.
2. Type designation
JD - 5 □ / □ □
Supply voltage
Code of setting current
Derived code
Design consequence number
Integrated motor protector

4. Technical data 6.3 Tripping feature
Table 1 Figure 1
Setting current Voltage of control power Suitable motor

Type 120min
range (A) supply (Supply Voltage) (V) power (kW)
100min
JD-5A/80 1~5 220V, 380V 0.5~2.5
JD-5A/80 5~20 220V, 380V 2.5~10 50min
JD-5A/80 20~80 220V, 380V 10~40

JD-5A/400 80~200 220V, 380V 40~100 20min
JD-5A/400 160~400 220V, 380V 80~200
10min
Control circuit: rated insulation voltage AC380V, rated frequency 5min
50Hz, contact parameters refer to Table 2.

2min
Table 2
Use type AC-15 1min
50s 30
20s
10s
20
10
5. Design features 5s
10A
5.1 Three-phase electronic type, trip class is level 10A, 10, 20 2s
and 30.
1s
1 2 5 8
5.2 Equipped with function of phase-failure, overload and three- × I e
phase unbalance protection.
5.3 Digital dial-up setting with high precision

Trip Operation Test Ambient
5.4 Digital current display. S.N. I/In
class time condition temperature
5.5 Three indicators indicate normal, overload and phase-failure 10A

(three-phase current unbalance) status respectively. 10 <2h non- start from
1 1.05
20 tripping cold status
5.6 Main circuit adopts feed-through wiring.
30
5.7 Installation mode: bolts. 10A
10
Right after
2 1.2 <2h tripping
20 item No.1
6. Protection features 30
10A 20±2
<2min
6.1 Operation characteristics under phases balanced-load status 10 Start after putting
<4min
one time of setting
(see Table 3) 3 1.5 20 <8min current through
6.2 Operation characteristic under phase-failure status 30 main circuit for 2h
<12min
Operation characteristic under phase-failure status should 10A 2s<Tp≤10s
meet the requirement: operation time of protector ≤5s 10 4s<Tp≤10s
start from
3 4 7.2 20 6s<Tp≤20s cold status
Max Ii-Iavg 30
i=1 9s<Tp≤30s
×100%＞40%
Iavg
Where: 6.4 Reset mode: De-energizing reset.

Ii---The r.m.s value of each phase
Iavg---The average current of three-phase current
7. Wiring diagram 8. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)

7.1 See Figure 2 for wiring diagram of control power supply @ JD-5A/80
AC220V voltage. 95 96 A1 A2
Figure 2
113max
64max
JD-5A Integrated motor protector
L3 L2 L1 N Phase failure run Overload

setting current 20A~80A
113±0.42
FU1 H3 H2 H1
126max
QS Protector
FU2
W1 V1 U1
STP ST 96 95 A2 A1 JD-5A/400
W2 V2 U2
KM
KM
135max
KM
R
66max
W3 V3 U3
JD-5A Integrated motor protector
QF1 Phase failure run Overload

setting current 80A～200A
L1, L2, L3: Three-phase power supply

KM: Contactor 142.5±0.29
W4 V4 U4 A1, A2, 95, 96: Number of protector connection terminal
STP: Stop button 156max
M ST: Start button
3~ FU1, Fu2: Fuse protector
QF1: Motor protector
7.2 See Figure 3 for wiring diagram of control power supply @ 9.1 Designation and type-specification of protector, select
AC380V voltage. controlling current and voltage (AC220V, AC380V, setting
current range (1A~5A, 5A~20A, 20A~80A, 80A~200A,
Figure 3
160A~400A), Trip class (10A, 10, 20, 30)
L3 L2 L1 N according to operating requirements. Trip class in routine
order is level 10.
Fu1 H3 H2 H1
9.2 Order Quantity.
QS Protector
Fu2
W1 V1 U1
STP ST 96 95 A2 A1
W2 V2 U2
KM
KM KM
QF1
W3 V3 U3
L1, L2, L3: Three-phase power supply

KM: Contactor
G
A1, A2, 95, 96: Number of protector connection terminal
W4 V4 U4
STP: Stop button
M ST: Start button
3 ~ FU1, Fu2: Fuse protector
2. Type designation
Code of setting current
Derived code
Integrated inotor protector
3.2 The ambient air temperature is -5℃~+40℃ and the

average temperature within 24h shall not exceed +35℃.
3.3 Atmospheric condition: Relative humidity of

atmosphere shall not exceed 50% at the temperature of
JD-5E Integrated Motor +40℃,and higher relative humidity is allowed at lower
temperature. For example, the air humidity can reach
Protector 90% at the temperature of +20℃. Regarding the
condensation casually caused by humidity change,
1. General special measures shall be taken.
3.4 Class of pollution: Class Ⅲ.

JD-5E Integrated Motor Protector is applicable to
overload and phase failure protection of AC motor 3.5 Installation categor y: categor y Ⅲ.
of long term and intermittent work with AC
3.6 The angle between the installation surface and the
50Hz, rated insulation voltage AC690V and rated
vertical surface shall not exceed ±5 degrees.
working current 1A-400A. The protector is usually
used together with a contactor. It conforms to 3.7 The place without obvious shake, impact and vibration
IEC 60947-4-1 standards. shall be selected as the installation site.
3.8 The installation site shall conform to the following

standards: explosive and dangerous medium, no gas
capable of corroding and damaging insulation in the
medium and less conductive dust in the medium.
3.9 The place with rain-proof and snow-proof equipment

and a little water vapor shall be used as the installation
site.
4. Technical data
4.1 Main circuit: rated insulation voltage AC690V, rated frequency 50Hz (shown in Table 1)
Table 1
Model Range of setting current (A) Controlled supply voltage (V) Power motor (kW)
JD-5E 1~5 220V OR 380V 0.5~2.5
JD-5E 5~25 220V OR 380V 2.5~12.5
JD-5E 20~80 220V OR 380V 10~40
JD-5E 80~200 220V OR 380V 40~100
JD-5E 160~400 220V OR 380V 80~200
4.2 Auxiliar y circuit: rated insulation voltage AC380V, rated frequency 50Hz (shown in Table 2)
Table 2
Utility Category AC-15
5. Others
5.1 Structure characteristics
5.1.1 Three-phase electronic type
5.1.2 Function of phase failure and overload protection
5.1.3 The setting current can be adjusted continuously.
5.1.4 Three indicating lights respectively indicate the working states of phase failure, operation and overload.
5.1.5 The main circuit adopts pass-through-core type wiring method.
5.1.6 Installation method: installation via screws
5.2 Protective characteristics

5.2.1 The operating characteristics of the protector during load unbalance of each phase are shown in Table 3.
Multiple of Ambient air

Serial number Tripping level Actuation time Starting condition
setting current temperature (℃)
10A
10
1 1.05 No actuation within 2h Start from cold state
20
30
10A
10
2 1.2 Actuation within 2h Operation following
20 sequence 1
30
20±2
10A ＜2min
10 ＜4min
3 1.5 Operation following
20 ＜8min sequence 1
30 ＜12min
10A 2s＜tp≤10s
10 4s＜tp≤10s
4 7.2
20 6s＜tp≤20s Start from cold state
30 9s＜tp≤30s
5.2.2 Tripping characteristics

The tripping level of the protector with rated working current from 1A to 80A is level 10A.
The tripping level of the protector with rated working current from 80A to 400A can be set as 10A, 10, 20 or 30.
Figure 1
120min
100min
50min
G
20min
10min
5min
2min
1min
50s
20s
30
10s 20
5s 10
10A
2s
1s
1 2 5 8
×Ｉe
5.3 Wiring diagram

5.3.1 Wiring diagram for control power supply @ AC220V voltage
Figure 2
L3 L2 L1 N
L3L2 L1
FU1 H3 H2 H1
QS Protector
FU2
W1 V1 U1
STP ST 96 95 A2 A1
W2 V2 U2
KM Each phase more than 1A feedthrough by three times
KM KM
W3 V3 U3
QF1
L3L2L1
L1, L2, L3: three-phase power supply
W4 V4 U4 KM: Contactor
M A1, A2, 95, 96: Number of protector connection terminal
3 ~ STP: Stop button
ST: Start button
FU1, FU2: Fuse protector Each phase below 1A feedthrough by three times
5.3.2 Wiring diagram for control power supply @ AC380V voltage
Figure 3
L3 L2 L1
L3 L2 L1 N
FU1 H3 H2 H1
QS Protector
FU2
W1 V1 U1
STP ST 96 95 A2 A1
Each phase more than 1A feedthrough by three times
W2 V2 U2
KM
KM KM L3 L2 L1
W3 V3 U3
QF1
KM: Contactor
W4 V4 U4 A1, A2, 95, 96: Number of protector connection terminal
STP: Stop button
M ST: Start button Each phase below 1A feedthrough by three times
3 ~ FU1, FU2: Fuse protector
JD-5E/80 JD-5E/400
113±0.29
110max
142.5±0.29
133max
Φ12 25
64max
65max
整定电流
R
JD-5E
10A
JD-5E 电动机保护器 80
0120
10
20
16
30
电动机综合保护器
200
35
脱扣级别整定电流
断相运行过载
断相运行过载
2×Φ5.6
126.5max
156max
7.1 Designation and type-specification of protector, select controlling current and voltage (AC220V, AC380V),
setting current range (1A~5A, 5A~25A, 20A~80A, 80A~200A, 160A~400A), according to operating requirements.
7.2 Order Quantity.
3.2 Ambient temperature Range: -5℃ ~ +40℃, with daily

average ≤ +35℃.

+40℃, the relative humidity of air shall be no more than 50%,
temperature, for instance air humidity may reach 90% at +20
℃. As for dews, which contigently appear due to change of
temperature, special steps should be taken.
3.5 Inclination between installation plane and vertical plane shall

≤±5°.
3.6 In the media without explosive risk, and no gases that may be
corrosive to metal and damage insulation in the media
together with at places where much conducting dust being in
existence.
3.7 At places where rain & snow proof facilities are equipped
JD-5 Motor Integrated 3.8 At places without prominence rock, impact and vibration.
Protector 3.9 Installation Category: Ⅲ.
1. General 4. Technical data
JD-5 Motor Integrated Protector (hereinafter referred to as 4.1 Rated insulation voltage AC690V, rated frequency 50Hz,rated
protector) is applicable for overload and phase-failure operating current 0.5A ~ 400A.
protection of AC motor @ A.C.50Hz, less than AC690V Table 1
rated insulation voltage and 0.5A~400A rated operating Type

Setting current Voltage of control power Suitable motor
range (A) supply (Supply Voltage) (V) power (kW)
current for its continuous working or discontinuous
working. Protector and AC contactor are generally used JD-5/80 0.5~5 220V, 380V, 0.25~2.5
JD-5/80 2~20 220V, 380V, 1~10
cooperatively.
This product meets the requirements of IEC 60947- 4-1. JD-5/80
JD-5/400
JD-5/400
20~80
80~200
160~400
220V, 380V,
220V, 380V,
220V, 380V,
10~40
40~100
80~200
G
2. Type designation
JD-5(with
1~80 220V, 380V, 0.5~40
buzzer)
4.2 Control circuit: rated insulation voltage AC380V, rated

frequency 50Hz, contact parameters refer to Table 2.
Rated control power voltage
Table 2
Use type AC-15
Rated current code
Design sequence No. Rated operating current (A) 1.5 0.95
Motor Integrated Protector
5. Design features
5.1 Three-phase electronic type, tripping grade (trip class): 10A.
5.2 Equipped with function of phase-failure and overload

protection.
5.3 Equipped with continuously adjustable device for setting

current.
5.4 Three indicators indicate normal, overload and phase-failure

status respectively.
5.5 Main circuit adopts feed through wiring.
5.6 Installation mode: use bolts for installation.

6. Protection features 6.3 Tripping feature
6.1 Operation characteristics under three-phase balanced-load Figure 1
status (see Table 3) 120min

100min
Table 3
50min
operating Test Ambient
S.N. I/In 20min
time Condition temperature
10min
1 1.05 <2h non-tripping Cold Status
2min
2 1.20 <2h tripping +20℃
Hot Status 1min
3 1.50 <2 min tripping 50s
4 7.20 2s<Tp≤10s Cold Status 40s
30s
6.2 Operation characteristic under phase-failure status (see Table 4) 20s
Table 4 10s
Multiple of setting current 5s

operating Test Ambient 1s
S.N. Any two The Third time Condition temperature 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
phases phases
×Ie
1 1.0 0.9 <2h non-tripping Cold Status
+20℃
2 1.15 0 ≤5s Hot Status
6.4 Reset mode: de-energizing reset
7. Wiring diagram
7.1 Wiring diagram for control power supply @ AC220V
voltage
L3 L2 L1 N
FU1 H3 H2 H1
L3 L2 L1
QS Protector
FU2
W1 V1 U1
STP ST 96 95 A2 A1 Circles of the cable: once (more than 3A)
W2 V2 U2
KM
KM KM
W3 V3 U3 L3 L2 L1
QF1 KM: Contactor
A1, A2, 95, 96: Number of protector connection terminal
Circles of the cable: twice every phase
STP: Stop button
W4 V4 U4 (less than 3A)
ST: Start button
FU1, FU2: Fuse protector
M
3~
7.2 Wiring diagram for control power supply @ AC380V

voltage
L3 L2 L1 N
FU1 H3 H2 H1
L3 L2 L1
QS Protector
FU2
W1 V1 U1
STP ST 96 95 A2 A1 Circles of the cable: once (more than 3A)
W2 V2 U2
KM
KM KM
W3 V3 U3
L3 L2 L1
QF1 L1, L2, L3: three-phase power supply
KM: Contactor
A1, A2, 95, 96: Number of protector connection terminal Circles of the cable: twice every phase
W4 V4 U4 STP: Stop button (less than 3A)
M ST: Start button
FU1, FU2: Fuse protector
3 ~

JD-5/80
110max
φ12
126max
95 96 A1 A2
64max
JD-5
MOTOR INTEGRATEDPROTECTOR
2s-30s X-Y
Φ5.5
Start delay Current setting
Phase-failure RunningOverload
113±0.42
JD-5/400
25max
133max
35max
156max
66max
JD-5
MOTOR INTEGRATEDPROTECTOR
2s-30s
Start delay
X-Y Φ5.5
Current setting
Phase-failureRunningOverload
142.5±0.29
G
9.1 Designation, type and specification of protector, select controlling current and voltage (AC220V, AC380V, ), setting current range
(0.5A~5A, 2A~20A, 20A~80A, 80A~200A 160A~400A, etc) according to operating requirements.
9.2 Order Quantity.

3.1 The altitude shall not exceed 2000m.
3.2 The ambient air temperature is -5℃~+40℃ and the

average temperature within 24h shall not exceed +35℃.
3.3 Atmospheric condition: Relative humidity of
atmosphere shall not exceed 50% at the temperature of
+40℃,and higher relative humidity is allowed at lower
temperature. For example, the air humidity can reach
90% at the temperature of +20℃. Regarding the
condensation casually caused by humidity change,
special measures shall be taken.
3.4 Class of pollution: Class Ⅲ
3.5 Installation categor y: categor y Ⅲ
3.6 The angle between the installation surface and the

vertical surface shall not exceed ±5 degrees.
3.7 The place without obvious shake, impact and vibration

shall be selected as the installation site.
3.8 The installation site shall conform to the following

standards: explosive and dangerous medium, no gas
capable of corroding and damaging insulation in the
JD-8 Integrated Motor medium and less conductive dust in the medium
Protector 3.9 The place with rain-proof and snow-proof equipment

and a little water vapor shall be used as the installation
site.
1. General
JD-8 Integrated Motor Protector is mainly applicable
to fault protection of overload and phase failure of 4. Technical data
low-voltage three-phase AC asynchronous motor in
4.1 Main circuit: rated insulation voltage AC690V,
electric power system with AC frequency 50Hz and
rated frequency 50Hz
rated insulation voltage less than 690V. The protector
is usually used together with the contactor in AC motor
Range of setting Power suitable
loop circuit for use. It conforms to IEC 60947-4-1 Model
current (A) for motor (kW)
standards.
0.5~5 0.25~2.5
2~20 1~10
JD-8 20~80 10~40
2. Type designation
32~80 16~40
64~160 32~80
4.2 Auxiliar y circuit: rated insulation voltage AC380V,

rated frequency 50Hz
Design serial number Utility Category AC-15

Integrated Motor Protector Rated operating current (A) 0.95
1.5
5. Others
5.1 Structure characteristics
5.1.1 Three-phase electronic type
5.1.2 Function of phase failure and overload protection(not suitable for reversible motor)
5.1.3 Device capable of continuously adjusting setting current
5.1.4 The main circuit adopts pass-through-core type wiring method.
5.1.5 Installation method: installation via screws
5.2 The protector has the following operating characteristics for load balance of each phase; the tripping level is level 30.
Serial number Multiple of setting current Actuation time Starting condition Ambient air temperature
1 1.05 No actuation within 2h Cold state

2 1.2 Actuation within 2h Hot state (the test is done Room temperature
3 1.5 Actuation within 12min following sequence 1) (20±5)℃
4 7.2 9s＜tp≤30s Cold state
5.3 Wiring diagram

Wiring diagram of control circuit with voltage AC220V Wiring diagram of control circuit with voltage AC380V
L1 L2 L3 N
L1 L2 L3
ST ST
FU STP
95 96 FU STP
95 96
KM KM
KM KM
FU
KM FU
KM
JD-8
JD-8
M
M

JD-8(0.5A~5A,2A~20A,20A~80A)
G
95 96
66±0.43 Φ12
68max
2/T1 4/T1 6/T1

40±0.28
51max
JD-8 MOTOR INTEGRATED PROTECTOR
A B C Overload
Current setting
52
R2.2 91max
JD-8(32A~80A,64A~160A)
95 96
96±0.5
Φ20
76max
2/T1 4/T1 6/T1

46±0.32
57max
L1 L2 L3
FU
JD-8 MOTOR INTEGRATED PROTECTOR
KM KM
FU
8 A B C Overload
Current setting M
80
R3.5
125max
7.1 The protector with proper type number and specification shall be selected according to the use requirement.
7.2 Order quantity.
NJYB3 Relay
1. General
NJYB3 Relay is used to provide overvoltage,undervoltage,
phase failure,phase sequence,three-phase unbalance,PTC
temperature and load protection control in three-phase
three-wire up to 415V circuits and three-phase four-wire up
to 240V circuits with a frequency of AC50Hz.
This relay is a voltage protection relay.After detecting the
voltage signal,the relay processes the input signal,judges if
there is an overvoltage,undervoltage,phase failure,phase
sequence,three-phase unbalance,PTC temperature and load
error and controls the opration accurately and stably by
means of the built-in microprocessor.
2. Type designation
N JYB 3 -
P:PTC temperature protection,optional

(Refer to following table)
1~18 Function code
Design S.N
Relay
3. Technical data
Protection Rated
Protection Contact Contact Electrical Mechanical
Model operation operational
function capacity form life life
time voltage
Overvoltage
Undervoltage Three-phase
0.1s~10s three-wire system:
Three-phase AC380V~AC415V 50Hz Ue/Ie:AC-15
voltage unbalance 240V/0.75A,
NJYB3 1Z 105 106
415V/0.47A;
Phase failure, Three-phase Ith:3A
phase sequence ≤1s four-wire system:
PTC temperature AC220V~AC240V 50Hz
Three- Single-
Phase Phase PTC Load
Three- phase phase/ Over voltage Under voltage Unbalance
Model sequence failure Temperature
phase four- two- protection protection protection protection
protection protection protection
wire phase
NJYB3-1
NJYB3-2 (1.05~1.30)×Us
NJYB3-3 (0.70~0.95)×Us
NJYB3-4 (1.05~1.30)×Us (0.70~0.95)×Us
NJYB3-5 (1.05~1.30)×Us (0.70~0.95)×Us
NJYB3-6 (1.05~1.30)×Us (0.70~0.95)×Us Fixed 20%
NJYB3-7 Fixed 120%×Us Fixed 80%×Us 5%~15%
NJYB3-8 (1.05~1.30)×Us (0.70~0.95)×Us 5%~15%
NJYB3-9 (1.05~1.30)×Us
NJYB3-10 (0.70~0.95)×Us
NJYB3-11 (1.05~1.30)×Us (0.70~0.95)×Us
NJYB3-12 (1.05~1.30)×Us (0.70~0.95)×Us
NJYB3-13 (1.05~1.30)×Us (0.70~0.95)×Us Fixed 20%
NJYB3-14 Fixed 120%×Us Fixed 80%×Us 5%~15%
NJYB3-15 (1.05~1.30)×Us (0.70~0.95)×Us 5%~15%
NJYB3-16
NJYB3-17P
NJYB3-18 (1.05~1.30)×Us (0.70~0.95)×Us Fixed 20%
or can be selected.
Immunity
Item Severity level

Electrostatic discharge immunity 8kV (air discharge)
Radiated electromagnetic field immunity Test electric field strength: 10V/m
Fast transient immunity For power line, 2kV, duration: 1min
Surge (impact) immunity Open circuit test voltage: 1kV
G
4. Wiring diagram
NJYB3-1, NJYB3-2, NJYB3-3, NJYB3-4, NJYB3-5, NJYB3-12, NJYB3-13, NJYB3-14, NJYB3-15, NJYB3-16
NJYB3-6,NJYB3-7, NJYB3-8 Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 N
14 11 12
14 11 12
KM KM
KM KM L1
L1
L2
L2 L3
L3 N
NJYB3-1P、NJYB3-6P、NJYB3-7P、NJYB3-8P、NJYB3-17P NJYB3-13P、NJYB3-14P、NJYB3-15P、NJYB3-16P
Wiring diagram Wiring diagram
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 N
14 11 12 R1 R2
14 11 12 R1 R2
KM KM PTC
KM KM PTC L1
L1
L2
L2 M
M L3
L3
N
NJYB3-9、NJYB3-10、NJYB3-11 Wiring diagram NJYB3-18 Wiring diagram
L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3
three-phase
three-wire
14 11 13 14 11 12 La Lb Lc
L1 KM KM
L1 L
L2
L2 O
L3 A
L3 D
N
two-phase
L1 L2 L3 N
L1
L2
single-phase 45.5max
L1 L2 L3 N
L1
N
66.2max
35.8±0.3 35±0.2
91max
L1 L2 L3 N
NJYB3-15 Phs.
Phs. Fail
Seq
Out >U/<U Asm
1.15 1.20 4 6
1.10 1.25 2 8
1.05 1.30 0.1 10

xUs t(s)
0.80 0.85 10
0.75 0.90
0.70 0.95 5 15
xUs Asm(%)
14 11 12
2.3 Performance feature
Reacting time Ambient air

S.N. Fault type
Specified time Inverse time humidity
1 Overvoltage protection (0.1~9.9)s Tr = (Uon/Ur)2 ×Tn

2 Undervoltage protection (0.1~9.9)s Tr = (Ur/Uun)2 ×Tn Room
3 Phase-Failure protection ≤0.1s temperature
4 Phase-sequence protection ≤0.1s
2.4 Time -voltage feature of voltage protector
Time-voltage feature of voltage protector
t(s)
OFF
9.9
7.6
5.6
3.9
2.5
NJYB1 Phase-Failure and 0.1
Phase-Sequence Protection Relay 0 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9

t(s)
1 1.1 1.2 Un
OFF
1. General 9.9
8.4
This product is used in AC 50Hz three-phase four-wire 7.3
220V circuit to control the overvoltage,under-voltage,phase 6.3

5.6
failure,phase sequence.
4.9
4.4
2. Type designation 4.0
3.6
2.1 Model and meaning
N J YB 1
Design No.
G
Voltage protection 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 Un
Note: 0.8Un is the preset normal voltage protection range, when delaying, it is 9.9s.
Relay

3. Wiring diagram
2.2 Technical parameters
Wiring diagram for voltage protector
2.2.1 Fundamental parameter
a. Overvoltage protection: (1.0-1.3) Ue; undervoltage N A B C
A
protection: (0.7-1.0) Ue.
b. Fault protection time: 0.1~9.9s. FUI
c. Dielectric strength: there is no breakdown and flicker
QFI
appeared for alternating current (50Hz) lasting a period of KM STP
C Ta
time of 1 s. under 2000V. B Tb
A Tc
d. Insulation resistance: >100M (relative humidity at 20℃ is
STP
90%). N
e. Contact capacity: AC-15 220V 1A. KM

Tb
f. Contact resistance: 0.03Ω. Ta
g. Contact life: life should ≥100, 000times.
KM
h. Ambient temperature: -10℃~ +50 ℃.
Load
i. Ambient humidity: ≤8% (20℃±5℃).
j. Installation mode: 35mm din rail installation
B
2. Type designation
Rated power supply voltage
Remodel (derived model)

G: monochrome luminotron fault indication type;
S: two-color luminotron fault indication type;
D: multifunction protection, multimode indication type
Design sequence No.
Phase-failure and phase-sequence protective relay
XJ3 Phase-Failure and Phase-

Sequence Protective Relay
1. General
XJ3 series phase failure and phase sequence protection
relay is used to provide overvoltage, undervoltage and
phase failure protection in three-phase AC circuits and
phase sequence protection in irreversible transmission
devices and features reliable performance, wide application
and convenient use.
The protector starts to function when it is connected to the

power control circuit in accordance with the drawing.
When the fuse of any phase of the three-phase circuit is
open or when there is a phase failure in the power supply
circuit, the XJ3 operates immediately to control the contact
to cut off the power supply of the AC contactor coil of the
main circuit so that the main contact of the AC contactor
operates to provide the load with phase failure protection.
When the phases of a three-phase irreversible device with

predetermined phase sequence are connected incorrectly
due to maintenance or change of the power supply circuit,
the XJ3 series will identify the phase sequence, stop
supplying power to the power supply circuit and achieve
the goal of protecting the device.
3. Technical data
Type XJ3-G XJ3-S XJ3-D
Phase-failure Phase-sequence error & Overvoltage Undervoltage

Protection function Three phase voltage unbalance≥8%~13% Phase-failure Phase-sequence error
Overvoltage protection(AC) 380V~460V 1.5s~4s (adjustable)

Undervoltage protection(AC) 300V~380V 2s~9s(adjustable)
Operating voltage AC 380V 50Hz/60Hz, Allowable fluctuating range±10% AC 380V 50Hz
Contact number 1 normally open & 1 normally close 1 group changeover
Contact capacity Ue/Ie:AC-15 380V/0.95A; Ith:5A Ue/Ie:AC-15 380V/0.47A; Ith:3A
Phase-failure and
Reacting time≤2s
phase-sequence protection
Electrical life 1×105

Mechanical life 1×106
Ambient temperature -5℃~40℃
Installation mode TH35-7.5(thickness 1.0 mm)rail 35mm Track installation or soleplate mounting
Note: In the example diagram for application circuit, protective relay can provide protection only under the condition of phase-failure
occurring at terminal 1, 2, 3 and among three phase of power supply A, B, C.
4. Wiring diagram
XJ3-G, S wiring diagram XJ3-D wiring diagram
A B C L1 L2 L3 L1
FU1
FU 4 5
3 6
XJ QF1 KM
2 7 ST
1 8 L3 Ta
Tb
Start Stop L2 Tc
STP
KM L1
XJ KM Ta
KM
KM 5 6
Tc
KM
Load
Load L2

G
XJ3-G, S overall and mounting dimension
110max
2×Φ4.5
53.7±0.37
84max
≥90
35.5
8×Φ4
46max
9 15.5
XJ3-D overall and mounting dimension
Φ5
115max
60.2±0.5
70.5max
36.5max
35.4±0.2
45.5max
P-047 Relay Control Relay
2. Type designation
Feature code: Improved type
Design sequence No.
Time delay relay
NJS1-H Time Delay Relay

1. General
NJS1-H series time delay relay (hereinafter referred to as relay)
is used as a time control element in control circuits with
an AC voltage of 240V or below and a frequency of
50Hz/60Hz and control circuits with a DC voltage of 240V
or below to make and break the circuit according to the
schedule.
Control Relay Relay P-048
3. Technical data
Mode NJS1-H
Operating mode On-delay (OND, OND1), trigger delay (OND2), On-off repetitive delay (FLY), interval delay (INT, INT1), optional
Number of contacts Delay 1 change-over
Contact capacity Ue/Ie: AC-15 220V/0.75A, 380V/0.47A; DC-13 220V/0.27A; Ith:5A
Solid state output NPN solid state delay 1 ouptut
Solid state output capacity Max 30VDC Max 100mA
Operational voltage AC/DC(100~240)V 50Hz/60Hz DC24V
Delay accuracy Start timing from power on: ±0.01%±0.05s, start timing from signal ON: ±0.01%±0.03s
Timing mode Addition or subtraction timing mode, optional
The output contacts have automatic reset function.
Contact output time
The contact ouptut time is 10, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000, 5000 or Hold, optional. (unit: ms)
Mounting type Panel type
Delay range For single product, 99.99s/999.9s/9999s/99min59s/999.9min/9999min/99h99min/9999h, optional
4. Wiring diagram
Trigger INA Pause INB
12VDC 100mA
Reset 0VDC
COM
6 7 8 9 10
OUT
11 12
OUT
30VDC 100mA
1 2 3 4 5
(+) (-)
(～) SOURCE (～)
G
Profile and installation dimension Opening size
65min
59max 97max
+0.5
-0
R
45.5
48.5max
65min
RESET
INT
PAUSE
LOCK OUT RUN
+0.5
SET MD 45.5 -0
NJS1-H TIMEDELAYRELAY
6. Profile and installation dimension
Output mode Timing-sequence diagram
Power
INA triggerterminal
INB pauseterminal
t t t
On delay
OUT(output)
settime
0
Settime
0
POWER ON DELAY(counting resets when power OFF)
Power
INA triggerterminal
INB pauseterminal
t a
On delay OUT(output)
settime
0
Settime
0
POWER ON DELAY(counting continues when power OFF)
Power
INA triggerterminal
INB pauseterminal
OUT(output) t t t
Trigger delay settime
0
Settime
0
SIGNAL ON DELAY1(resets when power OFF)
Power
INA triggerterminal
INB pauseterminal
Toff TonTa Tb Ton Toff Ton Toff Ton Toff
OUT(output)
settime
Loop delay
Settime
0
Settime
Settime
0
FLICKER(resets when power OFF)
Power
INA triggerterminal
INB pauseterminal
Interval delay OUT(output)

settime
Settime
0
INTERVAL1(resets when power OFF)
Power
INA triggerterminal
INB pauseterminal
Interval delay OUT(output)

settime
0
Settime
SIGNAL OFF DELAY(resets when power OFF)
G
One-shot Output (OUT)
Hold Output (OUT) Hold Output (OUT)

Note
2. Type designation
Feature code: Enhanced type
Design S.N.
Time-delay relay
Enterprise feature code
NJS1-M Time Delay Relay

1. General
NJS1-M Series Time Relay is applicable for controlling circuit
@ A.C. 50Hz/60Hz, up to 240V rated supply voltage and
up to D.C. 240V rated supply voltage as delay element to
make or break circuit according to preset time.
3. Technical data
(power) on delay (OND, OND1), trigger-delay (OND2), reciprocate-delay (FLY),

Operating mode
interval-delay (INT, INT1) are available for option
Contact number Delay 1 changeover

Contact capacity Ue/Ie: AC-15 220V/0.75A, 380V/0.47A; DC-13 220V/0.27A; Ith:5A
Solid-state output NPN solid-state delay 1 output
Solid-state output capacity Max 30VDC max 100mA
Operating voltage AC36V, AC/DC100V~240V 50Hz/60Hz
Delay precision Power supply ON start timing: ≤±0.01%±50ms Signal ON start timing: ≤±0.01%±30ms
Timing mode Plus & minus timing mode are available for option
Contact output is equipped with function of automatic reset, contact output time 10,
Contact output time
50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, 2000, 5000, and Hlod are available for option (unit: ms)

Installation mode Panel type
Delay range
Type 99.99s, 999.9s, 9999s, 99min59s, 999.9min, 9999min, 99h59min, 9999h are optional for each product
4. Wiring diagram
NJS2-M Wiring diagram
Trigger (INA) Pause(INB)
Reset 12VDC 100mA

0VDC COM
6 7 8 9 10
OUT
11 12
OUT 30VDC 100mA
1 2 3 4 5
(+) (-)
SOURCE
G
(~ ) (~ )

Profile and installation dimension Opening size
97max
45.5+0.5
0
48.5max
REST
45.5+0.5
SET
0
1NB
45
LOCK OUT CR RUN
REST MD
NJS1-M TIME DELAY RELAY
59max
6. Profile and installation dimension
Power supply
INA
INB
Reset
t t t
(power) on delay Output (OUT)
settime
0
settime
POWER ON DELAY (Power supply OFF Timing Reset)
Power supply (SOURCE)
Trigger (INA)
pause (INB)
Reset
t t a t-a
(power) on delay Output (OUT)

settime
0
POWER ON DELAY (Power supply OFF Timekeeping)
Trigger (INA)
pause (INB)
Reset
t t t
Trigger-delay
Output (OUT)
settime
0
settime
0
SIGNAL ON DELAY1(Power supply OFF Reset)
Trigger (INA)
pause (INB)
Reset Ton Ta
Toff Tb Ton Toff Ton Toff Ton Toff
Output (OUT)
Circulation-delay
settime
settime
0
settime
settime
0
FLICKER(Power supply OFF Reset)
Trigger (INA)
pause (INB)
Reset
Interval-delay Output (OUT)
settime
0
settime
0
SIGNAL OFF DELAY(Power supply OFF Reset)
Trigger (INA)
pause (INB)
Reset
Output (OUT)
Interval-delay
settime
0
settime
INTERVAL1 (Power supply OFF Reset)
One-shot Output (OUT)
Hold Output (OUT) Hold Output (OUT)

Note
G
2. Type designation
Feature code:
No mark: Conversion of delay group I with external
reset and pause functions
2Z: Conversion of delay group II
11: Conversion of delay group II with external reset
and pause functions
K: Conversion of delay group I, and instantaneous group I
S: Conversion of delay group I, cyclical delay
Design sequence No.
Time delay relay
Company code
Note: This product is applicable for wide range operating

voltage, for instance, operating voltage within
AC/DC24V～48V means it can operate normally within
the voltage range of AC/DC 24V to 48V.
NJS1 Time Delay Relay

1. General
NJS1 Series Time-Delay Relay is applicable for controlling

circuit @ A.C. 50Hz/60Hz, up to 380V rated voltage or up
to D.C.240V rated voltage as delay element to make or
break circuit according to preset time.
3. Technical data
Type NJS1 NJS1-2Z NJS1-11 NJS1-K NJS1-S
Operating power power power power Circulation-

mode on delay on delay on delay on delay delay
Contact Delay 1 Delay 2 Delay 2 Delay 1 changeover Delay 1

number changeover changeover changeover Instantaneous 1 changeover changeover
Contact capacity Ue/Ie:AC-15 220V/0.75A,380V/0.47A; DC-13 220V/0.27A; Ith:5A

m h
Turn-on (Power) on Time-base code 0.01s 0.1s s 10s s 0.1m m m 0.1h h
delay type Delay range Setting range 0.01s~99.99s 0.1s~999.9s 1s~9999s 10s~99990s 1s~99min99s 0.1min~999.9min 1min~9999min 1min~99h99min 0.1h~999.9h 1h~9999h
Circulation-delay Time-base code 0.1s 1s 0.1min 1min 0.1h 1h 10s

type Delay range Setting range 0.1s~9.9s 1s~99s 0.1min~9.9min 1min~99min 0.1h~9.9h 1h~99h 10s~990s
Operating voltage AC/DC: 24V~48V,100V~240V, AC220V, AC380V
Reset pause function Have N/A Have N/A Have

6
Delay precision ≤0.5%±50ms
Power consumption ≤3VA
Installation mode Panel type, Device type
Matched pedestal Panel type CZS08S, CZS11S, CZS08G, CZS11G, Device type CZS08C, CZS11C
4. Wiring diagram
NJS1-2Z Wiring diagram NJS1 Wiring diagram NJS1-S Wiring diagram
4 5 Pause Pause
4 5 4 5
3 6 3 6 3 6
Reset Reset
2 7 2 7 2 7
1 8 1 8 1 8
(-) (+) (-) (+) (-) (+)
( ~) ( ~) ( ~) ( ~) ( ~) ( ~)
SOURCE SOURCE SOURCE
NJS1-11 Wiring diagram NJS1-K Wiring diagram
Pause
Reset
5
6
7
3
4 5
6
G
4 8
3 9 2 7
2 10 1 8
1 11 (-) (+)
(-) (+) ( ~) ( ~)
( ~) ( ~) SOURCE
SOURCE

Opening size
NJS1
46max
45.4±0.4
48.5max
OPEN
46max
123max
58max

1. General
NJS5 series time relay is mainly used as time control
device for control circuit with AC frequency 50Hz/60Hz,
rated control supply voltage up to 400V and DC rated
control supply voltage to 24V to make or break the
circuit at a predetermined time.
2. Type designation
N JS
Delay specifications
A: Power on delay
B: Inter val delay
Y: Star - Delta Starters delay
M1: power-on delay (multi range type)
Design number
Time relay
Enterprise features of the code
3. Technical data
Product Model NJS5-A NJS5-B NJS5-Y NJS5-M1

Work mode Power on delay Interval delay Star - Delta Starters delay Power on delay
AC36V,AC110V,AC220V,AC230V,
Rated control supply voltage AC220V,AC380V AC380V
AC380V,AC400V,DC24V
Number of Contacts Delay 1 CO Delay 2 NO Delay 1 CO
Star - delta conversion time - - 20ms ~ 300ms (adjustable) -

Contact capacity Ue/Ie:AC-15 220V/0.75A, 380V/0.47A; DC-13 220V/0.27A; Ith:5A
Electrical life 3×104 1×105
6
1s, 10s, 1min, 10min, 1h, 10h, 1d, 10d

Delay specifications 5s,10s,30s,60s,2min,3min,5min,10min,20min
(multi range type, adjustable)

Installation Din rail
4. Wiring diagram
NJS5-A,NJS5-M1wiring diagram NJS5-B wiring diagram NJS5-Y wiring diagram
A1 16 18 A1 16 18 A1 18 28
A2 15 A2 15 A2 17

NJS5-A,NJS5-B outside dimensions
18.5max 65max
ON
36.4±0.5
100.6±1
107max
延时 10 s
5 7
3
9
1 10
时间继电器
NJS5-A
NJS5-Y outside dimensions
18.5max 65max
5 7
ON 3
9
100.6±1
107max
1 10
36.4±0.5
100 200
20 300ms
延时 10 s
时间继电器
NJS5-Y
NJS5-M1 outside dimensions
18.5max 65max G
A1 A2
ON 5 7
3
9
100.6±1
107max
1 10
36.4±0.5
1h 10h
10min 1d
1min 10d
10s ON
1s OFF
NJS5-M1
16
15 18
NJS5-M2 Time Relay

1. General
NJS5-M2 time relay mainly applies to control circuits
with 50Hz/60Hz AC rated control supply voltage to 400V
and DC rated control supply voltage to 24V as time
control element, to connect or disconnect circuit by
scheduled time.
2. Type designation
N JS 5 - M2/
M2: Multi-delay type (Multi-gear type)
Design number
Time replay
3. Technical data
Product model NJS5-M2
On-delay, off-delay, inter val delay, off-delay/inter val delay, equal period cyclical delay
Working mode
(ON start),equal period cyclical delay (OFF start), Trigger/inter val delay, 7 adjustable gears
Rated control supply voltage AC110V,AC220V,AC230V,AC240V,AC380V,AC400V,DC24V

Quantity of contacts Delay 1 conversion
Contact capacity 1s, 10s, 100s, 10min, 100min, 10h, 100h (Multiple adjustable gears)
Electrical life Ue/Ie:AC-15 220V/0.75A,380V/0.47A;DC-13 220V/0.27A;Ith:5A

Mechanical life 1×10 5
Delay specification 1×10 6
Installation method Din rail type or device type
4. Wiring diagram
NJS5-M2 wiring diagram
~
+
A1 Y1 16 18
A2 15
-
~

NJS5-M2 dimensions
18.5max
65max
A1 A2
Function
ON W
C Di
107.5max
H D
A B
90.5mmax
102±1
5 7
36.4±0.5
3
Time 9
1 10
10min
100s 100min
Range
10s 10h
1s 100h
NJS5-M2
Y1 16
15 18
G

1. General
NJS3 series time relay mainly used as time control

component for control circuit with AC 50Hz/60Hz,
rated control power supply voltage to 220V, make or
break the circuit at a preset time.
2. Type designation
None: inter val delay

A: off-delay
B: Power on delay
Design Code
Time delay relay
Enterprise features code
3. Technical data
Product Model NJS3 NJS3-A NJS3-B

Work mode Inter val delay Breaking delay Power on delay
Number of Contacts Delay 1 normally open
Rated control supply voltage AC220V,AC110V

Contact capacity Ue/le:AC-15 220V/3A,380V/1.9A; DC-13 24V/1.1A; lth:16A
Electrical life 1×10 5
Ambient temperature -5℃～+ 40℃
5s,10s,30s,60s,120s,180s,360s,480s,
Delay range 0.5min~20min
5min,10min,30min,60min,120min,180min,360min,480min
Power consumption ≤3VA

Installation Guide rail
Reset time ≤1s
4. Wiring diagram
Figure 2 NJS3 wiring
L 3 L 3
N 4 N 4
N L
NJS3 wiring (line 3) NJS3 wiring (4-wire)

Figure 3 NJS3-A wiring Figure 4 NJS3-B wiring
L
L
N
N
N N 4
L
L 3
4 3
Mounting size: TH35-7.5 steel mounting rail
18.5max 65max
100.6±1
36.4±0.5
107max
10
5 15
0.5
0 20
NJS3
L 3
N 4
G
NTE8 Time Delay Relay

1. General
NTE8 series time relay is mainly used as the time control element
to connect or disconnect the circuits according to the
predetermined time in control circuits with AC 50Hz/60Hz, rated
control power voltage up to 415V and DC rated control power
voltage up to 24V.
2. Type designation
NTE8-□
Working mode:
A:Off-delay
B:On-delay
C:Trigger interval-delay
J:Interval-delay
Y:Star-delta starting delay
M1:On-delay(multi-gear)
M2:Multi delay modes (multi-gear)
Time delay relay
Company code
3. Technical data
Type NTE8-A NTE8-B NTE8-J NTE8-C NTE8-Y NTE8-M1 NTE8-M2
AC36V、AC110V、
AC110V、AC220V、
AC220V、AC230V、 AC220V、AC230V、
Operational AC24V、AC110V、AC220V、AC230V、AC240V、 AC110V、AC220V、 AC230V、AC240V、
AC240V、AC380V、 AC240V、AC380V、
voltage Us AC380V、AC400V、AC415V，DC24V AC230V,AC240V AC380V、AC400V、
AC400V、AC415V AC400V、AC415V,
AC415V,DC24V
DC24
Trigger Star-delta On-delay Multi delay modes

Working mode Off-delay On-delay Inter val-delay
inter val-delay starting delay (multi-gear) (multi-gear)
0.1s～5s
1s～10s
3s～30s 0.5s～5s
6s～60s 1s～10s
0.1s～1s
12s～120s 3s～30s 0.1s～1s
1s～10s
18s～180s 6s～60s 1s～10s
0.1min～1min
36s～360s 0.2min～2min 10s～100s
1min～10min
Delay 48s～480s 0.3min～3min 1min～10min
0.5min～20min 0.1h～1h
range 0.5min～5min 0.5min～5min 10min～100min
1h～10h
1min～10min 1min～10min 1h～10h
0.1d～1d
3min～30min 2min～20min 10h～100h
1d～10d
6min～60min （Star delta (multi-gear)
(multi-gear)
12min～120min conversion
18min～180min 20ms～300ms）
36min～360min
48min～480min
Number of contacts 1 NO 1 changeover 1 NO 2 NO 1 changeover
Ue/Ie：
Ue/Ie： AC-15:
Ue/Ie：
AC-15:AC240V/0.75A, AC240V/3A,
AC-15:AC240V/0.75A, AC415V/0.47A;
Contact capacity AC415V/0.47A; AC415V/1.9A;
DC-13: DC220V/0.27A;
DC-13: DC220V/0.27A; DC-13:
Ith：5A
Ith：5A DC24V/1.1A;
Ith：10A
Installation method Guide rail type

Setting error ≤10%
Repetitive error ≤1%
Reset time ≤1s
Ambient temperature -5℃～+40℃
4.Wiring diag
NTE8-A NTE8-B/M1
L
A1 16 18
N
N L
A B A2 15
NTE8-C(3 wires) NTE8-C(4 wires)
L 3 L 3
N 4 N 4
N
N
L
L
NTE8-J NTE8-Y
A1 16 18 A1 18 28
A2 15 A2 17
NTE8-M2
G
~
A1 Y1 16 18
A2 15
-
~
5. Overall and mounting dimentions (mm)
66.5max
18.5max
35.2±0.2
93.5max
91±0.5
2. Type designation
JSS 48 A -
Feature code
Nil: means 8-pin power delay one group
changeover, equipped with function
of reset, pause (Multi-span delay)
2Z: means 8-pin power delay two group
changeover (Multi-span delay)
11: means 11-pin power delay two group
changeover, equipped with function of
reset, pause (Multi-span delay)
S: means 8-pin circulation-delay one group
changeover, equipped with function of
reset, pause (Multi-span delay)
G2: means 2 digit dial-up setting, 8-pin power
delay two group changeover (Single-span delay)
P2: means 2 digit dial-up setting, indicator type
JSS48A Time Delay Relay 8-pin power delay two group changeover
(Single-span delay)
P3: means 3 digit dial-up setting, indicator type
1. General 8-pin power delay two group changeover
JSS48A series time delay relay is mainly used as time control (Single-span delay)
component in the control circuit with AC frequency of P4: means 4 digit dial-up setting, indicator type
50Hz/60Hz, rated control supply voltage up to 380V and DC 8-pin power delay two group changeover
rated control supply voltage up to 240V for connecting and (Single-span delay)
disconnecting the circuit at preset time. Derived code
Standards:IEC 60947-5-1. Design sequence No.
Time delay relay
Note: This product is applicable for wide range of operating

voltage, for instance, operating voltage within
AC/DC24V~48V means it can operate normally within
the voltage range of AC/DC 24V to 48V.
3. Technical data
3.1 Main specifications please refer to the table
Model JSS48A JSS48A-2Z JSS48A-11 JSS48A-G JSS48A-P JSS48A-S

Delay range 0.01s~99.99s, 1s~99min99s, 1min~99h99min 0.01s~9.99s, 0.01s~99.99s, 0.1s~9.9s, 1s~99s,
Multi-span delay, time base adjustable 0.1s~99.9s, 0.1s~999.9s, 1s~99s, 1s~999s, 1min~99min,
1s~9999s, 0.1min~9.9min, 0.1min~99.9min, 1h~99h,
0.1min~999.9min, 1min~99min, Multi-span delay,
1min~999min, 1min~9999min, 0.1h~999.9h time base
Single-span delay, time base non-adjustable adjustable
Indication form Digitron Indicator Digitron

Number of contacts Delay 1 change- Delay 2 change-over sets Delay 1 change-
over set over set
Shuttling (cycling)
Operating method Power-on delay
delay
Rated control supply AC/DC24V~48V、AC/DC100V~240V、AC220V、AC380V，50Hz/60Hz

voltage Us, frequency
Allowable fluctuation
range of rated control 85%Us~110%Us
power supply voltage
Contact capacity Ue/Ie：AC-15 240V/0.75A，415V/0.47A；DC-13 220V/0.27，Ith：5A
Electrical life/mechanical
10/100
life (10,000 times)
Setting error When delay setting value is between 0.01s~5s, setting absolute error ≤0.05s;
when delay setting value is bigger than 5s, setting absolute error ≤1%
Reset time ≤1s
Mounting method Panel
4. Wiring diagram
JSS48A Wiring diagram JSS48A-2Z, JSS48A-G, JSS48A-P Wiring diagram
4 5 4 5
3 6 3 6
Pause
Reset
2 7 2 7
G
1 8 1 8
（- ）（+）（- ）（+）
（~）（~）（~）（~）
Source Source
JSS48A-11 Wiring diagram JSS48A-S Wiring diagram
Pause
4 5
Reset 6
5 7
6
Pause
3
Reset
4 8
3 9
2 7
2 10
1 11 1 8
（- ）（+）
（- ）（+）（~）（~）
（~）（~） Source
Source

overall and mounting dimension
59max
49max
JSS48A
8 8 S 8 8
124max
Opening size
45.5±0.3
45.5±0.3
2. Type designation
Adopt A, B, C, D, E, F, G to represent delay rang

code (applicable for multi-range type)
A: basic type (power on delay, multi-range type)

C: instantaneously operation type (power on
delay, multi-range type)
F: power off delay type
Y: delta start-delay type (power on delay)
K: control off-delay
R: repeat circulation-delay type (power on delay)
Design sequence No.
Integrative type
Time Delay Relay
JSZ3 Time Delay Relay

1. General
JSZ3 Time Delay Relay is applicable for automatic control
system, such as machine automatic control, and complete
equipment automatic control, etc.
G
3. Technical data
Type JSZ3A JSZ3C JSZ3F JSZ3K JSZ3Y JSZ3R
JSZ3C power on delay

power Signal breaking- Start Cycling-delay
Operating mode with instantaneously power off delay
on delay delay delta-delay
operation contact
A: (0.05-0.5)s/5s/30s/3min
B: (0.1-1)s/10s/60s/6min (0.1-1)s (0.1-1)s (0.1-1)s (0.5-6)s/60s
C: (0.5-5)s/50s/5min/30min (0.5-5)s (0.5-5)s (0.5-5)s (1-10)s/10min
(1-10)s (1-10)s
Delay range D:(1-10)s/100s/10min/60min (1-10)s (2.5-30)s/30min
(2.5-30)s (2.5-30)s
E: (5-60)s/10min/60min/6h (5-60)s (5-60)s (2.5-30)s (5-60)s/60min
F:(0.25-2)min/2min/2h/12h (15-180)s (15-180)s (5-60)s
G:(0.5-4)min/40min/4h/24h
Set mode Potentiometer
AC50Hz/60Hz, 36V, 110V, 127V, AC50Hz/60Hz, 36V, AC50Hz/60Hz AC110V AC36V,AC110V AC36V,AC110V
Operating
AC220V AC380V 110V, 127V AC220V AC380V AC220V AC230V 50Hz/60Hz AC220V 50Hz/60Hz AC220V
voltage
DC24V DC24V AC380V AC400V DC24V AC380V DC24V AC380V DC24V
Delay precision ≤10% ≤10% ≤10% ≤10% ≤10%
Contact Delay 2 switching, delay 1 changeover, Delay 1 switching or Delay 1 Delay Delta 1 Delay 1
number instantaneous switching delay 2 switching switching switching switching
Contact capacity Ue/Ie: AC-15 220V/0.75A, 380V/0.47A; DC-13 220V/0.27A;Ith:5A

Electrical Endurance 1×105
Mechanical Endurance 1×106
Installation mode Equipment type, Panel type, DIN-rail type
Matched Panel type: FM8858, CZS08S,

pedestal Equipment type,CZS08X-E
4. Wiring diagram
JSZ3A JSZ3C JSZ3F
External reset signal
4 5 4 5 4 5
3 6 3 6 3 6
( ) 2 7 (+) ( ) 2 7 (+) ( ) 2 7 (+)

(~) (~) (~) (~) (~) (~)
1 8 1 8 1 8
Source Source Source
JSZ3K JSZ3Y JSZ3R
External Control Signal
4 5 4 5
4 5
3 6 3 6 Y
3 6
( ) (+) 7
(~)
2 7
(~) ( ) 2
(~) 2 7 (+)
1 8 ( )
1 8 (+) (~) (~)
(~) 1 8
AC220V DC24V AC220V DC24V
AC220V DC24V
Source Source Source

JSZ3A-,C-, F, K, Y overall and mounting dimension
UP
54.5max
Φ35
51max
ON
58.5max 10max
41max
84max
JSZ3R overall and mounting dimension

55.5max
51max
58.5 12.5max
41max
86.5max
Opening size
32
4×Φ4.5
54.8
50
44
34
G
3. Technical data
Type JSZ6-2 JSZ6-4
Operating mode power on delay power on delay
Contact number Delay 2 changeover Delay 4 changeover

Ue/Ie: AC-15 240V/0.75A, 415V/0.47A;
Contact capacity
DC-13 220V/0.27A; Ith:5A
(0.1-1)s, (0.5-5)s, (1-10)s, (2.5-30)s, (5-60)s,

Delay range
(15-180)s, (1-10)min, (2.5-30)min, (5-60)min,
Rated control 50Hz/60Hz AC36V, AC110V,

supply voltage AC127V, AC220V;
range of rated control power supply voltage

85%Us~110%Us”
Set mode Potentiometer
Repeat precision ≤10%
Interchangeability Can interchange with H3Y series for use
CZY08A-02、CZY08A-E、CZY08B-01、
Matched pedestal：
CZY14A、CZY14B、CZY14B-E
4. Wiring diagram
JSZ6-2
JSZ6 Time Delay Relay
4 8 12 14 (+)
(~)
1. General
JSZ6 Time Delay Relay is applicable for automatic control

system, such as machine tool automatic control, complete
equipment automatic control. Etc. (-)
1 5 9 13 (~)
2. Type designation JSZ6-4
4 8 12 14 (+)
2: Delay 2 changeover; 4: Delay 4 changeover (~)
3 7 11
Design sequence No.
Integrated type 2 6 10
(-)
Time delay Relay 13 (~)
1 5 9

JSZ6 overall and mounting dimension
29max
22.5max 66max
Opening size
NKG3 Time Switch

1. General
NKG3-M time switch is mainly used in automatic control circuits

with frequency of AC 50Hz/60Hz, rated control power supply
voltage up to 240V and rated operating current up to 3A, for
timed connection and disconnection of various equipment such
as road lamps and advertising light boxes.
Standards:IEC 60947-5-1.
2. Type designation
Other feature codes

No: Basic type
M: Enhanced type
Design sequence No.
Time switch
3. Technical data
Working voltage 85%~110% rated voltage AC50Hz AC220V
Rated control supply voltage Us, frequency AC220V, AC230V, AC240V, 50Hz/60Hz
Allowable fluctuation range of rated control

85%Us~110%Us
G
Operating method Manual on, manual off, automatic on/off
Number of programmable groups 16 groups
Time control range 1s~168h
Timing error ±2s/d
Contact number 1 group change-over
Contact capacity Ue/Ie：AC-15 240V/3A，415V/1.9A；Ith：16A
Electrical life / mechanical life (10,000 times) 10/100
Ambient temp -5℃~+40℃
Item Severity level

Electrostatic discharge immunity ±8×(1±10%)kV (air discharge)
Radiated electromagnetic field immunity Test electric field strength: 10×(1±10%)V/m
Fast transient immunity For power line:2×(1±10%)kVduration:1min
Surge (impact) immunity For power line:2×(1±10%)kV
RF conduction immunity Open circuit test voltage: 10V,frequencyscope:150kHz~80MHz
Voltage sage immunity Sag 30% in half a cycle,sag 60% in 5 cycles and 50 cycles,sag 100% in 250 cycles
4. The drawing
4.1 Overall and mounting dimension Power AC220V
reset
3 4
3 4
R
Load AC220V
96max
82max
R
ON
MD
NKG3
R
ON
MD
KM
NKG3
36max 68.6max
4.2.3 Three-phase operating mode

If the electrical apparatus under control is three-phase
supplied, an external AC contactor is required.
a. If the coil voltage of the control contactor is AC220V
50Hz, the connection mode shown in Figure 4 should be
used.
35.4±0.28
88.8max
Figure 4 Connection diagram of three-phase control (contactor

coil: 220V)
Load AC380V
L1
L2
L3
N KM
reset
4.2 Connection mode 3 4
4.2.1 Direct control mode

If the electrical apparatus under control is single-phase R
supplied and has an operational current not greater than

the rated value of the switch, direct control mode can be
used, as shown in Figure 1. For lamp loads with a large
R
ON
MD
NKG3
starting impulse current, AC contactor expansion control

mode should be used.
Figure 1 Connection diagram of single-phase direct control
b. If the coil voltage of the control contactor is AC380V 50Hz, the

connection mode shown in Figure 5 should be used.
Power AC220V
reset Figure 5 Connection diagram of three-phase control (contactor
3 4
coil: 380V)
R
Load AC380V
L1
L2
ON
R L3
NKG3
MD
N KM
reset
3 4
Load AC220V R
R
ON
MD
NKG3
4.2.2 Single expansion mode

If the electrical apparatus under control is single-phase
supplied and has an operational current greater than the
rated value of the switch, AC contactor expansion control
mode should be used, as shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2 Connection diagram of single-phase expansion
control (contactor coil: 220V)
2. Type designation
Other feature codes

No: Basic type
M: Enhanced type
Design sequence No.
Time switch
3. Technical data
Rated control supply voltage AC(50Hz) 220V

Conventional heating current 5A
Usage category of auxiliary circuit AC-15
Rated operational current (Ie) AC-15 220V/0.75A 380V/0.47A
Timing error ≤2 seconds/day
Time control range 1s~168h
Mechanical life ≥30 thousand times
Electrical life ≥10 thousand times
NKG3-M Time Switch Mounting type Installation type, rail type

Immunity See Table 2
1. General
NKG3-M time switch (hereinafter referred to as

time switch) is used in automatic control circuits with a
frequency of AC 50Hz(or 60Hz), a rated control supply
voltage of up to 220V and a rated operational current of
0.75A to provide timed on-off control for street lamps,
advertising lamps and similar equipment.
G
4. The Drawing 4.2.2 Single expansion mode

4.1 overall and mounting dimension
supplied and has an operational current greater than the
rated value of the switch, AC contactor expansion control
3 4
mode should be used, as shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2 Connection diagram of single-phase expansion control
R
(contactor coil: 220V)
96max
82max
R Power AC220V
ON reset
MD
NKG3-M
3 4
36max 68.6max
Load AC220V
R
ON
MD
NKG3-M
KM
35.4±0.28
88.8max
4.2.3 Three-phase operating mode

If the electrical apparatus under control is three-phase
supplied, an external AC contactor is required.
a. If the coil voltage of the control contactor is AC220V
50Hz, the connection mode shown in Figure 4 should be
used.
Figure 4 Connection diagram of three-phase control (contactor
4.2 Connection mode coil: 220V)
4.2.1 Direct control mode
Load AC380V
L1
supplied and has an operational current not greater than L2
the rated value of the switch, direct control mode can be L3
N KM
used, as shown in Figure 1. For lamp loads with a large reset
3 4
starting impulse current, AC contactor expansion control

mode should be used. R
Figure 1 Connection diagram of single-phase direct control
R
ON
MD
NKG3-M
Power AC220V
reset
3 4
b. If the coil voltage of the control contactor is AC380V 50Hz, the

connection mode shown in Figure 5 should be used.
R Figure 5 Connection diagram of three-phase control (contactor
ON
MD
coil: 380V)
NKG3-M
Load AC380V
Load AC220V L1
L2
L3
N KM
reset
3 4
R
ON
MD
NKG3-M
3. Wiring diagram
3.1 Wiring for direct control mode: direct control mode can be
used for electrical apparatus which is single-phase power
supply and its power consumption doesn't exceed rated
value of this switch. See Figure 1 for wiring method;
3.2 Wiring for single-phase dilatancy mode: it is required a AC

contactor with larger capacity than electrical apparatus
power consumption for dilatancy when the controlled
electrical apparatus is single-phase power supply, whereas its
power consumption exceeds rated value of this switch. See
Figure 2 for wiring method;
3.3 Wiring for three-phase operation mode: if the controlled

electrical apparatus is three-phase power supply, it is
required to externally connect three-phase AC contactor.
a. See Figure 3 for wiring, control contactor @ AC220V coil
voltage, 50Hz;
b. See Figure 4 for wiring, control contactor @ AC380V coil
voltage, 50Hz
Figure 1
NKG1 Time Switch Power

supply
Load
SOURCE LOAD
1. General
L N N L
NKG1 time switch is mainly used in automatic control circuit with

AC frequency of 50 Hz/60Hz, rated control supply voltage up to
220V and rated operational current of 3A for the purpose of
timed making and breaking of lampposts and advertising
NKG1
lampboxes.
Figure 2
2. Technical data
Power
supply
KM
Load G
SOURCE LOAD
Operating mode Time automatic control L N N L
Rated control supply

AC220V, 50Hz/60Hz
power supply voltage NKG1
Manually opened, manually closed,

Operating method
automatic switch
Number of programmable
16 groups
groups
Batter y AA size batter y（replaceable)）
Time control range 1min~168h
Timing error ±2s/d
Contact number 1 NO contact
Contact capacity Ue/Ie：AC-15 240V/3A；Ith：10A
Electrical life / mechanical
10/100
life (10,000 times)
Installation method Equipped, rail mounting, wall mounting
Figure 3
A
B Load
C
N KM
SOURCE LOAD
L N N L
NKG1
Figure 4
A
B Load
C
N KM
SOURCE LOAD
L N N L
NKG1
72.43max
45.32max
3×Φ3.5±0.10
117.57max
107±0.29
35.5±0.28
62.7±0.23
3. Wiring diagram
3.1 KG10D-1H is 1 NO and see Figure 4 for wiring method;
3.2 KG10D-1Z is 1 NO/ 1 NC and see Figure 3 for wiring method;
3.3 Wiring for single-phase direct control mode: direct control

mode can be used for electrical apparatus which is single-
phase power supply and its power consumption doesn't
exceed rated value of this switch. See Figure 1 for wiring
method;

required to externally connect three-phase AC contactor. See
Figure 2 for wiring method for control contactor @ AC220V
coil voltage, 50Hz.
Figure 1 single-phase load
KG10D-1H
KG10D Time Switch

Power AC220V
1. General
Load AC220V
KG10D time switch is mainly used for the timed connection and
disconnection control of street lamps, advertising lamps and
other equipment in the automatic control circuit with AC Figure 2 three-phase load
frequency of 50Hz/60Hz, rated operating voltage of 220V and
rated operating current of 3A. KG10D-1H
2. Technical data N KM G
Load AC380V
A
B
Operating mode Time automatic control
C
Rated control supply AC220V, 50Hz/60Hz
voltage Us, frequency AC contactor
range of rated control (85%~110%)Us
Operating method Manually opened, manually closed,

automatic switch
16 groups
groups
Batter y Built in lithium batter y
Timing error ±2s/d
1 group of change-over contact or
Contact number
1 NO contact

10/100
life (10,000 times)

Figure 3 KG10D-1Z
1 2 3 4 5
Power
Figure 4 KG10D-1H
1 2 3 4 5
Power

102.3max
35.5±0.3
1 2 3 4 5
51.5max 73.5max
2. Technical data

AC220V, 50Hz/60Hz
Operating method Manually opened, manually closed,

automatic switch
16 groups
groups
Batter y built-in rechargeable batter y
Timing error ±2s/d
Contact number 1 normally-open contact
10/100
life (10,000 times)
Installation method Panel type
3. Wiring diagram
KG10M Time Switch Wiring diagram
1. General
KG10M time switch is mainly used for the timed connection and 4 5
disconnection control of street lamps, advertising lamps and 3 6
other equipment in the automatic control circuit with AC

2 7
frequency of 50Hz/60Hz, rated operating voltage of 220V and
1 8
rated operating current of 3A.
POWER
4. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm) G
WED
51.5max
OFF
59.5max 122.5max
Opening size
45.5
45.5
2. Technical data

AC220V, 50Hz/60Hz
Manually opened, manually closed,

Operating method automatic switch
groups 16 groups
Batter y AAA size batter y（replaceable)）

Timing error ±2s/d
Contact number 1 NO contact
Other function Delayed sleep function
life (10,000 times) 10/100
Equipped（KG316T）
Installation method Equipped, rail mounting,
wall mounting（KG316T-D）
KG316T series
1. General 3. Function features
3.1 "AAA” size battery, replaceable;
KG316T series time switch is mainly used in automatic control
circuits with AC 50Hz/60Hz, rated control supply voltage up to 3.2 Max set times per day (8 opens & 8 closes, 16 opens & 16
220V and rated operating current up to 3A, for the purpose of closes) and select according to requirements;
timed connect and disconnect control for lamppost, advertising
3.3 On-off time may cycle according to day or week;
light boxes, etc.
3.4 Equipped with keyboard locking function for error operation
Standards:IEC 60947-5-1. protection;
3.5 Adopt single key operation in all, easy to install and adjust;
3.6 Timing error ≤2s/day.
4. Wiring diagram
4.1 Wiring for direct control mode: direct control mode can be
used for electrical apparatus which is single-phase power
supply and its power consumption doesn't exceed rated
value of this switch. See Figure 1 for wiring method;
4.2 Wiring for single-phase dilatancy mode: it is required a AC

contactor with larger capacity than electrical apparatus
power consumption for dilatancy when the controlled
electrical apparatus is single-phase power supply, whereas its
power consumption exceeds rated value of this switch. See
Figure 2 for wiring method;

required to externally connect three-phase AC contactor;
a. See Figure 3 for wiring, control contactor @ AC220V coil
voltage, 50Hz;
b. See Figure 4 for wiring, control contactor @ AC380V coil
voltage, 50Hz.
Figure 1 5. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)
Power
Load
supply
Φ7±0.14 Φ4.2±0.12
T In T Out
R
107.9±0.29
121.32max
开自动关
KG316T时控开关
取消 /恢复校时校分校星期
自动 /手动定时时钟
电源动作
KG316T 2×R2.1±0.10
63.4±0.37 50.77max
Figure 2
74.73max
A
B Load
C
N KM
T In T Out
KG316T
Figure 3
Power
Load
supply
KM
T In T Out
KG316T
G
Figure 4
A
B Load
C
N KM
T In T Out
KG316T
2. Type designation
Feature Code：
H：improved Type
Design sequence No.
Counting
Note: Some models of this product apply to a wide range of operational voltage.
For example, an operational voltage of AC/DC100V～240V means that it
can operate normally within the voltage range of AC or DC 100V to 240V.
3. Technical data
Operational 85%-110% of rated voltage

voltage AC 50Hz/60Hz AC/DC100V-240V, DC24V

Output mode 1 group of change-over contacts
Ue/Ie: AC-15 220V/0.75A, 380V/0.47A;

NJJ7-H Counting Relay Contact capacity DC-13 220V/0.27A; Ith:5A
6-digit counting relay (the upper 6-digit

1. General Counting digits LCD is the count value, the lower 6-digit
LCD is the preset value)
NJJ7-H counting relay is used to provide counting and 1 time/second, 30 times/second,

Counting rate
counting control in control circuits with an AC frequency 1000 times/second (can be set)
of 50Hz/60Hz and a rated control voltage of up to 240V Addition, subtraction, reversible A,
Counting mode
and control circuits with a DC rated control supply voltage reversible B, reversible C
of up to 240V. Contact input, sensor input

Input signal (NPN type/PNP type can be set)
Value setting Can be set within the range 0.001~99.999

Output mode N, F, C, R, K, P, Q, A
The output time can be set

Output time within 0.01s~9.99s
(under output mode C, R, K, P ,Q or A)

Power consumption 3VA
Mounting type Panel type
Overall dimensions W58×H48×L97mm
Opening size W45.5×H45.5mm
Power-off memory More than 10 years (can be set)
4. Wiring diagram
INA INB Reset Pause 0VDC
6 7 8 9 10
12VDC
30mA 11 12
1 2 3 4 5
(+) Power (-) Output

(~) (~)
45.5
58max 97max
R
48max
45.5
复位设置
NJJ7-H 计数继电器
6. Sequence diagram of counting mode
Counting mode Timing-sequence diagram Remark
INA
INB
Count at INA rising edge,
5 stop counting at INB input.
4
3
Count value
2
1
0
V Addition counting mode
INA
INB
Count at INB input
5 falling edge at INA input.
4
Count value 3
2
1
0
INA
INB
n
n-1
INA上升沿计数，
INB输入停止计数。
stop counting at INB input.
G
n-2
n-3
Count value n-4
n-5
*n Preset value
D Subtraction counting mode
INA
INB
n
Count
INA输入时， at INB input
n-1
n-2 falling edge at INA input.
INB输入下降沿计数。
n-3
n-4
Count value n-5
*n Preset value
INA
INB
Reversible counting mode A:
Addition counting at INA input,
UD-A Reversible counting mode A subtraction counting when
INB input is active.
3 3
Count value 2 2 2
1 1
0
INA
INB Reversible counting mode B:

UD-B Reversible counting mode B Addition counting at INA input,
subtraction counting at INB input.
Count value 3 3
2 2 2
1 1 1
0
INA
INB Reversible counting mode C:

Automatic recognition of positive
UD-C Reversible counting mode C
and reverse rotations, addition
and subtraction counting.
Count value 3 3
2 2 2
1 1
0
7. Sequence diagram of output mode
Output
Plus counting mode Minus counting mode Inverse counting mode A, B, C
mode
Reset Reset Reset
Preset value Preset value Preset value
(N) Count value Count value Count value

0 0 0
Output Output Output
Reset Reset Reset
Count value Count value Count value

(F)
0 0 0
Reset Reset Reset

(C)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset

(R)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
Output
mode
Reset Reset Reset

(K)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset

(P)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset

(Q)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset

(A)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
G
Note: It is the output time, which can be set by the user.
3. Technical data
Operating voltage 85%-110% of rated voltage AC50Hz/60Hz AC/DC100V-240V, DC24V

Counting range 0~999999
Counting speed 10 times/s or 1000 times/s
Counting mode Addition counting mode
Input signal Contact input, sensor input (NPN type)
Reset mode Panel button reset, external terminal reset

Reset min pulse width 20ms
Counting error ≤±1 time
Current failure memory >10 years
Power consumption About 1.5VA
4. Wiring diagram
NJJ5-J contact signal input
0VDC CP
NJJ5-J Electronic Counter 1 2 3 4 5
12VDC
( ) Power ( )
30mA
( ～ ) ( ～ )
supply
1. General
This product adopts microminiature design and is

applicable for counting in various circuits.
2. Type designation
NJJ5-J sensor signal input
Rated operational voltage 12VDC

0VDC CP 30mA
Blank: normal ; E: with extended panel 1 2 3 4 5
Blue(Blue) Black(Yellow) Brown (Red)
Power
L: low-speed type 10 times/s ( )
( ～ )
( )
( ～ )
supply
H: high-speed type 1000 times/s
J: counter
NPN type sensor
Design S.N.
Counting relay
Note: This product is applicable for wide range operating voltage,for instance,
operating voltage within AC/DC100V~240V means it can operate normally
within the voltage range of AC/DC 100V to 240V.

Opening size
48max
22.5
24max
NJJ5-J
73max 45
6. Extended panel type

Extended panel type Opening size of extended panel type
56max
25
42max
NJJ5-J
73max 50
7. Operating timing-sequence diagram

NJJ5-J operating timing-sequence diagram
Power supply
Reset
999999
G
Count value
G
3. Technical data
Operating voltage 85%-110% of rated voltage AC50Hz/60Hz AC/DC100V-240V, DC24V

Accumulating time range 99999.9h, 99h59min59s, 9999h59min, 9999day23h
Resetting mode Panel button resetting, external terminal resetting
Input signal Contact input, sensor input (NPN type)
Resetting min pulse width 20ms
Accumulative error ≤0.02％
Current failure memory > 10 years
Power consumption 1.5VA approx.

4. Wiring diagram
NJJ5-L contact signal input
Accumulating
0VDC time control Reset
1 2 3 4 5
( ) ( )
( ～ ) ( ～ )
Power supply
NJJ5-L Electronic
Timer Note: If is required to accumulate time as making,
please short connect 3 and 4.
1. General
NJJ5-L sensor signal input
This product adopts microminiature design and is
applicable for accumulating time in various circuits.
Accumulating
0VDC time control Reset
2. Type designation 1 2 3 4 5
( )
( )
Blue (blue) Black (yellow)
( ～ )
( ～ )
Power supply
NPN type sensor 12VDC
Brown (red)
Rated operational voltage
NPN type sensor Blue (blue) Black (yellow)
Blank: normal ; E: with extended panel
12VDC
Brown (red)
1: 99999.9h
2:99h59min59s
3:9999h59min
4:9999day23h
L: time accumulator
Design S.N.
Counting relay
Note: This product is applicable for wide range operating voltage, for instance,

Opening size
48max
22.5
24max
NJJ5-L
73max 45
6. Extended panel type

Extended panel type Opening size of extended panel type
56max
25
42max
NJJ5-L 50
73max
7. Operating timing-sequence diagram

NJJ5-L operating timing-sequence diagram
Power supply
Reset
TOP
G
Accumulative time
G
2. Type designation
Design sequence No.
Counting relay
Note: This product is applicable for wide range of operating voltage, for instance,
NJJ3 Counting Relay

1. General
NJJ3 counting relay is mainly used as counting or counting

control component in the control circuit with AC frequency of
50Hz/60Hz, rated control power supply voltage up to 240V and
DC rated control power supply voltage up to 240V.
3. Technical data
Operating mode 85%-110% of rated voltage AC50Hz/60Hz AC/DC100V-240V
Rated control supply voltage Us, frequency AC/DC100V~240V, 50Hz/60Hz

Allowable fluctuation range of rated control 85%Us~110%Us

1 group of change-over contact, collector open output (30VDC, 100mA max)
Output method
Counting digit 6 digits (6-digit red LED is the count value, 6-digit green LED is the preset value)
Counting speed 1 time/s, 30 times/s, 1000 times/s optional
Counting mode Add, subtract, reversible A, reversible B, reversible C
Batch processing Can be set as 0~999999
Display form Nixie tube display
Input signal Contact input, sensor input (NPN type, PNP type optional)
External sensor power supply 12VDC, 30mA max
Value setting Setting range 0.001~99.999
Output time The output time can be set as 0.01s~9.99s (when the output mode is C, R, K, P, Q, A)

Power-off memor y More than 10 years (settable)
4. Wiring diagram
Count wiring diagram
12VDC
INA INB Reset OVDC 30mA Pause Batch reset
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
output
30VDC100mA
COM OUT Batch output
15 16 17 18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Output
(+) Power (-)
(-) (-)
External dimension
88max 97max
Preset
Bath 72max
setting
Lock
OutputBatchResetPower
output
NJJ3 Counting Relay
Opening size
69
69 G
INA
INB
Count value
0
1
2
3
4
G
INA
INB
Count at INB input
4
Count value 3
2
1
0
INA
INB
n Count at INA rising edge,
n-1 stop counting at INB input.
n-2
n-3
Count value n-4
n-5
*n Preset value
INA
INB
Count at INB input
n
n-2
n-3
n-4
Count value n-5
*n Preset value
INA
INB
UD-A Reversible counting mode A
subtraction counting when
3 3
Count value 2 2 2
1 1
0
INA

UD-B Reversible counting mode B subtraction counting at INB input.
Count value 3 3
2 2 2
1 1 1
0
INA

UD-C Reversible counting mode C and reverse rotations, addition
Count value 3 3
2 2 2
1 1
0
Output
mode
Reset Reset Reset

0 0 0

Output
mode
Reset Reset Reset

(F)
0 0 0
Reset Reset
Reset
Preset value Preset value
Preset value
Count value Count value

(C) Count value
0 0
0
Output Output
Output
t t t t
t t
Reset Reset Reset

(R)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
Reset Reset
Reset
Preset value Preset value
Preset value
Count value Count value

Count value
(K)
0 0
0
Output Output
Output
t t t t
t t
Reset
Preset value
Reset
Preset value
Reset
Preset value
G
(P)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset

(Q)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset

(A)
0 0 0
t t t t t t

2. Type designation
Feature Code：
M：enhanced Type
Design sequence No.
Counting
Note: This product is applicable for wide range of operating voltage, for instance,
NJJ7-M Counting Relay

1. General
NJJ7-H counting relay is mainly used as counting or counting

3. Technical data
Operating mode 85%-110% of rated voltage AC50Hz/60Hz AC/DC100V-240V, DC24V
Rated control supply voltage Us, frequency AC/DC100V~240V, 50Hz/60Hz；DC24V
Allowable fluctuation range of rated

85%Us~110%Us
control power supply voltage
Counting digit 6-digit counting relay (the upper 6-digit LCD is the count value, and the lower 6-digit LCD is the preset value)
Counting speed 1 time/s, 30 times/s, 1000 times/s optional
Counting mode Add, subtract, reversible A, reversible B, reversible C

External sensor power supply 12VDC, 30mA max
Value setting Setting range 0.001~99.999
Output time The output time can be set as 0.01s~9.99s (when the output mode is C, R, K, P, Q, A)
Contact number 1 group change-over

Power-off memor y More than 10 years (settable)
4. Wiring diagram
Count wiring diagram
INA INB Reset 0VDC 12VDC 30mA
6 7 8 9 10
output
11 12
Output 30VDC 100mA
1 2 3 4 5
(+ ) (- )
Power
(～) (～)
External dimension
58max
48max
NJJ7-M
97max
Opening size
45.5
45.5 G
INA
INB
Count value
0
1
2
3
4
G
INA
INB
Count at INB input
4
Count value 3
2
1
0
INA
INB
n-2
n-3
Count value n-4
n-5
*n Preset value
INA
INB
n Count at INB input
n-2
n-3
n-4
Count value n-5
*n Preset value
INA
INB
3 3
Count value 2 2 2
1 1
0
INA

UD-B Reversible counting mode B subtraction counting at INB input.
Count value 3 3
2 2 2
1 1 1
0
INA
Reversible counting mode C:

INB
Count value 3 3 and subtraction counting.

2 2 2
1 1
0
Output
mode
Reset Reset Reset

0 0 0

Output
mode
Reset Reset Reset

(F)
0 0 0
Reset Reset Reset

(C)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset

(R)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset

(K)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
Reset
Preset value
Reset
Preset value
Reset
Preset value
G
(P)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset

(Q)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset

(A)
0 0 0
t t t t t t

When the function mode for 8 output mode CR mode, when no output counter function mode for CT mode.
JDM15G Counting Relay

1. General
JDM15G counting relay is mainly used as counting or counting

2. Type designation
Derivative code
Design sequence No.
Counting relay
For example, an operational voltage of AC/DC100V~240V means that it
can operate normally within the voltage range of AC or DC 100V to 240V.
3. Technical data
Rated control supply voltage Us, frequency AC/DC100V~240V, 50Hz/60HzV
Allowable fluctuation range of rated

85%Us~110%Us
control power supply voltage
Output method 2 groups of change-over contacts, open-collector output (30VDC, 100mA max)
Counting digit 6 digits
Counting speed 30 times/s, 1000 times/s optional
Counting mode Add, add × 10, add × 100, subtract, reversible A, reversible B, reversible C
External sensor power supply 12VDC，30mA max
Output mode N, F, C, R
Output time The output time can be set from 0.01s to 9.99s (when the output mode is C or R)
Power-off memory More than 10 years (settable)
4. Wiring diagram
12VDC output
INA INB Reset 0VDC 30mA 30VDC 100mA NC
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18
NO COM NC NO COM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(+) Power (-)

(~) (~)
88max
69
104max
PNP NPN
76max
69
输出
复位
计数继电器 JDM15G 输出时间
INA
INB
4
3
Count value
2
1
0
V
Addition counting mode
INA
INB
Count at INB input
4
Count value 3
2
1
0
INA
INB INA上升沿计数，
G
n-1 INB输入停止计数。
n-3
Count value n-4
n-5
*n Preset value
INA
INB
Count at INB input
n
G
INA输入时，
falling edge at INA input.
n-1
n-2 INB输入下降沿计数。
n-3
n-4
Count value n-5
*n Preset value
INA

INB Addition counting at INA input,
3 3
Count value 2 2 2
1 1
0
INA

UD-B Reversible counting mode B Addition counting at INA input,
subtraction counting at INB input.
Count value 3 3
2 2 2
1 1 1
0
INA

Count value 3 3
2 2 2
1 1
0
Output
mode
Reset Reset Reset

0 0 0
Reset Reset Reset

(F)
0 0 0
Reset Reset Reset

(C)
0 0 0
t t t t t t
Reset Reset Reset

(R)
0 0 0
t t t t t t

JDM1-48 Counting Relay

1. General
JDM1-48 counting relay is mainly used for counting and

counting control in the control circuit with AC frequency of
2. Type designation
Blank: without power-off memory,

M: with power-off memory
Number of terminals: 8: 8 pins,

11: 11 pins (with 12V output for the sensor)
Counting rate:
L: low speed type, 30 times/second
H: high speed type, 200 times/second
Feature code: 6, 9, 14, 48
Design sequence No.
Counting relay
For example, an operational voltage of AC/DC24V~48V means that it can
operate normally within the voltage range of AC or DC 24V to 48V.
3. Technical data
Rated control supply voltage Us, frequency

Allowable fluctuation range of rated control power supply voltage
AC/DC24V~48V, AC/DC100V~240V, AC220V, AC380V, 50Hz/60Hz
85%Us~110%Us
G
Counting digit 4 digits
Counting mode Add count
Input signal Contact input, NPN sensor input, optocoupler input
External sensor power supply 12VCD，30mA max
Output mode N
Reset mode Panel button reset, external terminal reset
Number of contacts 1 group of change-over

10/100
G
Electrical life / mechanical life (10,000 times)
Power-off memory More than 10 years (settable)

4. Wiring diagram 6. Sequence diagram of counting mode

JDM1-48 Timing Chart (No blackout memory)
Reset
Conut 4 5
3 6 Power
2 7 Reset
Preset
1 8 value
0V
NPN Sensors
Power 0
( - ) ( + )
( ~ ) ( ~ )
Output
JDM1-48 Timing Chart (With power and memory)

6
5 7 Reset
4 8
+12V Brown (Red)
3 9
Conut Black (Yellow) Power
( - )
2 10
( ~ )
Power 1 11 Reset
Blue (Blue)
( + )
( ) 0V Preset
~
NPN Sensors value
Output
58max 128max
52max
JDM1-48
RESET
8 8 8 8 1
45.5
45.5
2. Type designation
L：low speed counting, 10 times/second;

H: high speed counting, 200 times/second.
Blank: without voltage input;

V: DC voltage input;
A: AC voltage input.
Counting digits: 6: 6-digit counting;

8: 8-digit counting.
Design sequence No.
Counter
3. Technical data
Power supply Internal power supply

Battery life About 6 years (25℃)
LCD display, display "0" type (hide“0”type

Display mode
JDM3 can be customized)
Output mode No output
Electronic Counter Counting digits 6-bit counter or 8-bit counter

Counting rate 10times/s or 200times/s
Counting mode Add count
1. General
None: no voltage input; V: DC voltage input; A:
AC voltage input
JDM3 electronic counter (hereinafter referred to as the counter), No voltage input (contact input):
Without voltage input
internally powered by lithium battery, is compact in appearance maximum contact connection resistance:
≤ 10K Ω (count on);
and used for counting in various circuits.
Minimum contact breaking resistance:
≥ 500K Ω (count off);
Input maximum residual voltage: 0.5V
DC voltage input (V): l: DO0V ~ 2V;

DC voltage input
H: DC4V ~ 30V (H valid)
G
(input impedance: ≥ 4.7 kΩ)
AC voltage input AC voltage input (a): AC / DC24V ~ 240V
Panel button reset (6 digits), external terminal

Reset mode
reset (6 digits & 8 digits)
Reset minimum pulse width ≥0.2s

G

JDM3 (without voltage input)
48max
Input Reset
52.9max
24max
1 3
2 4 LOCK
2 and 4 connected internally
Input Reset
1 3
0V 2 4 0V
22.5
JDM3 (DC voltage input)
45
Input Reset
+V 1 3
0V 2 4
Input Reset
+V 1 3
0V 2 4 0V
JDM3 (AC voltage input)
Input Reset
+
AC/DC 1 3
24V~240V 2 4
Input Reset
+
AC/DC 1 3
24V~240V 2 4 0V

2. Type designation
Input signal: Blank: without voltage input;

V: DC voltage input;
A: AC voltage input
Time accumulation range :

1: 99999.9h; 2: 99h59min59s;
3: 9999h59min; 4: 9999day23h;
5: 9999h59min59s; 6: 999999h59min;
Time accumulator
Design sequence No.
LCD display
Electronic type
3. Technical data
Power supply Internal power supply

SC3L Battery life About 6 years (25℃)
LCD display, display "0" type (hidden “0”

Electronic Timer Accumulator Display mode
type can be customized)
Output method No output
1. General 1: 99999.9h, 2: 99h59min59s, 3: 9999h59min,

Time range 4: 9999day23h, 5: 9999h59min59s,
SC3L electronic timer (hereinafter referred to as the timer), which 6: 999999h59min
is powered by lithium battery inside, has a compact appearance None: no voltage input; V: DC voltage input;
and is applicable to various circuits. A: AC voltage input
maximum contact connection resistance:
Without voltage input ≤ 10KΩ (count on);
Minimum contact breaking resistance:
≥ 500KΩ (count off);
Input maximum residual voltage: 0.5V
DC voltage input
AC voltage input
DC voltage input (V): l: DO0V ~ 2V;
H: DC4V ~ 30V (H valid)
(input impedance: ≥ 4.7 kΩ)
AC voltage input (a): AC / DC24V ~ 240V
G
Panel button reset (6 digits), external
Reset mode terminal reset (6 digits & 8 digits)
Reset minimum pulse width ≥0.2s
Time error ≤0.1%
Ambient temp 5℃~+40℃

G
SC3L (without voltage input)
48max
Input Reset
52.9max
24max
1 3
LOCK
2 4
Input Reset
1 3
0V 2 4 0V
22.5
SC3L (DC voltage input)
45
Input Reset
+V 1 3
0V 2 4
Input Reset
+V 1 3
0V 2 4 0V
SC3L (AC voltage input)
Input Reset
+
AC/DC 1 3
24V~240V 2 4
Input Reset
+
AC/DC 1 3
24V~240V 2 4 0V

2. Type designation
Rated power supply voltage
Length of electrode lead-wire:

L1: represents the max length of lead-wire is 1km
L2: represents the max length of lead-wire is 2km
Function code:
N: water supply, water drainage type
B: water supply and water drainage with
anti-exhausted of pump type
Design sequnce No.
Floatless relay
Company code
NJYW1 Floatless Relay

1. General
NJYW1 Series Floatless Relay is used in control circuit @

A.C. 50Hz/60Hz, up to 380V rated supply voltage for liquid
level automatic control at places of civil water tower, high
cistern, and underground conservation pool, etc. It is
capable to realize automatic water supply control or water
drainage control according to wiring requirement
of user.
This product is not applicable for level control for liquid

with poor conductivity such as oil, pure water, flammable &
explosive chemical liquid and high density sewage, etc. G
3. Technical data
Type NJYW1-NL1 NJYW1-NL2 NJYW1-BL1 NJYW1-BL2

Operating mode Continuous working
Contact number One group changeover contact
G
Contact capacity Ue/Ie:AC-15 220V/0.75A, 380V/0.47A; Ith:5A
Operating voltage AC 50Hz/60Hz 36V, 110V/220V, 220V/380V AC 50Hz/60Hz 36V, 110V, 220V, 380V
Control electrode voltage 24V
Conductor length Max 1km Max 2km Max 1km Max 2km
Operating resistance ≤25kΩ
Releasing resistance ≥2kΩ
Response time Reacting: max 80ms; releasing: max 160ms
Power consumption <3VA
Installation mode Guide rail type or device type
4. Wiring diagram
Wiring diagram for NJYW1-NL1, NJYW1-NL2 Wiring diagram for NJYW1-NL1, NJYW1-NL2
water supply mode 110V/220V water drainage mode 110V/220V
N L
N L
QS
QS
S0 S1 S2 E1
S0 S1 S2 E1 AC110V
AC110V AC220V
AC220V
Ta Tc Tb E3 E2
Ta Tc Tb E3 E2
KM
KM KM
KM
M
M
Wiring diagram for NJYW1-NL1, NJYW1-NL2 Wiring diagram for NJYW1-NL1, NJYW1-NL2
water supply mode 220V/380V water drainage mode 220V/380V
L1 L2 L3 N
L1 L2 L3 N
QS
QS
S0 S1 S2 E1
AC220V S0 S1 S2 E1
AC380V AC220V
AC380V
Ta Tc Tb E3 E2
Ta Tc Tb E3 E2
KM
KM KM
KM
M
M
wiring diagram for NJYW1-BL1 and NJYW1-BL2 wiring diagram for NJYW1-BL1 and
upper/lower water pool level control 220V NJYW1-BL2 upper/lower water pool level control 380V
N L L1 L2 L3 N
QS QS
Upper water pool Upper water pool

S0 S1 E4 E5 E1 S0 S1 E4 E5 E1
AC220V AC380V
Ta Tc Tb E3 E2 Ta Tc Tb E3 E2
KM KM
Lower water pool Lower water pool
KM KM
M M
Note: IN NJYW1-BL1 or NJYW1-BL2, Ta,Tc,Tb are not one group of changeover Note: In NJYW1-BL1 or NJYW1-BL2, Ta,Tc,Tb are not one group of changeover
contacts, among which Ta & Tc are one group of independent normally contacts, among which Ta & Tc are one group of independent normally
open contacts; Tc & Tb are one group of normally closed contacts open contacts; Tc & Tb are one group of normally closed contacts
Note: NJYW1-BL1 & NJYW1-BL2 can be used as water supply or water drainage
5. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm) control independently, its wiring diagram referring to NJYW1-NL1.
NJYW1-NL1,
NJYW1-NL2, NJYW1-BL1, and NJYW1-BL2
115max
70.5max
36±0.28
5
46max
60.2±0.37
35.4±0.28
2. Type designation
Design sequence No.: Nil: Basic type

Type B: with reacting indicator;
Type C: with"water supply"; "drainage" reacting
indicator
Floatless Relay
3. Technical data
Type JYB-714 JYB-714B JYB-714C

Operating mode Continuous working
Contact number One group of changeover contact

Contact capacity Ue/Ie: AC-15 220V/1.5A; Ith:5A
AC 50Hz/60Hz 36V, 110V, 220V, 380V

Operating voltage
(other voltage can be custom made)
Conductor length Max 1km

Power consumption <3VA

JYB-714 Floatless Relay Installation mode Device type or guide rail type
1. General
4. Wiring diagram
JYB-714 Series Floatless Relay is used in liquid level
Wiring diagram for JYB-714, JYB-714B, JYB-714C
automatic control circuit @ AC 50Hz/60Hz, up to 380V 220V water supply mode
rated supply voltage for liquid level automatic control at
places of civil water tower, high cistern, and underground
N L
conservation pool etc.
QS
1 8
2 7
G
KM 3 6
KM 4 5

380V water supply mode
L3 L2 L1
QS
1 8
2 7
KM 3 6
KM 4 5
M
3~

220V water drainage mode JYB-714C
N L
6 5 4 3
QS 2×Φ4.4±0.2
70max
1 8
2 7
7 8 1 2
KM 3 6
KM 4 5
88max
40±0.3
M
50max

380V water drainage mode
L3 L2 L1
QS
1 8
2 7
KM 3 6
KM 4 5
M
3~

JYB-714
6 5 4 3
2×Φ4.4±0.2
70max
7 8 1 2
88max
40±0.3
50max
JYB-714B
6 5 4 3
2×Φ4.4±0.2
70max
7 8 1 2
88max
40±0.3
50max
NJA1-KG Smart Relay

1. General
NJA1-KG smart relay is suitable for timing on or off control in
control circuit with rated control of power supply voltage of 110V
~ 240V, and rated insulation voltage up to 240V, and can also be
used as time control component to turn on or off the circuit at a
predetermined time.
2. Type designation
N J A 1 - KG
Time controller
Design sequence No.
APP Smart
Relay
Company code
G
3. Technical Data
Technical parameters NJA1-KG

Rated control supply voltage AC/DC 110V～240V
Setting method APP
Operation mode Timing (alarm), on-delay, inter val delay, cycle delay
Time hour : minute: second
Maximum number of timings 100 groups
Delay range 1s～99h59min59s
Other functions Manual switch, latitude function
Contact capacity Ue/Ie：AC-12 240V/10A
Ambient temperature -5℃～40℃
Mounting Type Rail type
4. Wiring diagram
L N
L N
ID
NJA1-KG
Power
Operating
Comm
APP
3 N
Load
L N
ID
NJA1-KG
35min
Power
Operating
Comm
APP
3 N
18±0.19 66.2±0.43
NJA1-L Smart Relay

1. General
NJA1-L smart relay is used as a logic control element in a control

circuit with rated control power supply voltage of 110V to 240V
and rated insulation voltage of up to 240V, and performs relevant
operation according to the set program.
2. Type designation
NJA1-L
Programmable logic controller
Design sequence No.
APP Smart
Relay
Company code
G
3. Technical Data
Technical parameters NJA1-L

Rated control supply voltage AC/DC 110V～240V
Programming method APP
On-off in put 4 groups
On-off out put 4 groups
Analog input / parameter 4 groups/DC 0V～10V
Maximum number of supported function blocks 200
Variable 100 (boolean, characters)
Support up to 28 On-off inputs (excluding the main unit), 28 On-off

Extended function outputs (excluding the main unit), 28 analog inputs (excluding the main unit),
32 analog outputs, and an extension of RS485/Modbus communication.
Contact capacity Ue/Ie：AC-15 240V/1.5A

Ambient temperature -5℃～40℃
Mounting Type Rail type
4. Wiring diagram
L N
NJA1-L
Run
Stop
Fault
Q0 Q1
Q2 Q3
L
Load N
L N
NJA1-L
35.2min
92.8±0.5
Run
Stop
Fault
Q0 Q1
Q2 Q3
66.2±0.43
36±0.28
Socket
CZS08C CZF11A-E (with finger safety protection)
70×50×20(mm) 52×44×31(mm)
6 5 4 3 4.2
2 1 11 10
CZS08C
70max
9
35.4
52max 3
34
35.4
4
2-M4×30
4
CZF11A-E
7 8 1 2
5 6 7 8
34 31max
44max
40max 20max
50max
Applicable relay type: JSS48A, JDM1-48, KG10M, JYB-714 and NJS1 Applicable relay type: JS14S device type, and JDM1-14
CZS08G CZS08X-E (with finger safety protection)
48.8×40×20.1(mm) 72×43.6×21(mm)
32
40max 20.1max 6 5 4 3
4.2
2 1 B 7
6 5 4 3
72max
50max
35.4
48.8max
CZS08X-E
7 8 1 2
7 8 1
6 5 4 3
34max 21max
43.6max
Applicable relay type: JSS48A, NJS1, Applicable relay type: JSZ3A, JSZ3C, JSZ3-2/3,
JDM1-48, KG10M, and JSZ3H-Y JSZ3K, JSZ3R, JSZ3F, and JSZ3Y
CZY08B-01 (wide type, copper strip connection) CZY14B (copper strip connection)
63×30.5×26(mm) 63×30.5×26(mm)
8 5 8 7 6 5
4 1 4 3 2 1
63max
63max
35.4
35.4
4
4
1 1 1 1
4 3 4 3
1 1 1 1 9
2 9 2 1 0
25 26max 25 26max
30.5max 30.5max
Applicable relay type: JSZ6-2 Applicable relay type: JSZ6-4
CZS08S CZS11S FM8858
Φ32.4×36.2(mm) Φ32.4×36.2(mm)
36.2max Φ32.4max 36.2max Φ32.4max
Applicable relay type: JSS48A, JDM1-6, Applicable relay type: JSS48A-11,

JSZ3H-Y, NJS1 JDM1-48, NJS1-11 Applicable relay type: JSZ3
CZY08A-E CZY14A-E (with finger safety protection)
72×23×31(mm) 72×30×31(mm)
4 1 3 2 1
8 5 8 7 6 5
15 22
72max
72max
35.4
35.4
59
59
59
59
2-M4×10 CZY14A-E 2-M4×10

CZY08A-E
12 9
12 11 10 9
14 13
4 14 13
4 4
31max
15 31max 22
23max 30max
Applicable relay type: JSZ6-2 Applicable relay type: JSZ6-4
G
P-119 Relay General Purpose Relay
3. Technical data
Contact Arrangement 2Z 2ZS 3ZS 4ZS

Initial contact resistance mΩ 100
Contact material Ag alloy
Rated load (resistive) A (250VAC/30VDC) 10 5 5 3
VAC 250
Max. switching voltage
VDC 125
Max. switching current A 10 5 5 3
VA 2500 1250 1250 750
Max. switching power
W 300 150 150 90
Electrical endurance Cycles 3×105
Machenical endurance Cycles 1×107
4. Coil specification
AC
Rated Holding Must drop- Operating Power

voltage voltage out voltage range consumption
6
12
24
NJX-13FW Miniature Power Relay 36
48 (80%~110%)
≤80%Ue ≥20%Ue 1.8VA
1. General 110 Ue
127
1.1 3A, 5A, 10A switching capacity
220
1.2 Wide range of coil ratings
230
1.3 Fully sealed with N2 inside
380
1.4 Certificate: CE, UL
DC
2. Type designation
NJX-13FW (D) / 006 - 2Z 1 1 voltage voltage out voltage range consumption
Installation: 5
1=top flange type; 6
2=lateral flange type; 12
blank=standard type 24
(75%~110%)
36 ≤75%Ue ≥10%Ue 0.9W
Termination: 1=PCB 6=Plug-in Ue
48
Contact arrangement: 110
2Z=2C(10A); 2ZS=2C(5A); 127
3ZS=3C; 4ZS=4C 220
Coil type: ~= AC; - = DC
Coil voltage : DC: 5V~220V;

AC: 6V~380V
Type:
D=with LED indicator;
B=With LED indicator and surge withstand(DC);
M=With arc suppression cover (only 4C);
Blank=Standard
Series
General Purpose Relay Relay P-120
5. Characteristics
Insulation resistance(at 500VDC) MΩ 100
Dielectric Between coil & contacts 1500VAC

strength Between open contacts 500VAC
Operation time ms ≤25
Release time ms ≤25
Shock resistance m/s2 100(pulse duration of 11ms)
Vibration (10～55)Hz,1mm double amplitude
Ambient temperature range ℃ -25～+55
Termination Plug-in, PCB
Dimension mm 27.5×21.5×35.5
Internal connection 2Z 2ZS 3ZS 4ZS
1 2 1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
3 4 5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
5 6 9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12
Standard type
13 14 10 11 13 14
7 8
1 1 2 4 1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
5 3 4 8 5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
5 6
9 12 9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12
with indicator
13 14 13 14 10 11 13 14
7 8
1 2 1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
3 4 5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
5 6
9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12
with indicator and diode
13 14 10 11 13 14
7 8
(+) (+) (+) (+)
G
10 13.2
13.2 13.2
4.4
3.8
4
4.6
4
6.4 4.1
6.4 4.1
6.4 4.1
6
18
16.9
16.9
PCB mounting holes

16.9
8×Φ1.8
8×Φ1.3 11×Φ1.3
14×Φ1.3
14.2
Dimensions 2Z 2ZS 3ZS 4ZS
21.5max 21.5max 21.5max 21.5max
35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
Plug-in type
7max
7max
7max
7max
5 2.6 2.6 2.6
21.5max 21.5max 21.5max 21.5max
35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
PCB type
5max
5max
5max
5max
1.5 1 1 1
Installation 2Z 2ZS 3ZS 4ZS
1 2 1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
3 4 5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
43max
43max
43max
43max
5 6 9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12
38
38
38
38
Top flange type 13 14 10 11 13 14
7 8
3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
21.5max 21.5max 21.5max 21.5max

35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
Lateral flange type

7max
7max
7max
7max
5 2.6 2.6 2.6

NJDC-17
Small Electromagnetic Relay
with Test Button
1. General
2Z,2ZS, 3ZS, 4ZS contact forms; with self-locking test
button; transparent dust cover package, diverse
mounting modes available; equipped with a variety of
sockets options; optional with the specifications of
the status indicator.
Temperature Range -25℃ ~+55℃

Relative humidity 90% RH at +20℃
Atmospheric pressure 86kPa~106kPa
Working position Any position
3. Technical data G
3.1 Contact parameters
Contact form 2Z(C),3Z(C),4Z(C)

Initial contact resistance 100mΩ
Contact Material Ag alloy
Contact load (COSΦ = 1.0) 2Z：10A；2ZS,3ZS：5A；4ZS：3A(220VAC/28VDC)
Maximum switching voltage 250VAC/125VDC
Maximum switching current 2Z：10A；2ZS,3ZS：5A；4ZS：3A
2Z:2200VA/280W
Maximum switching power 2ZS,3ZS：22500VA/300W
4ZS：660VA/84W
Electrical life (times) 1×105 (See safety certification report)
3.2Performance, and characteristic parameter
Insulation Resistance 100MΩ(500VDC)

Contact and coil 1500VAC
Dielectric Strength
Between open contacts 500VAC
Action time ≤25ms
Release time ≤25ms
Shock (stability) Acceleration 100m/s2, pulse duration of 11ms
Vibration Double amplitude of 1 mm (10~ 55) Hz
Terminal form Plug-in, PCB
Outside dimensions (mm) 27.5×21.5×35.5
3.3 Coil parameters
Rated power consumption 0.9W 1.8VA

Pull-in voltage DC: ≤ 75% rated voltage; AC: ≤ 80% of rated voltage
Release voltage DC: ≥ 10% rated voltage; AC: ≥ 20% of rated voltage
Maximum voltage 110% rated voltage
3.4 Specifications
Rated voltage VDC Action voltage VDC (≤) Release Voltage VDC (≥) Coil resistance Ω ± 10%
5 3.75 0.5 28
6 4.5 0.6 40
12 9.0 1.2 160
24 18.0 2.4 640
36 27.0 3.6 1440
48 36.0 4.8 1900
110 82.5 11.0 14500
127 95.3 12.7 18000
220 165.0 22.0 39000
Rated voltage VAC Action voltage VAC (≤) Release Voltage VAC (≥) Coil resistance±10%
6 4.8 1.2 10.5
12 9.6 2.4 44
24 19.2 4.8 160
36 28.8 7.2 380
48 38.4 9.6 650
110 88.0 22 3300
127 101.6 25.4 4100
220 176.0 44 14500
380 304.0 72 39000
Note: The coil parameters are the values of coil temperatime at 25℃
4. Other
Supporting socket (alternative)
Relay Model NJDC-17(D)/2Z

Model of equipped socket CZT08A-E CZT08A-02 CZT08B-01
Socket Dimensions (mm) 79×29×33 72×23×31 68×30×28
Socket lead form Screw-type terminals (device type, Din rail type)
Relay Mode NJDC-17(D)/2ZS
Model of equipped socket CZY08A-E CZY08B-01
Socket Dimensions (mm) 72×23×31 63×30.5×26
Socket lead form l Screw-type terminals (device type, Din rail type)
Model of equipped socket CZY11A-E CZY11B
Socket Dimensions (mm) 72×30×31 63×30.5×26
Model of equipped socket CZY14A-E CZY14B CZY14B-E
Socket Dimensions (mm) 72×30×31 63×30.5×26 63×30.5×26
5. Outside shape and mounting dimensions
Bottom wiring diagram (2Z) Bottom wiring diagram (2ZS) Bottom wiring diagram (3ZS) Bottom wiring diagram (4ZS)
1 2 1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
3 4 5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
5 6 9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12
13 14 10 11 13 14
7 8
Bottom wiring diagram

(2Z with indicator)
(2ZS with indicator)
G
1 1 2 4 1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
5 3 4 8 5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
5 6
9 12 9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12
13 14 13 14 10 11 13 14
7 8
Bottom wiring diagram (2Z Bottom wiring diagram (2ZS Bottom wiring diagram (3ZS Bottom wiring diagram (4ZS
with indicator and diode) with indicator and diode) with indicator and diode) with indicator and diode)
1 2 1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
3 4 5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
5 6
9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12
13 14 10 11 13 14
7 8
(+) (+) (+) (+)
PCB outline drawing (2Z) PCB outline drawing (2ZS) PCB outline drawing (3ZS) PCB outline drawing (4ZS)
10 13.2
13.2 13.2
4.4
3.8
4
4.6
4
4.1
4.1
4.1
6
18
6.4
6.4
16.9
16.9
6.4
16.9
8-φ1.8
8-Φ1.3 11-Φ1.3
14-Φ1.3
14.2
Outside dimensions drawing Outside dimensions drawing Outside dimensions drawing Outside dimensions drawing
(2Z pluggable) (2ZS pluggable) (3ZS pluggable) (4ZS pluggable)
21.5max 21.5max 21.5max 21.5max

35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
7max
7max
7max
7max
5 2.6 2.6 2.6
PCB outline drawing (2Z) PCB outline drawing (2ZS) PCB outline drawing (3ZS) PCB outline drawing (3ZS)
21.5max 21.5max 21.5max 21.5max

35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
5max
5max
5max
5max
1.5 1 1 1
6 Ordering Information
NJDC-17 (D) / 2Z AC220V 1
Relay Model D: with status indicator Contact form Coil voltage Terminal form
B: with status indicator 2Z: two sets of conversion(2C) DC (5 ~ 220) V 1: PCB type
And surge suppression (DC) 2ZS: two sets of conversion(2C) AC (6 ~ 380) V
6 or omitted: Plug-in
M: with arc shield 3ZS: three sets of conversion(3C)
(Used for 4ZS specifications) 4ZS: four sets of conversion(4C)
Blank :standard
2. Technical data
Contact Arrangement 2Z 2ZS 3ZS 4ZS

Contact material Ag alloy
Rated load (resistive) A (250VAC/30VDC) 10 5 5 3
VAC 250
VDC 125
Max. switching current A 10 5 5 3
VA 2500 1250 1250 750
W 300 150 150 90
3. Normal operating conditions and mounting

conditions
Temperature range -25℃~+55℃

Relative humidity 90%RH at +20℃
Working position Any
JQX-13F Miniature High-Power

4. Technical data
Electromagnetic Relay
1. General
Contact switching capability of 10A; a complete range of
AC/DC specifications; enclosed in transparent dust cover,
a variety of mounting types; various sockets available;
Specifications with state indicators available;
certifictaion: CE UL; models of the same type: LY2(N),
HH62P(-L).
G
4.1 Characteristics data
Insulation resistance 100MΩ(500VDC)
Between coil & yoke,

1500VAC
Dielectric strength between different groups of contacts

Operation time (25℃, rated voltage) ≤25ms
Release time (25℃, rated voltage) ≤25ms
Shock (resistance) Acceleration: 100m/s2, pulse duration: 11ms
Vibration 1mm double amplitude, (10~55)Hz
Outlet terminal type Plug-in type, PCB type
Overall dimensions (mm) 27.5×21.5×35.5
4.2 Coil data
Rate power consumption 0.9W, 1.8VA

Pick-up voltage DC: ≤75% rated voltage; AC: ≤80% rated voltage
Release voltage DC: ≥10% rated voltage; AC: ≥20% rated voltage
Max. voltage 110% Rated voltage
4.3 Specification data
Rated Operation voltage Release voltage Coil resistance

voltage VDC(≤) VDC(≥) Ω±10%
5 3.75 0.5
28
6 4.5 0.6
44
12 9.0 1.2
160
24 18.0 2.4
640
36 27.0 3.6
1440
48 36.0 4.8
2560
110 82.5 11.0
14500
127 95.3 12.7
17000
220 165.0 22.0
39000
Rated Operation voltage Release voltage Coil resistance

voltage VDC(≤) VDC(≥) Ω±10%
6 4.8 1.2 10.5

12 9.6 2.4 44
24 19.2 4.8 180
36 28.8 7.2 380
48 38.4 9.6 650
110 88.0 22 3670
127 101.6 25.4 4100
220 176.0 44 14500
380 304.0 76 39000
Note: The coli coli temperrature parameter is value in 25 ℃
5. Matching socket (optional)
Relay model JQX-13F(D)/2Z
Model of
CZT08A-E CZT08A-02 CZT08B-01
matching socket
Overall dimensions
72×30×31 72×23×31 68×30×28
of socket (mm)
Type of
Screw terminal (installation type, rail type)
socket lead
Connection diagram (bottom view) (2Z) Outline drawing (plug-in type)
21.5max 27.5max
1 2
3 4
35.5max
7.5max
5 6
7 8
5 5 0.5
Connection diagram (bottom view) 2Z(D) Outline drawing (PCB type)
1 2 21.5max 27.5max
3 4
35.5max
5 6
5max
7 8
1.5 0.5
Connection diagram (bottom view) 2Z(B) Outline drawing (lateral flange type)
43max
1 2 27.5max 21.5max
3 4
3.8
35.5max
7.5max
5 6
18.15
7 8
(+) 5 0.5 5
38
PCB opening drawing (2Z) Outline drawing (top flange type)

G
0.5 5 5
10
7.5max
3.8
35.5max
4.6
6
18
27.5max 21.5max
8×Φ1.8
3.5
8
2
4
6
1
3
14.2
38
43max
7 Ordering Information
JQX-13F (D) / 2Z PLU DC 24V
Series D: with status indicator Contact form Plug-in type Coil voltage
B: with status indicator 2Z: two sets of conversion(2C) DC(6-220)V
And surge suppression (DC) AC(6-220)V
Blank :standard
2. Type designation
JZX-22F (D) / 006 - 2Z 1 1
Installation: 1=top flange type;

2=lateral flange type;
blank=standard type
Termination: 1=PCB, 6=Plug-in
Contact arrangement 2Z=2C;

3Z=3C;
4Z=4C
Coil type: ~= AC;

- = DC
Coil voltage : DC: 5V~220V;
AC: 6V~380V
Type:
D=with LED indicator;
B=With LED indicator and surge withstand(DC);
M=With arc suppression cover (only 4C);
Blank=Standard
JZX-22F Miniature Power Relay Series
1. General
1.1 3A, 5A switching current
1.2 Various sockets available
1.3 With indicator to be selected
1.4 Full range of AC and DC coil
1.5 Certificate: CE, UL.
3. Technical data
Contact Arrangement 2Z (C) 3Z (C) 4Z (C)

Contact material Silver alloy
5A/250VAC 3A/250VAC
Rated load(resistive)
5A/30VDC 3A/30VDC
VAC 250
MAX. switching voltage
VDC 125
MAX. switching current A 5 3
VA 1250 750
Max. swithcing capacity
W 150 90
AC
Rated voltage Holding voltage Must drop-out voltage Operating range Power consumption
6
12
24
36
48
≤80%Ue ≥20%Ue (80%~110%)Ue 1.8VA
110
127
220
230
380
DC
Rated voltage Holding voltage Must drop-out voltage Operating range Power consumption
5
6
12
24
36 ≤75%Ue ≥10%Ue (75%~110%)Ue 0.9W
G
48
110
127
220
5. Characteristics

Operation time (25℃, rated voltage) ms ≤25
Release time (25℃, rated voltage) ms ≤25
Shock resistance m/s2 100
Humidity 90% RH at +20℃

Termination Plug-in, PCB
Dimension mm 27.5×21.5×35.5
6. Overall mounting dimensions (mm)

Internal connection(bottom view)
1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12 9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12
13 14 10 11 13 14 13 14 10 11 13 14
2Z 3Z 4Z 2Z, with indicator 3Z, with indicator 4Z, with indicator
Internal connection(botton view) PCB mounting poles
1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 13.2
13.2 13.2
4.4
5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
4
4.1
4.1
4.1
9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12
6.4
6.4
16.9
16.9
6.4
16.9
13 14 10 11 13 14
(+) (+) (+)
8×Φ1.3 11×Φ1.3
14×Φ1.3
2Z with indicator 3Z with indicator 4Z with indicator

2Z 3Z 4Z
and diode and diode and diode
Dimensions
21.5max 21.5max 21.5max

27.5max
27.5max
35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
7max
7max
7max
2.6 2.6 2.6

0.5 0.5
Plug-in, 2Z Plug-in, 3Z Plug-in, 4Z
Plug in PCB
21.5max 21.5max 21.5max 43max

27.5max
3.8
27.5max
0.5
35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
18.15
5max
5max
5max
2
35.5max 7max 0.5
1 1 1 38
top flange Lateral flange

PCB, 3Z PCB, 4Z PCB, 2Z
Left view
21.5max 21.5max 21.5max
1 4 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
35.5max
35.5max
35.5max
5 8 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
43max
43max
43max
38
38
38
9 12 7 8 9 9 10 11 12
13 14 10 11 13 14
7max
7max
7max
3.5 3.5 3.5
2.6 2.6 2.6
2Z, front installation 3Z, front installation 4Z, front installation 2Z, lateral flange 3Z, lateral flange 4Z, lateral flange
(top flange) (top flange) (top flange)
G
Temperature Range -10℃~+55℃

Relative humidity +20℃ Reach 90%
Working position Upright or side mounted (reed at the top)
3. Technical data
Contact form 2Z(C),3Z (C)

Contact Material Silver alloy
Contact load (resistive) 7.5A/220VAC, 7.5A/28VDC
Maximum switching current 7.5A
Maximum switching power 1650VA 210W
Electrical life (times) 1×105 (See safety certification report)
NJDC-12
Small Electromagnetic Relay
with Test Button
1. General
2Z, 3Z contacts form; contacts switching current up
to 7.5A; complete AC and DC specifications; with test
button functions, A wide range of device socket are
available.
3.2 Performance and characteristic parameter
Insulation Resistance 100MΩ(500VDC)
Contact and coil, between different sets of contacts 1500VAC

Dielectric Strength
Action time (25℃, rated voltage) ≤20ms
Release time (25℃, rated voltage) ≤20ms
Shock (stability) Acceleration 100m/s2, pulse duration of 11ms
Vibration Double amplitude of 1 mm (10~ 55) Hz
Terminal form Plug-in
Outside dimensions (mm) 35×35×52.5
3.3 Coil parameters
Rated power consumption 2W 3VA

Pull-in voltage DC: ≤ 75% rated voltage; AC: ≤ 80% of rated voltage
Release voltage DC: ≥ 10% rated voltage; AC: ≥ 20% of rated voltage
3.4 Specifications
Rated voltage VDC Action voltage VDC (≤) Release Voltage VDC (≥) Coil resistance Ω ± 10%
6 4.5 0.6 22
12 9.0 1.2 80
24 18.0 2.4 360
36 27.0 3.6 840
48 36.0 4.8 1440
110 82.5 11.0 7560
220 165.0 22.0 29000
Rated voltage VAC Action voltage VAC (≤) Release Voltage VAC (≥) Coil resistance Ω ± 10%
6 4.8 1.2 7
12 9.6 2.4 19
24 19.2 4.8 80
48 38.4 9.6 400
110 88.0 22 1600
220
380
176.0
304.0
44
76
7300
21000 G
Note: The coil coil temperature parameter is value in 25℃.
4. Matching socket (optional)
Relay Model NJDC-12/2Z

Model of equipped socket CZF08A CZF08A-E
Socket Dimensions (mm) 52×41×21.5 52×41×21.5
Socket lead form Screw-type terminals (device type, Din-rail type)
Relay Mode NJDC-12/3Z
Model of equipped socket CZF11A CZF11A-E
Socket Dimensions (mm) 52×44×31 52×44×31
Socket lead forml Screw-type terminals (device type, Din-rail type)
5. Outside shape and mounting dimensions
Bottom wiring diagram (NJDC-12/2Z) Outside dimensions drawing (NJDC-12/2Z) Outside dimensions drawing (NJDC-12/3Z)
4 5 35max 35max
3 6
6 7 8 9
10
2 7
7
5
35max
35max
11
6
1 8
5
4
1
2 4 2
3 3
Bottom wiring diagram (NJDC-12/3Z)
52.5max
52.5max
5 7
4 8
67max
67max
3 9
2 10
1 11
8.9±0.15
8.9±0.15
NJDC-12 / 2Z 006 VDC
Relay Model Contact form Coil rated voltage VAC: AC

2Z: two sets of conversion DC (5 ~ 220) V VDC: DC
3Z: three sets of conversion AC (6 ~ 380) V
3. Technical data
Contact Arrangement 2C, 3C

Rated load (resistive) 10A/250VAC, 10A/30VDC
VAC 250
VDC 125
Max. switching current A 10
VA 2500
W 300
Electrical endurance Cycles(×103) 100
Machenical endurance Cycles(×106) 10
AC

6
12
24
JQX-10F Miniature Power Relay 36
48
80%Un 20%Un (80%~110%)Un 3VA
1. General 110
127
1.1 10A switching current
220
230
1.3 Wide range of coil ratings
380
1.4 Certificate: UL, CE
DC
2. Type designation
JQX-10F / 006 - 2Z voltage voltage out voltage range consumption
5
Contact arrangement: 2Z=2C; 3Z=3C
Coil type: ~= AC; - = DC

6
12
G
24
Coil voltage: DC: 6V~220V; AC: 6V~380V 36 75%Un 10%Un (75%~110%)Un 2W

48
Series 110
127
220
5. Characteristics

Operation time （25℃,rated voltage） ms ≤20
Release time （25℃,rated voltage） ms ≤20

Termination Plug-in
Dimension mm 35×35×52.5

Internal connection (bottom view) Dimensions
35max 35max
4 5
6 7 8 9
3 6
10
7
35max
35max
5
11
6
2 7
5
4
1
4 2
1 8 3 2 3
JQX-10F/2Z
52.5max
52.5max
6
5 7
4 8
67max
67max
3 9
2 10
1 11
JQX-10F/3Z
8.9±0.15
8.9±0.15
JQX-10F/2Z JQX-10F/3Z
3. Technical data

VAC 250
VDC 125
VA 2500
W 300
AC

6
12
24
JTX Miniature Power Relay 36
48
80%Un 20%Un (80%~110%)Un 3VA
1. General 110
127
220
230
1.3 Wide range of coil ratings 380
DC
2. Type designation
JTX - 2C / 006 VDC voltage voltage out voltage range consumption
5
Coil type: VDC/VAC
Coil voltage: DC: 6V~220V;

6
12
G
24
AC: 6V~380V 36 (75%~110%)Un
75%Un 10%Un 2W
Contact configuration: 2C; 3C 48

110
Series 127
220
5. Characteristics

Operation time （25℃,rated voltage） ms ≤20
Release time （25℃,rated voltage） ms ≤20

Termination Plug-in

35max 35max
6 7 8 9
4 5
10
7
35max
35max
5
11
6
3 6
5
4
1
2 4 2
3 3
2 7
1 8
JTX-2C 52.5max
52.5max
6
5 7
67max
67max
4 8
3 9
2 10
1 11
8.9±0.15
8.9±0.15
JTX-3C
JTX-2C JTX-3C
3. Technical data

VAC 250
VDC 125
VA 2500
W 300
AC

6
12
24
JMK Miniature Power Relay 36
48
80%Un 20%Un (80%~110%)Un 3VA
1. General 110
127
220
1.2 With indicator to be selected
230
1.3 Full range of AC and DC coil
380
DC
2. Type designation
JMK 2P-Ⅰ / 006 VDC voltage voltage out voltage range consumption
VDC/VAC
Coil voltage: DC: 6V~220V;

6
12
G
24
AC: 6V~380V 36 75%Un 10%Un (75%~110%)Un 2W
48
Contact configuration: 2P=2C;
110
3P=3C
127
Series 220
5. Characteristics

Operation time ms ≤20
Release time ms ≤20

Termination Plug-in

35max 35max
6 7 8 9
4 5
10
7
35max
35max
5
3 6
11
6
5
4
1
2 7
1
2 4 2
3 3
1 8
JMK2P-Ⅰ 52.5max
52.5max
67max
67max
6
5 7
4 8
3 9
2 10
1 11
8.9±0.15
8.9±0.15
JMK3P-Ⅰ
JMK2P-Ⅰ JMK3P-Ⅰ
NJX2 Miniature
Electro-Magnetic Relay
1. General
2Z and 3Z contact forms; contact switching current up to 10A;

complete AC and DC specifications; with test button functions; a
wide range of device sockets are available;
G

Relative humidity +25℃~95%
Operating position Upstanding or side mounting (The anchor is on the top)
3. Technical data
Contact form 2 Z(C), 3Z(C)

Contact load (resistive) 10A 250VAC/30VDC
Maximum switching current 10A
Maximum switching power 2500VA 300W
Electrical life (cycles) 1×10 5
Mechanical life (cycles) 1×10 7
3.2 Performance parameters

Between coil and contacts 1500VAC
Dielectric strength
Action time ≤20ms
Release time ≤20ms
Shock (stability) Acceleration 100m/s2 , pulse duration 11ms
Vibration Double amplitude 1mm, (10~55)Hz
Terminal form Plug-in type
35×35×53 (standard)
Overall dimensions (mm)
35×35×55 (with mechanical latching)
3.3 Coil parameters
Rated power consumption 2W, 3VA

Pull-in voltage DC: ≤80% rated voltage; AC: ≤80% rated voltage
Release voltage DC: ≥10% rated voltage; AC: ≥20% rated voltage
3.4 Coil specification
Rated voltage VDC Pull-in voltage VDC (≤) Release voltage VDC(≥) Coil resistance Ω
6 4.8 0.6 22×(1±10%)
12 9.6 1.2 80×(1±10%)
24 19.2 2.4 360×(1±10%)
48 38.4 4.8 1440×(1±15%)
110 88 11 7560×(1±15%)
220 176 22 29000×(1±15%)
Rated voltage VAC Pull-in voltage VAC (≤) Release voltage VAC(≥) Coil resistance Ω /(20℃)
6 4.8 1.2 7×(1±10%)
12 9.6 2.4 19×(1±10%)
24 19.2 4.8 80×(1±10%)
36 28.8 7.2 200×(1±10%)
48 38.4 9.6 400×(1±10%)
110 88 22 1600×(1±15%)
220 176 44 7300×(1±15%)
380 304 76 21000×(1±15%)
4. Matching Sockets (optional)
Relay model NJX2/2Z NJX2/2Z2 NJX2/3Z NJX2/3Z1 NJX2/3Z2

Matching socket model CZF08A CZF08A-E CZF11A CZF11A-E
Socket overall dimensions (mm) 52×41×21.5 52×44×31
Socket lead form Screw type terminal
CZF08A CZF08A-E CZF11A CZF11A-E
5 Outline and Installing Dimensions

2Z(standard) 2Z(with mechanical latching) 3Z(standard) 3Z(with mechanical latching)
8 9
35max
8 9
35max
7
35max
6 6
35max
7 7
7
8
6
5
1
5
2
1
4
4
5
3 2
3 2 3 2 4 3
55max
55max
53max
53max
53max
53max
G
8.9±0.15
8.9±0.15
8.9±0.15
8.9±0.15
6. Connection Diagram
NJX2/2Z NJX2/2Z2 NJX2/3Z NJX2/3Z1
4 5 6
4 5 5 7 6
5 7
3 6 4 8
3 6 4 8
3 9 3 9
2 7 2 7
2 10 2 10
1 8 1 8 1 11 1 11
The same mode of connection as The same mode of connection as The same mode of connection as The same mode of connection as
JTX-2C JQX-10F/2Z,JMK2P-I JTX-3C JMK3P-I
NJX2/3Z2 NJX2/2Z(D) NJX2/2Z2(D) NJX2/3Z(D)
5 4 5 6
6 4 5 7
5 7
3 6 3 6 4 8
4 8
3 9
3 9 2 7
2 7
2 10
2 10 1 8
1 8 1 11
1 11
+ + +
The same mode of connection as The same mode of connection as The same mode of connection as The same mode of connection as
JQX-10F/3Z JTX-2C JQX-10F/2Z,JMK2P-I JTX-3C
NJX2/3Z1(D) NJX2/3Z2(D)
6
6 5 7
5 7
4 8
4 8
3 9
3 9
2 10 2 10
1 11 1 11
+ +
The same mode of connection as The same mode of connection as
JMK3P-I JQX-10F/3Z
7. Order Example
NJX2 / 3Z 1 (D) AC220V
Relay model Contact form Leading-out Function code Coil voltage

NJX2 2Z: two terminal form none: standard AC6V DC6V
change-over none: standard mode (BS) : with mechanical AC12V DC12V
3Z: three of connection latching function AC24V DC24V
change-over 1: special mode (D) : with energization AC36V DC48V
of connection 1 indication function AC48V DC110V
2: special mode (J) : with mechanical AC110V DC220V
of connection 2 indication function AC230V
(2Z no special mode AC240V
of connection 1) AC220V
AC380V
NJX2/2Z2(BS) (D) (J) AC220V means relay rated control coil voltage is AC220V, the contact form is 2Z change-over, the mode of
connection of leading-out terminal is special mode of connection 2, with mechanical latching, energization indication and
mechanical indication functions.
2. Working conditions
Temperature Range -45℃~+65℃

Relative humidity Reaching 95% at +25℃
Service position Optional
3. Major parameters and technical performance

Contact form 1Z, 2Z, 3Z

Contact Ratings Surrounding Air
Electrical
Temperature
Rated Voltage/ Operating Load Type
(SAT)/Ambient
Rated Current Cycles
(℃)
277VAC/15A 100000 Resistive SAT 65
230VAC/1HP 6000 HP SAT 65
600VAC/6.8A 6000 GP SAT 65
28VDC/10A 100000 Resistive SAT 65
Mechanical endurance 2 million times
NJX3 3.2 Performance and characteristic parameters

Small-scale Electromagnetic Insulation resistance 1000MΩ (500VDC)
Relay Dielectric withstand Between contact coils: 2200VAC

voltage Between break contacts: 800VAC
Operate time
1. Scope of application ≤15ms
（25℃, rated voltage）
Release time
1.1 Three contact forms, namely 1Z, 2Z and 3Z; it has ≤15ms
（25℃, rated voltage）
the characteristics of small size, low power dissipation, big
Shock (stability) Acceleration 100m/s2 Pulse duration 11ms
load capacity, and high reliability. It's extensively used in
Vibration Double-amplitude 1mm, 10~55Hz
the HVAC industry for the control of industrial equipment
Leading-out terminal form Quick-connect terminal
such as condenser, compressor and air-conditioning. It needs
Overall dimension (mm) 64.3×34.5×57.2
G
no socket and realizes wire connection using quick-connect
terminals, which is flexible and convenient.
3.3 Coil parameters
1.2 Certificate: UL, CE.
Pull-in voltage ≤85% rated voltage
Release voltage ≥20% rated voltage
Peak voltage 110% rated voltage
3.4 Specification & Parameter
Rated voltage VAC Operate voltage ≤VAC Release voltage ≥VAC Coil resistance Ω
24 20.4 4.8 42× (1±10%)
Note:The coli coli temperrature parameter is value in 25 ℃
64.3 1Z
1.6
37.8
57.2±0.7
34.5
2×Φ5
4±0.7
54.8
64.3
2Z
1.6
37.8
57.2±0.7
34.5
2×Φ5
4±0.7
22.2±0.5
54.8
64.3
1.6
3Z
37.8
57.2±0.7
34.5
2×Φ5
4±0.7
22.2±0.5
54.8
A
Socket
CZF08A CZF08A-E(With finger safety protection)
52×41×21.5(mm) 52×41×21.5(mm)
2 1 8 7
2 1 8 7
CZF08A
52max
52max
33 33
35.4
35.4
2-M4×20 2-M4×20
2×Φ4
2×Φ4
CZF08A
CZF08A-E
3 4 5 6
3 4 5 6
33 21.5max 33 21.5max
41max 41max
Applicable relay type: JQX-10F/2Z, JTX-2C, JMK2P-I Applicable relay type: JQX-10F/2Z, JTX-2C, JMK2P-I
CZF11A CZF11A-E(With finger safety protection)
G
52×44×31(mm) 52×44×31(mm)
2 1 11 10 2 1 11 10
3 9
3 9
52max
52max
33
35.4
35.4
34
4
2-M4×20 2-M4×30
4 4
2×Φ4
CZF11A CZF11A-E
5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
33 31max 34 31max
41max 44max
Applicable relay type: JQX-10F/3Z, JTX-3C, JMK3P-I Applicable relay type: JQX-10F/3Z, JTX-3C, JMK3P-I
CZT08A-E(With finger safety protection) CZT08B-01(Wide type, copper strip connection)
79×29×33(mm) 68×30×28(mm)
2 1
4 3
4 3
2 1
19
35.4
68max
79max
68
35.4
68
4
CZT08A-E
2-M4×12
6 5
8 7
8 7
6 5
4.4 33max 26 28max

19 30max
29max
Applicable relay type: JQX-13F(B)/2Z, Applicable relay type: JQX-13F(B)/2Z,

NJX-13FW(B)/2Z, HH62P(-L), LY2(N) NJX-13FW(B)/2Z, HH62P(-L), LY2(N)
CZY08A-E(With finger safety protection) CZY11A-E(With finger safety protection)
72×23×31(mm) 72×30×31(mm)
4 1
3 2 1
8 5
6 5 4
15
22
72max
72max
35.4
59
59
35.4
59
59
CZY08A-E
2-M4×10 2-M4×10
CZY11A-E
12 9
9 8 7
14 13
11 10
4 4
15 31max 22 31max
30max
23max
Applicable relay type: JZX-22F(B)/2Z, Applicable relay type:JZX-22F(B)/3Z, NJX-13FW(B)/3ZS,

NJX-13FW(B)/2ZS, HH52P(-L), MY2(N) HH53P(L),MY3(N)
CZY14A-E(With finger safety protection) CZY08B-01(Wide type, copper strip connection)
72×30×31(mm) 63×30.5×26(mm)
3 2 1
8 5
8 7 6 5
4 1
22
72max
63max
35.4
59
59
35.4
4
CZY14A-E 2-M4×10
1 1
12 11 10 9 4 3
4 14 13 1
2 9
4
31max
22 25 26max
30max 30.5max
Applicable relay type:JZX-22F(B)/4Z, NJX-13FW(B)/4ZS, Applicable relay type:JZX-22F(B)/2Z, NJX-13FW(B)/2ZS,

HH54P(L),MY4(N) JZX-18F(L)/2Z, HH52P(L),MY2(N)
CZY11B (Copper strip connection) CZY14B (Copper strip connection)
G
63×30.5×26(mm) 63×30.5×26(mm)
6 5 4 8 7 6 5
3 2 1 4 3 2 1
63max
63max
35.4
35.4
4
1 1 1 1
1 0 4 3
1 1 1 9
9 8 7 2 1 0
25 26max 25 26max
30.5max 30.5max
Applicable relay type: JZX-22F(B)/3Z, NJX-13FW(B)/3ZS, Applicable relay type: JZX-22F(B)/4Z, NJX-13FW(B)/4ZS,
HH53P(L), MY3(N) HH54P(L), JZX-18F(L)/4Z, MY4(N)
CZY14B-E (With finger safety protection, copper strip connection)
63×30.5×26(mm)
8 7 6 5
4 3 2 1
63max
35.4
4
1 1
4 3
1 1 1 9
2 1 0
25 26max
30.5max
Applicable relay type: JZX-22F(B)/4Z, NJX-13FW(B)/4ZS,HH54P(L), JZX-18F(L)/4Z, MY4(N)
NG102 NG103
Applicable relay type: CZY□A series、CZT□A series Applicable relay type: CZY□B series、CZT□B series
2. Type designation
Coil rated voltage :

AC:(12~380)V;
DC: (6~220)V.
Number of poles: 1P,2P,3P,4P
Contact capacity: 16:16A 32:32A
Design sequence No.
Pulse relay
Company code
3. Normal operating conditions and mounting

conditions

Pollution degree 1
NJMC1 Pulse Relay Mounting position Any position

Environmental protection category Dustproof type
Overvoltage category Ⅱ
1. General
Contact switching current of up to 16A and 32A; a complete

4. Technical data
range of AC/DC specifications; NJMC1 pulse relay is a
mechanical bistable relay that changes the contact state by 4.1 Contact data
inputting pulse signals.
Contact form 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P
NJMC1-16:16A NJMC1-32:32A
Contact load (resistive)
250VC/28VDC 250VC/28VDC
Max. switching voltage 250VAC/125VDC
Max. switching current
NJMC1-16:16A
NJMC1-16:4000VA 448W
NJMC1-32:32A
NJMC1-32:8000VA 896W
G
Electrical life (times) 1×10 5

4.3 Characteristics data

Between contact & coil 1500VAC
Dielectric strength
Shock (resistance) Acceleration: 100m/s2, pulse duration: 11ms
Vibration 1mm double amplitude, (10~55)Hz
Mounting type Din rail type
Overall dimensions (mm) 86×70
4.4 Coil data
Pulse voltage duration ≥50ms (200ms is recommended)

Voltage range (85%~110%)Un

NJMC1-16/4P
70
35.5
18 18 36 36 86
1P 2P 3P 4P
NJMC1-32/2P
70
35.5
18 36 54 72 86
1P 2P 3P 4P
NCC2
Magnetic Latching Relay
1H, 1D contact form; the contact switching current can reach
90A; used in telecontrol, telemetry, communication, automatic
control, electromechanical integration and power and electronic
equipment, in particular in electronic watt-hour meter; applicable
standards: GB/T 21711.1, JB/T 10923, IEC 61810-1.
G
Relay model Coli rated voltage VDC Coli resistance±10% Coli rated voltage VAC Coli resistance±10%
6 5 12 5.5
12 19 24 23.5
24 75 48 100
NJMC1-16/1P/2P 48 300 130 705

110 1600 220 2100
127 2100 230 2100
220 6031 240 2100
380 6200
6 2.5 12 2.75
12 9.5 24 11.75
24 37.5 48 50
NJMC1-16/3P/4P 48 150 130 352.5

110 800 220 1050
127 1050 230 1050
220 3015.5 240 1050
380 3100
6 5 12 5.5
12 19 24 23.5
24 75 48 100
48 300 130 705
NJMC1-32/1P
110 1600 220 1500
127 2100 230 1500
220 6031 240 1500
380 6200
6 2.5 12 2.75
12 9.5 24 11.75
24 37.5 48 50
48 150 130 352.5
NJMC1-32/2P
110 800 220 750
127 1050 230 750
220 3015.5 240 750
380 3100
6 1.67 12 1.83
12 6.33 24 7.83
24 25 48 33.33
48 100 130 235
NJMC1-32/3P
110 533.33 220 500
127 700 230 500
220 2010.33 240 500
380 2066.67
6 1.25 12 1.375
12 4.75 24 5.875
24 18.75 48 25
48 75 130 176.25
NJMC1-32/4P
110 400 220 375
127 525 230 375
220 1507.75 240 375
380 1550

Connection diagram and sequence chart

G
2. Normal working conditions and installation

conditions
Temperature Range -40°C~+70°C

Relative humidity +20°C, reaching 95%
Service position Any position
3. Major parameters and technical performance
Contact form 1H (A), 1D (B)

Initial contact resistance ≤1mΩ
Contact load (resistive) 90A/250VAC
Maximum switching voltage 250VAC
Maximum switching current 90A
Maximum switching power 22500VA
Electrical endurance (times) 6×103
Mechanical endurance (times) 3×105
3.2 Performance and characteristic parameters
Insulation resistance 1000MΩ (500VDC)
Dielectric withstand Between contact coils 4000VAC

voltage Between break contacts 1500VAC
Operate time （25℃,rated voltage） ≤20ms
Release time （25℃,rated voltage） ≤20ms
Peak acceleration 150m/s2,
Shock (stability)
pulse duration 11ms
60Hzuniform amplitude
Vibration
0.075mm，10~150Hz
Leading-out terminal
Printed panel
form
Overall dimension NCC2-80:43x34x22,

(mm) NCC2-90:39x32x18
3.3 Coil parameters
Rated dissipation One coil: 1.5W; double coil: 3W

Operate voltage ≤80%rated voltage
Operate time ≤20ms
Recommended pulsed voltage width (100〜300) ms
3.4 Specification & Parameter
One coil
Rated voltage VDC Action voltage VDC (≤) Coil resistance Ω ± 10%
5 4 16.6
6 4.8 24
9 7.2 54
12 9.6 96
24 19.2 384
48 38.4 1536
Double coil
Rated voltage VDC Action voltage VDC (≤) Coil resistance Ω ± 10%
5 4 2x8.3
6 4.8 2x12
9 7.2 2x27
12 9.6 2x48
24 19.2 2x192
48 38.4 2x768
43max 22max
32max
34max
39max
G
13.5±0.5
29±0.5
29±0.5
18max
21±0.7
NCC2-90
NCC2-80
Note: The overall dimension can be customized according to the actual requirements of customers.
NCC2 - 80 / 9VDC
Relay model Contact capacity Number of Rated voltage of the

80：80A contact sets coil (VDC):
90：90A No: one set 5,6,9,12,24,48
2: two sets
3: three sets
LV Capacitor
Self-heating Shunt Capacitor
BZMJ BKMJ NWC1 NWC5
NWC6
Page P-017
Intelligent Reactive Power Compensation Controller
JKF8 NWK1-GR

P-001 LV Capacitor BZMJ
2. Type designation
B Z M J □-□-□
Number of phase
Rated capacity (kvar)

Rated voltage (kV)
Capacitor series
3.2 Relative humidity: ≤50% at 40℃, ≤90% at 20℃
3.4 Environmental conditions:

without dangerous gas & steam,insulated and explosive
dustand dramatic mechanical vibration.
BZMJ Self-healing 4. Technical data
Shunt Capacitor 4.1 Rated voltage: AC(0.23~1.0)kV;
4.2 Rated frequency: 50Hz or 60Hz;

1. General 4.3 Rated capacity: 1~60Kvar;
1.1 Electric ratings: ≤AC1000V;
4.4 Capacity error: -5~+10%;
1.2 Application: For improvement of power factor
4.5 Dielectric loss tangent value:
and power quality;
≤30kvar tgs≤0.0012
1.3 Standards: IEC/EN 60831-1:2014 IEC/EN 60831-2:2014. ＞30kvar tgs≤0.0015
at rated power frequecy voltage;
4.6 Max. Allowed over-voltage: 1.1Un;
4.7 Max. Allowed over-current: 1.3In (1.6 In, 2h/24h; 2.0 In,
30min/24h);
4.8 Having Self-discharging property: power off,

voltage reduces from 2 Un to 75V and below within 3min;
4.9 Specific data;
4.10 Inrush current: 200In;
4.11 Withstand voltage: interelectrode, power frequency 2.15UN,

10s;
4.12 Withstand voltage: pole-to-case, power frequency 3.6kV,

60s;
4.13 Losses : ≤0.3W/kvar.

BZMJ LV Capacitor P-002
Main product models and data sheet
Serial Type and Rated Rated Rated Rated Rated Enclosure

voltage capacity frequency capacitor current height Figure
number Specification (kV) (kvar) (Hz) (μF) (A) (mm)
BZMJ 0.23-1-3 0.23 5 50/60 60.2/50.1 2.5 95 Fig.1

1
2 BZMJ 0.23-3-3 0.23 6 50/60 181/150 7.5 140 Fig.1
3 BZMJ 0.23-5-3 0.23 5 50/60 301/251 12.5 140 Fig.1
4 BZMJ 0.23-6-3 0.23 6 50/60 361/301 15.1 190 Fig.1
5 BZMJ 0.23-7.5-3 0.23 7.5 50/60 451/376 18.8 190 Fig.1
6 BZMJ 0.23-10-3 0.23 10 50/60 602/502 25.1 195 Fig.2
7 BZMJ 0.23-12-3 0.23 12 50/60 722/602 30.1 220 Fig.2
8 BZMJ 0.23-15-3 0.23 15 50/60 903/753 37.7 250 Fig.2
9 BZMJ 0.23-20-3 0.23 20 50/60 1203/1003 50.2 295 Fig.2
10 BZMJ 0.23-30-3 0.23 30 50/60 1805/1504 75.3 315 Fig.3
11 BZMJ 0.4-3-3 0.4 3 50 60 4.3 95 Fig.1
12 BZMJ 0.4-5-3 0.4 5 50 99 7.2 95 Fig.1
13 BZMJ 0.4-6-3 0.4 6 50 119 8.7 120 Fig.1
14 BZMJ 0.4-7.5-3 0.4 7.5 50 149 10.8 120 Fig.1
15 BZMJ 0.4-8-3 0.4 8 50 159 11.5 120 Fig.1
16 BZMJ 0.4-10-3 0.4 10 50 199 14.4 140 Fig.1
17 BZMJ 0.4-12-3 0.4 12 50 239 17.3 190 Fig.1
18 BZMJ 0.4-14-3 0.4 14 50 279 20.2 190 Fig.1
19 BZMJ 0.4-15-3 0.4 15 50 298 21.7 190 Fig.1
20 BZMJ 0.4-16-3 0.4 16 50 318 23.1 190 Fig.1
21 BZMJ 0.4-18-3 0.4 18 50 358 26.0 220 Fig.1
22 BZMJ 0.4-20-3 0.4 20 50 398 28.9 220 Fig.1
23 BZMJ 0.4-25-3 0.4 25 50 497 36.1 220 Fig.2
24 BZMJ 0.4-30-3 0.4 30 50 597 43.3 250 Fig.2

25 BZMJ 0.4-40-3 0.4 40 50 796 57.7 250 Fig.3
26 BZMJ 0.4-50-3 0.4 50 50 995 72.2 315 Fig.3
27 BZMJ 0.4-60-3 0.4 60 50 1194 86.6 315 Fig.3
28 BZMJ 0.45-3-3 0.45 3 50 47 3.8 120 Fig.1
29 BZMJ 0.45-5-3 0.45 5 50 79 6.4 120 Fig.1

30 Fig.1
BZMJ 0.45-6-3 0.45 6 50 94 7.7 120
31 BZMJ 0.45-7.5-3 0.45 7.5 50 118 9.6 120 Fig.1
32 Fig.1
BZMJ 0.45-8-3 0.45 8 50 126 10.3 120
33
34
BZMJ 0.45-10-3
BZMJ 0.45-12-3
0.45
0.45
10
12
50
50
157
189
12.8
15.4
140
190
Fig.1
Fig.1
H
35 BZMJ 0.45-14-3 0.45 14 50 220 18.0 190 Fig.1
36 Fig.1
BZMJ 0.45-15-3 0.45 15 50 236 19.2 190
37 BZMJ 0.45-16-3 0.45 16 50 252 20.5 190 Fig.1
38 Fig.1
BZMJ 0.45-18-3 0.45 18 50 283 23.1 220
39 BZMJ 0.45-20-3 0.45 20 50 314 25.7 220 Fig.1
40 Fig.2
BZMJ 0.45-25-3 0.45 25 50 393 32.1 220
41 BZMJ 0.45-30-3 0.45 30 50 472 38.5 250 Fig.2
42 Fig.3
BZMJ 0.45-40-3 0.45 40 50 629 51.3 250
43 BZMJ 0.45-50-3 0.45 50 50 786 64.2 315 Fig.3
44 Fig.3
BZMJ 0.45-60-3 0.45 60 50 943 77.0 315
45 BZMJ 0.525-5-3 0.525 5 50 58 5.5 120 Fig.1
46 BZMJ 0.525-10-3 0.525 10 50 115 11.0 140 Fig.1

47 BZMJ 0.525-15-3 0.525 15 50 173 16.5 190 Fig.1
48 BZMJ 0.525-20-3 0.525 20 50 231 22.0 220 Fig.1

49 BZMJ 0.525-25-3 0.525 25 50 289 27.5 220 Fig.2
50 BZMJ 0.525-30-3 0.525 30 50 346 33.0 250 Fig.2
51 BZMJ 0.525-40-3 0.525 40 50 462 44.0 250 Fig.3
BZMJ 0.525-50-3 0.525 50 50 577 55.0 315 Fig.3
BZMJ 0.525-60-3 0.525 60 50 693 66.0 315 Fig.3

P-003 LV Capacitor BZMJ
Type and Rated Rated Rated Rated Rated Enclosure

Serial capacitor
voltage capacity frequency current height Figure
52 BZMJ 0.69-5-3 0.69 5 50 33 4.2 95 Fig.1
53 BZMJ 0.69-10-3 0.69 10 50 67 8.4 140 Fig.1
54 BZMJ 0.69-15-3 0.69 15 50 100 12.6 190 Fig.1
55 BZMJ 0.69-20-3 0.69 20 50 134 16.7 220 Fig.1
56 BZMJ 0.69-25-3 0.69 25 50 167 20.9 220 Fig.2
57 BZMJ 0.69-30-3 0.69 30 50 201 25.1 250 Fig.2
58 BZMJ 0.69-40-3 0.69 40 50 267 33.5 250 Fig.3
59 BZMJ 0.69-50-3 0.69 50 50 334 41.8 315 Fig.3
60 BZMJ 0.69-60-3 0.69 60 50 401 50.2 315 Fig.3
61 BZMJ 1.14-10-3 1.14 10 50 25 5.1 220 Fig.1
62 BZMJ 1.14-15-3 1.14 15 50 37 7.6 250 Fig.2
63 BZMJ 0.4-7.5-3YN 0.4 7.5 50 149 10.8 195 Fig.2*
64 BZMJ 0.4-10-3YN 0.4 10 50 199 14.4 195 Fig.2*
65 BZMJ 0.4-15-3YN 0.4 15 50 298 21.7 250 Fig.2*
66 BZMJ 0.4-20-3YN 0.4 20 50 398 28.9 295 Fig.2*
Note: The specifications marked with “ *“ are used for compensating the individual phase,the bigger one of the four terminals should be connected to the neutral line.
5. Features 6. Note
5.1 Compact design and reliable quality thanks to advanced 6.1 Please guarantee that the capacitors are operated
technology and excellent imported material; under specified conditions,including the proper temperature,
5.2 Available for use in places with higher ambient temperature voltage and current, as over-voltage and over-current
and voltage variation; may shorten the life of the capacitor;
5.3 Having good sealing properties; amd outgoing terminals for 6.2 Please pay attention to the points following
convenient wiring and reliable connection; when the capacitor is shuntly connected in the system
5.4 Fixed type, convenient for mounting and elegant appearance a. For the system of current regulating system
due to novel mounting pins; and the electric equipments system,
5.5 No painting thanks to coated metal Enclosure used. the capacitor should not be directly connected;
b. Operational current of the capacitor should be less
than the off-load current of the shuntly connected motor;
c. When the transformer is off-load,the capacitor should
stop operating.
6.3 Specific switches, contactors and over-current relays
should be adopted when the capacitor is
shuntly connected in the system.

Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
28 28
25 25 25 25
37
30
30
H
H
7×10 boring
7×10 boring 7×10 boring
78
37
56
50
70
64
110
70
93
160 178
180 206 210
198
224 260
274
BKMJ LV Capacitor P-004
2. Type designation
B K M J □-□-□
Number of phase
Rated voltage (kV)
Medium code (metalized polypropylene film)
Filling material code (K-dry type flame retardant material)
Serial code (B means shunt capacitor)
Note: The split phase compensation capacitor model is the product with suffix YN.
For example, BKMJ 0.4-15-3YN means the line voltage is 400V, three-phase
aggregate capacity is 15kvar, and the product inside is of star connection, zero
conductor N is led out.
3.1 Ambient air temperature: -25℃~+50℃ (-25/C), -40℃~+55℃

customizable;
BKMJ Dry Type Low-voltage
3.2 Relative humidity: ≤50% at 40℃; ≤90% at 20℃;
Shunt Capacitor
3.3 Altitude:≤2000m. When it is higher than 2000m, please
increase the capacitor’s rated voltage for derating use, and
increase the mounting spacing and do well ventilation and heat
BKMJ dry type low-voltage shunt capacitor is applied in nominal emission;
voltage 1000V and below power frequency AC power system for 3.4 Ambient conditions: no harmful gas and steam, no
the purpose of raising the power factor, reducing the line loss conductive or explosive dust, no violent mechanical vibration.
and improving the voltage quality. Filled with dry type flame 4. Main Technical Parameters and Technical
retardant material; it is safe and reliable with small product size
Performance
4.1 Main technical parameters
and convenient installation.
Executed standard: IEC/EN 60831-1:2014 IEC/EN 60831-2:2014.
H
P-005 LV Capacitor BKMJ

voltage capacity frequency capacitor current height Figure
1 BKMJ 0.4-3-3 0.4 3 50 60 4.3 95 Fig.1
2 BKMJ 0.4-5-3 0.4 5 50 99 7.2 95 Fig.1
3 BKMJ 0.4-7.5-3 0.4 7.5 50 149 10.8 120 Fig.1
4 BKMJ 0.4-10-3 0.4 10 50 199 14.4 140 Fig.1
5 BKMJ 0.4-15-3 0.4 15 50 298 21.7 190 Fig.1
6 BKMJ 0.4-16-3 0.4 16 50 318 23.1 190 Fig.1
7 BKMJ 0.4-20-3 0.4 20 50 398 28.9 220 Fig.1
8 BKMJ 0.4-25-3 0.4 25 50 497 36.1 220 Fig.2
9 BKMJ 0.4-30-3 0.4 30 50 597 43.3 250 Fig.2
10 BKMJ 0.4-40-3 0.4 40 50 796 57.7 250 Fig.3
11 BKMJ 0.4-50-3 0.4 50 50 995 72.7 315 Fig.3
12 BKMJ 0.4-60-3 0.4 60 50 1194 86.6 315 Fig.3
13 BKMJ 0.45-3-3 0.45 3 50 47 3.8 95 Fig.1
14 BKMJ 0.45-5-3 0.45 5 50 79 6.4 95 Fig.1
15 BKMJ 0.45-7.5-3 0.45 7.5 50 118 9.6 120 Fig.1
16 BKMJ 0.45-10-3 0.45 10 50 157 12.8 140 Fig.1
17 BKMJ 0.45-15-3 0.45 15 50 236 19.2 190 Fig.1
18 BKMJ 0.45-16-3 0.45 16 50 252 20.5 190 Fig.1
19 BKMJ 0.45-20-3 0.45 20 50 314 25.7 220 Fig.1
20 BKMJ 0.45-25-3 0.45 25 50 393 32.1 220 Fig.2
21 BKMJ 0.45-30-3 0.45 30 50 472 38.5 250 Fig.2
22 BKMJ 0.45-40-3 0.45 40 50 629 51.3 250 Fig.3
23 BKMJ 0.45-50-3 0.45 50 50 786 64.2 315 Fig.3
24 BKMJ 0.45-60-3 0.45 60 50 943 77.0 315 Fig.3
25 BKMJ 0.525-3-3 0.525 3 50 35 3.3 95 Fig.1
26 BKMJ 0.525-5-3 0.525 5 50 58 5.5 95 Fig.1
27 BKMJ 0.525-7.5-3 0.525 7.5 50 87 8.2 120 Fig.1
28 BKMJ 0.525-10-3 0.525 10 50 115 11.0 140 Fig.1
29 BKMJ 0.525-15-3 0.525 15 50 173 16.5 190 Fig.1
30 BKMJ 0.525-16-3 0.525 16 50 185 17.6 190 Fig.1
31 BKMJ 0.525-20-3 0.525 20 50 231 22.0 220 Fig.1
32 BKMJ 0.525-25-3 0.525 25 50 289 27.5 220 Fig.2
33 BKMJ 0.525-30-3 0.525 30 50 346 33.0 250 Fig.2
34 BKMJ 0.525-40-3 0.525 40 50 462 44.0 250 Fig.3
35 BKMJ 0.525-50-3 0.525 50 50 577 55.0 315 Fig.3
36 BKMJ 0.525-60-3 0.525 60 50 693 66.0 315 Fig.3
37 BKMJ 0.69-5-3 0.69 5 50 33 4.2 95 Fig.1
38 BKMJ 0.69-7.5-3 0.69 7.5 50 50 6.3 120 Fig.1
39 BKMJ 0.69-10-3 0.69 10 50 67 8.4 140 Fig.1
40 BKMJ 0.69-15-3 0.69 15 50 100 12.6 190 Fig.1
41 BKMJ 0.69-20-3 0.69 20 50 134 16.7 220 Fig.1
42 BKMJ 0.69-25-3 0.69 25 50 167 20.9 220 Fig.2
43 BKMJ 0.69-30-3 0.69 30 50 201 25.1 250 Fig.2
44 BKMJ 0.69-40-3 0.69 40 50 267 33.5 250 Fig.3
45 BKMJ 0.69-50-3 0.69 50 50 334 41.8 315 Fig.3
46 BKMJ 0.69-60-3 0.69 60 50 401 50.2 315 Fig.3
47 BKMJ 1.20-10-3 1.20 10 50 22 4.8 190 Fig.1
48 BKMJ 1.20-15-3 1.20 15 50 33 7.2 250 Fig.2
49 BKMJ 1.20-20-3 1.20 20 50 44 9.6 250 Fig.2
50 BKMJ 1.20-30-3 1.20 30 50 66 14.4 315 Fig.3
51 BKMJ 1.20-40-3 1.20 40 50 88 19.2 315 Fig.3
52 BKMJ 0.4-5-3YN 0.4 5 50 99 7.6 140 Fig.2*
53 BKMJ 0.4-7.5-3YN 0.4 7.5 50 149 10.8 195 Fig.2*
54 BKMJ 0.4-10-3YN 0.4 10 50 199 14.4 195 Fig.2*
55 BKMJ 0.4-15-3YN 0.4 15 50 298 21.7 250 Fig.2*
56 BKMJ 0.4-20-3YN 0.4 20 50 398 28.9 295 Fig.2*
57 BKMJ 0.4-25-3YN 0.4 25 50 497 36.1 315 Fig.3*
58 BKMJ 0.4-30-3YN 0.4 30 50 597 43.3 315 Fig.3*
59 BKMJ 0.45-5-3YN 0.45 5 50 99 7.6 140 Fig.2*
60 BKMJ 0.45-7.5-3YN 0.45 7.5 50 118 9.6 195 Fig.2*
Notes: 1. The single-phase product may be custom-made. When rated voltage is lower than 800VAC, the overall dimensions of single-phase product are the same as those
of three-phase product with the same specification;
2. System voltage 127V/220V, grid frequency 60Hz, please select the product of rated voltage 0.23kV or 0.25kV, frequency 60Hz;
3. The product with “*” is of split-phase compensation capacitor; the product has four connecting terminals of star connection, in which the isolated terminal is
connected with the zero conductor N.
5. Main Features and Precautions for Use
5.1 Main features
5.1.1 Advanced import production equipment, good metalized polypropylene film, small product size, reliable quality.
5.1.2 Use safety: The product is filled with dry type flame retardant material and installed with the over-pressure protection device and
self-discharge device, and is characterized by being free of oil, environmental friendly, corrosion proof, explosion proof, good safety
and avoiding the product oil leakage and other hazards.
5.1.3 Applicable environment: applicable for all industrial users and places with high fire rating.
5.1.4 Convenient installation and use: The plastic mounting feet are first inserted from the bottom, and then the product is fixed and
installed using screws; it may be installed vertically or horizontally.
5.1.5 BKMJ series products have good materials selected with certain design margin and long use life.
5.1.6 The external installing dimensions of BKMJ series products are the same as those of our BZMJ series, easy for product maintenance
and replacement.
5.2 Precautions for use
5.2.1 Type selection of three-phase capacitor:
Grid system voltage (V) Capacitor rated voltage (kV) User grid frequency 60 Hz
127/220 0.23/0.25 0.25kV-50 Hz or 0.23kV-60Hz product may be selected
220/380 0.4/0.45/0.525 0.45kV/0.525kV-50 Hz or 0.4kV-60Hz product may be selected
660 0.69/0.75 0.75kV-50 Hz or 0.69kV-60Hz product may be selected
5.2.2 Over-voltage and overheating will shorten the capacitor life. At the tropical or high-altitude region, please recommend the selection
of products with higher rated voltage according to the grid system voltage.
5.2.3 When the system is installed with the shunt capacitor, it should pay attention to:
a. Harmonic current amplification is the main cause for capacitor damage. Common harmonic sources include: power electronic
devices, frequency converters (energy conservation transformation, such as motor speed control, inverter air conditioner), DC rectifier,
inverter, electrolytic plating equipment, electric arc furnace, intermediate frequency furnace, etc. Under the harmonic environment,
please refer to the following table for the capacitor type selection and harmonic suppression measures:
Harmonic source power/transformer capacity

Product type selection
Harmonic voltage resultant distortion factor

NLL≤10%
THDu≤3%
NLL≤20%
3%<THDu≤5%
20%≤NLL≤40%
THDu>5%
H
Capacitor rated voltage 0.4kV, 0.45kV 0.45kV, 0.48kV 0.525 kV
Harmonic suppression measures No need Proposed series reactor 7% Proposed series reactor 7% or 14%
Note: The harmonic power ratio NLL means the ratio of the sum of load power generating harmonic to the distribution transformer capacity. When the harmonic power ratio
NLL is >40%, it must be installed with CKSG series reactor or take the harmonic suppression measures.
b. In the AC 380V grid system, when the capacitor is in front series connection with the reactor, the capacitor’s rated voltage is selected
as follows:
When the reactance ratio of the reactor is 6% or 7%, the capacitor’s rated voltage should have 0.45kV or 0.48kV selected;
When the reactance ratio of the reactor is 12% or 14%, the capacitor’s rated voltage should have 0.525kV selected;
Reactor model selection: The reactor’s rated capacity is calculated according to the formula QC×reactance ratio (%). For example, the
capacitor BKMJ0.48-30-3 is equipped with the reactor with 7% of reactance ratio, the model of series reactor is CKSG-2.1/0.48-7%).
c. When the motor is in permanent connection with the shunt capacitor, the capacitor’s running current should be not more than 90% of
the motor’s no-load current.
d. When the transformer is of no load, it should ensure the capacitor is out of service to prevent overcompensation.
P-007 LV Capacitor BKMJ
5.2.4 To ensure normal use of the capacitor, the capacitor circuit should have short-circuit, over-pressure, over-current protections and
surge current stopping device (like series reactor or CJ19 special switch contactor).
5.2.5 To disconnect the capacitor power supply, the short-circuit discharge must be done before it can be contacted or tested.
5.2.6 The capacitor terminals and conductors should be in good connection. The current-carrying capacity of the connecting conductor
should be 1.43times higher than the capacitor’s rated current.
Product’s rated voltage (kV) Capacity range (kvar) Conductor section area (mm 2)
0.4, 0.45 ≤10 4.0
0.4, 0.45 12~20 6.0
0.4, 0.45 24~32 10.0
0.4, 0.45 35~50 16.0
0.4, 0.45 60 25.0
5.2.7 The capacitor’s top should keep more than 20mm of distance from other components; the capacitor’s mounting spacing should
not be less than 30mm, when the altitude is higher than 2000mm, the mounting spacing should not be less than 80mm.
5.2.8 When the capacitor is in fault or its life expires, the product’s internal over-pressure protective device will burst, playing a role of
explosion protection; in such case, the shell side will slightly bulge, and the capacitor manifests failure. The user is requested to
regularly test the capacitor’s operating voltage and operating current to fulfill prompt maintenance or replacement.
6. Outline and Installing Dimensions: Fig.1
25 25
30
7×10longkidney
-shapedhole
37
56
64
H
160
180
198
Fig.2
25 25
30
7×10 boring
H
78
50
70
178
206
224
Fig.3
28 28
7×10longkidney
37
-shapedhole
110
93
70
H
210
260
274
7. Order Instructions
7.1 The user should provide the product’s rated voltage, rated capacity, frequency, number of phases and other parameters.
7.2 The user should provide as much as possible some features of the use place, such as environmental conditions and grid quality.
For example, BKMJ 0.45-30-3 10units
Ordering 10 BKMJ capacitors with rated voltage 450V, rated capacity 30kavr and 3 phases.
H
P-009 LV Capacitor NWC1
2. Type designation
N W C 1 □-□-□ □
L: with inductor
Number of phase: 3: 3-ph; 1: 1-ph
Rated capacity Qn (kvar)
Rated voltage Un (kV)
Capacitor series
3.4 Environmental conditions:

without dangerous gas & steam,
NWC1 Self-healing insulated and explosive dust

and dramatic mechanical vibration.
Shunt Capacitor
4. Technical data
1. General
4.1 Rated voltage: 0.4, 0.415, 0.45, 0.525 and 0.69kV
1.1 Electric ratings: ≤AC1000V;
4.2 Rated frequency: 50Hz or 60Hz.
1.2 Application: For improvement of power factor
and power quality; 4.3 Rated capacity: 5~100Kvar
1.3 Standards: IEC/EN 60831-1:2014 IEC/EN 60831-2:2014.
4.5 Dielectric loss tangent value:

≤30kvar tgs≤0.0012
＞30kvar tgs≤0.0015
at rated power frequency voltage.
4.6 Max. allowed over-voltage: 1.1Un, not exceed 8h in 24h;
4.7 Max. allowed over-current: 1.3In;

voltage reduces from√2 Un (DC) to 75V
and below within 3min.
4.9 Model and Specifications
4.10 Inrush current: 200 In;
4.11 Withstand voltage: interelectrode, power frequency 2.15UN,

10s;
4.12 Withstand voltage: pole-to-case, power frequency 3.6kV,

60s;
4.13 Losses : ≤0.3W/kvar;
4.14 Expected life：≥170,000 h.

NWC1 LV Capacitor P-010

voltage capacity frequency capacitor current height Fig.ure
1 NWC1-0.4-5-3 0.4 5 50 99 7.2 160 Fig.1
2 NWC1-0.4-6-3 0.4 6 50 119 8.7 160 Fig.1
3 NWC1-0.4-7.5-3 0.4 7.5 50 149 10.8 160 Fig.1
4 NWC1-0.4-8-3 0.4 8 50 159 11.5 160 Fig.1
5 NWC1-0.4-10-3 0.4 10 50 199 14.4 160 Fig.1
6 NWC1-0.4-12-3 0.4 12 50 239 17.3 220 Fig.1
7 NWC1-0.4-14-3 0.4 14 50 279 20.2 220 Fig.1
8 NWC1-0.4-15-3 0.4 15 50 298 21.7 220 Fig.1
9 NWC1-0.4-16-3 0.4 16 50 318 23.1 220 Fig.1
10 NWC1-0.4-18-3 0.4 18 50 358 26.0 260 Fig.1
11 NWC1-0.4-20-3 0.4 20 50 398 28.9 260 Fig.1
12 NWC1-0.4-24-3 0.4 24 50 477 34.6 230 Fig.2
13 NWC1-0.4-25-3 0.4 25 50 497 36.1 230 Fig.2
14 NWC1-0.4-30-3 0.4 30 50 597 43.3 230 Fig.2
15 NWC1-0.4-35-3 0.4 35 50 696 50.5 270 Fig.2
16 NWC1-0.4-40-3 0.4 40 50 796 57.7 270 Fig.2
17 NWC1-0.45-5-3 0.45 5 50 79 6.4 160 Fig.1
18 NWC1-0.45-6-3 0.45 6 50 94 7.7 160 Fig.1
19 NWC1-0.45-7.5-3 0.45 7.5 50 118 9.6 160 Fig.1
20 NWC1-0.45-8-3 0.45 8 50 126 10.3 160 Fig.1
21 NWC1-0.45-10-3 0.45 10 50 157 12.8 160 Fig.1
22 NWC1-0.45-12-3 0.45 12 50 189 15.4 220 Fig.1
23 NWC1-0.45-14-3 0.45 14 50 220 18.0 220 Fig.1
24 NWC1-0.45-15-3 0.45 15 50 236 19.2 220 Fig.1
25 NWC1-0.45-16-3 0.45 16 50 252 20.5 220 Fig.1
26 NWC1-0.45-18-3 0.45 18 50 283 23.1 260 Fig.1
27 NWC1-0.45-20-3 0.45 20 50 314 25.7 260 Fig.1
28 NWC1-0.45-24-3 0.45 24 50 377 30.8 230 Fig.2
29 NWC1-0.45-25-3 0.45 25 50 393 32.1 230 Fig.2
30 NWC1-0.45-30-3 0.45 30 50 472 38.5 230 Fig.2
31 NWC1-0.45-35-3 0.45 35 50 550 44.9 270 Fig.2
32
33
NWC1-0.45-40-3
NWC1-0.525-5-3
0.45
0.525
40
5
50
50
629
58
51.3
5.5
270
160
Fig.2
Fig.1 H
34 NWC1-0.525-6-3 0.525 6 50 69 6.6 160 Fig.1
35 NWC1-0.525-7.5-3 0.525 7.5 50 87 8.2 160 Fig.1
36 NWC1-0.525-8-3 0.525 8 50 92 8.8 160 Fig.1
37 NWC1-0.525-10-3 0.525 10 50 115 11.0 160 Fig.1

38 NWC1-0.525-12-3 0.525 12 50 139 13.2 220 Fig.1
39 NWC1-0.525-14-3 0.525 14 50 162 15.4 220 Fig.1
40 NWC1-0.525-15-3 0.525 15 50 173 16.5 220 Fig.1
41 NWC1-0.525-16-3 0.525 16 50 185 17.6 220 Fig.1
42 NWC1-0.525-18-3 0.525 18 50 208 19.8 260 Fig.1
43 NWC1-0.525-20-3 0.525 20 50 231 22.0 260 Fig.1
44 NWC1-0.525-24-3 0.525 24 50 277 26.4 230 Fig.2
45 NWC1-0.525-25-3 0.525 25 50 289 27.5 230 Fig.2
46 NWC1-0.525-30-3 0.525 30 50 346 33.0 230 Fig.2
47 NWC1-0.525-35-3 0.525 35 50 404 38.5 270 Fig.2
48 NWC1-0.525-40-3 0.525 40 50 462 44.0 270 Fig.2


voltage capacity frequency capacitor current height Fig.ure
49 NWC1-0.69-5-3 0.69 5 50 33 4.2 160 Fig.1
50 NWC1-0.69-6-3 0.69 6 50 40 5.0 160 Fig.1
51 NWC1-0.69-7.5-3 0.69 7.5 50 50 6.3 160 Fig.1
52 NWC1-0.69-8-3 0.69 8 50 53 6.7 160 Fig.1
53 NWC1-0.69-10-3 0.69 10 50 67 8.4 160 Fig.1
54 NWC1-0.69-12-3 0.69 12 50 80 10.0 220 Fig.1
55 NWC1-0.69-14-3 0.69 14 50 94 11.7 220 Fig.1
56 NWC1-0.69-15-3 0.69 15 50 100 12.6 220 Fig.1
57 NWC1-0.69-16-3 0.69 16 50 107 13.4 220 Fig.1
58 NWC1-0.69-18-3 0.69 18 50 120 15.1 260 Fig.1
59 NWC1-0.69-20-3 0.69 20 50 134 16.7 260 Fig.1
60 NWC1-0.69-24-3 0.69 24 50 160 20.1 230 Fig.2
61 NWC1-0.69-25-3 0.69 25 50 167 20.9 230 Fig.2
62 NWC1-0.69-30-3 0.69 30 50 201 25.1 230 Fig.2
63 NWC1-0.69-35-3 0.69 35 50 234 29.3 270 Fig.2
64 NWC1-0.69-40-3 0.69 40 50 267 33.5 270 Fig.2
65 NWC1-0.4-50-3 0.4 50 50 995 72.2 300 Fig.3
66 NWC1-0.4-60-3 0.4 60 50 1194 86.6 300 Fig.3
67 NWC1-0.4-80-3 0.4 80 50 1591 115.5 300 Fig.4
68 NWC1-0.4-100-3 0.4 100 50 1990 144.3 300 Fig.4
69 NWC1-0.45-50-3 0.45 50 50 786 64.2 300 Fig.3
70 NWC1-0.45-60-3 0.45 60 50 943 77 300 Fig.3
71 NWC1-0.45-80-3 0.45 80 50 1258 102.6 300 Fig.4
72 NWC1-0.45-100-3 0.45 100 50 1573 128.0 300 Fig.4
5. Notices
5.1 Please guarantee that the capacitors are operated under specified conditions, including the proper temperature,
voltage and current, as overvoltageand over-current may shorten the life of the capacitor;
5.2 Please pay attention to the points following when the capacitor is shuntly connected in the system
a. For the system of current regulating system and the electric equipments system,
the capacitor should not be directly connected;
b. Operational current of the capacitor should be less than the off-load current of the shuntly connected motor;
c. When the transformer is off-load, the capacitor should stop operating.
5.3 Specific switches, contactors and over-current relays should be adopted when the capacitor is shuntly connected in the system.

Figure 1
25 25
47
H+30
H
206
224
194 67
Figure 2
28 28
Φ12×16
H+41
H
224
254
194 132
Figure 3
80 80
3-M12
Φ 12X20 H
300
375
350
380
320 132
Figure 3
80 80
Φ 12X20
375
300
350
380
196
320
On ordering, please clarify rated voltage, capacity, number of phase, frequency, etc of the products;
and associated conditions at the mounting place.
2. Type designation
N W C 5 □-□-□
Number of phase: 3: 3-ph
Rated capacity Qn (kVar)
Rated voltage Un (kV)
Capacitor series
3.4 Environmental conditions: without dangerous gas & steam,

insulated and explosive dust and dramatic mechanical
vibration.
NWC5 Self-healing 4. Technical data

Shunt Capacitor 4.1 Rated voltage: 0.23, 0.4, 0.45, 0.48, 0.525kV
4.2 Rated frequency: 50Hz or 60Hz.

1. General
4.3 Rated capacity: (1~40)kVar
1.1 Edectric ratings: ≤AC1000V.
1.2 Application: Newly developed energy-saving product
4.5 Dielectric loss tangent value: ≤0.0012,
for improvement of power factor and power quality;
at rated power frequency voltage
1.3 Standards: IEC/EN 60831-1:2014 IEC/EN 60831-2:2014
4.6 Max. allowed over-voltage: 1.1Un, not exceed 8h in 24h
4.7 Max. allowed over-current: 1.3In

(1.6 In, 2h/24h; 2.0 In, 30min/24h )

voltage reduces from √2 Un (DC) to 75V
and below within 3min.
4.9 Model and Specifications
4.10 Inrush current: 200In
4.11 Withstand voltage: interelectrode, power frequency 2.15UN, 10s

H
4.12 Withstand voltage: pole-to-case, power frequency 3.6kV, 60s
4.13 Losses : ≤0.2W/kvar
4.14 Use safety : over-pressure protection device,self-healing
4.15 Fixing: Threaded bolt M12 and M16
4.16 Expected life：≥170,000 h

Type and Rated Rated Rated Rated Rated

Serial Dimensions Mounting figure
voltage frequency capacity capacitor current
number Specification D×H(mm) dimensions number
(kV) (Hz) (kVar) (μF) (A)
1 NWC5-0.23-1-3（60Hz） 0.23 60 1 50 2.5 Φ60×190
M10×10 Figure 1
2 NWC5-0.23-3-3（60Hz） 0.23 60 3 151 7.5 Φ60×240
3 NWC5-0.23-5-3（60Hz） 0.23 60 5 251 12.6 φ76×240
4 NWC5-0.23-7.5-3（60Hz） 0.23 60 7.5 376 18.8 φ76×290 M12×16
Figure 2
5 NWC5-0.23-10-3（60Hz） 0.23 60 10 502 25.1 φ86×290
6 NWC5-0.23-15-3（60Hz） 0.23 60 15 753 37.7 φ96×290
M16×25
7 NWC5-0.23-20-3（60Hz） 0.23 60 20 1003 50.2 φ116×290 Figure 3
8 NWC5-0.4-3-3T 0.4 50 3 59.7 4.3 Ф60×175
9 NWC5-0.4-5-3T 0.4 50 5 99 7.2 Ф60×175 M10×10 Figure 1
10 NWC5-0.4-7.5-3T 0.4 50 7.5 149 10.8 Ф60×240
11 NWC5-0.4-10-3 0.4 50 10 199 14.4 ф76×240
12 NWC5-0.4-15-3 0.4 50 15 298 21.7 Ф76×290
M12×16
13 NWC5-0.4-16-3 0.4 50 16 318 23.1 Ф76×290 Figure 2
14 NWC5-0.4-20-3 0.4 50 20 398 28.9 Ф86×290
15 NWC5-0.4-25-3 0.4 50 25 497 36.1 Ф96×290
16 NWC5-0.4-30-3 0.4 50 30 597 43.3 ф106×290 M16×25
Figure 3
17 NWC5-0.4-40-3 0.4 50 40 796 57.7 ф116×290
18 NWC5-0.45-3-3T 0.45 50 3 47.2 3.8 Ф60×175
19 NWC5-0.45-5-3T 0.45 50 5 79 6.4 Ф60×175 M10×10 Figure 1
20 NWC5-0.45-7.5-3T 0.45 50 7.5 118 9.6 Ф60×240
21 NWC5-0.45-10-3 0.45 50 10 157 12.8 ф76×240
22 NWC5-0.45-15-3 0.45 50 15 236 19.2 Ф76×290
M12×16
23 NWC5-0.45-16-3 0.45 50 16 252 20.5 Ф76×290 Figure 2
24 NWC5-0.45-20-3 0.45 50 20 314 25.7 Ф86×290
25 NWC5-0.45-25-3 0.45 50 25 393 32.1 Ф96×290
26 NWC5-0.45-30-3 0.45 50 30 472 38.5 ф106×290 M16×25
Figure 3
27 NWC5-0.45-40-3 0.45 50 40 629 51.3 ф116×290
28 NWC5-0.48-3-3T 0.48 50 3 41.5 3.6 Ф60×175
29 NWC5-0.48-5-3T 0.48 50 5 69 6.0 Ф60×175 M10×10 Figure 1
30 NWC5-0.48-7.5-3T 0.48 50 7.5 104 9.0 Ф60×240

31 NWC5-0.48-10-3 0.48 50 10 138 12.0 ф76×240
32 NWC5-0.48-15-3 0.48 50 15 207 18.0 Ф76×290
M12×16
33 NWC5-0.48-16-3 0.48 50 16 221 19.2 Ф76×290 Figure 2
34 NWC5-0.48-20-3 0.48 50 20 277 24.0 Ф86×290
35 NWC5-0.48-25-3 0.48 50 25 346 30.0 Ф96×290
36 NWC5-0.48-30-3 0.48 50 30 415 36.1 ф106×290 M16×25
Figure 3
37 NWC5-0.48-40-3 0.48 50 40 553 48.1 ф116×290
38 NWC5-0.525-3-3T 0.525 50 3 34.7 3.3 Ф60×240
39 NWC5-0.525-5-3T 0.525 50 5 58 5.5 Ф60×240 M10×10 Figure 1
40 NWC5-0.525-7.5-3T 0.525 50 7.5 86.7 8.2 Ф60×240

41 NWC5-0.525-10-3 0.525 50 10 115 11.0 ф76×240
42 NWC5-0.525-15-3 0.525 50 15 173 16.5 Ф76×290
M12×16
43 NWC5-0.525-16-3 0.525 50 16 185 17.6 Ф76×290 Figure 2
44 NWC5-0.525-20-3 0.525 50 20 231 22.0 Ф86×290
45 NWC5-0.525-25-3 0.525 50 25 289 27.5 Ф96×290
46 NWC5-0.525-30-3 0.525 50 30 346 33.0 ф106×290 M16×25
Figure 3
47 NWC5-0.525-40-3 0.525 50 40 346 33.0 ф116×290
48 NWC5-0.45-5-3YN 0.45 50 5 79 6.4 φ76×240
49 NWC5-0.45-7.5-3YN 0.45 50 7.5 118 9.6 φ76×240
M12×16
50 NWC5-0.45-10-3YN 0.45 50 10 157 12.8 φ76×290
51 NWC5-0.45-15-3YN 0.45 50 15 236 19.2 φ86×290
Figure 4
52 NWC5-0.45-16-3YN 0.45 50 16 252 20.5 φ96×290
53 NWC5-0.45-20-3YN 0.45 50 20 314 25.7 φ96×290 M16×25
54 NWC5-0.45-25-3YN 0.45 50 25 393 32.1 φ106×290
55 NWC5-0.45-30-3YN 0.45 50 30 472 38.5 φ116×290
Note: All sizes are customizable with rated frequency 50Hz or 60Hz, single-phase or three-phase capacitor; the products of the same
capacity have the same overall dimensions.
5. Features
5.1 Safe and reliable operation because of the independent protective enclosure;
5.2 With good sealing properties; and outgoing terminals for convenient wiring and reliable connection;
5.3 Available for use in the places with higher ambient temperature and voltage variation ;
5.4 Fixed type, convenient for mounting and elegant appearance due o to novel mounting pins.
6. Note
6.1 Please guarantee that the capacitors are operated under specified conditions, including the proper temperature,
voltage and current, as over-voltage and over-current may shorten the life of the capacitor;
6.2 Please pay attention to the points following when the capacitor is shuntly connected in the system
a. For the system of current regulating system and the electric equipments system, the capacitor should not be directly connected;
b. Operational current of the capacitor should be less than the off-load current of the shuntly connected motor;
c. When the transformer is off-load, the capacitor should stop operating.
6.3 Specific switches, contactors and over-current relays should be adopted when the capacitor is shuntly connected in the system.
Figure 1 Figure 2
15 15
M8
30
35
44
15 15
H
20
43
79
M10×{10
60
D
Figure 3 Figure 4
34
M8
35
M8
H
35
35
35
H
A B
H
35
34
N C
D
D
Note: The capacity of three-phase capacitor (1~8)kvar is seen in Fig.1; (10~25)kvar in Fig.2; (30~40)kvar in Fig.3;The split phase
compensation capacitor has 4 connecting terminals with star connection and neutral line N lead-out, as shown in Fig.4.
NWC6 series dry low-voltage

shunt capacitor
1.Scope of application
NWC6 series dry low-voltage shunt capacitor is suitable for
power frequency AC power system with nominal voltage of
1000V and below to raise power factor, reduce line loss and
improve voltage quality. It is filled with dry flame-retardant
materials internally.
Operative norm: IEC/EN 60831-1:2014 IEC/EN 60831-2:2014.
2. Model and its meaning

N WC 6-□-□-□
Phase number: 3-Three-phase 1-Single-phase
Rated voltage (kV)
Design No.
Self-healing low -voltage shunt capacitor
Enterprise code
Note: The default rated frequency is 50Hz. For products with

the rated frequency of 60Hz, mark 60Hz.

conditions
3.1 Ambient air temperature: -25℃～+50℃-25/C）;
(can customized -25/D)
3.2 Relative humidity: ≤50% at 40℃; ≤90% at 20℃ ;
3.4 Environmental conditions: No harmful gases and vapor,

conductive or explosive dust and severe mechanical
vibration.
4. Main technical parameters and technical performance

4.1 Rated voltage: 0.23 kV, 0.25 kV, 0.4kV, 0.45kV, 0.48 kV, 0.525kV;
4.2 Rated frequency: 50Hz or 60Hz;
4.3 Rated capacity: (5～40)kvar;
4.4 Capacitance deviation: -5%～+10% ; the ratio of maximum and minimum measured of the capacitance between any
two outlet terminals of the three-phase capacitor should not exceed 1.08;
4.5 Tangent of the loss angle tgδ: Lower than 0.0012 under rated power frequency voltage;
4.6 Withstand voltage: interelectrode, power frequency 2.15UN, 10s; pole-to-case, power frequency 3.6kV, 60s;
4.7 Maximum permissible overvoltage: 1.1 UN; no more than 8h every 24h;
4.8 Maximum permissible current: 1.3IN; (1.6 In, 2h/24h; 2.0 In, 30min/24h )
4.9 Self-discharge characteristic: After the capacitor is applied with √2 UN DC voltage and the power is disconnected for
3min, the remaining voltage drops 75V or below;
4.10 Inrush current: 200 In
4.11 Withstand voltage: interelectrode, power frequency 2.15UN, 10s
4.12 Withstand voltage: pole-to-case, power frequency 3.6kV, 60s
4.13 Losses : ≤0.20W/kvar
4.14 Use safety:Dry-type,over-pressure protection device,self-healing
4.15 Fixing: Bottom threaded bolt M12 and M16
4.16 Expected life:≥200,000 h

Serial Dimensions Mounting Figure
1 NWC6-0.23-1-3（60Hz） 0.23 60 1 50 2.5 Φ60×190
M10×10 Figure 1
2 NWC6-0.23-3-3（60Hz） 0.23 60 3 151 7.5 Φ60×240
3 NWC6-0.23-5-3（60Hz） 0.23 60 5 251 12.6 Φ76×240
4 NWC6-0.23-7.5-3（60Hz） 0.23 60 7.5 376 18.8 Φ76×290 M12×16
Figure 2
5 NWC6-0.23-10-3（60Hz） 0.23 60 10 502 25.1 Φ86×290
6 NWC6-0.23-15-3（60Hz） 0.23 60 15 753 37.7 Φ96×290
M16×25
7 NWC6-0.23-20-3（60Hz） 0.23 60 20 1003 50.2 Φ116×290 Figure 3
8 NWC6-0.4-3-3T 0.4 50 3 59.7 4.3 Ф60×175
9 NWC6-0.4-5-3T 0.4 50 5 99 7.2 Ф60×175 M10×10 Figure 1
10 NWC6-0.4-7.5-3T 0.4 50 7.5 149 10.8 Ф60×240
11 NWC6-0.4-10-3 0.4 50 10 199 14.4 ф76×240
12 NWC6-0.4-15-3 0.4 50 15 298 21.7 Ф76×290
M12×16
13 NWC6-0.4-16-3 0.4 50 16 318 23.1 Ф76×290 Figure 2
14 NWC6-0.4-20-3 0.4 50 20 398 28.9 Ф86×290
15 NWC6-0.4-25-3 0.4 50 25 497 36.1 Ф96×290
16 NWC6-0.4-30-3 0.4 50 30 597 43.3 ф106×290 M16×25
Figure 3
17 NWC6-0.4-40-3 0.4 50 40 796 57.7 ф116×290
18
19
NWC6-0.45-3-3T
NWC6-0.45-5-3T
0.45
0.45
50
50
3
5
47.2
79
3.8
6.4
Ф60×175
Ф60×175 M10×10 Figure 1
H
20 NWC6-0.45-7.5-3T 0.45 50 7.5 118 9.6 Ф60×240
21 NWC6-0.45-10-3 0.45 50 10 157 12.8 ф76×240
22 NWC6-0.45-15-3 0.45 50 15 236 19.2 Ф76×290
M12×16
23 NWC6-0.45-16-3 0.45 50 16 252 20.5 Ф76×290 Figure 2
24 NWC6-0.45-20-3 0.45 50 20 314 25.7 Ф86×290
25 NWC6-0.45-25-3 0.45 50 25 393 32.1 Ф96×290
26 NWC6-0.45-30-3 0.45 50 30 472 38.5 ф106×290 M16×25
Figure 3
27 NWC6-0.45-40-3 0.45 50 40 629 51.3 ф116×290
28 NWC6-0.48-3-3T 0.48 50 3 41.5 3.6 Ф60×175
29 NWC6-0.48-5-3T 0.48 50 5 69 6.0 Ф60×175 M10×10 Figure 1
30 NWC6-0.48-7.5-3T 0.48 50 7.5 104 9.0 Ф60×240

31 NWC6-0.48-10-3 0.48 50 10 138 12.0 ф76×240
32 NWC6-0.48-15-3 0.48 50 15 207 18.0 Ф76×290
M12×16
33 NWC6-0.48-16-3 0.48 50 16 221 19.2 Ф76×290 Figure 2
34 NWC6-0.48-20-3 0.48 50 20 277 24.0 Ф86×290
35 NWC6-0.48-25-3 0.48 50 25 346 30.0 Ф96×290
36 NWC6-0.48-30-3 0.48 50 30 415 36.1 ф106×290 M16×25
Figure 3
37 NWC6-0.48-40-3 0.48 50 40 553 48.1 ф116×290

Serial Dimensions Mounting figure
38 NWC6-0.525-3-3T 0.525 50 3 34.7 3.3 Ф60×240
39 NWC6-0.525-5-3T 0.525 50 5 58 5.5 Ф60×240 M10×10 Figure 1
40 NWC6-0.525-7.5-3T 0.525 50 7.5 86.7 8.2 Ф60×240

41 NWC6-0.525-10-3 0.525 50 10 115 11.0 ф76×240
42 NWC6-0.525-15-3 0.525 50 15 173 16.5 Ф76×290
M12×16
43 NWC6-0.525-16-3 0.525 50 16 185 17.6 Ф76×290 Figure 2
44 NWC6-0.525-20-3 0.525 50 20 231 22.0 Ф86×290
45 NWC6-0.525-25-3 0.525 50 25 289 27.5 Ф96×290
46 NWC6-0.525-30-3 0.525 50 30 346 33.0 ф106×290 M16×25
Figure 3
47 NWC6-0.525-40-3 0.525 50 40 346 33.0 ф116×290
48 NWC6-0.45-5-3YN 0.45 50 5 79 6.4 ф76×240
49 NWC6-0.45-7.5-3YN 0.45 50 7.5 118 9.6 ф76×240
M12×16
50 NWC6-0.45-10-3YN 0.45 50 10 157 12.8 ф76×290
51 NWC6-0.45-15-3YN 0.45 50 15 236 19.2 ф86×290
Figure 4
52 NWC6-0.45-16-3YN 0.45 50 16 252 20.5 ф96×290
53 NWC6-0.45-20-3YN 0.45 50 20 314 25.7 ф96×290 M16×25
54 NWC6-0.45-25-3YN 0.45 50 25 393 32.1 ф106×290
55 NWC6-0.45-30-3YN 0.45 50 30 472 38.5 ф116×290
Note: All sizes are customizable with rated frequency 50Hz or 60Hz, single-phase or three-phase capacitor; the products of the same
capacity have the same overall dimensions.
5. Main technical parameters and technical performance

5.1 Main features
5.1.1 Use safety: This product is a dry product; it is filled with dry flame-retardant materials internally, such as: thermal
conductivity silica gel. Cylindrical aluminum tensile shell is provided with the over-pressure protection device; it is
characterized by oil-free, environmentally friendly, corrosion-resistant, anti-explosion etc. and it is safe and reliable.
5.1.2 Applicable environment: Suitable for places of higher fire rating.
5.1.3 Easy installation: The bottom is the M12/M16 stud fixedly installed; the product can be both mounted vertically and
horizontally.
5.1.4 Using NWC6 dr y capacitor can realize reactive power compensation cabinet modular design, reduce unit cost and
make maintenance more convenient.
5.2 Notice for use

5.2.1 Capacitor selection:
Grid system Capacitor rated User grid

voltage voltage frequency
Use 0.25kV-50 Hz or
127/220 0.23/0.25
order 60Hz products
Use 0.45kV-50 Hz or
220/380 0.4/0.45/0.525
order 60Hz products
5.2.2 Overvoltage and overheating will shorten the life of the capacitor. In tropical or high-altitude regions, recommend
the users to choose products of higher rated voltage according to the voltage of power network system.
5.2.3 When the system is installed with the shunt capacitor, attention should be paid to the following circumstances:
a. Under the circumstance of severe harmonic content, do not directly install the shunt capacitor and connect the 7%/14% reactor in
series for use. Under the circumstance of modest harmonic content, enhance the voltage level of the capacitor for derating, such
as: 0.525kV. (Common harmonic sources are frequency converter, DC rectifier, inverter, electrolytic plating equipment, medium
frequency furnace, electric arc furnace etc.).
b. When the motor is fixedly connected with the shunt capacitor, operating current of the
c. When the transformer is in empty load, the capacitor should be guaranteed to exit from the operation to prevent excessive compensation.
5.2.4 To ensure proper use of the capacitor, there should be short circuit, over-voltage, over-current protection and limiting inrush device
in the capacitor circuit (such as series reactor or CJ19 special switch contacts).
5.2.5 The capacitor is disconnected from the power supply and must be short-circuited discharged, and then can be touched or tested.
5.2.6 The capacitor terminals and conductors should be well connected. Current-carrying capacity of the connecting wire is 1.43
times higher than the rated current of the capacitor.
Product rated Wire cross

Capacity range
voltage -sectional area
0.23、0.25 ≤5 4.0
0.23、0.25 6~12 6.0
0.23、0.25 14~20 10.0
0.4、0.45 ≤10 4.0
0.4、0.45 12~20 6.0
0.4、0.45 24~30 10.0
5.2.7 A distance of 20mm or more between the top of the capacitor and other components should be kept to ensure reliable
operation of over-pressure protection device. The installation space between capacitors should be considered for the cooling condition
of the equipment.
5.2.8 When the capacitor malfunctions or the ser vice life is terminated, over-pressure protection device inside the product will be
broken, the upper cover slightly bulges and the capacitor failure occurs. Users are asked to periodically detect the operating
current and surface temperature of the capacitor and timely maintain it.
6. Physical and installation dimensions:

Figure 1 Figure 2
15 15
M8
30
35
44
1515
H
20
43
79
60
D
Figure 3 Figure 4
34 35
M8 M8
35
35
35
H
H
A B
H
34
35
NC
D D
Note: The capacity of three-phase capacitor (1~8)kvar is seen in Fig.1; (10~25)kvar in Fig.2; (30~40)kvar in Fig.3;The split phase
compensation capacitor has 4 connecting terminals with star connection and neutral line N lead-out, as shown in Fig.4.
7.1 Users must provide product rated voltage, rated capacity, frequency, phase number and other parameters.
7.2 Users must provide some of the features of the places of use as far as possible, such as environmental conditions, power
network quality.
Such as: NWC6 0.4-30-3 10 sets
Ordering 10 NWC6 series three-phase capacitors with the rated voltage of 400V and rated capacity of 30kavr.
P-021 LV Capacitor JKF8
2. Type designation
JK F 8-□，□ （50Hz or 60Hz）
Rated voltage: 380V,440V,220V,240V
Output loop specification: 6,12
Low-Voltage
Reactive Power Compensation Controller Series
3. Features
3.1 With combined control on reactive power
and power factor, a reliable input can be ensured
under low load, and surge switching can be prevented.
3.2 Real-time display of the network status,

including parameters such as power factor,
voltage, current, active power, and reactive power, etc.
3.3 The polarity of the sampling signal can

be automatically identified. Therefore, there is no need
JKF8 Intelligent Low-Voltage to worry about wrong connections with reversed polarity.
3.4 In case the voltage of the electrical power network

Reactive Power is lower than 300 V, or exceeds
Compensation Controller the preset over-voltage protection value,
the connected capacitor banks will be
automatically and rapidly(5 sec.)
1. General
disconnected in steps, and the voltage value
JKF8 Intelligent Low-Voltage will be displayed.
Reactive Power Compensation Controller
3.5 In case the signal from the secondary coil of
(hereinafter referred to as 'controller' ) is a dedicated
the current transformer is smaller than 150 ｍA,
controller which can make compensations for the reactive
the controller will prevent any more capacitor
power of low voltage distribution system.
from being connected,
in the mean time, automatically and rapidly (5 sec.)
disconnect the connected capacitor banks step-wise.
3.6 Switching (opening/closing control

of the contactor) prevention time for the same group
of capacitors is 3 minutes
(capacitor discharge duration)
3.7 The controller is with cyclic automated-self-test function,

which facilitates the factory acceptance test
for a capacitor panel.
4.2 Relative humidity: ≤50%, when 40℃, ≤90% when 20℃
4.3 Altitude: ≤2000 m
4.4 Operation environment: free of hazardous gas

and/or vapor, conductive or explosive dust,
or rigorous mechanical vibration.
4.5 Operation voltage: Un±20%

JKF8 LV Capacitor P-022
5. Technical data
Parameters Technical Specifications
Sampling voltage 400VAC±10% (Can be customized: 220VAC, 440VAC)
Sampling current 150mA~5 A

Rated frequency 50/60Hz±5%
Low-current capacitor
≤150 mA
connection prevention
Range of transformation ratio for sampling current transformer: 5~800,

Current transformation ratio
Preset value of the ratio (preset value in factory: 60, which means 300/5)
Time lag 5~120 seconds (preset value in factory: 30 seconds)
Full automation mode (displayed code F-0: 1): no need to set the capacitor connection threshold
or the capacitor disconnection threshold.
Preset mode
Manual setup mode(displayed code F-0: 0): need to set the capacitor connection threshold
and the capacitor disconnection threshold manually.
Capacitor connection Full automation mode: capacitor banks in the smallest step
threshold Manual mode: preset value for reactive power: 1~120 kvar (preset value in factory: 10 kvar)
Capacitor disconnection
Power factor, 0.85 ~ -0.95 continuously adjustable (preset value in factory: 1.00)
threshold
Over-voltage threshold 400 V~456 V (preset value in factory: 430 V), 230V~270V (preset value in factory: 250 V)
JKF8-6 (loop number can be set between 1 and 6),

Loop number
JKF8-12(loop number can be set between 1 and 12)
Operation mode Automated cyclic opening/closing control & manual operation
Max. power consumption 15 W
Output contact point capacity 5A/230V(or 3A/400V)
Weighyt Approximately1.5 Kg
6. Wiring diagram
High voltage side
10 Is1
9 Is2 Power transformer

Total current transformer
8 JKF8 Rear View

A B C N
7 Us1
6 Us2
5
H
Low voltatge side
3 COM
H
L
2 12 FU1 FU2 FU3
1 11
5A 1A 1A
P P
J1 J12
To load control panel
Note: If the coil voltage of the contactor is 230 V,

point P is connected to Phase N.
If the coil voltage of the contactor is 400 V,
point P is connected to Phase B or C.
P-023 LV Capacitor JKF8
6.1 Connection terminal US1 and US2 are to be connected to the sampling voltage. AC 400 V or AC 220V shall be connected.
6.2 Terminal IS1 and IS2 are to be connected to the sampling current, which shall be sampled
from the transformed current generated by the current transformer for the load, and which shall not be in-phase with
US1 and US2 (if A is for current, then B and C are for voltage).
6.3 Terminal COM is the common shared terminal to be connected to number 1 to 12 relays in
the output lines of the controller, and each of the terminals 1~12 is to be connected to the output control line
to control the respective contactor in the respective compensation loop of the capacitor panel.
6.4 If the coil voltage of the contactor J is 230 V, then Point P is connected to Phase N.
If the coil voltage of the contactor J is 400 V, then Point P is connected to Phase C (as long as it is not in-phase with terminal COM).
6.5 FU1~3 are to be connected to fusers which are supplied by the user.
7. Description of parameters
7.1 Description of dynamic parameters
Code Signification Unit Description
If the measured value is out of the display range,

I Current A
the approximate value will be displayed, e.g., 1260 A is displayed as E13
U Voltage V Display the measured voltage value
If the measured value is out of the display range, the approximate value
Q Reactive power kVar
will be displayed, e.g., 1360 Kvar is displayed as E14.
If the measured value is out of the display range, the approximate value
P Active power kW
will be displayed, e.g., 1360 kW is displayed as E14.
7.2 Description of preset parameters (menu description)
Range of Factory Change

Code Description Remark
Settings Settings Step
1 full automation
F-0 Preset mode 1 or 0 1 —
0 manual setup
This parameter is invalid

F-1 Capacitor connection threshold 1~120 kVar 10 kVar 1 kVar
under the full automation mode
F-2 Target power factor 0.85~-0.95 1.00 0.01 “-” stands for system capacity
F-3 Switching time lag 5~120 sec . 30 sec. 1 sec.
F-4 Over-voltage protection 400 V~456 V 430 V 2V Voltage difference: 8~10V
F-5 Number of control loop 1~6 or 1~12 6 or 12 1 Two types of specifications
Transformation ratio of the

F-6 5~800 60 5 (300: 5)
sampling current transformer
120mm
113±0.5mm
120mm
130mm 113±0.5mm
Boring dimension
On ordering, please clarify rated voltage, number of phase, frequency, etc of the products;
and associated conditions at the mounting place.
NWK1-GR LV Capacitor P-024
2. Model and definition

NWK 1 - G R - □ GB □
Signal control mode: Default relay,

D represents +12V DC
Compensation mode: GB common

compensation FB mixed compensation
Maximum number of output circuits:

12 circuits, 16circiuts
Functional option: R indicates

Rs485 communication
G represents power factor
Reactive power compensation controller
Note: When the control signal outputs +12V DC, the control
object is ZCK smart combination switch or TSC thyristor
switch.
NWK1-GR 3. Operating conditions

Series Low Voltage Reactive 3.1 Ambient temperature -20℃~55℃.
Compensation Controller 3.2 The air humidity shall not exceed 50% at 40℃ and 90% at 20℃.
3.3 The altitude shall not exceed 2500 m.

3.4 There is no corrosive gas, no conductive dust and no inflammable
NWK1-GR series low voltage reactive power compensation and explosive medium in the surrounding environment.
controller adopts large dot matrix LCD screen and mobile
3.5 There is no violent vibration at the location of installation.
phone menu operation mode to realize man-machine exchange.
Its sampling voltage range is AC (100~800) V and operating
frequency range is (45~65) Hz, which are suitable for reactive 4. Main functional characteristics:
power compensation and power distribution monitoring in
4.1 The product can realize full three-phase compensation or can
different regions of the world.
be tailor-made for mixed compensation of three phases and
ASIC chip is used to calculate and analyze the voltage and single phase.
current collected through FFT (Fast Fourier Transform), so
4.2 The dot matrix LCD displays real-time fundamental power
under a large harmonic component of power grid, the reactive
factor, power factor with harmonic, voltage, frequency, current,
power can be used as the basis of switching capacitors and
combined with the power factor for switching. The capacitor
capacity can be matched or switched in three phases or single
△KVAR, active power, reactive power, apparent power, THDU,
THDI, 3rd-15th harmonic bar chart, phase angle, electric energy,
temperature, time and other power grid parameters.
H
phase by cycle, code or any combination of values to realize
the optimal compensation effect. It is the newest smart reactive 4.3 Unique smart line checking function: The product can check
compensation controller introduced by our company. the phase sequence of three-phase voltage, current polarity
and phase sequence, perform software wire change, and guide
The product integrates the functions of digital power grid
users to check and change the line according to Chinese prompts,
measurement, record and storage, as well as Chinese and
which is extremely convenient.
English or graphic real-time display of dozens of electricity,
with high power measurement accuracy under harmonic 4.4 Capacitance setting: The capacitance can be set flexibly and
environment. Besides, it provides power quality analysis, conveniently according to coded value, equal capacity value
harmonic value protection and RS485 communication or arbitrary value.
transmission function.
Applicable standards: JB/T9663-2013; DL/T597-1996.

P-025 LV Capacitor NWK1-GR
4.5 For capacitors with the same capacity, select the capacitors according to operation frequency to achieve balanced
switching; for more than two kinds of capacitors with different capacity, select suitable capacitors automatically
according to the reactive power required, switch them on or off one by one, and give consideration to the number of
times; for compensation schemes with both different capacity and the same capacity, select suitable capacitors
automatically according to the reactive power required, then switch them according to operation frequency, and switch
the capacitors with low operation frequency at first. This mode is especially suitable for users with unstable electric load
or frequent light load of distribution transformer.
4.6 The capacity of the capacitors which have been shut down or have fault is set to 0, and such capacitors will no longer be
involved in operation.
4.7 The product has a perfect alarm mechanism. The LCD screen will display Chinese prompts for overvoltage, undercurrent,
over-harmonic, power factor assessment value and other items, with user-friendly interface.
4.8 Connect to SCADA and PLC system through RS485 communication interface, provide product communication protocol,
and directly connect with mainstream industrial control configuration software for data transmission.
5. Main technical parameters
Item NWK1-GR-16GB
AC380V±20% or AC (100~800) V,
Sampling voltage
independent auxiliary power supply
Sampling current (A) 0.05~5

Rated frequency (Hz) 45~65
Range of CT ratio 5/5~6000/5
COSΦ switch-on threshold Settable between 0.85L~0.85C
switch-off threshold Settable between 0.85L~0.85C
Delay in switching (S) 2~180
Overvoltage threshold (V) 100~800
Undervoltage threshold (V) 75~620
THDV threshold Off / (3~90)%
Capacitor configuration (kvar) Set the capacity of each circuit
Capacitor discharge delay (s) 0~240
Zero sequence threshold (%) Off
Alarm output (S) Off / (10~300) / Normally on
Fan start-up (℃) Off / 35~65
High temperature alarm (℃) Off / 50~85
Large screen main interface Off/On
Password protection Off/On
Date change None
Time change None
Relay contact output AC220V, 5A, fastest response speed: 2 seconds;
Active DC output + 12V DC, 100mA, fastest response speed: 2 seconds, or dynamic response: 100 milliseconds
Power consumption (W) ≤8
Maximum number of output circuits 12 circuits, 16 circuits
Restore to factory settings Off/On
6. Configuration of main models
Model Number of circuits Sampling voltage (V) Output mode Functional Characteristics
NWK1-GR-12GB 12 100-800 Relay contact Basic type + RS485 + subharmonic + alarm
NWK1-GR-12GBD 12 100-800 +12V DC Basic type + RS485 + subharmonic
NWK1-GR-16GB 16 100-800 Relay contact Basic type + RS485 + subharmonic
NWK1-GR-16GBD 16 100-800 +12V DC Basic type + RS485 + subharmonic
Note: When the control signal outputs +12V DC, the control object is ZCK smart combination switch or TSC thyristor switch.
7. Introduction of panel functions

7.1 Boot screen
NWK1 LV REACTIVE POWER COMPENSATION CONTROLLER
Run
Com
NWK1-GR-12GB
BACK ENTER
ZHEJIANG CHINT ELECTRICS CO.,LTD.
7.2 Automatic main interface
U: 389 V
I :250.8A
AUTO COS Φ : 0.97 L
000 S THDu : 2.7% H
P-027 LV Capacitor NWK1-GR
8. Product wiring diagram
8.1 Common compensation controller NWK1-GR-12GB / NWK1-GR-16GB (relay contact output, applicable to AC 127V / 220V, 220V / 380V
or three-phase 660V power grid systems)
To electric equipment
N P
J1 J2 J15 J16
COM
RS485/RS232
Alarm/Fan RS485-1
COM
A1 B1
Back view
Cooling fan
NWK1-GR-xxGB
(or alarm)
0 220V
To fan power supply

220 V or 380 V
To auxiliary power supply
AC220V
(1) COM is the relay common terminal inside the controller, and terminal number 1-16 is the control output.
Power transformer
(2) The independent operating power supply of controller is connected with auxiliary power supply AC 220V.
(3) In the LL380V system, if the contactor coil voltage is 380 V, the P point can be connected to C phase instead of N phase.
A C N
(4) If used for LL660V system or LL220V system, AC contactor coil is connected to auxiliary power supply AC220V.
B
9. Product installation and overall dimensions
V+12V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NWK1 LV REAC TIVE POWER CO MPENSATION CO NTROLLER
Run
V+12V 11 12 13 14 15 16 Alarm/Fan A1 B1
Com
RS485-1
113
120
NWK1-GR-16GB
BACK ENTER
Ua Ub Uc Un Ia Ib Ic In 0 220V
ZHEJIANG CHINT ELECTRICS CO.,LTD. AUX
120 95 113
Overall dimension: 120 mm × 120 mm × 95 mm, embedded hole size: 113 mm × 113 mm
When ordering, users are responsible for selecting the compensation type, rated voltage, number of output circuits, control signal output
mode (default relay output, suffix D represents +12VDC), etc. If the product exceeds the operating condition and main technical parameters,
it can be ordered through negotiation.
For example: Order NWK1-GR-16GB, 10 sets.
It indicates ordering NWK1-GR series low-voltage reactive compensation controller, with common compensation type, 16 channels, control
signal relay output, RS485 communication and data transmission function, and the ordering quantity is 10 sets.
H
Switch Disconnector, Fuse-switch Disconnector,
Changeover Switch
Switch Disconnector
HH15-QA HH15-QP NH40

Switch Disconnector Switch Disconnector Switch Disconnector
Fuse-switch Disconnector
HH15/QSA NHR17 NHR40 NHRT40

Fuse-switch Fuse-switch Fuse-switch Vertical
Disconnector Disconnector Disconnector Fuse-switch
Disconnector
Changeover Switch
NZ7 HH15/QAS/ NH40S NH40SZ

Automatic QPS/QSS Changeover Switch Automatic
Transfer Switching Changeover Switch Changeover Switch
Equipment

Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over
Switches, Connection Terminals
Feuses
NRZ28-20 CRT36-00 NRT36 NRT28

Solar Photo voltaic DC Fuse Knife Contact Cylindrical Contact
System Protector Fuse Protector Caps Fuse Holder
Protection Fuse
RT28 RT29 RT36

Cylindrical Contact Fuse with Knife Contact
Caps Fuse Protector Cylindrical Cap Fuse Protector
Terminal Blocks
SAK JXB JCUK TB
TC TH35-7.5(C45)
Rail
Change-over Switch Combination Switch
LW32 HZ10
Page P-040 Page PK-046
Travel Switch
YBLX-ME YBLX-WL YBLX-CK YBLX-P1

Travel Switch
YBLX-K1 YBLX-K3 YBLX-10 YBLX-19
Foot Switch Microswitch
YBLT-3、YBLT-4 YBLT-EKW/5A/B YBLXW-5 YBLXW-6
Controller
JD
Page P-086
Low Voltage VT & AVR & CT & PT
Control Transformers
NDK JBK5 SG CKSG

Control Transformer Control Transformer Three-phase Series Low-voltage
Air-immersed Series-connected
Transformer Reactor
Automatic AC Voltage Regulators
TND6 TM
TND1/TNS1 TND3
Automatic AC Ultra-low Voltage
Automatic AC Automatic AC
Voltage Regulator Automatic AC
Voltage Regulator Voltage Regulator
Voltage Regulator
TNDZ(DBW) DBW-JW
TNSZ(SBW) SBW-JW
Pillar Type AC Industrial-grade
Automatic Contactless Intelligent
Regulator with Voltage Stabilizer
Compensated
BH-0.66Ⅲ RCT
BH-0.66Ⅰ SDH-0.66Ⅱ
MES
Page P-045
GP-UPS
PC-UPS HP-UPS
Series Online
Series Backup Series Online
Uninterruptible
Uninterruptible Uninterruptible
Power Supply
Power Supply Power Supply

P-001 Low Voltage VT & AVR & CT & PT Control Transformers
2. Type designation
Rated output capacity (VA): 25VA~5000VA
Control
Single-phase
Company code
3.1 Temperature: -5℃~+40℃, the average value within
1 month should not exceed +30℃ and not exceed
+20℃ within 1 year;
3.3 Relative humidity: ≤95%

NDK Control Transformer
4. Features
1. General
The transformer is characterized by excellent performances,
1.1 Frequency: AC 50Hz/60Hz; reliable operation, compact design, safe wiring, and wide
application, etc.
1.2 Application: for control power supply of apparatus,
partial illumination and indicator light of machine tool
and other mechanic equipments.
1.3 Standard: Q/ZT258.

Control Transformers Low Voltage VT & AVR & CT & PT P-002
5. Technical data
Capacity Rated Rated Frequency

Model
(VA) input voltage(V) output voltage(V) (Hz)
NDK-25 25
NDK-50 50
NDK-100 100
NDK-150 150
NDK-200 200
NDK-250 250
NDK-300 300
NDK-400 400 6, 12, 24,
230, 400 36, 110, 127, 50/60
NDK-500 500 230, 400
NDK-700 700
NDK-1000 1000
NDK-1500 1500
NDK-2000 2000
NDK-3000 3000
NDK-4000 4000
NDK-5000 5000
Note: Customized products are available.

NDK(BK)-25VA ~1000VA
Dmax
Emax
A
C
Bmax
NDK(BK)-1500VA ~ 5000VA
Dmax
I
Emax
A
Bmax
C
Mounting dimensions Mounting holes Overall dimensions

Model
(A×C) (mm) (K×J) (mm) (B×D×E) (mm)
NDK-25 62.5×50 5×8 80×83×82

NDK-50 70×58 6×10 85×89×84
NDK-100 85×64 6×10 103×93×99
NDK-150 85×72 6×10 103×100×99
NDK-200 85×83 6×10 103×112×99
NDK-250 100×80 8×11 130×120×150
NDK-300 100×84 8×11 130×125×150
NDK-400 110×114 8×11 148×155×153
NDK-500 110×114 8×11 148×155×153
NDK-700 125×103 8×11 173×158×174
NDK-1000 125×123 8×11 173×186×174
NDK-1500 160×120 10×20 265×195×270
NDK-2000 160×130 10×20 265×205×280
NDK-3000 160×140 10×20 265×220×305
NDK-4000 190×160 10×20 315×240×305
NDK-5000 190×180 10×20 315×260×305
7. Wiring
7.1 NDK-100, capacity: 100VA, input 400V 230V, 7.2 NDK-100, capacity: 100VA, input 400V, output 36V;
output 36V 24V 12V 6V capacity 60VA 12V; capacity 40VA
0 230V 400V 0 400V
Primary
Primary
Iron core Iron core
Secondary
Secondary
36V 24V 12V 6V 0 36V 60VA 0 12V 40VA 0
7.3 NDK-100, capacity: 100VA, input 400V, output 36V 12V 7.4 NDK-100, capacity: 100VA, input 400V, output 36V
0 400V 0 400V
Primary Primary
Iron core Iron core
Secondary Secondary
36V 12V 0 36V 0

2. Type designation
Product code for the tropical zone:

"H" humid tropics, "A” dry tropical zone
Rated capacity: 40VA~2500VA
Design sequence No.
Control
Machine tool transformer
3.1 Temperature: -5℃~+40℃,
should not exceed +35℃ the average value within 24 hours.
If the lowest limit is -10℃ or -25℃, please declared.

JBK5 3.3 Relative humidity ≤90%, when the average lower limit value
is under +25℃ within the month;
Control Transformer ≤50% when the temperature is +40℃.
And when lower temperature;
1. General the humidity could be relatively higher.
But the teaperature is lower, the humidity higher.
1.1 Application: JBK5 series control transformers are
suitable for AC circuit of 50Hz/60Hz,
used as control sources for various mechanical equipment 4. Features
and general electrical appliances, and used as power
We always adopt gas argon arc welding for the connection
supplies for work lighting and signal lamps.
among iron cores and between iron core and clamping piece
1.2 Standard: Q/ZT205 (mounting piece) of JBK5 series control transformers,
which enables the product to be an entirety, so that the
structure is more reasonable and reliable.
In addition, the products have advantages of reliable operation,

low dissipation of energy, compact volume, safe wiring,
wide applicability, etc.
I

JBK5-40~630, JBK5-800(Vertical)
Dmax
K
Emax
A
C
Bmax
JBK5-800(Horizontal), JBK5-1000~2500 Type
C
J
K
Bmax
Dmax Emax
Dimension (mm) Item Overall dimensions (mm) Mounting dimensions (mm) Mounting holes (mm)
Capacity (VA) B max D max E max A C K

40~63 79 78 92 66 46 4.8
100 85 95 97 72 62 4.8
160 97 96 105 84 73.5 5.8
250 97 110 105 84 85 5.8
300 122 106 130 93 76 7
400 122 110 130 100 85 7
500 122 125 130 90 98 6
630 151 116 150 130 90 7
800(Vertical) 152 132 150 126 104 7
1000 230 170 156 160 142 7×14
1600 258 185 168 180 155 7×14
2500 285 210 175 210 175 7×14
SG Three-phase
Air-immersed Transformer
1. General
SG series Three-phase Air-immersed Transformer, is natural
cooling indoor, it is applicable to the circuit of AC
50Hz~60Hz, 1000V and below. It can be used in control
power of machine tool and mechanical equipment small type
power as well as work lighting and signal lamp power.
2. Type designation
S G - □/ □
Voltage grade (kV)
Rated capacity(kVA)
Normal cooling type
Three-phase
3.1 Altitude not exceed2000m.
3.2 Ambient temperature within-5℃~+40℃.
3.3 Relative humidity: less than 95%.
3.4 In the ambient, there should not has the gas that corroding
metal, destroying insulation. The transformer should not be
corroded by water, rain or snow.
4. Features
The transformers have two body types: exposed and fence. It has the
advantage of low consumption, low noise, better performance
against fire and free of pollution etc. The shell of the protective
type is made of steel plate, the transformer is in the shell. There
are several holes outside the shell to installation the power lines
In addition, this type can add the monitor meter of the voltage
and current according to the customer's request, And if the
capacity is above 80KVA, it can also add the axial flow fan or
wheels for moving.
I
5.1 The outline of SG series exposed dry cooling type transformer

(as sheet, fig.1)
5.2 The outline of SG series fence dry cooling type transformer
(as sheet, fig.2, fig.3, fig4, fig.5)
Exposed type Fence type (0.3kVA~3kVA)
Dmax
Bmax Dmax
Emax
Emax
A C
Bmax
Fence type (4kVA~20kVA) Fence type (30kVA~60kVA)
Bmax Dmax
Bmax Dmax
Emax
Emax
Fence type (80kVA~300kVA)
Bmax Dmax
铭牌
V V
A A A
Emax
Voltage (V) Overall dimensions (mm)

Connecting
Model Capacity Exposed Fence Exposed Fence
Input Output mark Mounting holes
Bmax Dmax Emax Bmax Dmax Emax A±5 C±5 A±5 C±5
SG-0.15 0.15 200 120 190 220 240 225 125 64 - -
SG-0.3 0.3 200 120 190 220 240 225 125 64 - - 6×12
SG-0.5 0.5 200 125 190 220 240 225 125 74 - -
SG-0.75 0.75 250 146 240 300 280 265 150 96 - -
SG-1 1 250 156 240 300 280 265 150 106 - -

Yyno
SG-1.5 1.5 380 330 220 290 390 355 300 220 103 - -
(Y/Yo) 8×16
SG-2 2 330 220 290 390 355 300 220 103 - -
SG-2.5 2.5 330 240 290 390 355 300 220 120 - -
SG-3 3 330 240 290 390 355 300 220 120 - -
SG-4 4 400 340 360 550 440 600 280 125

Yd
SG-5 5 400 220 400 340 380 550 440 600 280 125
(Y/△) 10×20
SG-6 6 400 340 380 550 440 600 280 125
SG-8 8 450 350 400 580 470 620 280 136
SG-10 10 480 370 450 620 470 680 310 150
SG-15 15 530 380 480 680 470 700 310 155 12.5×20
Dy
SG-20 20 380 550 390 480 680 470 700 310 160
(△/Y)
SG-30 30 730 440 570 900 630 800 420 275
SG-40 40 770 450 570 970 640 830 420 275
SG-50 50 810 470 670 1000 640 900 420 300
Dd
SG-60 60 220 870 490 710 1060 680 950 420 300
(△/△) 12.5×25
SG-80 80 930 520 720 1140 890 1180 420 310 with weels
SG-100 100 970 530 770 1190 900 1260 420 320 with weels
SG-150 150 960 580 750 1200 990 1300 640 350 with weels
SG-200 200 1000 600 830 1280 1010 1320 680 370 with weels
SG-300 300 1150 750 1000 1480 1020 1480 750 460 with weels Φ16
Note:
1. The dimensions of the above only for reference, when the input current is more than 300A, the customer need to
order specially, and the size will change correspondingly.
2. You can choose the rated input/output voltage in the sheet arbitrarily according to the demand.
3. The voltage and size out of the sheet, should confer with consumer on their demand.
4. SG-80kVA and above fence type transformer body have wheels and fan cooling system, with ammeter
and voltmeter, as fig.5.
5. SG-4kVA~60kVA fence type transformer only have body, with one indicator light of power, as fig.3, fig.4.
6. SG-0.3kVA~3kVA fence type transformer’s wiring terminals are outside, with an indicator light of power,
as fig.2.
6.1 product designation: three-phase normal-type transformer
6.2 product type
6.3 output capacity: 20kVA
6.4 frequency: 50Hz
6.5 rated input voltage (line-to-line voltage):380V
6.6 rated output voltage (line-to-line voltage):220V I

6.7 connection mode: input is “Y”, output is “△” or Mark Y/△
6.8 exposed or fence: exposed

2. Product model and meaning
Resistance rate
Nominal voltage: kV
Nominal capacity: kvar
Dry-type
S: three-phase, D: single-phase
Series-connected reactor

conditions.
3.1 Altitude should not exceed 2000 m.
CKSG Series 3.2 Max. ambient temperature: 40 °C , min. ambient temperature:

-25 °C.
Low-voltage Series-connected 3.3 Relative air humidity: air humidity ≤ 50% at 40 °C ambient
temperature, air humidity ≤ 90% at 20 °C ambient temperature.
Reactor
3.4 There is no contamination and explosive media that seriously
affect the insulation of the reactor, and no harmful corrosive
1. Main usages and applicable scope gas or dust in the ambient air. The reactor should not be eroded
This series of low-voltage series-connected reactors (hereinafter by water, rain or snow during the use.
referred to as reactor) are suitable for using in combination 3.5 There is no significant shake and shock vibration on the
with capacitors to suppress and absorb harmonics, protect installation site.
capacitors, avoid the impact of harmonic current and surge
voltage and current, improve the quality of power grid, increase
4. Product form and structure
power factor as well as extend the life time of capacitors.
Reactors can be divided into three-phase and single-phase types,
both of them are dry-type iron-core reactors.
4.1 The product structure of three-phase three-limb is used, in

which the core limb is divided into several even pieces via
multiple air gaps.
4.2 The clamps of reactor have been subject to anti-corrosion

treatment. The key clamps are made of non-magnetic
materials. The overall unit has undergone a process of
pre-baking, vacuum paint dipping as well as heat drying and
curing, in order to cast coil and iron core into one piece,
thereby reducing the temperature rise and noise during the
operation.
5. Wiring methods shown in connection diagram
K K
L L
C C
Y △
6. Shape and installation dimensions
For the shape and installation dimensions of reactors please refer to Figure 1 and Table 1.
Table 1
Dimensions(mm) Installation(mm)
Specifications Capacity of capacitor kvar Nominal capacity kvar
Bmax Dmax Emax A C
CKSG-0.7/0.4-7 10 0.7 240 160 185 200 85
CKSG-0.85/0.4-7 12 0.85 240 160 185 200 85
CKSG-0.98/0.4-7 14 0.98 240 160 185 200 85
CKSG-1.05/0.4-7 15 1.05 240 160 185 200 85
CKSG-1.12/0.4-7 16 1.12 240 170 185 200 95
CKSG-1.4/0.4-7 20 1.4 240 170 185 200 95
CKSG-1.75/0.4-7 25 1.75 240 170 185 200 95
CKSG-2.1/0.4-7 30 2.1 240 170 185 200 95
CKSG-2.45/0.4-7 35 2.45 250 180 185 210 110
CKSG-2.8/0.4-7 40 2.8 250 200 185 210 120
CKSG-3.15/0.4-7 45 3.15 250 205 185 210 125
CKSG-3.5/0.4-7 50 3.5 250 210 185 210 135
CKSG-4.2/0.4-7 60 4.2 280 210 220 235 125
CKSG-4.9/0.4-7 70 4.9 322 220 320 138 150
CKSG-5.6/0.4-7 80 5.6 322 230 320 138 160
Note: In addition, there are various voltage levels, such as 0.45, 0.48kV, 0.525kV, 0.66kV, 0.69kV.
Various resistance rates, such as 1%, 4.5%, 5%, 6%, 12%, 13%, 14%, etc.
Users should specify following points when they purchase products:

(1) The basic model, size and quantities of reactors
(2) Nominal current, nominal voltage, inductance, resistance rate and insulation class
(3) Environmental conditions
(4) Shape and installation dimensions for reference only. If the required size needs to be changed, it can be specified at the time of ordering.
I
P-011 Low Voltage VT & AVR & CT & PT Automatic AC Voltage Regulators
TND1 Single-phase Automatic

AC Voltage Regulator
TNS1 Three-phase Automatic
AC Voltage Regulator
1. General
1.1 Application:
TND1/TNS1 series full-automatic AC voltage
regulator collects sample and amplifies it
and automaticly control circuit, and drives the
servomotor to rotate the rocker arm and brush in
required direction, and finally adjusts the output
voltage to the rated value,
finally reaches the aim of stabilizing the voltage.
It can be widely used in areas,
where the mains voltage often comes across sharp
fluctuation or sharp seasonal variation,
such as industrial production, scientific research
medical treatment & hygiene,
household electrical appliances,
it can provide any loads with excellent power supply.
1.2 Features: Elegant appearance, compact structure,

light weight, low power waste,
complete protection functions, stable and reliable,
low output waveform distortion and so on.
2. Type designation
Cooling type. AN means: convective cooling

(AN will be omitted in model description);
AF means: draw out the hot-air with fan or
blow on the product direct.
Rated capacity of regulator (kVA)
D: single-phase, S: three-phase
Automatic voltage regulator

(high precise automatic AC voltage regulator)
3.1 Ambient temperature: -5℃~+40℃.
3.2 Relative humidity ≤90%(at +20℃).
3.4 Working environment: Indoors,

be free from chemical deposition, dirt,
harmful corrosive medium, or flammable or explosive gas.
Automatic AC Voltage Regulators Low Voltage VT & AVR & CT & PT P-012
4. Technical data
Model TND1 TNS1
No. of phase single three

Input voltage (V) 160V~250V 280V~430V(3-phase, 4-lines)
Output voltage (V) 220V±4% 380V±4%(3-phase, 4-lines)
Frequency (Hz) 50-60
Adjusting time(s) ≤6s when the input voltage changes within the range of 20V
harmonic distortion No additional distortion

Output over-voltage protection setting value 246±4V Phase voltage 246±4V
Output under-voltage protection setting value 180±8V Phase voltage 180±8V
5. Features
5.1 Output capacity

Fig. 1
The relation between output capacity and input voltage P————— Outp ut capacity
P/Pe
refer to as fig. 1 Pe———— Rate d o utp ut capacity
When input voltage is less than 198V, the output capacity of 100%
product will decrease, the working capacity of stabilizer shall
come down;
60%
when you choose output voltage of 110V, the output capacity
shall be no more than 60% rated capacity,to prevent overload.
In put volta ge V
5.2 Overload capacity 160 198 250 Phase volta ge
The stabilizer is not allowed to work overload for long time, 280 342 430 Tim e volta ge
when the input phase voltage fluctuate
within 198V ~ 250V (line voltage from 342V ~ 430V),
at emergent case, it is allowed to work as specified in sheet 1.
I
6. Overall dimensions and weights
Phase Weight Gross

Model & Spec. Overall dimensions (mm) Packing dimensions (mm) Pcs
number (kg) weight (kg)
TND1-0.5 195×205×150 436×234×182 2 9 10

TND1-1 215×240×170 506×270×200 2 12.2 14
TND1-1.5 215×240×170 506×270×200 2 13 15.2
TND1-2 225×290×220 336×268×258 1 8.5 9
TND1-3 245×305×240 366×295×266 1 12.5 13
Single-
TND1-5 225×350×285 389×270×318 1 15.7 16.2
phase
TND1-10/AF(vertical) 285×320×520 400×420×610 1 38.5 47
TND1-10(horizontal) 245×430×375 310×475×410 1 33 35.5
TND1-15/AF 325×430×620 420×535×720 1 58.5 70
TND1-20/AF 325×430×620 420×535×720 1 71.5 83
TND1-30/AF 402×735×803 510×840×970 1 140 156
TNS1-1.5 490×325×160 534×758×208 1 16 16.5
TNS1-3 490×325×160 534×758×208 1 19.5 20
TNS1-4.5 490×325×160 534×758×208 1 21.5 22
TNS1-6 275×355×620 360×475×715 1 33.5 40.5
Three- TNS1-9 330×360×730 420×475×825 1 46 54

phase TNS1-15 330×420×840 420×530×930 1 60.5 70
TNS1-20 510×465×930 595×580×1020 1 110 127
TNS1-30/AF 510×465×930 595×580×1020 1 115 132
TNS1-45/AF 480×790×1055 600×885×1220 1 191 214
TNS1-60/AF 480×790×1055 600×885×1230 1 230 253
a. Input and output of three-phase products of this series are of three-phase four-wire connected,
please wire them with neutral line before using.
Example of type selection: Three-phase motor 2.2kW 1pcs, 5.5kW 1pcs, when selecting the voltage regulator,
its capacity should be ≥(2.2kW+5.5kW)×2.5=19.25kVA, so,
the selected product should be three-phase SVC-20kVA at least.
b. When the three-phase voltage regalator is applied to single-phase or three-phase ,
max capacity of each phase should be one third of rated capacity.
c. When the input phase voltage is lower than 198V, the output capacity of voltage regulator will be reduced,
then the loads should be reduced correspondingly, otherwise, it may be overloaded; when the output voltage is 110V,
then the output capacity should not be beyond 50% of rated capacity, otherwise, it may be overloaded.
Please refer to fig.1 for detail characters.
Sheet 1 Safe consult coefficient of choosing regulator capacity
Load kind Consumer samples Safe coefficient Chosen capacity rate
Incandescent lamp,
＞1.1~1.3 times of
Complete resistive loads resistant coil, electric 1.1~1.3
total rated capacity
cooker
Fluorescent lamp, fan,

＞2.5~3 times of
Inductive, capacitive loads pump, air-conditioner, 2.5~3
total rated capacity
refrigerator and etc.
TND3
Automatic AC
Voltage Regulator
1. General
Application: TND3 series automatic AC voltage regulator

supplys power for equipment such as computers,
duplicating machines, industrial precision equipment,
medical apparatuses, household electrical appliances, etc.
2. Type designation
Rated capacity
Design sequence No.
Single-phase
Automatic voltage regulator
3.1 Ambient temperature: -5℃~+40℃.
3.2 Relative humidity ≤90%(at +20℃).
3.4 Working environment: Indoors,

be free from chemical deposition, dirt,
harmful corrosive medium, or flammable or explosive gas.
I
4. Technical data
Model TND3-3 TND3-5 TND3-7

Rated output capacity (kVA) 3 5 7
Range of rated input voltage (V) 160~250 160~250 160~250
Over load protective current (input) (A) 15 25 32
220V Voltage stabilizing accuracy ±4% ±4% ±4%
Rated 110V Voltage stabilizing accuracy ±8% ±8% ±8%
output
Over-voltage protection 246±4V 246±4V 246±4V
voltage (V)
Under-voltage protection 180±8V 180±8V 180±8V
Short delay 5±2s 5±2s 5±2s
Delay time
Long delay 5±2min 5±2min 5±2min
5. Features
a. The voltage stabilizer can work uninterruptedly, with c. Wide range of input voltage, strong load characteristic.
advantages of low waveform distortion, stable voltage d. Complete functions such as over-voltage and under-voltage
regulation, no instantaneous power failure, it guarantees the indication and protection, long time delay, short time delay, etc.
safety and normal operation of top-grade household appliances e. Utility power/ voltage stabilization switching function, direct
and computers that with memory function, its accuracy of utility power also is available if it is necessary.
output voltage stabilization is 220V±4% adjustable. f. There are 220V and 110V two circuits for rated output voltage;
b. Novel style, elegant appearance: g. Indication of input and output voltage.
The product adopts wall-mounted structure, which enables it to h. Carbon brush: It adopts the latest developed carbon brush.
possess convenient installation and small space occupying area. that has high performance, which sharply prolongs the service
The soft color and streamline outline seem to melt into modern life of voltage stabilizer.
6. Outline & installation size shown as fig.1 and table1
Fig.1 Outline & installation size diagram Table 1 Outline & installation size
A Installation
Outline size (mm) Net weight
Model & spec. size (mm)
(kg)
I
I Bmax Dmax Emax A±3
8
TND3-3 265 170 400 135 11.2
E
TND3-5 285 795 440 135 14.4
24
TND3-7 285 185 440 135 22.5

Φ16
B D
7.1 When the loads are capacitive or inductive, as the load has
Fig. 2 Curve of rated output capacity
heavy pickup current, please select the voltage stabilizer
whose capacity is 2.5~3 times of load power. P———— Output capacity
P/Pe
7.2 When the input phase voltage is lower than 198V, Pe———— Rated output capacity
the output capacity of voltage stabilizer will be reduced, Single output phase voltage (line voltage 380V)
100%
then the loads should be reduced correspondingly,
otherwise, it may be overloaded;
60%
when the output voltage is 110V, then the output capacity
should not be beyond 50% of rated capacity,
otherwise, it may be overloaded. Input
160 198 250 voltage (V)
Refer to fig. 2 for specific characteristics.
2. Type designation
TN D 6- /
Cooling mode: AN means that air is

a cooling way of natural convection;
default to this type if the product is
not indicated.
AF means the cooling way of extracting
internal air with an electric fan or directly
blowing the product cold
Rated capacity, kVA
Phase number: D-single phase; S-three phase
Automatic AC voltage regulator
3.1 Altitude of the installation site is no more than 2000m.
3.2 Environmental temperature: -5℃～+40℃. Upper limit

TND6 Automatic AC of the ambient air temperature of the installation is +40℃,
and its average temperature value in 24 hours shall not
Voltage Regulator exceed +35℃. Lower limit of the ambient air temperature of
the installation is -5℃.
1. General
Note: When the user needs to use the voltage stabilizer in the
TND6 automatic AC voltage regulator is a contact voltage environment above +40℃ or below-5℃, he shall declare to
stabilizer with wide input voltage range. It is an upgrade the manufacturer.
product designed according to the principle of TND1
3.3 Relative humidity: The relative humidity of the air is no
series voltage stabilizer. It is the closed-loop control
more than +50% when the maximum temperature is + 40 ℃;
system that consists of voltage stabilizer specially designed
higher relative humidity may be allowed at lower
or transformer and controller or control circuit to complete
temperatures, for example: 90% at 20℃.
the voltage stabilization function through driving the brush
Special measures shall be taken for the condensation
by the servo motor. The main characteristic of the TND6
occasionally produced due to temperature changes.
series voltage stabilizer is wide input voltage range which is
130V(110V)～250V (input voltage range of TND1 series 3.4 Installation environment shall be well ventilated and free
voltage stabilizer is 160V～250V); it can ensure the output from apparent impurity, corrosive gas, dust, combustible
voltage is stabilized at about 220V. TND6 series voltage material and gas. In the air of the installation environment,
stabilizer can be used in industrial production, scientific there shall be no corrosive and harmful gas or dust damaging
research, public facilities, medical science, household to insulation; in the use, the voltage stabilizer shall not be
appliances and other fields, provide stable power supply eroded by water, rain and snow.
for the load and ensure normal operation of the electrical
3.5 Ventilation shall be maintained around the installation site,
equipment. And it is suitable for areas with large voltage
and enough heat dissipation space shall be reserved around
fluctuation of power network or large seasonal variation
the installation site (generally, the reserved space shall be
of the voltage of the power network.
Standard compliant: Q/ZT 78.

greater than or equal to 0.5m). Plastic cover, cloth and other
inflammable materials are forbidden to cover the regulated
I
power supply or debris is not allowed to put on it to prevent
overheating of the regulated power supply and damaging.
3.6 The voltage stabilizer shall be horizontally installed; and there

shall be no significant shake and shock vibration at the
installation site.
3.7 For indoor use, output terminal of the voltage stabilizer shall
not be used in parallel.
3.8 Power voltage waveform is similar to sine wave.

4.1 Main parameters and technical performance
Table 1
Type Rated Rated output Frequency Rated input Input voltage Rated output voltage Output overvoltage Output
specification capacity (kVA) current (A) (Hz) voltage (V) range (V) and accuracy (V) protection value (V) capacity curve
TND6-10/AF 10 45.5
50/60 220 130~250 220(±4%) 246±4 Figure 2
TND6-15/AF 15 68.2
4.2 Output capacity curve
When the input voltage of the single-phase regulated P2(Output capacity) P2(Output capacity)
power supply is lower than 198V, output capacity of 100% 100%
the product is reduced and the product must be used

40% 50%
after reducing the capacity.
U1 U1
110 198 250 Input voltage 130 198 250 Input voltage
Figure 1 Output capacity curve Figure 2 Output capacity curve

5. Product features
5.1 Wide input voltage range: the input voltage range is 130V(110V)～250V, and the output voltage is 220V× (1±4%)
5.2 Strong load-carrying capacity; it can carry 50% of the rated load during the input at a low voltage of 130V
5.3 Low voltage stabilization function: it can still output 220V at the lowest input voltage of 130V(110V).
5.4 Voltage and current parameters are displayed on the digital instrumentation, clear and intuitive.
5.5 It has the overheat protection function. Patent designed circuit-breaker device is used as the input breaking switch which can automat-
ically cut off the power at the input terminal of the voltage stabilizer.
5.6 It adopts the patent design of “dual protection system for output and input”, overheat protection breaking input, overvoltage and
under voltage protection breaking output; complete protection functions make the protection more thoroughly.
5.7 Wide applicable load types; suitable for areas with large voltage fluctuation of power network or low voltage of power network.
6. Installation dimensions
Table 2
Physical dimension (mm) Width Package size (mm) Width

Type specification Pcs/package Net weight (kg) Gross weight (kg)
(max) x Depth (max) x Height (max) (max) x Depth (max) x Height (max)
TND6-10/AF 305×345×520 395×460×660 1 46 56.5
TND6-15/AF 325×435×605 415×540×735 1 71 85
Note: Above parameters are for reference; for the concrete parameters, take in kind as the standard. No prior notice will be given for any change.
For your safety, please read the following selection requirements and notes carefully when ordering:
a. This product is not suitable for overload conditions. In the region where the grid voltage is generally low, attention shall be paid to
the use of effective capacity which shall be reduced proportionally: i.e., the lower the input voltage, the smaller the electrical load.
When the input voltage is lower than 198V, output capacity of the regulated power supply will be reduced, so the load shall be
reduced to avoid overload. For its relationship, refer to “Figure 1, Output capacity curve”.
b. Generally, regulated power supply shall be reasonably selected according to the rated frequency, startup surge current, inductive or
capacitive load of the electrical equipment. Its output capacity shall be left with sufficient margin; especially in the impact load
selection, the margin shall be greater. For the specific selection safety factor, see Table 3.
Table 3
Load property Equipment type Safety factor Select regulated power supply capacity
Incandescent lamp, resistance wire,

Pure resistive load 1.1~1.3 ≥1.1~1.3 times total load power
electric furnace and other equipment
Fluorescent lamp, fan, pump, air

Inductive and capacitive loads 2.5~3 ≥2.5~3times total load power
conditioning, refrigerator etc.
c. There is a high voltage in the voltage stabilizer. Non-professionals do not open the case to avoid getting an electric shock.
d. The voltage stabilizer must be reliably grounded to ensure the use safety.
e. The voltage stabilizer shall be placed in a ventilated, dry room. The using environment shall be free of corrosive gases, vapors, conductive
dust and explosive substances, as well as violent vibration.
g. The voltage stabilizer is forbidden to be used in parallel. Output terminals of two or more voltage stabilizers shall not be used in parallel
or series.
h. When the product is working, carbon brush in the machine for pressure regulating produces arc spark. It is forbidden to place this
machine in a flammable and explosive place (such as: oil depot, fireworks factory etc.).
I
TM Ultra-low Voltage
Automatic AC
Voltage Regulator
1. General
TM series ultra low-voltage automatic AC voltage stabilizer is a
kind of stabilizer which adopts the sampling control system
composed of digital integrated circuit, controls electromagnetic
relay and changes the tap of auto-transformer, so as to achieve
stable output voltage. The outstanding advantage of the
product is to have the voltage stabilizing function of inputting
ultra low voltage and achieving a wide range of input voltage.
This product is widely used in office equipment of various

industries and household refrigerators, freezers, electric fans,
air conditioners, TVs, computers and other electrical appliances
and applies to communication, medical care, lighting system
and other electrical places, especially to some areas where
electrical appliances do not work properly which is caused by
too high or too low grid voltage. It can automatically adjusts
the voltage to the proper range, to ensure the normal use of
electrical appliances.
Product standard: Q/ZT 648.
2. Type designation
Rated capacity, kVA
Self-coupled voltage-adjusting step voltage regulator
3.2 The installation site elevation does not exceed 3000m.
3.3 Work environment: the installation environment has no obvious

contamination; the interior has no chemical depositions, dirts,
hazardous aggressive media and flammable, explosive gases.
3.4 Ventilation should be maintained around the installation site;

enough space should be left for heat dissipation around the
installation (generally the reserved space should be greater
than or equal to 0.5m). It is prohibited to use plastic cover, cloth
and other flammable items for covering the regulated power
supply or to place sundries on the power supply, in order to avoid
overheating damage to regulated power supply .
3.5 During installation, it is prohibited to place it onto the plastic

components of refrigerators, freezers and other appliances,
in order to avoid overload heating of the voltage stabilizer to
make plastic surfaces of appliances heat to cause deformation.
Fig. 1 Output capacity curve P2 (output capacity)

When the voltage inputted by single-phase stabilized 10 0%
power supply drops below 198V, the output capacity
of the product will be reduced and the product must
be used after reducing capacity. 50 %
U1
4. Technical data 13 0 19 8 27 0 Inpu t vol tag e
Table 1 Technical data
Rated Rated Rated output Output

Model Frequency Rated input Input voltage Installation
capacity output voltage and over-voltage
specification Hz voltage V range V method
kVA current A precision V protection value V
TM-0.5 0.5 2.3

TM-1 1 4.5
Desk type
TM-1.5 1.5 6.8
TM-2 2 9.1 130~270& 220
50 220 246±4
TM-3 3 13.6 95~270 (±10%)
TM-5 5 22.7 Wall-mounted,
TM-8 8 36.4 desk type
TM-10 10 45.5
Note: If need more wider input voltage range (50~270A), it can be customized.
5. Product features
5.1 The product adopts relay for fast switching and voltage regulating, with the characteristics of reliable operation, fast reaction speed, no
waveform distortion and strong instantaneous overload capacity.
5.2 Strong anti-overload, overvoltage capability. When the load is overweight, it has the functions of automatic protection and cutting off
the output power. When the grid voltage exceeds the input range of the voltage stabilizer and high voltage is inputted, it can also quickly
cut off the output, to ensure the safety of electrical equipment of users.
5.3 The effective input voltage range is AC 130V-270V. When the grid voltage changes from 130V to 270V, its output voltage is always maintained
within 220V±10%, therefore, it is particularly suitable for use in the occasion of grid voltage fluctuating within this range.
5.4 It uses LCD screen to display the input and output voltage values, with the characteristic of clear, intuitive, accurate readings.
5.5 It adopts excellent circuit design and is made from high-quality raw materials and parts. Thus this series of products have low failure
rate, long service life,safe and reliable operation.
5.6 TM-3~10 are equipped with two kinds of working states of “mains “and “steady”. When the voltage of AC is normal, “mains”
switch can be turned on to make the voltage stabilizer operate in “mains” state; at this time, loss of the straight-through output
terminal of AC power supply can be further reduced.
6. Outline overall and installing dimensions
Model and Outline dimension (mm)

Packing size (mm) Piece / package Net weight (kg) Gross weight (kg)
specification Width max. × depth max. × height max.
I
TM-0.5 165×275×96 215×352×146 1 2.7 3.1
TM-1 165×275×96 215×352×146 1 2.9 3.3
TM-1.5 165×275×96 215×352×146 1 4.0 4.4
TM-2 185×295×105 225×370×150 1 5.3 5.7
TM-3 260×380×155 308×430×195 1 9.9 10.7
TM-5 295×410×195 353×455×215 1 14.8 15.8
TM-8 295×410×195 353×455×215 1 18.8 19.8
TM-10 450×320×205 505×388×254 1 21.5 22.8
The above dimensions and weights are for reference only.

The product after improvement is subject to local change involved without prior notice.
For your safety, please read carefully the following selection requirements and precautions when ordering:
a. This product should not be used under overload conditions. In areas with generally low grid voltage, attention should be paid that the
use of effective capacity shall be proportionately reduced, that is, the lower the input voltage, the smaller the electric appliance (load)
shall be. When the input voltage drops below 198V, the output capacity of the regulated power supply will be reduced, thus it must be
used after reducing the load, in order to avoid overload. Refer to “Fig.1 Output capacity curve” for its relationship.
b. Under normal circumstances, regulated power supply shall be reasonably selected according to the rated power, start surge current, inductive
or capacitive loads of the electrical equipment in selection. Its output capacity should allow sufficient margin; especially in impact load
selection, margin should be greater.
For example, air conditioners, freezers, refrigerators and other household appliances require large start-up current at start moment.
Generally, power of the voltage stabilizer should be more than 3 times the rated power of the used appliances; otherwise, it will not
conducive to the normal work of household appliances.
c. There exists high voltage within the voltage stabilizer. Non professional personnel is not asked to open the casing so as to avoid the
electric shock.
d. The voltage stabilizer must be earthed reliably. AC socket connected with the input plug of the voltage stabilizer must be equipped with
reliable earth wire to ensure the safe use. The power plug should be pulled off or wiring removed for safekeeping if never used.
e. The voltage stabilizer should be placed indoor for ventilation and drying. The use environment should be free of corrosive gases,
vapors, conductive dusts, explosive substances and violent vibration.
f. Do not use plastic cover, cloth and others for covering the voltage stabilizer or place sundries on the voltage stabilizer in order to avoid
the overheating of the voltage stabilizer and being damaged. The voltage stabilizer should be placed in a well-ventilated location, for
better heat dissipation.
g. It is prohibited to use the voltage stabilizer in parallel. Output terminals of two or several voltage stabilizers shall not be used in parallel
or in series.h.When the product is operating, switching of the relay contacts in the machine may produce arc spark. It is prohibited to
use this machine in the combustible and explosive places (e.g. oil depot, fireworks factory etc.).
TNDZ(DBW), TNSZ(SBW)
Pillar Type AC Automatic
Regulator with Compensated
1. General
Application: used in the application requiring stable
voltage, such as telecommunication, broadcasting & TV,
elevator, silicone controlled apparatus, numerical control
machine tool, and various production lines, etc.
2. Type designation
Rated capacity kVA
DBW is originally model of single-phase

SBW is originally model of three-phase
Pillar iron core
Phases: D means single-phase S means three-phase
Auto-regulator
3.1 Temperature: -5℃~+45℃;
3.2 Altitude:≤1000m;
3.3 Relative humidity: 15%~90%(20℃).
I
4. Technical data
Accuracy The protect The protect

Rated Input Rated Rated output
Frequency of value of value of Response
Model capacity Phase voltage output current
(Hz) regulate output over- output under- time
(kVA) range voltage (A)
voltage voltage voltage
TNDZ(DBW)-20 20 When input 91

50 176 242 198 voltage steps
TNDZ(DBW)-30 30 1 ~ ~ 220 ±(1±5)% ± ± 15V,the output 136
60 264 2.2 2.2 response
TNDZ(DBW)-50 50 time≤1.5s 227
TNSZ(SBW)-30 30 46
TNSZ(SBW)-50 50 76
TNSZ(SBW)-75 75 114
TNSZ(SBW)-100 100 152
TNSZ(SBW)-150 150 228
When
TNSZ(SBW)-180 180 273
input
TNSZ(SBW)-200 200 voltage 304
50 304 418 342
steps
TNSZ(SBW)-225 225 3 ~ ~ 380 ±(1±5)% ± ± 342
25V,the
TNSZ(SBW)-250 60 456 3.8 3.8
250 output 380
TNSZ(SBW)-300 300 response 456
time≤1.5s
TNSZ(SBW)-320 320 486
TNSZ(SBW)-350 350 532
TNSZ(SBW)-400 400 608
TNSZ(SBW)-450 450 684
TNSZ(SBW)-500 500 760
Note1: It is no the function of output under voltage what eigibility item when normal regulations product
ex-facture, unless the customer request.
Note2: If have other requires you can discuss with manufacture.Such as output voltage is 400V, or output
voltage three-phase 220V, and the range of regulate voltage between ±3% can negotiate to order.
5. Features
5.1 When fault of phase sequence by power supply or maintenance of transformer, the voltage regulator will automatically check and
adjust to ensure the normal working of the regulator.
5.2 Adoption of new technology can reduce contactors to increase the reliability of voltage regulator.
5.3 With over-voltage protection and alarming

When the voltage is stable, the input voltage is beyond the threshold(456V) or output voltage beyond the threshold(426V±7V),the
voltage regulator will cut the power supply and alarm until the input and output voltage reduce to the normal value.
5.4 With the function of automatic start when power supply resumes.
5.5 With starting delay.

6. Specifications, overall dimensions and weights
Model Rated capacity Overall dimensions (mm) Net weight (kg)
20kVA 750×610×1250 200

TNDZ(DBW)
30kVA 800×610×1380 230
single-phase
50kVA 850×690×1450 305
30kVA 570×790×1050 195
50kVA 610×820×1150 260
75kVA 650×880×1210 310
100kVA 650×880×1210 355
150kVA 760×1100×1300 540
180kVA 900×1190×1550 600
200kVA 900×1190×1550 645
TNSZ(SBW)
225kVA 900×1190×1550 700
three-phase
250kVA 900×1190×1550 745
300kVA 900×1190×1550 840
320kVA 900×1190×1550 890
350kVA 1400×1070×2250 945
400kVA 1400×1070×2250 1045
450kVA 1400×1070×2250 1350
500kVA 1400×1070×2250 1400
7.1 Considering impact by inrush current, the safety coefficient should be 1.5-3 times. The safety coefficient is determined by the load.
7.2 This product should be connected to the natural line when the input and output circuit is three phase four line.
7.3 The capacity of single phase should be less than 1/3 of the product.
I
DBW-JW, SBW-JW
Industrial-grade Contactless
Intelligent Voltage Stabilizer
1. General
This series industrial-grade contactless intelligent voltage
stabilizer is divided into single-phase DBW-JW and three-
phase SBW-JW. Compared with other forms of voltage
stabilizer, it is characterized by large capacity, high efficiency,
no waveform distortion, quick voltage regulation response
and wide applicable loads. This series of product is set with
overvoltage, undervoltage, over current and other protection
functions; it is installed easily and operates reliably.
The product adopts the latest DSP arithmetic chip control
technology, fast alternating current sampling technology,
effective value correction technology, zero current switching
technology and fast compensation voltage stabilization
technology; it combines the intelligent instrument, quick
voltage regulation with fault diagnosis; the product is safe,
efficient and precise.
The product is mainly composed of isolation transformer,

SCR module, CPU control core and safety protection device;
it achieves the control without contacts and is widely applied
in large mechanical and electrical equipment, metal processing
equipment, production line, elevator, medical apparatus and
instruments, embroidery textile equipment, air conditioning,
radio and television, household appliances and building
lighting and other electrical equipment that needs a stable
voltage in the fields of industry, transportation, posts and
telecommunications, communications, national defense,
railway, research etc.
Standard compliant: YD/T 1270.

2. Type designation
B W-JW -
Rated capacity, kVA
Microcomputer control non-contact adjustment
Voltage stabilizer
Compensation type
Phase number: D-Single phase, S-Three-phase
3. Product features
3.1 CUP intelligent control, stable and reliable digital circuit
3.2 Intelligent LCD: Intelligent instrument displays voltage and current effective value in real time; clear, accurate, user-friendly man-
machine interface.
3.3 Three-phase modulation; unbalance degree of the output voltage is less than 1%; the accuracy of each phase output voltage
is unchanged; no contact, no wear and maintenance-free.
3.4 High-speed response: Voltage stabilization response time is within 40ms; it does not affect the voltage of computer automation,
equipment and apparatus.
3.5 High precision: Output voltage accuracy of the product can be set within±1%~±5%; the maximum voltage stabilization
accuracy is ±1%.
3.6 Communication interface: The machine is configured with RS-232 communication interface (optional).
3.7 Strong anti-interference and purification ability makes the output power completely pure.
3.8 Wide range of applications: Wide voltage stabilization range can meet the use of premises and equipment with bad power
grid quality and large voltage fluctuation range.
3.9 Complete protection functions: It is provided with overload, overvoltage, undervoltage, short circuit and other fault display
and protection functions to ensure the safe operation of voltage stabilizer and load.
3.10 Powerful preset functions: overcurrent protection limit can be set arbitrarily.
3.11 Strong adaptability: strong adaptability to power grid and load; reliably, continuously and stably operate under various
severe power grids and complex loads
3.12 No distortion in output voltage waveform: Zero current switching technology is adopted; no breaking current, surge
current occur in the switching process and the waveform is free of distortion.
3.13 Low loss: power loss is the minimum, and no-load loss is less than 0.5%.
3.14 Bypass function, easy maintenance: it can be switched between “Voltage stabilization” and “Bypass direct supply”
to facilitate the use in the trouble maintenance.
I
4. Working principle block diagram
L
T1 T2
L
SCRO SCR1 SCR2 SCR3

D1 D3 D5 D7
D0 D2 D4 D6 SCR9 SCR10
D17 D19
D16 D18
Uin D9 D11 D13 D15

R1
D8 D10 D12 D14 Uout
N
N
Note: This figure is the one-phase principle block diagram; three-phase principle block diagram is three one-phase principle block diagrams.
5. Normal working conditions and installation conditions

5.1 Upper limit of the ambient air temperature of the installation is +40℃,and its average temperature value in 24 hours shall not exceed
+35℃.Lower limit of the ambient air temperature of the installation is -5℃.
5.2 Altitude of the installation site is no more than 2000m (it shall be used after the capacity is reduced when the altitude is more than
2000m).
5.3 The relative humidity of the air is no more than +50% when the maximum temperature is + 40 ℃,higher relative humidity may be
allowed at lower temperatures, for example: 90% at 20℃.Special measures shall be taken for the condensation occasionally produced
due to temperature changes.
5.4 Indoor use.The environment shall be well ventilated and free of apparent impurity, corrosive gas, dust, combustible material and gas.
5.5 The voltage stabilizer shall be horizontally installed; and there shall be no significant shake and shock vibration at the installation site.
5.6 Output terminal of the voltage stabilizer shall not used in parallel.
Note: Particular service conditions that do not comply with the above provisions shall be determined by the using unit and our company
through negotiation.
Phase number Single phase Three phase

Input voltage 220V±15% 380V±15%
Rated output voltage 220V 380V
Frequency 50Hz～60Hz 50Hz～60Hz
Accuracy of voltage stabilization ± (1 ~ 5)% settable ± (1 ~ 5)% settable
Response time <40 ms <40 ms
Output overvoltage protection value (242±2)V (418±3.5)V
No additional waveform
Total harmonic distortion
distortion (static)
Efficiency ≥98%
Arrester, EMI filter, LC

Anti-interference
filter (optional)
Output phase voltage over 10%, cut

Over-voltage, under-voltage protection
off output or uninterrupted steering bypass
Liquid crystal display Voltage, current, abnormal
LED display and sound

Alarm
and light alarm
RS-232 interface inside

Communication interface
the machine (optional)
Note: The above parameters are for conventional products; users have special requirements
can customize the products through consultation.
7. Technical performance comparison
DBW-JW、SBW-JW TNSZ(SBW)Column
Industrial grade contactless Inductive voltage
Technical index compensated AC voltage
compensated AC voltage stabilizer stabilizer
stabilizer (servo-mechanical)
Use the microcomputer intelligent

detection and output instruction
Change the secondary winding
to control the fast switching of
voltage of the compensating
silicon controlled rectifier (SCR) Change the relative
transformer depending on the
module; maintain the stability of voltage of input and
movement of carbon brush rack
output voltage through the same output by changing
Working principle on the voltage regulating
frequency, lock phase and sine the phase angle of
transformer to maintain the
wave superposition compensation. the stator and the
stability of output voltage.
Fast response, no carbon brush, no rotor.
With carbon brush, contact
contact, no machinery, no spark and
and mechanical transmission.
three-phase regulation separately.
Slow (3～5)s: Belong

Fast: Time for stabilizing to the to lag voltage
rated voltage≤40ms; may stabilization; cannot
suppress the instantaneous input Slow (3～5)s: Motor suppress the
Response time
surge voltage,instantly and adjustment (Mechanical) instantaneous input
effectively protect the precision surge voltage, and
equipment. difficult to protect
the precision equipment.
Buttons on the display panel

Parameter setting Can not be set Can not be set
can set various parameters.
Conventional products
Conventional products are Conventional products are are three-phase
three-phase products regulated three-phase products regulated products regulated
Three-phase
separately with the three-phase uniformly without the uniformly without
unbalance degree
voltage automatic balancing three-phase voltage automatic the three-phase
function. balancing function. voltage automatic
balancing function.
Conventional
Protective 20ms protection after Protection time≥10s
products
response time the anomaly after the anomaly
do not have
Magnetic
Yes (stator and
leakage Nix Nix
rotor leakage)
interference
There is surge
voltage feeding
Power network back to the power
Nix Nix
pollution grid, and the voltage
increases with the
increase in the power
Side mainte- Regular

Maintenance-free Regular maintenance
nance cycle maintenance
I
8. Application area block diagram for DBW-JW, SBW-JW Industrial-grade contactless intelligent voltage stabilizer
Communication equipment
Medical equipment
Power grid
Laser cutting equipment
Numerical control processing equipment
Printing equipment
9.1 Selection method. Voltage stabilizer is generally selected according to the following formula:
S=PS’/COSΦ Where： S-Capacity of the voltage stabilizer actually needed;
P- Load power; S’- Safety factor, COSΦ- Load power factor
9.2 Power factors and safety factors

9.2.1 Pure resistive load: Power factor is 1 (such as: resistance wire, electric furnace etc.);
safety factor: 1.1~1.5.
9.2.2 Inductive load: Power factor is generally 0.6~0.8 (such as: elevator, air conditioner,
motor type equipment); safety factor: 1.5~3.
9.2.3 Capacitive load: Power factor is generally 0.6~0.8 (such as: computer room, radio
and television etc.); safety factor: 1.5~2.
9.2.3 Comprehensive load: Power factor is generally 0.6~0.7 (such as factory, hotel, and
household appliances comprehensive load); safety factor: 1.5~2.5
Reference for selection of safety factors: Under the inductive capacitive load environment,
safety factors must be carefully selected to ensure the safe operation of products because
the large load start current will cause impact to the voltage stabilizer.
Current Transformers Low Voltage VT & AVR & CT & PT P-030
BH-0.66 I
1. General
To be used in combination with measurement instruments:
ammeters, watt-hour meters, measurement units,
control relays, etc.
2.1 Secondary current Isn: 5A
2.2 Rated voltage Ue:660 V
2.3 Frequency: 50Hz/60Hz
2.4 Operating temperature: -5°C to +40°C, humidity <80%
2.6 Standards: IEC 61869-2
2.7 Installation type: busbar or plate fixing
3. Type designation
Category number
Width of window for bars
Current transformers series
I
P-031 Low Voltage VT & AVR & CT & PT Current Transformers
4. Technical data
Transformation Power(VA) Accuracy class Number of

Model turns through Overall and installing dimensions (mm)
ratio(Ipn/Isn) (A) 1 0.5 0.5S 0.2 0.2S iron core
5/5 2.5 2.5
10/5 2.5 2.5
15/5 2.5 2.5
20/5 2.5 2.5
25/5 2.5 2.5
30/5 2.5 2.5
40/5 2.5 2.5
50/5 2.5 2.5
86
75/5 2.5 2.5
5/1 2.5 2.5
10/1 2.5 2.5
15/1 2.5 2.5 P1
BH-0.66 Solid type 20/1 2.5 2.5
38 68
25/1 2.5 2.5 82
68
30/1 2.5 2.5
40/1 2.5 2.5
50/1 2.5 2.5
75/1 2.5 2.5
75/5 2.5 1
S1 S2
Φ22
100/5 2.5 1
80
75/1 2.5 1 1 P1
33.5 34
BH-0.66 20Ⅰ
100/1 2.5 1 1 61
30/5 2.5 2.5 5

50/5 2.5 2.5 3
75/5 2,5 2.5 2
100/5 2.5 1
100/5 5 5 2
150/5 2.5 2.5 1
200/5 5 5 1
250/5 5 5 1
S1 S2
300/5 5 5 1
80
400/5 5 5 1
11
30/1 2.5 2.5 5

50/1 2.5 2.5 3
Φ23
75/1 2.5 2.5 2 P1
100/1 2.5 1 1 31.3
33
BH-0.66 30Ⅰ 100/1 5 5 2 32
60.5
150/1 2.5 2.5 1
200/1 5 5 1
250/1 5 5 1
300/1 5 5 1
Power(VA) Accuracy class Number of

Transformation
30/5 5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 5
50/5 5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3
75/5 5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2
75/5 5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1
100/5 5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1
100/5 5 5 5 5 5 2
S1 S2
150/5 5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1
98
200/5 5 5 5 5 5 1
31
21
11
250/5 5 5 5 5 5 1
300/5 5 5 5 5 5 1 P1
30/1 2.5 1 5 11
50/1 2.5 1 3 21.5
31.5 42
75/1 5 2.5 2
44
100/1 5 2.5 2 75
BH-0.66 30ⅠB
150/1 5 2.5 1
200/1 5 5 1
250/1 5 5 1
30/5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 5
50/5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3
75/5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2
100/5 2.5 1
100/5 5 5 5 5 2.5 2
150/5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1
200/5 5 5 5 5 2.5 1
250/5 5 5 5 5 2.5 1
S1 S2
φ31
300/5 5 5 5 5 5 1
400/5 5 5 5 5 5 1
11
42
98
500/5 10 10 5 5 5 1
600/5 10 10 5 5 5 1
P1
30/1 5 2.5 5 5 5 5
11
50/1 5 2.5 3 42
43.5 40
75/1 5 2.5 2
75
BH-0.66 40Ⅰ 100/1 5 5 2
150/1 5 2.5 1
200/1 5 5 1
250/1 5 5 1
300/1 5 5 1
400/1 5 5 1
500/1 10 10 1
I

150/5 2.5 1
200/5 5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1

250/5 5 5 2.5 Φ37
2.5 2.5 1 S1 S2
300/5 5 5 5 5 5 1
98
400/5 5 5 5 5 5 1
16
500/5 10 10 5 5 5 1
600/5 10 10 5 5 5 1
P1
750/5 10 10 10 10 5 1
800/5 10 10 10 10 5 1 50
51
1000/5 40
10 10 10 10 5 1 82
1200/5 20 20 20 20 5 1
150/1 2.5 1
200/1 5 2.5 1
250/1 5 5 1 Φ37±0.28
107max
300/1 5 5 1
16±0.19
400/1 5 5 1
500/1 10 10 1 51±0.37
600/1 10 10 1
58
PC
750/1 10 10 1 50±0.5
84max 43max
BH-0.66 50Ⅰ 800/1 10 10 1
1000/1 10 10 1 (750/5A~1500/5A class 1 class 0.5)
200/5 5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1

250/5 5 5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1
300/5 5 5 5 5 2.5 1 S1 S2
400/5 5 5 5 5 5 1
500/5 10 10 5 5 5 1
126
21
600/5 10 10 5 5 5 1
750/5 10 10 10 10 5 1
800/5 10 10 10 10 5 1 Φ46
P1
1000/5 10 10 10 10 5 1
50
1200/5 20 20 20 20 5 1 62
20 20 20 1 102 40
1500/5 20 10
2000/5 20 20 20 20 10 1
200/1 5 1
250/1 5 5 1
300/1 5 5 1 Φ46±0.32
107max
400/1 5 5 1
500/1 10 10 1
21±0.22
600/1 10 10 1 61.5±0.37
10
58
750/1 10 1 PC
800/1 10 10 1 50±0.5
45max
104max
1000/1 10 10 1
BH-0.66 60Ⅰ
20 20 1 (1500/5A~2000/5A class 1 class 0.5)
1200/1

Transformation
300/5 5 5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1
400/5 5 5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1
500/5 10 10 5 5 5 1 S1 S2
600/5 10 10 5 5 5 1
30.5
750/5
138
10 10 10 10 5 1
11
800/5 10 10 10 10 5 1
1000/5 10 10 10 10 5 1
P1
1200/5 20 20 20 20 5 1
50
1500/5 20 20 20 20 10 1 60.5 Φ52
81.5
2000/5 20 20 20 20 10 1 118 46
2500/5 40 40 40 40 10 1
300/1 5 5 1
400/1 5 5 1 Φ52±0.37
149max
500/1 10 10 1
600/1 10 10 1
11±0.16
750/1 10 10 1 82±0.5
58
800/1 10 10 1
PC
1000/1 10 10 1 50±0.5 47max

BH-0.66 80Ⅰ 127max
1200/1 20 20 1
1500/1 (2000/5A~2500/5A class 1 class 0.5)
20 20 1
600/5 10 10 10 10 5 1
750/5 10 10 10 10 5 1
S1 S2
800/5 10 10 10 10 5 1
145
154
1000/5 10 10 10 10 5 1
42
32
22
1200/5 20 20 20 20 5 1
1500/5 20 20 20 20 10 1 P1
50
2000/5 20 20 20 20 10 1 62 Φ62
82
102 46
2500/5 40 40 40 40 10
3000/5 40 40 40 40 10 1
600/1 10 10 1 Φ62±0.37
171max
750/1 10 10 1
800/1 10 10 1
32.5±0.32
1000/1 10 10 1 102±0.57
58
PC
1200/1 20 20 1
50±0.5 53max
BH-0.66 100Ⅰ
1500/1 20 20 1 146max
(2500/5A~3000/5A class 1 class 0.5)

2000/1 20 20 1
1000/5 10 10 10 10 5 1
S1 S2
1200/5 20 20 20 20 5 1
Φ62
136
1500/5 20 20 20 20 10 1
36
2000/5 20 20 20 20 10 1
P1
50
2500/5 40 40 40 40 10 1 126
I
190
3000/5 40 40 40 40 10 1
46
4000/5 40 40 40 40 10 1
1000/1 10 10 1
Φ70±0.43
173max
1200/1 20 20 1
60±0.37
1500/1 20 20 1
BH-0.66 120Ⅰ 130±0.64
58
2000/1 20 20 1 PC
50±0.5 47max
2500/1 40 40 1 197max
3000/1 40 40 1 (2500/5A~4000/5A class 1 class 0.5)

2.2 Rated voltage Ue: 660 V
2.7 Installation type: Busbar or plate fixing
3. Type designation
Category number
SDH-0.66 Ⅱ Current transformer series
1. General
ammeters, watt-hour meters,
measurement units, control relays, etc.
4. Technical data

Model ratio(Ipn/Isn) (A)
turns through Overall and installing dimensions (mm)
1 0.5 0.5S 0.2 0.2S iron core
150/5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1
200/5 5 5 5 5 5 1
250/5 5 5 5 5 5 1
300/5 5 5 5 5 5 1
400/5 5 5 5 5 5 1
500/5 10 10 5 5 5 1 S1 S2
104
600/5 10 10 5 5 5 1
31
750/5 10 10 10 10 5 1
800/5 10 10 10 10 5 1
P1
150/1 5 2.5 1
42
200/1 5 5 1 45
78.5 46
250/1 5 5 1
SDH-0.66 40 Ⅱ
300/1 5 5 1
400/1 5 5 1
500/1 10 10 1
600/1 10 10

150/5 2.5 1
200/5 5 5 1
250/5 5 5 1
S1 S2
300/5 5 5 1
106
31.5
400/5 5 5 5 5 5 1
500/5 10 10 5 5 5 1
600/5 10 10 5 5 5 1 P1
750/5 10 10 10 10 5 1 52
800/5 10 10 10 10 5 1 54
87 46
1000/5 10 10 10 10 5 1
1200/5 20 20 20 20 5 1
1500/5 20 20 20 20 10 1
150/1 2.5 1 1
200/1 5 2.5 1
250/1 5 2.5 1
121max
31.5±0.28
300/1 5 5 1
400/1 5 5 1
52±0.37
500/1 10 10 1 58
PC
600/1 10 10 1
54±0.5 47m ax
750/1 10 10 1 88m ax
SDH-0.66 50 Ⅱ 800/1 10 10 1
(750/5A~1500/5A class 1 class 0.5)
1000/1 10 10 1
200/5 5 2.5 1
250/5 5 5 1
300/5 5 5 1
S1 S2
400/5 5 5 1
110
500/5 10 10 5 5 1
31.5
600/5 10 10 5 5 5 1
750/5 10 10 10 10 5 1 P1
800/5 10 10 10 10 5 1 53
62
1000/5 10 10 10 10 5 1 102 48
1200/5 20 20 20 20 5 1
1500/5 20 20 20 20 10 1
2000/5 20 20 20 20 10 1
200/1 5 5 1
S1 S2
250/1 5 5 1
300/1 5 5 1
128max
31.5±0.28
400/1 5 5 1
500/1 10 10 1 62±0.37
600/1 10 10 1 58
PC
750/1 10 10 1
53±0.5 49max
800/1 10 10 1 103max
SDH-0.66 60 Ⅱ
1000/1 10 10 1
(1500/5A~2000/5A class 1 class 0.5)
1200/1 20 20
I

600/5 10 10 5 5 1
750/5 10 10 5 5 1 S1 S2
32.5
118
800/5 10 10 10 10 5 1
1000/5 10 10 20 20 5 1 P1
60.5
1200/5 20 20 20 20 5 1 82
122 47
1500/5 20 20 20 20 10 1
2000/5 20 20 20 20 10 1
2500/5 40 40 40 40 10 1
144max
600/1 10 10 1
32.5±0.28
750/1 10 10 1
82±0.5
800/1 10 10 1
58
PC
1000/1 10 10 1
61±0.5 49max
123max
1200/1 20 20 1
SDH-0.66 80 Ⅱ
1500/1 20 20 1 (2000/5A~2500/5A class 1 class 0.5)
1000/5 10 10 10 10 5 1
S1 S2
1200/5 20 20 20 20 5 1
122
32.5
1500/5 20 20 20 20 10 1
P1
2000/5 20 20 20 20 10 1
74.5
102
140 50
2500/5 40 40 40 40 10 1
3000/5 40 40 40 40 10 1
159max
50±0.37
1000/1 10 10 1
1200/1 20 20 1 102±0.57
58
PC
1500/1 20 20 1 75±0.5 51max

141max
SDH-0.66 100 Ⅱ
2000/1 20 20 (2500/5A~3000/5A class 1 class 0.5)
1000/5 10 10 10 10 5 1
1200/5
S1 S2
20 20 20 20 5 1
154
1500/5 20 20 20 20 10 1
52
2000/5 20 20 20 20 10 1
P1
2500/5 30 30 30 30 10 1 54
122
169 48
3000/5 30 30 30 30 10 1
4000/5 30 30 30 30 10 1
1000/1 10 10 1
184max
65±0.37
1200/1 20 20 1
1500/1 20 20 1
122±0.57
58
PC
2000/1 20 20 1
56±0.5
55max
2500/1 30 30 1 173max
SDH-0.66 120 Ⅱ
3000/1 30 30 1 (2500/5A~4000/5A class 1 class 0.5)

BH-0.66 Ⅲ
1. General
ammeters, watt-hour meters,
2.5 Actitude:≤1000m
3. Type designation
Category number
4. Technical data Current transformer series

Transformation
ratio(Ipn/Isn) (A) 1 0.5 0.5S 0.2 iron core
75/5 2.5
100/5 2.5
S1 S2
150/5 5 5
44.5
86
11
P1
45
54
36
200/5 5 5
φ20
I
75/1 2.5 1 22
41
64
100/1 2.5 1
BH-0.66 20 Ⅲ
150/1 10 5
150/5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 1

200/5 2.5 5 5 5 1
250/5 5 5 5 5 1
S1 S2
300/5 5 5 5 5 1
400/5 5 5 5 5 1
92
54
31
21
11
P1
68
59
50
500/5 10 10 10 10 1
150/1 10 5 1
11
200/1 10 5 1 21
31
250/1 10 5 1 49
BH-0.66 30 Ⅲ 72
300/1 10 5 1
400/1 10 5 1

Transformation
150/5 5 5 1
200/5 5 5 1
250/5 5 5 1
300/5 5 5 5 5 1
400/5 5 5 5 5 1
500/5 10 10 10 10 1
600/5 10 10 10 10 1
S1 S2
750/5 10 10 10 10 1
800/5 10 10 10 10 1
102
68
59
50
31
11
42
P1
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1
150/1 10 5 1
200/1 10 5 1
11
250/1 10 5 1
31
300/1 10 5 1 42
59
400/1 10 5 1
84
BH-0.66 40 Ⅲ 500/1 10 10 1
600/1 10 10 1
750/1 10 10 1
800/1 10 10 1
300/5 5 5 1
400/5 5 5 1
500/5 10 10 10 10 1
600/5 10 10 10 10 1
750/5 10 10 10 10 1
S1 S2
800/5 10 10 10 10 1 φ36
107
68
59
50
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1
41
21
11
85
52
P1
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1
300/1 10 5 1
400/1 10 5 1 11
21
500/1 10 10 1 41
52
600/1 10 10 1 61
750/1 10 10 1 88
BH-0.66 50 Ⅲ
800/1 10 10 1
1000/1 10 10 1
500/5 10 10 10 10 1
600/5 10 10 10 10 1
750/5 10 10 10 10 1
800/5 10 10 10 10 1
S1 S2
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1 P1
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1
123
68
59
50
86
34
1500/5 20 20 20 20 1
500/1 10 10 1
600/1 10 10 1
750/1 10 10 1 62
90
800/1 10 10 1 112
1000/1 10 10 1
BH-0.66 60 Ⅲ
1200/1 20 20 1
500/5 10 10 10 10 1
600/5 10 10 10 10 1
750/5 10 10 10 10 1
800/5 10 10 10 10 1 S1 S2
P1
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1
143
106
1500/5 20 20 20 20 1
68
59
50
54
2000/5 40 40 40 40 1
500/1 10 10 1
600/1 10 10 1
750/1 10 10 1
62
800/1 10 10 1 90
1000/1 10 10 1 112
BH-0.66 60Ⅲ×50
1200/1 20 20 1
1500/1 20 20 1

500/5 10 10 10 10 1
600/5 10 10 10 10 1
750/5 10 10 10 10 1
800/5 10 10 10 10 1
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1 S1 S2
P1
1500/5 20 20 20 20 1
152
109
2000/5 40 40 40 40 1
54
68
59
50
2500/5 40 40 40 40 1
500/1 10 10 1
600/1 10 10 1 82
105
750/1 10 10 1 132
BH-0.66 80 Ⅲ 800/1 10 10 1
1000/1 10 10 1
1200/1 20 20 1
1500/1 20 20 1
2000/1 40 40 1
800/5 10 10 10 10 1
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1
S1 S2
1500/5 20 20 20 20 1 P1
2000/5 40 40 40 40 1
108
150
68
59
50
53
2500/5 40 40 40 40 1
800/1 10 10 1
1000/1 10 10 1 102
125
1200/1 20 20 1 152
1500/1 20 20 1
BH-0.66 100 Ⅲ
2000/1 40 40 1
1000/5 10 10 10 10 1
1200/5 20 20 20 20 1
1500/5 20 20 20 20 1
2000/5 40 40 40 40 1
S1 S2
P1
2500/5 40 40 40 40 1
151
109
3000/5 40 40 40 40 1
61
52
52
70
4000/5 40 40 40 40 1
1000/1 10 10 1
1200/1 20 20 1 122
147
1500/1 20 20 1 174
2000/1 40 40 1
BH-0.66 120 Ⅲ
2500/1 40 40 1
3000/1 40 40 1
5. Features
5.1 The product is characterized by high accuracy, fewer accessories and easy mounting, etc.
5.2 Made of single or several pieces of enameled wire evenly distributed around the core, secondary winding is characterized by good
magnetic conductivity capability, low power consumption, small magnetic-flux-leakage and convenient compensation adjustment.
I
5.3 Encapsulated in fire-reatardant plastic, the enclosure is characterized by good insulation capacity, high intensity, elegant apperance,
light convenient mounting, ect.
6. Installation
The fig below illustrates how the current transformer BH is mounted
Fixing through busbar
Screw M5
Busbar(one or several pcs)
Fixing plate
Insulation baffle
Insulation seat gasket
Base mounting
Busbar or cable
Screw M4 and washer
Mounting base
Surface of switchgear
The fig below illustrates how the current transfcrmer BH-0.66 is mounted
Fixing through busbar
Screw M5
Insulation seat gasket
Busbar(one or several pcs)
Insulation baffle
Base mounting
Busbar or cable
Mounting base
I
Surface of switchgear
Screw and washer

RCT Current Transformers

1. General
1.1 Application: to be used
in combination with measurement
instruments: ammeters, watt-hour meters,
2.3 Frequency: 50Hz/60 Hz
2.4 Operating temperature: -5℃+40℃, humidity＜80%
3. Type designation
Diameter of window for bars
Current transformer series
4. Features
4.1 The product is characterized by compact design,
light weight, etc.
4.2 Made of single or several pieces of enameled wire evenly

distributed around the core, secondary winding is
characterized by good magnetic conductivity capability,
low power consumption, small magnetic-flux-leakage
and convenient compensation adjustment.
4.3 Encapsulated in fire-retardant plastic,

the enclosure is characterized by good insulation capacity,
high intensity, elegant appearance, light weight,
convenient mounting, etc.
5. Technical data
Rated output(VA)
Number of
Current Overall and installing
Model Accuracy class turns through
ratio (A) dimensions (mm)
iron core
0.5 1
75/5 2.5 2.5 1
94
Φ78 Φ25
100/5 2.5 2.5 1 76 8.5

94 55
RCT-25
75/5 2.5 2.5 1
100/5 2.5 2.5 1
150/5 2.5 2.5 1
94
Φ78 Φ35
200/5 5 5 1
76 8.5
94 55
250/5 5 5 1
300/5 5 5 1
RCT-35
400/5 5 5 1
500/5 10 10 1
600/5 10 10 1
120
750/5 10 10 1
Φ105 Φ60
800/5 10 10 1
80 8.5
55
110
1000/5 10 10 1
RCT-60 1200/5 10 10 1
800/5 10 10 1
1000/5 10 10 1
I
153
1200/5 10 10 1
Φ136 Φ90
1500/5 10 10 1
80
8.5
RCT-90 1600/5 10 10 1 110 42
1500/5 10 10 1
1600/5 10 10 1
180
2000/5 20 20 1
Φ110
2500/5 20 20 1 Φ162
80
1 110 8.5 42
RCT-110 3000/5 20 20
MES Current Transformers

1. General
1.1 Application: to be used
in combination with measurement
instruments: ammeters, watt-hour meters,
2. Technical data
2.4 Instrument security factor (FS): 5
2.5 Operating temperature: -5℃to +40℃, humidity <80%.
3. Type designation
Current transformer series
4. Operation conditions
4.1 Installation site: Indoors.
4.2 Ambient temperature: -5℃~40℃, temperature ≤30℃.
4.3 Ambient humidity: Relative humidity ≤80%.
4.5 Atmospheric condition: Be free from severe contamination.

Rated load (VA)

Model Current rate (A) Overall and installing dimensions (mm)
0.5 class
150/5 5 41
200/5 5
88
250/5 5
Φ31
300/5 10
45
MES-30 400/5 10 80
52
300/5 5
400/5 5
88
11
41
500/5 10
45
MES-40 600/5 10 80
600/5 10 56
750/5 10
Φ50
800/5 10
118
12
61
1000/5 10
1200/5 10
82
101
1500/5 10
MES-60
500/5 10
118 56
600/5 10
750/5 10
800/5 10
130
42
22
32
102
1000/5 10
60
Φ62
1200/5 10 62
I
82
P1
14 126 14
1500/5 10
145
MES-100I 2000/5 10
125 53
2000/5 30
2500/5 30
148
53
102
3000/5 30
65
P1
2.2
1.4
4000/5 30 14 133 14
MES-100II 152
P-047 Low Voltage VT & AVR & CT & PT Uninterruptible Power Supply
PC-UPS Series Backup

1. Applicable scope
PC-UPS series uninterruptible power supply is a backup
UPS developed for computer load by our company. It is
consist of various modules, such as charging module,
battery pack, inverter module and conversion device, etc.
when the mains supply is normal, it supplies load a straight
power or alternating current slightly regulated by tapped
transformer. The inverter does not work, the battery is
charged by an independent charger. When the mains
exceeds the specified range, the load will be powered by
battery inverter instead of relay The backup UPS features
high operating efficiency, low noise and relatively low price.
It is mainly used for applications with small mains
fluctuation and low requirements for the quality
of power supply, which can ensure reliable operation of
personal computers and other loads. It is also suitable for
computer equipment and peripherals and other loads at
home or in commercial office.
2. Model and meaning

PC-UPS-
Nominal capacity (VA)
personal computer only (backup)

conditions
3.1 Ambient temperature: 0℃~+40℃;
3.2 Relative humidity: less than 90% (temperature: +20 ℃);
3.3 Altitude of installation site should not exceed 1000m;
3.4 Installation: the installation environment should be well

ventilated, no obvious; contamination, corrosive gases, dust,
combustibles and combustible gases.
Uninterruptible Power Supply Low Voltage VT & AVR & CT & PT P-048
Model PC-UPS-400 PC-UPS-600 PC-UPS-800 PC-UPS-1000 PC-UPS-1500 PC-UPS-2000

Capacity 400VA/240W 600VA/360W 800VA/480W 1000VA/600W 1500VA/900W 2000VA/1200W
Input
Voltage 220/230/240VAC
Voltage range 180~270VAC 140~290VAC 162~268VAC 140~300VAC 162~268VAC 162~268VAC
Frequency 60/50Hz (automatic detection)
Output
Output voltage 110/120VAC or 220/230/240VAC
Voltage range
±10%
(battery mode)
Frequency range
50Hz or 60±1Hz
(battery mode)
Conversion time Typically 2-6ms
Waveform
Analog sinewave
(battery mode)
Battery
Battery model
12V/4.5Ah×1 12V/7Ah×1 12V/9Ah×1 12V/7Ah×2 12V/9Ah×2 12V/9Ah×2
&number
Charging time Charged to 90% after 4hours Charged to 90% after 4-6hours
Protective function Overload, deep discharge and overcharge protection
Indicator description
LCD display Load size, battery capacity, mains mode, battery mode, bypass mode, fault indication
Ring of alarm
Battery mode Ring every 10 seconds
Battery is low Ring every 1 second
Overload Ring every 0.5 seconds
Error Ring continuously
Physical properties
L × W × H (mm) 300×101×142 320×130×182
Net weight (Kg) 3.7 4.4 5.0 8.2 10.4 10.6
Note: We reser ve the right to make changes to the current products. Please take the actual product as the standard.
5. Features
5.1 Full-plastic enclosure, features simple, compact and generous design;
5.2 Ultra-wide mains input range, automatically adjust mains voltage boosting and dropping, and stabilize voltage output
(only for 600VA-2KVA);
5.3 Superior microprocessor ensures reliable operation;
5.4 LCD touch screen, easy to operate;
5.5 Output analog sinewave, with auto restart function after mains supply restored and shutdown charging function.
6. Precautions for use

6.1 Do not place it on the inclined or uneven plane;
6.2 Avoid direct sunlight, rain or damp;

I
6.3 Keep away from fire and heat. Please do not place any object on the device;
6.4 Avoid corrosive gases;
6.5 If the user's load exceeds the rated output power, the output voltage will be very low, then device cannot work;
6.6 The main loads of PC-UPS series are computer load, inductive loads (e.g. fan, drill, hair drier, etc.). The backup UPS is not suitable for
photocopier, laser printer and other devices with large starting current;
6.7 Please put the device in a clean, well-ventilated place far away from heat sources and strong magnetic fields;
6.8 Do not open the housing by yourself to ensure your personal safety. If a fault occurs, please contact professional maintenance personnel;
6.9 Please keep uninterruptible power supply at a distance of more than 30cm from the monitor, so as not to interfere with the monitor.
7. Model selection guide

PC-UPS series is designed for computers and other equipment. When selecting models, you can mainly refers to nominal power and
standby power supply time to choose the capacity of UPS. UPS can be selected according to 2-5 times of load. The larger the value, the
longer the backup time, and vice versa.
Note: UPS is a precision power supply, suitable for weak inductive load such as computer. You cannot connect too many ticket printers!
Strong inductive loads, such as currency pressing machine for bank system, photocopier, laser printer, electric roller shutter door cannot
be connected! If needed, the matching ratio of UPS and such strong inductive load power must be 4:1 or more. Similarly, the matching
ratio of conventional UPS and power of power equipment should be 5:1 or more!
Example of model selection: If the user's total computer load power is 200W, according to the smallest multiple of 2, then:
UPS capacity (VA) = 200W×2 =400 VA, you can choose PC-UPS-400.
HP-UPS Series Online

1. Applicable scope
HP-UPS series online uninterruptible power supply is a
single-inlet and single-outlet high-frequency UPS
developed by our company. This series of UPS using high-
frequency switching technology, replacing the bulky
industrial frequency transformer in rectifier and inverter
with high-frequency switching elements. During operation,
regardless of whether the grid voltage is normal or not, the
output AC voltage is always output by the inverter online,
features small size, high efficiency and saving operating
costs. Each capacity model has both standard and long-
term version and is widely applied, ideal for small space,
such as office and computer room. It can be applied in
applications such as government office, education
organization, bank branch, and branch of large enterprise,
small and medium enterprises. It can provide reliable
power supply for critical equipment, such as miniaturized
data center, memory, network device, network phone,
communication device, automation device, Office terminal
as well as precision instrument.

HP-UPS- kVA
None-standard (internal battery pack);

L-long-term (need to equip battery pack)
None-tower-type (vertical); R-rack (horizontal)
Nominal capacity (kVA)
High-frequency online

conditions
3.1 Ambient temperature: 0℃~+40℃;
3.2 Altitude of installation site should not exceed 1000m;
3.3 Installation: the installation environment should be well

ventilated, no obvious contamination, corrosive gases, dust,
combustibles and combustible gases.
I
HP-UPS-1kVA(L) HP-UPS-2kVA(L) HP-UPS-3kVA(L) HP-UPS-6kVA(L) HP-UPS-10kVA(L)

Model
HP-UPS-1kVAR HP-UPS-2kVAR HP-UPS-3kVAR HP-UPS-6kVAR HP-UPS-10kVAR
Phase Single-phase
Capacity 1000VA/800W 2000VA/1600W 3000VA/2400W 6000 VA/4800W 10000VA/8000W
Input
Input voltage 110/110/115/120/127VAC or 200/208/220/230/240VAC 208/220/230/240VAC
55-150VAC or 110-300VAC at 50% load 110-300VAC at 50%load

Voltage range
85-140VAC or 160-280VAC at 100% load 176-300VAC at 100%load
Frequency range 40-70Hz 46-54Hz or 56-64Hz

Power factor ≧0.99@100% load
Output
Output voltage 110/110/115/120/127VAC or 200/208/220/230/240VAC 208/220/230/240VAC
Voltage range (battery

±1%
mode)
Frequency range(Sync
47-53Hz or 57-63Hz 46-54Hz or 56-64Hz
calibration range)
Frequency range
50±0.25Hz or 60±0.3Hz 50Hz or 60±0.1Hz
(battery mode)
Peak factor 3:1
≦3%THD (linear load) ≦3%THD (linear load)

Harmonic distortion
≦6%THD (non-linear load) ≦5%THD (non-linear load)
AC to DC 0 ms
Conversion
time Inverted to
4 ms (under standard conditions) None
bypass
Waveform(battery mode) Pure sine wave

Efficiency
Mains mode 88% 88% 90% 92% 93%

Battery mode 83% 85% 88% 90% 91%
Battery
Battery model 12V/9Ah
Number 2 4 6 16 20 16 20
Standard
Charged to 90% after 4 hours Charged to 90% after 9 hours
charging time
Standard Maximum
charging 1A 1A/2A
current
Charging
voltage 27.4±1% 54.7±1% 82.1±1% 218.4±1% 273±1% 218.4±1% 273±1%
(VDC)
Battery
Depends on customer (equip based on emergency time)
model
Number 2 3 4 6 8 6 8 16-20 (adjustable)
Maximum
Long-term charging 1A/2A/4A/6A (adjustable) 1A/2A/4A/6A(adjustable, 6A only for 16 batteries)
current
Charging
voltage 27.4±1% 41.0±1% 54.7±1% 82.1±1% 109.4±1% 82.1±1% 109.4±1% 218.4±1% (basedon 16 batteries)
(VDC)
Indicator description
LCD display Load size, battery capacity, mains mode, battery mode, bypass mode, fault indication
Ring of alarm
Battery mode Ring every 10 seconds
Battery is low Ring every 1 second
Overload Ring every 0.5 seconds

Error Ring continuously
Environmental conditions
Humidity 20-90%RH @ 0-40℃ (no condensation) 0-95%RH @ 0-50℃ 0-95%RH @ 0-40℃
Noise Less than 50dBA @ 1 meter Less than 55dBA @ 1 meter Less than 58dBA @ 1 meter
Control management
Smart RS232/
Support Windows 2000/2003/XP/Vista/2008, Windows 7/8, Linux, Unix and MAC
optional USB
Optional SNMP Power supply management supports SNMP management and network management
Physical properties
Model (tower-type) HP-UPS-1kVA(L) HP-UPS-2kVA(L) HP-UPS-3kVA(L) HP-UPS-6kVA(L) HP-UPS-10kVA(L)
L × W × H (mm) 282×145×220 397×145×220 421×190×220 369×190×688 442×190×668
Standard
Net weight (Kg) 9.8 17 27.6 61 74 66 76
L × W × H (mm) 282×145×220 397×145×220 369×190×318 442×190×318
Long-term
Net weight (Kg) 4.1
Model (rack) HP-UPS-1kVAR HP-UPS-2kVAR HP-UPS-3kVAR HP-UPS-6kVAR HP-UPS-10kVAR
Host: Host: Host:

500x438x88[2U] 500x438x88[2U] 580x438x133[3U]
L × W × H (mm) 310×438×88[2U] 410×438×88[2U] 630×438×88[2U]
Battery kit: Battery kit: Battery kit:
Standard 668x438x88 [2U] 580x438x133[2U] 580x438x133[2U]
Host: 15 Host: 15 Host: 18 Host: 18

Net weight (Kg) 12 19 29.3
Battery kit:48 Battery kit:61 Battery kit:51 Battery kit:61
L × W × H (mm) 310×438×88[2U] 410×438×88[2U] 500×438×88[2U] 580×438×133

Long-term
Net weight (Kg) 9 12 14.2 15 18
Note:
1. When 1-3 kVA UPS is set to constant voltage and constant frequency mode, the output power will decrease by 80%. When the output voltage of UPS is set to 100/200/208
VAC, the output power will decrease by 80%;
2. When 6/10 kVA UPS is set to constant voltage and constant frequency mode, the output power will decrease by 60%. When the output voltage of UPS is set to 208VAC,
the output power will decrease by 90%;
3. 200/208/220/230/240 VAC is only for long-term device (200VAC only for 1-3kVA); We reserve the right to make changes to the current products. Please take the actual
product as the standard.
5. Features
5.1 Truly realize online double-conversion, the conversion time from mains mode to battery mode is 0 ms. Microprocessor control ensures
high reliability;
5.2 Input power factor correction, the output power factor is up to 0.8;
5.3 Wide voltage input range 110-300V, for use in harsh power grid environment;
5.4 Frequency support 50/60 Hz adaptive, efficient frequency conversion mode;
5.5 Compatible generator input (generator capacity must be 2 times of UPS capacity);
5.5 The matched delicate SNMP card can implement perfect monitoring separately or together with USB or Rs232;
5.6 Simple operation and control through LCD display, and integrate display of state of UPS monitoring;
5.7 Support automatic power-on function (this feature is turned off by default, only for 1-3k);
5.8 Battery mode, shut down when the power runs out; automatically boot after the power is back on;
5.9 With ECO energy-saving mode (only for 1-3k), 6-10k standard EPO (emergency power-off device);
5.10 Features small size, easy operation, high power density, strong stability, cost-effective, wide application.
6. Precautions for use

6.1 Do not place it on the inclined or uneven plane; avoid direct sunlight, rain or damp; avoid corrosive gases; keep away from fire and heat;
please do not place any object on the device; please put the device in a clean, well-ventilated place far away from heat sources and strong
magnetic fields.
I
6.2 If the user's load exceeds the rated output power, the output voltage will be very low, then device cannot work.
6.3 Do not open the housing by yourself to ensure your personal safety. If a fault occurs, please contact professional maintenance personnel.
7. Model selection guide
HP-UPS series is designed for computers and other equipment. When selecting models, you can reasonably choose the capacity of
UPS according to nominal power and standby power supply time. It's generally recommended to select the UPS based on 2-5 times of
total load power.
Note: HP-UPS series applies half-bridge inverter architecture, it cannot adapt to half-wave load. More than 7% of the pure half-wave load
will cause the UPS's BUS voltage imbalance or the BUS voltage too high. Therefore, for half-wave loads, such as laser printer, hairdryer,
heat gun, servo motor, balanced loads (e.g. pure resistive load such as light bulbs, resistors in , or RCD load such as computers ) need to
be added to the UPS output. For equipment such as motor or compressor, it is easy to lead to machine overload due to a large starting
current. So the capacity of UPS must be 3-5 times of the load capacity.
GP-UPS Series Online

1. Applicable scope
GP-UPS series of online uninterruptible power supply is
a three-inlet and three-outlet or three-inlet and single-
outlet industrial frequency UPS developed by our
company. This series of UPS is an on-line double conversion
uninterruptible power supply system with pure sine wave
output, it is a kind of power device for supplying power for
important loads without grid interference, with stabilized
voltage and stabilizedfrequency. When the mains power
supply fails, the batteryenergy is inverted and output to
the load via UPS to achieve uninterrupted output. This
series of UPS applies high frequency double conversion
structure of output isolation transformer and advanced
digital control, to provide stable, clean and uninterrupted
output. At the same time, it also provides a variety of
communication solutions and user-friendly HMI, facilitating
machine settings and monitoring. Modbus, RS232
interface and expandable smart slot are provided on
communication section. This series of UPS system is mainly
composed of rectifier module and inverter module,
AC-to-DC-to-AC converter circuit, static bypass,
maintenance bypass, charge and discharge circuit of circuit.
Compared with GP-UPS series built-in isolation
transformer, the HP-UPS series has obvious advantages
ofstrong anti-high-frequency interference, high anti-
overload ability, capability of effectively reducing zero
voltage and high reliability. This series of UPS can provide
reliable power supply for applications, such as medium and
large networks, data centers, and concentrated power
supply of building, industrial factories and mines.
I

GP-UPS- kVA
Nominal capacity (kVA)
Industrial frequency online
3. Normal working conditions and installation conditions
3.1 Ambient temperature: 0℃~+55℃,

storage temperature: -15℃ ~ 60℃;
3.2 Relative humidity: 5% ~ 95%;
3.3 Altitude of installation site should not exceed 1000 m;

please derate to use if exceed this height;
Attitude (meter) 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
Derating factor 100% 95% 91% 86% 82% 78% 74% 70% 67%
3.4 No vibration and shock at the installation site and vertical tilt angle should be no more than 5°; the distance between front
and back of device and the wall or other objects should be at least 80 cm; the distance between the both sides of device and
the wall or other objects should be at least 50 cm;
Min. distance: 80 cm
Min. distance: 50 cm Min. distance: 50 cm
Min. distance: 80 cm
3.5 The UPS system should be installed in well-ventilated, cool and dust-free operating environment with low humidity and
clean air. Recommended ambient temperature is 20℃~25℃, the humidity is controlled at about 50%;
3.6 Note: Flammable, explosive or corrosive gases or liquids should not be stored near the installation site; install in the
working environment with conductive dust is forbidden.
4. Tower-type (ordinary industrial frequency UPS)/10~200kVA/three-inlet and three-outlet
GP-UPS-200kVA GP-UPS-120kVA GP-UPS-80kVA GP-UPS-40kVA GP-UPS-30kVA GP-UPS-10kVA

GP-UPS-100kVA GP-UPS-60kVA GP-UPS-15kVA
4.1 Features GP-UPS-20kVA
Digital control online double conversion technology;

This series provides with built-in output isolation transformer as standard, with low output power clutter. Industrial-strength design is
suitable for a wide range of harsh conditions, areas and environments, and has excellent performance especially in the harsh environment;
Front maintenance design, providing with maintenance bypass switch as standard, designed for various different loads and with multiple
communication interfaces;
Compatible with generator input (the capacity of generator must be 2 times of UPS capacity);
Support wrong phase input and rectifier without N wire;
Number of battery and charging current can be set on-site as required;
Battery mode, shut down when the power runs out;
Automatically boot after the power is back on;
Provide parallel function as standard, up to 4 device can operate in parallel, without any extra parallel card.
4.2 Main parameters and technical performance
GP-UPS GP-UPS GP-UPS GP-UPS GP-UPS GP-UPS GP-UPS GP-UPS GP-UPS GP-UPS GP-UPS
Model
-10kVA -15kVA -20kVA -30kVA -40kVA -60kVA -80kVA -100kVA -120kVA -160kVA -200kVA
15kVA/ 20kVA/ 30kVA/ 40kVA/ 60 kVA/ 80kVA/ 100kVA/ 120kVA/ 160kVA/ 200kVA/
Capacity 10kVA
12kW 16kW 24kW 32kW 48 kW 64kW 80kW 96kW 128kW 160kW
Input
Nominal voltage 3x380VAC/400VAC (3Ph+N)
Voltage range 165V~280V(Ph-N);285V~485V(Ph-Ph)
Frequency range 50/60Hz ±10%
Inverter
Output voltage 3X380VAC/400VAC/415VAC(3Ph+N)
Stable: typ. ±1%
Voltage stability
Transient: typ. ±5% (load change 100%-0%-100%)
Range of frequency
50/60Hz synch. ± 1%; Mains lost ± 0.1Hz
I
synchronization
Frequency tracking
±1Hz/s
rate
Output waveform Sine wave
Total harmonic
<2% (linear load); <5%(non-linear load)
(THDv)
Phase imbalance 120º±1% (balanced load) ; 120º±2% (50% unbalanced load)
Dynamic adjusting
Restore to 90% of rated value in less than 60 ms
time
Overload capacity 110%~150% can run for 10 minutes to 1 minute; 150% ~>160% can run for 1 minute to 200 ms; >160% can run for 200 ms
Peak factor 3:1
Factor range of load 0.6~1 (capacitive or inductive)
Unbalanced output
voltage @ 100% <1%
Unbalanced load
Current limit Extremely heavy overload, short circuit: limit of effective value of voltage; surge current: peak voltage limit
Table (continued)
GP-UPS GP-UPS GP-UPS GP-UPS GP-UPS GP-UPS GP-UPS GP-UPS GP-UPS GP-UPS GP-UPS
Model
-10kVA -15kVA -20kVA -30kVA -40kVA -60kVA -80kVA -100kVA -120kVA -160kVA -200kVA
10kVA/ 15kVA/ 20kVA/ 30kVA/ 40kVA/ 60kVA/ 80kVA/ 100kVA/ 120kVA/ 160kVA/ 200kVA/
Capacity
8kW 12kW 16kW 24kW 32kW 48kW 64kW 80kW 96kW 128kW 160kW
Bypass
Type Static switch
Voltage 3x380VAC/400VAC (three-phase + N wire)
Frequency 50/60Hz
Control method Microprocessor control
Inverted to bypass
Synchronous mode: 0 ms, asynchronous mode: 10 ms
switching time
Overload capacity 150%~180% can continue for 1 hour ~30 seconds; 180%~200% can continue for 30 seconds ~ 200 ms; 200% can continue for 200 ms
Switch to bypass Overload 160%: switch immediately
Switch back to
Automatically switch after alarm cleared
inverter
Maintenance bypass
Type Uninterrupted
Voltage 3 x 400V (three-phase + N wire)
Frequency 50/60Hz
Overall Online mode 89% 90% 91% 92%

effect Battery mode 90% 91% 92% 93%
Battery & charge
Number of battery (12 V) 29/30/31/32 (adjustable)
Charging method Optional: constant voltage charging / constant current charging
Default 10A, Max. = capacity/battery

Charging current voltage (real-time value) The maximum Preset 10A, max. 40A; 5A @ full load
current limit does not exceed 40A
Battery type Sealed lead-acid battery, nickel-cadmium battery

Physical
Size 656×405 975×554

656×405×817 821×432×1159 975×554×1286 1051×705×1646
D × W × H (mm) ×941 ×1326
Net weight (kg) 118 120 145 193 278 365 471 573 650 760 790
5. Cabinet-type (industrial design)

5.1 Features
Equipped with high-performance DSP chip (302-bit 150 MHz, independent multiplier) full digital THDV control;
Increased board integration (motherboard, display, rectifier drive, inverter drive, power × 2, make contact, sampling) ;
Use front flipping structure, no wire bending;
Smart fan speed control, the operating noise of the whole device is less than 60 db (in accordance with YD/T1095-2008II Class) under
redundancy or half load conditions;
Optimized air duct guarantees high heat emission efficiency;
Equipped with 6 temperature detection sensors, with early-warning function;
Parallel digital ring control, without balanced reactor, multiple devices can be paralleled;
Signal wire/electronic wire laid independently, the circuit board has protection function, with increased operational reliability;
Optimized ventilation path, with protection class IP20, optional IP42;
Equipped with cold start function;
Provide protection against installation errors (wrong connection of input and output, reverse connection of battery);
The UPS power supply instantly put into 100% non-linear load, without switch to bypass;
Battery switch detection;
ECO mode;
DSP online upgrade;
Meet the safety requirements 5.27 in YD/T1095-2008 standard (insulation resistance, insulation strength 2000VAC);
Full front mount and maintenance, connect with other cabinets is possible;
Selectable housing color and height;
The modular design of wearing and consumable parts enables quick exchange.
5.2 Industrial design 10kVA~200kVA/three-inlet three-outlet/DC 384V
GP-UPS- GP-UPS- GP-UPS- GP-UPS- GP-UPS- GP-UPS- GP-UPS- GP-UPS- GP-UPS- GP-UPS- GP-UPS-
Model 10kVA 15kVA 20kVA 30kVA 40kVA 60kVA 80kVA 100kVA 120kVA 160kVA 200kVA
DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3
Capacity 10kVA/ 15kVA/ 20kVA/ 30kVA/ 40kVA/ 60kVA/ 80kVA/ 100kVA/ 120kVA/ 160kVA/ 200kVA/
Input
Nominal voltage 3x380VAC/400VAC/415VAC
Voltage range 304VAC~456VAC
Frequency range 50Hz ± 5Hz (±10%)
Output
Nominal voltage 3x380VAC/400VAC/415VAC（three-phase + N wire)
Wiring method Tree-phase five-wire (three-phase + N wire + ground wire)
Output waveform Pure sine wave

Output Stable ±1%
voltage
regulated Dynamic ±5%
accuracy
Output frequency 50Hz
Output frequency
±1%
accuracy
Frequency tracking range ± 5Hz (work area of equivalent bypass)

Frequency tracking rate 1~2Hz/second
Output power 0.8
Peak factor of
3:1
output current
Output waveform <2% (linear load)

distortion (THDv) <4% (non-linear load)
Dynamic voltage
0%->100%->0% (R load) <±5% ;20%->100%->20% (R load) ±3%
transient range
Voltage transient
recovery time 0%~100% RCD load: recover to 90% of normal voltage in less than 60 ms
The third level
Output voltage 120°±1% (balanced load)

phase deviation 120°±2% (50% unbalanced load)
Conversion time 0 ms
Overload capacity
Short-circuit capability
0%~110% can continually operate; 110%~150% can continue for 10~1 minute; >160% can continue for 200 ms
60~100ms
I
Transient response time <5ms
Bypass
Wiring method Tree-phase five-wire (three-phase + N wire + ground wire)

Output voltage range 3x380VAC/400VAC/415VAC (three-phase + N wire)
Overload capacity 1.5 In ~ 1.8 in 1 hour to 30 seconds

Short-circuit
1.8 In~>2.0 in 30 seconds~200 ms
capability
System
Efficiency (linear load) 90% 91% 92%
Energy-saving mode
Yes
(non-parallel model)
Emergency switch Yes

Safety standard IEC 61000-4-5 surge protection
Table (continued)
GP-UPS- GP-UPS- GP-UPS- GP-UPS- GP-UPS- GP-UPS- GP-UPS- GP-UPS- GP-UPS- GP-UPS- GP-UPS-
Model 10kVA 15kVA 20kVA 30kVA 40kVA 60kVA 80kVA 100kVA 120kVA 160kVA 200kVA
DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3 DC384 3:3
10kVA/ 15kVA/ 20kVA/ 30kVA/ 40kVA/ 60kVA/ 80kVA/ 100kVA/ 120kVA/ 160kVA/ 200kVA/
Capacity
Battery/rectifier
Nominal
6-pulse 6-Pulse or 12-pulse
voltage
Rectifier
384VDC
voltage
Rectifier
Charging
395VDC~435VDC (adjustable)
voltage
Charging 10A, max.= capacity (kW)/battery

Preset 10A, max. 40A
current (max.) voltage (real-timevalue)
Battery model Lead-acid battery
Number 29~32 pieces(adjustable)

Battery DC non-return
None
diode
Cold start Yes

Physical properties
IP protection class IP20 (preset), IP21/IP31 (optional)
Cabinet size
800×800×1800 800×1200×1800 800×1600×1800
(D × W × H) mm
Net weight of cabinet

290 312 349 385 427 508 563 760 850 1120 1390
(kg)
Environmental conditions
Operating temperature 0~35°C continuous running, full load running for 8 hours at 40 °C (nominal input voltage, battery charge, no overload), decrease to 85% of linear load at 45 ° C
Relative humidity 0~90%, no condensation
Noise less than 70dB @ 1 meter

Control management
Modbus RS-232/RS485 Support Windows 2000/2003/XP/Vista/2008, Windows 7/8/10, Linux and MAC
Make contact interface 6 outputs, 2 inputs

Optional SNMP Power supply management supports SNMP management and network management
Note: We reserve the right to make technical changes.
5.3 Industrial design 10kVA~120kVA/three-inlet single-outlet/DC 384V

GP-UPS-10kVA GP-UPS-10kVA GP-UPS-20kVA GP-UPS-30kVA GP-UPS-40kVA GP-UPS-60kVA GP-UPS-80kVA GP-UPS-100kVA GP-UPS-120kVA

Model
DC384 3:1 DC384 3:1 DC384 3:1 DC384 3:1 DC384 3:1 DC384 3:1 DC384 3:1 DC384 3:1 DC384 3:1
Capacity 10kVA/8kW 15kVA/12kW 20kVA/16kW 30kVA/24kW 40kVA/32kW 60kVA/48kW 80KVA/64kW 100kVA/80kW 120kVA/96kW
Input
Nominal voltage 3x380VAC (three-phase + ground wire or three-phase + N wire + ground wire)
Voltage range 304VAC~456VAC
Frequency range 50Hz ± 5Hz (±10%)
Output
Nominal voltage 220VAC/230VAC/240VAC
Wiring method Single-phase three-wire (single phase + N wire + ground wire)
Output waveform Pure sine wave
Output Stable ±1%

voltage
regulated
accuracy Dynamic ±5%
Output frequency 50Hz
Output frequency
±1%
accuracy
Frequency tracking
±5Hz (work area of equivalent bypass )
range
Frequency tracking
1~2Hz/second
rate
Output power 0.8
Peak factor of
3:1
output current
Output waveform <2% (linear load)

distortion (THDv) <4% (non -linear load)
Dynamic voltage
0%->100%->0% (R load) <±5%: 20%->100%->20% (R load) ±3%
transient range
The third level of

voltage transient 0%~100% RCD load: restore to 90% of nominal voltage in less than 60 ms
recovery time
Output voltage 120º ±1% (balanced load)

phase deviation 120º ±2% (Half load unbalanced load)
Conversion time 0ms
Overload capacity 0%~110% can continually operate; 110%~150% can continue for 10~1 minute; >160% can continue for 200 ms
Short-circuit capacity 60~100ms
Transient response
<5ms
time
Bypass
Wiring method Single-phase three-wire (single-phase + Nwire + ground wire)

Input voltage range 220VAC±25%
Overload capacity 1.5 In ~ 1.8 in 1 hour to 30 seconds
Short-circuit capacity 1.8 In~>2.0 in 30 seconds~200 ms
System
Efficiency (linear load) ≧90%
Energy-saving mode
Yes
I
(non-parallel model)
Emergency switch Yes

Safety standard IEC 61000-4-5 surge protection, IEC 62040-2 EMC/EMI, IEC62040-1 Safety specification
Battery/rectifier
Type 6-pulse
Rectifier
384VDC
voltage
Rectifier Charging
395VDC~435VDC (adjustable)
voltage
Maximum Preset 10 A, Max. = capacity (kW)/battery

charging Preset 10 A, Max. 40 A
voltage (real-time value)
current
Battery
Lead-acid battery
model
Number 29~32 pieces(adjustable)
Battery
DC
non-return None
diode
Cold start Yes
Switch Disconnector, Fuse-switch Disconnector,
Changeover Switch
Switch Disconnector
HH15-QA HH15-QP NH40

Switch Disconnector Switch Disconnector Switch Disconnector
HH15/QSA NHR17 NHR40 NHRT40

Fuse-switch Fuse-switch Fuse-switch Vertical
Disconnector Disconnector Disconnector Fuse-switch
Disconnector
Changeover Switch
NZ7 HH15/QAS/ NH40S NH40SZ

Automatic QPS/QSS Changeover Switch Automatic
Transfer Switching Changeover Switch Changeover Switch
Equipment

P-001 Switch Disconnector Switch Disconnector
Switch Disconnector
Thermal
current 16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250
HH15-125/ HH15-160/
HH15/QA HH15-200/QA
QA QA
HH15/QP HH15-250/QP
NH40 NH40-16 NH40-32 NH40-40 NH40-63 NH40-80 NH40-100 NH40-125 NH40-160 NH40-200 NH40-250
HH15-/QA
HH15-/QP
NH40
Switch Disconnector Switch Disconnector P-002
315 400 630 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150
HH15-400/ HH15-630/ HH15-1000/ HH15-1250/ HH15-1600/

QA QA QA QA QA
HH15-630/ HH15-1000/ HH15-1250/ HH15-1600/ HH15-2500/ HH15-3150/

QP QP QP QP QP QP
NH40-315 NH40-400 NH40-630 NH40-1000 NH40-1250 NH40-1600 NH40-2000 NH40-2500 NH40-3150
J
P-003 Switch Disconnector HH15-QA
HH15-QA Switch Disconnector

1. General
1.1 Application
Mainly used in the distributing and motor circuit
which has high short-circuit current,
and acted as main switch or master switch
infrequently operated by hand,
it is particularly suitable in the relative high class
with drawable low voltage complete equipment.
They provide safety isolation and protection
against overcurrent for any low voltage electrical circuit.
1.2 Standard: IEC/EN 60947-3.
1.3 General characteristic

Full-enclosed structure
Unique rolling insert type contact system.
2. Type designation
2.1 Ordering information
No fuse,
with connection contacts in series
No. of auxiliary contacts

0: no auxiliary contact
1: 1 pair of auxiliary contact
2: 2 pairs of auxiliary contact
No. of poles
2: 2 poles
3: 3 poles
4: 4 poles
Series No.
Note: This switch may only be operated outside the cabinet.
2.2 Technical data
Specification 125 160 200 400 630 1000 1250 1600

No. of poles 3, 4, 3+N 3, 4
Rated insulating voltage(V) Ue=400V, Ui=690V. Ue=690V, Ui=1000V 800
AC400 AC415
Rated operating voltage Ue(V)
AC690 AC690
Conventional thermal current(A) 125 160 200 400 630 1000 1250 1600
400V:AC-22B;415V:AC22B 125 160 200 400 630 1000 1250 1600
Rated operating
690V: AC-21B 125 160 200 400 630 1000 1250 1600
current(A)
690V: AC-22B 125 160 160 315 425 630 800 1000
Rated Short-circuit making capacity (Peak)(kA) 20 20 20 50 50 50 65 85
Rated Short-time withstand cuuent(kA) 8 8 8 12.8 22.5 32 50 50
Mechanical life 15000 15000 15000 12000 12000 3000 1000 1000
Electric Life 1000 1000 1000 300 300 150 100 100
Operating torque (N·m) 7.5 7.5 7.5 16 16 30 30 30
Conventional thermal current of auxiliary contact

5 5 -
Ith 400, AC-15(A)
HH15-QA Switch Disconnector P-004
2.3 Dimension (mm)
HH15-125/QA, 160/QA, 200/QA
57.5 Earth bolt 36

C 200
Panel of switchgear cubicle
G □ 8 Operating 2×M6
P 6.5 G P
square shaft 110 1.5
37.5
16
D
B
F
94
D
B
F
63
Auxiliary
switch
H I M
If N pole is 4max
E available 150 41 H I
65
A +45
165~260 180
HH15-400/QA, 630/QA
10 Operating
60 square shaft 160 308
55 Panel of switchgear cubicle
G 45 E 2×M 8
C 176 70
Square
P 155
shaft10
50
ON
24
138
24
D
B
OFF
F
D
B
F
Auxiliary
140
switch
7 M
P
If N pole is 115 4max
wiring bolt H I available
A +55 175~330 87.5 G 65 H I
HH15-1000/QA
□12 Operating 100 87 87 87

square shaft P 62 C
2×M8
40
Panel of switchgear cubicle

available,length=252
50
ON
If N pole is
D
B
F
26
D
B
F
OFF
Earth bolt
35
200
40
5.5
4max
G H I M
E 87.5 P 400
A 280~375
432
HH15-1250，1600/QA
facade operation reverse operation

4max Panel of 4max
switchgear Panel of switchgear
cubicle cubicle
350~500
350~500
230
230
500
485
M12
80 40
J
20
35
Ⅰ合 Ⅰ合
25
220
286
250
350
310
O O
分分
11
R5.5 M12 M12 M12

91.5 100 100 N pole=134 65
P-005 Switch Disconnector HH15-QA
Specification A B C D E F G H I M P
HH15-125/QA 155 116 133 90 135 101 21.5 69 41 6 15
HH15-160/QA 155 127 133 90 135 107 22.5 65 45 10 25
HH15-200/QA 155 127 133 90 135 107 22.5 65 45 10 25
HH15-400/QA 240 160 142 130 100 135 27 106 65 10 25
HH15-630/QA 240 200 142 130 100 135 27 106 65 12 40
HH15-1000/QA 345 350 188 208 315 230 82 87 87 12 50
2.4 Boring dimension (mm)
50
4×Φ4.5
D
A
50
4-d
Φ30
A HH15-1250, 1600/QA
Openingsizeofthehandlemountingpanel
Specification A D d
HH15-125~200/QA +4 +0.5
65±0.2 Φ42 Φ4.5 0
HH15-250/QP 0
+2 +0.5
HH15-400~1000/QA 88±0.2 Φ63 Φ5.5 0
0
HH15-QP Switch Disconnector P-006
HH15-QP Switch Disconnector

3. Type designation
No fuse,
with connection contacts in parallel

No. of poles
2: 2 poles
3: 3 poles
4: 4 poles
Series No.
3.2 Technical data
Specification 250 400 630 1000 1250 1600 2500 3150

No. of poles 3, 4, 3+N 3, 3+N
Rated insulating voltage(V) Ue=400V,Ui=690V.Ue=690V,Ui=1000V
AC400
AC690
Conventional thermal current(A) 250 400 630 1000 1250 1600 2500 3150
400V:AC-22B 250 400 630 1000 1250 1600 2500 3150
Rated operating current(A) 690V:AC-21B 250 400 630 1000 1250 1470 2500 2500
690V:AC-22B 250 400 500 630 800 800 - -
Rated Short-circuit making capacity (Peak)(kA) 39 50 60 60 85 85 130 130
Rated Short-time withstand cuuent(kA) 8 12.8 25 32 50 50 80 80
Mechanical life 15000 12000 12000 12000 1000 1000 500 300
Electric Life 1000 1000 300 150 100 100 100 100
Operating torque (N·m) 16 30 30 40 45 60 75 90

5
Ith 400, AC-15(A)
J
P-007 Switch Disconnector HH15-QP
3.3 Dimension (mm)
HH15-250/QP
57.5 Earth bolt 36

G □ 8 Operating
Panel of
P square shaft 6.5
2×M 6 C
switchgear 200
110 1.5
cubicle G P
37.5
16
D
B
F
94
D
B
F
63
Auxiliary
switch
H I M
If N pole 150 4max 41 H I
E is available
165~260 65 180
A +45
HH15P-400~1000/QP
60 □10 Operating square shaft

Panel of 308
G 2×M8
45 E 55 switchgear
160 176 70
cubicle
Square
C
P shaft10 155
ON
24
138
D
B
24
OFF
D
B
F
Auxiliary
140
switch
7 M
P
If N pole 115 4max
Wiring bolt H I is available
+55
A 175~330 87.5 G 65 H I
HH15P-1250/QP, 1600/QP
□12 Operating square shaft P 62 C

Panel of
2×M8
switchgear 100 87 87 87
M
40
cubicle
40
If N pole is available
50
ON
26
D
B
F
OFF
=252
D
B
F
Earth bolt
200
35
40
R5.5
40
4max
165
G H I
E 87.5 P 400
A 280~375 432
HH15-QP Switch Disconnector P-008
Overall＆ Installation Dimension of HH15P-2500/QP、3150/QP
switchgear cubicle
G P 102 C
55 130
Panel of
12 Operating
□ square shaft
40
62 O
9
200
Only for 3150A,
ON
26
280
B pole
D
B
F
OFF
Only for 3150A,
Earth bolt
B pole
200
40
H I If N pole
E is available
180 130 4max
A +35
420~510 90
Specification A B C D E F G H I M O P
HH15-250/QP 155 143 133 90 135 118 22.5 65 45 10 - 25
HH15-400/QP 240 170 142 130 100 140 27 106 65 10 - 25
HH15-630/QP 240 170 142 130 100 140 27 106 65 10 - 25
HH15-1000/QP 240 218 142 130 100 178 27 106 80 12 - 40
HH15-1250/QP 345 350 188 208 315 230 82 87 87 12 - 40
HH15-1600/QP 345 350 188 208 315 230 82 87 87 12 - 50
HH15-2500/QP 395 440 342 152 372 390 115 97 97 12 40 80
HH15-3150/QP 395 470 342 152 372 420 115 97 97 12 50 100
3.4 Boring dimension (mm)
D
A
4-d
Specification A D d
HH15-250/QP +4 +0.5
65±0.2 Φ42 Φ4.5
0 0
HH15-630~1000/QP +2 +0.5
88±0.2 Φ63 Φ5.5
HH15P-1250~3150/QP 0 0
J
P-009 Switch Disconnector NH40
2. Type designation
N H 40 - □/ □ □ □□□ □ F H K
K means terminals is wiring

buckle type
H means with box body
F means terminal protection

type (only for 125A~250A)
Ⅱ means miniature
(only for central operation
under 63A and side operation
under 100A)
T means the frame is transparent

(only for single-cast switch under
630A)
W means the handle is operated outside
the cabinet.
1. General Without W means the handle is operated
1.1 Application inside the cabinet.
NH40 series Switch-disconnector is applicable S means double-cast switch
for AC 50Hz, rated voltage AC 690V and below, Without S means double single-cast switch
DC440V and below, rated current up to 3150A.
In the industrial enterprise power distribution C means front and side operation
equipment，it can be used to connect and disconnect Without C means front and central
the circuit and isolate the power supply frequently, operation
especially the 125A~630A can be used as frequent 3 means Three-pole, 31 means Three-pole
connected and broken. contact with auxiliary contact opening and closing
1.2 Standard: IEC/EN60947-3. 4 means Four-pole, 41 means Four-pole contact
with auxiliar y contact opening and closing
Thermal current Ith (A)
Design Code
Indicating Disconnector
Company code
2.2 Technical data
Thermal current Ith (A) 16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 630
Associated fuse rating (A) 16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 630
Rated insulation voltage(V) Ui 800
400V AC21B 16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 630
400V AC22B - - - - - - 125 125 200 250 315 400 630
400V AC23A - - - - - - 125 160 200 250 315 400 630
Rated current (A)
690V AC21B 16 32 40 63 63 63 125 160 200 250 315 400 500
690V AC22B - - - - - - 100 100 160 160 200 250 315
690V AC23A - - - - - - 50 63 70 80 125 160 200
Operation force (N) 30~50 40~60 65~100
NH40 Switch Disconnector P-010
Thermal current Ith (A) 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150
Associated fuse rating (A) 1000 1250 2×800 2×1000 2×1250
400V AC21B 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150
400V AC22B 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150
Rated current (A)
690V AC21B 800 800 1000 1600 1600 2000
690V AC22B 800 800 800 1000 1000 1250
Operation force (N) 200~300
2.3 Handle in the middle position

2.3.1 Overall and mounting dimensions(63A~100A)
NH40-16A~100A
105
20 54 250~405 50
3×Φ4.5
25
16~63AⅡ=70
16~63AⅡ=50
16~100A=123
16~100A=92
隔离开关 NH40-100/4
70
58
Ue 380/660V 50Hz AC-21B

Ie 100 A Φ30
GB14048.3 生产日期:200 年月
Mounting dimension of externally mounted handle
27
27 27 27
7.5
6
105 45
35
106.5
2.3.2 Overall and mounting dimensions(125A~630A)
V P P P Y
M
I
D
installhole 4×Φ
U
B
G
F
R Direct rotary handle

J
A C
Z
Switchgear panel
H
50
3× Φ4.5 J
25
Φ30
Mounting dimension of
extended rotary handle
Outside operated
E
P-011 Switch Disconnector NH40
Mounting dimension of NH40 switch disconnector
Specification NH40-□ NH40-□□/W Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)

Current A B C D E F Φ J H K G P R S U M V Y Z
125A/3 140 135 130 27 93 135 5.5 120 85 65 55 36 18 85 115 8 32 24 355~460
160A/3 140 135 130 27 93 135 5.5 120 85 65 55 36 20 85 115 8 33 24 355~460
125A/4 170 135 130 27 93 135 5.5 150 85 65 85 36 18 85 115 8 31 24 355~460
160A/4 170 135 130 27 93 135 5.5 150 85 65 85 36 20 85 115 8 32 24 355~460
200A/3 180 170 145 35 103 135 6.5 160 85 90 60 50 25 110 142 10 44 25 365~470
250A/3 180 170 145 35 103 135 6.5 160 85 90 60 50 25 110 142 10 44 25 365~470
200A/4 230 170 145 35 103 135 6.5 210 85 90 110 50 25 110 142 10 38 25 365~470
250A/4 230 170 145 35 103 135 6.5 210 85 90 110 50 25 110 142 10 38 25 365~470
315A/3 230 240 195 50 135 160 7 210 105 140 84 65 32 160 205 12 53 37 440~555
400A/3 230 240 195 50 135 160 7 210 105 140 84 65 35 160 205 12 50 37 440~555
630A/3 230 260 195 50 135 160 7 210 105 140 84 65 40 160 220 12 53 37 440~555
315A/4 290 240 195 50 135 160 7 270 105 140 144 65 32 160 205 12 48 37 440~555
400A/4 290 240 195 50 135 160 7 270 105 140 144 65 35 160 205 12 45 37 440~555
630A/4 290 260 195 50 135 160 7 270 105 140 144 65 40 160 220 12 48 37 440~555
2.3.3 Overall and mounting dimensions(1000A-1600A)
1000A~1600A with direct rotary handle
66 120 120 Y M12

N
Ⅰ合
70
330
200
175
U
B
分
O O
G
O
N
R C
J
A
450~660
N U
25 80
O
Switchgear panel
R
connection board1250A/1600A
50
4×Φ4.5
50
Φ30
Mounting dimension of
190 externally mounted handle
NH40 Switch Disconnector P-012
Mounting dimension of NH40 switch disconnector
Specification NH40-□□ NH40-□□/W Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)

Current A B C G J N R O U Y
1000A/3 378 316 240 192.5 353 20 60 35 240 48
1250A/3 378 356 240 192.5 353 35 70 40 246 48
1600A/3 378 356 240 192.5 353 35 80 40 246 48
1000A/4 498 316 240 252.5 473 20 60 35 240 48
1250A/4 498 356 240 252.5 473 35 70 40 246 48
1600A/4 498 356 240 252.5 473 35 80 40 246 48
2.3.4 Overall and mounting dimensions(2000A-3150A)

Operation outside the switchgear Remark:
C is the longest one among outside operation dimensions.
66 120 120 Y M12
2000, 2500A
N
Ⅰ合
82
330
220
U
B
O
分
L
N
O R C
J
A
680~795
Y1
Y
25 80
Switchgear panel 50
4×Φ4.5
50
Φ30
3150A Bploe
N pole
340
Mounting dimension of NH40 inside operation and NH40 switch disconnector
Specification NH40-□□ NH40-□□/W Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)

Current A B C J L N O R Y Y1
2000A/3 378 450 374 353 173.5 40 40 80 80 -
2500A/3 378 450 374 353 173.5 40 40 80 80 -
3150A/3 378 510 374 353 173.5 50 50 120 80 230

2000A/4 498 450 374 473 235 40 40 80 80 -
2500A/4 498 450 374 473 235 40 40 80 80 -
3150A/4 498 510 374 473 235 50 50 120 80 230
J
P-013 Fuse-Switch Disconnector Fuse-Switch Disconnector
Fuse-Switch Disconnector
Thermal
current 63 125 160 250 400 630 800 1000 1250
HH15-63/ HH15-125/ HH15-160/ HH15-250/ HH15-400/ HH15-630/ HH15-800/ HH15-1000/ HH15-12500/

HH15/QSA
QSA QSA QSA QSA QSA QSA QSA QSA QSA
NHR17 NHR17-160 NHR17-250 NHR17-400 NHR17-630
NHR40 NHR40-160 NHR40-250 NHR40-400 NHR40-630
NHRT40 NHRT40-160 NHRT40-250 NHRT40-400 NHRT40-630
HH15/QSA
NHR17
NHR40
NHRT40
HH15/QSA Fuse-Switch Disconnector P-014
2. Type designation
HH15 - □ / □ □ □
QSA: Switch-disconnector fuse

(to be matched with fuse)

No. of poles
2: 2 poles
3: 3 poles
4: 4 poles
Series No.
HH15/QSA Fuse-switch Note: User should order RT(NT) series additional

to assemble a switch-disconnector fuse
Disconnector
1. General
1.1 Application
which has high short-circuit current, and acted as
main switch or master switch infrequently
operated by hand, it is particularly suitable in the
relative high class with drawable low voltage
complete equipment. They provide safety isolation
and protection against overcurrent for any low voltage
electrical circuit.

Note: This switch should be used with RT36 (NT,RT16) or RT20 series fuses provided by the user. This switch may only be operated
outside the cabinet.
2.2 Technical data
Specification HH15-63 HH15-125 HH15-160 HH15-250 HH15-400 HH15-630 HH15-800 HH15-1000 HH15-1250
No. of poles 3, 4, 3+N 3, 4
Rated insulating voltage Ui(V) Ue=400V,Ui=690V.Ue=690V,Ui=1000V 800V
AC400 AC415
AC690 AC690
Conventional thermal current(A)
Rated operating
current(A)
400V:AC-23B/415V:AC-22B
690V:AC-23B/690V:AC22B
63
63
63
125
125
100
160
160
160
250
250
250
400
400
315
630
630
425
800
800
500
1000
1000
500
1250
1250
500
J
Rated Limiting Short-circuit current 400:V/H(kA) 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
Rated Limiting Short-circuit current when 690V(kA) 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Mechanical life 15000 15000 12000 12000 12000 3000 500 500 500
Electric Life 1000 1000 300 300 300 200 100 100 100
Rated current of fuse 400V/690V(A) 63/63 125/100 160/160 250/250 400/315 630/425 800/500 1000/630 1250/800
P-015 Fuse-Switch Disconnector HH15/QSA
Specification HH15-63 HH15-125 HH15-160 HH15-250 HH15-400 HH15-630 HH15-800, 1000, 1250
RT16-00 RT16-00 RT16-00 RT16-1 RT16-2 RT16-3
400V/415V RT20 RT20 RT20 RT20 RT20 RT20 HDLRS3
NT00 NT00 NT00 NT1 NT2 NT3
Model of fuse RT16-00 RT16-00 RT16-00 RT16-1 RT16-2 RT16-3
690V HDLRS3
NT00 NT00 NT00 NT1 NT2 NT3
Operating torque (N·m) 7.5 7.5 16 16 16 30 40

5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Ith 400, AC-15(A)
2.3 Dimension (mm)

HH15-63, 125/QSA
57.5 Earth bolt 36

G □ 8 Operating
2×M6 C Panel of 200
square shaft 6.5
switchgear cubicle
P G P
110 1.5
37.5
16
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
D
B
F
94
D
B
F
63
H I
If N pole is M
E 4max 41 H I
available
A +45 200~260 65 180
HH15-160, 250, 400/QSA
60 □10 Operating square shaft Panel of

G 45 2×M8 C switchgear cubicle
E 55 308
176 70
Square 155
P shaft 10
50
ON
24
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
138
D
B
OFF
24
D
B
F
140
7 M
P
If N pole is 115 4max
Wiring bolt H I
available
A +55 220~330 87.5 G 65 H I
HH15-630/QSA
□12 Operating square shaft 62 C 100 87 87 87

2×M8 Panel of
switchgear cubicle
50
ON
available=252
If N pole is
熔断体
熔断体
熔断体
26
D
B
F
Earth bolt
OFF
D
B
F
35
200
P M
G H I
R4.5 4max P
E 400
A 280~375 87.5 432
HH15/QSA Fuse-Switch Disconnector P-016
HH15-800~1250/QSA
facade operation reverse operation
4max
4max
Panel of
switchgear Panel of switchgear
cubicle cubicle
350~500
400~500
295
295
500
485
80 40
32 60 M12
20
35
22
25
Ⅰ合 Ⅰ合
RS0 Fuse
RS0 Fuse
RS0 Fuse
275
286
250
220
310
350
310
O O
分分
11
M12
M12 M12
R5.5 91.5 100 100 N pole=134 65
800~1000A 1250A
Specification A B C D E F G L1 L2
HH15-63 155±1.25 100±1.10 175±1.25 90±0.75 135±1.25 88±1.10 M5 165~225 165~385
HH15-125 155±1.25 116±1.10 175±1.25 90±0.75 135±1.25 101±1.10 M6 165~225 160~385
HH15-160 240±1.45 146±1.25 178±2.0 130±1.25 100±1.1 126±1.25 M8 220~270 220~390
HH15-250 240±1.45 160±1.25 198±2.3 130±1.25 100±1.1 135±2.0 M10 220~270 220~390
HH15-400 240±1.45 160±1.25 198±2.3 130±1.25 100±1.1 135±2.0 M10 220~270 220~390
HH15-630 345±1.8 270±2.6 242±2.6 208±1.6 315±1.6 230±2.3 M12 250~265 250~529
2.4 Boring dimension
50
4×Φ4.5
D
A
50
4-d
Φ30
HH15-800~1250/QSA
A
J
Opening size of the handle mounting panel
Specification A D d
+4 +0.5
HH15-63, 125/QSA 65±0.2 Φ42 Φ4.5
0 0
+2 +0.5
HH15-160~630/QSA 88±0.2 Φ63 Φ5.5
0 0
P-017 Fuse-Switch Disconnector NHR17
NHR17 Fuse-Switch Disconnector

1. General
1.1 NHR17 series fuse-swith disconnector
is a new product developed by our company.
Rated insulation voltage up to 800V.
rated operational voltage up to 690V.
rated operational current up to 630A,
rated frequency 50Hz,
in the distribution circuit and motor circuit
which has high short-circuit current
as the power switch, isolating switch,
emergency switch as well as circuit protection,
but normally it is not used
to make and break a single motor directly.
2. Type designation
NHR 17 - □/ □ □
1: With micro-gap switch

0: Without micro-gap switch
No. of poles
Conventional thermal current
Series No.
NHR17 Fuse-Switch Disconnector P-018
3. Technical data
Conventional thermal current(A) 63(32) 160 250 400 630

Rated insulation voltage V 800
690V
32、63 160 250 400 630
AC21
400V
32、63 160 250 400 630
AC22
400V
- 160 250 400 630
AC23
690V
- 160 250 400 630
AC21
Rated current A
690V
- 100 200 315 425
AC22
690V
- 100 160 315 315
AC23
Operating force N ≤120 ≤250 ≤350 ≤350 ≤450
Model RT19-125 NT00、RT16-00 NT1、RT16-1 NT2、RT16-2 NT3、RT16-3
20, 25, 32, 35, 80, 100, 125, 125,160, 200,

Rated current of matched 20, 25, 32, 315, 355, 400,
40, 50, 63, 80, 160,200, 224, 224, 250, 300,
fuse in 400V (breaking 35,40, 50, 63 425, 500, 630
100, 125,160 250 315, 355,400
capacity) (≥20kA) (≥100kA)
(≥100kA) (≥100kA) (≥100kA)
Associated fuse
20, 25, 32,

Rated current of matched 80, 100, 125, 125, 160, 200, 315, 355,
35, 40, 50,
fuse in 690V (breaking - 160, 200 224, 250, 300, 400, 425
63, 80,100
capacity) (≥50kA) 315(≥50kA) (≥50kA)
(≥50kA)
A D
B E
I I
F 4-Φ
L
K
J
J
C
Specification A B C D E F G H I J K L Φ
63(32)/2 - 75 135 165 77 70° 120 72 - 104 - - 6
63(32)/3 - 105 135 165 77 70° 120 72 31 104 - - 6
63(32)/3 - 150 135 165 77 70° 120 72 75 104 - - 6
160/3 123 110 186 215 90 66° 160 87 74 25 9.5 6.5 -
250/3 196 184 266 240 118 70° 230 125 114 50 25 9 -
400/3 260 250 330 390 145 72° 295 155 150 50 - - 9
630/3 260 250 330 390 145 72° 295 155 150 50 - - 9
J
NHR40 Fuse-switch Disconnector

1. General
1.1 NHR40 series switch-disconnector with fuse
is applicable in the circuit of AC50Hz,
rated voltage AC690V and below, DC440V and below,
rated current up to 630A.
NHR40 series are infrequently manually operated
multipolar fuse combination switches,
They break or switch off on load
and provide safely isolation
and protection against overcurrent
for any voltage electrical circuit.
2. Type designation
N HR 40 - □ / □ □ □ □
H:With box(only applicable to

front operation)
W: Extended rotary handle

Blank: Direct rotary handle
C: Lateral operation
Blank: Front operation
Three-pole
Four-pole
Series No.
Note: This switch should be used with RT36 (NT,RT16) or

RT20 series fuses provided by the user.
3. Technical data
Conventional thermal current (A) 63 160 250 400 630

Rated current voltage (A) 20、32、63 100、125、160 200、250 315、400 630
Rated insulation voltage (V) 690V 800V
400V
20、32、63 100、125、160 200、250 315、400 630
AC22
400V
20、32、63 100、125、160 200、250 315、400 630
AC23
690V
20、32、63 100、125、160 200、250 315 425
Associated current (A) AC22
690V
20、32、63 100、125、160 200、250 315 425
AC23
230V
20、32、63 100、125、160 200、250 315、400 630
DC22
230V
20、32、63 100、125、160 200、250 315、400 630
Rated current (A) DC23
440V
20、32、63 100、125、160 200、250 315 425
DC22
440V
20、32、63 100、125、160 200、250 315 425
DC23
Operation force (N) 60~80 65~100 80~120 100~150 230
Associated fuse Specification 00C 00 1 2 3
Remark:
1) With terminal shield
2) Two phases are connected in series according to the phase character
4. Structure and features

4.1 The switch adopts full-enclosed structure of reliable thermal characteristic to ensure reliable operation.
4.2 Each phase has two groups of contact system with double breaking points, these two groups of contacts are serially connected,
which has improyed its current breaking capability, and ensures the reliability of power supply disconnecting.
4.3 Manual rotated operation mechanism has energy storage spring,so the active contact can operate swiffly with no relation with
operation speed.

Facade operation inside the switchgear
≤63A
H A
can install on guide rail P

5 I
N
74°
ON
B
D
E
OFF
J
5
130 32 C
Front operation inside the switchgear
≥100A
H A
M W
N C F
Set screw
Set screw I
I
D
B
E
0
90
°
J
I P 0
Facade operation outside the switchgear
30 L
Finger
Square axostyle
Lock
K
50 50
Ф30 Ф30
3-Ф5.5
50
4-Ф4.5
100-400A Boring dimension 630A Boring dimension

on the panel on the panel
Overall and mounting dimensions

Speciflcation
A B C D E F H I J L M N W P K
63/2 108 120 - 92 96 - 160 4.5 - - - 22 - 32 -
63/3 140 120 32 92 96 - 160 4.5 - - - 22 - 32 -
63/4 172 120 60 92 96 - 160 4.5 - - - 22 - 32 -
160/2 128 162 36 120 142 67.5 190 5.5 115 205~325 8 19 21 36 126
160/3 165 162 36 120 142 67.5 190 5.5 115 205~325 8 19 21 36 126
160/4 202 162 36 120 142 67.5 190 5.5 115 205~325 8 19 21 36 126
250/2 185 195 60 160 166 91.5 210 5.5 145 205~325 10 19 21 60 126
250/3 240 195 60 160 166 91.5 210 5.5 145 205~325 10 19 21 60 126
250/4 300 195 60 160 166 91.5 210 5.5 145 205~325 10 19 21 60 126
400/2 214 205 66 170 176 122 210 5.5 145 205~325 10 25 21 66 126
400/3 280 205 66 170 176 122 210 5.5 145 205~325 10 25 21 66 126
400/4 346 205 66 170 176 122 210 5.5 145 205~325 10 25 21 66 126
630/3 346 300 250 250 268 39 350 Φ9 190 330~440 12 72 37 80 190
630/4 426 300 250 250 268 39 350 Φ9 190 330~440 12 72 37 80 190
Front operation with box type
A C D
B E
Specification A B C D E Φ
HR40-20-63/3 306±1.25 250±1.25 155±1.25 236±1.25 186±1.25 9
HR40-100/160/3 306±1.25 250±1.25 155±1.25 236±1.25 186±1.25 9
HR40-200/250/3 380±1.25 400±1.25 215±1.25 260±1.25 250±1.25 9
HR40-315/400/630/3 570±1.25 484±1.25 310±1.25 490±1.25 404±1.25 9
HR40-20-63/4 306±1.25 250±1.25 155±1.25 236±1.25 186±1.25 9
HR40-100/160/4 306±1.25 250±1.25 155±1.25 236±1.25 186±1.25 9
HR40-200/250/4 424±1.25 314±1.25 315±1.25 356±1.25 250±1.25 9
HR40-315/400/630/4 570±1.25 484±1.25 310±1.25 490±1.25 404±1.25 9
J
P-023 Fuse-Switch Disconnector NHRT40
NHRT40 Vertical
1. General
1.1 Application
NHRT40 series vertical fuse-switch disconnector
is applicable in the circuit of rated voltage AC690V
and below, rated current AC 160A-630A,
rated frequency of 50Hz.
NHRT40 series are infrequently manually operated
multipolar fuse combination switches.
They break or switch off on load and provide
safely isolation and protection against overcurrent
for any voltage electrical circuit.
1.2 Standard: IEC 60947-3.
2. Type designation
NHRT 40 - □ / □ □ □ □
B:Means foundation bed
N:Means new type(different

connection mode)
L: Three phases breaking

and making simultaneously;
Blank: independent operation
phase to phase
No. of poles
Series No.
3. Structure and features

3.1 Structure: The switch is consisted of underpan,
base, cover, handle and shield.
3.2 NT series fuse link is installed in the cover

to act as knife of active contact.
3.3 The handle moves fan-shapely

based on the pivot of underpan,
makes the cover and fuse make and break together,
it is with enough space and
remarkable disconnection point
which meets the requirement of disconnector switch.
3.4 It is convenient to dismount the base and underpan,

which is easy to mount the base to the busbar safely
and reliably.
3.5 There is arc extinguisher on the underpan,

which ensures breaking capacity of the switch.
NHRT40 Fuse-Switch Disconnector P-024
4. Technical data
Conventional thermal current (A) 160 250 400 630

Rated insulation voltage (V) 800
400V
160 250 400 630
AC20
400V
160 250 400 630
AC21
400V
160 250 400 630
AC22
Rated current (A)
690V
160 250 400 630
AC20
690V
100 200 315 425
AC21
690V
100 160 315 315
AC22
Model 00 1 2 3
20, 25, 32, 80, 100, 125, 125, 160, 200,

400V Rated current 315, 355, 400,
35, 40, 50, 160, 200, 224, 224, 250, 315,
of fuse 425, 500, 630
63, 80, 100, 125, 250 355, 400
(Breaking capactiy) A ( ≥100kA)
Specification of 160 ( ≥100kA) ( ≥100kA) ( ≥100kA)
associated fuse
20, 25, 32,
690V Rated current 80, 100, 125, 125, 160, 200,
35, 40, 50, 315, 355, 400, 425
of fuse 160, 200 224, 250, 300, 315
63, 80, 100 ( ≥50kA)
(Breaking capactiy) A ( ≥50kA) ( ≥50kA)
( ≥50kA)

NHRT40-160 Independent operation phase to phase NHRT40-160 Simuitaneous operation of three phases
D
C
B C 145
110
13
83
21
275
185
E
13
F
27
590
289
A
M8
F
E
185
A
E
275
33 33
max.322
B 26.5
29.5
145
162
J
P-025 Fuse-Switch Disconnector NHRT40
NHRT40-250, 400, 630 Independent operation phase to phase NHRT40-250, 400, 630 Simuitaneous operation of three phases
C C
B
146 B 146
max 300
290
E
max 457
A
E
14.2 14.5
57
57
50 58 58
Model A B C D E F
NHRT40-160 Independent operation phase to phase 650 49 150 230 185
NHRT40-160 Simuitaneous operation of three phases 590 49 198 322 185 100
NHRT40-250, 400, 630 Independent operation phase to phase 764 99 195 300 185
NHRT40-250, 400, 630 Simuitaneous operation of three phases 764 99 195 457 185
NHRT40-40-160/3N NHRT40-250-630/3N
190 300
186
148 100
49 154
115
290
275
185
185
664
669
185
185
26
34
54
15
50 58 50
NHRT40 Fuse-Switch Disconnector P-026
NHRT40-160/3LN NHRT40-250-630/3LN
460
220 195
100
29
152
8
50 150
108 7
25
14
80
8
L1
15
L1
185
185
185
φ14
L2
L2
655
669
185
664
664
651
185
185
3x10 L3
L3 25 14 26
45
34
54
50
15
50
NHRT40-160/3B NHRT40- 250-630/3B
49
100 138
15
80
8
L1 95 25
14
L1
185
185
l2
L2
14
655
664
185
185
25
l3 L3
25
26
14
91
34
54 15
35 35
12 45
50
40 40
J
P-027 Changeover Switch Changeover Switch
Changeover Switch
Thermal 16, 32, 40,

current 63, 80, 100 125 160 200 250 315 400
HH15/QAS HH15-125/QAS HH15-160/QAS HH15-400/QAS
HH15/QPS HH15-250/QPS
HH15/QSS HH15-63/QSS HH15-125/QSS HH15-160/QSS HH15-250/QSS HH15-400/QSS
NH40S NH40-125S NH40-160S NH40-200S NH40-250S NH40-315S NH40-400S
NH40-16, 32, 40,

NH40SZ NH40-125SZ NH40-160SZ NH40-200SZ NH40-250SZ NH40-315SZ NH40-400SZ
63, 80, 100SZ
HH15/QAS
HH15/QPS
HH15/QSS
NH40S
NH40SZ
Changeover Switch Changeover Switch P-028
630 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150
HH15-630/QAS HH15-1000/QAS
HH15-630/QPS HH15-1000/QPS HH15-1250/QPS HH15-1600/QPS HH15-2500/QPS HH15-3150/QPS
HH15-630/QSS
NH40-630S NH40-1000S NH40-1250S NH40-1600S NH40-2000S NH40-2500S NH40-3150S
NH40-630SZ NH40-1000SZ NH40-1250SZ NH40-1600SZ
J
P-029 Changeover Switch NZ7
2. Type designation
N Z 7 －□□/ □□□□□□□
Transfer mode without code:

Users can set the matter
R: self-throwing and self-reset
(power network to power network)
S: self-throwing and not self-reset
(power network to power network)
F: self-throwing and self-reset
(power network to power generation)
Controller type
A: basic type
Structure
Y: integrated (type)
NZ7 Automatic Transfer Without code: separated (type)
Switching Equipment Actuator circuit breaker type
Without code: NM1
1. General
Rated current (Arabic numerals)
Applicable to the three-phase four-line two-circuit power
Release with nothing as its code: NM1
supply network with an AC power frequency of 50Hz,
rated operational voltage of AC400V, and rated operational Number of poles: 3, 4
current of up to 630A, the NZ7 series automatic transfer
Breaking capacity code: S, H, R
switching equipment can automatically connect one or
several loads from one power source to another to ensure Frame size rated current (Arabic numerals)
the normal power supply of the load circuit.
This product is applicable to the important places such as
Automatic transfer switching equipment
industrial, commercial, and storied buildings,
and residential houses. Company code
Certificate: KEMA
Execution standard: IEC/EN 60947-6-1 3. Operating conditions
3.1 Ambient air temperature
The upper limit for the ambient air
temperature is +40℃, lower limit -5℃,
Ambient temperature
and the mean value of the temperature is
not greater than ＋35℃ within 24 hours;
3.2 Altitude
Altitude: not higher than 2,000m for the
2000m
installation site.
3.3 Atmospheric conditions: Altitude
When the ambient air temperature is +40℃,

the relative humidity of the air shall not be
higher than 50%, a higher relative humidity
is allowed at a lower temperature, e.g. 90%
at +20℃, and special measures shall be
taken for the condensation occasionally No Pollution
p ro d u c e d d u e to te m p e r a t u re c h a n g e s .
3.4 Class of pollution:

Class of pollution: 3
NZ7 Changeover Switch P-030
4. Technical data
Product type NZ7-63 NZ7-125 NZ7-250 NZ7-400 NZ7-630

Up to standard IEC/EN 60947-6-1
Actuator circuit breaker NM1-63 NM1-125 NM1-250 NM1-400 NM1-630
Parameters of electrical characteristics
Operating environment temperature -5℃~+40℃
Altitude 2000m
Class of pollution 3
10,16,20,25, 16,20,25,32,40, 100,125,160, 250,315, 400,500,

Specification for current
32,40,50,63A 50,63,80,100A 180,200,225A 350,400A 630A
Rated operational voltage(Ue) 400V 50Hz

Nominal insulation voltage(Ui) AC500V AC800V
Rated impulse withstand voltage 6kV 8kV
Number of poles 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P, 4P 3P, 4P
Short circuit breaking capacity codes S H H S H R H S H R H S H R S H R
Rated short circuit making capacity(Icm) 31.5 73.5 73.5 52.5 105 143 105 52.5 105 143 105 73.5 110 154 73.5 110 154
Rated short circuit breaking capacity(Icn) 15 35 35 25 50 65 50 25 50 65 50 35 50 70 35 50 70
Service life 6000 times 6000 times 6000 times 4000 times 3000 times
Usage category AC-33B
Electric equipment grade CB Class
Protection level IP30(except the main circuit terminal)
Protection Overload protection/short circuit protection
Controller characteristic
Controller Type A(basic type)
Rated control supply voltage Us 230V 50Hz
Installation mode for the controller Integrated/separated (as installed on the surface of the cabinet)
Operating transfer time (no time delay) ≤3.2s ≤3.5s ≤3.6s ≤4s ≤5s
Power consumption ≤10W
Installation and connection
Installation mode Fixed type
Connection mode Front connection
5. Characteristics and functions

The NZ7 series automatic transfer switching equipment (hereinafter referred to as automatic transfer switch) is the
CB class product of a new generation combined with the advanced digital electronic control technique. The product
features compactness, energy conser vation, convenient installation, reliable dual-interlock protection, etc., and is
advanced and complete in terms of function.
Single motor structure, compact
AUTO
ON
N
R
OFF
AUTO
SE T
QU ER Y
J
MA NU
N R OF F
Visualized management
5.1 Compactness
The transfer function is achieved via using the forward and backward rotation of the only one motor which allows for reducing
the product' s height and room for its installation.
5.2 Energy saving

The driving mechanism works in the mode of motor drive with less power consumption and noise.
Transmission mechanism (short-term service)

Type A controller (long-term service)
Type 63/Type 100 Type 225 Type 400/Type 630
≤10W 20W 40W 20W
5.3 Advanced and multipurpose functions
Auto
ON
N
R
OFF
Settable transfer parameter Visualized management Multi auxiliary functions
Under voltage transfer value three-phase voltage Off/on indication external-terminal Integrated controller in the
Delay time transfer magnitude display Fire control linkage modes of integrated and
Power network to power network Off/on state display Generator signal separated configurations easy
self-throwing and self-reset/power External power source for installation
network to power network
self-throwing and not self-reset/
power network to power generation
Self-throwing and self-reset
5.4 Dual-interlock protection

The mechanical-electrical interlock duplex protection is used to prevent two power sources from being connected simultaneously
to the load, wherein the electrical interlock works in the breaker contact position mode for directly indicating the automatic transfer
switch to perform the genuine electrical interlock so that the automatic transfer does not take place automatically in such cases
as contact fusion welding, breaker handle damage, and circuit fault breaker tripping.
6. Controller
Type and function Type A (basic type)
Modes of manual and automatic transfer ■
Working position of the main contact (actuator circuit breaker)

Prime power turned on ■
Standby power turned on ■
OFF ■
Automatic control
Monitoring the prime power Failures such as loss of phase/voltage, under and over voltage for any of three phases of the power supply
Monitoring the standby power Failures such as loss of phase/voltage, under and over voltage for any of three phases of the power supply
Self-throwing and self-reset ■
Self-throwing and not self-reset ■
Power network to power network ■
Power network to power generation ■
No-voltage transfer ■
Under voltage transfer ■
Over voltage transfer ■
Adjustable delay time ■
Transfer delay a Continuously adjustable in the range of 0s~180s
Return c Continuously adjustable in the range of 0s~180s
Generator control ■
Fire control linkage (inactive contact) ■
Indication
Indication for on, off, and double-break ■
Prime power indication ■ (Displaying voltage magnitude)
Standby power indication ■ (Displaying voltage magnitude)
Fault tripping indication ■
External indication signal terminal ■
Parameter setting indication ■
Interlock protection
Mechanical interlock ■
Electrical interlock ■ (not transfer automatically with faulty tripping)
6.1 The Type A integrated controller works in the modes of integrated or separated configurations,
and is installed in the cabinet or on the panel to allow operation outside the cabinet.
Whether to transfer from one power source to another depends on the state of the operational power supply.
Generating set control
Press-key manually forced transfer operating
6.2 Control voltage

AC230V 50Hz
6.3 Operation: automatic operation, manual operation
6.4 Setting delay

Transfer delay: adjustable in the range of 0s - 180s, prime power failure, time before off for QN;
Return delay: continuously adjustable within the range of 0s - 180s, prime power recovery, time before off for QR.
J
6.5 Interface for display and operation

LED digital display
1 2 3
AUTO MANU ERR

4
ON
5 N 9
OFF
6 SET 10
ON
7 R 11
OFF
12
STOP GENERATOR
8 13
19
AUTO QUERY
SET
14 MANU 18
N R OFF
15 17
16
1. Indication of automatic working mode; 15. Button for compulsorily turn off the normal power
2. Indication of manual working mode; Under the manual control mode, if this button is pressed, it can
3. Failure indication compulsorily switch to the normal power; if it is setting condition,
When the breaker is disengaged due to the failure or short-circuit this button is the “scroll up” button of setting programs;
of the switch, this lamp will be on; 16. Button for compulsorily turn off the alternative power
4. Display area of normal power voltage parameters Under the manual control mode, if this button is pressed, it can
It displays normal power voltage parameters and changeover compulsorily switch to the alternative power; if it is setting
delay time under the working condition, and setting items under condition, this button is the “scroll up” button of setting
the setting condition; programs;
5. Indication of the on or off of breaker on the normal power side 17. Off button
6. Indication of setting condition Under the manual control mode, if either line of both power
7. Indication of the on or off of breaker on the alternative power side lines are normal and this button is pressed, it will switch to
8. Indication of the start of stop function; the disengagement position; this button is the minus button
9. Units of voltage, time, and frequency of the normal power; for setting parameters when it is under setting condition;
10. Phases A, B, and C; 18. Failure inquiry button
11. Units of voltage, time, and frequency of the alternative power; When the switch fails and malfunction lamp on the failure
12. Display area of alternative power voltage parameters; screen is on, the detail malfunction code can be inquired if it
It displays alternative power voltage parameters and transfer is pressed; this button is the plus button if it is under the
delay time under the working condition, and setting items setting condition;
under the setting condition; 19. Setting button
13. Indication of the start signal of generator When this button is pressed, it may enter into the parameter
14. Selection button of automatic/manual transfer setting menu of the controller.
When it is regularly used, it can be used for selecting the
automatic or manual mode; it saves and exits the functions
when it is under the setting condition.
6.6 Operation description on parameter setting
AUTO
ON
N
R
OFF
Setting
AUTO
MANU
Set transfer value of under-voltage ofnormal power, press
SET
to increase and to decrease. 160V to 200V
N R
AUTO
MANU
Set transfer value of over-voltage of normal power, press
SET
N R
AUTO
MANU Set transfer delay time, press
SET
to increase and to decrease. 0s to 180s
N R
AUTO
MANU
Set transfer value of under-voltage of alternative power, press
SET
N R
AUTO
MANU
Set transfer value of over-voltage of alternative power, press
SET
N R
AUTO
MANU
Set return delay time, press
SET
N R
AUTO
MANU Set start delay time of generator, press
SET
N R
AUTO
MANU Set shut-down delay time of generator,press
SET
N R
AUTO
MANU
SET
Set transfer mode, press button to change the mode
(when the last digit is 0, it is grid-grid self-throw and self-reset mode;
when the value is 1, it is mutual alternative mode, when it is 2, it is
grid-generator. self-throw and self-reset mode.)
Note for keys

Button Description:
Press the Setting Button when the controller is working, LED will display
the parameter setting menu interface displayed in Figure ; press “ ”
and “ ” buttons in the setting menu to scroll up the setting options;
if the automatic/ manual button is pressed, it will exit the setting menu;
press “ ” or “ ” to change parameters.
J
Working processes of typy A controller
Grid – Grid
Grid – Grid mutual alternative operation
self-throw and self-reset operation
QN QR
QN QR UN is normal
UN is normal
UN fails
UN fails T1 can be adjusted from 0s to 180s
T1 can be adjusted from 0s to 180s
QN QR
QN QR UN is disconnected
UN is disconnected
UR is put into use
UR is put into use
QN QR
QN QR UR supplies
UR supplies
UN resumes to normal
UN resumes to normal
QN QR
QN QR UR supplies
UR is disconnected
UR fails
UN is put into use T2 can be adjusted from 0s to 180s
QN QR
QN QR UR is disconnected
UN supplies
UN is put into use
QN QR
UN supplies
Grid-Power Generation
self-throw and self-reset operation
QN QR
UN is normal
UN fails
Generator starts
Output of generator reaches set value

QN QR
UN is disconnected
UR is put into use
QN QR T1: Transfer delay can be adjusted from 0s to 180s

UR supplies
Failure of UN , time before disconnecting QN
UN resumes to normal T2: Return delay time can be adjusted from 0s to 180s
T2 can be adjusted from 0s to 180s Normal of UN , time before disconnecting QR
QN QR
UR is disconnected T3: Delay time in starting generator can be adjusted from 0s to 180s
T4: Delay time in shutting-down generator can be adjusted from 0s to 180s

UN is put into use QN: Operating breaker on the frequently used side
QR: Operating breaker on the stand-by side
QN QR
UN supplies UN : Normal power supply
UR : Alternative power supply
UN is put into use
Generator shuts down

7. NZ7 external connection diagram

7.1 Product connection diagram
N standby power
N Prime power
Prime power UN standby power UR
1 3 5 1 3 5
QN QR
N N
7.2 4P product connection diagram
Prime power UN standby power UR
1 3 5 N 1 3 5 N
QN QR
Note: QN actuator circuit breaker on the prime (normal) side

QR actuator circuit breaker on the standby (reserve) side
7.3 Wiring diagram of external terminals of the controller
Indication of UN status Indication of UR status

Auxiliary power Stop signal
101 102 103 104 201 202 203 204
301 302 401 402 403 404 501 502 503
+ -
Passive contact point
Passive contact point
Feedback signal
Tripping signal
Tripping signal
Power signal
Power signal
On signal
On signal
Zero line
Zero line
DC24V/0.5A
Start control of generator
J
Output is AC230V/0.5A Note: the hidden line is the internal wiring of the controller.
7.4 Application
Terminals 401 and 402 can only connect to

passive signal; otherwise, the controller will
be burnt! Passive signals may be inputted
through relay. Product after receiving the
stop signal off, 403 and 404 will be
connected.
After removing stop signals, this product will
restore to normal working status by pressing
any key of the controller.
UN normal
To control center
401 101
402 102 UN
403 103 QN on
Internal contact
terminal of the
404 104 QN tripped
controller
To the remote port of the generator
501 201
502 202 UR
503 203 QR on
204 QR tripped
301 +
DC24V
302 -
This terminal is used under the
Grid-Power Generation; it must
be connected to the generator
if required; and it does not affect
its use if it is not connected.
It is used under the Grid-Power
When the UN fails Generation mode and it is
allowed not to connect it, but
501 the default start delay of the
502 generator is 0 second.
503
8. Line incoming pattern
8.1 Connecting bus-bar type
Alternative power bus-bar

Normal power bus-bar
Line voltage signal sampling
Power bus-bar
Load bus-bar
8.2 Installation mode: vertical installation or horizontal installation

9.1 Outline dimension & Installation dimension
Wiring terminal of zero line

(Only three pole products)
J
H
M K L
H2 H3
① Outline dimension
O
N
B
E
H1
F G
Dimension A F G K
B E J L M N O H H1 H2 H3
Modle 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
NZ7-63 355 380 240 200 40 52.5 132.5 145 178 24 11.5 25 40 200 117 150 170 25 18/28
NZ7-125 390 420 240 200 43 58 148 163 194 24 9 30 43 200 136 150 180 25 24
NZ7-250 435 470 240 200 41.5 59 170.5 188 225 36 18.5 35 41.5 200 144 160 190 25 24
NZ7-400 565 615 330 225 43.5 68.5 232.5 257.5 304 61.5 36.5 48 43.5 265 224 200 227 24 40
NZ7-630 680 740 330 225 45.5 74.5 291 320 385 89 60 58 45.5 270 234 200 232 24 42
9.2 Installation dimension
4×ΦP
D
Dimension C
D P
Modle 3P 4P
NZ7-63 322 347 220 Φ8
NZ7-100 357 387 220 Φ8
NZ7-225 402 437 220 Φ8
NZ7-400 505 555 300 Φ10
NZ7-630 622 680 300 Φ10
J
9.3 Controller Module
84 42 14
144
140
140
50
80
80
nstallation dimension of the controller

when it is installed by split type
The user shall indicate such items as the type, current specification, number of poles.
Example: If you order an auto transfer switch equipment, shell current 100A, rated current 100A，breaking capacity
of Type H, 4 poles, Type A controller, you can write it as NZ7-100H/4100YA.
HH15/QAS/QPS/QSS Changeover Switch P-040
HH15/QAS/QPS/QSS
Changeover Switch
1. General
1.1 Application
which has high short-circuit current, and acted
as main switch or master switch infrequently operated
by hand, it is particularly suitable in the
relative high class with drawable low voltage complete
equipment.
They provide safety isolation and protection against
overcurrent for any low voltage electrical circuit.

2. Type designation
HH15 - □ / □ □ □ S
Changeover switch
QA: No fuse,
with series connection contacts
QP: No fuse,
with parallel connection contacts
QS: Switch-disconnector fuse
(associated with fuse)

No. of poles
2: 2 poles
3: 3 poles
4: 4 poles
Series No.

QSS series switch should be used with RT36 (NT,RT16) or
Rt20 series fuses provided by the user.
J
P-041 Changeover Switch HH15/QAS/QPS/QSS
2.2 Technical data
HH15/QAS
Specification 125 160 200 400 630 1000

No. of poles 3 3 3 3 3 3
Rated insulating voltage(V) Ue=400V, Ui=690V. Ue=690V, Ui=1000V
AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400
AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690
Conventional thermal current(A) 125 160 200 400 630 1000
400V: AC-21B 125 160 200 400 630 1000
Rated operating current(A) 400V: AC-22B 125 160 160 315 400 630
690V: AC-23B 125 160 160 400 400 800
Rated Short-circuit making capacity (Peak)(kA) 20 20 20 50 50 50
Rated Short-time withstand cuuent(kA) 1.5 1.6 2.4 4.8 8 12
Mechanical life 1400 1400 1400 800 800 500
Electric Life 200 200 200 200 200 100
Operating torque (N·m) 7.5 16 16 16 30 40

5 5 5 5 5 5
Ith 400, AC-15(A)
HH15/QPS
Specification 250 630 1000 1250 1600 2500 3150

No. of poles 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Rated insulating voltage(V) Ue=400V,Ui=690V.Ue=690V,Ui=1000V
AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400
AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690
Conventional thermal current(A) 250 630 1000 1250 1600 2500 3150
400V:AC-21B 250 630 1000 1250 1600 2500 3150
Rated operating current(A) 400V:AC-22B 250 630 630 630 800 - -
690V:AC-21B 250 630 1000 1250 1470 2500 2500

Rated Short-circuit making capacity (Peak)(kA) 39 60 60 85 85 130 130
Rated Short-time withstand cuuent(kA) 3 8 12 15 20 30 38
Mechanical life 1400 800 500 500 500 500 300
Electric Life 200 200 100 100 100 100 100
Operating torque (N·m) 16 30 40 45 60 75 90

5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Ith 400, AC-15(A)
HH15/QSS
Specification HH15-63 HH15-125 HH15-160 HH15-250 HH15-400 HH15-630

No. of poles 3 3 3 3 3 3
Rated insulating voltage Ui(V) Ue=400V,Ui=690V.Ue=690V,Ui=1000V
AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400 AC400
AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690 AC690
Conventional thermal current(A) 63 125 160 250 400 630
400V:AC-23B 63 125 160 250 400 630
Rated operating current(A)
690V:AC-23B 63 100 160 250 315 425
Rated Limiting Short-circuit current 400:V/H(kA) 50/100 50/100 50/100 50/100 50/100 50/100
Rated Limiting Short-circuit current when 690V(kA) 50 50 50 50 50 50
Mechanical life 1700 1400 1400 1400 800 800
HH15/QAS/QPS/QSS Changeover Switch P-042
Specification HH15-63 HH15-125 HH15-160 HH15-250 HH15-400 HH15-630

Electric Life 300 200 200 200 200 200
Rated current of fuse 400V/690V(A) 63/63 125/100 160/160 250/250 400/315 630/425
RT16 RT16 RT16 RT16 RT16 RT16
400V RT20 RT20 RT20 RT20 RT20 RT20
Model of fuse NT00 NT00 NT00 NT2 NT2 NT3
RT16 RT16 RT16 RT16 RT16
690V
NT00 NT00 NT1 NT2 NT3
Operating torque (N·m) 7.5 7.5 16 16 16 30

5 5 5 5 5 5
Ith 400, AC-15(A)
2.3 Mounting dimension(mm)
L
62×6 F
88+10.2
φ63+0.3
88+10.2
50
D
B
E
φ5.5+0.5
M
C
C×C
A
≤4 87.5
Model A B C D E F G L M
HH15-63/QSS 430 170 386 120 14 25 10 300 140
HH15-125/QSS 430 170 386 120 14 25 10 300? 140
HH15-125/QAS 430 170 386 120 14 25 10 300 140
HH15-160/QAS 430 170 386 120 14 25 10 300 140
HH15-250/QPS 430 170 386 120 14 25 10 300 140
HH15-160/QSS 630 190 590 120 25 25 12 300 200
HH15-250/QSS 630 190 590 120 25 25? 12 300 200
HH15-400/QSS 630 190 590 120 25 25 12? 300 200
HH15-400/QAS 630 190 590 120 25 25 12 300 200
HH15-630/QAS 630 190 590 120 25 25 12 300 200
HH15-630/QPS 630 190 590 120 25 25 12 300 200
HH15-1000/QPS 630 190 590 120 25 25 12 300 200
HH15-630/QSS 950 250 906 180 28 28 12 400 200
HH15-1000/QAS 950 250 906 180 28 28 12 400 200
HH15-1250/QPS 950 250 906 180 28? 28 12 400 200
HH15-1600/QPS 950 250 906? 180 28 28 12 400 200
HH15-2500/QPS 950 250 906 180 28 28 12 400 400
HH15-3150/QPS 950 250 906 180 28 28 12 400 400
J
P-043 Changeover Switch NH40S
NH40S Changeover Switch

1. General
1.1 Application
Mainly used in the distributing
and motor circuit which has
high short-circuit current,
and acted as main switch or master switch
infrequently operated by hand,
it is particularly suitable in the relative high class
with drawable low voltage complete equipment.
They provide safety isolation and protection
against overcurrent for any
low voltage electrical circuit.

2. Type designation
NH40 - □ / □ C S □ □
With “F”: terminal protection type

(only for 125~250A)
Without “F”: without terminal protection
With “W”: the handle is operated outside

the cabinet
Without “W”: the handle is operated inside
the cabinet
S: Changeover switch
C: lateral operation
Blank: front operation
3 represents three poles: 31 represents three poles

with auxiliary, one open and one closed
32 represents three poles with auxiliary, two open
and two closed
4 represents four poles: 41 represents four poles
with auxiliary, one open and one closed
42 represents four poles with auxiliary, two open
and two closed
Series No.
NH40S Changeover Switch P-044
2.2 Technical data
Conventional thermal current 16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 630
Associated fuse rating (A) 16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 630
400V AC21B 16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 630
400V AC22B - - - - - - 125 125 200 250 315 400 630
400V AC23A - - - - - - 125 160 200 250 315 400 630
Rated current (A)
690V AC21B 16 32 40 63 63 63 125 160 200 250 315 400 500
690V AC22B - - - - - - 100 100 160 160 200 250 315
690V AC23A - - - - - - 50 63 70 80 125 160 200
Operation force (N) 30~50 40~60 65~100
Conventional thermal current 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150

Associated fuse rating (A) 1000 1250 2×800 2×1000 2×1250
400V AC21B 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150
400V AC22B 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150
Rated current (A)
690V AC21B 800 800 1000 1600 1600 2000
690V AC22B 800 800 800 1000 1000 1250
Operation force (N) 200~300
Mounting dimensions of NH40-16~1600/C and NH40-16~1600/CS
A
A1
J N Y1 Operation inside the switchger
R 32 Y
M Y
L
U
B
V P P P 16~1600/CS 16~1600/C
C1 C
Panel of switchgear cubicle Panel of switchgear cubicle Operation outside the switchger
D 50
4× Φ4.5
50
Φ30
16~1600/CSW 16~1600/CW
Mounting dimension of externally mounted handle
Z1 Z
J
P-045 Changeover Switch NH40S
Mounting dimension of NH40 lateral operation and NH40 changeover switch disconnector
NH40-XX/C NH40-XX/CS Overall and

Specification
mounting dimensions (mm)
Current A A1 B C C1 D F J K L N P R U V M Y Y1 Z Z1
16~100A/3 290 170 107 135 185 85 135 116 84 7 25 30 14 90 20 6 39 90 360~465 440~545
16~100A/4 290 170 107 135 185 85 135 116 84 7 25 30 14 90 20 6 39 90 360~465 440~545
125A/3 295 192 135 155 235 85 135 120 95 7 29.5 36 18 115 31 8 58 122 410~515 480~595
160A/3 295 192 135 155 235 85 135 120 95 7 29.5 36 20 115 29 8 58 122 410~515 480~595
125A/4 325 222 135 155 235 85 135 150 95 7 29.5 36 18 115 31 8 58 122 410~515 480~595
160A/4 325 222 135 155 235 85 135 150 95 7 29.5 36 20 115 29 8 58 122 410~515 480~595
200A/3 335 232 170 176 260 85 135 160 115 7 29.5 50 25 142 37 10 67 148 430~535 510~615
250A/3 335 232 170 176 260 85 135 160 115 7 29.5 50 25 142 37 10 67 148 430~535 510~615
200A/4 385 282 170 176 260 85 135 210 115 7 29.5 50 25 142 37 10 67 148 430~535 510~615
250A/4 385 282 170 176 260 85 135 210 115 7 29.5 50 25 142 37 10 67 148 430~535 510~615
315A/3 430 298 240 233 335 105 160 210 180 9 43 65 32 205 48 12 84 196 515~630 620~735
400A/3 430 298 240 233 335 105 160 210 180 9 43 65 35 205 48 12 84 196 515~630 620~735
630A/3 430 298 260 233 335 105 160 210 180 9 43 65 40 220 48 12 84 196 515~630 620~735
315A/4 490 358 240 233 335 105 160 270 180 9 43 65 32 205 48 12 84 196 515~630 620~735
400A/4 490 358 240 233 335 105 160 270 180 9 43 65 35 205 48 12 84 196 515~630 620~735
630A/4 490 358 260 233 335 105 160 270 180 9 43 65 40 220 48 12 84 196 515~630 620~735
1000A/3 580 472 316 280 424 105 165 353 220 11 50 120 60 240 78 12 108 253 605~720 750~865
1250A/3 580 472 356 280 424 105 165 353 220 11 50 120 70 246 78 12 108 253 605~720 750~865
1600A/3 580 472 356 280 424 105 165 353 220 11 50 120 80 246 78 12 108 253 605~720 750~865
1000A/4 700 592 316 280 424 105 165 473 220 11 50 120 60 240 78 12 108 253 605~720 750~865
1250A/4 700 592 356 280 424 105 165 473 220 11 50 120 70 246 78 12 108 253 605~720 750~865
1600A/4 700 592 356 280 424 105 165 473 220 11 50 120 80 246 78 12 108 253 605~720 750~865
NH40S Changeover Switch P-046
Mounting dimensions of NH40-2000~3150/C and NH40-2000~3150/CS
78 120 120 2000、2500A 2000、2500A
M12 Wiring Wiring

N
11
330
220
U
B
Y 2000~3150/CS 2000~3150/C
O R Y
J 50 56 Y1
A1 570 425
A
Operation inside the switchger
990~1155 750~865
Y1
Y Y2 Y2 2000~31500/CSW Y Y2 2000~31500/CW
Panel of 25 80 Panel of 25 80
switchgear cubicle switchgear cubicle 50
4× Φ4.5
50
Φ30
connecting panel of connecting panel of Mounting dimension of externally mounted handle

3150A, B pole & N pole 3150A, B pole & N pole
570 340
Operation outside the switchger
Mounting dimension of NH40 changeover switch disconnect
Specification NH40-XX/C NH40-XX/CS Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)

Current A A1 B R J U O N Y Y1 Y2
2000A/3 580 472 440 80 353 325 40 40 105 335 -
2500A/3 580 472 440 80 353 325 40 40 105 335 -
3150A/3 580 472 510 120 353 360 50 50 105 335 105
2000A/4 700 592 440 80 473 325 40 40 105 335 -
2500A/4 700 592 440 80 473 325 40 40 105 335 -

3150A/4 700 592 510 120 473 360 50 50 105 335 105
J
P-047 Changeover Switch NH40SZ
2. Type designation
N H 40 - □ / □ SZ L □ X F □ H
With box
Y:Liquid cr ystal display
Split type
Fire function
Without any words means normal type,

automatic change and recovery
A means normal type, automatic
change but not automatic recovery
Ⅰ: Mains supply-mains supply, mutual
standby, phase loss protection;
overvoltageand undervoltage protection;
Ⅱ: Mains supply-mains supply, automatic
change and automatic recovery, phase
loss protection, overvoltage and
undervoltage protection;
NH40SZ Ⅲ: Mains supply-oil engine, automatic
change and automatic recovery, phase
Automatic Changeover Switch loss protection, overvoltage and
undervoltage protection;
1. General The terminal is 2 input and
NH40SZ automatic changeover switch disconnector 1output wiring
integrates electrical and mechanical interlocking systems
Dual-power supply automatic transfer
to guarantee safe transfer operation.
It is applicable for the three-phase four-wire power supply “3” represents three poles
system of AC 50Hz, rated voltage AC 380V ,rated current up “4” represents four poles
to 3150A.
It can realize automatic and manual changeover between
Design sequence No.
normal and back up power supply power,
and stop power supplying to load when changeover Isolating switch
process of power supply is carried out.
Company code
The switch is applicable for two circuits power supply
and in the condition which requires
high quality power supply.
Standard: IEC 60947-6-1
3. Technical data
Conventional
16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150
thermal current (A)
Ie (A) 16 32 40 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150
Ui(V) 660 800
Uimp (V) 8 12
Ue, Us Ue=400V; Us=220V
Rated making and breaking capacity 6Ie
Icw (KA) 5 10 12.6 50 50
Converting time (S) ≤3s ≤4s
Rated controlling Startup 300 325 355 400 600

capacity (W) Natural 55 62 74 98 120
Operation force (N) 30~50 40~60 65~100 75~120 200~300 250~400
NH40SZ Changeover Switch P-048
4. Control characteristics and product structure

4.1 Control characteristics:
There are two types of switch products, three-pole and four-pole (three poles + switchable neutral pole).
Four control types (common type, I, Ⅱ,Ⅲ),usually it is common type.
Control characteristics of common type switch:

a. This switch applies to the automatic change and automatic recovery of main power supply-standby power supply (including
manual oil generator; Note: Manual oil generator does not have to be used with type Ⅲ switches) systems. Power supply I precedes.
When power supply I is normal, it is switched on; when power supply I fails and power supply Ⅱ is normal,
the switch changes to power supply Ⅱ; when power supply I resumes, the switch automatically changes to power supply I.
Control characteristics of type I switch:

a. This switch applies to the mutual standby of mains supply systems. When the switch is in the “0” position, power
supply I precedes. When power supply I fails and power supply Ⅱ is normal, the switch changes to power supply Ⅱ; when power
supply Ⅱ is on and power supply I resumes, the switch does not automatically change to power supply I, it will change to power
supply I only when power supply Ⅱ fails. The main power supply changes to the standby power supply (the delay continuously
adjustable between 1～999s), the standby power supply changes to the main power supply (the delay continuously adjustble
between 1～999s).
b. Phase loss detection protection function, overvoltage、 undervoltage protection fuctions.
4.2 Product structure
Control characteristics of type Ⅱ switch:

a. This switch applies to the automatic change and automatic recovery of mains supply-mains supply systems. Power supply I
precedes. When power supply I is normal, it is switched on; when power supply I fails and power supply Ⅱ is normal, the
switch changes to power supply Ⅱ; when power supply I resumes, the switch automatically changes to power supply I. The main
power supply changes to the standby power supply (the delay continuously adjustable between 1～999s), the standby power
supply changes to the main power supply (the delay continuously adjustable between 1～999s).
b. Three-phase overvoltage, undervoltage and phase loss detection
protection functions.
Control characteristics of type Ⅲ switch:

a. This switch applies to the mutual standby or automatic change and automatic recovery of mains supply-oil generator (automatic
oil generator with signals) systems. Power supply I (the mains supply) precedes. When power supply I fails, the switch gives a
signal to start the oil generator. The oil generator has warm-up delay (continuously adjustable between 0～180s) function.
After the oil generator has started, the switch changes to power supply Ⅱ (the oil generator). When power supply I resumes, the
switch automatically changes to power supply I, the oil generator automatically stops after a cooling delay (continuously adjustable
between 0～180s).
b. Three-phase overvoltage and undervoltage protection functions
for mains supply and oil generator.
Type I, type Ⅱ and type Ⅲ switches have:

1) Automatic, remote and manual control functions
2) A 0.5s delay of the detection signal, to prevent misoperation.
3) A remote control “0” position in automatic state.
4) A key switch for the selection of operation mode.
J
16A-100A/4(Common type)
Model and specification
Control voltage
Position indication
Electrical key lock
Mechanical padlock
Switch body
Line Ⅱ connected to the standby power supply
Line I connected to the standby power supply
302~305 switch
state indicating
terminals
Operating handle
100A/3 common type; 100A/3, 4 typeⅠ, type Ⅱ, type Ⅲ; 125A-3200A/3, 4 common type, type I, type Ⅱ, type Ⅲ
Model and specification
Control voltage
Position indication
Electrical key lock
Mechanical padlock
Switch body
Line I connected to the standby power supply
Line Ⅱ connected to the standby power supply
101~106 control power supply input and output terminals
201~206 switch control terminals

301~306 switch operating state indicating terminals
401~406 switch operating state indicating terminals (reserved) (only for 315A and above)
501~506 electrical key lock, mechanical padlock state indicating terminals (only for 315A and above)
Operating handle
a. Electrical key lock: It controls the power supply of the internal control circuit of the switch. When the electrical lock is in the
“Automatic” position, the switch can be operated automatically or remotely. When the electrical lock is in the “Manual” position,
the switch can only be operated manually;
b. Operating handle: When operating the switch with the operating handle, the elctrical lock must be in the “Manual” position;
c. Mechanical padlock: Before maintenance, put the switch to the 0 position with the operating handle, pull up the padlock structure
and lock the padlock. (Pulling up the mechanical padlock switches off the internal control power supply of the switch so that it
cannot be operated electrically or manually);
d. Position indication: It indicates the operating position (I; 0; Ⅱ)

of the switch;
e. Control voltage: The control voltage class of the switch is 220VAC;
f. Switch body: The front part is line I, which is connected to the “Normal power supply”; the rear part is line Ⅱ, which is connected
to the “Standby power supply”.
4.3 Connection terminal of control circuit

Common type
Remote & Automatic Remote control at Automatic control at

control option breaking status making status
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Connection Normal powerⅠBackup powerⅡ Connection
terminal 1 220VAC OV 220VAC OV terminal 2 Ⅰ Ⅱ
101 102 103 104 105 106 201 202 203 204 205 206
POSITION POSITION
Connection Connection POSⅠ POS Ⅱ
terminal 3 Ⅰ Ⅱ terminal 3
302 303 304 305
301 302 303 304 305 306
(16A~100A common type only)
Ⅰ
MANU-PADLOCK
PREBREAK Ⅰ Ⅱ
Connection Connection
Ⅰ Ⅱ
terminal 4 terminal 5 501 502 503 504 505 506
Manual operation at breaking status With padlock
401 402 403 404 405 406 at breaking status
Automatic operation
at making status Without padlock
at making state
Type I and type Ⅱ

Communication control option making status breaking status
Connection Connection Control

terminal 1 terminal 2
Ⅰ Ⅱ
101 102 103 104 105 106 201 202 203 204 205 206
ⅠⅡ type 3P only
PREBREAK
POSITION
terminal 3 Ⅱ terminal 4 Ⅰ Ⅱ
Ⅰ
301 302 303 304 305 306 401 402 403 404 405 406
MANU-PADLOCK
Connection
terminal 5 501 502 503 504 505 506
J
Manual operation at breaking status With padlock at
Automatic operation breaking status
at making status Without padlock at

making state
Type Ⅲ

Generator starting Communication control option making status breaking status
Control/Auto Selection
terminal 1 terminal 2 Ⅰ Ⅱ
101 102 103 104 105 106 201 202 203 204 205 206
Ⅲ type 3P only Predict PREBREAK

terminal 3 Ⅱ terminal 4 Ⅰ Ⅱ
Ⅰ
301 302 303 304 305 306 401 402 403 404 405 406
MANU-PADLOCK
Connection
terminal 5 501 502 503 504 505 306
Manual operation at breaking status With padlock
Automatic operation at breaking status
at making status Without padlock

at making state
Terminal 1, main options

101, 106-Note: They do not connect with other terminal (only for common type)
102, 103-Power control terminal of circuit Ⅰ(only for common type)
104, 105-Power control terminal of circuit Ⅱ(only for common type)
101, 102-Generator starting signal input (for type Ⅲ)
103, 104-Firefighting +24V input, enforce "0", both switches breaks (for type I, Ⅱ, Ⅲ)
105, 106-Communication Interface (Reserved)
Terminal 2, remote control

201, 206-Terminal of remote controlling, automatic controlling functions. Remote control at breaking status and automatic
control at making status.
202, 203-Making switch I.
202, 204-At “0” position, both switches breaks (for type I, Ⅱ, Ⅲ) (include preferring position “0”)
202, 205-Making switch Ⅱ.
Terminal 3, position indication and zero-line terminal

301, 302-Switch I position
301, 303-At “0” position, all swithes breaks
301, 304-Switch Ⅱ position.
305-Type I, Ⅱ, switch I controls zero-line “N1”;
type Ⅲ switch I controls zero-line “N” (only for 3 poles)
Terminal 4, pre-breaking auxiliary contact

306-Type I, Ⅱ, switch Ⅱ controls zero-line “N2”; type Ⅲ, switch Ⅱ controls zero-line “N(G)”
402, 403, Pre-breaking position of indication switchⅠ.
404, 405, Pre-breaking position of indication switchⅡ.
Terminal 5 Manual and automatic operation mode and whether locking the switch
502, 503, Automatic and manual control indication
504, 505, Indcation of whether locking the switch Terminal 6 Start-up terminals
for diesel generator
501,506: They are supuerfluity.
5.1 16A~100A 4 poles main switch wiring diagram
Normal power supply Standby power supply

Secondary connection diagram
A phase B phase C phaseN phase Normal Standby

power supply power supply
Load output terminal

(Special attention should be paid to the sequence of connection.)
Connected to load output terminal
C N
HL1 and HL2 are respectively the resumption indicators of the

HD1 HD2 normal and standby power supplies;
HD1 and HD2 are respectively the service indicators of the normal
and standby power supplies;
302 303 304 305
302~305 are switch terminals.
5.2 125A~3150A main switch wiring diagram
Normal power supply Normal power supply
301 302 303 304 305 306
HD1 HD2
C N
125A~3150A
Note: Secondary connection of terminal 1 is required

Load output terminal (for 16A~100A with forced reset, the connection mode
is the same as above).
5.3 125A~3150A Secondary wiring diagram (3P, 4P)
Normal Standby
power supply power supply 301 302 303 304 305 306
AC220V AC220V
HD1 HD2
FU1 FU2
HL1 HL2
C N
J
101 102 103 104 105 106
125A~3150A
HL1 and HL2 are respectively the resumption indicators of the

normal and standby power supplies;
HD1 and HD2 are respectively the service indicators of the normal
and standby power supplies;
FU1 and FU2 are 5A fuses;
101~106, 201~206, 301~306 are switch terminals.
5.4 Depending on the operating mode, the following connection modes can be used for terminal 2:
a. Fully automatic connection mode
201 202 203 204 205 206
201 and 206 short connected (Normal Type)
Note: Secondary connection of terminal 1 is required.
b. Remote reset (the two power supplies are disconnected) connection mode
201 202 203 204 205 206
Forced reset contact (passive)
c. Remote connection mode (Note: SB1 and SB2 are external push-button switches)
201 202 203 204 205 206
d. Fully automatic + manual (remote) connection mode (Note: SB1 and SB2 are external push-button switches)
Automatic
Remote
Manual
201 Automatic
202 Remote
203
204
205
206
Normal Mode
Note: When switch SA is in the automatic position,① and ②
are connected.
When switch SA is in the manual position, ④ and ③
are connected, but the switch SA must break.
5.5 Connection diagram
NH40-16~100
16~100A 3P connection chart
A Ⅱ Power supply (Standby)

Ⅰ Power supply (Common) B
C
C
B
A
Lock position
A B C
Over load side
A Ⅱ Power supply (Standby)

Ⅰ Power supply (Common) B
C
N line must connection
N line must connection
C
B
A
Lock position
A B C N
Over load side
Correct mounting of the switch:
a. Copper busbars I and Ⅱ are respectively connected to phases R, S, T, N of the normal (front) and standby (rear) power supplies
from left to right.
b. The control power supplies are obtained respectively from phases T and N of the normal and standby power supplies.
c. AC220V control power supplies I and Ⅱ are respectively connected to terminals 102~103 and 104~105, among which
102 and 104 are respectively the live wires of the normal and standby power supplies.
d. Terminals 1.1 and 106 are only used as the control power supplies of the signal lamps. Note: They should not be connected
to any other lines.
e. When upper (lower) incoming line is used, phases R, S, T, N of the lower (upper) lines I and Ⅱ are respectively connected with
J
copper busbars or conductors as the output.
6. Mounting dimension of NH40SZ automatic changeover switch disconnector

16～1600A
Electric ware controlling connecting area J
er
N
et
Maxim rotation scope of handle
am
E
R
du
ΦX
nu
L
Se
G
B
B1
35
20
18
16
35 40
Y V P P P 60 80
Y1
A1
C
A 1000A 1250A 1600A
2000～3150A
J 142
2000
ΦX N
L
50
400
220
250
40
B
25
20
40 50
80 120
P Y
V R 120 120 120
Y1 A1 2000A 2500A 3150A
C A
Specification NH40SZ Mounting dimensions

Ith/Poles A A1 B C E J K L N P R V ΦX Y Y1
16A/3、4 305 245 106 170 133 234 84 7 75 30 14 10.5 6 36 86
32A/3、4 305 245 106 170 133 234 84 7 75 30 14 10.5 6 36 86
40A/3、4 305 245 106 170 133 234 84 7 75 30 14 10.5 6 36 86
63A/3、4 305 245 106 170 133 234 84 7 75 30 14 10.5 6 36 86
80A/3、4 305 245 106 170 133 234 84 7 75 30 14 10.5 6 36 86
100A/3、4 305 245 106 170 133 234 84 7 75 30 14 10.5 6 36 86
125A/3 380 292 135 240 208 275 78/108 7 87 36 20 20 9 58 135
160A/3 380 292 135 240 208 275 78/108 7 87 36 20 20 9 58 135
125A/4 410 320 135 240 208 312 78/108 7 87 36 20 20 9 58 135
160A/4 410 320 135 240 208 312 78/108 7 87 36 20 20 9 58 135
200A/3 420 330 170 240 208 312 78/108 7 87 50 25 27 11 60 140
250A/3 420 330 170 240 208 312 78/108 7 87 50 25 27 11 60 140
200A/4 470 380 170 240 208 358 78/108 7 87 50 25 27 11 60 140
250A/4 470 380 170 240 208 358 78/108 11 87 50 25 27 11 60 140
315A/3 455 382 240 315 270 365 180 11 95 65 32 37.5 11 84 195
400A/3 455 382 240 315 270 365 180 11 95 65 32 37.5 11 84 195
630A/3 455 382 260 315 270 365 180 11 95 65 40 37.5 13 84 195
315A/4 515 450 240 315 270 430 180 11 95 65 32 37.5 11 84 195
400A/4 515 450 240 315 270 430 180 11 95 65 32 37.5 11 84 195
630A/4 515 450 260 315 270 430 180 11 95 65 40 37.5 13 84 195
800A/3 900 520 310 368 320 500 220 11 85 120 60 60.5 13 108 252
1000A/3 900 520 310 368 320 500 220 11 85 120 60 60.5 13 108 252
1250A/3 900 520 360 368 320 500 220 11 85 120 70 60.5 13 108 252
1600A/3 900 520 360 368 320 500 220 11 85 120 80 60.5 13 108 252
800A/4 1010 635 310 368 320 610 220 11 85 120 60 60.5 13 108 252
1000A/4 1010 635 310 368 320 610 220 11 85 120 60 60.5 13 108 252
1250A/4 1010 635 360 368 320 610 220 11 85 120 70 60.5 13 108 252
1600A/4 1010 635 360 368 320 610 220 11 85 120 80 60.5 13 108 252
2000A/3 900 520 455 562 495 500 220 11 85 137 80 33 13 226 457
2000A/4 1010 635 455 562 495 610 220 11 85 137 80 33 13 226 457
2500A/3 900 520 455 562 495 500 220 11 85 137 80 33 13 226 457
2500A/4 1010 635 455 562 495 610 220 11 85 137 80 33 13 226 457
3150A/3 900 520 505 562 495 500 220 11 85 142 120 13 13 230 462
3150A/4 1010 635 505 562 495 610 220 11 85 142 120 13 13 230 462
J
Feuses
NRZ28-20 CRT36-00 NRT36 NRT28

Solar Photo voltaic DC Fuse Knife Contact Cylindrical Contact
System Protector Fuse Protector Caps Fuse Holder
Protection Fuse
RT28 RT29 RT36

Cylindrical Contact Fuse with Knife Contact
Caps Fuse Protector Cylindrical Cap Fuse Protector
Terminal Blocks
SAK JXB JCUK TB
TC TH35-7.5(C45)
Rail
Change-over Switch Combination Switch
LW32 HZ10
Page P-040 Page PK-046
Travel Switch
YBLX-ME YBLX-WL YBLX-CK YBLX-P1

Travel Switch
YBLX-K1 YBLX-K3 YBLX-10 YBLX-19
Foot Switch Microswitch
YBLT-3、YBLT-4 YBLT-EKW/5A/B YBLXW-5 YBLXW-6
Controller
JD
Page P-086
P-001 Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals Fuses
2. Type designation
2.1 Type designation of fuse base
N RZ 28 - □□
Rated current of the fuse link
Rated current of the fuse
Design sequence No.
DC fuse
Company code
3. Normal operating conditions and installation conditions

3.1 Ambient temperature: The ambient temperature does not
exceed 40℃, of which average value measured over 24h does
not exceed 35℃, and average value measured over one year
NRZ28-20 is lower than this value; the lowest value of the ambient air
temperature is -5℃.
Solar Photo voltaic System
3.2 Atmospheric conditions: The air is clean, with relative
Protection Fuse humidity not exceeding 50% when the maximum
temperature is 40°C. Higher relative humidity is possible
when the temperature is lower. For example, at 20°C, the
1. General
relative humidity can attain 90%. Measures are taken against
NRZ28-20 PV system protection fuse is applicable for short condensation on the product body due to temperature
circuit protection of distribution lines with rated voltage not variation.
exceeding DC1000V, rated current not exceeding 20A, and 3.3 Class of pollution: Class III
rated short-circuit capacity not exceeding 20kA.
3.4 Installation category: Class III
NRZ28-20 series is a compact, high-capacity, low-power fuse
series specifically developed by Chint Electric for photovoltaic 3.5 Installation conditions: The fuse should be installed in places
power system, mainly for the solar photovoltaic system free of significant shaking and shock vibration.
protection fuses, this series of fuse adopts high-quality 3.6 Altitude: See the table below for correction coefficients of
materials and passes stringent tests by well-known operating current at different altitudes:
manufacturers.
The main material of base is DMC-2; that of conductive

socket is H62. Breaking range and utilization category:
NRZ28-20 fuse link is "gPV" type, "gPV" represents the fuse
link used for PV system with a full range of DC breaking
capacity.
This product complies with GB / T 13539.6, IEC60269-6,

and has obtained CQC, TUV, CE and other domestic and
international certification.
Fuses Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals P-002
Altitude ≤2000m 2000m~3000m ≥3000m Example
Current correction factor Product with rated current of 10A at altitude of 2500m
1 0.9 0.8 The rated current after derating is 0.9X10=9A
3.7 If the operating conditions of fuse are different from those in the above table, please consult with the manufacturer.
4. Technical data
4.1 The main technical parameters (see Table 1)

Table 1
Rated voltage Breaking capacity Rated dissipation power Temperature rise Rated current
Model
(DC) V (kA) (W) (K) (A)
NRZ28-20 1000 20、35（15A) ≤3 ≤70 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 16, 20
4.2 Derating effect

At the 20 ℃ ambient temperature, we recommend the actual operating current of fuse link shall not exceed the rated current value.
take the environment and working conditions into account when selecting fuse link, such as extent of enclosure, air flow, size of
connection cable (length, cross-section) and changes in the instantaneous peak and other aspects; current carrying capacity test of
fuse link is conducted at 20 ℃ ambient temperature, and is affected by changes in ambient temperature during actual use. The higher
the ambient temperature is, the higher the operating temperature of the fuse link is, and the shorter its life expectancy is. Instead, the
life of the fuse link will be extended if running at lower temperatures.
The diagram below shows a typical curve of the impact of ambient temperature on the current carrying capacity
140
Percentage of ratings →
For example: When the ambient temperature of use is 20 ℃,

120
select rated current of "gPV" type fuse link In= 16A, if these fuse
links are used in 60 ℃ high temperature environment, must
100
additionally reduce the operating current, the curve A on the left
80
indicates percentage of ratings at 70 ℃ is 0.78, to ensure that the
fuse link does not malfunction, should re-select the rated current
60 of the fuse link: In = 16A/0.78 = 20.512A; according to standard

current rating of fuse link select In = 20A.
40
20
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Ambient temperature t→℃

Ambient temperature - carrying capacity curve
Where: curve line is "gPV" type fuse link curve for protection
K
4.3 Fuse characteristic curve
2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 8A 10A 12A 16A(15A) 20A

4
10
6
4
2
t(s)
103
6
4
102
6
4
101
6
4
100
6
4
0.1
1 2 4 6 8 101 2 4 6 8 102 2 4 6 8 103
Time - current band
104
4
Io(A)
103
6 20A
16A(15A)
4 12A
10A
8A
6A
2 5A
4A
3A
2A
102
4
In/A
101
4
4 6 101 2 4 6 102 2 4 6 103 2
perspective current(symmetrical virtral value) IP(A)

Characteristics of cut off current

Diagram 1 Overall and mounting dimensions of NRZ28-20 base
61max
TH35-7.5
18max
81max
Diagram 2 Overall and dimensions of NRZ28-20 fuse link
φ10.3±0.1
38±0.6
6.1 The following must be specified when ordering:
6.1.1 The product model, rated current and quantity for the fuse link.
6.1.2 The model specifications for the base, indicating the base, poles and the number of orders.
6.2 Order example

Order 100 pieces of NRZ28-20/10A, representing ordering 100
pieces of fuse link of model NRZ28-20 and rated current 10A.
100 pieces of NRZ28-20 (base), representing ordering 100 pieces
of fuse base of model NRZ28-20.
K
CRT36-00 DC Fuse Protector

1. General
CRT36-00 DC fuse protector is applicable to DC circuit with

rated voltage not more than DC80V, rated current not more than
600A and rated short-circuit capacity not more than 25kA for
short-circuit protection.
Its base materials are DMC resin and T3 red copper; its main
material is high-frequency electric porcelain and T3 red copper.
CRT36-00 series is a fuse protector series with miniaturization,
large capacity, low power consumption and high limit flow
capacity, specially designed by Chint Group for communication
industry power supply cabinet, power distribution cabinet and
other power distribution system in communication industry.
Such series fuse protector has passed through serious test of
well-known manufactures in communication industry.
Breaking scope and use categories: gS.
It conforms to GB/T 13539.4, IEC 60269-4 and EU RoHS

environmental protection requirements and has obtained CCC,
TUV and other domestic and international certification.
2. Type designation
C R T 36 - 00
Size
Design sequence No.
Knife contact
Fuse protector
For communication

exceed 40℃ , of which average value measured over 24h does
not exceed 35℃ , and average value measured over one year
is lower than this value; the lowest value of the ambient air

humidity not exceeding 50% when the maximum
condensation on the product body due to temperature
variation.
3.3 Class of pollution: Class III
3.5 Installation conditions: The fuse should be installed in places

free of significant shaking and shock vibration.
3.6 Altitude: See the table below for correction coefficients of

operating current at different altitudes:
4. Technical data
4.1 Main technical parameters (See Table 1)
Table 1
Type Rated Breaking Rated dissipation Temperature

Rated current(A)
specification voltage (V) capacity(kA) power(W) rising (K)
2, 4, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 35, 40, 50, 63, 80,
CRT36-00 80 25 ≤30 ≤70 100, 125, 160, 200, 224, 250, 300, 315, 355,
400, 425, 500, 600
4.2 Conventional fusing and conventional non-fusing (see Table 2)
Table 2
Rated current Conventional Conventional non-fusing Conventional fusing

(A) time(h) current Inf(A) current If(A)
In≤4 1 1.5In 2.1In

4＜In＜16 1 1.5In 1.9In
16≤In≤63 1 1.25In 1.6In
63＜In≤160 2 1.25In 1.6In
160＜In≤400 3 1.25In 1.6In
400≤In 4 1.25In 1.6In
4.3 Size code of pedestal and electric mechanical parameters (see Table 3)
Table 3
Specifications and
CRT36-00 160A CRT36-00 250A CRT36-00 600A
models of pedestal
Adapted fuse-link tube No. 00 00 00

Rated current (A) 2A~160A 200A~250A 300A~600A
Rated voltage (V) DC80V DC80V DC80V
Connection thread size M8 M8/M10 M10/M12
Tightening torque of connection bolt (N.m) 11 11/21 21/38
Recommended copper conductor cross-section 70 120 400
4.4 Use at lower capacity

At 20 ℃ Ambient temperature, the recommended actual working current of fuse link shall not be more than rated current. Changes
in environment and working conditions, such as sealing degree, air flow, connecting cable size (length, cross section), instantaneous
peak value shall be taken into account when selecting fuse link. Test for current bearing capacity of fuse link is done at 20 ℃ Ambient
temperature and fuse link will be affected by changes in Ambient temperature in actual use. The higher Ambient temperature, the
higher working temperature and shorter service life of fuse link will be. To the contrary, running at lower temperature will extend the
service life of fuse link.
The following figure is the typical curve of impact of Ambient temperature on current bearing capacity.
K
Ambient temperature- bearing capacity curve
140
Percentage of rated value →
120
100
B
80
60
Occurrence
Flow value
A
40
20
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Ambient temperature t →℃
Where: Curve A: Ordinary (gS) fuse-link curve for line protection;

Curve B: Quick (aR) fuse-link curve for the protection of semiconductor device.
For example: When the Ambient temperature at a service site is 20℃ and select a (gS) fuse link with rated current of In=63A, the
above fuse link shall be used at lower capacity under the high temperature of 70℃. Curve A in the figure at left side shows that the
percentage of running rated value is 0.78 when the temperature is 70℃. In order to prevent fuse link from occurring misoperation,
re-selection of rated current (In=63A/0.78 =80.77A) of such fuse link is required: select In=80A according to standard current class
of fuse link.
4.5 Characteristic curve

32A/35A
600A
500A
100A
400A
125A
160A
355A
425A
315A
300A
200A
224A
250A
80A
25A
10A
63A
50A
40A
20A
16A
2A
4A
6A
4 5
10 10
6
4 600A
Cut-off current peak ID (kA)
3 500A
t(s)
10 2 425A
400A
4 355A
315A 300A
10 250A
224A
2 200A
10 6 160A
125A 100A
4 80A
63A
50A
2 40A
35A
1 32A
3 25A 20A
10 10 16A
10A
6 6A
4 4A
0
10 2 2A
2
10
-1
6
10
4
2
-2
10 2 10
3 4 2 3 4 5
10 10 10 10 10 2 4 6 10 2 4 6 10 2 4 6 10 2 4 6 10
Expected current (effective value) Ip (A) Expected current (effective value) Ip (A)

Fig. 1: CRT36-00 160A Pedestal appearance and installation dimensions
56±1.5
M8
59max
25±1.5
6
120max
102±1.5
25±0.7
CRT36-00 DC80V 160A

31max
GB13539.1 IEC60269-1
GB T13539.4 IEC60269-4
2XΦ7.5±0.5
Fig. 2: CRT36-00 250A Pedestal appearance and installation dimensions
56±1.5
M8
M10
59max
25±1.5
6
133max
110±1.5
38±0.7
CRT36-00 DC80V 250A
31max
GB13539.1 IEC60269-1
GB T13539.4 IEC60269-4
25±0.7 2XΦ7.5±0.5
K
Fig. 3: CRT36-00 600 Pedestal appearance and installation dimensions
M10 56±1.5 M12
60max
25±1.5
166max
131±1.5
2XΦ7.5±0.5
37max
50±0.7 25±0.7
Fig. 4: CRT36-00 600A Fuse-link appearance dimensions

58max
49±1.5
30max
78.5±1.5
6.1 It needs to notify the following when ordering
Fuse link shall be marked with product model, rated current and quantity
6.2 It needs to notify the rated current of pedestal when ordering fuse-link pedestal
6.3 Ordering samples

For example: CRaaT36-00/600A, 100 fuse links represent 100 fuse links with product model of NRZ36-1 and rated current of 600A.
CRT36-00/160A 100 pedestals represent 100 pedestals with product model of CRT36-00 and rated current of 160A.
NRT36 Knife Contact Fuse

Protector
1. General
NRT36-00 (NH00) Knife contact fuse protector (hereinafter
referred to as "fuse protector") is a new and practical patent fuse
protector designed by our company, suitable for overload or
short-circuit protection in electric circuit with AC 45Hz to 62Hz,
rated voltage not more than 690V and rated current not more
than 160A. Such fuse protector is the latest high-tech products,
designed by Chint Group for communication industry and it is
outstanding among the previous similar products with three
innovations:
The first is double indications. The product body is equipped

with indicator, which highlights its indication advantages in dark
night or within the case when fused mass melted and indicator
illuminated;
The second is quick and convenient installation. This product is

designed to provide users with a quick installation method and
its guide rail installation can be done with screws for fixation;
The third is its free splicing, which is easy for mounting
clapboard. Users can freely splice number of poles as required to
conveniently mount clapboard.
The series products comply with GB/T 13539.2 and IEC 60269-2
standards and have obtained 3C certification and CB test report.
2. Type designation
Rated current of fuse links
Size
Low-voltage fuse protector (knife contact

fuse protector)
Rated current of fuse links
Size
Design sequence No.
Knife contact fuse protector
Company code


K
variation.
3.5 Installation conditions: The fuse should be installed in places free of significant shaking and shock vibration.
3.6 Altitude: See the table below for correction coefficients of operating current at different altitudes:
4. Technical data
Type specification Rated voltage (V) Breaking capacity (kA) Rated current (A) Rated current of fuse protector(A)
AC500 120 2, 4, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 35,

NRT36-00(NH00) 160
AC660, AC690 50 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125, 160
Characteristic curve of (N)RT36 series knife contact fuse protector

t(s)
Expected current (effective value) IP (A)

NRT36-00 Fuse link size
61max
49±1.5
30max
78±1.5
NRT36-00 Pedestal size
60max
25±1.5
25±0.7
36max
TH35 DIN-rail mounting
100±1.5
120max
NRT36-00-3P pedestal size
103max
67±0.5
86max
Ф14±0.5
132max
25±0.7
Ф8±0.5
6. Interchangeability of fuse links and pedestal
The fuse link and pedestal of NRT36-00 and RT36-00 can be used interchangeably; namely, the fuse link of NRT36-00 can match the
pedestal of NRT36-00 and RT36-00 at the same time. The difference is that NRT36-00 pedestal can be spliced and installed in guide rail
style or with screws, while guide rail installation and splicing are not available for RT36-00 pedestal; only installation with screws is
allowed. NRT36-00 fuse protector is equipped with indicator structures. The illuminating indicator shows that fuse links has melted.
NRT36-00 fuse protector has no such structure.
K
7. Installation, use and maintenance
7.1 Before installation, check if the fuse link can be flexibly plugged.
7.2 NRT36-00 pedestal can be either installed with screws or with
TH35 standard guide rail to realize rapid installation. Schematic
Diagram of Guide Rail Installation is given here.
This end is hung on guide rail
Up
Upward pressing can remove

the pedestal and downward Down
pressing with appropriate force
can realize quick installation in
If it cannot be stuck in
guide rail.
place by pressing it to the
bottom, use slot type
screwdriver to pull forward
to the limit structure of
this guide rail.
7.3 NRT36-00 pedestal is a new fuse protector pedestal, which can be spliced. When it is used in a multipolar structure, it must be
equipped with supporting clapboard; otherwise, it cannot be used in a multipolar structure (commonly used, such as: three poles).
Schematic diagram of splicing and assembly diagram in the case of three poles are as follows.
7.3.1 Schematic Diagram of 3P Pedestal Splicing
This multipolar splicing is upward

Up
This multipolar splicing

is downward
Down
7.3.2 Schematic Diagram of 3P Assembly Splicing
Clapboard
Class-III spliced fuse

protector pedestal
Th35 standard guide rail

Characteristic curve of (N)RT36 series knife contact fuse protector

t(s)
4
10
4
2
3
10
t(s)
4
2
102
4
2
1
10
4
2
0 4 10 20 32 50 80 125 200 315 500 800 1250
10
4
2
-1
10
4
2
-2
10
4 1 2 3 4 5
2 345 10 2 3 4 5 10 2 3 45 10 2 3 45 10 2 3 4 5 10
1250A
100 1000A
80 800A
60 630A
50 500A
400A
40 315A
Peak value of cut-off current ID (kA)
30 250A
200A
20 160A
125A
100A
80A
10 63A
8 50A
7 40A
32A
5 25A
4 20A
16A
3 10A
2 6A
4A
1 2A
0.8
0.7
0.5
0.3
1 2 3 4 5 678910 2 0 30 4 0 60 80 100
Expected current IP (kA)
(Symmetric effective value)
K
NRT28 Series Cylindrical Cap

Fuse Holder
1. Application scope
NRT28 series cylindrical cap fuse applies to power

distribution system with AC 45Hz-62Hz, rated voltage of 500V,
and rated current of 125A, to protect overload and short
circuit (it is not recommended but RT36 fuse in capacitor
box).
Neon light and resistance comprise the fuse base's fuse-

link fuse signal device (code “X”).
NRT28 series holder can be used in combination with

RT28-32, RT28-63, and RT29-125 “gG” fuse links, “gG”
is the general-purpose fuse link with full-range breaking
capacity.
Standard: IEC 60269-2.
3. Normal operating conditions and installation conditions 2. Model and meaning
3.1 Ambient temperature: The ambient temperature does not N RT 28 - □ □/

is lower than this value; the lowest value of the ambient air Number of poles (2P, 3P, single pole not indicated with number)
Signal device (code "X")
humidity not exceeding 50% when the maximum Rated current of fuse
Design code
relative humidity can attain 90%. Measures are taken against Powder-filled cartridge fuse
variation.


4. Normal operating and installation conditions
4.1 Parameter of fuse holder

Rated Nominal Number Dimension

Model A B C D E F G K
voltage (V) current (A) of poles
500 32 1P 64max 78.5±0.5 82max 18max / / 10.3±0.1 38±0.6

NRT28-32(X) 500 32 2P 64max 78.5±0.5 82max / 37max / 10.3±0.1 38±0.6
500 32 3P 64max 78.5±0.5 82max / / 55.5max 10.3±0.1 38±0.6
+0.6
500 63 1P 77max 108±1.0 112max 27max / / 14.3±0.1 51 - 1 . 0
+0.6
NRT28-63 500 63 2P 77max 108±1.0 112max / 54max / 14.3±0.1 51 - 1 . 0
+0.6
500 63 3P 77max 108±1.0 112max / / 81max 14.3±0.1 51 - 1 . 0
+0.1
500 125 1P 77max 126±1.0 128max 36max / / 22.2±0.1 58 - 2 . 0
+0.1
NRT28-125 500 125 2P 77max 126±1.0 128max / 72max / 22.2±0.1 58 - 2 . 0
4.2 Parameter of fuse link
Similar products at Size Rated Nominal Dissipation Breaking

Model
home and abroad (G×K) voltage (V) current (A) power (W) capacity (kA)
RT28-32 RT18-32,RT14-20,RT19-32,R015 10×38 500 2,4,6,10,16,20,25,32 ≤3 100

RT28-63 RT18-63,RT14-32,RT19-63,R016 14×51 500 2,4,6,10,16,20,25,32,40,50,63 ≤5 100
RT29-125 RT14-63,RT29-125,R017 22×58 500 10,16,20,25,32,40,50,63,80,100,125 ≤9.5 100
4.3 Parameter of fuse holder and fuse link
Model Equipped fuse link

of holder Size (mm) Model of fuse link Current (A)
NRT28-32(X) 10×38 RT28-32,R015 2,4,6,10,16,20,25,32
NRT28-63 14×51 RT28-63,R016 2,4,6,10,16,20,25,32,40,50,63
NRT28-125 22×58 RT29-125,R017 10,16,20,25,32,40,50,63, 80,100,125

NRT28-32
K
A
TH35-7.5 D G
1P
B E RT28-32
2P
F
C 3P
NRT28-63、NRT28-125
A
TH35-7.5
D
1P
E φG
B
2P
C F
3P RT28-63
RT29-125
6.1 Must be specified when ordering
6.1.1 Fuse must be specified the product model、rated current、 quantity
6.1.2 Base must be specified the specification、 specify the base, the number of poles、order amount
6.2 Order example
K
When order 100 RT28-32 20A fuses only can be written RT28-32/20A、100；
When order 100 3 poles of NRT28-32 bases only can be written NRT28-32/3P(Base)、100.
RT28 Cylindrical Contact

Caps Fuse Protector
1. General
Rt28 Cylindrical contact caps fuse protector is applicable to the

distribution equipment with AC 45Hz-62Hz, rated voltage of
500V and rated current not more than 63A for circuit overload
and short-circuit protection (RT36-00 fuse protector is
recommended to be used in capacitor box instead of this kind of
fuse protector).
Neon light and resistors constitute fusing signal device of fuse

link of fuse protector pedestal (symbol "X").
RT28-32 and RT28-63 fuse link is divided into "gG" type; “gG" is
ordinary fuse protector with full range of breaking capacity.
This product conforms to GB/T 13539.2 and IEC 60269-2

standards; its technical indicators have reached international
advanced level. "gG" fuse links can match RT28 pedestal.
This product complies with GB/T 13539.2 and IEC 60269-2.
3. Normal operating conditions and installation conditions 2. Type designation
3.1 Ambient temperature: The ambient temperature does not -

temperature is -5℃. Rated current of fuse links
3.2 Atmospheric conditions: The air is clean, with relative Number of poles (monopolar is not numbered)
Signal device (symbol "X")
when the temperature is lower. For example, at 20°C, the Rated current of fuse protector
NEW (new model and appearance)
variation. Design sequence No.
3.3 Class of pollution: Class III Code of powder-filled cartridge fuse protector


4. Technical data
4.1 Parameters of fuse protector supporter (pedestal)
Size
Rated Rated Number
Model voltage(V) current(A) of poles A B D E F G K
500 32 1P 79±1.5 81max 55±1.0 61max 18max 10.3±0.1 38±0.6
RT28N-32 500 32 2P 79±1.5 81max 55±1.0 61max 36max 10.3±0.1 38±0.6
500 32 3P 79±1.5 81max 55±1.0 61max 54max 10.3±0.1 38±0.6
500 32 1P 79±1.5 81max 55±1.0 61max 18max 10.3±0.1 38±0.6
RT28N-32X 500 32 2P 79±1.5 81max 55±1.0 61max 36max 10.3±0.1 38±0.6
500 32 3P 79±1.5 81max 55±1.0 61max 54max 10.3±0.1 38±0.6
+0.6
500 63 1P 102±2.0 107max 72±1.0 80max 27max 14.3±0.1 51 -1.0
+0.6
RT28-63 500 63 2P 102±2.0 107max 72±1.0 80max 54max 14.3±0.1 51 -1.0
+0.6
500 63 3P 102±2.0 107max 72±1.0 80max 81max 14.3±0.1 51 -1.0
+0.6
500 63 1P 102±2.0 107max 72±1.0 80max 27max 14.3±0.1 51 -1.0
+0.6
RT28-63X 500 63 2P 102±2.0 107max 72±1.0 80max 54max 14.3±0.1 51 -1.0
+0.6
500 63 3P 102±2.0 107max 72±1.0 80max 81max 14.3±0.1 51 -1.0
4.2 Parameters of fuse links
Similar models at Size Rated Rated Dissipation Breaking

Model
home and abroad (G×K) voltage(V) current(A) power(W) capacity(kA)
RT18-32, RT14-20,
RT28-32 10×38 500 2, 4, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32 ≤3 100
RT19-32, R015
RT18-63, RT14-32,
RT28-63 14×51 500 2,4,6,10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63 ≤5 100
RT19-63, R016
4.3 Configuration parameters of fuse protector supporter (pedestal) and fuse links
Fuse protector Supporting fuse protector

pedestal Model Size(mm) Model of fuse links Current(A)
RT28N-32
RT28N-32X
10×38 RT28-32, R015 2, 4, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32
RT28-63
RT28-63X 14×51 RT28-63, R016 2,4,6,10, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63

E
D
TH35-7.5
F φG
A
RT28-32
RT28-63
K
6. Schematic diagram
Matched schematic diagram of fuse protector supporter (pedestal) and fuse links
Matched schematic diagram of fuse protector supporter Matched schematic diagram of fuse protector supporter
(pedestal) and fuse links with size of 10×38 (pedestal) and fuse links with size of 14×51
RT28-32 RT28-63
Φ10X38 Φ14X51
NRT28-32
RT28N-32
RT28-63
NRT28-63
Matched schematic diagram of fuse protector supporter

(pedestal) and fuse links with size of 22×58
RT29-125
Φ22X58
NRT28-125
7.1 It needs to notify the following when ordering:

7.1.1 Fuse link shall be marked with product model, rated current and quantity.
7.1.2 Pedestal shall be marked with type, specification, pedestal mark, number of pole and quantity.
7.2 Ordering example

100 RT28-32 20A fuse links can be expressed as
100 RT28-32/20A fuse links.
100 NRT28-32 pedestal of three poles can be
expressed as 100 NRT28-32/ 3P pedestals.
RT29
Fuse with Cylindrical Cap
1. General
RT 29 type fuse with cylindrical cap applies to distribution
configuration of AC 45Hz-62Hz, rated voltage 500V and rated
current of 125A for protection from overload and short-circuit.
(This type of fuse is not recommended of using in the electric
capacity cabinet, if so, RT36-00 shall be used as replacement).
Fuse equipped with impinger can be used as open-phase
protection for the electric motor. Fuse-link for general service
with full range of breaking capacity shall be “gG” type which
can be used for line protection.
2. Type designation
Rated current of the fuse-link
Rated current of the fuse
Design sequence No.
Code for fuse of sealed-tube with material
4. Technical data
4.1 Parameters of fuse protector supporter (pedestal)
Similar models at Rated Rated

Model Length C D Width E Height H
home and abroad voltage (V) current(A)
RT29-16 RT19-16 500 16 70max 31±0.56 21max 47max
4.2 Parameter of fuse-link
Similar models at Size Rated Rated Dissipation Breaking

Model
home and abroad (B×A) voltage(V) current(A) power(W) capacity(kA)
RT29-16(RO14) RT19-16 8×32 500 2, 4, 6, 10, 16 ≤2.5 100

RT29-125(RO17) RT19-125 22×58 500 10,16,20,25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100, 125 ≤9.5 100
K
4.3 Fuse holder (chassis) and parameter of configuration of fuse-link
Fuse holder Supporting fuse protector

(chassis) Model Size(mm) Model of fuse links Current(A)
RT29-16 8×32 RT29-16 2, 4, 6, 10, 16

RT29-16 Chassis RT29-16Fuse-link
H
D
A
E φB
C
RT29-16 fuse used with RT29-16 chassis
RT29-16
φ8X32 RT29-16
6.1 Specifications must be made when ordering:

6.1.1 Fuse-link shall refer to product model, rated current and quantity.
6.1.2 Fuse holder (chassis) shall define the type specification, indicate the chassis, number of poles and number of orders
6.2 Examples for ordering: RT29-16,16A 100 pieces, represents as the fuse-link with ordering No.RT29-16/16A,100,pieces
RT29-16 (chassis) 100 pieces, represents as the fuse chassis with ordering No. RT29-16, 100 pieces.
K
RT28, RT29 Fuse with Cylindrical Cap

Protection Characteristic Curve
4
10
104 4
2
3
3
10
10
4
4 2
2 102
102 4
4 2
1
2 10
1
10 4
4 2
2 0 8A 32A 63A 125A
10
10
0 2A 6A 12A 25A 50A 100A
4
4 2
-1
2 10
-1
3 45 101 2 3 45 102 2 3 45 103 2 3 4 5 104
10 2 3 4 5 101 2 3 45
2
10 2 3 45 10
3
2 3 45 10
4
Expected current (virtual value) IP (kA)

Expected current (virtual value) IP (kA) “gG” time of fuse-link--current tape
4 20 125A
10 18
14 100A
4 12 80A
2 10 63A
3
8 50A
10
Cut-off currentD peak ID (kA)
7 40A
4 32A
5 25A
2 20A
4
10
2
16A
3
4 10A
2 2 6A
1 4A
10
4 1 2A
2 0.8
4A 10A 20A 40A 80A 0.7
10
0
0.5
4
2 -1
10 0.3
2 3 45 10
1
2 3 4 5 10
2
2 3 4 5 103 2 3 4 5 103 1 2 3 4 5 678910 20 30 40 60 80 100
Expected current (virtual value) IP (kA) (symmetric virtual value)
“gG” time of fuse-link--current tape
RT36 Knife Contact Fuse

Protector
1. General
RT36 Knife contact fuse protector is a new fuse protector
designed by our company and featured by small size, light
weight, low consumption and high breaking capacity, etc.; and
widely used for overload protection and short-circuit protection
of electric device.
The series products are divided into "gG" type; “gG" is

ordinary fuse protector with full range of breaking capacity.
This product conforms to GB/T 13539.2 and IEC 60269-2
standards; its technical indicators have reached international
advanced level.
2. Type designation
Rated current of fuse protector
Size
Design sequence No.
Code of powder-filled cartridge fuse protector


variation.


3.7 If the operating conditions of fuse are different from those

in the above table, please consult with the manufacturer.
K
3. Technical data
Table (continued)
Similar models at
Specifications Rated current (A) Rated voltage (V) Rated power (W) Breaking capacity (kA)
home and abroad
4 AC500/AC690/DC250 1.5 120/50/100

6 AC500/AC690/DC250 1.6 120/50/100
10 AC500/AC690/DC250 1.7 120/50/100
16 AC500/AC690/DC250 2.0 120/50/100
20 AC500/AC690/DC250 2.5 120/50/100
25 AC500/AC690/DC250 3.1 120/50/100
32 AC500/AC690/DC250 3.5 120/50/100
RT36-00 RT16-00(NT00)
35 AC500/AC690/DC250 3.8 120/50/100
40 AC500/AC690/DC250 4.0 120/50/100
50 AC500/AC690/DC250 5.3 120/50/100
63 AC500/AC690/DC250 6.1 120/50/100
80 AC500/AC690/DC250 6.9 120/50/100
100 AC500/AC690/DC250 10.0 120/50/100
125 AC500/AC690/DC250 9.6 120/50/100
160 AC500/AC690/DC250 12.0 120/50/100
4 AC500/AC690 1.7 120/50
6 AC500/AC690 2.0 120/50
10 AC500/AC690 1.8 120/50
16 AC500/AC690 2.5 120/50
20 AC500/AC690 3.0 120/50
25 AC500/AC690 3.5 120/50
32 AC500/AC690 4.05 120/50
35 AC500/AC690 4.0 120/50
RT36-0 RT16-0(NT0)
40 AC500/AC690 5.1 120/50
50 AC500/AC690 7.25 120/50
63 AC500/AC690 8.1 120/50
80 AC500/AC690 10.26 120/50
100 AC500/AC690 12.58 120/50
125 AC500/AC690 15.62 120/50
160 AC500/AC690 16.0 120/50
80 AC500/AC690/DC440 8.35 120/50/100
100 AC500/AC690/DC440 12.05 120/50/100
125 AC500/AC690/DC440 13.46 120/50/100
RT36-1 RT16-1(NT1) 160 AC500/AC690/DC440 16.53 120/50/100
200 AC500/AC690/DC440 20.8 120/50/100
224 AC500/AC690/DC440 22.69 120/50/100
250 AC500/AC690/DC440 23.0 120/50/100
125 AC500/AC690/DC440 21.7 120/50/100
160 AC500/AC690/DC440 22.7 120/50/100
200 AC500/AC690/DC440 26.8 120/50/100
224 AC500/AC690/DC440 28.9 120/50/100
RT36-2 RT16-2(NT2) 250 AC500/AC690/DC440 28.9 120/50/100
300 AC500/AC690/DC440 32.0 120/50/100
315 AC500/AC690/DC440 32.45 120/50/100
355 AC500/AC690/DC440 33.66 120/50/100
400 AC500/AC690/DC440 34.0 120/50/100
315 AC500/AC690/DC440 34.45 120/50/100
355 AC500/AC690/DC440 35.96 120/50/100
400 AC500/AC690/DC440 38.09 120/50/100
RT36-3 RT16-3(NT3)
425 AC500/AC690/DC440 40.20 120/50/100
500 AC500/AC690/DC440 45.23 120/50/100
630 AC500/AC690/DC440 48.0 120/50/100
800 AC500 75.08 120
RT36-4 RT16-4(NT4) 1000 AC500 90.0 120
1250 AC500 110 120
5.1 Fuse link size

RT36
L4
L3
L6
L5 L2
L1
RT36
Size RT36-00 RT36-0 RT36-1 RT36-2 RT36-3 RT36-4
L1 78.5±1.5 125±2.5 135±2.5 150±2.5 150±2.5 200±3.0
L2 30max 31max 49max 60max 69max 90max
+1.5
L4 49±1.5 68-3.0 68±2.5 68±2.5 68±2.5 90±3.0
L5 150±2.0
L6 15±0.5
Size RT36-00 RT36-0 RT36-1 RT36-2 RT36-3 RT36-4

L2 99±1.5 152±1.5 175±1.5 200±1.5 210±1.5 258±1.5
L4 24±1.5 35±1.5 35±1.5 35±1.5 35±1.5 40±1.5
L5 25±0.7 25±0.7 25±0.7 25±0.7 25±0.7 30±0.7
L6 30±0.7 30±0.7 30±0.7 45±0.7
L7 8.3±0.3 7.5±0.5 10.5±0.5 10.5±0.5 10.5±0.5 14±0.5
S M8 M8 M10 M10 M12 M16
K
5.2 Fuse base size
L3
L4
L2
L1
2XΦL7
L8
L6
L5
RT36-00-3P
101max 85max
70±0.43
8.5±0.5
132max
±
12.2±0.5
6.1 It needs to notify the following when ordering

6.1.1 Fuse link shall be marked with product model, rated current and quantity
6.1.2 Pedestal shall be marked with type, specification, pedestal mark and quantity.
6.2 Ordering example

For example: RT36-00/100A, 100 fuse links represent 100 fuse links with product model of RT36-00 and rated current of 100
RT36-00 100 pedestals represent 100 pedestals with product model of RT36-00.
RT36
Knife Contact Fuse Protector
Protection Characteristic Curve
4
10
4
2
3
10
t(s)
t(s)
4
2
2
10
4
2
1
10
4 4 10 20 32 50 80 125 200 315 500 800 1250
20
10
4
2
-1
10
4
2
-2
10
4 1 2 3 4 5
2 345 10 2 3 4 5 10 2 3 45 10 2 3 45 10 2 3 4 5 10
Expected current (effective value) IP (kA) Expected current (effective value) IP (kA)
1250A
100 1000A
80 800A
60 630A
50 500A
400A
40 315A
30 250A
Cut-off current peak ID (kA)
200A
20 160A
125A
100A
80A
10 63A
8 50A
7 40A
32A
5 25A
4 20A
16A
3 10A
2 6A
4A
1 2A
0.8
0.7
0.5
0.3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 20 30 40 60 80 100

(Symmetric effective value)
K
P-029 Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals Terminal Blocks
SAK Terminal Blocks
1. General
SAK series is applicable to power and control circuits as terminal

connection with rated voltage not more than 800V and rated
cross-sectional area of 2.5~70mm2.
Standard: GB/T 14048.7 IEC 60947-7-1
SAK-2.5 SAK-20RD SAK-4 SAK-6
SAK-10 SAK-16 SAK-35 SAK-70

Terminal Blocks Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals P-030
C
H
Note: boundary dimension is the same with JXB series of terminal blocks.
NO. Product name Specification Rated connectivity (mm2)

1 Terminal block SAK-2.5 1~2.5
2 Terminal block SAK-4 1.5~4
3 Terminal block SAK-6 2.5~6
4 Terminal block SAK-10 4~10
8 Fuse terminal SAK-20RD 2.5~4
9 Fasteners EW-35
10 Marked block SAK-B Thick9.4
11 Baffle plate AP-(4~10) Thick1.7
12 Baffle plate AP-2.5 Thick1.7
13 Baffle plate AP-16 Thick1.8
14 Baffle plate AP-35 Thick1.9
15 Baffle plate AP-70 Thick2
16 Central shorted pieces 2.5, 4, 6, 10, 16, 35, 70
17 marked number DEK 5(1……10)
3.1 When ordering, you shall indicate product type, wiring area or current, category and quantity;
3.2 Conventional terminal block consists of 10 pieces to a line.
3.3 Other special requirements shall be indicated.
3.4 Ordering example: SAK-2.5/10 5 pieces

Mean: Order 5 pieces of terminal blocks (product type: SAK, wiring area: 2.5 mm2 and category: general type)
K
JXB Terminal Blocks
1. General
JXB series is applicable to power and control circuits as terminal

connection with rated voltage not more than 800V and rated
cross-sectional area of 2.5~70mm2.
Standard: GB/T 14048.7 IEC 60947-7-1
JXB-2.5 JXB-20RD JXB-4 JXB-4S
JXB-6 JXB-10 JXB-16 JXB-35
JXB-70
C
H
Boundary dimension(mm)
NO. Product type Type of mounting rail
B C H
1 JXB-2.5 42 6.1 40 TH35/G32
2 JXB-4 42 6.6 45.8 TH35/G32
3 JXB-4S 56 6.3 56 TH35/G32
4 JXB-20RD 59.5 8 41.5 TH35/G32
5 JXB-6 42 8 45.8 TH35/G32
6 JXB-10 42 10.1 45.8 TH35/G32
7 JXB-16 52 12.1 51.7 TH35/G32
8 JXB-35 59 18.1 62.5 TH35/G32
9 JXB-70 76.5 22.1 79 TH35/G32
10 EW35(GD35, fasteners) 46 8.5 31
3.1 When ordering, you shall indicate product type, wiring area
or current, category and quantity;
3.4 Ordering example: JXB-2.5/10 5 pieces

Mean: Order 5 pieces of terminal blocks (product type: JXB,
wiring area: 2.5 mm2 and category: general type).
K
JCUK Terminal Blocks
1. General
JCUK series is applicable to circuit as wire connection with rated

voltage not more than 1000V and rated cross-sectional area of
150mm2.
Standard: GB/T 14048.7 IEC 60947-7-1.
JCUK-2.5N JCUK-35N JCUK-50H JCUK-150H
JCUK-95H JCUK-5N JCUK-6N JCUK-10RD
JCUK-3N JCUK/DK4 JCUK-5RD JCUK/K5
JCUK-5JD JCUK-10JD JCUK-16JD JCUK-35JD
JCUK/S JCUK-10N JCUK-16N


H
C
B
Boundary dimension(mm) Type of

NO. Product type Remark
B C H mounting rail
1 JCUK-2.5N 43 6.2 41 TH35/G32

2 JCUK-3N 43 5.2 46 TH35/G32
3 JCUK-5N 43 6.3 46 TH35/G32
4 JCUK-6N 43 8.2 46.5 TH35/G32
5 JCUK-10N 43 10.2 46.5 TH35/G32
6 JCUK-16N 43.5 12.2 51.5 TH35/G32
7 JCUK-35N 51 15.5 61.5 TH35/G32
8 JCUK-50H 76.5 20.5 76.5 TH35/G32
9 JCUK-95H 89 25.5 90.5 TH35/G32
10 JCUK-150H 106 31.3 112.5 TH35/G32
11 JCUK/S 73 8.3 51 TH35/G32
12 JCUK/K5 57 8.7 61.5 TH35/G32
13 JCUK/DK4 64 6.2 46.5 TH35/G32
14 JCUK-5JD 43 6.5 45.5 TH35/G32
15 JCUK-10JD 43 10.5 45.5 TH35/G32
16 JCUK-16JD 43 12.4 52.5 TH35/G32
17 JCUK-35JD 51 15.4 61.5 TH35/G32
18 JCUK-5RD 73 8.5 57 TH35/G32 Size of fuse link 5X25,rated current 6.3A
19 JCUK-10RD 63 12.5 56.5 TH35/G32 Size of fuse link 5X20,rated current 10A
20 E/UK(fastener) TH35/G32
21 JCUK-BJ(marked number) 1~10
22 D/UK4/10(3N-16N baffle plate, JUCK-2.5N baffle plate)
3.1 When ordering, you shall indicate product type, wiring area or current, category, and quantity;
3.4 Ordering example: JCUK-2.5N/10 5 pieces

2
Mean: Product number: JCUK, wiring area: 2.5mm , category: general type and total quantity: 5
K
TB Terminal Blocks
1. General
TB series is applicable to circuit with alternating current of 50Hz

(60Hz), rated voltage not more than 600V and rated current not
more than 100A for connection of wire.
Standard: GB/T 14048.7
TB-6003 TB-6004
TB-10003 TB-10004
TB-1503 TB-1504 TB-1506 TB-2503
TB-2504 TB-2506 TB-4503 TB-4504
TB-4505 TB-4506
TB-1510
φG
φF
D
L1 E
L
Product Group Boundary dimension(mm) connecting

No. Rated Current
type count L L1 D E F G screw
1 TB-1503 15A 3 45.5 35 22.2 18 4.2 7 M3

2 TB-1504 15A 4 54.3 44 22.2 18 4.2 7 M3
3 TB-1506 15A 6 72.5 62 22.2 18 4.2 7 M3
4 TB-1512 15A 12 126.2 115 22.2 18 4.2 7 M3
5 TB-1510 15A 10 107.5 97 22.5 18 4.2 7 M3
6 TB-2503 25A 3 55.5 44.6 30.5 20 4.2 7 M4
7 TB-2504 25A 4 67.5 56.5 30.5 20 4.2 7 M4
8 TB-2506 25A 6 92 81 30.5 20 4.2 7 M4
9 TB-2512 25A 12 163.8 152.6 30.5 20 4.2 7 M4
10 TB-4503 45A 3 70.5 59.2 38 24 5 7.2 M5
11 TB-4504 45A 4 86 75.6 38 24 5 7.2 M5
12 TB-4505 45A 5 103 92.5 38 24 5 7.2 M5
13 TB-4506 45A 6 119.5 109 38 24 5 7.2 M5
14 TB-4512 45A 12 220.5 209.5 38 24 5 7.2 M5
15 TB-6003 60A 3 75 63 38 30.5 5 7.2 M6
16 TB-6004 60A 4 93 81 38 30.5 5 7.2 M6
17 TB-10003 100A 3 86.5 75 43.5 34.5 5 7.2 M6
18 TB-10004 100A 4 108.5 97 43.5 34.5 5 7.2 M6
3.1 Pay attention to type, connection area or current, classification and quantity of products when ordering.
3.2 Regular terminal block shall be formed with sole block.
3.3 Other special requirements shall be noted.
3.4 Ordering example: TB-10003 5

Means ordering model is TB, rated current is 100A, and has 3 groups and quantity is 5.
K
TC Terminal Blocks
1. General
TC series is applicable to circuit with alternating current of 50Hz

(60Hz), rated voltage not more than 600V and rated current not
more than 600A for connection of wire.
Standard: GB/T 14048.7 IEC 60947-7-1.
TC-1003 TC-1503 TC-1504
TC-6003 TC-2003 TC-3003
TC-3004 TC-4004

Boundary and installed dimension of TC series with three groups Boundary and installed dimension of TC series with four groups
ΦG
ΦG
ΦF
ΦF
D
D
L1 L1 L1
E E
L L
Product Group Boundary dimension(mm) connecting

No. Rated Current
type count L L1 D E F G screw
1 TC-603 60A 3 86 28.5 43 38 5.2 9.6 M6

2 TC-604 60A 4 114.5 28.5 43 38 5.2 9.6 M6
3 TC-1003 100A 3 103 34 55 42 5.2 9.6 M6
4 TC-1004 100A 4 136 34 55 42 5.2 9.6 M6
5 TC-1503 150A 3 115.3 38.5 66 46 6.3 11 M8
6 TC-1504 150A 4 153.5 38.5 66 46 6.3 11 M8
7 TC-2003 200A 3 132 44 72 51 7.9 11.2 M8
8 TC-2004 200A 4 176.5 44 72 51 7.9 11.2 M8
9 TC-3003 300A 3 165.5 55 90 58 7.9 11.2 M10
10 TC-3004 300A 4 219.5 55 90 58 7.9 11.2 M10
11 TC-4003 400A 3 165.5 55 90 60 7.9 11.2 M10
12 TC-4004 400A 4 219.5 55 90 60 7.9 11.2 M10
13 TC-6003 600A 3 206.5 68.5 100.5 80 8.5 12 M12
14 TC-6004 600A 4 275.5 68.5 100.5 80 8.5 12 M12
3.1 Pay attention to type, connection area or current, classification and quantity of products when ordering.
3.2 Regular terminal block shall be formed with sole block.
3.3 Other special requirements shall be noted.
3.4 Ordering example: TC-603 5

Means ordering model is TC, rated current is 60A, and has 3 groups and quantity is 5.
K
TH35-7.5(C45) Rail
Change-over Switch Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals P-040
LW32
Universal Change-over Switch
1. General
Universal change-over switch of LW32 series is mainly
applicable to circuit with alternating current of
50Hz~60Hz, rated operational voltage not more than
380V and DC voltage not more than 220V for remote
control or transformation of power distribution
equipment, it can also used as change-over switch of
various electrical measuring meter and servo moto.
Standard: GB/T 14048.5 IEC 60947-5-1.
2. Type designation
2.1 Type of master control
LW 32- / /
Pitch number of contact system
No. of wiring diagram
Characteristics code (see Table 3)
Agreed thermal current(20A)
Design sequence No.
Universal change-over switch
2.2 Change-over switch for direct control motor

LW 32- □/□ □/□
Pitch number of contact system
Application code (see Table 1)
Rated power of controlled three-phase AC motor
Agreed thermal current(20A)
Design sequence No.
Universal change-over switch
K
P-041 Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals Change-over Switch
2.3 Technical Parameters

Rated operating voltage: AC380V, DC220V
Rated operating current: AC-15:380V, 2.6A
DC-13:220V,0.27A
Conventional heating current: 20A
Rated insulation voltage: 550V
Table 1
Use code Use
Q Direct starting
N Reversible conversion
S Two-speed motor shifting
SN Two-speed motor shifting, reversible
3. Others
3.1 Category
3.1.1 There are tow kinds, including
direct control of the motor and master control according to applications;
3.1.2 There are three types including location, self-rehabilitation and location self-rehabilitation according to operations;
3.1.3 For sessions of the contact system , locations are 1-12 section, self-rehabilitation are 1-3 section and direct control of motors
are 1-6 section;
3.1.4 Three types according to panel shape and size (see Table 2).
Table 2
Large square panel Small rectangular panel Small square panel
Length Width Length Width Length Width
64 64 60 48 48 48
3.2 Combination classification based on operation modes and positions of actuator (see Table 4)
Table 3
Use category Feature code Self-rehabilitation type
A 0° 30° 0° 45°
Actuator position
B 30° 0° 30° 45° 0° 45°
C 0° 90° 0° 30° 0° 45° 0°
D 90° 0° 90° 30° 0° 30° 45° 0° 45° 60° 0° 60°
E 90° 0° 90° 180° 30° 0° 30° 60° 45° 0° 45° 90° 60° 30° 30° 60°
F 60° 30° 0° 30° 60° 90° 45° 0° 45° 90° 150° 90° 30° 30° 90° 150°
G 60° 30° 0° 30° 60° 90° 90° 45° 0° 45° 90° 135° 90° 30° 30° 90° 150°
H 90° 60° 30° 0° 30° 60° 90° 135° 90° 45° 0° 45° 90° 135°
Location type
I 90° 60° 30° 0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 135° 90° 45° 0° 45° 90° 135° 180°
J 120° 90° 60° 30° 0° 30° 60° 90° 120°
K 120° 90° 60° 30° 0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150°
L 150° 120° 90° 60° 30° 0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150°
M 150° 120° 90° 60° 30° 0° 30° 60° 90° 120° 150° 180°
N 45° 45° 30° 30°
30° 0° 60° 135° 90° 0° 45°
Location Z
90° 0° 45°
3.3 Handle connections are divided into the following two types.
R Type I Type
Wiring diagram on commonly used control switch for voltage and current measurement converter box of LW32 series
Line voltage phase-change switch
UAB UBC UCA

LW32-20/YH4/2 90° 0° 90°
1-2 1-2 × ×
B
C 3-4 3-4 × ×
V
A 5-6 5-6 ×
7-8 ×
7-8
0 UAB UBC UCA

LW32-20/YH2/3 0° 90° 180° 270°
1-2 × ×
B 1-2 3-4
A 5-6 5-6 ×
V
7-8 7-8 ×
C 11-12 9-10
11-12 × ×
0 UAB UBC UCA

LW32-20/YH3/3 0° 90° 180° 270°
1-2 ×
A 1-2 ×
3-4
3-4
B 5-6 5-6 ×
V
7-8
7-8 ×
C 9-10
11-12 9-10 ×
11-12 ×
K
Phase-change switch for three-phase line voltage and three-phase voltage
UCA UBC UAB 0 UAN UBN UCN

LW32-20/YH5/4 135° 90° 45° 0° 45° 90° 135°
1-2 × ×
C 1-2 3-4 × ×
B 3-4 5-6 ×
5-6
V
7-8 ×
7-8
9-10 9-10 × ×
A 11-12
11-12 × ×
N 13-14
15-16 13-14 ×
15-16 ×
UCA UBC UAB 0 UAN UBN UCN

LW32-20/YH5/3 135° 90° 45° 0° 45° 90° 135°
C 1-2 1-2 × ×
3-4 3-4 ×
B 5-6 5-6 ×
V
7-8 7-8 × ×
A 9-10 9-10 × × ×
N 11-12 11-12 × × ×
Change-over switch for current measurement
0 IA IB IC
LW32-20/LH3/4 0° 90° 180° 270°
1-2 × × ×
BAC
3-4
1-2
5-6 × × ×
5-6 7-8 × × ×
7-8
9-10 9-10 ×
A 11-12
13-14
15-16 13-14 ×
15-16 ×
Direct start-up and breaking during operation
0 1
LW32-20/Q1/2 0° 45°
Panel 1-2
1-2 ×
A
3-4 3-4 ×
B A
C 5-6 5-6 ×
7-8 7-8
Forward and reverse direct start-up, breaking during operation
1 0 2
LW32-20/N1/3 45° 0° 45°
Panel C 1-2 1-2 ×

3-4 3-4 ×
5-6
M 5-6 ×
A 7-8
7-8 ×
B 9-10
11-12 9-10 × ×
11-12 × ×
Variable-speed switch of two-speed motor
1 0 2
LW32-20/S1/4 45° 0° 45°
1-2 1-2 ×
A 3-4 ×
3-4
5-6 5-6 ×
B 7-8
7-8 ×
9-10 M
9-10 ×
11-12
11-12 ×
13-14
C 13-14 ×
15-16
15-16 ×
4-Φ4.5 4-Φ4.5
When using small panel, Φ8 Φ8

L=22+9.6n a=48×48
36
Φ43
48
When using large panel,

a
L=25+9.6n a=64×64
36
L Thickness of mounting plate: 1~5 48
Installation dimension Installation dimension

of large panel of small panel
K
When ordering, the user shall use complete model of switch.

For example: Order universal change-over switch LW32, type
of wiring diagram is 100 sets. Order code: LW32-20/D303/2
100 sets.
Wiring diagram No. D303

Conversion angle 45° 0° 45°
1-2 × ×
3-4 ×
5-6 × ×
7-8 ×
Combination Switch Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals P-046
HZ10 Combination Switch

1.General
Hz10 series of combination switch is applicable to frequent
manual does not get through or circuit breaking, power or load
connection & conversion, circuit measurement and small
capacity motor control in circuit with AC voltage not more than
380V/50Hz~60Hz and DC voltage not more than 220V.
Standard: GB/T 14048.3 IEC 60947-3.
2. Type designation
HZ10- /
Number of poles
Code of enclosure type:

Without enclosure; no indication;
White plastic enclosure;
code: “M”
Code of application type
Design sequence No.
Combination switch
3. Technical data
AC-22A DC-21A AC-3

Type Ith (A) Ui (V)
Ue(V) Ie(A) Ue(V) Ie(A) Ue(V) Ie(A)
HZ10-10 10 10 10 380 3
HZ10-25 25 25 25 380 6.3
HZ10-60 60 380 380 60 220 60
HZ10-100 100 100 100
Note: Ie of a single-pole switch will reduce to 60% of the above data when AC voltage is 380V.
4. Others
4.1 Category
4.1.1 According to applications: single-power switch; two-power
supply or two-circuit reversing switch (code: P);
Three-circuit reversing switch (code: S);
Four-circuit reversing switch (code: G);
4.1.2 According to installation type: front connection type and rear connection type;
4.1.3. According to poles: monopolar, bipolar , tripolar , quadrupole;
4.1.4 According to sessions: One-section, two-section, three-section, four-section, five-section and six-section
Note: Only 3-pole or less, can be made for three-circuit reversing

switch and four-circuit reversing switch.
K
P-047 Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals Combination Switch
Number of poles Single-power switch Dual power switch (P) Three-circuit change-over switch (S) Four-circuit change-over switch (G)
1L1
1L1
1L1
2L1
Monopolar C1 L1 C1 C1 2L1 C1
2L1 3L1
3L1
4L1
1L2
1L2
1L2
2L2
Bipolar C2 L2 C2 C2 2L2 C2
2L2 3L2
3L2
4L2
1L3
1L3
1L3
2L3
Tripolar C3 L3 C3 C3 2L3 C3
2L3 3L3
3L3
4L3
1L4
1L4
1L4
2L4
Quadrupole C4 L4 C4 C4 2L4 C4
2L4 3L4
3L4
4L4

See Fig.1 and Fig.4 for outline and installation dimension of HZ10
Fig.1 Front-plate installation of the whole series Fig.2 Rear-plate installation of 10A, 25A, 40A
Φ Φ
H
B1 A2
A1 B2
C
S
C
S
Combination Switch Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals P-048
Fig.3 Rear-plate installation type during 60A, 100A Fig.4 Enclosure diagram and mounting hole size
∅
H
K
A2
B2
E
C
F
s
List of outline and installation dimension of unprotected enclosure switch:
Ith Boundary dimension

Remark
(A) A1 A2 H Φ C B1 B2 S J K
10 65.5 87 60+6n 10 60.3 55 74 5 - 29+6n
25 100.7 117 78+10n 11.5 94.7 90 100 6 - 38+10n “n” refers pole number/ welding machine switch n=6
60 143 155 102+15n 13 133 128 138.5 7 13 47+15n “G.S” refers pole number/welding machine switch n=2n”
100 143 155 104+17n 13 133 128 138.5 7 13 49+17n
Boundary dimension and hole size of protective enclosure switch:
Ith Maximum boundary dimension Installation dimension

Enclosure type Wiring channel
(A) Length Width Height E F G
Two-way 120 102 88
10 60 80 Φ8
Four-way 137 102 95
Two-way 168 142 131
White enclosure 25 100 100 Φ7
Four-way 190 142 135
Two-way 220 195 169
60(100) 126 126 Φ 10
Four-way 250 195 169
When ordering, the user shall use complete model of switch.

For example: Order combination switch HZ10, two-circuit reversing switch, bipolar,
conventional thermal current: 25A, 100 sets Order code: HZ10-25P/2 100 sets.
K
P-049 Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals Travel Switch
2. Type designation
Operation modes (see Table 2)
Design sequence No.
Travel switch
Improved code
3. Technical data
Contact type
NO NO
NC NC
YBLX-ME
Travel Switch
Table 1
Ingress protection IP62
1. General Operation frequency 20 t/min
YBLX-ME series travel switches are suitable for control circuit Ambient temperature -5℃~+40℃
Relative humidity ≤95%
or auxiliary circuit of AC 50Hz (or 60Hz), voltage 380V and DC
AC-15 380V; DC-13 220V
220V, with applications including travel control of movement Rated voltage
AC-15 0.8A; DC-13 0.16A
mechanism, switching of movement direction or speed, Rated control current
Installation category Ⅱ
automatic control of machine tool, and limit action and travel
Pollution degree class3
or program control of movement mechanism.
Insulation voltage Ui 415V
Compliance standards: GB/T14048.5, IEC60947-5-1. Rated impulse withstand
2.5KV
voltage Uimp
Table 2
Type (use the recommended type) Operating modes Alternative models (stop service)
YBLX-ME/8104 Roller rotating arm YBLX-AZ/8104 YBLX-TZ/8104
YBLX-ME/8107 Adjustable rotating rod YBLX-AZ/8107 YBLX-TZ/8107
YBLX-ME/8108 Adjustable roller rotating rod YBLX-AZ/8108 YBLX-TZ/8108
YBLX-ME/8111 Direct pressure plunger type YBLX-AZ/8111 YBLX-TZ/8111
YBLX-ME/8112 Direct pressure plunger horizontal roller YBLX-AZ/8112 YBLX-TZ/8112
YBLX-ME/8122 Direct pressure plunger vertical roller YBLX-AZ/8122 YBLX-TZ/8122
YBLX-ME/8166 Universal type I YBLX-AZ/8166 YBLX-TZ/8166
YBLX-ME/8169 Universal type II YBLX-AZ/8169 YBLX-TZ/8169
YBLX-AZ/8101 YBLX-TZ/8101
YBLX-ME/8101 Universal type III YBLX-ME/9101
YBLX-AZ/9101 YBLX-TZ/8101
Travel Switch Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals P-050
Table 3
Maximum operating Maximum operating Minimum overtravel Total travel

Type Operating modes
force ( max OF) range ( max PT) (min OT) (TT)
YBLX-ME/8104 Roller rotating arm 12N 35° 70° 105°

YBLX-ME/8107 Adjustable rotating rod 12N 35° 70° 105°
YBLX-ME/8108 Adjustable roller rotating rod 12N 35° 70° 105°
YBLX-ME/8111 Direct pressure plunger type 15N 5mm 2mm 7mm
YBLX-ME/8112 Direct pressure plunger horizontal roller 20N 5mm 2mm 7mm
YBLX-ME/8122 Direct pressure plunger vertical roller 20N 5mm 2mm 7mm
YBLX-ME/8166 Universal type I 12N 35° －－
YBLX-ME/8169 Universal type I 12N 35° －－
YBLX-ME/8101 Universal type IIII 12N 35° －－

YBLX-ME/8104 YBLX-ME/8108
Φ18 45max Φ18

50max
R3
R3
0
0~
2xM5
70
2xM5
2XΦ4.1
2xΦ4.1
136max
180max
9min
9min
56±0.3
56±0.3
2xM5
2xM5
21±0.2 28max
28max 21±0.2
28.5max 28.5max
48max
2xM5
2xΦ4.1
2xM5
2xΦ4.1
9min
104max
222max
56±0.3
9min
56±0.3
2xM5
2xM5
21±0.2 28max
21±0.2 28max
28.5max 28.5max
K
Φ13
2xM5
2xΦ4.1
2xM5
185max
2XΦ4.1
120max
9min
56±0.3
9min
56±0.3
2xM5
2xM5
21±0.2 28max
28.5max 21±0.2 28max

28.5max
2xM5
2xM5
2XΦ4.1 2XΦ4.1
184max
185max
9min 9min
56±0.3
56±0.3
2xM5
2xM5
21±0.2 28max 21±0.2 28max
28.5max 28.5max
YBLX-ME/8122
Φ13
2xM5
2XΦ4.1
120max
9min
56±0.3
2xM5
21±0.2 28max
28.5max
When ordering, the user shall specify the switch type, name and quantity.
For example: YBLX-ME/8169 travel switch 100 pieces
User note:
YBLX-ME/8104.8107.8108 this three kinds of specifications products.
Their operating mechanism is torsion spring energy storage.
This kind of product does not fit to the rotating arm stay for a long time in working condition.
Beware of torsion spring outlet fatigue fracture and other undesirable phenomena.
The three specifications of YBLX-ME/8111, 8112, and 8122 are direct-operated products. When the customer debugs
the equipment, the total travel for installation of the product is ≤7 mm to avoid damage to the built-in switch core by over-travel use.
YBLX-WL
Travel Switch
1.General
YBLX-WL series travel switches are suitable for control circuit or
auxiliary circuit of AC 50Hz (or 60Hz), voltage 380V and DC 220V,
with applications including travel control of movement
mechanism, switching of movement direction or speed,
automatic control of machine tool, and limit action and travel or
program control of movement mechanism.
Compliance standards: GB/T14048.5, IEC60947-5-1.
2. Type designation
Design sequence No.,S2 indicate pin

type of spring rotating rod (NJ)
Operation modes (see Table 1)
Design sequence No.
Travel switch
Improved code
Table 1
Type (use the
Operating modes Alternative models (stop service)
recommended type)
YBLX-WL/CA2 Single-roller rotating arm YBLX-WL/01CA2 YBLX-WL/ACA2、YBLX-WL/CA12/2 TZ-5104

YBLX-WL/CA12 Adjustable single-roller rotating arm YBLX-WL/01CA12 YBLX-WL/ACA12 TZ-5108
YBLX-WL/D Pressure-plunger type YBLX-WL/01D YBLX-WL/AD TZ-5101
YBLX-WL/D2 Plunger-roller type YBLX-WL/01D2 YBLX-WL/AD2 TZ-5102
YBLX-WL/NJ Universal type I YBLX-WL/01NJ YBLX-WL/ANJ TZ-5106
YBLX-WL/NJ/S2 Universal type II YBLX-WL/01NJ/S2 YBLX-WL/ANJ/S2 TZ-5169
YBLX-WL/CL Adjustable straight-shaft type YBLX-WL/01CL YBLX-WL/ACL TZ-5107
3. Technical data
Table 2
Operation frequency 20t/min

Rated voltage AC-15 380V; DC-13 220V
Rated control current AC-15 0.79A; DC-13 0.15A
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 4KV
K
Contact type
4(NO) 3(NO)
1(NC) 2(NC)
Table 1
Operating characteristic
Operating force Operation range Overtravel
Type
YBLX-WL/CL ≤20N ≤45° ≥15°

YBLX-WL/CA2 ≤20N ≤45° ≥15°
YBLX-WL/CA12 ≤20N ≤45° ≥15°
YBLX-WL/D ≤30N ≤7.5mm ≥2mm
YBLX-WL/D2 ≤30N ≤7.5mm ≥2mm
YBLX-WL/NJ ≤16N ≤45° -
YBLX-WL/NJ/S2 ≤16N ≤45° -

YBLX-WL/CA2 YBLX-WL/CA12
70max
Φ18
Φ18
4xM6
4xM6
4×Φ5 4xΦ5
130max
190max
9min 9min
58.7±0.5
30.2±0.5 M20X1.5
41max
YBLX-WL/D2 YBLX-WL/D
42max
Φ10 42max
Φ16
4xM6
4xM6
4XΦ5
4XΦ5
115max
9min
9min
102max
58.7±0.5
58.7±0.5
30.2±0.5 M20X1.5
30.2±0.5 M20X1.5
41max
41max
YBLX-WL/NJ YBLX-WL/NJ/S2
42max 42max
225max
4xM6
215max
4xΦ5
4xM6
4xΦ5
9min
58.7±0.5
9min
58.7±0.5
30.2±0.5 M20X1.5
30.2±0.5 41max
M20X1.5
41max
YBLX-WL/CL
56max
4xM6
220max
4xΦ5
9min
58.7±0.5
30.2±0.5 M20X1.5
41max
K
When ordering, the user shall specify the switch type, name and quantity.
For example: YBLX-WL/CA12 100 pieces
User note:
YBLX-WL/CA2, YBLX-WL/CA12, YBLX-WL/CL restricted by operating mechanism.
It can not apply to the arm action is greater than 90 degree condition.
Beware of the action angle is too large lead to turn arm rotation and other undesirable phenomena.
YBLX-CK Travel Switch
1.General
YBLX-CK series travel switches are suitable for control circuit or

Rated working voltage AC-15 380V ; DC-13 220V
Rated control current AC-15 0.8A ; DC-13 0.16A
Contact type
13 11 12 14
NO NC NC NO
2. Technical data
Mechanical equipment Food, agriculture,

Packing Machine Assembling Motor handling
Type for buildings and public textiles, timber, lumber,
machinery tool machine machinery
utilities industries, machinery
YBLX-CK/J Not commonly used Not commonly used Not commonly used Can be used The most commonly used The most commonly used
YBLX-CK/S Not commonly used The most commonly used The most commonly used Not commonly used Not commonly used Not commonly used
YBLX-CK/M The most commonly used Can be used The most commonly used Can be used Can be used The most commonly used
YBLX-CK/P The most commonly used The most commonly used The most commonly used Not commonly used The most commonly used Not commonly used
YBLX-CK/T The most commonly used The most commonly used The most commonly used Not commonly used The most commonly used Not commonly used
Direct-acting Direct-acting Direct-acting Adjustable roller Jib-type Universal

Type Direct-acting
steel roller plastic roller plastic roller rotating arm round rod type
YBLX-CK/J J161 J167 J10511 J10541 J10559

YBLX-CK/S S101 S102 S131, 139 S141 S159
YBLX-CK/M M110 M102 M121 M115
YBLX-CK/P P110 P102 P121 P118 P145 P155 P106 P108
YBLX-CK/T T110 T102 T121 T118 T106
K
YBLX-CK/M102 YBLX-CK/M141
41±0.5 52max
41±0.5
6±0.3
110max 6±0.3
108max
5±0.3
5±0.3
41±0.5
41±0.5
6±0.3
6±0.3
200max
108max
5±0.3
5±0.3
31max 65max 31max

65max
41±0.5 52max 41±0.5
6±0.3
6±0.3
120max
128max
5±0.3
5±0.3
31max 65max 31max

65max
YBLX-CK/J108 YBLX-CK/J161
7.1±0.3
7.1±0.3
120max
5.4±0.3
250max
5.4±0.3
60±0.5
60±0.5
2×Φ5±0.2
2×Φ5±0.2
30±0.5 30±0.5
65max
7.1±0.3
7.1±0.3
128max
5.4±0.3
60±0.5
135max
5.4±0.3
60±0.5
2XΦ5±0.2
2XΦ5±0.2
30±0.5 30±0.5
65max
65max
190max
7.1±0.3
7.1±0.3
300max
5.4±0.3
60±0.5
60±0.5
5.4±0.3
2XΦ5±0.2 2XΦ5±0.2
30±0.5 30±0.5
YBLX-CK/P102 YBLX-CK/P108
2x4±0.3 200max
2x4±0.3
95max
22±0.5
22±0.5
33max 33max
33max 33max
2x4±0.3
220max
2x4±0.3
22±0.5
86max
22±0.5
K
33max 33max
33max 33max
YBLX-CK/P118 YBLX-CK/M141
50max
2x4±0.3
2x4±0.3 120max
110max
22±0.5
22±0.5
33max 33max 33max
2X4±0.3
2X4±0.3
110max
98max
22±0.5
22±0.5
50max
2X4±0.3
250max
180max
2X4±0.3
22±0.5
22±0.5
33max 33max 48max
YBLX-CK/S101 YBLX-CK/S102
0.3
0.3
.5±
5.5±
7.6±0.3
Φ5
7.6±0.3
2× Φ
2X
110max
125max
5.2±0.3
60±0.5
5.2±0.3
60±0.5
30±0.5 30±0.5
42max 38max
42max 38max
70max
0.3
5.5±
.3
230max
0
.5±
7.5±0.3
2XΦ
7.5±0.3
Φ5
2X
130max
5.2±0.3
60±0.5
5.2±0.3
60±0.5
30±0.5 38max
42max 30±0.5
42max
68max
.5±0.3
0.3
5.5±
2XΦ5
7.5±0.3
2XΦ
280max
180max
7.5±0.3
60±0.5
60±0.5
5.2±0.3
5.2±0.3
30±0.5
30±0.5
42max
42max 66max
YBLX-CK/T102 YBLX-CK/T106
78max
190max
22±0.5
22±0.5
42±0.5
42±0.5
62max 32max
62max 32max
YBLX-CK/T110 YBLX-CK/T118
52max
88max
22±0.5
42±0.5 22±0.5
42±0.5
62max 32max
62max 32max
K
P-061 Travel Switch Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals
YBLX-CK/T121
88max
22±0.5
42±0.5
62max 32max
4. Ordering instructions:
The user must specify the model, name and quantity of the switch when ordering.
Eg: 100 YBLX-CK/J10541 Limit switch.
User note:
YBLX-CK/M115, YBLX-CK/J10541, YBLX-CK/P118, YBLX-CK/P145,YBLX-CK/P155,YBLX-CK/S131,YBLX-CK/S141,
YBLX-CK/S159,YBLX-CK/T118 restricted by operating mechanism. It can not apply to the arm action is greater
than 90 degree condition. Beware of the action angle is too large lead to turn arm rotation and other undesirable phenomena.
YBLX-P1 Travel Switch

1. General
YBLX-P1 series travel switches are suitable for control circuit or
2. Type designation
YB LX -P 1 /
Operating mode (see Table 2)
Element and protection type,

significance of letter code (see Table 1)
Design sequence No.
Contact type
2P 3P 4P
Improved code
Table 1
13 21 22 14
100 Bipolar protection travel switch (wide)
120 Bipolar protection travel switch (narrow)
303 Tripolar protection travel switch (wide)
13 21 22 14
404 Quadrupole protection travel switch (wide)
13 21 22 14
Table 2
Letter code Operation mode
1B Post type
1C Post type, with buffer
1D Roller post type
1E Post fork of rotary arm, with buffer
1F Angle lever, post fork of rotary arm
1G Post fork of rotary arm
1P Adjustable metal swing lever
1T Fork type, double wheel non-self-recovery
1U Adjustable post fork of rotary arm
K
3. Technical data
Table 3
Rated working voltage AC-15 380V ; DC-13 220V
Altitude ≤2000m
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 2.5KV
Operating characteristic
Operating force(max) Operating travel (max) Overtravel(min)
Type
YBLX-P1/100/1B 40N 6mm 1mm
YBLX-P1/100/1C 40N 6mm 1mm
YBLX-P1/100/1D 40N 6mm 1mm
YBLX-P1/100/1E 30N 6mm 1mm
YBLX-P1/100/1F 30N 6mm 1mm
YBLX-P1/100/1G 30N 45° 15°
YBLX-P1/100/1P 30N 45° 15°
YBLX-P1/100/1U 30N 45° 15°
YBLX-P1/100/1T 45N 80°

YBLX-P1/120/1F 30N 6mm
1mm
YBLX-P1/120/1G 30N 45° 15°
YBLX-P1/120/1P 30N 45° 15°
YBLX-P1/120/1U 30N 45° 15°
YBLX-P1/120/1T 45N 80°
YBLX-P1/303/1G 30N 45° 15°

YBLX-P1/303/1P 30N 45° 15°
YBLX-P1/303/1U 30N 45° 15°

YBLX-P1/404/1G 30N 45° 15°
YBLX-P1/404/1P 30N 45° 15°
YBLX-P1/404/1U 30N 45° 15°

YBLX-P1/120/1U YBLX-P1/120/1E
2XΦ5.5
160~242
125max
2XΦ5.5
60±0.5
60±0.5
2X5.5X7.5
2X5.5X7.5
30±0.5 65max
42max 30±0.5 42max
42max
YBLX-P1/120/1G YBLX-P1/100/1G
65max
40±0.5
65max
2XΦ5.5
132max
2X5.5X9
126max
60±0.5
2X5.5X7.5
30±0.5
42max
60max
YBLX-P1/100/1E YBLX-P1/120/1C
40±0.5
2X5.5X7.5
2X5.5X9
110max
118max
60±0.5
2XΦ5.5
42max 30±0.5
42max 42max
60max
K
YBLX-P1/120/1D YBLX-P1/120/1F
2X5.5X7.5
125max
120max
2XΦ5.5
60±0.5
60±0.5
2X5.5X7.5
2XΦ5.5
30±0.5 42max
42max 30±0.5
42max 42max
4.1 Protective enclosure
YBLX-P1/100 series YBLX-P1/120 series
16
6.5
16
6.5
2×Φ5.5
2×5.5×9
60
76.5
7.5
67.5
56 M20×1.5 40 2×5.5×7.5
30
M20×1.5 40
40
YBLX-P1/303 series YBLX-P1/404 series
42 2×5.5×9
40 16 40 16
6.5
6.5
12.5
4
6 7.5
7.5
2×5.5×9
91
110
127
M20×1.5
2×Φ5.5
56 M20×1.5 40
40 5
56 40
4.2 Type and data of driving head
Category B Category C
Φ10
Φ6
30.3
17.5
20
11.5
YBLX-P1/100/1B YBLX-P1/100/1C
Category D Category E
13 5 Φ22 9
27
47.5
43
35
18
19
YBLX-P1/100/1D YBLX-P1/100/1E
Category F Category G
44 9 56
Φ19 10 7
Φ22
.5
21
49
30
56
18
19 62.5
YBLX-P1/100/1F YBLX-P1/100/1G
Category T Category U
10
22
55.5
47.5 130.5
30 64.5 9
Φ19 7
142
30
52.5
36
63
YBLX-P1/100/1T YBLX-P1/100/1U
YBLX-P1/120/1T YBLX-P1/120/1U
YBLX-P1/303/1U
YBLX-P1/404/1U
Category P
Φ6
When ordering, the user shall indicate the product name, type
and quantity.
200
52.5 9
For example: YBLX-P1/120/1C Travel switch 100 pieces.
User note:YBLX-P1/120/1U(1P,1G),YBLX-P1/303/1U(1P,1G),YBLX-
YBLX-P1/100/1P
P1/404/1U(1P,1G) restricted by operating mechanism.
YBLX-P1/120/1P
YBLX-P1/303/1P
It can not apply to the arm action is greater than 90 degree
YBLX-P1/404/1P
condition. Beware of the action angle is too large lead to turn
K
arm rotation and other undesirable phenomena.
2. Type designation
YB LX-K 1 1
A pair of normally closed contacts
A pair of normally open contacts
“1” refers single roller

“2” refers two rollers
“3” refers plunger type
“4” refers roller plunger type
“5” refers Universal type
Design sequence No.
Fast
Travel switch
Improved code
Contact type
4(NO) 3(NO)
YBLX-K1 Travel Switch

1. General
1(NC) 2(NC)
YBLX-K1 series travel switches are suitable for control circuit or
3. Technical data
Table 1
Conventional thermal current 5A
Rated voltage AC-15 380V ; DC-13 220V
Operation frequency 20 t/min
Altitude ≤2000m
Table 2
Type
Operating YBLX-K1/111 YBLX-K1/211 YBLX-K1/311 YBLX-K1/411 YBLX-K1/511
characteristic
Maximum operating force (max OF) 15N 20N 20N 20N 15N
Maximum operating range ( max PT) 45° 70° 5mm 5mm 45°
Minimum overtravel (min OT) 15° 1mm 1mm

YBLX-K1/111 YBLX-K1/211
65max
65max 72
m
ax
2xM4 2xM4
140max
135max
65±0.5
65±0.5
2x Φ4.2
35±0.5 2x Φ4.2 35±0.5
44max 44max
YBLX-K1/311 YBLX-K1/411
2xM4
2xM4
100max
108max
65±0.5
65±0.5
2x Φ4.2
35±0.5 2xΦ4.2
41max 35±0.5
44max 41max 44max
YBLX-K1/511
210max
2xM4
65±0.5
2x Φ4.2
41max 35±0.5
44max
When ordering, the user shall indicate the product name, type and quantity.
For example: YBLX-K1/111 Travel switch 100 pieces.
User note: YBLX-K1/111 restricted by operating mechanism. It can not apply to the arm action is greater than 90 degree condition.
The four specifications of YBLX-K1/311, 411, 311M, and 411M are direct-operated products. When the customer debugs the
equipment, the total travel for installation of the product is ≤ 6 mm to avoid damage to the built-in switch core by over-travel
use.
K
2. Type designation
YB LX K 3/ /□
Operation modes （see Table1）
Type of protective enclosure（K、S、H）

Type of protective enclosure:
K: no protective enclosure, open type;
S: Vertical protective enclosure
with a cable entry at the bottom;
H: Horizontal protective enclosure with
a cable entry on the bottom and each side
Design code（20）
Design sequence No.
Fast
Travel switch
Improved code
Contact type
YBLX-K3 Travel Switch 4(NO) 3(NO)

4(NO) 3(NO)
1. General
(S) (H)
YBLX-K3 series travel switches are suitable for control circuit or
1(NC) 2(NC) 1(NC) 2(NC)
Table 1
Symbol Operation modes
Z Plunger type
L Roller plunger type
B Roller jib type
T Adjustable roller jib type
D Flexible rocker type
J Adjustable metal rocker type
H1 “cross” type, two wheels are in the same direction (upper left, upper right)
H2 “cross” type, left wheel is the front and the right wheel is on the back (upper left, lower right)
H3 “cross” type, left wheel is the front and the right wheel is on the back (lower left, upper right)
W Universal type
3. Technical data
Table 2
Rated voltage AC-15 380V ; DC-13 220V
Altitude ≤2000m
Table 3
S S
YBLX-K3/20 H /B YBLX-K3/20 H /H1
Type S
YBLX-K3/20 H /Z
S S S S
S
YBLX-K3/20 H /T YBLX-K3/20 /D YBLX-K3/20 H /H2 YBLX-K3/20 H /W
Operating H
YBLX-K3/20 H /L S S
characteristic YBLX-K3/20 H /J YBLX-K3/20 H /H3
Maximum operating force (max OF) 30N 20N 20N 30N 20N
Maximum operating range ( max PT) 7mm 45° 45° 80° 45°
Maximum operating force (max OF) 2.0mm 20° 20° -

YBLX-K3/20S/Z YBLX-K3/20S/B
70max
41.5
Φ18
2×5.5×7.5
32±0.5
54.5
2×Φ5.5
100max
150max
60±0.5
2×5.5×7.5
60±0.5
2×Φ5.5
30±0.5 M20×1.5 15.5
42max 42max
30±0.5 15.5 M20×1.5
42max
42max
K
YBLX-K3/20H/D YBLX-K3/20S/T
40±0.5 60max 70max

50
Φ18
113
2×5.5×7.5
200max
190max
2×5.5×7.5
60±0.5
2×Φ5.5
30±0.5 15.5 M20×1.5
62max 15.5
M20X1.5 44max 42max
42max
YBLX-K3/20S/W YBLX-K3/20S/H1, H2, H3
70max
Φ18
54.5
138max
2XΦ5.5
250max
2×5.5×7.5
60±0.5
60±0.5
2×Φ5.5
30±0.5 15.5 M20×1.5

15.5 30±0.5 42max
42max 42max
42max
When ordering, the user shall specify the product name, type and quantity.
For example: YBLX-K3/20S/T Travel switch 100 pieces
User note:
YBLX-K3/20S/B, YBLX-K3/20H/B, YBLX-K3/20S/T. YBLX-K3/20H/T restricted by operating mechanism.
It can not apply to the arm action is greater than 90 degree condition.
YBLX-10 Travel Switch

1. General
YBLX-10 series travel switches are suitable for electrical control
circuit of AC50Hz, Ue380V and DC220V, with applications such
as contact protection and travel control switch for controlling
cranes and metallurgical equipment.
2. Type designation
YB LX 10 -
Number control circuit（see Table2）
Actuating ways,digital code significance

shown in Table 1
Design sequence No.
Travel switch
3. Technical data Improved code
Table 2 Table 1
Conventional thermal current 10A Digital code Actuating ways
Nominal voltage AC-15 380V ; DC-13 220V 1 Single-roller lever operation arm
Nominal control current AC-15 0.79A ; DC-13 0.1A 2 Double-roller fork lever operation arm
Operation frequency 6t/min 3 Heavy-hammer type loading lever operation arm
Relative humidity ≤90%(20℃) Contact type
Altitude ≤2000m
Pollution degree class3 NONO
NCNC
Type Use
YBLX-10/11,12 Using for inertia stroke being very large slide works
YBLX-10/21,22 Using for inertia stroke being very large slide works

YBLX-10/11,YBLX-10/12
145max
135max
16±0.5
200max
168±1
10.8±0.5
5. Ordering information K
Please note the type of switch, name of switch, quantity of switch when users are ordering. For example,YBLX-10/21 travel 100
2. Type designation
YB LX-19/
Derived code:B rubber wheel
“one”can automatically reset “two”
can't automatically reset
“0”direct-acting
“1”Installed a roller on the transmission rod inside
“2” Installed a roller on the transmission rod outside
“3”Installed a roller on the transmission rod groove
Different inside or inside and outside
“0” no idler wheel

“1”single idler wheel
“2”Double idler wheels
Design sequence No.
Travel switch
Improved code
YBLX-19 Travel Switch
1. General
YBLX-19 series travel switches are suitable for control circuit

or auxiliary circuit of AC 50Hz (or 60Hz), voltage 380V and
4(NO) 1(NC) 2(NC) 3(NO)
DC 220V, with applications including travel control of
movement mechanism, switching of movement direction or
speed, automatic control of machine tool, and limit action
and travel or program control of movement mechanism.
3. Technical data
Table 1
level of protection IP52
Conventional thermal current 5A
Rated voltage AC 220V ; DC220V
Rated control current AC 0.79A ; DC0.1A
Frequency of operation 20t/min
Relative humidity ≤90%(20℃)
Altitude of sea level ≤2000m
Table 2
Type YBLX-19/111 YBLX-19/212

YBLX-19/001 YBLX-19/121 YBLX-19/222
Characteristic of YBLX-19/131
performance YBLX-19/232
YBLX-19/111B
Max of actuating force 16N 20N 25N
max of Operation range 7mm 45° 80°
Min of overtravel 2mm 15° -
Table 3
Type Structure and installation of drive
YBLX-19/001 Plunger
YBLX-19/111 A wheel mounted inside the "-" shaped pivot arm
YBLX-19/121 A wheel mounted outside the "-" shaped pivot arm
YBLX-19/131 A wheel mounted in the groove of the "-" shaped pivot arm
YBLX-19/212 Two roller are installed on internal side of “Cross” shaped rotating arm (Lower left Lower right)
YBLX-19/222 Two roller are installed on internal side of “Cross” shaped rotating arm (Upper left ,Upper right)
Two roller are installed on “Cross” shaped rotating arm, One on the internal side and the other on the
YBLX-19/232
external side(Lower left ,Upper right)

YBLX-19/212 YBLX-19/222
48max 55max
138max
138max
65±0.6
65±0.6
4xΦ4.2 4xΦ4.2
35±0.5 35±0.5
46max 46max
YBLX-19/232 YBLX-19/001
55max
46max
4xΦ4.2
138max
90max
65±0.6
65±0.6
4xΦ4.2
35±0.5 35max
35±0.5
46max
YBLX-19/111 YBLX-19/118
48max 52max
135max
135max
65±0.6
65±0.6
4xΦ4.2 4xΦ4.2
35±0.5 35±0.5
46max 46max
K
YBLX-19/121 YBLX-19/131
135max 55max 48max
135max
65±0.6
65±0.6
4xΦ4.2 4xΦ4.2
35±0.5 35±0.5
46max 46max
Please explain the model of switch, names and numbers when

customers order
Such as: YBLX-19/111 Travel switch 100 peaces
User note:
YBLX-19/111,YBLX-19/121,YBLX-19/131 restricted by operating
mechanism.
It can not apply to the arm action is greater than 90 degree
condition.
Beware of the action angle is too large lead to turn arm rotation
and other undesirable phenomena.
YBLX-19/001 is a direct-operated product. When the customer
debugs the equipment, the total travel for installation of the
product is ≤9 mm to avoid damage to the built-in switch core by
over-travel use.
P-075 Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals Foot Switch
YBLT-3, YBLT-4
Foot Switch
1. General
The foot switch YBLT-3,4 series is suitable for alternating
current 50Hz/60Hz;and the control lines of voltage to
380V,volts d.c.to 220V;as control machine tools
electric,medical facility.
In accordance with standard: GB/T 14048.5, IEC 60947-5-1.
2. Type designation
YB LT-
Design sequence No.
Foot switch
Improved code
Contact type
COM NO NC

Voltage current:AC-15 380V ; DC-13 220V;
Voltage current:AC-15 0.79A ; DC-13 0.14A;
Promise heating current:3A;
Sheathing material:YBLT-3, YBLT-4 cast aluminum alloy;
Level of protection:IP31;
Installation category:Ⅱ;
Pollution degree:class3;
Insulation voltage Ui:415V;
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:4KV.
Foot Switch Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals P-076
YBLT-3
108max
87±0.5
90max
220max
YBLT-4
3×Φ5.4 220max
140max
108max
87±0.5
80max
50max
YBLT-4
The full model number,name and quality of the switch should be given when ordering.
For example: YBLT-3foot switch, 100 peace
K
Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals Foot Switch P-078
2. Type designation
YB LT- EKW/5A /B
Type B
Promise heating current
Design sequence No.
Foot switch
Improved code
Contact type
NO NC COM

Voltage rating:AC-15 220V ; DC-13 220V;
YBLT-EKW/5A/B Foot Switch Voltage current:AC-15 0.8A ; DC-13 0.16A;
Promise heating current:5A;
1. General Switch element: YBLX-19/K Sheathing;
material: cast aluminum alloy;
The foot switch YBLT-EKW/5A/B series is suitable for alternating
Level of protection:IP20;
current 50~60Hz; and the control lines of voltage to 220V, volts
Installation category:Ⅱ;
d.c.to 220V;as control machine tools electric,medical facility etc.
Pollution degree:class3;
In accordance with standard: GB/T 14048.5, IEC 60947-5-1. Insulation voltage Ui:250V;
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp:2.5KV;
Operation frequency:20t/min;
Ambient temperature:-5℃-+40℃.
YBLT-EKW/5A/B
66max
50max
50±0.5
3-φ5.2
120±0.7
134max
114
The full model number,name and quality of the switch should be given when ordering.
For example: YBLT-EKW/5A/Bfoot switch, 100 peace
P-079 Foot Switch Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals
YBLXW-5
Microswitch
1. General
YBLXW-5 series micro switches are suitable for control circuit or

auxiliary circuit of AC 50Hz (or 60Hz), voltage 380V and DC
220V,with applications including travel control, limit protection
and interlocking of various mechanical equipment such as
machinery, textile, light industry, and electronic instrument.
2. Type designation
YB LX W-5/ 1 1 □
Operating mode:code and implication

see right-hand chart
A pair of normally closed contact
A pair of normally opened contact
Design sequence No.
Inching
Travel switch
Iimproved code
Contact type
COM NO NC
K
Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals Microswitch P-080
3. Technical data
Level of protection IP52

Operation frequency 20t/min
AC-15 380V ; DC-13 220V
Load Ordinary type
AC-15 0.79A ; DC-13 0.14A
Speed of operation 0.1mm/s~0.5mm/s
Contact resistance ≤100mΩ
Environment temperature -5℃~+40℃
Relative humidity ≤90%(20℃)
Altitude ≤2000m
Model Operating mode

YBLXW-5/11Z Handspike plunger type
YBLXW-5/11N2 Compression bar type
YBLXW-5/11G2 Roller compression bar type
YBLXW-5/11D1 Short spring–loaded plunger type
YBLXW-5/11M Panel mounting plunger type
YBLXW-5/11Q1 Panel mounting roller plunger type
YBLXW-5/11Q2 Panel mounting landscape roller plunger type
YBLXW-5/11N1 Hinge rail type
YBLXW-5/11G1 Hinge roller long rail type
YBLXW-5/11G2277 Hinge one–way roller long rail type
YBLXW-5/11G3 Hinge roller rail type
YBLXW-5/11GS Fine push rod type
Model
YBLXW-5/11Z YBLXW-5/11D1 YBLXW-5/11M YBLXW-5/11Q1 YBLXW-5/11Q2 YBLXW-5/11GS YBLXW-5/11G2277
Performance
characteristic
Movement(OF) ≤10N ≤10N ≤10N ≤10N ≤10N ≤10N ≤7N

Movement route ≤3.5mm ≤3.5mm ≤3.5mm 1.2±0.9mm 1.2±0.9mm ≤3.5mm ≤5mm
Excess of stroke ≥0.5mm ≥0.5mm ≥3mm ≥3mm ≥3mm ≥0.5mm ≥1mm
Model
YBLXW-5/11N1 YBLXW-5/11N2 YBLXW-5/11G1 YBLXW-5/11G2 YBLXW-5/11G3
Performance
characteristic
Movement(OF) ≤6N ≤7N ≤6N ≤7N ≤6N

Movement route ≤13mm ≤10mm ≤11mm ≤7mm ≤8.5mm
Excess of stroke ≥3mm ≥2mm ≥3mm ≥2mm ≥2.5mm
P-081 Microswitch Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals

YBLXW-5/11Z
2X5.4X4.2
33max
18max
18max
33max
51max 51max
25.2±0.18
YBLXW-5/11D1
2X5.4X4.2 2X5.4X4.2
36max
36max
18max
51max
25.2±0.18
YBLXW-5/11M
M12X1-6g M12X1-6g
52max
2X5.4X4.2
52max
2X5.4X4.2
18max
51max 51max
25.2±0.18
YBLXW-5/11Q1
M12X1-6g M12X1-6g
65max
18max
65max
2X5.4X4.2 2X5.4X4.2
51max
51max
25.2±0.18
25.2±0.18
K
YBLXW-5/11D1
65max
2X5.4X4.2
18max
51max
25.2±0.18
25.2±0.18
18max
YBLXW-5/11N2
2X5.4X4.2
2X5.4X4.2
36max
18max
36max
51max
51max
25.2±0.18 25.2±0.18
25.2±0.18
YBLXW-5/11N1
44max
2X5.4X4.2
2X5.4X4.2
44max
18max
25.2±0.18
25.2±0.18
76max
76max
YBLXW-5/11G2
46max
46max
18max
2X5.4X4.2
2X5.4X4.2
51max 51max
25.2±0.18
YBLXW-5/11G1
52max
2X5.4X4.2
2X5.4X4.2
52max
18max
25.2±0.18 25.2±0.18
65max 65max
YBLXW-5/11G2
2×5.4×4.2
46max
18max
25.2±0.18
25.2±0.18
51max
51max
65max 60max
K
P-084 Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals Microswitch
YBLXW-5/11G3
2X5.4X4.2
2X5.4X4.2
51max
18max
25.2±0.18
60max
60max
YBLXW-5/11GS
42max
18max
2xΦ4.5±0.2
2x?4.5±0.2
42max
18max
51max
51max
25.2±0.18
5.2.1 Please do not use the product in places where exposed to hot water (above 40 degrees) or in water vapor.
5.2.2 Please do not directly immerse the product in oil or water.
5.2.3 Please install the product at location where vibration and impact will not be applied and in direction where resonance will not occur.
5.2.4 YBLXW-5/11N1, 5/11N2, 5/11G1, 5/11G2, 5/11G3, 5/11G2277 has six specifications of products with levers. Users may not adjust the
levers by themselves during installation to prevent the products from malfunctioning such as non-operating.
Microswitch Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals P-085
YBLXW-6 Microswitch
1. General
YBLXW-6 series micro switches are suitable for control circuit or

auxiliary circuit with AC 50Hz~60Hz, voltage 380V and DC 220V,
with applications including travel control, limit protection and
interlocking of various mechanical equipment such as machinery,
textile, light industry and electronic instrument.
2. Type designation
YB LX W-6 /1 1
Operating mode
A pair of normally closed contact
A pair of normally opened contact
Design sequence No.
Inching
Travel switch
Improved code
Contact type
NC NO COM
3. Technical data
Level of protection IP52

Nominal voltage AC-15 380V ; DC-13 220V
Nominal current AC-15 0.79A ; DC-13 0.14A
Operating speed 0.1mm/s~0.5mm/s
Environment temperature -5℃~+40℃
Related humidity ≤85%(20℃)
Altitude ≤2000m
K
Type(recommend to adopt) Operating mode Type of replacement(discontinue)
YBLXW-6/11BZ Panel mounting plunger type -AZ/7310 -TZ/7310 -MN/5310 -ZL/15G03 -D4MC/5000
YBLXW-6/11CA Long press-button type
YBLXW-6/11DA Short press-button Ⅰtype -AZ/7110 -TZ/7110 -MN/5110 -ZL/15G01
YBLXW-6/11DA2 Short press-button Ⅱ type -AZ/7100 -TZ/7100 -MN/5100
YBLXW-6/11CG Long triangle type -AZ/7120 -TZ/7120 -MN/5120 -ZL/15G060 -D4MC/1000
YBLXW-6/11DG Short triangle type -AZ/7140 -TZ/7140 -MN/5140 -ZL/15G06 -D4MC/1020
YBLXW-6/11CL Long spar roller type -AZ/7121 -TZ/7121 -MN/5121 -ZL/15G07 -D4MC/2000
YBLXW-6/11DL Short spar roller type -AZ/7141 -TZ/7141 -MN/5141 -ZL/15G09 -D4MC/2020
YBLXW-6/11CDL Long spar one-way roller type -AZ/7124 -TZ/7124 -MN/5124
YBLXW-6/11DDL Short spar one-way roller type -AZ/7144 -TZ/7144 -MN/5144 -ZL/15G070 -D4MC/3030
YBLXW-6/11HL Lateral roller type -AZ/7312 -TZ/7312 -MN/5312 -ZL/15G031 -D4MC/5040
YBLXW-6/11ZL Straight roller type -AZ/7311 -TZ/7311 -MN/5311 -ZL/15G030 -D4MC/5020
YBLXW-6/11W1 Universal Ⅰ type -AZ/7161 -TZ/7161 -MN/5161
YBLXW-6/11W2 Universal Ⅱ type -AZ/7166 -TZ/7166 -MN/5166
YBLXW-6/11W3 Universal Ⅲ type -AZ/7169 -TZ/7169 -MN/5169
Performance
Movement Movement route Overtravel
characteristic
Model (OF)max (PT)max (OT)min
YBLXW-6/11BZ ≤8N ≤3.5mm ≥1.2mm

YBLXW-6/11CA ≤8N ≤3.5mm ≥1.2mm
YBLXW-6/11DA ≤8N ≤3.5mm ≥1.2mm
YBLXW-6/11DA2 ≤8N ≤3.5mm ≥1mm
YBLXW-6/11CG ≤5N ≤12mm ≥4mm
YBLXW-6/11DG ≤6N ≤10mm ≥2mm
YBLXW-6/11CL ≤5N ≤12mm ≥4mm
YBLXW-6/11DL ≤6N ≤10mm ≥2mm
YBLXW-6/11CDL ≤6N ≤12mm ≥4mm
YBLXW-6/11DDL ≤5N ≤10mm ≥2mm
YBLXW-6/11HL ≤8N ≤3.5mm ≥1.2mm
YBLXW-6/11ZL ≤8N ≤3.5mm ≥1.2mm
YBLXW-6/11W1 ≤2N ≤30° -
YBLXW-6/11W2 ≤2N ≤30° -
YBLXW-6/11W3 ≤2N ≤30° -

YBLXW-6/11ZL
M12X1-6g
82max
2XΦ4.2
25.5±0.2
22max
75max
YBLXW-6/11HL YBLXW-6/11DG
0
R=5
M12X1-6g
82max
58max
2XΦ4.2
2XΦ4.2
25.5±0.2
25.5±0.2
22max
22max
75max
75max
75max
YBLXW-6/11DL YBLXW-6/11BZ
43
R= M12X1-6g
72max
67max
2XΦ4.2
2XΦ4.2
25.5±0.2
25.5±0.2
22max
22max
75max
75max 75max
YBLXW-6/11CG YBLXW-6/11CL
61
7 R=
R=6
72max
62max
2XΦ4.2
22max
22max
75max
75max
75max
YBLXW-6/11DA YBLXW-6/11DA2
54max
72max
2XΦ4.2
2XΦ4.2 25.5±0.2
25.5±0.2
22max
22max
75max
75max
K
YBLXW-6/11CA YBLXW-6/11DDL
51
M12X1-6g R=
72max
81max
2XΦ4.2
2XΦ4.2
25.5±0.2 25.5±0.2
22max
22max
75max
75max
YBLXW-6/11W1 YBLXW-6/11W2
155max
132max
2XΦ4.2 2XΦ4.2
25.5±0.2 25.5±0.2
22max
22max
75max
75max
YBLXW-6/11W3 YBLXW-6/11CDL
66
R=
150max
83max
2XΦ4.2 2XΦ4.2
25.5±0.2 25.5±0.2
22max
22max
75max 75max
75max
5. Order information
5.1 When ordering, the user shall specify the switch type, name and quantity.
For example: YBLXW-6/11DA. 100 Microswitch;
5.2 User note:
5.2.1 Please do not use it in hot water and water vapor condition.
5.2.2 Please do not use it directly in oil and water
5.2.3 Please install the equipment in the place that vibration does not occur, also no resonance occurs.
P-089 Controller Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals
3.1 Scope of speed adjustment

Power supply:~220V(±10%)，50Hz or 60Hz,
100r/min~1300r/min
3.2 Rotation speed variation rate

(mechanical properties-hardness)
Rotation speed Speed under 5% load - Speed under 100% load
= ×100%
variation rate Rated speed
3.3 Steady speed accuracy≤1%
3.4 Maximum output:DC90V,8A
3.5 Controlling motor power :0.55kW~90kW
3.6 voltage speed ratio in three-phase midfrequency of

tachogenerator≥2V/100r/min
Plug number Connect corresponding name

1 midcourt line~220V
2 phase line~220V
3 Clutch excitation winding F1
4 Clutch excitation winding F2
JD 5 Output end of tachogeneratorU

6 Output end of tachogeneratorV
Electromagnetic Speed-adjustable 7 Output end of tachogeneratorW
Motor Control Device

1. General
JD series electromagnetic speed-adjustable 2 1 midcourt line~220V

phase line~220V
motor controller is the national union (unified) design
5 4 3 Clutch excitation
product of the former Ministry of Machinery Industry used
winding F1,F2
to control speed governing of the electromagnetic 7 6 Output end of
speed-adjustable motor (slip motor) to achieve constant tachogenerator
torque stepless speed control. The controller applies only U,V,W
to slip motor instead of ordinary motor.
Note:F1,F2 are to select and use (recommend) 1mm2 copper

2. Type designation
conductor with 0.55kW~40kW and 1.5mm2 copper conductor
JD - with 45kw-90kw;U,V,W conductors are select and use
(recommend) 0.75mm2 or 1mm2 copper conductor.
maximum power of controlled
motor(W)
A: manual ordinary type

B:manual precise type
design number(1-pointer type 2

-figure type
capacity reference to table 3
the controller of electromagnetic

speed-adjustable motor
K
Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals Controller P-090
3.7 Manual ordinary type

Table 1
1 1 1
Model No. JD 2 A-11 JD 2 A-40 JD 2 A-90
Supply voltage ~220V(±10%) 50Hz~60Hz
Maximum output rating(direct current 90V) 3.15A 5A 8A
Controllable power of motor (kW) 0.55~11 15~40 45~90
Tachogenerator Ratio of transmission of Phase-Ⅲ i-f voltage is ≥2V/100r/min
Relative speed variation ≤2.5%
Steady velocity precision ≤1%
Governor deflection (r/min) 1300~100 1300~100 1300~130

1
JD2 A-type external dimensions
130
A
192
245
210
150 4 95 15
135
1
JD2 A-type plate embedded-type installation
1
and the size of the holes controller JD 2 A-type used for wall-hung type installation size
4-φ6
80
re
n po
ope
140
192
132
P-091 Controller Fuses, Travel Switches, Universal Change-over Switches, Connection Terminals
Link connecting control casing and asynchronous motor with electromagnetic speed regulation
Three-phase ~ 380V
Control power φ ~ 220
Air switch
Slip clutch
Into the
Drag the power machine
junction box
The load axis
Tachometer generator
5.1 When ordering, shall give clear indicate of type,tachometer form,operation type, controlled power of motor and quantity.
5.2 If there are other special requirements, shall be indicated
5.3 ordering example: 200 JD1A-40, represent JD1A with indicating pointer,manual conventional type, controlled power of motor 40kW
200 of motor controllers with electromagnetic speed regulation.
K
Modular Din Rail Product
Identifier description P-001
Product overview
Miniature circuit breaker P-002
Residual current operated circuit breaker P-003
Accessories P-004
Isolation P-006
Parameters
Circuit breaker and switch parameters P-007
Residual current operated circuit breaker P-009
(RCBO) parameters
Tripping characteristics P-011
Product selection
Circuit breakers P-012
Product description P-014
Product description catalogue

P-001 Modular DIN Rail Product Identifier description
NXB-63 Miniature circuit breaker
Trademark
Product model
2-D barcode
Indication window
CE
Wiring diagram
Open/Close position
indicator
Standard
NXBLE-63 Residual current operated circuit breaker
Trademark Contact position

indication
Product model
Breaker Leakage indication

parameters
Standard
Wiring diagram
Open/Close
position indicator Leakage
parameter
2-D barcode
Test button
Product overview Modular DIN Rail Product P-002
Miniature circuit breaker
Overload protection, short circuit protection and isolation. It is widely used in building power distribution, industrial power distribution,
as well as control and protection for a variety of equipment with operating current not exceeding 125A.Key products series include:
L
NXB-40 NXB-63
40A and below single mode 1P + N 63A and below Miniature

Miniature Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker
( IEC 60898-1) ( IEC 60898-1)
NXB-63H NXB-80
63A and below Miniature Circuit 80A and below 1P, 1P + N, 2P

Breaker (IEC 60898-1) Miniature Circuit Breaker
( IEC 60898-1)
NXB-125G
NXB-125
125A and below Molded Case 125A and below Miniature

Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker
( IEC/EN 60947-2) ( IEC/EN 60898-1)
P-003 Modular DIN Rail Product Product overview
Residual current operated circuit breaker (RCBO)

It has the function of overload and short circuit protection, isolation and Earth leakage current protection, i.e., besides the protection
function of Miniature Circuit Breaker, it can also serve as additional protection for direct or indirect electric leakage/shock or protective
measures for electric fire. It is especially suited for places with low safety level, such as bathroom, swimming pool, plug socket or
transformer.Key products series include:
NXBLE-40 NXBLE-63Y
40A and below 1P + N RCBO 63A and below 1P + N RCBO

(IEC 61009-1) (IEC 61009-1)
NXBLE-32 NXBLE-63
32A and below RCBO 63A and below RCBO

(IEC 61009-1) (IEC 61009-1)
NXBLE-125
删除了
125A and below CBR
(IEC/EN 60947-2)
NXBLE-125
G
Accessories
A variety of additional features can be achieved with wide range of accessories when used with circuit breaker, such as alerts, shunt trip,
under-voltage protection, etc. Usually the Max number of accessories assembled on the circuit breaker is three. Accessories with
L
independent tripping function should be assembled first, such as shunt trip, and under-voltage trip, Followed by other accessories , such
as auxiliary contacts, alarm auxiliary contacts.
Accessories that can be assembled with NXB-63 series (IEC 60947-5)
AX-X1 AL-X1
Auxiliary contacts Alarm auxiliary contacts
SHT-X1 OVT-X1
Shunt release Over-voltage release
UVT-X1 OUVT-X1
Under-voltage release Over/under voltage release

P-005 Modular DIN Rail Product Product overview
Accessories for NXB-125 series
AX-X3 AL-X3
Auxiliary contacts Alarm auxiliary contacts
SHT-X3 OVT-X3
Shunt release Over-voltage release
UVT-X3 OUVT-X3
Under-voltage release Over/under voltage release

Isolation switch
With isolation function, it is mainly used for isolation and
functional disjunction of terminal power distribution.
L
NXHB-125
125A and below isolation switch

(IEC 60947-3)
P-007 Modular DIN Rail Product Parameters
Circuit breaker and switch parameters
Product model NXB-40 NXB-63 NXB-63H

Compliant standards IEC/EN60898-1 IEC/EN60898-1 IEC/EN60898-1
Rated current (A) 6~40 1~63 1~63
Rated voltage (V ~) 230/240 240/415 240/415
Rated frequency (Hz) 50/60 50/60 50/60
Number of poles 1P+N 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P
Mechanical life (cycles) 20000 20000 20000
Electrical life (cycles) 10000 10000 10000
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Ics (A) 4500 6000 10000
Short-circuit breaking capacity Icu (A) 4500
6000 7500
Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2 / 50)(kV) 4
4 4
Dielectric test voltage (V) (Power frequency 1 minute) 2000
(Power frequency 1 minute) 2000 (Power frequency 1 minute) 2000
28 cycles
Anti-humid and heat properties (IEC60068-2-30:55℃/90~96%,25℃/95~100%) 28 cycles 28 cycles
Minimum cross section (mm²) 1 1 1
Maximum cross section (mm²) 10 25 25
Terminals Standard connection torque (N·m) 1.2 2 2
Maximum withstand torque (N m) 1.8 2.5 2.5
Wire insertion depth (mm) 10 12.5 12.5
Reference temperature for setting of thermal element (℃) 30 30 30
Ambient temperature (℃) -35~+70 -35~+70 -35~+70
Ambient storage temperature (℃) -35~+85 -35~+85 -35~+85
Applicable altitude (m) 2000 2000 2000
Type B (3In ~ 5In) ■ ■
Type C (5In ~ 10In) ■ ■ ■
Electromagnetic
Type D (10In ~ 16In) ■ ■ ■
trip type
Type C (6.4In ~ 9.6In)
Type D (9.6In~14.4In)
(0.9~0.95)In (0.9~0.95)In (0.9~0.95)In

Derating factor with
multiple products (0.86~0.80)In (0.86~0.80)In (0.86~0.80)In
side by side
(0.78~0.76)In (0.78~0.76)In (0.78~0.76)In
(recommended value)
0.76In 0.76In 0.76In
Temperature Change for every 10℃ increase from
-(0.04~0.07)In -(0.03~0.05)In -(0.04~0.07)In
compensation the reference temp
coefficient
(recommended Change for every 10℃ decrease
+(0.04~0.07)In +(0.03~0.08)In +(0.04~0.08)In
value) from the reference temp
Cable entry Top or bottom entry Top or bottom entry Top or bottom entry
Mounting TH35-7.5-rail mounting TH35-7.5-rail mounting TH35-7.5-rail mounting
Pollution degree Pollution degree Ⅱ Pollution degree Ⅱ Pollution degree Ⅱ
Direct mounting IP20 IP20 IP20
Protection degree
Mounted in the distribution box IP40 IP40 IP40
AX-X1, AL-X1, SHT-X1, AX-X1, AL-X1, SHT-X1, AX-X1, AL-X1, SHT-X1,

Accessories that can be assembled
OVT-X1, UVT-X1, OUVT-X1 OVT-X1, UVT-X1, OUVT-X1 OVT-X1, UVT-X1, OUVT-X1
Parameters Modular DIN Rail Product P-008
NXB-80
IEC60898-1
NXB-125
IEC60947-2
NXB-125G
IEC60898-1
NXHB-125
IEC60947-3
L
80 63~125 63、80、100(1P、2P、3P、4P), 125(1P、2P) 63~125
240 240/415 240/415 240/415
50 50 50 50
1P, 1P+N, 2P 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P
20000 20000 20000 10000
10000 6000(In≤100A), 4000(In>100A) 6000(In≤100A), 4000(In>100A) 3000
6000 10000 10000 20Ie
6000 7500 7500 3Ie
4 4 4 6
(Power frequency 1 minute) 2000 (Power frequency 1 minute) 1890 (Power frequency 1 minute) 2000 (Power frequency 1 minute) 1890
28 cycles 28 cycles 28 cycles 28 cycles
1 16 16 1
25 50 50 50
2 3.5 3.5 3.5
3 4 4 4
12.5 15 15 15
30 30 30 30
-35~+70 -35~+70 -35~+70 -35~+70
-35~+85 -35~+85 -35~+85 -35~+85
2000 2000 2000 2000
■ ■
■ ■
■ ■
■
■
(0.9~0.95)In
(0.86~0.80)In
(0.78~0.76)In
0.76In
-(0.03~0.05)In -(0.03~0.05)In -(0.03~0.05)In
+(0.04~0.07)In +(0.04~0.07)In +(0.04~0.07)In
Top or bottom entry Top or bottom entry Top or bottom entry Top or bottom entry
TH35-7.5-rail mounting TH35-7.5-rail mounting TH35-7.5-rail mounting TH35-7.5-rail mounting

Pollution degree Ⅱ Pollution degree Ⅲ Pollution degree Ⅲ Pollution degree Ⅱ
IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
IP40 IP40 IP40 IP40
AX-X1, AL-X1, SHT-X1, AX-X3, AL-X3, SHT-X3, AX-X3, AL-X3, SHT-X3,

OVT-X1, UVT-X1, OUVT-X1 OVT-X3, UVT-X3, OUVT-X3 OVT-X3, UVT-X3, OUVT-X3
P-009 Modular DIN Rail Product Parameters
Residual current operated circuit breaker parameter
Product model NXBLE-40 NXBLE-63Y

Compliant standards IEC/EN61009-1 IEC61009-1
Rated current (A) 6~40 6~63
Rated residual operating current (A) 0.01, 0.03 0.01, 0.03
Leakage protection type AC AC
Rated voltage (V ~) 230/240 240
Rated frequency (Hz) 50/60 50
Number of poles 1P+N 1P+N
Mechanical life (cycles) 20000 20000
Electrical life (cycles) 10000 10000
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (A) 4500 4500
Short-circuit breaking capacity (A) 4500 4500
Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2 / 50)(kV) 4 4
Dielectric test voltage (V) (Power frequency 1 minute) 2000 (Power frequency 1 minute) 2000
28 cycles 28 cycles
Anti-humid and heat properties (IEC60068-2-30:55℃/90~96%,25℃/95~100%)
1 1
Minimum cross section (mm²)
10 25
Maximum cross section (mm²)
1.2 2
Terminals Standard connection torque (N·m)
1.8 2.5
Maximum withstand torque (N m)
10 12.5
Wire insertion depth (mm)
30 30
Reference temperature for setting of thermal element (℃)
-35~+70 -35~+70
Ambient working temperature (℃)
-35~+85 -35~+85
Ambient storage temperature (℃)
2000 2000
Applicable altitude (m)
Type B (3In ~ 5In)

Type C (5In ~ 10In) ■ ■
Electromagnetic
Type D (10In ~ 20In) ■ ■
trip type
Type C (6.4In ~ 9.6In)
Type D (9.6In~14.4In)
≤3 (0.9~0.95）In (0.9~0.95）In
Derating factor with
multiple products 4~6 (0.86~0.80)In (0.86~0.80)In
side by side 7~9 (0.78~0.76)In (0.78~0.76)In
(recommended value)
>9 0.76In 0.76In
Temperature Change for every 10℃ increase from the reference temp -(0.03~0.050)In -(0.03~0.050)In
compensation coefficient
(recommended value) Change for every 10℃ decrease from the reference temp -(0.04~0.07)In -(0.04~0.07)In
Cable entry Top-in, Bottom-out Top-in, Bottom-out
Mounting TH35-7.5-rail mounting TH35-7.5-rail mounting
Pollution degree Pollution degree Ⅱ Pollution degree Ⅱ
Direct mounting IP20 IP20
Protection class
Mounted in the distribution box IP40 IP40
AX-X1, AL-X1, SHT-X1, AX-X1, AL-X1, SHT-X1,

Accessories that can be assembled
OVT-X1, UVT-X1, OUVT-X1 OVT-X1, UVT-X1, OUVT-X1
Parameters Modular DIN Rail Product P-010
NXBLE-32
IEC61009-1
NXBLE-63
IEC61009-1
NXBLE-125
IEC/EN 60947-2
L
6~32 6~63 63、80、100(1P+N、2P、3P、3P+N、4P)125(1P+N、2P)
0.03, 0.05, 0.075, 0.1, 0.3 0.03, 0.05, 0.075, 0.1, 0.3 0.03, 0.05, 0.075, 0.1, 0.3
AC AC AC
240/415 240/415 240/415
50 50 50
1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P
20000 20000 20000
10000 10000 6000(In≤100A), 4000(In>100A)
6000 6000 10000
6000 6000 7500
4 4 4
(Power frequency 1 minute) 2000 (Power frequency 1 minute) 2000 (Power frequency 1 minute) 1890
28 cycles 28 cycles 28 cycles
1 1 16
25 16 50
2 2 3.5
2.5 2.5 4
12.5 10 15
30 30 30
-35~+70 -35~+70 -35~+70
-35~+85 -35~+85 -35~+85
2000 2000 2000
■ ■
■ ■
■ ■
■
■
(0.9~0.95）In (0.9~0.95）In (0.9~0.95）In
(0.86~0.80)In (0.86~0.80)In (0.86~0.80)In
(0.78~0.76)In (0.78~0.76)In (0.78~0.76)In
0.76In 0.76In 0.76In
-(0.03~0.050)In -(0.03~0.050)In -(0.03~0.050)In
-(0.04~0.07)In -(0.04~0.08)In -(0.04~0.07)In
Top-in, Bottom-out Top-in, Bottom-out Top-in, Bottom-out
TH35-7.5-rail mounting TH35-7.5-rail mounting TH35-7.5-rail mounting
Pollution degree Ⅱ Pollution degree Ⅱ Pollution degree Ⅲ
IP20 IP20 IP20
Ip40 IP40 IP40
AX-X1, AL-X1, SHT-X1, AX-X1, AL-X1, SHT-X1,

AX-X3, AL-X3
OVT-X1, UVT-X1, OUVT-X1 OVT-X1, UVT-X1, OUVT-X1
删除了NXBLE-125G
P-015 Product description Miniature circuit breaker

1. Compliant standards
IEC/EN60898-1
2. Compliant certification
CE
3. Major function
Overload protection, short circuit protection, positive isolation
4. Technical parameters
Rated current: 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 6A, 10A, 16A, 20A, 25A, 32A, 40A, 50A, 63A;
Rated voltage: 220V~/230V~/240V ~ (1P, 1P+N), 380V~/400V~/415V ~ (2 ~ 4P, 3P+N);
Frequency: 50/60Hz;
Electromagnetic release type: B, C, D;
Number of poles: 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P;
Mechanical life: 20000 cycles;
Electrical life: 10000 cycles;
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity(Icn): 6000A;
Short-circuit breaking capacity (Ics): 6000A;
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp): 4kV;
Power consumption on each pole of the circuit breaker: see Table 1.
Table 1
Rated current In (A) Maximum power consumption per pole (W)
1~10 3
16 3.5
20~25 4.5
32 6
40 7.5
50 9
63 13
0
72 -1.20
3P+N, 4P
0
54 -1.20 0
3P 77.8 -1.20 (Multipolar)
0
0
36 -0.62 76.8 -1.20
1P+N, 2P (Unipolar)
0
18 -0.43 42.5±0.31
1P
tilf out
2
34.5±0.5
45±0.31
-1.20
0
1 lift
81
65.5±0.37
Miniature circuit breaker Product description P-016
NXB-63H Miniature circuit breaker

L
IEC/EN60898-1
CE
3. Major function
Overload protection, short circuit protection , positive isolation
Rated current: 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 6A, 10A, 16A, 20A, 25A, 32A, 40A, 50A, 63A,;
Rated voltage: 220V~/230V~/240V ~ (1P, 1P+N), 380V~/400V~/415V ~ (2 ~ 4P, 3P+N);
Frequency: 50/60Hz;
Number of poles: 1P, 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P;
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity: 10000A;
Short-circuit breaking capacity: 7500A;
Rated impulse withstand voltage: 4kV;
Table 1
1~10 3
16 3.5
20~25 4.5
32 6
40 7.5
50 9
63 13
0
72 -1.20
3P+N, 4P
0
54 -1.20 0
3P 77.8 -1.20 (Multipolar)
0
0
36 -0.62 76.8 -1.20
1P+N, 2P (Unipolar)
0
18 -0.43 42.5±0.31
1P
tilf out
2
34.5±0.5
45±0.31
81 -1.20
0
1 lift
65.5±0.37
NXB-80 Miniature circuit breaker (coming soon)

IEC60898-1
CE
3. Major function
Overload protection, short circuit protection , positive isolation
Rated current: 80A;
Rated voltage: 240V ~;
Frequency: 50;
Number of poles: 1P, 1P+N, 2P;
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity: see Table 1;
Short-circuit breaking capacity: see Table 1;
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp(kV): 4;
Power consumption on each pole of the circuit breaker: ≤ 6.5W
Table 1
Number Rated Rated short-circuit Short-circuit

Model of poles voltage breaking capacity breaking capacity
1P, 1P+N 240V 6000A 6000A

NXB-80
2P 240V 6000A 6000A
0
77.8 -1.20 (Multipolar)
0 0
36 -0.62 76.8 -1.20 (Unipolar)
1P+N, 2P
0
18 -0.43 42.5±0.31
1P
tilf out
2
45±0.31
34.5±0.5
-1.20
0
1 lift
80
65.5±0.37

L
IEC/EN60898-1
CE
3. Major function
更新了图片 4. Technical parameters

Rated current: 6A, 10A, 16A, 20A, 25A, 32A, 40A;
Rated voltage: AC 230/240V;
Frequency: 50/60Hz;
Electromagnetic release type: C, D;
Number of poles: 1P+N;
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity(Icu): 4500A;
Short-circuit breaking capacity(Ics): 4500A;
Rated impulse withstand voltage(Uimp): 4kV;
Table 1
6~10 2
16~32 3.5
40 5
45±0.31
76.5 -1.20
0
65.5±0.37
tilf out
2
44±0.31
lift 1
0 34.5±0.5
18 -0.43
77
NXB-125 Moulded case circuit breaker

IEC/EN60947-2
CE
3. Major function
修改了图片
Rated current: 63A, 80A, 100A, 125A;
Rated voltage: 220V/230V/240V ~ (1P), 380V/400V/415V ~ (2P, 3P, 4P);
Frequency: 50Hz/60Hz;
Number of poles: 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P;
Electrical life: 6000 cycles (In≤100A); 4000 cycles (In＞100A);
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity(Icu): 10kA;
Short-circuit breaking capacity(Ics): 7.5kA;
65.5±0.37
L 49.5±0.31
tilf out
2
80.5±0.26
34.5±0.5
45±0.31
1 pull out
1P 2P 3P 4P
0 0 0 0
L(mm) 27-0.52 54-0.74 81 -1.40 108 -1.40
0 0 0 0
H(mm) 75.5 -1.20 78.5 -1.20 78.5 -1.20 78.5 -1.20
NXB-125G Miniature circuit breaker

L
IEC/EN60898-1
CE
3. Major function
修改了图片 4. Technical parameters
Rated current: 63, 80, 100(1P, 2P, 3P, 4P), 125(1P, 2P);
Rated voltage: 220V/230V/240V ~ (1P), 380V/400V/415V ~ (2P, 3P, 4P);
Frequency: 50Hz/60Hz;
Electrical life: 6000 cycles (In≤100A); 4000 cycles (In＞100A);
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity(Icn): 10000A;
Table 1
63 6
80 8
100 10
125 15
65.5±0.37
L 49.5±0.31
tilf out
2
80.5±0.26
34.5±0.5
45±0.31
1 pull out
1P 2P 3P 4P
0 0 0 0
L(mm) 27-0.52 54-0.74 81-1.40 108 -1.40
0 0 0 0
H(mm) 75.5 -1.20 78.5 -1.20 78.5 -1.20 78.5 -1.20
P-021 Product description RCCB
NXL-63 Residual Current

without over-current
protection (Magnetic)
1. General
1.1 Function
faults.
1.2 Selection
AC class
Tripping is ensured for slowly increasing sinusoidal AC
residual currents.
A class
Tripping is ensured for sinusoidal AC residual currents and
for pulsed DC residual currents, whether applied suddenly
or increasing slowly.
10mA - precision instrument leakage protection and
bathroom use.
300mA - protection against indirect contacts, as well as fire
hazard.
Tripping time
Instantaneous

on the last page.
RCCB Product description P-022
2. Technical data
Standard
IEC/EN 61008-1
AC, A
A
Rated current In A 16, 25, 32, 40, 63
Poles 1P+N, 3P+N
Rated voltage Ue V 230/400~240/415,110/200~127/220
Rated sensitivity I△n A 0.01 (Only for 1P+N 16A, 25A),0.03,0.3
Rated residual making and 500 (In=16A/25A/32A/40A)

Electrical A
features
Short-circuit current Inc=I△c A 6000/10000
SCPD fuse A 10000
break time under I△n s ≤0.1
Pollution degree 2
Mechanical
features
℃ -5...+40

mm2 25
AWG 18-3
mm2 10
N·m 2.5
Tightening torque
In-Ibs. 22
0
79 -1.2
5.5
34.5±0.5
45±0.31
86 -1.4
0
0
0 72 -1.2
36 -0.62 49.5±0.31
P-023 Product description Residual current operated circuit breaker (RCBO)
NXBLE-32 Residual current operated circuit

breaker (RCBO)
IEC61009-1
CE
3. Major function
Overload protection, short circuit protection, residual current operation
Rated current: 6A, 10A, 16A, 20A, 25A, 32A;
Rated residual operating current: 0.03A, 0.05A, 0.075A, 0.1A, 0.3A;
Rated voltage: 230V ~ (1P+N, 2P), 400V ~ (3P, 3P+N, 4P);
Frequency: 50Hz;
Number of poles: 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P;
Rated impulse withstand voltage(Uimp): 4kV.
L 42.5±0.31
tilf out
2
34.5±0.50
45±0.31
-1.40
0
94.5
1 lift
1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N 4P
0 0 0 0 0
L(mm) 45-0.62 63-0.74 90-1.40 99-1.40 117 -1.40
0 0 0 0 0
H(mm) 76.8 -1.20 77.8 -1.20 77.8 -1.20 77.8 -1.20 77.8 -1.20
Residual current operated circuit breaker (RCBO) Product description P-024

breaker (RCBO)
L
IEC61009-1
CE
3. Major function
Overload protection, short circuit protection, residual current operation
Rated current: 6A, 10A, 16A, 20A, 25A, 32A, 40A, 50A, 63A;
Frequency: 50/60Hz;
L 42.5±0.31
tilf out
2
34.5±0.50
45±0.31
94.5 -1.40
0
1 lift
1P+N 2P 3P 3P+N 4P
0 0 0 0 0
L(mm) 54 -0.74 72-0.74 103.5 -1.40 117 -1.40 135 -1.60
0 0 0 0 0
H(mm) 76.8 -1.20 77.8 -1.20 77.8 -1.20 77.8 -1.20 77.8 -1.20
NXBLE-63Y Residual current operated circuit

breaker (RCBO)
IEC61009-1
CE
3. Major function
Overload protection, short circuit protection, isolation, residual current operation
Rated current: 6A, 10A, 16A, 20A, 25A, 32A, 40A, 50A, 63A;
Rated residual operating current: 0.01A, 0.03A;
Rated voltage: 240V ~ ;
Frequency: 50Hz;
77±0.37
45±0.31
76.5 -1.20
0
2
tilf out
1 lift
34.5±0.5
0
36 -0.62
Residual current operated circuit breaker (RCBO) Product description P-026

breaker (RCBO)
L
IEC/EN61009-1
CE
3. Major function
Rated current: 6A, 10A, 16A, 20A, 25A, 32A, 40A;
Rated residual operating current: 0.01A, 0.03A;
Rated voltage: AC 230/240V ~ ;
Frequency: 50/60Hz;
65.5±0.37
44±0.31
tilf out
2
34.5±0.5
45±0.31
85.5 -1.40
0
lift 1
0 0
76.5 -1.20 36 -0.62

breaker (CBR)
IEC/EN60947-2
CE
3. Major function
Rated current: 63, 80, 100 (1P+N, 2P, 3P, 3P+N, 4P), 125 (1P+N, 2P);
Frequency: 50Hz;
Electrical life: 6000 cycles (In≤100A); 4000 cycles (In> 100A);
H
65.5±0.37
L
49.5±0.31
tilf out
34.5±0.5
2
45±0.31
108±0.70
1 pull out
1P+N 2P 3P 4P
0 0 0 0
L(mm) 54-0.74 81-0.87 108-1.40 135 -1.60
0 0 0 0
H(mm) 75.5 -1.20 78.5 -1.20 78.5 -1.20 78.5 -1.20
P-028
Note
L
P-029 Product description Accessories
AX-X1 Auxiliary contact

IEC60947-5
CE
3. Major function
To achieve long-distance signal indication for the open/close status of the circuit breaker

Table 1
Utilization category Rated operating voltage V Rated operating current A
AC 415 3
AC-12
AC 240 6
DC 130 1
DC-12 DC 48 2
DC 24 6
Figure 1
Action characteristics: Figure 1 shows the
wiring diagram for auxiliary contacts.
When the auxiliary contacts is open, terminals
11 and 12 are connected;
When the auxiliary contacts is closed, terminals
11 and 14 are connected.
Life: Operating life of auxiliary contacts is
≥ 10000 cycles.
14 12 11

Can be assembled with NXB-63, NXB-40 series circuit breakers, with assembly diagram
shown below:
Figure 2
① Remove the left

cover on the
circuit breaker
②
After AX-X1 is assembled with the circuit breaker, mount them on the TH3.5-7.5 steel
mounting rail.
Accessories Product description P-030

Figure 3
L
45±0.31
79-1.40
0
0
9-0.36
42.5±0.31
0
76.7-1.20
AL-X1 Alarm auxiliary contact

IEC60947-5
CE
3. Major function
To achieve signal indication over long distance for open/close status of the circuit
breaker and alarm.

Table 1
AC 415 3
AC-12
AC 240 6
DC 130 1
DC-12 DC 48 2
DC 24 6
Figure 1
Action characteristics: Figure 1 shows the
wiring diagram for auxiliary contact.When the
auxiliary contact is open, terminals 91 and 94
are connected;When the auxiliary contact is
closed, terminals 91 and 92 are connected.
When the alarm auxiliary contact is closed,
and manually opened with the handle,
terminals 91 and 92 shall still be connected;
94 92 91
when the alarm auxiliary contact is closed,
and the assembled circuit trip is open due
to error, terminals 91 and 92 shall be open,
and terminals 91 and 94 shall be connected;
Life: Operating life of alarm auxiliary contact
is ≥ 10000 cycles.

Can be assembled with NXB-63, NXB-40 series circuit breakers, with assembly diagram
shown below:
L
Figure 2
① Remove the
left cover on the ②
circuit breaker
After AL-X1 is assembled with the circuit breaker, mount them on the TH3.5-7.5 steel
mounting rail.

Figure 3
45±0.31
79 -1.40
0
0
9-0.36 42.5±0.31
0
76.7 -1.20
SHT-X1 Shunt release

1. Major function
To be assembled with the circuit breaker to achieve remote shunt trip.

Rated insulation voltage (Ui): 500V;
Rated operation current under different rated operation voltage (see Table 1):
Utilization category: AC-12, DC-12.
Table 1
Rated operating Rated operating

voltage (V) current (A)
AC 415 3
AC 240 6
AC/DC 48 3
AC/DC 24 6
Action characteristics: within the range of 70% ~ 110% of the rated control supply voltage, the
release should operate reliably to open the circuit breaker. Figure 1 shows the wiring diagram for
the release. When the release is open, terminal C2 and 12 shall be connected, and the
external security indicator shall light up; when the release is closed, terminal C2 and 14 shall
be connected, and the external warning indicator shall light up; when the release is
closed, and the external button is connected, the release shall trip and drive the circuit
breaker to trip and be opened. Meanwhile, the release indicator shall display trip mark.
Mechanical life: operating life of the release is ≥ 4000 cycles.
Figure 1
C1 C2
14 12
N

SHT-X1 can be assembled with NXB-63 or NXB-40 series circuit breaker, with the assembly
L
Figure 2
①Remove the
left cover on
the circuit
breaker
After SHT-X1 is assembled with the circuit breaker, mount them on TH35-7.5 steel
mounting rail.

Figure 3
79 -1.40
45±0.31
0
0
18 -0.43 43.5±0.31
0
76.7-1.20
OVT-X1 Overvoltage release

1. Major function
To be assembled with the circuit breaker to achieve overvoltage protection.

Rated operation voltage Ue: AC 240V 50Hz (or 60Hz).
Rated insulation voltage Ui: 500V.
Overvoltage setting value Uvo: 280V.
Release action characteristics: when the main circuit voltage is in the range of (85% ~
110%) Ue, the release shall be able to keep the circuit breaker to work reliably for long
term. When the main circuit voltage is increased to 280 (1 ± 5%) V, the release assembled
with NXB-63 series circuit breaker should act and trip open NXB-63 circuit breaker.
Mechanical and electrical life: the mechanical and electrical life of release is ≥4000
operation cycles.

OVT-X1 can be assembled with NXB-63 or NXB-40 series circuit breaker, with the assembly
Figure 1
① Remove the lef t

cover on the circuit
breaker
After the release is assembled with the circuit breaker, mount them on TH35-7.5 steel
mounting rail.

Figure 2
0
18-0.43
45±0.31
79-1.40
0
43.5±0.31
0
76.7-1.20
UVT-X1 Under-voltage release

1. Major function
L
To be assembled with the circuit breaker to achieve overvoltage protection.

Rated operation voltage Ue: AC 240V
Rated insulation voltage Ui 500V
Action characteristics: when the applied voltage ≤35% Ue, the product should prevent
circuit breaker from closing; when 35% Ue≤ applied voltage ≤70% Ue, the product
should operate and drive the circuit breaker open; when the applied voltage ≥85% Ue,
the product should be able to close. The applied voltage should not exceed 110%Ue.
Life: the operating life of the release is ≥ 4000 cycles.

UVT-X1 can be assembled with NXB-63 or NXB-40 series circuit breaker, with the assembly
Figure 1
②
① Remove the lef t
cover on the circuit
breaker
mounting rail.

Figure 2
0
18-0.43
45±0.31
79-1.40
0
43.5±0.31
0
76.7-1.20
OUVT-X1 Over/under voltage release

1. Major function
To be assembled with circuit breaker to achieve over/under voltage protection.

Rated operation voltage Ue: AC 240V, 50Hz;
setting value, the release should drive the circuit breaker to act. When the applied
voltage is below 35%Ue or above 105% of the over-voltage setting value, the release
should be able to prevent the circuit breaker from closing. When the supply voltage is
above 85% Ue and below 95% of over-voltage setting value, the circuit breaker should be
able to close normally. The upper limit of the applied voltage should be less than 110%
over-voltage operation setting value.
Mechanical and electrical life: the mechanical and electrical life after the release is
assembled with the circuit breaker should be ≥ 4000 cycles, of which, 500 cycles for
over-voltage trip and under-voltage trip each, and 3000 cycles for the open/close of the
circuit breaker.

OUVT-X1 can be assembled with NXB-63 or NXB-40 series circuit breaker, with the assembly
Figure 1
②
① Remove the
left cover on the
circuit breaker
After OUVT-X1 is assembled with the circuit breaker, mount them on the TH3.5-7.5 steel
mounting rail.

Figure 2
L
0
18-0.43
45±0.31
79-1.40
0
43.5±0.31
0
76.7 -1.20
AX-X3 Auxiliary contact

IEC/EN60947-5
CE
3. Major function
To be assembled with the circuit breaker to achieve long-distance signal indication for the
open/close status of the circuit breaker

Rated operating currents under different working voltages:
Table 1
AC 415 3
AC-12
AC 240 6
DC 130 1
DC-12 DC 48 2
DC 24 6
Action characteristics: Figure 1 shows the Figure 1
wiring diagram for auxiliary contacts.When 11

the auxiliary contacts is open, terminals 11
and 12 is connected; When the auxiliary
contacts is closed, terminals 11 and 14 is
connected.
Life: Operating life of auxiliary contacts is 12
10000 cycles. 14

AX-X3 can be assembled with NXB-125, NXB-125G series circuit breaker, with the assembly
Figure 2
① Remove the
left cover on the
circuit breaker ②
After AX-X3 is assembled with the circuit breaker, mount them on the TH3.5-7.5 steel
mounting rail.
这里原来是NXB-125 因为没有NXB-125的图片现
在换成了NXB-125G
请核对是否可以

Figure 3
L
0
9 -0.36
45±0.31
81-1.40
0
49.5±0.31
0
75.2 -1.20
AL-X3 Alarm auxiliary contact

IEC60947-5
CE
3. Major function
To be assembled with the circuit breaker to achieve signal indication over long distance
for open/close status of the circuit breaker and alarm.

Rated operation currents under different working voltages:
Table 1
AC 415 3
AC-12
AC 240 6
DC 130 1
DC-12 DC 48 2
DC 24 6
Action characteristics: Figure 1 shows the wiring Figure 1
diagram for auxiliary contact.
When the auxiliary contact is open, terminals 91

and 94 is connected; When the auxiliary contact is
closed, terminals 91 and 92 is connected. When
the alarm auxiliary contact is closed, and manually
open with the handle, terminals 91 and 92 shall
94 92 91
still be connected; when the alarm auxiliary
contact is closed, and the assembled circuit trip
open due to error, terminals 91 and 92 shall be
open, and terminals 91 and 94 shall be connected;
Life: Operating life of alarm auxiliary contact is 10000

cycles.

AL-X3 can be assembled with NXB-125 series circuit breaker, with the assembly diagram
shown below:
L
Figure 2
① Remove the left

cover on the
circuit breaker ②
同NXB-125换了
NXB-125G 核对
After AL-X3 is assembled with the circuit breaker, mount them on the TH3.5-7.5 steel
mounting rail.

Figure 3
9±0.18
45±0.31
81-1.40
0
49.5±0.31
0
75.2 -1.20
SHT-X3 Shunt release

1. Major function
To be assembled with the circuit breaker to achieve remote shunt trip.

Rated insulation voltage (Ui): 500V;
Rated operation current under different rated operation voltage (see Table 1):
Utilization category: AC-12, DC-12.
Table 1
Rated operating Rated operating

voltage (V) current (A)
AC 400 3
AC 230 6
AC/DC 48 3
AC/DC 24 6
Action characteristics: within the range of 70% ~ 110% of the rated control supply voltage, the
release should operate reliably to open the circuit breaker. Figure 1 shows the wiring diagram
for the release. When the release is open, terminal C2 and 12 shall be connected, and the
external security indicator shall light up; when the release is closed, terminal C2 and 14 shall be
connected, and the external warning indicator shall light up; when the release is closed, and
the external button is connected, the release shall trip and drive the circuit breaker to trip and
be opened. Meanwhile, the release indicator shall display trip mark.Mechanical life: operating
life of the release is ≥ 4000 cycles.
Figure 1
C1 C2
14 12
N

SHT-X3 can be assembled with NXB-125 circuit breaker, with the assembly diagram shown
below:
L
Figure 2
①Remove the
left cover on
the circuit
同上页
breaker
mounting rail.

Figure 3
OVT-X3 Overvoltage release

1. Major function
To be assembled with the circuit breaker to achieve over voltage protection.

Rated operation voltage Ue: AC 240V 50Hz (or 60Hz).
Rated insulation voltage Ui: 500V.
Overvoltage setting value Uvo: 280V.
Release action characteristics: when the main circuit voltage is in the range of (85% ~ 110%)
Ue, the release shall be able to keep the circuit breaker to work reliably for long term.
When the main circuit voltage is increased to 280 (1 ± 5%) V, the release assembled
with NXB-125series circuit breaker should act and trip open NXB-125 circuit breaker.
Mechanical and electrical life: the mechanical and electrical life of release is 4000
operation cycles.

OVT-X3 can be assembled with NXB-125 series circuit breaker, with the assembly diagram
shown below:
Figure 2
mounting rail.

Figure 3
UVT-X3 Under-voltage release

1. Major function
L
To be assembled with the circuit breaker to achieve under-voltage protection

Rated operation voltage Ue: AC240V
Rated insulation voltage Ui: 500V
Life: the operating life of the release is 4000 cycles.
Action characteristics: when the applied voltage ≤35% Ue, the product should
prevent circuit breaker from closing; when 35% Ue≤applied voltage ≤70% Ue, the
product should operate and drive the circuit breaker open; when the applied
voltage ≤85% Ue, the product should be able to close. The applied voltage should
not exceed 110%Ue.

UVT-X3 can be assembled with NXB-125 series circuit breaker, with the assembly
Figure 2
After the release is assembled with the circuit breaker, mount them on TH35-7.5
steel mounting rail.

Figure 3
OUVT-X3 Over/under voltage release

1. Major function
To be assembled with circuit breaker to achieve over/under voltage protection

Rated operation voltage Ue: AC240V, 50Hz;
setting value, the release should drive the circuit breaker to act. When the applied voltage
is below 35%Ue or above 105% of the over-voltage setting value, the release should be
able to prevent the circuit breaker from closing. When the supply voltage is above 85%
Ue and below 95% of over-voltage setting value, the circuit breaker should be able to close
normally. The upper limit of the applied voltage should be less than 110% over-voltage
operation setting value.
Mechanical and electrical life: the mechanical and electrical life after the release is assembled
with the circuit breaker should be 4000 cycles, of which, 500 cycles for over-voltage trip
and under-voltage trip each, and 3000 cycles for the open/close of the circuit breaker.

OUVT-X3 can be assembled with NXB-125 series circuit breaker, with the assembly diagram
shown below:
Figure 2
After OUVT-X3 is assembled with the circuit breaker, mount them to TH35-7.5 steel
mounting rail.

Figure 3
Isolation switch Product description P-048
NXHB-125 Isolation switch

L
IEC60947-3
CE
3. Major function
Isolation function
Rated current Ie: 20A, 32A, 40A, 63A, 80A, 100A, 125A;
Rated operation voltage Ue: 240V~(1P), 415V~(2P, 3P, 4P);
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp: 6kV;
Rated short time withstand current Icw: 12 Ie, power-on time of 1s;
Rated short-circuit making capacity Icm: 20Ie, power-on time of 0.1s;
Rated making and breaking capacity: 3Ie, 1.05Ue, COSΦ=0.65;
Operation performance: mechanical life of 10,000 cycles, electrical life of 3000 cycles;
Pollution degree: Ⅱ;
Utilization category: AC-22A, AC-21B;
Installation category: Ⅱ, Ⅲ;
Installation: TH35-7.5 steel rail mounting, the gradient of the mounting surface from the
vertical plane should be ≤5°;
Wiring: screw clamp wiring, tightening torque 3.5N·m (80A ~ 125A);
tightening torque 2.0N·m(20A ~ 63A).

Fig 1 Dimensions and installation sizes
44.5±0.31
34.5±0.5
45±0.31
80 -1.20
0
0 65.5±0.37
18-0.43
1P H
0
36 -0.62
2P
0
54-1.20
3P
0
72-1.20
4P
1P 2P~4P
0 0
H(mm) 76.3-1.2 78 -1.2
Modular DIN Rail Product
Tripping characteristics
Tripping characteristics are in compliant with standard IEC60898-1 and IEC61009-1
Test Type Test current Starting state Trip/Not trip time limit Expected outcome Notes
t≤1 h(for In≤63A)

a B,C,D 1.13In Cold Not trip
t＜2 h(for In＞63A)
t＜1 h(for In≤63A) Current increase

b B,C,D 1.45In Right after test Trip
t＜2 h(for In＞63A) steadily within 5s
1s＜t＜60s (for In≤32A) Trip

c B,C,D 2.55In Right after test 1s＜t＜120s (for In＞32A)
B 3In
Connect the current by
d C 5In Cold t≤0.1s Not trip
closing the auxiliary switch
D 10In
B 5In
Connect the current by
e C 10In Cold t＜0.1s Trip
closing the auxiliary switch
D 20In
Tripping characteristics are in compliant with standard IEC60947-2
Release type Test current Starting state Trip/Not trip time limit Expected outcome Notes
t≤1 h(for In≤63A)

C,D 1.05In Cold Not trip
t≤2 h(for In＞63A)
t＜1 h(for In≤63A) Current increase

C,D 1.3In Right after test Trip
t＜2 h(for In＞63A) steadily within 5s
C,D 2In Cold t＜900s Trip
C 6.4In
Cold t≤0.2s Not trip
D 9.6In Connect the current by
9.6In closing the auxiliary switch
C
Cold t＜0.2s Trip
D 14.4In
Tripping curve
Compliant with standard IEC60898-1 and IEC61009-1 Compliant with standard IEC60947-2
1.45 t(s)
10000 10000
5000 8000
1h 1hor2h
2000 2000
1000 1000
500 500
200 200
100
100
50 50
20
20
10
10
5
t(S)
5
2
2
1
1
0.5
0.5
0.2 B C D D
0.2
0.1 C
0.1
0.05
0.05
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.005
0.005
0.002
0.002
0.001
0.001
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 14 20 30 50 70 100 200 I/In
0.5 1 1.3 2 3 4 6.4 9.6 14.4 20 30 50 70 100 I/In
11 >> Empower the World

Modular DIN Rail Product
Cross-sectional area of the connecting copper wire
The following table shows the cross-sectional area of the copper wire corresponding to the rated current (recommended value):
Copper wire cross-sectional area Smm2 Rated current In(A)
1 In≤6
1.5 6＜In≤13
2.5 13＜In≤20
4 20＜In≤25
6 25＜In≤32
10 32＜In≤50
16 50＜In≤63
25 63＜In≤80
35 80＜In≤100
50 100＜In≤125
Product selection and order
Circuit breakers
Product model Number of poles Electromagnetic release type Rated current Rated residual operating current
NXB-40
1P+N C, D 6A, 10A, 16A, 20A, 25A, 32A, 40A
NXBLE-40 0.01A, 0.03A
1P, 1P+N, 2P, 1A, 2A, 3A, 4A, 6A, 10A, 16A,
NXB-63 B, C, D
3P, 3P+N, 4P 20A, 25A, 32A, 40A, 50A, 63A
NXBLE-32 1P+N, 2P, 3P, 6A, 10A, 16A, 20A, 25A, 32A 0.03A, 0.05A, 0.075A,
B, C, D
3P+N, 4P 6A, 10A, 16A, 20A, 25A, 32A, 40A, 50A, 63A 0.1A, 0.3A
NXBLE-63
NXBLE-63Y 1P+N C, D 6A, 10A, 16A, 20A, 25A, 32A, 40A, 50A, 63A 0.01A, 0.03A
NXB-80 1P, 1P+N, 2P B, C, D 80A
NXB-125 1P, 2P, C, D 63A, 80A, 100A, 125A
NXB-125G 3P, 4P B, C, D 63A, 80A, 100A
NXBLE-125 1P+N, 2P, C, D 63A, 80A, 100A, 125A 0.03A, 0.05A, 0.075A,
0.1A, 0.3A
NXBLE-125G 3P, 3P+N, 4P B, C, D 63A, 80A, 100A
Ordering example: NXB-40 C16 50 units

NXB-63 3P D63 50 units
NXBLE-63 1P+N C63 0.03A 30 units
Empower the World >> 12

Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
NXM series moulded case circuit breaker P-001
Overview P-003
Product selection P-009
Code of inner accessories P-017
Functions and features

Technical parameters P-027
Protection feature P-035
Accessories P-045
Complementary technical data P-058
Dimensions and installation P-062
Tripping curves P-081

P-001 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers NXM series moulded case circuit breaker
Accessories
1 Body
2 Alarm contact (optional)
3 Motor-driven mechanism (optional)
4 Auxiliary contact (optional)
5 Connection plate (optional)
6 Shunt release (optional)
7 Communication module(optional)
1
8 Rear connection plate (optional)
9 Under voltage release (optional)
10 Interphase barrier (standard)
11 Plug-in basement(optional) 2
12 Handheld test module(optional)
13 Manual operation mechanism (optional)
7
NXM Series Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-002
10
9
13
12
11
P-003 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Overview
NXM series moulded case circuit breaker

Breaker
The moulded case circuit breaker will provide protection for the circuit and equipment in
case of overload, short circuit and under voltage condition occurred in the power distribution
circuit. Besides, it can also provide protection of overload, short circuit and under voltage for
the non-frequent start of motor
▪ Frame size:
NXM-250S/4300A
NXM series moulded case circuit breaker: 63A, 125A, 160A, 250A, 400A, 630A,
800A, 1000A, 1250A, 1600A
NXMS series electronic breaker: 160A, 250A, 400A, 630A, 1000A, 1250A, 1600A
▪ Rated operational voltage: Ue : 220V/230V/240V, 380V/400V/415V, 500V , 690V
▪ Breaking capacity code: E, S, F, H
▪ Number of poles: 2P, 3P, 4P
▪ Release type:thermal magnetic fixed type; magnetic fixed type; electronic type.
▪ Installation method: Fixed type; plug-in type
NXMS-250H/3300
Nameplate interpretation
NXM-250S/4300A
1
In:250A
2 Ui:800V Uimp:8kV 1 Product type: Frame size; breaking capacity; poles number
3 50/60Hz Cat A 6
o
4 Ii:10In +40 C 7 2 In: Rated operational current
5 8
3 Ui: Rated insulation voltage

9
ZHEJIANG CHINT ELECTRICS CO.,LTD 4 Frequency of A.C.
5 Ii: 10In Multiple of current of transient behavior
6 Uimp: Rated impulsive withstand voltage
7 Cat A: Utilization category of breaker
8 +40℃: Ambient temperature
Ue Icu/Ics
10 (V) (kA) 12 9 Electrical symbol for circuit breaker with isolating function
220/230/240 50/30
380/400/415 36/20 10 Ue: Rated operational voltage
IT 11 The product is in conformity with standard IEC/EN 60947.2
IEC/EN 60947-2
11 Arc isolation board must be installed 12 Icu/Ics: Ultimate short circuit breaking capacity/Service short circuit breaking
capacity
NXM Nameplate of thermomagnetic

stationary molded case circuit breaker
Overview Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-004
1 Product type: Frame size; breaking capacity; poles number

2 In: Rated operational current
NXMS-250H/3300 3 IR: Long-time-delay setting current range

1
In:250A 4 Ui: Rated insulation voltage
2 IR 125A~250A
3 Ui:800V Uimp:8kV 5 Frequency of A.C.
4 50/60Hz Cat A 6
Uimp: Rated impulsive withstand voltage

M
5 7 6
8 7 Cat A: Utilization category of breaker

ZHEJIANG CHINT ELECTRICS CO.,LTD
8 Electrical symbol for circuit breaker with isolating function

9 Ue: Rated operational voltage
10 The product is in conformity with standard IEC/EN 60947.2
11 Icu/Ics: Ultimate short circuit breaking capacity/Service short circuit breaking
capacity
Ue Icu/Ics
9 (V) (kA) 11
220/230/240 75/50
380/400/415 50/36
IEC/EN 60947-2 IT
10 Arc isolation board must be installed
Nameplate of NXM electronic

molded case circuit breaker
Electronic release
Run
.... 0.9IR
__ 1.2IR
PTU T
160 180 60 80 4 5 6 8
0.5 1 3 6 4 10
150 200
140 225 2 8 3 12 TR
OFF OFF 12 100
125 250 1.5 OFF 2 OFF 0.3s
N× (In) IR (A) TR (S) Isd (IR ) Ii (xI n )
IR 2IR Isd Ii I
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 PTU interface
2 Neutral pole protection current setting, with 2 steps of current that is
adjustable and can be turned off (OFF)
3 Rated current setting with 8 steps
4 Long-time-delay (S) setting with 4 steps
5 Short-time-delay current Isd setting with 7 steps that is adjustable and can be
turned off (OFF)
6 Instantaneous action current Ii setting with 7 steps and that can be turned off (OFF)
7 Current-time protection curve

NXMLE series residual current circuit breaker

Residual current operated protection breaker (Coming soon)
Residual current circuit breakers are used mainly to provide protection against leakage
current which may cause insulation failure , electric shock to equipment and human body
irrespectively along with the standard protection against over load & short circuit condition.
▪ Frame size: 125A, 160A, 250A, 400A, 630A

▪ Rated operational voltage: Ue(V AC): 220/230/240, 380/400/415
▪ Breaking capacity code: S, F, H
▪ Number of poles: 1PN, 2P, 3P, 3PN, 4P
NXMLE-250S/4300A
▪ Installation method: fixed type; plug-in type
Nameplate interpretation
NXMLE-250S/4300A
1 In:250A
1 Product type: Frame size, breaking capacity, poles number
2 Ui:800V Uimp:8kV
3 50/60Hz Cat A 7
2 In: Rated operational current
4 Ii:10In +40oC 8
3 Ui: Rated insulation voltage
5 Ue Icu/Ics 9
(V) (kA)
6
220/230/240 50/30
10
4 Frequency of A.C.
380/400/415 35/18
5 Ii: 10In: Multiple of current of transient behavior
11 6 Ue: Rated operational voltage
To select type, install and use 7 Uimp: Rated impulsive withstand voltage
according to the GB 13955
ZHEJIAN G CHINT ELECTRICS CO.,LTD
8 Cat A: Utilization category of breaker
9 +40℃: Ambient temperature
10 Icu/Ics: Rated ultimate breaking capacity / Rated service breaking capacity
I n mA
11 Electrical symbol for circuit breaker with isolating function
12 300 16
12 Rated residual operating current value
200 300
100 13 t: Maximum breaking time

t<0.1s
13 14 Only applicable for three-phase power
Normal
Leakage 15 The product is in conformity with standard IEC/EN 60947.2

16 Leakage current selection (mA)
Test
14
IT button
IEC/EN 60947-2
Nameplate of NXMLE residual

current circuit breaker
NXHM series disconnector switch

Disconnector switch (Coming soon)
The disconnector switch series are mainly used for non-frequent circuit making or
breaking circuit in the distribution network.
▪ Frame size: 63A, 125A, 160A, 250A, 320A, 400A, 630A, 800A, 1000A
▪ Rated operational voltage: Ue(VAC): 380/400/415/690
▪ Number of poles: 3P, 4P
M
▪ Installation method: fixed type; plug-in type
NXHM-250
Installation method: stationary type and plug-in type

NXНM-250
1 Iе:250A 1 Product type: Frame size; poles number
2 Ui:800V Uimp:8kV
3 Icm 5880A 7 2 Ie: Rated operational current
4 Icw 4000A/1S
50/60Hz 3 Ui: Rated insulation voltage
5
6 4 Icm: Rated short-time making capacity

8
ZHEJIANG CHINT ELECTRICS CO.,LTD
5 Icw: Rated short-time withstand current
6 Frequency of A.C.
7 Uimp: Rated impulsive withstand voltage
8 Disconnector Function as per IEC/EN
9 Ue: Rated operational voltage
Ue 415/690V
9 10 The product is in conformity with standard IEC/EN 60947.3
Using category
AC-21A AC-21B
AC-22A AC-22B
IEC/EN 60947-3
Nameplate of NXHM
disconnector switch
Compliant with standard
▪ Product standard
IEC 60947-1(General rules)
IEC 60947-2(Breaker)
IEC 60947-3(switch, disconnector)
IEC 60947-4(motor, drive)
▪ Use standard in extreme environment

IEC 60068-2-1(low temperature)
IEC 60068-2-2(dry heat)
IEC 60068-2-11(salt mist)
IEC 60068-2-30(damp and hot)
Anti-humid heat capacity
The product has passed the environmental test of dry cold, dry heat, and wet heat and the like. It can operate reliably under extreme
environmental conditions.
Environment temperature
It must calculate according to the temperature compensation coefficient table provided in the sample in the event the temperature is lower
than -5℃ or higher than 40℃.
Altitude and pollution degree
The installation altitude of normal operation is 2000 m and below. The product can operate reliably in pollution degree III environment
In case of higher than 2000m, it must consider the decrease of defined in IEC 60947-1and 60664-1(industrial environment).
dielectric strength and colder air. The amendment action shall be
implemented according to the altitude derating factor table
provided in the sample.
Protection grade
The product is in conformity with the standard requirements of

IEC 60529 (enclosure protection grade).
Product body: protection grade is IP30 (except the wiring
terminal position)
▪ Installation of cabinet door

Equipped with toggle handle: the protection grade is IP40
Equipped with rotation handle: the protection grade is IP50
Equipped with motor-driven mechanism: the protection
grade is IP40
P-009 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Product selection

Model definition and description
-
NXM 160 S P / 4 300
Code of release
Product S capacity
Breaking Operation way Number of
Frame size code type and inner
code code2) code poles code
accessories3)
63A E: 15kA No code: First number

NXM: moulded
S: 25kA 2: 2 poles
case circuit direct handle represents the
breaker 125A F: 36kA operation 3: 3 poles release type
H: 50kA 4: 4 poles 2: only magnetic
160A P: motor type
E: 20kA operation
S: 36kA 3: thermal
250A magnetic type
F: 36kA Z: rotary handle
H: 50kA operation The second
400A
E: 36kA number and the
630A S: 50kA third number are
F: 50kA codes of inner
800A H: 70kA accessories
S: 50kA
1000A
F: 50kA
H: 70kA
1250A
S: 50kA
1600A H: 70kA
Model selection examples:

NXM-160S P/4300 2 A G 100 R: To order one moulded case circuit breaker with 160A frame size, 35kA breaking capacity, thermal adjustable and
magnetic fixed release, with motor-driven mechanism, 4 poles, with no inner accessories, motor protection, the category of four poles is A, with
overload alarm non-tripping function. The rated current is 100A and rear connection.
Note: 1) The rated current of each frame can be seen in table 1.
2)
The corresponding poles number and breaking capacity related to frame size can be seen in table 2.
3)
For tripping method and inner accessories, see page 17-20.
Comparison table of frame sizes and rated current
Rated current (A) 10 15 16 20 25 30 32 40 50 60 63 65 70 75 80 90 100 110 125 140 150 160

63
125
160
250
Frame 400
size
(A) 630
800
1000
1250
1600
Comparison table of frame sizes, number of poles and breaking capacity
Frame size (A) 63 125 160 250

Number of poles 2P 3P 4P 2P 3P 4P 2P 3P 4P 2P 3P 4P
E
Code of S
breaking
capacity F
H
Product selection Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-010
2 A 100 R
M
Usage Product with N pole Rated Code of
code the code is selectable current1) installation
No code: A: there is no over current release 10A~1600A No code: front

installed at pole N and the N pole connection
distribution
will always connect, which will not
protection R: rear
operate with the other three poles.
2: motor connection
protection B: there is no over current release
installed at pole N and the N pole DR: plug-in type
will operate with the other three rear connection
poles;
C: there is over current release

installed at N pole, and the N pole
will operate with the other three
poles;
D: there is over current release

installed at N pole, and the N pole
will always connects, which will
operate with the other three poles
Table 1
170 180 200 225 250 280 315 320 400 500 600 630 700 800 900 1000 1250 1600
Table 2
400 630 800 1000 1250 1600

2P 3P 4P 2P 3P 4P 2P 3P 4P 2P 3P 4P 2P 3P 4P 2P 3P 4P
NXMS series electronic moulded case circuit breaker

Description
NXMS - 160 H P / 3
Product Breaking capacity Number of poles

Frame size code Operation code
code code2) code2)
NXMS series 160A F: 36kA No code: direct handle 3: 3 poles

electronic H: 50kA operation 4: 4 poles4)
250A
moulded case P: motor operation
circuit breaker S: 50kA
400A Z: rotary handle operation
F: 50kA
630A H: 70kA
1000A S: 50kA
H: 70kA
1250A
S: 50kA
1600A H: 70kA

NXMS-160H P/3300 2 T 125R: To order one electronic moulded case circuit breaker with frame size 160 , 50kA breaking capacity, with motor-
driven mechanism, 3 poles, with no inner accessories, electronic release type, motor protection, with communication module.
The rated current is 125A and the installation method is rear connection.
1)
Note: The rated current of each frame can be seen in table 3.
2)
The corresponding poles number and breaking capacity related to each frame size can be seen in table 4.
3)
For tripping method and inner accessories, see page 21-22.
4)
The type of neutral pole (N pole) is: there is over current release installed at N pole and N pole will operate with the other three poles
together (N pole will connect at first and then disconnect).
Comparison table frame size and rated current

Table 3
Rated current(A) 32 63 125 160 250 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
160
250
400
Frame
630
size(A)
1000
1250
1600
Comparison table of frame size, number of poles and breaking capacity

Table 4
Frame size(A) 160 250 400 630 1000 1250 1600
Number of poles 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
S
Code of breaking
F
capacity
H
300 2 T 125 R
Releasing method and code Communication Rated

M
Usage code Code of installation
of inner accessories module code current1)
First number represents No code: No code: no 32A~1600A No code: front

the release type. distribution communication module connection
protection
3: The second number and 2: motor protection T: with communication R: rear connection
the third number are code module
of inner accessories
DR: plug-in type
of rear connection
NXMLE series residual current circuit breaker (Coming soon)

Description
NXMLE - 125 H P / 3 300 2
Breaking Code of Releasing method

Product Code of poles Usage
Frame size code capacity operation and code of inner
code number code
code2) mode accessories3)
NXMLE: residual 125A S: 25kA No code: 1PN First number No code

current circuit F: 18kA direct handle 2P represents the
H: 36kA distribution
breaker operation 3P release type.
protection
160A 3PN only magnetic type
P: motor 4P 2: type6) 2:motor
S: 35kA operation
250A 3: thermal protection
H: 50kA Z: rotary handle magnetic type
operation The second
400A number and the
third number
S: 50kA
are codes of
630A H: 75kA
accessories

NXMLE-125H P/4300 2 A 100 J A Y R: To order one residual current circuit breaker with 125A frame size, 35kA breaking capacity, with motor-
driven mechanism, 3 poles , thermal magnetic fixed type release, with no inner accessories, motor protection, the code of N pole is A.
The rated current is 100A with electric leakage alarm non-trip function, and the residual current value is A (30/50/100). It is delay type and rear
connection.
Comparison table of frame size and rated current
Rated current (A) 10 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 180

125
160
Frame
size 250
(A) 400
630
Comparison table of frame size, poles number and breaking capacity
Frame size (A) 125 160 250

Number of poles 1PN/2P 3P 3PN/4P 1PN/2P 3P 3PN/4P 1PN/2P 3P 3PN/4P
S
Code of breaking
F
capacity
H
Comparison table of frame size and residual current value and code
Frame size (A) 125 160 250

Fixed single grade, non-delay type 30/50/100/200/300/500 30/50/100/200/300/500 30/50/100/200/300/500
A: 30/50/100 A: 30/50/100 A: 30/50/100
B: 50/100/200 B: 50/100/200 B: 50/100/200
Adjustable 3 grades, non-delay type
C: 100/200/300 C: 100/200/300 C: 100/200/300
Residual
D: 200/300/500 D: 200/300/500 D: 200/300/500
current
Fixed single grade, delay type value and 50/100/200/300/500 50/100/200/300/500 50/100/200/300/500
code (mA )
B: 50/100/200 B: 50/100/200 B: 50/100/200
C: 100/200/300 C: 100/200/300 C: 100/200/300
Adjustable 3 grades, delay type
D: 200/300/500 D: 200/300/500 D: 200/300/500
- - -
A Y J A 100 R
Product with N pole, Openning Code of residual Code of residual Rated

M
current alarm current1) Code of installation
selectable code time5) current value4)
function
A: there is no over current No code: no No code A 10A~800A No code:

release installed at N pole time delay type Without residual B front connection
and the N pole will always Y: time delay current alarm with C
non-trip function R: rear connection
connect, which will not type D
operate with the other E DR: plug-in type
three poles. J: Residual current with rear
alarm with non-trip connection
B: there is no over current function
release installed at N pole
and the N pole will operate Q: Residual current
with the other three poles; start and stop
function
Note：1) See table 5 for rated current included 4)

As for the un-adjustable type, mark the residual current value directly;
in each frame size for the adjustable type, mark the code.
2)
See table 6 for corresponding poles, 5)
See table 8 for opening time.
breaking capacity.
3)
See page 23-24 for release type and
inner accessories.
Table 5
200 225 250 315 350 400 500 630
Table 6
400 630
3P 3PN/4P 3PN/4P 3P 3PN/4P
Table 7
400 630
50/100/200/300/500/1000 50/100/200/300/500/1000
B: 50/100/200 B: 50/100/200
C: 100/200/300 C: 100/200/300
D: 200/300/500 D: 200/300/500
E: 300/500/1000 E: 300/500/1000
50/100/200/300/500/1000 50/100/200/300/500/1000
B: 50/100/200 B: 50/100/200
C: 100/200/300 C: 100/200/300
D: 200/300/500 D: 200/300/500
E: 300/500/1000 E: 300/500/1000
Comparison table of frame size and maximum opening time
Frame size (A) 125 160 250

Non-delay type (s) ≤0.1 ≤0.1 ≤0.1
Delay type Y (s) 0.3/0.4/0.5 0.3/0.4/0.5 0.3/0.4/0.5
NXHM series switch disconnector (Coming soon)

Description
NXHM - 63 P / 3 00
Product Frame size Code of operation Number of Code of inner

code code way poles code accessories1)
NXHM: 63A No code: 3: 3 poles Code of inner

switch direct handle operation 4: 4 poles accessories
disconnector 125A P: motor operation
Z: rotary handle
160A
operation
250A
400A
630A
800A
1000A

NXHM-63 P/300 : To order one disconnector switch with 63A frame size, with motor-driven mechanism, 3 poles, with no inner accessories
rear connection.
Note: 1) See page 25-26 of product sample for inner accessories code. The number code “00”can be omitted in case of no inner
accessories.
Table 8
400 630
≤0.1 ≤0.1
0.3/0.4/0.5 0.3/0.4/0.5
M
P-017 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Code of inner accessories
NXM series moulded case circuit breaker,code of inner accessories
□ Alarm contact, ■ Auxiliary contact, ● Shunt release, ○ Under voltage release.

Left Right
installation installation
Handle
NXM-63E/S NXM-63F/H
Accessories code
NXM-125E/S NXM-125F/H
Accessories name
Only Thermal magnetic
3P 4P 3P 4P
magnetic release
No inner accessories 200 300
Alarm contact 208 308 ■ ■ ■ ■
Shunt release 210 310 ● ● ● ●
Auxiliary contact (1NO1NC) ■ ■ ■ ■

220 320
Auxiliary contact (2NO2NC)
Under voltage release 230 330 ● ● ● ●
Shunt release, auxiliary contact (1NO1NC) ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■

240 340
Shunt release, auxiliary contact (2NO2NC)
Under voltage release, shunt release 250 350 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Two groups of auxiliary contact (2NO2NC) 260 360
Under voltage release, auxiliary contact (1NO1NC) ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■

270 370
Under voltage release, auxiliary contact (2NO2NC)
Shunt release, alarm contact 218 318 ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
■ ■ ■ ■
Auxiliary contact (1NO1NC),alarm contact ■ ■ ■ ■
228 328
Auxiliary contact (2NO2NC), alarm contact
Under voltage release, alarm contact 238 338 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Shunt release, auxiliary contact (1NO1NC), ■ ■ ■ ■

248 348 ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
alarm contact
Two groups of auxiliary contact (2NO2NC),

268 368
alarm contact
Under voltage release, auxiliary ■ ■ ■ ■

278 378 ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
contact (1NO1NC), alarm contact
Code of inner accessories Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-018
NXM-160E/S NXM-160F/H M
3P 4P 3P 4P
■ ■ ■ ■
● ● ● ●
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
● ● ● ●
■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●
■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●
(Continued from the table above)
Accessories code NXM-250E/S NXM-250F/H
Accessories name
Thermal magnetic
Only magnetic 3P 4P 3P 4P
release

220 320

240 340
Under voltage release, shunt release 250 350 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Two groups of auxiliary contact (2NO2NC) 260 360 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Under voltage release, auxiliary contact ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■

(1NO1NC)
270 370
Under voltage release, auxiliary contact ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
(2NO2NC)
Shunt release, alarm contact 218 318 ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●

■ ■ ■ ■
Auxiliary contact (1NO1NC), alarm contact ■ ■ ■ ■
228 328
■ ■ ■ ■
Under voltage release, alarm contact 238 338 ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
Shunt release, auxiliary contact (1NO1NC),

■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●
248 348 ■ ■ ■ ■
alarm contact

■ ■ ■ ■
268 368 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
alarm contact
Under voltage release, auxiliary ■ ■ ■ ■

278 378 ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
contact (1NO1NC), alarm contact
NXM-400E/S/F/H NXM-800S/F/H
NXM-1250S/H NXM-1600S/H
NXM-630E/S/F/H NXM-1000S/H
3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
M
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ● ● ● ●
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ● ● ● ●
■ ■ ■ ■
● ● ● ● ●
●
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ● ■ ● ● ■ ● ■ ● ● ● ●
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ● ■ ● ● ■ ● ■ ● ● ● ●
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ● ■ ● ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ● ● ● ●
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ● ■ ● ■ ■ ● ● ● ●
■ ■ ● ■ ● ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
NXMS series electronic moulded case circuit breaker, code of inner accessories
Accessories code NXMS-160F/H NXMS-250F/H

Accessories name
Thermal magnetic
Only magnetic 3P 4P 3P 4P
release

220 320
Shunt release, auxiliary contact (1NO1NC) ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●

240 340
Shunt release, auxiliary contact (2NO2NC) ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●
Under voltage release shunt release 250 350 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Two groups of auxiliary contact (2NO2NC) 260 360 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

270 370
Shunt release, alarm contact 218 318 ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●

■ ■ ■ ■
Auxiliary contact (1 NO1NC), alarm contact ■ ■ ■ ■
228 328
■ ■ ■ ■
Under voltage release, alarm contact 238 338 ■ ● ■ ● ● ■ ● ■
Shunt release, auxiliary contact (1NO1NC), ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●

248 348 ■ ■ ■ ■
alarm contact

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
268 368 ■ ■ ■ ■
alarm contact
Under voltage release, auxiliary contact (1NO1NC),

278 378
■ ● ■ ● ● ■ ● ■
alarm contact ■ ■ ■ ■
NXMS-400S/F/H
NXMS-1000S/H NXMS-1250S/H NXMS-1600S/H
NXMS-630S/F/H
3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
M
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ● ● ● ●
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ● ● ● ●
■ ■ ■ ■
● ● ● ● ●
●
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ● ■ ● ● ■ ● ■ ● ● ● ●
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ● ■ ● ● ■ ● ■ ● ● ● ●
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ● ■ ● ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
■ ● ■ ● ● ■ ● ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
NXMLE series residual current circuit breaker, code of inner accessories
Accessories code NXMLE-125S/H NXMLE-160S/F/H

Accessories name
Thermal magnetic
Only magnetic 3P 3PN/4P 3P 3PN/4P
release
Auxiliary contact (1 NO1NC) ■ ■ ■ ■

220 320
Auxiliary contact (2 NO2NC) ■ ■
Shunt release, auxiliary contact (1NO1NC) ■ ●

240 340
Shunt release, auxiliary contact (2NO2NC) ■ ●
Under voltage release, shunt release 250 350 ● ●
Two groups of auxiliary contact (2NO2NC) 260 360 ■ ■
Under voltage release, auxiliary contact

● ■
(1NO1NC)
270 370
● ■
(2NO2NC)
Shunt release, alarm contact 218 318 ■ ●

■ ■ ■ ■
228 328
■
Auxiliary contact (2 NO2NC), alarm contact ■
Under voltage release, alarm contact 238 338 ●
Shunt release, auxiliary contact (1NO1NC), ■ ●

248 348 ■
alarm contact

■
268 368 ■
alarm contact
Under voltage release, auxiliary contact ■

278 378 ■ ●
(1NO1NC), alarm contact
NXMLE-400S/F/H
NXMLE-250S/F/H
NXMLE-630S/F/H
3P 3PN/4P 3P 3PN/4P
■ ■ ■ ■
M
● ● ●
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
● ● ●
● ■ ■ ●
● ■ ■ ●
■ ■
● ■ ■ ●
● ■ ■ ●
■ ●
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■
■ ●
■ ●
■
■ ■
■
■ ●
■
NXHM series disconnector switch, code of inner accessories
NXHM-63
NXHM-160
NXHM-125
Accessories name Accessories code
3P 4P 3P 4P
No inner accessories 00
Alarm contact 08 ■ ■ ■ ■
Shunt release 10 ● ● ● ●

20
Auxiliary contact (2NO2NC) ■ ■
Under voltage release 30 ● ● ● ●
Shunt release, auxiliary contact (1NO1NC) ● ■ ● ■ ■ ● ■ ●

40
Shunt release, auxiliary contact (2NO2NC) ■ ● ■ ●
Under voltage release, shunt release 50 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Two groups of auxiliary contact (2NO2NC) 60 ■ ■ ■ ■

● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
(1NO1NC)
70
● ■ ● ■
(2NO2NC)
Shunt release, alarm contact 18 ● ■ ● ■ ■ ● ■ ●

■ ■ ■ ■
28
■ ■
Auxiliary contact (2NO2NC), alarm contact ■ ■
Under voltage release, alarm contact 38 ● ■ ● ■ ■ ● ■ ●
Shunt release, auxiliary contact (1NO1NC),

■ ■ ■ ● ■ ●
48
● ■ ● ■ ■ ■
alarm contact

■ ■ ■ ■
68 ■ ■
alarm contact

78 ● ■ ● ■ ■ ● ■ ●
(1NO1NC), alarm contact ■ ■ ■ ■
NXHM-250 NXHM-400
NXHM-800 NXHM-1000
NXHM-320 NXHM-630
3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
M
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
● ■ ● ■ ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●
● ■ ● ■ ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
●
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
● ■ ● ■ ■ ● ■ ● ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
● ■ ● ■ ■ ● ■ ● ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
● ■ ● ■ ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
● ■ ● ■ ■ ● ■ ● ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
■ ■ ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ●
● ■ ● ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ● ■ ●
● ■ ● ■ ■ ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■ ● ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
P-027 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Functions and features
Technical Parameters
Frame Size, rated current Inm (A) 63 125 160 250
10,16,20,25,30,32,
10,16,20,25,30, 32,40,50,60,63,70,75,80,
Rated current In (A), 40℃, 55℃ 40,50,60,63,70,75, 160,170,180,200,225,250
32,40,50,60,63 100,125,140,150,160
80,100,125
Rated insulation voltage Ui(V) 800 800 800 800

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp(kV) 8 8 8 8
Rated operational voltage Ue(V), AC50/60Hz 220/230/240, 380/400/415/500 220/230/240, 380/400/415/500 220/230/240, 380/400/415 220/230/240, 380/400/415
Breaking capacity code E S F H E S F H E S F H E S F H
2P ▪ ▪ - - ▪ ▪ - - ▪ ▪ - - ▪ ▪ - -
Number of poles 3P ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
4P ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
AC220/230/240V 18 36 50 75 18 36 50 75 40 50 50 75 40 50 50 75
Rated ultimate short circuit
AC380/400/415V 15 25 36 50 15 25 36 50 20 36 36 50 20 36 36 50
breaking capacity Icu (kA)
AC500V - - 15 25 - - - - - - - - - - - -
AC220/230/240V 18 18 50 50 18 18 50 50 30 30 50 50 30 30 50 50
Rated service short circuit
AC380/400/415V 15 15 36 36 15 15 36 36 20 20 36 36 20 20 36 36
breaking capacity Ics (kA)
AC500V - - 15 25 - - - - - - - - - - - -
In conformity with standards IEC/EN 60947-2
Utilization category A A A A
Isolation function
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Arcing distance ≤50 ≤50 ≤50 ≤50
Without maintenance 20000 20000 20000 20000
Mechanical life (times)
With maintenance 40000 40000 40000 40000
Electricallife (times) AC415V, In 10000 10000 10000 10000
Magnetic Distribution protection ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

Release type and
release Motor protection ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
protection type
Thermal magnetic Distribution protection ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
release Motor protection ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Auxiliary contact ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Alarm contact ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Auxiliary contact, alarm contact ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Shunt release ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Under voltage release ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Accessories Manual operational mechanism ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Motor-driven mechanism ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Rear connection ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Plug-in type ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Extending terminal bonding bar ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Derivative product
For special use of prepaid ammeter ▪ - ▪ - ▪ - ▪ -
Overload alarm non-trip - - - - ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Width (2P/3P/4P) 56/78/103 56/78/103 63/90/120 78/105/140
Dimension and size(mm)
Height 135 135 155 165
Width (w) X height (H)X depth(D)
Depth (E/S/F/H type) 71/71/81/81 71/71/81/81 75.5/75.5/91/91 77/77/102/102
Functions and features Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-028
400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
M
250,280,300,315,320,350,400 400,450,500,600,630 630, 700, 800 800,900,1000 1000, 1250 1000, 1250,1600
1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

12 12 12 12 12 12
220/230/240, 380/400/415 220/230/240, 380/400/415 220/230/240, 380/400/415 220/230/240, 380/400/415 220/230/240, 380/400/415 220/230/240, 380/400/415
E S F H E S F H S F H S H S H S H
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
50 75 75 100 50 75 75 100 75 75 100 75 100 75 100 75 100
36 50 50 70 36 50 50 70 50 50 70 50 70 50 70 50 70
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
50 50 75 75 50 50 75 75 50 75 75 50 75 50 75 50 75
36 36 50 50 36 36 50 50 36 50 50 36 50 36 50 36 50
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
A A A A A A
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
≤100 ≤100 ≤100 ≤100 ≤100 ≤100
10000 10000 8000 5000 5000 5000

20000 20000 10000 10000 10000 10000
8000 8000 5000 2500 2500 2500
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ - - - -
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ - - - -
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ - - - - - - - - - - -
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ - - - -
140/185 140/185 182/240 210/280 210/280 210/280
257 257 270 280 370 370
108/108/108/108 108/108/108/108 113.5/113.5/113.5 117.5/117.5 152/152 1600A:157;<1600A:152
Frame size Inm(A) 160 250 400

Rated current In(A),40℃ 32、63、125、160 250 400
Rated insulation voltage Ui(V) 800 800 1000
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp(kV) 8 8 12
Rated operational voltage Ue(V),AC 50/60Hz 220/230/240、380/400/415、690* 220/230/240、380/400/415、690* 220/230/240、380/400/415、690*
Breaking capacity code F H F H S F H
Number of poles
3P ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
4P ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
AC220/230/240 50 75 50 75 75 75 100
Rated ultimate short circuit
AC380/400/415V 36 50 36 50 50 50 70
breaking capacity Icu(kA)
AC690V 10 10 10 10 10 10 15
AC220/230/240 50 50 50 50 50 75 75
Rated service short circuit
AC380/400/415V 36 36 36 36 36 50 50
breaking capacity Ics(kA)
AC690V 5 5 5 5 7.5 7.5 7.5
Rated shor-time withstand current Icw(kA),1s AC400/415V - - 8
In confromity with standard IEC/EN 60947-2
Utilization category A A B
Isolation function
▪ ▪ ▪
Arcing distance ≤50 ≤50 ≤100
Without maintenance 20000 20000 10000
With maintenance 40000 40000 20000
Electrical life (times) AC415V,In 10000 10000 8000
Electric release (times)

Distribution protection
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Motor protection
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Auxiliary contact
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Alarm contact
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Auxiliary contact, alarm contact
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Shunt release
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Under voltage release
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Communication module ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Maintenance tester ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Accessories Setting and monitoring software
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Remote indication contact ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Manual operational mechanism
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Rear connection
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Plug-in type
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Extending terminal bonding bar
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Temperature monitoring module
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Interphase barrier
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Width (3P/4P) 90/120 105/140 140/185
Dimension and size (mm)
Height 155 165 257
Width x height x depth
Depth (S/H type) 91/91 102 108/108
*690V only has CE certification

630 1000 1250 1600

630 800, 1000 1250 1600
M
1000 1000 1000 1000
12 12 12 12
220/230/240、380/400/415、690* 220/230/240、380/400/415、690* 220/230/240、380/400/415、690* 220/230/240、380/400/415、690*
S F H S H S H S H
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
75 75 100 75 100 75 100 75 100
50 50 70 50 70 50 70 50 70
10 10 15 15 20 - 30 - 30
50 75 75 50 75 50 75 50 75
36 50 50 36 50 36 50 36 50
7.5 7.5 7.5 12.5 15 - 20 - 20
8 12 19.2 19.2
B B B B
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
≤100 ≤100 ≤100 ≤100
10000 5000 5000 5000
20000 10000 10000 10000
8000 2500 2500 2500
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ - - - - - -
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ - - - -
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ - - - -
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
- - ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
140/185 210/280 210/280 210/280
257 280 370 370
108/108 117.5/117.5 152/152 157/157
*690V only has CE certification

NXMLE series residual current circuit breaker (Coming soon)
Frame size Inm(A) 125 160
10,16,20,25,32,40,50,
Rated operational current In (A), 40℃ 32,40,50,80,100,125,140,160
63,80,100,125
Rated insulation voltage Ui(V) 800 800

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp(kV) 8 8
Rated operational voltage Ue(V), AC 50/60Hz 220/230/240,380/400/415 220/230/240,380/400/415
Fixed single grade, non-delay type 30/50/100/200/300/500 30/50/100/200/300/500
Fixed single grade, delay type 50/100/200/300/500 50/100/200/300/500
A: 30/50/100 A: 30/50/100
B: 50/100/200 B: 50/100/200
Rated residual operating Adjustable three grades, non-delay type
C: 100/200/300 C: 100/200/300
current I Δn(mA)
D: 200/300/500 D: 200/300/500
B: 50/100/200 B: 50/100/200
C: 100/200/300 C: 100/200/300
Adjustable three grades, non-delay type
D: 200/300/500 D: 200/300/500
- -
Rated residual non-operating current IΔno(A) 0.5IΔn 0.5IΔn
Non-delay type 5I Δn, maximum breaking time(s) ≤0.04 ≤0.04
Delayed adjustable 2IΔn limit non-actuating time (s)non-adjustable 0.1/0.2/0.3, optional 0.1/0.2/0.3, optional
Delayed adjustable 2IΔn maximum breaking time 0.3/0.4/0.5, optional 0.3/0.4/0.5, optional
Breaking capacity code S F H S F H
1P+N ▪ - - ▪ - -
2P ▪ - - ▪ - -
Number of poles 3P ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
3P+N ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
4P ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Rated ultimate short circuit AC220/230/240 36 36 50 50 50 75
breaking capacity Icu(kA), AC380/400/415 25 18 36 35 25 50
Rated service short circuit AC220/230/240 18 36 36 30 50 50

breaking capacity Ics (kA) AC380/400/415 13 18 18 18 25 25
In conformity with standard IEC/EN 60947-2
Isolation function1) ▪ ▪
Arcing distance ≤50 ≤50
Without maintenance 20000 20000
With maintenance 40000 40000
Electrical life (times) AC415V,In 10000 10000
Auxiliary contact (1open and 1closed) ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Auxiliary contact (2open and 2closed) - - ▪ ▪
Alarm contact ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Auxiliary contact, alarm contact ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Shunt release ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Under voltage release ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Accessories Residual current alarm with non-trip module - -
▪ ▪
Manual operational mechanism ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Motor-driven mechanism ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Rear connection ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Plug-in type ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Extending terminal bonding bar ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Interphase barrier ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
Width (1PN/2P/3P/3PN/4P) 56/56/76/103/103 63/63/90/120/120
Dimension and sizes(mm)
width(W) x height(H) Height 156 160
x depth(D) Depth (S type and H type) 71/81 75.5/91
Note: 1) 1PN/3PN has no isolation function.

250 400 630
125,160,180,200,
250,280,315,320,350,400 400,500,630
M
225,250
800 800 800

8 8 8
220/230/240,380/400/415 220/230/240,380/400/415 220/230/240,380/400/415
30/50/100/200/300/500 50/100/200/300/500/1000 50/100/200/300/500/1000
50/100/200/300/500 50/100/200/300/500/1000 50/100/200/300/500/1000
A: 30/50/100 B: 50/100/200 B: 50/100/200
B: 50/100/200 C: 100/200/300 C: 100/200/300
C: 100/200/300 D: 200/300/500 D: 200/300/500
D: 200/300/500 E: 300/500/1000 E: 300/500/1000
B: 50/100/200 B: 50/100/200 B: 50/100/200
C: 100/200/300 C: 100/200/300 C: 100/200/300
D: 200/300/500 D: 200/300/500 D: 200/300/500
- E: 300/500/1000 E: 300/500/1000
0.5IΔn 0.5IΔn 0.5IΔn
≤0.04 ≤0.04 ≤0.04
0.1/0.2/0.3, optional 0.1/0.2/0.3, optional 0.1/0.2/0.3, optional
0.3/0.4/0.5, optional 0.3/0.4/0.5, optional 0.3/0.4/0.5, optional

S F H S F H S F H
▪ - - - - - - - -
▪ - - - - - - - -
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
50 50 75 75 75 100 75 75 100
35 25 50 50 36 70 50 36 70
30 50 50 50 75 75 50 75 75
18 25 25 25 36 36 25 36 36
IEC/EN 60947-2
A A A
▪ ▪ ▪
-35℃~+70℃
≤100 ≤100 ≤100
20000 10000 10000
40000 20000 20000
10000 8000 8000
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ 2)
▪ 2)
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
78/78/105/140/140 -/-/140/185/185 -/-/140/185/185
170 267 267

77/80 108/108 108/108
NXHM* series disconnector switch (Coming soon)
Conventional thermal current Ith(A), 40℃ 63 125 160

Rated current Ie (A) 63 125 160
Rated insulation voltage Ui (V) 800 800 800
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 8 8 8
Rated operational voltage Ue (V),AC 50/60Hz 400/415 400/415 400/415,690
Number of poles 3P/4P 3P/4P 3P/4P
Rated short-time withstand current ICW (peak value A)AC 400/415V 1s 800 1500 2000
In conformity with standards IEC/EN/ 60947-3
Utilization category AC-22A/AC-23A AC-22A/AC-23A AC-21A(B)/AC-22A(B)
Arcing distance ≤50 ≤50 ≤50 ≤50
Without maintenance 20000 20000 20000
With maintenance 40000 40000 40000
Electrical life (times) AC415V,In 10000 10000 10000
Auxiliary contact ■ ■ ■
Alarm contact ■ ■ ■
Auxiliary contact, alarm contact ■ ■ ■
Shunt release ■ ■ ■
Under voltage release ■ ■ ■
Manual operational mechanism ■ ■ ■

Accessories
Motor-driven mechanism ■ ■ ■
Rear connection ■ ■ ■
Plug-in ■ ■ -
Extending terminal bonding bar ■ ■ ■
Interphase barrier ■ ■ ■
Width (3P//4P) 78/103 78/103 90/120

Dimension and sizes (mm
Height 135 135 155
Width(W) x height(H) x depth(D))
Depth 71 71 75.5
*NXHM series product only has CE certification

250 400 630 800 1000

250 400 630 800 1000
1000
8
380/400/415/690
1000
12
400/415/690
1000
12
400/415/690
1000
12
400/415/690
1000
12
400/415/690
M
3P/4P 3P/4P 3P/4P 3P/4P 3P/4P
4000 5000 7800 10000 12000
IEC/EN 60947-3
AC-21A(B)/AC-22A(B) AC-21A(B)/AC-22A(B) AC-21A(B)/AC-22A(B) AC-21A(B)/AC-22A(B) AC-21A(B)/AC-22A(B)
-35℃~+70℃
≤50 ≤100 ≤100 ≤100 ≤100
20000 10000 10000 8000 5000

40000 20000 20000 10000 10000
10000 8000 8000 5000 2500
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
105/140 140/185 140/185 182/240 210/280

165 257 257 270 280
77 108 108 113.5 117.5
*NXHM series product only has CE certification

Protection Feature
Distribution protection –Only magnetic release
Only magnetic Setting of short circuit Setting value of short circuit protection
Frame size Inm(A) Rated current In(A) Release time
release protection current current Ii(A) and allowance
63 10~63 Fixed 10In , ±20%
125 10~125 Fixed 10In , ±20%
160 32~160 Fixed 10In , ±20%
250 125~250 Fixed 10In , ±20%
Short circuit 400 250~400 Fixed 10In , ±20% Instantaneous

protection action
630 400~630 Fixed 10In , ±20%
800 630~800 Fixed 10In , ±20%
1000 800~1000 Fixed 10In , ±20%
1250 1000~1250 Adjustable Ii : (7-8-9-10) In
1600 1000~1600 Adjustable Ii : (7-8-9-10) In
Setting of neutral pole Setting value of neutral pole short circuit

protection current protection current (A) and allowance
63 10~63 Fixed Ii , ±20%
125 10~125 Fixed Ii , ±20%
160 32~160 Fixed Ii , ±20%

Neutral pole
protection Instantaneous
250 125~250 Fixed Ii , ±20%
(code of N action
poles C/D) 400 250~400 Fixed Ii , ±20%
630 400~630 Fixed Ii , ±20%
800 630~800 Fixed Ii , ±20%
1000 800~1000 Fixed Ii , ±20%
1250 1000~1250 Adjustable Ii : (7-8-9-10) In
1600 1000~1600 Adjustable Ii : (7-8-9-10) In
Distribution protection—Thermal magnetic release
Thermal magnetic Frame size I (A) Setting of overcurrent

nm Rated current In(A) Release feature
release protection
Overload
protection
63A~1000A 10A~1000A Fixed
I2t=constant
1.05In(cold state), 2h non-trip(In＞63A), 1h non-trip(In≤63A)
1.30In(heat state), 2h trip(In＞63A), 1h trip(In≤63A)
M
1600 1000A~1600A Adjustable IR adjustable range: (0.7-0.8-0.9-1)In
Thermal magnetic Frame size I (A) Setting of short circuit Setting value of short circuit protection
nm Rated current In(A) Release time
release protection current current Ii(A) and allowance
63 10~63 Fixed 10In , ±20%
125 10~125 Fixed 10In , ±20%
160 32~160 Fixed 10In , ±20%
250 125~250 Fixed 10In , ±20%
Short circuit 400 250~400 Fixed 10In , ±20% Instantaneous

protection action
630 400~630 Fixed 10In , ±20%
800 630~800 Fixed 10In , ±20%
1000 800~1000 Fixed 10In , ±20%
1250 1000~1250 Adjustable Ii : (7-8-9-10) In
1600 1000~1600 Adjustable Ii : (7-8-9-10) In
Setting value of neutral pole overload

Setting of neutral pole
Frame size Inm(A) Rated current In(A) protection current(A)setting value
protection current
neutral pole short circuit protection current(A)
63 10~63 Fixed IR , Ii , ±20%
125 10~125 Fixed IR , Ii , ±20%
160 32~160 Fixed IR , Ii , ±20%

Neutral pole
protection 250 125~250 Fixed IR , Ii , ±20%
(code of N
pole C/D) 400 250~400 Fixed IR , Ii , ±20%
630 400~630 Fixed IR , Ii , ±20%
800 630~800 Fixed IR , Ii , ±20%
1000 800~1000 Fixed IR , Ii , ±20%
1250 1000~1250 Adjustable Ii : (7-8-9-10) In
1600 1000~1600 Adjustable Ii : (7-8-9-10) In
Protection Feature
Distribution protection—Electronic release
Electronic release Frame size Inm(A) Rated current In(A) Setting of overcurrent protection IR (A) Release feature/time
32 16-18-20-22-25-28-30-32
63 32-36-40-45-50-56-60-63
160
125 63-70-75-80-90-100-110-125
160 80-90-100-110-125-140-150-160
250 250 125-140-150-160-180-200-225-250 I2t=constant
Overload long-time- 1.05IR , no action within 2h
400 400 200-225-250-280-300-315-350-400 1.3IR , action with 1h
delay protection
630 630 400-450-480-500-530-560-600-630 2IR , tR=(12-60-80-100)s, Inm＜400A
2IR , tR=(12-60-100-150)s, Inm≥400A
800 630-660-680-700-720-750-780-800
1000
1000 630-680-720-780-820-900-950-1000
1250 1250 630-700-800-900-1000-1100-1200-1250
1600 1600 800-900-1000-1100-1250-1400-1500-1600
Action allowance ±10%
Short circuit short-time-

All series 32~1600 Isd=(1.5-2-3-4-5-6-8)IR+OFF
delay protection
tsd=0.3,±0.06s
Instantaneous protection 160~1600 32~1600 Ii=(2-3-4-6-8-10-12)IR+OFF
Instantaneous action
Neutral pole protection

All series 32~1600 IRN=(0.5 ,1)In+OFF, Adjustable
(code of four pole C/D)
Indication of overload All series 32~1600 IR0=1.2IR

Distribution protection—Only magnetic release + residual current release
Setting value of short circuit

Only magnetic Rated Setting of short circuit
Frame size Inm(A) protection current Ii(A) Release time
release current In(A) protection current
M
and allowance
125 10~125 Fixed 10In , ±20%
160 125,160 Fixed 10In , ±20%

Short circuit
protection 250 160~250 Fixed 10In , ±20%
400 315~400 Fixed 10In , ±20%
630 400~630 Fixed 10In , ±20%
800 630~800 Fixed 10In , ±20%
Residual current Residual current Setting value of rated residual

Frame size Inm(A) Release time
Release type release type current IΔn (A)
Non delay: single grade

30/50/100/200/300/500
and non-adjustable
Three grades and adjustable A/B/C/D

125/160/250 AC Type
Delay type: single grade Non-delay type 5IΔn
50/100/200/300/500 maximum breaking time(s) ≤0.4
and non-adjustable
Residual action Three grades and adjustable B/C/D Delay type 2IΔn limit
non-driving time (s) 0.1 0.2 0.3
current protection Non delay: single grade and
50/100/200/300/500/1000 Adjustable
non-adjustable Delay type 2IΔn maximum
breaking time(s) 0.3 0.4 0.5
Three grades and adjustable B/C/D/E Adjustable
400/630 AC Type
Delay type: single grade and
50/100/200/300/500/1000
non-adjustable
Three grades and adjustable B/C/D/E

Protection Feature
Distribution protection—Thermal magnetic release+ residual current release
Thermal magnetic Frame size I (A) Rated Overload protection

nm Release feature
release current In(A) current Setting
I2t=constant
Overload
All series 10A~800A Fixed 1.05 In(cold state), 2h non-release(In＞63A),1h non-release(In≤63A)
protection
1.30 In(heat state), 2h release(In＞63A),1h release(In≤63A)
Setting value of short circuit

Rated Setting of short circuit
Frame size Inm(A) protection current Ii(A) Release time
current In(A) protection current
and allowance
125 10~125 Fixed 10In , ±20%
Short circuit 160 125,160 Fixed 10In , ±20%

protection
250 160~250 Fixed 10In , ±20%
400 315~400 Fixed 10In , ±20%
630 400~630 Fixed 10In , ±20%
Setting value of rated

Frame size Inm(A) Residual current release type Release time
residual current IΔn(A)

30/50/100/200/300/500
and non-adjustable
Three grades and adjustable A/B/C/D Non-delay type 5IΔn maximum

125/160/250 AC type ≤0.4
breaking time(s)
Delay type: single grade
50/100/200/300/500
and non-adjustable
Residual current Delay type 2IΔn limit non-driving
protection Three grades and adjustable B/C/D time (s) 0.1 0.2 0.3
Adjustable
50/100/200/300/500/1000
and non-adjustable
Delay type 2IΔn maximum
Three grades and adjustable B/C/D/E breaking time(s) 0.3 0.4 0.5
400/630 AC type Adjustable
50/100/200/300/500/1000
and non-adjustable
Motor protection—Only magnetic release
Only magnetic Setting of short circuit Setting value of short circuit

release protection current protection current Ii(A) and allowance
63 10~63 Fixed 12In , ±20%

M
125 10~125 Fixed 12In , ±20%
160 32~160 Fixed 12In , ±20%
Short circuit
400 250~400 Fixed 12In , ±20%
630 400~630 Fixed 12In , ±20%
800 630~800 Fixed 12In , ±20%
Setting of neutral pole Setting value of neutral pole overload protection current(A)
Frame size Inm(A) Rated current In(A)
protection current Setting value neutral pole short circuit protection current(A)
63 10~63 Fixed IR , Ii , ±20%

125 10~125 Fixed IR , Ii , ±20%
Neutral pole
125,160 Fixed IR , Ii , ±20%
protection 160
(code of N 125,160 Fixed IR , Ii , ±20%
pole C/D)
250 160~250 Fixed IR , Ii , ±20%
400 315~400 Fixed IR , Ii , ±20%
630 400~630 Fixed IR , Ii , ±20%
800 630~800 Fixed IR , Ii , ±20%
Protection Feature
Motor protection—Thermal magnetic release
Thermal magnetic Setting of overcurrent

Frame size Inm(A) Rated current In(A) Release feature
release protection
I2t=constant
1.0In(cold state), ＞2h non release
Overload 1.2In(hot state), ≤2h release
125~800 25~630A Fixed
protection 7.2In(hot state),4s≤T≤10s, 10A≤In≤225A
6s≤T≤20s, 225A＜In≤630A(including 800A frame 630A)
Trip class: 10(≤160A), 20(160A＜In≤630A)
Thermal magnetic Setting of short circuit Setting value of short circuit

release protection current protection current Ii(A) and allowance
63 10~63 Fixed 12In , ±20%
125 10~125 Fixed 12In , ±20%
160 32~160 Fixed 12In , ±20%
Short circuit
400 250~400 Fixed 12In , ±20%
630 400~630 Fixed 12In , ±20%
800 630~800 Fixed 12In , ±20%
Setting of neutral pole Setting value of neutral pole overload protection current(A)
Frame size Inm(A) Rated current In(A)
protection current Setting value neutral pole short circuit protection current(A)
63 10~63 Fixed IR, Ii, ±20%
125 10~125 Fixed IR, Ii, ±20%
Neutral pole
125,160 Fixed IR, Ii, ±20%
protection 160
(code of N 125,160 Fixed IR, Ii, ±20%
pole C/D) Fixed
250 160~250 IR, Ii, ±20%
400 315~400 Fixed IR, Ii, ±20%
630 400~630 Fixed IR, Ii, ±20%
800 630~800 Fixed IR, Ii, ±20%
Motor protection—Electronic release
Setting of overcurrent
Electronic release Frame size Inm (A) Rated current In (A) Release feature/time
protection IR (A)
M
32 16-18-20-22-25-28-30-32
63 32-36-40-45-50-56-60-63 I2t=constant
160
100 1.05IR No actuation within 2h
63-70-75-80-85-90-95-100
1.2IR Actuation within 1h
Overload long-time- 125 63-70-75-80-90-100-110-125
delay protection Release class 10A 10 20 30
160 80-90-100-110-125-140-150-160
1.5IR 53 107 178 267
200 100-125-140-150-160-170-180-200
2IR 30 60 100 150
250 250 125-140-150-160-180-200-225-250
7.2IR 2.3 4.6 7.7 11.6
400 400 200-225-250-280-300-315-350-400
Delay time accuracy: ±20%
630 630 400-450-480-500-530-560-600-630
Operation allowance ±20%

Short circuit short-time-
160~630 32~630 Isd=(1.5-2-3-4-5-6-8)IR+OFF
delay protection
tsd=0.3,±0.06s
Instantaneous protection 160~630 32~630 Ii=(2-4-6-8-10-12-14)IR+OFF
Neutral pole protection

160~630 32~630 IRN= (0.5, 1)IR+OFF, adjustable
(N pole code C/D)
Overload indication 160~630 IR0=1.2IR

Protection Feature
Motor protection—Only magnetic release + residual current release
Only magnetic Setting of short circuit Setting value of short circuit protection
Frame size Inm (A) Rated current In (A) Release time
release protection current current Ii (A) and allowance
125 10~125 Fixed 12In , ±20%
Short circuit 160 125,160 Fixed 12In , ±20%

400 315~400 Fixed 12In , ±20%
630 400~630 Fixed 12In , ±20%
Residual current Residual current Setting value of rated

Frame size Inm (A) Release time
Release type release type residual current IΔn(A)

30/50/100/200/300/500
and non-adjustable

125/160/250 AC type ≤0.4
breaking time(s)
50/100/200/300/500
and non-adjustable
Delay type 2IΔn limit non-driving
Residual action Three grades and adjustable B/C/D time (s) 0.1 0.2 0.3
Adjustable
current protection
50/100/200/300/500/1000
and non-adjustable
50/100/200/300/500/1000
and non-adjustable
Motor protection—Thermal magnetic release+ residual current release
Thermal magnetic Overload protection

Frame size Inm (A) Rated current In (A) Release feature
release current setting
I2t=constant
1.0In (cold state),>2h non release
1.2In (hot state),≤2h release
Overload 1.5In (hot state),≤4min, 10A≤In≤225A
125~800 25A~630A Stationary
protection ≤8min, 225A＜In≤630A (including800A housing 630A)
7.2In (hot state),4s≤T≤10s, 10A≤In≤225A
6s≤T≤20s, 225A＜In≤630A (including800A housing 630A) release class:
10 (≤160A), 20 (160A＜In≤630A)
Motor protection—Thermal magnetic release+ residual current release
Thermal magnetic Setting of short Setting value of short circuit protection

Frame size Inm (A) Rated current In (A) Release time
release circuit protection current current Ii (A) and allowance
63 10~63
10~125
Stationary
Stationary
12In, ±20%
12In, ±20%
M
125
125,160 Stationary
160
Short circuit 125,160 Stationary 12In, ±20%
protection
250 160~250 Stationary 12In, ±20%
400 315~400 Stationary 12In, ±20%
630 400~630 Stationary 12In, ±20%
Residual current Residual current Setting value of rated

Frame size Inm (A) Trip time
release type release type residual current IΔn (A)

30/50/100/200/300/500
and non-adjustable

125/160/250 AC type ≤0.4
breaking time(s)
50/100/200/300/500
and non-adjustable
Delay type 2IΔn limit non-driving
Three grades and adjustable B/C/D time (s) 0.1 0.2 0.3
Residual current
Adjustable
protection
50/100/200/300/500/1000
and non-adjustable
50/100/200/300/500/1000
and non-adjustable

Inner Accessories
AX auxiliary contact
Function: Remote indication of "ON" , ''OFF'' position of the breaker, connect to the
control circuit of breaker.
Model description
AX-□□□□
Applicable product: general (omit)，residual current type (LE)
AX-M3 auxiliary contact Applicable product poles: 2P(2), general (omit)
Installation site code : left side installation (code L) and right side
installation (code R)
Frame size code (see table1)
Name code of auxiliary contact
Table1 Frame size code
Frame size 63/125 160 250 400/630 800 1000 1250/1600

Code M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7
For example: 63/125 frame right auxiliary contact code: AX-M1R
To indicate the "ON" or "OFF "state of circuit breaker
Schematic diagram of
Opening or free FX12
assembly of auxiliary FX11
trip OFF & TRIP FX14
contact with the body
AX
FX12
Closing ON FX11
FX14
Electrical characteristics
AC-15 DC-13
Operational voltage (V)
AC380/400/415 DC110 DC220/250
63~320 0.26 0.14 0.14
Operational
400~1000 0.4 0.2 0.2
current (A)
1250,1600 0.47 0.27 0.27
Wiring diagram
Auxiliary contact can be wired with indicator light.
The operator can know the location of switch ‘’ON‘’or‘’OFF‘’
without open the power
distribution cabinet via indicator light.
Power supply
F11 QF
H
F14 loop of
switching on
Loop of
switching off
F12 L12
Inner Accessories
AL alarm contact
Function: It is mainly used to provide signal in case of failure of circuit breaker or free trip.
Reasons for alarm contact to send failure indication signal:
M
▪ Overload or short circuit trip
▪ Under voltage trip
▪ Residual current operated trip
▪ Manual free trip
Model description
AL-M6 alarm contact
AL- □□□□
Applicable product poles: 2P(2), general (omit)
Name code of alarm contact
For instance: the left alarm contact code of 63/125 frame is: AL-M1L
Table1 frame size code
Frame size 63/125 160 250/320 400/630 800 1000
Schematic diagram of assembly of Code M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6

alarm contact with the body
To indicate the "ON" or "OFF“ state of circuit breaker
Open or close B12

B11
OFF & ON B14
AL
B12
TRIP B11
B14
AC-15 DC-13
Operational voltage (V)
AC380/400/415 DC110 DC220/250
63~320 0.26 0.14 0.14
Operational
400~1000 0.4 0.2 0.2
current (A)
1250,1600 0.47 0.27 0.27
Wiring diagram
Alarm contact can be connected with indicator light, buzzer and the like, and thus
the operator can be timely informed in case of release of circuit breaker.
Power supply
B11 QF
B14
B12
Inner Accessories
UVT under voltage release

Function: To switch off the circuit breaker in case of under voltage of power supply so as
to protect the electric equipment.
▪ The under voltage release shall switch off the circuit breaker reliably when the power
supply voltage decreases (or even decrease slowly) to 70%-35% of rated control power
supply voltage.
UV T-M4 under voltage release
▪ It shall ensure the closing of breaker when the power supply voltage equals to or is
more than 85% of rated control power supply voltage of under voltage release.
▪ The under voltage release shall be able to prevent closing of circuit breaker when the
supply voltage is less than 35% of rated control supply voltage of under voltage release.
Model description
UVT- □□□□□
Applicable product: Thermal-magnetic (omit)，residual current
type(LE): Electronic(E)
Applicable voltage code (see table2, only A1, A2 are applicable)
Schematic diagram of assembly Name code of under voltage release

of under voltage release and non-
release module with the body Table2 Applicable voltage code
For example: right under voltage release code of 63/125 frame 400V: UV T-M1A2
Frame size 63/125 160 250/320 400/630 800 1000 1250/1600

Voltage AC220V/230V/240V AC380V/400V/415V DC24V DC110V DC220V

Code A1 A2 D1 D2 D3
Under voltage release code (VA or W)

Frame size (A)
AC220V/230V/240V AC380V/400V/415V
63/125 3.1 4
160 3.2 3.9
250/320 3.3 4.3
400/630 2.5 3.6
800 1.6 2
1000 1.6 2
1600 1.6 2
Switching off reliably 35%~70%

Operating conditions (XU6) Preventing closing ≤35%
Closing reliably ≥85%
Response time 1s
Operation times 1000
Wiring diagram
M
X Uc2 Uc P1 P2
power supply
Inner Accessories
SHT shunt release
Function: Shunt release is an accessory for remote control.

The shunt release shall be able to make circuit breaker operating reliably when the
power voltage equals to any voltage within the range of 70%~110% of rated control
power voltage.
SHT-M2 shunt release Model description
SHT- □□□□□
Name code of shunt release
For example: left shunt release code of 63/125 housing 400V: SHT-M1A2L
Frame size 63/125 160 250/320 400/630 800 1000 1250/1600

Schematic diagram of assembly of
shunt release with the body
Table2 Applicable voltage code

Code A1 A2 D1 D2 D3
Code of under voltage release (VA or W)

Frame size(A)
AC220V/230V/240V AC380V/400V/415V DC24V DC110V DC220V
63/125 76 91.5 91 80 136
160 73 96.5 91 52.8 71
250/320 68.5 112 85.3 58 66
400/630 62.5 68 100 105 56
800 153 168 120 105 56
1000 153 163 120 105 56
1250/1600 175 183 140 143 286
Reliable operating voltage 70%~110%XUs
Conduction time minimum 10ms

(pulse mode) maximum 1s
Response time 30ms
Number of operations 1000
Wiring diagram
Shunt release M
K
C1 C2
SB
External Accessories
MD motor-driven mechanism
Function: it is applicable for switching circuit breaker on and off and retrip remotely, as
well as automation application.
Model description
MD - □□□□
Applicable product: Thermal-magnetic (omit), Electronic type (E),

residual current type (LE).
MD-M2 electric operational mechanism
Product breaking capacity: General (omit), S,H.
Name code of motor-driven mechanism
For example: motor driven code of 63/125 frame moulded case circuit breaker
400V: MD-M1A2
Frame size 63/125 160 250/320 400/630 800 1000 1250/1600

Table2 Applicable voltage code

Code A1 A2 D1 D2 D3
Schematic diagram of assembly of

motor-driven mechanism with the body
Category Model 63/125/250/320 frame All series

Structural style Electromagnet DC-AC
AC110V, 230V, 400V, AC220V, 230V, 240V,

Voltage specification AC230V, 400V AC380V, 400V, 415V,
DC24V, 110V, 220V, DC110V, 220V
Rated frequency 50Hz 50/60 Hz
Wiring diagram
Powersupply
Power supply Control
Control appliance
circuit apparatus
X P1 P2 S1 S2 S4
SB1(Making)
SB2(Breaking)
External power source
Description: SB1, SB2 is separately the on and off button;

P1, P2 are the external power line terminal. P1 will be connected to“+”, and P2 will be
connected to “-”if the external power source is DC.
Installation sketch of electric operational mechanism
63A 250A 400A

Frame size 160A 800A 1000A 1250/1600A
125A 320A 630A
Installation size H(mm) 93 97 97.5 154 153 154.5 156

ERH manual operational mechanism
Function: It realizes switching on, off and restriping via rotary handle according to human
body mechanics with unique design and transmission device.
Model description
ERH - □□
Category code of adaptive products: thermal magnetic type;

electronic type (no code)
residual current (code LE)
ERH-M6
Frame size (table 1)
Name code of manual operational mechanism
For example: manual operational mechanism code of 63/125 frame residual current
operating: ERH-M1LE
Frame size 63/125 160 250/320 400/630 800 1000 1250/1600

Installation diagram of manual operational mechanism
Φ65
H
18
Scheme diagram of assembly
of manual operational
mechanism with the body
frame current：63, 125, 160,
250, 400, 630, 800, 1000
10
53
Φ36
30.5
45°
D
Min=150mm
2-Φ5.5
frame current：1250, 1600
63A 250A 400A

Frame size 160A 800A 1000A 1250/1600A
125A 320A 630A
Installation sizes(mm) 53.5 61.5 63.5 98 97 97 68.5

PIA-M2
PIA plug-in basement

Function: It is convenient to replace moulded case circuit breaker without disassembling inlet-outlet line.
Model description
PIA-□□
Applicable product poles: 3(3p),4(4p) M

Frame size code(see table1)
Name code of plug-in basement
For example: plug-in basement code of 160 frame three-pole circuit breaker: PIA-M2 3
FCP front connection plate
Function: It grants the breaker a flexible line connecting way. The phase spacing can
increase via accessories so as to increase the electrical space between the adjacent
phases of line terminal of input and output of breaker, and thus increase the safety
FCP-M4
among the lines.
Model description:
FCP - □□
Pole number code of adaptive product: two poles (code 2), three poles
(code 3), four poles (code 4)
Frame size code (table 1)
Name code of front connection plate
For example: 63/125 frame three-pole circuit front connection place code: FCP-M13

Assembly scheme diagram of
front connection plate and Frame size 63/125 160 250/320 400/630 800 1000 1250/1600
the body
RCP rear connection plate
Function: It grants the breaker with flexible line connecting way, which is used to match
the switch board or other requirements so as to realize the line connecting on the back
of the installation plate.
Model description
RCP-M3
RCP - □□
Pole number code of adaptive product: two poles (code 2), three poles
(code 3), four poles (code 4)
Frame size code (table 1)
Name code of rear connection plate
For example: 63/125 frame three-pole circuit breaker with rear connection plate
code: RCP-M 13

Assembly scheme diagram
of rear connection plate
and the body Frame size 63/125 160 250/320 400/630 800 1000 1250/1600
Handheld test module (PTU-1)
Handheld test module is the extension of the circuit breaker function, it can connection
circuit breaker through USB interface, also the information of circuit breaker can be
M
displayed in the handheld test module. User can query and set the parameters of the circuit
breaker as needed. Users can easily monitor and repair the circuit breaker.
▪ Features:
▪ Query the factory parameters, shell current, rated current, communication address and
other informations of the circuit breaker;
▪ Query overload long delay, short delay, short circuit instantaneous, N phase protection,
ground fault current value,operating time and other settings parameters;
▪ Query real-time phase current value of the circuit breaker ABCN phase, the last fault alarm
PTU-1
current parameter value;
▪ Set the protection characteristic parameter of circuit breaker.(Not available for Dial-type
electronic circuit breakers);
▪ Can set the display brightness, screensaver power, serial communication parameters and
circuit breaker communication address;
▪ Circuit breaker analog signal trip test.
characteristic:
Power supply Single 14500 lithium-ion battery

Data interface
Battery capacity ≥800mAh
Operational Voltage 3.7 ~ 4.2V
Charging method USB +5V
Control mode Pushbutton
LCD screen 3.2 inch TFT color, vertical screen display
Backlight brightness 1~100 level adjustment
Screensaver saving 30 to 120 seconds can be set, can be closed
Battery power monitoring Yes
Continuous working hours 2h
Operating temperature -25℃～ +70℃
Charging interface Protocol：Modbus-RTU

Wired communication
Serial communication rate：1200/2400/4800/9600/19200bps
▪ Operating:
▪ Use five navigation keys with three shortcuts and one power key, it can provide users with
simple and quick operation experience;
▪ The five navigation keys default to up, down, left, right, and confirmation;
▪ The three shortcut keys are R, W, T, respectively, for the read parameters, set the parameters
of the test test trip;
▪ Power key press two seconds to switch operation, and operating tips are on the bottom
of each pages.
Navigation key interface
Modbus Communication module(COMA-3)
COMA-3 external Modbus communication module (Electronic type) is the extension of the
circuit breaker function. Through the connection with the circuit breaker communication
Power Indicator
interface to achieve the physical layer of signal conversion. The interface of the RS485
communication module can be connected to the host computer and realize the remote
function of the circuit breaker.
▪ Features:
COMA-3
▪ Built-in power supply module, can connect with an external power of 220V AC or 24V DC;
▪ Features:The communication module will supplies power to the circuit breaker electronic
release;
▪ Features:Can convert the communication single between the circuit breaker and host
computer;
▪ Features:Remote control of two relay output by receiving the instructions of the host
computer;
▪ Features:Meet the users` need of the circuit breaker network construction.
▪ Characteristic:
Voltage DC24V
R485 Connection port Power consumption ≤2.8W
Communication rate RS485 Communication baud rate：1200/2400/4800/9600/19200 bps
Relay output capacity 5A，DC 30V
Operating temperature -25℃～ +70℃
▪ Installation
▪ Installation via DIN35-7.5 standard rail.
Circuit breaker communication

interface
Complementary Technical Data

Altitude reducing capacity and correction coefficient table
It has no impact on the breaker feature where the altitude equals to 2000 m or below. The breaker electrical feature shall be corrected
according to the following table.
Altitude (m)
Correction coefficient of operating current
2000
1In
3000
0.94In
4000
0.88In
5000
0.85In
M
Maximum operationnal voltage (V) 690 600 500 440
Insulation voltage (V) 1000 800 700 600
Plug-in and rear connection current derating table
Frame size Rated current(A) Plug-in derating current(A) Note

500 450
630
630 520
700 650
800
800 720
900 850
1000
1000 920
Note: There is no need of current derating as no specification in the table

Altitude derating curve
Maximum operation
69
60
50
44
2000 3000 4000 5000 Altitude (mm)
Electronic type derating coefficient table
Long-time delay
Frame size Rated current -25℃ -20℃ -15℃ -10℃ -5℃ -0℃ Rated current 40℃ 45℃ 50℃ 55℃ 60℃ 65℃ 70℃
current setting
32A、63A、 I R<0.65In 1.2I R 1.2I R 1.1I R 1.1I R 1.05I R 1.05I R 32A、63A、125A 1.0In 0.9In 0.85In 0.8In 0.8In
NXMS-160
125A、160A I R >0.65In 1.0I R 160A 1.0In 0.9In 0.85In 0.8In 0.7In 0.7In
I R <0.58In 1.15I R 1.15 I R 1.15I R 1.05I R 1.05I R 1.05I R
NXMS-250 250A 250A 1.0In 0.9In 0.85In 0.8In 0.8In
I R >0.58In 1.0I R
400A 1.0In 0.9In 0.85In 0.8In 0.8In
NXMS-630 400A、630A ALL 1.0I R
630A 1.0In 0.9In 0.85In 0.8In 0.7In 0.7In
NXMS-1000 800A、1000A ALL 1.0I R 800A 1.0In 0.9In 0.85In 0.8In 0.8In
Power loss table
3/4pole total power loss

Product model Making current(A) Single pole resistance (mΩ)
Front connection Rear connection Plug-in rear connection
NXM-63 63 0.75 24 27 28
NXM-125 125 0.72 28 31 32
NXM-160 160 0.4 60 87 89
NXM-250
NXM-400
NXM-630
250
400
630
0.2
0.15
0.14
63
68
180
90
72
190
90
100
200
M
NXM-800 800 0.08 200 230 290
NXM-1000 1000 0.06 250 280 300
NXM-1600 1600 0.027 280 _ _
NXMS-160 160 0.2 40 50 62

NXMS-250 250 0.18 50 75 86
NXMS-400 400 0.1 58 87 90
NXMS-630 630 0.08 110 120 130
NXMS-1000 1000 0.05 140 155 167
NXMS-1600 1600 0.02 250 _ _
NXMLE-160 160 0.73 60 87 89

NXMLE-250 250 0.27 63 90 90
NXMLE-400 400 0.11 68 72 100
NXMLE-630 630 0.09 180 190 200
NXHM-63 63 0.4 28 31 35
NXHM-125 125 0.6 60 87 87
NXHM-160 160 0.2 40 50 62
NXHM-250 250 0.18 50 75 86
NXHM-400 400 0.1 58 87 90
NXHM-630 630 0.08 110 120 130
NXHM-800 800 0.05 200 230 290

NXHM-1000 1000 0.02 140 155 167
Parameter table of connecting cable/copper bar

The reference section of connecting cable/copper bar with different rated current is as follows.
Rated current (A) Section of wire (mm2)
10 1.5
16, 20 2.5
25 4.0
32 6.0
40, 50 10
63 16
80 25
100 35
125, 140 50
160 70
180, 200, 225 95
250 120
280, 315, 320, 350 185
400 240
Cable Copper bar

Rated current (A)
Section (mm2) Quantity Width x thickness (mm) Quantity
500 150 2 30×5 2
630 185 2 40×5 2
50×5 2
700, 800 240 2
50×10 1
50×5 3
900, 1000 - -
63×10 1
50×5 3
1250 - -
40×10 2
60×5 4
1600 - -
60×10 2
The above reference section is the reference value under 40 degrees operating environmental temperature.
The recommended value of tightening torque of different housing current connecting cable/copper bar is as follows:
Rated current (A) 63A/125A 160A 250A/320A 400A/630A 800A 1000A 1250A/1600A
1)
Torque (N m) 3/64)
10 12 30 30 40 30
Torque (N m)2) 3/64) 10 12 30 30 40 30
Torque (N m)3) 3/64) 10 12 30 30 40 30
1)
Tighten the torque of busbar (or extension busbar/connection lug) in case of connecting with the body directly.
2)
Tighten the torque of connecting terminal behind the stationary breaker/tighten the torque of connecting terminal of plug in breaker.
3)
Tighten the torque of extension busbar of terminal on the plug-in pedestal.
4)
Value of torque is 3 for 10A~63A of frame current 63 and 125A breaker, value of torque is 6 for 70A~125A for frame current 125A breaker.
Dimensions and installation Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-062
NXM- 63E/S/F/H, 125E/S/F/H, NXHM- 63, 125
Front connection, dimension (mm)
75 D2
50 50 D1
25 25 25 S:21 D
H:31
49
49
49
2P 3P 4P
1 3LINE 1 3 5LINE 1 3 5 N
LINE
M
27.5
27.5
27.5
ON
ON
ON
X X X X
121
121
121
135
55.5
55.5
55.5
OFF
OFF
OFF
LOAD LOAD LOAD

2 4 2 4 6 2 4 6 N
Y Y Y
18 18 18
26 26 23
Z
56 78 103
NXMLE-125S/F/H
75 D2
50 50 D1
25 25 25 21 D
49
49
49
1PN/2P 3P 3PN/4P
1 N 1 3 5 LINE 1 3 5 N LINE
LINE
ON
ON
38
38
ON
38
55.5
55.5
55.5
X X X
150
X
142
142
142
OFF
OFF
OFF
LOAD LOAD LOAD

1 N 2 4 6 2 4 6 N
Y Y Y
18 18 18
23 23 23
Z
56 78 103
NXM-63E/F/S/H, 125E/F/S/H, NXHM-63,125,NXMLE-125F/S/H
Installation size of baseplate
50
25 25
12.5 12.5 12.5
1PN/2P 3P 3PN/4P
2-Φ4.5 4-Φ4.5 6-Φ4.5

(H1/2)
(H1/2)
(H1/2)
H1
X X X
H1
H1
Y Y Y
Specification H1
D1 D2 D Remark
and model 1PN/2P 3P 3PN/4P
NXM-63E/S、125E/S 71 90 7 117 117 117 2P/3P/4P
NXM-63F/H、125F/H 81 100 7 - 117 117 3P/4P
NXMLE-125S 71 90 7 138 138 138 1PN/2P/3P/3PN/4P
NXMLE-125F/H 81 100 7 - 138 138 3P/3PN/4P
NXHM-63、125 71 90 7 - 117 117 3P/4P
P-063 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Dimensions and installation
NXM-63E/S/F/H, 125E/S/F/H, NXMLE-125S/F/H, NXHM-63, 125
Rear connection (mm)
100.5
100.5
67.5
67.5 3PN/4P
3P
H3
H2
50
Y Y
50
50
M8
M8
Rear connection (mm)
75
50
50 25
25 12.5 12.5
3P 3PN/4P
41.7
X X
H3
H3
H4
H4
4-Φ4.5 6-Φ4.5
6 -Φ11.8 8 -Φ11.8
Y Y
Specification and model H2 H3 H4 Remark

NXM-63E/S/F/H, 125E/S/F/H 135 121 117 3P/4P
NXMLE-125S/F/H 156 142 138 3P/3PN/4P
NXHM-63, 125 135 121 117 3P/4P
Plug-in rear connection (mm)
50.5
44.5 106(3PN/4P)
29.5 80(3P)
8.5 40
3PN/4P
3PN/4P
M5
25
X 50 25
H10
H5
H6
H7
H8
H9
X
(H5)
4-Φ5.5
M6
2
Specification and model H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 Remark

NXM-63E/S/F/H、125E/S/F/H 60 75 121 159 92 144 3P/4P
NXMLE-125S/F/H 60 98 142 183 112 165 3P/3PN/4P
NXHM-63、125 60 75 121 159 92 144 3P/4P
Cabinet gate hole (small) size (mm)
NXM-63, 125
NXHM-63, 125 NXMLE-125
25 25 25
1PN/2P 3P 3PN/4P
M
X X X X X
57.5
57.5
D3 ≤2 D3 ≤2 57.5 Y Y Y
Z Z
Cabinet gate hole (large) size (mm)
NXM-63、125
NXHM-63、125 NXMLE-125
58 80 105
16.5 40 40 D
1PN/2P 3P 3PN/4P
X X X X X
H11
H11
H11
≤2 ≤2
D4 D4 Y Y Y
Z Z
Specification H11
D3 D4 Remark
NXM-63E/S, 125E/S 71.5 64.5 88 88 88 2P/3P/4P
NXM-63F/H, 125F/H 81.5 74.5 - 88 88 3P/4P
NXMLE-125S 71 64 110 110 110 1PN/2P/3P/3PN/4P
NXMLE-125F/H 81 74 - 110 110 3P/3PN/4P
NXHM-63, 125 71 64 - 87.5 87.5 3P/4P
NXM-160E/S/F/H, NXHM-160
Rear connection, dimension (mm)
90 D5
60 60 D6
30 30 30 24.5 D
50
50
50
2P 3P 4P
1 N 1 3 5 1 3 5 N
LINE LINE LINE
24.5
24.5
24.5
ON
ON
ON
X X X X
135
135
155
135
51.7
51.7
51.7
OFF
OFF
OFF
LOAD LOAD LOAD
2 N 2 4 6 2 4 6 N
Y Y Y
17 17 17
32 32 29
Z
63 90 120
NXMS-160F/H
90 D5
60 60 D6
30 50 30 24.5 D
50
3P 4P
1 3 5 1 3 5 N
LINE LINE
24.5
24.5
ON
ON
45.5
45.5
X X X
135
155
135
OFF
OFF
LOAD LOAD
2 4 6 2 4 6 N
Y Y
17 17
29 29
Z
90 120
NXMLE-160S/F/H
90 D5
60 60 D6
30 30 30 24.5 D
50
50
50
1PN/2P 3P 3PN/4P
1 N 1 3 5
LINE LINE
28.5
27
29
ON
ON
51.7
51.7
51.7
X X X X
160
140
140
140
OFF
OFF
LOAD LOAD
2 N 2 4 6
Y Y Y
17 17 17
29 29 29
Z
63 90 120
NXM-160E/S/F/H, NXMS-160F/H, NXMLE-160S/F/H, NXHM-160
Installation size of baseplate (mm)
60
30 30
15 15 15
1PN/2P R 3P R 3PN/4P R
6
6
4.5 4.5 4.5
X X X
H12
H12
H12
Y Y Y
Specification H12
D6 D5 D Remark
NXM-160E/S 75.5 96 13.5 130.5 130.5 130.5 2P/3P/4P
NXM-160F/H 91 112 13.5 - 130.5 130.5 3P/4P
NXMS-160F/H 91 112 13.5 130.5 130.5 130.5 3P/4P
NXMLE-160S 75.5 96 13.5 135.5 135.5 135.5 1PN/2P/3P/3PN/4P
NXMLE-160F/H 91 112 13.5 - 135.5 135.5 3P/3PN/4P
NXHM-160 75.5 96 13.5 - 130.5 130.5 3P/4P
96.5
63.5
96.5
3PN/4P
63.5
M
3P
60
Y Y X
H13
H14
60
60
M8
M8
Plug-in rear connection, dimension (mm)
90
60
60 30
30 15 15
3P 3PN/4P
30
X
H15
H14
X
H15
H14
R 6-Φ11 R 8-Φ11
6
6
4.5 Y 4.5 Y
Specification and model H13 H14 H15 Remark
NXM-160E/S/F/H 155 135 130.5 3P/4P
NXMS-160F/H 155 135 130.5 3P/4P
NXMLE-160S/F/H 160 140 135.5 3P/3PN/4P
NXHM-160 155 135 130.5 3P/4P
Plug-in back-panel wiring, outline and installation size (mm)
135
124(3PN/4P)
38 94(3P)
3P/4P 3PN 13 3P/3PN/4P 46
60 30
H21
H20
(H16)
X X
H16
H18
M5
6- 8
M10
4
Specification
H16 H18 H20 H21 Remark
and model
NXM-160E/S/F/H 72 135 106 167 3P/4P

NXMS-160F/H 72 135 106 167 3P/4P
NXMLE-160S/F/H 77 140 111 172 3P/3PN/4P
NXHM-160 72 135 106 167 3P/4P
32 32 32
1PN/2P 3P 3PN/4P
X X X
H22
H22
H22
D7
Y Y Y
≤2
65 92 122
17.5 46
1PN/2P 3P 3PN/4P
X X X X
H23
H23
H23
D8
Y Y Y
≤2
Specification
Z D7 D8 H22 H23 Remark
and model
NXM-160E/S 75.5 62 54 90 2P/3P/4P

NXM-160F/H 91 77.5 54 90 3P/4P
NXMS-160F/H 91 77.5 54 92 3P/4P
NXMLE-160S 75.5 62 54 95 1PN/2P/3P/3PN/4P
NXMLE-160F/H 91 77.5 54 95 3P/3PN/4P
NXHM-160 75.5 62 54 90 3P/4P
NXM-250E/S/F/H, NXHM-250
105
70 70
D10
35 35 35
101.5
D9
101.5
101.5
2P 3P 4P 25 D
1 3 1 3 5 1 3 5 N
LINE LINE
NXM-320
30.5
30.5
30.5
ON
ON
x x x x
56
145
145
145
56
56
165
OFF
OFF
LOAD LOAD
2 4 2 4 6 2 4 6 N
D9”
Y Y Y
23.5 23.5 23.5
29 29 29 Z
78 105 140
NXMS-250F/H
105
70 70
D10
35 35
D9
101.5
101.5
3P 4P 24.5 D
1 3 5
LINE
1 3 5 N
LINE
30.5
30.5
ON
ON
51.5
51.5
x x x
145
145
165
OFF
OFF
LOAD LOAD
2 4 6 2 4 6 N
D9’’
Y Y
23.5 23.5
Z
29 29
105 140
NXMLE-250S/F/H
105
70 70
D10
35 35 35
D9
101.5
101.5
101.5
1PN/2P 3P 3PN/4P 25 D
1 N 1 3 5 1 3 5 N
LINE LINE LINE
33
33
33
ON
ON
ON
x
56
56
x x x
56
170
150
150
150
OFF
OFF
OFF
LOAD LOAD LOAD

2 N 2 4 6 2 4 6 N
D9’’
Y Y Y
23.5 23.5 23.5
29 29 29 Z
78 105 140
NXM-250E/S/F/H, NXMS-250F/H,NXMLE-250S/F/H, NXHM-250
Front-panel wiring, installation size (mm)
70
35
17.5 35 17.5
1PN/2P 3P 3PN/4P
x x
H24
H24
x
H24
2-Φ4.5 4-Φ4.5
6-Φ4.5
Y Y Y
Specification D9'' H24

D9 D10 D Remark
and model 125/160A 180/200A 225/250A 1PN/2P 3P 3PN/4P
NXM-250E/S 77 22.8 23 23 98 15 126 126 126 2P/3P/4P 98
NXM-250F/H 102 23 23.5 24 123 15 - 126 126 3P/4P 123
NXMS-250F/H 102 25 24 123 15 - 126 126 3P/4P 123
NXMLE-250S 77 25 24.5 99 15 131 131 131 1PN/2P/3PN/4P 98
NXMLE-250F/H 80 28 27.5 102 15 - 131 131 3P/3PN/4P 101
NXHM-250 77 25 24 98 15 - 126 126 3P/4P 122
NXM-250E/S/F/H, NXMS-250F/H, NXMLE-250S/F/H, NXHM-250, 320
108.5
108.5 67.5
67.5 3PN/4P
3P
70
H25
H26
X X X
70
M10
70
M10
105
70
70 35
3P 35 3PN/4P 17.5 17.5
35
X X
H27
H26
H27
H26
4 -Φ4.2
8 -Φ12
6 -Φ12 6 -Φ4.2
Y Y Specification and model H25 H26 H27 Remark
NXM-250E/S/F/H 165 145 126 3P/4P
NXMS-250F/H 165 145 126 3P/4P
NXMLE-250S/F/H 170 150 131 3P/3PN/4P
NXHM-250, 320 165 145 126 3P/4P

150
140(3PN/4P)
132
47.5 105(3P)
13 3P/3PN/4P 52.5
3P/3PN/4P
M6
70 35
X
H28
H30
35
(H28)
X
H32
H33
M8
6 -Φ8
5.5
Y
Specification and model H28 H30 H32 H33 Remark
NXM-250E/S/F/H 74 145 108 180 3P/4P
NXMS-250F/H 74 145 108 180 3P/4P
NXMLE-250S/F/H 79 144 113 185 3P/3PN/4P
NXHM-250, 320 74 139 108 180 3P/4P
31 31 31
1PN/2P 3P 3PN/4P
H34
X X
H34
X
H34
X
D11 Y Y Y
≤2
Z
80 107 142
23.5 53.5
1PN/2P 3P 3PN/4P
104
104
X X X
104
D12 Y Y Y
≤2
Z Specification and model H34 D11 D12 Remark
NXM-250E/S 58 77.5 62.8 2P/3P/4P
NXM-250F/H 58 102.5 87.8 3P/4P
NXMS-250F/H 53.5 102.5 87.8 3P/4P
NXMLE-250S 58 77.5 62.8 1PN/2P/3P/3PN/4P
NXMLE-250F/H 58 80.5 65.5 3P/3PN/4P
NXHM-250, 320 58 77.5 62.8 3P/4P
NXM-400E/S/F/H, 630E/S/F/H, NXHM-400, 630

132
88 88
161
44 44
108.5
D13
104
104
D
3P 4P
1 3 5 1 3 5 N
LINE LINE
H36
H35
H35
ON
ON
H34
H34
X X X
OFF
OFF
LOAD LOAD
2 4 6 2 4 6 N
D14
Y Y
30 30 Z
54 54
140 185
NXMS-400S/F/H, 630S/F/H
132
88 88
160
44 44
107.5
105.5
105.5
D13 D
3P 4P
1 3 5 1 3 5 N
LINE LINE
H37
H37
H36
H35
H35
ON
H34
ON
H34
X X X
OFF
OFF
LOAD LOAD
2 4 6 2 4 6 N
D14
Y Y
30 30 Z
54 54
140 185
NXMLE-400S/F/H, 630S/F/H
132
88 88 160
105.5
105.5
44 44 107.5
D13 D
3P 3PN/4P
1 3 5 1 3 5 N
LINE LINE
H34
H35
H35
ON
ON
X X X
H36
H34
OFF
OFF
LOAD LOAD
2 4 6 2 4 6 N
D14
Y Y
30 30 Z
54 54
140 185
NXM-400E/S/F/H, 630E/S/F/H, NXMS-400E/F/H, 630E/F/H, NXMLE-400S/F/H, 630S/F/H, NXHM-400, 630
88
Specification
44 22 H34 H35 H36 H37 H38 D13 D14 D Remark
3P 3PN/4P and model
39.5 37.5 250A-280A
44 37.5 300A-315A-320A
NXM-400E/S/F/H 40.5 38 350A-380A

H38
H38
X X 92 225 257 46 194 11

NXM-630E/S/F/H 39 400A-450A
39 500A-550A
41.5
4-Φ7 6-Φ7 40.5 600A-630A
NXMS-400S/F/H 40 37.5 400A

89 225 257 48 194 11
NXMS-630S/F/H 39.5 41 630A
Y Y 39 38.5 250A-280A
39.5 300A-315A-320A
NXMLE-400S/F/H 40.5 39.5 350A-380A

92 235 267 51 228 11
NXMLE-630S/F/H 39.5 400A-450A
39 500A-550A
41.5
40.5 600A-630A
NXHM-400 40.5 39 400A

92 225 257 46 194 11
NXHM-630 41.5 40.5 630A
93
93 58
58 3PN/4P 18 M10
3P
18
X
M
H35
H36
12
88
X X
88
88
12
8
132
88 88
3P 44 3PN/4P 44
22
H39
H40
X X
H39
H40
4- 7 6- 7
6 - 33 8 - 33
Y Y
Specification and model H39 H40 Remark

NXM-400E/S/F/H , 630E/S/F/H 225 194 3P/4P
NXMS-400S/F/H , 630S/F/H 225 194 3P/4P
NXMLE-400S/F/H 235 228 3P/3PN/4P
NXMLE-630S/F/H 235 228 3P/3PN/4P
NXHM-400 , 630 225 194 3P/4P
NXM- 400E/S/F/H, 630E/S/F/H, NXMS-400E/F/H, 630E/F/H, NXMLE-400S/F/H, 630S/F/H, NXHM-400, 630
111
88
187
60 3P 142 3PN//4P 71.5
23
3P
88 132
H46
H45
(H41)
(H41)
H43
X X
H44
H42
H41
X
H46
H45
4- 9
M8
4- 9
M12
8.5
Y Y
Specification and model H41 H42 H43 H44 H45 H46 Remark
NXM-400E/S/F/H, 630E/S/F/H 145 171 225 281 168 283 3P/4P
NXMS-400S/F/H, 630S/F/H 145 171 225 281 168 283 3P/4P

NXMLE-400S/F/H 155 181 235 291 178 293 3P/3PN/4P
NXMLE-630S/F/H 155 181 235 291 178 293 3P/3PN/4P
NXHM-400, 630 145 171 225 281 168 283 3P/4P

52 52
3P 3PN/4P
X X X
H47
H47
107.5
≤2
Y Y
Y

187
3P 142 3PN/4P 71.5
152
X X X
152
D15
≤2
Y Y
Z
Specification and model H47 D15 Remark
NXM-400E/S/F/H, 630E/S/F/H 94 96.5 3P/4P

NXMS-400S/F/H, 630S/F/H 87 96.5 3P/4P
NXMLE-400S/F/H, 630S/F/H 94 98.5 3P/3PN/4P

NXHM-400, 630 94 96.5 3P/4P
NXM-800S/F/H, NXHM-800
174
116 116
58 58 165
114
104
104
3P 4P D16 D
1 3 5 1 3 5 N
LINE LINE
45
45
235
ON
ON
X X X
235
270
91
91
OFF
OFF
LOAD LOAD
2 4 6 2 4 6 N
D17
Y Y
33 33
54 54 Z
182 240
Installation size of baseplate(mm)
W1 W2
(W1/2) 3PN/4P (W2/2)
3P
(W2/4)
M
X X
H48
H48
4 - 7.5 6 - 7.5
Y Y
Specification and model D16 D17 D H48 W1 W2 Remark

43 41 10.5 200 58 116 630A
NXM-800S/F/H
44 42 10.5 200 58 116 700A
NXHM-800
45 43 10.5 200 58 116 800A
W6
W6 W7
3PN/4P
W7
3P
16 M16
16
H61
H50
X X X
H49
H60
H60
20
10
20
Rear connection, dimension(mm)
3×W8
2×W8 2×W8
3P W8 3PN/4P W8/2 W8
W8
W8
H51
H50
H50
X
H51
4- 7 6 - 78 - 40
6 - 7.5
Y Y
Specification
W6 W7 W8 H49 H50 H51 H60
and model
NXM-800S/F/H 99 66 58 270 235 200 116

NXHM-800 99 66 58 270 235 200 116
110
236(3PN/4P)
92
178(3P)
3P/3PN/4P 60 3P/3PN/4P
23
100 66
M8
H56
H57
(H52)
X X
H53
H54
H55
H52
6- 9
M12
12
Specification
H52 H53 H54 H55 H56 H57 Remark
and model
NXM-800S/F/H 124 170 235 300 168 302 3P/4P

NXHM-800 124 170 235 300 168 302 3P/4P
W3 W3
3P 3PN/4P
X X
H58
H58
D18 Y Y
≤2
Y
W5
W4 (W4/2)
3P 3PN/4P
X X X
M
H59
H59
D19 ≤2 Y Y
Specification
D18 D19 H58 W3 H59 W4 W5 Remark
and model
NXM-800S/F/H 114.5 104 93 52 162 184 242 3P/4P

NXHM-800 114.5 104 93 52 162 184 242 3P/4P
NXM-1000S/H, NXHM-1000
210
140 140 168
70 70 118
D20 D
106
106
3P 4P
1 3 5 LINE 1 3 5 N LINE
52
X
ON
52
280
ON
X
100
243
X
100
243
OFF
OFF
LOAD
2 4 6 LOAD
2 4 6 N
D21
Y Y
45 45
Y
60 60
210 280
NXMS-1000S/H
210
140 140 168
70 70 118
D20 D
106
106
3P 4P
1 3 5 LINE
1 3 5 N LINE
52
ON
280
52
X X
ON
243
94
243
X
94
OFF
OFF
LOAD
2 4 6 LOAD
2 4 6 N
D21
Y Y
45 45
Y
60 60
210 280
NXM-1000S/H, NXMS-1000S/H, NXHM-1000
140
3P 70 4P 35
70
X X
243
243
4 - 7.5 6 - 7.5
Y Y
Specification and model D20 D21 D Remark

NXM-1000S/H 41 41 12 800A
NXHM-1000 43 42 12 1000A
NXMS-1000S/H 43 43 12 800/1000A

84
4P
84
3P M16
20
16
280
16 X
243
X
210
X
70
140
10

210
140 140
3P 70 4P 70
X X
243
243
6 - 40 8 - 40
4- 7 6- 7
Y Y
158.5
143.5 284(4P)
87 214(3P)
27 3P/4P 107
3P/4P
M
90 95
M10
(146)
X X
309
305
177
243
146
181
6 - 12
M12
10
3P 62 4P 62
X X
H60
H60
117 Y Y
≤2
282
3P 212 4P 106
X X X
172
172
105 Y Y
≤2
Specification and model H60 Remark

NXM-1000S/H 102 3P/4P
NXMS-1000S/H 95 3P/4P
NXHM-1000 102 3P/4P
NXM-1250S/H,1600S/H
242
92.5
92.5
70 140 158
D22 D
3P 4P
1 3 5 N 1 3 5
LINE LINE
37.8
37.8
X X X
370
ON
ON
120
120
OFF
OFF
2 4 6 LOAD N 2 4 6 LOAD
Y Y
53.5 53.5
78 78 Z
210 280
NXMS-1250S/H,1600S/H
242
70 140 158
92.5
92.5
D22 D
3P 4P
1 3 5 N 1 3 5
LINE LINE
40
40
X X X
370
ON
ON
120
120
OFF
OFF
2 4 6 LOAD N 2 4 6 LOAD
Y Y
53.5 53.5 Z
78 78
210 280
NXM-1250S/H,1600S/H，NXMS-1250S/H,1600S/H
140
70 70
3P 4P
35
X X
314
314
4 -Φ6 6 -Φ6
Y Y
Specification and model D22 D Remark
55 1000A
NXM-1250S/H,1600S/H 57 15.5 1250A
65 1600A
57 1250A
NXMS-1250S/H,1600S/H 15.5
65 1600A
NXM-1250S/H,1600S/H，NXMS-1250S/H,1600S/H
80 4P 80
3P
M
X
X X
122
127
1)
158.5
≤2
Y Y
Z
NXM-1600S/H, NXMS-1600S/H/, NXHM-1600

282
3P 212 4P 106
X
X X
177
177
2)
149
≤2
Y
Z Y
P-081 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers Tripping curves
NXM-63 NXM-63
Tripping curve Temperature compensation curve
10000 160
7200
3600
150
1200
600
300 140
Actuation time (s)
120
Rated current (%)

60 130
30
20 120
10
5
2 110
1
0.5 100
0.2
0.1 90
0.05
0.02
80
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 20
-35 -25 -15 -5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Rated current multiples Ambient temperature (°C)
NXM-125, NXMLE-125 NXM-125, NXMLE-125
10000 160
7200
3600
150
1200
600
140
300
120
Actuation time (s)
Rated current (%)
60 130
30
20 120
10
5
110
2
1
0.5 100
0.2
0.1 90
0.05
0.02 80
1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 20 -35 -25 -15 -5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

Tripping curves Moulded Case Circuit Breakers P-082
10000 160
7200
3600 150
1200
600
300
120
140 M
Rated current (%)

130
Actuation time (s)
60
30
120
20
10
5 110
2
1 100
0.5
0.2
90
0.1
0.05
80
0.02
-35 -25 -15 -5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 20
Ambient temperature (°C)

Rated current multiples
10000 170
7200
3600 160
1200
600 150
300
120 140
Rated current (%)
Actuation time (s)
60
30 130
20
10 120
5
2 110
125~250A
1
0.5 100
250~320A
0.2
0.1 90
0.05
80
0.02
-35 -25 -15 -5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 20

NXM-400/630, NXMLE-400/630 NXM-400/630, NXMLE-400/630
10000
160
7200
3600
150
1200
600
140
300
Rated current (%)

120 130
Actuation time (s)
60
20 120
10
5
110
2 400
1
100
0.5 630
0.2
90
0.1
0.05
0.02 80
-35 -25 -15 -5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 20
NXM-800 NXM-800
10000
160
7200
3600
150
1200
600
140
300
Rated current (%)
Actuation time (s)
120 130
60
20 120
10
5 110
2
1
100
0.5
0.2
90
0.1
0.05
0.02 80
-35 -25 -15 -5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 20

NXM-1000 NXM-1000
10000 170
7200
3600 160
1200
600
300
150
140
M
Rated current (%)

Actuation time (s)
120
60 130
20
10 120
5
2 110
1
0.5 100
0.2
0.1 90
0.05
0.02 80
-35 -25 -15 -5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 20
NXM-1250,1600 NXM-1250,1600
10000 170
7200
3600 160
1200
600 150
300
140
Rated current (%)
Actuation time (s)
120
60 130
20
10 120
5
2 110
1
0.5 100
0.2
0.1 90
0.05
0.02 80
-35 -25 -15 -5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

1 2 3 4 5 7 8 12 20

Tripping curve of distribution protection
4h
2h
1h
30min
20min
14min
10min Long-time-delay actuating current IR
6min Long-time-delay actuation time t R± 20%

4min (12~150S)
2min 150s
100s
80s
1min
60s
30sec
Actuation time
20sec
12s
10sec
Short-time-delay actuating current Isd±10%
5sec
(1.5~8)IR
2sec
1sec
Short-time-delay
0.5sec actuation time t2
0.3±0.06s
0.2sec
0.1sec
0.05sec
Instantaneous
actuating current Ii
0.02sec
(2~12)IR
0.01sec Maximum instantaneous

actuation time
0.6 0.7 1 1.3 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 20 30 40
Current (xIn) (A)

Tripping curve of motor protection
4h
2h
1h
M
30min
20min
14min
10min Overload actuating current IR
6min
Overload actuating release class
4min
2min
Class30
Class20
1min
Class10
30sec
20sec
Actuation time
Class10A
10sec
Short-time-delay actuating current Isd±10%
5sec
(1.5~8)IR
2sec
1sec
Short-time-delay
actuating time tsd
0.5sec
0.3±0.06s
0.2sec
0.1sec
0.05sec
Instantaneous
actuating current Ii
0.02sec
(2~14)IR
0.01sec Instantaneous actuation time
0.6 0.7 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7.2 8 10 12 15 20 30 40
Current (x Ir) (A)

Air Circuit Breaker
NXA series air circuit breaker P-001
Overview P-003
Product selection P-005
Functions and features

Technical parameters P-009
Intelligent controller P-011
Protection feature P-015
Measurement precision of the intelligent controller P-017
Accessories P-019
Capacity derating and power loss P-023
Dimension of busbar P-026
Selective protection between NM8 and NXA P-027
Installation and wiring

Dimensions and installation P-029
Secondary circuit wiring P-051
Annex
Ⅰ Configuration P-056
Ⅱ Selection table P-057
Ⅲ Earth fault protection P-058
IV Source-changeover controller P-061
P-001 Air Circuit Breaker NXA series air circuit breaker
Structural features of the circuit breaker
Safety shutter
Arcing chamber
Shunt release
Undervoltage release
Auxiliary contact
Closed electromagnet
Operation mechanism
Energy-storage handle
Motor-driven energy-storage mechanism
Racking-handle
Breaking button
Making button
Front cover
NXA series air circuit breaker Air Circuit Breaker P-002
Circuit breaker description
3
16
4
15
5
6
N
7
10
14 11
13 12
1 Trademark 9 QR code
2 Secondary wiring terminal 10 Extraction draw plate (only applicable to draw-out type)
3 Breaking button 11 "Disconnected" position locking (only applicable to draw-out type)
4 Energy-storage handle 12 Racking-handle entry (only applicable to draw-out type)
5 Making button 13 Position indication (only applicable to draw-out type)
6 Nameplate 14 Racking-handle storage (only applicable to draw-out type)
7 Energy-storage/release indicator 15 Intelligent controller
8 Breaking/making indicator 16 Fault-breaking indicator reset button

P-003 Air Circuit Breaker Overview
Circuit breaker
● Frame size (A): 1600, 2000, 3200, 4000, 6300

● Breaking capacity: N,S,H
● Rated operational voltage Ue (VAC): 380/400/415, 440/525/690
● Number of poles: 3P, 4P
● Installation method: draw-out type, fixed type
Operation conditions and environment adaptability
● Operation temperature:
The electrical and mechanical characteristics are applicable to the ambient temperature
of -5℃-+40℃. NXA can also operate in the ambient temperature of -45℃-+70℃ (M type,
A type), -20℃-+70℃ (P type, H type, CD-1), the derating factor is seen in P23-24.
● Storage conditions: apply to -45℃~+70℃
● NXA can resist the following electromagnetic interference
— Overvoltage generated by electromagnetic interference
— Overvoltage caused by environment interference or a power distributing system
— Electrostatic discharge of radio waves (radio, intercom, radar and the like)
● NXA has successfully passed the test for electromagnetic compatibility specified according to
the following standards (EMC) IEC/EN 60947-2
Annex F
The test can guarantee no false tripping and no interference on tripping time
● Protection grade:
Front IP 20, other side IP 00
Connection
● Rear connection
Horizontal connection, vertical connection
Interphase barrier
Lock
● Padlocks of "Making" and "Breaking" push button

● Position padlock (for locking the circuit breaker at disconnected position)
● Chassis padlock
● Door interlock: the circuit breaker is arranged at the connected or test part so as to
prohibit to open the door
Indication contact
● Standard contact
Making and breaking indication contacts
Fault tripping indication contact
Position indication contact
Spring charged indication contact
Overview Air Circuit Breaker P-004
Drawowt type breaker
+ =
Drawer seat Body Drawout type breaker

N
Fixed type breaker
NXA16 NXA20～NXA40
Note:NXA63 fixed type is seen in P45
Accessories
Interphased partition Secondary wiring terminal-drawout type Secondary wiring terminal-fixed type
N pole CT Counter PSU-1

P-005 Air Circuit Breaker Product selection
NXA series air circuit breaker
Rated current
Frame size 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 3600 4000 5000 6300
Breaking capacity
N ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
1600A S ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
H ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
N
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
2000A S
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
H
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
N
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
3200A S
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
H
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
N
▪ ▪ ▪
4000A S
▪ ▪ ▪
H
▪ ▪ ▪
6300A H
▪ ▪ ▪
Model definition and description
NXA 16 N 04 M D 3 AC230 M Other
Code of Code Code of Code of Code of Code of Code of Code of

Code of Code of breaking control circuit
of rated intelligent installation number operation special
Product frame size capacity voltage
current controller method of poles mode requirement
M: basic type No code: No code:

16:1600A N: basic 04-400A D: draw-out 3: AC 230:
motor no special
(04-16) type A
type 3 poles AC 230V
06-630A operation requirement
A: current type
▲
N A B C
08-800A
20:2000A S: standard 10-1000A P: power type F: fixed 4: AC 400: M: manual Special
(06-20) type type 4 poles AC 400V operation requirements
12-1250A OA
code,
H: harmonic N A B C
16-1600A type such as: UVT
150
32:3200A H: advanced DC 110:
20-2000A
(16-32) type 100 DC 110V
25-2500A
0
32-3200A
40:4000A DC 220:
(32-40) 36-3600A DC 220V
40-4000A
50-5000A
63:6300A
(40-63) 63-6300A
Note: 1) Intelligent controller PT/HT type. The basic functions are the same with P/H type. T refers to the internal temperature measurement function.
2)
Manual operation does not contain motor-driven mechanism, closing electromagnet and shunt release. Motor operation contains all standard accessories of remote
operation.
3)
Auxiliary working voltage of the intelligent controller: corresponding power modules is required if DC220V or DC110V is selected.
4)
NXA16N10-AD3-AC230: frame size is 1600A, N type breaking capacity, rated current is 1000A, A type intelligent controller, draw-out type and 3 poles, control
voltage is AC 230V motor operation.
Product selection Air Circuit Breaker P-006
Model definition and description-intelligent controller
NXA 16 TU M 04 3 AC230
Code of Code of Intelligent Code of Code of Code of Code of auxiliary

product frame size controller intelligent controller rated current number of poles power supply
16:1600A (04-16) M: basic type 3: AC 230:

04-400A; 06-630A
3 poles AC 230V
A: current type 08-800A; 10-1000A
20:2000A (06-20)
12-1250A; 16-1600A 4:
P: power type AC 400:
32:3200A (16-32)
H: harmonic type
20-2000A; 25-2500A
32-3200A; 36-3600A
4 poles AC 400V
N
40-4000A; 50-5000A DC 110:
40:4000A (32-40) DC 110V
63-6300A
63:6300A (40-63) DC 220:

DC 220V
Model definition and description-accessories
NXA 16 CC 230VAC
Code of
Frame size Code of accessories Code of rated voltage
product
16:1600A CC: Closed electromagnet 230VAC: AC230V
20:2000A ST: Shunt tripper 400VAC: AC400V
32:3200A MO: Motor 110VDC: DC110V
40:4000A UVT: Undervoltage tripper 220VDC: DC220V
63:6300A ASUVT:Self-priming undervoltage tripper Rated voltage+delay time

(1s、3s、5s、7s)
20/40:2000A-4000A UVTD:UVT delay unit
20/32:2000A-3200A ASUVTD: ASUVT delay unit
20/63:2000A-6300A
P-007 Air Circuit Breaker Product selection
Model definition and description-accessories
NXA 16 OF C04
Code of
Frame size Code of accessories Specification of accessories
product
16:1600A C04: Four groups of contacts
20:2000A C05: Five groups of contacts
32:3200A C06: Six groups of contacts

OF: Auxiliary contact
40:4000A N3: Three normally open and three normally closed
63:6300A N4: Four normally open and four normally closed
20/40:2000A-4000A N5: Five normally open and five normally closed
20/32:2000A-3200A 1S1S: One lock and one key
20/63:2000A-6300A KL: Key lock 2S1S: Two locks and one key
3S2S: Three locks and two keys
FCDP: Fixed type door frame
DCDP: Draw-out type door frame
FD: Fixed type interphased partition
DD: Draw-out type interphased partition
CE-CD-CT: Position signal
ILK2: Mechanical interlocking

two interlocking steel cables
MI-3: Triple mechanical

interlock ( 2on+1off )
MI-4: Triple mechanical

interlock ( 1on+2off )
Note Air Circuit Breaker P-008
Note
N
P-009 Air Circuit Breaker Functions and features
Features
Number of poles 3/4 6300A only 3P

Rated operational voltage Ue (V) AC 380/400/415 , AC 440/525/690
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV) 12
Rated frequency (Hz) 50/60
Flashover distance (mm) 0
Applicable to isolation IEC/EN 60947-2 Applicable
Pollution grade IEC 60664-1 N:3
Frame size 1600A

Rated current (A) 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Rated current of the fourth pole (A) 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600
Type of the circuit breaker N S H
380/400/415V 50 42 50
Rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (kA rms) VAC 50/60Hz Icu
440/525/690V 30 36 36
380/400/415V 42 42 50
Rated service short circuit breaking capacity (kA rms) VAC 50/60Hz Ics
440/525/690V 30 36 36
Utilization category B
380/400/415V 42 42 42
Rated short-time withstand current (kA rms) VAC 50/60Hz Icw 1s
440/525/690V 30 36 36
380/400/415V 20 25 25
Icw 3s
440/525/690V - - -
380/400/415V 105 88.2 105
Closed capacity (kA peak) VAC 50/60Hz Icm
440/525/690V 63 75.6 75.6
Making current tripping protection function (MCR kA rms) 10 16 16
Breaking time (ms) 32
Closing time (ms) 70
Installation, connection and service life
Mechanical Without maintenance 15000

Service life C/O cycle
Electrical Without maintenance 8000
Connection Horizontal ▪
3P 254×243.5×318.5
Fixed type
Size (width × depth × height) 4P 324×243.5×318.5
3P 308×331.5×351
Draw-out type
4P 378×331.5×351
Functions and features Air Circuit Breaker P-010
2000A
630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000
3200A
1600 2000 2500 3200
4000A
3200 3600 4000
6300A
4000 5000 6300
N
630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 1600 2000 2500 3200 3200 3600 4000 2000 2500 -
N S H N S H N S H H
80 65 80 80 80 100 80 85 100 120
50 55 55 65 70 70 65 75 75 85
50 65 65 80 80 85 80 85 85 120
50 55 55 65 70 70 65 75 75 85
B B B B
50 65 65 65 80 85 65 85 85 100
50 55 55 65 70 70 65 75 75 75
37 42 42 37 50 50 37 50 50 -
- - - - - - - - - -
176 143 176 176 176 220 176 187 220 264
105 121 121 143 154 154 143 165 165 187
16 16 16 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
32 32 32 32
70 70 70 70
15000 10000 10000 2000

8000 7000 3000 500
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
374×344×400 439×373.5×400 550×337.5×400 897×435.5×399

469×344×400 554×373.5×400 700×337.5×400 897×435.5×399
403×430×438.5 463×499.5×438.5 569×416×438.5 923×500×435.5
498×430×438.5 578×499.5×438.5 719×416×438.5 923×500×435.5
M type intelligent controller (Basic type)
Protection
All the protective threshold and time delay are set by a dial switch
1
— Ture RMS long-time-delay protection
2
— Thermal memory: heat accumulation before and after tripping
3 ● Short circuit protection

4 — Short-time delay (RMS) and instantaneous protection
12 — Optional four steps time-delay setting
5
13
6
7 14 Optional four steps time-delay setting
8 15
● Neutral line overcurrent protection (4P)
16
The neutral protective threshold can be adjusted to 50%, 100% and OFF
17
9
18 ● Test function
10
Simulating 6Ir test current for test tripping
11
● Tripping record function
1. Display window: display the current ● Ampere meter

value, the setting parameter, the fault
current,the tripping time Measure the real and effective value (RMS) of
2. Ig indicator for earth fault indication current with the precision of 2% for 40% to 150% in setting
3. Ir indicator for overload long-time-
delay tripping
4. Isd indicator for short circuit short-
time-delay tripping
5. Ii indicator for short circuit tripping
6. Menu button for inquiring the dial
position and fault record
7. Rightward button: turn to the next
state when inquiring the dial
position
8. Return button: back to the previous
level or resetting
9. Overload long-time-delay current
setting
10. Short circuit short-time-delay current
setting
11. Earth fault current setting
12. Overload long-time-delay time
setting
13. Transparent cover lockhole
14. Short circuit short-time-delay time
setting
15. Neutral line protection setting
16. Earth fault time-delay setting
17. Test button for simulating 6IR
current
18. Short circuit instantaneous current
setting
A type intelligent controller (Current type)
Protection
All the protective threshold and time delay are set by a dial switch
1
2
— Ture RMS long-time-delay protection
— Thermal memory: heat accumulation before and after tripping
3 ● Short circuit protection

4 — Short-time delay (RMS) and instantaneous protection
5
6
12
13
— Optional four steps time-delay setting

N
7 14 Optional four steps time-delay setting
8 15
● Neutral line overcurrent protection (4P)
16
The neutral protective threshold can be adjusted to 50%, 100% and OFF
17
9
18 ● Unbalanced current protection
10
Protecting phase failure or three phase unbalance
11
● Test function
1. Display window: display the current Simulating 6Ir test current for test tripping
value, the setting parameter, the
fault current, the tripping time
2. Ig indicator for earth fault ● Tripping record function
indication
3. Ir indicator for overload long- ● Ampere meter
time-delay tripping
Measure the real and effective value (RMS) of
time-delay tripping current with the precision of 2% for 40% to 150% in setting
5. Ii indicator for short circuit
tripping
6. Menu button for inquiring the dial
position and fault record
7. Rightward button: turn to the next
state when inquiring the dial
position
8. Return button: back to the previous
level or resetting
9. Overload long-time-delay current
setting
10. Short circuit short-time-delay
current setting
11. Earth fault current setting
12. Overload long-time-delay time
setting
14. Short circuit short-time-delay time
setting
15. Neutral line protection setting
16. Earth fault time-delay setting
17. Test button for simulating 6IR
current
18. Short circuit instantaneous
current setting
P type intelligent controller (Power type)
Protection
Setting all protective threshold values and time-delay by button
The setting values can be displayed on LCD display window
1 ● Protection functions of all A type control units are included

● Earth current protection function (Optional)
2
External transformer are configured
3 ● Advanced protection function
4
— Unbalanced voltage protection
— Overvoltage and undervoltage protection
5
— Overfrequency and underfrequency protection
6 — Phase sequence protection
— Reverse power protection function
7
— Required value protection function
13
8 The required value of the real and effective value of each current is calculated within a measurement window.
14 When the required value is off limit, the protection action is carried out. The setting of a sliding time window
9
is in the menu of "setting of a measurement meter".
15
10 ·A-phase maximal required current value,
·B-phase maximal required current value,
11
·C-phase maximal required current value,
12 ·N-phase maximal required current value are respectively set for each circumstance of the required value
protection without being affected by the setting of the neutral line protection.
● Extended function
— Self-diagnosis by the intelligent controller
1. Ig indicator for earth fault
— Operation times/fault tripping/alarming/deflection recording function provides the
tripping
2. Ir indicator for overload long-
latest ten times of recording
time-delay tripping — Main contact abrasion display function for evaluating the contact abrasion degree
3. Isd indicator for short circuit short- according to mechanical life, electrical services and breaking capacities of different
time-delay tripping frames.
4. Ii indicator for short circuit — Internal clock function
tripping — A Mini-USB interface is connected with a PC to achieve the functions of protection
5. Running indicator flickering in
setting, fault record downloading, whole power quantity detection and parameter
normal running
reading of a circuit breaker.
6. LCD screen with three-color
backlight. Green stands for normal
— "test" push button
running, yellow stands for ● Electric energy meter
alarming and red stands for — Current measurement
tripping. — Voltage measurement
7. Setting button — Frequency measurement
8. Leftward button — Required value measurement
9. Upward button
— Power (active power, reactive power and apparent) measurement
10. Downward button
— Electric energy (active power, reactive power and apparent) measurement
11. Enter button
12. Rightward button
— Power factor measurement
13. Transparent cover lockhole ● LCD three-color backlight
14. Mini-USB interface Green stands for normal running, yellow stands for alarming and red stands for tripping.
15. Test button for tripping test
H type intelligent controller (Harmonic wave type)

Protection
Setting all protective threshold values and time-delay by button
Besides the protective extended function of all P type control units,

H type control unit also comprises:
1
● Load monitoring function
2 ● Zone selective interlock (ZSI) (Optional)
3 ● Communication function
Modbus-RTU communication protocol
4
● Input/output function
5 — 2DI+2DO or 4DO
N
— DI signal: AC230V ( Standard configuration, and others can be selected);
6
DC110V
7 — DO needs to be configured with a power supply module (24VDC output) and
13 a relay module.
8
14
● Harmonic analysis function
9
— Measurement of the fundamental wave current, the fundamental wave line voltage,
15
10 the fundamental wave phase voltage, the fundamental wave power and each 3-31
odd harmonic wave current percentage (HRIh), the harmonic voltage percentage
11
(HRUh), the total harmonic wave current distortion rate (THDi, thdi) and the total
12 harmonic wave voltage distortion rate (THDu, thdu).
— The harmonic wave percentage(HR) refers to the ratio of root-mean-square value
of the Nth harmonic wave component contained in periodic alternative current quantity
to the root-mean-square value of the fundamental wave component, and is expressed
1. Ig indicator for earth fault
in percentage.
tripping
2. Ir indicator for overload long-
time-delay tripping
time-delay tripping
4. Ii indicator for short circuit
tripping
5. Running indicator flickering in
normal running
6. LCD screen with three-color
backlight. Green stands for normal
running, yellow stands for
alarming and red stands for
tripping.
7. Setting button
8. Leftward button
9. Upward button
10. Downward button
11. Enter button
12. Rightward button
14. Mini-USB interface
15. Test button for tripping test
Protection features
The protection features of the intelligent controller comprise inverse time characteristic and constant time characteristic. When the fault current
exceeds the set value of the inverse time limit, the controller performs constant time protection.
The inverse time limit corresponds to the feature curve I2t.
Overload long-time-delay protection feature
Overload long-time-delay protection action threshold value

<1.05Ir : ＞2h, no action
≥1.3Ir : ＜1h, action
Ir current setting value range: 0.4In, 0.5 In, 0.6 In, 0.7 In, 0.8 In, 0.9 In, 1.0 In+OFF (M/A);0.4In~1.0In+OFF(P/H)
Inverse time limit action feature: I2t, wherein t=(6/N)2*tr
Setting Multiple of Current Action Time
1.5Ir 16 32 64 128 192 256 320 384
2Ir 9 18 36 72 108 144 180 216

6Ir 1 2 4 8 12 16 20 24
Note: N --- the multiple I/Ir obtained by dividing failure current by set current
t --- time delay action of the failure action
tr --- long-time-delay set value
Allowed error of the action time ±15%
Conventional factory tuning:Ir=1.0In
tr=2s@6Ir
Short circuit short-time-delay protection feature
Short circuit short-time-delay protection action threshold value

＜0.85Isd: no action
＞1.15Isd: action
Isd current set value range: 2Ir, 3Ir , 4Ir, 5Ir, 6Ir , 8Ir, 10Ir +OFF (max 50kA，M/A);2Ir~10Ir+OFF(max 50kA，P/H)
Current Action time Remark
Action feature I²t= (10Ir)2tsd

Isd＜I≤10Ir Inverse time limit P, H
Setting time s 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
Setting time s 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
I≥1.1Isd Constant time limit Minimum s 0.06, 0.16, 0.255, 0.34 M, A, P, H
Maximum s 0.14, 0.24, 0.345, 0.46

Return time 0.05, 0.14, 0.25, 0.33
Note: Isd---short-time-delay current set value

I--- failure current value
Ir— long-time-delay set value
t--- failure action time-delay time
tsd---short-time-delay inverse time limit set value
Permissible error of action time ±15%
Conventional factory tuning:Isd=8Ir(Ir＜6250A)
Isd=50kA(Ir≥6250A)
tsd=0.4s
Short circuit instantaneous protection features
Short circuit instantaneous protection action threshold value

＜0.85Ii: no action
＞1.15Ii: action
The current setting value of instantaneous action: 2In, 4In, 6In, 8In, 10In, 12In, 15In+OFF(NXA40 max50kA，NXA63 max63kA，M/A);
2In~15In+OFF(NXA40 max 50kA，NXA63 max63kA P/H)
Note: action time≤50ms
Conventional factory tuning:Ii=12In(In=400A~5000A)
Ii=63kA(In=6300A)
Earth fault protection action features
Earth fault protection action threshold value

＜0.9Ig: no action
＞1.1Ig: action
N
M/A
Current setting value A B C D E F G OFF

NXA16, 20 0.2In 0.3In 0.4In 0.5In 0.6In 0.8In In
NXA32, 40, 63 500A 640A 800A 960A 1040A 1120A 1200A

tg(s) Inverse time limit Action features
P/H ( Ig )²
NXA16、20: 0.2In~1.0In+OFF t= ×tg
I²
NXA32、40、63: 500A~1200A+OFF
Setting time (s) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
Minimum (s) 0.06 0.16 0.255 0.34
Constant time limit
Maximal (s) 0.14 0.24 0.345 0.46
Return time 0.05 0.14 0.25 0.33
Note: Ig --- earth fault protection setting value. Default setting:NXA16/20:Ig=0.5In

When In≥1250A，Ig max=1200A NXA32/40/63: Ig=800A
I --- failure current value
t --- failure action time-delay time
tg --- earthing inverse time limit set value
The permissible error of the inverse time limit action time: ±15%
Conventional factory tuning:OFF
Controller minimum display current
Frame In Minimum display value（A）
1600 400～1600 60
2000 630～2000 60
≥3200 ≥1600 120
Note: Controller can work normally when single phase not less than 0.4In, three phase not less than0.2In.
Measurement precision of the intelligent controller

Current measurement
Measurement range Ia, Ib, Ic and IN are not less than 15In (rated current of the circuit breaker)
Below 0.1In: the measurement is inaccurate
0.1In-0.4In: the accuracy will be changed linearly from 5% to 2%
Measurement precision 0.4In-1.5In: the accuracy is 2%
＞1.5In: the accuracy will be changed linearly from 2% to 15%
The measurement accuracy of the earthing current is 10%
Voltage measurement
Line voltage: 0V~600V

Measurement range
Phase voltage: 0V~300V
Measurement precision Error: ±1%
Frequency
Measurement range 40HZ~70HZ
Measurement precision Error: ± 0.1HZ
Power
Measurement mode The effective value mode

3P type: total active power, total reactive power and total apparent power
Measurement content
4P type: phase splitting active power, phase splitting reactive power, phase splitting apparent power, total active
power, total reactive power, total apparent power
Active power: -32768KW~ + 32767KW
Reactive power: -32768Kvar~ + 32767Kvar
Measurement power
Apparent power: 0KVA~65535KVA
Error: ±2.5%
Power factor
Measurement content phase splitting power factor，total power factor
Measurement range -1.00~+1.00
Electric energy
Input reactive electric energy (EQin), output reactive electric energy (Eqout)
Measurement content Input active electric energy (EPin), output active electric energy (Epout)
Total active electric energy (EPtotal), total reactive electric energy (EQtotal), total apparent electric energy (Estotal)
Active electric energy: -32768KWh~ + 32767KWh

Measurement range Reactive electric energy: -32768Kvarh~ + 32767Kvarh
Apparent electric energy: 0~65535KVAh
Measurement precision Error ±2.5%
Harmonic wave measurement

Current: Ia, Ib, Ic,IN
Fundamental wave measurement
Voltage: Uan，Ubn，Ucn
Total harmonic wave distortion THD: the total distortion rate of the harmonic wave relatively to the fundamental wave
THDu and thdu Thd: the total distortion rate of the harmonic wave relatively to the effective value
Amplitude wave spectrum of harmonic wave The controller can display FFT amplitude of odd harmonic wave from 3 to 31in percentage
Measurement precision of control unit ±2%
Tripping curves Air Circuit Breaker P-018
LSI curves
Ir=(0.4~1)In
1000
100
tr=(1~24)s
10
T(s)
Isd=(2~10)Ir(max50kA)
N
1
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1 0.1
Ii=(2~15)In
(max50/63kA)
0.01
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 10 3 6 9 12 18 24 30
I(xIr) I(xIn)
Fig.1 Overcurrent protection curves
Earth fault protection curves
Ig=(0.2~1)In or
1000 500A~1200A
100
10
T(s)
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1 0.1
0.01
0.1 1 10
I(xIn)
Fig.2 Asymmetrical earth fault protection curves

Accessories: locks
Pushbutton lock
The pushbutton lock is to lock the circuit breaker by a transperant conver blocks so as to
prevent the breaking button and the making button of the circuit breaker from misoperation
and guarantee the reliable running of the circuit breaker.
Body lock
● A key lock includes four types. The latter two are applied to 2 input and 1 connect
power distribution system:
— Random lock
— One lock and one key
— Two locks and one key
— Three locks and two keys
Note：When the user separately purchases the key lock for installation, the panel needs to
be opened with a hole opener, and the hole opener is provided by the user.
Hole diameter：NXA16:Φ21mm NXA20~63:Φ24mm
Safety shutters padlock

● The padlock is prepared by users.Diameter of the lock is no more than Φ5mm.
when a circuit breaker body is at the disconnected or test part,
the safety shutters automatically block access to the disconnecting contact cluster.
"Disconnected" position padlock
After the chassis and body are locked at "Disconnected" position by a padlock, the
racking-handle cannot be inserted into racking-handle entry, and then the position
of the body cannot be changed.
Door interlock
Circuit breaker state door interlock
A cabinet door is prohibited to be opened when the circuit breaker is closed.
The cabinet door is allowed to be opened when the circuit breaker is disconnected.
Circuit breaker position door interlock
The cabinet door is prohibited to be opened when the circuit breaker is at the connected
and test part. The cabinet door is allowed to be opened when the circuit breaker is at the
disconnected position.
Cable mechanical interlock
It can realize the interlock of two horizontal or vertical-installed,three poles or four

poles,drawout type or fixed type circuit breaker.
1QF 2QF 3QF

0 0 0 1QF 2QF 3QF
0 0 1 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 0 1
1QF 2QF 3QF 1 0 0 1QF 2QF 3QF 0 1 0
1 1 0 1 0 0
1 0 1
Note:a. If need bend the cable,make sure radian is more than 120°.
b. Check and make sure enough lubricating oil of the cable.
c. The maximum distance between two interlock circuit breakers is1.5m.
Accessories: indication contacts

ON/OFF indication contacts
Standard configuration 4CO 6CO(for AC of NXA16 only)

Breaking capacity Current (A) / Voltage (V) Current (A) / Voltage (V)
VAC(AC-15) 1.3/240, 0.75/415 1.3/240, 0.75/415
VDC(DC-13) 0.55/110, 0.27/220 0.55/110, 0.27/220
"Connected", "disconnected" and "test" position indication contact

Standard configuration 1CO/3
Breaking capacity Current (A) / Voltage (V)
VAC(AC-15) 1.3/240, 0.75/415
VDC(DC-13) 0.55/110, 0.27/220
Alarming contact
N
Standard configuration 1CO
Breaking capacity Current (A) / Voltage (V)
VAC(AC-15) 1.3/240, 0.75/415
VDC(DC-13) 0.55/110, 0.27/220
Spring charging indication contact

Standard configuration 1NO
Breaking capacity Current (A)/ Voltage (V)
VAC(AC-15) 1.3/240, 0.75/415
VDC(DC-13) 0.55/110, 0.27/220
Note: 1) CO refers to a switch contact, and a one-normally-open and one-normally-closed contact is matched with a
common terminal.
2)
NO refers to a normally open contact. NC refers to a normally closed contact.
Source-changeover systems
● Mechanical interlock
1 normal and 1 replacement
2 incoming and 1 busbar
● Source-changeover controller (with adaptor)
1 normal and 1 replacement: mechanical interlock+2A type controller
2 incoming and 1 busbar: mechanical interlock+3A type controller
●Motor-driven mechanism (MO) (Standard configuration)

When a circuit breaker is switched on, an motor operation mechanism stores energy
automatically, so that when the circuit breaker is tripped, the device can switch on instantly.
An energy-storage handle as spare when no auxiliary power supply is provided.
Characteristics
VAC 50/60HZ 220/230/240, 380/400/415
Power supply
VDC 110, 220
Operation threshold 0.85-1.1Us
Frame size: power loss (VA or W) 16: 75W; 20: 85W; 32: 110W; 40: 110W; 63: 150W
1600A frame MO 2000A~6300A frame MO Motor overcurrent ≤1min
Charging time ≤7s
Operation frequency ≤2times/min
●Voltage coils (CC &ST) (Standard configuration)

●Closing coil (CC)
After the energy storage of the motor is completed, the closed electromagnet can be
operated and controlled within a range of 10 meters to instantaneously release the
energy storage spring force of the operating mechanism to close the circuit breaker.
1600A frame CC&ST
AC110
Rated control power supply voltage Us(V）AC 220/230/240 AC 380/400/415 DC220 DC110
(not available for NXA16）
Operation Voltage(V) (0.85-1.1)Us
Close time (ms) ≤50
NXA16 pulse 56 56 250 250 -

Power
consumption intermittent 300 300 132 70 300
(VA/W) NXA20~63
pulse 880 1800 880 850 850
Notes:
2000A~6300A frame CC&ST
1. It must select pulse type in the automatic control system.
2. power-on time of the intermittent type cannot be greater than 2 s, pulse frequency of
the pulse type cannot be more than 5 times/min, or the components are easily burnt.
3. Ensure that the product is in the energy storage state so that the closed electromagnet
may be energized;
4. If the product is not closed after a single power-on for 15s, must disconnect the power
on the closed electromagnet immediately.
●Shunt release (ST)

The power-on time cannot be greater than 2 seconds / time, and the power-on
frequency cannot be greater than 5 times / minute.
a. The shunt release should be used except for special products where the circuit breaker
must be directly disconnected manually;
b. The shunt release could operated within 10 meters to break the circuit breaker.
AC110
Rated control power supply voltage Us(V）AC 220/230/240 AC 380/400/415 DC220 DC110
(not available for NXA16）
Operation Voltage(V) (0.7-1.1)Us
Break time (ms) ≤28
NXA16 pulse 56 56 250 250 -

Power
consumption intermittent 300 300 132 70 300
(VA/W) NXA20~63
pulse 880 1800 880 850 850
Notes:
1. It must select pulse type in the automatic control system.
2. power-on time of the intermittent type cannot be greater than 2 s, pulse frequency of
the pulse type cannot be more than 5 times/min, or the components are easily burnt;
3. If the circuit breaker is not break by a single power-on of 15 s, must disconnect the
power on the shunt release immediately.
● Undervoltage release (UVT)

Under-voltage release (UVT) (Optional, The power must be turned on before the
circuit breaker is closed)
The under-voltage release has instantaneous operation and delayed operation:
Operation types of each frame under-voltage release
Self-priming Helped priming

Under-voltage instantaneous release Inm=1600A, 6300A Inm=2000A, 3200A, 4000A
1600A frame UVT 2000~4000A frame UVT
Under-voltage delay release Inm=1600A, 6300A Inm=2000A, 3200A, 4000A
Notes:
1. Inm=1600A under-voltage delay does not require an external delay controller.
The power-off operation is an instantaneous operation. There is no zero
voltage delay function;
2. Inm=6300A under-voltage delay does not require an external under-voltage delay
controller. There is a delay function for low voltage and power off;
N
6300A frame ASUVT 3. Inm=2000A~4000A under-voltage delay requires an external delay controller.
There is a delay operation when the power is off. There is a zero voltage delay function.
Delay time of under-voltage release Delay time (optional) Accuracy

Inm=1600A 1 s, 3 s, 5 s, 7 s (not adjustable) ±15%
Inm=2000A~4000A 1 s, 3 s, 5 s (not adjustable) 0~1s
Inm=6300A 0.3 s~7.5 s (adjustable) ±15%
The under-voltage will not operate when the voltage returns to 85% Ue and higher,, within 1/2 delay time.
2000~4000A frame UVTD

Note:
A self-priming under-voltage delay release may be provided for special orders
of NXA20~63. There is no external under-voltage delay controller, and the delay time
is 0.3s~7.5s, selectable and adjustable with an accuracy of ±15%.
When the under-voltage release is not powered, the circuit breaker cannot be closed
either electrically or manually.
Characteristics of under-voltage release
Rated control power supply voltage Ue(V) Ac110. AC220/230/240. AC380/400/415

Operating voltage (V) (0.35~0.7)Ue
Reliable closing voltage (V) (0.85~1.1)Ue
Reliable not-closing voltage (V) ≤0.35Ue
Power consumption (Inm=1600A/Inm=2000A~6300A) 20VA/48VA (W)

Capacity derating and power loss

Temperature capacity derating table of the fixed type circuit breaker
1600A frame
Ambient temperature 400A 630A 800A 1000A 1250A 1600A
Connection mode Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
40° - - - - - - - - - - - -
45° - - - - - - - - - - - -
50° - - - - - - - - - - 1550 1600
55° - - - - - - - - 1150 1200 1500 1550
60° - - 550 580 - - - - 1050 1100 1450 1500
2000A frame
40° - - - - - - - - - - - -
45° - - - - - - - - 1550 - 1900 -
50° - - - - - - - - 1500 1550 1850 1900
55° - - - - - - - - 1400 1450 1800 1800
60° - - - - - - - - 1300 1350 1700 1700
3200A frame

40° - - - - - - - -
45° - - - - - - - -
50° - - - - - - 3100 -
55° - - - - 2450 - 3000 3050
60° - - - - 2350 2400 2900 2950
4000A frame

Connection mode Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
40° - - - - - -
45° 3100 - - - 3800 3850
50° 3000 - - - 3600 3650
55° 3000 3050 3400 3450 3400 3450
60° 2900 2900 3200 3250 3200 3250
6300A frame

Connection mode Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
40° - - -
45° - - -
50° - - 5600
55° - 4800 5400
60° - 4800 5200
Note: “-” refers to no capacity derating.

Temperature capacity derating table of the draw-out type circuit breaker

1600A frame
40° - - - - - - - - - - - -
45° - - - - - - - - - - 1550 -
50° - - - - - - - - 1150 1200 1500 1550

55° - - 550 580 - - - - 1050 1100 1450 1500
60° - - 500 530 - - 950 - 950 1000 1400 1450
2000A frame
N
40° - - - - - - - - - - - -
45° - - - - - - - - 1500 - 1850 1900

200°0壳架
50° - - - - - - - - 1400 1500 1750 1850
55° - - - - - - - - 1300 1400 1650 1750
60° 600 - - - - - 1200 - 1200 1300 1550 1650
3200A frame

40° - - - - - - - -
45° - - - - 2450 - 3100 -
50° - - - - 2400 2450 3000 3100

55° - - - - 2350 2400 2900 3000
60° - - - - 2300 2350 2800 2900
4000A frame

Connection mode Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
40° - - - - - -
45° 3100 - - - 3800 3850

2000壳架
50° 3000 3100 - - 3600 3650
55° 2900 3000 3400 3450 3400 3450
60° 2800 2900 3200 3250 3200 3250
6300A frame

Connection mode Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal
40° - - -
45° - - -
50° - - 5600
55° - 4800 5400
60° - 4800 5200
Note: “-” refers to no capacity derating.

Altitude capacity derating factor
Altitude height (m) 2000 3000 4000 5000

Rated impulse withstand voltage (kV) Uimp 12 10 8.57 7.5
Average insulation grade (V) Ui 1000 833 714 625
Maximal operational voltage (V) 50/60HZ Ue 690 580 500 415
Average heat operational current(40)℃ 1.0 0.88 0.78 contact with factory
Power loss and input and output resistance

Power loss is the power loss of each pole measured at In, 50/60Hz. The input/output resistance is the DC resistance value of each pole
at the cold state.
Draw-out type Fixed type (W)

Frame size Rated current (A)
Power loss (W) Input/output resistance (μohm) Power loss (W) Input/output resistance (μohm)
400 30.5 63.6 15.6 32.4

630 75.7 63.6 38.6 32.4
800 99.1 51.6 54.1 28.2
1600A
1000 154.8 51.6 84.6 28.2
1250 241.9 51.6 132.2 28.2
1600 262.7 34.2 138.2 18.0
630 58.6 49.2 26.4 22.2
800 73.7 38.4 36.6 19.1
1000 115.2 38.4 57.2 19.1
2000A
1250 180 38.4 89.4 19.1
1600 294.9 38.4 146.5 19.1
2000 388.8 32.4 204.5 17.0
1600 127.2 16.6 60.1 7.8
2000 198.7 16.6 93.9 7.8
3200A
2500 310.5 16.6 146.7 7.8
3200 479.2 15.6 206.4 6.8
3200 435 14.1 239.6 7.8
4000A 3600 690.5 17.7 272.9 7.0
4000 852.5 17.7 337 7.0
4000 403.2 9.0 230.4 7.0
6300A 5000 630 9.0 360 7.0
6300 1000.2 8.8 571 6.4
Dimension of busbar
Bolt configuration
Type of bolt Application Fastening busbar
16: M10 Fastening busbar (36~52)N·m

20~63: M12 Fastening busbar (61~94)N·m
16~63：M3 Fastening secondary connector (0.4~0.5)N.m
Hole size and installation twisting moment of busbar
DrillingΦ（mm） Diameter of bolt Fastening twisting moment
N
16:Φ11 M10 (36~52)N·m
20~63:Φ13 M12 (61~94)N·m
Connection busbar specification reference under different temperature
Maximum permissible temperature of busbar: 100℃

The material of busbar is bare copper
Ambient temperature(-45~40)°C Ambient temperature 50°C Ambient temperature 60°C

Rated
Frame 5mm thick busbar 10mm thick busbar 5mm thick busbar 10mm thick busbar 5mm thick busbar 10mm thick busbar
current
(A) Number Number Number Number Number Number
Specification Specification Specification Specification Specification Specification
of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces of pieces
400 2 50*5 1 50*10 2 50*5 1 50*10 2 50*5 1 50*10
630 2 50*5 1 50*10 2 50*5 1 50*10 2 50*5 1 50*10
800 2 50*5 1 50*10 2 50*5 1 50*10 2 50*5 1 50*10
1600A
1000 3 50*5 2 50*10 3 50*5 2 50*10 3 50*5 2 50*10
1250 4 50*5 2 50*10 4 50*5 2 50*10 4 50*5 2 50*10
1600 4 50*5 2 50*10 4 50*5 2 50*10 4 50*5 2 50*10
630 2 50*5 1 50*10 2 50*5 1 50*10 2 60*5 1 60*10
800 2 50*5 1 50*10 2 50*5 1 50*10 2 60*5 1 60*10
1000 3 50*5 2 50*10 3 50*5 2 50*10 3 60*5 2 50*10
2000A
1250 3 60*5 2 50*10 3 60*5 2 50*10 3 60*5 2 50*10
1600 4 60*5 2 60*10 4 60*5 2 60*10 4 60*5 2 60*10
2000 6 60*5 3 60*10 6 60*5 3 60*10 6 60*5 3 60*10
1600 2 100*5 1 100*10 2 100*5 1 100*10 2 100*5 1 100*10
2000 4 100*5 2 100*10 4 100*5 2 100*10 4 100*5 2 100*10
3200A
2500 4 100*5 2 100*10 4 100*5 2 100*10 4 100*5 2 100*10
3200 8 100*5 4 100*10 8 100*5 4 100*10 8 100*5 4 100*10
3200 8 100*5 4 100*10 8 100*5 4 100*10 8 100*5 4 100*10
4000A 3600 7 120*5 3 120*12 7 120*5 3 120*12 7 120*5 3 120*12
4000 8 120*5 4 120*10 8 120*5 4 125*10 8 125*5 4 125*10
4000 12 100*5 6 100*10 12 100*5 6 100*10 14 100*5 7 100*10
6300A 5000 14 100*5 7 100*10 14 100*5 7 100*10 16 100*5 8 100*10
6300 16 100*5 8 100*10 16 100*5 8 100*10 18 100*5 9 100*10
Note:
a. When a copper bar selected by users is not matched with a wiring terminal of the circuit breaker, extended busbar is required to be designed
to transfer, and is designed by the users of their own. The cross section of the extended busbar cannot be less than the requirement in the table
above. The interval among the extended busbar is not less than the interval among wiring terminals of the circuit breaker.
b. After the busbar recommended in the table above is installed, the electric clearance between adjacent phases of the circuit breaker is not less
than 18mm.
c. Electrical elements are used for three-phase rectification and high-frequency inversion, such as a high-frequency induction heating furnace
(medium-frequency furnace steelmaking equipment), a solid high-frequency welding machine (such as an embedded arc electric welding
machine), vacuum heating smelting equipment (such as a monocrystalline silicon growth furnace), in load equipment by controlled silicon.
When a circuit breaker is selected, the influence on the circuit breaker by higher order harmonic component generated by controlled silicon is
required to be considered besides the influences by the environment temperature and altitude height. At the same time, capacity derating
is required, and the capacity coefficient (0.5-0.8) is recommended.
d. The electric clearance of fastening bolts of upper and lower busbar needs to be not less than 20mm after the installation of the busbar by users.
e. After the installation of the circuit breaker, the safety clearance among electrified bodies with different electric potential and between the
electrified bodies and the ground are not less than 18mm.
Selective protection between NM8 and NXA

Selective protection between NM8 and NXA Frame size rated current NXA16 NXA20
Rated current（A） 400 630 800 1000 1250 1600 630 800
Default setting
ratings of short 3.2 5.04 6.4 8 10 12.8 5.04 6.4
Upstream time-delay 8In（kA）
Downstream Setting ratings（kA） 0.8～4 1.26～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.26～6.3 1.6～8
Delayed tripping
0.1，0.2，0.3，0.4
time (s)
Returnable time 0.05，0.14，0.25，0.33

rated current current（A） setting ratings（kA）
0.16 0.8～4 1.26～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.26～6.3 1.6～8

16
0.19（Motor） 0.8～4 1.26～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.26～6.3 1.6～8
0.2 0.8～4 1.26～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.26～6.3 1.6～8

20
0.24（Motor） 0.8～4 1.26～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.26～6.3 1.6～8
0.25 0.8～4 1.26～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.26～6.3 1.6～8

25
0.30（Motor） 0.8～4 1.26～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.26～6.3 1.6～8
0.32 0.8～4 1.26～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.26～6.3 1.6～8

32
0.38（Motor） 0.8～4 1.26～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.26～6.3 1.6～8
NM8-100 0.4 0.8～4 1.26～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.26～6.3 1.6～8
40
NM8S-100 0.48（Motor） 0.8～4 1.26～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.26～6.3 1.6～8
0.5 0.8～4 1.26～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.26～6.3 1.6～8

50
0.60（Motor） 0.828～4 1.26～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.26～6.3 1.6～8
0.63 0.869～4 1.26～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.26～6.3 1.6～8

63
0.75（Motor） 1.035～4 1.26～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.26～6.3 1.6～8
0.8 1.104～4 1.26～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.26～6.3 1.6～8

80
0.96（Motor） 1.325～4 1.324～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.324～6.3 1.6～8
1 1.380～4 1.380～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.380～6.3 1.6～8

100
1.20（Motor） 1.656～4 1.656～6.3 1.656～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.656～6.3 1.656～8
1 1.380～4 1.380～6.3 1.6～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.380～6.3 1.6～8

100
1.20（Motor） 1.656～4 1.656～6.3 1.656～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.656～6.3 1.656～8
1.25 1.725～4 1.725～6.3 1.725～8 2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 1.725～6.3 1.725～8

125
1.5（Motor） 2.070～4 2.070～6.3 2.070～8 2.070～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 2.070～6.3 2.070～8
1.6 2.208～4 2.208～6.3 2.208～8 2.208～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 2.208～6.3 2.208～8

160
1.92（Motor） 2.650～4 2.649～6.3 2.649～8 2.649～10 2.649～12.5 3.2～16 2.649～6.3 2.649～8
NM8-250 1.8 2.484～4 2.484～6.3 2.484～8 2.484～10 2.500～12.5 3.2～16 2.484～6.3 2.484～8
180
NM8S-250 2.16（Motor） 2.981～4 2.980～6.3 2.980～8 2.980～10 2.980～12.5 3.2～16 2.980～6.3 2.980～8
2 2.760～4 2.760～6.3 2.760～8 2.760～10 2.760～12.5 3.2～16 2.760～6.3 2.760～8

200
2.4（Motor） 3.312～4 3.312～6.3 3.312～8 3.312～10 3.312～12.5 3.312 ～16 3.312～6.3 3.312～8
2.25 3.105～4 3.105～6.3 3.105～8 3.105～10 3.105～12.5 3.200～16 3.105～6.3 3.105～8

225
2.7（Motor） 3.726～4 3.726～6.3 3.726～8 3.726～10 3.726～12.5 3.720～16 3.726～6.3 3.726～8
2.5 3.450～4 3.450～6.3 3.450～8 3.450～10 3.450～12.5 3.450～16 3.450～6.3 3.450～8

250
3.0（Motor） / 4.140～6.3 4.140～8 4.140～10 4.140～12.5 4.140～16 4.140～6.3 4.140～8
2.5 3.450～4 3.450～6.3 3.450～8 3.450～10 3.450～12.5 3.450～16 3.450～6.3 3.450～8

250
3.0（Motor） / 4.140～6.3 4.140～8 4.140～10 4.140～12.5 4.140～16 4.140～6.3 4.140～8
3.15 / 4.347～6.3 4.347～8 4.347～10 4.347～12.5 4.347～16 4.347～6.3 4.347～8

315
3.78（Motor） / 5.216～6.3 5.216～8 5.216～10 5.216～12.5 5.216～16 5.216～6.3 5.216～8
NM8-630 3.5 / 4.830～6.3 4.830～8 4.830～10 4.830～12.5 4.830～16 4.830～6.3 4.830～8

350
NM8S-630 4.2（Motor） / 5.796～6.3 5.796～8 5.796～10 5.796～12.5 5.796～16 5.796～6.3 5.796～8
4 / 5.520～6.3 5.520～8 5.520～10 5.520～12.5 5.520～16 5.520～6.3 5.520～8

400
4.8（Motor） / / 6.624～8 6.624～10 6.624～12.5 6.624～16 / 6.624～8
5 / / 6.900～8 6.900～10 6.900～12.5 6.900～16 / 6.900～8

500
6.0（Motor） / / / 8.280～10 8.280～12.5 8.280～16 / /
6.3 / / / 8.694～10 8.694～12.5 8.694～16 / /

630
7.56（Motor） / / / / 10.43～12.5 10.43～16 / /
7 / / / 9.660～10 9.660～12.5 9.660～16 / /

700
8.4（Motor） / / / / 11.59～12.5 11.59～16 / /
NM8-1250 8 / / / / 11.04～12.5 11.04～16 / /

800
NM8S-1250 9.6（Motor） / / / / / 13.24～16 / /
10 / / / / / 13.80～16 / /
1000
12（Motor） / / / / / / / /
12.5 / / / / / / / /
1250
15.0（Motor） / / / / / / / /
NXA20 NXA32 NXA40 NXA63
1000 1250 1600 2000 1600 2000 2500 3200 3200 3600 4000 4000 5000 6300
8 10 12.8 16 12.8 16 20 25.6 25.6 28.8 32 32 40 50
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2～10
2～10
2～10
2.5～12.5
2.5～12.5
2.5～12.5
3.2～16
3.2～16
3.2～16
4～20
4～20
4～20
3.2～16
3.2～16
3.2～16
4～20
4～20
4～20
5～25
5～25
5～25
6.4～32
6.4～32
6.4～32
6.4～32
6.4～32
6.4～32
7.2～36
7.2～36
7.2～36
8～40
8～40
8～40
8～40
8～40
8～40
10～50
10～50
10～50
12.6～50
12.6～50
12.6～50
N
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2.070～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2.208～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2.649～10 2.649～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2.484～10 2.5～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2.980～10 2.980～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
2.760～10 2.760～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
3.312～10 3.312～12.5 3.312～16 4～20 3.312～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
3.105～10 3.105～12.5 3.2～16 4～20 3.2～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
3.726～10 3.726～12.5 3.726～16 4～20 3.726～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
3.450～10 3.450～12.5 3.450～16 4～20 3.450～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
4.140～10 4.140～12.5 4.140～16 4.140～20 4.140～16 4.140～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
3.450～10 3.450～12.5 3.450～16 4～20 3.450～16 4～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
4.140～10 4.140～12.5 4.140～16 4.140～20 4.140～16 4.140～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
4.347～10 4.347～12.5 4.347～16 4.347～20 4.347～16 4.347～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
5.216～10 5.216～12.5 5.216～16 5.216～20 5.216～16 5.216～20 5.216～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
4.830～10 4.830～12.5 4.830～16 4.830～20 4.830～16 4.830～20 5～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
5.796～10 5.796～12.5 5.796～16 5.796～20 5.796～16 5.796～20 5.796～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
5.520～10 5.520～12.5 5.520～16 5.520～20 5.520～16 5.520～20 5.520～25 6.4～32 6.4～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
6.624～10 6.624～12.5 6.624～16 6.624～20 6.624～16 6.624～20 6.624～25 6.624～32 6.624～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
6.900～10 6.900～12.5 6.900～16 6.900～20 6.900～16 6.900～20 6.900～25 6.900～32 6.900～32 7.2～36 8～40 8～40 10～50 12.6～50
8.280～10 8.280～12.5 8.280～16 8.280～20 8.28～16 8.280～20 8.280～25 8.280～32 8.280～32 8.280～36 8.280～40 8.280～40 10～50 12.6～50
8.694～10 8.694～12.5 8.694～16 8.694～20 8.694～16 8.694～20 8.694～25 8.694～32 8.694～32 8.694～36 8.694～40 8.694～40 10～50 12.6～50
/ 10.43～12.5 10.43～16 10.43～20 10.43～16 10.43～20 10.43～25 10.43～32 10.43～32 10.43～36 10.43～40 10.43～40 10.43～50 12.6～50
9.660～10 9.660～12.5 9.660～16 9.660～20 9.660～16 9.660～20 9.660～25 9.660～32 9.660～32 9.660～36 9.660～40 9.660～40 10～50 12.6～50
/ 11.59～12.5 11.59～16 11.59～20 11.59～16 11.59～20 11.59～25 11.59～32 11.59～32 11.59～36 11.59～40 11.59～40 11.59～50 12.6～50
/ 11.04～12.5 11.04～16 11.04～20 11.04～16 11.04～20 11.04～25 11.04～32 11.04～32 11.04～36 11.04～40 11.04～40 11.04～50 12.6～50
/ / 13.24～16 13.24～20 13.24～16 13.24～20 13.24～25 13.24～32 13.24～32 13.24～36 13.24～40 13.24～40 13.24～50 13.24～50
/ / 13.80～16 13.80～20 13.80～16 13.80～20 13.80～25 13.80～32 13.80～32 13.80～36 13.80～40 13.80～40 13.80～50 13.8～50
/ / / 16.56～20 / 16.56～20 16.56～25 16.56～32 16.56～32 16.56～36 16.56～40 16.56～40 16.56～50 16.56～50
/ / / 17.25～20 / 17.25～20 17.25～25 17.25～32 17.25～32 17.25～36 17.25～40 17.25～40 17.25～50 17.25～50
/ / / / / / 20.70～25 20.70～32 20.70～32 20.70～36 20.70～40 20.70～40 20.70～50 20.70～50

P-029 Air Circuit Breaker Installation and wiring
Dimensions and installation

1600A fixed type
Datum Y Inside of cabinet gate

105 105
B
N
137.5
RESET
A
318.5
Datum X
H
OFF ON
89
143.5
137.5
50.5
127 42 100 92.5
237(Three pole) 243.5
254(Three pole) F 87
307(Four pole)
324(Four pole)
Hole size
Hole size of the base Hole size of a panel

Datum Y
220 8×Φ4
F
10
4× 7 Datum Y
120
100
285
118.5
L
322
L1 Datum X
Schematic diagram of the overall size of the bottom surface

and the installation hole pitch
Installation plate
of the
circuit breaker
H L L1 Remark
5 237 254 In=400A~630A Fixed type, three pole 258
8 237 254 In=800A~1250A Fixed type, three pole
20 237 254 In=1600A Fixed type, three pole Hole size of the panel of the fixed type circuit breaker
5 307 324 In=400A~630A Fixed type, four pole

8 307 324 In=800A~1250A Fixed type, four pole
20 307 324 In=1600A Fixed type, four pole
Installation and wiring Air Circuit Breaker P-030
Side view Busbar size and busbar interval
A
Datum Y
45
N
8× 11
12.5
N pole 25
35.5
70 70 70
Datum Y
Datum Y
95 95 95 95 95
60 60 8×Ф13
6×Ф13
14
14
90
28
90
28
70 70 70 70 70
（Optional）（Optional）
Number of busbar
Number of pieces
"Rated current（A）" Three poles Four poles
A pole+C pole B pole A pole+B pole C pole+N pole
400～630 4 2 4 4
800～1250 4 2 4 4
1600 8 4 8 8
1600A draw-out type

105 105
137.5
RESET
Datum X
H
351
OFF ON
89
137.5
176.5
83.5
连接
试验
分离
154 79.5 164 78

308(Three pole) 331.5(Connected position)
378(Four pole) 380.5(Disconnected position)
73
F
Hole size

Datum Y
220 10×Φ4
Datum Y
F
4× 8.5
118
164
224
Datum X
40
120
320
143.5
L
L1
Schematic diagram of the overall size of the

bottom surface and the installation hole pitch Installation plate
of the
118
circuit breaker
H L L1 Remark
5
5 287 308 In=400A~630A Three pole

8 287 308 In=800A~1250A Three pole 258
20 287 308 In=1600A Three pole

Ratio: 1:1.5 Hole size of a panel of the draw-out type circuit breaker
5 357 378 In=400A~630A Four pole
8 357 378 In=800A~1250A Four pole

20 357 378 In=1600A Four pole
Side view Busbar size and interval
A Datum Y
N
45
26.5
12.5
8× 11 25
N pole
70 70 70
Datum Y Datum Y
95 95 95
95 95
60 8×Ф13
60 6×Ф13
14
14
28
81
28
81
70 70 70 70 70
Optional Optional
Number of busbar
Number of pieces
"Rated current（A）" Three poles Four poles
A pole+C pole B pole A pole+B pole C pole+N pole
400～630 4 2 4 4
800～1250 4 2 4 4
1600 8 4 8 8
2000A fixed type
237
200
RESET
128.5
R
A
OFF ON
D
Datum X
H
112
128.5
150
163
55
292
F
192 (Threepole) 182 26.5
287(Fourpole) 42 219.5 82
67
Hole size
Datum Y
Datum Y
69.5
233
311
150
270
Datum X
4 × 12
302 Installation plate

171(Threepole) 171
of the
F
266(Fourpole) circuit breaker
28.5
4
Φ
8×

bottom surface and the installation hole pitch
172.5
345
Hole of the panel
H Remark
10 In=630A
15 In=800A~1600A
20 In=2000A
A
Datum Y 60
N
17
N pole 8× 13 .
28
42
95 95 95
A
16×Φ13
N pole 30 60
14
60
30
N pole
115
40
95 95 95 86
17
horizontal connection Lengthen busbar

32×Φ13 28
60
95 95 95

2000A draw-out type
45
239
200
RESET
128.5
A
OFF ON
Datum X
D
H112
128.5
150
199.5
Disconnected
position
92
292 379.5 31
430
201.5(Three pole) 201.5
296.5(Four pole) F 41
Hole size
Datum Y
Datum Y
11 17
33
11
156
175
303
273
Datum X
379
11
14
17
302
66
16
132.5(Three pole) 132.5 Installation

plate of the
47
227.5(Four pole) F circuit breaker

20

Φ
×
172.5
11
bottom surface and the installation hole pitch Right outermost side
345 of the circuit breaker
201.5
Hole of the panel

H Remark
10 In=630A
15 In=800A~1600A
20 In=2000A
A
N pole
13.5
N
30
60 Datum Y
28 8× 13
39.5
95 95 95
A
16×Φ13
N pole 30 60
14
60
30
N pole
115
40
95 95 95 92.5
17
horizontal connection Lengthen busbar 28

32×Φ13
60
95 95 95

3200A fixed type
Inside of cabinet gate

Datum Y
237
200
RESET
A
128.5
R
H
OFF ON
Datum X
112
128.5
150

Catálogo Master - Baixa Tensão - 2020 - en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catálogo Master - Baixa Tensão - 2020 - en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Catálogo Master - Baixa Tensão - 2020 - en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Low Voltage Master Catalogue

NB1-63 NB1-63H NB1-63DC NB7

Page P-001 Page P-007 Page P-011 Page P-014

Page P-016 Page P-019 Page P-024

DZ158 NL1 NL210

Page P-027 Page P-030 Page P-032

NB1L NB3LE NB3LEG NB3LEU

Page P-034 Page P-043

NBH8LE DZ158LE NB2LE NB310L

Page P-045 Page P-047 Page P-050 Page P-053

Accessories for MCB, RCBO

Page P-057 Page P-059 Page P-061 Page P-063

Page P-065 Page P-067 Page P-069 Page P-072

Switch Disconnector Change-over Switch

NH2 NH4 NZK1 NZK2

Page P-077 Page P-079 Page P-081 Page P-083

Surge Arrester Pushbutton & Indicator

NU6-Ⅱ NU6-Ⅲ NP9 ND9

Page P-085 Page P-089 Page P-092 Page P-093

NX8 NX2 NXW1

Page P-094 Page P-096 Page P-097

Wall Mounting Enclosure

NB1 Miniature Circuit Breaker

Color coded contact position indicator

Line and load side terminals accept bus bar

3 Breaking capacity up to 6000A 7 Extendable DIN-rail holder for easy installation

1.3 Approvals and certificates

0.05 0.05 0.05

t(s) IEC/EN 60947-2 AC type 8-12 In IEC/EN 60947-2 AC type 9.6-14.4In

Let-through I 2t/A 2S I2t

Short-circuit current IP/A

1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13, 16,

1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 10, 13, 16, 20,

Electrical Energy limiting class 3

Ambient temperature (with

Storage temperation ℃ -35-+70

Connection From top and bottom

Power supply side: RT36-00 (fuse)

Power supply side: NM8-100S/H/R

2.4 Backup protection

Power supply side: RT16 series

Power supply side: NM8

2.5 Temperature derating

3. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)

IEC/EN 60898-1 AC type B curve

Short-circuit current IP/A

Standard IEC/EN 60898-1

Electrical Energy limiting class 3

Ambient temperature (with

Storage temperation ℃ -35...+70

Connection From top and bottom

Power supply side: RT36-00 (fuse)

Power supply side: NM8-100S/H/R

2.4 Backup protection

Power supply side: RT16 series

Power supply side: NM8

2.5 Temperature derating

3. Overall and mounting dimensions (mm)

Frame size rated current